admin
Fri, 02/02/2024 - 20:09
Edited Text
tlpl-~~
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY
OF
PENNSYLVANIA
UNDERGRADUATE CATALOGUE 1992-1994
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
250 University Avenue
California, Pennsylvania, 15419-1394
(412) 938-4000
UNDERGRADUATE CATALOG
1992-1994
Volume 92
Number 2
California University of Pennsylvania
is one of the fourteen institutions of higher learning
of the State System of Higher Education of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
California University of Pennsylvania is
A MEMBER OF
the Association of State Colleges and Universities
the American Association of Colleges of Teacher Eduction
ACCREDITED BY
the Middle States Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools
ACCREDITED IN TEACHER EDUCATION BY
the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education
ACCREDITED IN SOCIAL WORK BY
Council on Social Work Education
ACCREDITED IN ATHLETIC TRAINING BY
the National Athletic Trainers Association
ACCREDITED IN NURSING BY
the National League for Nursing
California University of Pennsylvania admits students of any sex, race, color, national and ethnic origin to all
rights, privileges, programs and activities generally accorded or made available to students at the University. The
same policy is followed with respect to all employees regardless of rank or classification. The University does not
discriminate on the basis of sex, race, color, religion, sexual preference, present or previous military service, ethnic
and national origin in the administration of its educational policies, admissions processes, scholarships and loan
programs, employment practices and athletic and other University administrative programs The University does
not discriminate on the basis of handicap in admission or access to its programs. Inquiries regarding Title IX
compliance and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 may be directed to the Title IX Coordinator (412)
938-4351, the Social Equity Officer (412) 938-4185, the Title 504 Coordinator (412) 938-4076, or the Director of
Office of Civil Rights Region ill, U.S. Department of Education, Philadelphia, PA 17101.
This catalog contains regulations, facts, and requirements that were correct at the time of publication. The
governing personnel of California University of Pennsylvania reserve the right and authority to alter any and/or
all of the statements contained herein.
In keeping with the educational mission of the University, the educational and financial policies and procedures are
continually being reviewed and changed. Consequently, this document cannot be considered binding and must be
used solely as an informational guide.
Students are responsible for keeping informed of official policies and for meeting all relevant requirements.
1
CONTENTS
ACADEMIC CALENDAR, 1992-1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
THE UNIVERSITY . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Majors & Programs Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
FEES AND EXPENSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FINANCIAL AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
COLLEGES, DEPARTMENTS, AND MAJORS . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 105
Divisions of the University . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-120
Departments, Majors, and Courses . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121-348
GOVERNANCE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Governance of the State System of Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Governance of California University of Pennsylvania . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faculty and Officers of the University . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .
Professors Emeriti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 349
. . 350
351-354
355-376
377-378
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
2
Academic Calendar: 1992-1994
Spring 1992
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Spring Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Easter Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Commencement
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
Friday
Monday
Thursday
Monday
Friday
Saturday
January 13-14
January 15
March 6
March 16
April 16
April 20
May 1
May2
Fall 1992
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Labor Day Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Thanksgiving Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
August 31-September 1
September 2
Friday
Tuesday
September 4
September 8
Tuesday
Monday
Thursday
November 24
November 30
December 17
Spring 1993
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Spring Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Easter Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Commencement
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
January 18-19
January 20
Friday
Monday
March 12
March 22
Thursday
Monday
Friday
Saturday
April 8
April 12
May7
May 8
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
3
Fall 1993
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Labor Day Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Thanksgiving Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
August 30-31
September 1
Friday
Tuesday
September 3
September 7
Tuesday
Monday
Tuesday
November 23
November 29
December 14
Spring 1994
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Spring Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Easter Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Commencement
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
Friday
Monday
Thursday
Monday
Friday
Saturday
January 17-18
January 19
~
-
March 11
March 21
March 31
April 4
May 6
May 7
Fall 1994
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Labor Day Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Thanksgiving Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
August 29-30
August 31
Friday
Tuesday
September 2
September 6
Tuesday
Monday
Friday
November 22
November 28
December 16
5
THE UNIVERSITY
-The Campus and the Region
-Some History
-Programs Offered
-Equality of Opportunity
-The Missions, Goals, and Objectives of the University
THE UNIVERSITY
6
THE CAMPUS
The University is in the Borough of California, a community of approximately 6000
residents, located in Washington County, on the banks of the Monongahela River, about an
hour's drive south of Pittsburgh. It is accessible via Interstate 70, Exits 15 (PA 43), 16
(Speers), or 17 (PA 88, Charleroi) or via U.S. 40 (PA 43 or 88). The recent completion
of the first spur of the limited-access Mid-Mon Valley / Fayette Expressway (PA 43) links
California to the federal Interstate system. The University is approximately 30 minutes from
Exit 8 (New Stanton) on the Pennsylvania Turnpike, and an hour from Greater Pittsburgh
International Airport.
The main campus consists of 33 buildings situated on 59 acres. A modem football
stadium, including an all-weather track, seven tennis courts, a baseball diamond, playing
areas for intramural sports, and picnic facilities is located on some 83 acres at the George
H. Roadman Recreation Center on Route 88, approximately two miles south of the main
campus.
The Area
The geographic location of the University gives the resident student opportunities to
explore and pursue a wide variety of activities. Located in the Appalachian Plateau, an area
of low rolling hills, the University is a short drive from camping, hiking,fishing, hunting,
white water rafting and canoeing, and skiing activities in the Laurel Mountains. In addition
to cultural activities provided on campus, the student has easy access to the Pittsburgh
metropolitan area. This provides the student an opportunity to enjoy the Pittsburgh
Symphony, the Pittsburgh Ballet, the Civic Light Opera, the David L. Lawrence Convention
Center, the Pittsburgh Steelers, Penguins, and Pirates, various museums and all of the
excitements and attractions of a major metropolitan area.
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA:
A BRIEF HISI'ORY
For more than a century, the institution that is now California University of
pennsylvania has been growing and changing, until now it has developed into a varied and
vital multi-purpose university. California is one of the fourteen state-owned institutions of
higher education in the State System of Higher Education, but it has its unique history, and
we present some of the highlights of it here. (Fuller information may be found in the book
by Regis J. Serinko, California State College: 1he People's College in the Monongahela
Valley, published in 1975.)
THE UNIVERSITY
7
1852: A two-story Academy, offering education from kindergarten through college was
established in the recently founded community of California. The institution was supported
by local taxes and the donations of some of the residents of the community.
1864: A ten-acre plot for the Academy, still the center of the University, was purchased.
1865: The Academy obtained a charter as a Normal School for its district and became a
teacher-preparatory institution.
1874: The institution was renamed the South Western State Normal School.
1914: The Commonwealth acquired the institution and renamed it the California State
Normal School. The curriculum was now exclusively a two-year preparatory course for
elementary school teachers.
1928: The institution became California State Teachers College, returning to its previous
status as a four-year degree-granting institution, with increasing opportunities for growth and
development. Under the presidency of Robert Steele (1928-1951), California began to
concentrate on industrial arts and atypical education (what is now called special education)
and otherwise expanded its curricula. The campus grew to 35 acres, and a number of new
buildings were erected.
1959: During the presidency of Michael Duda (1956-68), liberal arts curricula were
introduced, and the college became California State College. In 1962 a graduate program
was introduced. The degrees of M.A. and M.S. were initiated in 1968. During Dr. Duda's
presidency more than a dozen new buildings were completed, and the size of the student
body and faculty increased more than four-fold.
1974: During the presidency of George H. Roadman (1969-1977), the college developed a
special mission in Science and Technology, to complement its traditional roles in Liberal
Arts and Education.
1983: On July 1, 1983, the college became California University of Pennsylvania, in
recognition of its multiple roles and purposes, in the State System of Higher Education,
during the presidency of John Pierce Wat_kins. The College of Science and Technolo&y
became fully operational, offering programs in such varied areas as mathematics and
computer science, industrial management, nursing, energy technology, robotics, and
electrical engineering technology.
THE UNIVERSITY
8
Si monumentum requiris, circumspice.
DR. JOHN PIERCE WATKINS, president of California University of Pennsylvania from
1977 to 1992, is a member of the California class of 1953. He taught in the Edgewood
schools and received a master's degree at West Virginia University before returning in 1957
as a professor of English at California, where he has spent the remainder of his academic
career.
Dr. Watkins received his Ph.D. in English in 1963 from the University of Pittsburgh,
where he was a Danforth Fellow from 1960 to 1962. At California his courses in medieval
literature and in Shakespeare are particularly remembered. He served as chair of the
English department and as vice-president for academic affairs before becoming president.
He has traveled widely in this country and abroad on behalf of this university and has served
on numerous state, regional , national, and international bodies dealing with higher education.
Since 1977, California University has experienced unprecedented development. The
university has been reorganized into four vice-presidential areas of responsibility. The
College of Science and Technology was founded and given a special mission in the State
System in that area, and the academic organization of the university has consequently been
restructured. So many new programs have been introduced in Science and Technology,
Education and Human Services, Liberal Arts, and the Graduate School that a majority of
students are now enrolled in programs that did not exist 15 years ago. The university has
strengthened its commitment to social equity in recruitment and retention of students, staff,
and faculty. The new Manderino Library has become a center for state-of-the art
information technology. An attractive, commodious, and secure campus provides an
appropriate setting for study or work. Major buildings have been renovated-chief among
them certainly Old Main, which has been restored to its former grace, dignity, and utility.
Academic achievement has been encouraged and rewarded by increased scholarships and
awards, Learning Centers, an Honors program, and a presidential Honors Convocation.
Students have benefitted from improved residence halls and dining facilities, new programs
for physical fitness and recreation, broadened athletic programs, and an expanded Student
Union. Special provisions have been made for educationally, socially, economically, or
physically disadvantaged students and for mature, non-traditional students. Increasing
numbers of new faculty members have come to California, from throughout the country and
abroad. Generous provisions have been made for faculty professional development in both
teaching and research, and the faculty and administration have been increasingly successful
in procuring grants for their own programs and research and for the university. California's
tradition as a center for teacher education has increased through such programs as the
Teacher Enhancement Centers, which bring together experienced faculty from both the
public schools and the university. Since 1983 the Mon Valley Renaissance has brought the
university into partnership with local business, industry, and government to help revitali:ze
the economy of the region. By 1992, California University of Pennsylvania has become not
only a center for public higher education but a multi-purpose university serving the various
needs of Southwestern Pennsylvania.
9
THE UNIVERSITY
JOIIN PIERCE WATKINS
THE UNIVERSITY
UNDERGRADUATE ACADEMIC MAJORS AND OPTIONS
In order to provide educational opportunities for students with different backgrounds and
interests, the University offers a wide variety of academic programs. All of the degree programs
are based on a broad general education designed to assist the individual to develop skills in
communication, grow in cultural and intellectual interests, and develop the ability to do critical
thinking. This extensive foundation in the arts, sciences, and humanities is enriching and
essential in providing a liberal education for all students.
The University offers degrees from four separate divisions: the College of Education and
Human Services, which awards the bachelor of science degree in education in thirty major
programs, and two associate degree programs and the bachelor of arts degree in two programs;
the College of Liberal Arts, which awards the bachelor of arts and the bachelor of science
degrees in forty-three; the College of Science and Technology, which awards the bachelor of
science degree in forty-six programs; and the associate of science degree in ten areas; and the
Graduate School, which offers the master of science, master of arts, and master of education
degrees. The following programs are offered at the undergraduate level.
I. BACCALAUREATE DEGREE PROGRAMS
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
Anthropology
Art
Art: Teacher Certification
(with W&J or Carlow College)
Communication Studies
-Public Relations
-Radio & Television
Earth Science
-Meteorology
-Oceanography
Economics
English
-Business & Commercial Writing
-Creative Writing
-Journalism
-Radio & TV Writing
-Scientific & Technical Writing
French
Geography
-Applied Geography
-Travel & Tourism
Geology
German
History
Humanities Area
Industrial Organizational Psychology
International Studies
-Business & Economics
-Foreign Language
-Geography
- Political Science
Parks & Recreation Management
Philosophy
-Philosophy/Pre-Law
Political Science
-Pre-Law
-Public Administration
Psychology
Russian & Soviet Studies
Social Science Area
Sociology
Spanish
Theatre
Urban Studies
General Studies in Liberal Arts
(for undecided students)
THE UNIVERSITY
11
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOWGY
Administration & Management
Biology
-Pre-Chiropractic Medicine
-Pre-Dentistry
-Pre-Medicine
-Pre-Osteopathic Medicine
-Pre-Optometry
-Pre-Podiatric Medicine
-Pre-Pharmacy
-Pre-Veterinary Medicine
Business Administration
-Accounting
-Business Economics
-Computer Based Systems Management
-Finance
-Human Resources Management
-Management
-Marketing
Chemistry
Electrical Engineering Technology
Environmental Studies
-Environmental Conservation
-Environmental Pollution Control
-Environmental Resources
-Environmental Science
Graphic Communication Technology
-Electrographics
-Photolithography (Offset)
-Screen Printing
Industrial Management Technology
-Management & Computer Science
-Manufacturing
-Printing Management
Industrial Technology
Manufacturing Technology
Mathematics
Mathematics & Computer Science
Applied Computer Science
Medical Technology
Mortuary Science (Cooperative)
Natural science
Physics
Pre-Engineering
General Studies in Science & Technology
(for undecided students)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Athletic Training
Athletic Training/Dual Major
Early Childhood Education
Elementary Education
Elementary & Early Childhood Education
General Studies in Education
(for undecided students)
Gerontology
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped
and Early Childhood Education
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped
and Elementary Education
Secondary Education
-Art (See Liberal Arts above)
-Biology
-General Science
-Chemistry
-Comprehensive Social Science
-Communication
-Earth Science
-English
-French
-German
-Mathematics
-Physics
-Spanish
THE UNIVERSITY
12
Social Work
Special Education
-Community Service Personnel
-Mentally and/or Physically
Handicapped
-Mentally and/or Physically
Handicapped with Physical Education
& Recreation
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Technology Education
Il. ASSOCIATE DEGREE PROGRAMS
Besides the many four-year baccalaureate programs, California University also offers
a variety of two-year vocational programs to meet the educational needs of students who
wish to pursue career-oriented education. The degrees are designed to prepare students for
technical and vocational occupations immediately upon graduation.
Such areas as Automation Technology (with options in robotics and numerical control),
Drafting Technology, Administration and Management (with options in accounting,
computer-based systems management, and banking), Computer Science Technology, Screen
Process Printing Technology, Electronics Technology, Early Childhood Education, and
Community Living Arrangements provide the educational base for exciting careers in the
nineties and beyond.
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Accounting
Administration & Management
-Computer Based Management Systems
-Banking
Computer Science Technology
Automation Technology
-Numerical Control
-Robotics
Drafting Technology
Electronics Technology
Nursing at Washington Hospital
(Degree from Washington Hospital)
(Apply to Washington Hospital)
-Pre-Nursing at Washington Hospital
(No Degree)
Screen Printing Technology
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Community Living Arrangements
Early Childhood
THE UNIVERSITY
13
ill. CERTIFICATION PROGRAMS
(for those with previous certification or degree)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Early Childhood Certification
Elementary Certification
Technology Education Certification
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped
Certification
Secondary Education Certification
-Biology Certification
-Chemistry Certification
-Communication Certification
-Comprehensive Social Science
Certification
-Driver's Training Certification
- Science Certification
-English Certification
-Environmental Education Certification
-French Certification
-General Science Certification
-German Certification
-Mathematics Certification
-Physics Certification
-Spanish Certification
IV. UPPER DIVISION PROGRAMS
(available only to those with previous special certification and/or degree)
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Nursing (BSN-Upper Division for RNs)
-Pre-BSN Nursing
(prerequisites needed for RN s)
Electrical Engineering Technology
(completed Associate EET program)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetist
Public School Nursing (for RNs)
(for CRNAs)
Dental Hygienist (for Dental Hygienists)
THE UNIVERSITY
14
EQUALITY OF OPPORTUNITY
California University of Pennsylvania acknowledges that equality of opportunity is the
cornerstone of a free and democratic society. As a state-owned institution, it accepts the
duty of putting the principle of equal opportunity into practice. As an institution of higher
education, it accepts the responsibility of teaching that principle by its policies and actions.
Consequently, California University of Pennsylvania commits itself, ethically and legally,
to the equal opportunity policies of a system of fair and open recruitment and acceptance of
students regardless of sex, race, color, religious creed, lifestyle, affectional or sexual
preference, disability, present or previous military service, ancestry, national origin, union
and political affiliation, and age. Nevertheless, mindful of the reality of past injustices and
present societal needs, the university reserves the right to employ a limited use of racial,
ethnic, and sexual criteria to accomplish remedial objectives when necessary.
Once students are admitted to California University of Pennsylvania, the same rights,
privileges, programs and activities are made available to all without regard to arbitrary and
irrelevant criteria. Financial aids, especially scholarships, guaranteed loans, National Direct
Student Loans, grants, work study programs, assistantships, and internships, are provided
on an equal opportunity basis. Likewise, advisors and counselors are available to all
students. Special programs, in particular have been established to meet the needs of students
who meet the federally prescribed financial and academic criteria. Residence halls are
available on a first-come, first-served basis to all students without regard to race, national
origin, or religion. However, in the case of living arrangements, sex and disability
distinctions are made to better serve and accommodate all students. Finally, in accordance
with recent federal and state legislation, architectural and programmatic modifications have
been implemented to ensure that no qualified student is prevented from succeeding at
California University of Pennsylvania because of disability.
In addition, California University of Pennsylvania engages in an open and equitable system
of recruitment and employment of faculty and staff candidates. It practices a nondiscriminatory system of compensation, including pay, promotion, tenure, transfer,
education, training and other benefits of employment.
Finally, California University of Pennsylvania prides itself on having created a workplace
and learning environment free from discrimination and harassment. If situations or
conditions to the contrary occur, an immediate and appropriate redress will take place.
Persons aware of such situations or conditions are encouraged to contact the Social Equity
Officer (938-4185), or the Title IX Coordinator (938-4351), or the Section 504 Coordinator
(938-4076).
THE UNNERSITY
15
THE MISSION, GOAI.S, AND OBJECTIVES
OF CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY' OF PENNSYLVANIA
California University of Pennsylvania's mission is to provide quality education at a
reasonable cost. To this end the university:
(1) offers undergraduate instruction in the liberal''arts, education, human resources, the
professions, business, science and technology;
(2) offers a graduate education to, and beyond, the master's degree, in certain areas of
study;
(3) helps meet the region' s economic, social, cultural, and recreational needs; (4) fosters
research and service;
(5) encourages the intellectual growth of its faculty, as well as of its students.
California's special mission is to develop programs in science, technology, and applied
engineering.
Goals
California University of Pennsylvania is a multipurpose, regional university firmly
committed to offering students of widely varied ages, backgrounds, interests and needs, a
broad range of education opportunities and experiences. Thus, the university endeavors to
provide a contemporary array of degree programs-associate, baccalaureate and
masters-which will enable the student to develop as an intelligent, caring individual who
will be able to function as a contributing, productive member of society. The university
recognizes the important relationship that exists between those disciplines which enhance
one's ability to think critically, reason analytically, communicate effectively, maintain
historical perspective and promote good citiz.enship and those disciplines which provide the
specialized knowledge and the critical intellectual skills to perform effectively in a wide
variety of settings. To this end, it is the purpose of the university to prepare men and
women to meet the challenges of the world of work: in education, business, industry,
government, the professions, the human services, and graduate and professional schools.
The principal goal of the College of Education and Human Services, the university's
oldest division, is to maintain a diversity of contemporary curricula appropriate for the
preparation of new teachers and the improvement of teachers already in the field. More
recently, the college has elected to sponsor the development and delivery of a variety of
special programs for the purpose of educating practitioners in a number of human service
areas.
Through traditional courses of study, the College of Liberal Arts attempts to teach
reflective thinking .that enables graduates to make responsible social decisions in a multicultural world. The Liberal Arts programs are designed to present students with options that
THE UNIVERSITY
16
call upon precise knowledge, cultural perspectives, aesthetics, and personal and social
communication skills in order to create informed, as well as technologically literate,
graduates.
As the newest division of the university, the College of Science and Technology's goal
is to make available an array of scientific, technological and career-oriented programs which
prepare students for the increasingly complex demands of the industrial, business, health
fields as well as for further study in graduate and professional schools.
The goal of the Graduate School is to provide an opportunity for those who already
have undergraduate training to further develop their experience at the graduate or postgraduate level.
As a regional institution, the university strives to present a diversity of programs and
services for those residing in its service area. A principal goal of the Office of Development
and External Relations, especially in its Mon Valley Renaissance program, is to provide
different kinds of assistance related to economic development. The university also offers to
local residents access to many social and cultural activities.
Objectives
The faculty and students of the university are participating members of an educational
institution charged with preservation, discovery, and dissemination of knowledge in the arts,
sciences, technologies, vocations and professions, and with the creative application of that
knowledge in their lives both as individuals and members of society.
The objectives of the university are:
(1) To provide a liberal education which aims at developing analytical thinking and
individual initiative and responsibility;
(2) To provide flexible, innovative programs and support services that are responsive
to a broad range of student and regional needs;
(3) To provide a professional faculty and an effective administration;
(4) To create and maintain a learning environment in which the rights of all are
respected;
(5) To provide a wide range of learning opportunities for students interested in
associate, baccalaureate, graduate, and non-degree programs;
(6) To promote effective communication among faculty, students, administration, and
the general public;
(7) To provide a diversity of intellectual, cultural, social and recreational activities
and experiences for the university and surrounding communities;
(8) To encourage thoughtful and responsible faculty and student participation in local,
state, national, and international affairs;
(9) To require high standards of teaching and scholarship and to encourage
participation in professional activities;
(10) To foster academic research which contributes to human knowledge and the
vitality of the institution; and
(11) To maintain an on-going system of self-evaluation whereby the goals of the
institution serve as the criteria for determining the institution's effectiveness.
17
GENERAL INFORMATION
-Orientation
-Computer Facilities
-The Library
-Learning Resource Centers
-Honors Opportunities
-Placement and Career Services
-Cooperative Education
-Internships
-National Student Exchange
-Visiting Student Program
-Veterans Affairs
-Athletics
-Women's Center
-Campus Ministry
-Confidentiality of Records
-Public Safety and Security
GENERAL INFORMATION
18
ORIENTATION
A comprehensive one-day orientation program, under the direction of the Offices
of Academic Affairs and Student Development, is conducted for entering students and
their parents during the summer months before the student's beginning fall semester.
This initial formal encounter with the University community provides students and
parents with an intimate view of the University's total program, including both
academic and social aspects. Students and parents discuss the academic requirements
of various curricula with academic personnel and review an individual student's
interest, capabilities, and career plans. At the close of the program the students have
registered for their first semester of courses, and both parents and students have made
valuable contacts with University personnel, in both areas, academic and student
affairs.
GENERAL INFORMATION
II
19
COMPUTER FACILITIES
I
COMPUTER CENTER
The University Computer Center is located in the basement of Manderino Library.
Staff offices are open Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. until 4:00 p.m. User
facilities in the World Culture Building are available for student use at least 80 hours each
week. In addition, dial up access is available almost 24 hours a day.
The computer facilities at the University are separated into two distinct functional areas.
The first area deals with the providing of computer resources to meet the instructional and
research needs of the University, such as student access for coursework and the Manderino
Library VULCAT on-line catalog. The second area deals with providing resources to meet
the administrative needs of the University, including, for example, the following functions:
student scheduling and registration, library circulation control, revenue and accounts
receivable, student data base maintenance, personnel data base maintenance, and the
University budgeting system.
Computer Accounts
Any student may obtain a computer account by stopping in at the computer center office
in the basement of Manderino Library to fill out a user account request form. The forms
are available from the Computer Center secretary. There is no charge for the service or for
the use of the computer.
Students enrolled in courses where VAX computer assignments are given have an
account generated for them automatically. Other students must fill out an account request
form, which must be signed by a faculty advisor or instructor, then returned to the
Computer Center office. Individual user account requests normally take 24 hours to
process.
User Guide
An Introductory Users' Manual for VAX/VMS Users is available for $3.75 at the
information desk in the lobby of the Student Union. This manual is a must for all new or
infrequent VAX users. It describes some of the essential bits of knowledge required to
effectively utiliz.e the VAX computers on campus, including how to log in here at California
University of Pennsylvania, how to use the file editor, and how to compile programs.
GENERAL INFORMATION
20
World Culture User Center
The World Culture User Center located in the basement of the World Culture building
is the main center for campus VAX access. This facility contains a VAX terminal room,
various printers, a graphics room, a PC micro laboratory, and two classrooms.
Tektronix 4105 terminals and a 4696 color ink-jet screen copier are available to support
computer graphics courses. The PC micro lab currently houses IBM-PCs, PC clones,
Maclntoshes, and Apple microcomputers.
Entrance to the User Center is through the University Avenue (west) entrance or via the
elevator. Hours are, generally, Monday through Thursday, 8:00 a.m. to 10:30p.m.; Friday
and Saturday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.; and Sunday, 3:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m., but may vary.
The User Center is usually closed Saturdays during summer sessions.
Other Campus Facilities
Every department has microcomputers for student and staff use; only some of the major
facilities are listed here.
Two specialized VAX terminal laboratories, the Computer Aided Design and Drafting
laboratory and the Numerical Control Machine laboratory, are located in the Coover Annex
and operated by the Industry and Technology department. These laboratories are reserved
for students taking specific computer-aided drafting and numerical control course. Each
laboratory is equipped with Tektronix 4107 and 4207 terminals with graphics tablets.
Additional campus microcomputer laboratories are located in and operated by various
departments on campus, including Industry and Technology, Business and Economics,
Mathematics and Computer Science, Education, and the English Department's Word
Processing Laboratory (see page 21 below).
Instructional Applications
The University maintains the following applications packages in support of instructional
computing. Graphic packages run using the Tektronix 4100 series and 4200 series terminals
are available in the World Culture and Coover Annex terminal laboratories.
SPSS-X
Statistical Package for the Social Sciences, Extended
EQINOX
Computer Aided Manufacturing and Numerical control.
ANVIL-5000
Computer Aided Design and Drafting.
GKS
Graphical Kernel System (subroutine library).
PLOT- IO
Tektronix graphical subroutine packages.
KERMIT and XMODEM
PC to VAX file transfer packages.
VULCAT
Library On-Line Catalog.
TeX and LaTeX
Typesetting packages.
POPLOG
PROLOG AND LISP development package.
GENERAL INFORMATION
21
Campus Network
University VAX computers, terminal laboratories and many campus buildings are
connected together using a high-speed "Ethernet" local area network. This industry-standard
network allows users to share and more easily access campus computing resources.
Computer Center Facilities
The VAX computers which service the campus are maintained by the Computer Center.
The main system consists of a five node VAX cluster composed of the following processors:
one 14 megabyte 11/780, one 32 megabyte 8350 dual processor, and three 16 megabyte
8250 single processors. An HSC50 intelligent disk processor supplies the cluster nodes with
access to any of the four gigabytes of disk storage currently available.
Data backup is done using a TU78 6250 BPI or TU80 1600 BPI tape drive. A 1200
LPM Fujitsu printer and a 600 LPM LP26 printer produce administrative printouts.
Additionally, a Microvax II system supports the Computer Aided Design and Drafting
users.
User terminal access to all systems is via the Ethernet network. Some direct wire
connections remain to the 11/780 and microvax processor, but these will be replaced in the
future.
WORD PROCESSING LAB
The Word Processing Lab in Dixon Hall has more than 40 computers for the use of
students. During the regular academic year, the Lab is open at least 70 hours a week
(including weekends), and during the summer for 40 hours a week. The lab is staffed by
trained student workers, and a faculty coordinator is usually on duty during the day.
Both MS-DOS and Macintosh computers, and a variety of word processing and related
software, are available. In addition, the lab provides fast, high-quality, dot matrix and laser
printing.
For more elaborate art, layout, and design work, the lab offers desktop publishing
equipment and software, including major layout and art programs, pre-packaged art, big
screens, a scanner, and a light table. Students in the Professional Writing Program receive
instruction in desk-top publishing.
Apart from the purchase of an inexpensive storage disk, there are no fees or charges
for the use of the Word Processing Lab. The atmosphere is informal, and students in all
curricula are invited and encouraged to use this friendly, high-tech writing facility.
TEACHER EDUCATION COMPUTER LABORATORY
The College of Education and Human Services maintains a computer laboratory in the
Keystone Education Building, Room 402. The facility is equipped and designed to train
prospective teachers to use computers as tools to support their teaching and instructional
management roles.
22
GENERAL INFORMATION
Equipment includes 16 teaching stations, each consisting of one of the Apple Macintosh
family of computers with one hard drive, one floppy drive, and a color monitor. In
addition, each station is part of an AppleTalk Network linked to a Macintosh Ils. Each
position is linked to a laser printer or one of several dot matrix printers. There are more
than 100 titles of instructional software available for examination and evaluation.
The laboratory facilities are used for formal instruction for the course EDF 301,
Computers for Teachers, about one half of each weekday. During the remainder of the day
until 10:00 p.m. the laboratory is staffed and available to complete assignments for the
course, which is required of all Teacher Education majors, or other uses students may have.
Other than the inexpensive data disks, there is no cost to students.
GENERAL INFORMATION
23
TIIE LIBRARY
At the entrance to the University, the Louis L. Manderino Library is one of the most
prominent and most important buildings on campus. With more than a quarter million books
in open stacks, subscriptions to 1700 newspapers, magazines, and other periodicals, it is first
of all the chief and most accessible source of information on any subject. With a seating
capacity of more than 1500, it is also a place to study and to read, whether the reading is
required for a course or a term paper, or for browsing or recreational reading. During the
fall and spring semesters the library is open 15 hours a day during the week and 9-10 hours
a day on weekends. During the summer, the library is open 13 hours a day Monday
through Thursday and eight hours a day on Friday and Sunday. During examination periods
towards the end of the semester, library hours are extended still further.
Computeriz.ed information retrieval has made library research faster, more thorough,
and more efficient at Manderino. Instead of a card catalog, the library has VULCAT, its
"on-line" catalog that enables the student to sit at any of a dozen or more terminals and,
by means of an easy series of commands, not only quickly locate any books in the library's
collection but print out automatically the titles and call numbers of those books. VULCAT
can also be accessed from various on-campus terminals and, by means of a telephone
modem, by anyone who has a home computer.
To look up magazine or periodical articles, another set of terminals and printers runs
computerized CD-ROM discs to current bibliographies-replacing the need to consult
printed volumes of them issue by issue and year by year. Chief among these discs are: The
Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature, the Business Periodicals Index, the Applied Science
and Technology Index, the Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature , the
Social Sciences Index, the Humanities Index, the MLA International Bibliography, the
Education Index, and ERIC (including the Current Index to Journal in Education.) Through
a Tower System these on-line sources may be used by a number of people at one time.
Other specialized sources on disc include the Fortune 500 Prospector (of particular use to
Business majors), U.S. Census data, PC Globe and PC USA, which feature maps, a Word
Cruncher disc (containing, among other things, the complete works of Shakespeare,
historical documents and speeches, and many complete works of American literature), and
Books in Print. Brief tutorial sessions, specially written pamphlets, and individual assistance
from specialist librarians in bibliographical instruction assist the student who may be
unfamiliar with such on-line searching.
The library also offers such services as a large Reference Collection, inexpensive
photocopiers, out-of-state telephone directories, a large collection of college and university
catalogs, a pamphlet file, syllabi for all courses offered at the University, a certain amount
of computer software, a collection of specially housed art slides, and data on important
business and industries. Some of the special services in or available through the library are:
• Library privileges at 92 other local colleges and universities.
• A Curriculum Library for Teacher Education students, with a large collection of
children's books and textbooks.
GENERAL INFORMATION
24
A Media Center with both hardware (such as videocassette and tape players) and
software (such as films, records, and tapes) that the student may use or, in some
cases, charge out for class, home, or dorm use.
• Government documents of many different categories. Manderino Library is an
official Federal Government Document Depository and regularly receives, in bard
copy, microform, or CD-ROM format, large numbers of these documents-for
example, census data, reports, maps, and books. The Documents Librarian will
assist with the use of this important resource.
• Hundreds of thousands of documents on microform in the ERIC system relating to
all aspects of education, and easily located through the CD-ROM discs.
• Special files on business firms-local, national, and international.
The staff of the Manderino Library are "user-friendly" and welcome any suggestions
not only for books to add to the collection but for improvement of services.
•
25
GENERAL INFORMATION
LEARNING RESOURCE CENTERS
WRITING CENTER
The Writing Center is a non-credit service provided by the English Department to assist
students and faculty from every academic discipline with writing projects. Located in Dixon
119, the Center is open during the regular academic year from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.,
Monday through Friday. The center also offers writing assistance during summer sessions
on a slightly more limited basis.
The Writing Center lends its assistance in these ways:
(1) Tutorials are offered on a one-to-one basis. Tutors may be peers, graduate assistants,
or English instructors who are trained to provide conference-based writing assistance.
(2) Tutors function as coaches and collaborators, neither evaluating writing, lecturing
students, nor completing students' work. Instead, students collaborate with writers in
ways that facilitate the process of writers finding their own answers and developing
their own ideas.
(3) Each student's individual needs are the focus of the tutorial. Students are encouraged
to participate actively in setting the agenda for how the tutor and student will spend
their time together.
(4) The Center serves the university and the entire community, including writers
completing academic papers, business and lab reports, school applications, resumes,
graduate theses, writings for contests, and any other writing projects with which
writers are involved.
The Writing Center, which offers tutoring by appointment or on a walk-in basis, is a
free service to all University students.
READING CENTER
When your class reading assignments make you feel as if you've just entered the
university jungle, come to the Reading Center for a free one-hour tutoring session. Staffed
by one faculty member and two graduate assistants, the Center teaches techniques to
improve reading comprehension and vocabulary. The Center offers help in identifying main
ideas, making inferences, drawing conclusions, understanding concepts and facts, test-taking
skills and building vocabulary. Students make appointments to work privately with a tutor
or schedule an independent lab session that is staff directed. A recent addition to the
Elementary Education Department, the Reading Center is housed in the Keystone Building,
Room 200A and is open from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday.
GENERAL INFORMATION
26
MATHEMATICS LABORATORY
Offered in the Mathematics Laboratory in 115 Noss Hall are the following services and
resources:
1.
Mathematics and computer science tutoring.
2.
Computer software for mathematics courses and for math anxiety.
3. Reference books for mathematics courses and for math anxiety.
If you wish to take advantage of the free tutoring service please call 938-5893 to
schedule a 30-minute appointment. Before calling, we ask that you read your text and start
your homework. If you have trouble completing an assignment, schedule an appointment
for a tutoring session.
We have computer-directed-instruction software and 12 Apple Ile microcomputers
available for your use. The computer software includes topics from basic mathematics
through calculus.
We also have some mathematics-anxiety software. Most people feel up-tight about
mathematics in some way or another. If you're one of these people, you may want to try
some of these materials. (Mathematics anxiety books are available too.)
The Mathematics Laboratory is usually open from 9:a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Mondays to
Thursdays during the fall and spring semesters and the summer and from 9:00 a.m. to 4:00
p.m. on Fridays during the fall and spring semesters. The phone number is 938-5893.
CARE: Services for the Learning Disabled
California University meets the special needs of learning disabled students both in high
school and as undergraduates at the University with CARE-the Center for Academic
Research and Enhancement. More information and application procedures may be obtained
from the CARE office, (412) 938-5781, in the Keystone Education Building, Room 112.
Summer Program
The Summer Program brings learning disabled students who have completed their junior
year of high school to live and study on campus for five weeks. During this period the
students are given intensive remedial instruction in reading, mathematics, spelling, English,
social skills, study skills, survival skills, and Learning Strategies. Following classes each
day are mandatory study sessions, as well as evening recreational periods.
Students who successfully complete the first summer are invited to return the following
summer after their senior year of high school. This second-summer program offers
continued remediation and study skills, with increased emphasis on preparation for college.
A limited number of places may be available to new applicants who have completed their
senior year of high school but did not participate after their junior year.
GENERAL INFORMATION
27
The Summer Program serves approximately 24 students each year on a fee-for-service
basis.
Procedures and standards for admission to the university for the learning disabled are the
same as those for all other applicants. The two programs described are available to the
learning disabled student enrolled at the university. Application for admission to these
programs is a separate procedure and requires documentation separate from that which is
submitted to the Admissions Office at California. Such documents should be sent directly to
the CARE office.
Specialized Support Service Program
The Specialized Support Service Program (SSSP) serves a maximum of 40 participants
on a fee-for-service basis. The SSSP operates under contractual agreement with the
participants, parents, and the CARE staff.
In the first semester, all students must participate in Structured Academic Management
Seminars for two hours a day, four days a week. Subsequent levels of participation are
based on the participant's academic performance. The seminars provide:
• Development of a daily study plan with assigned monitors.
• Assistance in sequencing course assignments into manageable tasks.
• Daily monitoring of academic performance, including student training in
recording assignments and grades.
• Individual and small group tutoring in specific content areas with CARE staff.
• Referral for tutoring to other campus resources. (See the descriptions of the
Writing Center, the Mathematics Laboratory, the Reading Center, described on
pages 25-26 above, and the Department of Academic Development Services on
page 121 in this catalog.)
• The assistance of community-based specialized tutors when needed.
• Word processing equipment, software and the necessary training.
The CARE staff also monitors student academic performance, sends progress reports
to parents on students' overall academic status, assists in scheduling, and works closely with
students' academic advisors.
Additional services such as extended test time, oral testing, use of the Kurzweil Reader,
etc. are provided as needed.
Modified Basic Support Program
The Modified Basic Support Program (MBSP) insures the availability of basic support
services to all identified learning disabled students enrolled in the university who elect to
receive such services but are either not eligible for participation in the Specialized Support
Service Program due to program capacity or choose to receive a less intensive level of
service.
The following services are available to students in the MBSP:
• A regularly scheduled, weekly conference with a member of the CARE staff.
• Review of assignment and study patterns.
• Guidance for referrals to existing University resources.
28
GENERAL INFORMATION
Assistance in the development of self-advocacy as required by the learning
disability.
• Guidance to assist the student to work independently within the University setting.
Enrolli:nent in the MBSP is unlimited, and there is no fee for these services.
•
GENERAL INFORMATION
29
HONORS PROGRAM
The University Honors Program has been established to promote and reward outstanding
intellectual achievement. Each year, the applications of all new freshmen and transfer
students are reviewed, and those students with the very highest indicators of past and future
academic success are invited to participate in the Honors Program. Students in any
undergraduate program or division of the University may participate.
The Honors Program allows academically talented students to work at their own level
of ability, in courses at any stage of their undergraduate career, but it also provides special
opportunities for the inquiring mind to explore important or interesting subjects that are not
commonly offered in undergraduate curricula or that cut across traditional academic
boundaries.
Certain courses, designated as Honors Courses, are restricted to members of the Honors
Program, and they are offered at all class levels. Some of these Honors courses may be
interdisciplinary, cutting across the boundaries that often separate different fields of study.
A course in history, for example, might entail art, music, and literature and cover not just
a single period of time but many different eras and civiliz.ations. Other Honors courses may
represent advanced study, singly or with others, in the Honors student's major field of
study. These two kinds of courses are open only to members of the Honors Program; and
enrollment is kept low, to encourage close interaction between student and professor and to
ensure close attention.
Some of the other, "regular" University course offerings at all levels may have an
Honors component. In such courses, Honors students fulfill the same requirements as other
student in the class but perform certain additional independent work agreed on by student
and professor.
In all such courses, successful completion of the course or of its Honors component is
indicated on the student's transcript.
In addition to this course work, Honors students may participate in a number of special
activities, seminars, projects, etc. Guest speakers, who are eminent specialists in their
fields, address the Honors students from time to time. A special Honors Center, with its
own small library and computer, is reserved for the use of Honors Students.
Inquiries about the Honors Program may be made of the director, California University
of Pennsylvania, California, PA 15419, (412) 938-4535.
GENERAL INFORMATION
30
HONOR SOCIETIES
Many units or departments of the University sponsor undergraduate (or graduate) honor
societies that recognize high levels of academic accomplishment in particular fields of study.
These societies meet regularly with specially assigned faculty advisers, to discuss matters
of professional interest, to honor new inductees, to conduct research either independently
or in cooperation with faculty members, to attend scholarly meetings, or to p~re students
for graduate study or career opportunities. Some of these societies are described in further
detail elsewhere in this catalog; fuller information on all of them may be obtained in the
appropriate offices of the University.
Alpha Mu Gamma (AMr)
National Collegiate Foreign Language Honor Society
Alpha Psi Omega (A 'tO)
National Honorary Dramatics Fraternity
Beta Beta Beta (BBB)
National Honorary Biological Society
Gamma Theta Upsilon (r0Y)
National Honorary Geographical Society
Epsilon Pi Tau (EIIT)
International Honor Society in Industry and Technology
Honor Society in Education
Kappa Delta Pi (K.::lII)
Lambda Alpha (AA)
National Honorary Anthropology Fraternity
Omicron Delta Epsilon (O.::lE)
International Honor Society in Economics
Pi Gamma Mu (IIrM)
National Social Science Honor Society
Pi Kappa Delta (JIU)
National Honorary Forensic Fraternity
Rho Phi Alpha (P~A)
National Honorary Parks and Recreation Administration
Fraternity
Sigma Gamma Epsilon (ErE)
National Honorary Earth Sciences Fraternity
Sigma Pi Epsilon Delta (EIIE.::l) National Honorary Fraternity in Special Education
Sigma Tau Delta (CT'.::l)
National Honorary English Fraternity
Phi Alpha (~A)
Social Work Honorary Fraternity
Phi Alpha Theta (~A0)
International Honorary History Fraternity
Chi Gamma Psi (Xr't)
Honorary Fraternity in the Field of Science
HONORS AT GRADUATION
Commencement Honors are awarded to a limited number of students in the graduating
class. A minimum of 64 earned credits at California University in a baccalaureate degree
program is required to receive commencement honors.
For the criteria for Commencement Honors, see page 54 in the Academic Policies and
Procedures of this catalog.
SEMESTER HONORS
Full-time students are awarded on the basis of grade-point average at the end of each
semester. For the criteria for Semester Honors, see page 54 in the Academic Policies and
Procedures portion of this catalog.
GENERAL INFORMATION
31
HONORS CONVOCATION
The University recognizes, encourages, and rewards academic excellence of master's,
baccalaureate, and associate degree-seeking students by naming Presidential Scholars at an
annual Honors Convocation in the Spring semester. This award is a unique distinction,
separate and apart from Commencement Honors.
A baccalaureate degree-seeking student designated as a Presidential Scholar must have
a cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 in a baccalaureate program and have completed 64 credits (if
a junior) or 96 credits (if a senior), of which at least 30 must have been taken at this
university (calculated beyond an earned associate degree or other first degree, if applicable,
and in the present baccalaureate degree program).
An associate degree-seeking student designated as a Presidential Scholar must have a
cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 at California and have completed 45 credits, all of which must
have been taken at this University.
Both full-time and part-time students may, if qualified, be named Presidential Scholars.
At the Honors Convocation, presentations are made by honor societies, a Distinguished
Graduate Award is presented to a graduate of the University, and distinguished faculty
members are formally recognized. The convocation is followed by a reception at which
certificates are presented to the Presidential Scholars by the deans of the divisions of the
University.
DISTINGUISHED SERVICE AWARD
The Distinguished Service Award, a Student Government award, is granted to the most
outstanding women and men of each graduating class. The awards are made on the basis
of participation in activities, character, citiz.enship, leadership, and personality. The election
of persons to receive the awards is made by a committee composed of students and
administration.
COOPERATIVE EDUCATION
Cooperative Education allows students to be employed-whether in business, industry,
government, or service organiz.ations-in paid positions directly related to their academic
majors or career plans. Cooperative Education positions are pre-professional, monitored by
faculty members, and coordinated by the University. Students may be employed part or
full-time, and may choose to work during fall, spring and/or summer. Undergraduates as
well as graduate students in all academic majors are encouraged to participate provided they
meet the eligibility requirements. It is expected that the student's cooperative education
experience(s) will span over two semesters or summers while enrolled at California.
Cooperative Education positions are advertised through "Co-Opportunities," which is
published every two weeks. Students who enroll in Cooperative Education are eligible to
apply for advertised positions. Additional information and appointments with members of
GENERAL INFORMATION
32
the Cooperative Education staff are available in the Placement and Career Services office
in the Morgan Learning and Research Center.
INTERNSHIPS
Internships allow students to earn credit in their major fields of study while gaining
practical experience in productive organizations-usually off campus. Such positions may
nor may be salaried. Interns are usually in their junior or senior year, and approval must
be obtained from the department chairperson or the campus supervisor of the internship
program. Inquiries about internships should be made at departmental offices or at the deans'
offices.
THE NATIONAL STUDENT EXCHANGE (NSE)
An Opportunity to Widen Your Educational Horizons
Besides the educational opportunities offered on this campus, California University
offers you the chance to attend another school in the NSE network at little or no more cost
than you pay at California. This is an excellent chance to widen your educational horizons.
In consultation with the campus NSE coordinator, academic advisor, family and friends, you
select schools that will complement and supplement the course offerings at California
University while fulfilling your own personal and academic goals. You can take advantage
of the academic strengths of the other universities in the NSE program, for they have
become extensions of our campus.
California University's NSE coordinator, located in the Program Office, California
Memorial Union, 938-4306, can tell you about the ease with which the process of exchange
works and what will be required of you for participation. As you examine your own reasons
for going to another school, you will see that they are similar to some of the wide variety
of reasons expressed by the over 30,000 students who have been hosted at schools in the
network since it began in 1968. Most students exchange for a combination of reasons,
selecting schools that provide a particular academic interest or diversification along with the
opportunity to live in a different geographical or cultural setting. California students return
from exchange with new perspectives on their education and a better appreciation of their
home region, family and campus. They frequently become more independent as learners,
reflecting the self-reliance and self-confidence gained as a result of having taken a decisive
role in planning their education and future and carrying through with those plans. They
know more about their limitations and capabilities and develop an increased appreciation for
the vast differences in ideas and value systems that exist in different geographic locations
with different ethnic and racial groups.
The following institutions are members of the NSE:
Alabama State University
University of Alabama
University of Alaska, Anchorage
University of Alaska, Fairbanks
Northern Arizona University
California
California
California
California
California
State
State
State
State
State
Polytechnic University, Pomona
University, Bakersfield
University, Dominguez Hills
University, Fresno
University, Northridge
GENERAL INFORMATION
California State University, San Bernardino
Humboldt State University
Sonoma State University
Colorado State University
Fort Lewia College
University of Northern Colorado
University of Southern Colorado
Western State College of Colorado
Eastern CoMecticut State University
University of Delaware
Florida International University
University of South Florida
Georgia State University
University of Georgia
University of Guam
University of New Hampshire
Rutgers College, Rutgers University
Trenton State College
William Paterson College of New Jersey
Eastern New Mexico University
New Mexico State University
University of New Mexico
Hunter College of the City University of New York
SUNY Center at Stony Brook
SUNY College at Buffalo
SUNY College at Potsdam
East Carolina University
North Carolina State University
University of North Carolina at Charlotte
University of North Carolina at Wilmington
Bowling Green State University
Oklahoma State University
Eastern Oregon State College
Oregon State University
Portland State University
Southern Oregon State College
University of Oregon
East Stroudsburg University of PeMsylvania
Indiana University of PeMsylvania
University of Hawaii at Hilo
University of Hawaii at Manoa
Boise State University
University of Idaho
Illinois State University
Northeastern Illinois University
Indiana University-Purdue University at Fort Wayne
University of Northern Iowa
33
Fort Hays State University
Pittsburg State University
Murray State University
Grambling State University
Louisiana State University
University of Maine
University of Maine at Farmington
University of Southern Maine
Towson State University
University of Maryland at College Park
University of Massachusetta at Amherst
University of Massachusctta at Boston
Oakland University
Moorhead State University
University of MiMesota, Twin Cities
University of Missouri-Columbia
Montana State University
Southwest Missouri State University
University of Montana
University of Nebraska at Kearney
University of Nevada, Las Vegas
University of Nevada, Reno
West Chester University of PeMsylvania
University of Puerto Rico, Cayey
University of Puerto Rico , Humacao
University of Puerto Rico , Rio Piedras
Rhode Island College
University of Rhode Island
College of Charleston
South Carolina State College
University of South Carolina
Winthrop College
Northern State University
South Dakota State University
University of South Dakota
Memphis State University
University of the Virgin Islands
University of Utah
Utah State University
Virginia State University
Central Washington University
Western Washington University
West Virginia University
University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire
University of Wisconsin, Green Bay
University of Wisconsin, River Falls
University of Wyoming
34
GENERAL INFORMATION
VISITING STUDENT PROGRAM
IN THE STATE SYSTEM OF HIGHER EDUCATION
In addition to the National Student Exchange Program, students at California University
may choose to enroll for a time at any of the other 13 institutions in the Pennsylvania State
System of Higher Education; and similarly students from those 13 may enroll at California.
These institutions are Bloomsburg, Cheyney, Clarion, East Stroudsburg, Edinboro, Indiana,
Kutztown, Lock Haven, Mansfield, Millersville, Shippensberg, Slippery Rock, and West
Chester Universities of Pennsylvania.
The purposes of this program are to allow students at one institution to participate, for
a limited period of time, in courses, programs or experiences not available at their home
institution, without loss of institutional residency, eligibility for honors or athletics, or
credits toward graduation; and to expand options available to students in such matters as
student teaching , clinical experiences, internships, and international exchange programs.
Fuller information may be obtained from the office of the Vice-President for Academic
Affairs. Catalogs of the participating institutions may be consulted in the offices of the
college deans, or in Manderino Library.
The procedures and standards for this Visiting Student program are as follows. (They
apply equally to students in any of the 14 SSHE institutions.)
1. The student must have satisfactorily completed at least 27 credits at California, and be
in good academic standing.
2. The student must obtain advance approval from California University to complete
specified studies at a sister university under this program. Each university specifies
the approval procedure for its own students' participation and for students from SSHE
universities.
3. The student must present evidence of approval from California University and evidence
of visiting university acceptance at time of registration at the sister university.
4. · A student may complete up to 18 credits in a single semester and up to 16 credits of
summer work as a visiting student.
5. All credits and grades accrued at the sister university will be accepted in full by
California University, and thereafter treated as California University credits and grades.
6. The student registers at, and pays tuition and fees to, the State System university
visited. A student wishing to divide a courseload between two institutions during the
same term registers and pays appropriate tuition and fees at both universities.
OUTCOMES ASSESSMENT
California University is in the process of implementing a broad program of outcomes
assessment. This program will utilize information about incoming students as baseline data,
follow the development of those students throughout their academic career and track them
as alumni after graduation-in order to ensure and improve the quality of academic life and
GENERAL INFORMATION
35
of the graduates of this university. Certain components of this are already in place,
including sophomore and senior testing in the Department of Psychology, Admission to
Teacher Education, and the use of the NTE for teacher certification.
PLACEMENT AND CAREER SERVICES
The primary purpose of Placement and Career Services (PCS) is to assist students in
developing, evaluating, and effectively implementing appropriate career plans.
Undergraduates, seniors, graduate students, and alumni may obtain general advice and
information on career and job search strategies.
On-campus interviews and informational sessions are scheduled for students interested
in meeting with representatives from business firms, government agencies, industries, and
school districts seeking candidates for employment. The "career center" houses career
planning and company literature as well as information on current job opportunities.
Students are encouraged to visit the PCS office in the Morgan Learning Research Center
to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Schedule a session with the computeriz.ed guidance system .
Use the career center, including videos, audiotapes, and computeriz.ed software
resources.
See a staff member about any career issues, including questions about graduate and
professional school.
Attend career workshops, job fairs, and special programs .
Learn about alumni who will discuss their jobs .
Investigate cooperative education job opportunities .
Set up a credentials file .
Make an appointment for a "mock" interview .
See listings of full-time, part-time, and seasonal jobs .
Pick up guides to resum6 writing and interviewing, and other handouts .
Get the most up-to-date information on company recruiting visits .
Sign up for campus interviews and information sessions .
Learn what other services are available .
VETERANS AFFAIRS
The Office of Veterans Affairs, located in the Health Center (Ext. 4076/4077), is open
from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Evening hours may be arranged by
appointment. The director is Mr. Arthur Bakewell.
All matters pertaining to veterans and those entitled to veterans' benefits are handled in
this office. VA forms and enrollment certifications for all eligible students applying for
benefits are processed here.
All Veterans, Reservists, National Guard personnel, and eligible dependents applying for
entrance to the University should contact the Veterans Affairs Office at an early date so that
36
GENERAL INFORMATION
necessary VA paperwork can be processed to assure timely payments of educational benefits.
Veterans are also advised to take advantage of the University's program to award college
credits for military service schools. See page 80, on Admissions, in this catalog.
The on-campus Veterans Club also has its office in the Health Center. The club
sponsors the Colonel Arthur L. Bakewell Veterans Scholarship Fund. Two $1000
scholarships are currently awarded. See page 92 below for more information.
INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS
The University sponsors a comprehensive athletic program for both men and women.
The athletic program is regulated by the policies of the Athletic Council and administered
by the Director of Athletics, Dr. Tom Pucci. It is governed by the Office of Student
Development with the Dean of Students as the senior administrative officer.
Fourteen varsity sports are available to students: for men, baseball (coached by Chuck
Gismondi), basketball (Jim Boone), cross-country, football (Jeff Petrucci), soccer (Dennis
Laskey), track and field (Jack Henck), and wrestling (RobinErsland); for women, basketball
(Paul Flores), cross-country, softball (Linda Kalafatis), tennis (Richard Saccani), track and
field (Jack Henck), volleyball (Jing Pu) and soccer (Dennis Laskey). There are numerous
assistant coaches and graduate assistants. The training staff includes the members of the
Department of Sports Medicine. Academic progress of varsity athletes is carefully
monitored.
Students who desire to participate in intercollegiate athletics must meet the academic
standards of California University, PSAC, ECAC, and NCAA. Specific requirements may
be obtained from California University's Athletic Director, the Chairperson of the Athletic
Council, or the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
The University has outstanding facilities for athletics. Adamson Football Stadium, a
modem facility located at the George H. Roadman University Park, has spacious locker
rooms and a training room. The stadium has a seating capacity of 4,500 and an excellent
all-weather track.
Also located at the University Park are seven tennis courts, a baseball diamond, a
softball field, soccer fields, cross country course and several practice areas for varsity sports
and intramural activities.
Hamer Hall, located on the main campus, has three basketball courts, an Olympic-size
swimming pool, a training room, a weight room, and a wrestling workout room. The
building has a seating capacity of 3,600 for basketball games, and the natatorium can
accommodate more than 250 spectators.
Herron Hall, also located on the main campus, houses a full-service Recreation and
Fitness Center including racquet ball courts, several exercise rooms, weight rooms, saunas,
steam rooms, a whirlpool, and a swimming pool for students and staff at the University.
The Student Activities fee permits students to make use of all these facilities when their
use has not otherwise been scheduled.
GENERAL INFORMATION
37
WOMEN'S CENTER
The Women's Center in Clyde Hall is a service provided primarily for the female
students of the University. However, the male students as well as community residents are
welcome to participate in the activities of the center.
The main goals of the Women's Center are to supplement the academic education of the
students and prepare them to deal with barriers in life.
The activities are designed to help students grow and develop an understanding of how
women can impact the future. Options are highlighted that are available to women through
special programs and individual counseling. Additionally, programs are provided to help
students find creative ways to solve problems and manage the ever changing roles of
women.
The Center recognizes the needs of women and serves as a conduit to see that the needs
are addressed. The services provided are advocacy counseling information, interest
assessment, special events, and activities, support groups, workshops, special events and
activities.
Opportunities are available for students to serve on the Advisory Board of Directors,
serve on special events committees, share ideas for programs and participate in the
Mentoring Program.
CAMPUS MINISTRY
Spiritual development is an integral part of the process of education and of human
growth. A Campus Ministry Office, with a staff of professional campus ministers, fosters
the development of spiritual and religious student life.
The Campus Ministry of California University of Pennsylvania is at present temporarily
housed in the Herron Fitness Center, Room 313. Office hours are from 10:00 A.M. until
4:00 P.M. on weekdays while the University is in session. Campus ministers are on call
twenty-four hours a day. Some of the services provided are worship, pastoral counseling,
spiritual direction, information about local churches, and literature from participating faiths.
The Campus Ministry sponsors or co-sponsors a variety of religious or service programs.
Students and their families, faculty and staff of the university are welcome to come to
the Campus Ministry Office at all times. They may also call the Campus Ministry at 9384573. Campus Ministry cooperates with Student Development and Services and with other
university departments for the well-being of the students.
The Catholic chaplains are funded by the Catholic Diocese of Pittsburgh. The Protestant
chaplain is funded by the United Campus Ministry Council of California, who also place
members of the Coalition for Christian Outreach. Although the chaplains are members of
particular denominations, they serve all students, regardless of church affiliation. The
chaplains will put students in touch with a priest, minister or rabbi of their chosen
denominations.
GENERAL INFORMATION
38
OFFICE OF DEVELOPMENT AND EXTERNAL RELATIONS
The Office of Development and External Relations assists with fund-raising, maintains
relations with the alumni of the University, informs the public about the activities of the
University, and develops programs and activities that promote understanding for and support
of the University's goals.
Through this office, the University provides information and services to alumni,
governing boards, political groups, parents of students, employees, other colleges and
universities, the business community and donors. It informs the public of the activities of
students, alumni, professors, administrators, student organiz.ations and athletic teams.
Both staff and volunteers working in this department assist in the three principal fundraising activities: an annual campaign of fund-raising, deferred or planned giving, and
capital campaigning.
ALUMNI ASSOCIATION
The alumni of California University of Pennsylvania have been organized since 1939.
This organization numbers more than 30,000 graduates and former students of the
University.
The Association advances the growth and development of the University through
individual and group endeavor, fosters beneficial relationships among alumni, students, and
the University, and encourages outstanding academic and extracurricular achievement by
undergraduate and graduate students.
There are a number of services available to alumni, including a quarterly publication,
The California Review: use of the library and other University facilities; help from the
Placement Office in locating a job; scholarships for students; and many social events,
including Homecoming, Alumni Day and the many area chapter meetings of California
alumni.
The Office of Alumni Relations, located in Dixon Hall, is the center of alumni activity
on campus. The office maintains the alumni records, assists in conducting the affairs of the
Association, and serves as the communications center and clearing house for all alumni
activities. Alumni are always welcome.
CONFIDENTIALITY OF RECORDS
The University's policies on the confidentiality and disclosure of student records are
based on the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (Public Law 93-380), as
amended.
/1 !11VN01
8f~~ -h_ft--tima-
GENE. J iINFORMATION
JltS-r 5AY
f/Yf<_OLLfd
I. Introduction
~
pub-liml 9
5-tw-,5 ~
Official student records are established and maintained in a number of administrative offices
for a variety of legitimate educational purposes. In assuming responsibility for the
reasonable protection of these student records, the University recognizes its obligation to
comply with the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974. Important sections of
this federal law are summarized below.
II. OwMrship of Records
All records kept concerning students, including those records originating at other colleges
or universities and required for admission, as the property of California University of
Pennsylvania.
III. Definition of a Student
A student is defined as any person currently or previously matriculated on an official basis
in any academic program of the University.
IV. Public Infonnation Regarding Students
1. The following is classified as public and may be released without the prior consent of
a student: a student's name, address (both local and permanent), telephone number, place
and date of birth, academic curriculum, dates of attendance, date of graduation, degrees and
awards received, most recent educational institution attended, participation in student
activities (including athletics), and height and weight (for athletic teams).
2. Students may request that any or all of this information not be made public. Such
requests must be submitted in writing to the Office of Academic Records or (in the case of
graduate students) to the Dean of the School of Graduate Studies before the beginning of any
academic term.
V. Duclosure of Student Records
1. Upon proper identification, students my inspect their own official records in the presence
of the administrator in charge of records.
2. After a request to inspect a record has been received, the request must be honored within
a reasonable period of time: according to federal law, not to exceed 45 days.
3. Limitations on the Right of Access by Students
The following materials are not subject to inspection by students:
a) Confidential letters and statements of recommendation which were placed in the
educational records before January 1, 1975.
b) Financial records of the parents of the student, or any information contained therein.
c) Medical, psychiatric or similar records that are used solely in connection with
treatment. Such records can be reviewed by a physician or other appropriate
professional of the student's choice.
4. Disclosure of Infonnation to Third Parties
In most circumstances students have the right to withhold their records from external third
parties requesting to inspect these records. Exceptions to this general principle are as
follows:
a) Disclosure of student information will be made to a third party if written consent is
given by the student in question.
b) Information concerning a student will be released if properly subpoenaed pursuant to
a judicial proceeding.
GENERAL INFORMATION
40
c) All necessary academic and/or financial records of students may be disclosed to the
appropriate persons or agencies without a student's prior consent in connection with a
student's application for, or receipt of, financial aid.
d) Further limited disclosure of certain kinds of information may be required in special
circumstances in compliance with the federal law previously cited.
VI. Student Challenge to Record Entries
1. Students have the right to submit written or typed rebuttals to negative information
contained in their files. A rebuttal statement shall become part of the file, and in cases
where the negative information is reviewed by or transmitted to a third party, it must be
accompanied by the student's statement of rebuttal.
2. Students may challenge the accuracy and/or appropriateness of material combined in their
files. Once such a challenge has been made in writing, it will be the responsibility of the
University official in charge of the file to determine the validity of the challenge, if possible.
The University official shall make a written response to the challenge of the student,
specifying the action taken. Should a factual error be found in any materials, the University
official is authorix.ed to make the appropriate corrections.
3. If options 1 and 2 of this section are unsatisfactory, students may request a formal
hearing to challenge inaccurate, misleading, or inappropriate information in their records.
The University Record Hearing Committee shall conduct a hearing in accordance with the
procedures outlined in Public Law 93-380, as amended.
4. The substantive judgment of a faculty member or administrator about a student's work,
as expressed in grades and/or written evaluations, is not within the purview of this policy
statement. Such challenges by students may be made through the regular administrative
channels already in existence for such purposes.
VII. Responsibility of University Officials
1. University officials in charge of student files are responsible for the reasonable care and
protection of such files in accordance with University policy. This includes the
responsibility for the release of confidential information only to authorix.ed persons.
2. A log sheet, indicating the inspection or release of a student's file, must be kept in the
student's file.
3. University officials may classify student materials and records under their supervision
as active or inactive as circumstances warrant. At the discretion of the University official
in charge, inactive records may remain in the file but need not be circulated. these inactive
records may be reviewed by a student upon request.
4. A University official may take the initiative in an attempt to purge unfavorable
evaluations, or opinion records of a prejudicial nature, in a student's file. This may be done
by returning the material to the person who submitted it or by requesting from the author
that the material be destroyed.
Vlll. University Officials Respomible for Student Records
The following University officials are responsible for student records within their respective
administrative areas:
1. The Vice-President for Academic Affairs
2. The Vice-President for Student Development and Services
3. The Vice-President for Administration and Finance
GENERAL INFORMATION
41
These officers are responsible for the proper maintenance of all official student records
under their jurisdiction in accordance with the policies of this statement and the relevant
state and federal laws.
If further information is required, a student should contact the appropriate University
official with respect to the type of student records in question.
UNIVERSITY PUBLIC SAFETY/SECURITY SERVICES
The Department of Public Safety at California University of Pennsylvania is a fully
recogniz.ed law enforcement agency as authoriz.ed by 71 P.S. §646, the Administrative Code
of 1929 as amended and Title 18 of the Pennsylvania Consolidated Statutes, (Crime and
Offenses) and 24 P.S. § 20-1006-A(14) 20-2010A (5) of the State System of Higher
Education Act.
The department consists of professionally trained individuals capable of responding to
requests for assistance in routine and emergency situations. The department, a diverse
group of police officers, communications, and secretarial staff, provides continuous 24 hour
assistance to the University community. The staff includes a director, assistant night
operations supervisor, two shift supervisors and ten additional commissioned police officers
who have received training at the Pennsylvania State Police Academy. Three public safety
communications officers and one departmental secretary contribute to the operation of the
department.
Public safety personnel are certified in the use of emergency medical airborne evacuation
policy and procedure for transportation of the seriously ill or critically injured. Additional
services offered to University students, faculty, and staff consist of parking and traffic
management, criminal investigations, health, fire, and safety surveys, special event planning,
accident investigation, and crime prevention information and presentations.
Pursuant to the Pennsylvania College and University Security Act, and the Federal Crime
Awareness and Campus Security Act of 1990, post-secondary institutions, including colleges
and universities, must provide information with respect to campus crime statistics and
security policies of the institution and prepare, publish and distribute to all applicants,
students and employees, annually, information with respect to these areas.
The information is compiled by California University, and made available through the
Office of Admissions, the Office of Student Development, and the Office of Public Safety.
42
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
-Courses and Grading Procedures
-Graduation Requirements
-Earning a Second Degree
-Transcripts
-Academic Requirements
-Withdrawals
-Rea~ion
43
44
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
Students are responsible for securing current information about university policies
and for meeting all relevant requirements as listed in this catalog.
The university reserves the right to change policies, cu"iculum requirements, and
other provisions as needed and at any time.
Students are required to follow the provisions of the catalog that is in effect at the
time of their initial enrollment. Students who have interrupted their education for
more than one year are subject to the provisions of the current catalog.
Faculty advisors are available to assist students in planning an academic program,
but students have the responsibility for meeting all requirements for their degrees.
Students are urged to take advantage of the advisory and consultation services
available at the university.
Students should feel free to consult with professors, academic advisors, department
chairpersons, the deans, and the vice-president for academic affairs. All of these
university representatives maintain regular office hours for student consultations.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
45
COURSES, ACADEMIC STANDING,
GRADING SYSTEM,
WITHDRAWALS FROM COURSES, ETC.
Course Numbering System
Courses numbered 100 to 499 are undergraduate courses. Courses numbered 500 and
above are graduate level courses, but in certain circumstances, with the approval of the
professor and in the senior year, students may be allowed to take some courses numbered
in the 500's, for undergraduate credit.
Courses are numbered in the following way:
100-199
Freshman level
Sophomore level
200-299
Junior level
300-399
400-499
Senior level
Generally, courses whose numbers end in 9 (such as 209 and 459) consist of
independent study or individual tutoring. They require the consent of the professor and of
the department, the dean, and the academic vice-president. Courses whose numbers have
8 or 9 in the middle (such as 481 and 491) are seminars or workshops. Some courses are
sometimes offered as both undergraduate and graduate courses. Such "dual-listed" courses
require additional work on the part of the graduate students but may be taken only for
undergraduate credit by undergraduate students.
Credits
Credit for course work is recorded in credit hours. For most courses, one credit hour
represents one class period a week for about fifteen weeks. For laboratory classes, the ratio
may differ somewhat from one department to another, but usually two or three hours of
laboratory work are worth one academic credit.
A full-time student is one who is taking twelve or more credit hours. Therefore, a
student taking fewer than twelve credits is considered a part-time student.
In order to progress normally from one class to the next, a student should take an
average of 32 semester hours a year, or 16 credits a semester.
Attendance
Regular class attendance is a prerequisite to successful class performance. University
policy permits class absence for cause but places an obligation for successful completion of
course work on the student. There is no single, university-wide policy on class attendance
or on cuts; but professors may establish their particular policies on absences, assess
reasonable penalties if students do not observe these policies, and treat unexplained absences
as unexcused absences. The student must, in all cases, arrange to make up examinations
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
46
or other work missed because of absence, according to terms and a schedule agreeable
to the prof~rs.
It is the student's responsibility to inform professors of the cause of any absence - if
possible, in advance. Students should notify their college Dean of lengthy absences due to
illness or other causes; and appropriate documentation may be required in such cases. The
Dean will in turn notify the professors concerned. Requests for absence due to official
university activities, such as field trips or athletic contests, must be made by the appropriate
university official.
The Health Center does not
medical excuses. Under certain circumstances (see
pages 66-67 of this catalog) the Health Center will notify professors about students' absences
(or other failure to fulfill academic obligations) due to medical conditions; on the basis of
this notification, individual professors in turn will determine whether or not to excuse the
absences.
The temporary grade of Incomplete is not automatically awarded even if excused or
explained absences have prevented completion of required work by the end of the semester.
mue
Residence Requirements
Students in all curricula must complete a minimum of thirty credits of the last sixty
credits at California University to qualify for a degree. These credits may be taken in
regular day or evening classes.
Overload
Students may register for 18 credits. Students who are doing student teaching in the
College of Eduction and Human Services, however, may take additional courses only with
the special approval of the dean of that college. Students wishing to register for 19 credits
must obtain written permission from the dean of that College of the university in which they
are enrolled. Students wishing to take 20 or more credits must receive written permission
also from the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. However, only in exceptional
circumstances is permission to register for 20 or more credits granted. A fee is charged for
all credits in excess of 18.
In the summer, for more than six credits for either of the five-week sessions or for
more than 12 credits throughout the summer term, written permission must be obtained from
the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. Because of the brevity of the summer session,
registration for overload is discouraged.
Grade Point Average
To calculate a grade point average (GPA) divide the total number of grade points earned
in regular courses at this university by the total number of credit hours attempted. For
example, if a student has attempted a total of 60 credits, with 12 credits worth of A ( = 48
grade points), 24 of B ( = 72), 15 of C ( = 30), 6 of D ( =:= 6), and 3 of F ( = 0), that
student would have a total of 156 grade points, or a GPA of 2.60.
You do not take into account, in computing your GPA, the following: courses
transferred from other institutions, advanced placement courses, courses passed by
examination, courses in which a P grade was assigned, CLEP credits, or credits granted for
military service. If you repeat a course, only the repeat grade is counted. If you fail a
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
47
course which is taken under the Pass/Fail option, a failing grade is, however, counted in the
GPA; but no record of a failing grade is kept if you challenge a course by examination and
fail that examination. Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099,
and EDE 100 - do not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to
determine grade point average. (See page 78 of this catalog.)
Good Academic Standing
In order to remain in good academic standing, you must maintain a certain grade point
average, depending on the class that you are in, as follows:
Freshman
1.75
Sophomore
1. 85
Junior
1.95
Senior
2.00
Academic standing is based upon credits earned, not credits attempted. Although
developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100 - do not count
towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine good academic
standing. (See page 78 of this catalog.)
A student who does not achieve the proper GPA may be subject to either Academic
Probation or Academic Dismissal, as presented below.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
48
GRADING SYSTEM
Grade
Grade Points
Per Credit
Hour
Interpretation
A
Superior attainment
4
B
Above average
3
C
Average
2
D
Below average; lowest passing grade
1
F
Failure
0
AU
~
-
Not
calculated
I
Incomplete
Not
calculated
IF
An Incomplete for which the work was not
completed within a calendar year; computed in
the Grade Point Average and not removable from
a student's academic record
Not
calculated
p
Passed
Not
calculated
w
Official withdrawal from the university within the
first six weeks of a semester (not counted in the
GPA)
Not
calculated
-
WP
Withdrew passing after the first six weeks (not
counted in the GPA)
WF
Withdrew after six weeks with a grade of D or F
(counted in the GPA)
wx
Administrative withdrawal from the university
(not counted in the GPA)
Not
calculated
uw
Unofficial withdrawal from a course which the
student never attended or for which there is a
verified registration error (not counted in the
GPA)
Not
calculated
Not
calculated
0
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
49
CLASS ST ANDING
The following credit hour ranges apply:
Freshmen
1-31 credits earned
Sophomores
32-63 credits earned
Juniors
64-95 credits earned
Seniors
96 or more credits earned
These class designations are based on credits passed, not on credits attempted.
Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099 , and EDE 100- do
not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine class
standing. (See page 78 of this catalog.)
Transfer credits may be counted only after an evaluation of official transcripts has been
made by the appropriate dean.
Incomplete Grades
1.
The Incomplete is used when a professor is convinced the student can complete work
or make up work which has been missed or is incomplete because of reasons acceptable
to the professor. However, in all cases, the professor has the option of submitting a
final grade based on work completed. The professor may refuse to accept late work.
However, when appropriate explanation and documentation of an illness are given,
professors will not penalize students if makeups are possible or if grading on work
completed is reasonable. (See the sections on Class Attendance, page 45, and on the
Health Services, page 67, in this catalog.)
2. An Incomplete (I) should be removed by special arrangement between the student and
the professor within one calendar year after the receipt of the incomplete grade. (The
student is not required to register for the course again.)
3. After the work has been completed, the professor will submit a Change of Grade form
to the Academic Records Office.
4. After a lapse of one calendar year, the incomplete grade is converted to I-F. The I-F
grade will be considered in the computation of the student's grade point average as an
F grade. This I-F can be removed only when the course is repeated.
5. For a student who withdraws from the university immediately after incurring an I grade,
if the Incomplete is not made up before one calendar year has passed, the Incomplete
grade automatically becomes an I-F grade. Students who return to the university before
a year has elapsed have nevertheless only one full year since the I was received to
complete the work of the course.
6. If a student's name appears on a professor's grade roster in a course but that student
never attended the class, no grade is assigned by the professor. In such cases, the grade
of UW (unauthorized withdrawal) is assigned by the Dean for Enrollment Management
and Academic Services.
7. Graduating seniors must resolve their Incomplete grades by the last day of classes of
the term in which they intend to graduate. Otherwise, these Incompletes immediately
become I-F's, and graduation may be correspondingly affected.
I CJ y z rnd- f:Ju,yyU- -t-tLtGA
,I'
~
t?
I
.d )/J
/ .-vi ,
"--~ "' , v
A
-
t&
AC~ EM
~
P/F
~
PROCEDURES
.
'
In any course in
·ch the grading is either P or F and the professor records a grade
of A, B, or C, the grade is recorded as P. If the grade is recorded as Dor F, the grade
becomes an F. Grades of P are counted in the cumulative total of credits, but not in the
student's grade point average. Grades of Fin such courses carry no positive credit and are
figured into the grade point average.
Repeating a Course
You may repeat a course previously taken at this university. If you repeat a course,
only the later grade (excluding grades of will be counted in your grade point average,
although the original grade will remain on your transcript.
n
Withdrawal from Courses
If you withdraw from a course before the end of the sixth week of a semester, no
academic penalty is assessed.
If you withdraw from a course after the end of the sixth week, however, your professor
will report the grade you were earning when you withdrew, and it will become a permanent
part of your academic record, as follows. If you were earning a grade of A, B, or C, a
grade of WP will be recorded, and it will not affect your grade point average. If you were
earning a D or F, a grade of WF will be recorded, and the credits will be used to compute
your grade point average. WP and WF grades are also used if you withdraw from the
university within a semester.
You must officially withdraw from a course, using forms available at the Office of
Academic Records. Ceasing to attend class does not constitute official withdrawal.
Add/Drop
Class schedules may be changed during the add/drop period using the schedule
adjustment forms. All schedule changes are governed by the following regulations in the
Office of Academic Records.
1. All schedule changes must be approved by the student's advisor and College dean, as
necessary.
2. Courses may be added: during the first two days of a semester; during the first day of
a summer term; or, for any class (such as an evening class) which has not yet met for
the first time, during the first week of classes.
3. Students may drop courses without academic penalty (i.e., no grade assigned): during
the first six weeks of a semester; before the end of the second week of a five-week
summer term; or before the end of the fourth week of a ten-week summer term.
4. After the deadline for dropping a course without academic penalty, students who drop
a course or courses officially will receive WP or WF grades. Each professor will
assign the appropriate grade and the College Dean will translate A, B, and C grades to
WP, and D and F grades to WF.
5. No student is permitted to drop a course: during the last three weeks of a semester;
during the last two weeks of a five-week summer term; or during the last three weeks
of a ten-week summer term.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
6.
51
Leaving a course without officially dropping it in the Office of Academic Records may
result in the assignment of an F grade by the professor. If the professor does not assign
a grade, the designation of UW (unauthoriz.ed withdrawal) will be assigned by the Dean
for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
Grade Reports
Within two weeks of the end of each semester or the summer sessions, a full grade
report will be mailed to you at what you have recorded with the university as your
permanent home address. For this reason, you should be certain the Dean for Enrollment
Management and Academic Services has your correct permanent address.
In compliance with the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, such grade
sent to you and not to your parents or guardian.
reports
A grade report will not be sent if your academic records have been sealed for failure
to pay your university fees in full.
are
APPEALING A GRADE OR OTHER ACADEMIC DECISION
In appealing a grade, a student should first contact the professor who issued that grade
to discuss the reason for the grade. If the student is not satisfied with the professor's
explanation, the student should then contact the professor's department chairperson. This
latter contact must be in writing and must be filed with the chairperson within thirty
university calendar days after the beginning of the subsequent fall or spring semester
following the term in which the grade in question was given. f accord is not reached at the
chairperson level, the student may then appeal to the College dean. The final source of
appeal is the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. this final step should be taken only if
there is no possibility for a resolution at an earlier stage, and only if the student is convinced
that arbitrary and/or capricious standards were applied.
In the case of other academic decisions, the student should follow the same appeal
procedure insofar as possible. In matters relating to student conduct and discipline, the
Vice-president for Student Development has authority to review appeals: see the section on
University Conduct and Regulations, pages 70-71, in this catalog. In matters relating to
financial aid, see the section on Financial Aid; in matters relating to teacher certification,
see page 114 of this catalog.
It must be understood that it is not the policy of the administration to change a grade
duly assigned by a professor. It is the policy of the administration and the faculty to provide
students with an opportunity to voice their concerns on all matters, including grades.
COLLEGE LEVEL EQUIVALENCY PROGRAM (CLEP)
The university offers the opportunity to earn undergraduate credit through the College
Level Equivalency Program (CLEP), which has two testing categories, the General
Examination and the Subject Examination.
52
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
The General Examination is a series of tests in five separate areas: English
Composition, Natural Sciences, Mathematics, Humanities, and Social Sciences/History. A
student may earn up to thirty credits by passing the appropriate tests in this area.
The Subject Examination comprehensively tests a single subject, such as General
Psychology, Statistics, etc. A student who passes one of these examinations is awarded
credit for a comparable course at the university.
The CLEP program is administered by the Office of Career Planning and Placement
Services in the Leaming Research Center. There is a fee of $25.00 for evaluation of the
CLEP results and recording the results on the student's transcripts.
(The university no longer grants credits for Life Experience.)
CREDITS BY EXAMINATION
You may earn credit for certain courses by passing examinations in them. In order to
do so, you must first obtain permission from the chairperson of the department that offers
the course, and the Vice-president for Academic Affairs; you must register for the course
and pay a fee separate from other tuition and registration fees . Only the grades of P (Pass)
or F (Fail) will be recorded, and they will be further identified by the symbol CE.
DEGREES: WHEN CONFERRED
Degrees are conferred in May (at the end of the spring semester), in August (at the end
of the summer session), and in December (at the end of the fall semester); but
Commencement is now held only once a year, in May. Students who graduate in August
or December may participate in the Commencement exercises of the following May, but
their diplomas and official university transcripts record their date of graduation as of the
month and year in which their degree was conferred. Certain programs that require study
at participating off-campus institutions may not conclude their academic year until after the
May Commencement. Students in these programs graduate in August and therefore do not
participate in Commencement until the following May.
A graduate of California University of Pennsylvania is a member of the class of that
calendar year in which the degree was conferred. That is, if one graduated in May, August,
or December of 1991, one is a member of the class of 1991. It is immaterial what year one
may have attended Commencement.
UNDERGRADUATE CREDIT FOR GRADUATE COURSE
Undergraduate students who have completed their course work in their major and
related fields may enroll in graduate courses for undergraduate credit if they meet the
necessary requirements for those courses.
Individual departments determine the
prerequisites for each course. Graduate status may be a prerequisite for admission to some
courses.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
53
GRADUATE CREDIT LOAD FOR SENIORS
Undergraduates who are in their last term on campus and who are completing or have
completed all the requirements for their undergraduate degree may enroll in graduate classes
for graduate credit. They must fulfill all requirements for entrance into Graduate School
(other than the undergraduate degree or teaching certification). Graduate credits that are
used to fulfill undergraduate requirements may not also be used to fulfill requirements in a
Master's program.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
Graduation requirements are the prerogative of the deans and their faculty. All
requirements are subject to change as necessary and at any time.
Students should become acquainted with the graduation requirements for their programs.
Students are responsible for meeting all graduation requirements and for submitting the
required forms on time.
Compliance with the following general policies and procedures will help students
prepare for graduation:
1. The period during which application for graduation must be made is posted throughout
campus and printed in the Schedule of Classes and in the California Times. Students
must apply for graduation in the appropriate dean's office by the deadline. Graduation
will be delayed if this requirement is not met.
2. A minimum of 128 semester credits, including the satisfactory completion of all
required courses, is necessary for graduation. Developmental courses - ENG 100
(English Language Skills), MAT 098 (Basic Mathematics), MAT 099 - (Introductory
Algebra), and EDE 100 (Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills) do not count towards
graduation, though the credits earned in them are used to determine class standing,
grade point average, and eligibility for cocurricular activities.
3. An overall grade point average of 2.5 is required in the Teacher Education cu"icula.
An overall grade point average of 2. 0 is required in most cu"icula. Certain other
curricula may require minimum grades in courses in a student's major.
4. In the College of Education and Human Services, candidates in teacher education
programs must complete Student Teaching.
5. All bills must be paid in full before graduation can be approved.
6. Students in all curricula must complete a minimum of thirty credits of the last sixty
credits at California University of Pennsylvania.
7. All credentials for graduation, including an application for a teaching certificate where
appropriate and transcripts of credits from other institutions, must be submitted on time.
Graduation will be delayed if a student's record is incomplete.
8. Attendance at the.Commencement exercises is appropriate, unless unusual circumstances
warrant graduation in absentia. Permission to graduate in absentia is granted by the
President of the university, or his designee. Candidates for graduation are required to
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
54
contact the President's Office, or his designee's office, and request permission to be
excused from the Commencement ceremony.
Honors at Graduation
Commencement Honors are awarded to a limited number of students in the graduating
class, according to the schedule below. A. minimum of 64 earned credits at California
University in a baccalaureate degree program is required to receive commencement honors.
Credits, grades, and quality points earned as part of a previously completed associate
or first degree are not calculated for commencement honors designation.
Highest Honors (Summa Cum Laude)
3. 75 to 4.0
High Honors (Magna Cum Laude)
3.50 to 3.74
Honors (Cum Laude)
3.25 to 3.49
Semester Honors (Dean's List)
Full-time students are awarded honors (that is, placed on the Dean's List) on the basis
of grade-point average at the end of each semester as follows:
Highest honors
3.75 to 4.0
High honors
3.50 to 3.74
Honors
3.25 to 3.49
These semester honors correspond to the grade-point averages required for graduation
with honors.
REGISTRATION
Specific instructions as to the conduct of each registration are announced to students in
the California Times and in the separately published Schedules of Courses for the Fall,
Spring, and Summer terms.
1. A student must be regularly admitted to the university before permission is granted to
register. A written verification of official admission to the university is required for
registration.
2. An official registration is contingent upon academic eligibility to register. (See:
Probation; Dismissal.) If a registration has been completed in violation of this rule, it
will be revoked.
3. Each student is required to register in person according to the registration schedule
announced by the university.
4. Each student must comply with all registration procedures and complete the registration
within the deadlines set by the university.
5. A registration is not complete until:
a. All required registration materials have been properly completed and turned in on
time.
b. All university fees have been paid in full . Students who have preregistered but
have had their schedules canceled for non-payment of fees may have their schedules
reinstated before classes begin without payment of any further fee for late
registration. Such reinstatement is contingent upon the payment of all fees.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
6.
55
However, if such students do not take advantage of this special period of
reinstatement, they must register afresh, without guaranteed placement in the
courses they originally chose, and are assessed a fee of $15.00 for late registration.
Failure to register in the official manner may cause the registration to be canceled or
the student billed for incorrect class registrations.
DUAL MAJORS, SECOND MAJORS AND SECOND DEGREES
California University grants the following degrees: B.A.; B.S.; B.S. in Education; B.S.N;
and A.S. (All except the last are four-year, baccalaureate degrees.) These are referred to
below as degree areas.
A careful distinction must be drawn between the following different objectives and
opportunities and between the means to achieve them: (1) a Dual Major; (2) a Second
Major; and (3) a Second Degree. These opportunities, as explained below, are the only ones
offered: the university will, for example, award only one degree from any degree area.
None of these opportunities should be confused with any certification programs, such as
those in Teacher Education.
1. More than one major:
(a) A Dual Major is the pursuit of two separate baccalaureate majors simultaneously.
These majors may be in a single department or two departments, and each must be
recorded in the appropriate dean's office. Courses from one major area may be used
to satisfy requirements in the other major. Both majors are recorded on the transcript,
but all requirements for each major must be satisfied before the degree is conferred, and
only one degree is conferred.
(b) A Second Major may be pursued only (a) after the completion of a baccalaureate
degree and (b) in the same degree area as a first major. It does not lead to a second
degree. The prospective student must apply through the Office of Admissions, register
the intention of pursuing a Second Major, and fulfill any of the requirements of that
Second Major that have not yet been satisfied.
2.
A Second Degree may be pursued by any student (a) who has previously earned
an associate or baccalaureate degree from any regionally accredited institution
(including California University) or (b) who is currently pursuing a degree at
California University. The second degree must be in a different degree area from
the degree already earned or being pursued.
A student who is not currently in
a degree program at California University must apply for the second degree
program through the Office of Admissions.
Transfer credits from other institutions and prior credits from California University
of Pennsylvania may be used to satisfy requirements for the Second Degree. A
56
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
minimum of 30 credits must be taken in the Second Degree program by transfer
students. A minimum of 158 credits must be accumulated whether the degrees are
earned simultaneously or consecutively. All departmental, college, and university
requirements for the Second Degree must be satisfied. The transcript records the
Second Degree and the date of its completion. (The University will not award an
associate degree to a student who holds a baccalaureate degree in the same area.)
Transcripts are issued by the Office of Academic Records, Room 103 in the
Administration Building. Each transcript costs $2.00, and payment must be received before
the transcript is issued. Checks and money orders should be made payable to California
University of Pennsylvania. All transcripts are issued according to the provisions of the
Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 as amended: see also the section on
Confidentiality of Records on pages 38-41 of this catalog.
A request for a transcript must be made in writing, to ensure that academic information
is not improperly disclosed. Telephone requests for transcripts cannot be honored. The
request may be made by completing a form in the Office of Academic Records or by writing
a letter to that office indicating (a) the number of transcripts required, (b) the type of
transcripts required (i.e., undergraduate, graduate, or both), and (c) the name and address
of the person or institution that the transcript should be sent to. (Transcripts are issued to
a third party on condition that the recipient will not permit any other party to have access
to them without the written consent of the student.)
If a transcript is issued to a student, a notation to that effect appears on the transcript.
Transcripts marked in this manner are sometimes not considered "official" when presented
to a third party by the student.
Transcripts are issued as quickly as possible, but in busy periods of the academic year
there is necessarily some delay. Requests should therefore be made well before the
transcript is due elsewhere.
No transcript will be issued to a student whose financial obligations to the university
have not been met in full.
TRANSFER CREDITS
If you are a transfer student who has previously attended another college or university
and you are now applying for admission to California University of Pennsylvania, you may
receive credit for that work as explained in the section of this catalog dealing with
Application and Admissions.
If you are already a student here and wish to take a course at some other college or
university, you should get approval to do so from your advisor and from the dean of your
college at California University before you register for and take that course.
To transfer credits to California University:
1. Take courses that can be used to satisfy university or major requirements.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
57
Be sure to compare college catalog descriptions. Transfer credits are usually
determined by their equivalency to California University courses.
Only courses in which a grade of C or better is earned will transfer.
Remember, credits transfer, but grades do not. Transfer credits cannot raise a quality
point average; therefore, do not take repeat courses at another institution.
Courses taken at a community college, the equivalents of which are designated as
upper-level courses at California, do not transfer.
To be certain of transferability, complete the appropriate transfer form, which may be
obtained from the office of your dean.
/
f-n✓
'1,,,,,, ,,J,
~{/--IU~t'-u/.
A freshman carrying fewer th
ve er its is su ,fectTo
o ast1c action at the end
of the term in which the total num
credits attempted reaches or exceeds twelve.
Probationary action applies to upperclass students (excluding freshmen with fewer than
twelve credits) regardless of the number of credits scheduled in the term. This rule also
applies to part-time students.
A student who fails to meet the minimum cumulative grade point average for the
appropriate class category is placed on academic probation. See page 47 above, Good
Academic Standing.
Transfer credits that have been officially accepted are counted in determining the
student's proper class category.
At the end of a probationary semester that classification will be removed if the student
achieves the required minimum cumulative grade point average for the appropriate class
category.
A student may be extended on continued probation beyond a single semester with a
cumulative grade point average below the required minimum, provided that the grade point
average for the probationary semester is at least 2.00. Before registering for a new term,
students on extended probation must have their schedules approved by the dean of the
College of the university in which they are enrolled.
CHEATING AND PLAGIARISM
Truth and honesty are the subjects and the necessary prerequisites for all education.
Consequently, students who attempt to improve their grades or class standing by cheating
on examinations or plagiarism on papers may be penalized by disciplinary action ranging
from a verbal reprimand to a failing grade in the course. If the situation appears to merit
a more severe penalty, the professor may refer the matter to the appropriate dean or to the
Vice-president for Academic Affairs, with a request for more formal disciplinary action by
the university's Discipline Committee, which may result in suspension or expulsion from the
university.
58
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
DISMISSAL FOR ACADEMIC REASONS
The university reserves the right to refuse the privilege of further attendance to students
who have failed to meet the minimum scholarship requirements. See the sections above on
Good Academic Standing, page 47, and Probation, page 57, of this catalog.
If a student's cumulative grade point average remains below the required minimum after
a probationary term, and the term grade point average is below 2.00, that student will be
dismissed for at least one semester.
To apply for readmission after academic dismissal, see Readmission, below, page 60.
WITHDRAW AL FROM THE UNIVERSITY
A student who decides to withdraw from the university during any academic term,
regardless of the reason, is required to report to the Office of Academic Records and obtain
withdrawal forms. After the completion of a withdrawal interview the student must obtain
a clearance form from several offices of the university, including the Business Office. Upon
receipt of the clearance form and review of the student's records and status, the Dean for
Enrollment Management and Academic Services will certify as to the type of withdrawal.
If a withdrawal cannot be arranged in this way, the student must notify the Office of
Academic Records by telephone or by letter immediately. All withdrawals are governed by
the following regulations:
1. An honorable dismissal is granted to a student who withdraws from the university in the
official manner, bas met all financial obligations to the university, and bas been
properly cleared by the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
2. If the student withdraws officially, a W grade is recorded for each course scheduled.
AW grade carries no academic penalty and is not counted in the student's grade point
average. For an official withdrawal from a five-week session, W grades will be
recorded during the first two weeks only.
3. After the sixth week of the semester, a student who makes an official withdrawal
receives WP or WF grades in all courses scheduled. Professors assign A, B, C, D, or
F grades, and the Dean assigns WP grades to A, B,and C, and WF to Dor F grades.
For five-week courses the WP-WF grades are assigned after the end of the second
week.
4. No student is permitted to withdraw officially from the university during the last three
weeks of a semester or summer term.
5. Leaving the university without notifying the Office of Academic Records and making
an official withdrawal may result in automatic failure for all courses scheduled. It also
makes the student ineligible for any refund of fees, and may affect academic status
and/or financial aid.
Improper withdrawals of this type will be classified as
"unauthorized withdrawal" and the designation "UW" used for all registered courses
if another grade bas not already been assigned by the professor.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
59
WITIIDRAWALS: ADMINISTRATIVE
Administrative withdrawals of students are initiated by university officials for
compelling reasons given below. All such withdrawals are governed by the following
regulations and procedures.
The university administration has the authority to withdraw a student from the university
and to revoke that student's registration at any time for the following reasons:
1. Registration in violation of university regulations (e.g., academic ineligibility to
register).
2. Failure of the student to comply with academic requirements (e.g., unsatisfactory class
attendance).
3. Failure to pay university fees by the deadline.
4. Disciplinary suspension (or dismissal) for the remainder of an academic term or
indefinitely.
5. Severe psychological or health problems such that the student cannot be
permitted to continue in attendance.
6. Other reasons deemed appropriate by the proper administrative officer.
Except for academic ineligibility, the date of the administrative withdrawal is used to
determine the amount of fees to be assessed or canceled. (In most cases, the regular fee
assessment and refund policies of the university prevail.)
If a student registers in violation of the academic eligibility rule, the registration is
declared invalid and the fees paid by the student are refunded in full. No grades are
recorded.
Policy for recording grades:
For administrative withdrawals during the first six weeks of a semester (or two weeks
in a five-week summer session), the grading symbol WX is recorded for all courses on the
student's schedule. No other grades, including Incompletes, will be assigned.
After six weeks (or after two weeks in a summer session), the date of the administrative
withdrawal and the reason for the withdrawal are considered in assigning grades.
1. For disciplinary suspension or dismissal, only WP or WF grades are recorded.
2. For psychological ~r health reasons, WX or I (Incomplete) grades are assigned.
(Professors must consent to assigning Incompletes; otherwise, WX grades are recorded.)
3. For failure to pay fees, only WX grades are recorded.
4. The WX grade is not computed in the student's grade point average and therefore
carries no academic penalty.
5. The Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services has the authority to
backdate an administrative withdrawal if circumstances warrant such action.
6. Disciplinary suspensions or dismissal during a term is initiated by an appropriate
authority in the Student Development Office and written notification is sent to the Office
of Academic Records. The Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services
then cancels the student's registration, notifies other administrative offices on a "need
to know" basis, and informs the faculty members involved of the action taken.
60
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
READMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
Students who wish to return to the university after an absence of three consecutive terms
must apply for readmission to the office of the dean of the undergraduate college-Education
and Human Services, Liberal Arts, or Science and Technology-in which they were last
enrolled. Students who wish to change their major to a different curriculum in a different
College of the university from that in which they were formerly enrolled must first be
reacimitted to the College in which they were formerly enrolled.
Student who have been dismissed for unsatisfactory academic performance will be
considered for readmission only if they have satisfied the conditions for readmission that
were stipulated at the time of their dismissal. Usually , students are not considered for
readmission for a minimum of one semester.
In the case of suspensions or dismissals for disciplinary reasons , students must (a)
satisfy the conditions for readmission that were stipulated at the time of their dismissal, and
(b) receive permission from the Vice-president of Student Development to return to the
university.
In all cases, applications for readmission should be submitted at least one month before
the registration date for the term in which the student desires to enroll. If a readmission
involves a change of curriculum, the student must apply to the Dean of that college of the
university responsible for the new major.
No former student can be readmitted to the university until all past indebtedness bas
been paid.
61
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
-The Student Association, Inc.
-Student Congress
-Residence Halls
-Fraternities and Sororities
-Intercollegiate Athletics
-Health and Counseling Services
-Services for the Disabled
-Student Conduct
62
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
Inherent in the university's mission is a commitment to the total development of all
students. The Office of Student Development, under the direction of the Vice-President for
Student Development and Services, is administratively responsible for the implementation
of this commitment. The central focus of the Student Development program, therefore, is
the personalii.ation of the university experience, with concern for not only individual
intellectual development but for personal, social, and physical development as well.
Many of the services and opportunities provided by Student Development are described
in other places in this catalog, especially in the section on General Information.
For additional information and regulations governing student life and conduct besides
what is given below, students should refer to the current edition of the Student Handbook.
Student Development provides services to students in the following areas:
Athletics
Minority Affairs
Commuter Center
Recreation
Counseling Center
Residence Hall Programming
Dining Services
Student Association, Inc.
Disabled Services
Student Government
Student/Parent Orientation
Discipline
Drug/Alcohol Program (CHOICES)
Summer Camps
Fitness
Veterans Affairs
Health Center
Wellness/ Awareness
Women's Center
Housing
International Students
The principal administrative personnel responsible for the Student Development Program
are:
Vice President for Student Development and Services
Dean of Students
Dean for Student Services
Dean of Student Life/University Judicial Officer
Associate Dean for Residence Life
Associate Dean for Housing/Conferences
Director, University Dining Services
Assistant Dean for Student Services
Associate Dean for Student Support Services/Social Equity Officer
Director, Center for Student Growth and Development
Director of Counseling Center
Coordinator, International Education
Coordinator, Veterans Affairs
Director, Drug and Alcohol Program (CHOICES)
Director of the Student Association, Inc.
Business Manager of the Student Association, Inc.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
63
Director of Health Services
Director of Athletics
STUDENT ASSOCIATION, INC.
The Student Association, Inc. (SAi) is a non-profit corporation financed in part by the
Student Association fee, which is paid each term by every student. The Executive Director
is a university employee, who directs the affairs of SAi, and serves as the liaison between
SAi and the university.
Programs provided by the Student Association are determined by the Student Congress
and the Student Association Board of Directors. Student Association fees are collected,
budgeted, appropriated, disbursed and accounted for by SAi with the concurrence of the
president of the university.
SAi coordinates the co-curricular activities provided by the university, including
Homecoming, the University Park, concerts, plays, musical production, movies, outdoor
recreation, the Herron Recreation and Fitness Center, dances, picnics, TV Channel 29,
WVCS Radio, and other special events. Intercollegiate athletics are also funded by SAi.
In addition SAi coordinates the activities of student clubs and organiz.ations. The Student
Handbook provides a complete listing of active student clubs and organiz.ations.
Publications coordinated by SAi include a monthly calendar of events, The Student
Handbook, an organiz.ational handbook, The California Times (the student newspaper), and
a number of informative brochures.
SAi is responsible for the development and maintenance of the George H. Roadman
University Park, an 87 acre area located one mile from California on Route 88 South.
Facilities include tennis courts, practice football, baseball, soccer, rugby, and intramural
fields, picnic areas, and Adamson Stadium.
STUDENT CONGRESS
Student Congress is the official student governing body. It represents and serves the
entire student population. It provides for a student forum, establishes channels for the
communication of students' concerns to the proper administrative and faculty personnel,
implements programs and activities that enrich campus-life, and creates opportunities for
students to exercise and to develop leadership skills.
HOUSING
California University of Pennsylvania provides residence hall accommodations for
approximately 1500 students in six separate residence facilities. Women's residence halls
are Clyde and Stanley Halls, Men's residence halls are Johnson, Longanecker and
McCloskey Halls. Men and women are accommodated on separate floors of Binns Hall.
64
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
The university does not supervise or maintain any off-campus housing. Lists of offcampus housing are available, through the Commuter Center, but the housing office does
not approve or disapprove of such housing. Students are urged to take necessary precaution
in seeking off-campus housing.
As a campus or town resident each student is extended courtesies and services extended
to all residents of the Borough of California. Students in tum are expected to adhere to all
ordinances and regulations enacted by the borough, and violations will be treated
accordingly. Questions regarding off-campus housing should be directed to the Assistant
Dean for Student Services, Room 134, Memorial Union building, (412) 938-4021.
Application for Housing
Freshman students are urged to live in the university residence halls provided space is
available. Freshmen and transfers who indicate the need for on-campus housing receive the
appropriate application forms with their acceptance letter. On-campus housing is at a
premium at California University and there are a limited number of spaces available.
Students are encouraged to apply no later than May 1.
Upper-class students should contact the Housing Office, California Memorial Union,
California University of Pennsylvania, California, PA 15419, if they wish on-campus
residence hall accommodations. A limited number of spaces is reserved for returning
residents each fall, and specific instructions for securing a space are distributed in the halls
each March. If students meet required deadline submission dates, housing will be provided.
The university retains the right to assign all students to certain residence halls, floors and
roommates in the best interests of the university.
Housing contracts are for one academic year, September through May. This contract
commits the student to university housing for both the Fall and Spring semesters.
Contracting for a room for an academic year or Spring semester does not guarantee that
housing will be provided in subsequent years.
Room Deposit
An advance room deposit of $100.00 is required with the contract in order to reserve
a room for the following academic year. The deposit is held in the student's account and
applied toward the Spring semester. First-year students who wish to reside in a residence
hall will receive a housing contract with their Admissions Packet provided space is available.
The contract and card must be signed and returned to the Revenue Office, California
University of Pennsylvania, with the $100.00 deposit.
Up~r-class students are also required to pay the $100.00 room deposit. They may
obtain specific instructions on obtaining a housing contract from the Director of Housing,
Student Development Office, Student Union. Schedules and deadlines for housing contracts
are posted for each academic year. Withdrawal from the contract will result in partial or
total forfeiture of the deposit. In addition, the student may be held liable for that semester's
room and board charges.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
65
RESIDENCE LIFE
Each university residence hall is supervised by a staff that is headed by a residence hall
director. California University employs five full-time residence hall directors who live in
the residence halls. These professionals are readily available to students who may request
direction or assistance. The residence hall director, with the assistance of graduate assistants
and undergraduate resident assistants, has charge of the residence facility including
programming activities. A detailed description of the university's Residence Life Program,
residence facilities, and residence hall rules and regulations is included in the Residence Hall
Handbook.
EVENING TUTORING PROGRAM
In cooperation with the Academic Services department, an evening tutoring program is
based in two of the residence halls. This program is available to all students. A detailed
schedule of evening tutoring sites and hours is posted throughout the campus each semester.
The residence hall directors and their staff provide assistance in selection of and scheduling
appropriate tutors.
DINING SERVICES
California University offers a dining services program which allows students to choose
the time, place and service they prefer. All who reside in a university residence hall are
required to accept assignment to the board program. The program entitles students to 14
meals per week at the various dining facilities, as well as a $100 per term Flex Fund
Account. Off-campus and commuter students may enroll for the 14-meal board plan or one
of the other meal plans available for non-resident students. The assignment is for one full
semester and may not be terminated. Flex dollars are included in each plan and are nonrefundable other than upon complete withdrawal from the university during the term.
Specific questions and a detailed brochure may be obtained from the Director of University
Dining Services, Student Union Building, 938-4443.
INTERCOLLEGIATE ATIIl..ETICS
The university sponsors a comprehensive athletic program for both men and women.
The athletic program is regulated by the policies of the Athletic Council and administered
by the Director of Athletics, Dr. Tom Pucci. It is governed by the Office of Student
Development with the Dean of Students as the senior administrative officer.
Fourteen varsity sports are available to students: for men, baseball (coached by Chuck
Gismondi), basketball (Jim Boone), cross-country, football (Jeff Petrucci), soccer (Dennis
Laskey), track and field (Jack Henck), and wrestling (Robin Ersland); for women, basketball
66
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
(Paul Flores), cross-country, softball (Linda Kalafatis), tennis (Richard Saccani), track and
field (Jack Henck), volleyball (Jing Pu) and soccer (Dennis Laskey). There are numerous
assistant coaches and graduate assistants. The training staff includes the members of the
Department of Sports Medicine. Academic progress of varsity athletes is carefully
monitored.
Students who desire to participate in intercollegiate athletics must meet the academic
standards of California University, PSAC, ECAC, and NCAA. Specific requirements may
be obtained from California University's Athletic Director, the Chairperson of the Athletic
Council, or the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
SOCIAL FRATERNITIES AND SORORITIES
Local fraternities and sororities function under the control of their respective councils,
the Interfraternity Council and the Panhellenic Council. These organizations are subject to
university authority and regulations. The following social fraternities and sororities are
represented at California:
FRATERNITIES
Alpha Kappa Lambda
Alpha Phi Alpha
Delta Chi
Delta Sigma Phi
Kappa Alpha Psi
Phi Beta Sigma
Phi Kappa Theta
Phi Mu Delta
Phi Kappa Sigma
Omega Psi Phi
Sigma Tau Gamma
Theta Xi
Acacia
AKr
A4>A
"1X
"1E4>
KA't
4>BE
4>K0
4>M"1
4>KE
Oi'4>
SORORITIES
Alpha Kappa Alpha
Alpha Sigma Tau
Delta Sigma Theta
Delta Zeta
Sigma Kappa
Sigma Sigma Sigma
AKA
AET
"1E8
"1Z
EK
EEE
ETr
ex
HEALm SERVICES
The mission of the University Health Services is to provide high quality health care for
our students; to direct our students to other health care providers when appropriate; to
provide emergency care for all members of the university community; to promote the
holistic concept of a healthful life for the university community; to address the specific
health needs of those members of the student population with special problems; and to
conceive, develop and implement relevant health education programs for the university
community.
The Downey-Garofalo Health Center is open 24 hours a day, seven days a week while
the university is in session. A staff of full-time registered nurses is on duty at all hours.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
67
A qualified physician is on duty for four hours a day, Monday through Friday, during
specified hours.
University health services are available to all registered undergraduate and graduate
students. Employees, both faculty and staff, conference participants, visiting athletes and
other visitors will be given emergency treatment if such an emergency occurs on the
university campus. For the most part, the Health Center is an out-patient facility.
However, from time to time, emergencies may be accommodated overnight. In some cases,
short-time confinement of students coming from homes located a great distance from the
university is also approved. The university physician will determine when a student should
return home for treatment and recovery. He will also refer students to local hospitals in
emergencies and for other treatment beyond the capabilities of the Health Center. In cases
of emergency, Mon Valley Hospital will generally be used for primary care. The final
decision in hospital selection is the student's.
MEDICAL ABSENCES
Students unable to attend classes because of illness should contact their professors,
explain their absences, and arrange completion of any work that may have been missed.
The Health Center does not ~ue medical exc~, but will send written notification to
professors only in the following circumstances, provided that the student must initiate the
request:
(1) If a student consults a health care professional at the Health Center, and the health care
professional determines that the student has or had sufficient medical reason not to
attend class (or to fulfill other academic obligations), notification will be sent to the
student's professors but only if the student makes a request at that time.
(2) If a student has consulted a private physician, who has determined that the student has
or had sufficient medical reason not to attend class (or to fulfil other academic
obligations), and the physician notifies the Health Center to that effect in writing,
notification to this effect will be sent to the student's professors.
(3) If a student is confined for longer treatment or care at the infirmary section of the
Health Center, verification of the confinement will be sent to the student's professors.
If a student is hospitalized elsewhere or requires extended recovery with bed rest,
written notification should be sent from the attending physician to the Health Center,
which will notify the student's professors.
Upon notification from the Health Center or any other health care professional, the
professor may decide whether to consider the notification as a valid excuse from class or
other academic obligations.
A professor may call the Nurse Supervisor of the Health Center for verification of a
student's visit, but a visit can be verified only if a student was actually seen by a health
professional.
The delivery of high quality health care is the heart of the Health Center. Our personal
convictions and our legal obligations insure that all areas of the Health Center are under
strict rules of confidentiality. Medical information will be released by your written consent,
68
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
by a properly executed subpoena, and to appropriate university offices in an emergency if
knowledge of the information is necessary to protect ·the health and safety of the student and
other individuals.
COUNSELING AND PSYCHOLOGICAL SERVICES
The Counseling Center staff provides personal, social, psychological and career choice
services to students with problems that interfere with their adjustment and effective
educational performance while at the university.
If you are having trouble understanding your feelings, maintaining satisfactory social and
interpersonal relationships, or coping with academic demands, it may be beneficial to see
a counselor, social worker or psychologist at the Counseling Center.
You can call the Center at 938-4191, or contact the receptionist in the Center's office
in the Downey-Garofalo Health Center for an appointment with a licensed psychologist, or
counselor. You can make the appointment yourself or be referred by a professor, fellow
student, staff person or management personnel.
You can talk to a counselor in private with assurance that the discussion will remain
confidential. Most appointments are of an individual nature, but special interest groups can
be organized. The special interest groups may meet on a weekly basis dealing with stress,
test anxiety, self-disclosure, interpersonal relationships. parents, occupational choice,
depression, sex or other topics of interest to all members in the group.
In addition, interest, intelligence, aptitude and personality tests and questionnaires may
be used to gather more information about yourself. Through counseling you will learn how
to interpret this information and make better choices in university life.
The professional counselors have extended their services by developing a strong referral
system locally on campus and off campus. Referrals can be made to any department or
office on campus for financial aid, student work-study programs, tutoring, academic
advising, and other matters. Further, there is a close liai&<>n with the Student Development
Office, residence directors in the residence halls, the Health Center, the Speech and Hearing
Clinic, the Rehabilitation Office, the Veterans Affairs Office, the Women's Center, the
Campus Ministry, and other divisions of the university.
A formal agreement has been entered into by and between Southwestern Pennsylvania
Human Services, INC. (SPHS) and California University of Pennsylvania to provide
diversified counseling services.
Under this agreement SPHS and its affiliated corporations provide certain rehabilitative
and therapeutic treatment services to students and employees of California University upon
referral to the agencies by the university, its agents and associates or the students or
employees themselves. These services include drug and alcohol assessment and treatment,
mental health services, and primary health care services. Also, other health and social
services which are requested by the university and are within the scope of SPHS and its
affiliates may be provided. For further information on the drug and alcohol program on
campus, see the section on CHOICES on the page following.
Please call 938-4191 or drop in at the Health Center. Office hours: 8:00 a.m. to 4:00
p.m. daily, Monday through Friday. Weekend and evening sessions are by appointment.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
69
CHOICES
CHOICES is the drug and alcohol education and prevention program on campus. Its
office is in the Downey-Garofalo Health Center. It is one approach by California University
of Pennsylvania to provide a drug free community. CHOICES provides programs for the
University and surrounding communities aimed at increasing awareness of alcohol and drug
related issues.
These programs include consultation, counseling, education, selfdevelopment, substance-free activities, and support groups for co-dependency and Adult
Children of Alcoholics.
CHOICES is made up of three primary components: the Consortium, BACCHUS, and
the Assessment and Intervention Program. Each of these is an integral member of the
program's development and expansion within the campus community.
The Consortium is a combined effort by California and eight neighboring universities
to provide a forum for discussion of relevant and current issues in drug and alcohol
prevention and education as well as the sharing of developmental programming ideas. The
Consortium offers both our campus and other universities access to a resource library
consisting of videos, books, pamphlets, and other information related to drug and alcohol
use and abuse.
BACCHUS (Boost Alcohol Consciousness Concerning the Health of University Students)
is a student organization developed under the guidance of advisors from the office.
BACCHUS strives to help individuals explore their attitudes and behavior regarding alcohol
and drug use. BACCHUS is an educational component focusing on self-responsibility and
conscientious decision making.
The final element in the programming is the Assessment and Intervention component.
This program is designed to assist those whose behavior may be harmful to themselves or
others because of alcohol or drug abuse. Through this program offers an opportunity for
students to learn facts and to dispel myths concerning the use of alcohol and other drugs.
Through group interaction activities students gain a sense of self and the impact their actions
have on others.
CHOICES knows that decisions about life can be tough at times. Learning about
alcohol and other drug related issues may help you make positive and responsible choices.
SERVICES FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES
Disabled students are provided an equal opportunity to participate in student services and
activities conducted by this university. No qualified disabled student is, on the basis of
disability, excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, and or otherwise subjected
to discrimination under any academic, research, occupational training, housing, health,
insurance, counseling, financial aid, physical education, athletics, recreation, transportation,
other extracurricular, or other post-secondary program or activity offered or sponsored by
this university.
University programs and facilities are accessible to the disabled, and special needs of
disabled students are recognired. The Disabled Student Service Office in Room 114, Clyde
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
70
Hall, provides individualired assistance to those in need. Information on disabled students
services may be obtained through the Coordinator, Services for Student with Disabilities.
Students in need of attendant services should contact the coordinator at the earliest
practicable date.
Learning Disabled Students
On the special program - CARE - for learning disabled students, see pages 26-28 in
this catalog.
Parking for Disabled Students
Numerous parking spaces have been reserved for the exclusive use of disabled persons
who have mobility or other physical problems. These spaces are reserved for such use at
all times.
Disabled persons who require special parking privileges must apply for a special
temporary /permanent parking permit at the Office of Public Safety.
STUDENT REGULATIONS
Students are adults and are expected to take personal responsibility for their own
conduct. The university will react appropriately to incidents as they occur off campus.
1. The possession or use of alcoholic beverages or drugs on university property is
prohibited. Students are reminded that Pennsylvania law prohibits the use or possession
of alcoholic beverages by those under twenty-one years of age. See the section on
alcohol and drug use - CHOICES - on page 69 of this catalog.
2. Gambling in any form is prohibited on campus and in university owned and supervised
buildings.
3. Matriculation and identification cards are for personal use only. They are valid only for
the term in which the student is enrolled. Falsification of these cards or the transfer of
one to another person is strictly prohibited. These restrictions also apply to dining hall
cards.
4. Students and student organiutions are not permitted to make any purchases in the name
of the university or the Student Association, Inc., without written authoriution of the
proper officers. Those who fail to comply with this regulation are personally liable for
payment of those items purchased.
5. Men and women students may not visit each other in their residence hall rooms except
during hours when visitation is permitted. Visitation hours are posted in each residence
hall. Any exception to these hours must be authorired by the residence hall director.
6. The possession or use of firearms, firecrackers, or other explosives on campus or in
student living quarters is prohibited.
7. Tampering with fire equipment and setting off a false alarm are prohibited.
8. Unlawful entry to any university building and the theft or destruction of any university
property are prohibited.
9. Students who participate in any demonstration which is disorderly, riotous, destructive
and disruptive are subject to legal action by the Commonwealth, the local government,
and the university. Disciplinary action may also be taken by the university.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
71
10. A notice requesting a student to report to a professor or an administrative official has
priority over any other activity and requires compliance on the date, day and time
indicated. Should a conflict arise, the student must contact the professor or
administrative official before that date, day and time indicated to arrange rescheduling
of the conference.
11. Any person on university premises or in buildings supervised by the university is
required to produce identification upon the request of a professor, administrative
official, or employee of the Campus Safety force.
12. Any student who possesses, sells or uses any drug or medicine including narcotics, the
issuance of which is not controlled by prescription, is subject to disciplinary action by
the university and legal action by the civil authorities.
13. The university has a strict policy concerning solicitation by groups or individuals on
campus. Permission must be obtained from the Vice-President for Student Development
for any group or individual to sell items on campus.
14. THE UNIVERSITY WILL TOLERATE NO VIOLATION OF THE FOLLOWING
HAZING REGULATIONS. The term hazing shall include, but not be limited to, any
brutality of a physical nature, such as whipping, beating, branding, forced calisthenics,
exposure to the elements, forced consumption of any food, liquor, drug or other
substance, or any other forced physical activity which could adversely affect the physical
health and safety of the individual, and shall include any activity which would subject
the individual to extreme mental contact, forced conduct which could result in extreme
embarrassment, or any other forced activity which could adversely affect the mental
health or dignity of the individual. Willingness of an individual to participate does not
relieve an organization of responsibility for the act. The university has the following
options in cases where groups or individuals are found guilty of hazing: fines,
withholding of diplomas or transcripts, probation, suspension, or dismissal.
72
73
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
74
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
Requests for applications and all correspondence concerning admissions should be
directed to the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. Applicants are
encouraged to write or call for an appointment to visit the University. The address of the
Admissions Office is 250 University Avenue, California, PA, 15419-1394; the telephone
number is (412) 938-4404. All applications are individually evaluated. As soon as
applications are complete, a decision is reached and applicants notified. Every attempt is
made to complete this process within two weeks.
GENERAL ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
Admission standards have been established by the University to select those students
who will be most likely to succeed in the various programs of the University.
1. General Scholarship. An applicant for admission must be a graduate of an approved
or accredited secondary school or have an equivalent preparation as determined by any
state's Department of Education.
2. Aptitude and Ability Standards. An ability to do work in higher education should be
evident from an aptitude examination such as the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). In
certain instances, other kinds of evidence may be used to determine the ability to do
such work.
3. Character and Personality. Applicants must be able to demonstrate that they possess
the personality traits, interests, attitudes, and personal characteristics necessary for an
advanced education.
4. Admission to Special Curricula. A student seeking admission to a special curriculum
may be required to take an appropriate aptitude test in the special program or have
earned specific credentials.
EVALUATION OF STUDENT APPLICATIONS
Many variables are taken into consideration in reviewing applications for admission.
The admissions committee weighs as many of the following as possible: class rank,
cumulative grade point average, type of curriculum completed in relationship to the proposed
major, guidance counselor or another recommendation, on-campus interview, standardiz.ed
test scores, activities, and maturity.
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
75
SPECIFIC ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Freshmen
Students attending a post-secondary institution for the first time are considered new
freshmen. All students in this classification must submit a completed application, application
fee, high school transcript, and GED certificate (if applicable). Results from the Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Test (ACT) must be sent, if available. These
test results are beneficial to students and advisors as programs are individually tailored.
B.
Tramfers
Students who wish to transfer to this university must submit a formal application,
application fee, and official transcripts from all institutions attended after secondary school.
Students must be in good academic and social standing at the last institution attended in
order to qualify for admission to the university for the following semester. In cases where
students have been out of school for at least one semester, special consideration will be
given.
If a degree has not been earned beyond high school, applicants must also submit the
high school transcript, including the results of all standardized test scores.
See pages 79-80 below in this section of this catalog for information about how transfer
credits are evaluated. Transfer credits are not evaluated before application for admission
has been made.
C.
Tramients
Students who wish to enroll at California with the expectation of transferring credits
to their home institution and do not wish to receive a degree from California University of
Pennsylvania are classified as transients.
Students must submit a letter or form from the home institution with appropriate
authorization. The document must list those courses which are approved for registration.
Transcripts are not required.
A formal application with application fee must be submitted. An appropriate approval
letter with courses listed must be submitted for each semester for which transient status is
requested. In all cases, admission is granted for the approved semester only.
D.
Early Admission for High-School Students
High school students may be eligible for admission to California University of
Pennsylvania provided the following requirements have been met.
a.
The student must complete the application for admission form and pay the application
fee.
b. The applicant must have completed the sophomore year of high school and be enrolled
in a college preparatory curriculum.
c.
An early admission clearance form must be completed with all necessary signatures
affixed.
76
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
d.
The student's high school transcript must be submitted and reflect a cumulative grade
point average of 3.00 for the past two years. (For up-coming juniors, ninth- and tenthgrade averages will be used.)
The student's status will be classified as provisional for each session while still in high
school.
The student must submit a completed early admission clearance form and a transcript
for each session that enrollment at California University is desired.
At the completion of the student's high school program a second application must be
submitted with the final high school transcript. A second application fee is not
required. At this time the student will be in a degree program.
e.
f.
g.
E. Graduates of California University
Post-associate and post-baccalaureate students who have graduated from California
University must re-apply (with application fee) to the Admissions Office.
F. Other Post-Baccalaureate Students
Students who have not graduated from California University of Pennsylvania and want
to enroll in undergraduate programs must file an official application, application fee, and the
official transcript from the institution granting the baccalaureate degree with the Admissions
Office.
G. International Students
International students are required to submit an application for admission to California
University of Pennsylvania. In all cases, a special international student application must be
completed. All transcripts, a statement of financial support, and letters of recommendation
must be submitted. Assuming that all records indicate that an international students will be
successful, final admission is contingent upon acceptable clearance from the education
authorities of the home country and from the Department of Justice, Immigration and
Naturalization Service, of the United States.
Applicants from foreign countries must have competency in the use of the English
language as demonstrated through the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL)
examination.
International students must subscribe to the insurance plan of California
University. For identification purposes, international students should obtain a United States
Social Security number.
H. Special Students
Students who have completed all secondary school requirements may take courses at
the university without being a candidate for a degree. Special students must submit a
completed formal application, application fee, and all appropriate transcripts.
For special students, all regulations and fees are the same as for degree students.
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
77
I.
Veteram
Veterans of the United States armed forces who have not attended an institution of
higher education since their honorable discharge are unconditionally admissible to California
University.
STUDENT CREDENTIALS
All credentials presented in support of an application for admission become the
property of the university and cannot be returned to the student. The complete file will be
retained according to the provision of University policy and the Family Rights and Privacy
Act of 1974, as amended.
All information filed in support of the application must be complete and authentic.
Any false information may be used as grounds for denial or dismissal.
SPECIAL OPPORTUNITIES
California University has shown that some students can succeed and even excel when
given individual attention. Our university provides an environment where students are
known as individuals and receive additional help from faculty, administrators, and students.
In addition to the standard support services, California University of Pennsylvania offers a
Department of Academic Development Services, which provides tutoring and counseling for
all age groups. See the section on that department, on page 121 in this catalog.
Academically and financially needy students may be eligible for special state and
federal programs as administered through Academic Development Services, which provides
tutoring and counseling for all age groups.
c_ARE
__: _PR_o_G_RA_M_s_F_o_R_T_HE_L_E_ARNIN
___
G_o_IS_A_B_L_E_o_ _ ___.l ·
L -_ _ _
For information about special programs for the learning disabled - both high-school
and undergraduate students - see the section on CARE in the General Information section
of this catalog, pages 26-28 above.
DEVELOPMENTAL COURSES
All entering students (including transfer students but excluding those in the Nursing
curriculum or those who have already earned an associate or higher degree) must, before
their first registration at California, take three tests to determine their levels of competency
and placement in mathematics, English composition, and reading. Students who do not
achieve certain predetermined scores on these tests must enroll in the appropriate
78
PUCATION AND ADMISSION
developmental courses 1 and make use of the appropriate Learning Centers in Mathematics,
Writing, or Reading. These courses are ENG 100 (English Language Skills), MAT 098
(Basic Mathematics) and MAT 099 (Introductory Algebra), and EDE 100 (Reading,
Studying, and Listening Skills), which are all described in the course listings in this catalog.
For information on the Learning Centers, see the General Information section of this
catalog pages 25-26 above.
ese deve op
courses are preparatory to a university academic
do not count toward the fulfillment of the number
experience, the credits awarded in th
of credits for graduation; nor may the be used in fulfillment of General Education
requirements or academic major require nts. However, the grades achieved in these
courses are used in the establishment of the grade point average, of class standing, of
eligibility for financial aid, and of eligib" ity for participation in co-curricular activities.
This policy on developmental co
does not affect the transfer of all appropriate
its from other institutions.
READMISSION
For readmission after an absence from the university see page 60 in this catalog.
SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERS
Social Security numbers, which serve as the permanent student identification number,
must be entered on the application for admission. Students who do not have a social
security number should obtain one.
PENNSYLVANIA RESIDENCY
Residency is determined at the time of admission. Change of residency may only occur
by appealing to the Residency Appeals Committee. For further information, contact the
office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs after admission and prior to registration.
1However, transfer students who (a) have not already earned an associate or higher
degree and who (b) have completed the equivalent of English 101 or a college-level course
in mathematics with grades of C or better at another institution but (c) whose diagnostic test
scores indicate that they should take the appropriate developmental courses are not required
to repeat those courses or to take the developmental courses at this university. Nevertheless,
such students are strongly urged to take the developmental courses and to take the
opportunity for additional help provided by the Mathematics, Reading, and Writing Centers.
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION *
~1Jiv.CV,
~-11/
79
{W.fi.~ ADVANCED PLACEMENT CREDIT
A student who has taken Advanced Placement examinations under the auspices of the
College Board may receive credit for them at California, provided the score is 3.00 or
higher.
TRANSFER CREDIT EVALUATION
Prior to receiving a transcript evaluation,students must first make formal application
to the University through the Admissions Office, submitting all transcripts and the
required application fee. University officials are not permitted to evaluate transfer
credits provisionally.
2. For credit towards the Bachelor's degree, a maximum of 75 credits may be transferred
to California from two-year community or junior colleges,.98 credits from four-year
~olleges or universities, or 98 credits from a combination of two-year and four-year
colleges and universities. No more than fifteen credits towards an Associate degree
may
transferr to California University.
3. Courses taken at another school under a Pass/Fail option will be transferred under the
conditions of California's Pass/Fail policy.
4. Developmental courses are not transferable.
5. Grades of D are not transferable unless they are counted as part of an associate degree
granted at a public institution or a community college.
6. Courses are considered for transfer to California in the following order:
(a) Courses for which the grade earned was A, B, or C;
(b) Courses for which a Pass grade was given;
(c) Courses for which the student received a D grade as part of an earned degree.
7. No courses for which a D grade was received will be transferred after a total of 64
credits has been transferred.
8. When credits are transferred, only the credits are counted as advanced standing; the
grade point average of transfer courses is not calculated with California University
earned courses.
Although credits will always transfer according to these provisions, regulations that
govern the national professional accreditation of certain programs offered at California
University of Pennsylvania may sometimes not permit some courses taken in programs not
similarly accredited at other two- and four-year institutions to be transferred as the
equivalents of courses that may be similarly entitled or described in this catalog.
1.
80
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
Community College Graduates: Special Provisions
The University subscribes to the Articulation and Transferability Agreement between
the State System of Higher Education and Community Colleges. This agreement applies to
transferability of credits from Middle States or other regionally approved two-year and
junior colleges. The details of this agreement are:
1.
Since completion of an associate degree demonstrates a student's motivation to
complete a baccalaureate degree, preference for admission will be given to applicants
who have completed the associate degree.
2. A transfer student who has completed a two-year degree program should normally
expect to complete a baccalaureate program in two additional years. In certain
specialized programs of the receiving institution, however, a longer period may be
necessary for majors in these programs.
3. The D grade obtained by two-year college students is treated by the senior institution
in the same manner as the senior institution treats the D 's of its indigenous students.
Placement of the D grade on the program distribution sheet may vary from program
to program.
4. Secondary school transcripts as well as test scores are considered as a guidance tool
and not a determinant of transfer to the four-year institution. The awarding of the
associate degree is considered to have satisfied the high school graduation
requirements.
VETERANS: COURSE CREDIT FOR MlLIT ARY SERVICE
Veterans may be awarded credit for their military training and military schools. All
veterans. reservists, and National Guard members who have been honorably discharged (or
honorably discharged from active duty) may be eligible for credits. Credits are awarded
only in the category of Free Electives. Each veteran or reservist seeking such an award
must submit a copy of DD 214 to the Director of Veterans Affairs. Army veterans who
entered the army after October 1, 1981, should submit an A.A.R.T.S. transcript; Air Force
veterans who served after 1974 should submit a C.C.A.F. transcript. Evaluations based on
the latest American Council of Education Guides will be forwarded to the appropriate Dean
for approval.
ATTRITION
Information relating to the retention/attrition of students at the University can be
obtained through the office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs. Generally, more
than one-half of students who matriculate as baccalaureate students will graduate.
Information on this subject may be obtained through an individual appointment with the
Vice-President for Academic Affairs.
81
FEES AND EXPENSES
82
FEES AND EXPENSES
BASIC FEE (TUITION)•
The basic fee (tuition) covers the cost of instruction, registration, the keeping of student
records and library services.
Full-time students: For full-time students (scheduled for 12-18 credits) who are
residents of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,•• the basic fee is $1,314 a semester. An
additional $110 per credit is charged for credits scheduled in excess of 18.
Part-time students: Part-time students (scheduling 11 credits or fewer) who are
residents of the Commonwealth are charged $110 per credit.
Out-of-State students: For full-time students (scheduling 12-18 credits) who are not
residents of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,•• the basic fee is $2,446 a semester. An
additional $204 per credit is charged for credits scheduled in excess of 18.
Out-of-State, part-time students: Part-time students who are not residents of the
Commonwealth are charged $204 per credit.
OTHER FEES
Student Union Building Fee Schedule
Spring 1992, Summer 1992
Seniors
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 10.00
5.00
2.50
•AIL FEES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE. 1he amount shown for the basic fee (tuition) is in effect for the 19911992 academic year. Please contact the Revenue Office for current fee information .
..An in-state student is defined as one who is a bona fide resident of and domiciled within the State of
Pennsylvania for a reasonable period, net less than one year, immediately preceding the student's registration for
a tenn or semester in any Commonwealth-supponed college or university in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Miners are generally presumed to be a resident of the place of their parents' or guardian's domicile.
1he establishment of domicile is primarily a matter of continued residence and intention. Generally,
Pennsylvania domicile is considered to be established upon the completion of at least 12 months of continuous
residence within the State at the time of registration for courses.
FEES AND EXPENSES
83
Juniors
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 40
20
10
Sophomores and Freshmen
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 75
38
19
Fall 1992, Spring 1993, Summer 1993
Undergraduates
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 75
38
19
This fee is not refundable.
University Senice Fee
$ 75
9 or more credits
40
1-8 credits
This fee is not refundable except for academic dismissal or administrative action to revoke
a registration.
Student ASM>ciation Fee
All students are charged an activity fee according to their academic status as
follows :
12 or more credits
$100
6-11 credits
46
1-5 credits
24
This fee is refundable through the Office of Student Association, Inc.
Room and Board Charges
The cost for living in a university residence hall is $800 per semester for a double
room. (Most rooms are doubles.) The cost of meals is $800 per semester for 14 meals
a week, or $580 for 10 meals a week, or $430 for 7 meals a week.
84
FEES AND EXPENSES
Advance Deposit
All first-year students, including transfers and readmitted students are required to submit
a $75 advance deposit payable to California University of Pennsylvania. This fee may be
mailed or hand delivered to the Revenue Office, Administration Building, California
University of Pennsylvania. It is to be paid in advance of registration and is credited to the
student's account for the first semester.
Room Deposit
An advance room deposit of $100, held in the student's account and applied toward the
spring semester, is required in order to reserve a room for the following academic year.
First-year students who wish to reside in a residence hall will receive a housing contract
with their Admissions Packet. The contract and card must be signed and returned to the
Revenue Office, California University of Pennsylvania, with the $100 deposit.
Upper-class students are also required to pay the $100 room deposit. They should
obtain their housing contracts from the Director of Housing, Student Development Office,
Student Union Building. Schedules and deadlines for housing contracts are posted for each
academic year. Withdrawal from the contract will result in partial or total forfeiture of the
deposit. In addition, the student may be held liable for room and board charges for that
semester.
Late payment fee
A $15 fee is charged when a student fails to pay fees during the registration period or
by the date established in an approved deferment plan.
Dishonored check charge
Students making checks payable to California University of Pennsylvania which are not
acceptable to the bank because of insufficient funds are charged $15 for each such check.
The original amount plus the $15 charge must be paid by money order or certified bank
draft. Personal checks will not be accepted. The Student Association, Inc. charges $12 for
dishonored checks.
Damage charges
Students are held responsible for the cost of damage, breakage, or loss and/or the return
of University property.
Degree fee
A fee of $10 must be paid by each candidate for a degree from California University
of Pennsylvania. A student is not permitted to complete graduation from the University until
this fee has been paid. The fee is payable when the student has been notified of clearance
for graduation.
85
FEES AND EXPENSES
CLEPFee
A one-time fee of $25 is charged for the administration and recording of CLEP (College
Level Equivalency Program) credits regardless of the number of credits awarded.
Co-operative Education Fee
A one-time fee of $25 is charged for the recording of Co-operative Education
experiences, at the time when the student wishes to have them recorded on the official
transcript.
PAYMENT OF BILLS
All fees are assessed at the time of registration. Payment may be made by cash, check,
money order, or certified bank draft made payable to California University of Pennsylvania,
or by VISA or MasterCard. No personal check will be accepted in payment for past-due
accounts or to clear a returned check.
Delinquent Accounts
No student may be enrolled, graduate, receive semester grade reports, or receive a
transcript until all previous charges are paid.
FEES AND EXPENSES
86
Summary of Fees (Per Semester)
Full-time Resident Students
Basic Fee
University Service Fee
Student Union Building Fee
Housing Fee
Meal Fee (14 meals)
Student Association Fee
In-State
Out-of State
$ 1,314
75
$2,446
75
800
800
100
800
800
100
...
...
Full-time Commuting Students
Basic Fee
University Service Fee
Student Union Building Fee
Student Association Fee
$ 1,314
75
...
$2,446
75
...
100
•See schedule on pages 82-83.
REFUND POLICY
A refund or credit will not be allowed unless the withdrawal is properly made in the
Office of Academic Records. Except for emergencies, the date of notification is considered
the effective date of withdrawal. Financial aid recipients who intend to withdraw from the
University must be cleared by the Financial Aid Office as part of the withdrawal procedure.
Refunds are paid only by request, which must be made on the appropriate form,
available at the Revenue Office (Room 119, Administration Building).
For both the Basic Fee and for university housing, partial refunds, or credit, are based
upon a percentage of the fees charged and paid according to the following schedule:
1st and 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund
3rd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70% refund
4th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 % refund
5th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50% refund
After the 5th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REFUND
Refunds on board (dining) charges will be made according to a pro-rata schedule available
in the Revenue Office and in the Office of the Vice-president for Student Development and
Services (Room 129, California Memorial Union). It should be noted, however, that there
is no refund of flex dollars, used for university dining privileges, except on withdrawal from
the university.
FEES AND EXPENSES
87
SUMMER SESSIONS
Basic Fee (Tuition)
The enrollment fee for any of the regular summer sessions is $110 per semester hour
for Pennsylvania resident undergraduate student, and $204 per semester credit hour for nonPennsylvania resident undergraduate students.
University Service Fee
For nine or more credits in the summer, the fee is $75; for one to eight credits, the fee
is $40. This fee is not refundable.
Student Union Building Fee
See the schedule on pages 82-83. This fee is not refundable.
Student ~ation Fee
For 12 or more credits in the summer, the fee is $100; for 6-11, $46; for five or fewer,
$24.
Housing and Dining Hall Fee
In 1991, summer rates for housing in a university residence hall were: for the ten-week
session $810 for the 19-meal plan, $710 for the 12-meal plan; for the five-week session,
$405 for the 19-meal plan, $355 for the 12-meal plan. Summer rates for 1992 will be
established early in the spring semester of 1992.
Smnmer Refund Policy
For both the Basic Fee and for university housing, partial refunds, or credit, are based
upon a percentage of the fees charged and paid according to the following schedule:
5-Week Session
1st Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund
2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 % refund
After the 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . NO REFUND
10-Week Session
1st Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund
2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70% refund
3rd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60% refund
4th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 % refund
After the 4th Week ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REFUND
88
FEES AND EXPENSES
Refunds on board (dining) charges will be made according to a pro-rata schedule available
in the Revenue Office and in the Office of the Vice-president for Student Development and
Services (Room 129, California Memorial Union). It should be noted, however, that there
are no flex dollars for summer.
Special Conditions for Summer Sessions
The first day of classes is used as the starting date in considering the first week for
determining a refund or billing adjustment.
If a student registers for two or more sessions and then decides to withdraw from a
session before the start of that session, a refund or credit will be pro-rated by using the parttime credit fee. No refund or credit will be pro-rated for the Student Union Building Fee
or University Service Fee.
ACADEMIC MANAGEMENT SERVICES
BUDGET PAYMENT PLAN
This Plan allows you to pay University fees for Fall and Spring in 10 monthly payments
commencing June 1, 1992. The cost of this Plan is $45, which includes Life Benefit
Coverage. There are no other fees or interest charges. Information concerning this Plan will
be forwarded to you separately. If you wish, you may call Academic Management Services
directly, (800) 556-6684 for information.
89
FINANCIAL AID:
GRANTS
SCHOLARSHIPS
EMPWYMENT
WANS
90
FINANCIAL AID
Financial aid is a critical factor in providing students with the opportunity for a college
education. All financial aid is intended to supplement the family's financial resources, not
as a substitute.
GWSSARY OF FINANCIAL AID TERMS
Aid:
CSS:
CWSP:
Grant:
NEED:
Perkins Loan:
PLUS:
QPA or GPA:
SAR:
Scholarship:
SEOG:
Stafford:
Total package of funds awarded to meet university expenses.
College Scholarship Service: Organization which analy:res
Financial Aid Forms (F.A.F.'s) (not used by California
University of Pennsylvania).
College Work Study Program: Work on campus, controlled by
the University and funded by the Federal government.
Gift aid which is not repaid, based on need.
Negro Educational Emergency Drive: Local grant program for
African-American students demonstrating need.
Formerly National Direct Student Loan: Federal program
allocating need-based loans through the university.
Parent Loans for Undergraduate Students: Federally backed loan
available through local lenders.
Quality Point Average: Cumulative grade point average used to
determine academic eligibility.
Student Aid Report: Result of the Pell Grant analysis, sent to
student; student must submit all three parts to the university.
Gift aid which is not paid back: based on academic or cocurricular excellence.
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant: University-based
Federal grant awarded to students with highest financial need.
Stafford Loan Program: Federal loan program which subsidi:res
borrowed funds through hometown banks, etc. Eligibility based
on financial need.
APPLICATION PROCEDURE (ALL NEED-BASED PROGRAMS)
Students wishing to apply for need-based financial aid must file a "Pennsylvania State
Grant and Federal Student Aid Application." All California University of Pennsylvania aid
applicants (including applicants from states other than Pennsylvania) must file this
application to receive full aid consideration. Priority will be given to applications filed by
April 1.
Transfer students must also complete a "Financial Aid Transcript" for each college,
university, or post-secondary school previously attended. This form is required whether or
not aid was received at the previous school. These forms are available in the Financial Aid
Office.
FINANCIAL AID
91
BASIS AND MEIBOD OF AWARDING FINANCIAL AID
Student financial aid is provided on the basis of the applicant's documented financial
need. Financial need is defined as the difference between the estimated university costs and
expected family contribution. Grants and loans are credited directly toward costs incurred
at the university; any excess funds are refunded to the student. Earnings from student
employment are paid directly to the student on a bi-weekly basis.
Students' financial aid entitlements are based on their enrollment status at the end of the
fifth week of e.ach semester. Students who drop below twelve credit hours before the sixth
week should expect reductions or cancellations in the amount of aid that will be credited to
their account.
Part-time students taking at least six credits are eligible to apply for assistance through
the following financial aid programs:
Pell Grant
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant
Perkins Loan
College Work-Study
Stafford Loan
PLUS Loan
SLS Loan
Alternative Loan
Part-time students may apply for aid in the same manner as full-time students. The aid
awarded is dependent upon the student's financial need and availability of funds.
RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF FINANCIAL AID APPLICANTS
Every student has the right to apply for financial aid and also to request and receive
reconsideration of the financial aid decision. Students also have the right to know how their
financial need and family contributions are calculated. Students and parents are expected
to provide accurate information on all application materials and may be asked to provide a
photocopy of their latest federal income tax return. The Federal Government requires the
Financial Aid Office to ensure that financial information from all sources is accurate and
truthful. When forms are used to establish eligibility for federal student aid funds, false
statements or misrepresentations may subject those providing the information to a fine or
imprisonment or both, under provision of the U. S. Criminal Code. Students also have the
responsibility to notify the Financial Aid Office of any change occurring in their financial
position from that which was reported on the application (e.g., eligibility for Social Security
or veterans' benefits, receipt of scholarships, grants or other assistance, change in residency,
etc.).
FINANCIAL AID
92
FINANCIAL PLANNING
Students planning to attend California University of Pennsylvania should be aware that
the cash from many of the financial aid programs is not available until approximately nine
weeks into the semester for which the funds are intended. Students should plan to come to
the University with enough personal money for early-term purchases (books, materials, art
supplies, etc.) without depending upon financial aid funds.
SCHOLARSHIPS
The AAUW Scholarship: The California University of Pennsylvania Branch of the
American Association of University Women has established a $400 per year scholarship to
a full-time, female upperclass student over 30 who wants to complete her undergraduate
degree at the University. The scholarship may be renewed if a 3.0 academic grade point
average is maintained. Those interested should contact the Financial Aid Office (412) 9384415.
The Alwnni Scholarship: Ten renewable scholarships are given to freshmen entering with
an SAT score of at least 1050, a grade point average of 3.25, and a rank in the first or
second tenth of their graduating class. No application is necessary for renewal.
APSCUF Scholarship: A $500 scholarship is awarded by the Association of Pennsylvania
University Faculty (APSCUF) to an undergraduate man and an undergraduate woman.
Freshmen must have an SAT score of 1050 and have been ranked in the upper 20% of their
high school graduating class. Upperclassmen must have accrued 32 credits with at least a
3.5 grade point average from the University. A recipient of this scholarship cannot have
received any other academic scholarship. Those interested and eligible may obtain
application forms from the office manager of the University APSCUF Office in Keystone
(412) 938-4293.
The Colonel Arthur L. Bakewell Veterans' Scholarship Fund: Two $1000 scholarships
are offered annually by the California University Veterans Club. They are given in the
amount of $500 per semester. Recipients must (1) be honorably discharged veterans; (2) be
full-time undergraduate students who have completed 32 credits; (3) have a minimum of a
3.0 grade point average; and (4) have attended California University the previous semester.
Eligible veterans should contact the Veterans' Affairs Office (412) 938-4076.
The Gabriel P. Betz Scholarship: This scholarship is an annual grant of one $500 award
or two $250 awards to students who are juniors majoring in geography. A departmental
scholarship committee announces the awards during the fall semester. Applicants who are
seriously considering graduate work in geography should submit a transcript of their
undergraduate grades to the departmental committee. Interested students may contact
Professor Harry J. Orsag in the Earth Science Department (412) 938-4255.
The John Bitonti Memorial Scholarship: This $200 scholarship is given in the spring to
a Speech Pathology and Audiology major who has completed at least four of this
department's courses. The student must be a full-time undergraduate who has completed
33 credits with a 3.0 grade point average and who is involved in departmental activities.
FINANCIAL AID
93
The student is committee-selected. Inquiries can be made by contacting the Speech
Pathology and Audiology Department (412) 938-4175.
The Board of Governors' Minority Scholarship: This scholarship, which waives tuition
every semester for four years, is given each year to 15 entering freshmen with a 2.5 grade
point average and SAT score of 725. Interested students should contact the Admissions
Office (412) 938-4404.
The Edward McNall Bums Scholarship: A $500 award is apportioned by majority vote
of a scholarship committee to a student or students majoring in Social Science, Economics,
or History and Urban Studies who have completed between 45 and 60 credits at the
University. Applicants must submit a dated and signed letter of intent, a recent transcript
showing outstanding academic ability , and proof of financial need as determined by the
Financial Aid Office. Those interested should contact the Social Science Department (412)
938-4042.
The California PT A Scholarship: The California High School PTA awards a $500
scholarship to a freshman student who has graduated from California High School. The
scholarship is awarded based on academic performance and financial need. Applications are
available in the California High School's Guidance Office.
The California University of Pennsylvania Faculty Scholarships: The California
University of Pennsylvania Faculty awards renewable scholarships of from $750 to $1500
per year to a selected number of freshmen. Minimum qualifications are: (1) admission as
a full-time student at California University of Pennsylvania, (2) a combined SAT score
above 1200, and (3) rank in the upper 10 % of the high school graduating class. Inquiries
should be directed to Dr. Albert Maruslcin , Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee,
in Manderino Library (938-4095).
The J. Robert Craig Scholarship: Five hundred dollars for the first semester is awarded
to an incoming freshman exhibiting excellence in the natural sciences. Proof of this ability
must be verified by a letter of recommendation from the applicant's science teacher.
Interested freshmen should contact either Dr. George Frangos (412) 938-5748 or Professor
Clyde W. Clendaniel (4 12) 938-4148.
The Earth Science Faculty Scholarship: This $500 scholarship is awarded to a student
majoring in Earth Science, Geography , or Geology. Applicants must have a minimum of
3.0 grade point average in their maj or. The award is made at the end of the junior year.
Those interested should contact Dr. William J. Procasky of the Earth Sciences Department
(412) 938-4180.
The Eberly Family Scholarships: These renewable scholarships are awarded to noneducation majors who have demonstrated academic promise. The awards are restricted first
to Fayette County residents, second to Southwestern Pennsylvania residents, or third to
Pennsylvania residents. The scholarship value is up to full tuition for an academic year.
Each recipient must maintain good academic progress to continue receiving the award. No
application is necessary.
The Dr. Calvin Fleming Scholarship: Awarded to an outstanding student in the Natural
or Physical Sciences. For additional information, contact Dr. Albert Maruskin, Chairman
of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino Library (938-4095). No application is
necessary.
94
FINANCIAL AID
The David W. Hambacher Scholarship: A $500 scholarship is awarded in the freshman
year to a student whose composite SAT score is 1200 and who was in the upper 10% of the
high school graduating class. All eligible entering students are considered. Those interested
should contact the Psychology Department (412) 938-4100.
The Lillian E. Hammitt Scholarship: This award, for one academic year with the
possibility of renewal, is given to a full-time undergraduate enrolled or planning to enroll
for credit in the performing ensemble. Applicants must be recommended by their previous
instructor and must give a live audition. College of Education students are given preference.
The amount of the award varies, depending on financial need. For additional information,
contact Mr. Gene G. Suskalo, Chair, Music Department (412) 938-4242.
The Eleanor C. Bibbs Writing Award: A $100 award for a Composition 101 paper and
a $100 award for a Composition 102 paper are granted in the spring. Information may be
obtained from Dr. Edward Chute, Director of Freshman English, in Dixon 231 (938-4301).
The Delila C. Jenkins Scholarships: These renewable scholarships are awarded to
Freshman Education majors demonstrating financial need. The scholarship value is up to
full tuition for· an academic year. Each recipient must maintain good academic progress to
continue receiving the award. Applicants must submit the Pennsylvania State Grant and
Federal Aid application to be considered.
The Minor Major Memorial Award: This award is given to a scholastically outstanding
student in any of the English curricula. There is no application. Inquiries should be
directed to Professor Ronald L. Forsythe in the English Department (412) 938-4070.
The Joseph Lynn Marino Memorial Award: An Award of $200 to $500 is granted each
year to full-time undergraduates with at least a 3.5 overall grade point average. The
applicant must be enrolled in the College of Liberal Arts and must have completed six
credits in Anthropology. No application is necessary. Inquiries may be made by contacting
Dr. Albert Maruskin, Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino
Library (938-4095).
The Mon Valley NAACP Scholarship: A $600 renewable scholarship is awarded to a
Freshman who graduated from one of the following school districts: Charleroi, Belle
Vernon, Ringgold, Monessen, Yough, California or Bentworth. Nominations must be made
by each school district. Minimum qualifications are: (1) a combined SAT score of 750 or
ACT score of 19; (2) rank in the upper 25% of the high school graduating class; (3) a
cumulative 2.50 grade point average; (4) demonstrated financial need beyond other financial
aid grant programs; (5) an African-American high school senior; and (6) admission as a fulltime student at California University. Inquiries can be made by contacting the Admissions
Office (412) 938-4404.
The Doris Nevin Scholarship: This $500 scholarship is awarded at the end of the junior
year to a student exhibiting qualities of leadership, service, and an interest in physical
fitness. Applicants must have a grade point average of at least 2. 75 and must have
completed at least two Physical Education classes. Those eligible and interested should
contact the Women's Health and Physical Education Department (412) 938-4350.
The Kurt Nordstrom Memorial Scholarship: This scholarship is awarded each semester
to a student majoring in Printing Management. A departmental committee announces its
decision each semester. Interested students may contact Professor Richard Grimm of the
Industry and Technology Department (412) 938-4085.
FINANCIAL AID
95
The Mary Noss Freshman Scholarship: A $400 award for the freshman year only is given
to one student in each of Washington County's fourteen public and two parochial high
schools. The recipients, chosen by a committee in each high school, must attend the
University full-time. High school counselors will provide information.
The Non-Traditional Scholarship Award: This $200 non-renewable scholarship is awarded
to a student who has experienced a break in continuous flow between high school and
college. Applicants must have completed one year of full-time enrollment (24 credits) at
California University of Pennsylvania. The scholarship will be awarded on the basis of
academic performance and unmet financial need. The Pennsylvania State Grant and Federal
Student Aid application must be submitted.
The Elsbeth E. Santee Scholarship: One to four scholarships, up to $1,000, are awarded
each year to students majoring in one of the University's foreign languages. Applicants
must have a.grade point average of at least 3.0 in the language studied and attained second
semester sophomore, junior, or senior status. Applications for the scholarship must be made
by April 1. Additional information may be obtained by contacting Professor Elsbeth Santee,
chair of the Foreign Languages Department in South Hall: (412) 938-4i47.
The Sports Medicine Scholarships: Five scholarships up to $250 are awarded to
outstanding Athletic Training students, excluding incoming freshmen, who have a minimum
grade point average of 2. 75. All Athletic Training Curriculum students are considered.
Questions should be directed to Mr. William B. Biddington in the Sports Medicine
Department (412) 938-4562.
Other Scholarships: Periodic awards are made by various university departments,
organizations, affiliates and alumni. For information concerning these funds, students may
contact the Financial Aid Office.
ROTC SCHOLARSlllPS AND STIPENDS
The University offers participation in the Reserve Officers Training Corps. Students
enrolled and contracted into the Advanced Program receive a monthly, non-taxable stipend
of $100 for ten months of the school year during the last two years of the program.
Advanced freshmen and sophomores may compete for two-, three-, and four-year merit
scholarships. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, a flat book rate, and a $1000 yearly
stipend for the length of the scholarship. Applications for these scholarships may be secured
from the ROTC office. Through the Simultaneous Membership Program a student may be
a member of ROTC and an Army Reserve or Army National Guard unit at the same time.
The student receives the ROTC stipend and drill pay (approximately $120 per month) from
the reserves. For additional information call or visit the ROTC on campus, at 938-4074.
GRANTS
Pell Grant: This Federal aid program is designed to provide financial assistance to attend
post-high school educational institutions. This grant is intended to be the "floor" of the
FINANCIAL AID
96
financial aid package and may be combined with other forms of aid in order to meet the cost
of education. The amount of a Pell Grant is determined by the student's and family's
financial resources. Pell Grants range from $200 to $2,400. The Pell Grant award, unlike
a loan, does not have to be repaid. Students are eligible to receive a Pell Grant for 5.5
years if they received a Pell Grant prior to July 1, 1987. Students receiving a Pell Grant
for the first time after July 1, 1987 are subject to a five-year limitation of Pell Grant
assistance.
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants: Awards from this program are made to
students with exceptional financial need. The minimum a student may receive is $100 per
academic year. Eligibility is limited to undergraduate students who do not have a bachelor's
degree.
Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance Agency Grants: The PHEAA State Grant
program assists qualified students who need financial assistance to obtain higher education.
These grants are based upon admission to California University of Pennsylvania and the
need for financial assistance from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania as determined by the
Higher Education Assistance Agency. High school seniors can secure further information
and application forms from their high school guidance office. These grants are available
only to residents of Pennsylvania who enroll on a full-time basis. Students are eligible to
receive a maximum of eight semesters of state grant assistance.
Other State Grants: Several states, including Massachusetts, Vermont, Connecticut, West
Virginia, Rhode Island, and Ohio, have state grants which can be transferred to schools
outside the state. Interested students may obtain information concerning these programs
from their high school guidance counselors or from the appropriate State Higher Education
Agency.
LOANS
.1
Perkins Loan (formerly named National Direct Student Loan): High school graduates who
have been accepted for enrollment at California University of Pennsylvania, or students
enrolled at least half-time and who demonstrate financial need, may receive consideration
for this student loan.
Continued borrowing under the program from year to year depends on the availability of
funds. Repayment of principal and interest begins six months after students end their studies
for borrowers who received their first loan prior to July 1, 1987, or nine months after
students end their studies for borrowers who received their loan after June 30, 1987. This
loan bears an interest rate of five percent a year and repayment of principal may be extended
over a ten-year period. The normal minimum monthly repayment is $30.
Borrowers becoming full-time teachers in public or other non-profit private elementary or
secondary schools with a high enrollment of students from low-income families or becoming
full-time teachers of handicapped children may be eligible for complete cancellation of the
loan.
In addition, a borrower who becomes a full-time staff member in a preschool program of
the Economic Opportunity Act (Head Start) in certain states may also be eligible for
cancellation of the loan.
FINANCIAL AID
97
Peace Corps: Borrowers serving as volunteers in the Peace Corps are eligible for
cancellation of 15-20% of the total Perkins Loan obligation, depending on the length of
active service in the Peace Corps plus the accrued annual interest. Most government
sponsored loans, such as GSLs, defer repayment during the time a person serves in the
Peace Corps. Plus, there are academic credit programs for returned Peace Corps
volunteers, and over 50 graduate schools offer scholarships to former Volunteers.
Borrowers serving in the Armed Forces of the United States can have a maximum of 50
percent of the loan canceled at the rate of 12 1/2 percent a year, plus interest, for each
complete year of service in an area of hostilities.
Interest and principal payments are deferred during any period in which the borrower is
carrying at least one-half the normal academic work load at an institution of higher learning,
or up to three years if the borrower is on full-time active duty as a member of the Armed
Forces of the United States, is a volunteer under the Peace Corps Acts, or is a volunteer
under the Economic Opportunity Act (VISTA).
Any loans made prior to June 30, 1972 are subject to previous regulations. California
University of Pennsylvania approves and makes the loans and is responsible for collections.
Stafford Loan (Subsidized): The education of students from middle-income groups
frequently places a financial burden on the families, particularly if there are a number of
children who want to attend a university. In many cases, because of limited resources, the
student is not awarded sufficient amounts of aid on the form of employment or grants. Even
when commercial credit sources are available, repayment generally runs concurrently with
the years the student attends the University. To help these young people and their families,
a (subsidized) Stafford Program is in operation.
The laws governing the Stafford Loan Program changed in October, 1986 and based
eligibility for this program entirely on financial need. Students may borrow up to the
amount of unmet need but not over the yearly program limits of $2,625 per year for first
and second levels and $4,000 for subsequent undergraduate levels.
Repayment of the principal of the loan is not required until six months after the student
leaves or graduates from the University. The Federal government will pay the interest
during the time the student is enrolled at least half-time in the University. the loan bears
an interest rate of eight percent a year through the fourth year of repayment for all first-time
borrowers after July 1, 1988. The interest rate increases to ten percent beginning with the
fifth year of repayment. Repayment of the principal may be extended over a ten-year
period. The minimum monthly repayment is $50.
The necessary Stafford Loan application may be secured at any bank or financial institution.
Stafford Loans are available to students from other states through the Pennsylvania Higher
Education Assistance Agency (PHEAA) or agencies similar to PHEAA within their own
state.
Stafford Loan (Non-Subsidized): This loan program is administered by the Pennsylvania
Higher Education Assistance Agency (PHEAA). It provides additional loan resources to
students and parents in situations where eligibility for the subsidized Stafford Loan is denied
or significantly reduced because of income eligibility restrictions. The identical loan limits,
FINANCIAL AID
98
interest rate and principal repayment conditions apply to the non-subsidized loan as to the
subsidized loan previously described. The difference between the two types is that for the
non-subsidized loan borrower is responsible for payment of the interest during the in-school
period.
Students who have filed a PHEAA Stafford Loan Application through their lending
institution will have their maximum eligibility for the subsidized loan determined first.
PHEAA will then automatically offer the applicant a non-subsidized loan for the difference
between the loan limit and any amount of subsidized loan approved.
Out-of-state students may secure an application from the financial aid office and apply
directly to PHEAA.
PLUS Loans: This loan program permits parents to borrow for dependent undergraduate
students. Applicants' eligibility is partially based on a debt burden analysis of their income.
The applicable interest rate on all PLUS loans is variable. The current rate may be obtained
from your lender. Unlike the Stafford Loan Program, PLUS loans are not interestsubsidized. Repayment of the principal and interest normally begins sixty days after signing
the promissory note.
Applications for PLUS loans are available at most local lending institutions.
Supplemental Loan for Students (SLS): This program is currently limited to independent
undergraduate students and graduate students. Applicants' eligibility is partially based on
a debt burden analysis of income and expenses.
The applicable interest rate on all Supplemental loans is variable. The current rate may be
obtained from your lender. The Supplemental Loan program is also unsubsidized.
Repayment of principal and interest may be postponed for various reasons as specified by
program regulations.
Applications for Supplemental loans are available at local lending institutions.
Emergency Student Loan Fund: Emergency short-term loans up to $200 are available to
California University of Pennsylvania undergraduate students. Applications are available
at the Financial Aid Office.
EMPLOYMENT
College Work-Study Program: Students who need a job to help pay for university
expenses may be eligible for employment by California University of Pennsylvania under
the federally supported College Work-Study Program. Students usually work about eight
hours a week while attending classes full-time. During the summer or other vacation
periods when they do not have classes, students may, with proper authorization, work full
time (37 .5 hours per week) under this program. In three months of summer employment
under the Work-Study Program, an eligible student may earn $1 ,000 or more. This amount,
supplemented by weekly earning during the second year, may contribute substantially to a
student' s total educational costs, including necessary clothes, transportation and personal
expenses. A student's eligibility depends upon the demonstration of financial need.
FINANCIAL AID
99
Student Employment (non-CWSP): Employment under this program is provided as funds
permit. Work assignments and work schedules are similar to those for the Federal Work
Study Program. Interested students can receive further information and the employment
application through the Financial Aid Office.
SCHOLARSHIPS/WANS
Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship: The shortage of qualified teachers throughout the
United States led to the establishment of this federal program. Students ranking in the top
10 percent of their high school class who are enrolled or planning to enroll in a program of
study at California leading to certification to teach in a preschool, elementary or secondary
school may apply for this competitive scholarship. Awards range up to $5,000 per academic
year. For each yearly award received, students must agree to teach two years. This
obligation is reduced to one year if the scholar teaches on a full-time permanent basis in a
school in an area which federal regulations define as having a teacher shortage. The
scholarship reverts to a loan if recipients do not fulfill their teaching obligations.
Applications are available in high school guidance offices and this university's Financial Aid
Office.
Scholars in Education Award: The State of Pennsylvania also responded to the critical
shortage of qualified secondary mathematics and science teachers in Pennsylvania by
establishing this program. Students enrolled or planning to enroll in a program leading to
a teaching degree in secondary mathematics or science with an SAT score of at least 1000,
a high school rank in the top fifth of their class and a college or high school rank in the top
fifth of their class, and a college or high school grade point average of at least 3.0 on a 4.0
scale in their science or mathematics coursework are eligible to apply. Recipients must
agree to teach one year in a Pennsylvania secondary school for each yearly scholarship
received. The value of the yearly award at California is $1,500. The scholarship will
revert to a loan if recipients do not fulfill their teaching obligations. Applications are
available in high school guidance offices or this university's Financial Aid Office.
SPECIAL BENEFITS
Veterans' Benefits are available to many veterans who are discharged from the Armed
Forces or active members of the National Guard or Reserves. Additional information may
be obtained by phoning the Veterans Affairs Office at (412) 938-4076.
Vocational Rehabilitation is a service to conserve the working capacity of persons with an
impairment who still have reasonable expectations of becoming employed. Students who
might qualify for vocational rehabilitation aid to attend college should contact their county
Office of Vocational Rehabilitation.
FINANCIAL AID
100
OTHER SOURCES OF FINANCIAL AID
There are also many other avenues from which to obtain aid. These include relatives,
local clubs or organizations, businesses, summer earnings, special scholarships, etc. Your
guidance counselor, local civic leaders or local librarians are of great help in researching
such avenues of financial assistance.
SATISFACTORY ACADEMIC PROGRESS
To be considered for all Title IV student financial aid programs (namely, Pell Grants,
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants, Perkins Loans, Stafford Loans, PLUS Loans,
Supplemental Loans, or the College Work Study Program), the University requires students
to maintain satisfactory academic progress. The academic progress requirements are
composed of two parts:
PART I
The minimum requirements to meet the first part of the University's definition of
satisfactory academic progress for financial aid are as follows:
1. All first-time students are exempt from aid denial due to lack of academic progress for
the first two semesters of attendance at the University. Progress during the first two
semesters, however, does determine eligibility for the subsequent years.
2. Full-time students must earn 24 credits during the Fall and Spring semesters combined.
3. Part-time students must have attempted at least 12 credits before being evaluated. The
number of credits part-time students must earn will be prorated according to their
enrollment status. (For example, a student who schedules 12-16 credits over both
semesters of the academic year must complete 12 credits.)
PART II
In accordance with the University's published requirements to maintain "good academic
standing" (see pages 47 and 57 of this catalog), a student who is placed on academic
probation for having failed to maintain a satisfactory Grade Point Average is also placed on
financial aid probation for one semester. At the end of that semester one of the following
three situations must occur:
FINANCIAL AID
101
Either
(1) The classification of probation is removed when the student achieves the required
minimum Grade Point Average for the class category;
or
(2) The classification of probation is continued if the student achieves a 2.0 Grade Point
Average or better during the probationary term but fails to achieve the minimum
cumulative Grade Point Average for the student's category. In this case, eligibility for
Title IV Federal Aid may be continued;
or
(3) If the student's cumulative Grade Point Average for that semester is below 2.00, that
student is academically dismissed and denied Title IV Federal Aid until the minimum
Grade Point Average for that student' s class category is achieved. A student who is
academically dismissed and therefore denied Title IV Financial Aid may be re-admitted
to the University but must attend without the benefit of Title IV Federal Aid until the
required minimum Grade-Point Average for his/her class category has been achieved.
Academic standing is reviewed following each semester: see page 47 in this catalog.
The University does not award assistance from Title IV programs beyond a maximum
of 5.5 academic years (11 semesters).
FOR SPECIAL GRADES
I (Incomplete): Since credits are not awarded for this grade, until an Incomplete grade is
resolved, a course in which it is received does not count towards fulfilling requirements for
financial aid. If the Incomplete grade is resolved by the beginning of the following semester
of attendance and a passing grade is received, the credits will be counted.
W (Withdrawal) : All categories of Withdrawal earn no credit towards graduation or towards
satisfying the credit requirement listed above.
P (Pass): If this grade is awarded, the credits apply towards graduation and towards
satisfying the credit requirements listed above, but the grade-point average is not affected.
Repeating a Course: The last grade earned is always used in calculating the grade-point
average. If a student repeats a course, the credits are awarded only for the semester in
which it was repeated, not for the first time the course was attempted.
FINANCIAL AID
102
USE OF SUMMER SCHOOL TO MAKE UP DEFICIENCY
A student deficient in credits and/or grade-point average at the end of an academic year
may use the following summer to eliminate the deficiency, but no financial aid is provided
to help defray these summer school costs.
Students who are subject to academic dismissal owing to insufficient grade-point
averages may seek readmission through the dean of that college of the University in which
they are enrolled.
If summer school work is taken in order to improve a grade-point average (and
therefore to become eligible again for financial aid), it must be taken at California
University of Pennsylvania, since transfer grades are not computed into a student's gradepoint average.
Summer school work taken for the purpose of achieving minimum credit requirements
for eligibility for financial aid need not be completed at California University but must be
transferable to California. Before credits earned at another college or university can be
transferred to a student's record at this university, the student must seek and obtain
permission from the appropriate dean of the college of this university.
APPEAL PROCEDURE
If a student feels that an academic deficiency that has led to loss of eligibility for
financial aid is due to extenuating circumstances (such as illness or injury), a written appeal
must be submitted to the Director of Financial Aid which details the situation. the Director
may, if the circumstances warrant, grant a maximum of one semester of financial aid to a
student who does not meet the requirements for academic progress. If the Director denies
the request for special consideration, an appeal may be made to the Vice-President for
Administration and Finance.
REGAINING ELIGIBILITY
A student who has been denied financial assistance for lack of satisfactory academic
progress regains eligibility in the semester following the one in which requirements for
minimum credits for academic progress and/or grade point average have been fulfilled.
FINANCIAL AID
103
REFUND POLICY
Title IV financial aid recipients who withdraw from the University during the refund
period outlined in this catalog may not be entitled to receive their full refund. The portion
of the refund that must be returned to Title IV programs is the lesser of the amount of
assistance received under all Title IV programs other than under the CWS program or the
amount determined according to the following formula:
Title IV Aid
Institutional Refund
X
Total Title IV Aid
(exclusive of CWS Program earnings)
awarded for the payment period
Total Aid
(exclusive of all work earnings)
awarded for the payment period
For the purpose of this formula, an institutional refund is defined as the amount paid for
institutional charges by financial aid and/or cash payments minus the amount retained by the
institution for the portion of the semester that the student was enrolled at the institution.
The portion of the refund allocatable to the Title IV Programs will be restored to the
programs from which the student received aid in the following order: Perkins Loan
Program, GSL Program, PLUS Program, SLS Program, SEOG Program, and Pell Program.
Any portion of the refund restored to the GSL, PLUS, or SLS Programs is returned to the
student's lending institution.
104
DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS
105
THE DMSIONS OF THE
UNIVERSITY
THE DEPARTMENTS
THE CURRICULA
THE COURSES
106
DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS
PROGRAMS AND DEPARTMENTAL COURSE
ABBREVIATIONS
The following departmental and program abbreviations are used to identify courses. If no
department appears in the third column, consult the office of the Vice-president for
Academic Affairs.
CODE PROGRAMS BY DISCIPLINE
DEPARTMENT
ACC
ANT
ART
ATE
BIO
BUS
CAW
CCU
CHE
COM
COP
CPE
Business and Economics
Social Science
Art
Sports Medicine
Biological and Environmental Sciences
Business and Economics
Mathematics and Computer Science
csc
EAS
ECE
ECO
EDE
EDF
EDS
EDU
EET
ENG
ENS
ESP
FIN
FRE
GCT
GEO
GER
HIN
HIS
HON
Accounting
Anthropology
Art
Athletic Training Education
Biology
Business
Computer Assisted Workshop
Co-Curricular Activity
Chemistry
Communication Studies
Cooperative Education
Coaching Certification
Program
Computer Science
Earth Science
(including Geology)
Early Childhood
Economics
Elementary Education
Educational Foundations
Secondary Education
College of Education and Human Services
Electrical Engineering
Technology
English
Environmental Studies
Special Education
Finance
French
Graphic Communications Technology
Geography
German
Harrisburg Internship
History
Honors Program
Physical Science
Communication Studies
Health and Physical Education
Mathematics and Computer Science
Earth Sciences
Elementary Education
Business and Economics
Elementary Education
Educational Studies
Educational Studies
Industry and Technology
English
Biological and Environmental Sciences
Special Education
Business and Economics
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Industry and Technology
Earth Sciences
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Social Science
DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS
107
HPE
HSD
IAR
IND
ITE
LIT
MAT
MGT
MKT
MTE
MUS
NUR
PHI
PHS
PHY
POS
PSN
PSY
PTE
RNA
RUS
soc
sos
sow
SPA
SPN
TED
THE
XCP
XGE
XHS
xss
XUA
Health and Physical Education
Highway Safety and Driver Education
Industrial Arts
Industry
Industrial Technology
Literature
Mathematics
Management
Marketing
Manufacturing Technology
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physical Science
Physics
Political Science
Public School Nursing
Psychology
Petroleum Technology
Registered Nurse Anesthetist
Russian
Sociology
Social Science
Social Work
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Spanish
Technology Education
Theatre
Career Planning
Gerontology
Arts in Human Service
Soviet Studies
Urban Affairs
Health and Physical Education
Health and Physical Education
Industry and Technology
Industry and Technology
Industry and Technology
English
Mathematics and Computer Science
Business and Economics
Business and Economics
Industry and Technology
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physical Science
Physical Science
Social Science
Counselor Education and Services
Psychology
Earth Sciences
Counselor Education and Services
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Social Science
Social Science
Social Work
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Industry and Technology
Theatre
Academic Development Services
Gerontology
Art, Theatre
Foreign Languages and Cultures
History and Urban Affairs
108
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION
AND HUMAN SERVICES
The College of Education and Human Services is composed of the departments of
Academic Development Services, Counselor Education, Educational Studies, Elementary
Education, Gerontology, Health and Physical Education, Social Work, Special Education,
Speech Pathology, and Sports Medicine. The Departments of Counselor Education,
Educational Studies, Elementary Education, and Special Education, are concerned with
teacher education; the Departments of Academic Development and Services, Gerontology,
Health and Physical Education, Social Work, and Sports Medicine form the Human Services
component of the College. The department of Speech Pathology and Audiology offers an
undergraduate program but it does not lead to teacher certification; certification is offered
only at the graduate level in this department.
Information about these departments and their programs will be found in the next
portion of this catalog (except for Counselor Education, which offers only a graduate
program). The university is accredited by the Commission on Higher Education of the
Middle States Association. The program in Social Work is accredited by the Council on
Social Work Education. The program in Athletic Training, in the department of Sports
Medicine, is accredited by the National Association of Athletic Trainers. The programs in
Teacher Education are accredited by the National Council for the Accreditation of Teacher
Education (NCATE), and certified by the Pennsylvania Department of Education.
A grade-point average of 2. 50 is required for graduation in all teacher education
programs.
For teacher certification, a student must pass the NTE (the National Teachers'
Examination.)
TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAMS
California University of Pennsylvania has a long and distinguished history of preparing
teachers for the schools of the Commonwealth. When you graduate you will join nearly
30,000 teacher education alumni.
The College of Education and Human Services has developed and maintained a
reputation of excellence in the preparation of teachers. Because of its accreditation by
NCATE, and its requirement of the NTE, California's graduates are able to obtain a
teaching certificate in every state in the Union.
If you attend California University as a Teacher Education student you may enroll in
any of the following majors: Comprehensive Special Education, Elementary Education
(Kindergarten to Grade Six), Early Childhood Education (Nursery School to Grade Three),
Technology Education, and Secondary Education. The Secondary Education Curriculum
provides an opportunity to major in Science (Biology, Chemistry, Physics, Earth Science,
General Science, or Environmental Education), English, Communication (English, Speech,
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
109
and Theatre), Mathematics, Modem Foreign Languages (Spanish, French, German), and
Comprehensive Social Science. Certification in Art Education is available through a cooperative program with Carlow College and with Washington. and Jefferson College. (See
the Art Department, page 123, in this catalog.) It is also possible to have a dual major.
For example, some students choose a dual major in Elementary/Special Education or Early
Childhood/Special Education. The College of Education and Human Services also offers
a special program for graduate nurses in the Public School Nursing Program. Dental
Hygienists are also eligible for enrollment in a program leading to a Bachelor of Science
Degree in Education and certification as a Public School Dental Hygienist. The programs
in Gerontology, Athletic Training, Speech Pathology, and Social Work lead to a Bachelor
of Science degree, but not to teacher certification, although it is possible to combine a major
in Athletic Training with any Teacher Certification program.
Upon completion of a Teaching Certification program in the College of Education and
Human Services you will receive a Bachelor of Science Degree and an Instructional I
certificate. All candidates for teaching degrees must also take the NTE. The certificate is
your license to teach in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and is valid for up to six years
of teaching in Pennsylvania whenever they might occur. In order to convert the
Instructional I certificate into a lifetime valid Instructional II certificate you must have three
years of successful teaching experience and a Master's Degree or you must complete six
credits every five years. These credits may be undergraduate, graduate, or in-service credits
or any combination. The only restriction is that these credits must be taken at a four-year
institution.
GENERAL EDUCATION
Each program offered by the College of Education and Human Services is divided into
at least two parts: general education, and area of specializ.ation. In addition, Teacher
Education programs have requirements in Professional Studies. The exact requirements for
each program will be found in the following portion of the catalog.
The College of Education Council has adopted the following objectives for the general
education portion of education programs:
To develop in the prospective teacher:
1. The ability to communicate with adequate skill in the areas of speaking, writing, reading
and listening;
2. Knowledge, attitudes, skills, and understanding in the natural sciences, the social
sciences, technology, and the humanities;
3. The ability to promote better understanding and relationships among individuals and
groups;
and to provide the prospective teacher:
4. opportunities for development of leisure time and healthful living activities.
110
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
General Requirements
All students must achieve competency in English language skills at the level of
Composition 1-11. Teacher Education students must take Oral Communication (COM 100)
and General Psychology (PSY 100). Developmental courses (ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT
099 and EDE 100) are used to calculate grade point average and class standing but do not
count toward graduation (see page 78 of this catalog.)
All students must take courses in the Humanities, the Natural Sciences, and the Social
Sciences. Teacher Education students take courses in Health or Physical Activities.
AREA OF CONCENTRATION
Each of the areas of concentration has a sequence of courses and experiences which
provide the knowledge necessary for professional competence in that particular area, or in
the case of ~her education programs, for certification. In addition the methodology
necessary to deliver that knowledge to children is provided in a variety of ways dependent
upon the specialty area. Each one of the specialty areas in Teacher Education provides
students with a variety of clinical experiences culminating in a full semester of student
teaching experience. See the curricular requirements for each certification program, under
the appropriate department in this catalog.
PROFESSIONAL STUDIES
A carefully planned sequence of six courses required of all education majors provides
them with depth and breadth in the essentials of professional studies. These courses are
Foundations of Education (EDF 100), Educational Psychology (PSY 208), Teaching in a
Multicultural Society (EDU 210), Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (ESP 340),
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304), and Computers for Teachers (EDF 301).
Three additional courses give further knowledge and experience to those in secondary
education curricula: Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300), Introduction to
Educational Requirements (EDS 430), and Developmental Reading in the Secondary School
(EDS 465). Equivalent requirements are made in the Elementary/Early Childhood, Special
Education, and Technology Education curricula. Requirements in oral and written
communication and these courses assist in development of critical skills in communication
and problem-solving. The models are soundly supported by comprehensive knowledge
bases. All of these culminate in the semester-long student teaching experience where the
various knowledge of social, historical, technological, legal, educational, and cultural topics
is brought together in a manner that is both knowledge-based and experientially grounded,
tested, and applied. Students are thus prepared not only for imparting the necessary
knowledge but also for dealing with important matters of educational policy, school law,
diverse cultural populations, and students with special needs.
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
111
ADMISSION TO TEACHEREDUCATION
Admission to the university is not a guarantee that a student majoring in education will
be permitted to be admitted to Teacher Education, complete the program (which includes
student teaching), and receive a teaching certificate. The College of Education and Human
Services has established standards that all education majors must meet in order to complete
the Teacher Education Program. Some of these standards are embodied in the Admission
to Teacher Education Program, which must be initiated by the candidate during the semester
following the completion of 64 credits. In order to be admitted, a candidate must meet the
following requirements:
1. Pass the General Knowledge and Communication Skills subtests of the NTE. The test
must be taken when the student has completed 48 credits.
2. Obtain a minimum grade point average of 2.50 in both the major area/area of
specialization as well as in the overall grade point average. Transfer credits should be
used in calculating the 2.50 in the major only.
3. Successfully complete pre-student teaching field experiences in:
(a) Major area of speciali:zation;
(b) Foundations of Education (EDF 100);
(c) Educational Psychology (PSY 208).
4. Pass the College of Education and Human Service's speech and hearing test.
5. Obtain approval from the departmental advisor and major department chairperson (or
designee). Dual majors and secondary education majors must have completed approval
forms from advisors in both departments.
6. Complete at least 64 credits (including transfer credits) with a minimum of 12 credits
completed in the major field at California University.
7. Obtain a personal interview and a positive recommendation from a member of the
Committee for Admission to Teacher Education.
8. Obtain final approval from the Committee for Admission to Teacher Education.
Admission to Teacher Education is a prerequisite to application for Student Teaching.
It should be emphasized that the admission to Teacher Education Program, in total, is
also designed for the student's growth in educational, experiential, and self-evaluative ways.
PROFESSIONAL FIELD EXPERIE~CES
Educators have observed that those who enter the teaching profession with a wide
variety of contacts with young children, adolescents, and adults usually become superior
teachers. Many of those who fail as teachers or remain mediocre throughout their careers
lack such experiences. A program of Professional Field Experiences has been devised by
each curriculum department. In some cases, these experiences include not only school
activities but also activities in community agencies. Professional Field Experiences include
all those contacts with children, youth, and adults (through observation, participation and
teaching) that make a direct contribution to the understanding of individuals and their
guidance in the teaching-learning process.
112
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
California University students are placed in exemplary clinical and field experiences,
devised and supervised by faculty in their appropriate curricula, in a diversity of educational
sites and experiences. Placement is first effected in the freshman courses Foundations of
Education and Educational Psychology. The second tier of clinical experiences is embedded
in subject-related courses. These vary depending on the curriculum; for example, in the
Elementary curriculum students enroll in Field Experience in Early Childhood, and
Observation and Conference, both three-credit courses. In Technology Education students
enroll in Technology/Society Education, which contains a field experience. All Secondary
Education majors enroll in Problems of Secondary Education, which requires a Thursdayfree schedule devoted to field experience. Special Education courses are four-credit courses
with a field experience attached to each course. The third tier is student teaching.
University students are supervised closely by a professor from California and a cooperating
teacher in the schools, all of whose duties are specified and contractually mandated; and the
student teacher's work is regularly assessed as to the soundness and topicality of teaching
procedures, professional conduct, and subject matter content. Gradually, student teachers
are given increased responsibility for professional assignments, so that by the time of
successful completion of the experience they are prepared to assume independent classroom
authority.
Field-based and clinical experiences are systematically selected to provide opportunities
for education students to observe, plan, and practice in a variety of settings appropriate to
the professional roles for which they are being prepared. Students participate in field-based
and/or clinical experiences with culturally diverse and exceptional populations. These fieldbased and clinical experiences are sequenced to enable education students to develop the
skills that will enable them to assume full responsibility for classroom instruction or other
professional roles in schools.
GRADUATION IN GENERAL STUDIES
Candidates who do not meet the standards for admission to Teacher Education on initial
application have two semesters in which to correct deficiencies and obtain admission. If still
not approved, they may elect to transfer to another curriculum or, with special permission
of the Dean, take 12 credits in lieu of student teaching and graduate without teacher
certification.
The latter option (waiver of student teaching and teaching certification) is also available
to students who, for exceptional reasons, change their plans about career teaching but wish
to complete their baccalaureate programs. The student must initiate, in writing and in
person, a reasoned request to do so to the Director of Student Teaching. Such requests must
be reviewed and approved by the Director of Student Teaching. If the waiver request and
course credits in lieu of student teaching credits are approved, the student may earn a degree
without teaching certification. (A notation to this effect is entered on the student's
transcript.)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
113
STUDENT TEACHING
Student te.aching, a major professional laboratory experience, is conducted under the
supervision of the Director of Student Teaching.
California University has four
undergraduate te.aching programs: Elementary Education, Secondary Education, Technology
Education, and Special Education. Students who are candidates for certification are required
to earn twelve semester hours of credit in student teaching. However, student te.aching is
a competency based program and may continue beyond one semester. Candidates are
certified to te.ach only if they demonstrate ability to teach effectively. Teaching competency
is determined by the Director of Student Teaching, the university supervisor, and the
cooperating teacher or teachers. The student teacher is also required to take a practicum
while student teaching. Student teachers are not generally permitted to enroll in other
courses during the student teaching experience.
Student te.aching is normally conducted in selected public schools located in the service
area of the university. Alternative programs on an Indian reservation or Latino schools in
the American Southwest and overseas experiences are also available. Interested students
should discuss this possibility with the Director of Student Teaching in the February
preceding student teaching.
The institutional philosophy regarding student te.aching is to prepare students adequately
to assume their professional responsibilities in the teaching profession in a democratic
society and to develop their appreciation of their need for a mastery of the professional
knowledge and skill essential to all teaching and special proficiencies in their area of
speciali:zation. Student teaching is designed to provide a climate wherein the student may
exhibit creativity and the ability to make critical judgments based upon knowledge and
reason.
Applications for student teaching may be secured at the Dean's Office and must be
submitted in February for the next academic year.
Before students may be assigned to this vital part of the Teacher Education Curriculum,
they must:
a. be admitted to Teacher Education;
b. obtain departmental approval as having satisfactorily completed the required
preparatory work;
c. maintain a quality point average of 2.50 in the speciali:zation and overall;
d. be admitted to Student Teaching.
Transfer students are not assigned to student teaching until they have completed at least
24 credits of work in this university. Graduates of other colleges and universities must meet
the requirements of admission to Teacher Education before being assigned to student
teaching.
STUDENT TEACHING FOR EXPERIENCED TEACHERS
Teachers who have had one or more years of teaching experience may be permitted to
complete the student teaching requirement by special arrangement after consultation with the
114
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Director of Student Teaching. The Director may allow the student to fulfill the student
teaching requirement for the Bachelor of Science degree in Education by making a substitute
requirement in keeping with the needs of the individual student.
APPEAL PROCEDURE FOR CERTIDCATION STUDENTS
Students appealing decisions regarding teaching certification should contact the Dean of
Education and Human Services to discuss their concern. If accord is not reached at this
level, the student may appeal to the Vice President for Academic Affairs.
The final source of appeal is with the Certification Appeals Committee, Department of
Education, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. This step should be taken only if there is no
possibility for a resolution at an earlier stage, and only if the student is convinced that
arbitrary and/or capricious standards are applied.
U.S. CITIZENSIDP - A REQUIREMENT
FOR TEACHER CERTIDCATION IN PENNSYLVANIA
No permanent certificate may be granted to any person who is not a citizen of the
United States and no provisional certificate may be granted to any person who is not a
citizen or who has not declared in writing to the Department of Education the intention of
becoming a citizen.
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
115
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
What is the College of Liberal Arts? What does Liberal Arts mean? What is a Liberal
Arts student? Distinctive to the College and those who participate in it is the educational
orientation. Common to definitions of the Liberal Arts are a number of characteristics
which do establish a universal understanding: a broad and interdisciplinary course of study,
a concern with human values and social issues, the ability to think analytically and to
communicate effectively, and a global awareness and appreciation of people, places and their
history. The goal of a liberal education, therefore, is to provide the student with
opportunities to learn not only information about the world but to acquire basic analytic and
communicative skills. Information and skills have no value in themselves; they are valuable
insofar as they enrich life, by giving it greater meaning and by making it possible for
individuals to adapt to changing employment, personal, and social demands. In essence a
liberal arts education stresses the transferability of knowledge and skills from one
circumstance or situation to another. The emphasis is not on fitting the individual to a job,
but ensuring that the individual can meaningfully adapt to new personal and professional
situations. In this statement the College closely aligns itself with the position found in
Priorities for Pennsylvania's State System of Higher Education During the 1990's.
The College of Liberal Arts incorporates the departments of Art, Communication
Studies, Earth Science, English, Foreign Languages and Cultures, History and Urban
Studies, Music, Philosophy, Psychology, Social Science, and Theatre. Those departments,
and the Department of Business and Economics, collectively offer forty-two programs of
study. (See the list on page 10 above). Course distribution sheets are available in the
College Office; requirements are listed in the description of each program below for each
program. These sheets specify what courses are required and how courses apply toward
graduation.
Just as there is no Liberal Arts Department, there is no Liberal Arts major. The Liberal
Arts philosophy informs all programs of study within the College. Of these, some are
highly structured while others are flexible. Within the General Education course of study,
students are encouraged to explore a wide variety of course offerings as one approach in
determining an appropriate major. A major, for those who have not done so previously, is
to be selected by the end of the third regular semester or upon the completion of 45 credit
hours. This does not prohibit students from changing their major, provided they complete
the necessary form in the College Office. It does prevent students from taking courses that
could result in the failure to graduate within eight regular semesters of study.
Students who do not want a major limited to a single discipline have two degree
program options: the Humanities and Fine Arts Major, and the Social Sciences Major.
These reflect two thematic area studies. The curriculum in each is flexible and permits
interdisciplinary study. The Humanities and Fine Arts majors are advised by faculty
members in the Music Department. The Social Science majors are advised by faculty
members in the Social Science Department.
In keeping with this educational position, all students participate in the General
Education course of study. This program, while permitting students a broad selection of
116
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
specific courses, mandates that courses be taken in three categories: Humanities (one of
which must be in the Fine or Performing Arts-Art, Music, or Theatre), Natural Sciences
(one of which must be a laboratory course), and Social Sciences. A list of courses that will
satisfy these requirements can be obtained in the College Office.
The General Education core consists of 60 credits including Composition I (ENG 101)
and Composition II (ENG 102). The area of concentration contains 68 credits. In neither
section do developmental courses (ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100) count
toward graduation (see page 78 of this catalog).
English language competency is essential to the exchange of ideas, the successful
completion of course work and entrance into all areas of future employment. To insure that
students will develop their language skills and will have the means to meet these
expectations, the university requires that all entering students take the university's English
placement examination. Initial course placement is based on the results of that examination.
Students who do not pass the examination are required to take English Language Skills
(ENG 100). Since a great deal of college performance incorporates the ability to express
ideas clearly, all students are encouraged to take the two required composition courses
during their first semesters at California University. Furthermore, all students majoring in
any of the Liberal Arts are required to take three writing component courses. Not all
courses designated as writing component courses are English courses. A list of approved
courses can be secured from the College Office.
The College supports, implements, and coordinates a number of activities that enhance
its curricular program. It supports a Writing Center in Dixon 120. The Center, although
committed to assisting students who have English language deficiencies, provides assistance
to any faculty and student who wants to write better and more creatively. Working in both
close proximity and intention, the Word Processing Laboratory provides assistance to
persons wanting to create and edit papers on microcomputers. The Lab in room 110 of
Dixon Hall and a computer classroom also are used to advance experimental teaching
strategies in English.
The School Psychology Clinic, Room 311 of the Morgan Learning Research Center,
also is supported by the College. The Clinic in tum serves the campus community by
permitting any student to receive free testing. Information about what tests are offered and
when they are given can be obtained at the Psychology Department Office, Room 319, LRC.
The College Office in Noss 103 coordinates activities of common interest across the
College. One important concern shared by the College is the need to relate classroom
instruction with experiences outside the classroom, experiences which can assist the student
in determining career directions, including graduate education. Accordingly, the College
supports and implements field experiences in such areas as Archaeology and the Earth
Sciences. Equally important are the internship opportunities it works with departments to
implement.
What is an internship? For the greatest clarity of understanding, perhaps it would be
helpful to ask what an internship is not. It is not cooperative education, individualiud
instruction, nor a practicum. Cooperative education is paid ~mployment and receives no
academic credit. It, however, does give students the opportunity to relate their education
to career planning and preparation. Cooperative Education is handled through the Career
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
117
Planning and Placement Office on campus. A practicum, a course in which skills are
developed by performing prescribed tasks, receives academic credit and is under the
direction of a faculty member. No outside agency or supervisor is involved. Finally,
individualized instruction designates a special arrangement by a student with a faculty
member and the Dean to take a course not offered. For permission to be considered the
following conditions must be present: The course is a regular University catalog course and
the course is not scheduled to be taught in the semester in which it is desired or needed.
Applications are available in the College Office. In contrast to all of these, an internship
is a regularly offered course, is usually taken at an off-campus location and is under the dual
supervision of an agency as well as a faculty supervisor. Internships are not job training
programs, and students are not paid accordingly, although some internships provide
compensation for expenses incurred by the student. Guidelines and applications for
internships are to be secured from the office of the sponsoring department.
Internships are an integral part of the educational program of the College wherever and
whenever possible. Experience of students in settings where their academic knowledge and
skills can be integrated is essential if education is to be perceived as relevant to daily living
and to promote the idea that education is a continuous process, developed but not limited to
the classroom.
The College Office provides a number of student services. Among them are the review
of a student's progress toward graduation and graduation clearance; transfer credit
evaluation; consideration of requests for required course substitution approval; permission
to take courses at other institutions for transfer to California University, including courses
at schools outside the United States; the review of applications for readmission, and the
processing for changes of academic major requests. Students who have questions with
regard to College policies and procedures should contact the College Office, Noss 103.
118
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
The College of Science and Technology includes the academic departments of Biological
and Environmental Sciences, Business and Economics, Industry and Technology,
Mathematics and Computer Science, Military Science, Nursing, and Physical Science. The
College offers Associate and Bachelor's degree programs designed to prepare students to
meet present and future requirements of specific professions.
The objective of the Baccalaureate Degree programs of the College of Science and
Technology is to prepare men and women for responsible positions in business, government,
industry, and other complex organizations. As well, several of the college programs prepare
students to undertake further study in graduate and professional school. Each curriculum
includes both a general education component and a technical education component. The
curricula are divided this way so that students will receive a well-rounded education and so
that breadth of knowledge will increase their usefulness as professional employees and as
citizens in the community.
The General Education program for all four-year curricula of the College of Science and
Technology provides the foundation for the students' liberal education. All students,
regardless of major, are required to complete this portion of their program. The number
of credits in General Education varies from program to program. Depending upon the
specific curriculum, a student will be required to pursue one of two General Education
course sequences. The first general education course sequence has a required component
of 6-18 credits in skill areas, i.e., mathematics, writing, and speaking, and a common core
of thirty credits divided in the following manner:
Humanities Electives
6 credits
Social Science Electives
6 credits
Natural Science Electives
6 credits
Free Electives
12 credits
The only restrictions on courses students may select to fulfill these requirements are as
follows:
Basic Mathematics (MAT 098), Introduction to Algebra (MAT 099), English Language
Skills (ENG 100), and Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills (EDE 100) are developmental
courses and are not counted as satisfying any of the General Education requirements or
towards graduation, although the grades earned in those courses are computed into the grade
point average and the credits are used to determine class standing (see page 78).
Students are not permitted to select courses in the Humanities, Social Sciences, and
Natural Science areas from a discipline in which their program requires two or more courses
from that discipline. Exceptions to this policy are:
English and Literature:
Only general survey and literature
courses are permitted in the Humanities
area.
Communication Studies:
Only non-performance based courses are
permitted in the Humanities area.
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
119
Students must fulfill their requirements in the Humanities, Social Sciences, and Natural
Sciences by taking courses in two different disciplines within each area. The only exception
to this policy is: A student can take two sequential foreign language classes to satisfy the
Humanities electives requirement.
The second General Education course sequence is the same as prescribed by the College
of Liberal Arts. It consists of 6 credits of English Composition, 12 credits each in
Humanities, Natural Sciences and Social Sciences and 18 credits in free electives. In the
areas of Humanities, Natural Sciences and Social Sciences, electives must be selected from
at least three different disciplines. One of the electives in Humanities must be in Fine Arts.
The required General Education sequence for each curriculum is outlined in the appropriate
program section.
In the major area of concentration each Science and Technology curriculum includes the
necessary technical, scientific, and support courses to provide the basis for advanced study
in a professional area. Classroom theory is frequently supplemented by laboratory and
workshop experiences where the interrelationship between general principles and application
is emphasized. Advanced study in each discipline is emphasized during the junior and
senior years.
Additionally, several programs provide students with opportunities to
participate in either an internship in business or industry or a clinical year of study in a
hospital setting where the students' educational experiences are utilized in the workplace.
120
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
SCHOOL OF GRADUATE STUDIES
AND RESEARCH
The School of Graduate Studies and Research at California University of Pennsylvania
was initiated in 1961. Presently, there are twenty-eight academic majors within the school
leading to either the Master of Education, Master of Arts, or Master of Science degrees.
In addition, there are state-accredited supervision certificates offered beyond the master's
degree, in such areas as Industrial Artsfl'echnology Education and Reading. Over the past
twenty-five years, students completing master's degrees at this institution have enjoyed
success in pursuing doctoral degrees in various professions at reputable graduate schools
throughout the United States.
Many academic departments offer courses within their upper-division classes that can
be taken by academically qualified undergraduates as well as graduate students.
Courses offerings of the School of Graduate Studies and Research are not listed in this
catalog. Information and schedules may be obtained by writing or calling the Graduate
School at (412) 938-4187.
DEPARTMENT OF ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT SERVICES
121
DEPARTMENT OF ACADEMIC DEVEWPMENT SERVICES
Assistant Professor Geraldine M. Jones, chair. Professors Alton N. Powe, Melvin J. Sally;
Associate Professors Joanne Raleigh, and Dean L. Wahl; Assistant Professors Carolyn
Jones, JoAnn Rodriguez-Naeser.
The Department of Academic Development Services helps students adjust to and cope
effectively with academic and related non-academic challenges. Personal assistance is
provided to promote success. Academic advisement and instruction, tutoring, and guidance
give students opportunities to develop the motivation and skills needed for achievement of
their educational goals. Services are provided to the entire student population; however,
efforts are primarily intended for students whose educational or economic background makes.
it difficult for them to complete a college degree program.
Help is provided by both professional staff and student assistants in the following two
areas.
Tutorial and Instructional Services: Tutors provide assistance with courses in most
academic areas. They review lecture notes, check and review textbook and other course
materials, and teach course related vocabulary words. A three-credit course entitled
Reading, Study and Listening Skills (EDE 100) is offered to incoming freshmen.
Guidance Services: Counselors conduct initial interviews with each student; provide
an orientation for all new students; help students to schedule and register; monitor each
student's academic progress; and provide students with information concerning academic
policy, procedures, and practices. Academic advisement and vocational guidance are also
provided. Students are encouraged to discuss personal problems with counselors. All
discussions are treated confidentially. In many cases, students are referred to one of the
several other student services offices for additional assistance.
The Department of Academic Development Services is located in Noss Annex. Office
hours are from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Anyone desiring services
or information is encouraged to stop at the office or call 938-4230.
The Department of Academic Development Services offers one course, Career
Planning:
XCP 194: CAREER PLANNING. A course designed to help individuals integrate educational and personal
resources needed for employment and career success. Topics include self-evaluation, decision-making, resume
development, interview techniques, and overall career strategies. (1 er.)
DEPARTMENT OF ART
122
DEPARTMENT OF ART
Assistant Professor Richard H. Grinstead, Chair. Associate Professor Raymond E.
Dunlevy; Assistant Professors Leslie A. Parkinson, Richard Miecmikowski, Philip E.
Schaltenbrand; Instructor David Olson
PURPOSE
The study of artistic expression is a study of the development of art forms such as
sculpture and painting; the study of technique, that is, the use of color, design, and
perspective to achieve the artist's objectives; and a retrospective on what a culture and
society has seen, valued, and understood about its place in the world order. Art is a product
of human creativity, a manifestation of the human spirit and meaning. The study of art is
included in a liberal education because it informs students about the universal search for
meaning and meaningful expression, about their past, and about how each person learns to
move from a literal and concrete level of understanding to a more symbolic one.
PROGRAMS
The Art major can take (1) a general Art major or (2) an Art Certification program for
teaching in either a primary or a secondary school.
The Art program is very flexible. It directs students into various areas of art, namely
art history, introductory art classes, and a series of studio courses in one of the following
areas: drawing, painting, sculpture, weaving, ceramics, and printmaking. An art internship
can assist students in developing professional relationships and in applying their classroom
learning in professional settings. The program of study prepares students to enter graduate
school as well as to pursue careers in professions utilizing art.
Programs with the Art Institute of Pittsburgh
The university also has an agreement with the Art Institute of Pittsburgh which permits
a graduate of the Institute's two-year program to receive sixty credit hours toward a
Bachelor of Arts degree from California University. A second agreement between the
schools permits California University students to take courses during their junior year in
visual communication at the Institute and receive up to thirty credits in transfer if they
complete one year of full-time course work there.
The junior year program with the Art Institute permits students to take courses not
available at California University, specifically in the area of visual communication. This
course of study prepares students for positions in commercial art - for example,
advertising, publishing and corporate communication. Students acquire knowledge and
experience in preparing art and layouts for reproduction.
DEPARTMENT OF ART
123
Teacher Certification Program
The certification program, which prepares art teachers for both primary and secondary
schools, is undertaken in conjunction with area colleges since California University of
Pennsylvania does not confer certification in art. Art courses are taken at California
University. Art Education and student teaching courses (and, in one case an Art history
course) are taken through Carlow College or Washington and Jefferson College; but the
student receives the degree of B.A. in Art from California University of Pennsylvania.
At Carlow College the student must complete Secondary Art Methods and Materials
(AE 327), Elementary Art Student Teaching (AE 409), Secondary Art Student Teaching (AE
410). AE 327 will be billed at current California University credit cost plus the usual studio
fees. The student teaching courses will be billed at current Carlow tuition and fees for fulltime Carlow students.
At Washington and Jefferson College the student must complete Art of the Americas
(Art 205), Principles of Art Education (Art 400), and Student Teaching (Ed 407). Students
will be billed though Washington and Jefferson for these courses at evening/summer school
rates.
CAREERS
Students can become professional artists in their area of specialization, although most
will need to undertake graduate education if they are to be successful professionals.
Commercial art, in advertising and in broadcast media, continues to be a major employer
of Art students. Schools offer teaching positions for art educators who are certified and who
have passed the NTE. Graduates with studio art training have opportunities to work in
various museum settings, in art galleries and in interior decorating establishments. They
also can seek positions in design departments and as art directors in large corporations.
Artists can use their talents in conjunction with other areas of specialty, such as Biology,
History, and Archaeology. Artists can be illustrators in these areas.
Finally artists work in collaboration with persons in other disciplines or they
personally undertake to link their study of art with another discipline. There are many, for
example, scientific drawing, medical art being one interdisciplinary field; the utilization of
art in therapy, for persons interested in the area of Psychology and Art; and the linkage of
art, archaeology, and history, namely in the recording of artifacts and in reconstructive
work.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credit, of Humanities; 12 credit, of Natural
Sciences; 12 credit, of Social Sciences; 18 credit, of electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Art History I (ART 102); Art History II (ART 103); Art History m (ART
(104); Drawing I (ART 110); Fiber Arts (ART 112); Ceramics I (ART 113); Painting I (ART 116); Printmaking
I (ART 117); Sculpture I (ART 118); Design 2-D (ART 119); Drawing D (ART 210); required 45 credit, and
124
DEPARTMENT OF ART
Design 3-D (ART 120); 12 credits in a studio (non-concentration). Studio Concentration:12 credita. Related
Courses: 11 credits.
or
Options with the Art lmtitute Pittsburah: (A) Aa many as 60 credit& may be transferred by graduate,
of the Art Institute to the Bachelor' s degree at California . (B) California University junior-year atudenta may take
courses at the Art Institute totalling as many as 30 credits.
BACHELOR OF ARTS WITH TEACHER CERTIFICATION IN ART (K-12)
Curriculum:
{A) General Education: CompositionI-D (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credit& of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences.
(B) Professional Specialization: At California : Foundations of Education (EDF 100), Introduction to
Educational Media (EDF 304), Educational Testing and Measurement (EDS 430) .
At Carlow College: Secondary Art Methods and Materials (AE 327), Elementary Art Student Teaching (AE
409) , Secondary Art Student Teaching (AE 410) .
At Washington and Jefferson College: Art of the Americas (Art 205), Principles of Art Education (Art 400),
and Student Teaching (Ed 407).
{C) Area
Concentration: Major courses 27 credits. Design I (ART 105); Art Appreciation (ART 106);
Drawing I (ART 110); Design 2-D (ART 119); and Design 3-D (ART 120); 12 credits in a atudio concentration,
beyond the introductory course and chosen in consultation with a faculty advisor; 12 additional credits in Art:
Ceramics I (ART 113); Painting I (ART 116); Sculpture I (ART 118); Printmaking (ART 117); 15 credit& of
Humanities electives, including Weaving (ART 114) or Jewelry (ART 255) or Stained Glau (ART 115); Art
History I (ART 102); Art History D (ART 103); and 14 credits of electives including course ■ required by college
selected for accreditation.
or
Pt111rsyl~a1"a CtrtifkaJio,r requires a sallefactory score
o,r
tht NTE.
ART COURSES
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
+ART 102 . ART HISTORY I: PREHISTORIC TO GOTHIC . A study of art from prehistoric man to and
including the art of the Middle Ages . This course will relate artistic achievements with religious , social, political,
and philosophical attitudes of the times. (3 crs .) S
+ART 103. ART HISTORY D: RENAISSANCE TO BAROQUE. A study of Western Art specifically dealing
with the Renaissance and the Baroque art of Europe. This course will relate how the social, religious, political,
and philosophical attitudes influenced artistic productions. (3 crs.) F
+ART 104 . ART HISTORY ID: ROMANTICISM, CONTEMPORARY. A study of the art of the modem world
beginning with Neoclauicism and Romanticiam and continuing through the Twentieth Century. Social force, that
affect artistic expreuion are considered. (3 crs.)F
+ ART 105 . DESIGN I: An examination of elements and principles used in visual composition. The atudent use,
a variety of media to solve problems in the theory and practice of art fundamentals. (3 crs .)
DEPARTMENT OF ART
125
+ ART 106. ART APPRECIATION. An introduction to the major movements in art which helped ahape welllcm
civilization. Thia course is a survey of hiatorical and contemponry approaches to painting, aculpture and
architecture. (3 era.) F S
+ART 110. DRAWING I. A beginning course in the development of dnwing akilla and technique1atre11ing line,
contour and value studies, and the study of linear and areal perspective. The course atresses rendering techniques
and the visual 1kil11 necessary for students to dnw what they see. F S
ART 112. FIBER ARTS. The course ia an introduction to the world of fiber art. Emphaaia ia on explontion
of both tnditional and contemponry fiber cnft, from tnditional tapeatry and aculptunl basketry to functional
clothing and whimsical toys. The student will work with basketry, weaving, batiks, stitchery, quilting, and
applique to create exciting, imaginative art. (3 era.) F S
+ ART 113. CERAMICS I. An introductory explontion of clay through hand building techniques and the potter'•
wheel. Students will examine the various forms and functions of the cenrnic vessel. The course will focua on
forming processes and the glazing and firing of pieces made in the atudio. (3 era.) F S
+ ART 114. WEAVING . Thia ia a basic, introductory course in four-hameaa weaving . The atudent ia instructed
in the method of determining warp length and width, the threading of both table and floor looms and varioua loomcontrolled and hand-manipulated weaves. Both tnditional and contemponry pieces can be designed and both
functional and non-functional work can be executed. (3 era.) S
+ART 115. STAINED GLASS I. An introduction to the very basic ■ of glasa cutting, finiahing, and aoldering
technique,. Emphasis ia on the copper foil method of Louis Tiffany; however, the atudent may alao choose to work
with earning, etching, sand blaating on glass, and beveling in the construction of their projects. (3 era.) F
+ ART 116. PAINTING I. An introduction to the fundamentals of painting. Emphasis ia placed on fundamental
techniques including the study of light and shadow, color intensity control and projection and recession of objects
in space. Work and exercises are done primarily in oil paints. Work in watercolor or acrylic may be done with
prior approval of the instructor. (3 era.) F S
+ART 117. PRINTMAKING I. The course is designed to develop intereat and techniques in the making of
woodcuts, lithognphs, etchings, engnvings, serignphs, monoprints, and photo print processes. (3 era.) F S
+ ART 118. SCULPTURE I. Introduction to the basic language, elements, media, tools, techniques and principles
of organization used in sculpture. The basic techniques of manipulation, subtnction, subatitution and addition will
be covered, involving different media and tools. (3 era.) F S
+ART 119. DESIGN 2-D. An examination of elements and principles used in two-dimensional visual
composition. The student uses a variety of media to solve problems in the theory and pnctice of art fundamentals.
(3 era.) F
+ART 120. DESIGN 3-D. An examination of the elements and principles used in three-dimensional visual
composition. These include all the elements and principles used in two-dimensional design, as well as the concepts
of mass and volume . (3 crs.) S
ART 210. ORAWING ll. Continued development of dnwing skills and techniques ■tressing line, contour and
value studies. The course stresses interpretative dnwing in both tnditional media and in computer aided dnwing
and design. (3 era.) S
+ ART 211. COMMUNICATION DESIGN. This atudio course provides hands-on experience using design tools
and techniques to create pictorial symbols which communicate ideas in a universal language. The course also
explores the hiatory of pictures and symbols used as language . (3 era.) F
126
DEPARTMENT OF ART
ART 216. STAINED GLASS Il. This course provides further historical facts concerning stained glass and the
influence of contemporary design and construction on stained glass compositions. The course includes an
introduction to kiln firing, sandblasting, acid etching, beveling, and the application of these methods in glass
construction. (3 en.)
ART 232 . MICROCOMPUTER AS A TOOL FOR THE ARTIST. This course introduces the art major to
microcomputen and appropriate hardware/software for art production in various media. It is a studio course in
which worb of art are developed with the aid of the computer. Art majon must have completed at least two
studio requirements prior to taking this course. (3 en.) S
ART 234. BASIC PHOTOGRAPHIC METHODS FOR ARTISTS. A course that teaches basic information and
skills necessary to produce graphics presentations on • computer as well as the transfer of those presentations onto
video tape, so as to produce video slide showa, video titling, simple character generation and animation.(3 en.)
+ ART 245. TAPESTRY WEAYING. An introduction to both traditional and contemporary tapestry techniques.
Emphasis is on imaginative use of traditional techniques with each student expected to design and execute creative,
well-crafted woven pieces in a variety of unusual material. (3 en.)
+ ART 255 . JEWELRY I. An introduction to basic metal shaping and stone setting, using techniques in cutting,
shaping, piercing, fusing, and appliqueing wire and lheet silver, bra11 and copper into contemporary jewelry
forms. (3 en.) F
+ ART 260. WATERCOLOR I. Basic watercolor techniques. Emphasis is placed on both transparent and opaque
water colon. (3 en.) S
+ART 275. FABRICS. An introduction to the various 111rfacc treatments of common and unusual materials.
Emphasis is on contemporary applications of traditional techniques, 111ch as stitchery, fabric painting, silk screen,
stenciling, tic dye and batik, with the student expected to design both imaginative and innovative fabric art forms.
(3 en.) F S
ART 193, 293, 393, 493 . CERAMIC STUDIOS. Advanced courses in ceramic skills and techniques on the
potter' , wheel and in-hand forming methods. Considerable emphasis will be placed on glazing and firing .
Prerequisite: Ceramics I. (3 en.) F S
ART 299, 399, 425, 499 . FIBER ARTS STUDIOS . The fiber studio concentration explores a large spectrum of
contemporary textile techniques. Areas for investigation include, for example, 111rface and textile painting, and
the design of stuffed sculpture and fabric toys . Emphasis is, at all times, on innovative design, imagination in the
utilization of technique and material, as well as general craftsmanship . (3 en.) F S
ART 196,296,396,496 . PAINTING STUDIOS. A series of painting studios develop proficiencies in pamtmg
techniques, rendering skills, and the visual analysis of forms. Students explore a variety of painting methods,
111bjccts and themes. The goal is for each student to achieve a unique approach to form and content. (3 en.) F
s
ART 197, 297, 397, 497. PRINTMAKING STUDIOS. The studio sequence enables students to punue
printmaking technique, in depth. Students will also be expected to demonstrate critical thinking and analysis of
materials and the use of 111ch in the various media. (3 en.) F S
ART 198, 298,398,498 . SCULPTURE STUDIOS. The studio courses enable students to experiment with many
types of materials which can be used as sculpture. They will be expected to impose on themselves problems which
demonstrate critical thinking and analysis of materials. Prerequisite: Sculpture I. (3 en.) F S
ART 303. SECONDARY ART METHODS . A study of the development of secondary art students, as well as
the study of materials and their utilization in the development of a secondary art program. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF ART
127
ART 329. ART INTERNSHIP. Supervised experience providing the specific technical skills used in the art world
outside the classroom and studio - e.g., mounting exhibits, techniques of art restoration, graphic arts production
techniques, and promoting arts and cultural events. 0/ A credit)
ART 337. FOLK POTTERY OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA. An introduction to the history and
process of salt glazed stoneware, as it developed and functioned in Southwestern Pennsylvania during the second
half of the nineteenth century. (3 crs.)
ART 355. JEWELRY Il. An advanced course in fabrication with additional work in enameling and casting .
Emphasis is on imaginative design, craftsmanship and evident skill in each technique. (3 crs.)
ART 360. WATERCOLOR Il. A course designed to further the study of transparency and opaque watercolor.
Includes techniques in gouache, egg tempera, and fresco painting. (3 crs.)
ART 361. VIDEO ART/DESIGN. Provides advanced information and skills necessary to produce graphics
presentations on a computer and transfer those presentations onto video tape . Production of such products as video
slide shows, video titling, simple character generation and animation of video screens. (3 crs.)
ART 460. SELECTED TOPICS . This course provides material not covered in regular art studios or art history
classes. It affords faculty and students the opportunity to explore new ideas and techniques on selected topics . (3
crs.)
EDE 205 . ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES . A course required for Elementary Education majors.
Emphasis is placed on the nature of creativity and its value in the development of the whole child. Creativity is
given personal meaning through the exploration of art materials and techniques. The role of the classroom teacher
teachiui art is established. (3 crs.) F S
128
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
DEPARTMENT OF BIOWGICAL
AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
BIOLOGY (BIO)
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES (ENS)
MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
MORTUARY SCIENCE
PREPROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY
WASIIlNGTON HOSPITAL SCHOOL OF NURSING
Professor William G. Kimmel, chair; Associate Professor Edwin M. Zuchelkowski,
assistant chair. Professors Jan W. Balling, Foster E. Billheimer, Thomas P. Buckelew,
Raymond A. Catalano, William E. Gabor, Barry B. Hunter, Ewald C. Krueger, C. Allan
Miller, Thomas C. Moon, Jeanette Mullins, Marc A. Sylvester; Associate Professor
Mitchell M. Bailey; Assistant Professors David F. Boehm, John P. Carroll, Brian K.
Paulson.
The Department of Biological and Environmental Sciences is housed in a modem,
multi-million dollar four-story building, equipped with the latest in biological and
environmental science instruments. Specialized areas include both scanning and transmission
electron microscope facilities, an animal room, greenhouse, herbarium, plant growth
facilities, radiation laboratory, museum and extensive photographic facilities. Teaching
laboratories are equipped for the study of anatomy, botany, cytology, ecology, embryology,
entomology, genetics, microbiology, parasitology, physiology, radiation biology, zoology,
mammalogy, water pollution biology, ichthyology, animal behavior, biometry, ethology,
environmental toxicology, environmental physiology, solid waste management, air quality
monitoring, dendrology, ornithology and wildlife biology.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BIOLOGY
This is an intensive scientific curriculum which prepares students for graduate work
in the biological sciences and career work in many biologically related areas. The major
emphasis of this program is to provide the student with a broad scientific core of courses,
including studies in chemistry, physics, mathematics, and biology.
Students have the opportunity to select a wide range of biological elective courses that
best fulfill their need for future work or graduate study ranging from the molecular to the
population level. Practical laboratory experience emphasizes critical thinking and the use
of instrumentation to study living systems.
Career opportunities include preparation for graduate work in biology and related
fields, for industrial research, for government research, for careers as a medical illustrator,
in public health, and in the many health-related fields.
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
129
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Engliah Compo■itionl & II (ENG 101 & 102); 12 credita ofHumanitie■; 12 credita
of Natural Sciences; 12 credita of Social Science■; 18 credita of free electives.
(B) Area Coacentration: Principle■ of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology
(BIO 120); Genetic ■ (BIO 318); Evolution (BIO 478); 22 credita of elective counca in Biology (cho■cn to include
certain counc■ in botany, zoology, phy■iology, cell and molecular and ecology); General Cbemiltry I & II (CHE
101 & 102); Organic Cbemiltry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); General Phy1ic1 I & II (PHY 121 & 122); Calculu■ I
(MAT 281) or Buie Calculus (MAT 273).
or
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN BIOLOGY FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 crcdita in Humanities, including Composition I (ENG 101) and Composition II
(ENG 102); 11 credita in Natural Sciences including Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331), General Phy1ic1 I (PHY
121), and College Algebra (MAT 181) or Pre-Calculus (MAT 199), or Calculua I (MAT 281); 9 credita in Social
Science; 3 credita in Health or Physical Activitiea; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Paychology (PSY
101); 3 credita of Free Electives.
(B) Profewonal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology: (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problema of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa
and Meaaurcmcnta in Secondary School, (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School• (EDS 465);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainatrcaming Exceptional Lcarncn (EDU 340); Teaching in a
Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467); Student Teaching and
School Law (EDS 461); Mainstreaming the Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Computcn for Teachen (EDF 301).
(C) Professional Specialization: Required: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125);
General Zoology (BIO 120); Genetics (BIO 318). 16 credita ■elected from four Biology Core areaa .
Pennsylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
See also the section on General Science Certification, on page 298 in this catalog.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
The Environmental Studies Program prepares students for career work in environmental
science and ecology-related areas and for graduate work. The major emphasis of the
program is to provide the student with a broad core of courses in biology, supplemented
with courses in chemistry, physics, and mathematics. All students have the opportunity to
select from a wide range of science elective courses in order to fulfill their need for future
work or graduate school. Almost all courses include a laboratory or field component in
which students bring theory, methodology, and instrumentation to bear on specific problems.
A senior independent research problems class (which limits enrollment to fewer than
10 students for more effective learning) gives the student practical experience with all phases
of a research problem-literature review, experimental design, data collection., analysis,
interpretation and scientific writing. Some of the topics that have been covered include
water pollution biology, small mammal population dynamics, plant and animal species
130
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
diversity, comparisons between different types of habitats, shorebird food selection, the
effects of acid mine drainage on the distribution of streamside terrestrial vegetation, and the
effects of strip mining on ecological succession.
A steady demand exists for such environmental scientists as wildlife biologists, fishery
biologists, water analysis technicians, air pollution control monitors, environmental health
technicians, and interpretative naturalists. Many graduates are employed in these areas by
private industry and by state and federal organizations. Some graduates further their
education through work leading to the Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy degrees
and teach and do research at a college or university.
Options:
Environmental Conservation
Environmental Resources
Environmental Science
Environmental Pollution Control
Wildlife Biology
Curriculum:
(A) General Education (Environmental Conservation and Environmental Resources Tracks): English
Composition I & II (ENG IOI & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Pre-Calculus (MAT 199);
Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Computer Science I (CSC 121) or Pascal (CSC 128); 6 credits in
Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of free electives.
(B) Environmental Consenation Track: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120);
General Botany (BIO 125); Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); General Chemistry I & II (CHE IOI & 102);
Analytical Chemistry (CHE 261); Field Biology (ENS 205); Conservation ofBiological Resources (BIO 206); Game
and Habitat Management (ENS 421); Wildlife Techniques (ENS 422); Dendrology (BIO 442); Environmental
Research Problems (ENS 459) ; Biotic Communities (BIO 308); Biometry (BIO 466); Design & Analysis (ENS
495). 21 credits of the following recommended Electives: Ornithology (BIO 337); Entomology (BIO 445);
Ichthyology (BIO 435); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488); Ethology (BIO 441); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Plant
Ecology (BIO 314); Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336) : Soil Science (BIO 334) : Environmental Physiology (BIO 486);
Ecosystems Ecology (BIO 316) .
(C) Environmental Resources Track: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Man and His Environment
(ENS 100); Environmental Geology (EAS 231); General Chemistry I (CHE 101) and II (CHE 102); Introduction
to Oceanography (EAS 163); Contemporary Issues in Biology (BIO 103); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Map
and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 272); Soil Science (BIO 334); Earth Resources (EAS 232): Mineralogy
(EAS 331); Petrology (EAS 332); Coastal Geomorphology and Marine Resources (EAS 363); Historical Geology
(EAS 200); Field course in Geology, Biology, or Hydrology. 22 credits of the following electives (at least one
course from each group) : GROUP A - Meteorology (EAS 241); Climatology (EAS 242); Hydrology (EAS 202);
Air Quality Monitoring (ENS 430) . GROUP B - Geomorphology (EAS 343); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Solid
Waste Management (ENS 431). GROUP C - Geochemistry (CHE 255); Geophysics (PHY 235); Reservoir
Evaluation (PET 455); Micropaleontology (EAS 350). GROUP D - Computer Science II (CSC 222); Environmental
Chemistry (PHS 136); Environmental Regulations (ENS 432); Statistical Cartography (EAS 373).
(D) General Education (Environmental Science and Environmental Pollution Control Tracks) : English
Composition I & II (ENG 101 & 102) ; Formal Logic (PHI 312); Basic Calculus (MAT 237) or Calculus I (MAT
281); Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Computer Science I (CSC 121) or Pascal (CSC 128) . 6 credits in
Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits Free Electives .
(E) Environmental Science Track: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General
Botany (BIO 125); Ecosystems Ecology (BIO 316); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Biometry (BIO 466);
Environmental Research Problems (ENS 459); General Chemistry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); General Physics I &
II (PHY 121 & 122); Genetics (BIO 318); Evolution (BIO 478); Design and Analysis (ENS 495) . 18 credits from
the following Animal Ecology and/or Plant Ecology Cores: ANIMAL ECOLOGY CORE: Comparative Vertebrate
Anatomy (BIO 305); Ornithology (BIO 337); Entomology (BIO 445); Ichthyology (BIO 435); Water Pollution
Biology (BIO 488); Ethology (BIO 441); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Parasitology (BIO 327); Herpetology (BIO 433).
PLANT ECOLOGY CORE: Plant Ecology (BIO 314); Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Soil Science (BIO 334);
Dendrology (BIO 442); Biotic Communities (BIO 308).
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
131
(F) Eanronmental Pollution Control Track: Principles of Biology (BIO I IS); General Zoology(BIO 120);
General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemillry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemillry I & II (CHE 331 &
332); Analytical Chemillry I (CHE 261); Ecosyatema Ecology (BIO 316); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488);
Microbiology (BIO 326); Biometry (BIO 466); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Laboratory Instrumentation
(BIO 430); Techniques in Water and Waatewater Analy■is (ENS 341); Air Quality Monitoring (ENS 430); Solid
Waste Management (ENS 431); Environmental Regulations (ENS 432); Environmental Research Problema (ENS
459); Deaign and Analyais (ENS 495). S credits of related elective, aelected with advi10r'1 approval from counea
in ornithology, entomology, dendrology, mammalogy, 10il acience, and plant taxonomy .
(G) Wildlife Biology Track: Principle• of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany
(BIO 125); General Chemistry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); Genetics
(BIO 319); Principles of Wildlife Management (ENS 420); Wildlife Management Techniques (ENS 423);
Dendrology (BIO 442) or Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Ecosyllema Ecology (BIO 316); Ornithology (BIO 337);
Mammalogy (BIO 400); Biometry (BIO 466) or De■ign and Analyaia (BIO 495); 6 credits of the following
recommended elective,: Oral Communication (COM 101); Principle, of Management (MGT 201); Land Uae
Planning (GEO 317); Urban Planning (HIS 234); 12 credita of the following recommended electives: Microbiology
(BIO 326); Parasitology (BIO 327); Soil Science (BIO 334); Herpetology (BIO 433); Ichthyology (BIO 435);
Ethology (BIO 441); Entomology (BIO 445); Environmental Research Problema (ENS 459); Evolution (BIO 478);
Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488).
ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION ENDORSEMENT PROGRAM
Environmental education should be a life-long process. It is a way of looking at life,
fostering awareness of other life and of interrelationships, and learning to recognize the
effects (both good and bad) man has on his physical and biological surroundings. The need
for teachers to direct environmental programs and provide environmental teaching is
pressing. The courses listed below are designed to develop an individual's ability to teach
and/or direct the development of a school's environmental education program.
Cumculum:
Man and His Environment (ENS 100). Two of the following: Environmental Chemillry (PHS 136);
Environmental Biology (BIO 105); Environmental Geology (EAS 235). At lea&t one in each of the following areas:
1. Laboratory Science: Ecosyllema Ecology (BIO 316); Principle■ of Biology (BIO 115); Physical Geography (EAS
ISi); Meteorology (EAS 241); Man and His Physical World (PHS 111); 2 . Techniques and Procedurea: Plant
Taxonomy (BIO 336); Planning and Development of Areas and Facilities (XUA 416); Recreation and Park
Adminiatration (XUA 400); 3. Outdoor Activities: Conaervation and Biological Re10urce1 (BIO 206); Game and
Habitat Management (ENS 421); Wildlife Techniques (ENS 422); 4. Human Involvement: Continuing Problems
in Human Ecology (BIO 106); Human Ecology (GEO 240).
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
Advances in medical science have occurred at an accelerating pace in recent years, and
great progress has been made in the diagnosis and treatment of disease. Research findings
in biochemistry and advances in instrumentation technology have increased the quality of
American health care and have generated a growing demand for people trained in the field
of medical technology. The Medical Technology program prepares students to hold key
positions in the medical laboratory.
132
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
The Medical Technology program of this university is approved by the American
Society of Clinical Pathologists, a member of the American Medical Association (AMA).
California University of Pennsylvania is formally affiliated with eight hospital schools of
medical technology. The program involves a three-year program on campus and one year
(12 months) at one of the approved affiliated schools or one acceptable to California
University of Pennsylvania. Upon the completion of the clinical or internship year the
student is granted a Bachelor of Science degree from California University of Pennsylvania
as well as a certificate in medical technology from the hospital school. In addition,
graduates take the national test given by the Registry of Medical Technologists of the
American Society of Clinical Pathologists. The students who successfully pass this
examination become registered medical technologists M.T. (A.S.C.P.)
The University's hospital affiliations include:
Allegheny General Hospital
Pittsburgh, PA
Altoona Hospital
Altoona, PA
Conemaugh Valley Memorial Hospital
Johnstown, PA
Latrobe Area Hospital
Latrobe, PA
St. Vincent Hospital
Erie, PA
Washington Hospital
Washington, PA
West Penn Hospital
Pittsburgh, PA
To enhance the student's opportunity of being accepted by one of the affiliated hospital
schools of medical technology for the fourth or clinical year, it is strongly recommended that
the student maintain a minimum of a 3.0 quality point average in the natural sciences
(Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics) and a minimum of a 3.0 overall quality
point average.
Qualified men and women are in demand as medical technologists to hold responsible
positions in blood banking, microbiology, parasitology, chemistry, serology, hematology,
and nuclear medicine, as well as in supervisory positions in laboratories.
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: English Composition I (ENG IOI); Principle ■ of Management (BUS 201); 6 credita
in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credita in Natural Science ■; 12 credita in free electives.
(B) Ana oCCooceotratioo: Principle■ ofBiology (BIO I IS); General Zoology (BIO 120); Human Anatomy
(BIO 306); Microbiology (BIO 326); Human Phy■iology (BIO 328); Parasitology (BIO 327); Genetics (BIO 318);
Clinical Microbiology (BIO 426); Laboratory Inatrumentation (BIO 430); General Chemistry I & D (CHE 101 &
102); Analytical Chemistry I (CHE 361); General Physics I & D (PHY 121 & 122); Organic Chemistry I (CHE
331); College Algebra (MAT 181). The following courses are llrongly recommended by the Hoapital Schools of
Medical Technology: English Composition D (ENG 102); Organic Chemistry D (CHE 302); Mycology (BIO 407);
Radiation Biology (BIO 408); Biochemistry I (CHE 441); Statistic■ (MAT 215). Approved Medical Technology
(29 credits).
PREPROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY
Students in the health professions commit themselves to a lifelong process of selfeducation; therefore, the development of scholarly motivation, independence, and creativity
are vital to professional medical competence. Acquiring an understanding of people, their
societies, and their history is a valuable asset in the practice of the health professions.
Consequently, a liberal education in the humanities and the arts, as well as in the social and
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
133
natural sciences, provides the best professional preparation. In addition, the student should
demonstrate competence and concentrated study in a curriculum or field of special interest.
Although students interested in the health professions do not necessarily major in Biology,
they should plan to take a significant number of biology courses.
Varied program offerings make it possible to satisfy requirements for pre-medical, predental, pre-veterinary, pre-podiatry, pre-pharmacy, pre-chiropractic, and other pre-health
fields. Those interested should contact the Biology Department to discuss their career plans.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: English Composition I & Il (ENG 101 & 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits
of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Principles of Biology (BIO I 15); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany
(BIO 125); General Chemistry I & Il (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & Il (CHE 331 & 332); General
Physics I & Il (PHY 121 & 122); Basic Calculus (MAT 273) or Calculus I (MAT 281); Genetics (BIO 318);
Human Anatomy (BIO 306) or Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (BIO 305); Human Physiology (BIO 328); Cell
Biology (BIO 480); Microbiology (BIO 326); 9 credits of related electives in Biology (chosen from amon, courses
in parasitology, histology, embryology, clinical microbiology, and biochemistry).
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN MORTUARY SCIENCE
In today's world the expansion of knowledge occurs at such a rapid rate that the
average person cannot keep pace with information that affects his life. In professional
careers a broad understanding of the changing world is closely related to success. In the
health related professions, we find phenomenal growth in knowledge, technology and
improved delivery systems of service to the public. This expansion of preparation for the
mortuary sciences is one way that can serve the practitioner to better serve society.
Career Outlook
Highly qualified individuals can be successful as members of a well-established
mortuary firm or in an individuali:red firm. Careers in teaching and research are also
available.
Objectives
The program objectives are:
•
to prepare the student with an academic background that can challenge the changing
technology and demands of society;
•
to expand the opportunities for entry into a technological world.
Curriculmn OtTered
The California University program is accredited through the Middle States Association
of College and Secondary Schools. The mortuary science year, through affiliation with the
Pittsburgh School of Mortuary Science, is accredited through the American Board of Funeral
Service Education, National Association of Colleges of Mortuary Science, National
Conference of Funeral Service Examining Boards of the United States, Inc. This program
134
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
is designed for three years of approved study on campus and one year of study at the
Pittsburgh Institute of Mortuary Science. Upon completion of the program, the student is
granted a Bachelor of Science degree from California and a diploma from the Pittsburgh
Institute. Upon completion of a one-year resident intern period, the candidate applies for
the State Board Examinations and licensure as a funeral director and embalmer.
The curriculum requires 128 credits: 100 credits in required and elective California
University courses and 28 credits for the institute year at an approved mortuary science
institute.
Curriculum:
(A) Geaenil Education: English Compo1ition I & Il (ENG 101 & 102); General Paychology (PSY 100);
Elemcnta of Economics (ECO 100); 6 credita in Humanities; 6 crcdita in Social Science,; 6 credita in Natural
12 credita of free elective,.
(B) Area of Coacmtration: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology
(BIO 120); Human Anatomy (BIO 306); Human Physiology (BIO 328); Microbiology (BIO 326); General
Chemistry I & Il (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & Il (CHE 331 & 332); College Algebra (MAT 101);
Accounting I (BUS 111); Ethics (PHI 220); Psychology of Adjustment (PSY 315); Social Psychology (PSY 211);
Principle• of Sociology (SOC 100); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); Basic Programming Language
(CSC 105); Sculpture I (ART 118); Mathematica of Finance (MAT 171); Bu1inc11 Writing I (ENG 211); Principles
of Management (BUS 201); The Family (SOC 220); Introduction to Social work: (SOW 105); Death and Dying
(EDF 318); Oral Communication (COM 101); Animal Hiatology (BIO 325); Parasitology (BIO 327); 8 credita of
advanced Biology courses selected with adviaor'• approval.
Science■;
THE WASHINGTON HOSPITAL SCHOOL OF NURSING
REGISTERED NURSE PROGRAM
The Washington Hospital School of Nursing (WHSN) Registered Nurse Program is a
cooperative venture between California University and the WHSN. Entrance into the
program requires successful performance by the prospective student on the qualifying
examination given by the WHSN and subsequent acceptance for admission to both the
WHSN and California University of Pennsylvania. The program of study leading to the
certificate of completion given by WHSN and licensure as a registered nurse, following
successful completion of the prescribed curriculum and examinations as required by law, is
27 months in duration. The cooperative nature of this program is based upon the university
providing a minimum of 40 credits in traditional science and general education courses and
the WHSN providing the traditional nursing courses and clinical experiences required for
certification as a registered nurse. Because of the necessity by WHSN to limit enrollment,
the availability of university classes may be limited. This is particularly critical with regard
to the science classes, Anatomy and Physiology I and II, Chemistry for the Health Sci~glS,
Basic Microbiology, and Basic Principles of Nutrition where, depending upon circumstances,
enrollment may be restricted to students who have been formally accepted into the WHSN
Program. Individuals who wish to earn a degree from the university may continue in the
Bachelor of Science Nursing Program offered by the university following completion of the
WHSN Program. However, other qualifications and/or examinations may be required prior
to entry into the university BSN Program. (See the description of the Nursing Program,
pages 288-289 in this catalog.)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
135
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES COURSES (BIO)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+BIO 103. CONTEMPORARY- ISSUES IN BIOLOGY. Basic biological principle, are applied to the
undentanding of current social-biological proble1111 and how these relate to an individual'• penonal life. Topics
included are human sexuality, nutrition, health and disease, evolution, behavior, and the divenity of life. For
atudenu not majoring in Biology . Three ~ecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
+ BIO 104. BASIC CARE OF PLANTS. A genenl introduction to the baaic care of planu. Studenu are introduced
to technique, that will make the growing and caring of planu, indoon and out, le11 complicated and more fun.
Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
BIO 106. CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN HUMAN ECOLOGY. An extensive examination of man's impact
on the bioaphere, hydrosphere, lithosphere, and atmosphere, with emphaais on: (1) pollution of aquatic and
tripospheric 1yatc1111; (2) other pollutanu in human ecosyatc1111; (3) human population dynamics in relation to
disease, malnutrition, genetics, and food. Lectures, possibly supplemented with various field trips. Prerequisite:
BIO 103. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
+ BIO 108. BIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS. A one-semeatcr preparation course in biology for studenu who mull take
BIO 115 a■ part of their curriculum and who require additional training in the biological sciences. Topics are
selected to deal with the fundamental concepts that are requisite to entrance into BIO 115. Three lecture houn
weekly. (3 en.)
BIO 112. BIOLOGY OF SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES. A non-major Biology course pertaining to
the causes and consequences of human sexually transmitted diseases. Descriptions of the microorganis1111 which
cause STD■ and the facton which are involved in their dissemination will be studied. Special emphaais will be
directed toward■ human behavior pattema and mores which are conducive to contracting these venereal diseases.
Viral STD1 (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome, Human Papilloma Disease, Herpes Simplex II and Hepatitis
B) will be emphaaized because they can cause severe diseases or even death in humans; however, the more common
venereal diseases (syphilis, gonorrhea, lymphogranuloma, venereum, chancroid and candidiasis) will also be
studied . Prerequisite: None. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
BIO 115. PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY. Structures and functions common to all organisms; cell atructure and
function, the chemical aspecu of biological syatema, eneriy and materials balance in nature, developmental biology,
principle• of genetic ■, evolution, and ecology. Prerequisite: Science majon. Three lecture houn and three
laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
BIO 120. GENERAL ZOOLOGY. A comprehensive phylogenetic survey of the animal kingdom, with emphaais
on evolutionary change, and the interrelationships of animals with their environment. Laboratory studies of
represenutive memben of the major phyla. Prerequisite: BIO 115. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn
weekly. (4 en)
BIO 125. GENERAL BOTANY. A survey of form and function of the major plant groups as well II the bacteria,
algae, water mold ■, ■lime molds, and fungi within the overall framework of a modem phylogenetic syatcm of
clauification. Prerequisite: BIO 115. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 crs.)
BIO 206. CONSERVATION OF BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES. A study of biological aspects relating to plants and
animals directly auociated with water, soil, and environmental changea. Numerous field trips are taken into areas
136
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
of Western Pennsylvania to obser,,e land reclamation, conscr,,ation pncticea, and basic problems confronting
human populations. Prerequisites: BIO 115 & 125 . Three lecture houn and a three-hour field trip . (4 en.) S
BIO 305 . COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE AN ATOMY. A compantive study of the vertcbnte organs and organ
systems, primarily concentnting on comparing the nbbit with man. Other chordate■ arc used aa ancillary material.
Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 & 120. Three lecture houra and three labontory houra weekly . (4 era.)
BIO 306. HUMAN ANATOMY . A basic study of the structure of the human body. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 & 120
or penniuion of the instructor. Three lecture houra and three labontory houn weekly. (4 era.) F
BIO 307. PLANT ANATOMY. A detailed study of atructunl differentiations, especially in the hiaher planta: the
structure of mcriBtcms and developmental changes in their derivatives. Prerequisites: BIO 115 & 125. Three lecture
houra and three labontory hours weekly. (4 crs.) F
BIO 308 . BIOTIC COMMUNITIES. The principles of the structure and nature of various biotic communities arc
considered from the concrete stand to the biome level. Factors which limit, maintain, and modify biotic assemblages
arc presented qualitatively and quantitatively from the local to the regional portions of the communities.
Interrelationships between organisms and environment in reference to the organism's morphological, physiological,
and behavionl adaptations. The dynamics of ecological succession arc stressed, illustnting the permanence of
climax communities over geological time. Ecological techniques and methods to quantify and qualify the community
arc pursued in the field and laboratory. Extended field trips may be required. Prerequisite,: BIO 115, 120, and 125 .
Three lecture hours and three houra of laboratory/field experience weekly. (4 era.) S
BIO 314. PLANT ECOLOGY. >-t,consideration of the plant communities which arc influenced by both biotic and
physical factors . The emphasis is on the vegetation of Pennsylvania, especially in the area of the Appalachian
Mountains. Laboratory work provides the student with the opportunity to become familiar with modem methods
of vegetational analysis and community sampling . Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 125 . Three lecture hours and three
laboratory hours w~kly. (4 crs.) S
BIO 316 . ECOSYSTEMS ECOLOGY . An introductory study of the dynamics of the biological, physical, and
mathematical relationships and interrelationships that proceed within various ecosystems on the earth . Emphasis
is placed on biogcochemical cycling, energy cycling, population dynamics, productivity, and pertinent problems
concerning ecoayBtcm deterioration. Field and labontory studies concerning various processes openting within an
ecosystem. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . General Chemistry I and II and College Algebn recommended.
Three lecture hours and three hours of laboratory/field experience weekly . (4 crs.) F
BIO 317. EMBRYOLOGY. A study of oogenesis and spermatogenesis and resultant developments following
fertilization: factors involved in morphogenetic determination; organology; sequences of changes in development.
Special emphasis on the chick and comparative examples of development in other animals. Prerequisites: BIO 115
and 120. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly . (4 crs.) S
BIO 318. GENETICS. An introduction to molecular genetics and to the basic principles of inheritance. Gene
interactions, multiple-factor inheritance, chromosome mapping, chromosomal and extnchromosomal inheritance .
The roles of mutation, selection, migration, and genetic drift arc investigated to determine the genetic composition
of different populations. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . Three lecture houra and three laboratory houn
weekly . (4 crs .) F S
BIO 325 . ANIMAL HISTOLOGY. The study of cellular differentiations in tiuue , tissue identification, and special
functions, especially in the mammals. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houra and three labontory
hours weekly. (4 crs .) S
BIO 326. MICROBIOLOGY. A detailed study of bacteria and viruses, with less emphasis on fungi, algae, and
protozoans. Special emphasis on medical aspects of bacteriology, immunology, and virology. The cytology,
physiology, microbiology, and culture of microbes arc pursued in the laboratory. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 125,
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
137
CHE 101 and 102, or penniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boun weekly. (4 en.)
F
BIO 327. PARASITOLOGY. A lltUdy of the etioloJY, cpidemioloJY, and bioloJY of aomc common human and
animal para1ite1. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO l lS and 120. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boura weekly. (4 en.)
F
BIO 328. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. The functiona of the human body . Basic physiological phenomena arc studied
with conaiderable emphasis upon clinical and practical application. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 120 or penniuion
of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boon weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 330. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY I. A general survey of the basic anatomical tenna of poaition and
direction, the relevant acientific unita, the chemical componenta of living organisms, animal cytology, billology,
embryology, the intc,umcntary ayatem, the rudimcnta of neurology, the skeletal syatem, and the cardiovaacular
syatem. Prcrequi ■itea : Thia counc is for lltUdenta who arc enrolled in a nuning prognm, have completed at least
one counc in biology, or have obtained pcnniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory
houn weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 334. SOIL SCIENCE. An cdaphological approach ia taken in the lltUdy of the aoil, i.e., the aoil aa a natural
habitat for planta. The various properties of the aoil arc conaidercd a, they relate to plant production. Since the clay
and humua fractiona arc of trcmcndoua importance, the counc will incorporate a colloidal-biological baaia.
Prerequisite,: CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boon weekly. (4 en.) (F)
BIO 335. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY. The physio-chemical foundationa of plant functiona arc investigated, including
such topics aa water and salt abaorption, photosynthesis, respiration, plant growth substances, photoperiodic
rcsponaca, mineral metabolism, germination, and the effecta of air pollution on planta. Recent advances in the field
of plant physiology arc included. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 125, CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture hours and three
laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 336. PLANT TAXONOMY. A lltUdy of rclationahipa among the vaacular planta, ferna, their clauification,
and method, of identification. Plant familiea native to Weatem Pennaylvania arc atrcucd. Prerequisites: BIO l lS
and 125. Three lecture houn and tbrcc laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 337. ORNITHOLOGY. The lltUdy of bird life. Clauification, anatomy, behavior, and recognition of birds,
with emphaaia on local species and their rclationahips to people and the ecological balance with other organisms.
Prcrequiaitea: BIO l lS and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours or field activity weekly. (4 en.)
s
BIO 342. SCIENTIFIC PHOTOGRAPHY. A baaic counc in the life and environmental aciences which stresses
the myriad ways in which photography can be applied to enhance the effectivene11 of teaching and research
endeavors ofbiologiata and environmentaliata. Special attention is given to photomicroacopy, macrophotography,
and field photography. Various other illustrative material ■ arc alao prepared utilizing selective photographic
equipment and/or procedures. Studenta can take this counc twice for a maximum of 4 crcdita. Prerequisites: Three
Biology or Environmental councs with a minimum of one field-oriented counc. (2-4 en.) S
BIO 360. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Il. A general survey of the basic structure of the lymphatic syatem,
immunology, the brain, the spinal cord, the peripheral nervous ayatem, senaory rcccpton and special senac organa,
the endocrine ayatem, the respiratory ayatem, the digeative ayatem, the urinary syatem, homcoatasia, the
reproductive 1y1tcm, and human embryonic development. Prerequisite ■ : BIO 330 or penniuion of inatructor.
Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 370. METABOLISM. A study of the chemical compound, of biological importance, how these arc utilized
in human metabolic proceuca, and the rc,ulatory mcchaniams auociated with the maintenance of homeostasis.
Three lecture hours weekly. (3 en.)
138
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
BIO 400. MAMMALOGY. A study of the clauification, distribution, and natural history of mamrnala, with
emphasis on eaatem North American speciea. Field studiea and preparation of study specimena. Prerequiaitea: BIO
115, 120, 308 or 316 or ENS 300. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 405. HUMAN GENETICS. Chromoaomal abnormalities. Mendel' ■ Lawa, and the effect of change of gene
action on Mendelian ratios. Other topica: aex-related inheritance, random mating, conaa1111Jinity, alleliam,
mutationa, and maintenance of polymorphism. Prerequisitea: BIO 115, 120, and 318. Three lecture houn weekly.
(3 en.)
BIO 407. MYCOLOGY. An extenaive examination of the fungi, with emphaaia on the filamentoua forma . The
cytology, phyaiology, and morphology of the fungi are studied to determine their role in the acheme of nature.
Laboratory technique, in isolating, culturing, enumerating, and identifying fungi. Prerequiaitea: BIO 115, 125, and
326. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
BIO 418 . BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH INVESTIGATIONS. A reaearch study program for advanced underaraduate
studenta who wish to punue careen in biological or medical area■ . Emphaaia ia placed upon the student learning
to uae varioua acientific instrumenta and biolo1ical procedure• neceaaary for reaearch inveati1ationa. The student
worka cloaely with one or more faculty memben on a reaearch project which ia departmentally approved. Each
reaearch project ia unique, and the data should ultimately be published in a prominent biolojical journal. The
student normally participates in one aspect of an oqoing reaearch study and may punue work for one or more
aemeaten. Studenta can take a maximum of 12 credita, 6 of which may be counted in the area of concentration.
Prerequisite ■: BIO 115 and 125 (or 120), one BioloJy elective courae,junior or aenior llandilli, and a 3.0 QPA.
(1-4 en.)
BIO 426 . CLINICAL MICROBIOLOGY. A survey of the indigenoua and pathogenic microorganism■ of man,
general principles deduced from complexities involving biochemistry and physiology, host-parasite relationlhipa,
and laboratory procedures. Organisms studied include: bacteria, fungi, viruaes, and rickettaia . Prerequisites: BIO
I 15 and 326, Che 101 and 102. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 427. CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY. The physiology of the cell with empha1i1 on the relationlhip of cell
structure and function . Includes physical and chemical aspecta of cell■, the relation of cells to their environment,
energy conveniona in cells, membrane permeability, photoayntheaia, and enzyme action. Prerequiaitea: BIO I 15,
120, and 125; CHE 101 and 102; CHE 331 and 332 recommended. (4 en.) S
BIO 430. LABORATORY INSTRUMENTATION FOR BIOLOGY. The theory of, and practice with, major types
of laboratory inatrumentation uaed in modem biological practice. Content is adjusted to methods practiced at this
inatitution and may include any additional procedures of special interest to the class memben. Practice in writing
laboratory reports and designing experimenta. Prerequisite ■: BIO 115, 120, and 125, PHY 102, CHE 261, or
permission of inatructor. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 431 . TECHNIQUES IN ELECTRON MICROSCOPY. Detailed training in the operation and care of the
electron microacope: techniques of specimen preparation for electron microacope visualization, including fixation,
embedding, and ultrathin sectioning; special techniques such as replication and shadow casting. Prerequisite or
concurrent counes: BIO 432, CHE 331,332, or consent of the inatructor. (4 en.)
BIO 432. CELLULAR ULTRASTRUCTURE. A study of the generalized cell, the highly specialized cell, and
tissues as seen by the electron microacope, with special emphasis on correlation of structure with function. An
additional aim ia to enhance the student's ability to interpret electron micrograph,. Prerequisites: BIO I 15, 120 and
125, CHE 331 and 332, a molecular biology courae and/or consent of inatructor. Three lecture houn weekly. (3
en.)
BIO 433 . HERPETOLOGY. A consideration of the Amphibia and Reptilia from taxonomical, morphological,
evolutionary, behavioral, and physiological viewpoints, with special emphasis on the Testudinata. Prerequisites:
BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
139
BIO 435 . ICIITHYOLOGY. An introduction to the morphology, taxonomy, ecology, and distribution of the major
offrelhwater fishes, with emphaai1 on the northcaatem U.S. fauna . Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 and 120. Three
lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.)
group ■
BIO 440. DENDROLOGY. A atudy only of the tree specie■ of the Kingdom Metaphyta: the importance of theac
organisms to other biota, especially man, and their prospect■ of continued aurvival in a rapidly changing biosphere.
Emphaaia on the forest communitiea and tree species of the mixed meaophytic forest region■ of 10Uthwellem
Pennaylvania. Prerequisite■ : BIO 115 and 125 . Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) F
BIO 441. ETHOLOGY. Four principal approaches to ethology-ecology, phy1iology, genetic,, and development
are interpreted within the framework of evolutionary biology with emphaai1 on the pattern■ of behavioral 1imilaritie1
and differences among different kinda of animals. Prcrequiaites: BIO 115 and 120; BIO 308 or 316 or ENS 300.
Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 445 . ENTOMOLOGY. A specialized atudy of insect■ : identification and clauification development phases;
economic importance, disease vectors. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 1 IS and 120. Three lecture
houn and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
phy■ioloiical characteriatica,
BIO 449. BIOLOGY FOR MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY CLINICAL PRACTICUM I. Upon acceptance to a
hospital achoo! of Medical Technology, the student undertake, the clinical training experience required by the
National Accrediting Agency for Clinical Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). Programs of instruction will vary from
one hospital to another but uaually include hematology, microbiology, parasitology, immunology, urinalyaia, and
biochemistry . Thia course i1 the first of two required term,. (15 en.)
BIO 459. BIOLOGY FOR MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY CLINICAL PRACTICUM Il. A continuation of BIO 449.
The second of two terms. (14 en.)
BIO 466 . BIOMETRY . The fundamental concepta underlying the application of statistical method■ and experimental
design■ to environmental problems. Practical experience in the development and analysis of laboratory and field
projecta. Prerequisites: MAT 215, a field biology course, and consent of instructor. Three lecture hours and three
laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 478. EVOLUTION. An advanced course pertaining to the mechanisms that are operative in the procesa of
biological evolution. Life origins and development are investigated, with special emphaais placed upon the
importance of genetic and metabolic systems diversity. The recurring and univerul themes of mutation and natural
■election are thoroughly discusacd as the concept of evolution at the population level is developed . A detailed
account of human origin■ and specie ■ diversity is also studied. Prerequisites: BIO 318 and CHE 101 . Three lecture
hours weekly. (3 en.) F
BIO 480. CELL BIOLOGY. The biology of the cell with emphasis on the relationlhip of structure and function
within the cell. It is a atudy of cell organelles, growth, division, macromolecules, membranes, synthesia, and
regulation. Prcrequiaites: BIO 120, 125 and CHE 331. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly.
(4 en.)
BIO 486 . ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY. A comparative approach to the atudy of physiological ayatems in
animals relative to environmental pressure ■ and phylogenetic standing. Prcrequiaite: BIO 422. Three lecture hours
and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 488 . WATER POLLUTION BIOLOGY. A aurvey of the impact■ of various type■ of environmental pollutant■
on aquatic biological communitiea. Community responses are analyzed in a lecture/laboratory format with emphasia
on collection in the field . Three lecture hours and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
140
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES COURSES (ENS)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+ ENS 100. MAN AND HIS ENVIRONMENT. The broad field of environmental management. Man'• biological
baaia, aoila, land use, water pollution, air pollution, noise pollution, and agencies and lawa auociated with the
above topic, . No one area ia covered in depth. Rather, the student ia introduced to each problem, ill aource, current
corrective mcaaurea, and pouible future technology. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
ENS 20S. FIELD BIOLOGY. An introductory counc dealing with the conservation of renewable reaourcea, with
emphaaia on aoila, foreata, and wildlife. Basic ecological principle, are demonstrated aa they apply to native flon
and fauna of aouthweatem Pennsylvania . Extensive field experience■. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
ENS 341. TECHNIQUES IN WATF.R. AND WASTEWATF.R. ANALYSIS. A thorough atudy of the chemical
testing of water in waatewater plants, llrcama, and drinking water aources. Emphasi1 ia placed on learning
acceptable level ■ of chemical■ in the different type• of water. Sampica of water from aources of concern are
analyzed in the laboratory portion of the counc. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.)
ENS 3Sl. WATF.R. TREATMENT FACILrrIES. An examination of the opention of modem water work■ and
waatc water treatment 1yatema utilizing an integrated lecture-labontory approach . Empha■i1 ia on a pnctical
undentanding of concepts related to water proceuing and familiarity with the various techniques currently
employed. Lecture material ia correlated with the inapcction toun of local water and waatewater treatment facilities
and laboratory demonstrations of proce■ae1 and auociated analyse, of water quality. Three lecture houn weekly .
(3 en.)
ENS 420. PRINCIPLES OF WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT. Thia course is designed to provide atudenta with an
undentanding of the philoaophiea and concepts of ■cientific wildlife management. Major emphasi ■ will be placed
on wildlife management in North America, but differilli pcnpectives from other regions of the world will be
incorporated into the course. Topic, to be covered will include monitoring habitats and habitat management,
population exploitation, and administration, economic,, and aocio-political topic ■ a■ they relate to wildlife
management. Prerequi1ite1: BIO 111 and 121. Three lecture houn and three labontory houn weekly. (4 en.)
ENS 423. WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES. Thia course will cover techniques commonly used by
wildlife biologiata with empha1i1 on those applicable to birds and mammals. Important technique, covered in the
counc include ageing and sexing of important game ■peciea, habitat measurement and evaluation, population
analy1i1, and analy1i1 of food habits. The lecture portion of the course provides an introduction to common
techniques and the lab empha■izcd pnctical use and application of those techniques. Prerequisites: BIO 120 and
12S. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.)
ENS 430. AIR QUAUTY MONITORING. The technologies involved in the abatement of emiuions from mobile
and stationary aourcea, monitorilli technique■, and air quality standard■ . Prerequisite ■ : CHE 331, CHE 361, PHY
121 and 122, MAT 21S. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
ENS 431. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT. The fundamental technique■ involved in the collection, proceuilli,
and dispoaal of urban, indu■trial, and agricultunl waates. Prerequisite■: CHE 331. Three lecture houn weekly . (3
en.)
ENS 4S9. ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH PROBLEMS. An independent atudy with a coopenting faculty
member. Emphaai1 on ■cientific research on contemporary environmental problema. These independent atudies are
11 field-oriented II pouible, with a final research paper written in proper ■cientific notation. (This course ia 3
credits and ia not repeatable.)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
141
ENS 494. SEMINAR-NATURE CONSERVATION. Lectures, individual reports, panel discussions, and
individual project assignments concerning the environment and man's future roles in improving the quality of life.
(3 crs.)
ENS 495 . DESIGN AND ANALYSIS . The purpose is to provide environmental scientists with the theoretical and
applied basis of experimental design, sampling theory and sampling designs, data input and output, statistical
analysis and interpretation for studies involving ecological research, environmental pollution monitoring, and
environmental impact assessment. The emphasis will be on experimental design, sampling procedures, and the
application of computer methods for data base, spreadsheet, word processing, and statistical packages. Three lecture
hours weelcly. (3 crs.) S
ENS 497. ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION WORKSHOP. An interdisciplinary summer program designed to
prepare the public school teacher for teaching environmental education. This workshop considers all aspects of the
relationship of human beings and their institutions to the environment. It also has a large how-to- (This course carries a maximum of 2 credits and is not repeatable.)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
142
DEPARTMENT OF BUS~S AND ECONOMICS
ACCOUNTING (ACC)
ECONOMICS (ECO)
FINANCE (FIN)
MANAGEMENT (MGT)
MARKETING (MKT)
Professor M. Arsbad Chawdhry, Chair; Assistant Professor David T . Jones, Assistant
Chair. Professors Ali A. Hashemi, Karen L. LeMasters, Mahmood A. K. Omarnu, Young
J. Park, P. Ronald Tarullo; Associate Professors William F. Blosel, Ismail Cole, Robert J.
Kopko, Louise E. Serafin; Assistant Professors Burrell A. Brown, Debra M. Clingerman,
Edward Mendola, Susan J. Mongell, Michael K. Rich, Fred Rossell, Jr.
The Business and Economics Department offers a number of degree programs that are
unique in the curricula offered at the university. Great emphasis is given to the development
of fundamental skills that will be beneficial to graduates in both their professional and
private lives. The department recognizes that the keys for the student's future success are
flexibility and adaptability. These degree programs are fully supported with state-of-the-art
computer facilities including current software utilized in the business community. After
careful analysis of the current demands in the labor marketplace, the department has
designed four distinct degree approaches, each serving a specific student interest area and
potential employment segment. The four degree approaches are:
1. Bachelor of Arts in Economics
2. Bachelor of Arts in Administration and Management
3. Bachelor of Science in Business Administration (with various specialized options)
4. Two-year Associate Degree programs (in the fields of Accounting,
Administration/Management, Banking, and Computer Based Management.)
Additionally, courses offered within the department will prove to be of value to students
enrolled in other fields of study at the university. The practical nature of course material
offered by the department will assist all students desiring to gain knowledge of meaningful
business principles regardless of their primary specialization. The faculty and office staff
within the department will gladly assist students in reviewing available courses to determine
those that would have meaningful application to their chosen field of study.
Achievement is recognized in students as they progress through their studies in several
ways. Membership is open to qualified successful students in Omicron Delta Epsilon
(O.iE), an honorary Economics Fraternity, Delta Sigma Pi (.iEII), the Business Professional
Fraternity, the Accounting Club, the Economics Club, the Marketing Club, and the Society
for the Advancement of Management. These organizations are involved in a variety of
social and scholastic activities. In addition, the achievements of outstanding graduating
seniors are recognized with the following awards:
• Wall Street Journal Award for outstanding achievement in the study of Business or
Economics.
• H.&: R. Block Award for excellence in the study of Management
• Alfred 'Zeffiro Award for excellence in the study of Business Management
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
•
143
Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Public Accounts Award for high scholastic
achievement in the study of Accounting.
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN ECONOMICS
The Bachelor of Arts in Economics is a multipurpose program, with the objective of
providing students with a liberal arts background while taking them through a detailed
examination of the behavior of people as both producers and consumers. The program
develops an understanding of the economic problems facing us today at all levels of
government and business. This approach has been found to be attractive to many employers
in industry, government, and business. This program is an excellent preparation for
graduate study in economics, business administration, hospital administration, law, public
administration and urban planning. Regardless, many students successfully enter the labor
market immediately following graduation, bypassing graduate studies.
Curriculum:
(A) GeaeraJ Education: Compositionl-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science■;
12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective,.
(B) Area
Concentration: Economics Core: Introduction to Microeconomic• (ECO 201); Introduction
to Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Money and Banking (ECO 304); Intermediate Microeconomic ■ (ECO 301);
Intenncdiate Macroeconomic ■ (ECO 302); 14 additional credits of Economic, electives (at 200 level or above).
Communication Skills: Business Writing I (ENG 211) or Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Quantitative Skills:
Technical Math I (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181), Mathematica of Finance (MAT 171) Microa and
Application Software (CSC 101); Business Statiatic1 (MAT 225); Mathematical Economic• (ECO 320). Related
Councs: Accounting I (ACC 201) and Accounting D (ACC 202); five related courses approved by one'• advisor.
or
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE
IN ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
The Bachelor of Arts in Administration and Management provides for a broad-based
curriculum that is flexible to meet the educational needs of a business student with liberal
arts interests. The graduation requirements for this degree make it ideal for the transfer
student entering the university for the last two years of study. This degree will permit
maximum utili7Jltion of previously completed course work. The student will be prepared
for a variety of management positions in business, industry and government.
Curriculum
(A) GeaeraJ Education: Composition I (ENG 101) & D (ENG 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credits
in Natural Sciences; 12 credits in Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Introductory Microeconomic, (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomic■ (ECO
202); Money and Banking (ECO 304); Labor Economic■ (ECO 311); 6 additional credits of upper level Economic•
councs; Accounting I (ACC 201) & D (ACC 202); Managerial Accounting (ACC 321); Principles of Management
(MGT 201); Principles of Marketing (MKT 301); Financial Management (FIN 301); Labor Relations (MGT 362);
6 additional credits of upper-level courses in Accounting, Busineaa, Finance, Management or Marketing; Technical
Mathematics (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181); Buaineu Statistic, (MAT 225); Micros & Applications
Software (CSC 101); Oral Communication: Management (COM 250)°; Busine11 Writing I (ENG 211); Industrial
Psychology (PSY 209); and 5 credits of related electives approved by one's advisor.
144
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
BACHELOR OF SCIBNCE DEGREE IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
The Bachelor of Science in Business Administration offers a multitude of degree
programs that can be tailored to the exact characteristics and needs of each student. Often,
when students begin their college studies, they have not fully determined the career direction
desired. The course content of the various specialized options of th.is degree permits
modification of emphasis as the student' s interests become defined without loss of credits
earned toward graduation. The faculty offers a rich and diverse background of practical
business experience and scholarly achievement to equip the graduating student with the skills
and tools necessary for success in today's competitive job market. Students may focus on
one of the following specialized options: Accounting, Computer Based Management,
Marketing, Finance, Human Resource Management, Management, Business Economics, and
General.
The business world has grown increasingly complex in recent years. Computer
applications are being increasingly incorporated in today 's business programs. California
University's Bachelor of Science in Business Administration curriculum is designed to insure
that students acquire sufficient background in all of the required skill areas to undertake a
broad range of careers in business, industry and government. Labor Relations, Marketing,
Accounting, Production, Management, Finance and Communications are emphasized.
Career opportunities available to the graduate of th.is program are in such positions as
those of Accountant, Banker, City Manager, General Manager, Government Agency
Administrator, Hospital Administrator, Industrial Relations Manager, Insurance Agent,
Office Manager; Personnel Manager, Production Manager, Purchasing Agent, Retail
Manager, Sales Manager, Sales Representative, Securities Analyst, and Stock Broker.
Curriculum
(A) GaleraJ Education: Composition I (ENG IOI); Business Writing I (ENG 211); Group Discussion
Management (COM 102); College Algebra (MAT 18 1) or Technical Math I (MAT 182); Mathematics of Finance
I (MAT 171) or Basic Calculus (MAT 273) .; Business Statistics (MAT 225); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in
Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Coocentration: Businesa Writing II (ENG 212) or Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Oral
Communication: Management (COM 250); Micros & Application Software (CSC l 01); Industrial Psychology (PSY
209); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Money and Banking
(ECO 304) or Intermediate Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Labor Economics (ECO 311) or Intermediate
Microeconomics (ECO 301) or Managerial Economics (ECO 322); Introduction to Business (BUS 100) or Business
Elective; Accounting I (ACC 201) and II (ACC 202); Cost Accounting I (ACC 331) or Managerial Accounting
(ACC 321); Principles of Management (MGT 201 ); Principles of Marketing (MKT 301); Financial Management
(FIN 301); Labor Relations (MGT 362); Strategic Management (MGT 402); Analytical Methods (BUS 271) .
(1) For option in Accoulllillg: Intermediate Accounting I (ACC 301); Intermediate Accounting II (ACC
302); 9 credits of additional upper-level Accounting (ACC) courses (no internship credits); 11 credits in
Accounting, Business, Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing courses 200 level or above
(Recommended : Business Law I [BUS 242) and Computer Applications in Business [MGT 2711) .
(l) For option in Busl/less Economics: Intermediate Microeconomics (ECO 301); Intermediate
Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Mathematical Economics (ECO 320); 11 credits of Economics Electives 200
level or above; 5 credits from Accounting, Business, Finance, Management, Marketing electives .
(3) For option in CompuJer Based Sysums Ma11agemenJ: 15 credits of selected computer science courses;
Management Information Systems (MGT 371) ; Computer Based Management Systems (MGT 373) ; Applied
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
145
Econometric, (ECO 421); Upper level Accounting, Busincn, Economics, Finance, Management or
Marketin, Elective.
(4) For opdoa in Fbta1tee: Personal Money Manaaement (FIN 211); Advanced Financial Manaaement (FIN
302); Inve■tmcnta (FIN 305); Inaurance and Risk Manaaement (FIN 341); Financial Marketa and Inatitutions
(FIN 411); Applied Econometrica (ECO 421); Computer Applications in Businen I (MGT 271) or Lotus
1-2-3 Worbhop (CAW 102), and 7 credits from the following (3 to 6 of which may be 200 level or above):
Accounting, Busincn, Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing Electives); Bank Management (FIN
531); Upper Level Finance Elective; International Businesa Management (MGT 431); Industrial Organiution
(ECO 401); Public Finance (ECO 405); International Economics (ECO 431); Real Eatate Fundamentals (FIN
351); Real Eatate Practice (FIN 352), Busincn Law I (BUS 242).
(5) GIJNral: 26 credits of Accounting, Busincn, Economics, Finance, Management, Marketing electives
(200 level or above) . Lotu1 1-2-3 (CAW 102) and Computer Applications in Busincn I (MGT 271) are
recommended electives.
(6) For opdoa in HWrtall Rtsourr:e Malfllgtmelll: Business Law I (Bus 242), Human Resource
Management (MGT 352); Organiutional Behavior (MGT 301); Compensation Management (MGT 353);
Development of Interviewing Sicilia (PSY 370); 11 credits from the following (may include up to three
credits of Manaiement Electives): Demographic Analy1i1 (GEO 217), Human Ecology (GEO 240), Social
Psychology (PSY 211), Psychology of Gender Rolea (PSY 311), Paychology of Stress Management (PSY
222), Paychology of Personality (PSY 405), PaychologyTeating (PSY 340), Advanced Industrial Psychology
(PSY 428), Men, Women, and Work (SOC 125), Sociology of Workplace (SOC 215); Business, Society and
Government (BUS 342) .
(7) For opdoa in Malfllgtmelfl: Organiutional Behavior (MGT 301); Human reaource Management (MOT
352); Buainesa Law I (BUS 242); 9 credits of Upper level Management (MOT) courses (no internship
credits) and 8 credits of Management related course• to be ■elected with the approval of one's adviaor.
(8) For option in Marutlllg: Principles of Selling (MKT 222); Sales Management (MKT 321); Marketing
Management (MKT 401) Advertising Manaiement (MKT 351), Consumer Behavior (MKT 431), Marketing
Reacarch (MKT 431), Buainesa Marketing (MKT 452); 5 credits of the following (which may be 200 level
or above of Accounting, Buainen, Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing (MKT) electives):
Applied Econometrica (ECO 421) International Buainen Management (MGT 431 ); Real Eatate Fundamentals
(FIN 351); Real Eatate Practice (FIN 352), Inaurance and Risk Management (FIN 341), Retailing (MKT
331), Marketing for Non-profit organiutions (MKT 341), Busineas Law I (BUS 242) .
The alternative for students not wishing to make an immediate four-year commitment
to education is the two-year Associate Degree program in several disciplines. The
accounting student may wish to pursue a two-year course of study in Accounting preparatory
to entering a junior-level accounting position. Those interested in a two-year program in
Administration/Management or Computer Based Management can also pursue an Associate
Degree program. These curricula provide sufficient background in basic management skills
to qualify graduates for many entry-level supervisory positions in business and industry. For
students desiring a career in the financial service industry or for the employees of financial
institutions, an option in Banking is available in the Administration and Management
Associate Degree curriculum. Of course, a student can transfer all of the course work
completed toward the Associate Degree at any time to the appropriate four-year program
leading to a Bachelor's Degree. No more than fifteen credits can be transferred from
another institution to fulfill the requirements for the Associate Degree programs.
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
146
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN ACCOUNTING
The Department of Business and Economics offers this two-year associate degree to
provide students with high quality training in accounting. In the career ladder concept, the
university has designed the program so that students may transfer into the many four-year
business programs.
Careers are available in a number of fields in business and government, including
purchasing, sales, bookkeeping, and accounting itself.
Curriculum
(A) Gmeral Education: English Compoaition I (ENG 101); Bu ■inesa Writing I (ENG 211), Colle1e A11ebra
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematic■ I (MAT 182); Micro■ & Application■ Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credits in Humanities; 3 credits in Social Science■; 3 credits in Natural
Science■; 3 credits of free elective■ .
(B) Area ofConceutration: Intro to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I (ACC 201) and II (ACC 202); Coat
Accounting (ACC 331); Principle ■ of Management (MGT 201); Computer Application■ in Bu ■iness I (MGT 272);
6 credits from Elements of Economic ■ (ECO 100), Current Economic Iaaue■ (ECO 200), Intro Micro (ECO 201),
and Intro Macro (ECO 202); 6 credit■ of Accounting Elective■ to be ■elected with the approval of advi■or; 6-11
credits of Accounting, Buainess, Economics, Finance, Management and Marketing elective ■ (with the approval
of advi■or ■ome of these elective■ may be ■elected from lnduatrial P■ycbology (PSY 209), Mathematic■ of Finance
I (MAT 171), Bu1ine11 Stati1tic1 (MAT 225); Oral Communication■ Management (COM 250) .
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE
IN ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
This two-year associate degree provides students with the basic instruction for an entry level
management position with business or industry. In addition, all of the credits earned in this
program are transferable towards the four-year degree.
Careers available to the graduate of this program include a large number of junior
management positions in business and government, including sales, purchasing, employee
relations, and general management.
Curriculum
(A) Gmeral Education: English Composition I (ENG 101); Business Writing I (ENG 211); College Algebra
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematics (MAT 182); Micros & Application Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credit■ in Social Sciences; 3 credit■ in Natural Science■; 3 credit■ of free
electives.
(B) Area
Cooceotratioo: Introduction to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I & II (ACC 201 & 202);
Principle■ of Management (MGT 201); Computer Applications in BusineBS (MGT 271); 6 credit■ from Element■
of Economic, (ECO 100), Current Economic Issues (ECO 200), Introductory Microeconomic ■ (ECO 201),
Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); 20 credits of Restricted Electives to include 12-18 credits of Accounting,
BusineBS, Economics, Finance, Management, and Marketing courses; and 3-9 credits from Computer course,
Industrial Psychology (PSY 209); Mathematics of Finance I (MAT 171); BusineBS Statistics (MAT 225); Sociology,
or Social Science, Psychology Elective; Oral Communication Management (COM 250).
or
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
147
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE IN ADMINISI'RATION AND MANAGEMENT
OPTION: Banking
The Department of Business and Economics offers the two-year associate degree in
Banking as an option under the Administration and Management program. This curriculum
is designed to meet the needs for junior level management positions in the financial services
industry.
Curriculum
(A) Geaeral Education: Engliah Composition I (ENG 101); Buainea Writiq I (ENG 211), Colle1e
Algebn (MAT 181) or Technical Mathematica I (MAT 182); Micro■ & Application Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credits in Humanities; 3 credits in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Natunl
Sciences; 3 credits of free electives.
(8) Area of Concentration: Accounting I (ACC 201) and n (ACC 202); Mana1erial Accounlilli (ACC
321); Elements of Economics (ECO 100); Introductory Microeconomic■ (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomics
(ECO 202); Computer Applications in Bu■inea (MOT 271); Principles of Mana1ement (MOT 201), Fmancial
Management (FIN 301); Money and Bankiq (ECO 304); 2 credits of Finance elective; 9 credits from A.I.B.
course■ or from a list of selected counea in Bu1ine11, Mathematic ■, and Finance.
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE
IN COMPUTER BASED MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
The Business and Economics Department offers this two-year associate degree to
provide students with general management and computer skills.
Curriculum
(A) Geaeral Education: Engliah Composition I (ENG 101); Businea Writing I (ENG 211), College Algebn
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematics I (MAT 182); Micro■ & Applications Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credits in Humanities; 3 credits in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Natunl
Sciences; 3 credits of free electives.
(8) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Businea (BUS 100); Accounting I (ACC 201) and Il (ACC
202); Principles of Management (MGT 201); Computer Applications in Businea (MOT 271); Management
Information Systems (MOT 371) or Computer Based Management Systems (MOT 373); 6 credits from Elements
of Economics (ECO 100), Current Economic l1111es (ECO 200); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201), and
Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); 9 credits of ■elected computer courses; Managerial Accounting (ACC
321) or Cost Accounting (ACC 331); 3 credits of Economic ■ elective; 2 credits of Accounting, Businea,
Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing elective.
ACCOUNTING COURSES (ACC)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
ACC 201. ACCOUNTING I. The fundamentals of debit and credit; the use of journals and ledgen; basic
accounting procedures; adjusting and closing entries; completion of accounting cycle; prepantion of pertinent
financial ■tatements. (3 en.) (F,S)
148
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
ACC 202. ACCOUNTING II. A continuation of basic accounting principles with an emph11i1 on partnenhip and
corponte accounting. Prerequisite: ACC 201. (3 crs.) (F,S)
ACC 218. FEDERAL INCOME TAX I. An introduction to individual fedenl income tax accounting. (3 crs.)
(F)
ACC 301 . INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING I. In-depth treatment of baaic accounting principle, and concepts.
A prepantion for advanced courses in accounting and for the theory and pnctice aectiona of the Uniform CPA
Examination. Prerequi ■ite : ACC 202. (3 en.) (F,S)
ACC 302. INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING II. A continuation of the in-depth treatment of basic accounting
principles and concept■ with the emphasis on corpontions. A prepantion for advanced course, in accounting and
for the theory and pnctice sections of the Uniform CPA Examination. Prerequisite: ACC 301 . (3 crs.) (F,S)
ACC 318 . FEDERAL INCOME TAX II. Advanced topics in fedenl taxation. Partnership ■ , decedents, e■tate1,
trusts, corpontions, pension and profit sharing plans, foreign income, securitie■ tnnaactiona, etc . Prerequisite:
ACC 218. (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 321 . MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING . For non-accounting majors; emphasizes the use of accounting data
in the decision-making process of a business enterprise. Topics covered are cost-volume relationahip1;
manufacturing costs and analysis; relevant cost analysis; budgeting and variance analysis; responsibility accounting
and coat allocation; job and process product coating. Prerequisite: ACC 202. (3 crs.) (F,S)
ACC 331. COST ACCOUNTING I. An introduction to basic cost-accounting principle,, cost-volume, profit
analysis, standard costing, process and job order coating and departmental budgeting. Prerequisite: ACC 202 . (3
crs .) (F, Summer)
ACC 332. COST ACCOUNTING II. A survey of special topics in the field of manufacturing accounting.
Prerequisites: ACC 331. (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 341. NONPROFIT ACCOUNTING . An introduction to accounting for governmental and not-for-profit
organizations, including analysis of current, plant, and other genenl and special funds . Empha1i1 will be given
to planning, prognmming, and budgeting to achieve institutional objectives. Cost benefit analy1i1 will allO be
developed within the framework of funds allocation to specific prognma. Prerequisite: ACC 202. (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 401 . ADV ANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING I. Special topics in accounting. Mergers and acquisitions,
consolidated financial reporta, accounting for international opentions, etc. Prerequisite: ACC 302. (3 crs.) (F)
ACC 402 . ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING II. Study of the Financial Accounting concepts relative
to nonprofit organizations, fiduciaries, and other special topics in financial accounting. Prerequi ■ite: ACC 302. (3
crs.) (S)
ACC 418. TAX PLANNING AND CONCEPTS . Thia course deals with the broad recognition of the tax effect
on businesa decisions, and a pnctical approach to tax planning for both the corponte and individual taxpayer.
Prerequisite: ACC 218 . (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 441. AUDITING. Internal control evaluation and financial compliance, professional ethics, auditing
standards and procedures, statistical sampling and EDP auditing . Prerequisite: ACC 301 (3 crs.) (F)
ACC 491. ACCOUNTING INTERNSHIP. Prscticum with Public Accounting firms , government, or industry.
Prerequisites: 18 credits in Accounting and consent of instructor. (Repeatable; Variable credit; a maximum of 12
credit■ may be used towards a baccalaureate degree.) (F,S)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
149
BUSINESS COURSES (BUS)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
BUS 100. INI'RODUCTION TO BUSINESS. The internal and functional actting of busincaa cnterpriac, ita
organization and control (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 242. BUSINESS LAW I. A study of commercial law as it relates to contracta, agency and criminal and
constitutional law pertaining to business. Prerequisites: BUS 100 and at least sophomore standing (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 243. BUSINESS LAW D. A continuation of Business Law I. Basic legal conccpta of sale,, commercial
paper, accurcd transitions and related topic ■. Prerequisite: BUS 242. (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 271. ANALYTICAL METHODS. The courac prcacnta mathematical tool, which arc applied to bu1inc11
decision making. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or EC(? 201 and MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.)
BUS 342. BUSINESS, SOCIETY AND GOVERNMENT. A survey of the historical and contemporary
rclatiomhip between government and busincaa in the United States. Special emphasis is given to the dcvclopmcnta
of the past two decades. Prerequisite: At least Junior standing and ECO 100 or equivalent. (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 343 . CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY. Incorporating the concept of social responsibility or
corporate social responsiveness in the corporate busincaa atrategy; how to aaacaa organizational performance on
social issue, and design information systems to monitor policies in a large complex organization; the identification
of the stages that this process goes through and the characteristic problems and tasks aaaociatcd with each stage;
the evolution and/or design of structures and procedures for making the handling of social i88Uca consistent with
business strategies. Prerequisite: Junior standing. (3 en.) (S)
BUS 379 . SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN BUSINESS. (3 en.)
BUS 492. BUSINESS INTERNSHIP. The student ia placed with a buaincaa firm, a bank, a govemmcntagency,
or a non-profit organization for on-the-job and/or counaclling experience. It offen a practical training ground for
students, which supplemcnta academic training by permitting them to addrcsa actual problems in a real busincsa
environment. Prerequisite: Senior standing or permisaion of instructor. (Repeatable; Variable credit; a maximum
of 12 credits may be uacd to a baccalaureate degree.) (F,S)
BUS 495 . SEMINAR IN BUSINESS . An intensive examination of aclectcd subjects from the general field of
busincsa. Prerequisite: Conacnt of instructor. Thia courac is repeatable one time if the subject matter i, different
(3 era.)
ECONOMICS COURSES (ECO)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
ECO 100. ELEMENTS OF ECONOMICS. An introduction to the clements of economic analysis, structured
particularly for the non-major; the student is exposed to the mechanics of the market system and a survey of
modem macroeconomic theory and policy. Prerequisite: None. (3 en.) (F,S)
ECO 200. CURRENT ECONOMIC ISSUES . An application to contemporary economic principle,. Current
readings in economics arc examined . Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 . (3 en.) (Summer)
150
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
ECO 201. INTRODUCTORY MICROECONOMICS . An introduction to the market mechanism in a modem
mixed economy; aupply and demand analyaia i■ applied to consumer market■ aa well aa re■ource markets. (3 en.)
(F,S)
ECO 202. INTRODUCTORY MACROECONOMICS. An introduction to the determination of national income;
problems of inflation and unemployment; international tnde and economic growth. Emphaaia ia placed on the role■
of monetary and fi■cal policy in the conduct of macroeconomic policy. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 i■
recommended. (3 en.) (F,S)
ECO 242. GOVERNMENT AND BUSINESS . A ■tudy of the legal framework: within which buaineu operates,
including the Sherman Anti-Trust Act, Clayton Act, Robimon-Patmon Act, Federal Trade Act, and other newer
forma of BOCial control reJUlation. The course explores the relationahipa between government and bu■ineu:
government aa reJUlator, subsidizer, partner, and competition. Prerequisite: ECO 201. (3 en.)
ECO 251. DEVELOPMENT OF THE AMERICAN ECONOMY. A aurvey of the beginning, development, and
growth of the American economy with emphasis on the busineu sector. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 or
ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 301. INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS . An analysis of the theories of consumer behavior and of
firma in the allocation of re■ourcea, and of general price and distribution theory, with application to current
economic iuuea . Prerequisite■: ECO 201, ECO 202 or permiuion of instructor. (3 era.) (F)
ECO 302. INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS. Analy ■ia of the determination of national income,
employment and price level■. Di ■cu1Sion of consumption, investment, inflation, and government fi■cal and monetary
policy. Prerequisite: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 era.) (S)
ECO 304. MONEY AND BANKING. Relation of money and credit to economic activity and prices; impact of
public policy in financial markets and for good■ and aervices; policies, structure and the functions of the Federal
Reaerve System; organization, operation■, and functions of the commercial banking system, 11 related to queationa
of economic stability and public policy. Prerequi■itea: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 era.) (F,S)
ECO 307. STATE AND LOCAL FINANCE. Principle ■ and problems of financing state and local government■.
Topics include taxation, expenditures, intergovernmental pnt■, and governmental fiscal relations . Prerequisite:
ECO 100 or equivalent. (3 crs.)
ECO 311. LABOR ECONOMICS. An introduction to labor economic ■, theories of the labor movement, the
American labor movement, wage and employment theory, comparative labor movement■ and tnde union impact
on wages, price■, and national income. Prerequisite,: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 crs.) (F,S)
ECO 320. MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS. A course designed to enable Economics and Busine88 majors to
understand the simpler aspects of mathematical economics. Relationahipa of functions and graphs, simultaneous
equations, maximization technique■, and thoae part■ of algebra and calculus required for economic analysis are
preaented. Prerequiaites: ECO 201, ECO 202 and MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 crs.) (F)
ECO 322._ MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS. A aurvey of analytical techniques available to the modem bu1ine11
manager. Topica include economic■ for managers; busine88 forecasting; coat and production functions; industrial
pricing; profit planning; business decision making. Prerequisites: BUS 271 or ECO 320, or a course in calculus.
(3 crs.) (S)
ECO 331. REGIONAL ECONOMICS. An introduction to regional analysis: theories of city locations and
hierarchies, industrial location patterns, land-uae patterns, the short-run impact of industrial change upon
employment in one community and on long-run differentials of per capita income between regions. Prerequisite■:
ECO 201 and ECO 202. (3 crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
151
ECO 342. ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS. Environmental pollution, failure of the market 1y1tcm, and
optimum re1011rce allocation; levela of pollution abatement and public policy; energy and public policy.
Prerequi1ite: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 3Sl. COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS . An analysis of the inatitutional atructure of each type of
economy and understanding of the reasona for the aimilaritiea and difference, of inatitutional llructures by
comparing capitalill, aocialiat, and communill economic ayatcma. Prerequisite&: ECO 100, or ECO 201 , or ECO
202. (3 en.)
ECO 379. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN ECONOMICS. Thia counc is designed to meet the changing intereata of
atudenta and faculty. Topica vary in reaponac to thoac intercata. Prerequiaitea: ECO 201 , ECO 202 or permiaaion
of inatructor. (Variable credit.)
ECO 401. INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION. Analysia of market atructure and ita relation to market performance,
changing atructure of U.S. induatry, and pricing policies in different indullrial claasificationa of monopoly and
competition in relation to the problema of public policy . Prerequiaite: ECO 201 . (3 en.)
ECO 40S. PUBLIC FINANCE. A atudy of the role of federal , atate, and local govemrnenta in meeting public
wanta. Topic• include analysis of tax theory and policy, government expenditures, public debt management,
government budgeting, benefit coat analysis and income redillribution. Prerequisites: ECO 201 , ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 421 . APPLIED ECONOMETRICS . The formulation, ellimation and testing of economic models. Topics
include aingle variable and multiple variable regression techniques, ellimation of lagged relationships, uac of
dummy variables, problema of multicolincarity and autocorrelation and syatcm of equationa. Prerequisites: MAT
22S, ECO 201 and ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 431. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS. A descriptive and theoretical analysis of international trade,
balance of payment accounta, comparative coata, mechanisma of international financial relationa. Prerequisites:
ECO 201 , ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 433·. ECONOMICS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT. Undentanding of the obstacles to economic
growth, requirementa for ,rowth, and other topics related to economic growth in underdeveloped countries.
Prerequi1ite1: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 4S l . HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT. An extensive survey of the development of economic thought
from ancient time• to the prcacnt stressing the contributions of Smith, Ricardo, Marx, Marshall and Keynes . This
counc lhould be taken quite late in the undergraduate career. Prerequisites: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 479. HONORS COURSE IN ECONOMICS . Integrated reading under staff direction. Selected topics are
investigated and written reporta are submitted. Prerequisites: ECO 201, ECO 202 or permission of instructor.
The counc ia repeatable for one time if counc contenta arc different. (3 en.)
ECO 490. COMMUNITY RESOURCES WORKSHOP. A worklhop that expoacs teachen to various community
re1011rce1 and encourages their implementation into educational programa. Emphasis is placed on the economic
aapecta of community life with approximately twenty-five houn of classroom economics supplementing numerous
field tripa and lectures. This is not a repeatable counc . Prerequisites: Senior standing or college degree. (6 en.)
ECO 492. ECONOMICS INTERNSHIP. The atudent ia placed with a business firm, a bank, and induatrial firm,
a government office, a health care facility or a similar institution for on-the-job experiences related to classroom
counc work. This counc lhould be taken quite late in the undergraduate career. Credit houn will range from
1 to 12 depending upon the nature of the particular usignment. Prerequisite: Senior standing or permission of
inatructor. A maximum of 12 crcdita can be uacd toward the completion of degree. (Variable credit.) (F,S)
152
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
ECO 495. SEMINAR IN ECONOMICS. An intensive examination of aclected subject.a from the fields of
Economic,, Management, Buainc11 and Labor Relations. It ia a repeatable courac if courac content.a arc different .
Prerequisite: Permiuion of instructor. (3 en.)
FINANCE COURSES (FIN)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
FIN 201 . INTRODUCTION TO FINANCE. A survey courac which coven an introduction to financial market.a
and institutions responsible for the flow of fund ■ in the economy. The basic principles and concept.a which assist
the market participant.a in making sound financial decisions arc discussed. Prerequisite: BUS 100 and ECO 100
recommended . (3 era.) (S)
FIN 211. PERSONAL MONEY MANAGEMENT. A guide to penonal finance to beat meet one's objectives and
make financial decisions easier. Topics include budget.a, major purchaacs, use of credit and bank loans, insurance,
real estate and investment in securities, taxes and estate planning. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or permi11ion of
instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
FIN 301. FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT. The study of financial analysis, planning and control, including
working capital management, capital budgeting, coat of capital, and other selected subjects. Advanced techniques
of financial analysis arc employed. Prerequisites: ECO 201 and MAT 171 . MAT 225 is recommended . (3 en.)
(F,S)
FIN 302. ADV AN CED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT. A continuation of FIN 301. An intensive study of cost
of capital, long-term financing and analysis of caac1 relating to financial decisions of firms . Prerequisite: FIN 301 .
(3 en .) (S)
FIN 305. INVESTMENTS. An introduction to financial investments. Topics include accurities and securities
markets, invelltment risks, returns and constraints, portfolio policies, and institutional investment policies.
Prerequisite: MAT 171 and MAT 225 or permi11ion of instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
FIN 341 . INSURANCE AND RISK MANAGEMENT. A survey of the nature and significance of risk and the
basic ideas, problems, and principles found in modem insurance and other methods of handling risk. Prerequisite:
BUS 100 (3 en.) (Summer)
FIN 351 . REAL EST ATE FUNDAMENTALS. A basic cognitive courac covering physical, legal and economic
aspects of real estate. Topics include valuation, agreements of sale, title, leasing, settlements and landlord-tenant
relations . (2 en.) (F)
FIN 352. REAL ESTATE PRACTICE. Role of the real estate agent in listing, sales contract, financing, and
completion ofRESPA approved settlement sheet. The course examines the legal and ethical aspects of brokerage .
(2 en.) (S)
FIN 405. ADVANCED INVESTMENT ANALYSIS. Systematic approach to security analysis and valuation;
portfolio conatruction and management. Prerequisite; FIN 305 or permission of instructor. (3 en .)
FIN 411. FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS. Description and analysis of major financial
institutions, money and capital markets. Current topics in financial market and institutions. (3 en.) (S)
FIN 531. BANK MANAGEMENT. Detailed analysis of operational decisions faced by bank managers in the
areas of loans, investments, sources of funds, and liability management. (3 crs.) (S)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
153
MANAGEMENT COURSES (MGT)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
MGT 201. PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT. A survey of the theories in the field of management, covering
concepts developed by the classical school, the behavionl school, and the management science school. Emphasis
i1 on human facton, but the influences of economic• and technological facton are alao conaidered. Prerequisite:
PSY 100 or conaent of inatructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 205. ENTREPRENEURSHIP I: SMALL BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS . Entrepreneunhip and new
venture initiation. A atudy of the development of a business appropriate to the objectives and reaourcea of the
individual entrepreneur. This coune deals with the initiation of a new business venture nther than the management
of ongoing enterprises, and treats new venture fonnation primarily from the standpoint of the individual
entrepreneur nther than that of an established enterprise expanding into a new area. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3
en.)
MGT 271 . COMPUTER. APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS I. An introduction to the basic tools and techniques
of aoftware uaed to aolve business problems. This coune is taught on a lecture-labontory basis in which the
computer i1 utilized to present applicationa of the spreadsheet in business situations. (I er.) (F,S)
MGT 273 . COMPUTER. APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS Il. A continuation of Computer Applications in
Bu1ine11 I with an emphasi1 on more advanced topics and problem-aolving. This coune is taught on a
lecture-labontory basi1 in which the computer ia utilized to present applications of the spreadsheet in busine11
aituationa. (1 er.) (F)
MGT 301. ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR. An examination of theories and concepts relating the individual
to the organization. The coune analyzes the forces which influence behavior within an organization. Prerequisite:
MGT 201 or consent of instructor. (3 crs.) (F,S)
MGT 305. ENTREPRENEURSHIP Il: SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT. A management coune designed
to integnte all busineaa functions at a small business level. Study of the development and management of a
busine11 plan appropriate to the objectives and reaources of the individual entrepreneur. This coune deals with
the management of ongoing enterprises. A computer aoftware package is utilized to develop various cases and
problems found in the text. Each atudent develops a business plan in either Retailing Opentions, Service Business,
or Manufacturing Opentions. Prerequisite: MGT 205 . (3 crs.)
MGT 311. ORGANIZATION THEORY AND DESIGN. Organizations are essential to the way our aociety
opente1 and permeate and shape our lives. In addition to being the means for providing goods and services,
organizations create the settings in which moll people will spend a good part of their lives working either as
subordinates or managers or both. This coune offers students an understanding of the components that make up
an organization, its complexity, its structure and design and the interrelationships that exist among all of its
components. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3 crs.)
MGT 315. ORGANIZATION DEVEWPMENT AND CHANGE. Change pervades modem aociety. All
organizationa exill within a changing environment. To survive and develop, organizations mull be able to adapt
to these change, and respond to opportunities for growth. Change is also an inherent aspect of management.
Managen mull understand and manage change if the organization is to thrive and grow. This coune is about
planned organization change and is designed to introduce the atudent to the field of organization development, its
definition, 1oal1, precedents, emergence, approaches, and current status. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3 en.)
154
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
MGT 352. HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT. Decision-making and analyse■ of major management
problema that arise in manpower planning, recruitment, selection, development, compensation, and appraiaal of
employee■ in various organization■. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3 en.) (S)
MGT 353 . COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT. The design, implementation and evaluation of wage and aalary
package in both private and public sccton. Prcrequi,ite: MGT 352 or consent of instructor. (F)
MGT 362. LABOR RELATIONS . A survey of the many facet, of employee-management relation■ . The counc
examine■ the historical, atatutory and aocial bases for modem workplace relationships with empha■ia given to the
role of organized labor. Prerequisite: Junior level atanding or consent of instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 371. MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS. An introduction to management control ay ■tcms ,
which include control of production com, atandard co■u, flexible budget,, managed cosll, profit centen and capital
acquisition■. Prerequisite: MGT 201, CSC 101, or MGT 271. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 373 . COMPUTER BASED MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS. An introduction to the
technology, application, and management of computer-baaed information systems. Topic ■ covered include bu ■ineu
computer ay■tcms, computer hardware, computer aoftwarc, data-based management ay&tcms, general accounting
application, materials control application, management information proceuing, ay&tcms planning, and operation■
management. The counc usca LITTUS 1-2-3. Prcrequi1ite1: CSC IOI, MGT 371. (3 en.)
MGT 402. STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT. The integrated decision making of general management. Topic,
include corporate strategy and implementing corporate ■trategy . Prerequisites: MGT 201, MKT 301, FIN 301,
ACC 202. or consent of instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 431 . INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT. The concepll, problems and policies of international
business enterprises for managen. Prerequisite: Junior level atanding . (3 en.) (F)
MGT 452. HUMAN RESOURCE STRATEGY AND PLANNING . The human resource ia emerging a■ a
1i1nificant contingency in the formulation and implementation of organizational ■trategic plan■. Personnel policies
and proirama a■ well a■ the available 1kil11, knowledge, and attitude ■ can provide particular opportunitie■ or
limitation■ to management as an organization■'• ■trategic 1oals and plan■ arc defined. This counc is de ■igned to
examine organizational human resources manaiement from a strategic perspective. The key focu ■ i ■ on exploring
HR planning and atnte,Y concept,, developUJi an undentandilli of the related analytical tools, and determining
how these concept, and tools can be used to enhance an or,anization's competitive position. Prcrequi■ite: MGT
352. (3 en.)
MGT 492. SMALL BUSINESS INTERNSHIP. A pro,ram in which busineu majon intern with a local firm for
a scme■ter. Student, draw upon their academic knowledge to aid the local enterprise in ita over-all operation. The
type and scope of the problems vary with each individual ■ituation. The counc i ■ open to student, with junior or
senior atanding who have submitted a formal application, have the recommendation of a faculty member, and have
a aatiafactory Q.P.A. (Repeatable; Variable credit; a maximum of 12 credit, can be used toward the completion
of a baccalaureate degree .)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
155
MARKETING COURSES (MKT)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
MKT 222. PRINCIPLES OF SELLING . A lltlldy of basic principles of persuasive communications with emphasis
on proven, pnctical selling techniques. Activities include intenctive claaa discu88ions and video role-playing. (3
en.) (F,S)
MKT 301. PRINCIPLES OF MARKIITING. An introduction to basic principle, of marketilli manaaement.
Other topic, covered are selecting target market■ , developing marketing mixes, functions of marketing management.
Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 and MOT 201. (3 en.) (F,S)
MKT 321. SALES MANAGEMENT. Proven management techniques for remotely located field aalc■ force
member, are fully explored. Motivation, evaluation, and control of aales force activitie1 are developed through case
presentations and class discussions. Prerequisites: MKT 222. (3 en.) (F,S)
MKT 331. RETAILING. A management and marketing analysis of department, discount, specialty and chain stores
with special emphasis on location, human re10Urces, merchandising and effective pricing. Prerequisite: BUS 100
recommended. (3 en.)
MKT 341. MARKIITING FOR NON-PROFIT ORGANIZATIONS. A marketing coune de1igned for both
busine11 and nonbusiness majon that differentiates between for-profit and not-for-profit organiutions, investigates
the competitive environment facing nonprofits (e.g., hospital ■, churches, charities, college1,and univenities
performing arts groups), and applies research techniques and marketing management tools (product policy,
distribution and delivery systems, monetary pricing, and communication atntegies) to the nonbusines■ entity. (3
en.) (S)
MKT 351 . ADVERTISING MANAGEMENT. A study of the basic component■ of the adverti1ing mix,
establishing media selection techniques, and determining the beat vehicles for specific selling and promotional
efforts commonly confronting marketing managen today. Prerequisite: MKT 301. (F)
MKT 402. MARKIITING MANAGEMENT. Description and analysis of the nature, atntegie1 and techniques
of marketilli management. Prerequisite: Principles of Marketing (MKT 301). (3 en.) (F)
MKT 421. CONSUMER BEHAVIOR. Thi• coune ia designed to integnte the discipline, of psychology,
anthropology, economics and sociology with marketing to explain, undentand, and predict consumer deci1ions.
Thia ia achieved by exploring both the theoretical and pnctical implications of (1) individual behavior variables
such as motivation, learning, perception, penonality, and attitudes; (2) group influence, 111ch a, family, culture,
social claaa and reference group behavior; and (3) consumer deci1ion proce1■e1 111ch H cognitive di110nance, bnnd
loyalty, new product adoption and risk reduction. Prerequisite: MKT 301. (3 en.) (S)
MKT. 431. MARKETING RESEARCH. Description of behavionl and statistical tools for designing and
implementing research projects. Prerequisite■ : Principles of Marketing (MKT 301) and Busine ■■ Statistic ■ (MAT
225). (3 en.) (S)
MKT 451 . BUSINESS MARKIITING . The chancteriatic1 of bu1ineaa-to-bu1ineaa markctilli are explored and
developed focu1ing on environment, pricing, planning, distribution, evaluation and atntegy development for
marketing bu1ine11 and industrial producu to the professional user or buyer. Prerequi1ite: MKT 301. (3 en.) (S)
CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES
156
CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES (CCU)
One credit may be scheduled each semester in any one of the following. An activity may
be repeated in a following semester, but a total of no more than four credits towards
graduation may be earned in this way. These activities always count as "free electives" and
never towards fulfilling the requirements in any area of speciali:zation.
CCU 103. CO-EDUCATIONAL WEIGHT LIFTING AND CONDmONING (1 er.)
CCU 151. SHOTOKAN KARATE. Shotolcan Karate ia divided into three categoric■: Kihon (basic bloclca,
punches, kick, and stances); Kata (pre-arranged forms simulating combat aituationa); Kum.ie (sparring) . In each
category the beginner ia given inatruction at the moll basic level until the techniques become apontaneou1. (I er.)
CCU 187. PEP BAND. The Pep Band i1 composed of bra11, woodwind and percuaaionilll from the Univenity
Band. Thia enaemble performs at selected basketball games. (1 er., spring semeller)
CCU 188. WOODWIND ENSEMBLE. The Woodwind Ensemble ia composed of woodwind playen from the
Univenity Band . It explore■ all phase ■ of literature composed for this type of enaemble. The group rehearses one
hours a week and performs both on and off campus. (1 er.)
CCU 189. BRASS ENSEMBLE. The Braaa Ensemble ia composed ofbraaa players from the Univenity Band.
It explores all phase, of literature composed for thia type of enaemble. The group rehearse• one hour a week and
performs both on and off campus. (1 er.)
CCU 197. UNIVERSITY BAND. The University Band follows two curricula determined by the semeater. During
the fall semester, the University Band performs at football games and parade■ and is the featured exhibition band
at numerous marching band festivals . Membenhip in this enaemble ia open to any interested inatrumentalill.
Membership is alao open to those wishing to audition for feature twirler or for a position on the Silk Squad, Dance
Line or Rifle Line. During the spring semeater, the University Band performs literature which encompaue1 all
facets of the idiom. This enaemble performs at convocationa and concerts, both on and off campus. (I er.)
CCU 198. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY CHOIR. The California Univenity Choir provide, an opportunity for
students to sing a wide variety of music from the contemporary aa well aa the traditional repertoire. They perform
frequently on campue and throughout he area . Membership in the Choir ia elective; auditiona are not required . (1
er.)
CCU 199. CALIFORNIA SINGERS . The California Singers is a small performing ensemble. Membership in the
group is determined by audition. There are an equal number of men and women. The basic performance style
is that of a jazz/show choir, although other styles of music are performed when appropriate for the aeaaon or the
audience. Smaller groups, such aa a women's trio or a men'• barbershop quartet, are formed within this group .
Choreography is a regular part of the performances presented by this group. (1 er.)
CCU 292. STUDENT GOVERNMENT. Student Congre11 ia the official student governing body. Thia course
provides non-elected and elected studenta the opportunity to earn co-<:urricular credit while participating in Student
Congress. Students learn and practice leadership and administrative skills, implement programa that enrich campua
life and communicate atudent concerna to administrative and faculty peraonnel. (I er.)
CCU 293 . PUBLICATIONS: NEWSPAPER (1 er.)
CO-CURRRICULAR ACTIVITIES
157
CCU 295. PUBLICATIONS: "PEGASUS" (1 er.)
CCU 333 . RADIO STATION (Y{YCS). A student enrolled in this co-curricular course is introduced to broadcast
radio. The student becomes involved with on-air requirements as well as basic news and production techniques.
AJI work takes place at WVCS, the University's 3300-watt FM Station, which is owned and operated by the Student
Association, Inc . (1 er.)
CCU 379 . INTER-RESIDENCE HALL COUNCIL. The council is a representative group of students elected from
the six residence halls. Students taking this course assist in the governance of this organization and participate in
a number of the organization's service projects. (1 er.)
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
158
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
(Formerly Speech Communication)
COMMUNICATION STUDIES
-GENERAL
- RADIO AND TELEVISION
- PUBLIC RELATIONS
See also Secondary Communication Certification, pages 164-165, in this catalog.
Assistant Professor Dencil K. Backus, chair; Assistant Professor Patrick L. Miller, assistant
chair. Professor Marcella A. Rye Blout; Associate Professors Robert C. Cowles, Halbert
H. Holloway, J. Drew McGukin; Assistant Professors Sylvia L. Foil, MacDonald N. Kale,
Patricia Milford, George Yochum; Instructor James 0. Carter.
PURPOSE
Communication Studies is the discipline which focuses on human communicative
behavior and its influence on our personal, professional, social and cultural lives. The
curriculum provides the student with an opportunity (a) to understand more fully the human
communication process and how it affects the ways people interact with one another, and
(b) to develop communication skills which enhance the individual person's capacity to
function as a citizen in the world community.
PROGRAM
Students majoring in Communication Studies have four academic program options. (1)
The General Option provides the major with a core of general courses as well as a number
of restricted and open electives. This option is appropriate for those who wish to further
their educational careers in such areas as socio-political influence, rhetoric, or organizational
communication. (2) The Radio/felevision Option emphasizes the application of information
and theories learned in the classroom to the practice of production and critical decisionmaking. This option is appropriate for persons pursuing a career in telecommunications and
broadcast journalism. (3) The Public Relations Option is interdisciplinary in nature, since
courses are taken in disciplines such as English, Business and Psychology. (4) The fourth
option is for persons who want to teach in the area of Communication. The Communication
Studies Department in cooperation with the College of Education and Human Services
provides course work necessary for secondary school certification in Communication with
a speech concentration.
The academic program is enhanced by an internship program with radio and television
broadcast facilities. The TV studio supports campus efforts in video production. Students
have an opportunity to receive "hands-on" experience in conceiving, producing and editing
programs.
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
159
Radio station WVCS is owned and operated by California University's Student
Association, Incorporated. A faculty member from the Department of Communication
Studies serves as the educational advisor to the station. Students can become involved in
all aspects of radio programming and management.
Internships are available to students in their junior or senior year if they have
maintained a 3.0 grade point average or higher in their area of concentration.
HONOR SOCIETY
Pi Kappa Delta (IIIU) is the honor society for intercollegiate debaters, individual evl?nts
competitors, and teachers of communication. The Penn Zeta Chapter was organized in
1963. Undergraduate students can achieve membership in this society if they meet the
minimum standards of forensic participation and are extended an invitation to join. Further
information can be obtained at the departmental office.
AWARDS
Each year the faculty in Communication Studies selects one of the graduating seniors
as an Outstanding Graduate. The honoree receives a plaque, a one-year membership in the
Speech Communication Association, the national organization for communication
professionals, and a one-year subscription to one of its five professional journals.
CAREERS
Aside from careers in broadcast journalism or public relations, graduates can obtain
positions with management training programs, as speech writers and as salespeople. An
undergraduate major in Communication Studies is an asset for careers in law, religion,
education, labor relations, politics, marketing and resource development.
I
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES:
GENERAL OPfION
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: MAJOR COURSES : Perspectives on Communication (COM 100), Oral
Communication (COM l Ol); Fundamentals of Group Discussion (COM l 07); Interpersonal Communication (COM
165); Forensic Worbhop I (COM 192) and Il (COM 292) AND m (COM 392); Introduction To Oral Interpretation
(COM 224); Argumentation and Debate (COM 230); Language and Behavior (COM 315); Persuasion (COM 350);
Speech Criticism (COM 460); Communication Research Techniques (COM 481); Communication Theory (COM
490); RESTRICTED ELECTIVES: 9 additional credits in Communication Studies courses: Voice and Articulation
(COM 210) or Advanced Oral Interpretation (COM 324); Survey of R/rV/Film (COM 105) or TV Production
(COM 240) or Radio Production (COM 245); Presidential Rhetoric (COM 235) or Freedom of Speech (COM 260).
COGNATE COURSES: 23 credits from other disciplines pertinent to the student's academic or profenional
objective.
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
160
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES:
RADIO AND TELEVISION OPTION
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: Composition 1-ll (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanitie1; 12 credits of Natural
Sciencea; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Coocentration: MAJOR COURSES : Oral Communication (COM 101); Survey of Radio,
Televi■ion, and Film (COM 105); Fundamental• of Diacuaaion (COM 107); Introduction to Oral Interpretation
(COM 224); Radio Workahop (COM 196,296 or 396); Televiaion Workahop (COM 195,295 or 395); Forenaic
Workahop I (COM 192); Introduction to Televiaion Production (COM 240); Introduction to Radio Production
(COM 245); Radio and Televi1ion Announcing (COM 246); Radio and Televiaion Writing of New1 (COM 332)
or Drama (COM 335) or Commercials (COM 331); Broadcast Management (COM 355); Appreciation of Film
(COM 360); Communication Theory (COM 490) . RESTRICTED ELECTIVES: 9 additional credits of
Communication Studies courses. RELATED COURSES : 23 credits from otherdiaciplines relevant to a student' •
academic or profeaaional interest.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES:
PUBLIC RELATIONS OPI'ION
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: Composition 1-ll (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective■.
(B) Area ofCoocentration: MAJOR COURSES (42 en.) : Penpective1 on Communication (COM 100),
Oral Communication (COM 101), Fundamentals of Diacuaaion (COM 107), lnterpenonal Communication (COM
165), Introduction to Public Relationa (COM 203), Public Relationa Applicationa (COM 303), Language and
Behavior (COM 315), R/fV Writing: Commercial• (COM 331) or R/fV Writing: News (COM 332), Persuasion
(COM 350), Communication Research Technique■ (COM 481), Public Relationa Cases, Problems, and Campaigna
(COM 483), Communication Theory (COM 490), Newswriting (ENG 307) or Feature Writing (ENG 311), and
Advertising (ENG 437). RESTRICTED and RELATED ELECTIVES (26 er. hn.) to be chosen from the following
lists: Three to six credit houn from the following group: R/fV Commercials (COM 331), R/fV Writing: New■
(COM 332), Busineaa Writing I (ENG 211), Feature Writing (ENG 311), Advanced Writing (ENG 375), or
Copywriting (ENG 401) . Six to nine credits from the following group : Elements of Economic ■ (ECO 100),
Principles of Management (MGT 201), Introduction to Public Administration (POS 220), Principle■ of Marketing
(MKT 301), Busineaa, Society and Government (BUS 342) . Three to six credits from the following group : Social
Psychology (PSY 211), Industrial Psychology (PSY 209), Interviewing Skills (PSY 370), Psychology of Social
Control (PSY 455) . Three to ■ix credit houn from the following group : Graphic Communicationa I (IND 140),
Photography (IND 145) , Principles of Layout and Design (GCT 225). Up to eight credits for Practicum in
Communication Studies (COM 491).
COMMUNICATION STUDIES COURSES (COM)
Introductory courses are indicated by a plus sign ( + ).
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
+COM 100. PERSPECTIVES ON COMMUNICATION. An introductory course intended primarily for majon
in Communication Studie1. The course explains the many penpectives from which communication may be studied
and servea a1 an introduction to the diacipline. (3 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
161
+COM 101. ORAL COMMUNICATION. Designing, reheaning, and delivering extemporaneou1 llpee(:hea to
facilitate solvina ,roup and public problems; reporting and evaluating other 1peaken' intent, content, fonnat, and
delivery. (3 en.) F, S
+COM 102. GROUP DISCUSSION: MANAGEMENT. Participation in, and analy■i■ of, ,roup deciaion-making
proceases to develop communication and liatening ■kill ■ in group ■ituation■ , to develop an undentanding of the role
of small ,roup communication in bu■ineu and to identify and develop ■tylea and function■ of ,roup leadenhip. (3
en.) F, S (Nonnally for non-Communicationmajon)
+COM 105. SURVEY OF RADIO, TELEVISION, AND FILM. Introduction to communication in radio,
television, and film ; effecta of mas■ media on the audience and the individual; role of mau media in news,
documentariea, commercial■ , and entertainment broadcasting. (3 en.) F
+ COM 107. FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCUSSION. Introduction to group forma, techniques, participation, and
chainnanahip in infonnal and formal di ■cu11ion■ of contemporary iuues. (3 en.) F, S
+COM 165. INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION. This course seeks to help the ■tudent develop an
awareneu of the nature and complexity of interpenonal communication, recognize how perception of the self
affecta the ability to relate to othen, and gain an undentandina of those elementa that llhape the interpenonal
communication proceu. (3 en.) F, S
COM 192,292,392.
FORENSIC WORKSHOP.
Practical experience in debate, individual
■peaking ,
and
parliamentary procedure. (l er.) F, S
COM 195,295,395. TELEVISION WORKSHOP. Opportunities for "hands-on" television production experience
with both TV ■tudio and portable equipment. (I er.) F , S
COM 196,296,396. RADIO WORKSHOP. Practice in using equipment; projecta in radio . (1 er.) F, S
COM 203. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC RELATIONS . Examines PR as the communication function that
allow■ organization■ to interface with their environmenta and publics. It de■cribea the public relation■ procesa 11
well as ita hiatory, the guiding principles and concepta of organizational advocacy, and explores the various career
opportunitiea in the field . (3 en.) F
COM 210. VOICE AND ARTICULATION. Introduction to phonetics and to voice production and control, with
exercises to develop adequate quality, loudne11, pitch, rate, and articulation. (3 en.) F
+COM 224. INTRODUCTION TO ORAL INTERPRETATION. Technique ■ of di ■covering denotative and
connotative meanings in literature for presentation to liatenen; solo presentation■ of different literary forma . (3 en.)
F, S
COM 230. ARGUMENTATION AND DEBATE. Logical advocacy: briefing and aupporting logically adequate
cases advocating propo■itions of policy; negative positions; exposing fallacious evidence and reasoning; refutation
and rebuttal. Application■ to inte~ollegiate and mass media topics . Prerequisites: COM 101 or 250 or consent
of in■tructor. (3 en.) F
COM 235 . PRESIDENTIAL RHETORIC, 1960 TO THE PRESENT. A
■tudy
of the written texta, audio tapes,
and video tape ■ of selected speeche■ by American presidenta. The course explore■ the u ■e of rhetoric in campaigns,
in governance and in cri ■e ■ by the presidenta in order to illu ■trate contemporary political apeaking and ia an
examination of how to undentand and evaluate presidential speaking. (3 en.) S
COM 240. INTRODUCTION TO TELEVISION PRODUCTION.
Fundamental■ of televi■ion p~uction,
including the use of equipment. Producing, directing, and evaluating programs. (3 en.) F, S
162
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
COM 245 . INTRO TO RADIO PRODUCTION. A study of FCC rules and regulations as they apply to the radio
broadcaster; study of and practice on broadcast equipment; radio programming and production of 1everal type• of
programa. (3 crs.) F, S
COM 246. RADIO AND TELEVISION ANNOUNCING. Theories and practice of gathering, evaluating,
writing, and delivering newacasts, sports, commercials, interviews, for radio and television audiences. Prerequisites:
COM 240 or 245 or coD1Cnt of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
+ COM 250. ORAL COMMUNICATION: MANAGEMENT. Develops an awarene88 of and an appreciation for
communication in the business world; preparing and pre1enting oral reports and speechea deaigned especially for
persons who function in organizations, bu1ine11e1, or industries. (3 crs.) F, S (Normally for norH:ommunication
~~
.
COM 260. FREEDOM OF SPEECH. History of free speech in the world, with special attention to its
development in the United States; legal decisions in contemporary attacks upon and attempts to expand the principle
of freedom of speech. (3 crs.) S
COM 270. APPRECIATION OF TELEVISION. Development of critical skill in evaluating various kinda of
programming from commercial and public television sources; of awareness of individual viewers responaibility
toward influencing the nature and quality of programming; of ability to utilize TV as a source of information,
opinion, and entertainment. (3 en.) S
COM 303. PUBLIC RELATIONS APPLICATIONS . This course seeks to develop the production skills neceuary
to function in an entry-level public relationa position. Many assignments will help students develop: (1) proficiency
using the host of vehicles PR practitioners use, and (2) a portfolio. Effort will be made to create an atmosphere
similar to the first job in PR. The instructor will be the first PR supervisor-the boss-editing the work, criticizing
style, asking for research; forcing the student to plan, analyze, write, rewrite, prepare, repair, organize, and
reorganize. Prerequisite: COM 203 . (3 crs.) F , S
COM 315 . LANGUAGE AND BEHAVIOR. Developing language habits that improve acnsory and aymbolic
perception, inference-making, evaluation, and conflict management/resolution. Prerequisite: COM 165 or coD1Cnt
of instructor. (3 crs.) S
COM 324. ADV AN CED ORAL INTERPRETATION. Detailed analysis and evaluation of literary forma .
Creative experimentation in adapting performing literature for solo and group presentations. Prerequisite: COM
224 . (3 en.) S
COM 331. RADIO AND TELEVISION COMMERCIALS . The writing of commercial mcuages in varying
lengths for both radio and television, including preparation of storyboards. Prerequisites: COM 240 or 245 or
coD1Cnt of the instructor. (3 en.) S
COM 332. RADIO AND TELEVISION WRITING: NEWS.
The wntmg of news, commentary and
documentary, acripts for radio and television; includes the press conference. Prerequisites: COM 240 or 245 or
coD1Cnt of the instructor. (3 en.) F
COM 335 . RADIO AND TELEVISION WRITING: DRAMA. Writing and analyzingteleplays, film and/or radio
plays for understanding of dramatic composition and unique needs of specific writing genres and audiences. (3 en.)
s
COM 340. ADV AN CED TV PRODUCTION . Further application of techniques and skills learned in COM 240
with additional practical experience in TV program production and editing. Prerequisite: COM 240. (3 en.) S
COM 345 . ADVANCED RADIO PRODUCTION. Primarily for majors in Communication Studiea with an
emphasis on Media . Its purpose is to offer a "hands on" course rather than a technical theory treatise. Students
will develop and implement projects. Prerequisite : COM 245. (3 crs.) F
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
163
COM 350. PERSUASION. Methods of changing attitudes and behaviors through communication; analy1i1 of
individual,, audience,, occasion■, and subjects for persuasive appeal,. Study of logical and paychological
arrangements and the ethics of persuading and being persuaded. Preparation of persuasive speeches. Prerequisites:
COM 101 or 250 or con■ent of in■tructor. (3 en.) S
COM 355 . BROADCAST MANAGEMENT. Development of a working knowledge of the managerial structures
of broadcast organiution. Prerequisite: COM 240. (3 en.) S
COM 360. APPRECIATION OF FILM. Preparation for intelligent rcspon■e to cinema. Diacuuion of the acrcen
play, director, and actor. Critical evaluation of outatanding film■ of the past and present. (3 en.) S
COM 401 . INTERNATIONAL BROADCAST SYSTEMS. An overview of world broadcasting ayatcm■ • Prepares
the student to function as a person with a world view of the field of electronic ma11 communication. Prerequisites:
COM 355 and COM 105 . (3 era.)
COM 410. PROFESSIONAL VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS . The field of business and institutional video. The
course prepare• the student to function as a corporate writer, producer, director, and editor of desktop videos, video
prcsa releases, videoconfercnces, training tapes, and other busine11 and institutional videos . Prerequisites: COM
100, COM 105 and COM 355. (3 era.) S
COM 419. COMMUNICATION STUDIES PRACTICUM. Opportunities for practical radio, television, public
relation■ , etc . work in area busine1ses. (Variable) F, S
COM 429 . SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN COMMUNICATION. Independent study and reporting of topics of interest
to the student not available in scheduled courses. (Variable)
COM 445 . RADIO AND TELEVISION IN A FREE SOCIETY. A study of the rights and obligation■ of the
ma11 media producer, purveyor, and audience. Prerequisite: COM 240 or con■ent of instructor. (3 era.) S
COM 460. SPEECH CRITICISM . A study of historical, experimental, and other methodologies in speech
criticism. Analysis of significant speeches and speakers. Prerequisite: Major. (3 era.) F
COM 481. COMMUNICATION RESEARCH TECHNIQUES . This course is intended to provide an introduction
to and practice in the construction of research that is appropriate to the student's area of interest in Communication
Studies. It seeka to provide basic research skills to those anticipating graduate studies and to those anticipating
employment in areas of Communication Studies. Prerequisites: Major, junior standing or consent of instructor.
(3 era.) F
COM 483 . PUBLIC RELATIONS CASES, PROBLEMS, AND CAMPAIGNS . This course seeka to integrate
all the akilla required of the professional in designing and executing a complete public relations campaign. It should
be taken during the student's last semester on campus (but before an internship) . This is a seminar in which team
and group efforts, rather than individual productivity, arc emphasized. Prerequisite: COM 383 or consent of
instructor. (3 era.) F
COM 490. COMMUNICATION THEORY . A seminar in which the theories of human communication arc
analyzed, debated and evaluated . (3 crs.) S
COMMUNICATION TEACHING CERTIFICATION PROGRAM
164
CERTIFICATION IN COMMUNICATION
(ENGLISH, SPEECH, AND THEATRE)
FOR THE SECONDARY SCHOOIS
The faculty and courses for this program may be found in the listings for the
Departments of English, Communication Studies, and Theatre in this catalog.
The Secondary Education Communication program is designed to enable the teacher
candidate to develop personal communication skills and performance competencies and
attitudes, in order to become a conduit of learning, a model of communication competence,
including the empathic domain, and a resource person for facilitating communication in
educational and community settings.
The Communication teacher not only helps young people to experience all the methods
of human expression, both verbal and non-verbal, by which we communicate our thoughts
and feelings but also encourages students to be sensitive to creative expression.
Furthermore, the Communication teacher assists students to speak and listen effectively, to
read and write clearly, and to enhance their communication skills with varieties of aesthetic
experiences such as film, theatre, and television.
A Communication teacher is certified for grades seven through twelve and is qualified
to teach the traditional English areas, such as literature, writing and linguistics, as well as
speech and theatre.
Moreover, at California University this multi-disciplinary,
comprehensive program has been broadened to include teaching competencies in media such
as radio, television, film, and photography. Students majoring in Communication therefore
take a Common Core of courses, which includes a number of English, Speech, and Theatre
courses, and in addition choose a concentration in either Speech or Theatre.
Pennsylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the National Teachers
Examination.
Communication students receive valuable pre-professional experiences through campus
contacts as forensic judges and coaches for secondary school teams, assisting and advising
schools concerning play productions, and hosting area elementary and secondary schools at
University play productions.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN COMMUNICATION FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 credit, in Humanities, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102) and
Communication Theory (COM 490); 9 credit, in Natural Sciences; 9 credit, in Social Science; 3 credit, in Health
or Physical Activitiea; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100).
(B) ProffMional Education: Foundationa of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa and Measurement,
COMMUNICATION TEACHING CERTIFICATION PROGRAM
165
(EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School, (EDS 465); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU
100); Mainltreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301).
(C) Specialization:
1. Core Requirements: Communication: Engliah Grammar and Uaage (ENG 345); Theatre (6 credita):
Stagecraft I (l'HE 151) or Fundamental, of Acting (l'HE 130) or Fundamental, of Directing (l'HE 200) or
Worbhop1. Writing: Advanced Writing (ENG 375). Literature: 15 credita: Engliah Literature I (ENG 301) or
Engliah Literature ll (ENG 302); Shakespeare (ENG 425); Nineteenth-Century American Literature (ENG 303);
Twentieth-Century American Literature (ENG 304).
The student chooae1 one of the two following areas of concentration:
2 (a). For Conceotration in Speech (21 credits): Workahop: 3 credita: Debate (COM 192); Individual Eventa
(COM 292); Parliamentary Procedure (COM 392). Basic Couraea: 9 credita: Argumentation& Debate (COM 230);
Fundamentals of Diacussion or Persuasion (COM 107); Introduction to Oral Interpretation (COM 111) or Voice
and Articulation (COM 121). Enrichment: 3 credita: (Select One) Radio & T.V. in Free Society (COM 107);
Advanced Oral Interpretation (COM 212); or approved elective. Production: 3 credita: Introduction to Radio
Production or Introduction to TV Production or other approved elective; Analysis: 3 credita: (Select one) Language
& Behavior (COM 315); Speech Criticism (COM 460); Freedom of Speech (COM 260); Presidential Rhetoric
(COM 235); or other approved elective.
2 (b). For Conceotration in Theatre (ll credits): Production, Rehearaal, and Performance (THE 392); 6
credita in Theatre History or Theatre Literature, which may include Stagecraft I (l'HE 151), Fundamentals of
Acting (l'HE 130), and Fundamental• of Directina (l'HE 200); 3 credita of approved elective,.
166
DENTAL HYGIENE PROGRAM
DENTAL HYGIENE PROGRAM
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN DENTAL HYGIENE
This program is designed for persons who have completed an approved program and have
a valid license to practice Dental Hygiene. Students who have completed a two-year
program of full-time work take an additional two years at California University of
Pennsylvania. Those students with three years of full-time course work complete an
additional year of work at California. Each student is required to earn a minimum of thirty
credits at California University of Pennsylvania. The student earns a Bachelor of Science
degree in Education with certification as a dental hygienist.
Curriculum:
I. l>Ental Hygiene license, earned at an approved institution of higher education.
Il. Profewonal F.ducation (18-21): Required: Foundationa of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology
(PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Mainstreaming
Exceptional Child Learners (EDU 340); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210). Elective: EDE 301
(Computers for Teachen) .
Ill. General F.ducation (minimum of 27 credits): 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credits of Social Sciences; 9 credits
of Natural Science, iacludina MAT 215 (Stawtics). 8-11 credits of free elective,.
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
167
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
EARm SCIENCES (EAS)
GEOGRAPHY (GEO)
GEOLOGY (EAS)
INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: GEOGRAPHY
PARKS AND RECREATION MANAGEMENT
Professor Lawrence L. Moses, chair, Professors William]. Procasky, DonaldJ. Thompson,
Robert A. Vargo; Associate Professors Donald J. Conte, Harry J. Orsag; Instructors,
William A. Gustin, Betty I. Joynt
PURPOSE
Understanding our habitat is essential for survival. Still, understanding is more than
pragmatic. It satisfies a native curiosity about the world around each person.
The Department of Earth Sciences is composed of two distinct but integral components.
The first is the traditional earth sciences, namely, geology, oceanography, meteorology, and
hydrology, all of which are physical sciences. These disciplines describe and analyze
various techniques and knowledge associated with mathematics, chemistry and physics. The
objective of these activities is to apply research findings to the solution of environmental and
commercial needs.
A second component of the earth science curriculum is geography. This social science
studies the interrelationship between people and their natural environment.
It is
characterized by three subfields: human, physical or environmental, and technical
geography, including such topics as cartography and remote sensing. Allied to geography
are two other areas of study: travel and tourism and parks and recreation management.
Finally, students in the department have the opportunity of integrating the study of
geography with the humanities. Within the International Studies major is a Geography
option. Believing that future social and business arenas will be international, this major
stresses the importance of both learning about people and their environments as well as
learning another language. How people see and understand their environments is affected
greatly by language. Not only must Americans break their ethnocentric conception of life,
they must understand how people in general conceptualize the world in which they live.
PROGRAMS
The department has five programs and, within those programs, nine study options. The
Earth Sciences major has three study options: General, Meteorology, and Oceanography.
There is a Geography major with three options: General, Applied, and Travel and Tourism.
The Earth Science and Geography majors and options each have a common core of required
168
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
courses. Finally, there are three single option majors: Geology, International Studies:
Geography, and Parks and Recreation Management. The department, in conjunction with
the College of Education and Human Services, provides a teacher certification program for
those interested in teaching Earth Science in secondary schools. In order to be certified to
teach in Pennsylvania, students must pass the NTE. Students interested in the latter should
secure further information through the College of Education and Human Services. See also
the section on General Science Certification, page 298 in this catalog.
All majors stress the equal importance of general education and professional
development. Field experiences and internships help the student to integrate classroom
activities with "real world" experiences. This planned and progressive problem-solving
approach is central to the educational program.
Honor Societies
The national Earth Sciences honor society, Sigma Gamma Epsilon (ErE ), has a chapter
(AZ) on campus. Students recognized for their academic and professional achievements are
elected to it.
Honor students in Geography are eligible for induction into Gamma Theta Upsilon
(r0Y).
Membership is also available to students of high scholastic attainment in the California
University Chapter of Rho Phi Lambda (P4'A) Fraternity. Rho Phi Lambda is the
professional honor society for parks and recreation majors.
Careers
A student who desires a professional career in the earth sciences or in geography in
most instances will need to have an advanced degree. This is the case for such professions
as geologist, hydrologist, climatologist, oceanographic technician, stratigrapher, regional
planner, and cartographer. Undergraduates seeking employment, however, will find
opportunities in businesses undertaking environmental impact studies. Students with
undergraduate majors in Parks and Recreation Management or Travel and Tourism can enter
directly the job market, namely in such positions as directors or staff persons in schools,
governmental agencies (municipal and military, for example), industries or resorts with
recreational programs or as travel agents. More information on specific employment
opportunities is available in the Career Planning and Placement Office and from faculty
members responsible for specific majors.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EARm SCIENCES
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives.
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
169
or
(B) Area Cooceatratioa: Common Core course■ include Aatronomy (PHS 145); Introduction to Geoloay
(EAS 150); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Hiatorical Geology (EAS 200); Meteorology (EAS 241);
General Chemiatry I (CHE 101); General Phyaica I (PHY 121); Hydrology (EAS 202); Map Principle, (GEO 110);
College Algebra (MAT 181); or Technical Math I (MAT 182); and a Field Experience course (EAS). In addition
to the core course ■ each track has special requirements.
General Earth Science: 37 credits of required courses; 31 credits of required elective■ from four group of
earth science courses, 15 credits of which muat be at the 300 level or above.
Oceanoarapby: 37 credits of required course ■ ; 12 credits of required oceanographic course,:
Micropaleontology (EAS 350); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Seminar in Oceanography (EAS 463); and Coaatal
Geomorphology (EAS 563); and 19 credits of related electives.
Meteorolc)IY : 37 credits of required course,; 25 credits of required meteorological course,: Climatology
(EAS 242); Synoptic Meteorology (EAS 250); Field Work in Hydrology (EAS 302); Field Work in Meteorology
(EAS 341); Dynamic Meteorology (EAS 342); Reaional Climatology (EAS 550); Seminar in Meteorology (EAS
464); General Physic ■ ll (PHY 122); plus an additional six credits of mathematic,.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIDCATION IN EARm SCIENCE FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Educatioo: 15 credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-ll (ENG 101-102); 9 credits in
Natural Sciences, including a Biology, a Mathematic ■, and a Physical Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science;
3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9
credits of free electives.
(B) Profeuional Educatioo: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problema of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teata
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Leamen (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467) or Modem Methods (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461) .
(C) Pro(euional Specialization: Required: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Meteorology (EAS 241);
Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Aatronomy (PHS 145); General Chemistry I (CHE 101); Pre-Calculus
(MAT 199); General Physics I (PHY 121).
Restricted Dectives (12 credits of the following) : Physical Geography (EAS 160); Hiatorical Geology (EAS
200); Hydrology (EAS 202); Climatology (EAS 242); Cartography (EAS 271); Map and Air Photo Interpretation
(EAS 375); Field Methods (EAS 320); Field Work in Hydrology (EAS 302); Mineralogy (EAS 331); Field Work
in Meteorology (EAS 341); Geomorphology (EAS 343); Invertebrate Paleontology (EAS 551); Human Ecology
(GEO 240); Observational Astronomy (PHS 125); Seminar in Earth Science (EAS 495); Seminar in Astronomy
(EAS 790).
Pennsylvania certification requires a passing grade on the NTE.
170
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 Natural Science■;
12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective■ .
(B) Area of Concentration: Courses common to all tracks:
Human Geography (GEO 105); Map Principle■ (GEO 110); Physical Geography (EAS 160); F.conomic Geography
(GEO 200); Urban Geography (GEO 210) .
(C) Travel and Tourism Option Speciati:«!d Courses: Survey of Travel and Touri■m (GEO 150); World
Cities/Geography of Tourism (GEO 205); Comprehenaive Travel Planning (GEO 358); Seminar in Geography
(GEO 493); Climatology (EAS 242); Scenic Areas of the U .S. (EAS 264); Introduction to Bu1inen (BUS 100);
BusineBI Writing I (ENG 211); Oral Communication: Management (COM 205). Nine credits of restricted electives;
17 credits of related electives which could include an internship.
(D) Applied Option Speciati:«!d Courses: (GEO 210); Remote Senaing (GEO 255); Cartography (EAS 271);
Computer Cartography (EAS 273); Geography Information Systems (GEO 311); Statistical Cartography (EAS 373);
Map and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 375) . Eighteen credits in restricted electives including Introduction
to Microcomputer and Application Software (CSC 101); Statistics (MAT 215) and Scientific and Technical Writing
(ENG 217) . Seventeen credits (200 and above) in related courses.
(E) GEDeral Option Speciati:«!d Courses: Cartography (EAS 271) or Map and Aerial Photography
Interpretation (EAS 375); Seminar in Geography (GEO 493) . Twenty-four credits in restricted elective ■ and 23
in relaced electives, five of which can be an internship .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN GEOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities, 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Required Course, are: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Hiatorical Geology
(EAS 200); Mineralogy (EAS 331); Petrology (EAS 332); Structural Geology (EAS 425); Hydrology (EAS 202);
Geomorphology (EAS 343); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Stratigraphy (EAS 422); Tectonics (EAS 527); any earth
science field experience; General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101, 102); General Physic ■ 1-Il (PHY 121, 122); 9 credit■
of Math/Computer Science; and , 8 credits of related electives.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: GEOGRAPHY
The International Studies Program is administered by the Department of Foreign
Languages and Cultures. The Department of Earth Sciences supervises students who pursue
the geography option in that major.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Compositionl-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credit■ of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Studies; 18 credit■ of free electives.
(B) Areas of Concentration: (1) Area of Concentration: International Studies: Geography. Geography
21 credit hours: Economic Geography (GEO 200); Urban Geography (GEO 210); Demographic Analysis (GEO
217); Political Geography (GEO 345); Geography of Europe (GEO 325); Geography of Latin America (GEO 328).
Languages; 21 credit hours: Intermediate 1-Il (203, 204); Converaation, Composition and Phonetic ■ 1-Il (311, 312);
Culture courses (9 era.)
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
171
Related Electives: a minimum of three credits in each of Economics/Management, History, Englilh, Political
Science, Mathematica, Psychology and Philoaophy. Five additional credits of related elective, (can include an
intemlhip).
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PARKS AND RECREATION MANAGEMENT
Curriculum:
(A) General Education_
: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanitie■; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Human Geography (GEO 105); Map Principles (GEO 110); Physical
Geography (EAS 160); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Municipal Government (POS 205); Urban Geography
(GEO 210); Site Planning and De1ign (GEO 362); Recreation lndu■tryManagement (GEO 378); Propm Planning
and Administration (GEO 412); Developing the Master Plan (GEO 474); Introduction to Business (BUS 100) or
Principles of Management (MGT 210). Restricted electives: 12 credits. Related electives: 11 to 17 credits.
Intemlhip: 6 to 12 credits.
EARm SCIENCE COURSES (EAS)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
EAS 100. INTRODUCTION TO EARTH SCIENCE. Thia introductory course is designed to acquaint the student
with the four general areas of earth science: astronomy, geology, meteorology, and oceanography. The course
consists of two houn of lecture and one hour of lab work. (3 en.) F S
EAS 131. INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY. Thia course deals with the interaction
between man and his geologic environment. Emphasis is placed on the understanding of basic geologic principles
and case studies of some of the classic examples of environmcnt■ I problems. Laboratory exercises and problems
are an integral part of the course. Thia i■ intended 11 a 111rvey course and a ■tudent needs only a limited
background in geology. (3 en.) F
EAS 150. INTRODUCTION TO GEOLOGY . A 111rvey course intended primarily for the non-science major.
Topics considered include the make-up of the earth, internal and external processes that occur within or on the
earth, rocka and minerals, fossils, the earth's origin and evaluation, and the origin and evolution of life on this
planet. Laboratory work is an integral part of the course. (4 crs.) F S
EAS 160. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. The ■tudy of the physical aspects of human environment including climate,
soils, water, vegetltion, and topography. Map and map-making also are treated . (3 crs.)
EAS 163. INTRODUCTION TO OCEANOGRAPHY. An introductory course in the study of the four main
branches of oceanography: (1) Geology of the oceanic basins (origins of the oceans, structure and geomorphology
of the ocean'• floor, methods of investigation); (2) Chemiltry of the ocean waters; (3) Physics of the oceans
(currents, waves, tides, etc .); (4) Biology of the oceans (marine plants and animals) . No preliminary studies
required but previous course work in Physical Geology or Introduction to Geology recommended . (3 en.) S
EAS 166 . GEOLOGY OF PENNSYLVANIA. A 111rvey of the Commonwealth's geologic setting, geologic
history, and mineral resources. There are no prerequisites. Students will be introduced to the necessary geologic
172
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
conccpll and terminology. Studenll arc expected to participate in at least three of the four planned field trip,. (3
en.)
EAS 170. AREAL GEOLOGY. Thia counc involve, travel to aclected poinll of geologic intcrcll in the Rocky
Mountaina and Great Plaina of the wellcm part of the United State,. Moll activitica will be in field aituationa.
Activitie1 will focu1 on rock, mineral, and fouil identification, topographic map interpretation, and the role of
geologic proce11e1 in landform development. (3 en.)
EAS 200. HISTORICAL GEOLOGY. A lludy of the geologic hiatory of the earth and the aucceuion of the major
group of plani. and animal■ 11 baaed on the geologic interpretation of rock formatiom and fouil1 . Field trip, arc
an integral part of the counc. (4 en.) S
EAS 202. HYDROLOGY. A aurvey counc about the exi■tcnce of water on Earth. Topic, include the occurrence
and movement of water, physical and chemical characteriatica of water, and climatologic and geologic conaideration
of aurface and aub-aurface water. (3 en.) F
EAS 232. EARTH RESOURCES . An introductory counc in metallic and non-metallic rc1011rce1 with emph11i1
on the nature of mineral,, the lithosphere, and economic uaca of earth rc10urce1. (3 en.) F
EAS 241. METEOROLOGY. The physic, of the atmosphere a■ influenced by the earth-atmosphere interaction.
The effecll of the phyaical control, a, they alter the elemenll arc emphasized . The construction and 1naly1i1 of
weather map, i1 an integral part of the counc. (3 en.) F S
EAS 242. CLIMATOLOGY. In this counc the elemenll and controls of climate arc analyzed in 1 1yatcmatic
fashion. Various methods and techniques of cl111ifying climates arc prcacnted. The climate of each continent is
rcgionalized and the factors which produce the climatic patterm arc inveatigated . (3 en.) F S
EAS 250. SYNOPl'IC METEOROLOGY. An examination of the development and atructurc of large-scale
weather syatcma and fronts . Emphasis on the technique of analyzing and forecaating 1ynoptic scale weather
situationa. (3 en.) F
EAS 255. REMOTE SENSING . Thia counc emphasize■ the characteriatic1 and scientific role of aerial photo,
radar, and 11tellite image interpretation, as well as computer aui■tcd proceuing of spectral data acquired from
aircraft and 11tellites, 11 they relate to earth and atmospheric rc1011rce analysis. (3 en.) S
EAS 264. SCENIC AREAS OF THE UNITED ST ATES . Thia counc provide, an 1naly1i1 of the physical telling
of aome scenic area, in the United States. The focua is on differences in aoila, vegetation, climate, and landforma
in scenic areas with special empha■ is given to natural hiatory. (3 en.) F S
EAS 270. SCENIC AREAS OF THE WORLD. Thia course provides an analysis of the physical telling of scenic
areas of the world. The focus is on differences in aoila, vegetation, climates, and landforma with special emph11i1
given to natural hiatory. (3 en.)
EAS 271. CARTOGRAPHY. A laboratory counc designed to acquaint the student with the nature and function
of map,, including concepts of scales and cartographic symbols, graphic layout and design, and the uac of
cartographic tools and equipment in map construction. (3 en.) F
EAS 273 . COMPUTER CARTOGRAPHY. This counc provides an analysis of different methods and technique,
of rcprcacntina spatial data through the uac of various computer-based technologies. The focus is centered upon
the cartographic representation of aurface data through the uac of a personal-computer baaed program. (3 en.) S
EAS 302. FIELD WORK IN HYDROLOGY. This counc is designed as a follow-up course to hydrology. It give,
lludenll the opportunity to apply hydrologic principles and techniques in field tellings. Topic, arc aclected in
conaultation with the instructor. (3 en.) S
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIBNCES
173
EAS 304. CARBONATE GEOLOGY. A study of carbonate deposition, lithification, and digene1i1. Include■
chemical ■edimentology, textural classification, cyclicity of shelf llrata, facies interpretation for oil exploration,
and correlation. Lab component. Prerequisite ■: Hi■torical Geology and Sedimentology. (3 en.)
EAS 331 . MINERALOGY. An introduction to the morphology and internal llructure of cry1tal1 and the chemical
and phyaical ch1racteri■tic1 of mineral,. Laboratory time is devoted to the study of cry■tal model■ and the
identification of aelected mineral apecimena. (3 en.) F
EAS 332. PETROLOGY. A complete ■urvey of the major rock type, (igneou ■, ■edimentary, and metamorphic)
forma the b11i1 of thi1 coune. Con■ideration i1 given to their origin, deacription, and clauification. Of particular
importance i1 the relationship of the v1riou1 rock type■ to the compoaition and hi ■torical development of the 10lid
earth. Laboratory component emph11ize1 hand apecimen identification, but aome microacopic thin ■ection work
i1 1110 done. (3 en.) S
EAS 341. FIELD WORK IN METEOROLOGY . A field oriented course designed as a follow-up to basic
meteorology. The course is concerned with the use of meteorological in■truments to measure local weather
condition■, plotting and analyzing these conditions. Other weather problems and library research are part of the
course. (3 en.)
EAS 342. DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. An in-depth examination of the forces and laws that govern
atmoapheric flow. Topics investigated and analyzed include scale analyaes, geotropic and gradient wind models,
vorticity, vertical motion and boundary layer dynamic,. (3 en.) S
EAS 343. GEOMORPHOLOGY. This course involves the study of the origin, history, and ch1racteri1tic1 of
landforma and landscapes aa they are produced by the processes of weathering, man-walling, fluvial, glacial, wind,
and wave ero1ion (or a combination of theae) acting upon the geological material■ and 1tructure1 of the earth'•
crull. (3 en.)
EAS 3SO. MICROPALEONTOLOGY. Micropaleontology deals with the essential biological and geological
principles which are basic to all paleontological studies. In addition, considerable time is devoted to the atudy and
identification of various microfossil groups. Con■ideration is alao given to the origin of life and to its preservation
in ancient Precambrian rocks . Laboratory work emphasized. Problems to be aolved are similar to those that would
be encountered by the student in the petroleum indullry . (3 en.)
EAS 372. FIELD MAPPING. Thi■ i■ a field-oriented course in which the atudent will learn proper use of
measuring and mapping instruments and the techniques in the construction of simple maps . Interpretation of air
photo• and topographic maps is alao ■tressed. (3 en.) F
EAS 373 . STATISTICAL CARTOGRAPHY. The ■tati ■tical approach to cartographic repreaentation. Method ■
of data manipulation, problems of symbolization and techniques of presentation are emphasized. (3 en.)
EAS 37S. MAP AND AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY INTF.RPRETATION. This course coven the composition and
interpretation of aerial photographs and variou■ type• of maps. Students will learn how to interpret photos and
map, for quantitative and qualitative information on natural and man-made features . Some of the work requires
independent and group interpretation of maps, photographic slide, of aatellite imagery, computer proces■ed and
enhanced image■, and SLAR imagery. (3 en.) F
EAS 421. SEDIMENTOLOGY. An advanced course that deal■ with the detailed analysis of ■ediments and
aedimentary rocks. Both qualitative and quantitative techniques are utilized to derive the maximum information
from rock 11mple1. This information relate, to the erosional, transportational and depositional history of rocks.
To the greatest extent possible, the student works independently through a complete set of problems. (3 en.) F
174
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
EAS 422. STRATIGRAPHY. In this coune a study i• made of the basic principles governing the origin,
interpretation, correlation, claasification, and naming of atratified rock unita. The grou atratigraphy of the United
State, ia considered, with particular emphaaia placed on the rocks of the Pennsylvania Sylllem. (3 en.) S
EAS 425. STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY. The primary and secondary structure, of rock mauea and their formation
are covered in thia coune. Actual structure, are examined in the field . Geologic maps are utilized . (3 en.) F
EAS 430. OPTICAL MINERALOGY. An in-depth examination of the optical behavior of mineral cryatala in
polarized light with empha■ia on identification. (3 en.) S
EAS 436 . FIELD METHODS IN EARTH SCIENCE. Thia a coune designed to provide majon with the
knowledJe of problema encountered in field work and the techniques utilized to solve these problema. Thia coune
conaiata of planned trip,. Lecture, and di■cuaaiona are used to 111pplement the trip ■ . (3 en.)
EAS 437. FIELD METHODS IN GEOLOGY . Thia ia a coune designed to provide students with a knowledge
of geologic problema encountered in field work and the technique■ utilized to solve those problema. The student
i■ exposed to geologic and topographic map, 11 well II variou■ geologic inatrumenta. The coune conaiata of
plaMCd trip• to area, of geologic intereat. Summary reports, field exercises, and laboratory problema conatitute
the atudenta' work responsibility. (3 en.)
EAS 463 . SEMINAR IN OCEANOGRAPHY. Thia seminar ia designed for those who wiah to improve their
■cientific writing abilities and to learn more about the occana. The coune is built around an excunion to 1ite1 of
oceanographic intereat, library information and data collection, the writing of both abort and long papen and the
presentation of research. (3 en.)
EAS 464. SEMINAR IN METEOROLOGY. A ■cientific writing coune in which the student punues a
meteorologic topic through library or field research. Studenta learn to define a problem, to obtain relevant
literature, to gather data and to write and defend a research paper. (3 en.)
EAS 491 . FIELD COURSE IN EARTH SCIENCE. Thia coune ia designed for serioua Earth Science students
who desire to apply their clauroom knowledge to specific aite■ and earth ■cience field problema. Each semelller
will include trips to various sites at which ieologic, meteorological, or oceanographic proceaae ■, principles and
phenomena can be studied. (Variable)
EAS 492. FIELD COURSE IN GEOLOGY . Thi■ coune provides advanced geology studenta with opportunities
to study geology in siru . Field trips to clauic and leu well known 1ite1 will be incorporated into lecture,, data
collection, and ■cientific reporting . Laboratory exercise, will reflect field experience■ . (Variable)
EAS 494. GEOLOGY WORKSHOP. Provides the student with a variety of geologic experience■. Included are
lecture■ , laboratory exercise ■ , field work and problema. To the greateat extent pouible, the coune also i ■ tailored
to meet the need■ of individual atudenta. Permiuion of the ataff ia required. (Variable)
EAS 496. SEMINAR IN GEOLOGY. A ■cientific writing course in which the student punues a g~iogic topic
through library or field research. Studenta learn to define a geologic problem, to obtain relevant literature, to
gather raw data and to write and present a research paper. (3 en.)
EAS 498 . INTFJlNSHIP IN GEOLOGY. The student combines academic theory with practical on-the-job
experience by spending up to a full semester in one of several state or local governmental agencies. The practicum
can be taken for from 3 to 17 credits and includes 111pcrvision by the participating agency I I well I I performance
evaluation by the academic advisor. Limited to Geology majon. (Variable)
EAS 527. TECTONICS. To evaluate tectonic theories within a framework of worldwide historical geology but
special attention i■ given to the Appalachian and the North American Cordilleran orogenic eventa. (3 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
175
EAS 528 . QUANTrrATIVE APPLICATIONS IN EARTH SCIENCE. An upper-level coune de1igncd to provide
studenta opportunity to apply variou1 procedures to the ■olution of acologic problems. (3 en.) F
EAS 541. ADVANCED ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY. Thia coune deals with the human natural
environment, particularly acologic facton that can impact upon life or way of life. Empha1i1 i1 placed on an
in-depth atudy of environmental problems and poaaible alternative ■olutiona to 111ch problems. Buie engineering
- principles I I applied to acological problems arc conaidercd. Laboratory exercises, problems, and written rcporta
arc an intcpl part of the coune. (3 en.)
EAS 546 . PETROLEUM GEOLOGY. This coune deals with the fundamental propertie1 of petroleum and
petroleum rcservoin, including the origin, miption, and accumulation of oil and natural ga■ . Other topic, include
exploration techniques, computer application■, well drilling and completion, and major oil field■ of the United
State,. Empha■is ia on problem ■olving and laboratory work. (3 en.)
EAS 547. RESERVOIR EVALUATION. The purpose of thi1 coune i■ to analyze in detail rock■ which serve for
the storage and ultimately for the production of petroleum. The characteristics of these rock■ will be atudied in
hand specimen, in section, in core,, and on well log■. Laboratory work and problem ■olving arc emphaaizcd. (3
en.)
EAS SSO. REGIONAL CLIMATOLOGY. An advanced coune that deals with the application of various analytical
method■ and claaaification systems in climatology. The Koppen claaaification of climates is strcaacd. The climate
pattern■ of each continent and the facton which produce them arc investigated . (3 en.) S
EAS SSL INVERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY. Thia coune involveaa detailed study offoaail representatives
of the variou ■ invertebrate phyla II well 11 1 conaideration of the more important of these as index foaail ■.
Empha1i1 i■ on laboratory exerci■es and problem ■olving. It i■ hoped that this coune will prove to be of interest
to atudenta in biology I I well I I those in aeology . (3 en.)
EAS 563. COASTAL GEOMORPHOLOGY AND MARINE RESOURCES . A atudy of the phyaical proce1■e1
that ■hape coastal landforms and the pelagic and neuritic rc■ource1 of the ocean■ . Topics include long■horc
transport, wave action, awaah zone dynamic■, estaurine and deltaic geomorphology, ferromangane ■e and petroleum
rc■ources, and beach structure. Prerequisite: Introduction to Oceanography or permission of the instructor. (3
en.)
GEOGRAPHY COURSES (GEO)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
GEO 100. INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY. Introduces atudenta to regional differences throughout the world
in terms of landforms, climates, ■oil■ and vegetation as well I I population characteristic ■ and economic activities.
Rcprc ■entative 1rca1 like Western Europe, Soviet Union, Japan and Latin America arc developed. (3 en.) F S
GEO 1OS. HUMAN GEOGRAPHY. The coune provides inaighll into the existing pattern■ and distribution■ of
variou1 social groups which occupy the earth. Broad outline■ of human evolution, development and demographic
pattern■ arc emphasized. (3 en.) F S
GEO 110. MAP PRINCIPLES . A non-technical coune to develop competence in the development, recognition,
undentanding and evaluation of map information. Interpretation of thematic map■, both regional and world, ia
emphaaizcd. (3 en.) F
176
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
GEO 150. SURVEY OF TRAVEL AND TOURISM. An overview of the travel and touriam industry empha■izing
aapecta of field geographic, economic and cultural importance. Topics include introductory principle•, meaauring
and forecaatmademand, touriam planning, touriam marketing, tourism development, and the role of the geographer.
(3 en.) F S
GEO 200. ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY. The lludy of areal variation on the
related to producing, exchanging, and conauming reaourcea. (3 en.) S
earth' ■
aurface in man'• activitiea
GEO 205. WORLD CITIES/GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM. The geography of touriam in selected citiea of the
world with an empha■ia on form and function. Topic• include an analyaia of reaourcea for touriam, the organization
of related land use pattcfflll, and developmental proceaaea. (3 en.) S
GEO 210. URBAN GEOGRAPHY. An inveatigation of city environmenta. Topic ■ inveatigated and analyzed about
citiea include their cla■aification, location, diatribution, function, growth, type, and pattern of land use. Emphasia
toward urban planning ia incorporated. (3 en.) F
GEO 217. DEMOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS. A baaic course that deals with demographic proceaaea and trends.
Emphaaia ia placed on diatribution pattefflll and environmental ramificatiollll. (3 en.)
GEO 220. GEOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES AND PENNSYLVANIA. A atudy of the phyaical and
cultural environment throughout the United States and Pennsylvania particularly aa it relate ■ to apatial paltefflll of
population, agriculture, industry, aervice and tranaportation pattefflll. (3 en.)
GEO 240. HUMAN ECOLOGY. A social acience approach to dealing with relationship between humanity and
the organic and inorganic environment. Emphasia is placed on the physical, biological and cultural baais of human
adaptation to the environment. (3 en.)
GEO 285. RETAIL TRAVEL. The skills uaed in the worldwide travel industry that are eaaential for a career aa
a travel agency owner, manager, or agent, as a tour operator, or as a corporate, convention travel planner or
manager. (3 en.)
GEO 306 . MARKETING GEOGRAPHY. Spatial pattefflll associated with the collllUmption of good■ and aervices
are atreaaed, emphasia is placed on the collection and aubaequent diatribution of goods and service■ as related to
aapecta of the cultural environment. (3 en.)
GEO 311. GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS . Thia course providea an analyaia of different methods
and technique■ of repreaenting geographic data through the uae of various manual and computer-baaed technologies .
The focus ia upon the procesaea involved in the collection, compilation, and diaplay of geographic data within a
data baae. (3 en.)
GEO 315 . URBAN TRANSPORTATION. Tranaportation pattefflll within cities and current tranaportation
problem.a aa they relate to travel demand ■ and tranaportation policy. Urban apatial variation and ita relationship to
travel are atreaaed. (3 en.)
GEO 316 . CONTEMPORARY GEOGRAPHIC PROBLEMS . Topical analysia of local, regional and world areal
association problem.a from a geographic perapective. (3 en.)
GEO 317. LAND USE ANALYSIS. An analysis of the structure of urban and rural land uae which emphaaizea
of paltefflll and trends in land use . Methods of analyais are developed so that land uae ~an be effectively
understood . (3 en.)
GEO 318 . GEOGRAPHY OF CHINA. A geographic atudy of the historical , cultural, political and economic
facton a ■ they combine to make twentieth-century China an important factor in world affairs. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
177
GEO 325 . GEOGRAPHY OF EUROPE. A systematic of the forces which have shaped the human landscape of
Western Europe. National and regional disparities ranging from land relief and climate to BOCial and economic
phenomena are studied. (3 crs.)
GEO 328. GEOGRAPHY OF LATIN AMERICA. Concentrates upon the effects of the physical environment
upon human activities and upon the effects of the historical background, types of governments, and ethnic
background• of the people upon the development of the natural resources of. The study is regional by nations. (3
crs.)
GEO 330. GEOGRAPHY OF THE SOVIET UNION. A regional study of the physical and cultural features of
the Soviet Union. The emphasis is placed upon those factors responsible for the current position of the Soviet
Union aa a major world power and on potential future development. (3 crs.)
GEO 338 . GEOGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC BASIN . Lands and people of the great ocean. Particular attention
given to Australia, Indonesia, New Zealand, and the Philippines. (3 crs.)
GEO 340. HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY . A study of the interrelationships between the natural and cultural
environments and the historical development of the cultural landscape. The historical development of the United
States i• emphasized. (3 crs.)
GEO 345 . POLmCAL GEOGRAPHY. The state is the focus of the course, particularly in term■ of the role
played by the physical and cultural environment in term■ of its form and function. Particular emphasis placed 9n
frontiers, boundariea, law of the sea■, transportation and ecology. (3 en.)
GEO 358. COMPREHENSIVE TRAVEL PLANNING. A basic understandingofthe procedures and components
of travel planning and promotion. It presents major principles and techniques in developing travel programs, trip
packages, and group tours . The course studies transportation and infonnation systems, community services
supporting tourism, trends in accommodations and services, tours and junkets, travel sales and agency operations.
(3 crs.)
GEO 362. SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN. The components of the site design process. Instruction centers on
the specific tools and procedures necessary to enable the student to be an effective planner of recreation and park
facilities . The student gains an understanding of the complete planning process from conceptualization through
implementation and construction. (3 crs.)
GEO 374. DEVELOPING AND MANAGING LEISURE ENTERPRISES . An overview of the commercial
leisure induatry, specifically focusing on the procedures involved in the developing, marketing, and managing of
the enterprise. The student will acquire a knowledge of the step by step procedure involved in starting a leisure
busineu either through purchasing a going concern or through establishing an enterprise from its beginning. The
student then will be instructed on the management skills necessary for the effective and profitable management of
the enterprise. (3 crs.)
GEO 378. RECREATION INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT. Analysis of managerial and administrative practices
and proce1&es in recreation, park and agency departments, including departmental organization, policy making,
liability and negligenc~, personnel management and staffing, fiscal management, budgeting, finance, records and
reports, office management, and public relations. (3 crs.)
GEO 412. PROGRAM PLANNING AND ADMINISTRATION. The course emphasizes the analysis of a
community, a1&essment of its residential leisure needs, and implementation of recreational programs into the
community. Students will acquire an understanding of the program fields in relation to principles, planning,
objectives, goal setting, structural organization, advertising, and evaluation. (3 crs.)
GEO 445. FIELD METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY . An intensive micro-geographic study through field work. An
advanced course using geographic field tools and techniques . (3 crs.)
178
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
GEO 474. DEVELOPING THE MASTER PLAN. This course examines planning as a process with attention
focused on those particular activities and component& that must be related and completed in order to initiate
preparation and succe11ful implementation of a comprehensive master plan. The course provides experience in
applying acquired skills to specific uri>an and regional problems. Class participanu analyze a real or a hypothetical
problem, develop and evaluate alternative approaches, and recommend courses of action. (3 en.)
GEO 479. INTERNSHIP. The internship provides the student with the opportunity to apply classroom theory to
realistic, professional-level situations. It is intended to give the student a concentrated practical experience in a
professional organization. The concept& and experiences acquired in the classroom are honed and fine-tuned at this
level to prepare studenu for their career undertaking. (Variable)
GEO 491. FJELD COURSE IN GEOGRAPHY. Field investigation utilizing geographic tools and techniques
concentrating on primary data . (Variable)
GEO 493. SEMINAR IN GEOGRAPHY. Consideration of evolving geographic thought, evaluation of selected
geographic literature, and the development of individual or group research project&. Recommended as a culminating
course for majors in geography. (3 crs .)
GEO 498. INTERNSHIP IN GEOGRAPHY. This course involves the geography intern during the sophomore,
junior or senior year in a semester of practical experience with a planning, governmental, business, industrial, or
social agency. Credit for the course varies, depending upon the nature of the internship assignment and the number
of hours of on-the-job training. (Variable)
GEO 520. PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES . This course is for students with a background that
includes Principles of Geomorphology. It involves a systematic survey of the major physiographic provinces in the
United States. Emphasis is placed on the relationship of the underlying geology, geologic history, and climate to
the development of today's landscapes. Laboratory work principally involves interpretations from air photos and
topographic maps. (3 crs.)
EDU COURSES
179
EDU (EDUCATION) COURS~
EDU 210. TEACHING IN A MULTICULTURAL SOCIETY. The development of intergroup-interpersonal
awareness to promote a better understanding of different races, sexes, religious beliefs, national origins, and socioeconomic backgrounds found in our multicultural society. Emphasis on developing the awareness, knowledge skill
and competency needed for positive human relationships. (3 crs.) F-S
EDU 340. MAINSTREAMING EXCEPTIONAL LEARNERS. This course is designed to prepare educational
personnel with the information and skills necessary for accommodating exceptional learners in a variety of school
arrangements. Focus is on assessment and remediation of learning problems, classroom organization and
management, teaching resources, legal issues, curriculum considerations, parent involvement, condition of
professional services, and many other issues pertinent to the education of exceptional learners in the "mainstream"
of education. (3 crs.)
EDU 449 . STUDENT TEACHING- SPECIAL EDUCATION . (Variable) F-S
EDU 459 . STUDENT TEACHING - ELEMENTARY EDUCATION. (Variable) F-S
EDU 469. STUDENT TEACHING - SECONDARY EDUCATION. (Variable) F-S
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
180
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
EDUCATIONAL STUDIES (EDF)
SECONDARY EDUCATION (EDS)
Professor Marilynn Stanard, chair. Professors Dilawar Mumby Edwards, George J.
Frangos, John P. Moreschi, Jr., JoAnn Nelson, Angelo J. Orlandi, George A.Reid;
Associate Professors John C. Black, David N. Campbell, Lizbeth A. Gillette, Robert A.
Levin, Caryl Sheffield, John R. Young.
The department is responsible for the Secondary Education programs, the Principals
Program, the Professional Education components of programs in the College of Education
and Human Services and in the Graduate School, and a diversity of services to the
University.
The Secondary Education curriculum is organized around the concept of "teacher as
decision maker." Teacher candidates ~earn to make important decisions concerning how to
organize and manage classrooms utilizing a wide range of technologies and methodologies.
The Secondary Education program provides students with opportunities to work in a variety
of school settings. These include the School of the Future (an urban experience involving
innovative techniques and opportunities), Rural and Urban Schools, Schools on Native
American Reservations as well as overseas schools.
For the Secondary Education Curriculum the department offers a Bachelor of Science
in Education degree in the following Certification areas: Athletic Training, Biology,
Chemistry, Communication, Earth Science, General Science, English, Mathematics, Modem
Foreign Languages, Physics, and Comprehensive Social Sciences. Accordingly, this
curricular function is the responsibility of the Educational Studies Department in cooperation
with the appropriate academic departments. Curricula and requirements will be found in this
catalog in the listings of the individual departments.
Therefore, each student who is a Secondary Education major functions under a system
of dual advising whereby the student's advisor from the Educational Studies Department
assists the student in satisfying Certification requirements, while an advisor from the
student's chosen discipline guides the student in the area of specialization. Final advising
is with the student's advisor from the Educational Studies Department.
Students in the Secondary Education curricula must pass the NTE in order to achieve
Pennsylvania Teaching Certification. Students must achieve a 2.50 grade-point average in
both their major area and a 2.50 overall grade-point average for graduation.
Students who satisfactorily complete the program in Secondary Education may, at
graduation, qualify for the Pennsylvania Instructional I Certificate for teaching in their
certification area at the middle school and secondary school levels. Requirements are such
that the student may pursue certification in one or more teaching areas as mentioned above.
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
181
SECONDARY EDUCATION (EDS)
AND EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATIONS COURSES (EDF)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
EDF 100. FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION. A survey designed to contribute directly to the profeuional growth
and development of the prospective teacher and to serve as an introductory course for the atudent in Liberal ArU
or Science and Technology. It slrc88Cs the history, philosophy, and legal and social foundationa of the American
educational enterprise. Emphasi1 is also given to teaching as a profeuion, as well aa to the llnlcturc,
administration, and support of the system of public education at the local, state, and federal levels. The atudent
is encouraged to think constructively and creatively about education and self. (3 en.) S-F
EDS 300. PROBLEMS OF SECONDARY EDUCATION. The practical problems of teaching and learning in the
accondary school with emphasis on principle■ of problem solving arc studied. A aurvey is made of the llnlcturc
and nature of American accondary education. Tools and techniques used in problem solving arc introduced. A
field experience of two classes per week for nine weeks in the local secondary school■ is a requirement of the
course. Prerequisite: EDF 100. S-F
EDF 301. COMPUTERS FOR TEACHERS . This course in educational computing provides the learner with
fundamental concepts and skills that build a foundation for applying computen and other hardware and software
in educational settings. The course focuses on the computer as an object of inatruction, a productivity tool,and an
adjunct to inatruction in the classroom. Laboratory assignments requiring use of the univenity computer facilities
arc designed to provide generalizable and transferable competencies. (3 en.)
EDF 304. INTRODUCTION TO EDUCATIONAL MEDIA. This course, for prospective and practicing teachen
from various levels of education, pre-school to ·graduate school, is also relevant for persona in training programs
in churches, business, and industry. Emphasis is placed on media as an inherent part of effective instruction 11
well as on effective media utilization practices, the acquisition of skills in selecting media hardware and software,
and the operation of equipment and competence in simple local production techniques. The course has been
designed to facilitate learning in three inatructional modes: (1) large group, by meana of mediated lectures; (2) ,mall
group, by mcana of demonstrations and practice in equipment operation/local production; (3) independent atudy,
by meana of film loops, film strips, slide-tape presentations, and computer-assisted inatruction. Three cl111 houn
and one laboratory hour each week. (3 en.)
EDF 318. FOUNDATIONS OF DEATH AND DYING . The phenomenon of death and dying in the areas of
anthropology, psychology, philosophy, education, literature, etc. (3 era.) S
EDF 360. COMPARATIVE EDUCATION. An introduction to the various schools of the world. Selected countries
include England, France, Italy, Spain, West Germany, the U.S.S .R., and the United States. The general strategy
is to explore the history, social organizations, and economic and political conditiona that have shaped educational
institutiona in each country. (3 era.) S
EDS 420. INTRODUCTION TO GUIDANCE AND PERSONNEL SERVICES. The principles of guidance with
emphasis on the basic concepts of individual and group counseling and the relationship of the counselor, teacher,
and school nurse in grades K-12 . (3 era.)
EDS 430. EDUCATIONAL TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. A consideration of
the simpler statistical mcaaures, with particular strc11 on the application to clauroom work, and of the principle•
underlying the conatruction of valid, reliable objective tests. Prerequisite: Educational Psychology (3 era.) S-F
EDS 436 . TEACHING OF WRITING. A course to help the prospective teacher create a curriculum that will enable
atudents to write forcefully and clearly. The teacher should become aware of the students' needs and methods by
182
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
which thoac needs can beat be met. Such needs nnge from developing 1kill1 related to writiq, like correct spelling
and punctuation, to developing compositions that may vary from the utilitarian to the form-oriented to the empathic .
The effective teacher should also tic writiq ill8truction in with the rest of the English curriculum. Finally, the
teacher llhould consider how to evaluate completed papen in a way that will contribute to students' further progrcu
and ultimate independence of the teacher. (3 en.)
EDS 437. TEACHING OF COMMUNICATION. For Communication teaching candidate,; a specially designed
method• courac team taught by ill8tructon from the departmentl of Englillh, Communication Studic1, and Theatre
who have had teaching experience in secondary school,. The courac develop ■ proficiency in applying learning
theory and hiatorical perspectives to the Communication curriculum, developing and preacntiq lcaaon plans in
teaching 1imulations, developing curriculum appropriate to the area■ of specialization, directing young people in
extension activities (newspaper, yearbook, dnma, forensics, ndio and television), adapting content to students with
varying lcvcl1 of motivation and skill development, and becoming aware of availabilities in the job market. (3 en.)
EDS 440. TEACHING OF ENGLISH IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. The application of principle, of educational
p1ychology, philosophy, and sociology to the teaching of Englillh in junior and acnior high school. The courac
include, bolh pnctical techniques of clauroom pncticc and an invcatigation of the larger problems of the
profc11ion. Adequate prior content couracs in English arc necessary to the student undertaking this courac. (3 en.)
F
EDS 445. TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. Method, that may be used in
teaching Social Studies. Emphasis is placed on the philosophy, objectives, couracs of study, and organization of
subject matter for teaching purpoacs, curriculum materials, procedures and development. (3 en.) F
EDS 447. TEACHING OF EARTH SCIENCE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL. A review of conccpta and basic
philosophy in Earth Science. The courac includes a survey of available materials and current curricula in the field
of earth science which fonn the baacs for analysis of modem technique, in the teaching of this discipline. (3 en.)
EDS 455. MODERN METHODS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. A capstone courac in secondary education.
Students learn current research on teaching, planning, inatructional stntegica. Classroom management and
decision-making skills. (3 en.) S-F
EDS 456. THE SECONDARY SCHOOL CURRICULUM. An analysis of the functions of secondary school
curriculum including the historical development of the high school curriculum; current and projected trends;
patterns of curriculum development; the dynamics of curriculum improvement; curriculum provisions for meeting
individual differences; trends in specific ill8tructional fields; the place and purpoac of student activities and the
cxtn-clau curriculum. (3 en.)
EDS 460. TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS . The mathematical abilities of the
secondary student; methods of mathematical teaching; rcsulta of mathematical education according to recent
research; the control and uac of the visual aids pertaining to mathematics, and student, teacher, administntion and
community problems with proper methods of instruction. Content material is included at the discretion of the
Mathematica department. Evaluation is maintained by teats, reports, textbook evaluations, courac outlines, unit
plans, projecta and teaching lessons. (3 en.) S-F
EDS 461. STUDENT TEACHING AND SCHOOL LAW. Obacrvation and participation in all teaching and
activitic1 related to the performance of a teacher'• work, in the area of the student'• specializations. Prerequisite:
A genenl quality point avenge of 2.50 and 2.50 in the area of specialization. The student spends full time in
actual cla11room teaching for a semester of 16 weelca. (12 en.) (Variable credit in special circumstances) S-F
EDS 465 . DEVELOPMENT AL READING IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL. Intended to help the prospective
teachcn of the Secondary Education academic subject areas develop an undentanding and appreciation of the
reading skills needed by their studcntl. Methods of establishing awareness of gencnl reading needs as well as the
special 1kill1 unique to their subject area arc stressed. (2 en.) S-F
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
183
EDS 466 . TEACHING MODERN LANGUAGES (K through 12). Thia course is taught in the Language
Labontory. It coven the theory and pnctice of teaching modem languages. Instruction in the use of the
labontory i■ jiven. Ernpha1i1 i1 given to the atudent developing an adequate undemanding of the need■, intere■ta,
leamina chancteri■tica and motivations of atudenta at various age■ of development K through 12. (3 en.)
EDS 467. TEACHING OF SCIENCE IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. Give■ the proapective ■cience major a
thorough groundiq in the problema of teaching ■cience. The objective■ of the ■cience prognm in the secondary
■chool, selection of textboolta, 10Urce1 of auitable litenture, how to secure materials for instruction, the prepantion
of unit■, and ■pecial techniques are studied. Prerequisite: Twelve houn of work in major field . (3 en.) S-F
EDS 469. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. (Variable)
EDS 491. HONORS SEMINAR IN SECONDARY EDUCATION. A seminar intended to provide an experience
of quality that utilizes the human and other re10Urce1 of the univenity. The major emphasis is on inquiry nther
than mere acquisition of information. The methodology of the course is designed to feature the Socntic method,
case study, action research, or problem-oriented techniques. The examination is in the form of a defense of a paper
written by atudenta in their major fields . It is intended to minimize routine aummary and to maximize critical
thinking . (Variable)
EDE 494. STUDENT TEACHING WORKSHOP. For student■ seeking secondary teaching certification in
Pennsylvania who have had prior teaching experience in secondary ■choola. The learning procedures aaaume
various undentanding• and competenciea. Regiatntion for this workshop requires the approval of the Dean of
Education and the Director of Student Teaching. (8 era.) S
EDF 500. CREATING INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS . Thia basic production course encompaaaea the
principle ■, techniques, and skills used in the effective prepantion of a variety of inexpensive teacher-made
instructional materials, auch as tnn■parencies, opaque projection materials, individual materials to aupport projector
inatruction, duplicating di■c recording, on tape, duplicating tape ■, making 10Und effect■, chalkboard techniques,
mounting and preserving pictorial materials and ■pecimens, lettering techniques, devices for the di ■play and study
of live ■pecimens, apecial-purpose maps, models and mock-ups, (flannel boards, magnetic boards, electric boards,
dionma ■tagea, and effective bulletin boards). (3 era.)
EDF 510. PHOTOGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION. Beginning with the fundamentals ofphotognphy, this course
considers the skills and techniques needed to take and display effective photognphs in black and white or in color,
and how to use various camens, common aupplements, attachments, and materials. Because photognphy also
depend, on the photognpher's perception and style, students are encounged to seek out aubjecta that interest them.
They plan and execute individual projects in communicating thoughts or feelings to others. Applications to
problems of inatructional communication and instructional development are encounged, and emphasis is placed on
techniquea of presentation. (3 era.)
EDF 520. TELEVISION PRODUCTION FOR TEACHERS. A study of the techniquea for producing and directing
effective televised inatruction. Student■ develop skills and competencies by doing exercise, in planning, designing,
■cripting, preparing gnphics for, and teaching and directing short television lessons.
Effective utilization
techniquea and evaluation of televised instruction are also considered. (3 era.)
184
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION (EDE)
EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION (ECE)
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION/EARLY CHILDHOOD
See also: Special Education in this catalog, pages 326 and following, for dual majors in
Early Childhood and Special Education, and in Elementary Education and Special Education.
Professor Roger J. Orr, chair; Associate Professor Elwin Dickerson, assistant chair.
Professors M. Eileen Aiken, Dorothy M. Campbell, Ronald A. Christ, Allan D . Jacobs,
Gary W. Kennedy, J. Gregory Martin, Phyllis S. Mcllwain, Anthony J. Saludis; Associate
Professors Diane H. Nettles, Jannene Southworth, John R. Vargo; Assistant Professors
Beverly J. Melenyz.er, Joseph D. Scarmazzi
Student in all curricula must achieve a satisfactory score on the National Teachers '
Examination in order to acquire Pennsylvania Certification.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
The goal of the Elementary Education program is to have students acquire the
knowledge, skills, and attitudes essential to becoming a successful member of the teaching
profession.
The term Developmental Interaction is used to summariz.e the department's belief that:
(1) learning is the result of interaction between heredity and environmental factors;
(2) learning is the result of interaction between cognitive, affective, and psycho-motor areas
of development; and
(3) learning occurs in predictable stages of development which are age-related.
The Elementary/Early Childhood Professional Education Program seeks to prepare
teachers who facilitate learning by emphasizing the following: (1) process-oriented teaching
strategies, (2) diagnostic teaching, (3) holistic learning experiences, (4) reliance upon
intrinsic motivation, (5) responsive environments, (6) integration of cognitive and affective
objectives, and (7) home/school collaboration.
Elementary Education majors must successfully complete one semester of student
teaching, which includes field work at two grade levels. Certification to teach kindergarten
through sixth grade is awarded upon graduation and upon successful completion of the NTE.
The College of Education is accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of
Teacher Education. The Placement and Career Services Office aids students seeking
teaching positions locally and out-of-state.
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
185
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral F.ducation: 18 credit, in Humanities (including English Composition 1-11 and Oral
Communication); 15 credita in Natunl Sciences (including mathematic ■, biological science, physical science and
environmental science); 15 credit, in Social Science, (including Gcognphy, American History, Economic• and
Genenl Psychology), 3 credit, in Health and Phy■ical Activities
(B) Professional F.ducatioo: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computera for Teachera (EDF 301);
Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Educational Psychology (PSY 208): Child Psychology (PSY 205);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainatreaming Exceptional Leamera (EDU 340); Student Teaching
(EDE 461)
(C) Professional Specialization: Art for Elementary Teachera (EDE 205); Teachin, Music in Elementary
Gnde1 (EDE 207); Health and Physical Education in Elementary Gndea (EDE 208); Inatnictional StrateJiea in
Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children'• Litenture I
(EDE 311); Field Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Observation and Conference (EDE 409);
Mathematica Content and Method in the Elementary School (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studie1 (EDE 306);
Science in the Elementary School (EDE 307); Teaching of Language Arla (EDE 308); Assessing Children's
Performance (EDE 450)
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD
The Early Childhood Education program provides the academic background and field
work needed for teaching certification from infancy through third grade. Upon completion
of the program and upon successful completion of the National Teachers' Examination, the
prospective teacher will receive a Bachelor of Science degree and a Pennsylvania
Instructional Certificate. The College of Education is accredited by the National Council
for Accreditation of Teacher Education, and certification in Pennsylvania can apply to all
fifty states. Our Placement Office is active in aiding students seeking teaching positions
locally and out of state.
California University of Pennsylvania has had exceptionally high placement of its Early
Childhood graduates, and given the number of students graduating in the field, future
employment looks promising.
The objectives of the Early Childhood program are to help students:
-Understand the growth and development of children;
-Plan educational experiences using knowledge of different cultures and societies;
-Select and use instructional resources wisely.
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral F.ducation: 18 credit, in Humanities, including English Composition 1-11 (ENGl0l-102), Oral
Communication (COM 101), and counes in litenture, music, and art history; 15 credit, in Natural Sciences,
including Mathematics, Biology, Physical Science, and Environmental Science); 15 credit, in Social Sciences,
including Geognphy, American History (Before or Since 1877), American Government, Element, of Economics
Geognphy, and Genenl Psychology), 3 credita in Health, including Health Coed.
(B) Professional F.ducatioa: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computera for Teachera (EDF 301);
Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Educational Psychology (PSY 208): Child Psychology (PSY 205);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainatreaming Exceptional Leamera (EDU 340); Student Teaching
(EDE 461)
186
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
(C) ProfeMiooal Specialization: Field Experience with Infants, Toddlers, and Preschoolen (ECE 203); Field
in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Art for Early Childhood (ECE 215); Inatructional Strategies in
Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Music for Early Childhood (ECE 217); Health and Physical
Education in Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 218); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301);
Children' ■ Literature I (EDE 311); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); The Child in a Social and
Physical Environment (ECE 316); Science for Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 307); Communicative Art■ in
Early Childhood (ECE 318); Early Childhood Seminar (ECE 405)
Experience ■
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ELEMENTARY/EARLY CHILDHOOD (DUAL MAJOR)
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 18 credits in Humanities, including English Composition 1-11 (ENGI0l-102), Oral
Communication (COM 101), and courses in literature, music, and art history; 15 credits in Natural Science■,
including Mathematics, Biological Science, Physical Science, and Environmental Science); 15 credits in Social
Science,, including Geography, American History (Before or Since 1877), Elements of Economic ■ and General
Psychology), 3 credits in Health, Finl Aid and Personal Safety.
(B) ProfeMiooal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computers for Teachen (EDF 301);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210) ; Educational Psychology (PSY 208) : Child Psychology (PSY 205);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Student Teaching
(EDE 461)
(C) ProfeMiooal Specialization: Art for Elementary Teacher (EDE 205); Teaching Music in Elementary
Grades (EDE 207); Health and Physical Education in Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 218); Inatructional
Strategies in Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children's
Literature I (EDE 311); Field Experience in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Observation and Conference (EDE 409);
Mathematic ■ Content and Methods (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studies (EDE 306); Science for Elementary
Teachers (EDE 307); Teaching Language Art■ (EDE 308); Field Experiences with Infant, Toddlers, Preschoolers
(EDE 203); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE
315); Child in Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Communicative Art■ in Early Childhood (ECE 318);
Early Childhood Ed Seminar (ECE 405); Assessing Children's Performance (EDE 450)
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION- EARLY CHILDHOOD
187
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION COURSES (EDE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
EDE 100: READING, STUDY AND LISTENING SKILLS . The purpose of this counc i■ to develop lillening,
reading and ■tudy 1k.ill1 ncceaaary for academic ■ucce11 in Univenity ■tudies and future vocational and profe11ional
work. 11ris course does 1fOt cany credit towards gradualion. (3 en.)
EDE 205 : ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES. Development of art activities suitable for the elementary
gndea. Emphaais is placed upon the integntion of art education with other ■chool subjects. (3 en.)
EDE 207 : TEACHING OF MUSIC IN ELEMENTARY GRADES . For cla11room teachen of elementary, early
childhood and middle ■chool gndes, thi■ counc demonstrate■ proper technique■ of teaching mu ■ic to children.
Basic performance skills and their application in the classroom, such as the use of rhythm instruments, ■inging
game ■, records, dance ■, creative activitie1 and part- ■inging are taught. Information on resource material is
included. Students pnctice teaching selected mu ■ic topics to the other ■tudents in the cla11. (3 en.)
EDE 210. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES IN ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION.
The role of a developmental intenctionist teacher i■ explored in this counc. Preservice teachen are taught specific
pedagogical skills and stntegies that develop a teacher who does the following effectively: observe ■ and 11se1se1
children, facilitates active learning, provides a rich learning environment, attends to both affective and cognitive
demands of learning, and views learning a ■ an interaction of environmental and developmental facton . (3 en.)
EDE 218 : TEACHING HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/ELEMENTARY
AGE CHILDREN. An introductory counc with special emphasi1 on planning, asseHing, pre■cribing, teaching
and evaluating activities which enhance the development of growth of children beginning at infancy. Teacher
directed practicum experience■ are provided during cla11 time. Prerequisite 32 credits. (3 en.)
EDE 301 : TEACHING OF READING. Theoretical background and the research base behind suggestion■ to put
theory into pnctice are included to give the prospective teacher a balanced perspective. Students are presented
pnctical information, activities and strategies for teaching reading, and given the opportunity to participate through
observation■, demonstration■, and actual le110n planning and teaching situations. Prerequi ■ite: 32 credits; 9
Humanities credits. (3 crs.)
EDE 302: DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL READING. Major emphasis is placed on acquainting the ■tudent
with the technique■ of diagnosing reading difficultiea and of detennining appropriate remedial treatment.
Prerequisite : EDE 301. (3 crs.)
EDE 305: MATHEMATICAL CONTENT AND METHOD IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. Emphaais is on
understanding the cognitive development and the perception of children and their work with mathematic ■. To
accomplish this it i■ suggested that students work with children. The professor demon■tntes learning activities
appropriate to the developmental and academic levels of the children. Al time pennits, and on the ba1i1 of the
experiences gained through observing and working with children, critical analyses of commercial arithmetic
materials and texts, 11 well as recent trends and current projects in arithmetic, are considered. Prerequisite■ 32
credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 crs.)
EDE 306 : TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES FOR ELEMENTARY GRADES . The foundation■ of the social
studies are examined, and teaching strategic, are emphaaized . Attention will be given to current trend ■ and the
present statu■ of social studies. Child growth and development are related to knowledge base• throughout the
COUl'IIC . Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Social Science credits. (3 crs.)
188
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION- EARLY CHILDHOOD
EDE 307 : SCIENCE FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. Thia course is required of all lltudenu in the
Elementary curriculum. It is designed to acquaint students with the history of acience curricula, the content of
science, and the proce11 of science teaching. Additionally, the instructor generate, behavioral outcome, by
encouraging acientific alcilla, deacribing positive attitudes, and enhancing appreciationa and acience interelt.
Prerequi ■ite : 32 credits; 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.)
EDE 308 : TEACHING OF LANGUAGE ARTS . Presents a broad foundation of the variou1 aspects of the
language arta in elementary education. Emphasis given to the knowledge of the facets of the language arta, basic
principle, technique,, materials of instruction, recent trends and research, and practice planning language arta
experiences. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Humanities credits. (3 en.)
EDE 311: CHILDREN'S LITERATURE. Acquaints the student with literature available for children and various
techniques that may be employed in elementary classrooms to stimulate interelt in reading and telling stories and
poems. Prerequi■ites : 32 credits; 9 Humanities credits. (3 en.)
EDE 312: CHILDREN'S LITERATURE D. An extenaion of Children' s Literature I. Emphasis on selection and
use of literature compatible with children's needs, intereata, and abilities. Focuse ■ on heightening appreciation of
literature in children. Prerequisite: EDE 311 (3 en.)
EDE 335: READING IN URBAN SOCIETY . Presents an undentandingof the reading proceu and its relationahip
to lltudents in the urban school. Emphasis ia given to characteristics of the di ■advantaged child, phases of the
reading proceu, stages of readiness, needs of the di ■advantaged child, providing for individual difference,, variou■
multi-ethnic ba■al reading programs, and materials and equipment. Prerequisite: EDE 301 . (2 en.)
EDE 337: POETRY FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CHILD . The study of poetry and verse, the heart of
all literary experiences, mainly in terms of the pleaaure they give children through their meaning, music and
mythm. Emphaaia is given to the special pleaaure inherent in poetry for children by extending their imaginationa,
contributing new sen■ationa, and enhancing their past experiences. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Hurnanitiea credits.
(2 en.)
EDE 409 : OBSERVATION AND CONFERENCE. The 11tudent receives background and experience in working
with intermediate grade children in the classroom. Lectures and classroom teaching experience, are combined to
give the student an opportunity to discover an aptitude and interest in working with children. (3 en.)
EDE 450: ASSESSING CHILDREN'S PERFORMANCE. This course reflects the developmental interaction model
of teaching with a focus on the consideration of developmental factors in planning evaluation procedure,. This
course's content includes the development and adaptation of instruments and procedures for evaluation of activities
associated with a variety of teaching approaches including inquiry and diacovery learning.
EDE 461 : STUDENT TEACHING . During this course the student is assigned to work in two claurooms in the
public schools. Under supervision, the student observes and participates in all teaching activities related to the
performance of a teacher's work in the elementary grades. Beside field work, students attend practicum clau once
a week. Discussions are centered around the current materials utilized in all aubject areas. Pennsylvania achool
law, relevant to the work of the claBBroom teacher are analyzed and discussed thoroughly. Opportunities are
provided to discuu problems encountered by students in their student teaching experiences. Teaching opportunitie■
are identified and discussed on a weekly basis. (12 crs.)
EDE 498 : INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES IN ELEMENT ARY SCHOOL. The techniques and the experience ■ of
educational innovation are nearly boundleu; therefore, we focus on educational innovation a, reaction to national
crisis, as reaction to technical innovation, and aa reaction to political fad. From this perspective, we asae11 the
present social and political forces that engender change in our national experience and that foster innovation in our
educational practices. We will examine the role of the NTE as an agent of change. Prerequisite: 32 credits. (3
crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
189
EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION COURSES (ECE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
BCE 202: FIELD EXPERIENCES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. The studenta m:eive background and experience
in worki111 with primary grade children in the clauroom. Lectures and clauroom teachi111 experience■ arc
combined to Jive studenta an opportunity to diacover their aptitude for and interest in working with young children.
Prcrequi1ite1: 32 credita, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 en.)
BCE 203:FIELD EXPERIENCES wrrH INFANTS, TODDLERS, AND PRESCHOOLERS. Introduce■ the
student to working with young children, from infancy through five by providing field experience■ in infant/toddler
day care centen and prcachool centen (Day Care, Head Start, or Nunery School). The student obacrvea, plans
activities, and prepares learning materials for children in group acttings. Lectures and clauroom teaching arc
combined to give students an opportunity to diacover their aptitude for and interest in working with very young
children. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 crs.)
EDE 210. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES IN ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION.
The role of a developmental intenctionist teacher ia explored in this course. Prcacrvice teachen arc taught specific
pcdaJoJical ■kill■ and atratejiea that develop a teacher who doc■ the following effectively: obacrvea and a■ICIICI
children, facilitates active learning, provide ■ a rich learning environment, attend■ to both affective and cognitive
demand■ of learning and view ■ learning a■ an interaction of environment and developmental factor■. (3 crs.)
BCE 217: MUSIC FOR EARLY CHILDHOOD. A creative approach to the music intercata and need■ of the very
young child deaigncd to acquaint the prospective teacher with current music education practice■ in prcachool and
the primary ,rades. Experience■ arc provided in singing, listening, playing inatrumenta, mythmic movement, and
creative mu■ic activities. Prerequisite: 32 crcdita; 9 Humanitie■ crcdita. (3 en.)
EDE 218: TEACHING HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/ELEMENTARY
AGE CHILDREN. An introductory course with special emphasia on planning, aaacssing, prcacribing, teaching and
evaluating activities which enhance the development of growth of children beginning at infancy. Teacher directed
practicum experience, arc provided during claaa time. Prerequisite: 32 credita. (3 crs.)
BCE 301: READING EXPERIENCES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. This course prepares Early Childhood studenta
to become facilitators of early literacy learnings. Content deals with concepts of emerging literacy and the
introduction of reading skills from infancy throughout the primary gradea. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Humanitiea
credita. (3 en.)
EDE 307: SCIENCE FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. This course is required of all student in the
Elementary and Early Childhood curricula. It is designed to acquaint students with the history of acience curricula,
the content of acience, and the proceas of acience teaching. Additionally, the instructor, generates behavioral
outcome■ by encourajing acientific skills, deacribing positive attitudes, enhance appreciation■, and acience interest.
Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.)
BCE 315: MATHEMATICAL CONTENT IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. The student is introduced to how
mathematic, develops in the very young child and how to aaacas this development. The student is introduced to
the teaching of arithmetic, mea111rcment, and geometry to the young child. Skill■ and understanding■ that children
acquire from infancy to age 8 arc covered. Prerequisites: 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.)
BCE 316: THE CHILD IN A SOCIAL AND PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT. Providea student with skills nccesaary
to develop children' ■ awareness of their social and physical world. Teaching atrategiea arc developed and evaluated
190
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
as they pertain to children at the early childhood level of birth through eight yean. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9
Social Science credits. (3 en.)
ECE 318 : COMMUNICATIVE ARTS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. Familiarize students with methods of teaching
communication skills to young children. The integration of the cognitive and affective domaina, so important in
helping children communicate, receives special empha ■ia . Strategiea and techniques for teaching the language arts
are included . Prerequisite: 32 credits; 9 Humanitie, credits. (3 en.)
ECE 405 : EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION SEMINAR. How young children have been viewed and educated
by society throughout history. The present-day circumstances of children and families are studied. Students receive
background in how to work with parents, communities, other profeBBionals, and policy-maken to ensure a quality ,
developmentally appropriate education for young children. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 en.)
ECE 491 : FUNDAMENTALS OF DAY CARE EDUCATION. Background in the origin and current trends of
day care and the fundamentals of setting up a day care center. The course teaches students how to administer a
program focusing on aspects such as budgeting, personnel management, and developing program components.
Prerequisite: 32 credits; EDF 100, PSY 208 . (3 era.)
ECE 493 : DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRESCHOOL CHILD. The development of the child from conception to
six yean of age . The areas of development to be explored are sensory-motor, social-emotional, language, and
intellectual. Strategiea for enhancing growth through the various stages are emphasized. Prerequisite: 32 credits,
EDF 100, PSY 208: (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
191
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
ENGLISH (ENG)
LITERATURE (LIT)
PROFESSIONAL WRITING PROGRAM, Optiom in
-BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL WRITING
-CREATIVE WRITING
-JOURNALISM
-RADIO-TELEVISION MEDIA
-SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING
See also the program in Secondary Education Communication Certification (pages 164-165
in this catalog).
Professor Jack D. Goodstein, chair. Assistant Professor Ronald L. Forsythe, assistant chair.
Professors Philip Y. Coleman, Robert W. Dillon, Sr., John M. Hanchin, Robert A.
Korcheck, Horace S. Rockwood, ill, Charles R. Thomas; Associate Professors Glenn H.
Blayney, Edward J. Chute, Sumner Ferris, Gene Patrick Halboth, Madelon Jacoba,
Frederick S. Lapisardi, William M. Murdick, J. Alan Natali, Connie Mack Rea; Assistant
Professors William J. Beardsley, William K. Bennett, Bernard J. DeFilippo, Judith A.
Good, Robert H. Grimes, Patricia L. Hartman, William Hendricks, Arthur W. Knight,
Pratul C. Pathak, Lisa M. Schwerdt, G. Ralph Smith, II, Madeline C. Smith, Carole A.
Waterhouse; Instructor William A. Yahner
PURPOSE
English is a comprehensive discipline. Its scope encompasses a study of the evolution
of the language itself, the various types of writing, the literature in English (poetry, drama,
fiction, and essay regardless of national origin), and the study of literature in languages
other than English.
Enabling people to express their ideas clearly and to read their ideas and the ideas of
others in an appreciative and critical manner sets English off as a "liberalizing" course of
study. The ideas expressed are boundless. The content expressed is emotive as well as
rational. What is written is a personal and social record of the struggle to create meaning
for human existence. The reader is made more self-aware. Insight into the past and into
the present creates an interdisciplinary and common core of ideas to be discussed and
analymd by scholars in many disciplines.
PROGRAMS
The English major has seven options or areas of specialization. One is the general
English program. Five options form the Professional Writing Program: Business and
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
192
Commercial Writing, Creative Writing, Radio-Television Media, Scientific and Technical
Writing, and Journalism. The seventh option is for persons who want to teach English or
an allied area: the English Department in cooperation with the College of Education and
Human Services provides course work necessary for secondary school certification in
English and in Communication (which certifies students to teach English, Speech, or
Theatre).
A well developed internship program supports classroom studies in the Professional
Writing Program. Depending upon the Professional Writing option undertaken, a student
may take as many as sixteen credits of internship experience. Policies and procedures
regarding internships can be secured from the departmental office or faculty internship
supervisor.
HONOR SOCIETY
Sigma Tau Delta (ET~) is the National English Honor Society. The California
University Chapter, Delta Theta (~0), was chartered in 1959 and is the oldest chapter in
the Pennsylvania State System of Higher Education. Membership is Sigma Tau Delta is
open not only to English majors but also to all those who have English as an interest,
provided they have at least a 3.0 average in their English courses, rank in the highest 35%
of their class in general scholarship, have completed at least three semester of college, and
have completed at least two courses in literature in addition to freshman English.
AWARDS
The English Department offers the following awards, in order to encourage and reward
academic achievement:
The Eleanore C. Hibbs Writing Award is given annually to a student in Composition I
and Composition II. An applicant for the award must submit an essay that was written for
one of these classes and that carries the recommendation of the student's instructor. All
entries are judged by a special committee of the English Department. The winner receives
a certificate of merit and $100, both awarded at a luncheon in May.
The Minor W. Major Award is given annually to a student who has achieved distinction
in the study of English. The award is given for merit alone, usually to a student of junior
standing. A departmental committee reviews the academic records of prospective recipients,
usually English majors, and singles out the student who best meets its standards. The award
is named for Dr. Minor W. Major, late professor of English, 1957-1975. The recipient
receives a certificate of merit and a cash award, both presented at a luncheon usually in
April.
The English Faculty Award is given annually to the student in English whose
development has been most noteworthy over four years. The recipient receives a certificate
of merit and an inscribed book, awarded at the senior dinner in May.
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
193
CAREERS
Besides preparing the graduate for graduate work in English and American literature,
linguistics, library work, law, and a number of other fields, the English program offers
career opportunities in such positions as a newspaper reporter, magazine editor, writer,
public information assistant, advertising researcher, communications specialist, proof reader,
radio and television editor, and employment interviewer.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH
Curriculum:
(A) Geoeral Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area or Concentration: English Literature 1-11 (ENG 301 and 302); American Literature to 1865 (ENG
365); American Literature from 1865 to World War I (ENG 366); American Literature from World War I (ENG
367); Chaucer (ENG 415) or Milton (ENG 427) or Survey of Old and Middle English Literature (ENG 310);
ShakeBpeare (ENG 425); History of Literary Criticism (ENG 348) or Practical Criticism (ENG 448); Introduction
to Linguistic, (ENG 247) or History of the English Language (ENG 346) and 12 credits of 300-400 level English
counes. Related Counes: 30 credits, at least 16 of which must be in a Related Discipline approved by the advisor
and at least 16 of which must be at the 200 level or above.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH:
PROFESSIONAL WRITING PROGRAM
Curriculum:
Geoera1 Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
Busin~ and Commercial Writing Option
Area or Concentration: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Advertising (ENG 437); Great Books (ENG 203);
Bu1ine11 Writing I (ENG 211); and II (ENG 212); Journalism I (ENG 307); Research for Writen (ENG 308);
Publiahing the Magazine (ENG 351); Writing for Publication (ENG 496) . 9 credits of restricted elective,: Studie1
in Writing (ENG 352); Article Writing (ENG 435); Journalism II (ENG 311) and ill (ENG 312); Copywriting
(ENG 401); Directed projects in English (ENG 478); English Grammar and Usage (ENG 345); 21 credits of related
counes: Introduction to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I (BUS 111); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 301);
Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Principles of Marketing (BUS 321 ); Salcsmanahip (BUS 221 ); Principle,
of Management (BUS 201); 11 credits of elective,.
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
194
Creative Writing Option
Area or Coacmtration: Poetics (ENG 318); Creative Writing: Fiction (ENG 376) or Poetry (ENG 377); Creative
Writing Seminar (ENG 495); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351); Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Article Writing
(ENG 435); Studie1 in Writing (ENG 352); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Writing for Publication (ENG 496).
Three of the following restricted elective courses: Great Boob (ENG 203); Adaptation of Literary Material, (ENG
430) ; Playwriting (THE 250); Businen Writing I (BUS 211); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217);
Advertising (ENG 437); Journalism I (ENG 307); Creative Writing: Fiction (ENG 376) or Poetry (ENG 377);
Copywriting (ENG 401) . 32 credits of elective, drawn from literature (300 level and beyond), linguilllica, apccch,
foreign language,, and theatre, including 12 hours of electives from any one area .
Journalism Option
Area or Concentration: Word Procening (ENG 151); Journalism I (ENG 307) and Journalism D (ENG 311)
and Journalism m (ENG 312); Press Law and Ethics (ENG 253); American Journalism (ENG 254); Newapaper
Reporting I (ENG 334); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Six of the following: Research for Writers (ENG
308); Article Writing (ENG 435); Studies in Writing (ENG 352); Newspaper Reporting D (ENG 335); Publishing
the Magazine (ENG 351); Sportawriting I (ENG 313); Sportawriting D (ENG 314); Advertising (ENG 437).
Twelve credits in a related discipline; 16 credits in internship or related electives.
Radio-Television Media Option
Area or Concentration: Writing core: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Journali•m I (ENG 307); Research for
Writers (ENG 308); Article Writing (ENG 435); Directed Projects in English (ENG 478); Adaptation of Literary
Materials (ENG 430); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Media Core : Introduction to Televi1ion Production
(COM 240); Introduction to Radio Production (COM 245); Radio and Television Writing : News and Commercials
(COM 330) ; Radio and Television Writing: Drama (COM 335); Radio Workshop I (COM 196) and D (COM 296)
and ill (COM 396) or Television Workshop I (COM 195) and D (COM 295) and ill (COM 395). Six to 15 credits
of writing electives from among: Playwriting (THE 250); Journalism D (ENG 311) and m (ENG 312); Creative
Writing : Drama (ENG 378); Advertising (ENG 437); and Businesa Writing I (ENG 211) . Six to 12 credits of media
electives from among: Radio and Television Announcing-(COM 246); Appreciation of Television (COM 270);
Advanced Televi1ion Production (COM 340); and Special Problems in Speech Communication (COM 420). Three
to 15 credits of literature electives from among: Great Boob (ENG 203); Shakespeare (ENG 425); Studies in
Drama (ENG 488); Shakespeare in the Theatre (THE 305); World Drama (THE 315); Dramatic Theory and
Criticism (THE 400); or other advanced literature courses.
Scientific and Technical Writing Option
Area or Concentration: Writing Core: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Journalism I (ENG 307); Scientific
and Technical Writing I (ENG 217) and Technical Writing D (ENG 218); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351);
Article Writing (ENG 435); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Studies in Writing (ENG 352); Writing for
Publication (ENG 496); Literature Core : Six credits from among: Great Boob (ENG 203); English Literature I
(ENG 207) and English Literature D (ENG 208); American Literature to 1865 (ENG 365); American Literature
from 1865 to World War I (ENG 366) ; American Literature from World War I (ENG 367) . Related Electives:
14 credits from among: English Grammar and Usage (ENG 345); Journalism D (ENG 311); Advertising (ENG
437); Copywriting (ENG 401); Business Writing I (ENG 211); Directed Project in English (ENG 478) . 3-8 credits
of literature electives; and a 3-11 credit internship . 21 credits of Scientific or Technical courses, 15 credits in one
discipline code .
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
195
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN ENGLISH FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculma:
(A) Gmenl Educatioa:
Humanitie ■ (IS credit, minimum): including Compo■ition I (ENG 101);
(ENG 102), Theatre Coune, World Literature to 1600 (ENG 20S) or World Literature ■ince 1600
(ENG 206); Natural Science (9 credit, minimum); Social Science (9 credit minimum); Health or Phy■ical Activitie■
(3 credit minimum); Oral Communication (COM 101); General P■ychology (PSY 101).
(B) Profeuioaal Educatioa: (41 credita): Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational P■ychology
(PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300);
Educational Tellla and Mea■urementa in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary
School ■ (EDS 46S); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Lcamcra (EDU
340); Computera for Teachers (EDF 301); Teaching of English in Secondary Schools (EDS 440); Student Teaching
and School Law (EDS 461).
(C) Profeuioaal Specialization: (4S credita) : Advanced Writing (ENG 37S) or Scientific & Technical
Writing (ENG 217) or Creative Writing (ENG 376); History of the English Language (ENG 346); English
Grammar and U■age (ENG 34S); History of Literary Criticism (ENG 348); Introduction to Lingui ■tics (ENG 347);
Argumentation & Debate (COM 230) .
(D) AdHDCed Requirements: (27 credita) : American Literature to 186S (ENG 36S); American Literature
from 186S to World War I (ENG 366); American Literature from World War I (ENG 367) or American Literature
Elective; English Literature I (ENG 301); English Literature II (ENG 302); Shakespeare (ENG 42S);
Communication Theory (COM 490); Fundamentals of Acting (THE 130) or Stagecraft (THE ISi) or Fundamentals
of Directing (THE 200); ~00-400 ENG literature elective.
Compo■ition II
Students must achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to achieve Pennsylvania
Certification.
ENGLISH COURSES (ENG)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ ENG 100. ENGLISH LANGUAGE SKILLS . A beginning coune which provides guided practice in writing and
reading, with emphasis on the interrelationship of reading, thinking, and writing to evaluate the effective use of
the written language and, after evaluation, to help develop these ■kills to the level of competency expected of
college lludenta. ENG 100 stresses learning fundamental principles and attitudes concerning the writing process
as well as how to put into practice these principles and attitudes. It explores the importance of eaaential
compo■itional ■lcill■: the ability to read correctly and to organize material effectively and, by adherence to the innate
logic of language (revealed in ita rules of grammar, ■yntax, punctuation and vocabulary choice) to expreu idea■
clearly and precisely. This course does 1UJI cany credit towards graduation. (3 era.)
+ENG 101. ENGLISH COMPOSmON I. Composition I is a natural sequel to English Language Sicilia. It
guided practice in writing, with emphaaia on thoughtful analyai■ of subject matter, clear understanding
of the writing ■ituation, flexible use of rhetorical strategies, and development of stylistic options, particularly those
related to an understanding of a variety of purpose■ and voice■ . ENG 101 continues the development of the
eaaential writing, reading and thinking slcill■ atre■sed in ENG I 00. (3 era.)
provide■
196
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
+ENG 102. ENGLISH COMPOSITION D. The 1equence of Composition I - Composition D provides guided
practice in writing, with an empha■ia on more demanding writing aituatione. It continue ■ the work begun in
Compo■ition I with more complicated rhetorical ■trate,ie■ and styli■tic options, especially audience-centered
considerations. ENG 102 introduce■ reaearch and reaearch writing at the undergraduate level. (3 en.)
+ ENG 106. INTRODUCTION TO POETRY. An introduction to the elements of poetry throuah the clo■e
and explication of ■elected poetry from a variety of poets. (3 en.)
analy■ia
+ ENG 107. INTRODUCTION TO FICTION. An introduction to the elements of fiction throuJh the clo■e reading
of ■elected ■hort ■torie■, novella■, and novel■ by a variety of authon. (3 en.)
+ ENG 108. INTRODUCTION TO DRAMA. An introduction to the ba■ic elements of drama.
aelected from worka from the Greek Clauical Period to the Modem Age. (3 en .)
Reading■
will be
+ENG 151. WORD PROCESSING . Familiarize, the IIUdent with the ba■ic concepts of word proceuing. The
atudent learns ■uch operations a■ di■k fonnatting, editing and printing ■tandard document file■ , copying file■ from
other eource■, creating simple databaae file,, and melJUli file■ to do maaa-mailings. The coune aa■ume■ no prior
knowledge of computen. Thi■ coune may not be uaed to aatiafy Humanitie■ requirements in the General Education
program. (1 er.)
+ ENG 155 . BLACK LITF.RATURE. An introduction to the writing■ of African Americana in poetry, fiction, and
drama, ran,ing from the Harlem Renai■aance of the 1920. to the contemporary productions of Leroi Ione■ and
l■hmael Reed . (3 en.)
+ENG 191. STUDENT PUBLICATIONS WORKSHOP. The univenity newspaper and other publications aerve
as laboratories. The IIUdent practices writing, editing, photography, layout, and production. Above all, the IIUdent
learns to work against the clock, a journali■tic neceuity. (1 er.)+ENG 203 . GREAT BOOKS. The texta and hi■torical background ■ of aelectione from among the mo■t highly
regarded literature of the world . The range i■ from the clauical Greek era to the twentieth century. (3 en.)
+ ENG 205. WORLD LITERATURE TO 1600. Example, of worka from a variety of periods and culture■ through
1600 are examined for their literary merit and national characten. Worlte are read in translation. (3 en.)
+ENG 206 . WORLD LITERATURE FROM 1600. Example, of worka from a variety of culture■ and periods
after 1600 are examined for their literary merit and national characten. Works are read in translation. (3 en.)
ENG 211. BUSINESS WRITING I. An introduction to the analysis, writing, and oral preaentation of fonnal and
aemi-formal documents eaaential to busineu groups. Prerequisite: ENG 101. (3 en.)
ENG 212. BUSINESS WRITING D. A continuation in the practice of thoae skills developed in Busineu Writing
I. Prerequisite : Busineu Writing I or equivalent writing ability. (3 en.)
ENG 215. LITERATURE AND AGING. The 1111dy of literature that
include ■
aging as a thematic device. (3 en.)
ENG 217. SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING I. An introduction to the specific technique, uaed in the
preparation of reporta and other acientific documents. Recommended for Science and Technology majon. (3 en.)
ENG 218. SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING D. For IIUdents who wish to improve writing skills
acquired in ENG 217: a problem-aolving approach to adapting technical documents to variou■ audiences; ■trategie ■
of organization for complex technical documents ■uch aa formal propoaals, professional articles, and computer
documentation; the uae of computen to mailer different formats in acientific and technical communication.
Prerequi■ite : ENG 217. (3 er.)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
197
ENG 253. PRESS LAW AND ETHICS : Thi ■ counc help ■ atudent joumali1ta understand not only what they can
or can't do by law, but what they ■hould or ■hould not do within commonly accepted standard■ of good taste and
morality.
ENG 254. AMERICAN JOURNALISM: A atudy of the rccenthiltOry ofjoumaliam and of the prcacnt ■tatc of the
profeuion. The empha1i1 i■ on print journalism; however, the news gathering and reporting aapccta of radio and
tclevi■ion arc covered briefly. Prcrcqui1itc1: Joumali■m I and II for Writing Majon.
ENG 265. THE AMERICAN EXPERIENCE IN LITERATURE: NINETEENTH CENTURY. A aurvey of aclcctcd
worb which (1) were very popular; (2) were influential in the counc of American history; and (3) reveal faceta
of American life in the 19th century. (3 en.)
ENG 266. THE AMERICAN EXPERIENCE IN LITERATURE: TWENTIETH CENTURY. A study of aclectcd
literature of twentieth century America in the context of major social, hiltOrical, economic, and intellectual trend■ •
In addition to the treatment of ■tandard twentieth century •clauic■, • book■ which have had a wide popular appeal
or which have influenced or interpreted the cultural life of modem America arc atudied . All genres arc included,
with apccial empha■i■ on fiction and non-fiction. A lower divi ■ion counc de■igncd for the general educational
atudent. (3 en.)
ENG 301 . ENGLISH LITERATURE I. A aurvey of English literature from ita beginnings in the sixth century to
the late eighteenth century. (3 en.)
ENG 302. ENGLISH LITERATURE II. A aurvey of Engli■h literature from the Romantic pocta to the prcacnt day.
(3 en.)
ENG 307. JOURNALISM I (NEWSWRITING). An introduction to basic newsgathering and newswriting taught
by in-clau exerciaca early in the acmcstcr, followed by weekly auignmenta that require submissions to the
California 1lmes. (3 en.)
ENG 308. RESEARCH FOR WRITERS. For students in each of the ProfeSBional Writing tracks . Basic library
materials and technique■, on-campu■ rcaource■, govemmcntdocumenta, research libraries, and advanced techniques
of interviewing, document analysis, etc. Concludes with a pre-publication draft of a rcacarched paper in the
student's area of apecialization. (3 en.)
ENG 310. SURVEY OF OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE. A study of English literature from ita
beginning■ to approximately 1500. Some of the topic■, authon, and work■ arc Beowulf, elegiac and Christian
poetry, the riac of the drama, the romance (Sir Gawain and lhe Green Knight and Thomas Malory' ■ Morre
Danhur), and aclcctiona from Geoffrey Chaucer' s Canterbury Tales. Moat of the writing is read in Modem
Engli■h veniona. (3 en.)
ENG 3 ll . JOURNALISM II (FEATURE WRITING) . Feature writing and in-depth news reporting. Studenta write
four feature article■ ■uitable for publication in the California 1lmes. (3 en.)
ENG 312. JOURNALISM m. Working on college publications, editing, proofreading, and rewriting materials for
print arc learned in the clauroom and in the production of actual publicationa. (3 en.)
ENG 313 . SPORTSWRITING I . A study of the history of aportswriting in America and the technique• of writing
daily coverage of aports and athlete■ . Student.I will atudy interviewing, finding and using statistics, the standards
and practice ■ of the profeuion and the make-up, layout and de■ign of the daily aports page. Student.I will_ be
auigncd •beats• and will be asked to write at least one ltOry per week. (3 en.)
ENG 314. SPORTSWRITING II: A atudy of the techniques of writing lengthy, in-depth stories about aporta and
athletes. Student■ will be a■ked to write columns, feature 1t0rie1 and profile■ and to do investigative reporting .
Student■ ■hould have taken Joumali■m I and Sportswriting I. (3 en.)
198
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
ENG 31.S. SURVEY OF AMERICAN WOMEN WRrrERS: METHOD AND TEXT. The importance of both
text and method in the study of American women writen ia emph■aized in thia coune. Aaaiped reading• and
research worbhopa introduce studenta to ■ variety of texta and aourcea ■a well ■a to methods for reading,
discovering, and interpreting writings. Integration of text and method ia achieved through • aerie• of writing and
research projecta that ■re tied to the ■aaigned readings. (3 en.)
ENG 316. MYTHOLOGY I. An exploration of the origins of mythology and various mytha through• study of
aelected Greek, Roman, Nordic, Oriental, African, and American Indian mythologies, with attention to the roles
of aoda and heroes. (3 en.)
ENG 317. MYTHOLOGY Il. A further examination of mythology, with emphasis on legend• and folkt■ lea, through
study of En,liah, lriah, German, Italian, French, and American mythologies. (3 en.)
ENG 318. POETICS. Through reading• from a text on poetic theory, eu■ya on poetry by poeta, and ■n anthology
of poetry, studenta learn to analyze poema in great detail, atreaaing poetry ■a ■n ■ct of language and something
which ia made •• much II it ia inspired. Studenta become acquainted with the variety of me■n1 by which the
literary craft.man creates feeling and meaning. (3 en.)
ENG 321 . THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE: SKELTON THROUGH DONNE. A study of nondramatic prose and
poetry choaen from such writen as Thomas Wyatt, the Earl of Surrey, Thomas S■ckville, John Skelton, Sir Philip
Sidney, Edmund Spenser, William Shakespeare, and John Donne, with emph■aia on such literary genre••• the lyric
and sonnet, and ■n examination of various philosophical, historical, and social documenta. (3 en.)
ENG 322. THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE: BACON THROUGH MARVELL. A study of the non-dramatic prose
and poetry of En,l■nd in the seventeenth century from the worb of Francia Bacon, Richard Burton, John Donne,
Michael Drayton, George Herbert, Robert Herrick, Ben Jonaon, the King James Bible, Andrew Marvell, John
Milton, Henry Vaughan, and Izaak Walton. Emph■1i1 on the three achoola of poetry of the century. (3 en.)
ENG 334. NEWSPAPER REPORTING I. A profeaaion■ l-level coune that acquainta studenta with basic newsroom
procedures and ■aaignmenta. Prerequisites: Journ■ liam 1-Il.
ENG 335. NEWSPAPER REPORTING Il. The coune builds on material learned in Newspaper Reporting I, but
the emphaaia ahifta to extended coverage of more complex inatitutions and i1111e1, culminating in a multi-part story
which demonatratea ■ knowledge of both the i1111e and the governing, deliberative or enforcement agency involved.
Prerequiaitea: Journalism 1-Il, Newspaper Reporting I.
ENG 341. ROMANTIC LITERATURE. An intensive study of selected worb by such Romantic poeta •• William
Blake, William Wordsworth, Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Percy Bysahe Shelley, John Keata, and Lord Byron. (3 en.)
ENG 342. VICTORIAN LITERATURE. An historical and critical survey of the poetry and non-fictional prose of
the Victorian period through such writen as Alfred TeMyson, Robert and Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Thomas
Carlyle, Matthew Arnold, Dante Gabriel and Christin■ Rossetti, Gerard Manley Hopkins, John Stuart Mill , John
Ruskin, John Henry Newman, T . H. Huxley, and Walter Pater. (3 en.)
ENG 345. ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND USAGE. Provides future English te■ chen, professional writing majon,
and other inlereated atudenta, with a sophisticated background in En,liah grammar. The course coven a variety
of grammatical theoriea, issues of mechanical correctneaa in writing, and the sociology of usage. (3 en.)
ENG 346. HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A survey of the development of the language from ita
Germanic base to the emergence of American Engliah. Explanations of aound ahifta and foreign and social
influences. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
199
ENG 347. INTRODUCTIONTO LINGUISTICS. An examination of the ecvenl areas oflan,uage study: history
of the lan,uage, phonology and morphology, gnmman (tnditional and modem), and contcmponry American
usage, dialccll, lexicognphy, and ecmantic1. (3 en.)
ENG 348. HISTORY OF LITERARY CRITICISM. An examination of major critical documcnll from Plato
through the modem critics. An intenaive examination of the worb themselves, with some additional concern for
their place in litenry hiatory. (3 en.)
ENG 351 . PUBLISHING THE MAGAZINE. Studenll in this courec publish a magazine, Flipside. They contribute
worb of litenturc and reportage, illuatnte it with original work: or with photognphs, solicit contributon, finance
the magazine through advertising, and elllbliah editorial policy. (3 en.)
ENG 352. STUDIES IN WR1TING. A study in style: ill definition, ill analysis, and the technique, modern writen
of creative non-fiction uec to achieve it. Studenll analyze the work: of such writen as Tom Wolfe, Joan Didion,
Hunter Thompson and Truman Capote, and then apply to their own proec the techniques theec writen learned from
thoec writen. (3 en.)
ENG 355. SURVEY OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL I: THE BEGINNING THROUGH SCOTT. A study of the
development of the novel from ill beginnina• through the Romantic period, with emphasis on Daniel Defoe, Samuel
Richardson, Henry Fielding, Tobias Smollett, Sir Walter Scott, and Jane Austen. (3 era.)
ENG 356 . SURVEY OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL Il: DICKENS TO THE PRESENT. A study of the novels and
novelilll of the Victorian period and the twentieth century, including Charlea Dick:ena, Charlotte, Emily and Ann
Bronte, W. M . Thack:cny, George Eliot, Joecph Connd, James Joyce, and Virginia Woolf. (3 en.)
ENG 357. TWENTIIITHCENTURY BRil1SH LITERATURE TO WORLD WAR Il. A study of fiction, dnma,
and poetry with empha ■is on W. 8. Yeats, D. H. Lawrence, George Bernard Shaw, Jamea Joyce, Joecph Connd,
Virginia Woolf, E . M . Fonter, and W. H. Auden. (3 en.)
ENG 358. CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE SINCE WORLD WAR Il. An explontion of major genres in
American, English and Continental litenturc by such authors a ■ Saul Bellow, Norman Mailer, Kurt VoMegut, John
Fowle,, Robert LowelJ, Ken Kcecy, John Updike, Lawrence Durrell, Bernard Malamud, Philip Roth, Sylvia Plath,
Thom GuM, Boria Paatcrnak:, Samuel Beckett, Jean Genet, Eug~ne Ionesco, and Bcrtold Brecht. (3 era.)
ENG 365. AMERICAN LITERATURE I. The first courec in the survey of American litenturc covers the period
from ecttlemcnt to 1865. Readings take into account the discovery and rediscovery of new a ■ well as tnditional
texts: writing• of Native Americana, Colonilll, Fedenlista, Romantic,, Tnnscendentalista, and othen arc studied
with an empha ■ i1 upon the influence of Puritan and Enlightenment thought and upon the context of the implicit
conflicts in American aocial hiatory and culture. (3 crcs.)
ENG 366. AMERICAN LITERATURE Il. The accond courec in the survey of American litenturc focueca on the
period of the Civil War to the end of World War I in which fiction . and poetry dominate the litenturc.
Conaidention ia given to the emergence of Black: (in the Harlem Renaissance) and women writen within the context
of a maturing America: growing expanaion, imrnigntion, industrialization, and national definition (3 en.)
ENG 367. AMERICAN LITERATURE m. The final courec in the survey of American litenturc deals wi\h
writing, from World War I to the prcecnt. A growing divenity of •voices,~ atyles, and genre reflect the increasing
complexity and richneaa of the American litenry landscape. Both Modernista and contemponry writen arc
studied. (3 en.)
ENG 375. ADVANCED WRP'ING. The theoriea and pnctice of expository, persuasive, and specialiud report
writing. Prcrcquiaites: English Composition I and English Composition Il or equivalent writina ability. (3 en.)
200
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
ENG 376 . CREATIVE WRITING: FICTION . Techniques of fiction are studied and applied to the writing of short
stories, and students are encouraged to use and shape their own experience; transmitting those everyday things
around them into fictional realities. (3 en.)
ENG 377. CREATIVE WRITING : POETRY . A11pects of poetry, 111ch aa line length, rhythm, aound patterns and
imagery, are discussed . Students will apply those techniques to their own experience and vision, developing a
poetic voice or style. (3 en.)
ENG 378 . CREATIVE WRITING : DRAMA. Writing techniques for the modem stage; e .g., developing character
through dialogue and action. (3 crs.)
ENG 401. COPYWRITING. Students who have already taken the basic Advertising course are expected to improve
preexisting writing skills through individual and group projecta in each of these areas: (1) direct mail
advertisements, (2) newspaper and magazine space advertisements, (3) industrial newsletters and brochures, (4)
radio and TV advertisements. Each student writes at least two usable advertisements for off-campus and one for
a campus program or organization. Noifor beginnen. Prerequisite: ENG 437 (3 crs.)
ENG 415. CHAUCER. 1he Canterbury Tales and other works . (3 crs.)
ENG 419 . INTERNSHIP IN PROFESSIONAL WRITING . Introduces students to the competitive world of
professional writing. Students and cooperating institutions conclude a fonnal agreement whereby they work at a
job and simultaneously receive undergraduate credit. (All details of the course are to be worked out with the
Director of Professional Writing. Variable credits.)
ENG 425. SHAKESPEARE. Explores in considerable depth, and with special reference to the conditions of
Shakespeare's times and theater, some of his greatest plays, especially (a) those most often studied in secondary
school and (b) his great tragedies. (3 crs .)
ENG 427. MILTON. An examination of the major poetry : Paradise Lost, Paradise Regained, Samson Agonisies,
and Lycidas . The prose is treated insofar as it is related to the poetry . (3 crs.)
ENG 430. ADA.Pr ATION OF LITERARY MATERIALS . Adaptation of literature to the mechanical demands of
television, radio, theater, and film. While remaining faithful to an author's intent, the student must adapt one short
piece of literature and one major, long piece to each of the following: radio, television, theater, and film. (3 crs.)
ENG 435 . ARTICLE WRITING . The styles and techniques of article writing. The student learns the editorial
demands of numerous magazines, and demonstrates versatility and writing ability by tailoring the work to the
demands . Promotes astuteness by showing how to illustrate, "package,• and market a special kind of writing. (3
en .)
ENG 43 7 . ADVERTISING . An introduction to marketing theories, behavior patterns, and techniques of advertising
campaigns: copywriting, layout, and production of advertising through working for an actual client. (3 crs.)
ENG 445. DESCRIPTIVE LINGUISTICS . An examination of the methods used by linguists to describe languages
in terms of their internal structures. Topics explored include world language families, language classification,
writing systems, inventories of speech sounds, and other related material. (3 crs.)
ENG 448 . PRACTICAL CRITICISM. Provides examples of criticism and the opportunity to criticize poetry,
fiction , and drama . (3 crs .)
ENG 481. STUDIES IN OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE. Arthurian romance, medieval drama ,
Beowulf, medieval ballads, Old English Poetry. (3 crs.)
ENG 482 . STUDIES IN RENAISSANCE LITERATURE I. Eliubethan lyric poetry, pre-Shakespearean drama,
Jacobean drama , Renaissance prose, the school of Spenser, Metaphysical poetry, Cavalier poetry. (3 en .)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
201
ENG 483 . STUDIES IN THE RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. Reatontion dnma, Au,u1tan
aatire, the Scriblerua Club, periodical litenture, nco-i:laaaical criticiam. (3 en.)
ENG 484. STUDIES IN NINETEENTH-CENTURY LITERATURE. Nincteenth-centurydnma, Romantic proae,
nineteenth-century litenry criticism, the pre-Raphaelite,, the Edwardians, and the Georgiana. (3 en.)
ENG 485. STUDIES IN TWENTIETH CENTURY ENGLISH LITERATURE. Contemponry trends in litenture,
the war novel, the poets of the Thirties, Irish litenturc, the British novel. (3 en.)
ENG 487. STUDIES IN AMERICAN LITERARY GENRES. The American short atory, the nineteenth-century
American novel, the twentieth-century American novel, modern American poetry, American dnma, American nonfiction. (3 en.)
ENG 488 . STUDIES IN DRAMA. Cla11ical dnma, theater of the absurd, continental dnma , film and television
as dnma, realism and natunliam in dnma. (3 en.)
ENG 495. CREATIVE WRITING SEMINAR. The fictional principle■ learned in ENG 376 are applied to the
writing of major creative work, such as novella, and the atudent i■ given the opportunity to polish and extend
writing akilla previously acquired . (3 en.)
ENG 496. WRrrING FOR PUBLICATION . Students work individually with an inatructor to refine their work for
publication and are expected to publish at least one work during the aemeatcr. Simultaneou1ly, they compile jobrelated portfolios, and work on a auperviaed project, e.g ., a public relation■ scheme for the univenity . (3 en.)
LITERATURE COORS~ (Ll'D
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
These are all introductions to literature, with emphasis on the subject indicated in the title.
They are primarily intended for the general student and may not be used to fulfill
requirements for the English major.
+ LIT 111. *STAR TREK" AND MODERN MAN. (3 en.)
+LIT 115. MAN'S VIEW OF GOD. An introduction to the Bible as a chronicle of Hebrew hiatory in light of
recent archeological and philological discoveries, to demonatnte how deeply this oriental book has affected the
western mind. (3 en.)
+LIT 116. MYTH, MAGIC, MYSTICISM. The four basic paths into the unknown: magic, mysticism, fantasy,
and myth . (3 en.)
+ LIT 118. THE AMERICAN HERO. The development of the American hero in fiction, with specific emphasis
on the hero'• nature, chancier, and matuntion. (3 en.)
+ LIT 125. THE AMERICAN WEST. A genenl_introduction to the litenture of the Great American West through
an examination of a variety of litenry types. (3 en.)
202
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
+LIT 127. WOMAN AS HERO. An exploration of heroic roles assigned to women in literature, the contrast
between reality and tlle literature, and the differences between fictional women created by male and female autho111.
An analysis of the reasons for these differences forms part of the subject. (3 crs.)
+LIT 130. ATHEISM AND EXISTENTIALISM. (3 crs.)
+ LIT 138 . WAR IN THE NOVEL. A study that limits itself to those wars fought after 1900 and to their
treatments in literature. In particular, the course is interested in the effects of war upon individuals, and in the
ambivalence toward war ahown by novelists . (3 era.)
+ LIT 147. SCIENCE FICTION. An introductory survey of the forms of science fiction, with particular emphasis
on the author' s ability to detail and predict future developments . (3 era.)
+ LIT 148 . HORROR IN LITERATURE. An examination of the tradition of horror literature in England and
America from a literary, historical, and psychological viewpoint. Some emphasis on the sociological implications
of the popularity of the form . (3 crs.)
+LIT 150. BASEBALL IN LITERATURE. This course requires the student to read, write, and talk: about a game
that Steinbeck: called a "state of mind,• a game that is, in the words of Jacque Baf"Zlln, a way "to know America .•
Thus the student that works learns about both himself and his country. (3 crs.)
+ LIT 160 . AMERICAN NATURE WRITERS. An introduction to the best of America's great naturalists
emphasizing the development of informed and educated attitudes towards America ' s natural resources and issues
of protection and exploitation. (3 crs .)
+ LIT 166. SACCO AND V ANZEITI.
+ LIT 170. ALL ABOUT WORDS. An introduction to the total complexity and fascination of words. The course
deals with words as shapes, analogs, formulas , and games. Indirectly, but significantly, it instructs in vocabulary
by introducing a sizeable vocabulary for talking about words and by nurturing a student's natural curiosity about
worda. (3 m.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
203
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURFS
FRENCH (FRE)
GERMAN (GER)
RUSSIAN (RUS)
RUSSIAN AND SOVIET STUDIES
SPANISH (SPN)
Associate Professor Elsbeth E. Santee, chair. Professors Alan H. Krueck, Bruce L. Weston;
Associate Professors Raldo 0. Parascenz.o, Carol L. Kaplan; Assistant Professors Manuel
G. Demetrakis, Margarita Ribar
PURPOSE
Rapid political and economic changes in the world require that students not only
understand other cultures but that they can communicate with persons in those cultures. In
this sense familiarity with speaking and reading a foreign language and being aware of how
persons in other countries think about the world is pragmatic. It is good business or smart
diplomacy. Instruction in an unfamiliar language also helps students see the world from a
different perspective. Inasmuch as that occurs, students increase in self-awareness, lose a
blind ethnocentrism, and gain a greater appreciation of all cultures, including their own.
This makes life in general more meaningful.
PROGRAMS
The department administers three programs: a language program in German, French,
Spanish, and Russian; an International Studies program with options in Business and
Economics, Political Science, Geography and Languages (see the section on Earth Sciences,
pages 167 and following, in this catalog); a language certification program for students who
plan to teach in one of the language areas; and the Russian and Slavic Interdisciplinary
Studies Program. Students in these programs will develop listening, speaking, reading and
writing skills, as well as an awareness of cultural diversity and its impact on human
behavior.
Language and culture are closely aligned. To support both the language programs,
International Studies majors and the general education humanities electives, required across
the university for graduation, a series of culture courses, taught in English, are available.
These indicate how artistic expression, geography, economic and historical development in
the principal areas where the four languages are spoken mutually influence each other.
204
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
PLACEMENT
Students entering a foreign language course will be evaluated in order to determine the
proper course-level placement for them. Students who wish to receive credit for previously
acquired language proficiency can talce a CLEP examination or a challenge examination (see
pages 51-52 in this catalog).
AWARDS
The Elsbeth E. Santee Scholarship Fund grants renewable awards annually for students
majoring in a foreign language and who maintain a 3.0 QPA in their major. Information
about the award and application procedures is available from the departmental office.
CAREERS
Linguistic ability in languages other than English can promote employment opportunities
in organizations working internationally, namely international legal, banking and commercial
corporations, national and regional governmental agencies, social service and religious
organizations, educational institutions, the communications, import-export and travel
businesses and a variety of translation services. More information on specific employment
opportunities is available in the Career Planning and Placement Office.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIF1CATION IN
FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEACIDNG FOR GRADES K-12
(FRENCH, GERMAN, OR SPANISH)
Curriculum:
(A) Gmeral F.clucatioo: 15 credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102); 9 credits in
Natural Science,; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM
101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credits of free electives .
(B) Pro(euioaal F.clucation: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300) ; Educational Telltl
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School• (EDS 465);
TeachinJ in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming the Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Computen for
Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching Modern Languages K through 12 (EDS 460); Student Teaching and School Law
(EDS 461).
(C) Proreuioaal Specialization: Intermediate I (203) and II (204); Convenation and Compo■ition 1-11 (311
and 312); Advanced Composition, Grammar & Stylistics (FRE, GER, or SPN 401); 6 credits, Culture and
Civiliution; Survey of Literature 1-11 (421 and 422); Foreign Language Colloquium in appropriate languaae (FRE,
GER, or SPN 450); 6 credits of elective■ in major field in second foreign language.
Students in these curricula also must achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order
to achieve Pennsylvania Certification.
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
205
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH
Curricuhma:
(A) Gtllel'III Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Intermediate French 1-Il (FRE 203 and FRE 204); French Conversation,
Compo1ition, and Phonetic, 1-Il (FRE 311 and FRE 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Styli1tic1 (FRE
401); French Colloquium (FRE 450); Studie1 in French Culture (6 credits); Survey of French Literature 1-Il (FRE
421 and FRE 422); Geography of Europe (GEO 325). Six credits in one other foreign language; 3 credits in each
of HiltOry, English, Philosophy, Psychology, and Communication Studies. Fourteen credits of related electives
with the adviaer'• approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GERMAN
Curricuhma:
(A) Gt11e1'111 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Science; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: I!ttermediate German I (GER 203) and Il (GER 204); German Conversation and
Compo,ition I (GER 311) and Il (GER 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Stylistics (GER 401); Studies
in German Culture (6 credits); Survey of German Literature I (GER 421) and (GER 422); German Colloquium
(GER 450) or HiltOry of the German Language (GER 452); Geography of Europe (GEO 325); six credits in one
other foreign language; at least three credits in each of Philosophy, Psychology, Communication Studies, History,
and English. 14 credits of electives with the adviaer's approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SPANISH
Curricuhma:
(A) Gt11e1'111 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Intermediate Spanish I (SPN 203) and II ( SPN 204); Spanish Conversation and
Compo1ition I (SPN 311) and II (SPN 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Stylistics (SPN 401); Studies
in Hispanic Culture (6 credits); Survey of Spanish Literature (SPN 421); Survey of Spanish-American Literature
(SPN 422); Geography of Latin America (GEO 328); Spanish Colloquium (SPN 450); Six credits in one other
foreign language; at least three credits in each of Philosophy, Psychology, Communication Studies, HiltOry and
English. Fourteen credits of electives taken with the advisor's approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES,
WITH A SPECIALIZATION IN RUSSIAN AND SLAVIC STUDIES
Curriculum:
(A) Gtllel'III Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 1~); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Elementary Rusaian 1-11 (RUS 101-1Q2); Intermediate Ru11ian 1-11 (RUS 203204); Soviet Rusaian Culture (RUS 296); Geography of the Soviet Union (GEO 330); History of Russia (HIS 245);
Philosophy of Marxi,m (PHI 270); Comparative Economic System■ (ECO 351); Politics and Government of the
Soviet Union (POS 280); Studies in Ru11ian Literature (RUS 469); 35 credits of restricted electives.
206
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
FRENCH COURSES (FRE)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
Culture Courses (FRE 240 and 296-301) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy
General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the major. Courses
are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester.
+FRE 101. ELEMENTARY FRENCH I. For the IIUdent without previou■ knowledge of French. The
development of the fundamentals of correct idiomatic French. Instruction in basic audio-lingual comprchen■ ion,
sentence ltnlcture, reading, writing, and apeaking. Cla■aroom inllnlction ia supplemented by laboratory IIUdy and
practice. Three cla■a houn each week and one hour language laboratory per week. (3 en.)
+ FRE 102. ELEMENT ARY FRENCH Il. A continuation of French 101. Three cla■a houn each week and one
hour languaae laboratory per week. Prcrequi■ite : French 101 or one year of high achoo! French. (3 en.)
+ FRE 203. INTERMEDIATE FRENCH I. French ,rammar and reading. A review of essential French grammar.
Development of audio-lingual comprehen■ ion, reading and writing facility . Three class houn each week; one hour
languaae laboratory per week. Prerequisites: French 101 and 102 or two yean of high achoo! French. (3 en.)
+FRE 204. INTERMEDIATE FRENCH Il. Continuation of French 203 . Oral-aural work continue■ but i■
accompanied by a development of reading ■kill through diacuuion of selected prose and poetry. Three clau houra
and one hour language laboratory each week. Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. (3 en.)
+ FRE 240. THE MIDDLE AGES AND THE RENAISSANCE (800-1600). Thi■ course survey ■ the evolution of
French- culture from the Middle Age■ to the end of the sixteenth century, from an age of analogy to one of
1kcptici1m. While it doc■ follow 10eioloaical, political, phil080phical and historical development■ to a certain
degree, the course put■ it■ primary empha■i■ on the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual
art■ of the period. In 10 doing, this course illustrate■ to the student the way ■ in which France has been influenced
by it■ rich cultural heritage. (3 en.)
+ FRE 296 . THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY AND THE CLASSICAL AGE. This course surveys the evolution
of French culture from the early seventeenth century or the Baroque (1600-1640) to the clauical period (1640 to
the end of the century). The course seek■ to introduce the student to the history of French thought in the Splendid
Century. While it doc ■ follow 10eiological, political, philosophical and historical developments to a certain degree,
it■ primary emphasis i• on the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period.
In 10 doing, thi■ course illustrates to the student the ways in which France ha• been influenced by it■ rich cultural
heritage. (3 en.)
+ FRE 297. THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY AND ENLIGHTENMENT. Thia course surveys the evolution of
French culture throughout the Age of Enlightenment, when acientific diacovery and new historical methods acted
a• agents of change upon the traditional foundation■ of belief. Con■ ideration ia given to how these change, affected
French thoupt, e■pecially in the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period.
The course will introduce the student to thi■ age of criticism and recon■truction, an age viewed a■ the •cri■is of
the European mind" and gave birth to the philosophe, or •philosopher," one who was not only involved with the
theories but with 10eial reform as well. These reform■ in human inllitution■ and thought will be ahown to terminate
in the revolution of 1789 and the end of the Ancien Regime. (3 en.)
+ FRE 298. THE AGE OF FRENCK ROMANTICISM: FROM THE NAPOLEONIC EMPIRE TO THE
REVOLUTION OF 1848. Thi■ course survey■ the evolution of French culture throughout the Romantic Movement
which permeated the sen■ibility of the young in France under the reign of Louis XVI and which reached a true
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
207
flowerilli in the nineteenth century, particularly from 1820 to 1845. Boch the early precuraon and the maaten of
thia movement are conaidercd through a lludy of the artillic expreuion of the time,. (3 en.)
+FRE 299 . THE AGE OF FRENCH REALISM: THE SECOND EMPIRE TO THE AFTERMATH OF THE
FRANCO-PRUSSIAN WAR.. Thia coune 111rvey1 the evolution of French culture durilli the A,e of Realiam;
including the Franco-Pruuian War, positivism and ita aftermath. Thia period encompaaaca the dictatonhip of
Napoleon m, a monarchy marked by material aucceu among the middle clau and by disappointment and peuimiam
among thinken, writen, and artiata. Thia coune conaiden the artillic achievement& of the period within the
framework of the aociological, political, and hiatorical setting. The new generation of artiata studied reflect& a
disguat with the reactionary politics of the Second Empire and the effect& of the height of the lnduatrial Revolution.
The coune illu11trate1 to the student how the artiata found comfort and refuae in art as the only enduriDi value and
a■ a aubllitute for religion. The closilli decade, of the nineteenth century were to elaborate and divenify two
separate achoola of art, naturaliam follcrcd by the aae of po1itivi1m and incorporated in the work of Comte, Renan,
and Taine, and 1ymboli1m which expreucd itaclf in the areat pocta, Verlaine, Rimbaud, and Mallann6. Thi•
coune accb to illuatrate to the student how these conflictilli achoola of artillic expreuion manifeatcd themaclves
in the principal worb of literature, philoaophy, music, and the viaual arta. (3 en.)
+ FRE 300. THE BIR.TH OF THE MODF.RN: FRENCH CULTURE IN THE AR.TS 1900-WORLD WAR. D. Thia
coune survey• the evolution of French culture from 1900, the time of the Belle Epoque or Beautiful Period at the
tum of the century, to the advent of the Second World War. While the coune docs follow the aociological,
political, and hiatorical development& of the period, it puta emphasia on the artillic ramificationa of this period of
conflict and rapid chqe. The interwar years are treated in all their artillic output, especially in inter-war theater,
fiction, and the presence of the achoo! of Surrealism in poetry, fiction, theater, and art. (3 en.)
+FRE 301. CONTEMPORARY FRENCH CULTURE IN THE AR.TS SINCE WORLD WAR. D. Thia coune
survey, the evolution of French culture from the Occupation and Vichy Regime in France to the present day. It
seelca to introduce the student to the literature, philoaophy, muaic, filma, and viaual arta of the period which reveal
the rich cultural heritage of France. As an orientation to the cultural arta, conaideration will be aiven to the impact
which important acographical, aocial, and hiatorical elementa had upon them. (3 en.)
FRE 311. FRENCH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Cultural themes are a basis for
idiomatic conversation and diacuuiona. Written compositiona are auigncd to teach the student how to write
correct French. The coune also provides a 1y1tcmatic atudy of the sounds and 1011nd pattcrna of the French
Languaae. Three clau hours and one hour langua1e laboratory each week. Prerequisite: French 204. (3 en.)
FRE 312. FRENCH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS D. Continuation of French 311
on a more advanced level a■ reflected in conversation, composition, and exercises in phonetic tranacription.
Prerequiaite: French 311 . (3 en.)
FRE 401. ADVANCED COMPOSITION: GRAMMAR. AND STYLISTICS. An in-depth grammatical analyais
of the French languaae through intenaive practice in exercises, compoaitiona, and tranalationa. It i• required of all
majors•• well as those acckilli a teacher certification degree or certification in French. Prerequisite: French 312.
(3 en.)
FRE 421. SURVEY OF FRENCH LITERATURE I. An introduction to French literature from the Middle Ages
to 1800 through an examination of representative novel,, play,, and pocma of the period. Three clau hours each
week. (3 en.)
FRE 422. SURVEY OF FRENCH LITERATURE D. An introduction to French literature from 1800 to the
present th~gh an examination of representative novel■, play,, and pocma of the period. Three clalia hours each
week. (3 en.)
208
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
FRE 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN FRENCH. An advanced counc in intenaive spoken
contemporary French required of all French majon I I well I I those accking teacher certificatfon in French.
Prerequisite: French 311. ( 3 en.)
FRE 469 . STUDIES IN FRENCH LITERATURE. Subject matter to be arranged. Designed for French majon
who wish to take additional credit,. Prerequi1ite: 18 houn of French . (Variable)
GERMAN COURSES (GER)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
Culture Courses (GER 240-310 and 313-317) are taught in English and are intended to
satisfy General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the Major.
Courses are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular
semester.
+GER 101. ELEMENTARY GERMAN I. For ltUdenll who have had no previous instruction in German or who
require additional instruction before attempting a more advanced level. Develops the fundamentals of correct
idiomatic German through instruction in basic audio-linguiatic patterna and sentence structure. Three cla11 houn
and one hour language laboratory each week. (3 en.)
+ GER 102. ELEMENTARY GERMAN Il. Continuation of German 101. Three cla11 houn and one hour language
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 101 or one year of high-school German. (3 en.)
+GER 203 . INTERMEDIATE GERMAN I. The goals are to undentand, speak, and write German on a more
advanced level. A review of the structural principles covered in German 101 and German 102 and additional
structural material , idioma, etc. is given. More emph11is is placed on speaking and reading . Three cla11 houn and
one hour language laboratory each week. Prerequisite: German 102 or two years of high-school German. (3 en.)
+GER 204 . INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Il. Continuation of German 203, with speaking, reading, writing on a
more advanced level emph11iz.cd . Three cla11 houn and one language laboratory per week. Prerequiaite: German
203. (3 en.)
+GER 240. FROM TACITUS TO LUTHER. Fifteen hundred years of German Cultural History is traced in this
counc, including the tribal era, eatablishment of the Holy Roman Empire and medieval society. (3 en.)
+GER 296. THE GERMAN BAROQUE. The topic incorporates roughly two hundred years of German cultural
history beginning with the spread of Protcatantism in the late Renaissance and concluding at the apogee of
Enlightenment thought and influence. (3 era.)
+GER 297. THE AGE OF GOETHE: PART I-ENLIGHTENMENT. The first half of the life of JohaM
Wolfgang von Goethe ia the b11i1 for the counc chronology: 1749-1796; the period reflect, the acceptance,
endoncment and ultimate waning of Enlightenment (Aujklilrung) ideals in the German lands. (3 era.)
+GER 298 . THE AGE OF GOETHE: PART Il-ROMANTICISM. The concluding segment of Goethe's life
(1796-1832) encompasacs the reaction against Enlightenment ideals and the realities of the Napoleonic Wars. These
led to the riae of romanticism and the tint decisive atcpa to German cultural prominence in nineteenth century
Europe. (3 en.)
+-GER 299. RICHARD WAGNER AND HIS TIMES: TRIUMPH OF THE BOURGEOISIE. The period covered
begina in the year of Goethe' s death, 1832, which is also the year which witnesacd the first attempts of writing for
the musical atage by Richard Wagner. The rise of the German middle clau and triumph of bourgeois ideals form
the background for the endeavon and developments of Wagner and hia contemporaries . (3 era.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
209
+GER 300. THE Wll.HELMINIAN ER.A. The aurvey covers the period 1870-1918 when German land, are united
into a powerful national state, the Deuzsches Reich. Germany ia viewed at the peak of her cultural leadership in
weltem civilization, before the debacle of the First World War. (3 era.)
+ GER 301 . THE WEIMAR REPUBLIC. The ill-fated German Weimar Republic lasted fourteen years, from 1919
to 1933, but in that period the world witneued an unparalleled concentration of cultural endeavor bom from
military defeat, political humiliation and aocial and economic chaos following World War I. (3 era.)
+GER 302. GERMAN CULTURE UNDER THE NATIONAL SOCIALISTS . The premise for this course is that
German culture did not cease to manifeat itself during the period from 1933 to 1945 when Adolf Hitler and the Nazi
Party controlled Germany' a deatiny. What the German public waa permitted in the way of cultural conaumption
during the Nazi era is the focal point of the aurvey . Only worka produced in Germany at the time and either
explicitly or tacitly endorsed by the Nazi government are dealt with . (3 en.)
+GER 303 . GERMAN CULTURE IN EXILE. Many intellectuals uprooted for political or racial reasons by the
Nazi uaurpation of political power in Europe fled their homelands, never to return . Documentary evidence from
1933 to 1949 ia uaed to understand their exile and German culture abroad. (3 era.)
+GER 309. POSTWAR GERMANY-1945 TO 1990: BUNDESREPUBLIK (FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF
GERMANY, WEST GERMANY). The cult!Jral apectrum of the Federal Republic of Germany (West Germany,
BundesrepubUk Deuzschland) is the subject of thia survey. (3 era.)
+GER310.POSTWARGERMANY-1945TOTHEPRESENT:DEUTSCHEDEMOKRATISCHEREPUBLIK
(GERMAN DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC, EAST GERMANY). The cultural apectrum of the German Democratic
Republic (East Germany, DeulSche Demokratische Republik) is the subject of this survey which begins with the year
"0" and continues to ita demise.
GER 311. GERMAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Selected readings are used to
develop further skills in reading, writing, and speaking German. Three class hours and one hour language
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 204. (3 crs.)
GER 312. GERMAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSITION, AND PHONETICS II. Continuation of German 311,
conducted on a more advanced level. Three cla11 hours and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
German 311 or the completion of German 204 with a grade of A or B. (3 crs.)
+GER 313. AUSTRIA: FROM THE BABENBERGS TO THE CONGRESS OF VIENNA 976-1813 . Thia topic
presenta an approximately one-thousand-year cultural history of the Austrian empire from ita birth as protector and
aucce110r of the Holy Roman Empire, to ita twilight at the end of the Napoleonic Wars. (3 crs.)
+GER 314. AUSTRIA: FROM THE CONGRESS OF VIENNA TO THE TREATY OF
VERSAILLES-1813-1918 . The last century of Hapsburg rule is the backdrop for this aurvey of the Golden Age
of Austrian cultural enterprise. (3 crs.)
+GER316 . AUSTRIA: FIRST REPUBLIC-HEIM INS REICH-SECOND REPUBLIC (1919-PRESENT). This
course presenta a cultural history of Austria from 1919 to the present with representative works from the first
Republic (1919-38), the period of Nazi annexation (Anschluss) (1938-45) and the post-World War II era which gave
rise to the Second Republic (1955 to the present). (3 crs.)
GER 317. SWITZERLAND. This course presenta a cultural survey of the German-speaking SwiBB primarily
though the cultural contributions of the other lan,uage groups are represented. Although it begins in the days of
the Roman Empire and proceeda awiftly through the formation of the Swiss Confederation in the 13th century to
the beginning of the 18th century, the greater part of the course deals with the last two hundred years of the SwiBB
cultural enterprise. (3 era .)
210
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
GER 401. ADVANCED COMPOSfflON: GRAMMAR AND STYLISTICS. The counc provide, in-depth
grammar analysis of Gennan. lntenaive pnctice ia given for tnnalation and composition. Refinement of expository
writing ia a major goal, and emphasis is placed on achieving fluent and idiomatic expression to a degree acceptable
by a native and educated speaker. (3 en.)
GER 421. SUR.VEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE I. Presents a foundation on liierary definition (style, form,
period) and illuatntea them through the worka of leading Gennan speaking authors . (3 en.)
GER 422. SUR.VEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE II. Continuation of Gennan 421. (3 en.)
GER 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN GERMAN. The colloquium in Gennan is designed for
students in teacher education who mull demonatnte a fluency in oral presentation in order to meet requirements
for employment and tenure in Pennaylvania's achoo! ayatcma; &B such it i1 required for students in teacher
education. It ia de ■igned aecondarily for the libenl arts major who wiahea to enhance fluency in speaking, but it
is not required for the German major. (3 en.)
GER 452. HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. For German language majors but open to any lltUdent
meeting the prerequisite ■ . The counc begina with the emergence of a Gennan language group from its lndoEuropean heritage and tnces the development of contemporary German from Gothic through Old High Gennan,
Middle High Ge~n and dialectic manifeatationa, &B well &B its encounters with other European languages. The
counc ia required for German majors. (3 en.)
GER 469 . STUDIES IN GERMAN LITERATURE. Designed to meet special needs of Gennan majors.
Prerequisite: 18 hours of German. (Variable)
RUSSIAN COURSES (RUS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
Culture courses (RUS 240-297) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General
Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the major. Courses are not
taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester.
+RUS 101. ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN I. The purpose of RUS 101 is to prepare students to read intermediate
level Russian by the middle of Ruaaian 102. To this end, it begina with practicing all skills but soon changes to
a focus on structure and tnnalation. Ruaaian is presented without a text during the first week in order to establish
awareness of the 1011nds of the language. Then study follows the units of the text. The grade is based on
approximately 12 teats of equal weight. (3 en.)
+ RUS 102. ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN II. Completes the study of the structure of the RuBSian language . Reading
of Russian history begina approximately halfway through the acmeatcr, with Stilman 's Graded Readings in Russian
History. Prerequisite: Russian 101 or one year of high-school Russian. (3 en.)
+RUS 203 . INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN I. Ruuian 203 prepare, the atudent to read advanced Russian. Upon
completion ofStilman's Graded Readings in Russian History, the lltUdents read selected material• from the current
Soviet preu. Grammar review is presented &B required. The grade is baaed on approximately six tnnalation teats.
Three class hours each week. Perquisite: RuBSian 101 or 102. (3 en.)
+RUS 204 . INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN II. This counc is a continuation ofRUS 203 . Develops a reasonable
control of spoken Russian through dialogue and oral practice. Students read selected materials from current Soviet
publicationa. Prerequisite: Russian 203. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
211
+ RUS 240. RUSSIAN CULTURE. Studenta read fiction by great Ruuian authon, listen to muaic by compoaen
auch aa Tchaikovsky and Borodin, and grasp an understanding of Ruuia and ill culture through alidea, filma, and
other media. (3 en.)
+RUS 296. SOVIET RUSSIAN CULTURE. Literary and non-literary writings, films, slidea and recordings arc
used to present a broad picture of the Soviet Union. (3 en.)
+RUS 297. EASTERN EUROPEAN CULTURE. Study the folk and high culture of Poland, Czechoslovakia,
Hungary, Ukraine and Yugoslavia . Films, slides and recordings play a prominent role in the course. (3 en.)
RUS 311. RUSSIAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Intenaive practice of
contemporary Ruuian aa it is used in everyday situationa by Soviet Russian speaken. While there ia regular work
on composition, the course atrcucs proficiency in speaking. (3 en.)
RUS 312. RUSSIAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS ll. Continued intenaive practice
of contemporary Russian as it is used in everyday situationa by Soviet Ruuian speaken. While there is regular
work on composition, the course stresses proficiency in speaking. (3 en.)
RUS 469. STUDIES IN RUSSIAN LITERATURE. lndependentreadings in Russian literature. The inatructor and
the studentarrange a program of study according to the student's needs and desires. (Variable)
SPANISH COURSES (SPN)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
Culture Courses (SPN 205-303) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General
Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the Major. Courses are not
taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester.
+ SPN 10 l . ELEMENTARY SPANISH I. For the student without previous knowledge of Spanish who wishes to
achieve a command of language fundamentals . Acquisition of speech skills in the classroom is reinforced in the
language laboratory. Progressively greater emphasis is placed on reading and writing. Three class houn and one
hour language laboratory per week. (3 en.)
+SPN 102. ELEMENTARY SPANISH ll. A continuation of Spanish IOI. Three class houn and one hour
language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or one year of high school Spanish . (3 en.)
+ SPN 203. INTERMEDIATE SPANISH I. A review of the essentials of Spanish grammar through intenaive oral
and written practice to facilitate the use of Spanish grammar and to develop the use of words and exprcssiona
accepted throughout the Spanish-speaking world. Three class houn and one hour language laboratory per week.
Prerequisite■: Spanish 101 and Spanish 102 or their equivalenta. (3 en.)
.
+ SPN 204. INTERMEDIATE SPANISH ll. Develops control of the principal structural patterna of the language
through dialogue and oral reading, as well as through written exercise ■ baaed on selected readings. Three class
houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Spanish 203. (3 en.)
+SPN 205. 14TH CENTURY SPAIN. Thia course will examine the style of art, literature and music of the 14th
century Spanish culture. This is a period of conaolidation, of gradual assimilation of many influences and of
significant contributions to western culture. One of the outatanding boob in literature, ubro de bum amor, and,
212
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
in music, Las Huelgas Codex will be studied aa well II Ferrer Baua •• murals and Luis Borraua •• three-dimemional
worlta. (3 en.)
+SPN 206. GOLDEN AGE AND BAROQUE. The Golden Age of Spain ia a coune de1i,ned to capture the
significance of Spain' • reawakening. It deacribea Lope de Vega's revolutionizing the entire concept of dramatic
form; it detail, Spain'• contribution■ to Weatem Civilization in the form of great characten like Don Juan and Don
Quixote and how they influenced the culture, of the world. (3 en.)
+ SPN 207. 1700-MID 19TH CENTURY. Thia coune will examine the style of Peninsular art, literature and
mu1ic in the 18th and tint half of the 19th centurie1. Memben of the Houaeof Bourbonare on the Spanilh throne
and thereby there i, a strong French influence upon artistic expre11ion. Thia i, the Age of Reason and the age of
false and dictatorial 10phillication of neoclauic standard, which end, with the flowering of romantici1m. (3 en.)
+SPN 208. GENERATION OF 1898-MODERNISM. Thia coune examines the latter part of the 19th century,
a time in Spain when a new literary and social awarene11 was being expressed in the arts. Developmenll in the
arts aet the atmosphere in which an entire generation of artiata, the generation of 1898, 11 they were referred to,
set about the busine11 of representing the heart and soul of Spain. This coune closes by examining the work of
the intellectuals who brought the Modemismo of Rubin Dario of Nicaragua to Spain. (3 en.)
+ SPN 209. 2CYTH CENTURY SPAIN-PART I. In thi1 coune we will comider the concept of a •generation• and
two earlier movementa in Spanish poetry (Ultni1m and Creationi1m) before.dealin, with the poetry and the theater
of the artiata known aa the generation of '27. Also, the compoaen of the Grupo~ Madrid, an international
film-maker, Lui, Bunuel, as well as a very notorious painter, Salvador Dali, will be diacuued. (3 en.)
+SPN 210. 20TH CENTURY SPAIN-PART Il. The explosive growth and rebirth of Spanish culture during the
present century, especially the period following the repre11ive yean of the Franco regime, i1 studied through the
worlta of notable intellectuals and artiata 1Uch aa Salvador Dali, Pablo Picauo and Federico Garcfa Lorca. The
student is offered a panoramic orientation to the culture of contemporary Spain. (3 en.)
+ SPN 213. SPANISH CARIBBEAN . The cultural achievementa of contemporary Spanish Caribbean,. The coune
reviews changes in Caribbean societies since the movement~ avance (Vanguardism, 1927). A sampling of the
countries' art, unique music, architectural styles and folk dances, will be presented. (3 en.)
+SPN 240. ORIGINS OF SPANISH CULTURE. The style of art, literature and mu1ic of the 12th and 13th
centuries in Spain, in which the tendency i1 studied to recount wan, weddings and conquelll i1 evident. (3 en.)
+SPN 301. ROMANTICISM IN LATIN AMERICA. The style of art, literature and muaic of the 19th century
in Latin America. Attention will be given to the 1Ubordination of form to content, the emphaais given to
imagination and emotion which often celebrates nature, and the utilization of common man and freedom of spirit
themes. (3 en.)
+SPN 302. MEXICO 20TH CENTURY. The cultural achievementa of contemporary Mexican,. Changes in
Mexican society since the 1910 revolution, and the concern of Mexican writen with social and political theme,.
A sampling of the country's art, unique muaic, architectural styles, mural• and folk dances will be presented. (3
en.)
+SPN 303. CONTEMPORARY ARGENTINA. A view of Argentina's cultural tendencies in the Twentieth
Century such a■ Surrealism, 11 well II the intellectuals' choice of a simpler expre11ion of reality, surrealiam, 11
well as the exiatential and neo-natural style, in literature, music and visual arts. (3 en.)
SPN 311 . SPANISH CONVF.RSATION, COMPOSITION, AND PHONETICS I. Intemive practice in
convenation, composition and phonetics, baaed on modem prose, provides models of natural, spontaneou1 speech,
including colloquialisms. Written composition■ use orthographic rules. Three cla11 houn and one hour language
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Spanish 311. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
213
SPN 312. SPANISH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS II. A study of the essential Spanish
morphology, syntax, semantics, and linguistics as reflected in some representative authors . Prerequisite: Spanish
312 . (3 en.)
SPN 401. ADVANCED COMPOSITION: GRAMMAR AND STYLISTICS . This course is intended to provide
an in-depth grammatical analysis of the Spanish language, emphasizing "shades of differences" in the meaning of
words and expressions as used in oral and written expression. (3 crs.)
SPN 405 . CERV ANTES:DON QUIXOTE: Prerequisite: Spanish 321 or Spanish 322. (3 crs.)
SPN 416 . GOLDEN AGE NOVEL. The major prose worlcs of the Renaissance and Baroque styles are studied :
the Pastoral, Chivalric, and Picaresque novels . Prerequisite: Spanish 421 or Spanish 422 . (3 era.)
SPN 421. SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE. An intrnduction to the masterpieces of Spanish literature,
ranging from Poema de Mio Cid to current authors . Represented will be all of the important Spanish literary genres:
narrative poetry (epic and ballad), lyric verse , the short story, and selections from novels and dramas . (3 era.)
SPN 422. SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN LITERATURE. A study of representative selections from the
Colonial period to the present, with emphasis on the salient characteristics and the distinctive contributions of each
literary form in the period or movement under study. (3 crs.)
SPN 444. HISTORY OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. A history of the development of modem Spanish,
beginning with Vulgar Latin as used in the Iberian peninsula . Attention is given to the impact of political and
cultural influences on linguistic development as well as to making comparisons with the evolutionary development
of other Romance languages. Prerequisite: Twelve hours of Spanish beyond Spanish 102. (3 crs.)
SPN 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN SPANISH. An advanced course in intensive spoken
contemporary Spanish required of all Spanish majors as well as those seeking teacher certification in Spanish.
Prerequisite: Spanish 312. (3 crs.)
SPN 469. STUDIES IN SPANISH LITERATURE. Designed to meet the special needs of Spanish majors.
(Variable)
214
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOWGY
Associate Professor Marilyn M. Patterson, Chair. Professor Karen L. Hornung; Assistant
Professor Mary A. Hart. The following faculty members of other departments teach
Gerontology courses: Philip Y. Coleman and Angelo J. Orlandi.
As the number of older people in the country increases, the need for trained
professionals in the field of aging is also increasing dramatically every year. Employment
opportunities for persons trained in gerontology are not only excellent at this time but have
prospects of improving still further. The second largest projected growth area in jobs in the
United States in the 1990's is in positions working with older adults. California University
has the only approved Bachelor of Science in Gerontology program among the 14
universities in the State System of Higher Education.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN GERONTOLOGY
This program is dedicated to providing the student with a broad range of academic
and practical experiences that will enable the graduate to function in a variety of settings,
such as administration, planning, management, and delivery of services to older persons.
It is the objective of this program to increase the numbers and competency of persons
working with older adults, their families, and their communities.
The California Model Senior Center, located several blocks from campus, allows
students a chance to receive actual experience under the supervision of a Gerontology
department faculty member and a professional staff. It is one of very few Senior Centers
in the nation with relations to an academic program in Gerontology.
Students are involved in the various educational, recreational, nutritional,
informational, referral, transportation, and grant components of the multi-purpose Senior
Center. Specifically, students may coordinate the intergenerational visitation program,
coordinate Geriatric Assessment, facilitate support groups for caregivers and older adults,
develop training and educational videos, assist with program and group development, and
plan educational classes. The Senior Center is near campus and it offers accessible,
invaluable, and practical experience in a real-life setting.
The Gerontology Department operates several grant-and university-funded programs
providing a variety of services to the area's older population. Gerontology students are
involved in all projects and receive invaluable practical experience. Some of the present
ones are:
SHARE: Student Housing Alternative with Rural Elders is a unique project pairing
University students with rural older adults in a shared living arrangement. This project has
brought national recognition to the Gerontology program.
Senior Center/Senior Swim Programs: These provide educational, sociali:zation, recreation,
exercise, and nutrition services to older adults.
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
215
SHINE: Student Helpers Involved with Neighborhood Elders coordinates and trains student
volunteers from the junior high school, high school, and university level to provide
much-needed services to older adults.
REACH: Rural Elderly Access to Consumerism and Homemaking provides educational
programs and related services to older adults.
The Gerontology Department also conducts research related to the projects it
sponsors. By assisting in this research, students gain other skills that will be of value to
them in employment or post-graduate studies.
Curriculwn:
(A) General Education: Composition I and II (ENG 101,102); Business Writing I (ENG 211); 12 credits
of Humanities, including Oral Communication (SPE 101 ); 12 credits of Natural Sciences, including one computer
course; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 15 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Get'?ntology (XGE 101); Aging in American Society (XGE
102); Aging Policies and Services (XGE 201); Biology of Aging (XGE 204); Media and Library Reaources in
Aging (XGE 205); Adult Development and Aging (XGE 380); Seminar in Gerontology (XGE 439) . Eighteen
credita in major electives selected from the following: Middle Years of Life (XGE 202); Group Work with Older
Adulta (XGE 210); Aging and the Family (XGE 249); Minority Aging/Institutionalization (XGE 289); Health and
Safety in Aging (XGE 300); Counseling the Older Adult (XGE 320); Activities in Long-Term Care (XGE 340);
Selected Topics (XGE 349); Exercise for the Elderly (XGE 350); Rural Aging (XGE 369); Nursing Homes (XGE
370); Professional Practicum (XGE 449); Senior Center Operations (XGE 449); Survey of Aging Programs and
Services (XGE 449); Foundations of Death and Dying (EDF 318); Literature and Aging (ENG 223); Historical
Perspectives on Aging (HIS 205). Related Courses (16 crs.): Introduction to Social Work (SOW 150); Word
Processing (ENG 151); First Aid and Personal Safety (HPE 314); Delivery of Services (SOW 365); one other 200,
300, or 400 level Social Work course; one 200, 300, or 400 level Management or Marketing course. Required
Field Experience: a minimum of 6 credita, including both Community Set;ing (3 credits) and Institutional Setting
(3 credits). Related Elective•: 1-7 credits.
216
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
AGING SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE
The Aging Specialist Certificate is becoming recognized as the minimum credential
of qualification in the field of aging. The Certificate in Gerontology is designed primarily
for either undergraduates interested in working with older adults in relation to their
undergraduate major (e.g., Social Work, Psychology, Nursing, Speech Pathology and
Audiology) or people who are currently working with or on behalf of older adults who have
had practical experience in the field of aging but who have had little formal training. The
Aging Specialist Certificate is 18 hours of course work in Gerontology including a
three-credit practicum experience.
Curriculum:
Six credit.a in Gerontology: Introduction to Gerontology (XGE IOI); Aging Policie1 and Service, (XGE
20 I) . A minimum of nine credit.a of ■elected Gerontology course ■ choacn in consultation with the advi10r of the
Gerontology Program. Three-credit practicum counc (XGE 449).
- GERONTOLOGY COURSES (XGE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
XGE IOI. INTRODUCTION TO GERONTOLOGY . An introduction to the field of aging for major■ and
non-major■ . A general overview of the psycho10eial, biological, cultural , and behavioral aspect.a of late life. (3
en.) F S
XGE 102. AGING IN AMERICAN SOCIETY. Examinationofpsycho10eial aspect.a of work, retirement, leiaurc,
inatitutionalization, and death II experienced in contemporary America . Examination of roles and adjuatmcnll
in late life. (3 en.) F
XGE 201 . AGING POLICIES AND SERVICES . An overview of programa and acrvicea available to older
adult.a, including the pall, present, and future of aging policies. Covered arc the Older Americana Act and
amendment.a. Prerequisite: XGE 101, 205 . (3 en.) S
XGE 202. MIDDLE YEARS OF LIFE. Multidisciplinary life cycle approach to middleacence . Relationahip of
middle-aged to family , work, and community examined . Adult developmental taslca and stages emph11izcd . (3
era.)
XGE 204. BIOLOGY OF AGING. Introduction to biological aspect.a of aging, both normal and pathological.
Studied arc age-related changes in the digestive, akin, musculoskeletal, endocrine, and reproductive ay ■tcma.
Prerequisite : XGE 205. (3 era .) F
XGE 205 . MEDIA AND LIBRARY RESOURCES IN AGING. Introduction to print and non-print aging
materials. Student.a learn how to locate and use different types of library and media materials and write a
literature review following the APA style. (3 era.) F
XGE 210. GROUP WORK WITH OLDER ADULTS . Focuses on basic principles of group dynamics and
information about aging as it applies to group work. Student.a arc introduced to skills and specific technique,
required to facilitate groups with older adult.a in institutional and community based settings. (3 era.) S
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
217
XGE 249. AGING AND THE FAMILY. Overview of the theory/reacarch on familie■ in later life including a
1ynthe1i1 and review of existing literature, identification of reacarch i11ue1 and needs, and implication■ of thi■
information for practitioner■, reacarcher■, and family member■. (3 era.)
XGE 289. MINORITY AGING/INSTITUTIONALIZATION . An overview of the theory, reacarch, and policy
i1111e1 regarding minority aging and institutionalization, and implication■ of thia information for practitioner■,
reacarchen, and ■ociety. (3 era.)
XGE 300. HEALTH AND SAFETY IN AGING. Information and experience relative to health a1111C11ment,
maintenance, promotion ofwellnea■ among older adult■ . Safety i11ues for older adult■ will be presented. (3 en.)
XGE 320. COUNSELING THE OLDER ADULT. Combines information about the aaing proceaa with
information and skills practice in counseling intervention. (3 era.) F
XGE 340. ACTIVITIES IN LONG-TERM CARE. Basic principle■ of therapeutic recreation and activity program
planning aa it applies to acrving older adult■ in long-tenn care acttings, primarily nur■ ing homes, per■onal care
homes, and adult day care facilities. Student■ will be introduced to the 1kill1 needed to develop and implement
a well-balanced activity program. (3 era.)
XGE 349. SELECTED TOPICS. Roundtable diacuaaion■ of ■elected gerontological topics. For atudenta wanting
to study either a new topic or a topic in more detail. Topics vary according to student■ and in■tructor.
Prerequisite: XGE 101. (Variable credit)
XGE 350. EXERCISE FOR THE ELDERLY. Cour■e provide, information and experiences to develop and
conduct phyaical activity programs for the elderly. Activities to maintain and improve health and fitne11, and
corrective and therapeutic activities are also presented. Prerequiaites: XGE 204, HPE 314. (3 era.) S
XGE 369. RURAL AGING. Overview of rural, non-metropolitan are_as aa they relate to older adult■ •
compares rural older adult■ to their urban metropolitan counterpart■. (3 en.)
Cour■e
XGE 370. NURSING HOMES. Examines nuning homes from historical, medical, managerial, environmental,
and psycho■ocial per■pectives. (3 era.)
XGE 380. ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING. Introduction to psychology of aging. An overview of late
life cognitive processes including intelligence, learning, memory, problem solving, and creativity. Examination
of adult ■ocialization, per■onality adjustment, psychopathology, and death . Prerequisites: XGE 101 , 102, 204,
205, and junior level standing. (3 era.) S
XGE 439 . SEMINAR IN AGING. For advanced Gerontology students to intensively examine and discuss
■elected aging subject■. Topics chosen by instructor; research paper/project required . Prerequisites: XGE 101,
102, 201, 204, acnior status, and permiaaion of instructor. (3 era.) F
XGE 449, Section 1. GERONTOLOGY PRACTICUM: PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM. Opportunity to apply
theoretical knowledge to practice through placement in agency or institution serving older people. Practicum sites
include acnior center■, nur■ing homes, adult day care center■, independent living facilities, or area agencies on
aging. Prerequisites: Permission of instructor and extensive cour■ework . (Variable credit.) F S
XGE 449, Section 2. GERONTOLOGY PRACTICUM: SURVEY OF AGING PROGRAMS AND SERVICES.
Claa■ field trips to observe available aging programs and service■. Reacarch paper on aging programs and acrvices
required. (Variable credit.)
XGE 449, Section 3 . GERONTOLOG'i'. PRACTICUM: SENIOR CENTER OPERATIONS . Claas field trips
to observe wide range of acnior center■. Reacarch paper on acnior center operations required. (Variable credit.)
218
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
The following couneaaR taught in other dcpartmcnu of the University other than Gerontology but aR nonctheleu
Gerontology Major Electives.
EDF 318. FOUNDATIONS OF DEATH AND DYING. A multidisciplinary introduction to dcath-Rlatcd topic■
from anthropological, psychological, philosophical, educational, literary, and musical perspectives. (3 era.)
ENG 223. LITERATURE AND AGING. Positive and negative views of aging as portrayed in poetry, fiction,
and drama. Studenu learn techniques for intcrpRting litcratuR and exploR criticism of the litcratuR. (3 era.)
HIS 205. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON AGING. A chronological survey of aging in historical
perspective, emphasizing social, cultural, and economic conditions that have effect on the aging population. (3
era.)
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
219
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND
SAFETY
HEALffl AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION (HPE)
DRIVER EDUCATION (HSD)
Associate Professor Terry E. Scott, chair; Assistant Professors Carol A. McMahon, Floyd
W. Shuler; Instructor Harry L. Ervin
The Department offers courses reflecting the wellness concept. Presently, it functions
as a service oriented department. However, there is a certification program in Driver
Education Certification.
Driver Education Certification Program
The Department offers a certification program for a student seeking to become qualified
as a Driver Education teacher in the secondary schools. In order to fulfill the requirements
of this program, the student must complete a minimum of 12 semester hours. Six of the 12
hours are required in the program (HSD 300, Introduction to Safety, and HSD 305, Driver
Education and Traffic Safety).
The same 12 hours required in the Driver Education Endorsement Program can be used
as "free electives" in the 30-hour free elective block. For further information concerning
the program, contact the chairperson of the Health, Physical Education and Safety
Department in Hamer Hall.
DRIVER EDUCATION COURSES (HSD) _
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
•HSD 300. INTRODUCTION TO SAFETY EDUCATION. The history and development of the aafety movement.
Psychological variable• 111ch as attitudes, habits, emotions and values arc considered in tenm of their importance
in the total accident picture. Home, farm, traffic , fire industrial and many other areas of aafety arc discussed. (3
crs.) F S
•HSD JOS. DRIVER EDUCATION AND TRAFFIC SAFETY. Designed to prepare a teacher to teach a complete
thirty-and-1ix Driver Education clan. Emphasis upon euential facta, principle,, skills and p1ychological variable•
necesaary for good driving and the teaching of the aame to beginning drivers. Enrolled atudenta arc required to
teach a beginner the behind-the-wheel driving sequence. Prerequisite: a driver's license. (3 crs.) F S
220
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
HSD 306 . MATERIALS AND METHODS IN SAFETY IN THE SECONDARY AND ELEMENTARY
SCHOOLS. The various teaching methods and materials that can be uaed to teach aafety in the elementary or
secondary school ■. (3 era.) F
HSD 307. MOTORCYCLE SAFETY. A comprehenaive study of all aspects of motorcycle aafety. Various
classroom and nnge experience, are provided to enable each student to become a proficient cyclilt. The coune
alao prepare■ the student to teach others how to ride. Prerequi ■ite: HSD 305. (3 en.) F
HSD 405 . ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF SAFETY EDUCATION. Organizing and
Safety Education Prognm■ nnging from the elementary school through college. School aafety
prognm■, environmental safety, and safety services are analyzed in detail. Prerequi■ite: HSD 330. (3 en.) S
admini ■tering
HSD 408 . PROBLEMS IN ORNER AND TRAFFIC SAFETY. Current problem■ in many area■ of the driver and
traffic safety. Federal Highway Safety Program Standards are analyzed . (3 en.) F S
•Required courses for Driver Education Endorsement Program.
HEALm AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES (HPE)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
CPE 205 . FOUNDATIONS OF ATHLETICS . The basic theory, organization, and coaching technique■ of several
sports are covered. (2 en.) F S
HPE 100. HEALTH. Provide ■ the student with a critical analysis of health problem■ facing people today . Topic ■
studied include communicable diseases, chronic di■eases, abusive substances, mental health, sex education,
nutrition, exercise, and ltreu management. (2 era.) F S
HPE 102. AIDS PREVENTION. The course ia taught by an interdisciplinary team of public health providers and
university faculty. During the five-week course, the student will learn all the dimenaiona of AIDS . (1 er.) F S
HPE 202 . COED AEROBIC FITNESS AND NUTRITION. The course is designed to increase an individual' ■
fitness through higher level exercises. The activity portion of the class will include high impact aerobic ■ , rope
jumping, swimming, etc ., to improve the student' ■ cardiopulmonary endunnce, ltrength and flexibility . There will
be lectures on nutrition and basic exercise physiology. (2 era.) F S
HPE 231. BEGINNING BADMINTON AND TENNIS . Basic inltrUction in the rules, ltntegy,
etiquette of both badminton and tennis . (1 er.)
technique■
and
HPE 232. INTERMEDIATE BADMINTON AND TENNIS . An opportunity ia provided for the student to advance
beyond the beginner level and to acquire a greater degree of skill through advanced analysis of techniques and
stntegy. (1 er.) F S
HPE 241. BEGINNING SWIMMING. The course places emphasis on the development of skills that will enable
a student to move safely in and around the water with ease and enjoyment. Shallow water. (1 er.) F S
HPE 242. INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING. Advanced beginner and intermediate swimming inltrUction i■ provided.
Emphasis is placed on perfecting the nine basic ltrokes and on becoming more comfortable in, on, or near the
water. Students should feel safe in deep water in order to enter this course. (1 er.) F S
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
221
HPE 250. MODERN DANCE. Contemporary dance fonna, techniqueund compo1itionarc prcacntcd. The atudent
experience, working with exprcuive movement proble1111 in force, time, apace, line and level,. No prcrequi1ite.
2 houn combined lecture-laboratory. (1 er.) F S
HPE 252. JAZZ DANCE I. The courac i1 de■igncd to atimulate penonal ■ati1faction through the jazz dance form
of movement. It i1 offered II an introductory courac in jazz technique. (1 er.) F S
HPE 256. CONDmONING AND MOVEMENT EDUCATION. Encourage, an appreciation of the ability and
capacity to control and direct the movementl of the body with wll and intelligence. (l er.) F S
HPE 265 . BADMINTON AND GOLF. Buie instruction in the rule■, ■trategy , technique■ and courte1ie1 of both
golf and badminton. (l er.) F S
HPE 266. TENNIS AND VOLLEYBALL. Fundamental• and game technique■ of tenni1 and volleyball. Game
drill• and conditioning exen:iac■ arc al ■o a part of the courac. (l er.)
FS
HPE 267. ARCHERY, BILLIARDS , TABLE TENNIS . In■truction in the fundamental skill■ of the three activities.
(l er.)
HPE 271 . SLIMNASTICS. The courac is designed for weight management and cardiopulmonary endurance through
aerobic activitiea. The ■tudent will learn the ■afe type of aerobic exen:i■c ■ and diacu■■ dietary goala. (l er.) F S
HPE 275 . VOLLEYBALL AND BASKETBALL. lnstnlction and participation in the fundamental techniques,
methods, rule■, and game strategy of the two aporta . (l er.) F S
HPE 308. KINESIOLOGY . the biomechanic ■ of motor performance. Prepare, atudentl to analyze movement in
order to teach, correct, or improve human performance. Offered aa part of the Sportl Medicine Pro,ram. (3 en.)
F
HPE 309 . EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY. The courac coven the acientific theories and principle, underlying lllrcngth,
muacular endurance, cardio-vaacular endurance, flexibility , training and conditioning in human movement. Offered
11 part of the Sporta Medicine Program. (3 en.) S
HPE 312. WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTOR. Conducted under the auapice■ of the American Red Cro■s, the courac
is designed to equip the individual with the basic knowledge and skills neceaury to save one ' ■ own life or the live■
of othen. The courac provides certification in water safety instruction. Prerequisite: Current lifeguard training
certificate. (3 en.) S
HPE 314. FIRST AID PERSONAL SAFETY. Provide■ an undentanding of the cauac-effcct, prevention and
treatment of emergency ■ituation■ . Thia courac i■ helpful to all ■tudentl, eapccially ■tudentl in the teacher education
program. No prerequisite. Three-year certification is offered by the American Red Crou. (3 en.) F S
HPE 315. CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION . Include■ preventive heart practice,, baaic conccptl of heart
and lung function■ and ■kill■ for managilli obatructcd airways and cardiac arrclt. Certification ia by the American
Heart Auociation. No prerequisite. Offered when there ia ■tudent need and interc■t . (l er.) F S
HPE 316. LIFEGUARD TRAINING . Conducted under the auspice■ of the American Red Crou, the courac give■
con■ ideration to swimming, life-saving techniques, and pool management. American Red Crou Certification
iuued . Prcrequ~ite: Water Teat, CPR, and First Aid. (3 en.) F S
Ii·
HPE 338 . PHYSICAL EDUCATION FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL CHILD. An introduction to the principle■,
technique ■ , and rc■can:h in the phy■ical education training for the exceptional child. Major empha■i■ is on gro■a
motor akilla and physical activities leading to lifetime recreation and aporta . (3 en.)
222
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
HPE 347. BASKETBALL OFFICIATING. Enables studenta to become qualified PIAA basketball officials. Course
content includes analysis of roles, regulations and the mechanics of officiating. Studenta receive game officiating
practice. (2 en.) S
HPE 400. ADVANCED FIRST AID. Students learn advanced emergency first aid technique, auch as delivering
babies, extricating victims from automobiles, performing C.P.R. in transport, using Hare Traction splint for open
fractures, and understanding basic ambulance equipment. Three-year certification by the American Red Cross. (3
en.) S
HPE 500. EMERGENCY MEDICAL TECHNICIAN (EM1). Prepares studenta to become certified as Emergency
Medical Technicians. Emphasis is placed upon the care and treatment of the ill or injured in a variety of
emergency situations. Studenta arc required to devote at least ten houn to actual in-hospital observation.
Prerequisite: Age 16 . (4 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
223
DEPARTMENT OF ffiSTORY
AND URBAN STUDIES
ffiSTORY (HIS)
URBAN STUDIES (XUA)
Associate Professor Anthony P. McGrew, chair. Professors John F. Bauman, Frank T.
Edwards, J. K. Folmar; Associate Professors Margaret A. Spratt; Assistant Professor Sean
C. Madden.
PURPOSE
The recording and explanation of the events that constitute social, organiutional or
personal existence comprise the discipline of history. History, with its special concern for
what is unique in human events, is an integrative discipline. Its narratives and explanations
are contextual. As such, historians take cogni7.ance of the works of artists, philosophers and
social scientists. For example, social historians utilize the methods of the social scientist.
This integrative aspect of historical narrative and explanation continues to make it a primary
part of a Liberal Arts education. In as much as it reveals every person's past, it makes
possible greater personal freedom and creativity.
PROGRAMS
The department offers two degree programs: History and Urban Studies. The Urban
Affairs major provides the student with the information and perspectives necessary to
understand and analyze any complex urban system. It incorporates the principles and
methods of urban planning and administration. This program provides the student the
opportunity to participate in a practicum. Students interested in careers in Planning, Public
Administration, Business, or Law Enforcement are encouraged to take a full semester of
practicum credits in their junior or senior year.
The History major is general in nature, providing students with the opportunity to
select areas of topical interest. In relation to the major, the department, in conjunction with
the College of Education and Human Services, provides requisite courses for Social Science
certification for teaching in Secondary Schools. Students interested in teacher certification
can secure further information from the College of Education and Human Services Office.
HONOR SOCIETY
Students who meet the academic requirements are eligible for membership in Phi
Alpha Theta (~A0), the International Honor Society. Information can be obtained from
faculty advisors and the departmental office.
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
224
AWARDS
The History Faculty Award for Academic Excellence is given annually to the History
major who has demonstrated outstanding achievement.
The Edward McNall Burns Scholarship Award is given annually to any individual
majoring in Anthropology, Sociology, Political Science, Economics, History or Urban
Affairs. See the departmental office for further information.
CAREERS
Teacher, archivist, museum curator are professions directly related to the history
major. Careers in law, religion, foreign service, both corporate and governmental, and
diplomacy have a great reliance on historical knowledge. The urban affairs major will find
career opportunities in urban and regional planning, in public and private agencies which
provide data analysis relative to housing, market, transportation, crime and traffic patterns.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN lllSTORY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition I-II (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credita ofNatunl
Sciences; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: (l) Required Western History - 15 credita; History of the United States to
1877 (HIS 101); History of the United Stateaaince 1877 (HIS 102); History of Western Society to 1740 (HIS 104);
History of Western Society since 1740 (HIS 106); History Seminar (HIS 495) . (2) A minimum of two courses in
Non-Western History - 6 credits; (3) History Electives - 24 credits: These must include at least three topical and
three chronological courses listed on the History Major Distribution sheet, (4) Social Science Electives - 9 credits:
These credits require one course from three of the following discipline, : Economics, Sociology; Geognphy,
Anthropology, Political Science; (5) Related Electives - 14 credits.
1. . ______
B_A_C_HE_L_O_R_O_F_AR_T_S_IN_URB
__AN
__
STUD
__m_s_____......
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG l 0 l, l 02); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credits of Natunl
Science; 12 credits of Social Science; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Survey of Urban Affairs (XUA 101); Municipal Government (POS 205);
Urban Geognphy (GEO 210); Political Economy (XUA 217); Urban Sociology (SOC 235); History of Urban
American (HIS 236); Urban Transportation (GEO 315); Seminar in Urban Studie1 (XUA 480); 18-24 credits of
restricted electives, 6-12 credits of applied courses, and 11-14 credits of related elective,. A 6-12 credit Pncticum
in Urban Studies i1 optional.
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
225
IIlSTORY COURSES (HIS)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
+HIS 101. HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES TO 18TI. American history from the Pilgrima to the age of
modem indultly: the colonial heritage, American Revolution, the emergence of a new nation, weltwanl expanaion,
Civil War, and poltWar Reconatruction. (3 en.) F,S
+HIS 102. HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES SINCE 1877. The emergence of modem America, its
achievements and its problema: prosperity and depreaaion; war and social unrest; World War I through the Vietnam
era and beyond; the computer age and its challenges. (3 crs.) F, S
+HIS 104. HISTORY OF WESTERN SOCIEI"Y TO 1740: Western society from its origins in the near East to
the period of Absolutism in Europe. (3 crs.)
+HIS 106. HISTORY OF WESTERN SOCIETY SINCE 1740: Western society from the Enlightenment to the
preacnt. (3 en.)
+HIS 111. THE DEVELOPMENT OF MAJOR WORLD CIVILIZATIONS. The proceaa and interplay of the
major world cultures in their evolution: Indian, Moslem, East Asian (China, Korea, Japan), Slavic, Western
European, Latin American, and African. (3 crs.)
+ HIS 112. MAJOR WORLD CIVILIZATIONS IN TRANSITION. Significant factors influencing change in there
world'• major cultural areas: industrialization and urban conflict; the democratic revolution and the riac of
charismatic leaden from Napoleon to Hitler. (3 en.)
+HIS 121. EUROPEAN LIFE AND SOCIETY TO 1815 . The development of the social, economic, political,
religioua, and cultural experiences of the European people. F, S
+HIS 122. EUROPEAN LIFE AND SOCIETY SINCE 1815. The development of Europe from the CongreH of
Vienna to the end of the twentieth century; the social, political and economic stimulations that led to the emergence
of nationaliam, dictatorship, and war. (3 en.) F,S
HIS 147. HISTORY OF THE MIDDLE EAST. A history of the region, emphasizing the twentieth century
interplay of cultural changes with tnditional ways: Islam and modernization; Soviet-American rivalry; the politics
of oil; the Arab-Israeli conflict; and Arab nationalism: its leaden; the role of tem>rism. (3 era.)
HIS 150. HISTORY OF THE ANCIENT WORLD. A study of the origins of Western Civilization from prehistoric
man to the diaintegration of the Roman Empire; the cultural aspects of the Fertile Crescent and Greco-Roman
civilizations. (3 en.)
HIS 180. INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN'S HISTORY. An introductory courac designed to examine a variety of
women'• issue, using an intenliaciplinary approach . (3 era.)
HIS 187. FAMILY HISTORY. The techniques and proce88Cs used to tnce, study and analyze family history,
including such new developments as oral history, penonal family archives, census data retrieval, quantitative
methodologiea that are adaptable to family history, and the uaca of public documents and original aourcea. (3 en.)
226
DEPARTMENT OF IIlSTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
HIS 188. LOCAL HISTORY. An introduction to the location, evaluation and significance of local hilltOry by uaing
the problem-solving and genealogical approach. Specific topic, are analyzed in order to get to know at tint hand
the importance of local and family history at the gra11 roota level. (3 en.)
HIS 200. HISTORY OF PENNSYLVANIA. The hilltOry of Pennsylvania from colonial time■ to the present; the
changes involved in social, political, and economic life are treated from internal and external pointa of view. (3
en.)
HIS 201 . CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION . The cause, of the Civil War; the military, political, economic,
and social development■ during the war; the consequence, of the poatwar period from the standpoint of
contemporary development■ and their application■ today. (3 en.)
HIS 203 . HISTORY OF TRANSPORTATION IN PENNSYLVANIA. The role■ that Pennsylvania ha ■ played in
the development of transportation ayatema ■ince Colonial times, includifli turnpike ■, canals, river transport
(flatboat■ to ateamboata), railroads, and motor transportation.
HIS 204. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON AGING. A chronological survey of aging in American culture from
colonial times to the present. Principal subject■ for examination are the emergence and development of retirement
program■, -and institutional and non-institutional treatment of the elderly in social, religiou1, political and cultural
contexta. (3 en.)
HIS 215. THE EXPANSION OF AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY. The emergence of modem American foreign
policy and the facton that have influenced ita operation in the twentieth century: the interplay of military atrategy
and the conduct of foreign relation■; the role of an expanding intelligence activity 1ince World War II; alobal
economic problems; modem revolutionary movement■; the scientific revolution. (3 en.)
HIS 216. HISTORY OF ENGLAND. The rise of England II a world power from the reian of Henry VII to the
modem era, with particular attention to the social and economic aspect■ of Britiah life, the rise and fall of the
Britiah colonial empire and its consequence, on world affain. (3 en.)
HIS 217. THE AFRO-AMERICAN IN UNITED STATES HISTORY. A survey of the role of Afro-American&
in the coune of American hilltOry, from the beginning to the present. (3 en.)
HIS 218. HISTORY OF SPORT IN AMERICA. Sport a ■ a pervasive facet of our popular culture, a ■ a social
in&titution, aa an arena of human activity, and aa a drama; sports and cultural value■ and values conflict; the
relationahip of sport to social change throuahout American hilltOry. (3 en.)
HIS 220. UNITED STATES MILITARY HISTORY. The development of America' s military strategy and the
growth of the United States military establiahment: principal campaigns and battles; the role of the anncd forces
as a f()Cial and political in&titution from the Revolution to the post-Vietnam Era. Emphasis is given to twentiethcentury strategy and related policy problem■ . (3 en.)
HIS 225. HISTORY OF CONTEMPORARY EUROPE. Major development■ in Europe within the last 45 years
which have significance in challenging and transforming many of the traditional values of society. The decline in
the pre-eminent position of Europe in world affairs and the rise of a global civilization. (3 en.)
HIS 226. HISTORY OF MEDIEVAL EUROPE. A study of the political, social, economic, and cultural force• of
the Middle Ages, with emphasis on inatitutional and cultural life from the fall of Rome to the Renaissance. (3 en.)
HIS 227 . RENAISSANCE AND REFORMATION. A study of Renaissance culture in Europe from the fourteenth
to the sixteenth century, with emphasia on Italy, conaidering late medieval civilization, humanism, the artistic
Renaissance, and the growth of the middle class, the universal church, and the appearance and character of the
principal branches of Protestantism. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
227
HIS 230. HISTORY OF EASTERN EUROPE. The medieval origin.I of Poland, Czechoalovakia, Hungary,
Yugoalavia, and Bulgaria; Romania through the period of national revival of the nineteenth century, independence
after World War I, sovietization after World War II, and reemerging nationalism. (3 en.)
HIS 234. URBAN PLANNING IN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE. The planning implicationa ofuroanization; the
early city planning of the pre-induatrial era, and the efforta by city plannen and developen to make the city more
attractive and liveable in various period ■ of uroan growth . (3 en.)
HIS 236 . HISTORY OF URBAN AMERICA. The uroan experience in American from the aeventeenth century to
the preaent. Uroan America in the context of world uroanization, demographic trend ■ , technolojy, and the
implicationa of theae force■ on the soci~onomic acene of uroan development. (3 en.)
HIS 237. SOCIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES. The major grouping• and waya of the United States
from colonial day■ to the preaent. (3 en.)
HIS 238 . HISTORY OF AMERICAN LABOR. American labor from early Colonial times to the present. (3 en.)
HIS 240. HISTORY OF THE COLD WAR. The origina and continuance of Soviet-American rivalry 1ince World
War II; confrontation in Europe; NATO; the Wanaw Pact; the growing nuclear anenal; regional conflict in Africa,
Latin America and Asia; the Congo, Angola, Cuba, Iran, China, Vietnam; the politic ■ and leadenhip of both
nationa; the emergence of Ru11ia a ■ a global power. (3 en.)
HIS 245. HISTORY OF RUSSIA. Rusaian hiltory, culture, and inatitutiona from the inception of the Kievan state
to the present; the pre-Soviet periods and those aspects of development of the RuHian state and people that have
played a dominant role in the shaping ofRu11ian character, temperament, and history. (3 en.)
HIS 247. HISTORY OF ETHNIC AMERICA. The immigrant in United States hi1tory from the eighteenth century
through the contemporary period . (3 en.)
HIS 250. AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY . The growth of the American conatitutional system, with
special emphasis on those aspects of conatitutional growth that relate closely to the fundamental structure of
American government and social order. (3 en .)
HIS 260. WOMEN IN UNITED STATES HISTORY: A study of women from the Colonial Era until the present,
arranged around·topics such a ■ reform, abolition, political activism, working conditiona and contemporary issue■ .
(3 en.)
HIS 265 . HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA. The emergence of modem Latin America from the Aztecs to Castro;
economic and social development of the region in the twentieth century; struggle for social justice among divene
culturca; conflicts within Latin American political life; military dictatonhipa; parliamentary democracy; guerrilla
warfare and counterterrorism. (3 en.)
HIS 303. TALE OF THREE CITIES . A comparative approach to the proceu of uroan growth and the social,
economic and political forces shaping the American city over time. Three cities, Washington, Pennaylvania,
Pittsburgh and Philadelphia are examined to demonatrate how social, economic, political and technological forces
shaped the uroan landacape over the yean 1750-1980. (3 en.)
HIS 304. THE GREAT DEPRESSION AND WORLD WAR II. The stresses and straina of the 1930-1945 period
of United State ■ history, using recent trends in acholanhip . (3 en.)
HIS 305 . CONTEMPORARY HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES . The unprecedented
occurred in the United States since the end of World War II. (3 en.)
change■
that have
228
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
HIS 320. THE ANATOMY OF DICTATORSHIP. The basic, 10Cial, economic, psychological, and political
clements that make up the modem dictatonhip . (3 en.)
HIS 350. ADOLF HITLER.. The philo110phical and psychological clements that led to the rise of National
Socialism, and its impact upon the western world . (3 en.)
HIS 379. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN HISTORY. Development of individual prognms by students. (Variable en.)
HIS 495 . SEMINAR IN UNITED STATES HISTORY. A study of American historians and their writings; the
changing interpretations of major topic■ in American hi■tory. (3 en.) S
URBAN STUDIES COURSES (XUA)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
+ XUA 101. SURVEY OF URBAN AFFAIRS. An introduction to the basic concepts and language used to define
and undentand urban life. The course seek■ to familiarize students with the dynamics of urban life as well as with
the iuuc■ and problems which have hi■torically confronted the city and its people. (3 en.)
+XUA 173 . COMMUNITY ACTION ANDNEIGHBORHOODGOVER.NMENT. Aninterdi1eiplinaryanalysis
of the various aspects of community organization and neighborhood government of use to urban planncn and
managcn, policy analy ■ta, nd those seeking careen in local voluntary or governmental agencies and institutions.
(3 en.)
+XUA 217. POLmCAL ECONOMY. The application to issues in urban affain of the analytic methods and
common to planning law, politics, and economics. (3 en.)
principle ■
+ XUA 254. HOUSING AND HOUSING POLICY . Urban housing from the 10Ciological, economic, and historical
pcnpcctivc: the nature of ahclter, the elements of housing, and such topics as housing and transportation, housing
and the private sector, public housing, housing design, housing finance and slum creaton. (3 en .)
+XUA 264. ORGANIZATIONAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE BEHAVIOR. Organizational and administrative
behavior in the context of planning, policy development, purveyance, and implementation. In order to promote
basic undcntanding of the various activitic■ and proccsacs involved, a number of concrete policy cases are used
as vehicles for di1eu11ion and illumination. (3 en.)
XUA 328 . LEISURE LEARNING . An overview of both leisure and recreation with emphasis placed upon the
history, economics, education and the role of government and the private sector as they affect both leisure and
recreation in the twentieth century. (3 en.)
XUA 335 . RECREATION LEADERSHIP. A study of leadership theory practice and practical application as they
relate to the administration, service and delivery of recreational programs. (3 en.)
XUA 357. RECREATION FOR THE PHYSICALLY AND EMOTIONALLY DISABLED. Designed to assist
students to develop pcnonalized recreation programs for those individuals who are mainstreamed into both public
and private recreation programs. (3 en.)
XUA 449 . PRACTICUM IN URBAN AFFAIRS . An intemahip in one of numerous planning, development or
10Cial agencies or oraanizations serving the Washington, Greene, Westmoreland, Fayette, and Allegheny County
regions. Can be taken for 4-16 credits, and includes cooperating agency supervision as well as performance
review . (Variable en.)
HONORS COURSES
229
HONORS COURSES
Admission to the Honors Program is a prerequisite for all of ·these courses.
description of the Honors Program earlier in this catalog (page 29).
See the
HON 281. KNOWLEDGE AND CULTURE: SOME EXPLORATIONS. •To be culturally literate is to possess
the basic infonnation needed to thrive in the modem world"-E.D. Hinch. This course explore ■ what every
student need■ to know to read intelligently. Cius scuions focus on ■kill ■ needed to acquire cultural literacy, i.e .,
the grasp of a coherent community of value■ and recognitions. The course provide■ honon students with a
framcworlc of reference and bibliographic 1kill1 that they can utilize in their area■ of study. (3 en.)
HON 285. PROTEST MOVEMENTS IN THE 1960'S. A general and comprehensive perspective on the unique,
exciting, and dangerous world of 19601 politic,. Undentanding the period entails the use of films, videos, and
record■ as well as extensive reading. (3 en.)
HON 287. THE LITERATURE OF SOCIAL UNREST. The relationship between literature and aocial change as
mirrored in contemporary fiction and drama from Eaatem Europe, Latin America, and South Africa. Class
discuuion will emphasize the historical and political aignificance of works by such authors as Jerzy Kosinski, Milan
Kundera, Vaclay Havel, Gabriel Garci'a M,rquez, Athol Fugard and Nadine Gordimer. (3 en.)
HON 295. LITERATURE, THE VISUAL ARTS, AND THE WORLD VIEW. The relationships bttween
literature and the visual arts, primarily sculpture and painting, illustrated in various periods of history and
culture-Ancient Greece, the Renaissance, Manncriam, the Baroque, the Rococo, Romanticism, Realism and
Naturaliam, Impre1sionism, and Expressionism; and, by study of the historical, aocial, and philosophical
background■, an exploration of the •world view" of each period and how it ia expressed in artistic movements or
•schools." (3 crs.)
HON 381. EVOLUTION OF EARTH SYSTEMS. The evolutionary dynamic, of living systems; namely, how
the interrelationship, between plants, animals, humans and environment shape their evolution, extinction, diversity,
geographic distribution, geologic history, and, for humans, their cultural history. Specific examples of past and
present biotic communities include Ice Age vertebrates, living mammals, amphibians and reptiles, continental and
ialand fauna,, and human cultures from Peru, Egypt, the Amazon Basin and the Arctic. Lectures are strongly
aupplemcnted with study of apecimcna, artifacts, and exhibits from The Carnegie Museum of Natural History. (3
en.)
HON 385 . BIOLOGICAL ORIGINS OF SOCIAL BEHAVIOR. Socio-biology and the influence of the process
of natural selection on aocial behavior in non-human and human animals. Findings from the biological and aocial
science, are integrated to provide a comprehensive view of the origin and nature of various aocial behaviors. Field
and laboratory observations of animal behavior are used to demonatrate a complex variety of aocial behaviors. (3
en.)
HON 388. PRINCES AND PAUPERS: STUDIES IN SOCIAL CLASS, WEALTH AND POVERTY IN WORLD
HISTORY. The impact of aocial and economic inequality on world history, using a case study approach to the
exiatence of wealth and poverty in Ancient Rome, in Medieval and Refonnation Europe, in Colonial America, in
Victorian England, and in 20th Century Urban America. (3 crs.)
HON 499. HONORS THESIS. The thesis serve• as the capstone of the university Honors Program. Under the
aupcrviaion of a faculty adviser of the student' ■ choice, the honors student seeks to make a substantive contribution
to the discipline. Considerable latitude in the form of the contribution ia permitted; empirical and historical
research as well ■ 1 creative products are all appropriate. A reader/reviewer ia assigned to pass judgment
independently on the student'• scholastic effort. An oral defense, demonstration or display of the completed thesis
i• required. (3 en.)
230
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOWGY
Bachelor's Degree Programs:
Electrical Engineering Technology
(1) B. S. degree, 4 years
(2) Upper level, 2 year transfer
Graphic Communications:
Options - Electrographics
- Photolithography Offset
- Screen Printing
Industrial Management:
Options - Manufacturing
- Printing
Industrial Technology
Manufacturing Technology
Technology Education (formerly Industrial Arts)
~ate Degree Programs:
Automation Technology:
Options - Numerical Control Machining
- Robotics
Drafting Technology
Electronics Technology
Screen Printing
Faculty: Professor Jay D. Helsel, chair. Professors Ronald G. Dreucci, Richard C. Grim,
John R. Kallis, John H. Lucy, Mark L. Nowak, Joseph E. Pecosh, Charles A. Schuler,
Alfred E. Simpson, Darrell L. Smith. Associate Professors Mark E. Bronakowski, Stanley
A. Komacek, John W. Loney, James R. Means, Jr., Joseph A. Sanfilippo, John M.
Thompson, Jaroslav V. Vaverka. Assistant Professors Larry D. Horath, Rene L. Horath,
Steve C. Hsiung, David V. Kolick, Jeffrey S. Sumey. Instructors Joseph G. Schickel,
Susan G. Urbine.
The Department of Industry and Technology offers six bachelor's and four associate degrees
with various options. The Department has earned a national reputation of excellence in its
many technology programs.
Technology courses are taught in the Shriver L. Coover Complex, which houses twenty-two
laboratories in two buildings. All laboratories are well-equipped with state-of-the-art
equipment. Some of the facilities found in the Complex are three electronics laboratories,
CADD equipped drafting rooms, a numerical control machining laboratory, a robotics
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
231
laboratory, two graphics laboratories, an electronic composition laboratory, a material
testing laboratory, and a machine tool laboratory.
In addition, laboratories in
communication, production, and transportation technology are available for use in the
teacher education program (Technology Education).
In all the curricular descriptions below, F and S indicate whether the course is usually
offered in the Fall or the Spring.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY
Electrical Engineering Technology is a branch of higher education dealing with both abstrac!
and practical concepts from science, mathematics, engineering and technology.
Considerable emphasis is placed on applications of current technology to meet the needs of
everyday problems and situations. The Electrical Engineering Technology program provides
students with the knowledge required to design, develop, modify, maintain and repair
sophisticated electrical and electronic systems.
Career Outlook
Opportunities for employment in the field of Electrical Engineering Technology are diverse
and plentiful. Graduates will find challenging jobs in all areas of the United States. Typical
positions include:
Electronic Design
Instrumentation Design
Systems Control
Microprocessor/Computer Applications
Software Development
Electronic Field Representative
Sales Representative
Engineering Administration
Curricul1DD
The Electrical Engineering Technology program provides students with a comprehensive
understanding of the current engineering technology available to solve many of the technical
problems confronting business, industry and government. The necessary background in
mathematics, physics and computer science is provided so that meaningful mathematical
modeling can be introduced and applied. Computer/microprocessor interfacing and
programming are heavily used to demonstrate flexibility and simplicity in instrumentation
design, communications, signal processing, and controls. Classical linear systems are
presented to provide the student with an understanding of linear active filters, transient
analysis, transducer interfacing, linearization, instrumentation, communications and controls.
Finally, the student has an opportunity to develop wider intellectual horizons through the
university's general education program.
232
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Program A~ion
In addition to the conventional freshman admission procedure, student admission also
includes those who have successfully completed a two-year associate degree in Electrical
Engineering Technology or its equivalent.
Students graduating with an Electrical Engineering Technology associate degree from
institutions having an articulation agreement* with the University will normally enter the
program with junior class standing.
Students with an educational background in a field related to Electrical Engineering
Technology who apply for admission to the program will be evaluated on an individual
basis.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Electrical Engineering
One hundred and thirty-two credits are required for tM degree.
A. General Educalion: 59 credits
MAT 181 College Algebra (F,S)
MAT 191 College Trigonometry (F,S)
MAT 281 & 282 Calculus I & II (F,S)
CSC 12X Computer Science I (F,S)
(Any language)
PHY 101 (S) & 202 (F) College
Physics I & II
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
COM 250 Oral Communication: Management (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
Humanities Electives - 6 crs.
Social Science Elective - 9 crs.
Natural Science Elective - 4 crs.
Free Electives - 9 crs.
B. Professional Specialty: 73 credits
Electrical Engineering Technology- 65 crs.
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
110 DC Circuits (F)
160 AC Circuits (S)
170 Digital Electronics Design (S)
210 & 260 Linear Electronics I (F) & II (S)
220 Introduction to El_ectric Power (F)
270 Introduction to Microprocessor Design (S)
310 Methods in Engineering Analysis (F)
320 Network Analysis (F)
EET 330 Advanced Microprocessor Design (F)
EET 360 Microprocessor Engineering(S)
EET 370 & 420 Instrumentation Design l(S) & II(F)
EET 400 Senior Project Proposal (F)
EET 410 Automatic Control Systems (F)
EET 430 RF Communications (S)
EET 450 Senior Project (S)
EET 460 Digital Signal Proc. (S)
Technical Electives - 8 crs . minimum
• Articulation agreements :
Community College of Allegheny County - South Campus
Westmoreland County Community College
Butler County Community College
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
233
GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY
A reliable system for the transmission of ideas and messages is necessary in our fast-paced
progressive world. The "printed word" or graphic communications serve as a most effective
method of transferring those ideas and messages. Graphic communications involve all of
the people, processes, materials, and related fields necessary to reproduce words, pictures,
ideas and symbols in printed form on physical media such as paper, metal or cloth, in any
quantity. The graphic communications industry is a large and diverse industry employing
over one million people.
Among all U. S. manufacturing industries, graphic
communications ranks first in the number of establishments, sixth in total payroll and sixth
in total number of employees. This large and ever changing industry is experiencing many
technological changes that will create new slcills, jobs and challenges for tomorrow's
workers.
The Graphic Communications Technology Program at California University prepares people
to enter the field by offering a curriculum of technical studies with laboratory-based
experiences in the major printing processes. Students in the program study both general
education, technical, and technical specialty courses. They have the opportunity to
concentrate in one of three technical specialty areas: Electro-Graphics, Photo-Offset
Lithography, or Screen Printing. The facilities used by the Graphic Communication
Technology and Printing Management programs include three well equipped graphic
communication laboratories with two photographic darkrooms, a phototypesetting laboratory,
two modem electronic laboratories, and two drafting and design rooms. A wide variety of
modem photo composing, cameras, film processors, printing presses and other equipment
is available for instruction and student use.
Career Outlook
The future for people involved in graphic communications is bright. Because of both the
sire and tremendous diversity in the graphic communications industry there is a wide variety
of career opportunities for men and women of all interests, talents and educational levels.
Recent estimates indicate that up to 500,000 people will be needed in the next five years in
the nation's 100,000 printing plants. It would be impossible to list all of the individual job
descriptions that exist, but typically Graphic Communications Technology graduates expect
to fill positions in production areas, printing sales, quality control, customer service,
estimating, scheduling, print buying, product design, marketing, equipment sales and
technical service.
Opportunities are available with advertising agencies, publishers,
commercial printers, manufacturers of equipment and graphic communications suppliers, as
well as graphic communications electronic equipment and control systems.
234
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Curriculwn
The Graphic Communications Technology program provides students with a comprehensive
understanding of graphic communications concepts applicable to the solution of problems
encountered on the job. In addition, the program provides students with experiences in the
application of principles of business management and the development of analytical, and
verbal skills. Students also acquire computer programming skills to prepare them to carry
out their job responsibilities more effectively. To gain a more thorough understanding of
computers and other electronic systems, they also take some required course work in
electronics. Finally, students develop wider intellectual horiz.ons through their general
education program.
A unique opportunity in this program is the Graphic Communications Internship whereby
students may spend a junior or senior semester or a summer working in an industrial setting.
This internship broadens the students' education by offering the opportunity to work in a
real-world setting, experiencing the day-to-day operations in a printing plant. Students
observe how different jobs are produced, problems are handled, and solutions reached. In
addition, the employer has an opportunity to observe students as prospective employees.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Graphic Communications Technology
One hundred mid rwenl)l-eighl credits are required for the degree.
A . General Education: 48 credits
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Math l&Il (F,S)
PHY 121 General Physics I (F,S)
COM 250 Oral Communication: Mgt (F,S)
Humanities - 6 credits
Social Sciences - 6 credits
Natural Science - 6 credits
Free Electives - 12 credits
8 . Photo Offset Option: 80 credits
Management - 23 en.
GCT 340 & 440 Eat. & Cost Analysis I (F) & Il (S)
ITE 375 Principles of Production (F,S)
ITE 455 Quality Control (F,S)
MGT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
MKT 221 Salesmanship (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
MGT 362 Labor Relationa (F,S)
Technical Concentration - 27 en.
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commns. I & Il (F,S)
GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (F,S)
GCT 235 Photographic Techniques (F)
GCT 350,351 & 352 PhotolithographicTechniques
1 (F), n (S), & m (F)
GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F, S)
GCT 375 Finishing and Compoaing
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
235
Technical Support - 21 crs.
CSC I0S Buie Programming Language (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ (F,S)
IND 130 Introduction to Circuit Analysis (F,S)
PHS 13S Chemistry of Material, (F,S)
IND 13S Digital Electronic, (F,S)
PSY 209 Industrial P■ychology (F,S)
rrE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
OCT 49S Graphic Communication Intem.ahip or Approved Courses - 9 crs. (F,S)
C. Screen PrlMng Opdon: 80 crediu
Management - 23 crs.
OCT 340 & 440 Est. & Cost Analysis I (F) & Il (S)
ECO 201 Introduction to Microeconomics (F,S)
rra 37S Principles of Production (F,S)
rrE 4SS Quality Control (F,S)
MOT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
Electives - 2 crs.
Technical Concentration - 27 crs.
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Communa I & Il (F,S)
OCT lSS, 2SS & 3SS Screen Printing I (S),
n (F), & m cs)
OCT 22S Principles of Layout & Design (F,S)
OCT 23S Photographic Techniques (F)
OCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S)
IND 14S Photography (F,S)
Technical Support - 21 crs.
IND 101 Drawing & Design (F,S)
CSC l0S Ba ■ic Programming Language (F,S)
PHS 13S Chemistry of Material, (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F,S)
PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
OCT 49S Graphic Communication Intem.ahip or Approved Courses - 9 crs. (F,S)
D . Electro-Graphics: 80 credits
Management - 14 crs.
MOT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
rrE 37S Principles of Production (F,S)
OCT 340 Estimating & Coat Analysis I (F)
Electives - 2 crs.
Technical Concentration - 39 crs.
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commna. I & II (F,S)
OCT 320 & 321 Elect. Composition I & Il (F,S)
qCT 3S0 Photolithoiraphic Techniques I (F)
IND 110 Technical Drawing I (F ,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
IND 13S Digital Electronics (F,S)
IND 14S
IND 230
IND 23S
IND 33S
IND 330
Photography (F,S)
Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ (F,S)
Introduction to Microprocessors (F,S)
Advanced Microproceuors (S)
Industrial Electricity/Electronics (F,S)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
236
Technical Support - 18 era.
PHS 135 Chemistry of Material, (S)
CSC 121 & 221 Computer Science I & II (F,S)
PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
IND 215 Computer Aided Drafting I (F,S)
OCT 495 Graphic Communication Internahip or Approved Courses - 9 era. (F ,S)
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGY
The need for educated personnel to participate in the development and application of
technological change is evident; trained and experienced managers of production ensure that
the benefits of modem technology are realized. The complexity of modem production
processes requires higher levels of sophistication for planning, organizing, operating and
controlling these activities. The Industrial Management curriculum combines a core of
business and management courses with a selected technical area of study to prepare
graduates for managerial roles in industry. Three technical option areas are available:
Computer Science, Manufacturing, and Printing Management.
The Manufacturing and Printing Management options are administered by the Department
of Industry and Technology, while the Computer Science option is administered by the
Mathematics and Computer Science Department (see pages 268 and following below).
Career outlook
The graduate of the Industrial Management Technology program is prepared for a wide
variety of employment opportunities depending in part upon the chosen technical option area.
Several possible career possibilities are listed below:
Industrial Engineering Technology
Production Planning
Production Supervision
Quality Assurance
Numerical Control Programming
Industrial Sales
Systems Analysis
Computer Programming
In-House Printing Management
Field or Service Representation
Personnel Management
Marketing Management & Planning
Curriculwn
The student may select the appropriate option in order to gain the necessary skills for a
career in a business or industrial-related position. In addition the program:
provides the student with sufficient elective courses to allow for an exposure to the
humanities, the natural sciences and the social sciences;
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
237
presents the students with opportunities to develop the habits of reasoning
critically and thinking clearly;
provides the student with opportunities to develop appropriate communication and
quantitative skills;
exposes the student to an environment and activities that will provide an
understanding of the field of business and management;
provides the student with opportunities to develop competency in a technical area
such as printing management, computer science or technology.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Industrial Management
One hundred and twenty-eight credits are required.
A. General Education: 48 credits
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Math I & II (F,S)
PHY 121 General Phyaica I (F,S)
COM 2.S0 Oral Communication: Management (F,S)
Humanities - 6 era .
Natural Science - 6 era .
Social Science - 6 era.
Free Electives - 12 era.
B. Manufacturing Option: 80 credits
Management - 30 era.
PSY 209 lnduatrial Psychology (F,S)
ACC 201 & 202 Accounting I & II (F,S)
ACC 331 Coll Accounting I (F ,S)
ECO 201 Introductory Microeconomics (F,S)
ECO 202 Introductory Macroeconomics (F,S)
ECO 322 Managerial Economics (F,S)
MOT 361 Labor Relations (F,S)
ENG 211 Business Writing I (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
Computer Courses - 6 era.
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
CSC 218 COBOL I (F,S)
Metal Machining - 18 era.
IND 16.S & 26.S Machine Processes I (F,S) & II (S)
MTE 236 & 336 Numerical Control Programming I & II (F,S)
MTE 337 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (COMPACT II) (F)
MTE 338 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S)
Technical Drawing - 6 era.
IND 110 & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S)
238
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Electro-Mechanical - IS en.
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F,S)
IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
ITE 445 Quality Control (F,S)
ITE 181 Material Technology (F)
Elective Labs - S en.
C. Printing Managemenl Opdon: 80 credits
Management - 29 en.
ECO 201 Introductory Microeconomics (F,S)
ACC 201 Accounting I (F,S)
ITE 375 Principles of Production (F ,S)
•ITE 4SS Quality Control I (F) & ll (S)
MKT 221 Salesmanship (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
GCT 340 & 440 Estimating & Cost Analysis
MTE 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
Elective - 2 en.
Technical Concentration - 27 en.
GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (S)
GCT 235 Photographic Techniques
GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S)
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commns I (F,S) & ll (F,S)
GCT 350,351 & 352 PhotolithographicTechniqucs
1 (F), n (S) & m (F)
IND 145 Photography (F,S)
Technical Support - 15 en.
PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
CSC 105 Basic Programming Language (F,S)
MAT 171 Mathematics of Finance (F ,S)
PHS 135 Chemistry of Materials (S)
GCT 495 Graphic Communication Internship or Approved Councs - 9 en. (F,S)
D. Computer Option: Sec Mathematics and Computer Science Department List
INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY
The role of technology becomes increasingly important as lagging productivity, rising prices
and soaring energy costs combine to add to the economic difficulties of industries, workers,
and consumers. The need for educated men and women to work in the development and
application of technology has never been greater. The Industrial Technology program
provides students with the knowledge and skills to become highly qualified technical middle
managers who oversee and guide production and carry out the important research and
development needed in a variety of industries.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
239
Career Outlook
Students enrolled in the Industrial Technology program are required to complete several
management courses in addition to a core group of Industrial Technology courses. Typical
entry level positions for. graduates are:
Systems Analysis
Product Design
Purchasing
Safety Management
Motion and Time Specialist
Technical Problem Solving
Product Supervision
Quality Assurance
Production Control
Industrial Relations
Personnel Management
Sales and Service
Students have no difficulty in finding employment in business and industrial careers that
require knowledge in science, manufacturing, and management.
Curriculwn
The Bachelor of Science Degree in Industrial Technology has been planned to prepare
management-oriented technical graduates. A significant portion of the program is devoted
to the study of technological concepts, principles, and their relation to automation,
productivity, and manufacturing systems. Students may elect various technical options
which focus on the technologies of today and tomorrow through a laboratory-based
approach.
Requiremeata:
Bachelor of Science Degt't!e - Industrial Technology
One lumdrt!d and twenty-eight credits art! required/or the degree.
A . General Education: 48 Ct't!dilS
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Mathematica l&ll (F,S)
COM 250 Oral Communication: Management (F,S)
CSC XXX Computer Science - 3 era.
Humanities - 6 era.
Social Science - 6 era.
Natural Science - 6 era.
Free Electives - 12 era.
B. Industrial Technology: 80 Ct't!dilS
Physical Science - 8 era.
PHY 121 & 122 General Physics I & ll (F,S)
240
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Industrial Technology - 39 en.
IND 110 Technical Dnwing I (F,S)
IND 180 Introduction to Robotics
IND 215 CAD I (F,S)
ITE 101 lndultrial Safety (F,S)
ITE 480 Problema in Industrial Technology (S)
ITE 181 & 182 Material Technology I (F) & Il (S)
ITE 460 Principles of Manufacturing (S)
IND 165 Machine Processes I (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis(F,S) or
IND 135 Digital Electronic, (F,S) or
IND 230 Introductory Linear Electronics (F,S)
or IND 235 Introduction to Microproceuon (F ,S)
MAT 215 Statistic, (F,S
Management - 21 en.
MGT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
ITE 375 Principle■ of Production (F,S)
ITE 445 Quality Control (F,S)
ITE 385 lndultrial Cost Estimating (F)
ECO 100 Elements of Economics (F,S)
MGT 362 Labor Relations (F,S)
ITE 420 Production Analysis (F)
Technical Electives - 12 en.
Students will select from an approved list.
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
One measure of humanity's growth and progress is the ability to manufacture goods
effectively. It has been estimated that in the 1990' s over 22 million men and women will
be employed in the manufacturing industry. A sizeable portion of this growing labor force
is needed to engage in the management, manufacture, sale and programming of new
manufacturing and computer-aided design equipment. The Manufacturing Technology
program, while placing emphasis on the principles of numerical control (N /C) technology,
provides students with a broad, flexible education, enabling them to enter the manufacturing
work force in a variety of professional positions.
The facilities available to majors in the manufacturing technology programs include a
modem Numerical Control Machining laboratory and a well equipped Machining laboratory.
A wide variety of modem equipment such as N. C. Vertical Milling Machine, a N. C.
Turning Center, computers and computer terminals and other traditional machining
equipment is located in the laboratories.
Career Outlook
Opportunities for employment in the field of Manufacturing Technology are diverse and
available. Graduates will find challenging job placements in all geographical areas of the
United States.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
241
Some careers in Manufacturing Technology are:
N/C Field Representative
N/C Technician
N/C Programmer
N/C Coordinator
Technician
Manufacturing Supervisor
Production Manager
Quality Control Technician
Sales Representative
Industrial Engineering
CurricullDD
The Manufacturing Technology Program provides students with experiences in
manufacturing processes that will help them understand and solve problems they may
confront in the manufacturing world. The necessary background in math is provided so that
meaningful machine tool programming problems can be resolved. Students will study four
programming languages: BASIC, FORTRAN, COMPACT II and APT. Basic techniques
are studied in technical foundations courses such as technical drawing, electronics, and
machine shop. Advanced technology in CADD, Robotics, Hydraulics and Numerical
Control provides a capstone· of computer-assisted techniques used by modem industry to
increase quality and productivity. This technical background, coupled with managerial
subjects and the general education requirements, positions the manufacturing technology
students for many attractive job opportunities.
A unique opportunity within this program is the Manufacturing Technology Internship
whereby students may spend a semester or a summer working in an industrial setting. This
internship broadens the student's education, offering the opportunity to work in a real world
setting experiencing the day-to-day operations of a manufacturing facility . Students observe
how different jobs are produced, problems are handled, and solutions are reached. In
addition, the employer has an opportunity to observe students as prospective employees.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Mamifacturing Technology
One hundred and twenty-eighl credits are required for the degree.
A. Gmeral Education: 48 credits
ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Mathematica l&Il (F,S)
CSC 105 Basic Prognmming Language (F,S)
COM 250 Onl Communication: Management (F ,S)
Humanities - 6 crs.
Social Science - 6 era.
Natunl Science - 6 era .
Free Electives - 12 era.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
242
B. Manufacturing Technology: 80 credits
Indultrial Techoology - IS en.
PSY 209 Indultrial Psychology (F,S)
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
lTE 101 Indultrial Safety (F,S)
lTE 375 Principle, of Production (F,S)
lTE 445 Quality Control (F,S)
Elec~Mechanical - 8 en.
IND 180 Introduction to Robotic, (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analy1i1 (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic, (F,S)
IND 330 lndultrial Electricity/Electronic• (F,S)
IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
lTE 181 Material, Technology I (F)
Metal Machining - 24 en.
IND 165 & 265 Machine Proceuing I & n (F,S)
MTE 236 & 336 Num. Cont. Proa. I & Il (F,S)
Approved elective lab, - 6 en.
MTE 337 COMPACT Il (S)
MTE 338 APT (F)
Technical Drawing - 9 en.
IND llO & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S)
IND 215 CAD I (F,S)
MTE 495 Manufacturing Technology Internahip - 14 en. (F,S) or Approved Counea
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION
(formerly Industrial Arts)
The Technology Education program prepares the prospective teacher for employment in both
primary and secondary schools. Graduates of this program are awarded a Bachelor of
Science Degree in Education and an Instructional I certificate making them eligible for
teaching Technology Education/Industrial Arts in grades K-12.
Due to our ever-expanding knowledge base in a world community, technology education
majors are required to develop a strong academic background in the humanities, sciences,
mathematics and personal communication skills. In addition, these undergraduates must
have an understanding of how young students learn within a multicultural society.
Technology Education majors are required to complete a series of laboratory classes related
to technical systems of transportation, production, and communication. These laboratory
courses develop skills in the use of tools, materials and processes. Computer applications
are evident as current softwares and supporting devices are developed. Students make
extensive use of the universal systems model while studying production, services, and their
social/cultural impacts.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
243
Career Outlook
While the reputation for our program in Technology Education at California University of
Pennsylvania remains rather high, the demand for its graduates is even higher. For the most
part, these teachers have been successfully employed in Pennsylvania and other states. This
profession is open to both men and women. While most graduates have remained in
classroom teaching, many have become certified as either a building principal,
superintendent, guidance counselor or a special education instructor. Some obtain advanced
degrees and are eventually employed at a college or university.
Annual Open House
Prospective students are encouraged to attend the Annual Open House, which is held the last
Thursday in April. This is an excellent opportunity to tour the facilities and see a variety
of activities being conducted in the laboratories. Parents, teachers, administrators and
guidance counselors are also welcome. For more information, please call the departmental
office at (412) 938-4086.
Curriculwn
This curriculum includes a study of selected technologies which explore the solutions of
technical problems and their associated impacts encountered by people as they transport,
produce and communicate on a daily basis. More specifically, these systems are as follows.
Communication Technology. Communication technology is concerned with the study of the
methods by which humans communicate. This system includes experiences in such areas
as drafting, design, computer-aided drafting, photography, graphic arts, computer
networking, video production and desktop publishing.
Production Technology. Production technology is concerned with the study of the methods
by which humans produce goods both in-plant and on-site. This system includes courses in
manufacturing and construction technologies which provide an understanding in the
fabricating, forming, combining, and testing of such materials as composites, wood, plastics,
ceramics and metals. In addition, these classes contain activities which include the use of
computer-aided machining processes.
Transpo71ation Technology. Transportation technology is concerned with the study of how
people, products and materials are transported from one place to another. This system also
encourages the student to complete classes in electronics, digital circuitry, microprocessors,
pneumatics, hydraulics, robotics, energy/power systems and small gasoline engines.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
244
Requiranmu:
Bachelor of Scimce Deglle in Educalion:
Cenijicalion in Industrial Ans/Technology Educalionfor Grades K-12
One hundlld and thirry clldits all llquilldfor the deglle.
A . General Educalion: 48 clldits
CHE 101 General Chemistry I (F,S)
ENG 102 Englilh Composition II (F,S)
MAT 192 Technical Mathematica II (F,S)
PHY 121 & 202 General Physics 1&11 (F,S)
. COM 101 Oral Communication (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 9 era.
Social Science Electives - 6 era.
Health/Physical Activities - 3 era.
Electives - 7 era .
B. Professional Educalion: 15 credits
EDF 100 Foundations of Education (F,S)
EDU 210 Teaching in a Multicultural Society (F,S)
EDU 340 Mainstreamina Exceptional I.camera (F,S)
EDS 465 Dev. Reading Sec. School (F ,S)
PSY 208 Educational Psychology (F,S)
C. Professional Specialty: 24 credits
TED 280 Technology/Society/Education(F,S)
TED 410Teaching-CommunicationTech. (Rotated)
TED 420 Teaching Production Technology
(Rotated)
TED 430 Teaching Transportation (Rotated)
TED 461 Student Teaching and School Law
(12 era.) (F,S)
D. Curriculum Specialty: 42 clldits
Communications -
15 era.
Required Course,
TED 110 Introduction to Communication (F,S)
IND 101 Drawing and Design
IND 110 Technical Drawing I (F ,S)
Two Communication Electives (Select one course from Graphics and one course from Drafting from the courses
lilted below):
Graphic• Elective
IND 140 Graphic Communications I
IND 145 Photography
IND 240 Graphic Communications II
Drafting Elective
IND 210 Technical Drawing II
IND 215 Computer Aided Drafting I
IND 320 Architectural Drafting and Design
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
245
F.nergyffransportalion - 15 en.
Required Counea
TED 130 Introduction to Energyfrnnaportation (F,S)
IND 130 Introduction to Circuit Analysia (F,S)
Power Elective (Select One Coune)
IND 180 Introduction to Robotic ■
IND 184 Ene1JY and Power System,
IND 186 Hydnulic Fluid Power
IND 188 Pneumatic Fluid Power
IND 282 Small Gaaoline Engines
Electronic ■ Elective (Select One Coune)
IND 135 Digital Electronics
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic ■
IND 235 Introduction to Microproceaaon
Enerufrnnaportation Elective
(Select one other coune from the power or electronic, coune1 lilted above.)
Production - 12 en.
Required Courses
TED 120 Introduction to Production
Manufacturing Elective (Select one course)
IND 160 Material Fabricating
IND 165 Machine Proceaaing I (Fundamental, of Machine)
IND 275 Materials Testing
IND 278 Plaatica Technoloiy
MTE 236 Numerical Control Programming I
Construction Elective (Select one coune)
IND 250 Construction I
IND 350 Construction II
IND 355 Wood Technology
Production Elective
(Select one other course from the construction or manufacturing courses lilted above.)
Penmylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the National Teachers'
Examination (NTE).
246
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
~ociate Degrees
The Department offers four associate degrees. The Automation Technology degree has two
options: Numerical Control Machining and Robotics systems. The other two technical
choices are in Screen Printing and Drafting Technology. All programs are supported by the
twenty-two laboratories located in the Shriver L. Coover Complex.
The associate degree requires the completion of 66 credits. Associate degree credits can be
transferred toward the completion of a Bachelor of Science degree. The associate degree
is designed to provide graduates with the skills essential to enter the work force as a
technical skilled worker.
In the curricular requirements below, F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered
in the Fall or the Spring.
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY:
NUMERICAL CONTROL OPl'ION
Numerical control (N/C) of machine tools is a relatively recent innovation that has provi~ed
manufacturing industries, both large and small, a means of increasing productivity. The
change in this method of manufacturing requires that industries have educated personnel that
can develop complex numerical control programs.
California University of Pennsylvania has an outstanding Numerical Control Machining
Laboratory. It is equipped with two Bridgeport CNC vertical milling machines and CNC
lathe. High speed terminals and punches are available for computer access when writing
programs. Also, plotters and microcomputers are available for the preparation of programs.
Career Outlook
Career opportunities appear to be excellent in this area. Individuals trained in the
programming of numerical control machines can expect to be employed as N/C Technicians.
Personnel with N/C skills are needed in most geographic regions in the United States. Jobs
are available to these graduates who excel and desire a job in N/C Programming.
Curriculwn
Students in the Numerical Control option of the Automation Technology Program will learn
to write manual programs in the format detail of the machine tool, employing linear and
circular interpolation addressing three axes. In-house COMPACT II and APT are the two
machine tool languages that are studied. The computer programs prepared by the students
are interfaced with the machine tool with post processor software. Individual programs are
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
247
loaded into the memory of a CNC lathe or CNC mill and the part is then manufactured.
Students, therefore, are experienced N/C machine operators as well as manual, APT, and
COMPACT II programmers.
The principal objective of the Numerical Control Option of the Automation Technology
Degree is to provide the student with sufficient skills and expertise in the programming and
operation of computerized numerical control equipment to secure employment.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4
5.
Program, set up, and operate CNC equipment, i.e. lathes and mills.
Program using manual programming and the COMPACT II and APT
programming languages.
Prepare supporting documentation for machine setup and operation.
Program linear and circular moves.
Machine parts on a mill and a lathe using a N/C program prepared by the
student.
Requiremmta:
Associaze Degree in Auzomation Technology Numerical Control Oprion: 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 Engliah Compo■ition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematica I (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 3 en.
Social Science Elective - 3 en.
Natural Science Elective - 3 en.
Free Elective - 3 en.
B. Technical Studies: 39 credits
Numerical Control Machining - 24 en.
IND 165 & i65 Machine Processing I & D (F,S)
MTE 236 & 336 Numerical Control Programming I (F,S) & D (S)
MTE 337 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (COMPACT D) (F)
MTE 338 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S)
MTE 437 Advanced Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (Compact D) (S)
MTE 438 Advanced Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S)
Related Electives - 15 en.
IND 110 & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S)
IND 135 Digital Electronics
(F ,S)
IND 235 Introduction to Microprocesson (F,S)
IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
248
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY:
ROBOTICS SYSTEMS OPfION
Robots are automated devices that are used in the industrial world. These robots are used
individually or with other pieces of automated equipment. A variety of manufacturing
industries need people skilled in automated systems and robotics in order to increase
productivity and provide better quality control in the manufacturing of goods and materials.
California University of Pennsylvania has a well-equipped state-of-the-art Robotics Systems
Laboratory. A variety of robotic arms, from small educational robots to large industrial
robots, are used in providing instruction, along with an automatic guided vehicle (AGV),
an artificial vision system, programmable controllers, and automatic identification
equipment. This laboratory is an outstanding facility for the teaching of automated systems.
Career Outlook
The career opportunities appear to be excellent in this area. Various sources indicate that
the demand for automation technicians will increase 25-34% in the 1990's. Persons trained
in this field are expected to become automated manufacturing systems technicians in a
variety of settings where automated manufacturing principles are employed. The program
is structured as an interdisciplinary approach where each course emphasizes the
understanding of integrated systems that use automated equipment and components.
Curriculwn
The major purpose of this program is to train persons to become automated manufacturing
technicians who will be able to program, interface, set up, and operate the various
components that make up an automated system. Students will be able to understand the
operational behavior of individual robots and at the same time have an awareness of robots
in an automated manufacturing system. The graduate of the program will have sufficient
skills and expertise in automated systems, including robotics, to secure employment.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program, setup, maintain, and operate servo and non servo robots, artificial vision
systems, and other automated equipment.
Interface the different components of an automated system.
Prepare supporting documentation that is clear, concise and accurate.
Select equipment and components best suited for use in automation.
Solve industrial problems through the application of automation technology.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
249
Requiremmta:
Associale Degree in Automation Technology:
Robotic Systems Option: 66 credits
A. General Srwlies: 27 credits
ENG 101 Engliah Compo■ition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematics I (F,S)
PHY 121 General Phy1ic1 I (F,S)
CSC 105 Basic Programming Language (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technolou & Society (F,S)
Humanitiea Elective - 3 credits
Social Science Elective - 3 en.
Free Elective, - 3 credits
B. Technical Srwlies: 39 credits
Robotic, Syatcma - 15 credits
IND 180 Introduction to Robotics (F,S)
MTE 270 Electro-Hydraulic Servo Systems (F)
MTE 280 & 281 Robotics Syatcma I (F) & D (S)
MTE 290 Applications of Industrial Robotics
Systems (S)
Related Arca - 24 credits
IND
IND
IND
IND
130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
135 Digital Electronics (F,S)
186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
188 Pneumatic Fluid Power (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electron (F,S)
IND 235 Introduction to Microprocesson (F,S)
IND 330 Industrial Elec/Electron (F,S)
Technical Elective (One of the Following)
MTE 236 Numerical Control Programming I (F,S)
IND 335 Advanced Microprocessors (F)
or Course by advisor approval
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN DRAFI'ING TECHNOLOGY
Drafting is generally considered to be the primary means of communicating technical ideas.
It is the graphic language of industry and is essential to the process of design,
manufacturing, and service.
A modem drafting laboratory and a well equipped CAD laboratory with terminals and
plotters are available to support this program. The CADD systems are of industrial quality
using the ANVIL 5000 language and AUTOCAD.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
250
Career Outlook
As we continue to grow technologically, the need for drafting technicians will continue to
increase. Since technological growth is expected to continue for many years to come, the
need for personnel in drafting and related fields will, presumably, also continue to grow.
The placement of graduates from this program has been at nearly the 100% level and is
expected to continue at that rate for many years to come.
Curriculum
The principal objective of the Drafting Technology program is to provide students with
sufficient skills and expertise to secure employment in drafting or a related field. In
addition, all credits earned in this Associate Degree program are applicable to several
four-year Bachelor of Science degree programs.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to do at least the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Communicate technical ideas through freehand sketching.
Make technical drawings that fully describe a design idea.
Solve technical problems by using the tools and techniques of drafting.
Prepare pictorial presentation drawings in pencil, ink, and water color.
Write technical reports that are clear, concise, and accurate.
Prepare drawings and solve design problems using a modem CADD
(computer-aided drafting and design) system.
Requiremeats:
Associale Degree in Drafting Technology - 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematica I (F,S)
Pm 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 3 era.
Social Science Elective - 3 era.
Natunl Science Elective - 3 era.
Free Elective - 3 era.
B. Technical Studies: 39 credits
Technical Dnwing - 30 credits
IND 110, 210 & 310 Technical Dnwing I (F,S), Il (F,S), & ill (S)
IND 101 Dnwing and Design (F,S)
IND 215 & 315 Computer Aided Dnfting I (F,S) & Il (F,S)
IND 218 Deacriptive Geometry and Surface Development (F)
EAS 271 Cartognphy (F)
IND 318 Airliruah Techniques (F,S)
IND 320 Architcctunl Dnwing & De■ign (S)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
251
Related Area - 9 credits (Select 3 of the following)
IND 140 Gnphic Communicationa I (F,S)
rrE 181 Material■ Technology I (F)
IND 165 Machine Proceuea I (F,S)
rrE 101 Indultrial Safety (F,S)
IND 160 Material Fabricating (F,S)
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN ELECTRONICS TECHNOLOGY
Electronics Technology deals with devices, circuits, systems, and instrumentation. This
curriculum prepares students to install, analyze, diagnose, and repair electronic equipment
and systems.
The University has three outstanding laboratories for instruction in electricity and
electronics. One laboratory is devoted to courses in digital and microprocessor electronics,
one_to circuit analysis and linear electronics, and one to advanced courses with emphasis on
sophisticated instrumentation systems.
All of the laboratories are equipped with
microcomputers, and a complete instrumentation package is available at every student work
station. Students work in teams of two, and laboratory enrollment is limited to 24 persons.
In addition to the electronics center, students have access to a robotics laboratory and a
numerical control machining laboratory.
Career Outlook
Electronics is a vital and ever-expanding technology. The national job market is excellent
in this area as more and more businesses, industries, and institutions turn to electronic
solutions for many of their problems. The continued growth of electronics is expected to
provide many new positions for skilled technicians and technologists for the foreseeable
future.
Curriculwn
The Electronics Technology curriculum is designed to develop analytic skills and
problem-solving abilities in students. The courses are structured as a blend of applied
mathematics, theory, and laboratory practice. The content is modem with emphasis on
digital techniques, microprocessors, linear electronics, system analysis, product
development, and RF communications.
The principal objective of the Electronics Technology Associate degree is to provide the
student with sufficient skills and expertise to secure employment.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to:
252
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Analyze circuits with quantitative and computer skills for problem solving purposes.
Understand the concepts of de and ac circuits as applied to electrical and electronic
instrumentation.
Program, interface, and troubleshoot microprocessor based designs.
Apply the theory of radio frequency devices and circuits to modem communication
and telecommunication systems.
Work safely with electrical and electronics circuits while using electronic tools and
testing equipment.
Understand and work with solid-state devices and their application in digital and
linear electronic circuits.
Requinmeats:
Associate Degree in Electronics Technology - 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematica (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 3 era.
Social Science Elective - 3 era.
Natural Science Elective - 3 era.
Free Elective - 3 era.
8. Technical Studies: 39 credits
IND
IND
IND
IND
130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
135 Digital Electronics (F ,S)
230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F ,S)
235 Introduction to Microprocessors (F,S)
IND 330 Industrial EUEL (F,S)
IND 332 Communication Electron (S)
IND 335 Advanced Microproce880ra (F)
IND 336 Electron. Systems & Product Dvpmt. (F)
Technical Electives - IS era. (Advisor approval is required.)
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN SCREEN PRINTING TECHNOLOGY
Screen printing is one component of the rapidly growing graphic communications industry.
This industry has been growing at an annual rate of between six and eight percent a year.
Because of the increasing complexity of the communications industry, individuals trained in
screen printing are needed. Four outstanding graphic laboratories are utilized in this
program. Each has modem equipment related to its area of study. Modem photo-composing
equipment has recently been purchased for the Electronic Composition area. Modem
screening presses, dryers, computer stencil transfer equipment and other support items were
recently installed in the screening laboratory for student use.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
253
Career Outlook
Career opportunities are outstanding. People trained in screen printing will find employment
opportunities in most segments of the communications industry, small printing shops, and
large corporations with communications divisions or departments.
Curriculwn
The principal objective of the Screen Printing program is to provide students with knowledge
and expertise in the applications of screen printing, thus enabling them to become productive
members of the graphic arts industry. This program of studies offers the flexibility of
scheduling business electives for the acquisition of knowledge and skills to initiate and
manage one's own screen printing business.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate will be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Identify materials capable of being screen printed, based on a particular application.
Formulate a plan for the production of a screen printed product consistent with the
individual's career objective.
Produce quality screen printing plates for given applications.
Screen print a quality image on a designated material, in accordance with detailed
specifications.
Assess the quality and value of a screen printed production.
Recogni:ze the importance of membership in professional associations which support
individual career objectives and further professional growth.
In addition, all credits earned in this Associate (two year) program, are transferable to a four
year Bachelor of Science degree program.
Requin!ments:
Associaze Degree in Screen Prinling Technology - 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematic, I (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanitie■ Elective - 3 en.
Social Science Elective - 3 en.
Natural Science Elective - 3 en.
Free Elective - 3 en.
B. Technical Studies: 39 credits
Screen Printing - 30 credits
OCT 155, 255 & 355 Screen Printing I (S), II (F), & ill (S)
IND 140 Graphic Communication■ I (F ,S)
254
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (S)
GCT 340 Estimating & Cost Analysis I (F)
IND 101 Drawing and Design (F,S)
IND 210 Technical Drawing Il (F,S)
IND 145 Photography (F,S)
GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S)
1TE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
Related Area Electives - 9 credits (Select three of the following)
GCT 235 Photographic Techniques (F)
IND 240 Graphic Communications Il (F,S)
GCT 350 Photolithographic Techniques I (F)
IND 278 Plastics Technology (S)
ITE 375 Principles of Production (F ,S)
PHY 135 Chemistry of Materials (S)
TED 120 Introduction to Production (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis(F,S)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
255
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY COURSES (EET)
EET 110. DC CIRCUITS. An introduction to the study of electrical circuits. Topic ■ include resistance, voltage,
current, meah analysis, and nodal analysis. Network theorems pertaining to de 10Urces are presented. Corequisite:
MAT 181. (4 en.)
EET 160. AC CIRCUITS. An introduction to the study of electrical circuits in the sinusoidal steady state. Topics
include capaciton, inducton, complex numben, ac mesh analy1i1, ac nodal analysis and network theorems
pertainina to ac 10Urce1. Prerequisite: EET 110. Corequisite: MAT 191. (4 en.)
EET 170. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS DESIGN. An introduction to the design of combination and sequential digital
logic circuits. Topics include number systems, code■, gates, latche■, decoden, multiplexen, flip-flops, counten,
AID and DIA concepts and memory circuits. Prerequisite: None. (3 en.)
EET 210. LINEAR ELECTRONICS I. A study of solid state diodes and transiston. Methods of biasing,
temperature stabilization, determining voltage gain and input resistance for small signal amplifien. Prerequisite:
EET 160. (4 en.)
EET 220. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC POWER. A study of the fundamentals of three-phase circuits,
transformen, de machines, polyphase ac machines, and single-phase ac machine■ . Prerequisite: EET 160. (4 en.)
EET 260. LINEAR ELECTRONICS D. An introduction to power amplifien, differential amplifien, field effect
operational amplifien, frequency effects, voltage re,ulation, and operational amplifier applications.
Prequi1ite1: EET 210, MAT 281. (4 en.)
transi■ton,
EET 270. INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN. Introduction to programming concepts include■
branching, stack operations, ■ubroutines and vector interrupts. Interfacing topics include decoding, driven, D/ A
and AID convenion. Prerequisite: EET 178. (3 en.)
EET 310. METHODS IN ENGINEERING ANALYSIS . Introduction to matrix theory, classical fint and second
order transient analy1i1, active filter and o■cillator de■ign, and Fourier analysis. Computer solutions to ■pecial
problems will be presented . Prerequisites: EET 260, MAT 281 . Corequisites: EET 320, MAT 282. (4 en.)
EET 320. NETWORK ANALYSIS . A calculus-based circuit theory course. Topics include the introduction to
Laplace transforms, and the utilization of Laplace transforms in the study of circuit analysis, transfer functions and
frequency re■ponse . Circuit analysis programming i■ used to compare computer solutions with analytic solutions.
Prerequisites: EET 260, MAT 281 Corequisitea: EET 310, MAT 282. (4 en.)
EET 330. ADV ANCED MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN. Applications of microprocesson and microcomputen to
instrumentation, control, and communications. Topics include machine and assembly language programming, 1/0
interfacina circuits, advanced AID and D/A convenions, handahaking, interrupts, serial and parallel
communications and programmable timer algorithms. A semester project is required. Prerequisite : EET 270. (3
en.)
EET 360. MICROPROCESSOR ENGINEERING . The analy1i1 and development of MCU stand-alone controllen.
The requirements for the design of industrial applications and the use of advanced software development tools and
PCs as development systems will be presented. Prerequisite: EET 330. (4 en.)
EET 370. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN I. The design of electronic instruments utilizing linear and digital
integrated circuits and opto--electronic devices. Topic■ will include dual slope digital voltmeten, electronic
256
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
thennometen, iaolation amplifien, frequency counten and function generaton. Numerical linearization method,
for non linear tranaducen are introduced. Prerequisite: EET 320. (4 en.)
E!IT 400. SENIOR PROJECT PROPOSAL. The student will submit a written proposal for a project. After
approval of the project the student will be auigned a faculty adviaor. Minimum requirementa for the proposal are
aubmiuion of a functional specification and a time schedule for completion. Prerequisite: Senior Statu ■.
Corequiaite: ENG 217. (1 er.)
EET 410. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS . Design of feedback control aystema and device, aa applied to
electrical machinery and tranaducen. Topic■ will include Bode plots, the root-locus method and nyquiat diagnma.
Prerequisite: EET 370. Corequisite: EET 420. (4 en.)
EET 420. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN D. A microproce110r-baaed imtrumentation deai,n coune utilizing
linear, digital and opto-electronic device,. Software aolutions to input/output problems will be considered along with
aoftware aolutions to nonlinear transducer data . Prerequisite: EET 370. Corequiaite: EET 410. (4 en.)
EET 430. RF COMMUNICATIONS . Communication systems principles including: AM/FM modulation, AM/FM
demodulation, transmitten, receivers, antennas, transmiuion lines, digital techniques and protocols. Prerequisite:
EET 320 . (4 en.)
EET 450. SENIOR PROJECT. Employs the design, construction and analysis of an electronic device or imtrument.
Depending on the complexity of the project, total construction may not be required . With the approval from the
adviaor, group projects may alao be involved. Prerequisite: EET 400. (3 en.)
EET 460. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING. Introduction to linear systems, digital filters and the Z-Tranafonn,
and the Falt Fourier Transform. Fundamental• of sampling concepts and the interfacing of analog and digital ■ignal
proceuin, will alao be covered. Prerequi■itea: EET 410, EET 360. (4 en.)
EET 475 . BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY. A study of the widely used medical devices with
emphaaia upon those types used for patient care in the hospital . The Physics and Engineering of various device,
will be presented and their relationship to human anatomy and physiology will be emphasized. Hospital
organization and the role of the Clinical Engineering department will be examined. Prerequisite: EET 420. (4 en.)
EET 476 . BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Upon acceptance to a hospital the
student will work with a Clinical Engineer and/or a Biomedical Equipment Technician inspecting, maintaining,
calibrating and modifying biomedical equipment. Prognma of instruction will vary from hospital to hospital but
the student will be exposed to medical devices from all special and critical care areas . Prerequisite: EET 475 . (4
en.)
GRAPIIlC COMMUNICATIONS COURSES (GCT)
Courses marked (LAB) will meet for two hours of lecture and four laboratory hours per
week.
GCT 155 . SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES I (LAB) . The first in a aeries of three counes that define and
analyze the proce11 of screen printing, this coune is an introduction to the various applications of screen printing.
Student-deaianed activities are supported by exercises that provide quality and control for the printing proceaa.
Empha1i1 of the coune is centered on establishing repeatability of the printing process by controlling variable,;
photognphically generated stencil systems; single and multiple color image generation, conversion, aaaembly and
transfer; sheet-fed manual and semi-automatic preaawork; flat aubatrate printing applications of simple and complex
close register line artwork. Prerequisite: IND 140. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
257
GCT 225. PRINCIPLES OF LAYOUT AND DESIGN. A presentation of design elements and principles used to
produce various layouts for printing production. The individual must strive to develop harmonious relationships
between these design elements and principles and various printing applications through practical activity
assignments. The fundamentals of producing mechanical layouts for newspaper, magazine, direct mail, poster,
display and point of purchase advertising are considered to serve the individual's career direction. The explanation
and use of computers for electronic/desktop publishing is emphasized for practical application. Production and
practical application assignments are to be performed in conjunction with theory explanations as out of class
activitie ■. (3 era.)
GCT 235. PHOTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES (LAB). A study of the concepts and techniques involved in producing
color prints and color transparencies from color negatives. Emphasis is placed on picture composition, developing
color negatives, contact printing, filter fundamentals, enlarging calibration procedures and photo finishing .
Microphotography and positive print techniques are also covered. Prerequisite: IND 145 . (3 era.)
GCT 240. ELECTRONIC DESKTOP PUBLISHING (LAB). This course provides an in-depth study into the
electronic desktop publishing systems and their concept of architecture, operation, networking, financing, and
design role in the publishing industry. It covers the basic aspects of graphic designing, creating page layouts,
scanning of text and continuous tone photographs, connectivity, telecommunications, image setting, and encryption
of data. Each student will experience hands-on activities with microcomputers utilizing high-end design, draw,
paint, scanning, and integrated layout software packages.
GCT 255. SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES II (LAB). A study of the techniques used for image transfer of
line and halftone copy on substrates commonly used by the screen printer. Each student has the opportunity to
identify, calibrate and print upon selected substrates.Prerequisite: GCT 155. (3 crs.)
GCT 320. ELECTRONIC COMPOSITION I (LAB). An introduction to the operation of phototypesetting systems.
A variety of jobs are set which represent the range of standard typesetting formats in use in the industry. Work
with direct and indirect systems is carried out in the form of projects. A variety of input devices are used,
including paper tape, magnetic disk, optical character recognition and visual display systems. In addition students
are required to gather data about the state of the art of phototypesetting equipment presently in use. Prerequisite:
IND 140. (3 era.)
GCT 321. ELECTRONIC COMPOSmON II (LAB) . Emphasis is placed on analysis of photocomposition systems
from an understanding of basic functions and their compatibility with other components or systems. Some handson experience is provided to alter the compatibility for better system function. Prerequisite: GCT 320. (3 era.)
GCT 340. ESTIMATING AND COST ANALYSIS I. A critical examination of the operations involved in the
production of graphic materials for the purpose of determining costs of the operations to be included. The
procedures necessary to assemble this information to produce estimates of typical printing matter are discussed.
The identification and study of cost centers as they relate to the hour costs and ultimately to the selling price are
examined. Students are required to prepare a number of cost estimates for the course. Prerequisite: GCT 255 or
GCT 350. (3 era.)
GCT 350. PHITTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES I (LAB). An in-depth study of photographic process as it
relates to line and halftone reproduction of graphic materials. Projects are produced which represent the various
combinations of line and halftone materials as they are used in the industrial setting. Besides the projects required
of each student, the theoretical aspects of the optical system are investigated, as well as the areas of sensitive
materials, light and related chemical reactions. Prerequisites: IND 140 and IND 240. (3 era.)
GCT 351. PHITTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES II (LAB). A continuation of GCT 350 which utilizes the film
elements produced in order to complete required projects for this course. This course treats the subjects of
stripping, platemaking and presswork. A critical study of imposition of various type of jobs, from simple
single-<:olor to more complex multi-<:olor jobs. The latest techniques of platemaking as well as information on types
of plates presently in use are discussed. Feeder-delivery setup, press packing methods, inking/dampening systems,
258
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
control devices, rollers, blankets and other related press activities are thoroughly discussed. Also, some folding
and binding techniques are included. Prerequisite: GCT 350. (3 era.)
GCT 352. PHOTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES ill (LAB) . Primary emphaaia ia placed on developing an
understanding of the nature of light, the nature of color, its relation to filters and printing inks used in the graphics
industry and the problems caused by color contamination in making color separations. A presentation of direct and
indirect methods of color separations as well as the various masking techniques is included. The use of various
control devices is discussed and employed in the laboratory. Special techniques required to atrip projects, make
the plates, and produce them on the press are also covered. Prerequisites: GCT 225, GCT 235, GCT 320 and GCT
351. (3 en.)
GCT 355. SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES ill (LAB). This course is directed study relevant to the
individual' s career objectives based on specific screen printing applications. The student formulates specifications,
estimates and a procedural rationale for self-determined screen printed product productions. These student
productions are organized as a portfolio consistent with the individual career objective that haa been developed
through previous screen printing coursework. Four-color process screen printing with ultraviolet curing theory and
practice is analyzed for application through student independent study coursework. Prerequisite: GCT 255. (3 en.)
GCT 375. FINISHING AND BINDING (LAB) . This course provides an introduction to the operations performed
in the finishing and binding of printed materials. Various operations such as cutting, trimming, folding, folding
schemes, impositioning methods, gathering, stitching, casemaking, gluing, laminating, perforating, hot stamping,
sewing, and drilling will be considered. Analysis of the various kinds of adhesives and adhesion materials available
and their most effective uses will be discussed . Additionally, this course is heavily supplemented with field trips
to selected printing firms for first hand observations. Prerequisite: IND 240. (3 era.)
GCT 440. ESTIMATING AND COST ANALYSIS II. This second in the series of two courses dedicated to
estimating and cost analysis for printing production processes analyzes current computerized programs for
estimating, scheduling, determining cash flow , and inventory control. The need for computer literacy in the area■
of estimating, time-reporting, comparative ratio analysis and related activities are emphasized. No previous
technical knowledge about computers is required. The course is based on the student's comprehension and ability
to perform the specific objectives stated in Estimating and Cost Analysis I. Students are required to prepare a
number of computer assisted cost estimates for the course. Prerequisite: GCT 340. (3 en.)
GCT 495. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS INTERNSHIP. Student interns are placed with an organiution which
most nearly approximates their goals for employment. If this is not possible, students are placed in some type of
graphics environment which is available at the time . The intent of the internship is to provide students with
practical work experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with real problems requiring real
solutions in a relatively short time frame . Advisor and Department chairperson approval is required before course
enrollment.
This is a repeatable course and may be taken as follows : Students may earn up to nine credits of internship in the
following curriculums: Graphic Communications - Photo Offset; Graphic Communications - Electro-Graphics;
Graphic Communications - Screen Printing. The student is permitted to take nine credits of internship. However,
they may enroll for twelve credits for a full semester load and use three credits for free elective. Prerequisite:
Upper Level Slanding . (1-12 crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
259
INDUSTRY COURSES (IND)
IND -classes meet for two lecture and four laboratory hours per week.
IND 101. DRAWING AND DESIGN. An introductory coune for thoae who wiah to become more altilled and
confident in their ability to draw and deaian. Deaian elements, principle, and practice, are studied. Creativity,
aelf-discovery, and aelf-expreuion are encouraged. The student ia required to develop a disciplined approach to
problem aolving and a aensitivity to craftamanahip in order to create aolutions to a wide variety of challenging
de1ian auiinments. (3 en.)
IND 110. TECHNICAL DRAWING I. A beginning coune with emphaaia on the graphic language, mechanical
drawina, lettering, geometric construction, sketching and ahape description, multi-view projection, aectional view,,
dimensioning, axonometric projection, and oblique projection. (3 en.)
IND 130. INTRODUCTORY CIRCUIT ANALYSIS. An introduction to DC and AC circuit theory and analyaia.
The theory include, electrical meaBUrement ■yatema, Ohm'• Law, Kirchoff's Law■, circuit theorems, and
component characterilltica. Laboratory work provide■ experience, with electrical components, schematic ■ , electrical
tool,, and basic electrical and electronic instrumentation. (3 en.)
IND 13S. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS. An introduction to the theory and application of logic gates, Boolean
algebra, combinational logic, ■equential logic, ■hift regiaten, counten, and arithmetic circuits. Laboratory
experiments provide experiences with digital integrated circuits, circuit behavior, and digital trouble■hooting
technique,. (3 en.)
IND 140. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS I. Thia coune offen the student an opportunity for experience, of
practical application in the five major printing proce11e1. It coven image de1ign, convenion, aaaembly, carrier
preparation, transfer and fini■hina technique, related to lithographic, screen, letterpreu, flexographic, and gravure
printing. Related areaa of studiea include duplication, ink chemistry, paper uae and aelection, and photography.
(3 en.)
IND 14S. PHOTOGRAPHY. Thia course provide■ the opportunity to learn the technique■ involved in
monochromatic lltill photography and introduces color photography. It coven the basic aspects of picture taking,
camera operation, film proceuing, enlarging, print proceuing, finishing procedures and selecting photographic
equipment and lllppliea. (3 en.)
IND 160. MATERIAL FABRICATING . A BUrvey course designed to acquaint students with the origin and
industrial/technological UICI of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Laboratory experiences will include safety, aa well
aa conatruction of metal producta using a variety of fabricating procesaea and techniques. (3 era.)
IND 16S. MACHINE PROCESSING I. An introduction to basic foundry (metalcaating) and machine metalworking
proceaaea. Include, aand moldmalting and gating, layout, tool geometry, lathe work, milling, shaping, drilling,
and bench work . (3 en.)
IND 180. INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS. The course i1 de■iined to provide a variety of activities in
automated manufacturing emphasizing the use of robotic equipment. Theoretical as well aa practical hands-on
laboratory applications in robotic components, types, 1yatema and controllen are studied. Robotic programming
include, teach pendant, off-line programming, BASIC language, and ROBOTALIC. Practical applications include
interfacing with other peripherals in a workcell setting. (3 en.)
IND 184. ENERGY AND POWER SYSTEMS. An application of the 1y1tema approach to the study of energy
1011rce1 and converten, power transmisaion, and control■. lnatruction will focu■ on energy a~ it i• applied to
260
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
propulaion ayatema, residential conservation, and induatrial uaca. Energy alternatives, 1y1tem efficiency and
conservation arc empha■izcd . (3 en.)
IND 186. HYDRAULIC FLUID POWER. Thia counc atudies basic hydnulic components and circuits. Topic,
to be included arc: hydnulic fluids , filtntion, power supply, actuaton, controls, conditionen, and monitoring
device ■ . Teaching and learning activities include lectures, class discussion and labontory activities. (3 en.)
IND 188. PNEUMATIC FLUID POWER. An introductory counc in the ■tudy of pneumatic fluid power
components and circuits that include• gas law,, comprc880n, air lines, air distribution, air-conditioning components,
control devices, circuit diagnma, circuit deaign and construction, and troubleshooting of comprcaacd air 1y1tems.
Theoretical concepts arc verified by corresponding pnctical labontory activities. (3 en.)
IND 210. TECHNICAL DRAWING II. Provides experiences in problem-aolving through the uac of technical
workioi dnwing■ . Special emphasis is placed on American National Standards dnwing pncticea, shop proce1ac1,
conventional representation, standardization of machine part.I and fastcnen, prcpantion oftncinga, the reproduction
of dnwinga, and aurface development. Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.)
IND 215 . COMPUTER-AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) I. Thia counc involve, the uac of computer aoftwarc and
hardware II applied to mechanical design and dnfting. Students learn to manipulate basic geometric entities (points,
lines, and area) to create 2-D and 3-D model,. Experiences dealing with dimensioning, level/layer 111rface1 and
planes arc alao explored . Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.)
IND 218 . DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY AND SURFACE DEVELOPMENT. Adding to the knowledge and
experience, gained in Technical Dnwing I, thia counc coven the theory of projection in detail with emphaais on
the manipulation of points, lines and planes in space. In addition, 111rface development and design in order to acrve
of value in future advances auch aa computer-aided dnfting, computer-aided instruction and computer-aided
manufacturing. Prerequisite: IND 110 (3 en.)
IND 230. INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR ELECTRONICS. An investigation into the fundamental concepts of
analog electronic, including semiconductor device theory, power 111pplies, amplifiers, opentional amplifiers,
oscillaton, plate linear integntcd circuita, and control circuits. Labontory experiments provide experience, with
electronic instrumentation, electronic components, and electronic circuit behavior. Prerequisite: IND 130. (3 en.)
IND 235 . INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSORS . A presentation of number systems and codes,
rnicroproce880r architecture, computer arithmetic, machine language prognmrning, and microprocesaor interfacing.
Emphasis ia placed on labontory experiments dealing with machine language prognm execution and
rnicroproce880r interfacing. Prerequisite: IND 135 (3 en .)
IND 240. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS D. The emphasis in this second counc in gnphic communications is
on the equipment, processes, material, and supplies utilized by the industry for phototypesetting,
photo-composition, darkroom techniques, image assembly, platemaking, and offset duplicator opentions. The
student ia provided with learning experiences to develop a comprehensive understanding of the scope, structure,
products and related procesa of the printing industry. Prerequisite: IND 140 (3 en.)
IND 250. CONSTRUCTION PROCESSES I. An introductory course in construction with an emphasis on
residential houaing . Instruction and experiences will include aspects of construction 111ch as planning and
estimating, personnel and time management, site prcpantion, footings and foundations, fnming , and roofing . The
safe and intelligent uac of tools and material ■ ia strcaacd. Prerequisite: TED 120. (3 en.)
IND 265 . MACHINE PROCESSES II. Current foundry (metalcasting) procesaca arc ltudied. Advanced machine
metalworking procesaca, including indexing and gear cutting arc emphasized . Students arc responsible for
determining the sequence of opentions nece ■sary to produce a product. Prerequisite: IND 165 . (3 en.)
IND 275 MATERIALS TESTING . A ■tudy of the theory and application of materials testing uacd to determine
the chemical, phy■ical , mechanical and dimensional properties of materials. Specifically, the structure and
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
261
propertie1 of metal■, polymen, ceramic, and compo1it.e material, are investigated. Provi1iona are made for
individual and clan development of test ■pecimena and their subaequent evaluation. Instruction ia provided in the
recording and interpretation of test data. (3 en.)
IND 278. PLASTICS TECHNOLOGY. Thi, i1 a survey coune de1igned to provide the student with an opportunity
to gain information about the industrial and technological u■e1 of plastic-like materials. Laboratory experience,
are required in which the student de1ign,, constructaand u ■e1 a variety of tool,, forms and mold 1. Depending upon
the activity and the time allotted, students will be encouraged to create well-deaigned products for penonal and/or
profe11ional u■e . (3 en.)
IND 282. SMALL GASOLINE ENGINES. An introduction to the theory, operation and major overhaul procedures
of ■mall 2 and 4 cycle gaaoline engine,. Engine componenta, diagnosis, testing, maintenance, diuuembly,
reauembly, and trouble ■hooting are streued in the coune to afford the participants the opportunity to develop the
experti■e in coune content 1kil11 and the background to repair amall gaaoline engine,. Laboratory work provides
for the opportunity to apply theoretical concepta in general practice,. (3 en.)
IND 284. FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTO MECHANICS. An introduction to automobile mechanic■ with theory
and practical application,; limited to basic preventive and tune-up procedures in the areas of carburetion, pollution
device, and control 1, complete engine tune-up, diagnostic 1kill1, u ■e of testing equipment, ignition circuita, charging
circuita, and cranking circuita. Counea are offered at General Moton Training Cent.er by approval. Prerequisite:
IND 184. (3 en.)
IND 310. TECHNICAL DRAWING m. An ext.enaion of Technical Drawing I and II with continued emphasis on
skill, technique, and the u■e of ANSI and ISO drafting standards. The course is developed around current industrial
drafting practices and include■ instruction in geometric tolerancing, surface texture, weldments, metrication, etc.
Prerequisite■ : IND 101, IND 110, and IND 210. (3 en.)
IND 315 . COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) II. Thia course is an ext.enaion of Computer Aided Drafting
(CAD) I and will include more complex problem■ and procedure, in the development of graphic aolutiona . The use
of ext.ended geometry will compri ■e an important part of the coune. Students will gain additional experiences on
PC baaed computer drafting aystem■ . Prerequisite: IND 215. (3 en.)
IND 318. AIRBRUSH TECHNIQUES. Preci ■e pictorial line representation as it relates to technical illustration ia
stres■ed . Mechanical and freehand techniques uaed in pictorial line drawing are explored in detail. Students gain
experience in the theory of light and ■hadow . Emphasia ia placed on exploring more advanced graphic media in
technical illustration. Ext.enaive experience is provided in airbrush rendering techniques. Prerequisite : IND 110
(3 en.)
IND 320. ARCHITECTURAL DRAFTING AND DESIGN. Experience ia provided in basic residential design.
The fundamental aequence1 in deaigning and drawing are atreaaed as the student completes the architectural
drawing• neceaury for the construction of a reaidence. Elements of the coune include architectural atyles, area
planning, structural detailing, pictorial rendering, building specification,, and cost analysis . Prerequisite: IND
110. (3 en.)
IND 330. INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICITY/ELECTRONICS. An inveatigation into the theory and application■ of
moton and motor controllen, thyriston, tranaducen, programmable controllen, microproce110r controllen,
■ervomechaniama, and Robotic, . Laboratory experience, include motor identification, motor diaas■embly and
repair, motor testing, control circuitry, and ■ervomechaniama. Prerequisite■: IND 130 and IND 230. (3 en.)
IND 332. COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS. The application of devices and circuits to electronic
communication,. The major topic, include modulation, demodulation, tranamission, data tranafer, optical
technique,, test equipment, and aystem analyaia. Prerequiait.ea: IND 230 and IND 235. (3 en.)
262
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
IND 335 . ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS. This coune deals with advanced concepts in machine Jan,uage
programming. It introduce■ the world of editora, auemblera, and debuggera . It also coven the advanced
architecture of modem microproceuora and their more sophisticated illllrllction sell and addreuUJi mode,. The
student will learn to develop hardware and software required to apply microproceuora to real world problema.
Prerequiaite: IND 235 . (3 era.)
IND 336. ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT. Thia coune provides a development
experience for electronic systema and/or products. The student will select a project subject to illllrllctor approval
and develop that project to the prototype lllage. The llUdent will also verify all performance specifications for their
project. Prerequisites: IND 235 and IND 230. (3 era.)
IND 355. WOOD TECHNOLOGY. A llUdy of woodworking providing illllrllction in furniture and case work.
The safe use and care of machines and hand tool, i1 lllreued. Emphasis i1 placed on project planning and design,
colt analy1i1, wood technology, material selection and product development. Students design and produce a project
involving operations on basic machine■. (3 era.)
IND 365 . SPECIAL MACHINE PROCESSING. A special coune designed to allow the llUdent to investigate
a specific area of interest in the metal machining field. Students interested in taking this coune will complete a
document identifying- the ■cope of their interest, specifying the activities that will be pursued throughout the
semester, and have it approved by the illllrllctor 1ix weeks before the beginning of the clau. The llUdent'•
background in the metal machining proceues will be broadened by completing the laboratory experience, outlined
in the approved proposal. Prerequisites : IND 165 and IND 265. (3 era.)
IND 384. ADV AN CED AUTO MECHANICS. An advanced study in auto mechanics that provides for both an
in-depth underlllanding of basic automotive principles and a broadening in ■cope of other areas of preventive and
tune-up procedures. Theoretical and practical activities in carburetion, ignition circuits, charging circuits, cranking
circuits, and the use of testing equipment applicable to the unit of llUdy. Counes are offered at General Moton
Training Center by approval. Prerequiaite: IND 284. (3 era.)
INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY COURSES (ITE)
Courses marked (LAB) have two hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per week.
ITE 101. INDUSTRIAL SAFETY. An introduction to the fundamentals of safety as well as aound
management-oriented practices related to the development of a safe work place. Legal requirements of OSHA and
worker's compensation laws are diacuued. Students will be able to identify cause of accidents, identify safety
hazards, and apply methods of accident prevention. (3 era.)
ITE 181. MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY I (LAB) . A study of the theory and application of materials and materials
testing used in a wide variety of industrial applications. Study includes the chemical, physical, mechanical and
dimensional properties of metallic materials including ceramics. Sufficient background in general chemistry is
included to provide a proper foundation . (3 era.)
ITE 182. MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY ll (LAB). A continuation of Materials Technology I with an emphasis
on non-metals including natural and man-made polymera, wood and paper and composite,. Additional study of
materials testing ia included with provisions made for individual and clau development of test specimens and their
subsequent evaluation. Instruction is provided in the recording and interpretation of test data. Prerequisite: ITE
181. (3 era.)
ITE 205 . INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY (LAB) . A study of the theory and application
of material, used in a wide variety of industrial applications. Study include• the chemical, physical, mechanical,
and dimensional properties of materials. Specifically, the structure and properties of metals, polymera, ceramics,
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
263
and composite materials are investigated. Provision, are made for the telling of materials to demon.atrate the
various concepts being presented in clau. (3 en.)
ITE 311. INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS. An introduction to techniques and procedure■ for developing and
applying the principle• of human facton and ergonomics to system deaign and the systematic analysis,
identification, and evaluation of human-machine systems. Current advances in practical biomechanics and
ergonomic■ in industry in combating musculoskeletal injury and illneu will be discuued. Prerequisite: ITE 101 .
(3 en.)
ITE 375 . PRINCIPLES OF PRODUCTION. An introduction to the methods used in analyzing the production flow
from raw material to the finiahed product. Topic■ covered include a lludy of the major manufacturing proceases,
material, handling, plant layout, operation, analysis, industrial engineering, inventory control and ahipping . An
overview of the role of production management as it relates to the various areas of industrial environment will be
presented. (3 en.)
ITE 385. INDUSTRIAL COST ESTIMATING . An introduction to the methods used to cost and budget a
production organization. Topics include ■ome accounting basics, cost accounting, the time value of money and cost
estimating as related to induatrial operations. (3 en.)
ITE 420. PRODUCTION ANALYSIS . A continuation of the principles of production with an emphasis on the
calculation, auociated with production management. Topics include linear programming, scheduling and project
management as with pert, simulation and inventory control. Use ia made of per■onal computen for the calculations
involved . Prerequisite: ITE 375 . (3 en .)
ITE 445. QUALITY CONTROL. An introduction to the method■ used in analyzing quality control. Topic ■ include
a lludy of the fundamental ■ of statiatica and probability, the constnJction and use of control and attribute charta,
the definition and use of acceptance criteria and the use of computen in modem quality control operations. An
overview of the role of quality control department of a manufacturing facility will be presented. (3 en.)
ITE 460. PRINCIPLES OF MANUFACTURING . An introduction to the methods used in manufacturing proceues.
Topics covered include a lludy of the manufacturing ability, fabricability, and marketability of manufactured
products. Problems encountered by production managen in changing raw materials into a consumable product are
discuued . The use of per■onal computen for the ■olution of manufacturing problems is included. Prerequisite :
ITE 375 and ITE 385 . (3 en.)
ITE 480. PROBLFMS IN INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY (LAB) . This is a multidiscipline course that combines
the variou■ elements in indu■trial technology, giving the student the opportunity to study problems typically
encountered by an industrial technologist. The exact content of the course will vary depending upon the
background and experience of the instructor but it ia intended to include problem ■olving and role playing in a wide
variety of industrial setting ■ . lnduatrial consultants will al■o be uaed to expose the student to modem industry .
Prerequiaite: Senior Standing. (3 en.)
ITE 495 . INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Student interns will be placed with an industrial
organization which moat nearly approximate■ their goals for employment. The intent of the internship ia to provide
lludents with practical work experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with practical problems
requiring real ■olution■ in a relative abort time frame. Advi ■or and Department Chairper■on approval i ■ required
before course enrollment. Prerequisite: Upper Level Standing . (1-6 en .)
264
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY COURSES (MTE)
Courses marked (LAB) have two hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per week.
MTE 236. NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAMMING I (LAB). An introduction to the procedures for manually
proplllDlllJi numerically controlled equipment. Studenta write programs followinB a machine format detail, u1ing
carteaian coordinate, for motion command and incorporating preparatory and miacellaneoua command, neceuary
to manufacture parts on a machining and turnilli center. (3 era.)
MTE 270. ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO SYSTEMS (LAB). Activities relevant to this coune provide for
the functional underatanding and application of principles of electrohydraulic servo control robot systems. Topic,
include the operation and adjustment of electrohydraulic servo systems controlling, position, velocity, acceleration,
preuure, force and torque on both linear and rotary applications. Other topics and activities include servo-valve
applications, selection, and characteristic, and the study of transducers. Prerequisite■: IND 135 or IND 186 . (3
era.)
MTE 280. ROBOTICS SYSTEMS I (LAB). Activities in this coune focua on the practical application and
programmilli of non-servo controlled robota. Propmming of the robot ia accompliahed through the use of
programmable electronic controllers (PEC) . The three aeneral areas of study include : robot operation and
proplllDlllJi, robot maintenance and repair, and robot application in applied problems. Servo type applications
will 1110 be contraated. Robot operation includes site preparation, electrical and power control,, fluid power,
velocity control, machine interlocb, controller and connections, emergency procedures, and ufety precautions.
Studies in maintenance and repair procedure include theory diagrams, preventive and dia,nostic checb, and
replacement procedures . Robot application involves applyinB non-servo robota and programmable controllers to
industrial situations. Prerequisite: IND 180. (3 era.)
MTE 281 . ROBOTICS SYSTEMS D (LAB). Studenta learn to use servo robota II part of a work:cell through
theoretical and practical hands-on activities. Topics will include components of servo robota, controller components,
confi,uration and operation, controller proarammilli, pro,ram input and output, dynamic performance of servo
robota, servo robot operation, and servo robot testing and troubleshooting. Prerequisites: IND 180, MTE 270,
MTE 280. (3 era.)
MTE 290. APPLICATIONS OF INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS SYSTEMS (LAB). Thia coune provides activities
in the planni!li, preparation, installation, and operation of automated activitiea in integrated work:cella. Topics
include application planning, feed devices, development trends, end effectors, computer interfacing, automatic
identification, and automation interfacin,. The use and programmilli of an artificial vision system is introduced
in thia coune. Prerequisites: IND 180, MTE 270, MTE 280, and MTE 281. (3 era.)
MTE 336 . NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAMMING D (LAB). The second of two counea in the manual
programming of numerically controlled machines. Concentration is placed on continuoua path machining of parts
using the linear interpretation capability of machines to cut chords of area to closely approximate curves. Circular
interpolation ia studied with the additional word addresses that are nece11Bry. Auignments provide experiences
in three axis linear interpolation programming and two axis circular interpolated progralllDlllJi. Prerequisite: MTE
236 . (3 era.)
m.
MTE 337. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (COMPACT
A study of the COMPACT computer languaae used to produce machine tape imtructions for manufacturilli parts.
Students learn to access and utilize a computer to produce part geometry and direct a machine tool to accompliah
a variety of metal machining operations. The graphics capability of BRAVOS aoftware will be explored.
Prerequisite: MTE 236. (3 era.)
MTE 338. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (API).
An
investigation of the APT machine tool language for programming numerical controlled machine tools. Students
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
265
write APT proarams and operate equipment with the produced tape, to manufacture milled and turned paru.
Prerequisite: MTE 236. (3 era.)
MTE 437. ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT
(COMPACT D) . An invellligation into the more aophiaticatcd proceuea of the COMPACT D machine tool
programming language. Paru are programmed and manufactured on a CNC milling machine and lathe u1ina the
COMPACT D language and the BRAVOS graphic aoftware. Prerequisite: MTE 337. (3 era.)
MTE 438 . ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT
(APT). The machining of parts using matrixe1, loops, pocketing, macros, and other advanced techniques. Theac
methods are applied to the operation of a CNC vertical milling machine and a CNC lathe. Prerequisite: MTE 338.
(3 era.)
MTE 495 . MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Student interns are placed with an industrial
organization which most nearly approximates their goals for employment. The intent of the internship is to provide
students with practical work: experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with practical problems
requiring real aolutiona in a relative short time frame . Adviaor and Department Chairperaon approval i, required
before courac enrollment. Thia is a repeatable courac and may be taken as follows: Students may take up to 14
credits. The extra credit may be used as a free elective or for a credit deficiency due to other program changes.
Prerequisite: Upper Level Standing. (1-14 era .)
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION COURSES (TED)
Courses marked (LAB) will meet for two hours of lecture and four laboratory hours per
week.
TED 110. INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION (LAB) . A broad overview of communication systems,
specifically, print, acoustic, light, audio-visual and electronic media as they relate to the realm of communicationa.
Students experience individualized and group laboratory activitiea in the combined areas of generating, aaacmbly,
processing, diueminating and assimilating of a communicative message. (3 era.)
TED 120. INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION (LAB). An introduction to production technology as it relates
to manufacturing and conatruction. Activities include manufacturing proceues, material testing, and a studentdirected manufacturing enterpriac. (3 era.)
TED 130. INTRODUCTION TO ENERGYfl'RANSPORTATION (LAB). An analysis of energy sources and
transportation systems, their operation, efficiencies, historical and future development, and social and environmental
impacts. Students design transportation systems and verify their safety, energy, and economic efficiency. (3 era.)
TED 280. TECHNOLOGY/EDUCATION/SOCIETY . A claBB for all Technology Education majors; to be taken
during the aophomore or junior year. Students study the development of general education in relationship to
technology as found in a pluralistic society. Readings and discuBBion will focus on the taxonomies and systems for
technology education, professional organizationa, developmental rates of youth, laboratory safety, special need
learners, teacher liability, and certification requirements. The technology education major is required to spend each
Friday making visitationa to industrial sites, urban schools and a regular teaching center. This class meets two
lecture houra per week: and all day Friday (to meet the requirements of the Early Field Experience Program) .
Prerequisites: TED 110, TED 120, TED 130 and 9 credits in IND couracs. (3 crs.)
TED 410 . TEACHING COMMUNICATION (LAB). Advanced studies in the areas of light, print, acoustic,
audiovisual and electronic systems aa they relate to communicationa. The student develops inatructional units,
laboratory applications, evaluation systems, design communicationa facility and prepare instructional materials for
266
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
uae in teaching communications technology K thru 12. Peer teaching is utilized to determine the content validity
of the developed inatructional unita . Prerequisites: TED 110 and TED 280. (3 en.)
TED 420. TEACHING PRODUCTION (LAB). A courae designed to provide technology education majon with
experiences relating to the teaching of production technology in the public schools. Cius participanta examine
methods of promoting the program, teaching special needs studcnta, design production facilities, and develop
instructional unita for uae in teaching manufacturing and construction on the primary and aecondary level. This
development includes the identification of problems, individual research, laboratory applications, and writing
inatructional materials. Computer applications such as CAD/CAM and a student-directed cnterpriae activity will
be included. Prerequisites: TED 120 and TED 280. (3 era.)
TED 430. TEACHING ENERGY/TRANSPORTATION (LAB). Studenta will draw on their technical slcills and
knowledge in the areas of transportation, energy, electronic ■, fluid power, and robotics to develop curriculum plans
and inatructional activities appropriate for public school teaching of transportation technology. In addition,
enhancing technical skill ■ and teaching techniques will be emphaaized along with the integration of computen,
mathematics, and science into transportation technology education. Prerequisitea: TED 130 and TED 280. (3 en.)
TED 461. STUDENT TEACHING - TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION. Student teaching is the culminating
experience of teacher education majors in the Technology Education curriculum. The student teacher i1 auigned
to and worb under the supervision of two different master teachers at two different field locations during the
aemester. The development and refinement of contemporary pedagogical skills constitute the primary learning
purpoae for each student teacher. Specific teacher-learning skill ■ which are developed are tenon planning, delivery
method ■, Ofianizational procedures, class control, laboratory management, aafcty practices, record keeping, and
educational measurement and evaluation. An integral component of the student teaching experience is a weekly
practicum. The practicum aerves as a means of coordinating activities and interchanging ideaa and experience• of
the student teachers. (12 era.)
INDEPENDENT STUDY COURSES
TED 310. STUDIES IN COMMUNICATION (1-3 era.)
TED 320. STUDIES IN PRODUCTION (l-3 era.)
TED 330. STUDIES IN TRANSPORTATION (1-3 en.)
'"TED 460. HONORS STUDY IN COMMUNICATION (1-3 en.)
'"TED 470. HONORS STUDY IN PRODUCTION (l-3 era.)
'"TED 480. HONORS STUDY IN TRANSPORTATION (1-3 era.)
Tbcae are independent studies in which the student works in an area of interest under the guidance of an inatructor
with similar interesta. The student prepares triplicate copies of a proposal which preaents the objective■ to be
achieved and a procedural outline, states special conditions and expected findings, and specifics how the activity
will be evaluated .
Studenla are entitled to a minimum of five houn of individual faculty time per credit.
instructor and department approval before the student registen in the courae.
Proposal ■
must receive
•Honors couraes are reaerved for studenta with a MB" grade or better quality point average in the Technology
Education curriculum specialty couraes taken.
DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SERVICES
267
DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SERVICES
William L. Beck, Dean of Library Services. Associate Professor Albert R. Pokol, Chair.
Professors Kade Kos, Albert F. Maruskin; Associate Professors Clyde Y. Kiang, Richard
M. Matovich, Lola E. Maxwell; Assistant Professors Marsha L. Nolf, Betty Shaw;
Instructor, Alice G. Dennison; Kathleen A. Joki, Systems Analyst.
A fuller description of the services and materials available in the library may be found
in the General Information section, towards the beginning of this catalog.
The members of this department are in charge of the Manderino Library. They also
supply, to students, faculty, and staff, such services as instruction in the use of the
VULCAT on-line catalog, the CD-ROM computerized indexes to periodicals, and other
library resources. They offer assistance in reference questions, interlibrary loans, and
advanced bibliographical searches in other databases. They offer instruction in the use of
the library for individual classes at both beginning and advanced levels, and they are
responsible for collection development and the processing of materials as they arrive at the
library.
268
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF MATIIEMATICS AND COMPUTER
SCIENCE
MATHEMATICS (MAT)
COMPUTER SCIENCE (CSC)
COMPUTER ASSISTED WORKSHOPS (CAW)
Professor Howard L. Hausher, chair. Associate Professor John A. Beyer, assistant chair.
Professors Michael R. Gross, Robert T. Little, Andrew J. Machusko, Lawrence D.
Romboski, Paul D. Williams; Associate Professors Robert M. Berry, William F. Blank,
Antonio J. Fernandes, John S. Gibson, Jr., Judith I. Hall, George D. Novak, Anthony S.
Pyulrowski, Donald R. Sapko, Elwyn M. Schmidt, John S. Skocik, Jr., Brian E. Weinrich;
Assistant Professors Jerry M. Blackmon, Anette M. DeNardo, Barbara Hess, Karla A.
Hoffman, Nancy A. Skocik
The Department of Mathematics and Computer Science offers several degree programs:
The Bachelor of Science degree in Applied Computer Science is designed to provide the
student with a strong computer science background supplemented with a substantial core of
courses in a related academic discipline.
The Bachelor of Science degree in Mathematics and Computer Science is a careful
blending of courses that offers the student both theory and applications in mathematics and
computer science.
The Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Management Technology: Management and
Computer Science Option emphasizes management and business courses along with computer
science courses. The program is designed to prepare the student for continued study at the
graduate level or for employment in business, industry, or government.
The Bachelor of Arts degree in Mathematics is a sufficiently flexible program that
permits the student to select courses that meet particular interests and needs. It allows for
both depth and breadth of study in mathematics as well as study in the natural sciences. It
is designed to provide the student with an excellent background for graduate studies in
mathematics and for employment opportunities in business, industry, or government.
The Bachelor of Science in Education degree is a program designed for the student who
wishes to pursue a career in secondary teaching of mathematics. It provides the prospective
teacher the opportunity to acquire the knowledge, attitudes, skills, and understanding
necessary to become an effective educator.
The Associate degree in Computer Science is a two-year program designed to provide
the student with career-oriented computer science technology background. Though its
emphasis is on training for job placement in the computer industry after a two-year
curriculum, the program is designed to allow for transfer into the Bachelor of Science
programs.
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
269
In addition to the degree programs, there is offered an 18-credit hour certificate
program in personal computer applications.
Provision is made in several of the programs to accommodate student internships. The
availability of these internships is dependent upon the needs of various governmental
agencies and private employers, and they are not a guaranteed part of the program. If
selected, the student may earn a salary as well as college credit and invaluable experience.
Faculty advisors work carefully with the student to select the courses best suited to the
student's interests and goals.
An open-door policy prevails in the Department of
Mathematics and Computer Science so that students may discuss problems freely with their
advisors or members of the department.
Student work-study assignments are available for those who desire and qualify for
employment. Students may assist in the Mathematics Department, the Computer Center,
the Computer Laboratory, or the Mathematics Laboratory. Hence, students learn while they
earn.
In order to encourage and recogni:re academic achievement, the Department of
Mathematics and Computer Science makes the following awards:
Computer Science Award: The computer science award is presented annually to the
graduating student of the Mathematics and Computer Science Department who has achieved
a high level of academic excellence in computer science courses.
Frederick E. Atkins Memorial Award: In honor of the contributions made by Frederick
E. Atkins to the Mathematics Department and to the many students he taught, an award
established in his name is presented to the graduating student of the Mathematics and
Computer Science Department who has achieved a high level of academic excellence in
Mathematics courses, in either the Mathematics and Computer Science program or the
Bachelor of Arts in Mathematics program.
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
270
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN APPLIED COMPUTER SCIENCE
This program is a careful blending of courses designed to provide the student sufficient
specificity to achieve a solid computer science background as well as sufficient flexibility
to allow for the development of an interest in another academic area. It is for students who
do not require the mathematics-oriented or business-oriented approach provided by the
department' s other programs.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: English Composition I & ll (ENG 101 & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing
(ENG 217); Oral Comrnunications-Management(COM 103); Basic Programming (CSC 105) or Computer Science
I (CSC 121); Technical Mathematica I (MAT 182); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Science■ ; 6 credits
in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Free Elective■ .
(B): Area ofCoaceotration: Stati■tic ■ (MAT 215); Discrete Mathematic ■ (MAT 272); Basic Calculus (MAT
273); Linear Algebra I (MAT 341); Micro■ and Application Software (CSC 101), Computer Science with C (CSC
223) ; Pascal Programming (CSC 123); Cobol I (CSC 218); Logic & Switching Theory (CSC 316); .A■aembler
Language (CSC 323); Information Structures (CSC 377); Computer Architecture (CSC 378); Operating Systems
(CSC 400); Data Comrnunications(CSC 405); Lisp Programming (CSC 410); Structure of Programming Languages
(CSC 455) ; Language Translation (CSC 460) . 9 credits of Computer Science Electives selected from the following :
Computer Science ll (CSC 221); Computer Operations (CSC 300); Operations Research (CSC 309); Cobol ll (CSC
318); Computer Graphics (CSC 324); Systems Analysis (CSC 375); Artificial Intelligence (CSC 420); Numerical
Analysis (CSC 424); Data Base Management Systems (CSC 456); Theory of Languages (CSC 475); Computer
Science Internship (CSC 419) . 20 credits of related electives must be taken in a single discipline selected by the
student and approved by the faculty advisor and the department chairperson (at least 14 credits must be 200 level
or higher) .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
The program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree in Mathematics and Computer
Science is a careful blending of courses which offers students the theory and application of
problems in mathematics and computer science. A demanding but versatile program, it
permits students with a deficiency in mathematics to take introductory courses to provide
them sufficient background to effectively take courses in their area of concentration.
Although the introductory courses do not count in the area of concentration, they do count
as free electives in the program.
· This program is designed to prepare the student for continued study at the graduate level
~r for employment in business, industry, and government in computer operations, computer
programming, systems analysis, or computer equipment analysis, or as a computer specialist
in research, analysis, information storage and retrieval, or computer sales.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: English Composition I & ll (ENG 101 & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing
(ENG 217); Formal Logic I (PHI 211); Mathematic ■ of Finance ll (MAT 271); Basic Programming Language (CSC
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
271
l0S) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural
Science,; 12 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Coacentration: Calculu■ I, Il, m & IV (MAT 281, 282, 381, 382); Diacrete Mathematica (MAT
272); Abltract Algebn I (MAT 3Sl); Statillical Analy1i1 I (MAT 461); Linear Alaebn I (MAT 341); Differential
Equations (MAT 406); Computer Science with Paacal (CSC 123); Computer Science with C (CSC 223): Auembler
Language (CSC 323); Coboll (CSC 218); Information Structure, (CSC 377); Structure of Pro,nmming Languages
(CSC 4SS); Numerical Analysis (CSC 424); LoJic and Switchin, Theory (CSC 316); Computer Architecture (CSC
378); Theory of Languages (CSC 47S); 6 credits from Mathematica Counea; Linear Alaebn Il (MAT 441);
Abltract Algebn Il (MAT 4Sl); Statillical Analy1i1 Il (MAT 462); Honon (MAT 469); Advanced Calculua I &
Il (MAT 481 & 482); Topology (MAT 490); Seminar in Mathematic, (MAT 49S). 17 credits from Computer
Science Coune1: Computer Science Il (CSC 221); Computer Opentions (CSC 300); Survey ofOpentions Research
(CSC 309); Cobol Il (CSC 318); ComputerGnphica (CSC 324); Systems Analysis (CSC 37S); Openting Systems
(CSC 400); Data Communications (CSC 40S); Artificial lnlelliaence (CSC 420); Lisp Prognmming (CSC 410);
Data Base Manaaement (CSC 4S6); Languaae Tnnalation (CSC 460); lnlernahip (maximum 12 en. allowed) (CSC
419).
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MATHEMATICS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Compoaition 1-Il (ENG 101, I 02); 12 credits of Humanitie1; 12 credits of Natunl
12 credits of Social Science■; 18 credits of free elective,.
Science■;
(B) Area of Coacentration: Calculus I, Il, m, & IV (MAT 281, 282, 381, & 382); Geometry (MAT 203);
Abltract Alaebn I (MAT 3Sl); Linear AIJebn I (MAT 341); Statillical Analysi1 I {MAT 461); Differential
Equations (MAT 406); Advanced Calculus I (MAT 481) and Il (MAT 482); Topoloay (MAT 490); 12 credits in
Physics and/or Chemistry; 20 credits in Natunl Science Elective,.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN MATHEMATICS FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: lS credits in Humanitie1, iocludin, Composition I - Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits
in Natunl Science■; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Onl Communication
(COM 101); Genenl P1ychofogy (PSY 100); 9 credits of free elective,.
(B) Profes.,ional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teltl
and Meaaurementa in Secondary School, (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 46S);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teachin, in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainatreaming Exceptional
Child (EDU 340); Teaching of Mathematica in Secondary School, (EDS 460) or Modem Method• (EDS 4SS);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461).
(C) Profes.,ional SpeciaJization: Required: Calculus I, Il, m, (MAT 281, 282, 381); Diacrete Mathematics
(MAT 272); Geometry (MAT 203); Abltract Alaebn I (MAT 3Sl); Statistical Analy1i1 I (MAT 461); Linear
Algebn I (MAT 341); Hi1tory of Mathematica (MAT 304); Basic Pro,nmming Language (CSC l0S) or
Introduction to Computer Science with Paacal (CSC 123).
272
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
Reltricted Eective,: Choose one from Group I and one from Group Il.
Group I: Calculua IV (MAT 382); Differential Equationa (MAT 406); Abstract Algebra Il (MAT 451); Statistical
Analy1i1 Il (MAT 462); Linear Algebra Il (MAT 441); Honon Coune in Mathematic, (MAT 469); Theory of
Equationa (MAT 305); Seminar in Mathematic, (MAT 495) .
Group Il: Basic Program Language (CSC 105); Introduction to Computer Science with Pucal (CSC 123);
Introduction to Computer Science with C (CSC 223); Aaaembler Language (CSC 323); Information Structure, (CSC
377); Syatema Analy1i1 (CSC 375).
Students must also achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to acquire
Pennsylvania certification.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INDUSI'IUAL MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY:
MANAGEMENT AND COMPUTER SCIENCE OPfION
Curriculum:
(A) GeDen1 Education: English Compo■ition I (ENG 101); Busineu Writing I (ENG 211); Scientific and
Technical Writing (ENG 217); Technical Mathematic, I (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181); Mathematica
of Finance I (MAT 171); Ba1ic Calculus (MAT 273); 6 credit in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits
in Natural Science,; 12 credits of free elective■.
(B) Area of Coacemtratioa: Mathematic ■ of Finance Il (MAT 271); Statistics (MAT 215) or Bu1ine11
Statistic, (MAT 22.5); Discrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Oral Communication Management (COM 103); General
Psychology (PSY 100); Indultrial P■ychology (PSY 209); Introduction to MicroproceB10nand Application Software
(CSC 101); Baaic Prognmmina Language (CSC 105) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); Computer Science with
Pascal (CSC 123); Computer Science with C (CSC 223); Cobol I & Il (CSC 218 & 318); Information Structure,
(CSC 377); Data Baae Management (CSC 456); Syatema Analy1i1 (CSC 375); Survey of Operationa Research (CSC
309); 5 credits of 200 level or above computer science elective,. Accountina I & Il (ACC 201 & 202); Managerial
Accounting (ACC 321) or Coat Accountina (ACC 331); Introductory Microeconomic• (ECO 201); Introductory
Macroeconomic, (ECO 202); Principle, of Management (MOT 201); Fmancial Management (FIN 301); Labor
Relationa (MOT 362); 3 credits of 300 level or above in Accountina, Busineu, Economic1, Management,
Marketina or Fmance.
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE
IN COMPUTER SCIENCE TECHNOLOGY
This two:year associate degree program provides students with training in computer
science technology. This high-quality program is career-oriented. All credits earned in this
program are directly transferable to the four-year Bachelor's degree in Industrial
Management Technology-Management and Computer Science Option.
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
273
Curricululll:
(A) General Educatioa: English Compoaitionl (ENG IOI); Busineaa Writing I (ENG 211); Colle1e Algebra
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematic ■ I (MAT 182); Baaic Programmin, LallJU&ge (CSC I OS) or Computer Science
I (CSC 121); Science, Technoloiy, and Society (PHI 247); 3 credit.sin Humanities; 3 credit.sin Social Sciences;
3 credit.s in Natural Science,; 3 credit.s in Free Elective,.
(B) Area ofConcentratioa: Mathematica of Finance I (MAT 171); Statistics (MAT 215) or Buaine11Stati1tic1
(MAT 225); Discrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Introduction to Microproce880r■ and Applications Software (CSC
101); Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Cobol I (CSC 218); Computer Operations (CSC 300); Systems
Analyaia (CSC 375); Information Structures (CSC 377); 12 credita Mathematica and/or Computer Science elective ■
200 level or above .
CERTIFICATE IN PERSONAL COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
This eighteen-credit certificate program is designed for both undergraduates interested
in concentrating their elective course work in the area of micro-computer applications and
non-degree seeking students interested in learning how to use microcomputers in their daily
lives. The course requirements are divided into three areas: Programming (6 credits),
Application Software (9 credits), and Field Experience (3 credits). The Systems Analysis
course may be substituted for the field experience.
Curriculum:
Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Introduction to Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Micro,
and Application Software (CSC 101); PC Applications Programming (CAW 105); Word Proceaaing (ENG 151);
Lotua 1-2-3 (CAW 102); Advanced Lotus Workshop (CAW 103); Field Experience in Computer Science (CSC 199)
or Systems Analy1i1 (CSC 375) .
MATHEMATICS COURSES (MAT)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
+ MAT 098. BASIC MATHEMATICS . A review of the fundamentals of arithmetic computations to include: whole
number, fractions and decimals, percent.B, ratio and proportion. Basic geometric measures and formulas. Some
elementary alaebra . (3 era.) 1his course does IIOI eam credit toward graduation. Thia course may not be
uaed aa a Natural Science elective.
+MAT 099. INTRODUCTORY ALGEBRA. Designed to aid the student in the transition from arithmetic to
algebra. It may be a tenninal course for 10me or may be a preparation for a traditional College Algebra course
and topic ■ will include: Operations on integen and polynomials, factoring and linear equations. (3 era.) Thia
course may not be uaed aa a Natural Science elective. This course does IIOI eam credit toward graduation.
+MAT 100. FUNDAMENTALS OF MATHEMATICS. Seta and their language; numeration aystems; properties
of natural numben, whole numben, integers, rational and real numbers; elementary number theory; modular
arithmetic; mathematical systems; logic. No prerequisite■ . (3 era.)
274
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
MAT 155. METRIC WORKSHOP. For one who wiahe1 to improve one'• uac of the metric 1yatem in all aspects
of daily life. Activities applicable to tcachen, parents, and pcnona in bu1incu and indultry. Teaching 1trategie1,
game■, and 1011rces of materials for tcachen. (1 er.)
+MAT 161. DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL TECHNIQUES IN MATHF.MATICS . For Elementary Education
majon. Various approaches and meth?(i• designed to engage the student in a critical analy1i1 of 1trength1 and
weakncaac1 in approaches to teaching mathematics. Material■ and game■ to remedy deficiencies of the child .
Teaching technique• such as flexible grouping pattern, and individual inatJUction. Prerequisite: Two yean of high
achoo! mathematic,. (3 en.)
MAT 163. INTUITIVE GEOMETRY. To develop basic concepts of geometry: congruence, similarity, measure,
symmetry, etc. Lecture,, group and individual projects. Geometry for the elementary gndes i1 emphasized . (3
en.)
+ MAT 171 . MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE I. Simple intcreat, compound intereat, value of money relative to
time and intcreat, diacounting, accumulation, mortgage points, annuitie1, amortization achedule1, and equation■ of
value. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 182 (3 en.)
+MAT 181. COLLEGE ALGEBRA. Fundamental operation■; factoring and fraction■, exponents and radicals;
and gnpha; equation■ and inequalities; ayatem■ of equation■. Prerequisite: MAT 099 or high achoo!
algebra. (3 en.)
function■
+MAT 182. TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS I. An introduction to algebraic topic ■ usually covered in a highachool algebra coune, 111ch a ■ function■ , graphs, exponents and radicals, and linear and quadratic equations.
Emphasis on technology application■ . (3 en.)
+MAT 191. COLLEGE TRIGONOMETRY. Polar coordinates; identities; solving trigonometric equationa;
functiona and invene functiona, complex numben and logarithm■. Prerequiaite: The student ahould have an
adequate background in algebra, and some plane geometry ia de1inble . (3 en.)
+MAT 192. TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS Il. An emphaaia on trigonometry: trigonometric functiona, vccton,
graph• of trigonometric functiona, exponents and logarithm■, and additional topics in trigonometry. Empha1i1 on
technology applicationa. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.)
+ MAT 199. PRE-CALCULUS . Fundamental notion■ (functiona, lines, acgments, slopea, angle between
and equation■), conic ■, algebnic and tranacendental curve,. (3 en.)
line■ ,
graph■
MAT 203. GEOMETRY. Analysis of axiomatic system■ , axiomatic development of elementary Euclidean
geometry and non-Euclidean geometry. Prerequisites: MAT 181 and MAT 191, or three yean of high-achoo!
mathematics. (3 en.)
MAT 215 . STATISTICS. For non-mathematics majon; not counted toward a mathematics major. Frequency
diatribution, percentile■, mea111rea of central tendency and variability, nonnal diatribution and curve, populations,
samples, sampling diatribution of means, sampling diatribution of proportion, null and alternative hypotheac1, type
I and type Il erron, teats of mean■, confidence intervala, dcciaion procedure,, correlation, chi-square, 1imple
analysis of variance and design of experimenta. Prerequisite: MAT 181. (3 en.)
MAT 225. BUSINESS STATISTICS. Statistical technique, relevant to buainc11 applicationa. Primary emphaais
i1 placed upon identification of appropriate atatistical method, to uac, proper interpretation and appropriate
preacntation of reaulta. Topics include descriptive atatiatica, probability concepta, the nonnal probability
diatribution, estimation techniques, teata of hypotheac1, 1imple and multiple linear regre11ion. Statistical software
i1 uacd to implement many of the statistical method■ . Prerequiaite: MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
275
MAT 271 . MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE II. Gencnliud aMuitie■; bond ■, amortization of premium, and
accumulation of diacount; c11h flows; depreciation achedules; comparison of depreciation; net ca■h flow; nte of
return; capitaliud coll and aMual return; life aMuitie■; life inaunnce. Prerequisite: MAT 171 (3 en.)
MAT 272. DISCRETE MATHEMATICS. An introduction to theories and methods of mathematic athat are relative
to computer acience. topic• include: logic, sell, elementary number theory, mathematical induction, combinatorics,
relations, dignpha, Boolean matrice1, t.rcca. (3 en.)
MAT 273 . BASIC CALCULUS . The techniques of differentiation and integntion are covered without the theory
oflimita and continuity. Applicationa in buaineaaand biological acience are conaidered . Prerequisite■ : MAT 181
or MAT 182, MAT 191 or MAT 192. (3 en.)
.MAT 281. CALCULUS I. A revie~ of absolute value and inequalities; an introduction to analytic geometry;
functions, limits, and continuity; the derivative; applications of the derivative. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT
199 or four yean of high-achoo! mathematics. (3 en.)
MAT 282. CALCULUS II. The integnl; fundamental theorem of integnl calculus; applications of the integnl;
invenc functiona; logarithmic functiona; exponential functiona; trigonometric functiona; hyperbolic functiona;
techniques of integntion. Prerequisite: MAT 281. (3 en.)
MAT 300. MATHEMATICAL INSIGHTS . A gndual introduction to the basic concepll of logic, set theory, and
abatnct algebn. The axiomatic structure i1 emphasiud. (3 en.)
MAT 304. HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS . Thia counc ia a hiatorical ■ummary of the development of
mathematic ■ . Empha■is will be relating mathematic ■ to the development of world culture and ita relation■hip with
all aspects of our culture. The lives and diacoveries of many mathematiciana are discu1sed. Methods of
incorponting the hillory of mathematic, into high school mathematics councs are a major focu1 of the counc.
Prerequisite ■ : MAT 203 and MAT 282. (3 en.) S
MAT 305 . THEORY OF EQUATIONS . Complex numben; theorems involving polynomial1 in one variable; cubic
and biquadratic equations; sepantion of roots, Stunn' a theorem, and approximate evaluation of roots. Prerequisite:
Junior or Senior 11tandi111, (3 en.) S
MAT 341. LINEAR ALGEBRA I. Systems of linear equations and matrices; detenninanll; vecton in 2-space and
3-space; vector spaces; linear tnnsfonnations (3 en.)
MAT 351. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA I. Fundamental concepll of logic; natunl numbers, well-ordering property,
induction, elementary concepll of number theory;_.iJ:8UPS;-cosell, Lagrange's theorem, normal sub-groups, factor
groups; homomorphism, i■omorphism, and related topic■ inclu~
Cayley'a theorem, natural hemomorphism, and
the three fundamental homomorphism theorems. (3 en.)
MAT 381. CALCULUS m. Indeterminate fonna and improper intc ls, polar coordinates and conic sections,
infinite aerie■ , and the theory of infinite aerie■ . Prerequisite: MAT 28 . en.)
MAT 382 . CALCULUS IV. Vectors in the plane; vectors in three space; theory or curve ■ and surfaces; the
differential calculua and the integnl calculu■ of function■ of several variable■ . Prerequisite: MAT 381. (3 en.)
MAT 406 . DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS . Ordinary differential equations and their ■olutions . The exilllence and
uniquencaa of ■olutions . Various types of differential equationa and the techniques for obtaining their ■olution . Some
basic applications, including numerical techniques. Computer ■olution techniques are discus■ed . Prerequisite: MAT
282 and MAT 381. (3 en.)
276
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
MAT 441. LINEAR ALGEBRA Il. Extend• the concepta learned in Linear Algebra I. The content i1 not fixed ,
but usually includes the following topics: linear transfonnations, change-of-baae ■ matricea, repreaentation matrice1;
inner-product spaces, eigenvalues and eigenvecton, diagonalization. Prerequi1ite: MAT 341 (3 en.) F
MAT 451. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA Il. Study of ring■, ideals, quotient ringa, inte,ral domaina, and fields ; ring
homomorphisnu; polynomial rings, diviaion algorithnu, factorization of polynomial,, unique factorization,
extensions, fundamental theorem; finite field■. Prerequi1ite: MAT 35 I . (3 en.)
MAT 461. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS I. Baaic concepta of both diacrete and continuoua probability theory. The
study of random variable,, probability diatributions, mathematical expectation and a number of 1ignificant
probability models. Introduction to atatiatical eatimation and hypotheaia teating . Prerequiaitea: MAT 282 (3 en.)
MAT 462. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS Il. Statiatical theory and application of atatiatical eatimation technique■ and
hypothesis teating methods. Simple linear and multiple linear regreaaion models. Statiatical techniques are
implemented with microcomputer atatiatical aoftware . Prerequisite■: MAT 461 (3 en.) S
MAT 469. HONORS COURSE IN MATHEMATICS. Mathematica majon mull, aa a prerequisite for this courae,
have completed 64 credita with a QPA of 3 .25 in all work and the permiaaion of the department chair or nonrepeatable. (3 en.)
MAT 481. ADVANCED CALCULUS I. Logic and technique, of proof; relation■ , function■, cardinality, and
naive aet theory; development of real numben from natural numben through topology of the line; convergence and
related idea, dealing with function■ (sequence, and aerie■) including continuity.
MAT 482. ADVANCED CALCULUS Il. Further development of the limit concept pertaining to functions
including differentiation and integration along with appropriate theorenu and propertie ■; continuation of
development of sequences and aeries including functions . Prerequi■ite : MAT 481. (3 en.)
MAT 490. TOPOLOGY. Set theory as applied to topological spaces including the real line; metric spaces.
Prerequisite: MAT 351 or MAT 481. (3 en.)
MAT 490. SEMINAR IN MATHEMATICS . Topic, in thi■ courae are choaenjointly by the inatructor and the
student or atudenta involved. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor and chairman of department. Repeatable for
a maximum of 3 credita. (1 to 3 en.)
COMPUTER SCIENCE COURSES (CSC)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +).
+CSC 101. INTRODUCTION TO MICROCOMPUTER AND APPLICATION SOFIWARE. An introductory
study of the IBM-PC microcomputer, ita operating system, and its moat popular application■. Major topics:
Computer hardware, MS-DOS, word processing, spread aheeta, graphic■, data baaea. (3 en.)
+CSC 105 . BASIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE. The nature and atructure of computen, the history and
development of computen, flow charting and elementa of the BASIC language involved in reading and printing,
transfer atatementa, looping, subroutines, conversational programming, etc . The computer language taught i■
BASIC. (3 en.)
+CSC 121. COMPUTER SCIENCE. Thia courae ia an introduction to computer acience using a recent venion
of the FORTRAN programming language. The concept of structured programming, input and output technique■,
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
277
exprcuion evaluation, the uaignment lllatement, decision lllatementa, looping techniques, and arrays arc among the
topic• covered in thia coune. Prcrequiaite: MAT 181. (3 en.)
CSC 123. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE wrrH PASCAL. Thia coune introduce, the ltudent to
computen, algorithma, and pro,rama. Empha1i1 ia on efficient pro,nm deai,n using llnlcturcd pro,nmming
technique,. Students arc required to run PASCAL programa on the Univenity's computer ayatem and/or on
penonal computen. (3 en.)
CSC 199. FIELD EXPERIENCE IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Thia coune ia designed for the Auociate Degree
in Computer Science prognm. It affords •handa-on" job-related experience in computer acience. Availability of
this coune ia dependent upon finding a hoat organization. Not repeatable. (3 en.)
CSC 218. COBOL I. Introductory concepts of data proceuing through the buic components of COBOL
prognmming. Includes structured programming, input/output computational, conditionals, and table handling
facilities. Prerequisite : An introductory coune in computer acience is recommended . (3 en.)
CSC 221. COMPUTER SCIENCE Il. Thia coune involves advanced pro,nmming technique, using the moat
recent venion of the FORTRAN programming language. Among the topic• covered in this coune arc advanced
array technique■ , character manipulation, subroutine, and function subpro,nma, the internal rcprcaentation of
character and numeric value,, and file proceuing. Prcrequiaite: CSC 121. (3 en.)
CSC 223. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE wrrH C. Thi ■ coune introduce• the student to the C
environment. Emph11i1 is on efficient software development using llnlctured programming techniques. Students
arc required to run C programa on the Univenity' s computer system and/or on personal computen. Prerequisite:
CSC 123 or equivalent. (3 en.)
CSC 256. COMPUTER-AIDED INSTRUCTION (CAI). The coune is taught on a lecture-laboratory baais.
Students arc expected to be able to uae the Math and Computer Science department's personal computers and should
be familiar with at least one converutional computer language, preferably BASIC. In the laboratory seaaion,
students arc expoaed to various types of CAI prognmming materials and instructed in the development of their
own CAI •pack.age" using appropriate software. Prerequisite: CSC 105 or CSC 121 or CSC 123. (3 en.) F
CSC 300. COMPUTER. OPERATIONS . Introduction to the hardware of the computer and the usage and operation
of the Central Proceuing Unit and its peripheral equipment. Prerequisites: CSC 221 or CSC 123 . (3 en.)
CSC 309 . SURVEY OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH. Lecture and laboratory aessiona utilizing the computer in
the performance of quantitative methods of decision-making. Survey of prcaent operations rcaearch tools available
to the administrator and manager is an integral part of the coune. Prerequisites: Junior or Senior It.anding, MAT
215 or MAT 225, along with MAT 341 arc desirable. (3 en.)
'.
CSC 316 . LOGIC AND SWITCHING THEORY OF THE COMPUTER. Thia coune is designed to provide an
in-depth 1tudy of Boolean algebra and its application to switching and gating networks . Prerequisites: CSC 105
or CSC 121 or CSC 123 or MAT 272. Recommended couraes arc MAT 273 or MAT 281 and CSC 323 . (3 en.)
CSC 318. COBOL Il. A continuation of COBOL I emphaaizing aequential and indexed files, disk: storage, table
handling, subpro,nma, library copy facilities, interactive proceuing, sorting, character manipulation and
debugging. Top-down deai,n and principle ■ of structured programming permeate the courae. File editing, file
updating and file maintenance programs arc covered in detail. Prerequisite: CSC 218 (3 en.)
CSC 323. ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING . Computer organization, rcprcaentation of numbers and
characters, instruction codes, machine language, macros, and subroutines. Prerequisite: CSC 123 or CSC 221 (3
en.)
278
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 'AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
CSC 324. COMPUTER GRAPHICS. Lecture and labontory aeaaiona utilizing the computer via inter-active
gnphic1 terminal,, and study of the theory and hardware of gnphica device■. Development and utilization of
gnphic1 10ftware i1 the major goal of thi1 coune. Prerequisites: CSC 123 or CSC 221 . (3 en.)
CSC 375. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS . An introduction to the baaic conccpta and tool• of 1yatema analy1i1 within the
context of real life problem situationa. Prerequi1ite: CSC 101 and CSC 123 or permiaaion of imtnactor. (3 en.)
s
CSC 377. INFORMATION STRUCTURES. Data llructures, conccpta and algorithm■ uaed in 10lution of nonnumerical problem■. Topics include atacb, queue■, linked liata and binary tree■, 10rting and ■earching method■,
and 10me analy1i1 of algorithm■ . Prerequi1ite1: MAT 272 and CSC 123. (3 en.)
CSC 378. COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE. Centnl proceaaor organization, imtnaction formata, addreaaing
schemes, hienrchiea of atonge, executive, and priority proceuing, 11 well as input and output. Prerequi1ite: CSC
123 or CSC 221 and CSC 316 and CSC 323. (3 en.) F
CSC 400. OPERATING SYSTEMS. An introduction to the function, purpose, chancteristics, and design objectives
of computer operating syatema. Prerequisites: CSC 323 and CSC 377. (3 en.) F
CSC 405. DATA COMMUNICATIONS . A study of the theory, implementation procedure■, and problem■
a110Ciatcd with data communicationa. Prerequi1ite: CSC 378, MAT 272, CSC 377 and MAT 341. (3 en.) S
CSC 410. LISP PROGRAMMING. An introduction to LISP (List Proceuing) 11 a vehicle for encoding
intelligence-exhibiting procesaea. Topic ■ include a ■urvey of lambda calculus and recursive function theory.
Prerequi1ite1: CSC 377 (3 en.) F
CSC 419. MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE INTERNSHIP. Focuae1 on job related experience in
Computer Science and Mathematic,. Opportunitiea may be available to studenta off and on campu1. (l-15 en.)
CSC 420. ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE. To ■urvey the 10ftware pacbgea needed for artificial intelligence and
to uae theae II tool, in a representative sample of Al topics . Prerequisites: CSC 377 and CSC 410. (3 en.) S
CSC 424. NUMERICAL ANALYSIS . Round-off errors and computer arithmetic; numerical instability; error
analy1i1 and estimation; cubic spline interpolation; condition number of a matrix; Gauuian elimination and pivoting
atntegiea for linear system■; numerical integntion and 10lution of differential equation,. Prerequisite,: CSC 123
or CSC 221 and MAT 382. (3 en.) F
CSC 455. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES . The power and limitationa of algebraic language■ ,
string manipulation languagesand intenctive languagenre studied together with compiler llructure and technique, .
Pre!CQuiaite: CSC 223. (3 en.) F
CSC 456. DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS. Design, implementation and application of data base
management 1yatems. Prerequisite: CSC 218. (3 en.)
CSC 460. LANGUAGE TRANSLATION. Theory and design of asaemblen, interpreters, and compilers for digital
computers. Topics include analysis of 10Urce language, genention of efficient-object code, and optimization
techniques. Prerequisites: CSC 323 and CSC 377 . (3 en.) S
CSC 475. THEORY OF LANGUAGES. An introduction to abatnct machine theory, combinatorial 1yatems,
computable functions, and formal linguistics. Topics include tinite-atate machines, regular aeta, Turing machines,
Chomsky bienrchy gnmman and language,. Empb11i1 is on ■urveying baaic topics and developing an intuitive
understanding in the theory of languages. Prerequisite,: CSC 377, MAT 272 or MAT 351. (3 en.) S
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
279
CSC 485. SPECIAL TOPICS IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Individual study or research on topic ■ and materials
not ordinarily covered by other courses. Repeatable for a maximum of three credits. Prcrequi1ite: Pennission of
illBlructor. (3 en.)
CSC 496. SEMINAR IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Topics to be chosen jointly by the instructor and the student
or students involved. Prerequisite: Approval of instructor. (I to 3 en.)
COMPUTER ASSISTED WORKSHOPS (CAW)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
CAW 102. LOTUS WORKSHOP. An introductory study of the LOTUS 1-2-3 Worksheet Program. Worksheet
entries and LOTUS 1-2-3 commands and graphs. (1 er.)
CAW 103. ADV ANCED LOTUS WORKSHOP. A study of the LOTUS 1-2-3 macro command language, data base
commands, and worksheet consolidation. Prerequisite: CAW 102. (I er.)
CAW 105. PC APPLICATIONS PROGRAMMING WORKSHOP. An introductory study of the personal computer
operatina 1y■tcm includina batch files, confi,uration files and communicatiom. (3 en.) S
280
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
(ARMY ROTC)
Major Rand C. Lewis, Professor of Military Science; Captain Steven Roberts, Assistant
Professor, officer in charge; Captain John Haselrig, Assistant Professor; Captain Andrew
E. Kwortelc, Assistant Professor
The Army Reserve Officers Training Corps (Army ROTC) is a national program that
provides college-trained officers for the U.S. Army, the Army National Guard and the U.S.
Army Reserve. Army ROTC enhances students' education by providing unique leadership
and management experience and helps develop self-discipline, physical stamina and poise.
This education experience is further enhanced through the Professional Military Education
program. This program encourages students to take additional courses in military history,
written communication, human behavior, management, and national security studies.
Participation in field training/trips may be required during each semester. For additional
information not covered below, please call the Military Science department (938-4074) or
visit the ROTC building on the University campus.
THE BASIC PROGRAM
Army ROTC is traditionally a four-year program consisting of a Basic and Advanced
Program. The Basic Program is usually taken in the freshman and sophomore years. The
student incurs no military obligation. Students may discontinue the Basic Program at any
time. It consists of four semesters of training and instruction on areas of national defense,
land navigation, small unit leadership, military history and leadership development.
Uniform, necessary textbooks, and equipment are furnished without cost to the student.
To be eligible for the Basic Program, a student must be enrolled as a full-time student
at California University and not be a conscientious objector. Students who have taken Junior
ROTC or have military experience (active duty or reserves) may receive advanced placement
credit for the Basic Program.
THE ADVANCED PROGRAM
The Advanced Program is normally taken in the final two years of college. Instruction
includes further leadership development and evaluation, organiz.ational and management
techniques, tactics and administration. Training is directed towards preparing the student
to be commissioned and assume responsibilities as a Second Lieutenant upon completion of
all program requirements.
A paid Advanced Camp is held during the summer between the junior and senior year
and is required of all advanced course students. This camp permits the cadet to put into
practice the principles and theories acquired in classroom instruction. In addition to being
paid approximately $600 (for six weeks of leadership training), the cadet is paid travel
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
281
expenses, room and board, medical and dental care, and other benefits while attending
Advanced Camp.
To be eligible for the Advanced Program, a student must (1) fulfill the requirements for
the Basic Program, (2) successfully complete the Professor of Military Science's (PMS)
interview and selection process, (3) meet Army medical standards, (4) pass an Officer
Selection Battery (OSB), (5) have a Grade Point Average of 2.0 or better (2.2 or better
preferred), and (6) meet Army physical fitness standards.
Two-Year Program
The two-year program enables students who did not enroll in the Basic Program to
become eligible for entry into the Advanced Program through one of three methods: (1)
Armed Forces veterans and Junior ROTC graduates may qualify for entry into the Advanced
Program. (2) Students may elect to attend the ROTC Basic Camp (a six-week program
completed during the summer) before entering the Advanced Program. (3) Students may
attend Basic Training as members of an Army Reserve or National Guard unit. To be
eligible for the two-year program one must be a full-time student in good standing with the
university and must have at least junior status, be pursuing a four-year degree, and satisfy
all the entry requirements outlined above for the Advanced Program.
Anny ROTC Stipend
All students that are enrolled and contracted into the Advanced Program receive a
stipend of $100 per month for ten months of each school year during the last two years of
the ROTC program. This stipend is non-taxable.
Anny ROTC Scholarships
Advanced freshmen may compete for three-year merit scholarships whether or not they
are enrolled in Military Science courses. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, a flat
book rate, and a $100 per month ROTC stipend during the school year for the length of the
scholarship. Applications for these .scholarships are accepted from the end of the fall
semester through the beginning of the spring semester.
Simultaneous Membership Program (SMP)
This program provides membership in ROTC and an Army Reserve or Army National
Guard unit at the same time. While enrolled in ROTC, the student is also filling a
leadership position such as platoon leader in a Reserve or National Guard unit. This affords
the student the opportunity gain valuable leadership and management experience while
attending California. The student receives the ROTC stipend ($100/month) and drill pay
from the Reserves (approximately $120/month). Students who qualify and take advantage
of all the benefits that are available through this program may receive benefits of as much
as $10,000.
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
282
Milftary Science Student Activities
Military Science students are encouraged to participate in university and civic activities
as much as their course load will allow. The Military Science Department and the Vulcan
Cadet Corps sponsor numerous activities such as serving as color guard for all home football
and basketball games and university functions, Red Cross blood drives, marching in parades,
and formal and semi-formal social activities.
Military Adventure Training
In addition to all the training and activities offered by the Department of Military
Science, a selected number of highly motivated cadets are afforded the opportunity to attend
some of the U.S. Army's most prestigious and challenging military schools. Limited
numbers of positions are available for California cadets to attend the U.S. Army Airborne
School (at Fort Benning, Georgia), the U.S. Army Air Assault School (at Fort Campbell,
Kentucky), and the U.S. Army Northern Warfare School (at Fort Greenly, Alaska). School
allocations are awarded on a competitive basis.
A Suggested Military Science Curriculwn
Fall Semester
Spring Semester
Basic Course
Freshman
Sophomore
GMS 111
GMS 213
Junior
Senior
GMS 315
GMS 417
GMS 112
GMS 214
Advanced Course
GMS 316
GMS 418
MILITARY SCIENCE BASIC PROGRAM: GMS COURSES
The first four semesters of Military Science (100 and 200 series courses) constitute the Basic
Program, allowing the college student to gain insight into the military as a profession
without incurring any military obligation. The student learns about the role of the US Army
in providing for national security, basic leadership and management skills, as well as basic
military skills. The student is afforded the opportunity to partake in outdoor activities such
as rappelling, swim survival and white water rafting besides participating in the various
social activities sponsored by the Cadet Corps.
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
283
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
GMS 111 . LEADERSHIP CONCEPl'S AND COMMUNICATIONS SKILL. Develop, the atudent'a leadenhip
and management 1kill1 through a aeries of caae atudiea and role-playing model■. Studenta learn communication
skills, interpenonal 1kill1 and penonnel conflict reaolution . One hour lecture and one hour leadc;_nhip laboratory
per week. (2 en.) F
GMS 112. ROLE OF THE U .S . ARMY IN NATIONAL SECURJI'Y. Familiarize, the atudent with the
organization of the Department of Defenae, focu1i111 on the U .S . Anny, Reaerve componenta, the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization (NATO), Soviet Anny doctrine, and baaic aoldering 1kill1. One hour lecture and one hour
leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.) S
GMS 213. FUNDAMENTALS OF MILITARY SKILLS AND SMALL UNIT LEADERSHIP. Studenta learn baaic
land na"igational 1kill1 by using the military topographical map and the lenaatic compau. Additionally, the atudent
ia taught basic, in ,mall unit leadenhip and tactic, of aquad-aized unita. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip
laboratory per week. (2 en.) F
GMS 214. MILITARY HISTORY: LEADERS AND BATTLES. An analytical study of the principles of war and
their application■ in U .S . military history from the American Revolution through the Vietnam conflict. The atudent
will atudy the commander' ■ penpective and how it affected the outcome of the battle. Three houn lecture per week.
(3 en.) S
LEADERSHIP LABORATORY: (Baaic Program cadeta/atudenta)ln laboratory the cadet learn■ basic military 1kill1,
111ch II fint aid , awim 111rvival, and mountaineering 1kill1 and ia afforded the opportunity to rappel. Cadeta are
1)10 afforded the opportunity to gain leadenhip experience through various challe111ing aquad or platoon poaitiona.
Leadenhip laboratory mull be acheduled u part of each basic Military Science courae (GMS 111 thru GMS 214) .
Mll..ITARY SCIENCE ADVANCED PROGRAM: GMS COURSES
The 300 and 400 series courses constitute the advanced courses of military instruction
for men and women who desire a commission as Second Lieutenant in the active Anny, the
Anny Reserve, or the National Guard. This phase is composed of studies in advanced
leadership and management, tactics, military law, modem instructional and training
techniques and ethics and professionalism. Students are evaluated on their leadership skills
in various leadership positions. Acceptance by the Professor of Military Science is a
prerequisite for enrollment in the Advanced Program.
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
GMS 315 . ADVANCED MILITARY SKILLS AND LEADERSHIP DEVELOPMENT. Extcnaive atudy and
experience in military leadenhip and military combat akilla, 111ch a■ drill and ceremony, land navigation,
communication■, and phy■ical fitneu. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Acceptance into the Advanced Program. (2 en.) F
GMS 316 . ADVANCEDMil..ITARY TACTICS AND COMBAT OPERATIONS . Extcnaive atudy and handa-on
experi~nce in small unit ~ctica and leadenhip 1kill1, including operation■ orden, offenaive and defenaive combat
operation■ and leadenhip development. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.)
s
284
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
GMS 417. DYNAMICS OF MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND ARMY FUNCTIONS. A study of the U.S. Army's
command and staff functions, military justice system, and the Army Training Management Syatem. In-depth
discu11ions of ethic• and professionalism required of the Officer Corps. Two hours lecture and one hour leadenhip
laboratory per week:. (2 era.) F
GMS 418. THE MILITARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND OFFICER TRANSmON. An introduction to the
U.S. Army'• personnel and logistical management system and personnel evaluation system. The course conclude■
with a worbhop to a11ist the cadet to make the transition into the military profe11ion. Two houn lecture and one
hour leadenhip laboratory per week:. (2 en.) S
LEADERSHIP LABORATORY. (Advanced Program cadets) During leadenhip laboratory cadets are evaluated
in various leadenhip positions at the battalion and company level. Leadership laboratory i1 de1igned to prepare
cadets for advanced camp and future appointments as Second Lieutenants. Senior level cadets conduct the training
and administration of the Cadet Corps. Leadership laboratory must be scheduled in conjunction with the advanced
Military Science courses (GMS 315 through GMS 418).
285
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
MUSIC (MUS)
HUMANITIES AREA
Associate Professor Gene G. Suskalo, chair. Associate Professors Paul P. Dolinar, Max A.
Gonano, Shirley J. Sutton, Albert Tiberio
PURPOSE
People, regardless of time and place, are expressive about the circumstances of their
lives, as well as about their hopes and dreams. One form of that expression is music. To
comprehend its meaning and importance necessitates relating it to an historical context and
to understanding the science of sound production behind this art form. Music is not simply
an end in itself. Music is also a means by which the values and interests of a society are
revealed.
The music curriculum is designed to give a general introduction to the appreciation of
modem and classical music as well as to provide interested students with the opportunity to
participate in the university's band, choirs, and instrumental ensembles.
PROGRAM
The university has no major in music. The curriculum serves the General Studies
Program of the university and the Co-Curricular Program sponsored by Student Affairs, Inc.
Located in the Music Department is the Humanities Area Major. It provides students with
the opportunity and flexibility to structure a course of study from across disciplines in the
humanities - Music, Art, Theater, Philosophy, Communication Studies, English, and the
Foreign Languages and Cultures.
MUSIC COURSES (MUS)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+MUS 100. INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC. Expoaes the student to the various hiatorical, analytical and aesthetic
elements of muaic, thereby providing an opportunity to broaden and enrich peraonal enjoyment. This expoaure to
mu■ic ia made through the uae of villl41 aid■, audio recording■, radio, television, films, and concerts. (3 en.) F-S
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
286
MUS 104. VOICE CLASS I. Thi, courx i, deaigned for students who want to improve their singing voice I I a
musically exprcuive instrument. Breathiq, vocal placement, and diction will be emphasized. Attention will also
be given to improving 1ight-1inging ability. (3 en.)
+MUS 105. SURVEY OF JAZZ. Coven the historical background of jazz from 1900 to the present, the important
artiata and ensemble, and their contributions to the art fonn, and analyze• of jazz styles and forms via guided
liatening1 to recording,, video,, and attendance at live performance,. (3 en.) F-S
+ MUS 106. SURVEY OF TWENTIETH-CENTURY MUSIC . Auiata in a realization and undentanding of the
impact of modern twentieth-century compositional and performance techniques upon the tnditional muaical heritage.
The student will emerge with a theoretical knowledae of numerou■ twentieth-century musical concepts and
technique,, 11 well I I an appropriate vocabulary. Important compoacn and a de■criptive analy1i1 of their worb
will play a dominalll role throughout the courx. (3 en.) F-S
+ MUS 107. AMERICAN MUSIC . Presents a panoramic view of the musical activities which have occurred in
America from Colonial time, through the present. Included in thia study of American folk, popular and art muaic
arc the various upects of primitive music, psalmody, early opera, and concert life, African and European folk
music•• influence in America, the ■inging ■chool , the mu■ical effect of European immigrants, and the roots of jazz
and its ramifications. (3 en.) F-S
MUS 114. VOICE CLASS ll. This course continue, the objectives of Voice I (MUS 104). A more demanding level
of vocal literature, commensurate with the student'• 1ingina ability will be performed.
+ MUS 11 S. FUNDAMENTALS OF MUSIC. Provide■ a knowledge of the fundamentals of muaic and an ability
to execute baaic 1kill1, including the study of note value,, meter signature■, ■cales, key signature,, and the use of
syllables in reading music . A b11ic introduction to the piano keyboard i1 also included . Strongly recommended
for Elementary Education students and any ochen interested in ■trcngthening their knowledge of music
fundamental,. (3 en.) F-S
MUS 196. JAZZ ENSEMBLE. Entnnce by interview with Jazz Ensemble Director. Required attendance at
rchcaraala and all public performance,. Membenhip ,ranted only by audition. (1 er.) F-S
MUS 197. CALIFORNIA CHORALE. A ,roup of approximately 25 mixed voices. Memben arc chosen from the
ltudent body, faculty , and mcmbcn of surrounding communitie■. Membership is granted only by audition. (1 er.)
F-S
MUS 203 . SURVEY OF THE AMERICAN MUSICAL. Thi, course will present the variou■ historical, cultural
and social elements of the American Muaical. Thia will be accompli■hed through the use of visual aid ■ , audio
recording,, television, video tape■ , film■ , and whenever pouible, attendance at live performances. Experts in the
field will be utilized II guest lecturcn. (3 en.)
MUS 211. KEYBOARD I. For the beginning ltudents intercated in achieving facility at the piano. Includes playing
of major and minor ■cale■, pattel'III and fingering,. Chord, (I, IV, V) in both major and minor key■ followed by
their invenion■ and the common tone chord sequence pattern. A student completing the course ahould be able to
play aimple song■ by combining melody with chord accompaniment. It ia expected that atudenll will be at an entry
level in keyboard experience. (3 en.) F-S
MUS 212. KEYBOARD ll. A continuation of Keyboard I for the more advanced student. Review of ■cales,
chords, invenion■, and sight readings followed by the improvisation of simple accompaniments from chord
1ymbol1. Modulation study is begun with the study of the circle of fifths; further method• of modulation arc
introduced II time permits. Transposition at boch the accond and third is introduced. A thorough study of
dominant seventh chord, relating the ■imple improvisation within any given key. (3 en.) S
• • •
287
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
CCU 187. PEP BAND. The Pep Band ia composed of bra11, woodwind and percuaaioniata from the University
Band. Thia enacmble performs at aclected basketball 1ame1. (1 er. aprin, acmeater) S
CCU 188 . WOODWIND ENSEMBLE. The Woodwind Enacmble ia composed of woodwind players from the
University Band. It explore, all phaaca of literature composed for thia type of enacmble. The ,roup rehearaea one
hour a week and performs both on and off campua. (1 er. per acmeater) F-S
CCU 189. BRASS ENSEMBLE. The Brau Enacmble ia composed of bra11 players from the University Band.
It explores all phaacs of literature composed for thia type of enacmble. The ,roup rehearaea one hour a week and
performs both on and off campua. (1 er. per acmeater) F-S
CCU 197. UNIVERSITY BAND. The University Band follow■ two curricula determined by the acmeater. During
the fall acmeater, the University Band performs at football 1ame1 and parades and ia the featured exhibition band
at numerous marchiDB band feativala. Membership in thi1 enacmble ia open to any intereated inatrumentaliat.
Membership ia alao open to thoac wilhiDB to audition for feature twirler or for a po1ition on the Silk, Squad, Dance
Linc, or Rifle Linc. DuriDB the SpriDB Scmeater, the University Band performs literature which encompaaaca all
facets of the idiom. Thia enacmble performs at convocationa and concerts, both on and off campus. (1 er. per
acmeater)
'
CCU 198. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY CHOIR. The California University Choir provides an opportunity for
atudents to aing a wide variety of music from the contemporary I I well I I the traditional repertoire . They perform
frequently on campua and throughout the area. Membership in the Choir ia elective; auditions are not required.
(1 er.) F-S
CCU 199. CALIFORNIA SINGERS. The California Sillier& ia a amall performiDB enacmble. Membership in the
,roup is determined by audition. There are an equal number of men and women . The baaic performance atyle
is that of a pop/ahow/awing choir, although other atyles of muaic are performed when appropriate for the acaaon
or the audience. Smaller groups, such I I a women'• trio or a men'• barbershop quartet, are formed within thia
group. Choreography ia a regular part of the performance, preacnted by thia group. (1 cr.)F-S
•
• •
ECE 217. MUSIC IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. A creative approach to the muaic intereata and nccda of the very
young child, de1igncd to acquaint the prospective teacher with current music education practice, in pre-achoo! and
the primary ,rades. Experiences are provided in 1ingi11B, liateniDB, playiDB inatnnncnts, rhythmic movement, and
creative music activitie1. (3 era.) F-S
EDE 207. TEACHING OF MUSIC IN ELEMENTARY GRADES K-8 . Thia course teachea the proper technique,
of teaching muaic to children and include, the atudy of much aource material and its proper application in the
cla11room. Students develop technique■ and procedure, through actual teaching experience in a cla11room actting.
Although not required, Fundamental■ of Muaic (115) ia atroDBIY advised . (3 era.) F-S
288
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
Professor Margaret A. Marcinek, chair. Associate Professor Jacqueline Stefanik; Assistant
Professors Suz.anne M. Palko, Debra A. Shelapinsky.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING
The Department of Nursing, an upper-division nursing program for registered nurses
who have graduated from associate degree and diploma programs, is accredited by the
National League for Nursing. The Bachelor of Science in Nursing program is designed to
build upon the prior knowledge and experience of registered nurses. It prepares the
graduate to practice as a generalist in a variety of health settings through the internalization
of concepts relevant to professional nursing. The course of study combines general
education in the humanities as well as the biophysical and psychosocial sciences with
comprehensive theory and practice in nursing.
All of the academic requirements of the University apply to the Nursing Program. In
addition, a minimum grade of "C" is required in each upper-division nursing course.
All RN students are admitted into the Pre-BSN Program and must complete all Pre-BSN
requirements before being admitted to the upper-division BSN nursing courses. An overall
QPA of 2.0 is required for entrance into upper-division nursing courses, and a subsequent
QPA of 2.0 in nursing courses must he met for graduation requirements.
Lower-division courses may he accepted as transfer credits from accredited institutions,
or they may he completed at California University of Pennsylvania. Selected courses may
he challenged by examination. Specific information on challenge examinations for General
Education courses may he obtained from the Department of Nursing.
Knowledge from previously completed nursing courses must he validated in order to
grant lower-division credit in nursing. Validation examinations are administered in the
department and are composed of the NLN Mobility Profile II Examinations and the Clinical
Performance Examination. In addition, participation in the optional Portfolio Review
process may permit students to waive selected clinical requirements. Further information
on validation examinations and Portfolio Review may he obtained from the department.
Specified General Education and support courses must he completed at California
University of Pennsylvania. All exceptions to this policy must he approved by the
chairperson of the department and the Dean of the College of Science and Technology.
Students enrolled in upper-division nursing courses must meet the annual health
requirements. In addition, students must provide evidence of professional and personal
liability insurance coverage, evidence of current RN licensure, and current CPR
certification.
Scholarship opportunities for the RN student entering this program are available through
various local, state and national nursing organizations. Additionally, the Department of
Nursing maintains a Nursing Honor Society and a Nursing Alumni Society which presents
a yearly award to the outstanding graduating senior.
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
289
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral F.ducatioa: Compositionl-Il (ENG 101 and 102); College Algebra (MAT 181); Statistic ■ (MAT
215 or 225); General Psychology (PSY 100); Principle■ of Sociology (SOC 100); Developmental P■ychology (PSY
207); Social P■ychology (PSY 211); Penpective1 in Philoaophy (PHI 100) or Ethics (PHI 220); 3 en. Humanities
elective; Human Anatomy and Physiology I and Il (BIO 230, 260); Chemillry for Health Profe11ional1 (CHE ISO);
Microbiology (BIO 226); 7 en. of free electives.
(B) Support Counes: Principles of Manaiement (MGT 201); Introduction to Microcomputen (CSC 101)
total of 6 en. from any 2 area■ in Computer Science, Gerontology, Buaineaa Writing, Public School Nuning,
Nutrition (BIO 228), or Nuning elective (NUR 200).
(C) Area of Coaceatntioa: Nuning Placement Examinationa: NLN Mobility Profile Il Examinationa and
Clinical Performance Examination (30 en.); Philoaophy of Profe11ional Nuning (NUR 330); Health Aaaeaament
(NUR 350); Trend ■ and laaue■ in Nuning (NUR 360); Profe11ional Nuning in Health Promotion (NUR 390);
Method■ of Nuning Research (NUR 430); Profeaaional Nuning in Health Restoration (NUR 440); Profeaaional
Nuning; Social lmplicationa (NUR 460); Leadenhip and Change in Nuning (NUR 490).
NURSING COURSES (NOR)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
NUR 101. WOMEN'S HEALTH ISSUES.
Thi■
and cogs;em■ of women in today'• ■ociety .
Emphasi■
coune ia designed to address the various health care issues, needs
is on the biological, developmental, psychological and ■ocial
concepts related to women'• health care. FREE ELECTIVE. OPEN TO ALL STUDENTS. (3 en.) S
NUR 105 : PARENTING; INSIGHTS AND ISSUES . This coune examines the challenge of parenthood and
effective parenting in today' ■ world . Explication of the functiona, proceaa and problems of parenting serves a s
a foundation for di■cu■sion of effective parenting ■kills and behavion. FREE ELECTIVE. OPEN TO ALL
STUDENTS. (3 en.) S
NUR 200. TRANSmONS IN NURSING . This RN/BSN tnnaition coune is deaigned to assist the reiistered nune
in developing and achieving profeaaional goal■. Empha1i1 i■ on educational trends in nuning, concepts of
profeaaionali■m, theories of role tnnaition, and culture shock. (3 en.) F
■tudent
NUR 330. PHILOSOPHY OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING. Focuses on theoretical frameworks for professional
nuning practice, including an introduction to the nuning proce11. Allignments assist students to develop and apply
a penonal philosophy of profeaaional nuning, and to independently plan appropriate interventiona for multicultural
clients of all ages. Prerequisite: BSN Status. (3 en.) F
NUR 350. HEALTH ASSESSMENT. Concepts and skills of history-taking and physical asseaament are
emphasized, focusing on the variationa in approach as well as in findings at different stages of human development.
Prerequi■ite : BSN Statu1. (3 en.) F
NUR 360. TRENDS AND ISSUES IN NURSING. Analysis of professional nuning aa well aa bi~thical issues
from historical and contemporary viewpoints with implicationa for profe■sional nuninJ practice in the health care
delivery ■ystem. Prerequisite: BSN Status. (3 en.) S
NUR 390. PROFESSIONAL NURSING IN HEALTH PROMOTION. Reviews concepts and principles of
profeaaional nuning practice related to health promotion and maintenance for individuals and familiea 1cro11 the
life span. Emphasis ia on enhancement of health aaseaament skills and utilization of the nuning proceaa to manage
health promotion activities. Prerequisites: NUR 330, NUR 350. (6 en.) S
290
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
NUR. 430. MEI'HODS OF NURSING RESEARCH. Basic concepts and methods related to the reaearch proce11.
Opportunity i■ provided for the- development of critical thinking- and decision-making ■killa needed by the
profeuional nune to analyze and evaluate reaearch findings for application to practice. Prerequisite: BSN Statu1.
(3 era.) F
NUR. 440. PROFESSIONAL NURSING IN HEALTH RESTORATION. Focuses on health restoration and
rehabilitation of individual& acro11 the life ■pan . Practicum■ provide the opportunity for direct client care in a
variety of aettinga. Emphasis i■ on the development of a theoretical base for nursing practice and scientific analy1i1
of nursing care. Prerequisite: NUR. 390 (6 en.) F
NUR. 460. PROFESSIONAL NURSING: SOCIETAL IMPLICATIONS. Societal influences on the health care
delivery aystcm and professional nursing practice are examined. Clinical experiences focus on application of
advanced decision-making skills utilizing the nursing proceBB to meet health care needs of an identified population.
Prerequisite: NUR. 440. (3 era.) S
NUR. 490. LEADERSHIP AND CHANGE IN NURSING. Enhances leadership skills through analysis of
and experiential exercises. Practicum■ provide for application of theory in critical analy1i1 of
situations and decision-making within the practice of nursing to meet emerging health needs of consumers.
Prerequisite■: NUR. 440 and MOT 201. (6 en.) S
theorie■/conccpts
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
291
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
Professor Ronald C. Hoy, Chair. Professors John J. Bums, Vincent F. Lackner, Barbara
Ann Demartino Swyhart, John J. Walsh; Assistant Professor Gary A. Smith.
The word philosophy comes from two Greek words that mean love (..fo,, phileo) and
knowledge (<10ux, sophia), and throughout much of history anyone who sought wisdom was
called a philosopher. Socrates was esteemed to be wise because he was aware of how little
he knew. In knowing this, however, he was wiser than the "authorities" and "experts"
whose unreflective confidence in their beliefs was mistaken. With time, philosophy as an
academic discipline became the critical study of the justification of beliefs and the attempt
to put together different kinds of beliefs to form a workable view of reality as a whole. In
brief, philosophy is the critical study of beliefs about truth, knowledge, reality, and values.
Aristotle thought the study of philosophy was intrinsically rewarding because it fulfilled a
distinctively human potential-the ability to reason and to know. But if minimizing one's
mistaken or dogmatic beliefs has practical value, then philosophy also can serve pragmatic
purposes.
Philosophy students study the historical development of theories about the nature of
knowledge, reality, and values, and they learn how to assess the correctness of such
theories. Students develop their abilities to think logically, to explore ethical issues from
different perspectives, and to present their ideas effectively in writing.
PROGRAMS
The Department of Philosophy has two majors. The first is a traditional, general,
course of study which includes the historical, normative (e.g., ethics and aesthetics) and
methodological (e.g., logic) professional areas. The second, in addition to traditional course
work, focuses on topics and issues pertinent to graduate study, particularly those related to
the legal profession, such as the philosophy of law, ethics, social and political philosophy.
ACTMTIES
The Philosophy Department sponsors a student Philosophy Club which gives students
informal social opportunities for discussions, debates, and lectures. The Philosophy faculty
also present or host topical lectures and forums.
292
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
CAREERS
Philosophy majors can go on to a variety of careers: law, ministry, teaching, civil
service, management, to name a few. Indeed, a philosophy major is well suited for any
career that valu~ critical reasoning, logical problem solving, and an ability to look at issu~
from many perspectiv~. Increasingly, for example, the business world is looking for
liberally educated employees who have learned how to go on learning. Philosophy majors
should work closely with their advisor to choose major and non-major cou~ that will help
them achieve their individual career goals. The Philosophy program at California University
is d~igned to be flexible so that it can be tailored to the diverse needs and inte~ts of
philosophy majors.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHILOSOPHY
Curricuhma:
(A) Geaera1 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Science,; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) l'lliloaoplly COKeatration: Logic and Language (PHI 115); History of Ancient Philosophy (PHI 201);
Sixteenth to Eighteenth Century Philosophy (PHI 206) .
Restricted ElectiTes: twenty-one credits: two courac1 in each of the following areas of philosophy: Historical,
Normative, and Methodological. One additional courac from one of the above mentioned areas .
Related Electins: thirty-eight credits.
(C) l'llilosopby/Pre-Law COKeatration: Logic and Languaae (PHI 115); History of Ancient Philosophy (PHI
201); 16th-18th Century Philosophy (PHI 206); Social and Political Philosophy (PHI 225); Ethical Theory (PHI
320); Philosophy of Law (PHI 370); four additional advanced Philosophy couracs.
Related Electins: 12 credits of advanced Philosophy couracs. Electives: 14 credits
PHILOSOPHY COURSES (Pill)
Introductory cou~ are indicated by a plus ( +).
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
+PHI 100. PERSPECTIVES IN PHILOSOPHY. Analysi■ of such major philosophical issues as the nature of
knowledge, reality, religion and moral,. (3 en.) F S
+PHI 115. LOGIC AND LANGUAGE. An introduction to basic principles and techniques for distinguishing
correct from incorrect reasoning. (3 en.) F S
+ PHI 200. WORLD RELIGIONS. The study of the
■even
world religions, including their origins and doctrines.
(3 en.)
+ PHI 20 I. HISTORY OF ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY. Analysis of the texts of the pre-Socratic philosophen, Plato,
Aristotle, the Stoic,, Epicureans, and the Skeptic,. (3 en.) F
+ PHI 206. SIXTEENTH TO EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHY. Introduction to such influential thinken
Francia Bacon, Dcacartcs, Hobbea, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant. (3 era.) S
11
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
293
PHI 211. FORMAL LOGIC I. Introduction to the ■yntax and
language,, and al10 to prooftheorie1 for ■uch languages. (3 en.)
■emantics
of truth-functional and first-order
+ PHI 220. IITHICS. An examination of ■elected ethical 1y11tem1 and their philo■ophical foundation■.
emph11i1 on understanding 111ch b11ic moral concepta I I good, right and duty. (3 en.)
Lay■ ■pecial
+ PHI 225. SOCIAL AND POLmCAL PHILOSOPHY. An examination of ■elected ■ocial or political 1y11tem1
and their philo■ophical foundation■. Lay■ ■pecial emph11i1 on 111ch baaic concepta I I natural righta, equality,
justice, individual freedom and political authority. (3 en.)
PHI 231. PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION. A con■ ideration of the nature of religion, ■peculatiom and argumenta
of the nature and existence of God, the po11ibility of religious knowledge, claim■ to religious experience and
revelation, the problem of evil, the belief in immortality and the meaningfulneaa of religious language . (3 era.)
+ PHI 247. SCIBNCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY. Examines the philo■ophical i1111e1 that stem from the
impact that evolving science and technology have on people's beliefs, values, and behavior. (3 era.) F S
+PHI 266. PHILOSOPHY OF PLAY. Seeb to clarify human play and/or lei111re activitie1. Special attention i ■
given to the problem of con■tructive and destructive form■ of play and their relationship to human freedom and
anxiety. (3 en.)
+PHI 270. PHILOSOPHY OF MARXISM. An examination of the basic texta of Marx and Engels and the
development of Marxist philo10phy. Attempta a critical evaluation in light of contemporary political
philo■ophy. (3 en.)
111b ■equent
PHI 305. MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY. Begin■ with Neo-Platonism and proceeds with 111ch thinkers as Augustine,
Erigena, Amelm, Thomas Aquina1, Roger Bacon, Dun■ Scotu1 and William of Ockham. (3 en.)
PHI 310. NINETEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHY. A 111rvey of the development of German idealism after Kant
and the voluntaristic reaction■ to it. A110 considen British Empirici■m and French Positivism. (3 era.)
PHI 312. FORMAL LOGIC II. A continuation of Formal Logic I, with emphasis on the meta-theory of
truth-functional and first-order languages. It al10 considers ■elected topics in the philo■ophy of logic and the
philo■ophy of mathematics. Prerequisite: PHI 211. (3 era.)
PHI 320. IITHICAL THEORY. An examination of the poaaibility and nature of ethical knowledge and the meaning
of moral diacour■e. Special consideration is given to contemporary discussions. (3 era.)
PHI 325 . PHILOSOPHY OF SCIBNCE. A study of the methods, concepts and presuppositions of scientific inquiry.
An attempt is made to understand the historical development of science in the context of various theorie■ of
knowledge and reality. (3 era.)
PHI 335. AESTHETIC THEORY. An examination of the nature and basis of criticism in the fine arts and
literature - the nature and function of art, aesthetic standard ■, the concept of beauty, artistic creativity and the
meaning and truth in literature and the art■ . (3 era.)
PHI 370. THE PHILOSOPHY OF LAW. A survey of the debate about the concept of law in the history of
philo10phy and an examination of the recent revival of the debate in greater detail. Specific topic ■ include the
nature of legal rea ■oning, the legal enforcement of morality, the problem of responsibility, and the concept of
justice.
PHI 405 . EPISTEMOLOGY. An examination of
contemporary discuaaion■. (3 en.)
■elected
theories of knowledge with special emph11i1 on
294
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
PHI 410. METAPHYSICS M. An inquiry into the nature of reality and the meaning of existence. (3 en.)
PHI 415. PHILOSOPHY OF MIND. An examination of important atAges in the philosophical development of the
notion of mind. Diacusaea such contemporary problema aa the relation of mind and body and the nature of
conaciouaneu, and analyze• 111ch notiona a ■ will, emotion, action and memory. (3 en.)
PHI 420. PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE. An exploration of the relationa between the variou1 dimenaiona of
traditional philosophical problema. Examine• theories of meaning, kinda of meaning, and uaea of language•. (3
en.)
PHI 426. PHENOMENOLOGY AND EXISTENTIALISM. A study of the historical background and development
of twentieth century European philosophy, with particular emphasis on 111ch major philosophen aa Hu1aerl,
Heidegger, Sartre and Merleau-Ponty. (3 en.)
PHI 431. ANALYTICAL PHILOSOPHY. An exploration of selected philosophical issues (e.g ., knowledge, truth
and meaning), utilizing recent work in conceptual and methodological analysia. Though the coune ia usually
problem-oriented, a aood deal of the history of recent Anglo-American philosophy is covered. Recommended
prerequisites: PHI 206 and PHI 211 . (3 en.)
PHI 459. TUI'ORIAL IN PHILOSOPHY. (Variable credita)
PHI 470. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN PHILOSOPHY. A discussion of aome special problem or i11Ue in philoaophy .
(3 en.)
PHI 490. SEMINAR IN PHILOSOPHY. A diacuuion of either one prominent philosopher or a movement in
philosophy. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
295
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
CHEMISTRY (CHE)
PHYSICS (PHY)
PRE-ENGINEERING
PHYSICAL SCIENCE (PBS)
NATURAL SCIENCE
GENERAL SCIENCE TEACHER CERTIDCATION
Associate Professor Clyde W. Clendaniel, chair. Professors Theodore L. Dominick, Gabriel
C. Fusco, David L. Johnson, Anthony Lazzaro, David W. Pajerski; Associate Professors
Gregg Gould, Michael Hackett, Michael Walt Robin, Robert L. Zoppetti; Instructor Elaine
S. Costello
The Physical Science Department is a unique department in that it houses both the
Chemistry and Physics programs at the University. Both of these programs are located in
the New Science building which was renovated in 1984. Along with the building renovation
the department acquired state-of-the art chemical instrumentation, and more recently has
acquired a number of computers for use in both the physics and chemistry programs.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY
This program focuses upon studies of the nature and structure of matter and provides
a strong foundation in the fundamentals of chemistry, physics and mathematics. Upon
successful completion of this program, the graduate is qualified to assume a position as a
chemist in either the private or public sector. Program graduates should also be well
prepared to undertake graduate studies leading to the M.A., M.S., or Ph.D. in Chemistry.
Through consultation with an advisor, students obtain information that will guide them
toward a proper selection of electives in General Education. Such a judicious selection of
electives based upon the student's objectives may help to promote additional career
opportunities upon graduation and also satisfy the admissions standards of various
professional and graduate schools. Some graduates have thus chosen to continue their
education or to pursue careers in medicine, dentistry, pharmacy, management, college and
university teaching, and research.
Career opportunities include positions as an analytical chemist, a quality control
specialist, an industrial management trainee, a technical writer, a chemical purchasing agent
and a sales person with the chemistry industry. The program also provides preprofessional
training in medicine, dentistry, and law, as well as preparation for graduate school.
296
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
Curriculum:
(A) General Education:
Compo■ition 1-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanitie1; 12 credita of Natural
Sciences; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives.
(B) Area of Coacentratioa: General Chemilltry 1-D-m (CHE 101, 102 and 203); Analytical Chemilltry I
(CHE 261); Organic Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 331 and 332); Physical Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 451 and 452); 4 credita of
Chemilltry elective■; Calculu11-D (MAT 281 and 282); College Physics 1-D (PHY 101 and 202); 18 Olher credits
of related electives.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHYSICS
The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree in Physics offers the student a
variety of choices which may be tailored to one's needs. From the Physics curriculum the
student may choose between a diversity of courses in classical and contemporary physics,
including such courses in applied physics as Plasma Physics, Quantum Mechanics, Special
and General Relativity, and Astrophysics. Advanced laboratories include facilities for
studies in photometry, holography, X-ray diffraction, and digital electronics.
The flexibility of the program allows the graduate to prepare for many occupations,
including admission to an advanced degree program in Physics or Engineering, and technical
or research positions with industry or government. The programs also serve as excellent
training for entrance to professional schools.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 9 credita in Social Science;
3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); IS credits of free elective ■ including Composition 1-D (ENG IOI, 102).
(B) Area of Coacentratioa: College Physic ■ 1-D-m (PHY 101, 202, and 203); Intermediate Mechanics (PHY
221); Intermediate Electricity and Magneti■m (PHY 301); Modem Phy1ic1 I (PHY 331); Calculu■ 1-D-m (MAT
281, 282, and 381); Differential Equations (MAT 406); General Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 101 and 102); 6 credita of
Phy■ic, Electives; 19 credits of Advanced Related Elective,.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN CHEMISTRY FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: IS credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-D (ENG 101-102); 11 credita in
Natural Sciences, including Principles ofBiolou (BIO 115), Organic Chemilltry (CHE 322), and an approved Earth
Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM
IOI); General Psychology (PSY 100); 6 credits of free electives, including a science elective.
(B) ProfEllSional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teats
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Learners (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467) or Modem Methods (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461).
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
297
(C) Professional Speciali.r.ation: General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101, 102); Geochemiatry (CHE 255);
Analytical Chemistry I (CHE 261); Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331); Organic Chemistry Il (CHE 332);
Biochemistry (CHE 441) ; Physical Chemiatry I (CHE 451); Individual Work I (CHE 368); Calculu ■ I (MAT 281);
Calculu1 Il (MAT 282); Principles of Biology (BIO 115); College Phy■ic ■ I (PHY 101).
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN PHYSICS FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 credits in Humanities, including Compo1ition I - Il (ENG 101, 102); 11 credits
in Natural Sciences, including Principles of Biology (BIO 115), General Chemistry (CHE 102), and an Earth
Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM
101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 1 credit of free elective,.
(B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School, (EDS 465);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Leamen (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary School■ (EDS 467) or Modem Method■ (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461) .
(C) Professional Speciali.r.ation: College Physics 1-Il-m (PHY 101, 202 and 203); Intermediate Mechanics
(PHY 221); Intermediate Electricity and Magnetism (PHY 301); Modem Physics (PHY 331); Mathematical
Methods of Physics I (PHY 341); Physics Seminar (PHY 495); Calculus 1-Il-m (MAT 281, 282 and 381); General
Chemistry I (CHE 101).
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
COOPERATIVE ENGINEERING PROGRAM
California University of Pennsylvania participates in cooperative liberal arts engineering
programs with both the Pennsylvania State University and the University of Pittsburgh. The
student undertakes a three-year curriculum at California University of Pennsylvania
concentrating on studies in liberal arts and pre-engineering courses in natural sciences.
Upon successful completion of that curriculum and the recommendation of faculty, the
student spends two years at the Pennsylvania State .University or the University of
Pittsburgh, at which time the student will complete the engineering course requirements as
specified by the institution.
Some advantages of such cooperative programs include the following:
1. For students who have yet to choose between engineering or another discipline as a
field endeavor, the programs provide initial studies in both the arts and sciences at California
University of Pennsylvania, during which time they may ascertain whether their abilities and
interests lie in the field of engineering or another discipline.
298
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
2. The program permits qualified students to receive both a liberal and technical
education at relatively low cost.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 9 credita in Humanities including Perspective, in Philosophy (PHI 100); 6 credita
in Natural Sciences; 12 credita in Social Sciences, including Elementa of Economic, (ECO 100); Composition 1-Il
(ENG 101 and 102); Oral Communication (COM 101).
(B) Area or Concentration: Technical Drawing I (IND 110); Engineering Seminar; General Chemistry 1-Il
(CHE 101 and 102); College Physics 1-Il-m (PHY 101, 202 and 203); Calculus 1-Il-ill-IV (MAT 281, 282, 381
and 382); Linear Algebra I (MAT 341); Computer Science I (CSC 121); Differential Equationa (MAT 406); 16
credita of Engineering Discipline Courses.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN NATURAL SCIENCE
This extremely flexible program provides the student with an opportunity to structure
a course of study that encompasses the broad areas of science and mathematics. Students
enrolling in this program are expected to work carefully and regulai:ly with their academic
advisor to develop a program that meets their individual needs. Course distribution sheets
outlining the curricular structure of the program are available in both the Physical Science
Department office and the office of the College of Science and Technology.
GENERAL SCIENCE CERTIFICATION
The College of Education and Human Services offers a program for a student who has
already received certification but seeks also to he qualified as a teacher of General Science
in secondary schools. In order to fulfill the requirements of this program the student must
complete twenty-seven semester hours. The courses required are: General Zoology (BIO
120); General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemistry 1-11 (CHE 101 and 102); General
Physics 1-11 (PHY 121 and 122); Geology (EAS 150); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS
163). Further information may he obtained at the Office of Education and Human Services
in the Keystone Education Building.
CHEMISI'RY COURSES (CHE)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+CHE 100. INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY. A preparatory course emphasizing the mathematical and
reaaoning 11cill1 needed to be aucceaaful in General Chemistry. There are no prerequisites, and the course aati1fie1
requirementa in the Natural Science area for non-science majors. Thia course is not an elective for Chemillry
majors. Three clan hours each week. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
299
+CHE 101. GENERAL CHEMISTRY I. An introductory COUl'IIC for majon and non-majon. Topic, covered
include atomic structure, bonding, stoichiometry, chemical reactions (including redox reactions) , solutions, and the
liquid state. Three claaa houra and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.)
+CHE 102. GENERAL CHEMISTRY Il. A continuation of General Chemistry I. The gaaeou ■ state, solutions,
thermodynamics, kinetics, acids and bases, gaseoua and ionic equilibria. Prerequisite: CHE 101. Three claaa and
three laboratory houn each week. (4 era.)
CHE 150. CHEMISTRY FOR THE HEALTH PROFESSIONS . The basic principles of general chemistry, orianic
chemistry, and biochemistry needed for the health sciences (specifically nursing chemistry). Three lecture hours
and three laboratory houra each week. (4 era.) F
CHE 203. GENERAL CHEMISTRY m. A continuation of General Chemistry Il. Descriptive chemistry of metala
and nonmetal,, electrochcmistry, nuclear chemistry, solid state molecular orbitals, coordination chemistry .
Laboratory :' Equilibrium and qualitative chemistry of the elements. Three class and three laboratory hours each
week. Prerequisite: CHE 102. (4 en.) S
CHE 255 . GEOCHEMISTRY. Basic chemical principles employed in the solution of some geologic problems.
Geologic dating, sedimentary geochemistry, chemical weathering, colloids and structural aspects of clay minerals
and soila. Three claaa houn each week. (3 en.) F
CHE 261. ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY I. An introduction to quantitative analytical techniques and procedure
including volumetric, gravimetric, and spectroscopic methods. Prerequisites: CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture
houra and three laboratory hours each week. (4 en.) F
CHE 262. INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS I. An introduction to various instrumental and separation techniques
including 111ch topics II chromatography, clcctrochcmistry, and atomic absorption spectroscopy . Prerequisite: CHE
261. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours each week. (4 en.) S
CHE 331 . ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. An introduction to the basic principles which govern the reactions of carbon
compound,. Particular emphasis is placed on the structure and atereochemistry of organic molecules, acid-base
theory, reaction mechanisms, and an introduction to the reactions and synthesis of alkanes, alkenes, alkynes,
alicyclica, alkyl halides and aromatic compounds. Three hours lecture and three hours laboratory . Prerequisites:
CHE 101 and 102. (4 en.) F
CHE 332. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Il. A continuation of the study of organic compounds. The student is
introduced to the important functional groups present in such families as alcohols, ethers, carboxylic acids, caters,
amides, aldehyde,, kctonca, amines, phenols, aryl halides, and reactions, and synthetic interconversion of these
compound,. Three houra lecture and three houn laboratory. Prerequisites: CHE 331 . (4 en.) S
CHE 340. ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPIC INTERPRJITATION. Introductory theory and interpretation of infrared
spectroscopy, ultraviolet spectroscopy, nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, and maas spectrometry.
Prerequisites: CHE 101 and CHE 331. Three claas hours each week. (3 en.) S
CHE 345 . ~EDICINAL CHEMISTRY . A comprehensive survey of the major classes of organic pharmaceutical
agents, with particular cmpha ■is on the structurea, synthesis and pharmacological properties, aa well a ■ the
structure-activity relationships of the important classes of drugs used in medicine. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and
CHE 332. Three claaa hours each week. (3 en.) S
CHE 350. COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CHEMISTRY. This coul'IIC engages the student in activitiea which
focus on computer solution of chemical problcma. Both software coding and usage, as well aa interfacing of
microcomputera to chemical instruments, are covered. Prerequisites: CHE 101; CHE 102 and BASIC
Programmiq Language. Three claaa hours each week. (3 en.) S
300
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
CHE 368 . INDIVIDUAL WORK I. An opportunity for atudenta apecializing in chemistry to organiu, inveltiaate,
and report on a apecific problem of their own selection. (1 er.)
CHE 410. CHEMISTRY INTERNSHIP. The atudent i■ provided an opportunity to work: in an indu■trial or nonprofit research laboratory . This practical training is intended to ■upplement the academic pro,ram. Prerequi■ite:
Junior or Senior ■tanding and permission of the department. (Variable: 1-12 en.)
CHE 411. BIOCHEMISTRY I. A comprehensive ■urvey of the properties, reactions, and atructure of amino acids,
proteins, enzyme ■, carbohydrates, fats and lipids, and nucleic acid■. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332. Three
clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F
CHE 412. BIOCHEMISTRY ll. A comprehensive ■urvey of metabolic proceue■, including carbohydrate
metaboli■m, the Kreb ■ cycle, photo■ynthe ■i ■, fatty acid and protein metaboli■m, aa well aa protein bio■ynthe■i■,
fatty acid bio■ynthe■i■ and DNA replication. Prerequi■ite: CHE 411. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) S
CHE 421. ADV ANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. Modem treatment of principles of inorganic chemistry,
empha■izing chemical bonding and stereochemistry, with emphaaia on periodic properties, acida and baaea, and nonaqueous solvents. Coordination compounds; nomenclature stereochemistry, and kinetics of coordination coq,ounda
of the abort and long transition metals. Three clau houn each weelt. Prerequisite: CHE 451. (3 en.) F
CHE 422. ADV ANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY ll. A atudy of the chemistry of metal coordination
compounds. The hiatorical development of coordination theory i■ presented 11 well I I the modem concepta of
valence bond, cry■tal field and molecular orbital theories I I they apply to coordination compound■ • Prerequisite:
CHE 425 . ORGANIC PREPARATIONS. An advanced coune in synthetic organic chemiatry with emphaaia on the
moat recently discovered method■ of synthe■ia of organic compound■. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332.
Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F
CHE 426 . QUALU ATIVE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. A laboratory coune in which the identifications of organic
compound, are determined by experimental analyaia. A basic aim i■ to develop in the atudent a more active
acquaintance with the concepts and facts introduced in elementary organic chemistry. Thia implies recoune to
chemical reactions rather than reliance on inatrumental analysis. Nevertheleu, the use of infrared and nuclear
ma,netic resonance inatrumentation will also form an integral part of the coune. Prerequiaites: CHE 331 and 332.
(3 era.) S
CHE 433. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. A detailed atudy of the mechanism■ of the main typea of
organic chemical reactions, and the methods - both kinetic and non-kinetic - used to atudy reaction mechaniama.
Prerequisite■: CHE 331 , CHE 332, CHE 451 and CHE 452. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 era.) F
CHE 434. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY ll. A continuation of the material presented in Advanced
Organic Chemiatry I (CHE 433) with particular emphasis on photochemistry, pericyclic and aromatic
rearrangementa, and the chemistry of radicals and carbenes. Prerequisites: CHE 433. Three clau houn each weelt.
(3 en.) S
CHE 445 . MATHEMATICS FOR CHEMISTS. Mathematical technique■ including differential and inte,ral
calculua, ordinary and partial differential equations, ,raphical method■, approximation methods, complex numben,
Fourier aerie, expansions, determinants coordinate aystema, vector analy1i1, vector and matrix alaebra with
emphasis on application to chemical systema. Prerequisite■: Differential and Inte,ral Calculua. Three clau houn
each weelt. (3 en.) F S
CHE 4S 1. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I. Properties of gaaea, kinetic-molecular theory, molecularenergiea, clauical
and ■tatiltical development of thennodynamics, with applications to thermochemistry and chemical equilibria.
Prerequiaitea: CHE 261 and mathematics throuah Integral Calculua. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houra
each weelt. (4 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
301
CHE 452. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY Il. Kinetic ■ of chemical reaction,, properties of liquids, phase equilibria,
aolutiona, thermodynamics, properties of elcctrolytc1 in solution; and elcctrochemistry. Three lecture houn and
three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: CHE 451. (4 en.) S
CHE 495. CHEMISTRY SEMINAR. Student■ may choose a particular topic in chemistry and, under the
supervision of a faculty member, prepare and present a seminar report on it. The topics arc to be on material not
covered in the undergraduate councs, or may be extcnaiona of ■ome particular aspect of chemistry included in less
detail in an undergraduate counc. (I er.) F S
PHYSICS COURSES (PHY)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ PHY I 01 . COLLEGE PHYSICS I. Introductory Phy1ics. Vecton, mechanics, energy, momentum, conservation
principles and oacillatory motion. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Corequisite: MAT 281
(4 en.) S
PHY 121. GENERAL PHYSICS I. An introductory non-calculus counc dealing with mechanic, and heat. A
functional knowledge of algebra and elementary trigonometry is a1111med. Three clas■ houn and three laboratory
houn each week. (4 en.)
PHY 122. GENERAL PHYSICS Il. An introductory non-calculu ■ counc addreBSing the areas of ■ound, light and
electricity and magnetism. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: PHY 121. (4
en.)
+PHY 202. COLLEGE PHYSICS Il. A continuation of College Physics 101. Heat and thermodynamics,
and acoustics, electricity, magnetism and AC circuits. Three class houn and three laboratory
houn each week. Prerequisite: PHY 101 Corequisite: MAT 282. (4 en.) F
hydrostatic■, wave■
PHY 203 . COLLEGE PHYSICS m. A continuation of College Physics 202. Maxwell'• equation and
electromagnetic waves, light, atomic and nuclear physics, and special relativity. Some time is al■o spent reviewing
material from College Physic ■ 101 and 202 . Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prcrequi1ite:
PHY 202. Corequisite: MAT 381. (4 en.) S
PHY 221. INTERMEDIATE MECHANICS. Vector calculus, Newtonian kinematics, and dynamic, of many
particle 1y1tcma with emph11i1 on integral relation,, motion in a central potential, acattcring theory, 1y1tcma with
conatraints, variational principles in mechanics, ■mall oscillationa, wave equation, and special relativity. Three
class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prcrequi1ite: PHY 202. Corequisite : MAT 381. (4 en.) S
PHY 235. GEOPHYSICS . Primary empha■ ia i■ on geophysical prospecting for oil. Particularly focuse1 on the
following prospecting methods: seismic refraction and reflection, gravitational, magnetic, and electrical. Three
class houn each week. (3 en.) F S
PHY 30 I . INTERMEDIATE ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM. Electric and magnetic field■ and energy, the
effects of matter on them, circuits, Maxwell'• equations, electromagnetic waves. Vector calculu■ and differential
equation, uacd. Prerequisites: PHY 203 and MAT 381. Recommended: PHY 221, MAT 382 and MAT 341.
Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.) F
PHY 331. MODERN PHYSICS I. Relativistic kinematics and dynamic■, particle and wave aspects of radiation and
particles, the atructure of the hydrogen atom, and the many-electron atom■ . Quantum mechanic, introduced for
1be tint time here . Prerequisites: PHY 203 and MAT 381 . Three class houn each week. (3 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
302
PHY 341. MATHEMATICAL METHODS OF PHYSICS I. Vector calculus, Fourier series and integrals, ordinary
differential equations, partial differential equation, general series representations of functions and special functions .
Prerequi1ite1: PHY 203 and MAT 381. Three clau houra each week:. (3 en.) S
PHY 451 . ADV ANCED LABORATORY I. Experiment& selected from topics discul&ed in Modem Physic ■ I. The
lecture time ia uaed to discu11 error analyaia, curve fitting, and points of interest to the laboratory reports.
Prerequi■ite : 12 Phy1ic1 credits. One clau hour each week: and three laboratory houn each week:. (1 er.) F S
PHY 495 . PHYSICS SEMINAR. An introduction to literature, history, teaching, and research methods in the
Junior standing and at least 19 houra of physic, (including College Phy1ic1 1-11)
(1 er.) F S
phy■ical science■• Prerequisite■:
PHYSICAL SCIENCE COURSES (PHS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ PHS 117. BASIC PHYSICAL SCIENCE. An elementary, non-laboratory approach to the physical world.
Topics may be selected jointly by the students and the instructor. Three class hours each week:. (3 crs.)
PHS 125. OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY. This course is designed to present an opportunity to acquire a
general understanding of the Night-Time sky as it relates to Astronomy as well as experiences and opportunities
for observation. Two class hours each week:. (2 crs.)
PHS 135. CHEMISTRY OF MATERIALS. An introduction to the science of chemistry, in which the principles
are lhown in a nonmathematical manner. Thia course attempts to lhow how chemistry is an integral part of our
lives and how it has both solved and created many problems in a modem technological society . Three claaa hours
each week:. (3 en.) S
PHS 145 . ASTRONOMY. A presentation of methods of investigation and results of astronomical discoveries.
Survey of facts and important astronomical theories. Solar system, what is a star, multiple star systems, variable
atan and stellar evolution will be discuaaed. Instruments of the astronomer - telescopes, spectroscopes, etc. will be uaed . Three cla11 hours each week:. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
303
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOWGY
GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY
INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Associate Professor Stephen Levendos, chair. Professors Gail Ditkoff, Ira London, Richard
Scott, M. Eugene Wilson; Associate Professors Kirk John, Dennis C. Sweeney, Sylvia
Williams; Assistant Professor Elizabeth Mason; Instructor Sammy Lonich.
PURPOSE
Psychology is one of the social science disciplines engaged in the systematic study of
human behavior. Psychology focuses on the study and explanation of patterns of individual
behavior. The latter rests not only on mental processes but on social and physiological ones.
The field of psychology seeks to understand individual behavior as an end in itself as well
as use that information to assist persons to live more productive and fulfilling lives.
PROGRAMS
The department offers two majors: General Psychology and Industrial/ Organizational
Psychology. Industrial/Organizational Psychology is the research and applied specialty
which is concerned with the impact of organizational dynamics upon individual decisionmaking. It is the major for students interested in human resource management careers.
Within the General Psychology major there are options for students interested in counseling
and mental health care careers, educational, child, or developmental psychology. The
department makes available to its majors a publication entitled "The Survival Manual,"
which states policies, procedures, course requirements, and other information of interest to
majors.
AWARDS
The David W. Hambacher Memorial Fund Scholarship Award is given annually.
Applicants must be Psychology majors with a 3.5 &rade point average. Information about
the award is available in the departmental office.
An Outstanding Senior Award is given annually at the spring Psychology Club banquet.
HONOR AND PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES
Qualified majors can join Psi Chi (i'X), the national honor society. The department
also sponsors a Psychology Club which hosts guest speakers, organizes trips to conferences
of professional interest, and provides career and employment information.
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
304
CAREERS
With a bachelor's degree in Psychology, a graduate can secure a variety of entry-level
positions at mental health centers and clinics. A Bachelor of Psychology in the
lndustrial/Organiz.ational area can find employment in personnel resource management.
Students will be prepared to do personnel recruitment, training, testing, and supervision.
Most career opportunities in psychology, however, require an advanced degree.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) Geaen1 Educatioo: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credita of Natural
Science■;
12 credita of Social Science; 18 credita of free electives.
(B)AreaofConceatratioa:
Required: General P1ychology (PSY 100); P■ycholojical Statistic ■ (PSY 225); P■ychology of Leaming (PSY 235);
Hilltory and Sy■tema of P■ychology (PSY 345); Experimental P1ychology (PSY 360).
Oae of the following: Child P■ychology (PSY 205) or Adoleacent P■ychology (PSY 206) or Developmental
Psycholou (PSY 207).
Two of the followina: Educational Paycholou (PSY 208) or lnduatrial Psychology (PSY 209) or Social
P■ycholou (PSY 211) or Psycholojical Testing (PSY 340).
One of the following: P■ychology of Penonality (PSY 305) or Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400).
Nine to 24 credita of additional Psychology courae ■.
Seventeen to 35 credita in related elective,, including courae, in at lea■t three of the followina area■ :
Anthropology, Biology, Chemi■try, Education, Gerontology, Political Science, Philosophy, Physic ■,
Social Work, Sociology, and Special Education.
BACHELOR OF ARTS
IN INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Curricalum:
(A) Geaenl Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science■;
12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: General Psychology (PSY 100); Advanced Industrial Psycholou (PSY 428);
Psychology of Gender Roles (PSY 311); Social Psychology (PSY 211); Psychological Statistics (PSY 225);
lndu■trial Psychology (PSY 209); Psychology of Leaming (PSY 235); Psychology of Testing (PSY 340); Hilltory
and Sy■tema (PSY 345); Interviewing Skills (PSY 370); Principle■ of Management (MOT 201); Organizational
Behavior (MOT 301); Human Reaource Management (MOT 352); Compensation Management (MOT 353); Labor
Relations (MOT 362). 8 credits of psychology electives. 15 credita of Re■tricted Elective■ from Communication
Studie1, Buaineu, Accounting, E.conomics, lndu ■trial Technology Education, Computer Auiated Workshop ■, and
Englilh.
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
305
PSYCHOLOGY COURSES (PSY)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ PSY 100. GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY. A general introduction to the scientific study of the principle■ of behavior
with emphaai■ on auch topic■ 11 method■ of re ■earch, development of the individual, learning, motivation,
emotiona, cOjllitive proceue1, senaation, perception, telling, peraonality, behavior diaorders, and individual
difference■. Experimental re ■earch as well as practical application is stres■ed . (3 era.) F S
+PSY 205. CHil.D PSYCHOLOGY. Age-related change■ in ■ocial, cognitive, emotional, and phyaical
Development from prenatal ■tage■ through later childhood i1 included . Socialization of the child
i■ examined. Prerequi■ite : PSY 100. (3 era.) F S
characteri■tic■.
+ PSY 206. ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY. Factors that influence the growth and development of adolescent■ •
on the relationahip among physiological, psychological and ■ociological factors and theoretical system■
u■ed to deacribe, explain, predict, and work with adolescents. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
Emphaai■
+PSY 207. DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. The patterna of phyaical, mental,
development throu1hout the life ■pan . Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 era.) F S
■ocial
and emotional
+ PSY 208. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY. The learning proceu, with emphasis on learning in school settinga,
i1 examined. The application of current theories and research findings to school settings is considered. The
application of current theorie1 and re■earch finding, to cl11sroom ■ituations ia stressed. Thia course examine■
coJnitive development, intelligence, motivation, discipline, behavioral objective■, and mea■urement and evaluation.
Prerequi■ite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
PSY 209. INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. The application of paychological principle■ of behavior to people and
work conditiona. An examination of buaine■a and induatrial activities and the role of the psycholoJill plays in auch
activitie■• A ltrolli emphuis on the practical and everyday problem■ that confront people in the world of work.
Prerequi■ite : PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
PSY 211. SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY. The interaction between the individual and ■ocial groups within a cultural
context: the individual in a ■ocial role, ■ocial 1roup1, and ■ocial institutions. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
PSY 215 . PSYCHOLOGY OF EXCEPI'IONAL CHILDREN . The psychological problem■ of children who have
hearilli, apeech, mental and behavioral deficits, as well as culturally disadvantaged and gifted children are explored.
A major objective ia to gain a functional understanding of these problems and of modem intervention techniques.
The student i ■ given the opportunity to gain firsthand experience with exceptional children in an observation of a
apecial cla■a in the public schools. Prerequisites: PSY 100 and 205 for Psychology Majors; PSY 100 and 205 or
207 for non-P1ycholo1y Majors. (3 era.) F S
PSY 222. PSYCHOLOGY OF STRESS MANAGEMENT. Source of streu, effects of streu, mediation of streu
will be examined with the focua being on practical application. (3 era.)
and method, of copilli with
ltreaa
PSY 225. PSYCHOLOGICAL STATISTICS. This course provides the student with a working knowledge of
1tati■tical procedures and their application to p■ychological meaaurement and re■earch in the ■ocial and behavioral
acience■• A variety of 1tati■tical method■, includilli meaaure1 of central tendency, variability, and correlation
coefficient■, are presented. Hypothesia te■tilli and prediction are alao included. The student use, the computer
to analyze data and interpret■ the reault■ generated. The application of ltati ■tical procedure, to re■earch que■tiona
in the field of behavioral and ■ocial acience i■ emph11ized. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
306
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
PSY 235. PSYCHOLOGY OF LEARNING. The nature and conditiona of learning, the type, of learning and the
experimental procedures uaed in the atudy of learning problema. The variou1 interpretationa of the proceu are
examined and evaluated. Prerequi1ite: PSY 100 (3 en.) F
PSY 305. PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY. The euential facton that result in creating individual differences
of human behavior. Current theories uaed to explain the development and lltnlcture of penonality are preaented.
The characteriatic1 of the normal and the maladjulted penonality are identified, with apecial concern for
developmental patterna. Prerequi1ite: PSY 100 (3 en.) S
PSY 310. MENTAL HEALTH/PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT. Problema of penonality and mechani1m1
of adjuatment, including a atudy of the oriJin and re10lution of conflicts, and the role of emotion in the patterna
of behavior. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en) F
PSY 311. PSYCHOLOGY OF GENDER ROLES . How gender roles develop , the facton that sultain theae roles,
and how gender role■ influence the daily livea of men and women. Sex difference, are viewed from hillorical,
biological, psychological, aociological, and anthropologicalpenpective1. Prerequisite PSY 100 (3 en.) S
PSY 340. PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTING. The nature and function of measurement in p1ychology with
concentration on teat conlltnlction problema and procedure■ and an examination of 10me typical teats in the fields
of intelligence, penonality, aptitude■, abilities, and intereats. Prerequisites: PSY 100 and 225 . (3 en.) F S
PSY 345 . HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY. A detailed look at the evolution of paychological
thought. The early problema and method• of paychology are examined in 10me detail aa are the varioua achoola
of paychological thought. Emphasis ia directed toward the effect of the diacoveriea and thinking of the time• on
the courae of the development of psychology aa a acience. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 en.) S
PSY 350. PRINCIPLES OF BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION. A conaideration of the application of the principle■
of contemporary behaviorism to the problem of behavior modification in educational and clinical aettinga. Major
emphasis ia placed on the remediation of problema of academic, emotional, and aocial adjustment in the claaaroom
context. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100 (3 en.)
PSY 360. EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. Empha1iu1 the design of reaearch strategies for evaluating
hypotheaea about behavior and the quantitative analy1i1 of reaearch results. Theae principle• of reaearch are
preaented in the context of, and are applied to the content of experimental inquiry such as aenaation and perception,
conditioning and learning, memory, thinking and problem-10lving, aocial influence proceues, and paychological
telling. Prerequisite: PSY 225 (3 en.) F
PSY 365. METHODS OF RESEARCH. Handa-on laboratory experience• in the application of experimental
procedure• to lhe acientific wdy of behavior. ·Students apply a variety of melhods to reaearch problema in a
number of content areaa and are exposed to the reaearch literature in theae area ■ . A110 included i1 instruction in
the preparation of a formal reaearch report. Prerequisite: PSY 225 and 360 (3 en.) S
PSY 370. INTERVIEWING SKILLS . For aenior students who will soon be aeeking employment in an
organizational aetting, providing knowledge and practical experience in aeveral different and specific type• of
interview,, especially the aelection interview for employment, the career planning interview, exit interview and the
performance evaluation interview. Prerequi1ite: Junior or aenior 1tandi11J. (3 en.) S
PSY 375 . PSYCHOPATHOLOGICAL DISORDERS OF CHILDHOOD. Thi■ courae explore• lhe varioua
p1ychopathological di10rden of childhood. The particular manife1tation in children will be diacuued for each
di10rder, with emphasis on the quantitative nature of clinical symptom characteriatica as illustrated by caae atudie1.
The differentiation between 1imilar diagnoae1 and ■ymptoma, H well a1 the relationahipa between each di10rder
and other emotional familial problema, will be diacuued. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100 and 205 .
PSY 400. ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY . A survey of behavioral pathology - including paychoaea, neuroaes,
character di10rden including drug addiction and p1ychophysiological di10rder - together with a general
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
307
conaiderationof etiology, treatment, and pro,no1i1. Prerequisite: PSY 100 and 12 credit■ in P1ychology. (3 en.)
FS
PSY 410. CLINICAL CHll.D PSYCHOLOGY. Thi■ coune ia a comprehenaive introduction to the field of Clinical
Child PaycholoJY. It will explore the major concept■, reaearch findinaa, and profeuional iuuea influencina the
practice of Clinical Child PaycholoJY. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100, 205 and 375. (3 en.)
PSY 411. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY I. Deai,ned to aid ltUdentl to think creatively about the kinda of information
and data to be obtained in ltlldying individual■. Seeb to point out some of the problerna and procedure, which
conatitute types of clinical procedure■ • Not de■i,ned to train the ltUdent to become a clinical p ■ychologiat, but
rather an introduction to the applied area■ of clinical p■ychology . Prerequi1ite1: PSY 305, 340, 400, and Senior
standing. (3 en.) F
PSY 412. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY II. The projective technique, u■ed to a■ae ■s individual personality. The
conatruction and method■ of interpretation of theae technique,. An introduction to some of the tools of the clinical
p ■ychologiat and counaelor. Prerequisite■: PSY 350, 340, 400, and Senior standing. (3 en.) S
PSY 428. ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. A survey of aeveral important i■sue■ not considered in
PSY 209, including organizational dynamic,, paychological evaluationa, employee right■ law■ , wage and aalary
p1ychologie1, and the undentanding of employee motivationa. Prerequisite: PSY 209 (3 en.) S
PSY 430. PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY. The relationahips between bodily procesaes and behavior. The
relationahip between p■ychological phenomena and the phy■iological functioning of the organism. Senaation and
perception, reflexive behavior, motivation, emotional behavior, and critical functioning. Some laboratory
experience i, included. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en.) F
PSY 452. CLINICAL PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY I. Special study in caae study methods, paychological
testing, and psychopathology . Prerequi1ite1: PSY 340, 400, 411 , and permission of the chairperson of the
department. (3 en.) F
PSY 453 . CLINICAL PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY II. A continuation of Clinical Practicum I, but with
,reater empha1i1 on psychotherapy, uae of clinical instrument■, dia,noatic caae1, and visit■ to hospital■ and clinics.
Prerequisites: PSY 452 and permiaaion of the chairperson of the department. (3 en.) S
PSY 455 . PSYCHOLOGY OF SOCIAL CONTROL. Analyaes of fictionalized descriptiona of attempt■ to control
human behavior from the viewpoint of contemporary behavioral science. Such analyaes reveal the degree to which
the procedure■ and outcome■ described in fictional account■ are conaistent with what is known or aasumed to be
true about behavior and it■ cauae1. Fictionalized account■ of such technique, as physical puni■hmcntl, threats,
indoctrination and brainwashing, drug■ , and hypno1i1 applied to both individuals and group ■ are conaidered. The
moral and ethical i■sue, involved in ■ocial control venue individual freedom are examined in the light of• rapidly
developing behavioral technology and an increaaing real-life incidence of miaapplicationa and abuaes. Prerequisite:
PSY 100. (3 en.) S
PSY 469. PSYCHOLOGY INTERNSHIPS. Student■ will be placed with profeaaional psychological agenciea off
campu1. They will integrate, under supervi1ion, what they have academically been studying - the dutie1 and
re■ponaibilitie1 aui,ned to them by practicing p ■ychologiat■ in the field . Eligibility requirement■ and procedures
for application are available at the departmental office. 01A credit 3-16)
308
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING (PSN)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING
The Public School Nursing Program provides an academic background and the field
experience required to function effectively as a nurse in a school setting from kindergarten
through grade twelve. The program is specifically designed to prepare students for a dual
role as school nurse and health educator.
Applicants to the program must have completed an approved nursing program and be
registered nurses. Upon completion of the program, the Bachelor of Science in Education
degree with a major in Public School Nursing will be awarded.
The Office of Placement and Career Services at California University of Pennsylvania
is active in assisting graduates seeking employment as public school nurses.
The State Department of Education mandates that school nurses be hired according to
a student ratio of 1: 1,500. Therefore, it is expected that the need for highly qualified school
nurses will continue.
Additionally, the demand for competent school nurses can be expected to increase
because of the expanding number of handicapped students mainstreamed into the regular
classroom. Increased emphasis on health education and health counseling should have a
significant effect on the demand.
The general objectives of the Public School Nursing Program are to enable the student
to:
Acquire the knowledge, attitudes, and skills essential for professional school nursing;
Apply theories and concepts pertaining to the role of a school nurse during a supervised
practicum;
Comprehend the nature of an educational setting and serve as an active participant in
curriculum design, faculty affairs, and professional activities;
Function as an integral part of the school health team;
Foster an appreciation of the existing community services for children and youth;
Develop competencies in group dynamics and public relations;
Appreciate the professional organizations of the school nurse that focus on continuing
education and maintaining high-quality standards of performance.
The Public School Nursing Program is designed for applicants who have completed an
approved nursing program and are registered nurses. California University of Pennsylvania
grants up to a total of 68 credits for completion of the R.N. from a hospital program.
Students receiving the R.N. from an associate degree program will have their credits
evaluated according to the credits taken at the college granting the degree. The University
will transfer no more than 90 credits per student from any two-year Community or Junior
College.
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING PROGRAM
309
Usually, at least sixty additional credits are required in order to earn a Bachelor of
Science degree in Education and certification as a Public School Nurse.
The applicant must possess current licensure as a professional registered nurse in
Pennsylvania.
The applicant must give evidence of one year's supervised experience as a graduate
nurse.
Thirty credits must be earned at California University of Pennsylvania in fulfillment of
the residency requirements.
Curriculum:
Public School Nuning (PSN 306); Public Health Nuning I & ll (PSN 301 & 302); Nutrition and Community
Health (PSN 305); Prevention and Control of Communicable Diaeaac (PSN 405); Foundation, of Education (EDF
100); Educational P■ychology (PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Guidance (EDS
420); one Sociology counc; Introduction to Exceptionality (ESP SOI); 9 credits in Humanitie1; 9 credit■ in Social
Science,; 8 credits of free elective,. A minimum of fifteen houn of practicum in the public school i1 required in
addition to the regular classroom work.
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING COURSES (PSN)
PSN 301. PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING I. A lltlldy of the American health care delivery ayatcm in terma of an
hiatorical, philosophical, and sociological pcnpcctive. Arcaa of emphasis include current trends in health care,
utilization of health acrvice■, resource,, government participation in health promotion, rcaearch, and iMOvationa
in the health field. (3 en.)
PSN 302. PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING ll. The need for health education as it relates to the taxonomy of
lifestyle; the concept of wellne11 i■ examined. Contemporary iaauea and trend■ arc analyzed in depth in terma of
promotion of penonal and community health, current legislation, and the role of the achoo! nunc as a health
educator. (3 en.)
PSN 305. NUTRITION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH. A review of the basic concept■ and principles in
nutrition; the aaac11ment of nutritional need, at different stages of growth and development. Focuaca upon cultural
difference, in food habit■, aclection of food, importance of diet in health and diaeaac, quackery, budgeting, special
nutrition problema of the achoo! age child, nutrition education, and role of the achoo! nunc . (3 en.)
PSN 306. PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING. A comprchenaive lltlldy of the _physical, aocial, and emotional
development of children with aaac11ment procedures for identification of deviation, from nonnal. Basic principles
and concept■ relating to the organization of the school health program, school health services, health inatruction,
and healthful school living. Practicum in a public achoo! setting provides opportunity for application of concept■
developed in theory . Prerequisite: Student■ must aubmit evidence of current CPR certification prior to entering this
practicum. (4 en.)
PSN 405. PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASE. A conceptual approach to the
lltlldy of communicable diaeaacs with recognition of significant historical events, as well as identification of the
social, psychological and economic facton involved. Explores current control meaaurcs, roles of administrative
agencies, methods of epidemiological investigation, and the role of the achoo! nunc. (3 en.)
310
R. N.ANESTHETISTPROGRAM
R. N. ANESTIIETIST PROGRAM
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION FOR C.R.N.A.
This program for Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetists is designed for persons who
have completed an approved anesthetist program and are currently licensed CRNA's. The
program provides the academic background and field experience necessary for the student
to develop skill in functioning more effectively in an instructional and administrative
capacity.
The CRNA Program is offered by the College of Education and Human Services. The
College of Education and Human Services meets all standards of accrediting agencies.
California University of Pennsylvania is accredited by the Middle States Association of
Colleges and Universities. The College of Education and Human Services has national
accreditation from the National Association of Colleges of Teacher Education.
Studies have indicated a strong demand for nurse anesthetists. Certainly, unlimited
opportunities are available to the Certified Nurse Anesthetist who has additional preparation
in the area of instruction.
The general objectives of the program are to enable the student to:
Develop the competencies required for effective media utili:zation practice;
Develop competencies in group dynamics and public relations;
Develop competencies relating to the administrative aspects of anesthesia as a result of
planned field experience;
Design a conceptual framework for curriculum planning;
Develop a theory of learning which lends support and evidence of applicability to an
effective instructional process;
Understand the principles underlying the construction of tests and the statistical
measures of evaluation.
California University of Pennsylvania will grant up to a total of 68 credits for
completion of the R.N. and an additional 26 credits for completion of the anesthetist
program.
All R. N. 's graduating from an Associate Degree Program must have their transcripts
evaluated to determine the number of credits to be granted. The University will transfer no
more than 75 credits per student from any two-year Community or Junior College.
To complete the requirements for a Bachelor of Science in Education, students must
complete 34 additional credits of approved undergraduate work. Thirty credits must be
earned at California University of Pennsylvania.
R.N.ANESTHETISTPROGRAM
311
Curriculum:
Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Learning Re10Urce1 and Instructional Technology (EDF 308);
Introduction to Guidance (EDS 420); The Secondary School Curriculum (EDS 456); Introduction to Instruction
(EDS 425); Educational Teata and Measurements (EDS 430); Administration and Field Experience (EDS 411); 12
credilll in Humanities and Social Sciences.
REGISTERED NURSE ANESTHETIST COURSES (RNA)
RNA 411 . ADMINISTRATION AND FIELD EXPERIENCE FOR NURSE ANESTHETIST. The principles and
practice of administration of nurse anaesthetiat and policies concerning planning, human relations, and personnel
as well aa the administration of business affairs, legal liability and organizational problems. In addition to the
regular classroom work, a 15-hour field experience affords studenlll opportunities for practical experiences in
administrative functions through observation and participation in the programs of nearby hospitals. (4 crs.)
312
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
ANTHROPOLOGY (ANT)
POLITICAL SCIENCE (POS)
-GENERAL
- INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: POLITICAL SCIENCE
-PRE-LAW
-PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
SOCIAL SCIENCE (SOS)
- SOCIAL SCIENCE AREA MAJOR
SOCIOLOGY (SOC)
Associate Professor James Wood, chair. Professors Rollin M. Barber, Ronald L. Michael,
William F. Schweiker; Associate Professors William D. Hepner; Assistant Professors Joseph
C. Heim, John P. Nass, Willie H. Pigg.
PURPOSE
Common to the degree programs offered by the Department of Social Science is the
study of people interacting with one another. Their common approach is scientific; that is,
they study patterns of human behavior by objective, measurable methodologies.
Anthropology is the most comprehensive since there is no aspect of human development
or behavior that it does not study, although it traditionally has focused on pre-industrial
societies. Anthropology includes such diverse subject areas as ethnology, medical and
psychological anthropology, archaeology, and human evolution.
Political Science is the most prescribed of the above disciplines. It limits its interests
to the political aspects of human behavior, both national and international, including the
study of power and public organizations. For this reason Pre-law and Public Administration
are two areas closely related to Political Science.
Sociology, which is closely aligned with anthropology, is less comprehensive. It
concentrates on the nature, structure and interactional processes in large and small groups,
institutions and societies, usually found in modem industrial societies. It can focus, for
example, on political institutions and behavior, but it usually does this in relation to other
institutions, such as the economic, educational, familial and religious ones.
The Social Science Area major is general and interdisciplinary in nature. It presents
an overview and the interrelationship of all the social science disciplines, not simply those
stated above. For more information about this program, please inquire at the departmental
office. Courses in this area contribute to a historical perspective within the social sciences.
. DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
313
PROGRAMS
Anthropology, Social Science and Sociology are majors without optional specializations.
Political Science is a major with three options: General Political Science, Public
Administration, and Pre-law. The Public Administration option is an interdisciplinary field
of study with courses offered through the programs in Business and Economics and Urban
Affairs, as well as Political Science. Under the International Studies Program, Political
Science advises the International Studies: Political Science option. This course of study
also is interdisciplinary in its coursework. Finally, the department, in conjunction with the
College of Education and Human Services, provides a teacher certification program for those
interested in teaching the social sciences in secondary schools.
Field experiences are available in archaeology and political science. An archaeology
field school runs during the summer school session. Students participate in the excavation
of an archaeological site whereby they apply what was learned in class to an actual dig.
An internship in Political Science is a form of field experience. Students are placed in
governmental agencies and the offices of public administrators and elected officials where
they can observe and practice what they have learned in the classroom.
HONOR SOCIETIES
Anthropology majors are eligible for membership in the Gamma Chapter of Lambda
Alpha (AA), the national honor society. Requirements are the completion of twelve credits
of Anthropology course work and a 3.0 grade point average or higher in the major, as well
as an overall 2. 7 GPA.
Students in the social sciences are eligible for membership in Pi Gamma Mu (IlrM),
the social science honor society. Students must have completed sixty-four university credits,
including a minimum of twenty credits in social science course work, and have a 3.0 or
higher grade point average.
AWARDS
The Joseph Lynn Marino Memorial Award is presented annually. For consideration an
applicant must have a minimum grade point average of 3.5, be enrolled in the College of
Liberal Arts and have successfully completed two courses in Anthropology. Persons
interested in applying can secure further information from the departmental office.
The Edward McNall Bums Scholarship Award is given annually to any individual
majoring in Anthropology, Sociology, Political Science, Economics, History, or Urban
Affairs. See the departmental office for further information.
CAREERS
Students with an undergraduate degree can secure work in entry level social service and
personnel resource areas. Career opportunities, however, increase with the attainment of
314
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
graduate course work and degrees. The social sciences as a whole prepare students to enter
careers in law, public administration, the ministry, personnel resource management,
education, social service professions and law enforcement.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 crcdita of Humanitiea; 12 crcdita of Natural
Science,; 12 crcdita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free elective,.
(B) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Anthropology (ANT I 00); History of Anthropology (ANT 420);
World Elhnology (ANT 255); Field School (ANT 100) or Prehistoric American Indiana (ANT 355); 21 credita of
elective, in Anthropology; Principles of Sociology; plua 32 credita of related elective,.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credita in Natural
Science■;
12 credita in Social Sciences; 18 crcdita of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration (68 credits): Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National
Government (POS 105); Seminar in American Politic, (POS 450). One course each in American Politics, Political
Theory, International Relationa/Comparative Politic,, and Public Administration/Public Policy. 15 credita of
Political Science elcctivea. At leall nine crcdita mull be at the 300 level or above. Related couraca (32 crcdita) :
Hiatory of the United State, to 1877 (HIS 101); Hiatory of the United State, aince 1877 (HIS 102); European Life
and Society to 1815 (HIS 121); European Life and Society 1ince 1815 (HIS 122); 20 crcdita in related couraca, 15
crcdita of which mull be at the 200 level or above.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION TRACK
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credits in Natural
Science,; 12 crcdita in Social Sciences; 18 crcdita of free elective,.
(B) Area of Concentration (68 crcdita): Political Science: Introduction to Political Science (POS 100);
American National Government (POS 105); Introduction to Public Adminiatration (POS 220); Introduction to Public
Policy (POS 300); Seminar in American Politics (POS 450). Manaaement: Introduction to Microeconomic, (ECO
201); Introduction to Macroeconomics (ECO 202); State and Local Finance (ECO 307); Financial Management of
Non-Profit Organizations (FIN 307); Principles of Management (MOT 201); Marketing for Non-Profit
Organizations (M1CT 341). Urban Studies: Survey of Urban Affairs (XUA 101). Ilectiv~: 18 credita from
approved lill. With the rccommendationofthe Political Science faculty members, studenta may earn up to 6 hours
credit through an internship program. Related Courses: Computer Science (specific course selected with advisor's
approval); Stati ■tics (MAT 215); Group Diacuaaion Management (COM 102); Oral Communication: Management
(COM 250); 2 credits of related electives selected with advisor's approval.
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
315
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education. Composition 1-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science■ ;
12 credit& of Social Sciences; 18 credit& of free elective■ •
(B) Area of Concentration: Principle, of Sociology (SOC 100); Re■carch Method■ (SOC 200); History of
Social Thought (SOC 375); 27 credita of major electives. Related Courses: Introduction to Anthropoloay (ANT
100); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National Government (POS 105); Statistic, (MAT
215); Elements of Economics (ECO 100); General Psychology (PSY 100); Social P■ychology (PSY 211); 3 credita
in Philo■ophy; 8 credit& of electives.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN SOCIAL STUDIES FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: 15 credita in Humanities, including Composition I - D (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits
in Natural Sciences; 9 credita in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication
(COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credita of free electives.
(B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465);
Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Learners (EDU 340); Teaching of Social Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 445) or Modem Methods (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461).
(C) Professional Specialization: Introduction to Anthropology (ANT 100) and one additional Anthropology
course; Introduction to Geography (GEO 100) md one additional Geography course; History of the United States
to 1877 (HIS 101); History of the United State■ 1ince 1877 (HIS 102); Elemcnta of Economics (ECO 100);
Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201) or Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Introduction to Political
Science (POS 100); American Government (POS 105); Educational Psychology (PSY 11 O); Adolescent Psychology
(PSY 206); Principles of Sociology (SOC 100) and one additional Sociology course.
(1) For concentralion in Anthropology: Origins of Man (ANT 285). 9 credita from the following : Culture
Block (choose 3 or 6 credita): Primitive Institutions (ANT 210); Enculturation (ANT 235); Peasant and Folk
Culture (ANT 240); Culture Change and Culture Shock (ANT 250); World Ethnology (ANT 255); Southwest
Ethnology (ANT 270); Indians of North American (ANT 280). Archaeology Block (choose 3 or 6 credits):
Archaeology Field School I (ANT 101 - maximum of 3 credita); Old World Prehistory (ANT 200); classical
Archaeology (ANT 260); Archaeology (ANT 260); Archaeology & Culture History (ANT 287); Prehistoric
American Indians (ANT 355).
(2) For concentralion in Economics: Intermediate Microeconomics (ECO 301); Intermediate Macroeconomics
(ECO 302); 6 credita from Economics course■ 200 level or above.
(3) For concentralion in Geography: Physical Geography (EAS 160); Human Geography (GEO 105);
Economic Geography (GEO 200); Cartography (EAS 171 or Map and Aerial Photography (EAS 272).
(4) For concentration in History : European Life and Society to 1815 (HIS 121); European Life and Society
since 1815 (HIS 122); Seminar in United State■ History (HlS 495); any History elective.
(5) For concentralion in Political Science: 6 credit& from the following : Municipal Government (POS 205);
Political Parties (POS 218); Introduction to Public Administration (POS 220); Constitutional Law (POS 250); Civil
Liberties (POS 215). also 6 credits from the following : Comparative Politics (POS 215); Development of Political
Thought (POS 225); International Relations (POS 236); Politics and Government in the Soviet Union (POS 280);
foreign Policy: A Comparative Approach (POS 320).
(6) For concentralion in Psychology: Child Psychology (PSY 205); Mental Hygiene (PSY 310); Social
Psychology (PSY 211); Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400) .
316
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
(1) For concentralion in Sociology: Contemporary Social Problems (SOC 205); Minority Group Relationa
(SOW 218); The Family (SOC 220); Url>an Sociology (SOC 235); Social Inatitutiona (SOC 240).
Students must also achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to acquire
Pennsylvania certification.
ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES (ANT)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ ANT 100. INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY. An introduction to biological anlhropoloJY (primatoloJY,
hominid evolution, variation in modem man); archaeoloJY (methods, evidence, of the evolution and diffusion of
culture); anthropological linguiatica; and cultural anthropology (methods of participant observation, comparative
data from non-Welllem 10eietiea, divenity and unity of culture). F, S
+ ANT 101. ARCHAEOLOGY FIELD SCHOOL. An introduction to archaeological procedure, by participation
in the excavation of a ailc. Students will be involved in all phaaca of an archaeological excavation, from initial
preparation of the site for excavation through the proceaaing of artifacts at the campu1 archaeological laboratory.
(3-6 credits)
ANT 200. OLD WORLD PREHISTORY. A middle-level aurvey of the main archaeological focal pointa of the Old
World, requiring a basic understanding of archaeological concepts, goala and technique,. (3 en.)
ANT 205. CULTURAL RESOURCE MANAGF.MENT: HISTORICAL PRESF.RV ATION. The counc acquainta
the student with the need for preservation of cultural rcaource1 (hiatoric preservation), the legialation aupportin,
auch work, and the way the work is performed. Studenta learn what i1 meant by hiatoric preservation and cultural
rcaource atudy, what types of queations prcacrvationiata mull acck anawen to, how significant rcaourcea (hiatoric
and archaeological) arc identified, how it i■ detennincd whether a rcaource i■ considered significant, how to do
architectural deacriptions of historic atructurca, and how to complete the National Regilller of Hiatoric Place,
nomination forms. Part of the course involve ■ on-site atudy of rcaourcea. Prcrcquiaite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 210. PRIMrrIVE INSTITUTIONS . Analysia and compariaon of the 10eial, political, and religious institutions
of pre-literate and pre-industrial peoplea. (3 en.)
ANT 220. AZTECS, MAYAS, AND INCAS. An introduction to and aurvey of the ethnoloJY and pre-conquest
archaeology of the advanced American Indian culturca ofMeao-Amcrica and the Andean Culture area. Inquiry into
the problems of cultural precocity. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 225 . EIGHTEENTH AND NINETEENTH CENTURY FOLK CRAFTS AND TRADmONS . Studenta learn
how to place American folk crafts and tnditions in cultural perspective by learning how to identify auch crafts and
tnditions, detennining how they have evolved through time, and identifying the role auch practice, held in the
American family. They learn the rudimenti of a number of the crafts and tnditions by observing them bein,
performed and by doing them. They learn how to gather material folk cultural data by collcctin, data on a craft
or folk tradition in Southwestern Pennaylvania. (3 en.)
ANT 226. HISTORIC SITES ARCHAEOLOGY. The course acquaints atudents with techniques, philoaophy, work,
and aims of that branch of history and anthropology that atudiea the American pall from a cultural-archaeological
point of view. The course includes study of military and community restorations baaed on hiatorical archaeoloay,
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
317
auch as Colonial Williamsburi, Plimouth Plantation, Independence Square, Fort Michilimackinac, Fort Ligonier,
and Fort Neceuity. Some laboratory and field experience• included. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 231 . MEDICAL ANTHROPOLOGY . An introductory coune that emphasize, the contributiona from
biological anthropoloJY, archaeology, and cultural anthropoloJY to the ltudy of human aickneu and health.
Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 235 . ENCULTURATION. A croaH:ultural examination of the univeraal human problem of transforming a
neonate into a functioning adult in a particular culture. (3 en.)
ANT 250. CULTURE CHANGE AND CULTURE SHOCK. Conditiona and facton which stimulate or retard
cultural change are conaidered with reference to specific historical, ethnological and aociological data and theories .
Emphasize, the impact of Weatem technoloiy upon non-We■tem culture■ while alao treatina of the
•primitivization• of the Welllem world. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 255. WORLD ETHNOLOGY. An advanced coune in cultural anthropology, in which comparative data from
text and films about non-Welllem culture, are uaed to reveal cultural differences and similarities and the nature of
the ethnographic enterpriae. (3 en.)
ANT 260. CLASSICAL ARCHAEOLOGY. The ba1ic concept of Western man as revealed in the archaeological
record from Crete through the Hellenistic period. (3 en.)
ANT 270. SOUTHWEST ETHNOLOGY. An examination of the conatantly changing cultural life styles that have
existed in the Southwest Cultural Area of North American. (3 en.)
ANT 280. INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA. Social anthropology and cultural ecology of American Indian
culture,. (3 en.)
ANT 281. SUB-SAHARAN AFRICA. The cultural anthropology of aelected African groups, past and
contemporary. (3 en.)
ANT 285 . ORIGINS OF MAN . Contemporary biological anthropology, emphasizing the evolution of human being■
part of the evolution of the primates. (3 en.)
H
ANT 287. ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURE HISTORY . A comprehensive survey of archaeology: history,
theory and techniques. (3 en.)
ANT 329. ANTHROPOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Application of theoretical knowledge to practical aituationa, to
meet career and program need ■ by meana of auperviaion and training, to enhance a student'• profe11ional viability.
(VA credit)
ANT 355 . PREHISTORIC AMERICAN INDIANS . The archaeology and reconstnicted culture of Indiana of the
ealtem United State,. (3 en.)
ANT 385 . PRIMATE SOCIETIES AND BEHAVIOR. Advanced 1tudy of the non-human primates, including
clauification to the generic level. Prerequisite: ANT 285 or permi11ion of the instnictor. (3 en.)
ANT 420. HISTORY OF ANTHROPOLOGY. (3 en.)
ANT 495 . SEMINAR IN ANTHROPOLOGY. (3 en.)
318
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
POLITICAL SCIENCE COURSES (POS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+POS 100. INTRODUCTION TO POLrrICAL SCIENCE. Thi ■ course is designed to introduce lllldenu to key
proceue1, and acton in the political world. It is intended to be a general, not detailed,
examination, and attempU to encourage undentandina, reflection and critical thinking. (3 en.) F,S
idea■, in■titutiona,
+ POS IOS. AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. Thia ia an introductory course in American government, focusing on
the major inatitutions and processe■ in the American political system. Topics discussed in the course include
separation of powen, checks and balances, civil liberties, political parties, the Congress, the President, the Supreme
Court, federalism, and policy-making proceuea. (3 en.) F, S
POS 205. MUNICIPAL GOVERNMENT. The organizational forms of municipalitie1, the proceu of decisionmaking and implementation, and proposed 10lutiona to problems of an urlian society. (3 en.)
POS 210. POLrrICS OF WESTERN EUROPE. A comparative analysi1 of the
of the nation■ of Great Britain, France, and Well Germany, and how these
■y■tem. Prerequisite■ : POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.) S
in■titutiona, proceue■,
nation■
and policiea
relate to the United Statea
POS 218. POLmCAL PARTIES, CAMPAIGNS, AND ELECTIONS . The organization and operations of
political parties in the United States. Careful attention is given to the methods used by parties in nominating
candidates in conducting campaign■ and to the significance of pressure groups, public opinion, and the electorate
in our political life. Prerequisite: POS 105. (3 en.)
POS 219. THE MASS MEDIA AND AMERICAN POLITICS. The interaction of politics and the mau media
within American society. Topic ■ include media effecu on political socialization, techniques of opinion
manipulation, propaganda, pre11 responsibility, public opinion polling, and government control of the media.
Special attention ia devoted to the use of television as an instrument of communication. Prerequisites: POS 105.
(3 en.)
POS 220. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION. Primarily an introduction to the study of
American public adminiatration, this course seeks to achieve several broad objectives. Firat, it attempta to convey
an understanding of the significant role played by administration in present-day American government and of the
implication■ of that role for a democratic society. It ha ■ the further purpose of providing insight into the specific
relationahipa between administration and the broad political environment from which it arises and in which it
operates. Finally, and mainly, the course offen opportunity for consideration of those more specialized and
technical facton, ■uch as public organization, public penonnel, budgeting, and executive leadership, that are
involved in the formulation and administration of public policy. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.)
POS 222. THE ADMINISTRATION OF CRIMINAL JUSTICE IN THE UNITED STATES. The operations of
the criminal ju■tice ay■tem in the United States. Topics include crime in American, the rule of law, the role of the
police, the function of the prosecuting and defense attorney, criminal courts and trial processes, sentencing,
corrections, incarceration, probation and parole. Prerequisite: POS !OS. (3 en.)
POS 228. DEVELOPMENT OF POLmCAL THOUGHT: CLASSICAL AND MEDIEVAL. The basic ideas,
value,, and methods of the profound political thinken and philosophers from Claaaical Greece, Rome, and the
Chri■tian Church. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
319
POS 229. DEVELOPMENT OF POLmCAL THOUGHT: MODF.RN. A sequel to the questions and approaches
niacd in POS 228. The major political philoaophen from the Renaissance to the beginning of the twentieth
century. Prerequisites: POS JOO and POS 105. (3 en.)
POS 235. STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. A treatment of the organiution, powen, functions, and
problem of It.ate and local governmental units . Emphaais ia placed on the growing complexity of relationship,
among the various levels of government II a remit of technological developments and the growth of metropolitan
areas. (3 en.)
POS 236. INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS. A pnctical and theoretical introduction to a
atudy of syatcmatic patterns in international relations. Includes analysis of rules, instruments, proceucs, decisionmaking facton, and conflict resolution. (3 en.)
POS 237. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS. An analysis and evaluation of the United Nations and other
international organiutions, and of aome of the theoretical concepts and pnctical problems involved. Prerequisite:
POS 100 or pcnniuion of instructor. (3 en.)
POS 270. POLmCS OF THE DEVELOPING AREAS . A compantive analy1i1 of the problems faced by recently
independent nations of the Third World and the idea ■ and institutions they have developed in an attempt to addrcu
the difficulties of political, economic, and aocial change. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 en.)
POS 280. POLmcs IN THE SOVIET UNION. Basic components of Soviet politics: background history, Marxist
ideology, and the historical development of Ruaaian political institutions and pncticea from the Revolution to the
prcacnt. Prerequisite,: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 era.) F
POS 300. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC POLICY. Primarily in acminar faahion . Students prcacnt and discuss
major idea■ from aasigned readings . Formal lectures arc alao scheduled when needed to prcacnt basic ideas and
information. Prerequisite: Any Political Science course or penniuion of the instructor. (3 era.)
POS 306. CONGRESS . An intensive examination of the legislative problems and procedure■ of Congress. Students
arc introduced to auch topic, as the rcprcacntational functions of Congrcu, the role of parties and leaden in
Congrcu, the importance of the committee system, and the forces affecting congrcuional decision-making.
Prerequisites: POS 105 or pennisaion of the instructor. (3 era.)
POS 307. REVOLUTION . A compantive study of the phenomenon of revolution, encompassing the cauacs, eventa,
and principal acton in thoac periods that culminate in the outbreak of violent political change. Prerequisites: POS
100 and POS 105 . (3 era.) F
POS 310. THE PRESIDENCY. Intensive study of the American presidency, focusing on personality, organiution
of the office, uac and miauac of power, and policy making. Prerequisites: POS 105 or penniuion of instructor.
(3 en.)
POS 314. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW: GOVERNMENTAL POWERS . A study of the major provisions of the
American Constitution and the growth of American constitutional law baaed on analysis and discussion of leading
judicial decisions. Prerequisite ■ : POS 105 or pennisaion of instructor. (3 era.)
POS 315. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW: CIVIL LIBERTIES . A atudy of the development and meaning of the rights
and liberties guannteed to persona under the Constitution of the United States. Special emphasis ia placed on the
antccedenta of and the adoption of the Bill of Righta and a description of the court structure through which the
meaning of civil liberties is determined in specific situations. Prerequisites: POS 105 or penniaaion of the
instructor. (3 en.)
320
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
POS 316. JUDICIAL PROCESS. Intensive ltlldy of the judicial proceu in the United States and the relationship
between the judicial ayatem and the larger American social ayatem. Prerequisite: POS 105 or permiuion of the
imtructor. (3 en.)
POS 320. U. S. FOREIGN POLICY: Policy objectives, patterns of decision-making, and U .S. foreign policy
actions. The roles of interest groups, public opinion, Congress, and other external influences in U. S. foreign
policy are alao examined. Prerequisite: POS 105 . (3 en.)
POS 322. POLIDCS OF THE MIDDLE EAST. A comparative analysis of the institutions, proceues, and politic•
of Middle Eastern governments and how these have been shaped by the international relations of the region.
Prerequiaite: POS 100. (3 en.)
POS 323. POLIDCS OF LATIN AMERICA. A comparative analysis of the institutions, proce1se1, and politic,
of Latin American countries and how these have been shaped by the international relations of the region .
Prerequisite: POS 100. (3 crs.)
POS 325. POLIDCS OF ASIA. A comparative analysis of the institutions, processes,and policies of China, Japan,
and India and how these nations relate to the system in the United States. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105.
(3 en.)
POS 327. CONTEMPORARY POLIDCAL THOUGHT. A general survey of the major political ideas and
thinken of the twentieth century, drawing connections between these ideas and contemporary developments in
philosophy, paychology, economics, and sociology . Prerequisite,: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 crs.)
POS 329 . INTERNSHIP IN POLIDCAL SCIENCE. Practical field experience to supplement academic wor~,
developing profesaional competencies in research and communication skills.
POS 330. AMERICAN POLIDCAL IDEAS. An advanced course in political theory: the major political ideas and
controversiea that are associated with the development of American political thought. Prerequisites : Any Political
Science course or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.)
POS 335 . ADMINISTRATIVE LAW. The legal structure and political environment within federal administrative
agencies in the United States that formulate public policy . Emphasis is given to the growth of the administrative
state within the United States, the necessity for the delegation of legislative authority to administrative agencies and
the need for judicial control of the bureaucracy . Prerequisites: POS 100, POS 105 or permission of the instructor.
(3 crs.)
POS 450. SEMINAR IN AMERICAN POLITICS . Thia seminar, required of all Political Science majors, is
deaigned to provide intensive examination of a specific and narrowly focused area in the field of American politics.
The course ia research-oriented and consists of individually prepared contributions by all participants, which are
discussed and critically appraised by all members of the class. Prerequisites: Students taking this course must be
Seniors majoring in Political Science. (3 en.) S
SOCIOLOGY COURSES (SOC)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+SOC 100. PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY. Examines interaction among human beings. Emphasis on natural
and social heritage, the meaning and functions of culture, and the origin, function, and characteristics of social
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
321
institution,, with inquiry into the nature and genesis of 10Cial pathology. (3 en.) F, S
+SOC 110. ETHNIC, RACIAL AND SEXUAL MINORITIES. Disadvantaged, not just numerical, minoritiea are
studied in tenna of their demoaraphic and ecoloaical characteristic,. Contemporary iuues are studied in historical
context. (3 en.)
+ SOC 125 . MEN, WOMEN AND WORK. Through readings, audio-visual material■ , panel, and informal student
reporta, clasa memben investigate the role• of men and women in the existing economic structure, the reason, for
the■e role, and the development of trends and changes in the economic area . Diacu11ion-cenlered. (3 en.)
+SOC 155. CHARISMATIC LEADERS. The characteristic, of chariamatic leaden and the methodology u■ed
to study thia phenomenon. Diacu11ion-centered cla1■e1 . (3 en.)
+ SOC 165. MODERN FREEDOM MOVEMENTS. The study of 10Cial movements in American IOCiety. Basic
focus is upon 10Cial change brought about by 10Cial movements. (3 en.)
SOC 175 . CONTEMPORARY WOMEN'S MOVEMENT. An investigation of themes, philosophies, and activists
in the current women's movement. (3 en.)
SOC 200. RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIOLOGY. Fundamental concepta of systematic, empirical 10Cial
research; the logical and procedural rulea for scientific problem solving and the method■ and techniques for
implementing the■e rules in actual research. (3 en.)
SOC 205 . CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL PROBLEMS . Contrasting theoretical approaches provide alternative
approachea to undentanding and analyzing 10Cial problems. (3 en.) F,S
SOC 210. SOCIAL STRATIFICATION. The student is made more aware of the class, status, and power inequities
of our stratified 10Ciety. Claa■, cute, and estate ayatems are compared. Prcrequiaite: SOC 110. (3 en.)
SOC 215 . SOCIOLOGY OF THE WORKPLACE. Basic patterns of work behavior in American culture. Some
emphaai■ ia placed upon career path, and the impact of technological change upon work. (3 en.)
SOC 220. THE FAMILY. The institution of the family within the context of American culture. Prerequisite: SIC
100. (3 en.)
SOC 225. SOCIOLOGY OF AGING . Theoretical issues of aging, research, and the methodological tradition,
involved in the study of the human aging proce11. Special emphasis is placed upon the interaction of pertinent
biological and sociological variables related to the proces■es of work, retirement, leisure, institutionalization, and
death . Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 240. URBAN SOCIOLOGY. Focu■ea on the relationahip between the demographics of urbanization and the
10Cial-psychological characteristic, of urbanism. Dcterminiat, compositional, and sub-cultural theories are
compared. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 260. CRIME. Types of criminal behavior, the epidemiology of crime in the United States, the social baais
of law, and major etiological forces responsible for lawbreaking. General systems theory is the basic theoretical
penpective u■ed in this cour■e . Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 285 . SOCIOLOGY OF SUBSTANCE USE AND ABUSE. The 10Ciology of substance uae and abuae, as
well as the approaches for treatment. Special emphasis is given to alcohol and the more commonly abused drugs
(e.g., nicotine, marijuana, and cocaine). The course focuacs on the social procesacs that influence substance abuac
and the 10Cietal coats and con,equencea. Prerequisite: SOC 100 or permission of the instructor. (3 en.)
322
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
SOC 305 . SYMBOLIC INTERACTIONISM. A 10eiological contribution to 10eial psychology, aymbolic
interactioniam, ia viewed as complementing paychological contribution■ to the field, particularly to the Gestalt,
p ■ychoanalytical , and neo-behavioral theorie,. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 370. SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY BUILDING . Some of the logical baaca for determining the relative merits
of alternative a1&Umptiona concerning matten of fact or 10eial policy. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 375 . HISTORY OF SOCIAL THOUGHT. Major theoretical penpectivea are compared in terms of their
aaaumptiona and utility in explaining social behavior; emphasis is on conflict theory, aymbolic interactioniam, and
structure functionaliam. Intended primarily for Sociology and Social Work: majon in the sixth semester or higher.
(3 en.)
SOC 495 . SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY. (3 en.)
SOCIAL SCIENCE COURSES (SOS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+SOS 100. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL SCIENCE. An introduction to the broad field of human behavioral
studies, with concern for the changing and contrasting patterns evidenced therein. (3 era.) F, S
+SOS I 01 . WORLD CULTURE. A survey of the evolution of human culture: governmental, economic, 10eial,
religious, intellectual, and aesthetic activities from ancient times to the beginning of the modem world . (3 era.)
+SOS 107. UNIVERSAL CULTURE PROBLEMS . Problems of technological change in ancient Egypt and in
modem China; problems of social organization in industrial western nations and in the U .S.S.R.; problems of
allocation of authority in ancient Greece and in Nazi Germany; and problems of religion in medieval Europe and
the Middle Eaat today . (3 era.)
SOS 110. QUALITY OF LIFE. (3 era .)
SOS 155 . CULTURAL VIEWS OF WOMEN. Women in five different cultures. Special attention ia given to the
work: ofMafiaret Mead . (3 era.)
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
323
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
SOCIAL WORK
Associate Professor Edward Brown, chair. Professors Beverly G. Willison.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SOCIAL WORK
The Social Work program is designed to (1) provide the student with generalist skills
for direct entry into social work practice through a variety of agencies and human services
settings at a beginning professional level; (2) to prepare the student for entrance to graduate
programs of social work or related professional schools; and (3) to contribute to a general
college education by helping students to understand social welfare needs, services, and issues
relevant to a modem industrial democracy.
Graduates of the program are eligible for full membership in the National Association
of Social Workers and also for advanced standing if they choose to continue their social
work education at an accredited graduate social work program. The program provides
career opportunities in such areas as personal services (casework counseling, family
development, therapy, etc.); protection services (corrections, public health,judicial system,
etc.); maintenance services (child care, institutions, mental health, physical health, public
welfare, etc.); and information/advising services (education, hot lines, crisis centers,
consulting, etc.).
For graduation student must maintain at least a 2.0 QPA average in the major.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Compoaition 1-D (ENG 101-102); 12 credits in Humanitie■ ; 12 credits in Natural
Science,; 12 credits in Social Science; 18 credits of free elective■ .
(B) Ana of Concentration: Introduction to Social Work (SOW 150); Social Work Interviewing (SOW 301);
Social Work Method■ I (SOW 255); Social Work Method ■ D (SOW 346); Social Work Methods ill (SOW 347);
Social Work Reacarch Method• (SOW 450); Human Growth and Behavior I (SOW 215); Human Growth and
Behavior (SOW 216); Minority Group Relation• (SOW 208); Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400); Human Sexuality
and Society (SOW 475); Social Change (SOW 370); Delivery of Servic e ■ (SOW 365); Social Welfare as a Social
lnatitution (SOW 290); Child Welfare (SOW 270); Juvenile Delinquency (SOW 265); Contemporary Social
Problems (SOW 205); Advanced Clinical Methoda in Social Work (SOW 352); Welfare Practicum I ((SOW 309);
Welfare Practicum D (SOW 319); and Seminar in Social Work (SOW 495) .
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
324
SOCIAL WORK COURSES (SOW)
Introductory courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+SOW 150. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK. Introduce, the social, political, and economic dimensions
of poverty and welfare service, of the United State,. Complementa other beginning counea in the aocial science,
by intepting this knowledge in a fashion which aida in the comprehension of welfare service, while eatabliahing
a ba1i1 for movement towards higher level counea. (3 en.)
SOW 208. MINORITY GROUP RELATIONS. Analysis of the historical, economic and political relations of
relations of American religiou1, ethnic, and racial minorities in tenna of aocial change and aocial atructure . f aocial
change and aocial atructure. Special attention given to Puerto Rican, Chicano and Indian subculture,. Source1 of
prejudice and discrimination, aocial processea including conflict segregation, a1similation, accommodation, and
cooperation. Prerequi1ite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOW 215 . HUMAN GROWfH AND BEHAVIOR Il.
Prerequisite: SOW 215 (3 en.)
A continuation of Human Growth and Behavior I.
SOW 255 . SOCIAL WORK METHODS I. Designed for people who work: with other people. Auume1 that
although the task:I that a human service worker may be a1k:ed to perform vary from agency to agency, there are,
nevertheleu, certain attitudes, knowledge, and skills that are basic to all such work:. It further auume1 that H these
attitudes, knowledge, and skills become more acutely developed, self-awareness will develop with subsequent
development of a profeBSionalized self. Prerequisites: SOW 150 and SOW 100. (3 en.)
SOW 265 . JUVENILE DELINQUENCY. The causes, prevention, and treatment of deviancy among youth.
Emphasi, on concept of the non-adversary role of the juvenile court system and the urgent need for change. An
exploration of the aociological theories for deviancy and the changing attitude toward treatment and treatment
facilities. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 en.)
SOW 270. CHILD WELFARE. The services which are peculiar to programs in a Child Welfare agency.
Casework: with children, natural parenta and substitute parenta is discussed. Separation theories are presented and
related to the undentanding of this experience for children. Some historical, as well aa, current practice in
homemaker service, day care, foster care, (foster home inatitutiona, group home■, and residential treatment centen)
and adoption will be presented. Case material will be used to focus the discussion of the caseworker'• role in these
service,. Prerequisite: SOW 150 (3 en.)
SOW 290. SOCIAL WELFARE AS A SOCIAL INSTITUTION. Historical approach to aocial welfare aa an
inatitution in order to focus on the proceu of inatitutionaliution in which behavior that ia anticipated and
unpredictable evolve■ into that which is regular, patterned and recurring. The historical approach alao enable■
atudenta to make aome correlation between values, beliefs and norms emanating from aocial welfare in aixteenth,
eighteenth and nineteenth century Europe and concepta, attitude, and philoaophies auociated with aocial welfare
in twentieth century America. Prerequisite,: PSY 100 and SOW 150. (3 en.)
SOW 301. SOCIAL WORK INTERVIEW. Thia coune ia designed to familiarize atudenta with the euential
componenta of interviewing skills in collecting information, asseBSing client problems and interviewing in the
proceu of ameliorating individual or small group disfunctioning. This coune emphasizes the importance of the
interview H a major means of communication with penona in need of help. (3 en.)
SOW 309. WELFARE PRACTICUM I. An opportunity to learn and apply theoretical knowledge to practice
through involvement in a aocial welfare agency setting or inatitution. The student is required to apend 16 clock:
houn per week: in the field. Prerequisite: Permiuion of the inatructor. (6 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
325
SOW 319. WELFARE PRACTICUM Il. Continuation of Welfare Practicum I. The student continue, to work:
under a trained aocial worker, prefenbly in the aame setting aa the previous placement. The student ia expected
to demomtnte a considenble amount of clauroom knowledge and ahould ahow conviction about the value of aocial
work: in improving the client'• psycho-aocial functioning . The student ia required to spend 16 clock houn per week
in the field . Prerequisite: SOW 309 and permiaaion of the inatnlctor. (6 en.)
SOW 346. SOCIAL WORK METHODS Il: GROUP WORK. Hiatory of aocial group work:, the aocial the aocial
work: valuea, the aaaessment of goals and objectives in the group, the principles of aocial group work:, and the
various model ■ of group thenpy. Prerequi1ite1: SOW 150 and SOW 255. (3 en.)
SOW 347. SOCIAL WORK METHODS m: COMMUNITY ORGANIZATION. A comprehensive review and
descriptive hiatory of the evolution of community organiution methodologies with emphasis upon their generic
aocial work: qualities. Concern is devoted to both the character of the proceaa and task:■ aaaociated therewith, aa
well aa the role community organiution plays in aocial reform in the United States. The course material relates
to collective aocial behavior, aocial institutions, the politics of aocial services delivery, community problem-solving,
and aocial planning . Prerequisite: SOW 346. (3 en.)
SOW 352. ADVANCED CLINICAL METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK. Builds upon the elements of casework:
pncticea introduced in Social Work Method• I. The proceaa of paychoaocial study, diagnosia, and treatment more
adequately developed. Abundant use of aaaigned tests and case material, particularly those concerned with aocial
welfare . Pedagogic use of role playing ia also ayatematically developed . Generic concepts ltreaaed, but specific
setting topically considered. For example, relaxation training, biofeedback:, hypnoaia and projective telling for the
aocial worker are typically considered . Prerequisite: SOW 255 (3 en.)
SOW 365. DELIVERY OF SERVICES. Deals with macro practice techniques. Theoretical underpinnings are
examined from a aocial systems prospective. The primary value ltreaaed is that the student must become sensitive
to consumers and empathetic to their concerns is prerequisite to becoming a professional aocial worker. It is felt
that such a goal cannot be attained simply by talking about consumers, but that consumerism must be experienced.
Therefore, the student is required during the semeater to become involved in a consumer concern, which will be
agreed upon by the student and the instructor, and write a paper describing their experience and how it relates to
the course. Prerequisite: SOW 346.
SOW 370. SOCIAL CHANGE. A continuation of SOW 365, Delivery of Services, and also emphasis on macro,
genenlist techniques, drawn from aocial syatem theory . It is also stressed that aocietal representative• will effect
needed change• only if the human service worker initiates change efforts in a faahion that provides adequate
feedback: to decision makers. It is assumed that decision makers effect needed aocietal change• satisfied.
Prerequisitea: SOW 346, 365. (3 en.)
SOW 450. RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK. The aocial work: scientific endeavor is presented as
a special type of problem-solving and analytical thinking activity. Its thrust is to teach the undergnduate student
to become a critical consumer of research reports and to prepare the student to begin to understand the critical
importance of research aa a profeaaional endeavor.
SOW 475 . HUMAN SEXUALITY. Thia course provides a basic overview of the human sexual syatem. Social
sexual value■ and attitudes will be examined along with information on physiological and psychological sexual
dysfunctioning. A special emphasis will be on the skills and knowledge needed to provide information to clienta
aa well as thenpeutic interventions. (3 en.)
SOW 495 . SEMINAR IN SOCIAL WORK. (variable)
326
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
SPECIAL EDUCATION
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
COMMUNITY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED:
PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION
EARLY CHILDHOOD/SPECIAL EDUCATION
ELEMENTARY/SPECIAL EDUCATION
Professor Wallace D. Hodge, chair. Professors Robert A. Bauman, Peter J. Belch, Robert
F. Dickie, Jay R. Powell; Associate Professors Albert Dascenzo, Regis Laz.or, Ben A.
Mule, Angela K. Zondos; Assistant Professor Paul L. Lancaster
The Department of Special Education, accredited by the American Association of
Colleges of Teacher Education, offers several programs leading to the baccalaureate degree
with a major in Special Education. The Mentally/Physically Handicapped curriculum leads
to a Pennsylvania Instructional I Certification. This certificate entitles the graduate to teach
children manifesting the following handicaps: mental retardation, learning disability, physical
handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage. The Mentally/Physically Handicapped
curriculum with Physical Education and Recreation emphasis also leads to Pennsylvania
certification. In addition graduates of this program can provide adaptive physical education
instruction for each of the handicap categories. Majors in either Early Childhood or
Elementary education may dual major in Special Education. Graduates of these programs
receive certification in both Early Childhood/Elementary and Mentally/Physically
Handicapped.
Pennsylvania teacher certification requires a satisfactory grade on the NIE.
The field of special education, both within the state of Pennsylvania and nationally,
continues to grow, providing excellent professional career opportunities. Recent federal
legislation has mandated new services for handicapped youngsters and provided increased
funding. The impetus should be toward an increased growth rate in special education
programs, particularly for children with severe and/or profound handicaps. The area of
physical education and recreation for the handicapped is also presently characterized by
expanding interest and activity. More and more programs are recognizing the needs of
handicapped children to develop their physical skills and their ability to participate in
recreational activities. Graduates of the Mentally/Physically Handicapped program are
qualified to assume several professional roles including: special education classroom teacher,
resource room teacher, homebound instruction teacher, hospital teacher, itinerant physical
education teacher for the handicapped, recreational director in an institutional or agency
setting, recreational program specialist for governmental agencies involving parks and
playgrounds as well as a variety of roles in sheltered workshops and community-living
arrangements for handicapped adults.
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
327
The growth of mainstream programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid.
It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild forms of handicaps typically attain higher
levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special self-contained
classroom. These children do, however, need special help and remedial instruction in some
areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is
becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of children while
continuing to maintain their enrollment in regular classrooms. This process of integrating
the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool level, or no later
than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in Early Childhood or Special Education
will be able to provide excellent resource services to both children and the other staff
members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume
several professional roles, including regular early childhood classroom teacher (nurserythird grade), special education classroom teacher-mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed,
physically handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged (nursery-twelfth grade), and
resource room teacher.
The Special Education Department also offers two programs for majors preparing to
work with the handicapped in various community settings. Students may complete a twoyear associate degree or a four-year baccalaureate degree in the Community Services
Personnel Training Program.
This program emphasizes providing service to the
handicapped in other than school settings. Training stresses a comprehensive non-categorical
approach to understanding handicapping conditions.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED EDUCATION
This program, leading to the Pennsylvania Instructional Level I certification, entitles the
graduate to teach children with the following handicaps: Mental retardation, learning
disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage.
The general objectives of the program are:
To demonstrate an understanding of the nature of handicapping conditions and
the impact of these conditions on normal growth and development;
To demonstrate an ability to effectively use alternative instructional strategies
appropriate to the needs of exceptional children;
To demonstrate the ability to identify the educationally relevant characteristics
of various exceptional children and to effectively diagnose and prescribe
appropriate educational experiences;
To demonstrate the ability to function as a competent classroom manager in
promoting learning among handicapped students;
To demonstrate competency to initiate instructional programs that facilitate
appropriate career and vocational goals for the mentally/physically
handicapped.
328
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
Curriculam:
(A) Gmenl Education: 9 credita in Humanitie1; 9 credita in Natunl
Science■; 9 credita in Social Science■ ;
3 credita of Health or Phyaical Activitie1; Onl Communication (COM IOI); Gencnl Paycholoi)' (PSY 101); 22
credita of free elective,, including Engliah Composition 1-ll (ENG 101 , 102).
(B) Profeuioaal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Paychology (PSY 208);
Developmental P■ycholoi)' (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a Multicultunl
Society (EDU 210); Computcn for Teachen (EDF 301); 6 creditB of electivea; Student Teaching and Pncticum
(C) Area ofCoaceatratioa: Exceptional Child 1-ll (ESP 100, 201); Behavior Principles 1-ll (ESP 301,401);
Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503);
Phyaical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Curriculum Methods 1-ll (ESP 504-505); Habilitation
Tnining (ESP 506) .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SPECIAL EDUCATION:
COMMUNITY SERVICES
The Community Services Personnel Training Program is a four-year undergraduate
curriculum leading to a Bachelor of Science degree in Special Education. It emphasizes
career working with the handicapped in community settings other than schools. Training
stresses a comprehensive non-categorical approach to understanding
handicapping
conditions. Students learn to work with the mentally retarded, learning disabled, physically
handicapped, emotionally disturbed, and brain-injured.
The field of community alternative services for the handicapped is the fastest growing
area in the field of human care services. Both philosophical concern and legal mandates
have drastically altered the nature of such services during the past few years. Communities
are beginning to recognize and respond to their responsibility for handicapped residents.
Large-scale warehousing of human beings within institutions has been significantly reduced,
and, more importantly, society is re-examining the central question of institutionali:r.ation on
humanitarian and constitutional grounds. This shift has opened an entirely new professional
career field-providing community-based alternative programs for the handicapped.
Expansion, while rapid, has been impeded by the lack of trained personnel. The need for
competent personnel in this area will very probably continue to expand. Graduates of this
program are qualified to assume professional roles as resident managers of community living
arrangements, mental retardation specialists in MH/MR community programs, supervisors
of work activity centers, supervisors of therapeutic activity centers, supervisors of adult
development centers, supervisors of child development centers.
The general objectives of the Community Services Personnel Training Program are:
To demonstrate the ability to use effectively behavior management principles
in a number of applied settings;
To demonstrate the ability to program effectively and provide instruction to
handicapped clients in the area of daily living skills.
To demonstrate the ability to provide effective counseling services to clients
and their families.
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
329
Curriculum:
(A) Gt11era1 Educatioo: 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 2 credits in Health or Physical
Activities; General Psychology (PSY 100); 20 credit, of free electives, including English Composition 1-Il (ENG
101, 102).
(B) Professional Specialization: 15 credita from the following: Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400);
Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Social Psychology (PSY 209); Principles of Behavior Modification (PSY
350); Child Welfare (SOW 270); Contemporary Social Problems (SOC 205); The Family (SOC 220): Juvenile
Delinquency (SOW 265); Social Institutions (SOC 240); Social Change (SOW 370).
(C) Professional Education: Exceptional Child 1-Il (ESP 101,200); Behavior Principles 1-Il (ESP 301,401);
Education of Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Academic and Recreational Skill Training (ESP 278);
Occupational and Daily Living Skill Training (ESP 279); Community ReBOUrces and Public Relations (ESP 378);
Buaineu Management and Legal Factors (ESP 379); Client Counseling and Psycho-Social Development and Client
Counseling (ESP 478); Program Evaluation and Personnel Management (ESP 479); Internship and Practicum.
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN COMMUNITY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS
One of the most significant new developments in the field of human services has been
the rapid and dramatic growth of community-based programs for the mentally retarded.
These community living arrangements (CLAs) need trained staff members to provide client
services.
This program is specifically designed to incorporate skills that will lead to immediate
employment in a CLA after completion of the program.
Curriculum:
(A) Genenl Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits in Social Sciences (including General
Psychology [PSY 100) and one Psychology elective and a Sociology course); 6 credits in Natural Sciences including
Fundamental• of Mathematics (MAT 100); 3 credits of free electives.
(B) Professional Counes: Exceptional Children 1-Il (ESP 101, 200); Behavior Principles 1-Il (ESP 301 ,
401); Academic and Recreational Skill Training (ESP 278); Occupational Skill Training and Activities of Daily
Living (AOL) (ESP 279); Community ReBOUrce Utilization and Public Relations (ESP 378); Practicum.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED:
PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION
The Comprehensive Mentally/Physically Handicapped Physical Education and
Recreation program is a four-year undergraduate program leading to a Bachelor of Science
degree in Education and to the Pennsylvania Instructional I certification.
This certificate entitles the graduate to teach children with the following handicaps:
mental retardation, learning disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain
damage. Majors pursuing the Physical Education and Recreation area of interest can
provide physical education instruction for each of these handicap categories.
The area of physical education and recreation for the handicapped is presently
characteri.zed by expanding interest and activity. More and more programs are recognizing
the needs of handicapped children to develop their physical skills and their ability to
330
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
participate in recreational activities. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume
several professional roles, including special education teacher for the handicapped,
recreational director in an _institutional or agency setting, and recreational program specialist
for governmental agencies involving parks and playgrounds.
The objectives of this program are:
To demonstrate an understanding of the nature of handicapping conditions and
the impact of these conditions on normal growth and development;
To demonstrate the ability to effectively use alternative instructional strategies
appropriate to the needs of exceptional children;
To demonstrate the ability to identify the educationally relevant characteristics
of various exceptional children and to effectively diagnose and prescribe
appropriate educational experiences;
To demonstrate the ability to function as a competent classroom manager in
promoting learning among handicapped students;
To demonstrate competency to initiate the instructional programs that facilitate
appropriate career and vocational goals for the mentally/physically
handicapped;
To demonstrate the ability to implement physical education programs for
handicapped youngsters, with emphasis on gross-motor skills and physical
activities leading to lifetime recreation skills.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 9 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM lCJO); 3 credita in
Health and Physical Education; 9 credits in Natural Sciences; 9 credits in Social Sciences, including General
Psychology (PSY lCJO); 21 credita of Free Electives, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102)
(B) Profeuiooal Education: 32 credita: Educational Foundations (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY
208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a
Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); six credita of electivea; Student Teacbina
and School Law: 12 credits.
(C) Area of Concentration: 39 credita: Exceptional Child 1-11 (ESP 100, 200); Behavioral Principles 1-11
(ESP 301, 401); Education of the Severely and Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnoltic Telling and
Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503); Phyaical Activitiea for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Curriculum and
Methods 1-11 (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506).
(D) Physical Education and Recreation: 16 credita: Anatomy, Kinesiology and Physiology (ESP 315); Motor
Learning (ESP 316); Rhythmical Analysis and Creative Movement (ESP 317); School-Community Recreation and
Crafts (ESP 415); Methods of Physical Education and Recreation (ESP 416) .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
EARLY CHILDHOOD/SPECIAL EDUCATION (DUAL MAJOR)
Students of superior academic achievement who are majoring in either Early Childhood
Education or Special Education are encouraged to consider pursuing a dual curriculum
leading to Pennsylvania certification in both fields. Current educational thought advocates
the placement of mildly handicapped youngsters in regular classrooms with special education
resource services made available to the student and the classroom teacher. Students who
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
331
successfully complete this dual-major program will possess demonstrated competencies in
facilitating the assimilation of the mildly handicapped into the mainstream of American
education and society.
The growth of mainstreaming programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been
rapid. It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild forms of handicaps typically attain
higher levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special selfcontained classroom. These children do, however, need special help and remedial
instruction in some areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the
resource room, is becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of these
children while continuing to maintain their enrollment in regular classrooms. This process
of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool
level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in both Early Childhood
and Special Education will be able to provide excellent resource services to both children
and the other staff members of an elementary school.
Graduates of this program are qualified to assume several professional roles, including
regular early childhood classroom teacher (nursery-third grade) , special education classroom
teacher-mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically handicapped, learning disabled,
brain-damaged (nursery-twelfth grade)-and resource room teacher.
Early Childhood/Special Education dual majors must demonstrate the competencies
associated with each of the individual certificate programs (refer to the Early Childhood and
Special Education programs). In addition, the following general objectives must be met:
To demonstrate the ability to identify students who are in need of some special
service;
To demonstrate the ability to work effectively with other teachers in
cooperatively planning programs for children with special needs;
To demonstrate the ability to facilitate the social acceptance of children with
handicaps by structuring classroom environments that reinforce positive
interpersonal relationships;
To demonstrate the ability to complete educational assessment of the learning
needs of students;
To demonstrate the ability to develop individual educational prescriptions based
on assessment data;
To demonstrate the ability to effectively modify instructional strategies or
materials to provide for the unique needs of students manifesting learning
handicaps.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM 100) and
Composition I-II (ENG 101-102); 15 credits in Natural Sciences; 15 credits in Social Sciences, including General
Psychology (PSY 100); 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities.
(B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Child
Psychology (PSY 205) or Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Student Teaching and
Prscticum.
(C) Early Childhood Courses: Field Experience in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Laboratory Experiences in
Nursery/Kindergarten (ECE 201); Art for Early Childhood (ECE 215); Music for Early Childhood (ECE 217);
332
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
Health and Physical Education for Early Childhood (ECE 218) or Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child
(HPE 337); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Children' s Literature (ECE 311); Mathematics
Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); The Child in Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Science for
Early Childhood (ECE 317); Early Childhood Seminar (ECE 405).
(D) Special Education Courses: Exceptional Child I-II (ESP 100,201); Behavioral Principles I-II (ESP 301 ,
401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP
503); Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337) or Health and Physical Education for Elementary
Grades; Curriculum Methods I-II (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506).
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ELEMENTARY/SPECIAL EDUCATION (DUAL MAJOR)
The growth of mainstream programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid.
It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild handicaps typically attain higher levels of
achievement in the regular class environment than in the special self-contained classroom.
However, these children still need special help and remedial instruction in some areas of the
curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is becoming an
increasingly common means of addressing the needs of mildly handicapped children. This
process of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the
preschool level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in both
Elementary and Special Education are able to provide excellent resource services to both
children and other staff members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are
qualified to assume several professional roles: regular elementary classroom teacher (K-8),
special education classroom teacher (mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically
handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged, nursery-grade 12), and resource room
teacher.
Students of superior academic achievement who are majoring in either Elementary
Education or Special Education are encouraged to pursue a dual curriculum leading to
Pennsylvania certification in both fields. Since current educational thought advocates the
placement of mildly handicapped youngsters in regular classrooms with special education
resource services made available to the student and the classroom teacher, students who
successfully complete this dual major program will possess demonstrated competencies in
facilitating the assimilation of the mildly handicapped into the mainstream of American
education and society.
Elementary/Special Education dual majors must demonstrate the competencies associated
with each of the individual certification programs (refer to the competencies given in this
and the Elementary Education sections of this catalog). In addition, the following general
objectives must be satisfied:
To demonstrate the ability to identify students who are in need of some special
service;
To demonstrate the ability to work effectively with other teachers in
cooperatively planning programs for children with special needs;
To demonstrate the ability to facilitate the social acceptance of children with
handicaps by structuring classroom environments that reinforce positive
interpersonal relationships;
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
333
To demonstrate the ability to complete educational assessment of the learning
needs of students;
To demonstrate the ability to develop individual educational prescriptions for
children based on assessment data;
To demonstrate the ability to effectively modify instructional strategies and/or
materials to provide for the unique needs of students with learning handicaps.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 18 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM 100) and
Composition 1-11 (ENG 101 -102), courses in art, history, and music; 15 credits in Natural Sciences, including
algebra, biology, physical science, and Man and His Environment; 15 credits in Social Sciences, including General
Psychology (PSY I 00), American Government, U.S. History (Before or Since I 877), Elements of Economics, and
Geography; Co-Ed Health and one credit of Physical Education
(B) Proft!Mional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Child
Psychology (PSY 205) or Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Student Teaching; Practicum
and School Law.
(C) Elementary Education Courses: Elementary Health and Physical Education (EDE 208) or Physical
Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children's Literature I (EDE
311); Field Experiences in Early Childhood Education (ECE 202); Mathematics Content and Methods in the
Elementary School (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studies (EDE 306); Science for Elementary Teachers (EDE
307); Teaching Language Arts (EDE 308) .
(D) Special Education Courses: Exceptional Child I-II (ESP 100, 201); Behavioral Principles 1-11 (ESP 301,
401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP
503); Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337) or Health and Physical Education for the Elementary
School (EDE 208); Curriculum and Methods I-II (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506).
334
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES (ESP)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
B indicates that the courses are usually offered both semesters.
ESP 101 & 200. EXCEPTIONAL CHILD I & II. A tw<>--<:oune introductory sequence to handicapped children and
to the field of special education. Theac coune■ examine the range of handicaps in children and their broad
10eiological, educational, and vocational implication■. Specifically, the acquence develop■ competencies in such
area, 11 the historical development of acrvice1 for handicapped, children, definition■ and clauification of children'•
handicap,, the impact of labelling children and main■tream programa, pre-school and poat-school programa for the
handicapped, family acrvices, prosthetic devices and program modifications for the physically handicapped and a
behavioral analysis of normal child development. Theac counea atress obacrvation of the various target groups of
handicapped children. ( 4 en. each) F
ESP 250. WORKSHOP FOR TEACHER AIDES . For teacher aides who worlc in clasac■ for handicapped children.
the content i1, however, of great value to all teacher' s aides since it deals with methods that might enable the
participants to deal more easily and more effectively with any children. Numerous activities characterize the
worbhop; it i ■ not a lecture coune. (3 en.) B
ESP 278 . ACADEMIC AND RECREATIONAL SKILL TRAINING. Handicapped penon■ residing in the
community mull acquire thoac sltills which will facilitate assimilation to the community at large. Important among
theac ■ltil11 are baaic competencie■ in academic area■ such as reading, writing, communication, and computational
abilitie■. In order to live independently, the handicapped must also be capable of -nonnal" behavioral responaca
in varioua 10eial, vocational and recreational situation■. (3 en.) F
ESP 279. OCCUPATIONAL SKILL TRAINING AND ACTIVITIES OF DAILY LIVING (ADL) . Thia coune
focuac1 on the prevocational and vocational need■ of handicapped youth and adults as well II thoac supportive 11till1
ncce ...ry for achieving acceptable level• of -nonnal adult adjuatmcnt. • Since the habilitation and training need ■
of the handicapped population are so divene, the nature of coune content and emphasis is also broad, to include
such programa as sheltered worlcahops and rehabilitation facilities, worlc activity centen, therapeutic activity
centen, CLS'1, etc . (3 en.) F
ESP 301 . BEHAVIOR PRINCIPLES I. Provides the student with the verbal and performance sltills in
measurement and obacrvation nccesury to apply the principles of behavior modification in schools and a variety
of other acttings. Students who complete the coune will have mastered sltills in data collection, data manipulation,
and data-display including graphing, behavioral definitions, the principles of reinforcement and extinction, and databased decision malting. (4 en.) F
ESP 315. ANATOMY, KINESIOLOGY, PHYSIOLOGY. An introduction to practical lcnowledge of human
growth and development, human anatomy and physiology. Special focus on the biomechanics of human motion
in relation to sport and recreational sltills for handicapped and nonhandicapped penon■. (3 en.) S
ESP 316. MOTOR LEARNING . A preparatory coune for teaching adapted physical education to handicapped
children. A 1y1tcmatic approach baaed on the I CAN Curriculum is used to 11ac11, teach and evaluate paychomotor
11till1. Child development theories are atudied and applied to the development of special physical education
programs for handicapped children. (3 en.) S
ESP 317. RHYTHMICAL ANALYSIS AND CREATIVE MOVEMENT. An introductory coune that focuaca on
the therapeutic value of music and dance. Special emphasis is placed on Laban' s Effort-Shape System of Movement
Analysis. (3 en.) S
ESP 360. FIELD EXPERIENCE FOR SPECIAL EDUCATION . Provides a vehicle for obtaining needed practical
experience, with various groups of handicapped children. The type of practicum site may vary widely and includes
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
335
such acttinga aa public and private residential inatitutiona, day care centen, therapeutic activity centen, lheltered
worbhopa, rehabilitation centen, community MH/MR programs, and summer camps for handicapped children.
(Variable credit) B
ESP 378. COMMUNITY RESOURCE UTILIZATION AND PUBLIC RELATIONS. Community-baaedprognma
for handicapped individuala utilize community facilitiea, agenciea, and acrvicea to provide broad-baaed support and
auiatance to the client populationa. In thoac aituationa where an insufficient or inadequate level of support ia in
place, the public II well a ■ the policy maken muat be mobilized to fill identified voids . Very often the apringboard
from which an effective acrvice baac can be eatablilhed ia a well developed program of public relationa. the public
relationa prognm al110 acrvea the handicapped by educating the community memben-the neighbon of handicapped
penona living in the community. (3 en.) B
ESP 379 . BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS . Community-based prognma
currently exiat both aa a mandate of law and at the pleasure of legislation from a fiscal standpoint. Further, the
relationahipa between providen and clienta, providen and agencies, agenciea and clients, etc . are all regulated.
Thia courac, therefore, explores the many legal implicationa involved in community-baaed programs and apecifiea
the reaponaibility that atudents will face as profe11ional1. (3 en.) B
ESP 401 . BEHAVIOR PRINCIPLES II. Thia courac familiarize, the atudent the laboratory derived learning
principle, that constitute the field of applied behavior analysis. An experimental component provides each atudent
the opportunity to observe and report on a behavioral intervention program. (4 en.) S
ESP 415 . SCHOOL, COMMUNITY RECREATION, AND CRAFTS FOR HANDICAPPED PERSON . Basic
philosophical foundationa of leisure and recreation. Special focus ia on the aima and benefits of the recreation
proce11 and therapeutic recreation. A third of this courac includes supervised practice with penona who are
handicapped. (3 en.) B
ESP 416. METHODS OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION FOR HANDICAPPED PERSONS .
Prepare, teachen of the handicapped to plan, aaaeu, prescribe, teach, and evaluate special physical education
programs for penona who are mentally retarded, learning disabled, hearing impaired , visually handicapped,
emotionally diaturbed , orthopedically handicapped, and multi-handicapped . (4 en.) B
ESP 459 . STUDENT TEACHING. In the new comprehenaive curriculum, each courac has a practicum associated
with it that involves conaistent contact throughout each semester with apecial children. The Special Education ataff
memben make a concerted effort to ensure that Special Education majon are exposed to the full range of children
covered under the comprehenaive certification, i.e., mentally retarded, emotionally diaturbed, learning disabled,
brain damaged, and physically handicapped . Students are also expoaed to the dimenaiona of mild-profound and
elementary-aecondary since the new certification coven K-12, mild through profound, in each of the handicapping
areas for their atudent teaching experience. the areas relate to their specific vocational goals and their own intereata
and atrengtha . The major practicum, Student Teaching, provides an intenaive experience for the atudent in two of
the handicapping areas for a period of sixteen weeks . (12 en.) B
ESP 478. PSYCHO-SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT AND CLIENT COUNSELING. Examines the concept of
nonnalization and how the emphasis on the nonnalization of the experience, of handicapped clients in communitybaaed prognma ia vital to their succeaaful adjuatment. Methods for developing nonnalizing experiences are also
explored . (3 en.) B
ESP 479 . PROGRAM EVALUATION AND PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT. Thia courac ia intended to fulfill
the need of training of penonnel within community facilities who are required to perform management duties. The
environments for which the training techniques in the courac are designed include community living arrangements,
lheltered worklhops, adult activity centen (both therapeutic and work), and other human service providen and
community aocial welfare agencies . Competencies are developed that are knowledge- or infonnation-baacd as well
11 akill-baaed. (3 en.) B
336
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
ESP 490. PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM AND SCHOOL LAW. Meeta weekly to provide Special Education
majors working toward, a comprchenaivecertificate (Mentally Retarded, Emotionally Disturbed, Leaming Disabled,
Brain Damaged and Physically Handicapped) with an opportunity to diacuss problems encountered by the studenta
in their teaching experiences. The studenta arc provided with opportunities to demonatrate the effectiveness and
functionality of their teacher-made devices, learning centers, and curriculum materials uaed in their claaaroom. (2
era.) B
ESP 495. HONORS SEMINAR. (3 era.) B
ESP 498 . INTERNSHIP. Each student majoring in the Handicapped Persona Community Service Personnel
Training Program completes a one-semester (15-week) internship assigned to community agencies. Ten weelcs are
spent worlcifii in all phases of a community living arrangement (CLA), including client counseling, slcill training,
recreational planning, public rclationa, buaincss and personnel management, etc . Interns arc required to live at the
CLA facility when it i ■ conaidered essential to their training . The remaining five weeks of the internship arc spent
in another type of community program for the handicapped, such aa therapeutic activitiea centers, worlc activity
centers, adult development centers, sheltered workshops, etc . Studenta arc encouraged to identify the type of
agency they arc interested in and attcmpta arc made to arrange an appropriate affiliation. (Variable.) B
ESP 501. INTRODUCTION TO THE EXCEPTIONAL CHil.D. An introduction to handicapped children and to
the field of special education, examining the broad range of handicaps in children and their sociological,
educational, and vocational implicationa. (Variable.) B
ESP 502. EDUCATION OF THE SEVERELY/PROFOUNDLY HANDICAPPED. How to work with children
and adulta who display severe/profound learning and/or behavior problems. Studenta spend time tutoring at
facilities for this population. (Variable.) F
ESP 503 . DIAGNOSTIC TESTING AND PRESCRIPTIVE TEACHING . This course deals with both normreferenced and criterion-referenced testa and their use with exceptional children. Class participanta must administer
selected testa and preacribe remediation based on the resulta . (Variable.) S
ESP 504 AND ESP 505 . CURRICULUM PLANNING AND METHODS I AND II. Curriculum and Methods I
and II are a block of courses that are offered to Special Education majors the semester prior to their student
teaching experience. The major purpose of these courses is the inatruction of communication and arithmetic slcills
to all age groups of exceptional children. Specifically, Curriculum and Methods I is concerned with communication
slcills (reading-silent and oral-vocabulary development and comprehension) . Curriculum and Methods II
emphasizes arithmetic slcills. Both courses stress: (1) a behavioral diagnosis of communication and arithmetic
strengths and wealcnesses; (2) the development and implementation of intervention strategies for various populations
of exceptional children; (3) the selection and/or development of appropriate materials for instruction; and (4) the
procedures and techniques for continuous evaluation for the instructional process in order to determine
effectivencsa. (Variable.) B
ESP 506. HABILITATION TRAINING . This course deals with special education programs for senior high school
studenta as well as those persons who reside in the community. Emphasis is placed on vocational preparation and
training . Specific techniques for task analysis of jobs, daily living slcills, and social adaptation constitute a major
portion of this course. Emphasis is placed on the development of functional slcills that contribute to normalized
development. (Variable.) B
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
337
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PAIBOWGY AND AUDIOWGY
Associate Professor Albert E. Yates, chair. Professors R. Michael Feldman; Associate
Professors Charles A. Gismondi, D. Frank McPherson, Richard R. Nemec
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
SPEECH/LANGUAGE PAfflOLOGY
The experiences in the Speech Pathology and Audiology Department are integrated with
the overall undergraduate program in order to provide students with a broad understanding
of the needs of individuals who have communication disorders. The department also
provides clinical services for individuals who have communication disorders. Students
observe and/or assist in diagnostic evaluations and therapy programs. The work includes
experiences with individuals of all ages, ranging from pre-school to adult.
The undergraduate program in Speech Pathology and Audiology (SPA) is a
preprofessional degree program. Students, therefore, should be preparing themselves for
future graduate training in order to pursue a career in the profession of Speech/Language
Pathology. (At California University of Pennsylvania, teacher certification in SPA is not
offered as an undergraduate program, but may be obtained in graduate school.) Students
planning to complete the undergraduate program in SPA should maintain a grade point
average (GPA) sufficient to enhance the probability that they can be admitted to a graduate
program. Since unconditional admission to most graduate programs in SPA requires a 3. 0
GPA in the major area and a 2.8 overall GPA in undergraduate work, these are the
minimum goals which undergraduates should strive to achieve. To facilitate the attainment
of these goals, the faculty in SPA have determined that students should be maintaining the
following GPAs at the indicated points in their undergraduate program:
I
I
OVERALL GPA
I
SPA GPA
End of Freshman Year (32 credit hours)
2 .20
2 .50
End of Sophomore Year (64 credit hours)
2 .40
2 .65
End of Junior Year (96 credit hours)
2 .60
2 .80
Graduation (128 credit hours)
2 .80
3.00
I
Students who are not achieving the above standards will be counseled each semester
concerning the options which are available to them : (1) Make a more concerted effort to
improve their level of performance, (2) consider transferring to some other program, or (3)
graduate from the program with the minimum allowable GPA (2.3 overall and 2.5 in SPA),
but with the understanding that employment opportunities in the profession with only the
338
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S. degree will be extremely limited if not completely nonexistent. Every effort will be
made to assist students with whatever option they choose.
•
•
•
•
•
The objectives of this program are to:
Develop an understanding of the basic acoustical, anatomical, neurological, and normal
development of speech, language, and hearing;
Develop knowledge of the various disorders affecting speech and language and the
underlying pathologies and symptoms of the disorders;
Create awareness of the instruments and procedures available to assess speech and
language disorders and develop the ability to select and use such instruments correctly;
Develop the clinical skills to effectively perform therapeutic procedures to correct or
improve speech and language disorders;
Instill the principles and practices of ethical professional behavior.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education (56 credits): Humanities: 18 credits (from two disciplines), including Composition
1-11 (ENG 101-102) and Oral Communication(COM 101); Natural Sciences: 9 credits (from two disciplines); Social
Sciences: 9 credits (from two disciplines); 3 credits Health or Physical Activities; General Psychology (PSY 100);
Free Electives: 14 credits.
(B) ReJated Professional Courses (30 credits selected from adviser-approved university courses), including
Developmental Psychology (PSY 207), Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210) or Ethnic, Racial, and
Social Minorities (SOC 110), Computers for Teachers (EDF 301), Foundations of Education (EDF 100), and
Educational Psychology (PSY 110). (EDF 100 and PSY 110 are required only for Pennsylvania Certification.)
(C) Speech Pathology and Audiology (42 credits): ASHA Basic Science Requirements (selected from
matrix) : 6 credits in Biological Sciences, Physical Sciences, or Mathematica; 6 credits in Behavioral or Social
Sciences; Survey of Speech Pathology (SPA 100); Language and Speech Development (SPA 105); Phonetics (SPA
203); Anatomy and Physiology (SPA 204); Acoustics and Psychoacoustics (SPA 211); Speech Pathology I (SPA
300); Speech Pathology II (SPA 30 l ); Auditory Training and Speech Reading (SPA 302); Introduction to Audiology
(SPA 305); Clinical Practicum (SPA 400).
SPEECH PAfflOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY COURSES (SPA)
SPA 100. SURVEY OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY. This course introduces the student to the field of communication
disorders through a description of the communicatively handicapped. (3 era.)
SPA 105 . LANGUAGE AND SPEECH DEVELOPMENT. The course emphasis is on the normal development
of speech, language, and communication. The form and function of language are considered, i.e., phonology,
syntax, morphology, semantics, and pragmatics. (3 era.)
SPA 203. PHONETICS. Introduces practical phonology and phonetic, as they apply to the communicative proce11.
The student is required to learn and use the International Phonetic Alphabet. (3 era.)
SPA 204. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. The structure and normal function of the components of the human
body participating in the production of speech; how the function of these components may change during speech
production. Prerequisite: 6 er. in biological sciences. (3 era.)
SPA 211. ACOUSTICS AND PSYCHOACOUSTICS. This course will provide the student with a basic
understanding of how sound is generated and measured. In addition, the manner in which the human auditory
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
339
system encodes sound information and subsequently extracts meaning from it will be investigated. Prerequisite: 6
credits of Physical Science or Mathematics. (3 crs.)
SPA 300. SPEECH PATHOLOGY I. This course provides students with introductory knowledge of children with
language and speech disorders. They will become aware of procedures and principles utilized by speech-language
pathologists in the assessment and management of children with language and speech delays/disorders.
Prerequisites: SPA 100, 203 , 204 and 211. (3 crs.)
SPA 301 . SPEECH PATHOLOGY II. Primary emphasis is placed on several of the major speech disorders,
namely: fluency disorders, voice disorders, language disorders in adults, dysar1hria, apraxia, and dysphagia.
Prerequisites: SPA 203, 204, 211. (3 crs.)
SPA 302. AUDITORY TRAINING AND SPEECH READING . The course will emphasize work with hearing
handicapped individuals in the following areas: (a) diagnostic information; (b) speech reading methods; (c) auditory
training techniques; and (d) speech training for the aurally handicapped . Prerequisites : SPA 211 and 305. (3 crs.)
SPA 305. INTRODUCTION TO AUDIOLOGY. The course will provide the student with an understsnding of the
genetic and disease processes producing hearing loss in children and adults and the procedures used to assess
hearing loss and rehabilitste persons with hearing impairment. Prerequisite: SPA 204, 211. (3 crs.)
SPA 400. CLINICAL PRACTICUM. Provides the student clinician with a variety of therapeutic and evaluation
experiences with children or adults having speech, language or hearing disorders. Prerequisites: SPA 300 and 301 .
(3 crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
340
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
ATIIl..ETIC TRAINING EDUCATION
Associate Professor William B. Biddington, chair; Associate Professor Robert H. Kane, Jr.;
Assistant Professor Bruce D. Barnhart; Instructor, Joni L. Cramer
The Athletic Training Education Program provides interested students with the
opportunity to develop the leadership, responsibilities, and special skills necessary for a
career as a Certified Athletic Trainer. The basic concept of athletic training involves the
prevention, care, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic injuries. The Athletic Training
Education Program is a National Athletic Trainers' Association (NATA) approved
curriculum and is approved by the State Board of Physical Therapy. Modem athletic
training rooms are located in Hamer Hall and Adamson Stadium. The cadaver anatomy
laboratory is also located in Hamer Hall. The California University intercollegiate athletic
program, which is a strong NCAA Division II program and a member of the PSAC
. (Pennsylvania State Athletic Conference), comprises 14 varsity sports that enable students
to gain valuable experience as student athletic trainers.
The high incidence of injuries occurring through athletic participation has become a
national concern and has created demand for individuals who have completed athletic
training courses, fulfilled clinical requirements, and earned a minimum of a bachelor's
degree. Job opportunities for certified athletic trainers have increased substantially, and the
employment potential for athletic trainers should continue to increase. The ultimate goal of
this program is to prepare graduates for certification by the NATA and for careers in athletic
training. Many high schools hire athletic trainers to help provide better health care for their
interscholastic athletic programs. In addition, four-year colleges and universities and junior
and community colleges provide significant possibilities for employment. Positions with
professional teams exist; however, they are fewer in number than those associated with
school athletic programs. There is also growing employment in sports medicine and
rehabilitation clinics for athletic trainers.
Admission into the Athletic Training Education Program is competitive, and only a
limited number of students are selected each year. Applications for the Athletic Training
curriculum are accepted during the second semester of the freshman year and screened by
the Admissions and Academic Standards Committee (AASC). During the first semester of
the sophomore year, -the student submits a letter of application to the AASC, which screens,
interviews, and selects the remaining students to a maximum number of ten. Criteria for
selection are a minimum of a 2.75 QPA, 350 observation hours over a three-semester
period, interpersonal skills, and other qualifications, which can be obtained from the
Program Director of the Athletic Training Education Program.
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
341
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ATHLETIC TRAINING EDUCATION (SINGLE MAJOR)
This program will lead a prospective student to a Bachelor of Science degree in
Education without teacher certification.
Curriculum:
(A) Gmeral F.ducation: IS credit, in Humanities including Oral Communication (COM 101); English
Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credit, in Natural Sciences; 9 credit, in Social Sciences; 2 credit, in Physical
Activitie, and 37 credit, of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Practicum Athletic Training I, Il (ATE 100, 110); Substance Abuse Education
(ATE 120); Human Anatomy of the Extremities 1-Il (ATE 200, 210); Health (HPE 100); two courac1 in
Psychology; Kinesiology (HPE 310); Physiology of Exercise (HPE 311); Athletic Training 1-Il (ATE 220, 260);
Administrative Aspect, of Athletic Training (ATE 230); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Human
Physiology for Athletic Trainen (ATE 250); Nutrition for Sports (ATE 230); Emergency Medical Technician (HPE
500); Modality Principles and Techniques with Laboratory (ATE 320); Therapeutic Exercise with Laboratory (ATE
330); Orthopedic Evaluations in Sports Medicine (ATE 400); and Special Topics in Sports Medicine (ATE 450).
Clinical houn: minimum of 800 houn during junior and senior ycan.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ATHLETIC TRAINING/SECONDARY EDUCATION
DUAL MAJOR WITH:
Biology
Chemistry
Communication (Speech)
Communication (Theatre)
Early Childhood
Earth Science
Elementary Education
English
Foreign Languages
General Science
Mathematics
Physics
Social Studies
Special Education
The dual major in Athletic Training/Secondary Education enables interested students to
pursue the education and training necessary for a dual career as effective teachers and
athletic trainers. The requirements listed below are for the Athletic Training component
alone. Students interested in this program should contact the Program Director of the
Athletic Training Education Program for details on the dual major. This program also
requires satisfactory performance on the NTE in order to receive a Pennsylvania teaching
certificate.
342
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
Curriculum:
(A) Genen1 Education: 15 credita in Humanities including Oral Communication (COM 101); English
Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 9 credita in Social Sciences; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 2 credita in Physical
Activities. (Certain programs require specific counes in these areas).
(B) Area or Concentration: Human Anatomy of the Extremities 1-11 (ATE 200, 210); Practicum Athletic
Training I, II (ATE 100, 110); Substance Abuse Education (ATE 120); Health Co-ed (HPE 100); General
Psychology (PSY 100); Kinesiology (HPE 310); Physiology of Exercise (HPE 311); Emergency Medical Technician
(HPE 500); Athletic Training 1-11 (ATE 220, 260); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainera (ATE 230); Nutrition
for Sport, (ATE 240); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainers (ATE 250); Modality Principles and Techniques
with Laboratory (ATE 320); Therapeutic Exercise with Laboratory (ATE 330); Orthopedic Evaluations in Sporta
Medicine (ATE 400) and Special Topic• in Sports Medicine (ATE 450). Clinical experience: minimum of 800
hours during junior and senior years.
(C) Professional Education Requirements: Al required by the College of Education and Human Services.
(D) Professional Specialization (Second Major): Al required by the specific major.
A'IHLETIC TRAINING COURSES (ATE)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
ATE 100. PRACTICUM ATHLETIC TRAINING I. The basic mechanical techniques of athletic training, 111ch
as taping, transportation, modality usage, maintenance of equipment, record keeping, etc. (1 er.) F
ATE 110. PRACTICUM ATHLETIC TRAINING II. A continuation of Practicum Athletic Training I; taping,
evaluationa, rehabilitation equipment, etc. Prerequisite: ATE 100. (1 er.) S
ATE 120. SUBSTANCE ABUSE EDUCATION . The knowledge of substance abuse as it relate, to athletics and
competition, drug testing procedures as enforced by governing a880Ciationa, and the prevention and treatment of
substance abuse.
ATE 200. HUMAN ANATOMY OF THE EXTREMITIES I. The organization, structures, and functiona of the
human body: the development of the cell, tissues, integumentary system, digestive system, respiratory system,
urinary system, reproductive system, lymphatic and cardiovascular systems. (3 era.) F
ATE 210. HUMAN ANATOMY OF THE EXTREMITIES II. The organization, structure■ and functions of the
human body; the development and function of the skeletal system, ligament and joint structure, muscular system,
and the nervous system. Prerequisite: ATE 200. (3 era.) S
ATE 220. ATHLETIC TRAINING I. The basic prevention, care, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic injuries;
understanding and demonstrating how to develop a conditioning program, basic evaluation of injuries, and how to
manage them, and other topics related to sport, medicine. Prerequisites: Open to curriculum studenta only . (3 era.)
F
ATE 230. ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS OF ATHLETIC TRAINING . The administrative functions, litigation,
staff relationships, ethics, budget and supplies, inventory, facility design, maintenance, safety assesament, student
trainer organization and risum6 writing. Prerequisites: Open to curriculum students only. (1 er.) S
ATE 240. NUTRITION FOR SPORTS. Nutrition and its applications to health and sport,: designed to provide the
student with a sound nutritional background 10 that ■ound decisions may be made concerning all aspecta of
nutrition. Additionally, specific nutritional techniques used to improve athletic performance are addressed. (3 era.)
F
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
343
ATE 250. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY FOR ATHLETIC TRAINERS . An introductory course in human physiology
examining the function of the body' s major systems. Particular attention is given to those systems of interest to
prospective athletic trainers. Prerequisites: ATE 200, 210. (3 crs.) S
ATE 260. ATHLETIC TRAINJNG Il. The spine and its extremities; the evaluation techniques that are used to
determine the degree of injury found in the clinical setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (3 crs.)
s
ATE 320. MODALITY PRJNCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES WITH LABORATORY. Lectures and laboratory
exercises that explain the use and theory of physical therapy modalities that are used in the sports medicine clinical
setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (4 crs.) F
ATE 330. THERAPEUTIC EXERCISE WITH LABORATORY. Lectures and laboratory exercises that explain
the use and theory of therapeutic exercise and equipment used for rehabilitation in the sports medicine setting.
Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (4 crs.) S
ATE 400. ORTHOPEDIC EVALUATIONS 1N SPORTS MEDICJNE. Clinical evaluations of injured athletes by
the student and the physician to be used in determining the extent of an injury. The student will register for this
course again in a consecutive semester. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only . (1 er.) F S
ATE 450. SPECIAL TOPICS 1N SPORTS MEDICJNE. Orienta the advanced student to research and
experimentation in sports medicine and athletic training. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (3 crs.)
F
344
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
THEATRE (THE)
See also the program in Secondary Education Communication Certification (pages 164-165
in this catalog.)
Professor Roger C. Emelson, chair. Associate Professor Malcolm P. Callery; Assistant
Professor Michael J. Slavin; Instructor Richard James Helldobler
PURPOSE
As one of the performing arts, the theatre is a means of self-expression and social
communication. Whether studying pure dramatic expression or musical dramatic expression,
the objective is to understand how speech, as well as the non-verbal aspects of a production,
such as lighting, movement, scenery and costumes, communicates ideas and emotion and
how they have been used and are used for entertainment, education, reform and other social
purposes. The study of the dramatic arts serves not only Theatre majors but those in other
disciplines concerned with human interaction and symbolic expression, e.g., Art,
Communication Studies, Political Science, Sociology, English, and Psychology. Students
who are aware of the history and technology associated with the theatre hopefully will be,
as participants, whether as actors or viewers, more appreciative of this art form.
PROGRAM
Theatre is an undergraduate degree program in the College of Liberal Arts. Theatre
also is one option of the teacher certification program in Communication. Persons who
receive certification in this area can teach English, Theatre, Speech, and Non-Print Media.
The student interested in the certification program should contact the College of Education
and Human Services. A master's degree program in Communication that includes theatre
studies is available through the School of Graduate Studies.
The Theatre Program as a whole serves a dual function. It provides occupational
education and training for talented students who wish to pursue a career in Theatre, and it
provides not only educational but performance opportunities for all students on campus. The
addition of six dance courses, which range from basic ballet to theatre dance, gives the
major a competitive advantage in professional preparation.
The Theatre Department annually presents four on-campus play, dance and musical
productions. Dance concerts which combine classical ballet and modem jazz contribute to
the university's performing arts presentations. At Linden Hall, a nearby conference and
recreation center, the department sponsors the Valley Theatre Company, which produces six
plays and musicals from May through October. In cooperation with the Student Association,
Incorporated, the department also sponsors three play-producing groups: the University
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
345
credits. It is expected that each experience will be in a different area of play production.
Theatre majors are required to take one practicum credit during each regularly enrolled
term. A major must have a minimum of eight practicum credits. Practicum grades are
awarded on the faculty advisor's evaluation of the quality of work performed and on the
completion of the work hours agreed to at the time the practicum is undertaken.
The Theatre Department recognizes student achievement. It rewards creative excellence
by offering opportunities for upper level students to produce a musical variety show and to
direct or design theatrical productions.
The University's Steele Auditorium has a seating capacity of 955. It has a proscenium
stage, a 16-channel sound mixer with multiple microphone and line inputs on stage, and is
undergoing a complete renovation of its lighting system. The theatre also has scenery,
lighting, costume, and property areas.
HONOR SOCIETY
Since 1938, outstanding students annually have been elected to the University Players'
Hall of Fame. Membership in Alpha Psi Omega (A~O), the national honor society, can be
achieved through active participation in theatre productions.
CAREERS
Graduates work throughout the country in professional and semi-professional theatre,
in film and television, rehabilitational theatre, teaching, recreation, public relations, interior
decoration, and arts management.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101-102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area Concentration: Required: 29 credits of Introduction to the Theatre (THE 100); Ballet Technique
(THE 121); Fundamentals of Acting (THE 131); Stagecraft I (THE 151); History of the Theatre I & Il (THE 261
& 262); Production, Rehearsal and Performance (THE 392); Theatre Practicum (THE 350-358); 24 credits of
theatre electives; 15 credits of related electives in disciplines closely related to Theatre.
or
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
346
THEATRE COURSES (THE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
All the Theatre courses are offered during a student's four-year matriculation at California
University.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +).
+THE 100 INTRODUCTION TO THE THEATRE. A survey of the art and craft of the theatre from play script
to play production. Theatre history and literature, acting, directing, design, and playhouse architecture are studied
to discover what goes on in the theatre and what it all means. Students will be aaaigned as cast or crew for
departmental productions during the term in which they are enrolled. Students can expect to participate in claaaroom
performances. (3 era.) F,S
+THE 101. VOICE AND SPEECH. A practical and useful course for the performer or anyone who wants a
flexible , strong, controlled voice. The Lessac method involving the natural ways in which the body produces vocal
sounds is primarily studied for clear and articulate speech which is free of regional qualities, affectation, imitation,
and annoying physical habits. The course also involves trsnacription of the International Phonetic Alphabet for
correct pronunciation. (3 era.) F
+THE 102. VOICE AND INTERPRETATION. Methods of analysis and presentation for effective oral reading
of dramatic literature, prose and poetry. (3 era.) S
+THE 121. BALLET TECHNIQUE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to ballet as
practiced in western Europe and in the United States. Basic techniques include barre exercises, port de bras and
center practice with jumps, beats, and turns. This course is suitable for the student who has no previous experience.
(3 era.) F
THE 122. BALLET TECHNIQUE ll. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of techniques
demonstrated in specialized study and drill. Emphasis is placed on quicker retention of complex combinations.
Further emphasis is placed on center work to develop the student's artistry in the dance form. Prerequisite : Ballet
Technique I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student' • experience
and ability. (1-3 era.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of 7 credits to count toward graduation.) S
+THE 126 MAKEUP. This course covers modeling the face and the body with makeup, and the addition ofthreedimensional prostheses. Historical, specific character, fantasy, corrective, street and fashion makeup will be
researched, designed and applied . Students with an advanced interest will construct three-dimensional prostheses
and hair pieces. (3 era.)
+THE 131. FUNDAMENTALS OF ACTING. An introduction to the development of the basic tools of the actor' s
craft, and personal discipline for the actor through the use of acting exercises, sensitivity exercises, theatre games
and improvisation. (3 era.) F
+THE 151. STAGECRAFT I. Introduction to the theory and practice of stagecraft, involving basic set
construction, painting and plan reading. Practical experience for students majoring in performance media . (3 era.)
F
THE 152. STAGECRAFT ll. Advanced practice and principles of scenery and property construction. Practical
experience with plastics, metals, silk screening, drafting and advanced woodworking is stressed . Prerequisite:
Stagecraft I or permission of instructor. (3 era.) S
THE 200. FUNDAMENTALS OF DIRECTING. The comprehensive study of a director's pre-production planning
for a play presented on stage, film or television. The directorial analysis of plays and basic fundamentals of
composition, picturization, pantomime with properties, movement, and ground plan are studied. The in-claaa
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
347
prepantion of a complete directorial script for a one-act or cuning from a longer play may be directed as part of
a public prognm of student-directed plays. (3 crs .) S
THE 211. LIGIITING I. The basic theory and pnctice of lighting for the stage, film, and television. Pnctical
experience for student& majoring in performance media is stressed. (3 crs.) F
THE 212. LIGIITING D. Advanced pnctice of lighting for the stage, television and film. Pnctical application for
students majoring in performance media is stressed. Prerequisite: Lighting I or consent of the instructor. (3 crs.)
s
+THE 220. JAZZ TECHNIQUE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to American jazz
dance. Lengthening muscles and developing isolation techniques are pncticed as necessary for most forms of jazz
dance. The Luigi Technique which includes standing and floor warm-up, stretch and center pnctice in jumps, turns
and isolations is studied . (3 crs.) F
THE 221. JAZZ TECHNIQUE D. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of jazz techniques
as demonstnted in specialized study and drill . Emphasis is placed on quicker retention of complex combinations.
Further emphasis is placed on center work to develop the student's artistry in the dance form . Prerequisite: Jazz
Technique I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student's experience
and ability . (1-3 crs.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of 7 credits to count toward gnduation.) S
THE 225 . COSTUME CONSTRUCTION. Basic pattern dnfting and sewing techniques applied to the construction
of costumes. (3 crs.)
THE 231. INTERMEDIATE ACTING . The development of a personal and useful acting method to create
believable chancters for the stage. The acting method is developed through intense scene work that includes
chancter and script analysis. Prerequisite: Fundamentals of Acting or consent of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
+THE 240. CREATIVE DRAMATICS. The stimulation and development of creativity through playmaking
exercises, storytelling, improvisation and sensitivity techniques useful for potential teachers and parenta. (3 crs.)
FS
THE 245 . CHILDREN'S THEATRE. The selection, direction and production of plays for children. (May be
repeated for credit.) (3 crs.)
+TH_E 255 . PUPPETRY. The planning and production of puppet plays. (3 crs.)
+THE 257. HISTORY OF COSTUME. A survey of the history of costume in the western world . (3 crs.)
+THE 261. HISTORY OF THE THEATRE I. The development of the theatre from the Classic through the
Baroque, including representative plays. (3 crs.) F
THE 262. HISTORY OF THE THEATRE D. The development of the theatre from the Baroque to the present day,
including representative plays . (3 crs .) S
+THE 263. AMERICAN THEATRE HISTORY . A survey of the American theatre from Colonial times to the
present, including representative plays. (3 crs.) F
THE 270. READERS THEATRE. The principles and pnctice of organizing and presenting Readers Theatre
presentations. Prerequisite: THE 102 or COM 111 or permission of instructor. (3 crs.)
THE 300. THEATRE DANCE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to the various dance
forms used in musical theatre. The forms are tap, jazz, ballet, ethnic and modem dance . Choreognphic styles as
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
348
originated by Agnes DeMille, Bob Fosse, Jerome Robbins and Jack Cole will be demonstrated and applied .
Prerequisite: Ballet Technique D, Jazz Technique Dor permission of the instructor. (3 crs.)
THE 301. THEATRE DANCED. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of modem dance
techniques as demonstrated in specialized study and drill. Emphasis is placed on principles stressed in Theatre
Dance I with the addition of character shoes for women, partnering work and stage combat. Prerequisite: Theatre
Dance I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student' s experience and
ability. (1-3 crs.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of7 credits to count toward graduation.)
+THE 305 . SHAKESPEARE IN THE THEATRE. Representative Shakespearean plays studied as theatrical
presentations. (3 crs.)
THE 315. WORLD DRAMA ON STAGE. Classical to nineteenth-century plays (excluding Shakespeare) studied
as theatrical preaentations. (3 era.) F
THE 317. MODERN DRAMA ON STAGE. Nineteenth and twentieth-century plays studied as theatrical
presentations. (3 crs.) S
THE 323 . SCENERY DESIGN I. Introduction to the theory and practice of designing scenery for various
environments . Prerequisite: Stagecraft I or permission of the instructor. (3 crs .) F
THE 324. SCENERY DESIGN D. Advanced theory and practice of designing scenery for various environments .
Prerequisite: Scenery Design I or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
THE 325. COSTUME DESIGN . Basic principles of costume design. Students complete various design projects
for specific plays selected from a variety of historical periods. (3 crs.)
THE 328 . SCENE PAINTING. The practice of scenery painting for the theatre. Students work with a variety of
paints, texturing materials, and application techniques. Emphasis is placed on enlarging an existing art work to a
size suitable for the stage. (3 era.)
THE 330. ADVANCED ACTING. This course challenges the actor' s ability to demonstrate a personal and useful
acting method through a wide range of problems as found in historical and modem plays, and in acting styles.
Prerequisite: Intermediate Acting or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
THEATRE - CHANGE IN PRACTICUM LISTING . Theatre practicum is the application of learned skills in
all areas of theatre and dance. Credit is variable. Maximum number of credits per term is five; maximum that
will count toward graduation is eighteen. Courses numbered THE 350 through THE 358 are practicums that can
be repeated up to 5 credits each . Courses THE 357 and 358 can be repeated, but cannot exceed 10 credits.
+THE 350.
+THE 351.
+THE 352.
+THE 353.
+THE 354.
+THE 355.
+THE 356 .
+THE 357.
+THE 358 .
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
ACTING.
DANCE.
DIRECTING.
DESIGN.
MANAGEMENT.
TECHNICAL DIRECTOR.
TECHNICAL PRODUCTION.
TOURING THEATRE.
SUMMER THEATRE.
THE 392. PRODUCTION, REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE. Special acting, directing, management and
design, or technical involvement in a play production. Prerequisite: Senior level only. (3 crs.) F S
THE 400. DRAMATIC THEORY AND CRITICISM. Theories of dramatic structure and their application to
theatrical presentations. (3 crs.) S
349
GOVERNANCE
The State System of Higher Education
California University of Pennsylvania:
Administrative Officers and Staff
Faculty and Administration
Emeriti Faculty
350
STATE SYSTEM OF IIlGHER EDUCATION
THE STATE SYSTEM OF IDGHER EDUCATION
OF
THE COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA
James H. McCormick, Chancellor
Emily Hannah
Vice-Chancellor
Academic Policy and Planning
Wayne G. Failor
Vice-Chancellor
Finance and Administration
Edward P. Kelley, Jr.
Vice-Chancellor
Employee and Labor Relations
Sarah V. Souris
Vice-Chancellor
Advancement
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
F . Eugene Dixon, Jr., Chairperson
Judy Ansill, Vice-chairperson
James L. Larson, Vice-chairperson
Muriel Berman
The Honorable Donald M. Carroll, Jr.
The Honorable Jeffrey W. Coy
Jennifer Crissman
G. Edward DeSeve
Floyd M. Mains
Mary Napoli
Joseph M. Nespoli
Darren K. Parr
Philip D. Rowe, Jr.
Rebecca F. Gross
The Honorable Jere W. Schuler
James A. Hughes
The Honorable Patrick J. Stapleton
The Honorable F. Joseph Loeper
Julius Uehlein
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
351
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
John Pierce Watkins, President
COUNCIL OF TRUSTEES
Judy Ansill, Chairperson
Carmine Durzo, Vice-chairperson
Aaron Selekman, Secretary and Student Trustee
William F. Barry
Gail Lese
Robert Billick
Frank Mascara
Frank DeLuca
Gwendolyn Simmons
Paul Lemmon
Steven Stout
352
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
ACADEMIC AFFAIRS
Vice-President for Academic Affairs
Nancy Z. Nelson
Acting Associate Vice-President for Academic Affairs
Donald J. Thompson
George W. Crane
Dean, School of Graduate Studies and Research
Stephen A. Pavlak
Dean, College of Education and Human Services
Acting Associate Dean, College of Education and Human Services
Regis Lamr
Director of Student Teaching
Betty A. Ford
Dean, College of Science and Technology
Richard B. Hart
Associate Dean, College of Science and Technology
Harry M. Langley
Dean, College of Liberal Arts
Jesse A. Cignetti
Associate Dean, College of Liberal Arts
Walter A. Brumm
William L. Beck
Dean of Library Services
Library Systems Analyst
Kathleen A. Joki
Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services
Norman G. Hasbrouck
Assistant Director of Admissions
Amy C. Woodward
Assistant Director of Admissions
Jeannine Metal
Director, Placement and Career Services
Stephanie Lashway
Assistant Director, Placement and Career Services
Charles E. Talbert
Coordinator, Cooperative Education
Dawn Wilson DePasquale
Director of Institutional Research
Richard L. Kline
Director of Honors Program
Jay R. Powell
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
Vice-President for Student Development and Services
Dean of Students
Dean of Student Life/University Judicial Officer
Dean for Student Services
Associate Dean for Residence Life
Director, University Dining Services
Associate Dean for Support Services, Director for Social Equity
Director, Women's Center, Disabled Services
Associate Dean for Student Services
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Elmo Natali
Paul E. Burd
Phillip L. Hayes
Dennis Riegelnegg
William F. Behrendt
Lenora Angelone
Alan K. James
Alberta Graham
Tim Susick
Paul Bums
Colleen Crooks
William Edmonds
Shawn Urbine
Leslie Louse
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
Athletic Director
Associate Athletic Director
Dean/International Student Adviser
Counseling Psychologist
Counseling Psychologist
Counselor, Drug & Alcohol Specialist, Director of CHOICES
Campus Ministry
Director of Student Publications
Executive Director, Student Association, Inc.
Assistant Director, Student Association, Inc.
Operations Manager, Student Association, Inc.
Program Director, Student Association, Inc.
Assistant Program Director, Student Association, Inc.
Systems Analyst
Comptroller, Student Association, Inc.
Director, Fitness Center
University Physician
Head Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
Nurse Educator
Manager, Book Store, Student Association, Inc.
Manager, University Dining Services
353
Tom Pucci
Paul Flores
Nancy J. Tait
Lynn R. Surrey
Dawn Moeller
Liz Gruber
Sr. Karen Larkins
William Bennett
Paul E. Burd
Barry Niccolai
Dave Smith
Jay R. Wheeler
John G. Watkins
Richard Olshefski
Anna Coleman
Paul Fazio
Raymond Nino, M.D.
Celeste H.Roskevitch
Virginia Saunders
Mary Ann Keruskin
Lois Sheridan
Bernice Barnhart
Claudia Martucci
Janet Todaro
Norma Snyder
Linda Timko
Paul Taylor
354
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
Vice-President for Administration and Finance
Associate Vice President for Administration and Finance
Comptroller
Director of Computer Services
Director of Financial Aid
Director of Grants
Director of Health and Safety
Director of Personnel
Director of Physical Plant
Director of Public Safety
Director of Purchasing
Director of Budget
Inventory and Facilities Officer
Director of Payroll
Allan J. Golden
Eugene P. Grilli
Vacant
Richard E. Cerullo
Gary Seelye
Sandra Huska
Thomas Hartley, Sr.
Penelope Stanick
Thomas Jameson
Jack Duvall
Carl Maurer
Charles W. Zinsser, Jr.
Vacant
Margaret M. Wilson
DEVELOPMENT AND EXTERNAL RELATIONS
Vice-President for Development and External Relations
Executive Director, Mon Valley Renaissance
Director of Alumni Relations
Director of Public Relations
Homer R. Pankey
Richard H. Webb
Pauline M. Tonsetic
Cleo C. Boyle
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
355
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION
(The date is that of first appointment to California University of Pennsylvania.)
M . EILEEN AIJCBN. (1969) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY BDUCATION
B.S., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ed.D., Brigham
Young Univenity
DBNCIL K. BACKUS. (1983) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
A.B., Glenville State College; M.A. , West Virginia Univenity
MITCHELL M. BAILEY. (1959) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIBNCES
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Rutgen Univenity
JAN W . BAWN0. (1966) PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVIRONMENTALSCIBNCES
B.A., Univenity of Louisville; M .S., Purdue University; Ph .D ., Univenity of Louisville
ROI.UN M . BARBER. (1976) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.S ., Ohio State Univenity; M .S. , Ohio State Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity
BRUCE D . BARNHART. (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; A.T .C.
JOHN F. BAUMAN. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A. , Uninua College; M.A., Temple Univenity; Ph.D., Rutgen Univenity
ROBERT A. BAUMAN. (1968) PROFESSOR, SPl!CIAL EDUCATION
B.S., Geneseo College; M .S., Indiana Univenity; Ed.D., Indiana Univenity
WILLIAM J. BBARDSLEY. (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BN0USH
B.A., West Virginia University; M.A., West Virginia Univenity
WILLIAM L. BBCK. (1970) OHAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.L.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh
WIWAM F. BEHRENDT. (1971) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, STUDENT SERVICES; OHAN FOR RESIDENCE UFB
B.S. , California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Univenity of Pittaburgh
PBT8R J. BBLCH. (1968) PROFESSOR AND COORDINATOR OF 0RADUATB PROORAM, special education
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ed.D., West Virginia
Univenity
WIWAM BENNETT. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BN0USH; DIRECl'OR OF STUDENT PUBUCATIONS
B.A., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M .A., Univenity of Pittaburgh
ROBERT M . BERRY. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.A. , Univenity of Maine; M .A., Univeraity of Maine
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
356
JOHN A. BHYER.. (1963) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.Ed ., Duquemc Univenity; M.Ed ., Duquesne Univenity; M. Math., Univenity of South Carolina
Wll.JJAM B. BIDDINOTON. (1977) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S ., Welt Virginia Univenity; M .S., Welt Virginia Univenity; A.T.C.
FOSTER E. BILLHEIMBR. (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCBS
B.S., PcMtylvania State Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Texas; Ph.D., Rutgen Univenity
JOHN C. BLACK. (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BDUCATIONALSTUDIES
B.S., Clarion Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D ., Univenity of Pitllburah
JERRY M . BLACKMON . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB; DIRl!CTOR, P.C .
LABS
B.S., Oklahoma State Univenity; M .S., Oklahoma State Univenity; Regiatcrcd Profeuional Engineer
(Electrical) P.E.
WIIJJAM F . BLANK. (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A.T. , Duke Univenity
G. H . BLAYNEY. (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EN0USH
B.A., Lafayette College; M.A ., Brown Univenity; B.Litt., Univenity of Oxford
Wll.JJAM F . BLOSEL. (1976) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., PeMtylvania State Univenity; M.B.A., Univenity of Pittsburgh; C .P.A.
MARCELLA A. RYE BLOUT. (1968) PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., Welt Virginia University; Ed.D., Welt Virginia
Univenity
DAVID F. BoEHM. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Welt Liberty State College; M.S., Welt Virginia Univenity; Ph.D ., Welt Virginia Univenity
MARKE. BRONAKOWSKI. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of PeMtylvania
BURREU. A. BROWN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S. , California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .B.A., Univenity of Pitllburgh; J .D ., Univenity of Pitllburgh
EDWARD BROWN. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SOCIAL WORK
B.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M.L .S., Carnegie Mellon Univenity; M .S.W., Univenity of Pitllburgh
ROBERT A. BROWN. (1969) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
B.A., University of New Hampshire; M .Ed., Univenity of Pitllburgh; Ph.D., University of Pitllburgh
WALTER A. BRUMM. (1988) ASSOCIATE DEAN, COI.J.JlOE OF UBERALARTS
B.A., Wittenberg Univenity; B.D., Methodist Theological School of Ohio; M .A., Kent State Univenity;
Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
357
THOMAS P. BUCKELEW.
(1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Muhlenberg College; M .S., Univenity of South Carolina; Ph .D., Univenity of South Carolina
(1969) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DEAN OF STUDENTS
B.A., West Virginia Univenity; M.A., Well Virginia Univenity; Ed.D., Well Virginia Univenity
PAULE. BURD .
(1969) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY
B.A., Univenity of Notre Dame; M .A., Univenity of Toronto; J.D., Duquesne Univenity
JOHN J . BURNS.
MALcolM P. CALLERY.
(1978) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, THEATRE
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .F .A., Southern Illinois Univenity
N. CAMPBELL. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B. Ed ., Southeastern Louisiana Univenity; M.S. , Univenity of Illinois; Ph.D., Univenity of Illinois
DAVID
(1973) PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S., Bucknell University; Ph.D., University of PittBburgh
DoROTHY M. CAMPBELL.
(1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Univenity of Massachusetts; M .S., Eastern Kentucky Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of North Dakota
JOHN P . CARROLL.
(1990) INSTRUCTOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., Marshall University; M .A ., Ohio University
JAMES 0. CARTER .
(1967) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Brigham
Young Univenity
RAYMOND A. CATALANO .
M . ARsHAD CHAWDHRY . (1976) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., University of Agriculture (Pakistan); M.S., Univenity of Agriculture (Pakistan); M.A., Univenity of
Maryland; M .S., University of Illinois; Ph .D., Univenity of Illinois
A. CHRIST . (1970) PROFESSOR, EU!MENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., University of PittBburgh; M.Ed ., University of PittBburgh; Ed.D., Pennsylvania State University
RONALD
(1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF FRESHMAN WRITING, ENGLISH
B.A., St. Vincent College; M.A ., University of Minnesota; Ph.D., Univenity of Minnesota.
EDWARD J . CHUTE.
A. CIGNll1TI. (1968) DEAN, COLl..llOE OF LIBERAL ARTS
B.S., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Duquesne Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity
JESSE
CLYDE W. CLENDANIEL.
(1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A.T., Indiana Univenity
M . CLINGERMAN . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.A., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.B.A., West Virginia Univenity
DEBRA
(1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.A., Harvard College; M.A., Tufts University; Ph.D., University of PittBburgh
lsMAIL COLE.
358
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
(1967) PROFESSOR, BNGLISH
B.S ., Southern Illinois University; M.A., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of Illinoi ■
PHILIP Y. COLEMAN.
(1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, HARTH SCIENCES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.S., California
University of Pennsylvania
DoNALD J. CONTE.
ELAINE S. COSTEU.O.
(1966) INSTRUCTOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S . , California University of Pennsylvania
ROBERT C. COWLES .
(1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF FORENSIC ACTIVITIES, COMMUNICATION
STUDIES
B.A., Marietta College; M .A., Bowling Green State University
JONI
L. CRAMER . (1991) INSTRUCTOR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S ., West Virginia University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; A.T.C .
(1969) DEAN, GRADUATE SCHOOL AND RESEARCH
B.S ., State University of New York at Brockport; M.S., State University of New York at Fredonia; Ph.D.,
Ohio University
GEORGE W . CRANE.
(1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
ALBERT DASCENZO .
J. DEFILIPPO . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., California University of Pennsylvania; D .A., Carnegie
BERNARD
Mellon University
ANETTB M . DENARDO .
(1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
(1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A., West Liberty State College; M.A., West Virginia University
MANUEL G. DEMETRAXIS.
(1991) INSTRUCTOR AND REFERENCE LIBRARIAN , LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S ., Radford University; M.S., Radford University; M.L.S. , Florida State University
AUCH G . DENNISON .
(1990) COORDINATOR, COOPERATIVE EDUCATION
B.A., Grove City College; M .A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania
DAWN WILSON DEPASQUALE.
(1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D ., West
Virginia University
ELWIN DICKERSON.
F . DICJCJE. (1966) PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION
B.S., Bridgewater State College; M .A., Michigan State University; Ed .D., Michigan State University
ROBERT
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
359
ROBERT W. DILLON, SR. (1970) PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
A.B., Fairfield University; M.A., Ohio University; Ph.D ., Ohio University
GAILS. DITJCOFF. (1986) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., State University of New York at BinaJamton; M.S., State University of New York at Albany; Ph .D.,
State University of New York at Albany
PAUL P. DoUNAR. (1968) ASSOCtATB PROFESSOR, MUSIC
B.S., Duquesne University; M.Ed., Duquesne University
THEODORE L. DoMINICK. (1969) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIBNCB
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Weat Virginia University
RONALD G. DREUCCI. (1973) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D., West
Virginia University
RAYMONDE. DUNLEVY. (1978) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
DILAWAR MUMBY EDWARDS. (1972) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
I.Sc ., St. Aloyaiua' College, Jabalpur, India; B.E. (Hon■.), Govt. Engineering College, Jabalpur, India;
M .E.(I), Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India; M .Sc. in Ed., Indiana University; Ph.D., Indiana
University
FRANKT. EDWARDS. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Antioch College; B.S., Georgetown School of Foreign Service; M.A., Georgetown University; Ph .D. ,
Catholic Univenity of America
ROGER C. EMELSON. (1961) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, THEATRE
· B.A. , Beloit College; M .F .A., Carnegie Mellon University; Ph.D ., Carnegie Mellon University
HARRY L . ERVIN . (1971) INSTRUCTOR, HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
B.S ., Hardin-Simmon■ College
R . MICHAEL FELDMAN . (1969) PROFESSOR, SPF.llCH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.A., University of Iowa; Ph .D., Northweatcm University; CCC Audiology
ANTONIO J. FERNANDES. (1961) ASSOCtATB PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB
B.A., Well Virginia University; M.S., Weat Virginia University
SUMNER FERRIS. (1964) ASSOCtATE PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Harvard College
PAUL A. FLoRES. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ATHumcs; ASSOCtATE DIRECTOR OF ATHumcs;
WOMEN 'S BASKllTBALL COACH
B.S. , Eaat Stroudsburg University of Pennsylvania; M.S., East Stroudsburg University of Pennsylvania
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
360
L. FOIL. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF TELEVISION STUDIO, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
8.S .S., Northwestern University; M.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D ., Northwestern University
SYLVIA
J.
K. FOLMAR.. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Samford University; M.A., Binningham-Southern College; Ph.D., University of Alabama (l'uacalooaa)
BETTY A . FORD . (1989) DIRECTOR STUDENT TEACHING, COLI.EOE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
B.A., Fairmont State College; M .A., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., Ohio University
(1968) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ENGLISH
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., North Dakota State University
RONALD L. FORSYTHE.
(1966) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
8.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , West Virginia University; Ph.D., The Ohio State
University
GEOROE J . FRANOOS .
Fusco. (1967) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
8 .S., Duquesne University; M .S., Duquesne University; Ph.D., University of Colorado
GABRIEL C .
E. GABOR . (1964) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., West Virginia University; M .S., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., West Virginia University
WILUAM
(1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.A., Washington and Jefferson College; M .A., Michigan State University
JOHNS . GIBSON, JR.
(1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
8.S ., Carnegie Mellon University; M.Ed ., University of Pittsburgh; M .Pub.Mgmt., Carnegie Mellon
University
LIZBETH A . GILLE'ITE.
CHARLES A. GISMONDI.
COACH
(1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPEECH PATHOLOOY AND AUDIOLOOY; HEAD BASEBALL
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.S ., West Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology
(1981) VICE-PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
B.A., Fairleigh Dickinson University; M .A.T., Fairleigh Dickinson University; Ph .D ., New York University
Ail.AN J . GOLDEN .
MAx A. GONANO . (1982) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MUSIC; DIRECTOR OF BANDS
B.F.A., Carnegie Mellon University; M.F.A., Carnegie Mellon University
(1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.A., Pennsylvania State University
JUDITH A . GooD .
JACK
D. GOODSTEIN. (1967) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ENGLISH
B.A., Queens College; M.A., New York University; Ph .D ., New York University
(1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
8 .A., Colgate University; Ph .D ., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
GREOO GOULD .
(1971) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR, WOMEN ' S CENTER
B.S., Robert College; M. Ed., Loyola University of Chicago
ALBERTHAL . GRAHAM.
P. GRJW. (1982) ASSOCIATE VICE-PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
B.A., California University of Pennsylvania; M.B.A., University of Pittsburgh
EUGENE
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
361
RICHARD C. GRIM. (1983) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
B.S ., Arbnaaa State Univenity; M.S ., Arkanaa■ State Univenity; Ed.D., Univenity ofTenneuee
H. GRIMES. (1961) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Welt Virginia Univenity; M.A., West Virginia Univenity
ROBHRT
RICHARD H. GRINSTEAD. (1972) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ART
B.A.E., Ohio State Univenity; B.F.A. , Ohio State Univenity; M .F .A., Ohio State Univenity; M .A.E., Ohio
State Univenity
R. GROSS . (1978) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCJBNCE
B.S ., Carnegie Mellon Univenity; Ph .D., Univenity of Pittaburgh
MICHAEL
EI.J7Alllmf A. GRUBHR . (1990) INSTRUCTOR, STUDBNT SHRVICBS
B.S., Bowling Green State Univenity; M.A. , Youngstown State Univenity
A. GUSTIN. (1988) INSTRUCTOR, BARTH SCJBNCBS
B.S., Indiana State Univenity; M.A., Indiana State Univenity
WIWAM
MICHAEL HACIIBIT. (1965) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIBNCE
B.S ., Univenity of Delaware; M .S., University of Delaware
GBNB PATRICK HALB<>TH. (1965) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Marquette Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Chicago
I. HALL. (1984) ASSOCIATB PROFBSSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCJBNCE
B.S., Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S., University of Pittaburgh
JUDITH
JOHN
M. HANCHIN. (1967) PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Duque1nc Univenity; M.Ed., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Indiana University of
Pennsylvania
A. HART. (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, OHRONTOLOOY
B.S ., Nebraska Wesleyan Univenity; M.A., Duquesne Univenity; Graduate Aging Specialist Certificate,
MARY
University of Nebraska, Omaha
RICHARD B. HART . (1968) DBAN, COLLEOB OF SCJBNCE AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S ., Franklin and Marshall College; Ph.D. , University of Minneaota
PATRICIA L. HARTMAN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFBMOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Abilene Christian Univenity; M .A.T ., Johna Hopkins University; M .A., Ohio Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio
University
NORMAN G. HAsBROUCK. (1980) DBAN, BNROUMBNT MANAOBMBNT AND ACADBMIC SHRVICBS
B.A., Thiel College; M.A., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania
JOHN A. HAsBUUO. (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT), MILITARY SCJBNCE
B.S., Lock Haven University of Pennsylvania; Captain, U.S. Anny
AU A . HAsHBMI . (1982) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., Univenity of Tehran; M.P.A., University of Tehran; M.B.A., St. Louis Univenity; Ph .D.,
Northwestern Univenity
362
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNNERSITY
HOWARD L . HAUSHBR (1966) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.S., Wayneaburg College; M.A., West Virginia University; Ed.D ., University of Virginia
PHIL HAYES. (1970) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SBRVJCBS; DEAN FOR STUDENT LIFE
B.S., Fainnont State College; M .Ed., West Virginia University; Ed.D., West Virginia University
C . HEIM. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
BA, University of Pittaburgh; MA, University of Pittaburgh; M. Phil., Cambridge University
JOSEPH
RICHARD JAMBS HBLUX)BLBR. (1988) INSTRUCTOR, CHAIR, AND COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE COMMUNICATION
PROGRAM, THEATRE
B.B.A., University of Toledo; M.A., Bowling Green State University, Ph .D ., Bowling Green State University
JAY D . HELSEL. (1961) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Pennsylvania State University; Ed.D ., University of
Pittaburgh
WU.LIAM HENDRICKS . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A. , Caae Western Reserve University; M.A., University of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , University of Pittaburgh
WU.LIAM D . HEPNER. (1956) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University
BARBARA HESS. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
WALLACB D . HOOOB. (1968) PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.Ed ., Duquesne University; Ed.D., West Virginia University
KARLA A . HOFFMAN . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB
B.S., Towson State University; M.Ed ., University of Massachusetts; CAGS University of Massachusetts
HALBERT
H.
HOl.LOWAY.
{1985) ASSOCIATE
PROFESSOR
AND
ASSOCIATE
DlRllCTOR
OF
FORENSICS,
COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., San Jose State University; M.A., San Francisco State University; Ph .D., Wayne State University
LARRY D . HORATH . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., Eastern Illinois University; M.S., Eastern Illinois University; Ph .D., Texas A&M University
L. HORATH. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., Peru State College; M .S., Texas A & M University; Ph .D ., Texas A&M University
REN~
KAREN L. HORNUNG . (1981) PROFESSOR, GERONTOLOGY .
B.A., Geneva College; M .A., University of New Mexico; Ph.D ., University of Nebraska; Graduate A~ng
Specialist, University of Michigan; Faculty Fellow, Geriatric Education Center of Pennsylvania
RONALD C . HOY. (1969) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR , PHILOSOPHY
B.A., University of California at Berkeley; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh
STEVE C . HSIUNG . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.Ed., National Kaohsiung Nonna! University; M.S, University of North Dakota; MS . EE., Kansas State
University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
BARRY B. HUNTER.
363
(1968) PROFESSOR AND DIRECI'OR OF ORADUATE STUDIES, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
SCIENCES
B.S., California University of Penmylvania; M.S ., University of Minnesota; M .Ed., California University
of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., West Virginia University
MADELON JACOBA.
(1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENOUSH
B.A., Albion College; M.A., Purdue University; Ph.D ., Purdue University
(1970) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Eastern Michigan University; M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University; Ph .D., Wayne State
University
ALU..N D. JACOBS .
(1984) ASSOCIATE DEAN, STUDENT SERVICES; SOCtAL EQUITY OFFICER
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh
ALAN K. JAMES .
KIRK R. JOHN. (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., California University of Penmylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D ., Indiana
University of Pennsylvania; NCSP; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist; Pennsylvania Licensed
Psychologist
L. JOHNSON. (1968) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S., University of Kansas; Ph .D ., Louisiana State University
DAVID
A. JOICL. (1988) SYSTEMS ANALYST, LIBRARY SERVICES
B .S ., State University of New York at Buffalo; M.S.I.S., University of Pittsburgh
KATHLEEN
CAROLYN JONES .
(1975) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVllLOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.A., St. Augustine's College; M.A., North Carolina Central University
T . JONES . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S. , Waynesburg College; M.S ., Well Virginia University; C .P.A.
DAVID
GERALDINE
M . JONES. (1974) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, CHAIR, AND UPWARD BOUND DIRECTOR, ACADEMIC
DEVllLOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California University of Pennsylvania
(1991) INSTRUCTOR, EARTH SCIENCES
B.S., Salem State College
BETTY I . JOYNT
N. KAl.t. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., Governors State University; M .A. , Governors State University; M.A., University of Illinois, Chicago;
Ph .D., Indiana University, Bloomington
MACDONALD
JOHN R. KALuS .
(1985) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D., University
of Pittsburgh
(1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S ., University of Connecticut; M.S ., University of Southern Maine; P.T.; A .T .C .
ROBERT H . KANE, JR.
364
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
CAROLL. KAPIAN. (1984) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A., Northwellem Univenity; M.A., Northwellem Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittaburgh
GARY W . KENNEDY. (1962) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittsburgh
CLYDE Y. KIANG. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHIBF CATALOGER, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.A., National Taiwan Univenity; M.A., Wellem Michigan Univenity; M.A., Michigan State Univenity
WIUJAM G. KIMMEL. (1976) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.A., Wilkes College; M.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; Ph.D ., Pennsylvania State Univenity
RICHARD L. KLINE. (1972) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR OF INSTITUTIONAL SEARCH
B.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; M.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania
ARTHUR W. KNIGHT. (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A., San Franciaco State Univenity; M .A ., San Franciaco State University
DAVID V. KOLICX:. (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; A.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California
Univenity of Pennsylvania
STANLBY A. KOMACBK. (1987) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., Miami University; Ed.D., West Virginia University
ROBERT J. KOPKO. (1979) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., Elon College; M.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; C .P.A.
ROBERT A. KORCHECK. (1967) PROFESSOR AND COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE STUDIES, ENGLISH
B.A., St. Bonaventure University; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ph .D., West Virginia Univenity
KADE Kos . (1961) PROFESSOR AND CATALOGER, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S ., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.L.S., Syracuse University; Ed.D ., University of Pittsburgh
ALAN H. KRUECK. (1966) PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A ., Syracuse University; M.A., Michigan State University; Ph.D ., University of Zurich
EwALD C. KRUBOER. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMBNTALSCIENCES
B.S., Oshkosh State College; M.S ., West Virginia University
ANDREW E. KWORTEK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT), MILITARY SCIENCE
B.A ., California University of Pennsylvania; Captain, U.S. Anny
PAULL. LANCASTER. (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S ., California University of Pennsylvania
HARRY M . LANGI.BY. (1989) ASSOCIATB DEAN, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S ., Texas Lutheran College; M.S ., Clemson Univenity; Ph.D., Clemson University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
365
(1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENOUSH
A.B., Niagara University; M .A., Niagara University
FREDERICKS. LAP!SARDI.
(1988) DIRECTOR, PLACBMBNT AND CARBBR SERVICES
B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M .S.Ed ., Duquesne University
STEPHANIE URCHICIC LAsHWAY.
REGIS LAzoR.
(1972) ACTING ASSOCIATE DBAN, COLLBOE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES; ASSOCIATE
PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., University of Delaware
(1966) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of North Carolina; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State
University
ANTHONY u.zzARO .
(1986) PROFBSSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., West Virginia University; M .B.A., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh
KARBN L. LBMAsTERS .
(1961) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.S., Illinois State College
STEPHEN LBVBNDOS.
(1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Brandeis University; M .S., Brown University; D.A., Carnegie Mellon
ROBERT A. LBVJN .
T. LITTLB. (1970) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D., West
Virginia University
ROBERT
(1975) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
R.N., Uniontown Hospital School of Nursing; B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D ., West
Virginia University; M.S ., California University of Pennsylvania
SHIRLEY A. LITTLB.
IRA
T. LoNDON . (1970) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., University of Delaware; Ph .D ., University of Connecticut
(1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S ., Youngstown State University; M.S., Michigan Technological University
JOHN W . LoNEY.
SAM
P . LoNICH . (1989) INSTRUCTOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., California University of Pennsylvania
JOHN
H. LUCY . (1972) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University; Ph .D., The Ohio State
University
(1970) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., University of Georgia; Ph.D ., University of Georgia
ANDREW J. MACHUSKO.
366
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
F . MEL MADDBN. (1976) PROFESSOR, COUNSBLOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
S.T.B., St. Anthony-on-the Hudaon (with Catholic Univenity); M.A., Montclair State Colleje; Ed.D.,
Univenity of North Dakota
SEAN C. MADDEN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Xavier Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Notre Dame; D.A., Carnegie Mellon Univenity
A. MARCINEK. (1983) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, NURSING
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.S .N., University of Maryland; Ed .D., West Vi[Jinia University; R.N .
MAROARBT
J . GREOORY MARTIN . (1969) PROFESSOR, BU!MBNTARY EDUCATION
B.A., Miami University; M.A.T., Cornell Univenity; Ph.D., Cornell Univenity
F . MARUSKJN . (1966) PROFESSOR AND COLLECJ1ON DHVBLOPMBNT LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.A., Pennsylvania State University; M.L.S., Univenity of Piu.burgh; Ph.D., Univenity of Piu.burgh
ALBERT
ELIZABETH MAsoN .
(1987) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY; SUPERVISOR, SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY CLINIC
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Ball State
Univenity; NCSP; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist
RICHARD
M.
MATOVICH . (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, AND INTER.UBRARY LOAN/DOCUMENTS LIBRARIAN,
LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Duque1ne Univenity; M.L.S., Univenity of Piu.burgh
E. MAXwllU.. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CURRICULUMUBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., University of Piu.burgh; M .L.S., Rutgen Univenity
LoLA
P. McGREW. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, HISTORY AND
B.S., Brigham Young University; M.A., Brigham Young University
AN11fONY
URBAN AFFAIRS
J . DRBW McGUKJN . (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, DIRllCTOR OF COMMUNICATION LAB/RBSBARCH CBNTBR,
COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION STUDIBS
B.A., Freed-Hardeman College; S.C .T ., Murny State University; Ph.D., Univenity of Nebraska
PHYLus S . MCILWAIN . (1969) PROFESSOR, ELBMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D.,
University of Piu.burgh
CAROL A. MCMAHON . (1974) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
B.S., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Piu.burgh
D . FRANK MCPHERSON . (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBBCH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M .S., University of Hawaii; Ph.D., Purdue University; C.C .C.
Speech Pathology; C.C.C. Audiology
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
367
JAMFS T. MCVHY. (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Youlliltown Univenity; M.A. , Univenity of Virginia
JAMFS R . MBANS, JR. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., Well Virginia Univenity; M .S ., Univenity of Pittaburgh
MELBNYz.ER. (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ELBMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; M.Ed ., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; Ed .D .,
Indiana Univenity of Pennaylvania
BBVHRLY J.
MBNDou. . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND BCONOMICS
M.S., Wayneaburg College; M .S ., Robert Morri■ College; C .P.A.
EDWARD
JBANNINBMBTAL. (1985) ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, ADMISSIONS
B.A., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennaylvania
L. MICHAEL. (1969) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIBNCB
B.S., Jameatown Colleae; M .A., Univenity of North Dakota; Ed.D., Ball State Univenity
RONALD
RICHARD MIBCZNIKOWSKI. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .A ., State Univenity of New York at Alfred Univenity
PATRICIA MILFORD . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., George Mason Univenity; M .A ., Eastern Michigan Univenity; Ph.D ., Pennaylvania State Univenity
C. ALLAN MILLER. (1976) PROFESSOR AND DIRBCTOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, BIOLOGICAL AND
BNVIRONMENTAL SCIBNCES
B.S., Buena Villa Colleae; M .A ., Mankato State College; Ph.D ., North Dakota State Univenity
L . MILLER. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.S., Dickinson State Univenity; M.A ., Colorado State Univenity
PATRICK
DAWN M. MOELLER. (1990) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, STUDBNT SERVICES
B.A. , Univenity of Virginia; M.S. , Syracuse Univenity; Ph.D ., Syracuse Univenity
SUSAN J . MONOBU.. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND BCONOMICS
B.A., Seton Hill Colleae; M .A ., Univenity of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittsburgh
C. MOON . (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.A., Kalamazoo College; M .A.T., Oberlin College; Ph.D ., Michigan State Uruver■ ity
THOMAS
JOHN
P. MORESCHI, JR. (1972) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.S ., California Univenityof Pennaylvania; M .Ed., Univer■ity of Pittsburgh; Ed.D ., Univer■ ity of Pittsburgh
LAWRBNCB L. MOSES. (1969) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BARTH SCIBNCES
B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .Ed ., Pennaylvania State
Pittaburgh
Univer■ ity ;
Ph.D., University of
368
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNNERSITY
JBANETTB MUWNS. (1975) PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVJRONMENTAL SCIBN<:m
B.A ., Wayne State University; M .S ., Waync State University; Ph.D., North Dakota State University
8BN A. MULE. (1972) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, SPllCIAL BDUCATION
B.S. , State University of New York at Genc1e0; M .Ed., University of Rochester
WJWAM M . MURDICK. (1969) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BN0USH
B.A. , State University of New York; M .F .A., University of Iowa
JOHN P. NASS. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.A., Michigan State University; M .A., Western Michigan University; Ph.D. , The Ohio State University
El.MO NATAU. (1962) VICE-PRBSIDBNT, STUDENTDHVELOPMBNT AND SERVJ<:m
B.S., California University of PeMaylvania; M .A., Welt Virginia University
J . ALAN NATAU. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EN0USH
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., California University of Pennsylvania
JOANN NELSON . (1969) PROFESSOR, BDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.L.S ., University of Pittsburgh; Ph.D ., University of
Pittsburgh
NANCY Z. NELSON (1967) VJCE-PRBSIDENT, ACADEMIC AFFAIRS
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh; Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh
RICHARD R . NBMBC. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Welt Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology
DIANE H . NETTLES. (1989) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BLBMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.A., University of South Florida; M .A., University of South Florida; Ph.D ., University of South Florida
MARsHA L. NOLF. (1987) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND BIBUOORAPHIC LECl'URER, UBRARY SERVJ<:m
B.A., Waynesburg College; M .L.S., University of Pittsburgh
GEORGE D . NOVAIC. (1959) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Litt., University of Pittsburgh
MARK L. NOWAIC. (1985) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOGY
B.S., University of Wisconsin, Stout; M.S ., Texas A&M University; Ed.D., Texaa A&M University; C .P.R.
DAVIDE. OLSON, (1991) INSTRUCTOR, ART
B.A., Pennsylvania State University; M.Ed ., Pennsylvania State University
MAHMOOD A. K. OMARZAI . (1979) PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND ECONOMICS
B.A., Y.D. College, India; M .A., Karachi University, Pakilltln; M.A., Indiana University; Ph.D ., Indiana
University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
369
J. ORIANDI . (1966) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., St. Vincent College; M .A., Well Virginia Univenity; Ed .D ., West Virginia Univenity
ANGELO
J. ORR. (1969) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Pennsylvania State Univenity; Ed.D. , Pennsylvania State
ROGER
Univenity
J . ORSAG. (1967) ASWCIATE PROFESSOR, BARTH SCJl!NCES
B.S. , Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.L., Univenity of Pittsburgh
HARRY
DAVID W . PAJERSKI. (1969) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCJl!NCE
B.S., University of Pittsburgh; M.S., Univenity of New Hampshire; Ph .D . , University of Pittsburgh
SUZANN!! M. PALKO . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, NURSING
B.S.N ., Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; M .S .N ., University of Pennsylvania; R .N .
HOMER R. PANKEY. (1965) VICE-PRl!SIDENT, DEVELOPMENT AND BXTERNAL RELATIONS
B.A., Shepherd College; M .A ., West Virginia University; Ed.D ., West Virginia University
RALDo 0. PARASCENW . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M .Ed., University of Pittsburgh; M. Lit., University of Pittsburgh; D .Ph.
& Lit., International University of Mexico
J . PARK. (1977) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.P.A., Korea University; M.A., Temple University; Ph.D ., Temple University
YOUNG
A. PARKINSON . (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S ., Indiana University; M.S., University of Pittsburgh
LESLIE
WJWAM G . PARNELL. (1968) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
B .S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Eastern Michigan University; Ed.D ., West Virginia
University
C. PATHAK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A., University of Delhi, India; M.A., University of Delhi, India; L .L .B., University of Delhi, India; M.A.,
PRATUL
Univenity of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee
MARILYN M. PATTERSON. (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, GERONTOLOGY
B.A., Florida State University; M.S., Memphis State University; Ed.D. , Memphis State University;
Certification, National Board for Certified Counselors
K . PAULSON . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
B.A., Gustavus Adolphus College; M .S ., Michigan Technological University; Ph.D ., University of Oldahoma
BRIAN
STEPHEN A . PAVUJC. (1971) DEAN , COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California Univenity of PeMsylvania; Ph .D ., University
of Pittsburgh
370
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
JosBPH E . PECosH. (1967) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh
PAMELA 8. PlmUCK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION; DIRECfOR, READING CLINIC
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D, University
of Pittaburgh
JEFFREY L . PlrrR.UCCJ . (1981) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ATHLETICS; HEAD FOOTBAIL COACH
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., California University of Pennsylvania
WIWB H . PIOG. (1986) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.S., University of Tennessee; M.A., University of Tennessee
ALBERT R. PoKOL. (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, CHAIR, AND REFERENCE LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Duquesne University; M.L.S ., University of Pittaburgh
ALTON N . PoWE. (1973) PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D.,
University of Pittsburgh
JAY R. PoWELL. (1972) PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION; DIRECfOR, HONORS PROGRAM
B.S., University of Illinois; M.A., Southern Illinois University; Ph .D ., Southern Illinois University
WIWAM J. PROCASKY. (1965) PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , University of Nebraska; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh
TOM G. Pucci. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ATHLETICS; DIRECfOR OF ATHLETICS.
B.S., California State University al Sacramento; M.Ed ., Pacific University; Ed.D ., University of New
Mexico.
ANTHONY S. PvzoROWSKJ . (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
Associate, Pennsylvania State University; B.S., West Virginia University; M.S ., West Virginia University;
Ph.D., West Virginia University; E.l.T.
JOANNE RAulJGH . (1975) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ACT 10 I DIRECfOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT ANO SERVICES
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California University of Pennsylvania
CONNIE MACK REA . (1963) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A., Centenary College; B.S., Centenary College; M .Ed ., University of Colorado; M .A., University of
Southern California
GEORGE A. REID . (1968) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Muskingham College; M.S ., Westminster College; Ph .D., University of Pittsburgh
MARGARITA RIBAR. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES ANO CULTURES
B.S., Universidad Pedag6gica, Bogota, Colombia; M.S ., Duquesne University
MICHAEL K. RICH . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS ANO ECONOMICS
B.S., Utah State University; M.B.A., Kent State University
F. DENNIS RIEOELNEGO. (1978) DEAN OF STUDENT SERVICES
B.A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M. Ed., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
371
(1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT) AND OFFICBR. IN CHARO£!, MIUTARY SCIENCE
B.A., Virginia Military Institute; Captain, U.S. Anny
STEVEN ROBBR.TS .
(1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIE!NCE!
B.A., Hunter College; M .S., New York University
MICHAEL WALT ROBIN.
ill. (1969) PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
A .B. , Boston University; M .A ., University of Michigan; Ph .D ., University of Michigan
HORACE S. ROCKWOOD,
JOANNB RODRIOUBZ- NAESBR .
(1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF STUDENT SUPPORT SBR.VJCBS,
ACADBMIC DHVELOPMBNT AND SBR.VJCBS
B.A., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
D . ROMBOSKI . (1969) PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR. SCIE!NCE
B.A., Washington and Jefferson College; M .A., Rutgers University; M.S. , Rutgers University; Ph .D .,
Rutgers University
I.AWRBNCE
(1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S ., Waynesburg College; M .S ., California University of Pennsylvania; C.M .A .
FRBD RossBLL, JR.
(1973) PROFESSOR, ACADBMIC DBVBLOPMBNT AND SBR.VJCBS
B.S. , West Virginia University; M.Ed. , California University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D ., University of
Pittsburgh
MBI..VIN J. SALLY .
(1969) PROFESSOR, BI..BMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., Duquesne University; M .Ed ., Duquesne University; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh
ANTHONY J . SALUDIS.
(1965) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR , INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Ball State University
JOSEPH A. SANFILIPPO .
(1966) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, FORBION LANOUAOBS AND CULTURES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , West Virginia University
ELSBBTH E . SANT£!£!.
R. SAPKO . (1961) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., University of Pittsburgh
DoNALD
D . SCARMAZZ! . (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BI..BMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
JOSEPH
(1968) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S., Kutztown University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Temple University
PHILIP E. SCHALTBNBRAND.
G . SCHICKEL . (1988) INSTRUCTOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M. Ed. , Clemson University
JOSEPH
(1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIE!NCB
B.S. , Pennsylvania State University; M.S ., West Virginia University
ELWYN M . SCHMIDT .
(1966) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D ., Texas A&M University
CHARLES A . SCHULBR.
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
372
WII.J.JAM F. SCHWEIKER. (1972) PRO~R, SOCIAL SCIBNCE
B.A., Welt Virginia University; M.A., University of Minnesota; Ph .D. , University of Minnesota
LISA M. SCHWBRDT.
(1990) ASSISTANT PRO~R, BNOLISH
B.S. , Florida International University; B.A., Florida International University; M .A ., Purdue University;
Ph.D., Purdue University
RICHARD D . SCOTT .
(1971) PRO~R, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., PeMaylvania State University; M .S., University of Massachusetts; Ph.D., University ofTenneuee
TBRRY
E. SCOTT. (1966) ASSOCIATB PRO~R AND CHAIR, HBALTH AND PHYSICAL BDUCATION
B.A., William Jewell Colle1re; M.A., Washington University of St. Louis
LoUISB
E. SBRAFIN. (1991) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BUSINBSS AND BCONOMICS
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; E.M.B.A. , University of Pittsburgh
BBTTY SHAW. (1988) ASSISTANT PRO~R AND RBFBRBNCB LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SBRVICES
B.S., University of Pittsburgh; M.L.S ., Carnegie Mellon University; M .A., Indiana State University
(1991) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BDUCATIONAL STUDIBS
B.S. , California University of PeMaylvania; M.Ed., Slippery Rock University; Ph.D. , University of
Pittsburgh
CARYL SHBFFIBlD .
A. SHBU.PINSICY. (1986) ASSISTANT PRO~R, NURSING
B.S.N., University of Akron; M .S.N., University of Pittsburgh; R.N.; P.N.P.
DBBRA
JOHN
W. SHIMKANIN. (1990) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BLBMBNTARYBDUCATION
B.S ., Moravian College; M .S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D., Penn State University
Fl.oYO W. SHUL.BR. (1966) ASSISTANT PRO~R, HBALTH AND PHYSICAL BDUCATION
B.A., Welt Liberty State College; M .S., Welt Virginia University
ALFRED E. SIMPSON . (1976) PRO~R, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S ., Southern University; M.A., Welt Virginia University; Ph.D., The Ohio State University
JOHNS . SKOCIK, JR.
(1967) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIBNCB
B.S ., California University of PeMaylvania; M .S., Welt Virginia University
A. SKOCIK. (1990) ASSISTANT PRO~R, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIBNCE
B.S., California University of PeMaylvania; M.Ed., California University of PeMaylvania
NANCY
MICHAEL J. SLAVIN . (1989) ASSISTANT PRO~R, THBATRE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., Welt Virginia University
(1968) PRO~R, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California University of PeMaylvania; Ed.D., Texa,
A&M University
DAR.REILL. SMITH.
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
373
G. RALPH SMITH, 0 . (1964) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, BNOUSH
A.B., Franklin and Marshall College
GARY A. SMITH. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, PHILOSOPHY
B.A., Juniata College; M .A., Wayne State Univenity
MADEUNE C. SMITH. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, ENOUSH
B.A., Mt. St. Mary College; M .A., SUNY-New Paiz; Ph.D., West Virginia Univenity
JANNENE SOlITHWORTH-MACINTYRB. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BLBMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Ball State Univenity; M.A., Ball State Univenity; Ed.D ., Univenity of PittBburgh
MAROARBT A. SPRATT. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Transylvania Univenity; M.A., Duke Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Kentucky
MARILYNN STANARD. (1987) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Western Michigan Univenity; M.A., Michigan State Univenity; Ph .D ., Michigan State Univenity
JACQUEUNE STEFANIK. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, NURSINO
B.S.N., Pennsylvania State Univenity; M .S.N., West Virginia Univenity;M.P.A., West Virginia Univenity;
C.R.N.P.
JEFFREYS . SUMEY. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.S., West Virginia Univenity
LYNN R. SURREY. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, STUDENT SERVICES; COUNSBUNO PSYCHOLOOIST
B.A., Olivet Nazarene Univenity; M.A. , Univenity of Mis10Uri at Kansai City; Ph.D., Univenity of
Miaaouri at Kansas City
GBNE G. SUSKALO. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, MUSIC
B.S., Duquesne Univenity; M.S., Duquesne Univenity; M .Music, Duquesne Univenity
SHIRLEY J. SUTTON. (1964) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, MUSIC; DIRECTOR, CALIFORNIA CHORALE
B.Mus.Ed., Drake Univenity; M.Mus.Ed., Drake Univenity
DENNIS C . SWEENEY. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, PSYCHOLOOY
B.S., Univenity of Nol1h Carolina; M .A., Bowling Green State Univenity; Ph.D., Bowling Green State
Univenity
BARBARA ANN DEMAR.TINO SWYHART. (1986) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY
B.A., Marquette Univenity; M .A., Marquette Univenity; Ph .D., Temple Univenity
MARC A. SYLVESTER. (1973) PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, BIOLOOICAL AND
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.A., Waahington and Jeffenon College; M.S ., West Virginia Univenity; Ph .D ., West Virginia Univenity
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
374
(1971) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; COUNSELOR, CENTER FOR STUDENT DEVELOPMENT
8.S. , Lake Erie College; M .S., Northern Illinois Univenity; Ed.D ., Indiana Univenity
NANCY J . TAIT.
E. TALBERT . (1978) ASSOCIATE DJJtECTOR, PL\CEMENT AND CAREER SERVICES
B.A., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California Univenity of Pennsylvania
CHARLES
P.
(1978) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.A., Marietta College; M.A ., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , Univenity of Pittaburgh
RONAID TARULLO .
(1965) PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
8.A. , West Virginia Univenity; 8 .S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .A .. , West Virginia
Univenity Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of PeMSylvania; Ed .D ., West Virginia Univenity
C . R . THOMAS.
DoNALD J. THOMPSON .
(1969) ACTING ASSOCIATE VICE-PRESIDENT FOR ACADEMIC AFFAIRS; PROFESSOR, EARTH
SCIENCES
B.A., Monmouth College; M.A. , Indiana Univenity; Ph .D ., Washington Univenity
JOHN
M. THOMPSON . (1987) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M .S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D ., Univenity of Pittaburgh
(1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MUSIC
8 .S. , The Juilliard School; M.A., Columbia Univenity; P.O., Teachen College of Columbia Univenity
ALBERT nBE!RIO .
G. URBINE. (1990) INSTRUCTOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., CleDlllOn Univenity
SUSAN
JOHN
R. VARGO . (1970) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity
(1984) PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.S., Syracuse Univenity; Ph .D ., Syracuse Univenity
ROBERT A . VARGO .
(1990) ASSOCIATE, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., DUX School of Mines, Czechoslovakia; M.8.A., Baldwin-Wallace College; M .S., Columbia Pacific
Univenity
JAROSLAV V . VAVERXA .
L. WAHL. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Slippery Rock: Univenity of Pennsylvania
DEAN
JOHN
H. WALSH . (1961) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY
A .B., Duquesne Univenity; M.A., Duquesne Univenity; Ph .D ., Georgetown University
A. WATERHOUSE. (1986) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENOUSH
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.F.A ., Univenity of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., Ohio University
CAROLE
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
375
JOHN PIERCE WATKINS . (1957) PRESIDENT
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A ., West Virginia University; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh
RICHARD H . WEBB . {1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR, MON VALUN RENAISSANCE
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., West Virginia University
BRIAN E . WEINRICH. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S ., Pennsylvania State University; M.A ., Pennsylvania State University; M .S. , Shippensburg University
of Pennsylvania
BRUCE L . WESTON . (1972) PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.S., Northwestern University; M.A., University of Michigan; Ph .D., University of Michigan
PAUL D . WILUAMS. (1986) PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF MATH LAB, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Clarkson University; Ed .D., University of Pittaburgh
SYLVIA S . WILUAMS . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY; COORDINATOR, GRADUATE PROGRAM;
DIRECTOR, SCHOOL PsYCHOLOGY CLINIC
B.A. , Pennsylvania State University; M .A., West Virginia University; Pennsylvania Certified School
Psychologist; Licensed Psychologist
BEVERLY G. WILLISON. (1978) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL WORK
B.A., Duquesne University; M .S.W., University of Pittaburgh; Ed.D., West Virginia University; N.C.C .,
L.S.W., A.C .S.W.
MAURICE E. WILSON. (1969) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., Wofford College; M .A., William and Mary University; Ph .D ., Emory University
JAMES WOOD . (1987) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.A ., Colorado State University; M .A., Arizona State University; Ph .D ., Arizona State University
AMY C . WOODWARD. (1984) ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, ADMISSIONS
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
WILLIAM A. YAHNER. (1989) INSTRUCTOR AND COORDINATOR, WRITING CENTER, ENGLISH
B.S, Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; M .A ., Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D. , Indiana
University of Pennsylvania
ALBERT E . YATES . (1964) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., West Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology
GEORGE YOCHUM . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A ., University of Pittaburgh; M .A., University of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , University of Pittaburgh
JOHN R. YOUNG. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Lincoln University; M .Litt. , University of Pittaburgh; Ph .D ., University of Pittaburgh
~GELA K . ZONDOS. (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION
B.S ., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M .A., Michigan State University; Ph.D ., New York
University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
376
L . ZoPPB'ITI . (1961) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Pennsylvania State University
ROBERT
EDWIN
M. ZUCHELKOWSKI. (1985) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR,
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., West Virginia University
BJOLOOICAL AND
EMERITI
377
PROFESSORS EMERITI
The honorary status of professor emeritus is awarded to retired members of the faculty on
recommendation of their academic departments and approval by the President and the
Trustees of the University. Faculty members who have only recent retired have not yet had
the opportunity to be designated emeriti.) It signifies dedicated service to the University and
demonstrates that, though retired from teaching, the emeritus professor maintains a valued
relationship with California University of Pennsylvania.
Dr. Robert H. Aldstadt (1963-1988)
Dr. George S. Allen (1971-1988)
Mr. James T. Anthony (1964-1981)
Dr. Arthur L. Ball (1964-1984)
Mrs. Ruth Barry (1962-1979)
Dr. William R. Benedetti (1965-1990)
Mr. August J. Bethem (1961-1983)
Mr. Richard M. Birch (1957-1989)
Dr. William L. Black (1965-1975)
Dr. Vernon L. Bloemker (1962-1990)
Mr. Gale H. Boak (1967-1986)
Mr. J. Herschel Bowlen (1946-1969)
Dr. Clarence L. Brammer (1969-1985)
Mr. Charles A. Butler (1961-1985)
Dr. Merrill G. Campbell (1948-1974)
Ms. Mary Jean Cicconi (1969-1991)
Mr. Leonard M. Colelli (1958-1982)
Dr. Thomas H. Coode (1965-1989)
Dr. J. Robert Craig (1957-1982)
Dr. Harold K. Crockett (1965-1978)
Mr. Wasil Curtioff (1966-1977)
Dr. William F. Daniels (1964-1981)
Ms. Ethel V. Davis (1969-1991)
Mrs. Gertrude Davis (1965-1975)
Dr. Mary R. DeCarlo (1954-1968)
Mr. Joseph A. Delisi (1968-1985)
Mr. Berlie E. Dishong (1964-1986)
Mr. Angus H. Douple (1946-1970)
Dr. William L. Dovenspilce (1955-1982)
Dr. Walter A. Fabian (1969-1984)
Mr. Edward E. Fear (1964-1987)
Miss Ann D. Fisfis (1968-1987)
Dr. Richard E. Frickert (1969-1990)
Dr. Henry H. Furio (1969-1979)
Dr. Karl W. Gamble (1961-1976)
Mrs. Mildred Gath (1966-1980)
Mr. Henry R. George (1965-1984)
Mrs. Joan M. Glasgow (1972-1982)
Ms. Pauline Glod (1959-1979)
Mr. Ivan H. Guesman (1968-1982)
Dr. William 0. Hambacher (1968-1988)
Mrs. Lela T. Hamilton (1953-1968)
Dr. George S. Hart (1938-1968)
Dr. Arthur G. Henry (1958-1968)
Mr. Robert V. Herron (1965-1990)
Mr. Francis Herron (1960-1982)
Mrs. Eleanore Hibbs (1966-1980
Miss Louise A. Hildreth (1926-1962)
Dr. Eugene F. Hilton (1970-1981)
Mrs. Merrell Holman (1947-1980)
Dr. Jack F. Hoyes (1946-1971)
Mrs. Rose G. Hughes (1938-1974)
Miss Donna Johnson (1969-1986)
Mr. William B. Kania (1961-1988)
Mr. John H. Katusa (1966-1986)
Dr. Milton C. Kells (1966-1991)
Mr. Roger R. Keightley (1963-1991)
Dr. Harold E. Kemper (1955-1978)
Mr. Curtis W. Kerns (1969-1982)
Mr. Benjamin R. Kneisley (1968-1986)
Miss M. Isobel Knill (1966-1989)
Mr. Daniel Lee LaBute (1964-1991)
Ms. Norma Langham (1959-1979)
Mr. John R. Lawrence (1966-1990)
Mr. John R. Linton (1967-1991)
Mr. Leonard Liz.ak: (1966-1991)
Dr. W. Ray Lister (1963-1988)
Mrs. Rose Lofstead (1957-1979)
Mr. Arthur L. Long (1963-1981)
Dr. John A. Long (1963-1974)
378
Mr. Norton E. Lownsbery (1969-1986)
Ms. Norma E. Maatta (1965-1986)
Mr. Samuel Madia (1966-1986)
Ms. Margaret Maley (1966-1980)
Dr. Wilbur Marisa (1960-1979)
Mrs. Ada K. Marsh (1945-1965)
Dr. John 0. Marsh (1967-1982)
Mr. Schuyler Marshall (1958-1982)
Mr. Richard L. May (1967-1989)
Mr. John C. McCrory (1958-1984)
Mr. James C. McIntyre (1964-1981)
Mr. James L. McPaul (1966-1981)
Dr. Milton A. Messinger (1969-1991)
Dr. Harry L. Monroe (1942-1975)
Dr. Albert D. Murden (1971-1982)
Miss Doris Nevin (1962-1980)
Mr. James Norman (1961-1980)
Dr. Joseph C. Nucci (1968-1990)
Dr. Mary Catherine O'Brien (1960-1984)
Dr. Virjean Parker (1970-1991)
Dr. Harold Pash (1969-1982)
Dr. Stephen E. Pavlak (1950-1979)
Dr. Fred Pollock (1968-1985)
Dr. Philip J. Proud (1962-1981)
Mr. John Pushkarsh (1966-1982)
Miss Louise Rakestraw (1946-1974)
Miss Gloria Rhodes (1970-1982)
Dr. Daniel E. Rider (1969-1985)
Mr. John R. Riggle (1964-1991)
Dr. George H. Roadman (1948-1977)
Dr. Luis V. Romero (1965-1976)
EMERITI
Miss Emma Sacco (1928-1957)
Dr. Regis J. Serinko (1961-1985)
Dr. Irvin Shutsy (1946-1979)
Mr. Edward Sikora (1956-1983)
Mr. R. Donald Similo (1966-1988)
Mr. Charles Slick (1964-1978)
Mr. Hubert E. Snyder (1949-1976)
Mr. Vetold W. Spomy (1963-1978)
Dr. Sarah Stephenson (1968-1987)
Mr. John R. Swearingen (1955-1975)
Dr. John Tomikel (1965-1982)
Dr. Harold W. Traister (1947-1957)
Dr. Allison E. Troy (1971-1984)
Dr. Alexander N. Tsambassis
(1964-1981)
Mr. Leonard Volkin (1967-1977)
Mr. Frank L. Vulcano (1965-1991)
Mrs. Maetroy A. Walker (1969-1990)
Mrs. Marian H. Weaver (1954-1976)
Dr. Howard R. White (1966-1976)
Mrs. Lola M. Willett (1961-1977)
Dr. Robert F. Wilseck (1967-1986)
Dr. Daniel E. Wilson (1966-1988)
Mrs. Miriam Wilson (1966-1984)
Mr. Myles B. Witchey (1962-1988)
Mr. Donald B. Wodock (1966-1986)
Mrs. Henrietta Wood (1959-1978)
Mr. Edward Zadoromy (1962-1985)
Mr. Jay A. Zeffiro (1970-1988)
Mr. George Zemo (1957-1986)
INDEX
379
INDEX
Abbreviationa . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 106
Absence• from Clau . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4S, 67
Academic Affain, Univenity Pel'IIOnncl . . . 352
Academic Development Services . . . . . . . . 121
Academic Dismisaal . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... S7
Academic Programs and Degrees . . . . ... 106
Academic Progreu, Satisfactory . . . . . ... 100
Academic Standing, Good . . . . . . . . . . 47, S7
ACC: Accounting Coul'IICs .... .. .. . . . 147
Accounting, Program in . . . . . .. .. .... 144
Accounting, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . 146
Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Administration and Finance,
Univenity Pel'IIOnncl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Administration and Management,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Administration and Management,
Bachelor' s Degree in ... .. .. . . .... 143
Administrative Officen and Staff . . . . . . . 354
Admi88ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Advanced Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Advanced Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Aging : See : Gerontology
Aging, Specialist Certificate in ... ... . .. 216
Alcohol and Drug Intervention
Program (CHOICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Alumni Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Alumni Scholarships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Anesthetist Program and
Coul'IICs (RNA) . . . . . . . . .. . .... . 310
ANT: Anthropology Courses . . . . . . . . . . 316
Anthropology, Major in .. .... • . . . . . . 314
Appeal, Financial Aid ... . ... . . . . . . . 102
Appeal, Procedure for Teacher
Certification Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Appealing a Grade or other Academic Dcciaiona,
Procedures for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 1
Application, for Admiuion . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Area Degree Programs . . . . l lS, 282, 298, 312
Art, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . 123-124
Art Courses (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 123
Art, Department and Major . . . . . . . . ... 122
Associate Degrees (Two-Year Programs):
See : Accounting; Banking; Community Living
Arrangements; Computer Science Technology;
Computer Based Management Systems;
Drafting Technolol)'; Early Childhood;
Electronics Technoloi)'; Numerical Control
Technology; Robotics; Screen Printing
Technology
ATE: Athletic Training Courses . . . . . . . . 342
Athletic Training, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Athletic, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 6S
Attendance at Claascs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4S , 67
Attrition Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Automation Technology,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 247
Banking, Auociate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . 147
BIO: Biology Course■ ... ... .. ... . . . 13S
Biology, Certification in for
Teacher Education .. . .. . . . . . . . . . 129
Biology, Department and Majon .. . . . . . . 128
Board of Governon, State System of
Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3S0
Budget Plan for Payment of Fee, . . . . . . . . 88
BUS : Busineu Coul'IICs . .. ... . . .. ... 149
Busine88 Administration
See also: Administration and Management
Business Administration, Major in . . . . . . . 144
Busine88 and Commercial Writing,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Busine88 and Economics,
Department and Majon . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Busine88 Economics Major . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Calendar, Academic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Campus and Surrounding Area . . . . . . . . . . 6
Campus Ministry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 37
See also: Counseling and Psychological Services
CARE Program for
the Learning Diaabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Career Planning, Coul'IIC (XCP) . . . . . . . . 121
CAW: Computer Assisted Workahopa . . . . 279
CCU: Co-Curricular Courses ... ... .. .. 156
Certification for Teachen . . . . . . . . . . . . l 08
Chancellor, State System of
Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Cheating and Plagiarism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S7
Check, Charge for Bad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chemistry, Certification in for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Chemistry, Courses (CHE) . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Chemistry, Major in . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 29S
CHOICES (Drug & Alcohol
380
Program) . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Citizenship, Requirement for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Class Absence ■ Due to Illness . . . . . . . 45 , 67
Claaa Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CLEP: See College Level Examination Pro,ram
Co-Curricular Activities Course ■
(CCU) .... . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 156
College Level Equivalency
Program (CLEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . S l, 85
Colleges: Undergraduate Divisions
of the University . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-119
COM: Communication Studies Course■ . •.. 160
Commencement Honora . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54
Communication, Major in, for
Teacher Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
See also : Communication Studies
Communication Studies Department
and Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Communication Studies Course■ (COM) . . . 160
Community College Graduates,
Transfer Credits for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Community Living Arrangements,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Community Services,
Special Education Major in . . . . . . . . . 328
Computer Applications, Certification in . . . 273
Computer Aaai■ted Workahops (CAW) .... 279
Computer Baaed Systems Management,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Computer Baaed Systems Management,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Computer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Computer Facilities ... .... . . . . . . .... 19
Computer Laboratory, Teacher Education ... 21
Computer Science Technology,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Computer Science, Courses (CSC) . . . . . . 276
Computer Science, Degree Programs in . . . 270
Confidentiality of Student Records . . . . . . . . 38
Cooperative Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cooperative Engineering Program . . . . . . . 297
Council of Trustees, University . . . . . . . . 35 l
Counseling and Psychological Services . . . . . 68
See also : Campus Ministry
Course Numbering System . . . . . . . . .. .. 45
Course Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Creative Writing Major . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Credentials, Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 77
Credit Load and Overload . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46
Credits and Credit Houra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Credits Earned by Examination ... . .... .. 52
CSC : Computer Science Courses . . .. . . .. 79
"Cuts" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 67
INDEX
Dean's List . ... . .... . . . ... .. .. . .. 54
Degrees Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 0
Degree■, When Conferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Delinquent Account■ . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . 85
Dental Hygiene, Education Certification,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Development and External Relations . . . 8, 354
Developmental Course■ . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 78
Dining Service■ . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 65
Di■abled : Parking and Service ■ .. •• . . . . . . 69
Di■abled : Program for Learning-Di■abled . .. 26
Dismi■■al , for Academic Reasons . . . . . . . . 57
See also: Withdrawal, Administrative
Distinguiahed Service Award . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dormitories: See Residence Hall ■
Drafting Technology, Associate Degree in .. 247
Driver Education Program . . .. .... . . . . 219
Drop/ Add Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Drug & Alcohol Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Dual Majora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 55
Early Admisaion for High School Students . . . 79
Early Childhood, Associate Degree in . . . . 326
Early Childhood, Major in ... . . . . . . . . 185
Early Childhood/Special Education, Major in 186
Earth Science, Certification in for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . .. .... 169
Earth Science Courses (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . 171
Earth Science, Department and Majora .. .. 167
EAS: Earth Science Courses . . . . . . . . . . 171
ECE: Early Childhood Courses . . . . . . . . 189
Economics Courses (ECO) . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Economics, Major in . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 143
EDE: Elementary Education Courses . ... . 187
EDS : Secondary Education Courses . . . . . . 181
EDU (Education) Courses . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Education and Human Services, College of . 108
Educational Foundations, Courses (EDF) .. 181
Educational Studies, Department . . . . . . . . 180
v EEr: Electrical Engineering Course ■ . .. .. 255
Electrical Engineering Technology Major in . 231
Electrical Engineering Technology (EET)
Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Electrographics, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Electronics Technology, Associate Degree in 25 l
Elementary Education, Courses (EDE) . . .. 187
Elementary Education, Department . . . . . . 184
Elementary Education, Major in .. .. . . . . 184
Elementary Education/Special Education,
Dual Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Emeriti Faculty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Employment, Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ENG: Engliah Course■ ..... . ........ 195
Engineering (Electrical) Technology Major in 255
Engineering, Cooperative Program . . . . . . 297
INDEX
English, Certification in
for Teacher1iducation . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
English Coones (ENG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
English, Department and Majon . . .. . ... 191
ENS : Environmental Studies Coones .. ... 140
Entnnce Requirements . . . . . . . . .. . .. 74-77
Environmental Educ, ,on Endonement . . . . 131
Environmental Stujies C~ nes (ENS) ... . 140
Environmental Coll8ervation, Resources, Science,
and Pollution Control, ~a_f;;n in . . . . . . 129
Equality of Op_portuni~y '\' .. : . . . . . .... 14
ESP: Coones m Special Education . . . . . . 335
Examination, Credits b . . . . . . . .... ... 52
Faculty, Administntion and Profeaaional Staff 355
Faculty, Emeriti . .. . .. ... ... . . . ... 377
Fees and Expe118es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-89
FIN: Finance Counes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Finance, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Financial Aid and Scholarships .. . .... 89-103
Financial Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Foreign Languages, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Foreign Languages, Department and Majon . 203
Foreign Students: See International Students
Fraternities, Social . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
FRE: French Counes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
French, Certification in for Teacher Education 204
French, Coones (FRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
French, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
GCT: Graphic Communications Coones . . . 256
General Business Major . . . . . . . . . . .. . 145
General Education, College of
Education & Human Services . . . . . . . . 109
General Education, College of Liberal Arts . 115
General Education, College of
Science and Technology . . . . . . . . . . . 118
General Science Certification . . . . . . . . . . 298
GEO: Geography Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Geography, Coones (GEO) ... . . . . . . . . 175
Geography Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Geology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GER: Coones in German . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
German, Certification in
for Teacher Education ... .. . ... ... 204
German, Coones (GER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
German, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Gerontology . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... .. 214
Gerontology, Counes ()CGE) . . . . . . . . . . 216
Gerontology, Major in .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Gerontolou: Aging Specialist Certificate . . 215
GMS : Coones in Military Science
(RaTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 283
Goals of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Good Academic Standing . . . . . . . . . . 47, 57
381
Governon, Board of, State System of
Higher Education
Grade Appeal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Grade Point Average . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 46
Grade Reporta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 51
Grading System . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Graduate Coones, Undergraduate Credit for . 52
Graduate Credits for Senion . . . . . . . . ... 53
Graduate School . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Graduation Honon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54
Graduation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Grants, Financial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 95
Graphic Communications Technology,
Major in .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . 237
Graphic Communications, Coones (GCT) . . 256
Guidance and Cou118eling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Handicapped, Academic Programs in. See Special
Education and Speech Pathology
Handicapped: See Disabled
Hazing . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . ... 71
Health and Physical Education, Coones (HPE)220
Health, Physical Education and Safety,
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Health Profeaaions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Health Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
HIS : History Counes . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 225
History and Urban Studies Department of . . 223
History, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
History of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Honon Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Honon Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Honor Societies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Honors Convocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Honon, Graduation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54
Honon, Semester (Dean's List) .. . .. . . . . 54
Honon : See also: Distinguished Service Awards
Housing . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Housing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HSD: Coones in Driven Education
and Highway Education . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Human-Resources Manaiement, Major in . . 145
Humanities, Area Degree Program in .. 115, 285
Identification, Social Security Number . . . . . 78
Illneaa, Absence Due to ·. . . . . . . . . . . 45 , 67
Incomplete Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Industrial Arts: See Industry and Technology
Industry and Technology, Department .... 230
IND Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Industrial Management Technology, Major in 236
Industrial Management Technology:
Computer Science Option, Major in . . . . 272
Industrial/Organizational Psychology,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Industrial Technology, Counes (ITE) .. ... 262
382
Industrial Technology, Major in .. . .. . .. 238
Industry Counc1 (IND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Infinnary: See Health Service■
Intercollegiate Athletic ■ • . . . . . . . . . • . . . 65
International Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
International Studie ■ (Geography) Major in . 170
Intemahip• . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 116
rrE: Coone■ in Industrial Technology . . . . 262
Journali■m, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Laboratory Coone Requirement,
College of Liberal Arts . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Language■, Foreign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Late Payment Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Learning Centen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Learning Di■abled : CARE Program . . . .. . . 26
Learning Reaource Centen . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Liberal Arts, College of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Library, Loui1 L . Manderino . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Library Service,, Department . . . . . . . . . . 267
LIT: Coone■ in Literature . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Literature, Coone■ Loam . ... . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . 96, 99
Majon, Lill of ... . . . ... .. . . .. . ... 106
Management, Major in ... . . ... . . . . . . 145
Management (MGT) Coonca . . . . . . . . . . 153
Management and Computer Science/
Industrial Management Program . . . . . . 272
Manufacturing/lndulllrial Management,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Manufacturing Technology, Councs (MTE) 264
Manufacturing Technology,
Degree Program in .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Marketing, Major in . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 145
Marketing (MK1) Coone, . . . ... . . . . . 154
MAT: Mathematic Coone, . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Mathematic ■ and Computer Science,
Department of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Mathematica and Computer Science, Major in 270
Mathematica, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Mathematic ■, Coone■ (MAT) . . . . . . . . . 273
Mathematic■ Laboratory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mathematic ■, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Medical Technology, Major in . . . . .. ... 131
Mentally/Phy ■ically Handicapped, Major in . 329
Meterology, Program in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
MGT: Management Coones . . . . . . . . . . 154
Mentally/Phy■ically Handicapped, Physical
Education and Recreation Major in . . . . 329
Military Science, Councs (GMS) . . . . 282, 283
Military Science, Department of . . . . . . . . 277
Minilllry, Campu1 ... . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 37
Miuion of the Univenity . . . . . . .. . . . . . IS
MKT: Marketing Coones . . . . . . . . . ... 153
INDEX
Mortuary Science, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . 135
MTE: Manufacturing Technology Counc■ • . 264
Mu■ic, Department and Counc■ (MUS) . . . 285
Natural Science, Area Degree Program in . . 298
Nondi■crimination Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Numerical Control Technology,
Auociate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
NUR.: Counc■ in Nuning . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Nuraing, Bachelor of Science in . . . . . . . . 288
Nuning, Department and Coune1 (NUR.) . . 288
Nuning: See al.so: Regiatered Nunc Anelllhetilll
Program; Public School Nuning Program;
Dental Hygiene Program; Health Profeuiona
Objective■ of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Oceanography, Program in . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Out-of-State Residency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Ouwome1Alleument . . ... .. .. . . . . . . 34
Overload, Coone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Parka and Recreation, Major in . . . . . . . . 171
Paa/Fail Grading Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Payment of Bill■ • . . . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . 85
Pennaylvania Residency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
PHI: Philoaophy Counc1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Philoaophy Department . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 291
Photo-Lithography (Offset)
Program in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
PHS : Phy■ical Science Coone■ . .... .... 302
PHY: Phy1ic1 Coones ... . . . . . . . .. .. 301
Physical Education Coones (HPE) . . . . . . 228
Phyaical Education: See al.so Special Education
Physical Science Coones (PHS) . . . . . . . . 302
Phyaical Science Department . . . . . . . . . . 295
Physic ■ Councs (PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Phyaics, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Physic ■, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JS
Plagiariam and Cheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Political Science, Counes (POS) . . . . . . .. 318
Political Science, Major in . . . . . . . . . .. 314
POS : Political Science Counes . . . . . . . .. 318
Pre-Engineering Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Pre-Law/Philoaophy, Major in . .. . ... . . 292
Pre-Profe■aional Biology Majora . . . . . . . . 132
Printing Management: Industrial Management
Technology Program in . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Probation, Academic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Profeuional Writing Program,
Majon in .. . . . . . . . . ... . ... 191, 193
Program and Departmental
Coone Abbreviation■ • ... • . . . ••. . . 106
Program■ Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 06
Progreu, Academic, Satisfactory . . . . 47, 100
INDEX
PSN: Public School Nuning Coones . . . . . 308
PSY: Psychology Coune1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Psychology, Coones (PSY) .. .. . . . . . . . 305
Psychology, Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Psychology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Public Administntion, Major in . . . . . . .. 314
Public Relations, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Psychological Counseling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Public Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . ... 41
Public School Nuning Prognm
and Counea (PSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Quality Point Avenge (Gnde Point Avenge) . 46
Radio and Television, Communication
Studies Major in . . . . . . . .... .. . .. 160
Radio and Television, Profeuional Writing
Major in ..... . . .. .......... .. 194
Reading Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Readmi11ion lo the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . 60
Refund, for Student Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Refund Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87, 103
Regiatcred Nune Aneathetill Prognm
and Counea (RNA) . . . . . . . . . . . ... 310
Regiatntion, Fee for Late . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Registntion Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Regulationa, Genenl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Repeating a Coone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Reserve Ofticen Tnining Corps (ROTC) 95, 280
Residence Halla . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 63
Residence Rcquiremenll for Gnduation . . . . 46
Residency, Pennsylvania and Out-of-State . . . 76
RNA: Coone, in Nurse Anesthetist Program 310
Robotic• Syatcma, Auociate Degree in . . . . 248
ROTC . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . ... 95,277
Room Deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ruuian Coones (RUS) .... .. .. . . ... 210
Ru11ian & Slavic Studiea, Major in . . . . . . 205
Satiafactory Academic Progre11 . . . . . . . . 100
Scholanhipa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 99
Science and Technology, College of . . . . . . 118
Science, Certification in Genenl
Science for Teacher Education . . . . . . 298
Scientific and Technology Writing,
Profeuional Writing, Major in . . . . . . . 194
Screen Printing, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Screen Printing, Technology, Associate
Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Second Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 55
Second Major . . . . . . . ... ... . . . .... 55
Secondary Education, Certification in . . . . . 179
Secondary Education, Courses (EDS) . . . . . 181
Secondary Education:
See also,: Prognma in Teacher Certification in
Art, Biology, Chemillry, Communication, Earth
Science, En,lish, Mathematica, Foreign
383
Language• (French, Gennan, Spanish),
Phy1ic1, Social Sciencee, and Technology
Education
Security lnfonnation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Semeatcr Honon (Dean'• Lill) .. .... . ... 54
SOC : Sociology Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Social Science, Arca Degree Prognm in 115, 312
Social Science, Certification in for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Social Science, Counce (SOS) . . . . . . . . . 322
Social Science, Department (Anthropology,
Political Science, Social Science,
Sociology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Social Security Numben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Social Work Coones (SOW) . . . . . . . . . . 325
Social Work Department and Major .. .... 323
Sociology, Counea (SOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Sociology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Sororitie1, Social . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SOS: Courses in Social Science .. .. . . . . 322
SOW: Social Work Counce . . . . . .... .. 324
SPA: Counca in
Speech Pathology and Audiology . . . . . 338
Spanish, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Spanish Coones (SPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Spanish, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
SPE: Coones in Special Education . . . . . . 334
Special Education/Community Services,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Special Education, Coones (ESP) . . . . . . . 334
Special Education, Department . . . . . . . . . 326
Special Education/Early Childhood,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Special Education, Majon in . . . . . . . . . . 326
Special Education, Mentally and/or
Phyaically Handicapped, Majon in . 327, 329
Special Studenll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Speech Communciation:
See : Communication Studies
Speech Pathology and Audiology,
Department and Major . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Speech Pathology and Audiology,
Coune1 (SPA) . . . . . . . . . .... .. .. 338
SPN: Spani ■h Counca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sporll Medicine, Department and Prognma . 340
State Syatcm of Higher Education,
Chancellor and Board of Governon . . . . 350
Student Association Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Student Aaaociation, Incorporated . . . . . . . . 63
Student Congreu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Student Development and Service, . . . . 62, 352
Student Development: Univenity PenoMel .. 62
Student Exchange Prognm . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
INDEX
384
Student Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 113
Student Teaching for Experienced Teachen . 113
Student Union Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83
Teacher Education, Admission to . . . . . . . 111
Teacher Education Programs . . . . . . . . . . 108
Technology Education, Major in . . . . . . . . 242
TED : Technology Education Counes . .... 265
Television and Radio, Communication
Studies Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
THE: Counea in Theatre . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Theatre, Counes (THE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Theatre, Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Theatre, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Theatre: Su also: Communication
Tnnscript Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Transfer Credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 79-80
Transient Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Travel & Tourism, Major in . . . . . . . . . . 170
Trustees, Council of, California Univenity . 351
Tuition and Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-82
Two-year Programs: See : Associate Degrees
Undergraduate Credit for Graduate Counes . . 52
Photography
Production Assistance
Urban Studies, Coones (XUA) . . . . . . . . . 228
Urban Studies, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
U .S . Citizenship-A Requirement for Teacher
Certification in Pennsylvania . . . . . . . . 114
Veterans .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 99
Veterans, Coune Credit for Military Service . 86
Visiting Students Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vocational Rehabilitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Washington Hospital,
Registered Nunes' Program . . . . . . . . 114
Withdrawal, Administrative ... . . . . . . . .. 58
Withdrawal from Courses .. . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Withdrawal from the Univenity . ... .. .. . 58
Women' s Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Work Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Word ProceHing Center . . . . . ... . . . . . . 21
Writing Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Writing, Professional Writing Major .. 191 , 193
Writing Requirement, College of Liberal Arts I 15
XCP: Career Planning Coune . . . . . . . . . 121
XGE: Gerontology Counes . . . ... . . . . . 216
XUA: Counea in Urban Affain . . . . . . . . 228
Mary Huschak
Mary Jane Sicchitano
,.
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
250 University Avenue
California, PA 15419-1394
412-938-4000
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY
OF
PENNSYLVANIA
UNDERGRADUATE CATALOGUE 1992-1994
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
250 University Avenue
California, Pennsylvania, 15419-1394
(412) 938-4000
UNDERGRADUATE CATALOG
1992-1994
Volume 92
Number 2
California University of Pennsylvania
is one of the fourteen institutions of higher learning
of the State System of Higher Education of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
California University of Pennsylvania is
A MEMBER OF
the Association of State Colleges and Universities
the American Association of Colleges of Teacher Eduction
ACCREDITED BY
the Middle States Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools
ACCREDITED IN TEACHER EDUCATION BY
the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education
ACCREDITED IN SOCIAL WORK BY
Council on Social Work Education
ACCREDITED IN ATHLETIC TRAINING BY
the National Athletic Trainers Association
ACCREDITED IN NURSING BY
the National League for Nursing
California University of Pennsylvania admits students of any sex, race, color, national and ethnic origin to all
rights, privileges, programs and activities generally accorded or made available to students at the University. The
same policy is followed with respect to all employees regardless of rank or classification. The University does not
discriminate on the basis of sex, race, color, religion, sexual preference, present or previous military service, ethnic
and national origin in the administration of its educational policies, admissions processes, scholarships and loan
programs, employment practices and athletic and other University administrative programs The University does
not discriminate on the basis of handicap in admission or access to its programs. Inquiries regarding Title IX
compliance and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 may be directed to the Title IX Coordinator (412)
938-4351, the Social Equity Officer (412) 938-4185, the Title 504 Coordinator (412) 938-4076, or the Director of
Office of Civil Rights Region ill, U.S. Department of Education, Philadelphia, PA 17101.
This catalog contains regulations, facts, and requirements that were correct at the time of publication. The
governing personnel of California University of Pennsylvania reserve the right and authority to alter any and/or
all of the statements contained herein.
In keeping with the educational mission of the University, the educational and financial policies and procedures are
continually being reviewed and changed. Consequently, this document cannot be considered binding and must be
used solely as an informational guide.
Students are responsible for keeping informed of official policies and for meeting all relevant requirements.
1
CONTENTS
ACADEMIC CALENDAR, 1992-1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
THE UNIVERSITY . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Majors & Programs Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
FEES AND EXPENSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FINANCIAL AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
COLLEGES, DEPARTMENTS, AND MAJORS . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 105
Divisions of the University . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-120
Departments, Majors, and Courses . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121-348
GOVERNANCE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Governance of the State System of Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Governance of California University of Pennsylvania . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faculty and Officers of the University . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .
Professors Emeriti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 349
. . 350
351-354
355-376
377-378
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
2
Academic Calendar: 1992-1994
Spring 1992
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Spring Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Easter Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Commencement
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
Friday
Monday
Thursday
Monday
Friday
Saturday
January 13-14
January 15
March 6
March 16
April 16
April 20
May 1
May2
Fall 1992
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Labor Day Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Thanksgiving Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
August 31-September 1
September 2
Friday
Tuesday
September 4
September 8
Tuesday
Monday
Thursday
November 24
November 30
December 17
Spring 1993
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Spring Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Easter Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Commencement
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
January 18-19
January 20
Friday
Monday
March 12
March 22
Thursday
Monday
Friday
Saturday
April 8
April 12
May7
May 8
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
3
Fall 1993
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Labor Day Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Thanksgiving Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
August 30-31
September 1
Friday
Tuesday
September 3
September 7
Tuesday
Monday
Tuesday
November 23
November 29
December 14
Spring 1994
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Spring Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Easter Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Commencement
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
Friday
Monday
Thursday
Monday
Friday
Saturday
January 17-18
January 19
~
-
March 11
March 21
March 31
April 4
May 6
May 7
Fall 1994
Registration/Orientation
Classes Begin
Labor Day Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Thanksgiving Recess
Begins after classes
Ends at 8:00 a.m.
Classes End
Monday, Tuesday
Wednesday
August 29-30
August 31
Friday
Tuesday
September 2
September 6
Tuesday
Monday
Friday
November 22
November 28
December 16
5
THE UNIVERSITY
-The Campus and the Region
-Some History
-Programs Offered
-Equality of Opportunity
-The Missions, Goals, and Objectives of the University
THE UNIVERSITY
6
THE CAMPUS
The University is in the Borough of California, a community of approximately 6000
residents, located in Washington County, on the banks of the Monongahela River, about an
hour's drive south of Pittsburgh. It is accessible via Interstate 70, Exits 15 (PA 43), 16
(Speers), or 17 (PA 88, Charleroi) or via U.S. 40 (PA 43 or 88). The recent completion
of the first spur of the limited-access Mid-Mon Valley / Fayette Expressway (PA 43) links
California to the federal Interstate system. The University is approximately 30 minutes from
Exit 8 (New Stanton) on the Pennsylvania Turnpike, and an hour from Greater Pittsburgh
International Airport.
The main campus consists of 33 buildings situated on 59 acres. A modem football
stadium, including an all-weather track, seven tennis courts, a baseball diamond, playing
areas for intramural sports, and picnic facilities is located on some 83 acres at the George
H. Roadman Recreation Center on Route 88, approximately two miles south of the main
campus.
The Area
The geographic location of the University gives the resident student opportunities to
explore and pursue a wide variety of activities. Located in the Appalachian Plateau, an area
of low rolling hills, the University is a short drive from camping, hiking,fishing, hunting,
white water rafting and canoeing, and skiing activities in the Laurel Mountains. In addition
to cultural activities provided on campus, the student has easy access to the Pittsburgh
metropolitan area. This provides the student an opportunity to enjoy the Pittsburgh
Symphony, the Pittsburgh Ballet, the Civic Light Opera, the David L. Lawrence Convention
Center, the Pittsburgh Steelers, Penguins, and Pirates, various museums and all of the
excitements and attractions of a major metropolitan area.
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA:
A BRIEF HISI'ORY
For more than a century, the institution that is now California University of
pennsylvania has been growing and changing, until now it has developed into a varied and
vital multi-purpose university. California is one of the fourteen state-owned institutions of
higher education in the State System of Higher Education, but it has its unique history, and
we present some of the highlights of it here. (Fuller information may be found in the book
by Regis J. Serinko, California State College: 1he People's College in the Monongahela
Valley, published in 1975.)
THE UNIVERSITY
7
1852: A two-story Academy, offering education from kindergarten through college was
established in the recently founded community of California. The institution was supported
by local taxes and the donations of some of the residents of the community.
1864: A ten-acre plot for the Academy, still the center of the University, was purchased.
1865: The Academy obtained a charter as a Normal School for its district and became a
teacher-preparatory institution.
1874: The institution was renamed the South Western State Normal School.
1914: The Commonwealth acquired the institution and renamed it the California State
Normal School. The curriculum was now exclusively a two-year preparatory course for
elementary school teachers.
1928: The institution became California State Teachers College, returning to its previous
status as a four-year degree-granting institution, with increasing opportunities for growth and
development. Under the presidency of Robert Steele (1928-1951), California began to
concentrate on industrial arts and atypical education (what is now called special education)
and otherwise expanded its curricula. The campus grew to 35 acres, and a number of new
buildings were erected.
1959: During the presidency of Michael Duda (1956-68), liberal arts curricula were
introduced, and the college became California State College. In 1962 a graduate program
was introduced. The degrees of M.A. and M.S. were initiated in 1968. During Dr. Duda's
presidency more than a dozen new buildings were completed, and the size of the student
body and faculty increased more than four-fold.
1974: During the presidency of George H. Roadman (1969-1977), the college developed a
special mission in Science and Technology, to complement its traditional roles in Liberal
Arts and Education.
1983: On July 1, 1983, the college became California University of Pennsylvania, in
recognition of its multiple roles and purposes, in the State System of Higher Education,
during the presidency of John Pierce Wat_kins. The College of Science and Technolo&y
became fully operational, offering programs in such varied areas as mathematics and
computer science, industrial management, nursing, energy technology, robotics, and
electrical engineering technology.
THE UNIVERSITY
8
Si monumentum requiris, circumspice.
DR. JOHN PIERCE WATKINS, president of California University of Pennsylvania from
1977 to 1992, is a member of the California class of 1953. He taught in the Edgewood
schools and received a master's degree at West Virginia University before returning in 1957
as a professor of English at California, where he has spent the remainder of his academic
career.
Dr. Watkins received his Ph.D. in English in 1963 from the University of Pittsburgh,
where he was a Danforth Fellow from 1960 to 1962. At California his courses in medieval
literature and in Shakespeare are particularly remembered. He served as chair of the
English department and as vice-president for academic affairs before becoming president.
He has traveled widely in this country and abroad on behalf of this university and has served
on numerous state, regional , national, and international bodies dealing with higher education.
Since 1977, California University has experienced unprecedented development. The
university has been reorganized into four vice-presidential areas of responsibility. The
College of Science and Technology was founded and given a special mission in the State
System in that area, and the academic organization of the university has consequently been
restructured. So many new programs have been introduced in Science and Technology,
Education and Human Services, Liberal Arts, and the Graduate School that a majority of
students are now enrolled in programs that did not exist 15 years ago. The university has
strengthened its commitment to social equity in recruitment and retention of students, staff,
and faculty. The new Manderino Library has become a center for state-of-the art
information technology. An attractive, commodious, and secure campus provides an
appropriate setting for study or work. Major buildings have been renovated-chief among
them certainly Old Main, which has been restored to its former grace, dignity, and utility.
Academic achievement has been encouraged and rewarded by increased scholarships and
awards, Learning Centers, an Honors program, and a presidential Honors Convocation.
Students have benefitted from improved residence halls and dining facilities, new programs
for physical fitness and recreation, broadened athletic programs, and an expanded Student
Union. Special provisions have been made for educationally, socially, economically, or
physically disadvantaged students and for mature, non-traditional students. Increasing
numbers of new faculty members have come to California, from throughout the country and
abroad. Generous provisions have been made for faculty professional development in both
teaching and research, and the faculty and administration have been increasingly successful
in procuring grants for their own programs and research and for the university. California's
tradition as a center for teacher education has increased through such programs as the
Teacher Enhancement Centers, which bring together experienced faculty from both the
public schools and the university. Since 1983 the Mon Valley Renaissance has brought the
university into partnership with local business, industry, and government to help revitali:ze
the economy of the region. By 1992, California University of Pennsylvania has become not
only a center for public higher education but a multi-purpose university serving the various
needs of Southwestern Pennsylvania.
9
THE UNIVERSITY
JOIIN PIERCE WATKINS
THE UNIVERSITY
UNDERGRADUATE ACADEMIC MAJORS AND OPTIONS
In order to provide educational opportunities for students with different backgrounds and
interests, the University offers a wide variety of academic programs. All of the degree programs
are based on a broad general education designed to assist the individual to develop skills in
communication, grow in cultural and intellectual interests, and develop the ability to do critical
thinking. This extensive foundation in the arts, sciences, and humanities is enriching and
essential in providing a liberal education for all students.
The University offers degrees from four separate divisions: the College of Education and
Human Services, which awards the bachelor of science degree in education in thirty major
programs, and two associate degree programs and the bachelor of arts degree in two programs;
the College of Liberal Arts, which awards the bachelor of arts and the bachelor of science
degrees in forty-three; the College of Science and Technology, which awards the bachelor of
science degree in forty-six programs; and the associate of science degree in ten areas; and the
Graduate School, which offers the master of science, master of arts, and master of education
degrees. The following programs are offered at the undergraduate level.
I. BACCALAUREATE DEGREE PROGRAMS
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
Anthropology
Art
Art: Teacher Certification
(with W&J or Carlow College)
Communication Studies
-Public Relations
-Radio & Television
Earth Science
-Meteorology
-Oceanography
Economics
English
-Business & Commercial Writing
-Creative Writing
-Journalism
-Radio & TV Writing
-Scientific & Technical Writing
French
Geography
-Applied Geography
-Travel & Tourism
Geology
German
History
Humanities Area
Industrial Organizational Psychology
International Studies
-Business & Economics
-Foreign Language
-Geography
- Political Science
Parks & Recreation Management
Philosophy
-Philosophy/Pre-Law
Political Science
-Pre-Law
-Public Administration
Psychology
Russian & Soviet Studies
Social Science Area
Sociology
Spanish
Theatre
Urban Studies
General Studies in Liberal Arts
(for undecided students)
THE UNIVERSITY
11
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOWGY
Administration & Management
Biology
-Pre-Chiropractic Medicine
-Pre-Dentistry
-Pre-Medicine
-Pre-Osteopathic Medicine
-Pre-Optometry
-Pre-Podiatric Medicine
-Pre-Pharmacy
-Pre-Veterinary Medicine
Business Administration
-Accounting
-Business Economics
-Computer Based Systems Management
-Finance
-Human Resources Management
-Management
-Marketing
Chemistry
Electrical Engineering Technology
Environmental Studies
-Environmental Conservation
-Environmental Pollution Control
-Environmental Resources
-Environmental Science
Graphic Communication Technology
-Electrographics
-Photolithography (Offset)
-Screen Printing
Industrial Management Technology
-Management & Computer Science
-Manufacturing
-Printing Management
Industrial Technology
Manufacturing Technology
Mathematics
Mathematics & Computer Science
Applied Computer Science
Medical Technology
Mortuary Science (Cooperative)
Natural science
Physics
Pre-Engineering
General Studies in Science & Technology
(for undecided students)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Athletic Training
Athletic Training/Dual Major
Early Childhood Education
Elementary Education
Elementary & Early Childhood Education
General Studies in Education
(for undecided students)
Gerontology
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped
and Early Childhood Education
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped
and Elementary Education
Secondary Education
-Art (See Liberal Arts above)
-Biology
-General Science
-Chemistry
-Comprehensive Social Science
-Communication
-Earth Science
-English
-French
-German
-Mathematics
-Physics
-Spanish
THE UNIVERSITY
12
Social Work
Special Education
-Community Service Personnel
-Mentally and/or Physically
Handicapped
-Mentally and/or Physically
Handicapped with Physical Education
& Recreation
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Technology Education
Il. ASSOCIATE DEGREE PROGRAMS
Besides the many four-year baccalaureate programs, California University also offers
a variety of two-year vocational programs to meet the educational needs of students who
wish to pursue career-oriented education. The degrees are designed to prepare students for
technical and vocational occupations immediately upon graduation.
Such areas as Automation Technology (with options in robotics and numerical control),
Drafting Technology, Administration and Management (with options in accounting,
computer-based systems management, and banking), Computer Science Technology, Screen
Process Printing Technology, Electronics Technology, Early Childhood Education, and
Community Living Arrangements provide the educational base for exciting careers in the
nineties and beyond.
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Accounting
Administration & Management
-Computer Based Management Systems
-Banking
Computer Science Technology
Automation Technology
-Numerical Control
-Robotics
Drafting Technology
Electronics Technology
Nursing at Washington Hospital
(Degree from Washington Hospital)
(Apply to Washington Hospital)
-Pre-Nursing at Washington Hospital
(No Degree)
Screen Printing Technology
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Community Living Arrangements
Early Childhood
THE UNIVERSITY
13
ill. CERTIFICATION PROGRAMS
(for those with previous certification or degree)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Early Childhood Certification
Elementary Certification
Technology Education Certification
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped
Certification
Secondary Education Certification
-Biology Certification
-Chemistry Certification
-Communication Certification
-Comprehensive Social Science
Certification
-Driver's Training Certification
- Science Certification
-English Certification
-Environmental Education Certification
-French Certification
-General Science Certification
-German Certification
-Mathematics Certification
-Physics Certification
-Spanish Certification
IV. UPPER DIVISION PROGRAMS
(available only to those with previous special certification and/or degree)
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Nursing (BSN-Upper Division for RNs)
-Pre-BSN Nursing
(prerequisites needed for RN s)
Electrical Engineering Technology
(completed Associate EET program)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetist
Public School Nursing (for RNs)
(for CRNAs)
Dental Hygienist (for Dental Hygienists)
THE UNIVERSITY
14
EQUALITY OF OPPORTUNITY
California University of Pennsylvania acknowledges that equality of opportunity is the
cornerstone of a free and democratic society. As a state-owned institution, it accepts the
duty of putting the principle of equal opportunity into practice. As an institution of higher
education, it accepts the responsibility of teaching that principle by its policies and actions.
Consequently, California University of Pennsylvania commits itself, ethically and legally,
to the equal opportunity policies of a system of fair and open recruitment and acceptance of
students regardless of sex, race, color, religious creed, lifestyle, affectional or sexual
preference, disability, present or previous military service, ancestry, national origin, union
and political affiliation, and age. Nevertheless, mindful of the reality of past injustices and
present societal needs, the university reserves the right to employ a limited use of racial,
ethnic, and sexual criteria to accomplish remedial objectives when necessary.
Once students are admitted to California University of Pennsylvania, the same rights,
privileges, programs and activities are made available to all without regard to arbitrary and
irrelevant criteria. Financial aids, especially scholarships, guaranteed loans, National Direct
Student Loans, grants, work study programs, assistantships, and internships, are provided
on an equal opportunity basis. Likewise, advisors and counselors are available to all
students. Special programs, in particular have been established to meet the needs of students
who meet the federally prescribed financial and academic criteria. Residence halls are
available on a first-come, first-served basis to all students without regard to race, national
origin, or religion. However, in the case of living arrangements, sex and disability
distinctions are made to better serve and accommodate all students. Finally, in accordance
with recent federal and state legislation, architectural and programmatic modifications have
been implemented to ensure that no qualified student is prevented from succeeding at
California University of Pennsylvania because of disability.
In addition, California University of Pennsylvania engages in an open and equitable system
of recruitment and employment of faculty and staff candidates. It practices a nondiscriminatory system of compensation, including pay, promotion, tenure, transfer,
education, training and other benefits of employment.
Finally, California University of Pennsylvania prides itself on having created a workplace
and learning environment free from discrimination and harassment. If situations or
conditions to the contrary occur, an immediate and appropriate redress will take place.
Persons aware of such situations or conditions are encouraged to contact the Social Equity
Officer (938-4185), or the Title IX Coordinator (938-4351), or the Section 504 Coordinator
(938-4076).
THE UNNERSITY
15
THE MISSION, GOAI.S, AND OBJECTIVES
OF CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY' OF PENNSYLVANIA
California University of Pennsylvania's mission is to provide quality education at a
reasonable cost. To this end the university:
(1) offers undergraduate instruction in the liberal''arts, education, human resources, the
professions, business, science and technology;
(2) offers a graduate education to, and beyond, the master's degree, in certain areas of
study;
(3) helps meet the region' s economic, social, cultural, and recreational needs; (4) fosters
research and service;
(5) encourages the intellectual growth of its faculty, as well as of its students.
California's special mission is to develop programs in science, technology, and applied
engineering.
Goals
California University of Pennsylvania is a multipurpose, regional university firmly
committed to offering students of widely varied ages, backgrounds, interests and needs, a
broad range of education opportunities and experiences. Thus, the university endeavors to
provide a contemporary array of degree programs-associate, baccalaureate and
masters-which will enable the student to develop as an intelligent, caring individual who
will be able to function as a contributing, productive member of society. The university
recognizes the important relationship that exists between those disciplines which enhance
one's ability to think critically, reason analytically, communicate effectively, maintain
historical perspective and promote good citiz.enship and those disciplines which provide the
specialized knowledge and the critical intellectual skills to perform effectively in a wide
variety of settings. To this end, it is the purpose of the university to prepare men and
women to meet the challenges of the world of work: in education, business, industry,
government, the professions, the human services, and graduate and professional schools.
The principal goal of the College of Education and Human Services, the university's
oldest division, is to maintain a diversity of contemporary curricula appropriate for the
preparation of new teachers and the improvement of teachers already in the field. More
recently, the college has elected to sponsor the development and delivery of a variety of
special programs for the purpose of educating practitioners in a number of human service
areas.
Through traditional courses of study, the College of Liberal Arts attempts to teach
reflective thinking .that enables graduates to make responsible social decisions in a multicultural world. The Liberal Arts programs are designed to present students with options that
THE UNIVERSITY
16
call upon precise knowledge, cultural perspectives, aesthetics, and personal and social
communication skills in order to create informed, as well as technologically literate,
graduates.
As the newest division of the university, the College of Science and Technology's goal
is to make available an array of scientific, technological and career-oriented programs which
prepare students for the increasingly complex demands of the industrial, business, health
fields as well as for further study in graduate and professional schools.
The goal of the Graduate School is to provide an opportunity for those who already
have undergraduate training to further develop their experience at the graduate or postgraduate level.
As a regional institution, the university strives to present a diversity of programs and
services for those residing in its service area. A principal goal of the Office of Development
and External Relations, especially in its Mon Valley Renaissance program, is to provide
different kinds of assistance related to economic development. The university also offers to
local residents access to many social and cultural activities.
Objectives
The faculty and students of the university are participating members of an educational
institution charged with preservation, discovery, and dissemination of knowledge in the arts,
sciences, technologies, vocations and professions, and with the creative application of that
knowledge in their lives both as individuals and members of society.
The objectives of the university are:
(1) To provide a liberal education which aims at developing analytical thinking and
individual initiative and responsibility;
(2) To provide flexible, innovative programs and support services that are responsive
to a broad range of student and regional needs;
(3) To provide a professional faculty and an effective administration;
(4) To create and maintain a learning environment in which the rights of all are
respected;
(5) To provide a wide range of learning opportunities for students interested in
associate, baccalaureate, graduate, and non-degree programs;
(6) To promote effective communication among faculty, students, administration, and
the general public;
(7) To provide a diversity of intellectual, cultural, social and recreational activities
and experiences for the university and surrounding communities;
(8) To encourage thoughtful and responsible faculty and student participation in local,
state, national, and international affairs;
(9) To require high standards of teaching and scholarship and to encourage
participation in professional activities;
(10) To foster academic research which contributes to human knowledge and the
vitality of the institution; and
(11) To maintain an on-going system of self-evaluation whereby the goals of the
institution serve as the criteria for determining the institution's effectiveness.
17
GENERAL INFORMATION
-Orientation
-Computer Facilities
-The Library
-Learning Resource Centers
-Honors Opportunities
-Placement and Career Services
-Cooperative Education
-Internships
-National Student Exchange
-Visiting Student Program
-Veterans Affairs
-Athletics
-Women's Center
-Campus Ministry
-Confidentiality of Records
-Public Safety and Security
GENERAL INFORMATION
18
ORIENTATION
A comprehensive one-day orientation program, under the direction of the Offices
of Academic Affairs and Student Development, is conducted for entering students and
their parents during the summer months before the student's beginning fall semester.
This initial formal encounter with the University community provides students and
parents with an intimate view of the University's total program, including both
academic and social aspects. Students and parents discuss the academic requirements
of various curricula with academic personnel and review an individual student's
interest, capabilities, and career plans. At the close of the program the students have
registered for their first semester of courses, and both parents and students have made
valuable contacts with University personnel, in both areas, academic and student
affairs.
GENERAL INFORMATION
II
19
COMPUTER FACILITIES
I
COMPUTER CENTER
The University Computer Center is located in the basement of Manderino Library.
Staff offices are open Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. until 4:00 p.m. User
facilities in the World Culture Building are available for student use at least 80 hours each
week. In addition, dial up access is available almost 24 hours a day.
The computer facilities at the University are separated into two distinct functional areas.
The first area deals with the providing of computer resources to meet the instructional and
research needs of the University, such as student access for coursework and the Manderino
Library VULCAT on-line catalog. The second area deals with providing resources to meet
the administrative needs of the University, including, for example, the following functions:
student scheduling and registration, library circulation control, revenue and accounts
receivable, student data base maintenance, personnel data base maintenance, and the
University budgeting system.
Computer Accounts
Any student may obtain a computer account by stopping in at the computer center office
in the basement of Manderino Library to fill out a user account request form. The forms
are available from the Computer Center secretary. There is no charge for the service or for
the use of the computer.
Students enrolled in courses where VAX computer assignments are given have an
account generated for them automatically. Other students must fill out an account request
form, which must be signed by a faculty advisor or instructor, then returned to the
Computer Center office. Individual user account requests normally take 24 hours to
process.
User Guide
An Introductory Users' Manual for VAX/VMS Users is available for $3.75 at the
information desk in the lobby of the Student Union. This manual is a must for all new or
infrequent VAX users. It describes some of the essential bits of knowledge required to
effectively utiliz.e the VAX computers on campus, including how to log in here at California
University of Pennsylvania, how to use the file editor, and how to compile programs.
GENERAL INFORMATION
20
World Culture User Center
The World Culture User Center located in the basement of the World Culture building
is the main center for campus VAX access. This facility contains a VAX terminal room,
various printers, a graphics room, a PC micro laboratory, and two classrooms.
Tektronix 4105 terminals and a 4696 color ink-jet screen copier are available to support
computer graphics courses. The PC micro lab currently houses IBM-PCs, PC clones,
Maclntoshes, and Apple microcomputers.
Entrance to the User Center is through the University Avenue (west) entrance or via the
elevator. Hours are, generally, Monday through Thursday, 8:00 a.m. to 10:30p.m.; Friday
and Saturday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.; and Sunday, 3:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m., but may vary.
The User Center is usually closed Saturdays during summer sessions.
Other Campus Facilities
Every department has microcomputers for student and staff use; only some of the major
facilities are listed here.
Two specialized VAX terminal laboratories, the Computer Aided Design and Drafting
laboratory and the Numerical Control Machine laboratory, are located in the Coover Annex
and operated by the Industry and Technology department. These laboratories are reserved
for students taking specific computer-aided drafting and numerical control course. Each
laboratory is equipped with Tektronix 4107 and 4207 terminals with graphics tablets.
Additional campus microcomputer laboratories are located in and operated by various
departments on campus, including Industry and Technology, Business and Economics,
Mathematics and Computer Science, Education, and the English Department's Word
Processing Laboratory (see page 21 below).
Instructional Applications
The University maintains the following applications packages in support of instructional
computing. Graphic packages run using the Tektronix 4100 series and 4200 series terminals
are available in the World Culture and Coover Annex terminal laboratories.
SPSS-X
Statistical Package for the Social Sciences, Extended
EQINOX
Computer Aided Manufacturing and Numerical control.
ANVIL-5000
Computer Aided Design and Drafting.
GKS
Graphical Kernel System (subroutine library).
PLOT- IO
Tektronix graphical subroutine packages.
KERMIT and XMODEM
PC to VAX file transfer packages.
VULCAT
Library On-Line Catalog.
TeX and LaTeX
Typesetting packages.
POPLOG
PROLOG AND LISP development package.
GENERAL INFORMATION
21
Campus Network
University VAX computers, terminal laboratories and many campus buildings are
connected together using a high-speed "Ethernet" local area network. This industry-standard
network allows users to share and more easily access campus computing resources.
Computer Center Facilities
The VAX computers which service the campus are maintained by the Computer Center.
The main system consists of a five node VAX cluster composed of the following processors:
one 14 megabyte 11/780, one 32 megabyte 8350 dual processor, and three 16 megabyte
8250 single processors. An HSC50 intelligent disk processor supplies the cluster nodes with
access to any of the four gigabytes of disk storage currently available.
Data backup is done using a TU78 6250 BPI or TU80 1600 BPI tape drive. A 1200
LPM Fujitsu printer and a 600 LPM LP26 printer produce administrative printouts.
Additionally, a Microvax II system supports the Computer Aided Design and Drafting
users.
User terminal access to all systems is via the Ethernet network. Some direct wire
connections remain to the 11/780 and microvax processor, but these will be replaced in the
future.
WORD PROCESSING LAB
The Word Processing Lab in Dixon Hall has more than 40 computers for the use of
students. During the regular academic year, the Lab is open at least 70 hours a week
(including weekends), and during the summer for 40 hours a week. The lab is staffed by
trained student workers, and a faculty coordinator is usually on duty during the day.
Both MS-DOS and Macintosh computers, and a variety of word processing and related
software, are available. In addition, the lab provides fast, high-quality, dot matrix and laser
printing.
For more elaborate art, layout, and design work, the lab offers desktop publishing
equipment and software, including major layout and art programs, pre-packaged art, big
screens, a scanner, and a light table. Students in the Professional Writing Program receive
instruction in desk-top publishing.
Apart from the purchase of an inexpensive storage disk, there are no fees or charges
for the use of the Word Processing Lab. The atmosphere is informal, and students in all
curricula are invited and encouraged to use this friendly, high-tech writing facility.
TEACHER EDUCATION COMPUTER LABORATORY
The College of Education and Human Services maintains a computer laboratory in the
Keystone Education Building, Room 402. The facility is equipped and designed to train
prospective teachers to use computers as tools to support their teaching and instructional
management roles.
22
GENERAL INFORMATION
Equipment includes 16 teaching stations, each consisting of one of the Apple Macintosh
family of computers with one hard drive, one floppy drive, and a color monitor. In
addition, each station is part of an AppleTalk Network linked to a Macintosh Ils. Each
position is linked to a laser printer or one of several dot matrix printers. There are more
than 100 titles of instructional software available for examination and evaluation.
The laboratory facilities are used for formal instruction for the course EDF 301,
Computers for Teachers, about one half of each weekday. During the remainder of the day
until 10:00 p.m. the laboratory is staffed and available to complete assignments for the
course, which is required of all Teacher Education majors, or other uses students may have.
Other than the inexpensive data disks, there is no cost to students.
GENERAL INFORMATION
23
TIIE LIBRARY
At the entrance to the University, the Louis L. Manderino Library is one of the most
prominent and most important buildings on campus. With more than a quarter million books
in open stacks, subscriptions to 1700 newspapers, magazines, and other periodicals, it is first
of all the chief and most accessible source of information on any subject. With a seating
capacity of more than 1500, it is also a place to study and to read, whether the reading is
required for a course or a term paper, or for browsing or recreational reading. During the
fall and spring semesters the library is open 15 hours a day during the week and 9-10 hours
a day on weekends. During the summer, the library is open 13 hours a day Monday
through Thursday and eight hours a day on Friday and Sunday. During examination periods
towards the end of the semester, library hours are extended still further.
Computeriz.ed information retrieval has made library research faster, more thorough,
and more efficient at Manderino. Instead of a card catalog, the library has VULCAT, its
"on-line" catalog that enables the student to sit at any of a dozen or more terminals and,
by means of an easy series of commands, not only quickly locate any books in the library's
collection but print out automatically the titles and call numbers of those books. VULCAT
can also be accessed from various on-campus terminals and, by means of a telephone
modem, by anyone who has a home computer.
To look up magazine or periodical articles, another set of terminals and printers runs
computerized CD-ROM discs to current bibliographies-replacing the need to consult
printed volumes of them issue by issue and year by year. Chief among these discs are: The
Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature, the Business Periodicals Index, the Applied Science
and Technology Index, the Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature , the
Social Sciences Index, the Humanities Index, the MLA International Bibliography, the
Education Index, and ERIC (including the Current Index to Journal in Education.) Through
a Tower System these on-line sources may be used by a number of people at one time.
Other specialized sources on disc include the Fortune 500 Prospector (of particular use to
Business majors), U.S. Census data, PC Globe and PC USA, which feature maps, a Word
Cruncher disc (containing, among other things, the complete works of Shakespeare,
historical documents and speeches, and many complete works of American literature), and
Books in Print. Brief tutorial sessions, specially written pamphlets, and individual assistance
from specialist librarians in bibliographical instruction assist the student who may be
unfamiliar with such on-line searching.
The library also offers such services as a large Reference Collection, inexpensive
photocopiers, out-of-state telephone directories, a large collection of college and university
catalogs, a pamphlet file, syllabi for all courses offered at the University, a certain amount
of computer software, a collection of specially housed art slides, and data on important
business and industries. Some of the special services in or available through the library are:
• Library privileges at 92 other local colleges and universities.
• A Curriculum Library for Teacher Education students, with a large collection of
children's books and textbooks.
GENERAL INFORMATION
24
A Media Center with both hardware (such as videocassette and tape players) and
software (such as films, records, and tapes) that the student may use or, in some
cases, charge out for class, home, or dorm use.
• Government documents of many different categories. Manderino Library is an
official Federal Government Document Depository and regularly receives, in bard
copy, microform, or CD-ROM format, large numbers of these documents-for
example, census data, reports, maps, and books. The Documents Librarian will
assist with the use of this important resource.
• Hundreds of thousands of documents on microform in the ERIC system relating to
all aspects of education, and easily located through the CD-ROM discs.
• Special files on business firms-local, national, and international.
The staff of the Manderino Library are "user-friendly" and welcome any suggestions
not only for books to add to the collection but for improvement of services.
•
25
GENERAL INFORMATION
LEARNING RESOURCE CENTERS
WRITING CENTER
The Writing Center is a non-credit service provided by the English Department to assist
students and faculty from every academic discipline with writing projects. Located in Dixon
119, the Center is open during the regular academic year from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.,
Monday through Friday. The center also offers writing assistance during summer sessions
on a slightly more limited basis.
The Writing Center lends its assistance in these ways:
(1) Tutorials are offered on a one-to-one basis. Tutors may be peers, graduate assistants,
or English instructors who are trained to provide conference-based writing assistance.
(2) Tutors function as coaches and collaborators, neither evaluating writing, lecturing
students, nor completing students' work. Instead, students collaborate with writers in
ways that facilitate the process of writers finding their own answers and developing
their own ideas.
(3) Each student's individual needs are the focus of the tutorial. Students are encouraged
to participate actively in setting the agenda for how the tutor and student will spend
their time together.
(4) The Center serves the university and the entire community, including writers
completing academic papers, business and lab reports, school applications, resumes,
graduate theses, writings for contests, and any other writing projects with which
writers are involved.
The Writing Center, which offers tutoring by appointment or on a walk-in basis, is a
free service to all University students.
READING CENTER
When your class reading assignments make you feel as if you've just entered the
university jungle, come to the Reading Center for a free one-hour tutoring session. Staffed
by one faculty member and two graduate assistants, the Center teaches techniques to
improve reading comprehension and vocabulary. The Center offers help in identifying main
ideas, making inferences, drawing conclusions, understanding concepts and facts, test-taking
skills and building vocabulary. Students make appointments to work privately with a tutor
or schedule an independent lab session that is staff directed. A recent addition to the
Elementary Education Department, the Reading Center is housed in the Keystone Building,
Room 200A and is open from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday.
GENERAL INFORMATION
26
MATHEMATICS LABORATORY
Offered in the Mathematics Laboratory in 115 Noss Hall are the following services and
resources:
1.
Mathematics and computer science tutoring.
2.
Computer software for mathematics courses and for math anxiety.
3. Reference books for mathematics courses and for math anxiety.
If you wish to take advantage of the free tutoring service please call 938-5893 to
schedule a 30-minute appointment. Before calling, we ask that you read your text and start
your homework. If you have trouble completing an assignment, schedule an appointment
for a tutoring session.
We have computer-directed-instruction software and 12 Apple Ile microcomputers
available for your use. The computer software includes topics from basic mathematics
through calculus.
We also have some mathematics-anxiety software. Most people feel up-tight about
mathematics in some way or another. If you're one of these people, you may want to try
some of these materials. (Mathematics anxiety books are available too.)
The Mathematics Laboratory is usually open from 9:a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Mondays to
Thursdays during the fall and spring semesters and the summer and from 9:00 a.m. to 4:00
p.m. on Fridays during the fall and spring semesters. The phone number is 938-5893.
CARE: Services for the Learning Disabled
California University meets the special needs of learning disabled students both in high
school and as undergraduates at the University with CARE-the Center for Academic
Research and Enhancement. More information and application procedures may be obtained
from the CARE office, (412) 938-5781, in the Keystone Education Building, Room 112.
Summer Program
The Summer Program brings learning disabled students who have completed their junior
year of high school to live and study on campus for five weeks. During this period the
students are given intensive remedial instruction in reading, mathematics, spelling, English,
social skills, study skills, survival skills, and Learning Strategies. Following classes each
day are mandatory study sessions, as well as evening recreational periods.
Students who successfully complete the first summer are invited to return the following
summer after their senior year of high school. This second-summer program offers
continued remediation and study skills, with increased emphasis on preparation for college.
A limited number of places may be available to new applicants who have completed their
senior year of high school but did not participate after their junior year.
GENERAL INFORMATION
27
The Summer Program serves approximately 24 students each year on a fee-for-service
basis.
Procedures and standards for admission to the university for the learning disabled are the
same as those for all other applicants. The two programs described are available to the
learning disabled student enrolled at the university. Application for admission to these
programs is a separate procedure and requires documentation separate from that which is
submitted to the Admissions Office at California. Such documents should be sent directly to
the CARE office.
Specialized Support Service Program
The Specialized Support Service Program (SSSP) serves a maximum of 40 participants
on a fee-for-service basis. The SSSP operates under contractual agreement with the
participants, parents, and the CARE staff.
In the first semester, all students must participate in Structured Academic Management
Seminars for two hours a day, four days a week. Subsequent levels of participation are
based on the participant's academic performance. The seminars provide:
• Development of a daily study plan with assigned monitors.
• Assistance in sequencing course assignments into manageable tasks.
• Daily monitoring of academic performance, including student training in
recording assignments and grades.
• Individual and small group tutoring in specific content areas with CARE staff.
• Referral for tutoring to other campus resources. (See the descriptions of the
Writing Center, the Mathematics Laboratory, the Reading Center, described on
pages 25-26 above, and the Department of Academic Development Services on
page 121 in this catalog.)
• The assistance of community-based specialized tutors when needed.
• Word processing equipment, software and the necessary training.
The CARE staff also monitors student academic performance, sends progress reports
to parents on students' overall academic status, assists in scheduling, and works closely with
students' academic advisors.
Additional services such as extended test time, oral testing, use of the Kurzweil Reader,
etc. are provided as needed.
Modified Basic Support Program
The Modified Basic Support Program (MBSP) insures the availability of basic support
services to all identified learning disabled students enrolled in the university who elect to
receive such services but are either not eligible for participation in the Specialized Support
Service Program due to program capacity or choose to receive a less intensive level of
service.
The following services are available to students in the MBSP:
• A regularly scheduled, weekly conference with a member of the CARE staff.
• Review of assignment and study patterns.
• Guidance for referrals to existing University resources.
28
GENERAL INFORMATION
Assistance in the development of self-advocacy as required by the learning
disability.
• Guidance to assist the student to work independently within the University setting.
Enrolli:nent in the MBSP is unlimited, and there is no fee for these services.
•
GENERAL INFORMATION
29
HONORS PROGRAM
The University Honors Program has been established to promote and reward outstanding
intellectual achievement. Each year, the applications of all new freshmen and transfer
students are reviewed, and those students with the very highest indicators of past and future
academic success are invited to participate in the Honors Program. Students in any
undergraduate program or division of the University may participate.
The Honors Program allows academically talented students to work at their own level
of ability, in courses at any stage of their undergraduate career, but it also provides special
opportunities for the inquiring mind to explore important or interesting subjects that are not
commonly offered in undergraduate curricula or that cut across traditional academic
boundaries.
Certain courses, designated as Honors Courses, are restricted to members of the Honors
Program, and they are offered at all class levels. Some of these Honors courses may be
interdisciplinary, cutting across the boundaries that often separate different fields of study.
A course in history, for example, might entail art, music, and literature and cover not just
a single period of time but many different eras and civiliz.ations. Other Honors courses may
represent advanced study, singly or with others, in the Honors student's major field of
study. These two kinds of courses are open only to members of the Honors Program; and
enrollment is kept low, to encourage close interaction between student and professor and to
ensure close attention.
Some of the other, "regular" University course offerings at all levels may have an
Honors component. In such courses, Honors students fulfill the same requirements as other
student in the class but perform certain additional independent work agreed on by student
and professor.
In all such courses, successful completion of the course or of its Honors component is
indicated on the student's transcript.
In addition to this course work, Honors students may participate in a number of special
activities, seminars, projects, etc. Guest speakers, who are eminent specialists in their
fields, address the Honors students from time to time. A special Honors Center, with its
own small library and computer, is reserved for the use of Honors Students.
Inquiries about the Honors Program may be made of the director, California University
of Pennsylvania, California, PA 15419, (412) 938-4535.
GENERAL INFORMATION
30
HONOR SOCIETIES
Many units or departments of the University sponsor undergraduate (or graduate) honor
societies that recognize high levels of academic accomplishment in particular fields of study.
These societies meet regularly with specially assigned faculty advisers, to discuss matters
of professional interest, to honor new inductees, to conduct research either independently
or in cooperation with faculty members, to attend scholarly meetings, or to p~re students
for graduate study or career opportunities. Some of these societies are described in further
detail elsewhere in this catalog; fuller information on all of them may be obtained in the
appropriate offices of the University.
Alpha Mu Gamma (AMr)
National Collegiate Foreign Language Honor Society
Alpha Psi Omega (A 'tO)
National Honorary Dramatics Fraternity
Beta Beta Beta (BBB)
National Honorary Biological Society
Gamma Theta Upsilon (r0Y)
National Honorary Geographical Society
Epsilon Pi Tau (EIIT)
International Honor Society in Industry and Technology
Honor Society in Education
Kappa Delta Pi (K.::lII)
Lambda Alpha (AA)
National Honorary Anthropology Fraternity
Omicron Delta Epsilon (O.::lE)
International Honor Society in Economics
Pi Gamma Mu (IIrM)
National Social Science Honor Society
Pi Kappa Delta (JIU)
National Honorary Forensic Fraternity
Rho Phi Alpha (P~A)
National Honorary Parks and Recreation Administration
Fraternity
Sigma Gamma Epsilon (ErE)
National Honorary Earth Sciences Fraternity
Sigma Pi Epsilon Delta (EIIE.::l) National Honorary Fraternity in Special Education
Sigma Tau Delta (CT'.::l)
National Honorary English Fraternity
Phi Alpha (~A)
Social Work Honorary Fraternity
Phi Alpha Theta (~A0)
International Honorary History Fraternity
Chi Gamma Psi (Xr't)
Honorary Fraternity in the Field of Science
HONORS AT GRADUATION
Commencement Honors are awarded to a limited number of students in the graduating
class. A minimum of 64 earned credits at California University in a baccalaureate degree
program is required to receive commencement honors.
For the criteria for Commencement Honors, see page 54 in the Academic Policies and
Procedures of this catalog.
SEMESTER HONORS
Full-time students are awarded on the basis of grade-point average at the end of each
semester. For the criteria for Semester Honors, see page 54 in the Academic Policies and
Procedures portion of this catalog.
GENERAL INFORMATION
31
HONORS CONVOCATION
The University recognizes, encourages, and rewards academic excellence of master's,
baccalaureate, and associate degree-seeking students by naming Presidential Scholars at an
annual Honors Convocation in the Spring semester. This award is a unique distinction,
separate and apart from Commencement Honors.
A baccalaureate degree-seeking student designated as a Presidential Scholar must have
a cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 in a baccalaureate program and have completed 64 credits (if
a junior) or 96 credits (if a senior), of which at least 30 must have been taken at this
university (calculated beyond an earned associate degree or other first degree, if applicable,
and in the present baccalaureate degree program).
An associate degree-seeking student designated as a Presidential Scholar must have a
cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 at California and have completed 45 credits, all of which must
have been taken at this University.
Both full-time and part-time students may, if qualified, be named Presidential Scholars.
At the Honors Convocation, presentations are made by honor societies, a Distinguished
Graduate Award is presented to a graduate of the University, and distinguished faculty
members are formally recognized. The convocation is followed by a reception at which
certificates are presented to the Presidential Scholars by the deans of the divisions of the
University.
DISTINGUISHED SERVICE AWARD
The Distinguished Service Award, a Student Government award, is granted to the most
outstanding women and men of each graduating class. The awards are made on the basis
of participation in activities, character, citiz.enship, leadership, and personality. The election
of persons to receive the awards is made by a committee composed of students and
administration.
COOPERATIVE EDUCATION
Cooperative Education allows students to be employed-whether in business, industry,
government, or service organiz.ations-in paid positions directly related to their academic
majors or career plans. Cooperative Education positions are pre-professional, monitored by
faculty members, and coordinated by the University. Students may be employed part or
full-time, and may choose to work during fall, spring and/or summer. Undergraduates as
well as graduate students in all academic majors are encouraged to participate provided they
meet the eligibility requirements. It is expected that the student's cooperative education
experience(s) will span over two semesters or summers while enrolled at California.
Cooperative Education positions are advertised through "Co-Opportunities," which is
published every two weeks. Students who enroll in Cooperative Education are eligible to
apply for advertised positions. Additional information and appointments with members of
GENERAL INFORMATION
32
the Cooperative Education staff are available in the Placement and Career Services office
in the Morgan Learning and Research Center.
INTERNSHIPS
Internships allow students to earn credit in their major fields of study while gaining
practical experience in productive organizations-usually off campus. Such positions may
nor may be salaried. Interns are usually in their junior or senior year, and approval must
be obtained from the department chairperson or the campus supervisor of the internship
program. Inquiries about internships should be made at departmental offices or at the deans'
offices.
THE NATIONAL STUDENT EXCHANGE (NSE)
An Opportunity to Widen Your Educational Horizons
Besides the educational opportunities offered on this campus, California University
offers you the chance to attend another school in the NSE network at little or no more cost
than you pay at California. This is an excellent chance to widen your educational horizons.
In consultation with the campus NSE coordinator, academic advisor, family and friends, you
select schools that will complement and supplement the course offerings at California
University while fulfilling your own personal and academic goals. You can take advantage
of the academic strengths of the other universities in the NSE program, for they have
become extensions of our campus.
California University's NSE coordinator, located in the Program Office, California
Memorial Union, 938-4306, can tell you about the ease with which the process of exchange
works and what will be required of you for participation. As you examine your own reasons
for going to another school, you will see that they are similar to some of the wide variety
of reasons expressed by the over 30,000 students who have been hosted at schools in the
network since it began in 1968. Most students exchange for a combination of reasons,
selecting schools that provide a particular academic interest or diversification along with the
opportunity to live in a different geographical or cultural setting. California students return
from exchange with new perspectives on their education and a better appreciation of their
home region, family and campus. They frequently become more independent as learners,
reflecting the self-reliance and self-confidence gained as a result of having taken a decisive
role in planning their education and future and carrying through with those plans. They
know more about their limitations and capabilities and develop an increased appreciation for
the vast differences in ideas and value systems that exist in different geographic locations
with different ethnic and racial groups.
The following institutions are members of the NSE:
Alabama State University
University of Alabama
University of Alaska, Anchorage
University of Alaska, Fairbanks
Northern Arizona University
California
California
California
California
California
State
State
State
State
State
Polytechnic University, Pomona
University, Bakersfield
University, Dominguez Hills
University, Fresno
University, Northridge
GENERAL INFORMATION
California State University, San Bernardino
Humboldt State University
Sonoma State University
Colorado State University
Fort Lewia College
University of Northern Colorado
University of Southern Colorado
Western State College of Colorado
Eastern CoMecticut State University
University of Delaware
Florida International University
University of South Florida
Georgia State University
University of Georgia
University of Guam
University of New Hampshire
Rutgers College, Rutgers University
Trenton State College
William Paterson College of New Jersey
Eastern New Mexico University
New Mexico State University
University of New Mexico
Hunter College of the City University of New York
SUNY Center at Stony Brook
SUNY College at Buffalo
SUNY College at Potsdam
East Carolina University
North Carolina State University
University of North Carolina at Charlotte
University of North Carolina at Wilmington
Bowling Green State University
Oklahoma State University
Eastern Oregon State College
Oregon State University
Portland State University
Southern Oregon State College
University of Oregon
East Stroudsburg University of PeMsylvania
Indiana University of PeMsylvania
University of Hawaii at Hilo
University of Hawaii at Manoa
Boise State University
University of Idaho
Illinois State University
Northeastern Illinois University
Indiana University-Purdue University at Fort Wayne
University of Northern Iowa
33
Fort Hays State University
Pittsburg State University
Murray State University
Grambling State University
Louisiana State University
University of Maine
University of Maine at Farmington
University of Southern Maine
Towson State University
University of Maryland at College Park
University of Massachusetta at Amherst
University of Massachusctta at Boston
Oakland University
Moorhead State University
University of MiMesota, Twin Cities
University of Missouri-Columbia
Montana State University
Southwest Missouri State University
University of Montana
University of Nebraska at Kearney
University of Nevada, Las Vegas
University of Nevada, Reno
West Chester University of PeMsylvania
University of Puerto Rico, Cayey
University of Puerto Rico , Humacao
University of Puerto Rico , Rio Piedras
Rhode Island College
University of Rhode Island
College of Charleston
South Carolina State College
University of South Carolina
Winthrop College
Northern State University
South Dakota State University
University of South Dakota
Memphis State University
University of the Virgin Islands
University of Utah
Utah State University
Virginia State University
Central Washington University
Western Washington University
West Virginia University
University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire
University of Wisconsin, Green Bay
University of Wisconsin, River Falls
University of Wyoming
34
GENERAL INFORMATION
VISITING STUDENT PROGRAM
IN THE STATE SYSTEM OF HIGHER EDUCATION
In addition to the National Student Exchange Program, students at California University
may choose to enroll for a time at any of the other 13 institutions in the Pennsylvania State
System of Higher Education; and similarly students from those 13 may enroll at California.
These institutions are Bloomsburg, Cheyney, Clarion, East Stroudsburg, Edinboro, Indiana,
Kutztown, Lock Haven, Mansfield, Millersville, Shippensberg, Slippery Rock, and West
Chester Universities of Pennsylvania.
The purposes of this program are to allow students at one institution to participate, for
a limited period of time, in courses, programs or experiences not available at their home
institution, without loss of institutional residency, eligibility for honors or athletics, or
credits toward graduation; and to expand options available to students in such matters as
student teaching , clinical experiences, internships, and international exchange programs.
Fuller information may be obtained from the office of the Vice-President for Academic
Affairs. Catalogs of the participating institutions may be consulted in the offices of the
college deans, or in Manderino Library.
The procedures and standards for this Visiting Student program are as follows. (They
apply equally to students in any of the 14 SSHE institutions.)
1. The student must have satisfactorily completed at least 27 credits at California, and be
in good academic standing.
2. The student must obtain advance approval from California University to complete
specified studies at a sister university under this program. Each university specifies
the approval procedure for its own students' participation and for students from SSHE
universities.
3. The student must present evidence of approval from California University and evidence
of visiting university acceptance at time of registration at the sister university.
4. · A student may complete up to 18 credits in a single semester and up to 16 credits of
summer work as a visiting student.
5. All credits and grades accrued at the sister university will be accepted in full by
California University, and thereafter treated as California University credits and grades.
6. The student registers at, and pays tuition and fees to, the State System university
visited. A student wishing to divide a courseload between two institutions during the
same term registers and pays appropriate tuition and fees at both universities.
OUTCOMES ASSESSMENT
California University is in the process of implementing a broad program of outcomes
assessment. This program will utilize information about incoming students as baseline data,
follow the development of those students throughout their academic career and track them
as alumni after graduation-in order to ensure and improve the quality of academic life and
GENERAL INFORMATION
35
of the graduates of this university. Certain components of this are already in place,
including sophomore and senior testing in the Department of Psychology, Admission to
Teacher Education, and the use of the NTE for teacher certification.
PLACEMENT AND CAREER SERVICES
The primary purpose of Placement and Career Services (PCS) is to assist students in
developing, evaluating, and effectively implementing appropriate career plans.
Undergraduates, seniors, graduate students, and alumni may obtain general advice and
information on career and job search strategies.
On-campus interviews and informational sessions are scheduled for students interested
in meeting with representatives from business firms, government agencies, industries, and
school districts seeking candidates for employment. The "career center" houses career
planning and company literature as well as information on current job opportunities.
Students are encouraged to visit the PCS office in the Morgan Learning Research Center
to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Schedule a session with the computeriz.ed guidance system .
Use the career center, including videos, audiotapes, and computeriz.ed software
resources.
See a staff member about any career issues, including questions about graduate and
professional school.
Attend career workshops, job fairs, and special programs .
Learn about alumni who will discuss their jobs .
Investigate cooperative education job opportunities .
Set up a credentials file .
Make an appointment for a "mock" interview .
See listings of full-time, part-time, and seasonal jobs .
Pick up guides to resum6 writing and interviewing, and other handouts .
Get the most up-to-date information on company recruiting visits .
Sign up for campus interviews and information sessions .
Learn what other services are available .
VETERANS AFFAIRS
The Office of Veterans Affairs, located in the Health Center (Ext. 4076/4077), is open
from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Evening hours may be arranged by
appointment. The director is Mr. Arthur Bakewell.
All matters pertaining to veterans and those entitled to veterans' benefits are handled in
this office. VA forms and enrollment certifications for all eligible students applying for
benefits are processed here.
All Veterans, Reservists, National Guard personnel, and eligible dependents applying for
entrance to the University should contact the Veterans Affairs Office at an early date so that
36
GENERAL INFORMATION
necessary VA paperwork can be processed to assure timely payments of educational benefits.
Veterans are also advised to take advantage of the University's program to award college
credits for military service schools. See page 80, on Admissions, in this catalog.
The on-campus Veterans Club also has its office in the Health Center. The club
sponsors the Colonel Arthur L. Bakewell Veterans Scholarship Fund. Two $1000
scholarships are currently awarded. See page 92 below for more information.
INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS
The University sponsors a comprehensive athletic program for both men and women.
The athletic program is regulated by the policies of the Athletic Council and administered
by the Director of Athletics, Dr. Tom Pucci. It is governed by the Office of Student
Development with the Dean of Students as the senior administrative officer.
Fourteen varsity sports are available to students: for men, baseball (coached by Chuck
Gismondi), basketball (Jim Boone), cross-country, football (Jeff Petrucci), soccer (Dennis
Laskey), track and field (Jack Henck), and wrestling (RobinErsland); for women, basketball
(Paul Flores), cross-country, softball (Linda Kalafatis), tennis (Richard Saccani), track and
field (Jack Henck), volleyball (Jing Pu) and soccer (Dennis Laskey). There are numerous
assistant coaches and graduate assistants. The training staff includes the members of the
Department of Sports Medicine. Academic progress of varsity athletes is carefully
monitored.
Students who desire to participate in intercollegiate athletics must meet the academic
standards of California University, PSAC, ECAC, and NCAA. Specific requirements may
be obtained from California University's Athletic Director, the Chairperson of the Athletic
Council, or the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
The University has outstanding facilities for athletics. Adamson Football Stadium, a
modem facility located at the George H. Roadman University Park, has spacious locker
rooms and a training room. The stadium has a seating capacity of 4,500 and an excellent
all-weather track.
Also located at the University Park are seven tennis courts, a baseball diamond, a
softball field, soccer fields, cross country course and several practice areas for varsity sports
and intramural activities.
Hamer Hall, located on the main campus, has three basketball courts, an Olympic-size
swimming pool, a training room, a weight room, and a wrestling workout room. The
building has a seating capacity of 3,600 for basketball games, and the natatorium can
accommodate more than 250 spectators.
Herron Hall, also located on the main campus, houses a full-service Recreation and
Fitness Center including racquet ball courts, several exercise rooms, weight rooms, saunas,
steam rooms, a whirlpool, and a swimming pool for students and staff at the University.
The Student Activities fee permits students to make use of all these facilities when their
use has not otherwise been scheduled.
GENERAL INFORMATION
37
WOMEN'S CENTER
The Women's Center in Clyde Hall is a service provided primarily for the female
students of the University. However, the male students as well as community residents are
welcome to participate in the activities of the center.
The main goals of the Women's Center are to supplement the academic education of the
students and prepare them to deal with barriers in life.
The activities are designed to help students grow and develop an understanding of how
women can impact the future. Options are highlighted that are available to women through
special programs and individual counseling. Additionally, programs are provided to help
students find creative ways to solve problems and manage the ever changing roles of
women.
The Center recognizes the needs of women and serves as a conduit to see that the needs
are addressed. The services provided are advocacy counseling information, interest
assessment, special events, and activities, support groups, workshops, special events and
activities.
Opportunities are available for students to serve on the Advisory Board of Directors,
serve on special events committees, share ideas for programs and participate in the
Mentoring Program.
CAMPUS MINISTRY
Spiritual development is an integral part of the process of education and of human
growth. A Campus Ministry Office, with a staff of professional campus ministers, fosters
the development of spiritual and religious student life.
The Campus Ministry of California University of Pennsylvania is at present temporarily
housed in the Herron Fitness Center, Room 313. Office hours are from 10:00 A.M. until
4:00 P.M. on weekdays while the University is in session. Campus ministers are on call
twenty-four hours a day. Some of the services provided are worship, pastoral counseling,
spiritual direction, information about local churches, and literature from participating faiths.
The Campus Ministry sponsors or co-sponsors a variety of religious or service programs.
Students and their families, faculty and staff of the university are welcome to come to
the Campus Ministry Office at all times. They may also call the Campus Ministry at 9384573. Campus Ministry cooperates with Student Development and Services and with other
university departments for the well-being of the students.
The Catholic chaplains are funded by the Catholic Diocese of Pittsburgh. The Protestant
chaplain is funded by the United Campus Ministry Council of California, who also place
members of the Coalition for Christian Outreach. Although the chaplains are members of
particular denominations, they serve all students, regardless of church affiliation. The
chaplains will put students in touch with a priest, minister or rabbi of their chosen
denominations.
GENERAL INFORMATION
38
OFFICE OF DEVELOPMENT AND EXTERNAL RELATIONS
The Office of Development and External Relations assists with fund-raising, maintains
relations with the alumni of the University, informs the public about the activities of the
University, and develops programs and activities that promote understanding for and support
of the University's goals.
Through this office, the University provides information and services to alumni,
governing boards, political groups, parents of students, employees, other colleges and
universities, the business community and donors. It informs the public of the activities of
students, alumni, professors, administrators, student organiz.ations and athletic teams.
Both staff and volunteers working in this department assist in the three principal fundraising activities: an annual campaign of fund-raising, deferred or planned giving, and
capital campaigning.
ALUMNI ASSOCIATION
The alumni of California University of Pennsylvania have been organized since 1939.
This organization numbers more than 30,000 graduates and former students of the
University.
The Association advances the growth and development of the University through
individual and group endeavor, fosters beneficial relationships among alumni, students, and
the University, and encourages outstanding academic and extracurricular achievement by
undergraduate and graduate students.
There are a number of services available to alumni, including a quarterly publication,
The California Review: use of the library and other University facilities; help from the
Placement Office in locating a job; scholarships for students; and many social events,
including Homecoming, Alumni Day and the many area chapter meetings of California
alumni.
The Office of Alumni Relations, located in Dixon Hall, is the center of alumni activity
on campus. The office maintains the alumni records, assists in conducting the affairs of the
Association, and serves as the communications center and clearing house for all alumni
activities. Alumni are always welcome.
CONFIDENTIALITY OF RECORDS
The University's policies on the confidentiality and disclosure of student records are
based on the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (Public Law 93-380), as
amended.
/1 !11VN01
8f~~ -h_ft--tima-
GENE. J iINFORMATION
JltS-r 5AY
f/Yf<_OLLfd
I. Introduction
~
pub-liml 9
5-tw-,5 ~
Official student records are established and maintained in a number of administrative offices
for a variety of legitimate educational purposes. In assuming responsibility for the
reasonable protection of these student records, the University recognizes its obligation to
comply with the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974. Important sections of
this federal law are summarized below.
II. OwMrship of Records
All records kept concerning students, including those records originating at other colleges
or universities and required for admission, as the property of California University of
Pennsylvania.
III. Definition of a Student
A student is defined as any person currently or previously matriculated on an official basis
in any academic program of the University.
IV. Public Infonnation Regarding Students
1. The following is classified as public and may be released without the prior consent of
a student: a student's name, address (both local and permanent), telephone number, place
and date of birth, academic curriculum, dates of attendance, date of graduation, degrees and
awards received, most recent educational institution attended, participation in student
activities (including athletics), and height and weight (for athletic teams).
2. Students may request that any or all of this information not be made public. Such
requests must be submitted in writing to the Office of Academic Records or (in the case of
graduate students) to the Dean of the School of Graduate Studies before the beginning of any
academic term.
V. Duclosure of Student Records
1. Upon proper identification, students my inspect their own official records in the presence
of the administrator in charge of records.
2. After a request to inspect a record has been received, the request must be honored within
a reasonable period of time: according to federal law, not to exceed 45 days.
3. Limitations on the Right of Access by Students
The following materials are not subject to inspection by students:
a) Confidential letters and statements of recommendation which were placed in the
educational records before January 1, 1975.
b) Financial records of the parents of the student, or any information contained therein.
c) Medical, psychiatric or similar records that are used solely in connection with
treatment. Such records can be reviewed by a physician or other appropriate
professional of the student's choice.
4. Disclosure of Infonnation to Third Parties
In most circumstances students have the right to withhold their records from external third
parties requesting to inspect these records. Exceptions to this general principle are as
follows:
a) Disclosure of student information will be made to a third party if written consent is
given by the student in question.
b) Information concerning a student will be released if properly subpoenaed pursuant to
a judicial proceeding.
GENERAL INFORMATION
40
c) All necessary academic and/or financial records of students may be disclosed to the
appropriate persons or agencies without a student's prior consent in connection with a
student's application for, or receipt of, financial aid.
d) Further limited disclosure of certain kinds of information may be required in special
circumstances in compliance with the federal law previously cited.
VI. Student Challenge to Record Entries
1. Students have the right to submit written or typed rebuttals to negative information
contained in their files. A rebuttal statement shall become part of the file, and in cases
where the negative information is reviewed by or transmitted to a third party, it must be
accompanied by the student's statement of rebuttal.
2. Students may challenge the accuracy and/or appropriateness of material combined in their
files. Once such a challenge has been made in writing, it will be the responsibility of the
University official in charge of the file to determine the validity of the challenge, if possible.
The University official shall make a written response to the challenge of the student,
specifying the action taken. Should a factual error be found in any materials, the University
official is authorix.ed to make the appropriate corrections.
3. If options 1 and 2 of this section are unsatisfactory, students may request a formal
hearing to challenge inaccurate, misleading, or inappropriate information in their records.
The University Record Hearing Committee shall conduct a hearing in accordance with the
procedures outlined in Public Law 93-380, as amended.
4. The substantive judgment of a faculty member or administrator about a student's work,
as expressed in grades and/or written evaluations, is not within the purview of this policy
statement. Such challenges by students may be made through the regular administrative
channels already in existence for such purposes.
VII. Responsibility of University Officials
1. University officials in charge of student files are responsible for the reasonable care and
protection of such files in accordance with University policy. This includes the
responsibility for the release of confidential information only to authorix.ed persons.
2. A log sheet, indicating the inspection or release of a student's file, must be kept in the
student's file.
3. University officials may classify student materials and records under their supervision
as active or inactive as circumstances warrant. At the discretion of the University official
in charge, inactive records may remain in the file but need not be circulated. these inactive
records may be reviewed by a student upon request.
4. A University official may take the initiative in an attempt to purge unfavorable
evaluations, or opinion records of a prejudicial nature, in a student's file. This may be done
by returning the material to the person who submitted it or by requesting from the author
that the material be destroyed.
Vlll. University Officials Respomible for Student Records
The following University officials are responsible for student records within their respective
administrative areas:
1. The Vice-President for Academic Affairs
2. The Vice-President for Student Development and Services
3. The Vice-President for Administration and Finance
GENERAL INFORMATION
41
These officers are responsible for the proper maintenance of all official student records
under their jurisdiction in accordance with the policies of this statement and the relevant
state and federal laws.
If further information is required, a student should contact the appropriate University
official with respect to the type of student records in question.
UNIVERSITY PUBLIC SAFETY/SECURITY SERVICES
The Department of Public Safety at California University of Pennsylvania is a fully
recogniz.ed law enforcement agency as authoriz.ed by 71 P.S. §646, the Administrative Code
of 1929 as amended and Title 18 of the Pennsylvania Consolidated Statutes, (Crime and
Offenses) and 24 P.S. § 20-1006-A(14) 20-2010A (5) of the State System of Higher
Education Act.
The department consists of professionally trained individuals capable of responding to
requests for assistance in routine and emergency situations. The department, a diverse
group of police officers, communications, and secretarial staff, provides continuous 24 hour
assistance to the University community. The staff includes a director, assistant night
operations supervisor, two shift supervisors and ten additional commissioned police officers
who have received training at the Pennsylvania State Police Academy. Three public safety
communications officers and one departmental secretary contribute to the operation of the
department.
Public safety personnel are certified in the use of emergency medical airborne evacuation
policy and procedure for transportation of the seriously ill or critically injured. Additional
services offered to University students, faculty, and staff consist of parking and traffic
management, criminal investigations, health, fire, and safety surveys, special event planning,
accident investigation, and crime prevention information and presentations.
Pursuant to the Pennsylvania College and University Security Act, and the Federal Crime
Awareness and Campus Security Act of 1990, post-secondary institutions, including colleges
and universities, must provide information with respect to campus crime statistics and
security policies of the institution and prepare, publish and distribute to all applicants,
students and employees, annually, information with respect to these areas.
The information is compiled by California University, and made available through the
Office of Admissions, the Office of Student Development, and the Office of Public Safety.
42
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
-Courses and Grading Procedures
-Graduation Requirements
-Earning a Second Degree
-Transcripts
-Academic Requirements
-Withdrawals
-Rea~ion
43
44
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
Students are responsible for securing current information about university policies
and for meeting all relevant requirements as listed in this catalog.
The university reserves the right to change policies, cu"iculum requirements, and
other provisions as needed and at any time.
Students are required to follow the provisions of the catalog that is in effect at the
time of their initial enrollment. Students who have interrupted their education for
more than one year are subject to the provisions of the current catalog.
Faculty advisors are available to assist students in planning an academic program,
but students have the responsibility for meeting all requirements for their degrees.
Students are urged to take advantage of the advisory and consultation services
available at the university.
Students should feel free to consult with professors, academic advisors, department
chairpersons, the deans, and the vice-president for academic affairs. All of these
university representatives maintain regular office hours for student consultations.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
45
COURSES, ACADEMIC STANDING,
GRADING SYSTEM,
WITHDRAWALS FROM COURSES, ETC.
Course Numbering System
Courses numbered 100 to 499 are undergraduate courses. Courses numbered 500 and
above are graduate level courses, but in certain circumstances, with the approval of the
professor and in the senior year, students may be allowed to take some courses numbered
in the 500's, for undergraduate credit.
Courses are numbered in the following way:
100-199
Freshman level
Sophomore level
200-299
Junior level
300-399
400-499
Senior level
Generally, courses whose numbers end in 9 (such as 209 and 459) consist of
independent study or individual tutoring. They require the consent of the professor and of
the department, the dean, and the academic vice-president. Courses whose numbers have
8 or 9 in the middle (such as 481 and 491) are seminars or workshops. Some courses are
sometimes offered as both undergraduate and graduate courses. Such "dual-listed" courses
require additional work on the part of the graduate students but may be taken only for
undergraduate credit by undergraduate students.
Credits
Credit for course work is recorded in credit hours. For most courses, one credit hour
represents one class period a week for about fifteen weeks. For laboratory classes, the ratio
may differ somewhat from one department to another, but usually two or three hours of
laboratory work are worth one academic credit.
A full-time student is one who is taking twelve or more credit hours. Therefore, a
student taking fewer than twelve credits is considered a part-time student.
In order to progress normally from one class to the next, a student should take an
average of 32 semester hours a year, or 16 credits a semester.
Attendance
Regular class attendance is a prerequisite to successful class performance. University
policy permits class absence for cause but places an obligation for successful completion of
course work on the student. There is no single, university-wide policy on class attendance
or on cuts; but professors may establish their particular policies on absences, assess
reasonable penalties if students do not observe these policies, and treat unexplained absences
as unexcused absences. The student must, in all cases, arrange to make up examinations
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
46
or other work missed because of absence, according to terms and a schedule agreeable
to the prof~rs.
It is the student's responsibility to inform professors of the cause of any absence - if
possible, in advance. Students should notify their college Dean of lengthy absences due to
illness or other causes; and appropriate documentation may be required in such cases. The
Dean will in turn notify the professors concerned. Requests for absence due to official
university activities, such as field trips or athletic contests, must be made by the appropriate
university official.
The Health Center does not
medical excuses. Under certain circumstances (see
pages 66-67 of this catalog) the Health Center will notify professors about students' absences
(or other failure to fulfill academic obligations) due to medical conditions; on the basis of
this notification, individual professors in turn will determine whether or not to excuse the
absences.
The temporary grade of Incomplete is not automatically awarded even if excused or
explained absences have prevented completion of required work by the end of the semester.
mue
Residence Requirements
Students in all curricula must complete a minimum of thirty credits of the last sixty
credits at California University to qualify for a degree. These credits may be taken in
regular day or evening classes.
Overload
Students may register for 18 credits. Students who are doing student teaching in the
College of Eduction and Human Services, however, may take additional courses only with
the special approval of the dean of that college. Students wishing to register for 19 credits
must obtain written permission from the dean of that College of the university in which they
are enrolled. Students wishing to take 20 or more credits must receive written permission
also from the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. However, only in exceptional
circumstances is permission to register for 20 or more credits granted. A fee is charged for
all credits in excess of 18.
In the summer, for more than six credits for either of the five-week sessions or for
more than 12 credits throughout the summer term, written permission must be obtained from
the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. Because of the brevity of the summer session,
registration for overload is discouraged.
Grade Point Average
To calculate a grade point average (GPA) divide the total number of grade points earned
in regular courses at this university by the total number of credit hours attempted. For
example, if a student has attempted a total of 60 credits, with 12 credits worth of A ( = 48
grade points), 24 of B ( = 72), 15 of C ( = 30), 6 of D ( =:= 6), and 3 of F ( = 0), that
student would have a total of 156 grade points, or a GPA of 2.60.
You do not take into account, in computing your GPA, the following: courses
transferred from other institutions, advanced placement courses, courses passed by
examination, courses in which a P grade was assigned, CLEP credits, or credits granted for
military service. If you repeat a course, only the repeat grade is counted. If you fail a
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
47
course which is taken under the Pass/Fail option, a failing grade is, however, counted in the
GPA; but no record of a failing grade is kept if you challenge a course by examination and
fail that examination. Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099,
and EDE 100 - do not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to
determine grade point average. (See page 78 of this catalog.)
Good Academic Standing
In order to remain in good academic standing, you must maintain a certain grade point
average, depending on the class that you are in, as follows:
Freshman
1.75
Sophomore
1. 85
Junior
1.95
Senior
2.00
Academic standing is based upon credits earned, not credits attempted. Although
developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100 - do not count
towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine good academic
standing. (See page 78 of this catalog.)
A student who does not achieve the proper GPA may be subject to either Academic
Probation or Academic Dismissal, as presented below.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
48
GRADING SYSTEM
Grade
Grade Points
Per Credit
Hour
Interpretation
A
Superior attainment
4
B
Above average
3
C
Average
2
D
Below average; lowest passing grade
1
F
Failure
0
AU
~
-
Not
calculated
I
Incomplete
Not
calculated
IF
An Incomplete for which the work was not
completed within a calendar year; computed in
the Grade Point Average and not removable from
a student's academic record
Not
calculated
p
Passed
Not
calculated
w
Official withdrawal from the university within the
first six weeks of a semester (not counted in the
GPA)
Not
calculated
-
WP
Withdrew passing after the first six weeks (not
counted in the GPA)
WF
Withdrew after six weeks with a grade of D or F
(counted in the GPA)
wx
Administrative withdrawal from the university
(not counted in the GPA)
Not
calculated
uw
Unofficial withdrawal from a course which the
student never attended or for which there is a
verified registration error (not counted in the
GPA)
Not
calculated
Not
calculated
0
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
49
CLASS ST ANDING
The following credit hour ranges apply:
Freshmen
1-31 credits earned
Sophomores
32-63 credits earned
Juniors
64-95 credits earned
Seniors
96 or more credits earned
These class designations are based on credits passed, not on credits attempted.
Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099 , and EDE 100- do
not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine class
standing. (See page 78 of this catalog.)
Transfer credits may be counted only after an evaluation of official transcripts has been
made by the appropriate dean.
Incomplete Grades
1.
The Incomplete is used when a professor is convinced the student can complete work
or make up work which has been missed or is incomplete because of reasons acceptable
to the professor. However, in all cases, the professor has the option of submitting a
final grade based on work completed. The professor may refuse to accept late work.
However, when appropriate explanation and documentation of an illness are given,
professors will not penalize students if makeups are possible or if grading on work
completed is reasonable. (See the sections on Class Attendance, page 45, and on the
Health Services, page 67, in this catalog.)
2. An Incomplete (I) should be removed by special arrangement between the student and
the professor within one calendar year after the receipt of the incomplete grade. (The
student is not required to register for the course again.)
3. After the work has been completed, the professor will submit a Change of Grade form
to the Academic Records Office.
4. After a lapse of one calendar year, the incomplete grade is converted to I-F. The I-F
grade will be considered in the computation of the student's grade point average as an
F grade. This I-F can be removed only when the course is repeated.
5. For a student who withdraws from the university immediately after incurring an I grade,
if the Incomplete is not made up before one calendar year has passed, the Incomplete
grade automatically becomes an I-F grade. Students who return to the university before
a year has elapsed have nevertheless only one full year since the I was received to
complete the work of the course.
6. If a student's name appears on a professor's grade roster in a course but that student
never attended the class, no grade is assigned by the professor. In such cases, the grade
of UW (unauthorized withdrawal) is assigned by the Dean for Enrollment Management
and Academic Services.
7. Graduating seniors must resolve their Incomplete grades by the last day of classes of
the term in which they intend to graduate. Otherwise, these Incompletes immediately
become I-F's, and graduation may be correspondingly affected.
I CJ y z rnd- f:Ju,yyU- -t-tLtGA
,I'
~
t?
I
.d )/J
/ .-vi ,
"--~ "' , v
A
-
t&
AC~ EM
~
P/F
~
PROCEDURES
.
'
In any course in
·ch the grading is either P or F and the professor records a grade
of A, B, or C, the grade is recorded as P. If the grade is recorded as Dor F, the grade
becomes an F. Grades of P are counted in the cumulative total of credits, but not in the
student's grade point average. Grades of Fin such courses carry no positive credit and are
figured into the grade point average.
Repeating a Course
You may repeat a course previously taken at this university. If you repeat a course,
only the later grade (excluding grades of will be counted in your grade point average,
although the original grade will remain on your transcript.
n
Withdrawal from Courses
If you withdraw from a course before the end of the sixth week of a semester, no
academic penalty is assessed.
If you withdraw from a course after the end of the sixth week, however, your professor
will report the grade you were earning when you withdrew, and it will become a permanent
part of your academic record, as follows. If you were earning a grade of A, B, or C, a
grade of WP will be recorded, and it will not affect your grade point average. If you were
earning a D or F, a grade of WF will be recorded, and the credits will be used to compute
your grade point average. WP and WF grades are also used if you withdraw from the
university within a semester.
You must officially withdraw from a course, using forms available at the Office of
Academic Records. Ceasing to attend class does not constitute official withdrawal.
Add/Drop
Class schedules may be changed during the add/drop period using the schedule
adjustment forms. All schedule changes are governed by the following regulations in the
Office of Academic Records.
1. All schedule changes must be approved by the student's advisor and College dean, as
necessary.
2. Courses may be added: during the first two days of a semester; during the first day of
a summer term; or, for any class (such as an evening class) which has not yet met for
the first time, during the first week of classes.
3. Students may drop courses without academic penalty (i.e., no grade assigned): during
the first six weeks of a semester; before the end of the second week of a five-week
summer term; or before the end of the fourth week of a ten-week summer term.
4. After the deadline for dropping a course without academic penalty, students who drop
a course or courses officially will receive WP or WF grades. Each professor will
assign the appropriate grade and the College Dean will translate A, B, and C grades to
WP, and D and F grades to WF.
5. No student is permitted to drop a course: during the last three weeks of a semester;
during the last two weeks of a five-week summer term; or during the last three weeks
of a ten-week summer term.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
6.
51
Leaving a course without officially dropping it in the Office of Academic Records may
result in the assignment of an F grade by the professor. If the professor does not assign
a grade, the designation of UW (unauthoriz.ed withdrawal) will be assigned by the Dean
for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
Grade Reports
Within two weeks of the end of each semester or the summer sessions, a full grade
report will be mailed to you at what you have recorded with the university as your
permanent home address. For this reason, you should be certain the Dean for Enrollment
Management and Academic Services has your correct permanent address.
In compliance with the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, such grade
sent to you and not to your parents or guardian.
reports
A grade report will not be sent if your academic records have been sealed for failure
to pay your university fees in full.
are
APPEALING A GRADE OR OTHER ACADEMIC DECISION
In appealing a grade, a student should first contact the professor who issued that grade
to discuss the reason for the grade. If the student is not satisfied with the professor's
explanation, the student should then contact the professor's department chairperson. This
latter contact must be in writing and must be filed with the chairperson within thirty
university calendar days after the beginning of the subsequent fall or spring semester
following the term in which the grade in question was given. f accord is not reached at the
chairperson level, the student may then appeal to the College dean. The final source of
appeal is the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. this final step should be taken only if
there is no possibility for a resolution at an earlier stage, and only if the student is convinced
that arbitrary and/or capricious standards were applied.
In the case of other academic decisions, the student should follow the same appeal
procedure insofar as possible. In matters relating to student conduct and discipline, the
Vice-president for Student Development has authority to review appeals: see the section on
University Conduct and Regulations, pages 70-71, in this catalog. In matters relating to
financial aid, see the section on Financial Aid; in matters relating to teacher certification,
see page 114 of this catalog.
It must be understood that it is not the policy of the administration to change a grade
duly assigned by a professor. It is the policy of the administration and the faculty to provide
students with an opportunity to voice their concerns on all matters, including grades.
COLLEGE LEVEL EQUIVALENCY PROGRAM (CLEP)
The university offers the opportunity to earn undergraduate credit through the College
Level Equivalency Program (CLEP), which has two testing categories, the General
Examination and the Subject Examination.
52
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
The General Examination is a series of tests in five separate areas: English
Composition, Natural Sciences, Mathematics, Humanities, and Social Sciences/History. A
student may earn up to thirty credits by passing the appropriate tests in this area.
The Subject Examination comprehensively tests a single subject, such as General
Psychology, Statistics, etc. A student who passes one of these examinations is awarded
credit for a comparable course at the university.
The CLEP program is administered by the Office of Career Planning and Placement
Services in the Leaming Research Center. There is a fee of $25.00 for evaluation of the
CLEP results and recording the results on the student's transcripts.
(The university no longer grants credits for Life Experience.)
CREDITS BY EXAMINATION
You may earn credit for certain courses by passing examinations in them. In order to
do so, you must first obtain permission from the chairperson of the department that offers
the course, and the Vice-president for Academic Affairs; you must register for the course
and pay a fee separate from other tuition and registration fees . Only the grades of P (Pass)
or F (Fail) will be recorded, and they will be further identified by the symbol CE.
DEGREES: WHEN CONFERRED
Degrees are conferred in May (at the end of the spring semester), in August (at the end
of the summer session), and in December (at the end of the fall semester); but
Commencement is now held only once a year, in May. Students who graduate in August
or December may participate in the Commencement exercises of the following May, but
their diplomas and official university transcripts record their date of graduation as of the
month and year in which their degree was conferred. Certain programs that require study
at participating off-campus institutions may not conclude their academic year until after the
May Commencement. Students in these programs graduate in August and therefore do not
participate in Commencement until the following May.
A graduate of California University of Pennsylvania is a member of the class of that
calendar year in which the degree was conferred. That is, if one graduated in May, August,
or December of 1991, one is a member of the class of 1991. It is immaterial what year one
may have attended Commencement.
UNDERGRADUATE CREDIT FOR GRADUATE COURSE
Undergraduate students who have completed their course work in their major and
related fields may enroll in graduate courses for undergraduate credit if they meet the
necessary requirements for those courses.
Individual departments determine the
prerequisites for each course. Graduate status may be a prerequisite for admission to some
courses.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
53
GRADUATE CREDIT LOAD FOR SENIORS
Undergraduates who are in their last term on campus and who are completing or have
completed all the requirements for their undergraduate degree may enroll in graduate classes
for graduate credit. They must fulfill all requirements for entrance into Graduate School
(other than the undergraduate degree or teaching certification). Graduate credits that are
used to fulfill undergraduate requirements may not also be used to fulfill requirements in a
Master's program.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
Graduation requirements are the prerogative of the deans and their faculty. All
requirements are subject to change as necessary and at any time.
Students should become acquainted with the graduation requirements for their programs.
Students are responsible for meeting all graduation requirements and for submitting the
required forms on time.
Compliance with the following general policies and procedures will help students
prepare for graduation:
1. The period during which application for graduation must be made is posted throughout
campus and printed in the Schedule of Classes and in the California Times. Students
must apply for graduation in the appropriate dean's office by the deadline. Graduation
will be delayed if this requirement is not met.
2. A minimum of 128 semester credits, including the satisfactory completion of all
required courses, is necessary for graduation. Developmental courses - ENG 100
(English Language Skills), MAT 098 (Basic Mathematics), MAT 099 - (Introductory
Algebra), and EDE 100 (Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills) do not count towards
graduation, though the credits earned in them are used to determine class standing,
grade point average, and eligibility for cocurricular activities.
3. An overall grade point average of 2.5 is required in the Teacher Education cu"icula.
An overall grade point average of 2. 0 is required in most cu"icula. Certain other
curricula may require minimum grades in courses in a student's major.
4. In the College of Education and Human Services, candidates in teacher education
programs must complete Student Teaching.
5. All bills must be paid in full before graduation can be approved.
6. Students in all curricula must complete a minimum of thirty credits of the last sixty
credits at California University of Pennsylvania.
7. All credentials for graduation, including an application for a teaching certificate where
appropriate and transcripts of credits from other institutions, must be submitted on time.
Graduation will be delayed if a student's record is incomplete.
8. Attendance at the.Commencement exercises is appropriate, unless unusual circumstances
warrant graduation in absentia. Permission to graduate in absentia is granted by the
President of the university, or his designee. Candidates for graduation are required to
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
54
contact the President's Office, or his designee's office, and request permission to be
excused from the Commencement ceremony.
Honors at Graduation
Commencement Honors are awarded to a limited number of students in the graduating
class, according to the schedule below. A. minimum of 64 earned credits at California
University in a baccalaureate degree program is required to receive commencement honors.
Credits, grades, and quality points earned as part of a previously completed associate
or first degree are not calculated for commencement honors designation.
Highest Honors (Summa Cum Laude)
3. 75 to 4.0
High Honors (Magna Cum Laude)
3.50 to 3.74
Honors (Cum Laude)
3.25 to 3.49
Semester Honors (Dean's List)
Full-time students are awarded honors (that is, placed on the Dean's List) on the basis
of grade-point average at the end of each semester as follows:
Highest honors
3.75 to 4.0
High honors
3.50 to 3.74
Honors
3.25 to 3.49
These semester honors correspond to the grade-point averages required for graduation
with honors.
REGISTRATION
Specific instructions as to the conduct of each registration are announced to students in
the California Times and in the separately published Schedules of Courses for the Fall,
Spring, and Summer terms.
1. A student must be regularly admitted to the university before permission is granted to
register. A written verification of official admission to the university is required for
registration.
2. An official registration is contingent upon academic eligibility to register. (See:
Probation; Dismissal.) If a registration has been completed in violation of this rule, it
will be revoked.
3. Each student is required to register in person according to the registration schedule
announced by the university.
4. Each student must comply with all registration procedures and complete the registration
within the deadlines set by the university.
5. A registration is not complete until:
a. All required registration materials have been properly completed and turned in on
time.
b. All university fees have been paid in full . Students who have preregistered but
have had their schedules canceled for non-payment of fees may have their schedules
reinstated before classes begin without payment of any further fee for late
registration. Such reinstatement is contingent upon the payment of all fees.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
6.
55
However, if such students do not take advantage of this special period of
reinstatement, they must register afresh, without guaranteed placement in the
courses they originally chose, and are assessed a fee of $15.00 for late registration.
Failure to register in the official manner may cause the registration to be canceled or
the student billed for incorrect class registrations.
DUAL MAJORS, SECOND MAJORS AND SECOND DEGREES
California University grants the following degrees: B.A.; B.S.; B.S. in Education; B.S.N;
and A.S. (All except the last are four-year, baccalaureate degrees.) These are referred to
below as degree areas.
A careful distinction must be drawn between the following different objectives and
opportunities and between the means to achieve them: (1) a Dual Major; (2) a Second
Major; and (3) a Second Degree. These opportunities, as explained below, are the only ones
offered: the university will, for example, award only one degree from any degree area.
None of these opportunities should be confused with any certification programs, such as
those in Teacher Education.
1. More than one major:
(a) A Dual Major is the pursuit of two separate baccalaureate majors simultaneously.
These majors may be in a single department or two departments, and each must be
recorded in the appropriate dean's office. Courses from one major area may be used
to satisfy requirements in the other major. Both majors are recorded on the transcript,
but all requirements for each major must be satisfied before the degree is conferred, and
only one degree is conferred.
(b) A Second Major may be pursued only (a) after the completion of a baccalaureate
degree and (b) in the same degree area as a first major. It does not lead to a second
degree. The prospective student must apply through the Office of Admissions, register
the intention of pursuing a Second Major, and fulfill any of the requirements of that
Second Major that have not yet been satisfied.
2.
A Second Degree may be pursued by any student (a) who has previously earned
an associate or baccalaureate degree from any regionally accredited institution
(including California University) or (b) who is currently pursuing a degree at
California University. The second degree must be in a different degree area from
the degree already earned or being pursued.
A student who is not currently in
a degree program at California University must apply for the second degree
program through the Office of Admissions.
Transfer credits from other institutions and prior credits from California University
of Pennsylvania may be used to satisfy requirements for the Second Degree. A
56
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
minimum of 30 credits must be taken in the Second Degree program by transfer
students. A minimum of 158 credits must be accumulated whether the degrees are
earned simultaneously or consecutively. All departmental, college, and university
requirements for the Second Degree must be satisfied. The transcript records the
Second Degree and the date of its completion. (The University will not award an
associate degree to a student who holds a baccalaureate degree in the same area.)
Transcripts are issued by the Office of Academic Records, Room 103 in the
Administration Building. Each transcript costs $2.00, and payment must be received before
the transcript is issued. Checks and money orders should be made payable to California
University of Pennsylvania. All transcripts are issued according to the provisions of the
Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 as amended: see also the section on
Confidentiality of Records on pages 38-41 of this catalog.
A request for a transcript must be made in writing, to ensure that academic information
is not improperly disclosed. Telephone requests for transcripts cannot be honored. The
request may be made by completing a form in the Office of Academic Records or by writing
a letter to that office indicating (a) the number of transcripts required, (b) the type of
transcripts required (i.e., undergraduate, graduate, or both), and (c) the name and address
of the person or institution that the transcript should be sent to. (Transcripts are issued to
a third party on condition that the recipient will not permit any other party to have access
to them without the written consent of the student.)
If a transcript is issued to a student, a notation to that effect appears on the transcript.
Transcripts marked in this manner are sometimes not considered "official" when presented
to a third party by the student.
Transcripts are issued as quickly as possible, but in busy periods of the academic year
there is necessarily some delay. Requests should therefore be made well before the
transcript is due elsewhere.
No transcript will be issued to a student whose financial obligations to the university
have not been met in full.
TRANSFER CREDITS
If you are a transfer student who has previously attended another college or university
and you are now applying for admission to California University of Pennsylvania, you may
receive credit for that work as explained in the section of this catalog dealing with
Application and Admissions.
If you are already a student here and wish to take a course at some other college or
university, you should get approval to do so from your advisor and from the dean of your
college at California University before you register for and take that course.
To transfer credits to California University:
1. Take courses that can be used to satisfy university or major requirements.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
57
Be sure to compare college catalog descriptions. Transfer credits are usually
determined by their equivalency to California University courses.
Only courses in which a grade of C or better is earned will transfer.
Remember, credits transfer, but grades do not. Transfer credits cannot raise a quality
point average; therefore, do not take repeat courses at another institution.
Courses taken at a community college, the equivalents of which are designated as
upper-level courses at California, do not transfer.
To be certain of transferability, complete the appropriate transfer form, which may be
obtained from the office of your dean.
/
f-n✓
'1,,,,,, ,,J,
~{/--IU~t'-u/.
A freshman carrying fewer th
ve er its is su ,fectTo
o ast1c action at the end
of the term in which the total num
credits attempted reaches or exceeds twelve.
Probationary action applies to upperclass students (excluding freshmen with fewer than
twelve credits) regardless of the number of credits scheduled in the term. This rule also
applies to part-time students.
A student who fails to meet the minimum cumulative grade point average for the
appropriate class category is placed on academic probation. See page 47 above, Good
Academic Standing.
Transfer credits that have been officially accepted are counted in determining the
student's proper class category.
At the end of a probationary semester that classification will be removed if the student
achieves the required minimum cumulative grade point average for the appropriate class
category.
A student may be extended on continued probation beyond a single semester with a
cumulative grade point average below the required minimum, provided that the grade point
average for the probationary semester is at least 2.00. Before registering for a new term,
students on extended probation must have their schedules approved by the dean of the
College of the university in which they are enrolled.
CHEATING AND PLAGIARISM
Truth and honesty are the subjects and the necessary prerequisites for all education.
Consequently, students who attempt to improve their grades or class standing by cheating
on examinations or plagiarism on papers may be penalized by disciplinary action ranging
from a verbal reprimand to a failing grade in the course. If the situation appears to merit
a more severe penalty, the professor may refer the matter to the appropriate dean or to the
Vice-president for Academic Affairs, with a request for more formal disciplinary action by
the university's Discipline Committee, which may result in suspension or expulsion from the
university.
58
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
DISMISSAL FOR ACADEMIC REASONS
The university reserves the right to refuse the privilege of further attendance to students
who have failed to meet the minimum scholarship requirements. See the sections above on
Good Academic Standing, page 47, and Probation, page 57, of this catalog.
If a student's cumulative grade point average remains below the required minimum after
a probationary term, and the term grade point average is below 2.00, that student will be
dismissed for at least one semester.
To apply for readmission after academic dismissal, see Readmission, below, page 60.
WITHDRAW AL FROM THE UNIVERSITY
A student who decides to withdraw from the university during any academic term,
regardless of the reason, is required to report to the Office of Academic Records and obtain
withdrawal forms. After the completion of a withdrawal interview the student must obtain
a clearance form from several offices of the university, including the Business Office. Upon
receipt of the clearance form and review of the student's records and status, the Dean for
Enrollment Management and Academic Services will certify as to the type of withdrawal.
If a withdrawal cannot be arranged in this way, the student must notify the Office of
Academic Records by telephone or by letter immediately. All withdrawals are governed by
the following regulations:
1. An honorable dismissal is granted to a student who withdraws from the university in the
official manner, bas met all financial obligations to the university, and bas been
properly cleared by the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
2. If the student withdraws officially, a W grade is recorded for each course scheduled.
AW grade carries no academic penalty and is not counted in the student's grade point
average. For an official withdrawal from a five-week session, W grades will be
recorded during the first two weeks only.
3. After the sixth week of the semester, a student who makes an official withdrawal
receives WP or WF grades in all courses scheduled. Professors assign A, B, C, D, or
F grades, and the Dean assigns WP grades to A, B,and C, and WF to Dor F grades.
For five-week courses the WP-WF grades are assigned after the end of the second
week.
4. No student is permitted to withdraw officially from the university during the last three
weeks of a semester or summer term.
5. Leaving the university without notifying the Office of Academic Records and making
an official withdrawal may result in automatic failure for all courses scheduled. It also
makes the student ineligible for any refund of fees, and may affect academic status
and/or financial aid.
Improper withdrawals of this type will be classified as
"unauthorized withdrawal" and the designation "UW" used for all registered courses
if another grade bas not already been assigned by the professor.
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
59
WITIIDRAWALS: ADMINISTRATIVE
Administrative withdrawals of students are initiated by university officials for
compelling reasons given below. All such withdrawals are governed by the following
regulations and procedures.
The university administration has the authority to withdraw a student from the university
and to revoke that student's registration at any time for the following reasons:
1. Registration in violation of university regulations (e.g., academic ineligibility to
register).
2. Failure of the student to comply with academic requirements (e.g., unsatisfactory class
attendance).
3. Failure to pay university fees by the deadline.
4. Disciplinary suspension (or dismissal) for the remainder of an academic term or
indefinitely.
5. Severe psychological or health problems such that the student cannot be
permitted to continue in attendance.
6. Other reasons deemed appropriate by the proper administrative officer.
Except for academic ineligibility, the date of the administrative withdrawal is used to
determine the amount of fees to be assessed or canceled. (In most cases, the regular fee
assessment and refund policies of the university prevail.)
If a student registers in violation of the academic eligibility rule, the registration is
declared invalid and the fees paid by the student are refunded in full. No grades are
recorded.
Policy for recording grades:
For administrative withdrawals during the first six weeks of a semester (or two weeks
in a five-week summer session), the grading symbol WX is recorded for all courses on the
student's schedule. No other grades, including Incompletes, will be assigned.
After six weeks (or after two weeks in a summer session), the date of the administrative
withdrawal and the reason for the withdrawal are considered in assigning grades.
1. For disciplinary suspension or dismissal, only WP or WF grades are recorded.
2. For psychological ~r health reasons, WX or I (Incomplete) grades are assigned.
(Professors must consent to assigning Incompletes; otherwise, WX grades are recorded.)
3. For failure to pay fees, only WX grades are recorded.
4. The WX grade is not computed in the student's grade point average and therefore
carries no academic penalty.
5. The Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services has the authority to
backdate an administrative withdrawal if circumstances warrant such action.
6. Disciplinary suspensions or dismissal during a term is initiated by an appropriate
authority in the Student Development Office and written notification is sent to the Office
of Academic Records. The Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services
then cancels the student's registration, notifies other administrative offices on a "need
to know" basis, and informs the faculty members involved of the action taken.
60
ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
READMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
Students who wish to return to the university after an absence of three consecutive terms
must apply for readmission to the office of the dean of the undergraduate college-Education
and Human Services, Liberal Arts, or Science and Technology-in which they were last
enrolled. Students who wish to change their major to a different curriculum in a different
College of the university from that in which they were formerly enrolled must first be
reacimitted to the College in which they were formerly enrolled.
Student who have been dismissed for unsatisfactory academic performance will be
considered for readmission only if they have satisfied the conditions for readmission that
were stipulated at the time of their dismissal. Usually , students are not considered for
readmission for a minimum of one semester.
In the case of suspensions or dismissals for disciplinary reasons , students must (a)
satisfy the conditions for readmission that were stipulated at the time of their dismissal, and
(b) receive permission from the Vice-president of Student Development to return to the
university.
In all cases, applications for readmission should be submitted at least one month before
the registration date for the term in which the student desires to enroll. If a readmission
involves a change of curriculum, the student must apply to the Dean of that college of the
university responsible for the new major.
No former student can be readmitted to the university until all past indebtedness bas
been paid.
61
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
-The Student Association, Inc.
-Student Congress
-Residence Halls
-Fraternities and Sororities
-Intercollegiate Athletics
-Health and Counseling Services
-Services for the Disabled
-Student Conduct
62
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
Inherent in the university's mission is a commitment to the total development of all
students. The Office of Student Development, under the direction of the Vice-President for
Student Development and Services, is administratively responsible for the implementation
of this commitment. The central focus of the Student Development program, therefore, is
the personalii.ation of the university experience, with concern for not only individual
intellectual development but for personal, social, and physical development as well.
Many of the services and opportunities provided by Student Development are described
in other places in this catalog, especially in the section on General Information.
For additional information and regulations governing student life and conduct besides
what is given below, students should refer to the current edition of the Student Handbook.
Student Development provides services to students in the following areas:
Athletics
Minority Affairs
Commuter Center
Recreation
Counseling Center
Residence Hall Programming
Dining Services
Student Association, Inc.
Disabled Services
Student Government
Student/Parent Orientation
Discipline
Drug/Alcohol Program (CHOICES)
Summer Camps
Fitness
Veterans Affairs
Health Center
Wellness/ Awareness
Women's Center
Housing
International Students
The principal administrative personnel responsible for the Student Development Program
are:
Vice President for Student Development and Services
Dean of Students
Dean for Student Services
Dean of Student Life/University Judicial Officer
Associate Dean for Residence Life
Associate Dean for Housing/Conferences
Director, University Dining Services
Assistant Dean for Student Services
Associate Dean for Student Support Services/Social Equity Officer
Director, Center for Student Growth and Development
Director of Counseling Center
Coordinator, International Education
Coordinator, Veterans Affairs
Director, Drug and Alcohol Program (CHOICES)
Director of the Student Association, Inc.
Business Manager of the Student Association, Inc.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
63
Director of Health Services
Director of Athletics
STUDENT ASSOCIATION, INC.
The Student Association, Inc. (SAi) is a non-profit corporation financed in part by the
Student Association fee, which is paid each term by every student. The Executive Director
is a university employee, who directs the affairs of SAi, and serves as the liaison between
SAi and the university.
Programs provided by the Student Association are determined by the Student Congress
and the Student Association Board of Directors. Student Association fees are collected,
budgeted, appropriated, disbursed and accounted for by SAi with the concurrence of the
president of the university.
SAi coordinates the co-curricular activities provided by the university, including
Homecoming, the University Park, concerts, plays, musical production, movies, outdoor
recreation, the Herron Recreation and Fitness Center, dances, picnics, TV Channel 29,
WVCS Radio, and other special events. Intercollegiate athletics are also funded by SAi.
In addition SAi coordinates the activities of student clubs and organiz.ations. The Student
Handbook provides a complete listing of active student clubs and organiz.ations.
Publications coordinated by SAi include a monthly calendar of events, The Student
Handbook, an organiz.ational handbook, The California Times (the student newspaper), and
a number of informative brochures.
SAi is responsible for the development and maintenance of the George H. Roadman
University Park, an 87 acre area located one mile from California on Route 88 South.
Facilities include tennis courts, practice football, baseball, soccer, rugby, and intramural
fields, picnic areas, and Adamson Stadium.
STUDENT CONGRESS
Student Congress is the official student governing body. It represents and serves the
entire student population. It provides for a student forum, establishes channels for the
communication of students' concerns to the proper administrative and faculty personnel,
implements programs and activities that enrich campus-life, and creates opportunities for
students to exercise and to develop leadership skills.
HOUSING
California University of Pennsylvania provides residence hall accommodations for
approximately 1500 students in six separate residence facilities. Women's residence halls
are Clyde and Stanley Halls, Men's residence halls are Johnson, Longanecker and
McCloskey Halls. Men and women are accommodated on separate floors of Binns Hall.
64
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
The university does not supervise or maintain any off-campus housing. Lists of offcampus housing are available, through the Commuter Center, but the housing office does
not approve or disapprove of such housing. Students are urged to take necessary precaution
in seeking off-campus housing.
As a campus or town resident each student is extended courtesies and services extended
to all residents of the Borough of California. Students in tum are expected to adhere to all
ordinances and regulations enacted by the borough, and violations will be treated
accordingly. Questions regarding off-campus housing should be directed to the Assistant
Dean for Student Services, Room 134, Memorial Union building, (412) 938-4021.
Application for Housing
Freshman students are urged to live in the university residence halls provided space is
available. Freshmen and transfers who indicate the need for on-campus housing receive the
appropriate application forms with their acceptance letter. On-campus housing is at a
premium at California University and there are a limited number of spaces available.
Students are encouraged to apply no later than May 1.
Upper-class students should contact the Housing Office, California Memorial Union,
California University of Pennsylvania, California, PA 15419, if they wish on-campus
residence hall accommodations. A limited number of spaces is reserved for returning
residents each fall, and specific instructions for securing a space are distributed in the halls
each March. If students meet required deadline submission dates, housing will be provided.
The university retains the right to assign all students to certain residence halls, floors and
roommates in the best interests of the university.
Housing contracts are for one academic year, September through May. This contract
commits the student to university housing for both the Fall and Spring semesters.
Contracting for a room for an academic year or Spring semester does not guarantee that
housing will be provided in subsequent years.
Room Deposit
An advance room deposit of $100.00 is required with the contract in order to reserve
a room for the following academic year. The deposit is held in the student's account and
applied toward the Spring semester. First-year students who wish to reside in a residence
hall will receive a housing contract with their Admissions Packet provided space is available.
The contract and card must be signed and returned to the Revenue Office, California
University of Pennsylvania, with the $100.00 deposit.
Up~r-class students are also required to pay the $100.00 room deposit. They may
obtain specific instructions on obtaining a housing contract from the Director of Housing,
Student Development Office, Student Union. Schedules and deadlines for housing contracts
are posted for each academic year. Withdrawal from the contract will result in partial or
total forfeiture of the deposit. In addition, the student may be held liable for that semester's
room and board charges.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
65
RESIDENCE LIFE
Each university residence hall is supervised by a staff that is headed by a residence hall
director. California University employs five full-time residence hall directors who live in
the residence halls. These professionals are readily available to students who may request
direction or assistance. The residence hall director, with the assistance of graduate assistants
and undergraduate resident assistants, has charge of the residence facility including
programming activities. A detailed description of the university's Residence Life Program,
residence facilities, and residence hall rules and regulations is included in the Residence Hall
Handbook.
EVENING TUTORING PROGRAM
In cooperation with the Academic Services department, an evening tutoring program is
based in two of the residence halls. This program is available to all students. A detailed
schedule of evening tutoring sites and hours is posted throughout the campus each semester.
The residence hall directors and their staff provide assistance in selection of and scheduling
appropriate tutors.
DINING SERVICES
California University offers a dining services program which allows students to choose
the time, place and service they prefer. All who reside in a university residence hall are
required to accept assignment to the board program. The program entitles students to 14
meals per week at the various dining facilities, as well as a $100 per term Flex Fund
Account. Off-campus and commuter students may enroll for the 14-meal board plan or one
of the other meal plans available for non-resident students. The assignment is for one full
semester and may not be terminated. Flex dollars are included in each plan and are nonrefundable other than upon complete withdrawal from the university during the term.
Specific questions and a detailed brochure may be obtained from the Director of University
Dining Services, Student Union Building, 938-4443.
INTERCOLLEGIATE ATIIl..ETICS
The university sponsors a comprehensive athletic program for both men and women.
The athletic program is regulated by the policies of the Athletic Council and administered
by the Director of Athletics, Dr. Tom Pucci. It is governed by the Office of Student
Development with the Dean of Students as the senior administrative officer.
Fourteen varsity sports are available to students: for men, baseball (coached by Chuck
Gismondi), basketball (Jim Boone), cross-country, football (Jeff Petrucci), soccer (Dennis
Laskey), track and field (Jack Henck), and wrestling (Robin Ersland); for women, basketball
66
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
(Paul Flores), cross-country, softball (Linda Kalafatis), tennis (Richard Saccani), track and
field (Jack Henck), volleyball (Jing Pu) and soccer (Dennis Laskey). There are numerous
assistant coaches and graduate assistants. The training staff includes the members of the
Department of Sports Medicine. Academic progress of varsity athletes is carefully
monitored.
Students who desire to participate in intercollegiate athletics must meet the academic
standards of California University, PSAC, ECAC, and NCAA. Specific requirements may
be obtained from California University's Athletic Director, the Chairperson of the Athletic
Council, or the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services.
SOCIAL FRATERNITIES AND SORORITIES
Local fraternities and sororities function under the control of their respective councils,
the Interfraternity Council and the Panhellenic Council. These organizations are subject to
university authority and regulations. The following social fraternities and sororities are
represented at California:
FRATERNITIES
Alpha Kappa Lambda
Alpha Phi Alpha
Delta Chi
Delta Sigma Phi
Kappa Alpha Psi
Phi Beta Sigma
Phi Kappa Theta
Phi Mu Delta
Phi Kappa Sigma
Omega Psi Phi
Sigma Tau Gamma
Theta Xi
Acacia
AKr
A4>A
"1X
"1E4>
KA't
4>BE
4>K0
4>M"1
4>KE
Oi'4>
SORORITIES
Alpha Kappa Alpha
Alpha Sigma Tau
Delta Sigma Theta
Delta Zeta
Sigma Kappa
Sigma Sigma Sigma
AKA
AET
"1E8
"1Z
EK
EEE
ETr
ex
HEALm SERVICES
The mission of the University Health Services is to provide high quality health care for
our students; to direct our students to other health care providers when appropriate; to
provide emergency care for all members of the university community; to promote the
holistic concept of a healthful life for the university community; to address the specific
health needs of those members of the student population with special problems; and to
conceive, develop and implement relevant health education programs for the university
community.
The Downey-Garofalo Health Center is open 24 hours a day, seven days a week while
the university is in session. A staff of full-time registered nurses is on duty at all hours.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
67
A qualified physician is on duty for four hours a day, Monday through Friday, during
specified hours.
University health services are available to all registered undergraduate and graduate
students. Employees, both faculty and staff, conference participants, visiting athletes and
other visitors will be given emergency treatment if such an emergency occurs on the
university campus. For the most part, the Health Center is an out-patient facility.
However, from time to time, emergencies may be accommodated overnight. In some cases,
short-time confinement of students coming from homes located a great distance from the
university is also approved. The university physician will determine when a student should
return home for treatment and recovery. He will also refer students to local hospitals in
emergencies and for other treatment beyond the capabilities of the Health Center. In cases
of emergency, Mon Valley Hospital will generally be used for primary care. The final
decision in hospital selection is the student's.
MEDICAL ABSENCES
Students unable to attend classes because of illness should contact their professors,
explain their absences, and arrange completion of any work that may have been missed.
The Health Center does not ~ue medical exc~, but will send written notification to
professors only in the following circumstances, provided that the student must initiate the
request:
(1) If a student consults a health care professional at the Health Center, and the health care
professional determines that the student has or had sufficient medical reason not to
attend class (or to fulfill other academic obligations), notification will be sent to the
student's professors but only if the student makes a request at that time.
(2) If a student has consulted a private physician, who has determined that the student has
or had sufficient medical reason not to attend class (or to fulfil other academic
obligations), and the physician notifies the Health Center to that effect in writing,
notification to this effect will be sent to the student's professors.
(3) If a student is confined for longer treatment or care at the infirmary section of the
Health Center, verification of the confinement will be sent to the student's professors.
If a student is hospitalized elsewhere or requires extended recovery with bed rest,
written notification should be sent from the attending physician to the Health Center,
which will notify the student's professors.
Upon notification from the Health Center or any other health care professional, the
professor may decide whether to consider the notification as a valid excuse from class or
other academic obligations.
A professor may call the Nurse Supervisor of the Health Center for verification of a
student's visit, but a visit can be verified only if a student was actually seen by a health
professional.
The delivery of high quality health care is the heart of the Health Center. Our personal
convictions and our legal obligations insure that all areas of the Health Center are under
strict rules of confidentiality. Medical information will be released by your written consent,
68
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
by a properly executed subpoena, and to appropriate university offices in an emergency if
knowledge of the information is necessary to protect ·the health and safety of the student and
other individuals.
COUNSELING AND PSYCHOLOGICAL SERVICES
The Counseling Center staff provides personal, social, psychological and career choice
services to students with problems that interfere with their adjustment and effective
educational performance while at the university.
If you are having trouble understanding your feelings, maintaining satisfactory social and
interpersonal relationships, or coping with academic demands, it may be beneficial to see
a counselor, social worker or psychologist at the Counseling Center.
You can call the Center at 938-4191, or contact the receptionist in the Center's office
in the Downey-Garofalo Health Center for an appointment with a licensed psychologist, or
counselor. You can make the appointment yourself or be referred by a professor, fellow
student, staff person or management personnel.
You can talk to a counselor in private with assurance that the discussion will remain
confidential. Most appointments are of an individual nature, but special interest groups can
be organized. The special interest groups may meet on a weekly basis dealing with stress,
test anxiety, self-disclosure, interpersonal relationships. parents, occupational choice,
depression, sex or other topics of interest to all members in the group.
In addition, interest, intelligence, aptitude and personality tests and questionnaires may
be used to gather more information about yourself. Through counseling you will learn how
to interpret this information and make better choices in university life.
The professional counselors have extended their services by developing a strong referral
system locally on campus and off campus. Referrals can be made to any department or
office on campus for financial aid, student work-study programs, tutoring, academic
advising, and other matters. Further, there is a close liai&<>n with the Student Development
Office, residence directors in the residence halls, the Health Center, the Speech and Hearing
Clinic, the Rehabilitation Office, the Veterans Affairs Office, the Women's Center, the
Campus Ministry, and other divisions of the university.
A formal agreement has been entered into by and between Southwestern Pennsylvania
Human Services, INC. (SPHS) and California University of Pennsylvania to provide
diversified counseling services.
Under this agreement SPHS and its affiliated corporations provide certain rehabilitative
and therapeutic treatment services to students and employees of California University upon
referral to the agencies by the university, its agents and associates or the students or
employees themselves. These services include drug and alcohol assessment and treatment,
mental health services, and primary health care services. Also, other health and social
services which are requested by the university and are within the scope of SPHS and its
affiliates may be provided. For further information on the drug and alcohol program on
campus, see the section on CHOICES on the page following.
Please call 938-4191 or drop in at the Health Center. Office hours: 8:00 a.m. to 4:00
p.m. daily, Monday through Friday. Weekend and evening sessions are by appointment.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
69
CHOICES
CHOICES is the drug and alcohol education and prevention program on campus. Its
office is in the Downey-Garofalo Health Center. It is one approach by California University
of Pennsylvania to provide a drug free community. CHOICES provides programs for the
University and surrounding communities aimed at increasing awareness of alcohol and drug
related issues.
These programs include consultation, counseling, education, selfdevelopment, substance-free activities, and support groups for co-dependency and Adult
Children of Alcoholics.
CHOICES is made up of three primary components: the Consortium, BACCHUS, and
the Assessment and Intervention Program. Each of these is an integral member of the
program's development and expansion within the campus community.
The Consortium is a combined effort by California and eight neighboring universities
to provide a forum for discussion of relevant and current issues in drug and alcohol
prevention and education as well as the sharing of developmental programming ideas. The
Consortium offers both our campus and other universities access to a resource library
consisting of videos, books, pamphlets, and other information related to drug and alcohol
use and abuse.
BACCHUS (Boost Alcohol Consciousness Concerning the Health of University Students)
is a student organization developed under the guidance of advisors from the office.
BACCHUS strives to help individuals explore their attitudes and behavior regarding alcohol
and drug use. BACCHUS is an educational component focusing on self-responsibility and
conscientious decision making.
The final element in the programming is the Assessment and Intervention component.
This program is designed to assist those whose behavior may be harmful to themselves or
others because of alcohol or drug abuse. Through this program offers an opportunity for
students to learn facts and to dispel myths concerning the use of alcohol and other drugs.
Through group interaction activities students gain a sense of self and the impact their actions
have on others.
CHOICES knows that decisions about life can be tough at times. Learning about
alcohol and other drug related issues may help you make positive and responsible choices.
SERVICES FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES
Disabled students are provided an equal opportunity to participate in student services and
activities conducted by this university. No qualified disabled student is, on the basis of
disability, excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, and or otherwise subjected
to discrimination under any academic, research, occupational training, housing, health,
insurance, counseling, financial aid, physical education, athletics, recreation, transportation,
other extracurricular, or other post-secondary program or activity offered or sponsored by
this university.
University programs and facilities are accessible to the disabled, and special needs of
disabled students are recognired. The Disabled Student Service Office in Room 114, Clyde
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
70
Hall, provides individualired assistance to those in need. Information on disabled students
services may be obtained through the Coordinator, Services for Student with Disabilities.
Students in need of attendant services should contact the coordinator at the earliest
practicable date.
Learning Disabled Students
On the special program - CARE - for learning disabled students, see pages 26-28 in
this catalog.
Parking for Disabled Students
Numerous parking spaces have been reserved for the exclusive use of disabled persons
who have mobility or other physical problems. These spaces are reserved for such use at
all times.
Disabled persons who require special parking privileges must apply for a special
temporary /permanent parking permit at the Office of Public Safety.
STUDENT REGULATIONS
Students are adults and are expected to take personal responsibility for their own
conduct. The university will react appropriately to incidents as they occur off campus.
1. The possession or use of alcoholic beverages or drugs on university property is
prohibited. Students are reminded that Pennsylvania law prohibits the use or possession
of alcoholic beverages by those under twenty-one years of age. See the section on
alcohol and drug use - CHOICES - on page 69 of this catalog.
2. Gambling in any form is prohibited on campus and in university owned and supervised
buildings.
3. Matriculation and identification cards are for personal use only. They are valid only for
the term in which the student is enrolled. Falsification of these cards or the transfer of
one to another person is strictly prohibited. These restrictions also apply to dining hall
cards.
4. Students and student organiutions are not permitted to make any purchases in the name
of the university or the Student Association, Inc., without written authoriution of the
proper officers. Those who fail to comply with this regulation are personally liable for
payment of those items purchased.
5. Men and women students may not visit each other in their residence hall rooms except
during hours when visitation is permitted. Visitation hours are posted in each residence
hall. Any exception to these hours must be authorired by the residence hall director.
6. The possession or use of firearms, firecrackers, or other explosives on campus or in
student living quarters is prohibited.
7. Tampering with fire equipment and setting off a false alarm are prohibited.
8. Unlawful entry to any university building and the theft or destruction of any university
property are prohibited.
9. Students who participate in any demonstration which is disorderly, riotous, destructive
and disruptive are subject to legal action by the Commonwealth, the local government,
and the university. Disciplinary action may also be taken by the university.
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
71
10. A notice requesting a student to report to a professor or an administrative official has
priority over any other activity and requires compliance on the date, day and time
indicated. Should a conflict arise, the student must contact the professor or
administrative official before that date, day and time indicated to arrange rescheduling
of the conference.
11. Any person on university premises or in buildings supervised by the university is
required to produce identification upon the request of a professor, administrative
official, or employee of the Campus Safety force.
12. Any student who possesses, sells or uses any drug or medicine including narcotics, the
issuance of which is not controlled by prescription, is subject to disciplinary action by
the university and legal action by the civil authorities.
13. The university has a strict policy concerning solicitation by groups or individuals on
campus. Permission must be obtained from the Vice-President for Student Development
for any group or individual to sell items on campus.
14. THE UNIVERSITY WILL TOLERATE NO VIOLATION OF THE FOLLOWING
HAZING REGULATIONS. The term hazing shall include, but not be limited to, any
brutality of a physical nature, such as whipping, beating, branding, forced calisthenics,
exposure to the elements, forced consumption of any food, liquor, drug or other
substance, or any other forced physical activity which could adversely affect the physical
health and safety of the individual, and shall include any activity which would subject
the individual to extreme mental contact, forced conduct which could result in extreme
embarrassment, or any other forced activity which could adversely affect the mental
health or dignity of the individual. Willingness of an individual to participate does not
relieve an organization of responsibility for the act. The university has the following
options in cases where groups or individuals are found guilty of hazing: fines,
withholding of diplomas or transcripts, probation, suspension, or dismissal.
72
73
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
74
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
Requests for applications and all correspondence concerning admissions should be
directed to the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. Applicants are
encouraged to write or call for an appointment to visit the University. The address of the
Admissions Office is 250 University Avenue, California, PA, 15419-1394; the telephone
number is (412) 938-4404. All applications are individually evaluated. As soon as
applications are complete, a decision is reached and applicants notified. Every attempt is
made to complete this process within two weeks.
GENERAL ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
Admission standards have been established by the University to select those students
who will be most likely to succeed in the various programs of the University.
1. General Scholarship. An applicant for admission must be a graduate of an approved
or accredited secondary school or have an equivalent preparation as determined by any
state's Department of Education.
2. Aptitude and Ability Standards. An ability to do work in higher education should be
evident from an aptitude examination such as the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). In
certain instances, other kinds of evidence may be used to determine the ability to do
such work.
3. Character and Personality. Applicants must be able to demonstrate that they possess
the personality traits, interests, attitudes, and personal characteristics necessary for an
advanced education.
4. Admission to Special Curricula. A student seeking admission to a special curriculum
may be required to take an appropriate aptitude test in the special program or have
earned specific credentials.
EVALUATION OF STUDENT APPLICATIONS
Many variables are taken into consideration in reviewing applications for admission.
The admissions committee weighs as many of the following as possible: class rank,
cumulative grade point average, type of curriculum completed in relationship to the proposed
major, guidance counselor or another recommendation, on-campus interview, standardiz.ed
test scores, activities, and maturity.
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
75
SPECIFIC ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Freshmen
Students attending a post-secondary institution for the first time are considered new
freshmen. All students in this classification must submit a completed application, application
fee, high school transcript, and GED certificate (if applicable). Results from the Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Test (ACT) must be sent, if available. These
test results are beneficial to students and advisors as programs are individually tailored.
B.
Tramfers
Students who wish to transfer to this university must submit a formal application,
application fee, and official transcripts from all institutions attended after secondary school.
Students must be in good academic and social standing at the last institution attended in
order to qualify for admission to the university for the following semester. In cases where
students have been out of school for at least one semester, special consideration will be
given.
If a degree has not been earned beyond high school, applicants must also submit the
high school transcript, including the results of all standardized test scores.
See pages 79-80 below in this section of this catalog for information about how transfer
credits are evaluated. Transfer credits are not evaluated before application for admission
has been made.
C.
Tramients
Students who wish to enroll at California with the expectation of transferring credits
to their home institution and do not wish to receive a degree from California University of
Pennsylvania are classified as transients.
Students must submit a letter or form from the home institution with appropriate
authorization. The document must list those courses which are approved for registration.
Transcripts are not required.
A formal application with application fee must be submitted. An appropriate approval
letter with courses listed must be submitted for each semester for which transient status is
requested. In all cases, admission is granted for the approved semester only.
D.
Early Admission for High-School Students
High school students may be eligible for admission to California University of
Pennsylvania provided the following requirements have been met.
a.
The student must complete the application for admission form and pay the application
fee.
b. The applicant must have completed the sophomore year of high school and be enrolled
in a college preparatory curriculum.
c.
An early admission clearance form must be completed with all necessary signatures
affixed.
76
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
d.
The student's high school transcript must be submitted and reflect a cumulative grade
point average of 3.00 for the past two years. (For up-coming juniors, ninth- and tenthgrade averages will be used.)
The student's status will be classified as provisional for each session while still in high
school.
The student must submit a completed early admission clearance form and a transcript
for each session that enrollment at California University is desired.
At the completion of the student's high school program a second application must be
submitted with the final high school transcript. A second application fee is not
required. At this time the student will be in a degree program.
e.
f.
g.
E. Graduates of California University
Post-associate and post-baccalaureate students who have graduated from California
University must re-apply (with application fee) to the Admissions Office.
F. Other Post-Baccalaureate Students
Students who have not graduated from California University of Pennsylvania and want
to enroll in undergraduate programs must file an official application, application fee, and the
official transcript from the institution granting the baccalaureate degree with the Admissions
Office.
G. International Students
International students are required to submit an application for admission to California
University of Pennsylvania. In all cases, a special international student application must be
completed. All transcripts, a statement of financial support, and letters of recommendation
must be submitted. Assuming that all records indicate that an international students will be
successful, final admission is contingent upon acceptable clearance from the education
authorities of the home country and from the Department of Justice, Immigration and
Naturalization Service, of the United States.
Applicants from foreign countries must have competency in the use of the English
language as demonstrated through the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL)
examination.
International students must subscribe to the insurance plan of California
University. For identification purposes, international students should obtain a United States
Social Security number.
H. Special Students
Students who have completed all secondary school requirements may take courses at
the university without being a candidate for a degree. Special students must submit a
completed formal application, application fee, and all appropriate transcripts.
For special students, all regulations and fees are the same as for degree students.
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
77
I.
Veteram
Veterans of the United States armed forces who have not attended an institution of
higher education since their honorable discharge are unconditionally admissible to California
University.
STUDENT CREDENTIALS
All credentials presented in support of an application for admission become the
property of the university and cannot be returned to the student. The complete file will be
retained according to the provision of University policy and the Family Rights and Privacy
Act of 1974, as amended.
All information filed in support of the application must be complete and authentic.
Any false information may be used as grounds for denial or dismissal.
SPECIAL OPPORTUNITIES
California University has shown that some students can succeed and even excel when
given individual attention. Our university provides an environment where students are
known as individuals and receive additional help from faculty, administrators, and students.
In addition to the standard support services, California University of Pennsylvania offers a
Department of Academic Development Services, which provides tutoring and counseling for
all age groups. See the section on that department, on page 121 in this catalog.
Academically and financially needy students may be eligible for special state and
federal programs as administered through Academic Development Services, which provides
tutoring and counseling for all age groups.
c_ARE
__: _PR_o_G_RA_M_s_F_o_R_T_HE_L_E_ARNIN
___
G_o_IS_A_B_L_E_o_ _ ___.l ·
L -_ _ _
For information about special programs for the learning disabled - both high-school
and undergraduate students - see the section on CARE in the General Information section
of this catalog, pages 26-28 above.
DEVELOPMENTAL COURSES
All entering students (including transfer students but excluding those in the Nursing
curriculum or those who have already earned an associate or higher degree) must, before
their first registration at California, take three tests to determine their levels of competency
and placement in mathematics, English composition, and reading. Students who do not
achieve certain predetermined scores on these tests must enroll in the appropriate
78
PUCATION AND ADMISSION
developmental courses 1 and make use of the appropriate Learning Centers in Mathematics,
Writing, or Reading. These courses are ENG 100 (English Language Skills), MAT 098
(Basic Mathematics) and MAT 099 (Introductory Algebra), and EDE 100 (Reading,
Studying, and Listening Skills), which are all described in the course listings in this catalog.
For information on the Learning Centers, see the General Information section of this
catalog pages 25-26 above.
ese deve op
courses are preparatory to a university academic
do not count toward the fulfillment of the number
experience, the credits awarded in th
of credits for graduation; nor may the be used in fulfillment of General Education
requirements or academic major require nts. However, the grades achieved in these
courses are used in the establishment of the grade point average, of class standing, of
eligibility for financial aid, and of eligib" ity for participation in co-curricular activities.
This policy on developmental co
does not affect the transfer of all appropriate
its from other institutions.
READMISSION
For readmission after an absence from the university see page 60 in this catalog.
SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERS
Social Security numbers, which serve as the permanent student identification number,
must be entered on the application for admission. Students who do not have a social
security number should obtain one.
PENNSYLVANIA RESIDENCY
Residency is determined at the time of admission. Change of residency may only occur
by appealing to the Residency Appeals Committee. For further information, contact the
office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs after admission and prior to registration.
1However, transfer students who (a) have not already earned an associate or higher
degree and who (b) have completed the equivalent of English 101 or a college-level course
in mathematics with grades of C or better at another institution but (c) whose diagnostic test
scores indicate that they should take the appropriate developmental courses are not required
to repeat those courses or to take the developmental courses at this university. Nevertheless,
such students are strongly urged to take the developmental courses and to take the
opportunity for additional help provided by the Mathematics, Reading, and Writing Centers.
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION *
~1Jiv.CV,
~-11/
79
{W.fi.~ ADVANCED PLACEMENT CREDIT
A student who has taken Advanced Placement examinations under the auspices of the
College Board may receive credit for them at California, provided the score is 3.00 or
higher.
TRANSFER CREDIT EVALUATION
Prior to receiving a transcript evaluation,students must first make formal application
to the University through the Admissions Office, submitting all transcripts and the
required application fee. University officials are not permitted to evaluate transfer
credits provisionally.
2. For credit towards the Bachelor's degree, a maximum of 75 credits may be transferred
to California from two-year community or junior colleges,.98 credits from four-year
~olleges or universities, or 98 credits from a combination of two-year and four-year
colleges and universities. No more than fifteen credits towards an Associate degree
may
transferr to California University.
3. Courses taken at another school under a Pass/Fail option will be transferred under the
conditions of California's Pass/Fail policy.
4. Developmental courses are not transferable.
5. Grades of D are not transferable unless they are counted as part of an associate degree
granted at a public institution or a community college.
6. Courses are considered for transfer to California in the following order:
(a) Courses for which the grade earned was A, B, or C;
(b) Courses for which a Pass grade was given;
(c) Courses for which the student received a D grade as part of an earned degree.
7. No courses for which a D grade was received will be transferred after a total of 64
credits has been transferred.
8. When credits are transferred, only the credits are counted as advanced standing; the
grade point average of transfer courses is not calculated with California University
earned courses.
Although credits will always transfer according to these provisions, regulations that
govern the national professional accreditation of certain programs offered at California
University of Pennsylvania may sometimes not permit some courses taken in programs not
similarly accredited at other two- and four-year institutions to be transferred as the
equivalents of courses that may be similarly entitled or described in this catalog.
1.
80
APPLICATION AND ADMISSION
Community College Graduates: Special Provisions
The University subscribes to the Articulation and Transferability Agreement between
the State System of Higher Education and Community Colleges. This agreement applies to
transferability of credits from Middle States or other regionally approved two-year and
junior colleges. The details of this agreement are:
1.
Since completion of an associate degree demonstrates a student's motivation to
complete a baccalaureate degree, preference for admission will be given to applicants
who have completed the associate degree.
2. A transfer student who has completed a two-year degree program should normally
expect to complete a baccalaureate program in two additional years. In certain
specialized programs of the receiving institution, however, a longer period may be
necessary for majors in these programs.
3. The D grade obtained by two-year college students is treated by the senior institution
in the same manner as the senior institution treats the D 's of its indigenous students.
Placement of the D grade on the program distribution sheet may vary from program
to program.
4. Secondary school transcripts as well as test scores are considered as a guidance tool
and not a determinant of transfer to the four-year institution. The awarding of the
associate degree is considered to have satisfied the high school graduation
requirements.
VETERANS: COURSE CREDIT FOR MlLIT ARY SERVICE
Veterans may be awarded credit for their military training and military schools. All
veterans. reservists, and National Guard members who have been honorably discharged (or
honorably discharged from active duty) may be eligible for credits. Credits are awarded
only in the category of Free Electives. Each veteran or reservist seeking such an award
must submit a copy of DD 214 to the Director of Veterans Affairs. Army veterans who
entered the army after October 1, 1981, should submit an A.A.R.T.S. transcript; Air Force
veterans who served after 1974 should submit a C.C.A.F. transcript. Evaluations based on
the latest American Council of Education Guides will be forwarded to the appropriate Dean
for approval.
ATTRITION
Information relating to the retention/attrition of students at the University can be
obtained through the office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs. Generally, more
than one-half of students who matriculate as baccalaureate students will graduate.
Information on this subject may be obtained through an individual appointment with the
Vice-President for Academic Affairs.
81
FEES AND EXPENSES
82
FEES AND EXPENSES
BASIC FEE (TUITION)•
The basic fee (tuition) covers the cost of instruction, registration, the keeping of student
records and library services.
Full-time students: For full-time students (scheduled for 12-18 credits) who are
residents of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,•• the basic fee is $1,314 a semester. An
additional $110 per credit is charged for credits scheduled in excess of 18.
Part-time students: Part-time students (scheduling 11 credits or fewer) who are
residents of the Commonwealth are charged $110 per credit.
Out-of-State students: For full-time students (scheduling 12-18 credits) who are not
residents of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,•• the basic fee is $2,446 a semester. An
additional $204 per credit is charged for credits scheduled in excess of 18.
Out-of-State, part-time students: Part-time students who are not residents of the
Commonwealth are charged $204 per credit.
OTHER FEES
Student Union Building Fee Schedule
Spring 1992, Summer 1992
Seniors
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 10.00
5.00
2.50
•AIL FEES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE. 1he amount shown for the basic fee (tuition) is in effect for the 19911992 academic year. Please contact the Revenue Office for current fee information .
..An in-state student is defined as one who is a bona fide resident of and domiciled within the State of
Pennsylvania for a reasonable period, net less than one year, immediately preceding the student's registration for
a tenn or semester in any Commonwealth-supponed college or university in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Miners are generally presumed to be a resident of the place of their parents' or guardian's domicile.
1he establishment of domicile is primarily a matter of continued residence and intention. Generally,
Pennsylvania domicile is considered to be established upon the completion of at least 12 months of continuous
residence within the State at the time of registration for courses.
FEES AND EXPENSES
83
Juniors
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 40
20
10
Sophomores and Freshmen
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 75
38
19
Fall 1992, Spring 1993, Summer 1993
Undergraduates
Full-Time
Part-Time
Part-Time
12 credits or more
6 to 11 credits
1 to 5 credits
$ 75
38
19
This fee is not refundable.
University Senice Fee
$ 75
9 or more credits
40
1-8 credits
This fee is not refundable except for academic dismissal or administrative action to revoke
a registration.
Student ASM>ciation Fee
All students are charged an activity fee according to their academic status as
follows :
12 or more credits
$100
6-11 credits
46
1-5 credits
24
This fee is refundable through the Office of Student Association, Inc.
Room and Board Charges
The cost for living in a university residence hall is $800 per semester for a double
room. (Most rooms are doubles.) The cost of meals is $800 per semester for 14 meals
a week, or $580 for 10 meals a week, or $430 for 7 meals a week.
84
FEES AND EXPENSES
Advance Deposit
All first-year students, including transfers and readmitted students are required to submit
a $75 advance deposit payable to California University of Pennsylvania. This fee may be
mailed or hand delivered to the Revenue Office, Administration Building, California
University of Pennsylvania. It is to be paid in advance of registration and is credited to the
student's account for the first semester.
Room Deposit
An advance room deposit of $100, held in the student's account and applied toward the
spring semester, is required in order to reserve a room for the following academic year.
First-year students who wish to reside in a residence hall will receive a housing contract
with their Admissions Packet. The contract and card must be signed and returned to the
Revenue Office, California University of Pennsylvania, with the $100 deposit.
Upper-class students are also required to pay the $100 room deposit. They should
obtain their housing contracts from the Director of Housing, Student Development Office,
Student Union Building. Schedules and deadlines for housing contracts are posted for each
academic year. Withdrawal from the contract will result in partial or total forfeiture of the
deposit. In addition, the student may be held liable for room and board charges for that
semester.
Late payment fee
A $15 fee is charged when a student fails to pay fees during the registration period or
by the date established in an approved deferment plan.
Dishonored check charge
Students making checks payable to California University of Pennsylvania which are not
acceptable to the bank because of insufficient funds are charged $15 for each such check.
The original amount plus the $15 charge must be paid by money order or certified bank
draft. Personal checks will not be accepted. The Student Association, Inc. charges $12 for
dishonored checks.
Damage charges
Students are held responsible for the cost of damage, breakage, or loss and/or the return
of University property.
Degree fee
A fee of $10 must be paid by each candidate for a degree from California University
of Pennsylvania. A student is not permitted to complete graduation from the University until
this fee has been paid. The fee is payable when the student has been notified of clearance
for graduation.
85
FEES AND EXPENSES
CLEPFee
A one-time fee of $25 is charged for the administration and recording of CLEP (College
Level Equivalency Program) credits regardless of the number of credits awarded.
Co-operative Education Fee
A one-time fee of $25 is charged for the recording of Co-operative Education
experiences, at the time when the student wishes to have them recorded on the official
transcript.
PAYMENT OF BILLS
All fees are assessed at the time of registration. Payment may be made by cash, check,
money order, or certified bank draft made payable to California University of Pennsylvania,
or by VISA or MasterCard. No personal check will be accepted in payment for past-due
accounts or to clear a returned check.
Delinquent Accounts
No student may be enrolled, graduate, receive semester grade reports, or receive a
transcript until all previous charges are paid.
FEES AND EXPENSES
86
Summary of Fees (Per Semester)
Full-time Resident Students
Basic Fee
University Service Fee
Student Union Building Fee
Housing Fee
Meal Fee (14 meals)
Student Association Fee
In-State
Out-of State
$ 1,314
75
$2,446
75
800
800
100
800
800
100
...
...
Full-time Commuting Students
Basic Fee
University Service Fee
Student Union Building Fee
Student Association Fee
$ 1,314
75
...
$2,446
75
...
100
•See schedule on pages 82-83.
REFUND POLICY
A refund or credit will not be allowed unless the withdrawal is properly made in the
Office of Academic Records. Except for emergencies, the date of notification is considered
the effective date of withdrawal. Financial aid recipients who intend to withdraw from the
University must be cleared by the Financial Aid Office as part of the withdrawal procedure.
Refunds are paid only by request, which must be made on the appropriate form,
available at the Revenue Office (Room 119, Administration Building).
For both the Basic Fee and for university housing, partial refunds, or credit, are based
upon a percentage of the fees charged and paid according to the following schedule:
1st and 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund
3rd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70% refund
4th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 % refund
5th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50% refund
After the 5th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REFUND
Refunds on board (dining) charges will be made according to a pro-rata schedule available
in the Revenue Office and in the Office of the Vice-president for Student Development and
Services (Room 129, California Memorial Union). It should be noted, however, that there
is no refund of flex dollars, used for university dining privileges, except on withdrawal from
the university.
FEES AND EXPENSES
87
SUMMER SESSIONS
Basic Fee (Tuition)
The enrollment fee for any of the regular summer sessions is $110 per semester hour
for Pennsylvania resident undergraduate student, and $204 per semester credit hour for nonPennsylvania resident undergraduate students.
University Service Fee
For nine or more credits in the summer, the fee is $75; for one to eight credits, the fee
is $40. This fee is not refundable.
Student Union Building Fee
See the schedule on pages 82-83. This fee is not refundable.
Student ~ation Fee
For 12 or more credits in the summer, the fee is $100; for 6-11, $46; for five or fewer,
$24.
Housing and Dining Hall Fee
In 1991, summer rates for housing in a university residence hall were: for the ten-week
session $810 for the 19-meal plan, $710 for the 12-meal plan; for the five-week session,
$405 for the 19-meal plan, $355 for the 12-meal plan. Summer rates for 1992 will be
established early in the spring semester of 1992.
Smnmer Refund Policy
For both the Basic Fee and for university housing, partial refunds, or credit, are based
upon a percentage of the fees charged and paid according to the following schedule:
5-Week Session
1st Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund
2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 % refund
After the 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . NO REFUND
10-Week Session
1st Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund
2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70% refund
3rd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60% refund
4th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 % refund
After the 4th Week ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REFUND
88
FEES AND EXPENSES
Refunds on board (dining) charges will be made according to a pro-rata schedule available
in the Revenue Office and in the Office of the Vice-president for Student Development and
Services (Room 129, California Memorial Union). It should be noted, however, that there
are no flex dollars for summer.
Special Conditions for Summer Sessions
The first day of classes is used as the starting date in considering the first week for
determining a refund or billing adjustment.
If a student registers for two or more sessions and then decides to withdraw from a
session before the start of that session, a refund or credit will be pro-rated by using the parttime credit fee. No refund or credit will be pro-rated for the Student Union Building Fee
or University Service Fee.
ACADEMIC MANAGEMENT SERVICES
BUDGET PAYMENT PLAN
This Plan allows you to pay University fees for Fall and Spring in 10 monthly payments
commencing June 1, 1992. The cost of this Plan is $45, which includes Life Benefit
Coverage. There are no other fees or interest charges. Information concerning this Plan will
be forwarded to you separately. If you wish, you may call Academic Management Services
directly, (800) 556-6684 for information.
89
FINANCIAL AID:
GRANTS
SCHOLARSHIPS
EMPWYMENT
WANS
90
FINANCIAL AID
Financial aid is a critical factor in providing students with the opportunity for a college
education. All financial aid is intended to supplement the family's financial resources, not
as a substitute.
GWSSARY OF FINANCIAL AID TERMS
Aid:
CSS:
CWSP:
Grant:
NEED:
Perkins Loan:
PLUS:
QPA or GPA:
SAR:
Scholarship:
SEOG:
Stafford:
Total package of funds awarded to meet university expenses.
College Scholarship Service: Organization which analy:res
Financial Aid Forms (F.A.F.'s) (not used by California
University of Pennsylvania).
College Work Study Program: Work on campus, controlled by
the University and funded by the Federal government.
Gift aid which is not repaid, based on need.
Negro Educational Emergency Drive: Local grant program for
African-American students demonstrating need.
Formerly National Direct Student Loan: Federal program
allocating need-based loans through the university.
Parent Loans for Undergraduate Students: Federally backed loan
available through local lenders.
Quality Point Average: Cumulative grade point average used to
determine academic eligibility.
Student Aid Report: Result of the Pell Grant analysis, sent to
student; student must submit all three parts to the university.
Gift aid which is not paid back: based on academic or cocurricular excellence.
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant: University-based
Federal grant awarded to students with highest financial need.
Stafford Loan Program: Federal loan program which subsidi:res
borrowed funds through hometown banks, etc. Eligibility based
on financial need.
APPLICATION PROCEDURE (ALL NEED-BASED PROGRAMS)
Students wishing to apply for need-based financial aid must file a "Pennsylvania State
Grant and Federal Student Aid Application." All California University of Pennsylvania aid
applicants (including applicants from states other than Pennsylvania) must file this
application to receive full aid consideration. Priority will be given to applications filed by
April 1.
Transfer students must also complete a "Financial Aid Transcript" for each college,
university, or post-secondary school previously attended. This form is required whether or
not aid was received at the previous school. These forms are available in the Financial Aid
Office.
FINANCIAL AID
91
BASIS AND MEIBOD OF AWARDING FINANCIAL AID
Student financial aid is provided on the basis of the applicant's documented financial
need. Financial need is defined as the difference between the estimated university costs and
expected family contribution. Grants and loans are credited directly toward costs incurred
at the university; any excess funds are refunded to the student. Earnings from student
employment are paid directly to the student on a bi-weekly basis.
Students' financial aid entitlements are based on their enrollment status at the end of the
fifth week of e.ach semester. Students who drop below twelve credit hours before the sixth
week should expect reductions or cancellations in the amount of aid that will be credited to
their account.
Part-time students taking at least six credits are eligible to apply for assistance through
the following financial aid programs:
Pell Grant
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant
Perkins Loan
College Work-Study
Stafford Loan
PLUS Loan
SLS Loan
Alternative Loan
Part-time students may apply for aid in the same manner as full-time students. The aid
awarded is dependent upon the student's financial need and availability of funds.
RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF FINANCIAL AID APPLICANTS
Every student has the right to apply for financial aid and also to request and receive
reconsideration of the financial aid decision. Students also have the right to know how their
financial need and family contributions are calculated. Students and parents are expected
to provide accurate information on all application materials and may be asked to provide a
photocopy of their latest federal income tax return. The Federal Government requires the
Financial Aid Office to ensure that financial information from all sources is accurate and
truthful. When forms are used to establish eligibility for federal student aid funds, false
statements or misrepresentations may subject those providing the information to a fine or
imprisonment or both, under provision of the U. S. Criminal Code. Students also have the
responsibility to notify the Financial Aid Office of any change occurring in their financial
position from that which was reported on the application (e.g., eligibility for Social Security
or veterans' benefits, receipt of scholarships, grants or other assistance, change in residency,
etc.).
FINANCIAL AID
92
FINANCIAL PLANNING
Students planning to attend California University of Pennsylvania should be aware that
the cash from many of the financial aid programs is not available until approximately nine
weeks into the semester for which the funds are intended. Students should plan to come to
the University with enough personal money for early-term purchases (books, materials, art
supplies, etc.) without depending upon financial aid funds.
SCHOLARSHIPS
The AAUW Scholarship: The California University of Pennsylvania Branch of the
American Association of University Women has established a $400 per year scholarship to
a full-time, female upperclass student over 30 who wants to complete her undergraduate
degree at the University. The scholarship may be renewed if a 3.0 academic grade point
average is maintained. Those interested should contact the Financial Aid Office (412) 9384415.
The Alwnni Scholarship: Ten renewable scholarships are given to freshmen entering with
an SAT score of at least 1050, a grade point average of 3.25, and a rank in the first or
second tenth of their graduating class. No application is necessary for renewal.
APSCUF Scholarship: A $500 scholarship is awarded by the Association of Pennsylvania
University Faculty (APSCUF) to an undergraduate man and an undergraduate woman.
Freshmen must have an SAT score of 1050 and have been ranked in the upper 20% of their
high school graduating class. Upperclassmen must have accrued 32 credits with at least a
3.5 grade point average from the University. A recipient of this scholarship cannot have
received any other academic scholarship. Those interested and eligible may obtain
application forms from the office manager of the University APSCUF Office in Keystone
(412) 938-4293.
The Colonel Arthur L. Bakewell Veterans' Scholarship Fund: Two $1000 scholarships
are offered annually by the California University Veterans Club. They are given in the
amount of $500 per semester. Recipients must (1) be honorably discharged veterans; (2) be
full-time undergraduate students who have completed 32 credits; (3) have a minimum of a
3.0 grade point average; and (4) have attended California University the previous semester.
Eligible veterans should contact the Veterans' Affairs Office (412) 938-4076.
The Gabriel P. Betz Scholarship: This scholarship is an annual grant of one $500 award
or two $250 awards to students who are juniors majoring in geography. A departmental
scholarship committee announces the awards during the fall semester. Applicants who are
seriously considering graduate work in geography should submit a transcript of their
undergraduate grades to the departmental committee. Interested students may contact
Professor Harry J. Orsag in the Earth Science Department (412) 938-4255.
The John Bitonti Memorial Scholarship: This $200 scholarship is given in the spring to
a Speech Pathology and Audiology major who has completed at least four of this
department's courses. The student must be a full-time undergraduate who has completed
33 credits with a 3.0 grade point average and who is involved in departmental activities.
FINANCIAL AID
93
The student is committee-selected. Inquiries can be made by contacting the Speech
Pathology and Audiology Department (412) 938-4175.
The Board of Governors' Minority Scholarship: This scholarship, which waives tuition
every semester for four years, is given each year to 15 entering freshmen with a 2.5 grade
point average and SAT score of 725. Interested students should contact the Admissions
Office (412) 938-4404.
The Edward McNall Bums Scholarship: A $500 award is apportioned by majority vote
of a scholarship committee to a student or students majoring in Social Science, Economics,
or History and Urban Studies who have completed between 45 and 60 credits at the
University. Applicants must submit a dated and signed letter of intent, a recent transcript
showing outstanding academic ability , and proof of financial need as determined by the
Financial Aid Office. Those interested should contact the Social Science Department (412)
938-4042.
The California PT A Scholarship: The California High School PTA awards a $500
scholarship to a freshman student who has graduated from California High School. The
scholarship is awarded based on academic performance and financial need. Applications are
available in the California High School's Guidance Office.
The California University of Pennsylvania Faculty Scholarships: The California
University of Pennsylvania Faculty awards renewable scholarships of from $750 to $1500
per year to a selected number of freshmen. Minimum qualifications are: (1) admission as
a full-time student at California University of Pennsylvania, (2) a combined SAT score
above 1200, and (3) rank in the upper 10 % of the high school graduating class. Inquiries
should be directed to Dr. Albert Maruslcin , Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee,
in Manderino Library (938-4095).
The J. Robert Craig Scholarship: Five hundred dollars for the first semester is awarded
to an incoming freshman exhibiting excellence in the natural sciences. Proof of this ability
must be verified by a letter of recommendation from the applicant's science teacher.
Interested freshmen should contact either Dr. George Frangos (412) 938-5748 or Professor
Clyde W. Clendaniel (4 12) 938-4148.
The Earth Science Faculty Scholarship: This $500 scholarship is awarded to a student
majoring in Earth Science, Geography , or Geology. Applicants must have a minimum of
3.0 grade point average in their maj or. The award is made at the end of the junior year.
Those interested should contact Dr. William J. Procasky of the Earth Sciences Department
(412) 938-4180.
The Eberly Family Scholarships: These renewable scholarships are awarded to noneducation majors who have demonstrated academic promise. The awards are restricted first
to Fayette County residents, second to Southwestern Pennsylvania residents, or third to
Pennsylvania residents. The scholarship value is up to full tuition for an academic year.
Each recipient must maintain good academic progress to continue receiving the award. No
application is necessary.
The Dr. Calvin Fleming Scholarship: Awarded to an outstanding student in the Natural
or Physical Sciences. For additional information, contact Dr. Albert Maruskin, Chairman
of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino Library (938-4095). No application is
necessary.
94
FINANCIAL AID
The David W. Hambacher Scholarship: A $500 scholarship is awarded in the freshman
year to a student whose composite SAT score is 1200 and who was in the upper 10% of the
high school graduating class. All eligible entering students are considered. Those interested
should contact the Psychology Department (412) 938-4100.
The Lillian E. Hammitt Scholarship: This award, for one academic year with the
possibility of renewal, is given to a full-time undergraduate enrolled or planning to enroll
for credit in the performing ensemble. Applicants must be recommended by their previous
instructor and must give a live audition. College of Education students are given preference.
The amount of the award varies, depending on financial need. For additional information,
contact Mr. Gene G. Suskalo, Chair, Music Department (412) 938-4242.
The Eleanor C. Bibbs Writing Award: A $100 award for a Composition 101 paper and
a $100 award for a Composition 102 paper are granted in the spring. Information may be
obtained from Dr. Edward Chute, Director of Freshman English, in Dixon 231 (938-4301).
The Delila C. Jenkins Scholarships: These renewable scholarships are awarded to
Freshman Education majors demonstrating financial need. The scholarship value is up to
full tuition for· an academic year. Each recipient must maintain good academic progress to
continue receiving the award. Applicants must submit the Pennsylvania State Grant and
Federal Aid application to be considered.
The Minor Major Memorial Award: This award is given to a scholastically outstanding
student in any of the English curricula. There is no application. Inquiries should be
directed to Professor Ronald L. Forsythe in the English Department (412) 938-4070.
The Joseph Lynn Marino Memorial Award: An Award of $200 to $500 is granted each
year to full-time undergraduates with at least a 3.5 overall grade point average. The
applicant must be enrolled in the College of Liberal Arts and must have completed six
credits in Anthropology. No application is necessary. Inquiries may be made by contacting
Dr. Albert Maruskin, Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino
Library (938-4095).
The Mon Valley NAACP Scholarship: A $600 renewable scholarship is awarded to a
Freshman who graduated from one of the following school districts: Charleroi, Belle
Vernon, Ringgold, Monessen, Yough, California or Bentworth. Nominations must be made
by each school district. Minimum qualifications are: (1) a combined SAT score of 750 or
ACT score of 19; (2) rank in the upper 25% of the high school graduating class; (3) a
cumulative 2.50 grade point average; (4) demonstrated financial need beyond other financial
aid grant programs; (5) an African-American high school senior; and (6) admission as a fulltime student at California University. Inquiries can be made by contacting the Admissions
Office (412) 938-4404.
The Doris Nevin Scholarship: This $500 scholarship is awarded at the end of the junior
year to a student exhibiting qualities of leadership, service, and an interest in physical
fitness. Applicants must have a grade point average of at least 2. 75 and must have
completed at least two Physical Education classes. Those eligible and interested should
contact the Women's Health and Physical Education Department (412) 938-4350.
The Kurt Nordstrom Memorial Scholarship: This scholarship is awarded each semester
to a student majoring in Printing Management. A departmental committee announces its
decision each semester. Interested students may contact Professor Richard Grimm of the
Industry and Technology Department (412) 938-4085.
FINANCIAL AID
95
The Mary Noss Freshman Scholarship: A $400 award for the freshman year only is given
to one student in each of Washington County's fourteen public and two parochial high
schools. The recipients, chosen by a committee in each high school, must attend the
University full-time. High school counselors will provide information.
The Non-Traditional Scholarship Award: This $200 non-renewable scholarship is awarded
to a student who has experienced a break in continuous flow between high school and
college. Applicants must have completed one year of full-time enrollment (24 credits) at
California University of Pennsylvania. The scholarship will be awarded on the basis of
academic performance and unmet financial need. The Pennsylvania State Grant and Federal
Student Aid application must be submitted.
The Elsbeth E. Santee Scholarship: One to four scholarships, up to $1,000, are awarded
each year to students majoring in one of the University's foreign languages. Applicants
must have a.grade point average of at least 3.0 in the language studied and attained second
semester sophomore, junior, or senior status. Applications for the scholarship must be made
by April 1. Additional information may be obtained by contacting Professor Elsbeth Santee,
chair of the Foreign Languages Department in South Hall: (412) 938-4i47.
The Sports Medicine Scholarships: Five scholarships up to $250 are awarded to
outstanding Athletic Training students, excluding incoming freshmen, who have a minimum
grade point average of 2. 75. All Athletic Training Curriculum students are considered.
Questions should be directed to Mr. William B. Biddington in the Sports Medicine
Department (412) 938-4562.
Other Scholarships: Periodic awards are made by various university departments,
organizations, affiliates and alumni. For information concerning these funds, students may
contact the Financial Aid Office.
ROTC SCHOLARSlllPS AND STIPENDS
The University offers participation in the Reserve Officers Training Corps. Students
enrolled and contracted into the Advanced Program receive a monthly, non-taxable stipend
of $100 for ten months of the school year during the last two years of the program.
Advanced freshmen and sophomores may compete for two-, three-, and four-year merit
scholarships. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, a flat book rate, and a $1000 yearly
stipend for the length of the scholarship. Applications for these scholarships may be secured
from the ROTC office. Through the Simultaneous Membership Program a student may be
a member of ROTC and an Army Reserve or Army National Guard unit at the same time.
The student receives the ROTC stipend and drill pay (approximately $120 per month) from
the reserves. For additional information call or visit the ROTC on campus, at 938-4074.
GRANTS
Pell Grant: This Federal aid program is designed to provide financial assistance to attend
post-high school educational institutions. This grant is intended to be the "floor" of the
FINANCIAL AID
96
financial aid package and may be combined with other forms of aid in order to meet the cost
of education. The amount of a Pell Grant is determined by the student's and family's
financial resources. Pell Grants range from $200 to $2,400. The Pell Grant award, unlike
a loan, does not have to be repaid. Students are eligible to receive a Pell Grant for 5.5
years if they received a Pell Grant prior to July 1, 1987. Students receiving a Pell Grant
for the first time after July 1, 1987 are subject to a five-year limitation of Pell Grant
assistance.
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants: Awards from this program are made to
students with exceptional financial need. The minimum a student may receive is $100 per
academic year. Eligibility is limited to undergraduate students who do not have a bachelor's
degree.
Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance Agency Grants: The PHEAA State Grant
program assists qualified students who need financial assistance to obtain higher education.
These grants are based upon admission to California University of Pennsylvania and the
need for financial assistance from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania as determined by the
Higher Education Assistance Agency. High school seniors can secure further information
and application forms from their high school guidance office. These grants are available
only to residents of Pennsylvania who enroll on a full-time basis. Students are eligible to
receive a maximum of eight semesters of state grant assistance.
Other State Grants: Several states, including Massachusetts, Vermont, Connecticut, West
Virginia, Rhode Island, and Ohio, have state grants which can be transferred to schools
outside the state. Interested students may obtain information concerning these programs
from their high school guidance counselors or from the appropriate State Higher Education
Agency.
LOANS
.1
Perkins Loan (formerly named National Direct Student Loan): High school graduates who
have been accepted for enrollment at California University of Pennsylvania, or students
enrolled at least half-time and who demonstrate financial need, may receive consideration
for this student loan.
Continued borrowing under the program from year to year depends on the availability of
funds. Repayment of principal and interest begins six months after students end their studies
for borrowers who received their first loan prior to July 1, 1987, or nine months after
students end their studies for borrowers who received their loan after June 30, 1987. This
loan bears an interest rate of five percent a year and repayment of principal may be extended
over a ten-year period. The normal minimum monthly repayment is $30.
Borrowers becoming full-time teachers in public or other non-profit private elementary or
secondary schools with a high enrollment of students from low-income families or becoming
full-time teachers of handicapped children may be eligible for complete cancellation of the
loan.
In addition, a borrower who becomes a full-time staff member in a preschool program of
the Economic Opportunity Act (Head Start) in certain states may also be eligible for
cancellation of the loan.
FINANCIAL AID
97
Peace Corps: Borrowers serving as volunteers in the Peace Corps are eligible for
cancellation of 15-20% of the total Perkins Loan obligation, depending on the length of
active service in the Peace Corps plus the accrued annual interest. Most government
sponsored loans, such as GSLs, defer repayment during the time a person serves in the
Peace Corps. Plus, there are academic credit programs for returned Peace Corps
volunteers, and over 50 graduate schools offer scholarships to former Volunteers.
Borrowers serving in the Armed Forces of the United States can have a maximum of 50
percent of the loan canceled at the rate of 12 1/2 percent a year, plus interest, for each
complete year of service in an area of hostilities.
Interest and principal payments are deferred during any period in which the borrower is
carrying at least one-half the normal academic work load at an institution of higher learning,
or up to three years if the borrower is on full-time active duty as a member of the Armed
Forces of the United States, is a volunteer under the Peace Corps Acts, or is a volunteer
under the Economic Opportunity Act (VISTA).
Any loans made prior to June 30, 1972 are subject to previous regulations. California
University of Pennsylvania approves and makes the loans and is responsible for collections.
Stafford Loan (Subsidized): The education of students from middle-income groups
frequently places a financial burden on the families, particularly if there are a number of
children who want to attend a university. In many cases, because of limited resources, the
student is not awarded sufficient amounts of aid on the form of employment or grants. Even
when commercial credit sources are available, repayment generally runs concurrently with
the years the student attends the University. To help these young people and their families,
a (subsidized) Stafford Program is in operation.
The laws governing the Stafford Loan Program changed in October, 1986 and based
eligibility for this program entirely on financial need. Students may borrow up to the
amount of unmet need but not over the yearly program limits of $2,625 per year for first
and second levels and $4,000 for subsequent undergraduate levels.
Repayment of the principal of the loan is not required until six months after the student
leaves or graduates from the University. The Federal government will pay the interest
during the time the student is enrolled at least half-time in the University. the loan bears
an interest rate of eight percent a year through the fourth year of repayment for all first-time
borrowers after July 1, 1988. The interest rate increases to ten percent beginning with the
fifth year of repayment. Repayment of the principal may be extended over a ten-year
period. The minimum monthly repayment is $50.
The necessary Stafford Loan application may be secured at any bank or financial institution.
Stafford Loans are available to students from other states through the Pennsylvania Higher
Education Assistance Agency (PHEAA) or agencies similar to PHEAA within their own
state.
Stafford Loan (Non-Subsidized): This loan program is administered by the Pennsylvania
Higher Education Assistance Agency (PHEAA). It provides additional loan resources to
students and parents in situations where eligibility for the subsidized Stafford Loan is denied
or significantly reduced because of income eligibility restrictions. The identical loan limits,
FINANCIAL AID
98
interest rate and principal repayment conditions apply to the non-subsidized loan as to the
subsidized loan previously described. The difference between the two types is that for the
non-subsidized loan borrower is responsible for payment of the interest during the in-school
period.
Students who have filed a PHEAA Stafford Loan Application through their lending
institution will have their maximum eligibility for the subsidized loan determined first.
PHEAA will then automatically offer the applicant a non-subsidized loan for the difference
between the loan limit and any amount of subsidized loan approved.
Out-of-state students may secure an application from the financial aid office and apply
directly to PHEAA.
PLUS Loans: This loan program permits parents to borrow for dependent undergraduate
students. Applicants' eligibility is partially based on a debt burden analysis of their income.
The applicable interest rate on all PLUS loans is variable. The current rate may be obtained
from your lender. Unlike the Stafford Loan Program, PLUS loans are not interestsubsidized. Repayment of the principal and interest normally begins sixty days after signing
the promissory note.
Applications for PLUS loans are available at most local lending institutions.
Supplemental Loan for Students (SLS): This program is currently limited to independent
undergraduate students and graduate students. Applicants' eligibility is partially based on
a debt burden analysis of income and expenses.
The applicable interest rate on all Supplemental loans is variable. The current rate may be
obtained from your lender. The Supplemental Loan program is also unsubsidized.
Repayment of principal and interest may be postponed for various reasons as specified by
program regulations.
Applications for Supplemental loans are available at local lending institutions.
Emergency Student Loan Fund: Emergency short-term loans up to $200 are available to
California University of Pennsylvania undergraduate students. Applications are available
at the Financial Aid Office.
EMPLOYMENT
College Work-Study Program: Students who need a job to help pay for university
expenses may be eligible for employment by California University of Pennsylvania under
the federally supported College Work-Study Program. Students usually work about eight
hours a week while attending classes full-time. During the summer or other vacation
periods when they do not have classes, students may, with proper authorization, work full
time (37 .5 hours per week) under this program. In three months of summer employment
under the Work-Study Program, an eligible student may earn $1 ,000 or more. This amount,
supplemented by weekly earning during the second year, may contribute substantially to a
student' s total educational costs, including necessary clothes, transportation and personal
expenses. A student's eligibility depends upon the demonstration of financial need.
FINANCIAL AID
99
Student Employment (non-CWSP): Employment under this program is provided as funds
permit. Work assignments and work schedules are similar to those for the Federal Work
Study Program. Interested students can receive further information and the employment
application through the Financial Aid Office.
SCHOLARSHIPS/WANS
Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship: The shortage of qualified teachers throughout the
United States led to the establishment of this federal program. Students ranking in the top
10 percent of their high school class who are enrolled or planning to enroll in a program of
study at California leading to certification to teach in a preschool, elementary or secondary
school may apply for this competitive scholarship. Awards range up to $5,000 per academic
year. For each yearly award received, students must agree to teach two years. This
obligation is reduced to one year if the scholar teaches on a full-time permanent basis in a
school in an area which federal regulations define as having a teacher shortage. The
scholarship reverts to a loan if recipients do not fulfill their teaching obligations.
Applications are available in high school guidance offices and this university's Financial Aid
Office.
Scholars in Education Award: The State of Pennsylvania also responded to the critical
shortage of qualified secondary mathematics and science teachers in Pennsylvania by
establishing this program. Students enrolled or planning to enroll in a program leading to
a teaching degree in secondary mathematics or science with an SAT score of at least 1000,
a high school rank in the top fifth of their class and a college or high school rank in the top
fifth of their class, and a college or high school grade point average of at least 3.0 on a 4.0
scale in their science or mathematics coursework are eligible to apply. Recipients must
agree to teach one year in a Pennsylvania secondary school for each yearly scholarship
received. The value of the yearly award at California is $1,500. The scholarship will
revert to a loan if recipients do not fulfill their teaching obligations. Applications are
available in high school guidance offices or this university's Financial Aid Office.
SPECIAL BENEFITS
Veterans' Benefits are available to many veterans who are discharged from the Armed
Forces or active members of the National Guard or Reserves. Additional information may
be obtained by phoning the Veterans Affairs Office at (412) 938-4076.
Vocational Rehabilitation is a service to conserve the working capacity of persons with an
impairment who still have reasonable expectations of becoming employed. Students who
might qualify for vocational rehabilitation aid to attend college should contact their county
Office of Vocational Rehabilitation.
FINANCIAL AID
100
OTHER SOURCES OF FINANCIAL AID
There are also many other avenues from which to obtain aid. These include relatives,
local clubs or organizations, businesses, summer earnings, special scholarships, etc. Your
guidance counselor, local civic leaders or local librarians are of great help in researching
such avenues of financial assistance.
SATISFACTORY ACADEMIC PROGRESS
To be considered for all Title IV student financial aid programs (namely, Pell Grants,
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants, Perkins Loans, Stafford Loans, PLUS Loans,
Supplemental Loans, or the College Work Study Program), the University requires students
to maintain satisfactory academic progress. The academic progress requirements are
composed of two parts:
PART I
The minimum requirements to meet the first part of the University's definition of
satisfactory academic progress for financial aid are as follows:
1. All first-time students are exempt from aid denial due to lack of academic progress for
the first two semesters of attendance at the University. Progress during the first two
semesters, however, does determine eligibility for the subsequent years.
2. Full-time students must earn 24 credits during the Fall and Spring semesters combined.
3. Part-time students must have attempted at least 12 credits before being evaluated. The
number of credits part-time students must earn will be prorated according to their
enrollment status. (For example, a student who schedules 12-16 credits over both
semesters of the academic year must complete 12 credits.)
PART II
In accordance with the University's published requirements to maintain "good academic
standing" (see pages 47 and 57 of this catalog), a student who is placed on academic
probation for having failed to maintain a satisfactory Grade Point Average is also placed on
financial aid probation for one semester. At the end of that semester one of the following
three situations must occur:
FINANCIAL AID
101
Either
(1) The classification of probation is removed when the student achieves the required
minimum Grade Point Average for the class category;
or
(2) The classification of probation is continued if the student achieves a 2.0 Grade Point
Average or better during the probationary term but fails to achieve the minimum
cumulative Grade Point Average for the student's category. In this case, eligibility for
Title IV Federal Aid may be continued;
or
(3) If the student's cumulative Grade Point Average for that semester is below 2.00, that
student is academically dismissed and denied Title IV Federal Aid until the minimum
Grade Point Average for that student' s class category is achieved. A student who is
academically dismissed and therefore denied Title IV Financial Aid may be re-admitted
to the University but must attend without the benefit of Title IV Federal Aid until the
required minimum Grade-Point Average for his/her class category has been achieved.
Academic standing is reviewed following each semester: see page 47 in this catalog.
The University does not award assistance from Title IV programs beyond a maximum
of 5.5 academic years (11 semesters).
FOR SPECIAL GRADES
I (Incomplete): Since credits are not awarded for this grade, until an Incomplete grade is
resolved, a course in which it is received does not count towards fulfilling requirements for
financial aid. If the Incomplete grade is resolved by the beginning of the following semester
of attendance and a passing grade is received, the credits will be counted.
W (Withdrawal) : All categories of Withdrawal earn no credit towards graduation or towards
satisfying the credit requirement listed above.
P (Pass): If this grade is awarded, the credits apply towards graduation and towards
satisfying the credit requirements listed above, but the grade-point average is not affected.
Repeating a Course: The last grade earned is always used in calculating the grade-point
average. If a student repeats a course, the credits are awarded only for the semester in
which it was repeated, not for the first time the course was attempted.
FINANCIAL AID
102
USE OF SUMMER SCHOOL TO MAKE UP DEFICIENCY
A student deficient in credits and/or grade-point average at the end of an academic year
may use the following summer to eliminate the deficiency, but no financial aid is provided
to help defray these summer school costs.
Students who are subject to academic dismissal owing to insufficient grade-point
averages may seek readmission through the dean of that college of the University in which
they are enrolled.
If summer school work is taken in order to improve a grade-point average (and
therefore to become eligible again for financial aid), it must be taken at California
University of Pennsylvania, since transfer grades are not computed into a student's gradepoint average.
Summer school work taken for the purpose of achieving minimum credit requirements
for eligibility for financial aid need not be completed at California University but must be
transferable to California. Before credits earned at another college or university can be
transferred to a student's record at this university, the student must seek and obtain
permission from the appropriate dean of the college of this university.
APPEAL PROCEDURE
If a student feels that an academic deficiency that has led to loss of eligibility for
financial aid is due to extenuating circumstances (such as illness or injury), a written appeal
must be submitted to the Director of Financial Aid which details the situation. the Director
may, if the circumstances warrant, grant a maximum of one semester of financial aid to a
student who does not meet the requirements for academic progress. If the Director denies
the request for special consideration, an appeal may be made to the Vice-President for
Administration and Finance.
REGAINING ELIGIBILITY
A student who has been denied financial assistance for lack of satisfactory academic
progress regains eligibility in the semester following the one in which requirements for
minimum credits for academic progress and/or grade point average have been fulfilled.
FINANCIAL AID
103
REFUND POLICY
Title IV financial aid recipients who withdraw from the University during the refund
period outlined in this catalog may not be entitled to receive their full refund. The portion
of the refund that must be returned to Title IV programs is the lesser of the amount of
assistance received under all Title IV programs other than under the CWS program or the
amount determined according to the following formula:
Title IV Aid
Institutional Refund
X
Total Title IV Aid
(exclusive of CWS Program earnings)
awarded for the payment period
Total Aid
(exclusive of all work earnings)
awarded for the payment period
For the purpose of this formula, an institutional refund is defined as the amount paid for
institutional charges by financial aid and/or cash payments minus the amount retained by the
institution for the portion of the semester that the student was enrolled at the institution.
The portion of the refund allocatable to the Title IV Programs will be restored to the
programs from which the student received aid in the following order: Perkins Loan
Program, GSL Program, PLUS Program, SLS Program, SEOG Program, and Pell Program.
Any portion of the refund restored to the GSL, PLUS, or SLS Programs is returned to the
student's lending institution.
104
DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS
105
THE DMSIONS OF THE
UNIVERSITY
THE DEPARTMENTS
THE CURRICULA
THE COURSES
106
DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS
PROGRAMS AND DEPARTMENTAL COURSE
ABBREVIATIONS
The following departmental and program abbreviations are used to identify courses. If no
department appears in the third column, consult the office of the Vice-president for
Academic Affairs.
CODE PROGRAMS BY DISCIPLINE
DEPARTMENT
ACC
ANT
ART
ATE
BIO
BUS
CAW
CCU
CHE
COM
COP
CPE
Business and Economics
Social Science
Art
Sports Medicine
Biological and Environmental Sciences
Business and Economics
Mathematics and Computer Science
csc
EAS
ECE
ECO
EDE
EDF
EDS
EDU
EET
ENG
ENS
ESP
FIN
FRE
GCT
GEO
GER
HIN
HIS
HON
Accounting
Anthropology
Art
Athletic Training Education
Biology
Business
Computer Assisted Workshop
Co-Curricular Activity
Chemistry
Communication Studies
Cooperative Education
Coaching Certification
Program
Computer Science
Earth Science
(including Geology)
Early Childhood
Economics
Elementary Education
Educational Foundations
Secondary Education
College of Education and Human Services
Electrical Engineering
Technology
English
Environmental Studies
Special Education
Finance
French
Graphic Communications Technology
Geography
German
Harrisburg Internship
History
Honors Program
Physical Science
Communication Studies
Health and Physical Education
Mathematics and Computer Science
Earth Sciences
Elementary Education
Business and Economics
Elementary Education
Educational Studies
Educational Studies
Industry and Technology
English
Biological and Environmental Sciences
Special Education
Business and Economics
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Industry and Technology
Earth Sciences
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Social Science
DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS
107
HPE
HSD
IAR
IND
ITE
LIT
MAT
MGT
MKT
MTE
MUS
NUR
PHI
PHS
PHY
POS
PSN
PSY
PTE
RNA
RUS
soc
sos
sow
SPA
SPN
TED
THE
XCP
XGE
XHS
xss
XUA
Health and Physical Education
Highway Safety and Driver Education
Industrial Arts
Industry
Industrial Technology
Literature
Mathematics
Management
Marketing
Manufacturing Technology
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physical Science
Physics
Political Science
Public School Nursing
Psychology
Petroleum Technology
Registered Nurse Anesthetist
Russian
Sociology
Social Science
Social Work
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Spanish
Technology Education
Theatre
Career Planning
Gerontology
Arts in Human Service
Soviet Studies
Urban Affairs
Health and Physical Education
Health and Physical Education
Industry and Technology
Industry and Technology
Industry and Technology
English
Mathematics and Computer Science
Business and Economics
Business and Economics
Industry and Technology
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physical Science
Physical Science
Social Science
Counselor Education and Services
Psychology
Earth Sciences
Counselor Education and Services
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Social Science
Social Science
Social Work
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Foreign Languages and Cultures
Industry and Technology
Theatre
Academic Development Services
Gerontology
Art, Theatre
Foreign Languages and Cultures
History and Urban Affairs
108
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION
AND HUMAN SERVICES
The College of Education and Human Services is composed of the departments of
Academic Development Services, Counselor Education, Educational Studies, Elementary
Education, Gerontology, Health and Physical Education, Social Work, Special Education,
Speech Pathology, and Sports Medicine. The Departments of Counselor Education,
Educational Studies, Elementary Education, and Special Education, are concerned with
teacher education; the Departments of Academic Development and Services, Gerontology,
Health and Physical Education, Social Work, and Sports Medicine form the Human Services
component of the College. The department of Speech Pathology and Audiology offers an
undergraduate program but it does not lead to teacher certification; certification is offered
only at the graduate level in this department.
Information about these departments and their programs will be found in the next
portion of this catalog (except for Counselor Education, which offers only a graduate
program). The university is accredited by the Commission on Higher Education of the
Middle States Association. The program in Social Work is accredited by the Council on
Social Work Education. The program in Athletic Training, in the department of Sports
Medicine, is accredited by the National Association of Athletic Trainers. The programs in
Teacher Education are accredited by the National Council for the Accreditation of Teacher
Education (NCATE), and certified by the Pennsylvania Department of Education.
A grade-point average of 2. 50 is required for graduation in all teacher education
programs.
For teacher certification, a student must pass the NTE (the National Teachers'
Examination.)
TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAMS
California University of Pennsylvania has a long and distinguished history of preparing
teachers for the schools of the Commonwealth. When you graduate you will join nearly
30,000 teacher education alumni.
The College of Education and Human Services has developed and maintained a
reputation of excellence in the preparation of teachers. Because of its accreditation by
NCATE, and its requirement of the NTE, California's graduates are able to obtain a
teaching certificate in every state in the Union.
If you attend California University as a Teacher Education student you may enroll in
any of the following majors: Comprehensive Special Education, Elementary Education
(Kindergarten to Grade Six), Early Childhood Education (Nursery School to Grade Three),
Technology Education, and Secondary Education. The Secondary Education Curriculum
provides an opportunity to major in Science (Biology, Chemistry, Physics, Earth Science,
General Science, or Environmental Education), English, Communication (English, Speech,
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
109
and Theatre), Mathematics, Modem Foreign Languages (Spanish, French, German), and
Comprehensive Social Science. Certification in Art Education is available through a cooperative program with Carlow College and with Washington. and Jefferson College. (See
the Art Department, page 123, in this catalog.) It is also possible to have a dual major.
For example, some students choose a dual major in Elementary/Special Education or Early
Childhood/Special Education. The College of Education and Human Services also offers
a special program for graduate nurses in the Public School Nursing Program. Dental
Hygienists are also eligible for enrollment in a program leading to a Bachelor of Science
Degree in Education and certification as a Public School Dental Hygienist. The programs
in Gerontology, Athletic Training, Speech Pathology, and Social Work lead to a Bachelor
of Science degree, but not to teacher certification, although it is possible to combine a major
in Athletic Training with any Teacher Certification program.
Upon completion of a Teaching Certification program in the College of Education and
Human Services you will receive a Bachelor of Science Degree and an Instructional I
certificate. All candidates for teaching degrees must also take the NTE. The certificate is
your license to teach in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and is valid for up to six years
of teaching in Pennsylvania whenever they might occur. In order to convert the
Instructional I certificate into a lifetime valid Instructional II certificate you must have three
years of successful teaching experience and a Master's Degree or you must complete six
credits every five years. These credits may be undergraduate, graduate, or in-service credits
or any combination. The only restriction is that these credits must be taken at a four-year
institution.
GENERAL EDUCATION
Each program offered by the College of Education and Human Services is divided into
at least two parts: general education, and area of specializ.ation. In addition, Teacher
Education programs have requirements in Professional Studies. The exact requirements for
each program will be found in the following portion of the catalog.
The College of Education Council has adopted the following objectives for the general
education portion of education programs:
To develop in the prospective teacher:
1. The ability to communicate with adequate skill in the areas of speaking, writing, reading
and listening;
2. Knowledge, attitudes, skills, and understanding in the natural sciences, the social
sciences, technology, and the humanities;
3. The ability to promote better understanding and relationships among individuals and
groups;
and to provide the prospective teacher:
4. opportunities for development of leisure time and healthful living activities.
110
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
General Requirements
All students must achieve competency in English language skills at the level of
Composition 1-11. Teacher Education students must take Oral Communication (COM 100)
and General Psychology (PSY 100). Developmental courses (ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT
099 and EDE 100) are used to calculate grade point average and class standing but do not
count toward graduation (see page 78 of this catalog.)
All students must take courses in the Humanities, the Natural Sciences, and the Social
Sciences. Teacher Education students take courses in Health or Physical Activities.
AREA OF CONCENTRATION
Each of the areas of concentration has a sequence of courses and experiences which
provide the knowledge necessary for professional competence in that particular area, or in
the case of ~her education programs, for certification. In addition the methodology
necessary to deliver that knowledge to children is provided in a variety of ways dependent
upon the specialty area. Each one of the specialty areas in Teacher Education provides
students with a variety of clinical experiences culminating in a full semester of student
teaching experience. See the curricular requirements for each certification program, under
the appropriate department in this catalog.
PROFESSIONAL STUDIES
A carefully planned sequence of six courses required of all education majors provides
them with depth and breadth in the essentials of professional studies. These courses are
Foundations of Education (EDF 100), Educational Psychology (PSY 208), Teaching in a
Multicultural Society (EDU 210), Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (ESP 340),
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304), and Computers for Teachers (EDF 301).
Three additional courses give further knowledge and experience to those in secondary
education curricula: Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300), Introduction to
Educational Requirements (EDS 430), and Developmental Reading in the Secondary School
(EDS 465). Equivalent requirements are made in the Elementary/Early Childhood, Special
Education, and Technology Education curricula. Requirements in oral and written
communication and these courses assist in development of critical skills in communication
and problem-solving. The models are soundly supported by comprehensive knowledge
bases. All of these culminate in the semester-long student teaching experience where the
various knowledge of social, historical, technological, legal, educational, and cultural topics
is brought together in a manner that is both knowledge-based and experientially grounded,
tested, and applied. Students are thus prepared not only for imparting the necessary
knowledge but also for dealing with important matters of educational policy, school law,
diverse cultural populations, and students with special needs.
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
111
ADMISSION TO TEACHEREDUCATION
Admission to the university is not a guarantee that a student majoring in education will
be permitted to be admitted to Teacher Education, complete the program (which includes
student teaching), and receive a teaching certificate. The College of Education and Human
Services has established standards that all education majors must meet in order to complete
the Teacher Education Program. Some of these standards are embodied in the Admission
to Teacher Education Program, which must be initiated by the candidate during the semester
following the completion of 64 credits. In order to be admitted, a candidate must meet the
following requirements:
1. Pass the General Knowledge and Communication Skills subtests of the NTE. The test
must be taken when the student has completed 48 credits.
2. Obtain a minimum grade point average of 2.50 in both the major area/area of
specialization as well as in the overall grade point average. Transfer credits should be
used in calculating the 2.50 in the major only.
3. Successfully complete pre-student teaching field experiences in:
(a) Major area of speciali:zation;
(b) Foundations of Education (EDF 100);
(c) Educational Psychology (PSY 208).
4. Pass the College of Education and Human Service's speech and hearing test.
5. Obtain approval from the departmental advisor and major department chairperson (or
designee). Dual majors and secondary education majors must have completed approval
forms from advisors in both departments.
6. Complete at least 64 credits (including transfer credits) with a minimum of 12 credits
completed in the major field at California University.
7. Obtain a personal interview and a positive recommendation from a member of the
Committee for Admission to Teacher Education.
8. Obtain final approval from the Committee for Admission to Teacher Education.
Admission to Teacher Education is a prerequisite to application for Student Teaching.
It should be emphasized that the admission to Teacher Education Program, in total, is
also designed for the student's growth in educational, experiential, and self-evaluative ways.
PROFESSIONAL FIELD EXPERIE~CES
Educators have observed that those who enter the teaching profession with a wide
variety of contacts with young children, adolescents, and adults usually become superior
teachers. Many of those who fail as teachers or remain mediocre throughout their careers
lack such experiences. A program of Professional Field Experiences has been devised by
each curriculum department. In some cases, these experiences include not only school
activities but also activities in community agencies. Professional Field Experiences include
all those contacts with children, youth, and adults (through observation, participation and
teaching) that make a direct contribution to the understanding of individuals and their
guidance in the teaching-learning process.
112
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
California University students are placed in exemplary clinical and field experiences,
devised and supervised by faculty in their appropriate curricula, in a diversity of educational
sites and experiences. Placement is first effected in the freshman courses Foundations of
Education and Educational Psychology. The second tier of clinical experiences is embedded
in subject-related courses. These vary depending on the curriculum; for example, in the
Elementary curriculum students enroll in Field Experience in Early Childhood, and
Observation and Conference, both three-credit courses. In Technology Education students
enroll in Technology/Society Education, which contains a field experience. All Secondary
Education majors enroll in Problems of Secondary Education, which requires a Thursdayfree schedule devoted to field experience. Special Education courses are four-credit courses
with a field experience attached to each course. The third tier is student teaching.
University students are supervised closely by a professor from California and a cooperating
teacher in the schools, all of whose duties are specified and contractually mandated; and the
student teacher's work is regularly assessed as to the soundness and topicality of teaching
procedures, professional conduct, and subject matter content. Gradually, student teachers
are given increased responsibility for professional assignments, so that by the time of
successful completion of the experience they are prepared to assume independent classroom
authority.
Field-based and clinical experiences are systematically selected to provide opportunities
for education students to observe, plan, and practice in a variety of settings appropriate to
the professional roles for which they are being prepared. Students participate in field-based
and/or clinical experiences with culturally diverse and exceptional populations. These fieldbased and clinical experiences are sequenced to enable education students to develop the
skills that will enable them to assume full responsibility for classroom instruction or other
professional roles in schools.
GRADUATION IN GENERAL STUDIES
Candidates who do not meet the standards for admission to Teacher Education on initial
application have two semesters in which to correct deficiencies and obtain admission. If still
not approved, they may elect to transfer to another curriculum or, with special permission
of the Dean, take 12 credits in lieu of student teaching and graduate without teacher
certification.
The latter option (waiver of student teaching and teaching certification) is also available
to students who, for exceptional reasons, change their plans about career teaching but wish
to complete their baccalaureate programs. The student must initiate, in writing and in
person, a reasoned request to do so to the Director of Student Teaching. Such requests must
be reviewed and approved by the Director of Student Teaching. If the waiver request and
course credits in lieu of student teaching credits are approved, the student may earn a degree
without teaching certification. (A notation to this effect is entered on the student's
transcript.)
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
113
STUDENT TEACHING
Student te.aching, a major professional laboratory experience, is conducted under the
supervision of the Director of Student Teaching.
California University has four
undergraduate te.aching programs: Elementary Education, Secondary Education, Technology
Education, and Special Education. Students who are candidates for certification are required
to earn twelve semester hours of credit in student teaching. However, student te.aching is
a competency based program and may continue beyond one semester. Candidates are
certified to te.ach only if they demonstrate ability to teach effectively. Teaching competency
is determined by the Director of Student Teaching, the university supervisor, and the
cooperating teacher or teachers. The student teacher is also required to take a practicum
while student teaching. Student teachers are not generally permitted to enroll in other
courses during the student teaching experience.
Student te.aching is normally conducted in selected public schools located in the service
area of the university. Alternative programs on an Indian reservation or Latino schools in
the American Southwest and overseas experiences are also available. Interested students
should discuss this possibility with the Director of Student Teaching in the February
preceding student teaching.
The institutional philosophy regarding student te.aching is to prepare students adequately
to assume their professional responsibilities in the teaching profession in a democratic
society and to develop their appreciation of their need for a mastery of the professional
knowledge and skill essential to all teaching and special proficiencies in their area of
speciali:zation. Student teaching is designed to provide a climate wherein the student may
exhibit creativity and the ability to make critical judgments based upon knowledge and
reason.
Applications for student teaching may be secured at the Dean's Office and must be
submitted in February for the next academic year.
Before students may be assigned to this vital part of the Teacher Education Curriculum,
they must:
a. be admitted to Teacher Education;
b. obtain departmental approval as having satisfactorily completed the required
preparatory work;
c. maintain a quality point average of 2.50 in the speciali:zation and overall;
d. be admitted to Student Teaching.
Transfer students are not assigned to student teaching until they have completed at least
24 credits of work in this university. Graduates of other colleges and universities must meet
the requirements of admission to Teacher Education before being assigned to student
teaching.
STUDENT TEACHING FOR EXPERIENCED TEACHERS
Teachers who have had one or more years of teaching experience may be permitted to
complete the student teaching requirement by special arrangement after consultation with the
114
COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
Director of Student Teaching. The Director may allow the student to fulfill the student
teaching requirement for the Bachelor of Science degree in Education by making a substitute
requirement in keeping with the needs of the individual student.
APPEAL PROCEDURE FOR CERTIDCATION STUDENTS
Students appealing decisions regarding teaching certification should contact the Dean of
Education and Human Services to discuss their concern. If accord is not reached at this
level, the student may appeal to the Vice President for Academic Affairs.
The final source of appeal is with the Certification Appeals Committee, Department of
Education, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. This step should be taken only if there is no
possibility for a resolution at an earlier stage, and only if the student is convinced that
arbitrary and/or capricious standards are applied.
U.S. CITIZENSIDP - A REQUIREMENT
FOR TEACHER CERTIDCATION IN PENNSYLVANIA
No permanent certificate may be granted to any person who is not a citizen of the
United States and no provisional certificate may be granted to any person who is not a
citizen or who has not declared in writing to the Department of Education the intention of
becoming a citizen.
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
115
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
What is the College of Liberal Arts? What does Liberal Arts mean? What is a Liberal
Arts student? Distinctive to the College and those who participate in it is the educational
orientation. Common to definitions of the Liberal Arts are a number of characteristics
which do establish a universal understanding: a broad and interdisciplinary course of study,
a concern with human values and social issues, the ability to think analytically and to
communicate effectively, and a global awareness and appreciation of people, places and their
history. The goal of a liberal education, therefore, is to provide the student with
opportunities to learn not only information about the world but to acquire basic analytic and
communicative skills. Information and skills have no value in themselves; they are valuable
insofar as they enrich life, by giving it greater meaning and by making it possible for
individuals to adapt to changing employment, personal, and social demands. In essence a
liberal arts education stresses the transferability of knowledge and skills from one
circumstance or situation to another. The emphasis is not on fitting the individual to a job,
but ensuring that the individual can meaningfully adapt to new personal and professional
situations. In this statement the College closely aligns itself with the position found in
Priorities for Pennsylvania's State System of Higher Education During the 1990's.
The College of Liberal Arts incorporates the departments of Art, Communication
Studies, Earth Science, English, Foreign Languages and Cultures, History and Urban
Studies, Music, Philosophy, Psychology, Social Science, and Theatre. Those departments,
and the Department of Business and Economics, collectively offer forty-two programs of
study. (See the list on page 10 above). Course distribution sheets are available in the
College Office; requirements are listed in the description of each program below for each
program. These sheets specify what courses are required and how courses apply toward
graduation.
Just as there is no Liberal Arts Department, there is no Liberal Arts major. The Liberal
Arts philosophy informs all programs of study within the College. Of these, some are
highly structured while others are flexible. Within the General Education course of study,
students are encouraged to explore a wide variety of course offerings as one approach in
determining an appropriate major. A major, for those who have not done so previously, is
to be selected by the end of the third regular semester or upon the completion of 45 credit
hours. This does not prohibit students from changing their major, provided they complete
the necessary form in the College Office. It does prevent students from taking courses that
could result in the failure to graduate within eight regular semesters of study.
Students who do not want a major limited to a single discipline have two degree
program options: the Humanities and Fine Arts Major, and the Social Sciences Major.
These reflect two thematic area studies. The curriculum in each is flexible and permits
interdisciplinary study. The Humanities and Fine Arts majors are advised by faculty
members in the Music Department. The Social Science majors are advised by faculty
members in the Social Science Department.
In keeping with this educational position, all students participate in the General
Education course of study. This program, while permitting students a broad selection of
116
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
specific courses, mandates that courses be taken in three categories: Humanities (one of
which must be in the Fine or Performing Arts-Art, Music, or Theatre), Natural Sciences
(one of which must be a laboratory course), and Social Sciences. A list of courses that will
satisfy these requirements can be obtained in the College Office.
The General Education core consists of 60 credits including Composition I (ENG 101)
and Composition II (ENG 102). The area of concentration contains 68 credits. In neither
section do developmental courses (ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100) count
toward graduation (see page 78 of this catalog).
English language competency is essential to the exchange of ideas, the successful
completion of course work and entrance into all areas of future employment. To insure that
students will develop their language skills and will have the means to meet these
expectations, the university requires that all entering students take the university's English
placement examination. Initial course placement is based on the results of that examination.
Students who do not pass the examination are required to take English Language Skills
(ENG 100). Since a great deal of college performance incorporates the ability to express
ideas clearly, all students are encouraged to take the two required composition courses
during their first semesters at California University. Furthermore, all students majoring in
any of the Liberal Arts are required to take three writing component courses. Not all
courses designated as writing component courses are English courses. A list of approved
courses can be secured from the College Office.
The College supports, implements, and coordinates a number of activities that enhance
its curricular program. It supports a Writing Center in Dixon 120. The Center, although
committed to assisting students who have English language deficiencies, provides assistance
to any faculty and student who wants to write better and more creatively. Working in both
close proximity and intention, the Word Processing Laboratory provides assistance to
persons wanting to create and edit papers on microcomputers. The Lab in room 110 of
Dixon Hall and a computer classroom also are used to advance experimental teaching
strategies in English.
The School Psychology Clinic, Room 311 of the Morgan Learning Research Center,
also is supported by the College. The Clinic in tum serves the campus community by
permitting any student to receive free testing. Information about what tests are offered and
when they are given can be obtained at the Psychology Department Office, Room 319, LRC.
The College Office in Noss 103 coordinates activities of common interest across the
College. One important concern shared by the College is the need to relate classroom
instruction with experiences outside the classroom, experiences which can assist the student
in determining career directions, including graduate education. Accordingly, the College
supports and implements field experiences in such areas as Archaeology and the Earth
Sciences. Equally important are the internship opportunities it works with departments to
implement.
What is an internship? For the greatest clarity of understanding, perhaps it would be
helpful to ask what an internship is not. It is not cooperative education, individualiud
instruction, nor a practicum. Cooperative education is paid ~mployment and receives no
academic credit. It, however, does give students the opportunity to relate their education
to career planning and preparation. Cooperative Education is handled through the Career
COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
117
Planning and Placement Office on campus. A practicum, a course in which skills are
developed by performing prescribed tasks, receives academic credit and is under the
direction of a faculty member. No outside agency or supervisor is involved. Finally,
individualized instruction designates a special arrangement by a student with a faculty
member and the Dean to take a course not offered. For permission to be considered the
following conditions must be present: The course is a regular University catalog course and
the course is not scheduled to be taught in the semester in which it is desired or needed.
Applications are available in the College Office. In contrast to all of these, an internship
is a regularly offered course, is usually taken at an off-campus location and is under the dual
supervision of an agency as well as a faculty supervisor. Internships are not job training
programs, and students are not paid accordingly, although some internships provide
compensation for expenses incurred by the student. Guidelines and applications for
internships are to be secured from the office of the sponsoring department.
Internships are an integral part of the educational program of the College wherever and
whenever possible. Experience of students in settings where their academic knowledge and
skills can be integrated is essential if education is to be perceived as relevant to daily living
and to promote the idea that education is a continuous process, developed but not limited to
the classroom.
The College Office provides a number of student services. Among them are the review
of a student's progress toward graduation and graduation clearance; transfer credit
evaluation; consideration of requests for required course substitution approval; permission
to take courses at other institutions for transfer to California University, including courses
at schools outside the United States; the review of applications for readmission, and the
processing for changes of academic major requests. Students who have questions with
regard to College policies and procedures should contact the College Office, Noss 103.
118
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
The College of Science and Technology includes the academic departments of Biological
and Environmental Sciences, Business and Economics, Industry and Technology,
Mathematics and Computer Science, Military Science, Nursing, and Physical Science. The
College offers Associate and Bachelor's degree programs designed to prepare students to
meet present and future requirements of specific professions.
The objective of the Baccalaureate Degree programs of the College of Science and
Technology is to prepare men and women for responsible positions in business, government,
industry, and other complex organizations. As well, several of the college programs prepare
students to undertake further study in graduate and professional school. Each curriculum
includes both a general education component and a technical education component. The
curricula are divided this way so that students will receive a well-rounded education and so
that breadth of knowledge will increase their usefulness as professional employees and as
citizens in the community.
The General Education program for all four-year curricula of the College of Science and
Technology provides the foundation for the students' liberal education. All students,
regardless of major, are required to complete this portion of their program. The number
of credits in General Education varies from program to program. Depending upon the
specific curriculum, a student will be required to pursue one of two General Education
course sequences. The first general education course sequence has a required component
of 6-18 credits in skill areas, i.e., mathematics, writing, and speaking, and a common core
of thirty credits divided in the following manner:
Humanities Electives
6 credits
Social Science Electives
6 credits
Natural Science Electives
6 credits
Free Electives
12 credits
The only restrictions on courses students may select to fulfill these requirements are as
follows:
Basic Mathematics (MAT 098), Introduction to Algebra (MAT 099), English Language
Skills (ENG 100), and Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills (EDE 100) are developmental
courses and are not counted as satisfying any of the General Education requirements or
towards graduation, although the grades earned in those courses are computed into the grade
point average and the credits are used to determine class standing (see page 78).
Students are not permitted to select courses in the Humanities, Social Sciences, and
Natural Science areas from a discipline in which their program requires two or more courses
from that discipline. Exceptions to this policy are:
English and Literature:
Only general survey and literature
courses are permitted in the Humanities
area.
Communication Studies:
Only non-performance based courses are
permitted in the Humanities area.
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
119
Students must fulfill their requirements in the Humanities, Social Sciences, and Natural
Sciences by taking courses in two different disciplines within each area. The only exception
to this policy is: A student can take two sequential foreign language classes to satisfy the
Humanities electives requirement.
The second General Education course sequence is the same as prescribed by the College
of Liberal Arts. It consists of 6 credits of English Composition, 12 credits each in
Humanities, Natural Sciences and Social Sciences and 18 credits in free electives. In the
areas of Humanities, Natural Sciences and Social Sciences, electives must be selected from
at least three different disciplines. One of the electives in Humanities must be in Fine Arts.
The required General Education sequence for each curriculum is outlined in the appropriate
program section.
In the major area of concentration each Science and Technology curriculum includes the
necessary technical, scientific, and support courses to provide the basis for advanced study
in a professional area. Classroom theory is frequently supplemented by laboratory and
workshop experiences where the interrelationship between general principles and application
is emphasized. Advanced study in each discipline is emphasized during the junior and
senior years.
Additionally, several programs provide students with opportunities to
participate in either an internship in business or industry or a clinical year of study in a
hospital setting where the students' educational experiences are utilized in the workplace.
120
COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
SCHOOL OF GRADUATE STUDIES
AND RESEARCH
The School of Graduate Studies and Research at California University of Pennsylvania
was initiated in 1961. Presently, there are twenty-eight academic majors within the school
leading to either the Master of Education, Master of Arts, or Master of Science degrees.
In addition, there are state-accredited supervision certificates offered beyond the master's
degree, in such areas as Industrial Artsfl'echnology Education and Reading. Over the past
twenty-five years, students completing master's degrees at this institution have enjoyed
success in pursuing doctoral degrees in various professions at reputable graduate schools
throughout the United States.
Many academic departments offer courses within their upper-division classes that can
be taken by academically qualified undergraduates as well as graduate students.
Courses offerings of the School of Graduate Studies and Research are not listed in this
catalog. Information and schedules may be obtained by writing or calling the Graduate
School at (412) 938-4187.
DEPARTMENT OF ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT SERVICES
121
DEPARTMENT OF ACADEMIC DEVEWPMENT SERVICES
Assistant Professor Geraldine M. Jones, chair. Professors Alton N. Powe, Melvin J. Sally;
Associate Professors Joanne Raleigh, and Dean L. Wahl; Assistant Professors Carolyn
Jones, JoAnn Rodriguez-Naeser.
The Department of Academic Development Services helps students adjust to and cope
effectively with academic and related non-academic challenges. Personal assistance is
provided to promote success. Academic advisement and instruction, tutoring, and guidance
give students opportunities to develop the motivation and skills needed for achievement of
their educational goals. Services are provided to the entire student population; however,
efforts are primarily intended for students whose educational or economic background makes.
it difficult for them to complete a college degree program.
Help is provided by both professional staff and student assistants in the following two
areas.
Tutorial and Instructional Services: Tutors provide assistance with courses in most
academic areas. They review lecture notes, check and review textbook and other course
materials, and teach course related vocabulary words. A three-credit course entitled
Reading, Study and Listening Skills (EDE 100) is offered to incoming freshmen.
Guidance Services: Counselors conduct initial interviews with each student; provide
an orientation for all new students; help students to schedule and register; monitor each
student's academic progress; and provide students with information concerning academic
policy, procedures, and practices. Academic advisement and vocational guidance are also
provided. Students are encouraged to discuss personal problems with counselors. All
discussions are treated confidentially. In many cases, students are referred to one of the
several other student services offices for additional assistance.
The Department of Academic Development Services is located in Noss Annex. Office
hours are from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Anyone desiring services
or information is encouraged to stop at the office or call 938-4230.
The Department of Academic Development Services offers one course, Career
Planning:
XCP 194: CAREER PLANNING. A course designed to help individuals integrate educational and personal
resources needed for employment and career success. Topics include self-evaluation, decision-making, resume
development, interview techniques, and overall career strategies. (1 er.)
DEPARTMENT OF ART
122
DEPARTMENT OF ART
Assistant Professor Richard H. Grinstead, Chair. Associate Professor Raymond E.
Dunlevy; Assistant Professors Leslie A. Parkinson, Richard Miecmikowski, Philip E.
Schaltenbrand; Instructor David Olson
PURPOSE
The study of artistic expression is a study of the development of art forms such as
sculpture and painting; the study of technique, that is, the use of color, design, and
perspective to achieve the artist's objectives; and a retrospective on what a culture and
society has seen, valued, and understood about its place in the world order. Art is a product
of human creativity, a manifestation of the human spirit and meaning. The study of art is
included in a liberal education because it informs students about the universal search for
meaning and meaningful expression, about their past, and about how each person learns to
move from a literal and concrete level of understanding to a more symbolic one.
PROGRAMS
The Art major can take (1) a general Art major or (2) an Art Certification program for
teaching in either a primary or a secondary school.
The Art program is very flexible. It directs students into various areas of art, namely
art history, introductory art classes, and a series of studio courses in one of the following
areas: drawing, painting, sculpture, weaving, ceramics, and printmaking. An art internship
can assist students in developing professional relationships and in applying their classroom
learning in professional settings. The program of study prepares students to enter graduate
school as well as to pursue careers in professions utilizing art.
Programs with the Art Institute of Pittsburgh
The university also has an agreement with the Art Institute of Pittsburgh which permits
a graduate of the Institute's two-year program to receive sixty credit hours toward a
Bachelor of Arts degree from California University. A second agreement between the
schools permits California University students to take courses during their junior year in
visual communication at the Institute and receive up to thirty credits in transfer if they
complete one year of full-time course work there.
The junior year program with the Art Institute permits students to take courses not
available at California University, specifically in the area of visual communication. This
course of study prepares students for positions in commercial art - for example,
advertising, publishing and corporate communication. Students acquire knowledge and
experience in preparing art and layouts for reproduction.
DEPARTMENT OF ART
123
Teacher Certification Program
The certification program, which prepares art teachers for both primary and secondary
schools, is undertaken in conjunction with area colleges since California University of
Pennsylvania does not confer certification in art. Art courses are taken at California
University. Art Education and student teaching courses (and, in one case an Art history
course) are taken through Carlow College or Washington and Jefferson College; but the
student receives the degree of B.A. in Art from California University of Pennsylvania.
At Carlow College the student must complete Secondary Art Methods and Materials
(AE 327), Elementary Art Student Teaching (AE 409), Secondary Art Student Teaching (AE
410). AE 327 will be billed at current California University credit cost plus the usual studio
fees. The student teaching courses will be billed at current Carlow tuition and fees for fulltime Carlow students.
At Washington and Jefferson College the student must complete Art of the Americas
(Art 205), Principles of Art Education (Art 400), and Student Teaching (Ed 407). Students
will be billed though Washington and Jefferson for these courses at evening/summer school
rates.
CAREERS
Students can become professional artists in their area of specialization, although most
will need to undertake graduate education if they are to be successful professionals.
Commercial art, in advertising and in broadcast media, continues to be a major employer
of Art students. Schools offer teaching positions for art educators who are certified and who
have passed the NTE. Graduates with studio art training have opportunities to work in
various museum settings, in art galleries and in interior decorating establishments. They
also can seek positions in design departments and as art directors in large corporations.
Artists can use their talents in conjunction with other areas of specialty, such as Biology,
History, and Archaeology. Artists can be illustrators in these areas.
Finally artists work in collaboration with persons in other disciplines or they
personally undertake to link their study of art with another discipline. There are many, for
example, scientific drawing, medical art being one interdisciplinary field; the utilization of
art in therapy, for persons interested in the area of Psychology and Art; and the linkage of
art, archaeology, and history, namely in the recording of artifacts and in reconstructive
work.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credit, of Humanities; 12 credit, of Natural
Sciences; 12 credit, of Social Sciences; 18 credit, of electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Art History I (ART 102); Art History II (ART 103); Art History m (ART
(104); Drawing I (ART 110); Fiber Arts (ART 112); Ceramics I (ART 113); Painting I (ART 116); Printmaking
I (ART 117); Sculpture I (ART 118); Design 2-D (ART 119); Drawing D (ART 210); required 45 credit, and
124
DEPARTMENT OF ART
Design 3-D (ART 120); 12 credits in a studio (non-concentration). Studio Concentration:12 credita. Related
Courses: 11 credits.
or
Options with the Art lmtitute Pittsburah: (A) Aa many as 60 credit& may be transferred by graduate,
of the Art Institute to the Bachelor' s degree at California . (B) California University junior-year atudenta may take
courses at the Art Institute totalling as many as 30 credits.
BACHELOR OF ARTS WITH TEACHER CERTIFICATION IN ART (K-12)
Curriculum:
{A) General Education: CompositionI-D (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credit& of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences.
(B) Professional Specialization: At California : Foundations of Education (EDF 100), Introduction to
Educational Media (EDF 304), Educational Testing and Measurement (EDS 430) .
At Carlow College: Secondary Art Methods and Materials (AE 327), Elementary Art Student Teaching (AE
409) , Secondary Art Student Teaching (AE 410) .
At Washington and Jefferson College: Art of the Americas (Art 205), Principles of Art Education (Art 400),
and Student Teaching (Ed 407).
{C) Area
Concentration: Major courses 27 credits. Design I (ART 105); Art Appreciation (ART 106);
Drawing I (ART 110); Design 2-D (ART 119); and Design 3-D (ART 120); 12 credits in a atudio concentration,
beyond the introductory course and chosen in consultation with a faculty advisor; 12 additional credits in Art:
Ceramics I (ART 113); Painting I (ART 116); Sculpture I (ART 118); Printmaking (ART 117); 15 credit& of
Humanities electives, including Weaving (ART 114) or Jewelry (ART 255) or Stained Glau (ART 115); Art
History I (ART 102); Art History D (ART 103); and 14 credits of electives including course ■ required by college
selected for accreditation.
or
Pt111rsyl~a1"a CtrtifkaJio,r requires a sallefactory score
o,r
tht NTE.
ART COURSES
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
+ART 102 . ART HISTORY I: PREHISTORIC TO GOTHIC . A study of art from prehistoric man to and
including the art of the Middle Ages . This course will relate artistic achievements with religious , social, political,
and philosophical attitudes of the times. (3 crs .) S
+ART 103. ART HISTORY D: RENAISSANCE TO BAROQUE. A study of Western Art specifically dealing
with the Renaissance and the Baroque art of Europe. This course will relate how the social, religious, political,
and philosophical attitudes influenced artistic productions. (3 crs.) F
+ART 104 . ART HISTORY ID: ROMANTICISM, CONTEMPORARY. A study of the art of the modem world
beginning with Neoclauicism and Romanticiam and continuing through the Twentieth Century. Social force, that
affect artistic expreuion are considered. (3 crs.)F
+ ART 105 . DESIGN I: An examination of elements and principles used in visual composition. The atudent use,
a variety of media to solve problems in the theory and practice of art fundamentals. (3 crs .)
DEPARTMENT OF ART
125
+ ART 106. ART APPRECIATION. An introduction to the major movements in art which helped ahape welllcm
civilization. Thia course is a survey of hiatorical and contemponry approaches to painting, aculpture and
architecture. (3 era.) F S
+ART 110. DRAWING I. A beginning course in the development of dnwing akilla and technique1atre11ing line,
contour and value studies, and the study of linear and areal perspective. The course atresses rendering techniques
and the visual 1kil11 necessary for students to dnw what they see. F S
ART 112. FIBER ARTS. The course ia an introduction to the world of fiber art. Emphaaia ia on explontion
of both tnditional and contemponry fiber cnft, from tnditional tapeatry and aculptunl basketry to functional
clothing and whimsical toys. The student will work with basketry, weaving, batiks, stitchery, quilting, and
applique to create exciting, imaginative art. (3 era.) F S
+ ART 113. CERAMICS I. An introductory explontion of clay through hand building techniques and the potter'•
wheel. Students will examine the various forms and functions of the cenrnic vessel. The course will focua on
forming processes and the glazing and firing of pieces made in the atudio. (3 era.) F S
+ ART 114. WEAVING . Thia ia a basic, introductory course in four-hameaa weaving . The atudent ia instructed
in the method of determining warp length and width, the threading of both table and floor looms and varioua loomcontrolled and hand-manipulated weaves. Both tnditional and contemponry pieces can be designed and both
functional and non-functional work can be executed. (3 era.) S
+ART 115. STAINED GLASS I. An introduction to the very basic ■ of glasa cutting, finiahing, and aoldering
technique,. Emphasis ia on the copper foil method of Louis Tiffany; however, the atudent may alao choose to work
with earning, etching, sand blaating on glass, and beveling in the construction of their projects. (3 era.) F
+ ART 116. PAINTING I. An introduction to the fundamentals of painting. Emphasis ia placed on fundamental
techniques including the study of light and shadow, color intensity control and projection and recession of objects
in space. Work and exercises are done primarily in oil paints. Work in watercolor or acrylic may be done with
prior approval of the instructor. (3 era.) F S
+ART 117. PRINTMAKING I. The course is designed to develop intereat and techniques in the making of
woodcuts, lithognphs, etchings, engnvings, serignphs, monoprints, and photo print processes. (3 era.) F S
+ ART 118. SCULPTURE I. Introduction to the basic language, elements, media, tools, techniques and principles
of organization used in sculpture. The basic techniques of manipulation, subtnction, subatitution and addition will
be covered, involving different media and tools. (3 era.) F S
+ART 119. DESIGN 2-D. An examination of elements and principles used in two-dimensional visual
composition. The student uses a variety of media to solve problems in the theory and pnctice of art fundamentals.
(3 era.) F
+ART 120. DESIGN 3-D. An examination of the elements and principles used in three-dimensional visual
composition. These include all the elements and principles used in two-dimensional design, as well as the concepts
of mass and volume . (3 crs.) S
ART 210. ORAWING ll. Continued development of dnwing skills and techniques ■tressing line, contour and
value studies. The course stresses interpretative dnwing in both tnditional media and in computer aided dnwing
and design. (3 era.) S
+ ART 211. COMMUNICATION DESIGN. This atudio course provides hands-on experience using design tools
and techniques to create pictorial symbols which communicate ideas in a universal language. The course also
explores the hiatory of pictures and symbols used as language . (3 era.) F
126
DEPARTMENT OF ART
ART 216. STAINED GLASS Il. This course provides further historical facts concerning stained glass and the
influence of contemporary design and construction on stained glass compositions. The course includes an
introduction to kiln firing, sandblasting, acid etching, beveling, and the application of these methods in glass
construction. (3 en.)
ART 232 . MICROCOMPUTER AS A TOOL FOR THE ARTIST. This course introduces the art major to
microcomputen and appropriate hardware/software for art production in various media. It is a studio course in
which worb of art are developed with the aid of the computer. Art majon must have completed at least two
studio requirements prior to taking this course. (3 en.) S
ART 234. BASIC PHOTOGRAPHIC METHODS FOR ARTISTS. A course that teaches basic information and
skills necessary to produce graphics presentations on • computer as well as the transfer of those presentations onto
video tape, so as to produce video slide showa, video titling, simple character generation and animation.(3 en.)
+ ART 245. TAPESTRY WEAYING. An introduction to both traditional and contemporary tapestry techniques.
Emphasis is on imaginative use of traditional techniques with each student expected to design and execute creative,
well-crafted woven pieces in a variety of unusual material. (3 en.)
+ ART 255 . JEWELRY I. An introduction to basic metal shaping and stone setting, using techniques in cutting,
shaping, piercing, fusing, and appliqueing wire and lheet silver, bra11 and copper into contemporary jewelry
forms. (3 en.) F
+ ART 260. WATERCOLOR I. Basic watercolor techniques. Emphasis is placed on both transparent and opaque
water colon. (3 en.) S
+ART 275. FABRICS. An introduction to the various 111rfacc treatments of common and unusual materials.
Emphasis is on contemporary applications of traditional techniques, 111ch as stitchery, fabric painting, silk screen,
stenciling, tic dye and batik, with the student expected to design both imaginative and innovative fabric art forms.
(3 en.) F S
ART 193, 293, 393, 493 . CERAMIC STUDIOS. Advanced courses in ceramic skills and techniques on the
potter' , wheel and in-hand forming methods. Considerable emphasis will be placed on glazing and firing .
Prerequisite: Ceramics I. (3 en.) F S
ART 299, 399, 425, 499 . FIBER ARTS STUDIOS . The fiber studio concentration explores a large spectrum of
contemporary textile techniques. Areas for investigation include, for example, 111rface and textile painting, and
the design of stuffed sculpture and fabric toys . Emphasis is, at all times, on innovative design, imagination in the
utilization of technique and material, as well as general craftsmanship . (3 en.) F S
ART 196,296,396,496 . PAINTING STUDIOS. A series of painting studios develop proficiencies in pamtmg
techniques, rendering skills, and the visual analysis of forms. Students explore a variety of painting methods,
111bjccts and themes. The goal is for each student to achieve a unique approach to form and content. (3 en.) F
s
ART 197, 297, 397, 497. PRINTMAKING STUDIOS. The studio sequence enables students to punue
printmaking technique, in depth. Students will also be expected to demonstrate critical thinking and analysis of
materials and the use of 111ch in the various media. (3 en.) F S
ART 198, 298,398,498 . SCULPTURE STUDIOS. The studio courses enable students to experiment with many
types of materials which can be used as sculpture. They will be expected to impose on themselves problems which
demonstrate critical thinking and analysis of materials. Prerequisite: Sculpture I. (3 en.) F S
ART 303. SECONDARY ART METHODS . A study of the development of secondary art students, as well as
the study of materials and their utilization in the development of a secondary art program. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF ART
127
ART 329. ART INTERNSHIP. Supervised experience providing the specific technical skills used in the art world
outside the classroom and studio - e.g., mounting exhibits, techniques of art restoration, graphic arts production
techniques, and promoting arts and cultural events. 0/ A credit)
ART 337. FOLK POTTERY OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA. An introduction to the history and
process of salt glazed stoneware, as it developed and functioned in Southwestern Pennsylvania during the second
half of the nineteenth century. (3 crs.)
ART 355. JEWELRY Il. An advanced course in fabrication with additional work in enameling and casting .
Emphasis is on imaginative design, craftsmanship and evident skill in each technique. (3 crs.)
ART 360. WATERCOLOR Il. A course designed to further the study of transparency and opaque watercolor.
Includes techniques in gouache, egg tempera, and fresco painting. (3 crs.)
ART 361. VIDEO ART/DESIGN. Provides advanced information and skills necessary to produce graphics
presentations on a computer and transfer those presentations onto video tape . Production of such products as video
slide shows, video titling, simple character generation and animation of video screens. (3 crs.)
ART 460. SELECTED TOPICS . This course provides material not covered in regular art studios or art history
classes. It affords faculty and students the opportunity to explore new ideas and techniques on selected topics . (3
crs.)
EDE 205 . ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES . A course required for Elementary Education majors.
Emphasis is placed on the nature of creativity and its value in the development of the whole child. Creativity is
given personal meaning through the exploration of art materials and techniques. The role of the classroom teacher
teachiui art is established. (3 crs.) F S
128
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
DEPARTMENT OF BIOWGICAL
AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
BIOLOGY (BIO)
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES (ENS)
MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
MORTUARY SCIENCE
PREPROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY
WASIIlNGTON HOSPITAL SCHOOL OF NURSING
Professor William G. Kimmel, chair; Associate Professor Edwin M. Zuchelkowski,
assistant chair. Professors Jan W. Balling, Foster E. Billheimer, Thomas P. Buckelew,
Raymond A. Catalano, William E. Gabor, Barry B. Hunter, Ewald C. Krueger, C. Allan
Miller, Thomas C. Moon, Jeanette Mullins, Marc A. Sylvester; Associate Professor
Mitchell M. Bailey; Assistant Professors David F. Boehm, John P. Carroll, Brian K.
Paulson.
The Department of Biological and Environmental Sciences is housed in a modem,
multi-million dollar four-story building, equipped with the latest in biological and
environmental science instruments. Specialized areas include both scanning and transmission
electron microscope facilities, an animal room, greenhouse, herbarium, plant growth
facilities, radiation laboratory, museum and extensive photographic facilities. Teaching
laboratories are equipped for the study of anatomy, botany, cytology, ecology, embryology,
entomology, genetics, microbiology, parasitology, physiology, radiation biology, zoology,
mammalogy, water pollution biology, ichthyology, animal behavior, biometry, ethology,
environmental toxicology, environmental physiology, solid waste management, air quality
monitoring, dendrology, ornithology and wildlife biology.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BIOLOGY
This is an intensive scientific curriculum which prepares students for graduate work
in the biological sciences and career work in many biologically related areas. The major
emphasis of this program is to provide the student with a broad scientific core of courses,
including studies in chemistry, physics, mathematics, and biology.
Students have the opportunity to select a wide range of biological elective courses that
best fulfill their need for future work or graduate study ranging from the molecular to the
population level. Practical laboratory experience emphasizes critical thinking and the use
of instrumentation to study living systems.
Career opportunities include preparation for graduate work in biology and related
fields, for industrial research, for government research, for careers as a medical illustrator,
in public health, and in the many health-related fields.
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
129
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Engliah Compo■itionl & II (ENG 101 & 102); 12 credita ofHumanitie■; 12 credita
of Natural Sciences; 12 credita of Social Science■; 18 credita of free electives.
(B) Area Coacentration: Principle■ of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology
(BIO 120); Genetic ■ (BIO 318); Evolution (BIO 478); 22 credita of elective counca in Biology (cho■cn to include
certain counc■ in botany, zoology, phy■iology, cell and molecular and ecology); General Cbemiltry I & II (CHE
101 & 102); Organic Cbemiltry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); General Phy1ic1 I & II (PHY 121 & 122); Calculu■ I
(MAT 281) or Buie Calculus (MAT 273).
or
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN BIOLOGY FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 crcdita in Humanities, including Composition I (ENG 101) and Composition II
(ENG 102); 11 credita in Natural Sciences including Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331), General Phy1ic1 I (PHY
121), and College Algebra (MAT 181) or Pre-Calculus (MAT 199), or Calculua I (MAT 281); 9 credita in Social
Science; 3 credita in Health or Physical Activitiea; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Paychology (PSY
101); 3 credita of Free Electives.
(B) Profewonal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology: (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problema of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa
and Meaaurcmcnta in Secondary School, (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School• (EDS 465);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainatrcaming Exceptional Lcarncn (EDU 340); Teaching in a
Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467); Student Teaching and
School Law (EDS 461); Mainstreaming the Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Computcn for Teachen (EDF 301).
(C) Professional Specialization: Required: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125);
General Zoology (BIO 120); Genetics (BIO 318). 16 credita ■elected from four Biology Core areaa .
Pennsylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
See also the section on General Science Certification, on page 298 in this catalog.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
The Environmental Studies Program prepares students for career work in environmental
science and ecology-related areas and for graduate work. The major emphasis of the
program is to provide the student with a broad core of courses in biology, supplemented
with courses in chemistry, physics, and mathematics. All students have the opportunity to
select from a wide range of science elective courses in order to fulfill their need for future
work or graduate school. Almost all courses include a laboratory or field component in
which students bring theory, methodology, and instrumentation to bear on specific problems.
A senior independent research problems class (which limits enrollment to fewer than
10 students for more effective learning) gives the student practical experience with all phases
of a research problem-literature review, experimental design, data collection., analysis,
interpretation and scientific writing. Some of the topics that have been covered include
water pollution biology, small mammal population dynamics, plant and animal species
130
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
diversity, comparisons between different types of habitats, shorebird food selection, the
effects of acid mine drainage on the distribution of streamside terrestrial vegetation, and the
effects of strip mining on ecological succession.
A steady demand exists for such environmental scientists as wildlife biologists, fishery
biologists, water analysis technicians, air pollution control monitors, environmental health
technicians, and interpretative naturalists. Many graduates are employed in these areas by
private industry and by state and federal organizations. Some graduates further their
education through work leading to the Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy degrees
and teach and do research at a college or university.
Options:
Environmental Conservation
Environmental Resources
Environmental Science
Environmental Pollution Control
Wildlife Biology
Curriculum:
(A) General Education (Environmental Conservation and Environmental Resources Tracks): English
Composition I & II (ENG IOI & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Pre-Calculus (MAT 199);
Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Computer Science I (CSC 121) or Pascal (CSC 128); 6 credits in
Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of free electives.
(B) Environmental Consenation Track: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120);
General Botany (BIO 125); Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); General Chemistry I & II (CHE IOI & 102);
Analytical Chemistry (CHE 261); Field Biology (ENS 205); Conservation ofBiological Resources (BIO 206); Game
and Habitat Management (ENS 421); Wildlife Techniques (ENS 422); Dendrology (BIO 442); Environmental
Research Problems (ENS 459) ; Biotic Communities (BIO 308); Biometry (BIO 466); Design & Analysis (ENS
495). 21 credits of the following recommended Electives: Ornithology (BIO 337); Entomology (BIO 445);
Ichthyology (BIO 435); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488); Ethology (BIO 441); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Plant
Ecology (BIO 314); Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336) : Soil Science (BIO 334) : Environmental Physiology (BIO 486);
Ecosystems Ecology (BIO 316) .
(C) Environmental Resources Track: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Man and His Environment
(ENS 100); Environmental Geology (EAS 231); General Chemistry I (CHE 101) and II (CHE 102); Introduction
to Oceanography (EAS 163); Contemporary Issues in Biology (BIO 103); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Map
and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 272); Soil Science (BIO 334); Earth Resources (EAS 232): Mineralogy
(EAS 331); Petrology (EAS 332); Coastal Geomorphology and Marine Resources (EAS 363); Historical Geology
(EAS 200); Field course in Geology, Biology, or Hydrology. 22 credits of the following electives (at least one
course from each group) : GROUP A - Meteorology (EAS 241); Climatology (EAS 242); Hydrology (EAS 202);
Air Quality Monitoring (ENS 430) . GROUP B - Geomorphology (EAS 343); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Solid
Waste Management (ENS 431). GROUP C - Geochemistry (CHE 255); Geophysics (PHY 235); Reservoir
Evaluation (PET 455); Micropaleontology (EAS 350). GROUP D - Computer Science II (CSC 222); Environmental
Chemistry (PHS 136); Environmental Regulations (ENS 432); Statistical Cartography (EAS 373).
(D) General Education (Environmental Science and Environmental Pollution Control Tracks) : English
Composition I & II (ENG 101 & 102) ; Formal Logic (PHI 312); Basic Calculus (MAT 237) or Calculus I (MAT
281); Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Computer Science I (CSC 121) or Pascal (CSC 128) . 6 credits in
Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits Free Electives .
(E) Environmental Science Track: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General
Botany (BIO 125); Ecosystems Ecology (BIO 316); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Biometry (BIO 466);
Environmental Research Problems (ENS 459); General Chemistry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); General Physics I &
II (PHY 121 & 122); Genetics (BIO 318); Evolution (BIO 478); Design and Analysis (ENS 495) . 18 credits from
the following Animal Ecology and/or Plant Ecology Cores: ANIMAL ECOLOGY CORE: Comparative Vertebrate
Anatomy (BIO 305); Ornithology (BIO 337); Entomology (BIO 445); Ichthyology (BIO 435); Water Pollution
Biology (BIO 488); Ethology (BIO 441); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Parasitology (BIO 327); Herpetology (BIO 433).
PLANT ECOLOGY CORE: Plant Ecology (BIO 314); Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Soil Science (BIO 334);
Dendrology (BIO 442); Biotic Communities (BIO 308).
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
131
(F) Eanronmental Pollution Control Track: Principles of Biology (BIO I IS); General Zoology(BIO 120);
General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemillry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemillry I & II (CHE 331 &
332); Analytical Chemillry I (CHE 261); Ecosyatema Ecology (BIO 316); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488);
Microbiology (BIO 326); Biometry (BIO 466); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Laboratory Instrumentation
(BIO 430); Techniques in Water and Waatewater Analy■is (ENS 341); Air Quality Monitoring (ENS 430); Solid
Waste Management (ENS 431); Environmental Regulations (ENS 432); Environmental Research Problema (ENS
459); Deaign and Analyais (ENS 495). S credits of related elective, aelected with advi10r'1 approval from counea
in ornithology, entomology, dendrology, mammalogy, 10il acience, and plant taxonomy .
(G) Wildlife Biology Track: Principle• of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany
(BIO 125); General Chemistry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); Genetics
(BIO 319); Principles of Wildlife Management (ENS 420); Wildlife Management Techniques (ENS 423);
Dendrology (BIO 442) or Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Ecosyllema Ecology (BIO 316); Ornithology (BIO 337);
Mammalogy (BIO 400); Biometry (BIO 466) or De■ign and Analyaia (BIO 495); 6 credits of the following
recommended elective,: Oral Communication (COM 101); Principle, of Management (MGT 201); Land Uae
Planning (GEO 317); Urban Planning (HIS 234); 12 credita of the following recommended electives: Microbiology
(BIO 326); Parasitology (BIO 327); Soil Science (BIO 334); Herpetology (BIO 433); Ichthyology (BIO 435);
Ethology (BIO 441); Entomology (BIO 445); Environmental Research Problema (ENS 459); Evolution (BIO 478);
Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488).
ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION ENDORSEMENT PROGRAM
Environmental education should be a life-long process. It is a way of looking at life,
fostering awareness of other life and of interrelationships, and learning to recognize the
effects (both good and bad) man has on his physical and biological surroundings. The need
for teachers to direct environmental programs and provide environmental teaching is
pressing. The courses listed below are designed to develop an individual's ability to teach
and/or direct the development of a school's environmental education program.
Cumculum:
Man and His Environment (ENS 100). Two of the following: Environmental Chemillry (PHS 136);
Environmental Biology (BIO 105); Environmental Geology (EAS 235). At lea&t one in each of the following areas:
1. Laboratory Science: Ecosyllema Ecology (BIO 316); Principle■ of Biology (BIO 115); Physical Geography (EAS
ISi); Meteorology (EAS 241); Man and His Physical World (PHS 111); 2 . Techniques and Procedurea: Plant
Taxonomy (BIO 336); Planning and Development of Areas and Facilities (XUA 416); Recreation and Park
Adminiatration (XUA 400); 3. Outdoor Activities: Conaervation and Biological Re10urce1 (BIO 206); Game and
Habitat Management (ENS 421); Wildlife Techniques (ENS 422); 4. Human Involvement: Continuing Problems
in Human Ecology (BIO 106); Human Ecology (GEO 240).
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
Advances in medical science have occurred at an accelerating pace in recent years, and
great progress has been made in the diagnosis and treatment of disease. Research findings
in biochemistry and advances in instrumentation technology have increased the quality of
American health care and have generated a growing demand for people trained in the field
of medical technology. The Medical Technology program prepares students to hold key
positions in the medical laboratory.
132
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
The Medical Technology program of this university is approved by the American
Society of Clinical Pathologists, a member of the American Medical Association (AMA).
California University of Pennsylvania is formally affiliated with eight hospital schools of
medical technology. The program involves a three-year program on campus and one year
(12 months) at one of the approved affiliated schools or one acceptable to California
University of Pennsylvania. Upon the completion of the clinical or internship year the
student is granted a Bachelor of Science degree from California University of Pennsylvania
as well as a certificate in medical technology from the hospital school. In addition,
graduates take the national test given by the Registry of Medical Technologists of the
American Society of Clinical Pathologists. The students who successfully pass this
examination become registered medical technologists M.T. (A.S.C.P.)
The University's hospital affiliations include:
Allegheny General Hospital
Pittsburgh, PA
Altoona Hospital
Altoona, PA
Conemaugh Valley Memorial Hospital
Johnstown, PA
Latrobe Area Hospital
Latrobe, PA
St. Vincent Hospital
Erie, PA
Washington Hospital
Washington, PA
West Penn Hospital
Pittsburgh, PA
To enhance the student's opportunity of being accepted by one of the affiliated hospital
schools of medical technology for the fourth or clinical year, it is strongly recommended that
the student maintain a minimum of a 3.0 quality point average in the natural sciences
(Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics) and a minimum of a 3.0 overall quality
point average.
Qualified men and women are in demand as medical technologists to hold responsible
positions in blood banking, microbiology, parasitology, chemistry, serology, hematology,
and nuclear medicine, as well as in supervisory positions in laboratories.
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: English Composition I (ENG IOI); Principle ■ of Management (BUS 201); 6 credita
in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credita in Natural Science ■; 12 credita in free electives.
(B) Ana oCCooceotratioo: Principle■ ofBiology (BIO I IS); General Zoology (BIO 120); Human Anatomy
(BIO 306); Microbiology (BIO 326); Human Phy■iology (BIO 328); Parasitology (BIO 327); Genetics (BIO 318);
Clinical Microbiology (BIO 426); Laboratory Inatrumentation (BIO 430); General Chemistry I & D (CHE 101 &
102); Analytical Chemistry I (CHE 361); General Physics I & D (PHY 121 & 122); Organic Chemistry I (CHE
331); College Algebra (MAT 181). The following courses are llrongly recommended by the Hoapital Schools of
Medical Technology: English Composition D (ENG 102); Organic Chemistry D (CHE 302); Mycology (BIO 407);
Radiation Biology (BIO 408); Biochemistry I (CHE 441); Statistic■ (MAT 215). Approved Medical Technology
(29 credits).
PREPROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY
Students in the health professions commit themselves to a lifelong process of selfeducation; therefore, the development of scholarly motivation, independence, and creativity
are vital to professional medical competence. Acquiring an understanding of people, their
societies, and their history is a valuable asset in the practice of the health professions.
Consequently, a liberal education in the humanities and the arts, as well as in the social and
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
133
natural sciences, provides the best professional preparation. In addition, the student should
demonstrate competence and concentrated study in a curriculum or field of special interest.
Although students interested in the health professions do not necessarily major in Biology,
they should plan to take a significant number of biology courses.
Varied program offerings make it possible to satisfy requirements for pre-medical, predental, pre-veterinary, pre-podiatry, pre-pharmacy, pre-chiropractic, and other pre-health
fields. Those interested should contact the Biology Department to discuss their career plans.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: English Composition I & Il (ENG 101 & 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits
of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Principles of Biology (BIO I 15); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany
(BIO 125); General Chemistry I & Il (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & Il (CHE 331 & 332); General
Physics I & Il (PHY 121 & 122); Basic Calculus (MAT 273) or Calculus I (MAT 281); Genetics (BIO 318);
Human Anatomy (BIO 306) or Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (BIO 305); Human Physiology (BIO 328); Cell
Biology (BIO 480); Microbiology (BIO 326); 9 credits of related electives in Biology (chosen from amon, courses
in parasitology, histology, embryology, clinical microbiology, and biochemistry).
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN MORTUARY SCIENCE
In today's world the expansion of knowledge occurs at such a rapid rate that the
average person cannot keep pace with information that affects his life. In professional
careers a broad understanding of the changing world is closely related to success. In the
health related professions, we find phenomenal growth in knowledge, technology and
improved delivery systems of service to the public. This expansion of preparation for the
mortuary sciences is one way that can serve the practitioner to better serve society.
Career Outlook
Highly qualified individuals can be successful as members of a well-established
mortuary firm or in an individuali:red firm. Careers in teaching and research are also
available.
Objectives
The program objectives are:
•
to prepare the student with an academic background that can challenge the changing
technology and demands of society;
•
to expand the opportunities for entry into a technological world.
Curriculmn OtTered
The California University program is accredited through the Middle States Association
of College and Secondary Schools. The mortuary science year, through affiliation with the
Pittsburgh School of Mortuary Science, is accredited through the American Board of Funeral
Service Education, National Association of Colleges of Mortuary Science, National
Conference of Funeral Service Examining Boards of the United States, Inc. This program
134
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
is designed for three years of approved study on campus and one year of study at the
Pittsburgh Institute of Mortuary Science. Upon completion of the program, the student is
granted a Bachelor of Science degree from California and a diploma from the Pittsburgh
Institute. Upon completion of a one-year resident intern period, the candidate applies for
the State Board Examinations and licensure as a funeral director and embalmer.
The curriculum requires 128 credits: 100 credits in required and elective California
University courses and 28 credits for the institute year at an approved mortuary science
institute.
Curriculum:
(A) Geaenil Education: English Compo1ition I & Il (ENG 101 & 102); General Paychology (PSY 100);
Elemcnta of Economics (ECO 100); 6 credita in Humanities; 6 crcdita in Social Science,; 6 credita in Natural
12 credita of free elective,.
(B) Area of Coacmtration: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology
(BIO 120); Human Anatomy (BIO 306); Human Physiology (BIO 328); Microbiology (BIO 326); General
Chemistry I & Il (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & Il (CHE 331 & 332); College Algebra (MAT 101);
Accounting I (BUS 111); Ethics (PHI 220); Psychology of Adjustment (PSY 315); Social Psychology (PSY 211);
Principle• of Sociology (SOC 100); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); Basic Programming Language
(CSC 105); Sculpture I (ART 118); Mathematica of Finance (MAT 171); Bu1inc11 Writing I (ENG 211); Principles
of Management (BUS 201); The Family (SOC 220); Introduction to Social work: (SOW 105); Death and Dying
(EDF 318); Oral Communication (COM 101); Animal Hiatology (BIO 325); Parasitology (BIO 327); 8 credita of
advanced Biology courses selected with adviaor'• approval.
Science■;
THE WASHINGTON HOSPITAL SCHOOL OF NURSING
REGISTERED NURSE PROGRAM
The Washington Hospital School of Nursing (WHSN) Registered Nurse Program is a
cooperative venture between California University and the WHSN. Entrance into the
program requires successful performance by the prospective student on the qualifying
examination given by the WHSN and subsequent acceptance for admission to both the
WHSN and California University of Pennsylvania. The program of study leading to the
certificate of completion given by WHSN and licensure as a registered nurse, following
successful completion of the prescribed curriculum and examinations as required by law, is
27 months in duration. The cooperative nature of this program is based upon the university
providing a minimum of 40 credits in traditional science and general education courses and
the WHSN providing the traditional nursing courses and clinical experiences required for
certification as a registered nurse. Because of the necessity by WHSN to limit enrollment,
the availability of university classes may be limited. This is particularly critical with regard
to the science classes, Anatomy and Physiology I and II, Chemistry for the Health Sci~glS,
Basic Microbiology, and Basic Principles of Nutrition where, depending upon circumstances,
enrollment may be restricted to students who have been formally accepted into the WHSN
Program. Individuals who wish to earn a degree from the university may continue in the
Bachelor of Science Nursing Program offered by the university following completion of the
WHSN Program. However, other qualifications and/or examinations may be required prior
to entry into the university BSN Program. (See the description of the Nursing Program,
pages 288-289 in this catalog.)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
135
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES COURSES (BIO)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+BIO 103. CONTEMPORARY- ISSUES IN BIOLOGY. Basic biological principle, are applied to the
undentanding of current social-biological proble1111 and how these relate to an individual'• penonal life. Topics
included are human sexuality, nutrition, health and disease, evolution, behavior, and the divenity of life. For
atudenu not majoring in Biology . Three ~ecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
+ BIO 104. BASIC CARE OF PLANTS. A genenl introduction to the baaic care of planu. Studenu are introduced
to technique, that will make the growing and caring of planu, indoon and out, le11 complicated and more fun.
Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
BIO 106. CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN HUMAN ECOLOGY. An extensive examination of man's impact
on the bioaphere, hydrosphere, lithosphere, and atmosphere, with emphaais on: (1) pollution of aquatic and
tripospheric 1yatc1111; (2) other pollutanu in human ecosyatc1111; (3) human population dynamics in relation to
disease, malnutrition, genetics, and food. Lectures, possibly supplemented with various field trips. Prerequisite:
BIO 103. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
+ BIO 108. BIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS. A one-semeatcr preparation course in biology for studenu who mull take
BIO 115 a■ part of their curriculum and who require additional training in the biological sciences. Topics are
selected to deal with the fundamental concepts that are requisite to entrance into BIO 115. Three lecture houn
weekly. (3 en.)
BIO 112. BIOLOGY OF SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES. A non-major Biology course pertaining to
the causes and consequences of human sexually transmitted diseases. Descriptions of the microorganis1111 which
cause STD■ and the facton which are involved in their dissemination will be studied. Special emphaais will be
directed toward■ human behavior pattema and mores which are conducive to contracting these venereal diseases.
Viral STD1 (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome, Human Papilloma Disease, Herpes Simplex II and Hepatitis
B) will be emphaaized because they can cause severe diseases or even death in humans; however, the more common
venereal diseases (syphilis, gonorrhea, lymphogranuloma, venereum, chancroid and candidiasis) will also be
studied . Prerequisite: None. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
BIO 115. PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY. Structures and functions common to all organisms; cell atructure and
function, the chemical aspecu of biological syatema, eneriy and materials balance in nature, developmental biology,
principle• of genetic ■, evolution, and ecology. Prerequisite: Science majon. Three lecture houn and three
laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
BIO 120. GENERAL ZOOLOGY. A comprehensive phylogenetic survey of the animal kingdom, with emphaais
on evolutionary change, and the interrelationships of animals with their environment. Laboratory studies of
represenutive memben of the major phyla. Prerequisite: BIO 115. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn
weekly. (4 en)
BIO 125. GENERAL BOTANY. A survey of form and function of the major plant groups as well II the bacteria,
algae, water mold ■, ■lime molds, and fungi within the overall framework of a modem phylogenetic syatcm of
clauification. Prerequisite: BIO 115. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 crs.)
BIO 206. CONSERVATION OF BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES. A study of biological aspects relating to plants and
animals directly auociated with water, soil, and environmental changea. Numerous field trips are taken into areas
136
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
of Western Pennsylvania to obser,,e land reclamation, conscr,,ation pncticea, and basic problems confronting
human populations. Prerequisites: BIO 115 & 125 . Three lecture houn and a three-hour field trip . (4 en.) S
BIO 305 . COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE AN ATOMY. A compantive study of the vertcbnte organs and organ
systems, primarily concentnting on comparing the nbbit with man. Other chordate■ arc used aa ancillary material.
Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 & 120. Three lecture houra and three labontory houra weekly . (4 era.)
BIO 306. HUMAN ANATOMY . A basic study of the structure of the human body. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 & 120
or penniuion of the instructor. Three lecture houra and three labontory houn weekly. (4 era.) F
BIO 307. PLANT ANATOMY. A detailed study of atructunl differentiations, especially in the hiaher planta: the
structure of mcriBtcms and developmental changes in their derivatives. Prerequisites: BIO 115 & 125. Three lecture
houra and three labontory hours weekly. (4 crs.) F
BIO 308 . BIOTIC COMMUNITIES. The principles of the structure and nature of various biotic communities arc
considered from the concrete stand to the biome level. Factors which limit, maintain, and modify biotic assemblages
arc presented qualitatively and quantitatively from the local to the regional portions of the communities.
Interrelationships between organisms and environment in reference to the organism's morphological, physiological,
and behavionl adaptations. The dynamics of ecological succession arc stressed, illustnting the permanence of
climax communities over geological time. Ecological techniques and methods to quantify and qualify the community
arc pursued in the field and laboratory. Extended field trips may be required. Prerequisite,: BIO 115, 120, and 125 .
Three lecture hours and three houra of laboratory/field experience weekly. (4 era.) S
BIO 314. PLANT ECOLOGY. >-t,consideration of the plant communities which arc influenced by both biotic and
physical factors . The emphasis is on the vegetation of Pennsylvania, especially in the area of the Appalachian
Mountains. Laboratory work provides the student with the opportunity to become familiar with modem methods
of vegetational analysis and community sampling . Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 125 . Three lecture hours and three
laboratory hours w~kly. (4 crs.) S
BIO 316 . ECOSYSTEMS ECOLOGY . An introductory study of the dynamics of the biological, physical, and
mathematical relationships and interrelationships that proceed within various ecosystems on the earth . Emphasis
is placed on biogcochemical cycling, energy cycling, population dynamics, productivity, and pertinent problems
concerning ecoayBtcm deterioration. Field and labontory studies concerning various processes openting within an
ecosystem. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . General Chemistry I and II and College Algebn recommended.
Three lecture hours and three hours of laboratory/field experience weekly . (4 crs.) F
BIO 317. EMBRYOLOGY. A study of oogenesis and spermatogenesis and resultant developments following
fertilization: factors involved in morphogenetic determination; organology; sequences of changes in development.
Special emphasis on the chick and comparative examples of development in other animals. Prerequisites: BIO 115
and 120. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly . (4 crs.) S
BIO 318. GENETICS. An introduction to molecular genetics and to the basic principles of inheritance. Gene
interactions, multiple-factor inheritance, chromosome mapping, chromosomal and extnchromosomal inheritance .
The roles of mutation, selection, migration, and genetic drift arc investigated to determine the genetic composition
of different populations. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . Three lecture houra and three laboratory houn
weekly . (4 crs .) F S
BIO 325 . ANIMAL HISTOLOGY. The study of cellular differentiations in tiuue , tissue identification, and special
functions, especially in the mammals. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houra and three labontory
hours weekly. (4 crs .) S
BIO 326. MICROBIOLOGY. A detailed study of bacteria and viruses, with less emphasis on fungi, algae, and
protozoans. Special emphasis on medical aspects of bacteriology, immunology, and virology. The cytology,
physiology, microbiology, and culture of microbes arc pursued in the laboratory. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 125,
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
137
CHE 101 and 102, or penniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boun weekly. (4 en.)
F
BIO 327. PARASITOLOGY. A lltUdy of the etioloJY, cpidemioloJY, and bioloJY of aomc common human and
animal para1ite1. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO l lS and 120. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boura weekly. (4 en.)
F
BIO 328. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. The functiona of the human body . Basic physiological phenomena arc studied
with conaiderable emphasis upon clinical and practical application. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 120 or penniuion
of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boon weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 330. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY I. A general survey of the basic anatomical tenna of poaition and
direction, the relevant acientific unita, the chemical componenta of living organisms, animal cytology, billology,
embryology, the intc,umcntary ayatem, the rudimcnta of neurology, the skeletal syatem, and the cardiovaacular
syatem. Prcrequi ■itea : Thia counc is for lltUdenta who arc enrolled in a nuning prognm, have completed at least
one counc in biology, or have obtained pcnniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory
houn weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 334. SOIL SCIENCE. An cdaphological approach ia taken in the lltUdy of the aoil, i.e., the aoil aa a natural
habitat for planta. The various properties of the aoil arc conaidercd a, they relate to plant production. Since the clay
and humua fractiona arc of trcmcndoua importance, the counc will incorporate a colloidal-biological baaia.
Prerequisite,: CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boon weekly. (4 en.) (F)
BIO 335. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY. The physio-chemical foundationa of plant functiona arc investigated, including
such topics aa water and salt abaorption, photosynthesis, respiration, plant growth substances, photoperiodic
rcsponaca, mineral metabolism, germination, and the effecta of air pollution on planta. Recent advances in the field
of plant physiology arc included. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 125, CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture hours and three
laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 336. PLANT TAXONOMY. A lltUdy of rclationahipa among the vaacular planta, ferna, their clauification,
and method, of identification. Plant familiea native to Weatem Pennaylvania arc atrcucd. Prerequisites: BIO l lS
and 125. Three lecture houn and tbrcc laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 337. ORNITHOLOGY. The lltUdy of bird life. Clauification, anatomy, behavior, and recognition of birds,
with emphaaia on local species and their rclationahips to people and the ecological balance with other organisms.
Prcrequiaitea: BIO l lS and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours or field activity weekly. (4 en.)
s
BIO 342. SCIENTIFIC PHOTOGRAPHY. A baaic counc in the life and environmental aciences which stresses
the myriad ways in which photography can be applied to enhance the effectivene11 of teaching and research
endeavors ofbiologiata and environmentaliata. Special attention is given to photomicroacopy, macrophotography,
and field photography. Various other illustrative material ■ arc alao prepared utilizing selective photographic
equipment and/or procedures. Studenta can take this counc twice for a maximum of 4 crcdita. Prerequisites: Three
Biology or Environmental councs with a minimum of one field-oriented counc. (2-4 en.) S
BIO 360. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Il. A general survey of the basic structure of the lymphatic syatem,
immunology, the brain, the spinal cord, the peripheral nervous ayatem, senaory rcccpton and special senac organa,
the endocrine ayatem, the respiratory ayatem, the digeative ayatem, the urinary syatem, homcoatasia, the
reproductive 1y1tcm, and human embryonic development. Prerequisite ■ : BIO 330 or penniuion of inatructor.
Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 370. METABOLISM. A study of the chemical compound, of biological importance, how these arc utilized
in human metabolic proceuca, and the rc,ulatory mcchaniams auociated with the maintenance of homeostasis.
Three lecture hours weekly. (3 en.)
138
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
BIO 400. MAMMALOGY. A study of the clauification, distribution, and natural history of mamrnala, with
emphasis on eaatem North American speciea. Field studiea and preparation of study specimena. Prerequiaitea: BIO
115, 120, 308 or 316 or ENS 300. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 405. HUMAN GENETICS. Chromoaomal abnormalities. Mendel' ■ Lawa, and the effect of change of gene
action on Mendelian ratios. Other topica: aex-related inheritance, random mating, conaa1111Jinity, alleliam,
mutationa, and maintenance of polymorphism. Prerequisitea: BIO 115, 120, and 318. Three lecture houn weekly.
(3 en.)
BIO 407. MYCOLOGY. An extenaive examination of the fungi, with emphaaia on the filamentoua forma . The
cytology, phyaiology, and morphology of the fungi are studied to determine their role in the acheme of nature.
Laboratory technique, in isolating, culturing, enumerating, and identifying fungi. Prerequiaitea: BIO 115, 125, and
326. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
BIO 418 . BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH INVESTIGATIONS. A reaearch study program for advanced underaraduate
studenta who wish to punue careen in biological or medical area■ . Emphaaia ia placed upon the student learning
to uae varioua acientific instrumenta and biolo1ical procedure• neceaaary for reaearch inveati1ationa. The student
worka cloaely with one or more faculty memben on a reaearch project which ia departmentally approved. Each
reaearch project ia unique, and the data should ultimately be published in a prominent biolojical journal. The
student normally participates in one aspect of an oqoing reaearch study and may punue work for one or more
aemeaten. Studenta can take a maximum of 12 credita, 6 of which may be counted in the area of concentration.
Prerequisite ■: BIO 115 and 125 (or 120), one BioloJy elective courae,junior or aenior llandilli, and a 3.0 QPA.
(1-4 en.)
BIO 426 . CLINICAL MICROBIOLOGY. A survey of the indigenoua and pathogenic microorganism■ of man,
general principles deduced from complexities involving biochemistry and physiology, host-parasite relationlhipa,
and laboratory procedures. Organisms studied include: bacteria, fungi, viruaes, and rickettaia . Prerequisites: BIO
I 15 and 326, Che 101 and 102. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 427. CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY. The physiology of the cell with empha1i1 on the relationlhip of cell
structure and function . Includes physical and chemical aspecta of cell■, the relation of cells to their environment,
energy conveniona in cells, membrane permeability, photoayntheaia, and enzyme action. Prerequiaitea: BIO I 15,
120, and 125; CHE 101 and 102; CHE 331 and 332 recommended. (4 en.) S
BIO 430. LABORATORY INSTRUMENTATION FOR BIOLOGY. The theory of, and practice with, major types
of laboratory inatrumentation uaed in modem biological practice. Content is adjusted to methods practiced at this
inatitution and may include any additional procedures of special interest to the class memben. Practice in writing
laboratory reports and designing experimenta. Prerequisite ■: BIO 115, 120, and 125, PHY 102, CHE 261, or
permission of inatructor. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 431 . TECHNIQUES IN ELECTRON MICROSCOPY. Detailed training in the operation and care of the
electron microacope: techniques of specimen preparation for electron microacope visualization, including fixation,
embedding, and ultrathin sectioning; special techniques such as replication and shadow casting. Prerequisite or
concurrent counes: BIO 432, CHE 331,332, or consent of the inatructor. (4 en.)
BIO 432. CELLULAR ULTRASTRUCTURE. A study of the generalized cell, the highly specialized cell, and
tissues as seen by the electron microacope, with special emphasis on correlation of structure with function. An
additional aim ia to enhance the student's ability to interpret electron micrograph,. Prerequisites: BIO I 15, 120 and
125, CHE 331 and 332, a molecular biology courae and/or consent of inatructor. Three lecture houn weekly. (3
en.)
BIO 433 . HERPETOLOGY. A consideration of the Amphibia and Reptilia from taxonomical, morphological,
evolutionary, behavioral, and physiological viewpoints, with special emphasis on the Testudinata. Prerequisites:
BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
139
BIO 435 . ICIITHYOLOGY. An introduction to the morphology, taxonomy, ecology, and distribution of the major
offrelhwater fishes, with emphaai1 on the northcaatem U.S. fauna . Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 and 120. Three
lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.)
group ■
BIO 440. DENDROLOGY. A atudy only of the tree specie■ of the Kingdom Metaphyta: the importance of theac
organisms to other biota, especially man, and their prospect■ of continued aurvival in a rapidly changing biosphere.
Emphaaia on the forest communitiea and tree species of the mixed meaophytic forest region■ of 10Uthwellem
Pennaylvania. Prerequisite■ : BIO 115 and 125 . Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) F
BIO 441. ETHOLOGY. Four principal approaches to ethology-ecology, phy1iology, genetic,, and development
are interpreted within the framework of evolutionary biology with emphaai1 on the pattern■ of behavioral 1imilaritie1
and differences among different kinda of animals. Prcrequiaites: BIO 115 and 120; BIO 308 or 316 or ENS 300.
Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) S
BIO 445 . ENTOMOLOGY. A specialized atudy of insect■ : identification and clauification development phases;
economic importance, disease vectors. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 1 IS and 120. Three lecture
houn and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
phy■ioloiical characteriatica,
BIO 449. BIOLOGY FOR MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY CLINICAL PRACTICUM I. Upon acceptance to a
hospital achoo! of Medical Technology, the student undertake, the clinical training experience required by the
National Accrediting Agency for Clinical Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). Programs of instruction will vary from
one hospital to another but uaually include hematology, microbiology, parasitology, immunology, urinalyaia, and
biochemistry . Thia course i1 the first of two required term,. (15 en.)
BIO 459. BIOLOGY FOR MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY CLINICAL PRACTICUM Il. A continuation of BIO 449.
The second of two terms. (14 en.)
BIO 466 . BIOMETRY . The fundamental concepta underlying the application of statistical method■ and experimental
design■ to environmental problems. Practical experience in the development and analysis of laboratory and field
projecta. Prerequisites: MAT 215, a field biology course, and consent of instructor. Three lecture hours and three
laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 478. EVOLUTION. An advanced course pertaining to the mechanisms that are operative in the procesa of
biological evolution. Life origins and development are investigated, with special emphaais placed upon the
importance of genetic and metabolic systems diversity. The recurring and univerul themes of mutation and natural
■election are thoroughly discusacd as the concept of evolution at the population level is developed . A detailed
account of human origin■ and specie ■ diversity is also studied. Prerequisites: BIO 318 and CHE 101 . Three lecture
hours weekly. (3 en.) F
BIO 480. CELL BIOLOGY. The biology of the cell with emphasis on the relationlhip of structure and function
within the cell. It is a atudy of cell organelles, growth, division, macromolecules, membranes, synthesia, and
regulation. Prcrequiaites: BIO 120, 125 and CHE 331. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly.
(4 en.)
BIO 486 . ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY. A comparative approach to the atudy of physiological ayatems in
animals relative to environmental pressure ■ and phylogenetic standing. Prcrequiaite: BIO 422. Three lecture hours
and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F
BIO 488 . WATER POLLUTION BIOLOGY. A aurvey of the impact■ of various type■ of environmental pollutant■
on aquatic biological communitiea. Community responses are analyzed in a lecture/laboratory format with emphasia
on collection in the field . Three lecture hours and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.)
140
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES COURSES (ENS)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+ ENS 100. MAN AND HIS ENVIRONMENT. The broad field of environmental management. Man'• biological
baaia, aoila, land use, water pollution, air pollution, noise pollution, and agencies and lawa auociated with the
above topic, . No one area ia covered in depth. Rather, the student ia introduced to each problem, ill aource, current
corrective mcaaurea, and pouible future technology. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
ENS 20S. FIELD BIOLOGY. An introductory counc dealing with the conservation of renewable reaourcea, with
emphaaia on aoila, foreata, and wildlife. Basic ecological principle, are demonstrated aa they apply to native flon
and fauna of aouthweatem Pennsylvania . Extensive field experience■. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
ENS 341. TECHNIQUES IN WATF.R. AND WASTEWATF.R. ANALYSIS. A thorough atudy of the chemical
testing of water in waatewater plants, llrcama, and drinking water aources. Emphasi1 ia placed on learning
acceptable level ■ of chemical■ in the different type• of water. Sampica of water from aources of concern are
analyzed in the laboratory portion of the counc. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.)
ENS 3Sl. WATF.R. TREATMENT FACILrrIES. An examination of the opention of modem water work■ and
waatc water treatment 1yatema utilizing an integrated lecture-labontory approach . Empha■i1 ia on a pnctical
undentanding of concepts related to water proceuing and familiarity with the various techniques currently
employed. Lecture material ia correlated with the inapcction toun of local water and waatewater treatment facilities
and laboratory demonstrations of proce■ae1 and auociated analyse, of water quality. Three lecture houn weekly .
(3 en.)
ENS 420. PRINCIPLES OF WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT. Thia course is designed to provide atudenta with an
undentanding of the philoaophiea and concepts of ■cientific wildlife management. Major emphasi ■ will be placed
on wildlife management in North America, but differilli pcnpectives from other regions of the world will be
incorporated into the course. Topic, to be covered will include monitoring habitats and habitat management,
population exploitation, and administration, economic,, and aocio-political topic ■ a■ they relate to wildlife
management. Prerequi1ite1: BIO 111 and 121. Three lecture houn and three labontory houn weekly. (4 en.)
ENS 423. WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES. Thia course will cover techniques commonly used by
wildlife biologiata with empha1i1 on those applicable to birds and mammals. Important technique, covered in the
counc include ageing and sexing of important game ■peciea, habitat measurement and evaluation, population
analy1i1, and analy1i1 of food habits. The lecture portion of the course provides an introduction to common
techniques and the lab empha■izcd pnctical use and application of those techniques. Prerequisites: BIO 120 and
12S. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.)
ENS 430. AIR QUAUTY MONITORING. The technologies involved in the abatement of emiuions from mobile
and stationary aourcea, monitorilli technique■, and air quality standard■ . Prerequisite ■ : CHE 331, CHE 361, PHY
121 and 122, MAT 21S. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.)
ENS 431. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT. The fundamental technique■ involved in the collection, proceuilli,
and dispoaal of urban, indu■trial, and agricultunl waates. Prerequisite■: CHE 331. Three lecture houn weekly . (3
en.)
ENS 4S9. ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH PROBLEMS. An independent atudy with a coopenting faculty
member. Emphaai1 on ■cientific research on contemporary environmental problema. These independent atudies are
11 field-oriented II pouible, with a final research paper written in proper ■cientific notation. (This course ia 3
credits and ia not repeatable.)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
141
ENS 494. SEMINAR-NATURE CONSERVATION. Lectures, individual reports, panel discussions, and
individual project assignments concerning the environment and man's future roles in improving the quality of life.
(3 crs.)
ENS 495 . DESIGN AND ANALYSIS . The purpose is to provide environmental scientists with the theoretical and
applied basis of experimental design, sampling theory and sampling designs, data input and output, statistical
analysis and interpretation for studies involving ecological research, environmental pollution monitoring, and
environmental impact assessment. The emphasis will be on experimental design, sampling procedures, and the
application of computer methods for data base, spreadsheet, word processing, and statistical packages. Three lecture
hours weelcly. (3 crs.) S
ENS 497. ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION WORKSHOP. An interdisciplinary summer program designed to
prepare the public school teacher for teaching environmental education. This workshop considers all aspects of the
relationship of human beings and their institutions to the environment. It also has a large how-to- (This course carries a maximum of 2 credits and is not repeatable.)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
142
DEPARTMENT OF BUS~S AND ECONOMICS
ACCOUNTING (ACC)
ECONOMICS (ECO)
FINANCE (FIN)
MANAGEMENT (MGT)
MARKETING (MKT)
Professor M. Arsbad Chawdhry, Chair; Assistant Professor David T . Jones, Assistant
Chair. Professors Ali A. Hashemi, Karen L. LeMasters, Mahmood A. K. Omarnu, Young
J. Park, P. Ronald Tarullo; Associate Professors William F. Blosel, Ismail Cole, Robert J.
Kopko, Louise E. Serafin; Assistant Professors Burrell A. Brown, Debra M. Clingerman,
Edward Mendola, Susan J. Mongell, Michael K. Rich, Fred Rossell, Jr.
The Business and Economics Department offers a number of degree programs that are
unique in the curricula offered at the university. Great emphasis is given to the development
of fundamental skills that will be beneficial to graduates in both their professional and
private lives. The department recognizes that the keys for the student's future success are
flexibility and adaptability. These degree programs are fully supported with state-of-the-art
computer facilities including current software utilized in the business community. After
careful analysis of the current demands in the labor marketplace, the department has
designed four distinct degree approaches, each serving a specific student interest area and
potential employment segment. The four degree approaches are:
1. Bachelor of Arts in Economics
2. Bachelor of Arts in Administration and Management
3. Bachelor of Science in Business Administration (with various specialized options)
4. Two-year Associate Degree programs (in the fields of Accounting,
Administration/Management, Banking, and Computer Based Management.)
Additionally, courses offered within the department will prove to be of value to students
enrolled in other fields of study at the university. The practical nature of course material
offered by the department will assist all students desiring to gain knowledge of meaningful
business principles regardless of their primary specialization. The faculty and office staff
within the department will gladly assist students in reviewing available courses to determine
those that would have meaningful application to their chosen field of study.
Achievement is recognized in students as they progress through their studies in several
ways. Membership is open to qualified successful students in Omicron Delta Epsilon
(O.iE), an honorary Economics Fraternity, Delta Sigma Pi (.iEII), the Business Professional
Fraternity, the Accounting Club, the Economics Club, the Marketing Club, and the Society
for the Advancement of Management. These organizations are involved in a variety of
social and scholastic activities. In addition, the achievements of outstanding graduating
seniors are recognized with the following awards:
• Wall Street Journal Award for outstanding achievement in the study of Business or
Economics.
• H.&: R. Block Award for excellence in the study of Management
• Alfred 'Zeffiro Award for excellence in the study of Business Management
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
•
143
Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Public Accounts Award for high scholastic
achievement in the study of Accounting.
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN ECONOMICS
The Bachelor of Arts in Economics is a multipurpose program, with the objective of
providing students with a liberal arts background while taking them through a detailed
examination of the behavior of people as both producers and consumers. The program
develops an understanding of the economic problems facing us today at all levels of
government and business. This approach has been found to be attractive to many employers
in industry, government, and business. This program is an excellent preparation for
graduate study in economics, business administration, hospital administration, law, public
administration and urban planning. Regardless, many students successfully enter the labor
market immediately following graduation, bypassing graduate studies.
Curriculum:
(A) GeaeraJ Education: Compositionl-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science■;
12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective,.
(B) Area
Concentration: Economics Core: Introduction to Microeconomic• (ECO 201); Introduction
to Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Money and Banking (ECO 304); Intermediate Microeconomic ■ (ECO 301);
Intenncdiate Macroeconomic ■ (ECO 302); 14 additional credits of Economic, electives (at 200 level or above).
Communication Skills: Business Writing I (ENG 211) or Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Quantitative Skills:
Technical Math I (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181), Mathematica of Finance (MAT 171) Microa and
Application Software (CSC 101); Business Statiatic1 (MAT 225); Mathematical Economic• (ECO 320). Related
Councs: Accounting I (ACC 201) and Accounting D (ACC 202); five related courses approved by one'• advisor.
or
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE
IN ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
The Bachelor of Arts in Administration and Management provides for a broad-based
curriculum that is flexible to meet the educational needs of a business student with liberal
arts interests. The graduation requirements for this degree make it ideal for the transfer
student entering the university for the last two years of study. This degree will permit
maximum utili7Jltion of previously completed course work. The student will be prepared
for a variety of management positions in business, industry and government.
Curriculum
(A) GeaeraJ Education: Composition I (ENG 101) & D (ENG 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credits
in Natural Sciences; 12 credits in Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Introductory Microeconomic, (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomic■ (ECO
202); Money and Banking (ECO 304); Labor Economic■ (ECO 311); 6 additional credits of upper level Economic•
councs; Accounting I (ACC 201) & D (ACC 202); Managerial Accounting (ACC 321); Principles of Management
(MGT 201); Principles of Marketing (MKT 301); Financial Management (FIN 301); Labor Relations (MGT 362);
6 additional credits of upper-level courses in Accounting, Busineaa, Finance, Management or Marketing; Technical
Mathematics (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181); Buaineu Statistic, (MAT 225); Micros & Applications
Software (CSC 101); Oral Communication: Management (COM 250)°; Busine11 Writing I (ENG 211); Industrial
Psychology (PSY 209); and 5 credits of related electives approved by one's advisor.
144
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
BACHELOR OF SCIBNCE DEGREE IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
The Bachelor of Science in Business Administration offers a multitude of degree
programs that can be tailored to the exact characteristics and needs of each student. Often,
when students begin their college studies, they have not fully determined the career direction
desired. The course content of the various specialized options of th.is degree permits
modification of emphasis as the student' s interests become defined without loss of credits
earned toward graduation. The faculty offers a rich and diverse background of practical
business experience and scholarly achievement to equip the graduating student with the skills
and tools necessary for success in today's competitive job market. Students may focus on
one of the following specialized options: Accounting, Computer Based Management,
Marketing, Finance, Human Resource Management, Management, Business Economics, and
General.
The business world has grown increasingly complex in recent years. Computer
applications are being increasingly incorporated in today 's business programs. California
University's Bachelor of Science in Business Administration curriculum is designed to insure
that students acquire sufficient background in all of the required skill areas to undertake a
broad range of careers in business, industry and government. Labor Relations, Marketing,
Accounting, Production, Management, Finance and Communications are emphasized.
Career opportunities available to the graduate of th.is program are in such positions as
those of Accountant, Banker, City Manager, General Manager, Government Agency
Administrator, Hospital Administrator, Industrial Relations Manager, Insurance Agent,
Office Manager; Personnel Manager, Production Manager, Purchasing Agent, Retail
Manager, Sales Manager, Sales Representative, Securities Analyst, and Stock Broker.
Curriculum
(A) GaleraJ Education: Composition I (ENG IOI); Business Writing I (ENG 211); Group Discussion
Management (COM 102); College Algebra (MAT 18 1) or Technical Math I (MAT 182); Mathematics of Finance
I (MAT 171) or Basic Calculus (MAT 273) .; Business Statistics (MAT 225); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in
Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Coocentration: Businesa Writing II (ENG 212) or Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Oral
Communication: Management (COM 250); Micros & Application Software (CSC l 01); Industrial Psychology (PSY
209); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Money and Banking
(ECO 304) or Intermediate Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Labor Economics (ECO 311) or Intermediate
Microeconomics (ECO 301) or Managerial Economics (ECO 322); Introduction to Business (BUS 100) or Business
Elective; Accounting I (ACC 201) and II (ACC 202); Cost Accounting I (ACC 331) or Managerial Accounting
(ACC 321); Principles of Management (MGT 201 ); Principles of Marketing (MKT 301); Financial Management
(FIN 301); Labor Relations (MGT 362); Strategic Management (MGT 402); Analytical Methods (BUS 271) .
(1) For option in Accoulllillg: Intermediate Accounting I (ACC 301); Intermediate Accounting II (ACC
302); 9 credits of additional upper-level Accounting (ACC) courses (no internship credits); 11 credits in
Accounting, Business, Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing courses 200 level or above
(Recommended : Business Law I [BUS 242) and Computer Applications in Business [MGT 2711) .
(l) For option in Busl/less Economics: Intermediate Microeconomics (ECO 301); Intermediate
Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Mathematical Economics (ECO 320); 11 credits of Economics Electives 200
level or above; 5 credits from Accounting, Business, Finance, Management, Marketing electives .
(3) For option in CompuJer Based Sysums Ma11agemenJ: 15 credits of selected computer science courses;
Management Information Systems (MGT 371) ; Computer Based Management Systems (MGT 373) ; Applied
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
145
Econometric, (ECO 421); Upper level Accounting, Busincn, Economics, Finance, Management or
Marketin, Elective.
(4) For opdoa in Fbta1tee: Personal Money Manaaement (FIN 211); Advanced Financial Manaaement (FIN
302); Inve■tmcnta (FIN 305); Inaurance and Risk Manaaement (FIN 341); Financial Marketa and Inatitutions
(FIN 411); Applied Econometrica (ECO 421); Computer Applications in Businen I (MGT 271) or Lotus
1-2-3 Worbhop (CAW 102), and 7 credits from the following (3 to 6 of which may be 200 level or above):
Accounting, Busincn, Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing Electives); Bank Management (FIN
531); Upper Level Finance Elective; International Businesa Management (MGT 431); Industrial Organiution
(ECO 401); Public Finance (ECO 405); International Economics (ECO 431); Real Eatate Fundamentals (FIN
351); Real Eatate Practice (FIN 352), Busincn Law I (BUS 242).
(5) GIJNral: 26 credits of Accounting, Busincn, Economics, Finance, Management, Marketing electives
(200 level or above) . Lotu1 1-2-3 (CAW 102) and Computer Applications in Busincn I (MGT 271) are
recommended electives.
(6) For opdoa in HWrtall Rtsourr:e Malfllgtmelll: Business Law I (Bus 242), Human Resource
Management (MGT 352); Organiutional Behavior (MGT 301); Compensation Management (MGT 353);
Development of Interviewing Sicilia (PSY 370); 11 credits from the following (may include up to three
credits of Manaiement Electives): Demographic Analy1i1 (GEO 217), Human Ecology (GEO 240), Social
Psychology (PSY 211), Psychology of Gender Rolea (PSY 311), Paychology of Stress Management (PSY
222), Paychology of Personality (PSY 405), PaychologyTeating (PSY 340), Advanced Industrial Psychology
(PSY 428), Men, Women, and Work (SOC 125), Sociology of Workplace (SOC 215); Business, Society and
Government (BUS 342) .
(7) For opdoa in Malfllgtmelfl: Organiutional Behavior (MGT 301); Human reaource Management (MOT
352); Buainesa Law I (BUS 242); 9 credits of Upper level Management (MOT) courses (no internship
credits) and 8 credits of Management related course• to be ■elected with the approval of one's adviaor.
(8) For option in Marutlllg: Principles of Selling (MKT 222); Sales Management (MKT 321); Marketing
Management (MKT 401) Advertising Manaiement (MKT 351), Consumer Behavior (MKT 431), Marketing
Reacarch (MKT 431), Buainesa Marketing (MKT 452); 5 credits of the following (which may be 200 level
or above of Accounting, Buainen, Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing (MKT) electives):
Applied Econometrica (ECO 421) International Buainen Management (MGT 431 ); Real Eatate Fundamentals
(FIN 351); Real Eatate Practice (FIN 352), Inaurance and Risk Management (FIN 341), Retailing (MKT
331), Marketing for Non-profit organiutions (MKT 341), Busineas Law I (BUS 242) .
The alternative for students not wishing to make an immediate four-year commitment
to education is the two-year Associate Degree program in several disciplines. The
accounting student may wish to pursue a two-year course of study in Accounting preparatory
to entering a junior-level accounting position. Those interested in a two-year program in
Administration/Management or Computer Based Management can also pursue an Associate
Degree program. These curricula provide sufficient background in basic management skills
to qualify graduates for many entry-level supervisory positions in business and industry. For
students desiring a career in the financial service industry or for the employees of financial
institutions, an option in Banking is available in the Administration and Management
Associate Degree curriculum. Of course, a student can transfer all of the course work
completed toward the Associate Degree at any time to the appropriate four-year program
leading to a Bachelor's Degree. No more than fifteen credits can be transferred from
another institution to fulfill the requirements for the Associate Degree programs.
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
146
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN ACCOUNTING
The Department of Business and Economics offers this two-year associate degree to
provide students with high quality training in accounting. In the career ladder concept, the
university has designed the program so that students may transfer into the many four-year
business programs.
Careers are available in a number of fields in business and government, including
purchasing, sales, bookkeeping, and accounting itself.
Curriculum
(A) Gmeral Education: English Compoaition I (ENG 101); Bu ■inesa Writing I (ENG 211), Colle1e A11ebra
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematic■ I (MAT 182); Micro■ & Application■ Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credits in Humanities; 3 credits in Social Science■; 3 credits in Natural
Science■; 3 credits of free elective■ .
(B) Area ofConceutration: Intro to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I (ACC 201) and II (ACC 202); Coat
Accounting (ACC 331); Principle ■ of Management (MGT 201); Computer Application■ in Bu ■iness I (MGT 272);
6 credits from Elements of Economic ■ (ECO 100), Current Economic Iaaue■ (ECO 200), Intro Micro (ECO 201),
and Intro Macro (ECO 202); 6 credit■ of Accounting Elective■ to be ■elected with the approval of advi■or; 6-11
credits of Accounting, Buainess, Economics, Finance, Management and Marketing elective ■ (with the approval
of advi■or ■ome of these elective■ may be ■elected from lnduatrial P■ycbology (PSY 209), Mathematic■ of Finance
I (MAT 171), Bu1ine11 Stati1tic1 (MAT 225); Oral Communication■ Management (COM 250) .
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE
IN ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
This two-year associate degree provides students with the basic instruction for an entry level
management position with business or industry. In addition, all of the credits earned in this
program are transferable towards the four-year degree.
Careers available to the graduate of this program include a large number of junior
management positions in business and government, including sales, purchasing, employee
relations, and general management.
Curriculum
(A) Gmeral Education: English Composition I (ENG 101); Business Writing I (ENG 211); College Algebra
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematics (MAT 182); Micros & Application Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credit■ in Social Sciences; 3 credit■ in Natural Science■; 3 credit■ of free
electives.
(B) Area
Cooceotratioo: Introduction to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I & II (ACC 201 & 202);
Principle■ of Management (MGT 201); Computer Applications in BusineBS (MGT 271); 6 credit■ from Element■
of Economic, (ECO 100), Current Economic Issues (ECO 200), Introductory Microeconomic ■ (ECO 201),
Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); 20 credits of Restricted Electives to include 12-18 credits of Accounting,
BusineBS, Economics, Finance, Management, and Marketing courses; and 3-9 credits from Computer course,
Industrial Psychology (PSY 209); Mathematics of Finance I (MAT 171); BusineBS Statistics (MAT 225); Sociology,
or Social Science, Psychology Elective; Oral Communication Management (COM 250).
or
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
147
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE IN ADMINISI'RATION AND MANAGEMENT
OPTION: Banking
The Department of Business and Economics offers the two-year associate degree in
Banking as an option under the Administration and Management program. This curriculum
is designed to meet the needs for junior level management positions in the financial services
industry.
Curriculum
(A) Geaeral Education: Engliah Composition I (ENG 101); Buainea Writiq I (ENG 211), Colle1e
Algebn (MAT 181) or Technical Mathematica I (MAT 182); Micro■ & Application Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credits in Humanities; 3 credits in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Natunl
Sciences; 3 credits of free electives.
(8) Area of Concentration: Accounting I (ACC 201) and n (ACC 202); Mana1erial Accounlilli (ACC
321); Elements of Economics (ECO 100); Introductory Microeconomic■ (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomics
(ECO 202); Computer Applications in Bu■inea (MOT 271); Principles of Mana1ement (MOT 201), Fmancial
Management (FIN 301); Money and Bankiq (ECO 304); 2 credits of Finance elective; 9 credits from A.I.B.
course■ or from a list of selected counea in Bu1ine11, Mathematic ■, and Finance.
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE
IN COMPUTER BASED MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
The Business and Economics Department offers this two-year associate degree to
provide students with general management and computer skills.
Curriculum
(A) Geaeral Education: Engliah Composition I (ENG 101); Businea Writing I (ENG 211), College Algebn
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematics I (MAT 182); Micro■ & Applications Software (CSC 101); Science,
Technology and Society (PHI 246); 3 credits in Humanities; 3 credits in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Natunl
Sciences; 3 credits of free electives.
(8) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Businea (BUS 100); Accounting I (ACC 201) and Il (ACC
202); Principles of Management (MGT 201); Computer Applications in Businea (MOT 271); Management
Information Systems (MOT 371) or Computer Based Management Systems (MOT 373); 6 credits from Elements
of Economics (ECO 100), Current Economic l1111es (ECO 200); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201), and
Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); 9 credits of ■elected computer courses; Managerial Accounting (ACC
321) or Cost Accounting (ACC 331); 3 credits of Economic ■ elective; 2 credits of Accounting, Businea,
Economics, Finance, Management or Marketing elective.
ACCOUNTING COURSES (ACC)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
ACC 201. ACCOUNTING I. The fundamentals of debit and credit; the use of journals and ledgen; basic
accounting procedures; adjusting and closing entries; completion of accounting cycle; prepantion of pertinent
financial ■tatements. (3 en.) (F,S)
148
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
ACC 202. ACCOUNTING II. A continuation of basic accounting principles with an emph11i1 on partnenhip and
corponte accounting. Prerequisite: ACC 201. (3 crs.) (F,S)
ACC 218. FEDERAL INCOME TAX I. An introduction to individual fedenl income tax accounting. (3 crs.)
(F)
ACC 301 . INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING I. In-depth treatment of baaic accounting principle, and concepts.
A prepantion for advanced courses in accounting and for the theory and pnctice aectiona of the Uniform CPA
Examination. Prerequi ■ite : ACC 202. (3 en.) (F,S)
ACC 302. INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING II. A continuation of the in-depth treatment of basic accounting
principles and concept■ with the emphasis on corpontions. A prepantion for advanced course, in accounting and
for the theory and pnctice sections of the Uniform CPA Examination. Prerequisite: ACC 301 . (3 crs.) (F,S)
ACC 318 . FEDERAL INCOME TAX II. Advanced topics in fedenl taxation. Partnership ■ , decedents, e■tate1,
trusts, corpontions, pension and profit sharing plans, foreign income, securitie■ tnnaactiona, etc . Prerequisite:
ACC 218. (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 321 . MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING . For non-accounting majors; emphasizes the use of accounting data
in the decision-making process of a business enterprise. Topics covered are cost-volume relationahip1;
manufacturing costs and analysis; relevant cost analysis; budgeting and variance analysis; responsibility accounting
and coat allocation; job and process product coating. Prerequisite: ACC 202. (3 crs.) (F,S)
ACC 331. COST ACCOUNTING I. An introduction to basic cost-accounting principle,, cost-volume, profit
analysis, standard costing, process and job order coating and departmental budgeting. Prerequisite: ACC 202 . (3
crs .) (F, Summer)
ACC 332. COST ACCOUNTING II. A survey of special topics in the field of manufacturing accounting.
Prerequisites: ACC 331. (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 341. NONPROFIT ACCOUNTING . An introduction to accounting for governmental and not-for-profit
organizations, including analysis of current, plant, and other genenl and special funds . Empha1i1 will be given
to planning, prognmming, and budgeting to achieve institutional objectives. Cost benefit analy1i1 will allO be
developed within the framework of funds allocation to specific prognma. Prerequisite: ACC 202. (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 401 . ADV ANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING I. Special topics in accounting. Mergers and acquisitions,
consolidated financial reporta, accounting for international opentions, etc. Prerequisite: ACC 302. (3 crs.) (F)
ACC 402 . ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING II. Study of the Financial Accounting concepts relative
to nonprofit organizations, fiduciaries, and other special topics in financial accounting. Prerequi ■ite: ACC 302. (3
crs.) (S)
ACC 418. TAX PLANNING AND CONCEPTS . Thia course deals with the broad recognition of the tax effect
on businesa decisions, and a pnctical approach to tax planning for both the corponte and individual taxpayer.
Prerequisite: ACC 218 . (3 crs.) (S)
ACC 441. AUDITING. Internal control evaluation and financial compliance, professional ethics, auditing
standards and procedures, statistical sampling and EDP auditing . Prerequisite: ACC 301 (3 crs.) (F)
ACC 491. ACCOUNTING INTERNSHIP. Prscticum with Public Accounting firms , government, or industry.
Prerequisites: 18 credits in Accounting and consent of instructor. (Repeatable; Variable credit; a maximum of 12
credit■ may be used towards a baccalaureate degree.) (F,S)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
149
BUSINESS COURSES (BUS)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
BUS 100. INI'RODUCTION TO BUSINESS. The internal and functional actting of busincaa cnterpriac, ita
organization and control (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 242. BUSINESS LAW I. A study of commercial law as it relates to contracta, agency and criminal and
constitutional law pertaining to business. Prerequisites: BUS 100 and at least sophomore standing (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 243. BUSINESS LAW D. A continuation of Business Law I. Basic legal conccpta of sale,, commercial
paper, accurcd transitions and related topic ■. Prerequisite: BUS 242. (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 271. ANALYTICAL METHODS. The courac prcacnta mathematical tool, which arc applied to bu1inc11
decision making. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or EC(? 201 and MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.)
BUS 342. BUSINESS, SOCIETY AND GOVERNMENT. A survey of the historical and contemporary
rclatiomhip between government and busincaa in the United States. Special emphasis is given to the dcvclopmcnta
of the past two decades. Prerequisite: At least Junior standing and ECO 100 or equivalent. (3 en.) (F,S)
BUS 343 . CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY. Incorporating the concept of social responsibility or
corporate social responsiveness in the corporate busincaa atrategy; how to aaacaa organizational performance on
social issue, and design information systems to monitor policies in a large complex organization; the identification
of the stages that this process goes through and the characteristic problems and tasks aaaociatcd with each stage;
the evolution and/or design of structures and procedures for making the handling of social i88Uca consistent with
business strategies. Prerequisite: Junior standing. (3 en.) (S)
BUS 379 . SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN BUSINESS. (3 en.)
BUS 492. BUSINESS INTERNSHIP. The student ia placed with a buaincaa firm, a bank, a govemmcntagency,
or a non-profit organization for on-the-job and/or counaclling experience. It offen a practical training ground for
students, which supplemcnta academic training by permitting them to addrcsa actual problems in a real busincsa
environment. Prerequisite: Senior standing or permisaion of instructor. (Repeatable; Variable credit; a maximum
of 12 credits may be uacd to a baccalaureate degree.) (F,S)
BUS 495 . SEMINAR IN BUSINESS . An intensive examination of aclectcd subjects from the general field of
busincsa. Prerequisite: Conacnt of instructor. Thia courac is repeatable one time if the subject matter i, different
(3 era.)
ECONOMICS COURSES (ECO)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
ECO 100. ELEMENTS OF ECONOMICS. An introduction to the clements of economic analysis, structured
particularly for the non-major; the student is exposed to the mechanics of the market system and a survey of
modem macroeconomic theory and policy. Prerequisite: None. (3 en.) (F,S)
ECO 200. CURRENT ECONOMIC ISSUES . An application to contemporary economic principle,. Current
readings in economics arc examined . Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 . (3 en.) (Summer)
150
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
ECO 201. INTRODUCTORY MICROECONOMICS . An introduction to the market mechanism in a modem
mixed economy; aupply and demand analyaia i■ applied to consumer market■ aa well aa re■ource markets. (3 en.)
(F,S)
ECO 202. INTRODUCTORY MACROECONOMICS. An introduction to the determination of national income;
problems of inflation and unemployment; international tnde and economic growth. Emphaaia ia placed on the role■
of monetary and fi■cal policy in the conduct of macroeconomic policy. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 i■
recommended. (3 en.) (F,S)
ECO 242. GOVERNMENT AND BUSINESS . A ■tudy of the legal framework: within which buaineu operates,
including the Sherman Anti-Trust Act, Clayton Act, Robimon-Patmon Act, Federal Trade Act, and other newer
forma of BOCial control reJUlation. The course explores the relationahipa between government and bu■ineu:
government aa reJUlator, subsidizer, partner, and competition. Prerequisite: ECO 201. (3 en.)
ECO 251. DEVELOPMENT OF THE AMERICAN ECONOMY. A aurvey of the beginning, development, and
growth of the American economy with emphasis on the busineu sector. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 or
ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 301. INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS . An analysis of the theories of consumer behavior and of
firma in the allocation of re■ourcea, and of general price and distribution theory, with application to current
economic iuuea . Prerequisite■: ECO 201, ECO 202 or permiuion of instructor. (3 era.) (F)
ECO 302. INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS. Analy ■ia of the determination of national income,
employment and price level■. Di ■cu1Sion of consumption, investment, inflation, and government fi■cal and monetary
policy. Prerequisite: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 era.) (S)
ECO 304. MONEY AND BANKING. Relation of money and credit to economic activity and prices; impact of
public policy in financial markets and for good■ and aervices; policies, structure and the functions of the Federal
Reaerve System; organization, operation■, and functions of the commercial banking system, 11 related to queationa
of economic stability and public policy. Prerequi■itea: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 era.) (F,S)
ECO 307. STATE AND LOCAL FINANCE. Principle ■ and problems of financing state and local government■.
Topics include taxation, expenditures, intergovernmental pnt■, and governmental fiscal relations . Prerequisite:
ECO 100 or equivalent. (3 crs.)
ECO 311. LABOR ECONOMICS. An introduction to labor economic ■, theories of the labor movement, the
American labor movement, wage and employment theory, comparative labor movement■ and tnde union impact
on wages, price■, and national income. Prerequisite,: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 crs.) (F,S)
ECO 320. MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS. A course designed to enable Economics and Busine88 majors to
understand the simpler aspects of mathematical economics. Relationahipa of functions and graphs, simultaneous
equations, maximization technique■, and thoae part■ of algebra and calculus required for economic analysis are
preaented. Prerequiaites: ECO 201, ECO 202 and MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 crs.) (F)
ECO 322._ MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS. A aurvey of analytical techniques available to the modem bu1ine11
manager. Topica include economic■ for managers; busine88 forecasting; coat and production functions; industrial
pricing; profit planning; business decision making. Prerequisites: BUS 271 or ECO 320, or a course in calculus.
(3 crs.) (S)
ECO 331. REGIONAL ECONOMICS. An introduction to regional analysis: theories of city locations and
hierarchies, industrial location patterns, land-uae patterns, the short-run impact of industrial change upon
employment in one community and on long-run differentials of per capita income between regions. Prerequisite■:
ECO 201 and ECO 202. (3 crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
151
ECO 342. ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS. Environmental pollution, failure of the market 1y1tcm, and
optimum re1011rce allocation; levela of pollution abatement and public policy; energy and public policy.
Prerequi1ite: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 3Sl. COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS . An analysis of the inatitutional atructure of each type of
economy and understanding of the reasona for the aimilaritiea and difference, of inatitutional llructures by
comparing capitalill, aocialiat, and communill economic ayatcma. Prerequisite&: ECO 100, or ECO 201 , or ECO
202. (3 en.)
ECO 379. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN ECONOMICS. Thia counc is designed to meet the changing intereata of
atudenta and faculty. Topica vary in reaponac to thoac intercata. Prerequiaitea: ECO 201 , ECO 202 or permiaaion
of inatructor. (Variable credit.)
ECO 401. INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION. Analysia of market atructure and ita relation to market performance,
changing atructure of U.S. induatry, and pricing policies in different indullrial claasificationa of monopoly and
competition in relation to the problema of public policy . Prerequiaite: ECO 201 . (3 en.)
ECO 40S. PUBLIC FINANCE. A atudy of the role of federal , atate, and local govemrnenta in meeting public
wanta. Topic• include analysis of tax theory and policy, government expenditures, public debt management,
government budgeting, benefit coat analysis and income redillribution. Prerequisites: ECO 201 , ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 421 . APPLIED ECONOMETRICS . The formulation, ellimation and testing of economic models. Topics
include aingle variable and multiple variable regression techniques, ellimation of lagged relationships, uac of
dummy variables, problema of multicolincarity and autocorrelation and syatcm of equationa. Prerequisites: MAT
22S, ECO 201 and ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 431. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS. A descriptive and theoretical analysis of international trade,
balance of payment accounta, comparative coata, mechanisma of international financial relationa. Prerequisites:
ECO 201 , ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 433·. ECONOMICS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT. Undentanding of the obstacles to economic
growth, requirementa for ,rowth, and other topics related to economic growth in underdeveloped countries.
Prerequi1ite1: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 4S l . HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT. An extensive survey of the development of economic thought
from ancient time• to the prcacnt stressing the contributions of Smith, Ricardo, Marx, Marshall and Keynes . This
counc lhould be taken quite late in the undergraduate career. Prerequisites: ECO 201, ECO 202. (3 en.)
ECO 479. HONORS COURSE IN ECONOMICS . Integrated reading under staff direction. Selected topics are
investigated and written reporta are submitted. Prerequisites: ECO 201, ECO 202 or permission of instructor.
The counc ia repeatable for one time if counc contenta arc different. (3 en.)
ECO 490. COMMUNITY RESOURCES WORKSHOP. A worklhop that expoacs teachen to various community
re1011rce1 and encourages their implementation into educational programa. Emphasis is placed on the economic
aapecta of community life with approximately twenty-five houn of classroom economics supplementing numerous
field tripa and lectures. This is not a repeatable counc . Prerequisites: Senior standing or college degree. (6 en.)
ECO 492. ECONOMICS INTERNSHIP. The atudent ia placed with a business firm, a bank, and induatrial firm,
a government office, a health care facility or a similar institution for on-the-job experiences related to classroom
counc work. This counc lhould be taken quite late in the undergraduate career. Credit houn will range from
1 to 12 depending upon the nature of the particular usignment. Prerequisite: Senior standing or permission of
inatructor. A maximum of 12 crcdita can be uacd toward the completion of degree. (Variable credit.) (F,S)
152
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
ECO 495. SEMINAR IN ECONOMICS. An intensive examination of aclected subject.a from the fields of
Economic,, Management, Buainc11 and Labor Relations. It ia a repeatable courac if courac content.a arc different .
Prerequisite: Permiuion of instructor. (3 en.)
FINANCE COURSES (FIN)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
FIN 201 . INTRODUCTION TO FINANCE. A survey courac which coven an introduction to financial market.a
and institutions responsible for the flow of fund ■ in the economy. The basic principles and concept.a which assist
the market participant.a in making sound financial decisions arc discussed. Prerequisite: BUS 100 and ECO 100
recommended . (3 era.) (S)
FIN 211. PERSONAL MONEY MANAGEMENT. A guide to penonal finance to beat meet one's objectives and
make financial decisions easier. Topics include budget.a, major purchaacs, use of credit and bank loans, insurance,
real estate and investment in securities, taxes and estate planning. Prerequisite: ECO 100 or permi11ion of
instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
FIN 301. FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT. The study of financial analysis, planning and control, including
working capital management, capital budgeting, coat of capital, and other selected subjects. Advanced techniques
of financial analysis arc employed. Prerequisites: ECO 201 and MAT 171 . MAT 225 is recommended . (3 en.)
(F,S)
FIN 302. ADV AN CED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT. A continuation of FIN 301. An intensive study of cost
of capital, long-term financing and analysis of caac1 relating to financial decisions of firms . Prerequisite: FIN 301 .
(3 en .) (S)
FIN 305. INVESTMENTS. An introduction to financial investments. Topics include accurities and securities
markets, invelltment risks, returns and constraints, portfolio policies, and institutional investment policies.
Prerequisite: MAT 171 and MAT 225 or permi11ion of instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
FIN 341 . INSURANCE AND RISK MANAGEMENT. A survey of the nature and significance of risk and the
basic ideas, problems, and principles found in modem insurance and other methods of handling risk. Prerequisite:
BUS 100 (3 en.) (Summer)
FIN 351 . REAL EST ATE FUNDAMENTALS. A basic cognitive courac covering physical, legal and economic
aspects of real estate. Topics include valuation, agreements of sale, title, leasing, settlements and landlord-tenant
relations . (2 en.) (F)
FIN 352. REAL ESTATE PRACTICE. Role of the real estate agent in listing, sales contract, financing, and
completion ofRESPA approved settlement sheet. The course examines the legal and ethical aspects of brokerage .
(2 en.) (S)
FIN 405. ADVANCED INVESTMENT ANALYSIS. Systematic approach to security analysis and valuation;
portfolio conatruction and management. Prerequisite; FIN 305 or permission of instructor. (3 en .)
FIN 411. FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS. Description and analysis of major financial
institutions, money and capital markets. Current topics in financial market and institutions. (3 en.) (S)
FIN 531. BANK MANAGEMENT. Detailed analysis of operational decisions faced by bank managers in the
areas of loans, investments, sources of funds, and liability management. (3 crs.) (S)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
153
MANAGEMENT COURSES (MGT)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
MGT 201. PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT. A survey of the theories in the field of management, covering
concepts developed by the classical school, the behavionl school, and the management science school. Emphasis
i1 on human facton, but the influences of economic• and technological facton are alao conaidered. Prerequisite:
PSY 100 or conaent of inatructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 205. ENTREPRENEURSHIP I: SMALL BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS . Entrepreneunhip and new
venture initiation. A atudy of the development of a business appropriate to the objectives and reaourcea of the
individual entrepreneur. This coune deals with the initiation of a new business venture nther than the management
of ongoing enterprises, and treats new venture fonnation primarily from the standpoint of the individual
entrepreneur nther than that of an established enterprise expanding into a new area. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3
en.)
MGT 271 . COMPUTER. APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS I. An introduction to the basic tools and techniques
of aoftware uaed to aolve business problems. This coune is taught on a lecture-labontory basis in which the
computer i1 utilized to present applicationa of the spreadsheet in business situations. (I er.) (F,S)
MGT 273 . COMPUTER. APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS Il. A continuation of Computer Applications in
Bu1ine11 I with an emphasi1 on more advanced topics and problem-aolving. This coune is taught on a
lecture-labontory basi1 in which the computer ia utilized to present applications of the spreadsheet in busine11
aituationa. (1 er.) (F)
MGT 301. ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR. An examination of theories and concepts relating the individual
to the organization. The coune analyzes the forces which influence behavior within an organization. Prerequisite:
MGT 201 or consent of instructor. (3 crs.) (F,S)
MGT 305. ENTREPRENEURSHIP Il: SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT. A management coune designed
to integnte all busineaa functions at a small business level. Study of the development and management of a
busine11 plan appropriate to the objectives and reaources of the individual entrepreneur. This coune deals with
the management of ongoing enterprises. A computer aoftware package is utilized to develop various cases and
problems found in the text. Each atudent develops a business plan in either Retailing Opentions, Service Business,
or Manufacturing Opentions. Prerequisite: MGT 205 . (3 crs.)
MGT 311. ORGANIZATION THEORY AND DESIGN. Organizations are essential to the way our aociety
opente1 and permeate and shape our lives. In addition to being the means for providing goods and services,
organizations create the settings in which moll people will spend a good part of their lives working either as
subordinates or managers or both. This coune offers students an understanding of the components that make up
an organization, its complexity, its structure and design and the interrelationships that exist among all of its
components. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3 crs.)
MGT 315. ORGANIZATION DEVEWPMENT AND CHANGE. Change pervades modem aociety. All
organizationa exill within a changing environment. To survive and develop, organizations mull be able to adapt
to these change, and respond to opportunities for growth. Change is also an inherent aspect of management.
Managen mull understand and manage change if the organization is to thrive and grow. This coune is about
planned organization change and is designed to introduce the atudent to the field of organization development, its
definition, 1oal1, precedents, emergence, approaches, and current status. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3 en.)
154
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
MGT 352. HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT. Decision-making and analyse■ of major management
problema that arise in manpower planning, recruitment, selection, development, compensation, and appraiaal of
employee■ in various organization■. Prerequisite: MGT 201. (3 en.) (S)
MGT 353 . COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT. The design, implementation and evaluation of wage and aalary
package in both private and public sccton. Prcrequi,ite: MGT 352 or consent of instructor. (F)
MGT 362. LABOR RELATIONS . A survey of the many facet, of employee-management relation■ . The counc
examine■ the historical, atatutory and aocial bases for modem workplace relationships with empha■ia given to the
role of organized labor. Prerequisite: Junior level atanding or consent of instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 371. MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS. An introduction to management control ay ■tcms ,
which include control of production com, atandard co■u, flexible budget,, managed cosll, profit centen and capital
acquisition■. Prerequisite: MGT 201, CSC 101, or MGT 271. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 373 . COMPUTER BASED MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS. An introduction to the
technology, application, and management of computer-baaed information systems. Topic ■ covered include bu ■ineu
computer ay■tcms, computer hardware, computer aoftwarc, data-based management ay&tcms, general accounting
application, materials control application, management information proceuing, ay&tcms planning, and operation■
management. The counc usca LITTUS 1-2-3. Prcrequi1ite1: CSC IOI, MGT 371. (3 en.)
MGT 402. STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT. The integrated decision making of general management. Topic,
include corporate strategy and implementing corporate ■trategy . Prerequisites: MGT 201, MKT 301, FIN 301,
ACC 202. or consent of instructor. (3 en.) (F,S)
MGT 431 . INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT. The concepll, problems and policies of international
business enterprises for managen. Prerequisite: Junior level atanding . (3 en.) (F)
MGT 452. HUMAN RESOURCE STRATEGY AND PLANNING . The human resource ia emerging a■ a
1i1nificant contingency in the formulation and implementation of organizational ■trategic plan■. Personnel policies
and proirama a■ well a■ the available 1kil11, knowledge, and attitude ■ can provide particular opportunitie■ or
limitation■ to management as an organization■'• ■trategic 1oals and plan■ arc defined. This counc is de ■igned to
examine organizational human resources manaiement from a strategic perspective. The key focu ■ i ■ on exploring
HR planning and atnte,Y concept,, developUJi an undentandilli of the related analytical tools, and determining
how these concept, and tools can be used to enhance an or,anization's competitive position. Prcrequi■ite: MGT
352. (3 en.)
MGT 492. SMALL BUSINESS INTERNSHIP. A pro,ram in which busineu majon intern with a local firm for
a scme■ter. Student, draw upon their academic knowledge to aid the local enterprise in ita over-all operation. The
type and scope of the problems vary with each individual ■ituation. The counc i ■ open to student, with junior or
senior atanding who have submitted a formal application, have the recommendation of a faculty member, and have
a aatiafactory Q.P.A. (Repeatable; Variable credit; a maximum of 12 credit, can be used toward the completion
of a baccalaureate degree .)
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
155
MARKETING COURSES (MKT)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
MKT 222. PRINCIPLES OF SELLING . A lltlldy of basic principles of persuasive communications with emphasis
on proven, pnctical selling techniques. Activities include intenctive claaa discu88ions and video role-playing. (3
en.) (F,S)
MKT 301. PRINCIPLES OF MARKIITING. An introduction to basic principle, of marketilli manaaement.
Other topic, covered are selecting target market■ , developing marketing mixes, functions of marketing management.
Prerequisite: ECO 100 or ECO 201 and MOT 201. (3 en.) (F,S)
MKT 321. SALES MANAGEMENT. Proven management techniques for remotely located field aalc■ force
member, are fully explored. Motivation, evaluation, and control of aales force activitie1 are developed through case
presentations and class discussions. Prerequisites: MKT 222. (3 en.) (F,S)
MKT 331. RETAILING. A management and marketing analysis of department, discount, specialty and chain stores
with special emphasis on location, human re10Urces, merchandising and effective pricing. Prerequisite: BUS 100
recommended. (3 en.)
MKT 341. MARKIITING FOR NON-PROFIT ORGANIZATIONS. A marketing coune de1igned for both
busine11 and nonbusiness majon that differentiates between for-profit and not-for-profit organiutions, investigates
the competitive environment facing nonprofits (e.g., hospital ■, churches, charities, college1,and univenities
performing arts groups), and applies research techniques and marketing management tools (product policy,
distribution and delivery systems, monetary pricing, and communication atntegies) to the nonbusines■ entity. (3
en.) (S)
MKT 351 . ADVERTISING MANAGEMENT. A study of the basic component■ of the adverti1ing mix,
establishing media selection techniques, and determining the beat vehicles for specific selling and promotional
efforts commonly confronting marketing managen today. Prerequisite: MKT 301. (F)
MKT 402. MARKIITING MANAGEMENT. Description and analysis of the nature, atntegie1 and techniques
of marketilli management. Prerequisite: Principles of Marketing (MKT 301). (3 en.) (F)
MKT 421. CONSUMER BEHAVIOR. Thi• coune ia designed to integnte the discipline, of psychology,
anthropology, economics and sociology with marketing to explain, undentand, and predict consumer deci1ions.
Thia ia achieved by exploring both the theoretical and pnctical implications of (1) individual behavior variables
such as motivation, learning, perception, penonality, and attitudes; (2) group influence, 111ch a, family, culture,
social claaa and reference group behavior; and (3) consumer deci1ion proce1■e1 111ch H cognitive di110nance, bnnd
loyalty, new product adoption and risk reduction. Prerequisite: MKT 301. (3 en.) (S)
MKT. 431. MARKETING RESEARCH. Description of behavionl and statistical tools for designing and
implementing research projects. Prerequisite■ : Principles of Marketing (MKT 301) and Busine ■■ Statistic ■ (MAT
225). (3 en.) (S)
MKT 451 . BUSINESS MARKIITING . The chancteriatic1 of bu1ineaa-to-bu1ineaa markctilli are explored and
developed focu1ing on environment, pricing, planning, distribution, evaluation and atntegy development for
marketing bu1ine11 and industrial producu to the professional user or buyer. Prerequi1ite: MKT 301. (3 en.) (S)
CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES
156
CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES (CCU)
One credit may be scheduled each semester in any one of the following. An activity may
be repeated in a following semester, but a total of no more than four credits towards
graduation may be earned in this way. These activities always count as "free electives" and
never towards fulfilling the requirements in any area of speciali:zation.
CCU 103. CO-EDUCATIONAL WEIGHT LIFTING AND CONDmONING (1 er.)
CCU 151. SHOTOKAN KARATE. Shotolcan Karate ia divided into three categoric■: Kihon (basic bloclca,
punches, kick, and stances); Kata (pre-arranged forms simulating combat aituationa); Kum.ie (sparring) . In each
category the beginner ia given inatruction at the moll basic level until the techniques become apontaneou1. (I er.)
CCU 187. PEP BAND. The Pep Band i1 composed of bra11, woodwind and percuaaionilll from the Univenity
Band. Thia enaemble performs at selected basketball games. (1 er., spring semeller)
CCU 188. WOODWIND ENSEMBLE. The Woodwind Ensemble ia composed of woodwind playen from the
Univenity Band . It explore■ all phase ■ of literature composed for this type of enaemble. The group rehearses one
hours a week and performs both on and off campus. (1 er.)
CCU 189. BRASS ENSEMBLE. The Braaa Ensemble ia composed ofbraaa players from the Univenity Band.
It explores all phase, of literature composed for thia type of enaemble. The group rehearse• one hour a week and
performs both on and off campus. (1 er.)
CCU 197. UNIVERSITY BAND. The University Band follows two curricula determined by the semeater. During
the fall semester, the University Band performs at football games and parade■ and is the featured exhibition band
at numerous marching band festivals . Membenhip in this enaemble ia open to any interested inatrumentalill.
Membership is alao open to those wishing to audition for feature twirler or for a position on the Silk Squad, Dance
Line or Rifle Line. During the spring semeater, the University Band performs literature which encompaue1 all
facets of the idiom. This enaemble performs at convocationa and concerts, both on and off campus. (I er.)
CCU 198. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY CHOIR. The California Univenity Choir provide, an opportunity for
students to sing a wide variety of music from the contemporary aa well aa the traditional repertoire. They perform
frequently on campue and throughout he area . Membership in the Choir ia elective; auditiona are not required . (1
er.)
CCU 199. CALIFORNIA SINGERS . The California Singers is a small performing ensemble. Membership in the
group is determined by audition. There are an equal number of men and women. The basic performance style
is that of a jazz/show choir, although other styles of music are performed when appropriate for the aeaaon or the
audience. Smaller groups, such aa a women's trio or a men'• barbershop quartet, are formed within this group .
Choreography is a regular part of the performances presented by this group. (1 er.)
CCU 292. STUDENT GOVERNMENT. Student Congre11 ia the official student governing body. Thia course
provides non-elected and elected studenta the opportunity to earn co-<:urricular credit while participating in Student
Congress. Students learn and practice leadership and administrative skills, implement programa that enrich campua
life and communicate atudent concerna to administrative and faculty peraonnel. (I er.)
CCU 293 . PUBLICATIONS: NEWSPAPER (1 er.)
CO-CURRRICULAR ACTIVITIES
157
CCU 295. PUBLICATIONS: "PEGASUS" (1 er.)
CCU 333 . RADIO STATION (Y{YCS). A student enrolled in this co-curricular course is introduced to broadcast
radio. The student becomes involved with on-air requirements as well as basic news and production techniques.
AJI work takes place at WVCS, the University's 3300-watt FM Station, which is owned and operated by the Student
Association, Inc . (1 er.)
CCU 379 . INTER-RESIDENCE HALL COUNCIL. The council is a representative group of students elected from
the six residence halls. Students taking this course assist in the governance of this organization and participate in
a number of the organization's service projects. (1 er.)
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
158
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
(Formerly Speech Communication)
COMMUNICATION STUDIES
-GENERAL
- RADIO AND TELEVISION
- PUBLIC RELATIONS
See also Secondary Communication Certification, pages 164-165, in this catalog.
Assistant Professor Dencil K. Backus, chair; Assistant Professor Patrick L. Miller, assistant
chair. Professor Marcella A. Rye Blout; Associate Professors Robert C. Cowles, Halbert
H. Holloway, J. Drew McGukin; Assistant Professors Sylvia L. Foil, MacDonald N. Kale,
Patricia Milford, George Yochum; Instructor James 0. Carter.
PURPOSE
Communication Studies is the discipline which focuses on human communicative
behavior and its influence on our personal, professional, social and cultural lives. The
curriculum provides the student with an opportunity (a) to understand more fully the human
communication process and how it affects the ways people interact with one another, and
(b) to develop communication skills which enhance the individual person's capacity to
function as a citizen in the world community.
PROGRAM
Students majoring in Communication Studies have four academic program options. (1)
The General Option provides the major with a core of general courses as well as a number
of restricted and open electives. This option is appropriate for those who wish to further
their educational careers in such areas as socio-political influence, rhetoric, or organizational
communication. (2) The Radio/felevision Option emphasizes the application of information
and theories learned in the classroom to the practice of production and critical decisionmaking. This option is appropriate for persons pursuing a career in telecommunications and
broadcast journalism. (3) The Public Relations Option is interdisciplinary in nature, since
courses are taken in disciplines such as English, Business and Psychology. (4) The fourth
option is for persons who want to teach in the area of Communication. The Communication
Studies Department in cooperation with the College of Education and Human Services
provides course work necessary for secondary school certification in Communication with
a speech concentration.
The academic program is enhanced by an internship program with radio and television
broadcast facilities. The TV studio supports campus efforts in video production. Students
have an opportunity to receive "hands-on" experience in conceiving, producing and editing
programs.
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
159
Radio station WVCS is owned and operated by California University's Student
Association, Incorporated. A faculty member from the Department of Communication
Studies serves as the educational advisor to the station. Students can become involved in
all aspects of radio programming and management.
Internships are available to students in their junior or senior year if they have
maintained a 3.0 grade point average or higher in their area of concentration.
HONOR SOCIETY
Pi Kappa Delta (IIIU) is the honor society for intercollegiate debaters, individual evl?nts
competitors, and teachers of communication. The Penn Zeta Chapter was organized in
1963. Undergraduate students can achieve membership in this society if they meet the
minimum standards of forensic participation and are extended an invitation to join. Further
information can be obtained at the departmental office.
AWARDS
Each year the faculty in Communication Studies selects one of the graduating seniors
as an Outstanding Graduate. The honoree receives a plaque, a one-year membership in the
Speech Communication Association, the national organization for communication
professionals, and a one-year subscription to one of its five professional journals.
CAREERS
Aside from careers in broadcast journalism or public relations, graduates can obtain
positions with management training programs, as speech writers and as salespeople. An
undergraduate major in Communication Studies is an asset for careers in law, religion,
education, labor relations, politics, marketing and resource development.
I
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES:
GENERAL OPfION
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: MAJOR COURSES : Perspectives on Communication (COM 100), Oral
Communication (COM l Ol); Fundamentals of Group Discussion (COM l 07); Interpersonal Communication (COM
165); Forensic Worbhop I (COM 192) and Il (COM 292) AND m (COM 392); Introduction To Oral Interpretation
(COM 224); Argumentation and Debate (COM 230); Language and Behavior (COM 315); Persuasion (COM 350);
Speech Criticism (COM 460); Communication Research Techniques (COM 481); Communication Theory (COM
490); RESTRICTED ELECTIVES: 9 additional credits in Communication Studies courses: Voice and Articulation
(COM 210) or Advanced Oral Interpretation (COM 324); Survey of R/rV/Film (COM 105) or TV Production
(COM 240) or Radio Production (COM 245); Presidential Rhetoric (COM 235) or Freedom of Speech (COM 260).
COGNATE COURSES: 23 credits from other disciplines pertinent to the student's academic or profenional
objective.
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
160
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES:
RADIO AND TELEVISION OPTION
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: Composition 1-ll (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanitie1; 12 credits of Natural
Sciencea; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Coocentration: MAJOR COURSES : Oral Communication (COM 101); Survey of Radio,
Televi■ion, and Film (COM 105); Fundamental• of Diacuaaion (COM 107); Introduction to Oral Interpretation
(COM 224); Radio Workahop (COM 196,296 or 396); Televiaion Workahop (COM 195,295 or 395); Forenaic
Workahop I (COM 192); Introduction to Televiaion Production (COM 240); Introduction to Radio Production
(COM 245); Radio and Televi1ion Announcing (COM 246); Radio and Televiaion Writing of New1 (COM 332)
or Drama (COM 335) or Commercials (COM 331); Broadcast Management (COM 355); Appreciation of Film
(COM 360); Communication Theory (COM 490) . RESTRICTED ELECTIVES: 9 additional credits of
Communication Studies courses. RELATED COURSES : 23 credits from otherdiaciplines relevant to a student' •
academic or profeaaional interest.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES:
PUBLIC RELATIONS OPI'ION
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: Composition 1-ll (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective■.
(B) Area ofCoocentration: MAJOR COURSES (42 en.) : Penpective1 on Communication (COM 100),
Oral Communication (COM 101), Fundamentals of Diacuaaion (COM 107), lnterpenonal Communication (COM
165), Introduction to Public Relationa (COM 203), Public Relationa Applicationa (COM 303), Language and
Behavior (COM 315), R/fV Writing: Commercial• (COM 331) or R/fV Writing: News (COM 332), Persuasion
(COM 350), Communication Research Technique■ (COM 481), Public Relationa Cases, Problems, and Campaigna
(COM 483), Communication Theory (COM 490), Newswriting (ENG 307) or Feature Writing (ENG 311), and
Advertising (ENG 437). RESTRICTED and RELATED ELECTIVES (26 er. hn.) to be chosen from the following
lists: Three to six credit houn from the following group: R/fV Commercials (COM 331), R/fV Writing: New■
(COM 332), Busineaa Writing I (ENG 211), Feature Writing (ENG 311), Advanced Writing (ENG 375), or
Copywriting (ENG 401) . Six to nine credits from the following group : Elements of Economic ■ (ECO 100),
Principles of Management (MGT 201), Introduction to Public Administration (POS 220), Principle■ of Marketing
(MKT 301), Busineaa, Society and Government (BUS 342) . Three to six credits from the following group : Social
Psychology (PSY 211), Industrial Psychology (PSY 209), Interviewing Skills (PSY 370), Psychology of Social
Control (PSY 455) . Three to ■ix credit houn from the following group : Graphic Communicationa I (IND 140),
Photography (IND 145) , Principles of Layout and Design (GCT 225). Up to eight credits for Practicum in
Communication Studies (COM 491).
COMMUNICATION STUDIES COURSES (COM)
Introductory courses are indicated by a plus sign ( + ).
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
+COM 100. PERSPECTIVES ON COMMUNICATION. An introductory course intended primarily for majon
in Communication Studie1. The course explains the many penpectives from which communication may be studied
and servea a1 an introduction to the diacipline. (3 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
161
+COM 101. ORAL COMMUNICATION. Designing, reheaning, and delivering extemporaneou1 llpee(:hea to
facilitate solvina ,roup and public problems; reporting and evaluating other 1peaken' intent, content, fonnat, and
delivery. (3 en.) F, S
+COM 102. GROUP DISCUSSION: MANAGEMENT. Participation in, and analy■i■ of, ,roup deciaion-making
proceases to develop communication and liatening ■kill ■ in group ■ituation■ , to develop an undentanding of the role
of small ,roup communication in bu■ineu and to identify and develop ■tylea and function■ of ,roup leadenhip. (3
en.) F, S (Nonnally for non-Communicationmajon)
+COM 105. SURVEY OF RADIO, TELEVISION, AND FILM. Introduction to communication in radio,
television, and film ; effecta of mas■ media on the audience and the individual; role of mau media in news,
documentariea, commercial■ , and entertainment broadcasting. (3 en.) F
+ COM 107. FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCUSSION. Introduction to group forma, techniques, participation, and
chainnanahip in infonnal and formal di ■cu11ion■ of contemporary iuues. (3 en.) F, S
+COM 165. INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION. This course seeks to help the ■tudent develop an
awareneu of the nature and complexity of interpenonal communication, recognize how perception of the self
affecta the ability to relate to othen, and gain an undentandina of those elementa that llhape the interpenonal
communication proceu. (3 en.) F, S
COM 192,292,392.
FORENSIC WORKSHOP.
Practical experience in debate, individual
■peaking ,
and
parliamentary procedure. (l er.) F, S
COM 195,295,395. TELEVISION WORKSHOP. Opportunities for "hands-on" television production experience
with both TV ■tudio and portable equipment. (I er.) F , S
COM 196,296,396. RADIO WORKSHOP. Practice in using equipment; projecta in radio . (1 er.) F, S
COM 203. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC RELATIONS . Examines PR as the communication function that
allow■ organization■ to interface with their environmenta and publics. It de■cribea the public relation■ procesa 11
well as ita hiatory, the guiding principles and concepta of organizational advocacy, and explores the various career
opportunitiea in the field . (3 en.) F
COM 210. VOICE AND ARTICULATION. Introduction to phonetics and to voice production and control, with
exercises to develop adequate quality, loudne11, pitch, rate, and articulation. (3 en.) F
+COM 224. INTRODUCTION TO ORAL INTERPRETATION. Technique ■ of di ■covering denotative and
connotative meanings in literature for presentation to liatenen; solo presentation■ of different literary forma . (3 en.)
F, S
COM 230. ARGUMENTATION AND DEBATE. Logical advocacy: briefing and aupporting logically adequate
cases advocating propo■itions of policy; negative positions; exposing fallacious evidence and reasoning; refutation
and rebuttal. Application■ to inte~ollegiate and mass media topics . Prerequisites: COM 101 or 250 or consent
of in■tructor. (3 en.) F
COM 235 . PRESIDENTIAL RHETORIC, 1960 TO THE PRESENT. A
■tudy
of the written texta, audio tapes,
and video tape ■ of selected speeche■ by American presidenta. The course explore■ the u ■e of rhetoric in campaigns,
in governance and in cri ■e ■ by the presidenta in order to illu ■trate contemporary political apeaking and ia an
examination of how to undentand and evaluate presidential speaking. (3 en.) S
COM 240. INTRODUCTION TO TELEVISION PRODUCTION.
Fundamental■ of televi■ion p~uction,
including the use of equipment. Producing, directing, and evaluating programs. (3 en.) F, S
162
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
COM 245 . INTRO TO RADIO PRODUCTION. A study of FCC rules and regulations as they apply to the radio
broadcaster; study of and practice on broadcast equipment; radio programming and production of 1everal type• of
programa. (3 crs.) F, S
COM 246. RADIO AND TELEVISION ANNOUNCING. Theories and practice of gathering, evaluating,
writing, and delivering newacasts, sports, commercials, interviews, for radio and television audiences. Prerequisites:
COM 240 or 245 or coD1Cnt of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
+ COM 250. ORAL COMMUNICATION: MANAGEMENT. Develops an awarene88 of and an appreciation for
communication in the business world; preparing and pre1enting oral reports and speechea deaigned especially for
persons who function in organizations, bu1ine11e1, or industries. (3 crs.) F, S (Normally for norH:ommunication
~~
.
COM 260. FREEDOM OF SPEECH. History of free speech in the world, with special attention to its
development in the United States; legal decisions in contemporary attacks upon and attempts to expand the principle
of freedom of speech. (3 crs.) S
COM 270. APPRECIATION OF TELEVISION. Development of critical skill in evaluating various kinda of
programming from commercial and public television sources; of awareness of individual viewers responaibility
toward influencing the nature and quality of programming; of ability to utilize TV as a source of information,
opinion, and entertainment. (3 en.) S
COM 303. PUBLIC RELATIONS APPLICATIONS . This course seeks to develop the production skills neceuary
to function in an entry-level public relationa position. Many assignments will help students develop: (1) proficiency
using the host of vehicles PR practitioners use, and (2) a portfolio. Effort will be made to create an atmosphere
similar to the first job in PR. The instructor will be the first PR supervisor-the boss-editing the work, criticizing
style, asking for research; forcing the student to plan, analyze, write, rewrite, prepare, repair, organize, and
reorganize. Prerequisite: COM 203 . (3 crs.) F , S
COM 315 . LANGUAGE AND BEHAVIOR. Developing language habits that improve acnsory and aymbolic
perception, inference-making, evaluation, and conflict management/resolution. Prerequisite: COM 165 or coD1Cnt
of instructor. (3 crs.) S
COM 324. ADV AN CED ORAL INTERPRETATION. Detailed analysis and evaluation of literary forma .
Creative experimentation in adapting performing literature for solo and group presentations. Prerequisite: COM
224 . (3 en.) S
COM 331. RADIO AND TELEVISION COMMERCIALS . The writing of commercial mcuages in varying
lengths for both radio and television, including preparation of storyboards. Prerequisites: COM 240 or 245 or
coD1Cnt of the instructor. (3 en.) S
COM 332. RADIO AND TELEVISION WRITING: NEWS.
The wntmg of news, commentary and
documentary, acripts for radio and television; includes the press conference. Prerequisites: COM 240 or 245 or
coD1Cnt of the instructor. (3 en.) F
COM 335 . RADIO AND TELEVISION WRITING: DRAMA. Writing and analyzingteleplays, film and/or radio
plays for understanding of dramatic composition and unique needs of specific writing genres and audiences. (3 en.)
s
COM 340. ADV AN CED TV PRODUCTION . Further application of techniques and skills learned in COM 240
with additional practical experience in TV program production and editing. Prerequisite: COM 240. (3 en.) S
COM 345 . ADVANCED RADIO PRODUCTION. Primarily for majors in Communication Studiea with an
emphasis on Media . Its purpose is to offer a "hands on" course rather than a technical theory treatise. Students
will develop and implement projects. Prerequisite : COM 245. (3 crs.) F
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION STUDIES
163
COM 350. PERSUASION. Methods of changing attitudes and behaviors through communication; analy1i1 of
individual,, audience,, occasion■, and subjects for persuasive appeal,. Study of logical and paychological
arrangements and the ethics of persuading and being persuaded. Preparation of persuasive speeches. Prerequisites:
COM 101 or 250 or con■ent of in■tructor. (3 en.) S
COM 355 . BROADCAST MANAGEMENT. Development of a working knowledge of the managerial structures
of broadcast organiution. Prerequisite: COM 240. (3 en.) S
COM 360. APPRECIATION OF FILM. Preparation for intelligent rcspon■e to cinema. Diacuuion of the acrcen
play, director, and actor. Critical evaluation of outatanding film■ of the past and present. (3 en.) S
COM 401 . INTERNATIONAL BROADCAST SYSTEMS. An overview of world broadcasting ayatcm■ • Prepares
the student to function as a person with a world view of the field of electronic ma11 communication. Prerequisites:
COM 355 and COM 105 . (3 era.)
COM 410. PROFESSIONAL VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS . The field of business and institutional video. The
course prepare• the student to function as a corporate writer, producer, director, and editor of desktop videos, video
prcsa releases, videoconfercnces, training tapes, and other busine11 and institutional videos . Prerequisites: COM
100, COM 105 and COM 355. (3 era.) S
COM 419. COMMUNICATION STUDIES PRACTICUM. Opportunities for practical radio, television, public
relation■ , etc . work in area busine1ses. (Variable) F, S
COM 429 . SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN COMMUNICATION. Independent study and reporting of topics of interest
to the student not available in scheduled courses. (Variable)
COM 445 . RADIO AND TELEVISION IN A FREE SOCIETY. A study of the rights and obligation■ of the
ma11 media producer, purveyor, and audience. Prerequisite: COM 240 or con■ent of instructor. (3 era.) S
COM 460. SPEECH CRITICISM . A study of historical, experimental, and other methodologies in speech
criticism. Analysis of significant speeches and speakers. Prerequisite: Major. (3 era.) F
COM 481. COMMUNICATION RESEARCH TECHNIQUES . This course is intended to provide an introduction
to and practice in the construction of research that is appropriate to the student's area of interest in Communication
Studies. It seeka to provide basic research skills to those anticipating graduate studies and to those anticipating
employment in areas of Communication Studies. Prerequisites: Major, junior standing or consent of instructor.
(3 era.) F
COM 483 . PUBLIC RELATIONS CASES, PROBLEMS, AND CAMPAIGNS . This course seeka to integrate
all the akilla required of the professional in designing and executing a complete public relations campaign. It should
be taken during the student's last semester on campus (but before an internship) . This is a seminar in which team
and group efforts, rather than individual productivity, arc emphasized. Prerequisite: COM 383 or consent of
instructor. (3 era.) F
COM 490. COMMUNICATION THEORY . A seminar in which the theories of human communication arc
analyzed, debated and evaluated . (3 crs.) S
COMMUNICATION TEACHING CERTIFICATION PROGRAM
164
CERTIFICATION IN COMMUNICATION
(ENGLISH, SPEECH, AND THEATRE)
FOR THE SECONDARY SCHOOIS
The faculty and courses for this program may be found in the listings for the
Departments of English, Communication Studies, and Theatre in this catalog.
The Secondary Education Communication program is designed to enable the teacher
candidate to develop personal communication skills and performance competencies and
attitudes, in order to become a conduit of learning, a model of communication competence,
including the empathic domain, and a resource person for facilitating communication in
educational and community settings.
The Communication teacher not only helps young people to experience all the methods
of human expression, both verbal and non-verbal, by which we communicate our thoughts
and feelings but also encourages students to be sensitive to creative expression.
Furthermore, the Communication teacher assists students to speak and listen effectively, to
read and write clearly, and to enhance their communication skills with varieties of aesthetic
experiences such as film, theatre, and television.
A Communication teacher is certified for grades seven through twelve and is qualified
to teach the traditional English areas, such as literature, writing and linguistics, as well as
speech and theatre.
Moreover, at California University this multi-disciplinary,
comprehensive program has been broadened to include teaching competencies in media such
as radio, television, film, and photography. Students majoring in Communication therefore
take a Common Core of courses, which includes a number of English, Speech, and Theatre
courses, and in addition choose a concentration in either Speech or Theatre.
Pennsylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the National Teachers
Examination.
Communication students receive valuable pre-professional experiences through campus
contacts as forensic judges and coaches for secondary school teams, assisting and advising
schools concerning play productions, and hosting area elementary and secondary schools at
University play productions.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN COMMUNICATION FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 credit, in Humanities, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102) and
Communication Theory (COM 490); 9 credit, in Natural Sciences; 9 credit, in Social Science; 3 credit, in Health
or Physical Activitiea; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100).
(B) ProffMional Education: Foundationa of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa and Measurement,
COMMUNICATION TEACHING CERTIFICATION PROGRAM
165
(EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School, (EDS 465); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU
100); Mainltreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301).
(C) Specialization:
1. Core Requirements: Communication: Engliah Grammar and Uaage (ENG 345); Theatre (6 credita):
Stagecraft I (l'HE 151) or Fundamental, of Acting (l'HE 130) or Fundamental, of Directing (l'HE 200) or
Worbhop1. Writing: Advanced Writing (ENG 375). Literature: 15 credita: Engliah Literature I (ENG 301) or
Engliah Literature ll (ENG 302); Shakespeare (ENG 425); Nineteenth-Century American Literature (ENG 303);
Twentieth-Century American Literature (ENG 304).
The student chooae1 one of the two following areas of concentration:
2 (a). For Conceotration in Speech (21 credits): Workahop: 3 credita: Debate (COM 192); Individual Eventa
(COM 292); Parliamentary Procedure (COM 392). Basic Couraea: 9 credita: Argumentation& Debate (COM 230);
Fundamentals of Diacussion or Persuasion (COM 107); Introduction to Oral Interpretation (COM 111) or Voice
and Articulation (COM 121). Enrichment: 3 credita: (Select One) Radio & T.V. in Free Society (COM 107);
Advanced Oral Interpretation (COM 212); or approved elective. Production: 3 credita: Introduction to Radio
Production or Introduction to TV Production or other approved elective; Analysis: 3 credita: (Select one) Language
& Behavior (COM 315); Speech Criticism (COM 460); Freedom of Speech (COM 260); Presidential Rhetoric
(COM 235); or other approved elective.
2 (b). For Conceotration in Theatre (ll credits): Production, Rehearaal, and Performance (THE 392); 6
credita in Theatre History or Theatre Literature, which may include Stagecraft I (l'HE 151), Fundamentals of
Acting (l'HE 130), and Fundamental• of Directina (l'HE 200); 3 credita of approved elective,.
166
DENTAL HYGIENE PROGRAM
DENTAL HYGIENE PROGRAM
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN DENTAL HYGIENE
This program is designed for persons who have completed an approved program and have
a valid license to practice Dental Hygiene. Students who have completed a two-year
program of full-time work take an additional two years at California University of
Pennsylvania. Those students with three years of full-time course work complete an
additional year of work at California. Each student is required to earn a minimum of thirty
credits at California University of Pennsylvania. The student earns a Bachelor of Science
degree in Education with certification as a dental hygienist.
Curriculum:
I. l>Ental Hygiene license, earned at an approved institution of higher education.
Il. Profewonal F.ducation (18-21): Required: Foundationa of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology
(PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Mainstreaming
Exceptional Child Learners (EDU 340); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210). Elective: EDE 301
(Computers for Teachen) .
Ill. General F.ducation (minimum of 27 credits): 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credits of Social Sciences; 9 credits
of Natural Science, iacludina MAT 215 (Stawtics). 8-11 credits of free elective,.
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
167
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
EARm SCIENCES (EAS)
GEOGRAPHY (GEO)
GEOLOGY (EAS)
INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: GEOGRAPHY
PARKS AND RECREATION MANAGEMENT
Professor Lawrence L. Moses, chair, Professors William]. Procasky, DonaldJ. Thompson,
Robert A. Vargo; Associate Professors Donald J. Conte, Harry J. Orsag; Instructors,
William A. Gustin, Betty I. Joynt
PURPOSE
Understanding our habitat is essential for survival. Still, understanding is more than
pragmatic. It satisfies a native curiosity about the world around each person.
The Department of Earth Sciences is composed of two distinct but integral components.
The first is the traditional earth sciences, namely, geology, oceanography, meteorology, and
hydrology, all of which are physical sciences. These disciplines describe and analyze
various techniques and knowledge associated with mathematics, chemistry and physics. The
objective of these activities is to apply research findings to the solution of environmental and
commercial needs.
A second component of the earth science curriculum is geography. This social science
studies the interrelationship between people and their natural environment.
It is
characterized by three subfields: human, physical or environmental, and technical
geography, including such topics as cartography and remote sensing. Allied to geography
are two other areas of study: travel and tourism and parks and recreation management.
Finally, students in the department have the opportunity of integrating the study of
geography with the humanities. Within the International Studies major is a Geography
option. Believing that future social and business arenas will be international, this major
stresses the importance of both learning about people and their environments as well as
learning another language. How people see and understand their environments is affected
greatly by language. Not only must Americans break their ethnocentric conception of life,
they must understand how people in general conceptualize the world in which they live.
PROGRAMS
The department has five programs and, within those programs, nine study options. The
Earth Sciences major has three study options: General, Meteorology, and Oceanography.
There is a Geography major with three options: General, Applied, and Travel and Tourism.
The Earth Science and Geography majors and options each have a common core of required
168
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
courses. Finally, there are three single option majors: Geology, International Studies:
Geography, and Parks and Recreation Management. The department, in conjunction with
the College of Education and Human Services, provides a teacher certification program for
those interested in teaching Earth Science in secondary schools. In order to be certified to
teach in Pennsylvania, students must pass the NTE. Students interested in the latter should
secure further information through the College of Education and Human Services. See also
the section on General Science Certification, page 298 in this catalog.
All majors stress the equal importance of general education and professional
development. Field experiences and internships help the student to integrate classroom
activities with "real world" experiences. This planned and progressive problem-solving
approach is central to the educational program.
Honor Societies
The national Earth Sciences honor society, Sigma Gamma Epsilon (ErE ), has a chapter
(AZ) on campus. Students recognized for their academic and professional achievements are
elected to it.
Honor students in Geography are eligible for induction into Gamma Theta Upsilon
(r0Y).
Membership is also available to students of high scholastic attainment in the California
University Chapter of Rho Phi Lambda (P4'A) Fraternity. Rho Phi Lambda is the
professional honor society for parks and recreation majors.
Careers
A student who desires a professional career in the earth sciences or in geography in
most instances will need to have an advanced degree. This is the case for such professions
as geologist, hydrologist, climatologist, oceanographic technician, stratigrapher, regional
planner, and cartographer. Undergraduates seeking employment, however, will find
opportunities in businesses undertaking environmental impact studies. Students with
undergraduate majors in Parks and Recreation Management or Travel and Tourism can enter
directly the job market, namely in such positions as directors or staff persons in schools,
governmental agencies (municipal and military, for example), industries or resorts with
recreational programs or as travel agents. More information on specific employment
opportunities is available in the Career Planning and Placement Office and from faculty
members responsible for specific majors.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EARm SCIENCES
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives.
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
169
or
(B) Area Cooceatratioa: Common Core course■ include Aatronomy (PHS 145); Introduction to Geoloay
(EAS 150); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Hiatorical Geology (EAS 200); Meteorology (EAS 241);
General Chemiatry I (CHE 101); General Phyaica I (PHY 121); Hydrology (EAS 202); Map Principle, (GEO 110);
College Algebra (MAT 181); or Technical Math I (MAT 182); and a Field Experience course (EAS). In addition
to the core course ■ each track has special requirements.
General Earth Science: 37 credits of required courses; 31 credits of required elective■ from four group of
earth science courses, 15 credits of which muat be at the 300 level or above.
Oceanoarapby: 37 credits of required course ■ ; 12 credits of required oceanographic course,:
Micropaleontology (EAS 350); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Seminar in Oceanography (EAS 463); and Coaatal
Geomorphology (EAS 563); and 19 credits of related electives.
Meteorolc)IY : 37 credits of required course,; 25 credits of required meteorological course,: Climatology
(EAS 242); Synoptic Meteorology (EAS 250); Field Work in Hydrology (EAS 302); Field Work in Meteorology
(EAS 341); Dynamic Meteorology (EAS 342); Reaional Climatology (EAS 550); Seminar in Meteorology (EAS
464); General Physic ■ ll (PHY 122); plus an additional six credits of mathematic,.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIDCATION IN EARm SCIENCE FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Educatioo: 15 credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-ll (ENG 101-102); 9 credits in
Natural Sciences, including a Biology, a Mathematic ■, and a Physical Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science;
3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9
credits of free electives.
(B) Profeuional Educatioo: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problema of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teata
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Leamen (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467) or Modem Methods (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461) .
(C) Pro(euional Specialization: Required: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Meteorology (EAS 241);
Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Aatronomy (PHS 145); General Chemistry I (CHE 101); Pre-Calculus
(MAT 199); General Physics I (PHY 121).
Restricted Dectives (12 credits of the following) : Physical Geography (EAS 160); Hiatorical Geology (EAS
200); Hydrology (EAS 202); Climatology (EAS 242); Cartography (EAS 271); Map and Air Photo Interpretation
(EAS 375); Field Methods (EAS 320); Field Work in Hydrology (EAS 302); Mineralogy (EAS 331); Field Work
in Meteorology (EAS 341); Geomorphology (EAS 343); Invertebrate Paleontology (EAS 551); Human Ecology
(GEO 240); Observational Astronomy (PHS 125); Seminar in Earth Science (EAS 495); Seminar in Astronomy
(EAS 790).
Pennsylvania certification requires a passing grade on the NTE.
170
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 Natural Science■;
12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective■ .
(B) Area of Concentration: Courses common to all tracks:
Human Geography (GEO 105); Map Principle■ (GEO 110); Physical Geography (EAS 160); F.conomic Geography
(GEO 200); Urban Geography (GEO 210) .
(C) Travel and Tourism Option Speciati:«!d Courses: Survey of Travel and Touri■m (GEO 150); World
Cities/Geography of Tourism (GEO 205); Comprehenaive Travel Planning (GEO 358); Seminar in Geography
(GEO 493); Climatology (EAS 242); Scenic Areas of the U .S. (EAS 264); Introduction to Bu1inen (BUS 100);
BusineBI Writing I (ENG 211); Oral Communication: Management (COM 205). Nine credits of restricted electives;
17 credits of related electives which could include an internship.
(D) Applied Option Speciati:«!d Courses: (GEO 210); Remote Senaing (GEO 255); Cartography (EAS 271);
Computer Cartography (EAS 273); Geography Information Systems (GEO 311); Statistical Cartography (EAS 373);
Map and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 375) . Eighteen credits in restricted electives including Introduction
to Microcomputer and Application Software (CSC 101); Statistics (MAT 215) and Scientific and Technical Writing
(ENG 217) . Seventeen credits (200 and above) in related courses.
(E) GEDeral Option Speciati:«!d Courses: Cartography (EAS 271) or Map and Aerial Photography
Interpretation (EAS 375); Seminar in Geography (GEO 493) . Twenty-four credits in restricted elective ■ and 23
in relaced electives, five of which can be an internship .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN GEOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities, 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Required Course, are: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Hiatorical Geology
(EAS 200); Mineralogy (EAS 331); Petrology (EAS 332); Structural Geology (EAS 425); Hydrology (EAS 202);
Geomorphology (EAS 343); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Stratigraphy (EAS 422); Tectonics (EAS 527); any earth
science field experience; General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101, 102); General Physic ■ 1-Il (PHY 121, 122); 9 credit■
of Math/Computer Science; and , 8 credits of related electives.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: GEOGRAPHY
The International Studies Program is administered by the Department of Foreign
Languages and Cultures. The Department of Earth Sciences supervises students who pursue
the geography option in that major.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Compositionl-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credit■ of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Studies; 18 credit■ of free electives.
(B) Areas of Concentration: (1) Area of Concentration: International Studies: Geography. Geography
21 credit hours: Economic Geography (GEO 200); Urban Geography (GEO 210); Demographic Analysis (GEO
217); Political Geography (GEO 345); Geography of Europe (GEO 325); Geography of Latin America (GEO 328).
Languages; 21 credit hours: Intermediate 1-Il (203, 204); Converaation, Composition and Phonetic ■ 1-Il (311, 312);
Culture courses (9 era.)
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
171
Related Electives: a minimum of three credits in each of Economics/Management, History, Englilh, Political
Science, Mathematica, Psychology and Philoaophy. Five additional credits of related elective, (can include an
intemlhip).
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PARKS AND RECREATION MANAGEMENT
Curriculum:
(A) General Education_
: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanitie■; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Human Geography (GEO 105); Map Principles (GEO 110); Physical
Geography (EAS 160); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Municipal Government (POS 205); Urban Geography
(GEO 210); Site Planning and De1ign (GEO 362); Recreation lndu■tryManagement (GEO 378); Propm Planning
and Administration (GEO 412); Developing the Master Plan (GEO 474); Introduction to Business (BUS 100) or
Principles of Management (MGT 210). Restricted electives: 12 credits. Related electives: 11 to 17 credits.
Intemlhip: 6 to 12 credits.
EARm SCIENCE COURSES (EAS)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
EAS 100. INTRODUCTION TO EARTH SCIENCE. Thia introductory course is designed to acquaint the student
with the four general areas of earth science: astronomy, geology, meteorology, and oceanography. The course
consists of two houn of lecture and one hour of lab work. (3 en.) F S
EAS 131. INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY. Thia course deals with the interaction
between man and his geologic environment. Emphasis is placed on the understanding of basic geologic principles
and case studies of some of the classic examples of environmcnt■ I problems. Laboratory exercises and problems
are an integral part of the course. Thia i■ intended 11 a 111rvey course and a ■tudent needs only a limited
background in geology. (3 en.) F
EAS 150. INTRODUCTION TO GEOLOGY . A 111rvey course intended primarily for the non-science major.
Topics considered include the make-up of the earth, internal and external processes that occur within or on the
earth, rocka and minerals, fossils, the earth's origin and evaluation, and the origin and evolution of life on this
planet. Laboratory work is an integral part of the course. (4 crs.) F S
EAS 160. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. The ■tudy of the physical aspects of human environment including climate,
soils, water, vegetltion, and topography. Map and map-making also are treated . (3 crs.)
EAS 163. INTRODUCTION TO OCEANOGRAPHY. An introductory course in the study of the four main
branches of oceanography: (1) Geology of the oceanic basins (origins of the oceans, structure and geomorphology
of the ocean'• floor, methods of investigation); (2) Chemiltry of the ocean waters; (3) Physics of the oceans
(currents, waves, tides, etc .); (4) Biology of the oceans (marine plants and animals) . No preliminary studies
required but previous course work in Physical Geology or Introduction to Geology recommended . (3 en.) S
EAS 166 . GEOLOGY OF PENNSYLVANIA. A 111rvey of the Commonwealth's geologic setting, geologic
history, and mineral resources. There are no prerequisites. Students will be introduced to the necessary geologic
172
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
conccpll and terminology. Studenll arc expected to participate in at least three of the four planned field trip,. (3
en.)
EAS 170. AREAL GEOLOGY. Thia counc involve, travel to aclected poinll of geologic intcrcll in the Rocky
Mountaina and Great Plaina of the wellcm part of the United State,. Moll activitica will be in field aituationa.
Activitie1 will focu1 on rock, mineral, and fouil identification, topographic map interpretation, and the role of
geologic proce11e1 in landform development. (3 en.)
EAS 200. HISTORICAL GEOLOGY. A lludy of the geologic hiatory of the earth and the aucceuion of the major
group of plani. and animal■ 11 baaed on the geologic interpretation of rock formatiom and fouil1 . Field trip, arc
an integral part of the counc. (4 en.) S
EAS 202. HYDROLOGY. A aurvey counc about the exi■tcnce of water on Earth. Topic, include the occurrence
and movement of water, physical and chemical characteriatica of water, and climatologic and geologic conaideration
of aurface and aub-aurface water. (3 en.) F
EAS 232. EARTH RESOURCES . An introductory counc in metallic and non-metallic rc1011rce1 with emph11i1
on the nature of mineral,, the lithosphere, and economic uaca of earth rc10urce1. (3 en.) F
EAS 241. METEOROLOGY. The physic, of the atmosphere a■ influenced by the earth-atmosphere interaction.
The effecll of the phyaical control, a, they alter the elemenll arc emphasized . The construction and 1naly1i1 of
weather map, i1 an integral part of the counc. (3 en.) F S
EAS 242. CLIMATOLOGY. In this counc the elemenll and controls of climate arc analyzed in 1 1yatcmatic
fashion. Various methods and techniques of cl111ifying climates arc prcacnted. The climate of each continent is
rcgionalized and the factors which produce the climatic patterm arc inveatigated . (3 en.) F S
EAS 250. SYNOPl'IC METEOROLOGY. An examination of the development and atructurc of large-scale
weather syatcma and fronts . Emphasis on the technique of analyzing and forecaating 1ynoptic scale weather
situationa. (3 en.) F
EAS 255. REMOTE SENSING . Thia counc emphasize■ the characteriatic1 and scientific role of aerial photo,
radar, and 11tellite image interpretation, as well as computer aui■tcd proceuing of spectral data acquired from
aircraft and 11tellites, 11 they relate to earth and atmospheric rc1011rce analysis. (3 en.) S
EAS 264. SCENIC AREAS OF THE UNITED ST ATES . Thia counc provide, an 1naly1i1 of the physical telling
of aome scenic area, in the United States. The focua is on differences in aoila, vegetation, climate, and landforma
in scenic areas with special empha■ is given to natural hiatory. (3 en.) F S
EAS 270. SCENIC AREAS OF THE WORLD. Thia course provides an analysis of the physical telling of scenic
areas of the world. The focus is on differences in aoila, vegetation, climates, and landforma with special emph11i1
given to natural hiatory. (3 en.)
EAS 271. CARTOGRAPHY. A laboratory counc designed to acquaint the student with the nature and function
of map,, including concepts of scales and cartographic symbols, graphic layout and design, and the uac of
cartographic tools and equipment in map construction. (3 en.) F
EAS 273 . COMPUTER CARTOGRAPHY. This counc provides an analysis of different methods and technique,
of rcprcacntina spatial data through the uac of various computer-based technologies. The focus is centered upon
the cartographic representation of aurface data through the uac of a personal-computer baaed program. (3 en.) S
EAS 302. FIELD WORK IN HYDROLOGY. This counc is designed as a follow-up course to hydrology. It give,
lludenll the opportunity to apply hydrologic principles and techniques in field tellings. Topic, arc aclected in
conaultation with the instructor. (3 en.) S
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIBNCES
173
EAS 304. CARBONATE GEOLOGY. A study of carbonate deposition, lithification, and digene1i1. Include■
chemical ■edimentology, textural classification, cyclicity of shelf llrata, facies interpretation for oil exploration,
and correlation. Lab component. Prerequisite ■: Hi■torical Geology and Sedimentology. (3 en.)
EAS 331 . MINERALOGY. An introduction to the morphology and internal llructure of cry1tal1 and the chemical
and phyaical ch1racteri■tic1 of mineral,. Laboratory time is devoted to the study of cry■tal model■ and the
identification of aelected mineral apecimena. (3 en.) F
EAS 332. PETROLOGY. A complete ■urvey of the major rock type, (igneou ■, ■edimentary, and metamorphic)
forma the b11i1 of thi1 coune. Con■ideration i1 given to their origin, deacription, and clauification. Of particular
importance i1 the relationship of the v1riou1 rock type■ to the compoaition and hi ■torical development of the 10lid
earth. Laboratory component emph11ize1 hand apecimen identification, but aome microacopic thin ■ection work
i1 1110 done. (3 en.) S
EAS 341. FIELD WORK IN METEOROLOGY . A field oriented course designed as a follow-up to basic
meteorology. The course is concerned with the use of meteorological in■truments to measure local weather
condition■, plotting and analyzing these conditions. Other weather problems and library research are part of the
course. (3 en.)
EAS 342. DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. An in-depth examination of the forces and laws that govern
atmoapheric flow. Topics investigated and analyzed include scale analyaes, geotropic and gradient wind models,
vorticity, vertical motion and boundary layer dynamic,. (3 en.) S
EAS 343. GEOMORPHOLOGY. This course involves the study of the origin, history, and ch1racteri1tic1 of
landforma and landscapes aa they are produced by the processes of weathering, man-walling, fluvial, glacial, wind,
and wave ero1ion (or a combination of theae) acting upon the geological material■ and 1tructure1 of the earth'•
crull. (3 en.)
EAS 3SO. MICROPALEONTOLOGY. Micropaleontology deals with the essential biological and geological
principles which are basic to all paleontological studies. In addition, considerable time is devoted to the atudy and
identification of various microfossil groups. Con■ideration is alao given to the origin of life and to its preservation
in ancient Precambrian rocks . Laboratory work emphasized. Problems to be aolved are similar to those that would
be encountered by the student in the petroleum indullry . (3 en.)
EAS 372. FIELD MAPPING. Thi■ i■ a field-oriented course in which the atudent will learn proper use of
measuring and mapping instruments and the techniques in the construction of simple maps . Interpretation of air
photo• and topographic maps is alao ■tressed. (3 en.) F
EAS 373 . STATISTICAL CARTOGRAPHY. The ■tati ■tical approach to cartographic repreaentation. Method ■
of data manipulation, problems of symbolization and techniques of presentation are emphasized. (3 en.)
EAS 37S. MAP AND AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY INTF.RPRETATION. This course coven the composition and
interpretation of aerial photographs and variou■ type• of maps. Students will learn how to interpret photos and
map, for quantitative and qualitative information on natural and man-made features . Some of the work requires
independent and group interpretation of maps, photographic slide, of aatellite imagery, computer proces■ed and
enhanced image■, and SLAR imagery. (3 en.) F
EAS 421. SEDIMENTOLOGY. An advanced course that deal■ with the detailed analysis of ■ediments and
aedimentary rocks. Both qualitative and quantitative techniques are utilized to derive the maximum information
from rock 11mple1. This information relate, to the erosional, transportational and depositional history of rocks.
To the greatest extent possible, the student works independently through a complete set of problems. (3 en.) F
174
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
EAS 422. STRATIGRAPHY. In this coune a study i• made of the basic principles governing the origin,
interpretation, correlation, claasification, and naming of atratified rock unita. The grou atratigraphy of the United
State, ia considered, with particular emphaaia placed on the rocks of the Pennsylvania Sylllem. (3 en.) S
EAS 425. STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY. The primary and secondary structure, of rock mauea and their formation
are covered in thia coune. Actual structure, are examined in the field . Geologic maps are utilized . (3 en.) F
EAS 430. OPTICAL MINERALOGY. An in-depth examination of the optical behavior of mineral cryatala in
polarized light with empha■ia on identification. (3 en.) S
EAS 436 . FIELD METHODS IN EARTH SCIENCE. Thia a coune designed to provide majon with the
knowledJe of problema encountered in field work and the techniques utilized to solve these problema. Thia coune
conaiata of planned trip,. Lecture, and di■cuaaiona are used to 111pplement the trip ■ . (3 en.)
EAS 437. FIELD METHODS IN GEOLOGY . Thia ia a coune designed to provide students with a knowledge
of geologic problema encountered in field work and the technique■ utilized to solve those problema. The student
i■ exposed to geologic and topographic map, 11 well II variou■ geologic inatrumenta. The coune conaiata of
plaMCd trip• to area, of geologic intereat. Summary reports, field exercises, and laboratory problema conatitute
the atudenta' work responsibility. (3 en.)
EAS 463 . SEMINAR IN OCEANOGRAPHY. Thia seminar ia designed for those who wiah to improve their
■cientific writing abilities and to learn more about the occana. The coune is built around an excunion to 1ite1 of
oceanographic intereat, library information and data collection, the writing of both abort and long papen and the
presentation of research. (3 en.)
EAS 464. SEMINAR IN METEOROLOGY. A ■cientific writing coune in which the student punues a
meteorologic topic through library or field research. Studenta learn to define a problem, to obtain relevant
literature, to gather data and to write and defend a research paper. (3 en.)
EAS 491 . FIELD COURSE IN EARTH SCIENCE. Thia coune ia designed for serioua Earth Science students
who desire to apply their clauroom knowledge to specific aite■ and earth ■cience field problema. Each semelller
will include trips to various sites at which ieologic, meteorological, or oceanographic proceaae ■, principles and
phenomena can be studied. (Variable)
EAS 492. FIELD COURSE IN GEOLOGY . Thi■ coune provides advanced geology studenta with opportunities
to study geology in siru . Field trips to clauic and leu well known 1ite1 will be incorporated into lecture,, data
collection, and ■cientific reporting . Laboratory exercise, will reflect field experience■ . (Variable)
EAS 494. GEOLOGY WORKSHOP. Provides the student with a variety of geologic experience■. Included are
lecture■ , laboratory exercise ■ , field work and problema. To the greateat extent pouible, the coune also i ■ tailored
to meet the need■ of individual atudenta. Permiuion of the ataff ia required. (Variable)
EAS 496. SEMINAR IN GEOLOGY. A ■cientific writing course in which the student punues a g~iogic topic
through library or field research. Studenta learn to define a geologic problem, to obtain relevant literature, to
gather raw data and to write and present a research paper. (3 en.)
EAS 498 . INTFJlNSHIP IN GEOLOGY. The student combines academic theory with practical on-the-job
experience by spending up to a full semester in one of several state or local governmental agencies. The practicum
can be taken for from 3 to 17 credits and includes 111pcrvision by the participating agency I I well I I performance
evaluation by the academic advisor. Limited to Geology majon. (Variable)
EAS 527. TECTONICS. To evaluate tectonic theories within a framework of worldwide historical geology but
special attention i■ given to the Appalachian and the North American Cordilleran orogenic eventa. (3 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
175
EAS 528 . QUANTrrATIVE APPLICATIONS IN EARTH SCIENCE. An upper-level coune de1igncd to provide
studenta opportunity to apply variou1 procedures to the ■olution of acologic problems. (3 en.) F
EAS 541. ADVANCED ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY. Thia coune deals with the human natural
environment, particularly acologic facton that can impact upon life or way of life. Empha1i1 i1 placed on an
in-depth atudy of environmental problems and poaaible alternative ■olutiona to 111ch problems. Buie engineering
- principles I I applied to acological problems arc conaidercd. Laboratory exercises, problems, and written rcporta
arc an intcpl part of the coune. (3 en.)
EAS 546 . PETROLEUM GEOLOGY. This coune deals with the fundamental propertie1 of petroleum and
petroleum rcservoin, including the origin, miption, and accumulation of oil and natural ga■ . Other topic, include
exploration techniques, computer application■, well drilling and completion, and major oil field■ of the United
State,. Empha■is ia on problem ■olving and laboratory work. (3 en.)
EAS 547. RESERVOIR EVALUATION. The purpose of thi1 coune i■ to analyze in detail rock■ which serve for
the storage and ultimately for the production of petroleum. The characteristics of these rock■ will be atudied in
hand specimen, in section, in core,, and on well log■. Laboratory work and problem ■olving arc emphaaizcd. (3
en.)
EAS SSO. REGIONAL CLIMATOLOGY. An advanced coune that deals with the application of various analytical
method■ and claaaification systems in climatology. The Koppen claaaification of climates is strcaacd. The climate
pattern■ of each continent and the facton which produce them arc investigated . (3 en.) S
EAS SSL INVERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY. Thia coune involveaa detailed study offoaail representatives
of the variou ■ invertebrate phyla II well 11 1 conaideration of the more important of these as index foaail ■.
Empha1i1 i■ on laboratory exerci■es and problem ■olving. It i■ hoped that this coune will prove to be of interest
to atudenta in biology I I well I I those in aeology . (3 en.)
EAS 563. COASTAL GEOMORPHOLOGY AND MARINE RESOURCES . A atudy of the phyaical proce1■e1
that ■hape coastal landforms and the pelagic and neuritic rc■ource1 of the ocean■ . Topics include long■horc
transport, wave action, awaah zone dynamic■, estaurine and deltaic geomorphology, ferromangane ■e and petroleum
rc■ources, and beach structure. Prerequisite: Introduction to Oceanography or permission of the instructor. (3
en.)
GEOGRAPHY COURSES (GEO)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
GEO 100. INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY. Introduces atudenta to regional differences throughout the world
in terms of landforms, climates, ■oil■ and vegetation as well I I population characteristic ■ and economic activities.
Rcprc ■entative 1rca1 like Western Europe, Soviet Union, Japan and Latin America arc developed. (3 en.) F S
GEO 1OS. HUMAN GEOGRAPHY. The coune provides inaighll into the existing pattern■ and distribution■ of
variou1 social groups which occupy the earth. Broad outline■ of human evolution, development and demographic
pattern■ arc emphasized. (3 en.) F S
GEO 110. MAP PRINCIPLES . A non-technical coune to develop competence in the development, recognition,
undentanding and evaluation of map information. Interpretation of thematic map■, both regional and world, ia
emphaaizcd. (3 en.) F
176
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
GEO 150. SURVEY OF TRAVEL AND TOURISM. An overview of the travel and touriam industry empha■izing
aapecta of field geographic, economic and cultural importance. Topics include introductory principle•, meaauring
and forecaatmademand, touriam planning, touriam marketing, tourism development, and the role of the geographer.
(3 en.) F S
GEO 200. ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY. The lludy of areal variation on the
related to producing, exchanging, and conauming reaourcea. (3 en.) S
earth' ■
aurface in man'• activitiea
GEO 205. WORLD CITIES/GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM. The geography of touriam in selected citiea of the
world with an empha■ia on form and function. Topic• include an analyaia of reaourcea for touriam, the organization
of related land use pattcfflll, and developmental proceaaea. (3 en.) S
GEO 210. URBAN GEOGRAPHY. An inveatigation of city environmenta. Topic ■ inveatigated and analyzed about
citiea include their cla■aification, location, diatribution, function, growth, type, and pattern of land use. Emphasia
toward urban planning ia incorporated. (3 en.) F
GEO 217. DEMOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS. A baaic course that deals with demographic proceaaea and trends.
Emphaaia ia placed on diatribution pattefflll and environmental ramificatiollll. (3 en.)
GEO 220. GEOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES AND PENNSYLVANIA. A atudy of the phyaical and
cultural environment throughout the United States and Pennsylvania particularly aa it relate ■ to apatial paltefflll of
population, agriculture, industry, aervice and tranaportation pattefflll. (3 en.)
GEO 240. HUMAN ECOLOGY. A social acience approach to dealing with relationship between humanity and
the organic and inorganic environment. Emphasia is placed on the physical, biological and cultural baais of human
adaptation to the environment. (3 en.)
GEO 285. RETAIL TRAVEL. The skills uaed in the worldwide travel industry that are eaaential for a career aa
a travel agency owner, manager, or agent, as a tour operator, or as a corporate, convention travel planner or
manager. (3 en.)
GEO 306 . MARKETING GEOGRAPHY. Spatial pattefflll associated with the collllUmption of good■ and aervices
are atreaaed, emphasia is placed on the collection and aubaequent diatribution of goods and service■ as related to
aapecta of the cultural environment. (3 en.)
GEO 311. GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS . Thia course providea an analyaia of different methods
and technique■ of repreaenting geographic data through the uae of various manual and computer-baaed technologies .
The focus ia upon the procesaea involved in the collection, compilation, and diaplay of geographic data within a
data baae. (3 en.)
GEO 315 . URBAN TRANSPORTATION. Tranaportation pattefflll within cities and current tranaportation
problem.a aa they relate to travel demand ■ and tranaportation policy. Urban apatial variation and ita relationship to
travel are atreaaed. (3 en.)
GEO 316 . CONTEMPORARY GEOGRAPHIC PROBLEMS . Topical analysia of local, regional and world areal
association problem.a from a geographic perapective. (3 en.)
GEO 317. LAND USE ANALYSIS. An analysis of the structure of urban and rural land uae which emphaaizea
of paltefflll and trends in land use . Methods of analyais are developed so that land uae ~an be effectively
understood . (3 en.)
GEO 318 . GEOGRAPHY OF CHINA. A geographic atudy of the historical , cultural, political and economic
facton a ■ they combine to make twentieth-century China an important factor in world affairs. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
177
GEO 325 . GEOGRAPHY OF EUROPE. A systematic of the forces which have shaped the human landscape of
Western Europe. National and regional disparities ranging from land relief and climate to BOCial and economic
phenomena are studied. (3 crs.)
GEO 328. GEOGRAPHY OF LATIN AMERICA. Concentrates upon the effects of the physical environment
upon human activities and upon the effects of the historical background, types of governments, and ethnic
background• of the people upon the development of the natural resources of. The study is regional by nations. (3
crs.)
GEO 330. GEOGRAPHY OF THE SOVIET UNION. A regional study of the physical and cultural features of
the Soviet Union. The emphasis is placed upon those factors responsible for the current position of the Soviet
Union aa a major world power and on potential future development. (3 crs.)
GEO 338 . GEOGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC BASIN . Lands and people of the great ocean. Particular attention
given to Australia, Indonesia, New Zealand, and the Philippines. (3 crs.)
GEO 340. HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY . A study of the interrelationships between the natural and cultural
environments and the historical development of the cultural landscape. The historical development of the United
States i• emphasized. (3 crs.)
GEO 345 . POLmCAL GEOGRAPHY. The state is the focus of the course, particularly in term■ of the role
played by the physical and cultural environment in term■ of its form and function. Particular emphasis placed 9n
frontiers, boundariea, law of the sea■, transportation and ecology. (3 en.)
GEO 358. COMPREHENSIVE TRAVEL PLANNING. A basic understandingofthe procedures and components
of travel planning and promotion. It presents major principles and techniques in developing travel programs, trip
packages, and group tours . The course studies transportation and infonnation systems, community services
supporting tourism, trends in accommodations and services, tours and junkets, travel sales and agency operations.
(3 crs.)
GEO 362. SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN. The components of the site design process. Instruction centers on
the specific tools and procedures necessary to enable the student to be an effective planner of recreation and park
facilities . The student gains an understanding of the complete planning process from conceptualization through
implementation and construction. (3 crs.)
GEO 374. DEVELOPING AND MANAGING LEISURE ENTERPRISES . An overview of the commercial
leisure induatry, specifically focusing on the procedures involved in the developing, marketing, and managing of
the enterprise. The student will acquire a knowledge of the step by step procedure involved in starting a leisure
busineu either through purchasing a going concern or through establishing an enterprise from its beginning. The
student then will be instructed on the management skills necessary for the effective and profitable management of
the enterprise. (3 crs.)
GEO 378. RECREATION INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT. Analysis of managerial and administrative practices
and proce1&es in recreation, park and agency departments, including departmental organization, policy making,
liability and negligenc~, personnel management and staffing, fiscal management, budgeting, finance, records and
reports, office management, and public relations. (3 crs.)
GEO 412. PROGRAM PLANNING AND ADMINISTRATION. The course emphasizes the analysis of a
community, a1&essment of its residential leisure needs, and implementation of recreational programs into the
community. Students will acquire an understanding of the program fields in relation to principles, planning,
objectives, goal setting, structural organization, advertising, and evaluation. (3 crs.)
GEO 445. FIELD METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY . An intensive micro-geographic study through field work. An
advanced course using geographic field tools and techniques . (3 crs.)
178
DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES
GEO 474. DEVELOPING THE MASTER PLAN. This course examines planning as a process with attention
focused on those particular activities and component& that must be related and completed in order to initiate
preparation and succe11ful implementation of a comprehensive master plan. The course provides experience in
applying acquired skills to specific uri>an and regional problems. Class participanu analyze a real or a hypothetical
problem, develop and evaluate alternative approaches, and recommend courses of action. (3 en.)
GEO 479. INTERNSHIP. The internship provides the student with the opportunity to apply classroom theory to
realistic, professional-level situations. It is intended to give the student a concentrated practical experience in a
professional organization. The concept& and experiences acquired in the classroom are honed and fine-tuned at this
level to prepare studenu for their career undertaking. (Variable)
GEO 491. FJELD COURSE IN GEOGRAPHY. Field investigation utilizing geographic tools and techniques
concentrating on primary data . (Variable)
GEO 493. SEMINAR IN GEOGRAPHY. Consideration of evolving geographic thought, evaluation of selected
geographic literature, and the development of individual or group research project&. Recommended as a culminating
course for majors in geography. (3 crs .)
GEO 498. INTERNSHIP IN GEOGRAPHY. This course involves the geography intern during the sophomore,
junior or senior year in a semester of practical experience with a planning, governmental, business, industrial, or
social agency. Credit for the course varies, depending upon the nature of the internship assignment and the number
of hours of on-the-job training. (Variable)
GEO 520. PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES . This course is for students with a background that
includes Principles of Geomorphology. It involves a systematic survey of the major physiographic provinces in the
United States. Emphasis is placed on the relationship of the underlying geology, geologic history, and climate to
the development of today's landscapes. Laboratory work principally involves interpretations from air photos and
topographic maps. (3 crs.)
EDU COURSES
179
EDU (EDUCATION) COURS~
EDU 210. TEACHING IN A MULTICULTURAL SOCIETY. The development of intergroup-interpersonal
awareness to promote a better understanding of different races, sexes, religious beliefs, national origins, and socioeconomic backgrounds found in our multicultural society. Emphasis on developing the awareness, knowledge skill
and competency needed for positive human relationships. (3 crs.) F-S
EDU 340. MAINSTREAMING EXCEPTIONAL LEARNERS. This course is designed to prepare educational
personnel with the information and skills necessary for accommodating exceptional learners in a variety of school
arrangements. Focus is on assessment and remediation of learning problems, classroom organization and
management, teaching resources, legal issues, curriculum considerations, parent involvement, condition of
professional services, and many other issues pertinent to the education of exceptional learners in the "mainstream"
of education. (3 crs.)
EDU 449 . STUDENT TEACHING- SPECIAL EDUCATION . (Variable) F-S
EDU 459 . STUDENT TEACHING - ELEMENTARY EDUCATION. (Variable) F-S
EDU 469. STUDENT TEACHING - SECONDARY EDUCATION. (Variable) F-S
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
180
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
EDUCATIONAL STUDIES (EDF)
SECONDARY EDUCATION (EDS)
Professor Marilynn Stanard, chair. Professors Dilawar Mumby Edwards, George J.
Frangos, John P. Moreschi, Jr., JoAnn Nelson, Angelo J. Orlandi, George A.Reid;
Associate Professors John C. Black, David N. Campbell, Lizbeth A. Gillette, Robert A.
Levin, Caryl Sheffield, John R. Young.
The department is responsible for the Secondary Education programs, the Principals
Program, the Professional Education components of programs in the College of Education
and Human Services and in the Graduate School, and a diversity of services to the
University.
The Secondary Education curriculum is organized around the concept of "teacher as
decision maker." Teacher candidates ~earn to make important decisions concerning how to
organize and manage classrooms utilizing a wide range of technologies and methodologies.
The Secondary Education program provides students with opportunities to work in a variety
of school settings. These include the School of the Future (an urban experience involving
innovative techniques and opportunities), Rural and Urban Schools, Schools on Native
American Reservations as well as overseas schools.
For the Secondary Education Curriculum the department offers a Bachelor of Science
in Education degree in the following Certification areas: Athletic Training, Biology,
Chemistry, Communication, Earth Science, General Science, English, Mathematics, Modem
Foreign Languages, Physics, and Comprehensive Social Sciences. Accordingly, this
curricular function is the responsibility of the Educational Studies Department in cooperation
with the appropriate academic departments. Curricula and requirements will be found in this
catalog in the listings of the individual departments.
Therefore, each student who is a Secondary Education major functions under a system
of dual advising whereby the student's advisor from the Educational Studies Department
assists the student in satisfying Certification requirements, while an advisor from the
student's chosen discipline guides the student in the area of specialization. Final advising
is with the student's advisor from the Educational Studies Department.
Students in the Secondary Education curricula must pass the NTE in order to achieve
Pennsylvania Teaching Certification. Students must achieve a 2.50 grade-point average in
both their major area and a 2.50 overall grade-point average for graduation.
Students who satisfactorily complete the program in Secondary Education may, at
graduation, qualify for the Pennsylvania Instructional I Certificate for teaching in their
certification area at the middle school and secondary school levels. Requirements are such
that the student may pursue certification in one or more teaching areas as mentioned above.
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
181
SECONDARY EDUCATION (EDS)
AND EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATIONS COURSES (EDF)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
EDF 100. FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION. A survey designed to contribute directly to the profeuional growth
and development of the prospective teacher and to serve as an introductory course for the atudent in Liberal ArU
or Science and Technology. It slrc88Cs the history, philosophy, and legal and social foundationa of the American
educational enterprise. Emphasi1 is also given to teaching as a profeuion, as well aa to the llnlcturc,
administration, and support of the system of public education at the local, state, and federal levels. The atudent
is encouraged to think constructively and creatively about education and self. (3 en.) S-F
EDS 300. PROBLEMS OF SECONDARY EDUCATION. The practical problems of teaching and learning in the
accondary school with emphasis on principle■ of problem solving arc studied. A aurvey is made of the llnlcturc
and nature of American accondary education. Tools and techniques used in problem solving arc introduced. A
field experience of two classes per week for nine weeks in the local secondary school■ is a requirement of the
course. Prerequisite: EDF 100. S-F
EDF 301. COMPUTERS FOR TEACHERS . This course in educational computing provides the learner with
fundamental concepts and skills that build a foundation for applying computen and other hardware and software
in educational settings. The course focuses on the computer as an object of inatruction, a productivity tool,and an
adjunct to inatruction in the classroom. Laboratory assignments requiring use of the univenity computer facilities
arc designed to provide generalizable and transferable competencies. (3 en.)
EDF 304. INTRODUCTION TO EDUCATIONAL MEDIA. This course, for prospective and practicing teachen
from various levels of education, pre-school to ·graduate school, is also relevant for persona in training programs
in churches, business, and industry. Emphasis is placed on media as an inherent part of effective instruction 11
well as on effective media utilization practices, the acquisition of skills in selecting media hardware and software,
and the operation of equipment and competence in simple local production techniques. The course has been
designed to facilitate learning in three inatructional modes: (1) large group, by meana of mediated lectures; (2) ,mall
group, by mcana of demonstrations and practice in equipment operation/local production; (3) independent atudy,
by meana of film loops, film strips, slide-tape presentations, and computer-assisted inatruction. Three cl111 houn
and one laboratory hour each week. (3 en.)
EDF 318. FOUNDATIONS OF DEATH AND DYING . The phenomenon of death and dying in the areas of
anthropology, psychology, philosophy, education, literature, etc. (3 era.) S
EDF 360. COMPARATIVE EDUCATION. An introduction to the various schools of the world. Selected countries
include England, France, Italy, Spain, West Germany, the U.S.S .R., and the United States. The general strategy
is to explore the history, social organizations, and economic and political conditiona that have shaped educational
institutiona in each country. (3 era.) S
EDS 420. INTRODUCTION TO GUIDANCE AND PERSONNEL SERVICES. The principles of guidance with
emphasis on the basic concepts of individual and group counseling and the relationship of the counselor, teacher,
and school nurse in grades K-12 . (3 era.)
EDS 430. EDUCATIONAL TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. A consideration of
the simpler statistical mcaaures, with particular strc11 on the application to clauroom work, and of the principle•
underlying the conatruction of valid, reliable objective tests. Prerequisite: Educational Psychology (3 era.) S-F
EDS 436 . TEACHING OF WRITING. A course to help the prospective teacher create a curriculum that will enable
atudents to write forcefully and clearly. The teacher should become aware of the students' needs and methods by
182
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
which thoac needs can beat be met. Such needs nnge from developing 1kill1 related to writiq, like correct spelling
and punctuation, to developing compositions that may vary from the utilitarian to the form-oriented to the empathic .
The effective teacher should also tic writiq ill8truction in with the rest of the English curriculum. Finally, the
teacher llhould consider how to evaluate completed papen in a way that will contribute to students' further progrcu
and ultimate independence of the teacher. (3 en.)
EDS 437. TEACHING OF COMMUNICATION. For Communication teaching candidate,; a specially designed
method• courac team taught by ill8tructon from the departmentl of Englillh, Communication Studic1, and Theatre
who have had teaching experience in secondary school,. The courac develop ■ proficiency in applying learning
theory and hiatorical perspectives to the Communication curriculum, developing and preacntiq lcaaon plans in
teaching 1imulations, developing curriculum appropriate to the area■ of specialization, directing young people in
extension activities (newspaper, yearbook, dnma, forensics, ndio and television), adapting content to students with
varying lcvcl1 of motivation and skill development, and becoming aware of availabilities in the job market. (3 en.)
EDS 440. TEACHING OF ENGLISH IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. The application of principle, of educational
p1ychology, philosophy, and sociology to the teaching of Englillh in junior and acnior high school. The courac
include, bolh pnctical techniques of clauroom pncticc and an invcatigation of the larger problems of the
profc11ion. Adequate prior content couracs in English arc necessary to the student undertaking this courac. (3 en.)
F
EDS 445. TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. Method, that may be used in
teaching Social Studies. Emphasis is placed on the philosophy, objectives, couracs of study, and organization of
subject matter for teaching purpoacs, curriculum materials, procedures and development. (3 en.) F
EDS 447. TEACHING OF EARTH SCIENCE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL. A review of conccpta and basic
philosophy in Earth Science. The courac includes a survey of available materials and current curricula in the field
of earth science which fonn the baacs for analysis of modem technique, in the teaching of this discipline. (3 en.)
EDS 455. MODERN METHODS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. A capstone courac in secondary education.
Students learn current research on teaching, planning, inatructional stntegica. Classroom management and
decision-making skills. (3 en.) S-F
EDS 456. THE SECONDARY SCHOOL CURRICULUM. An analysis of the functions of secondary school
curriculum including the historical development of the high school curriculum; current and projected trends;
patterns of curriculum development; the dynamics of curriculum improvement; curriculum provisions for meeting
individual differences; trends in specific ill8tructional fields; the place and purpoac of student activities and the
cxtn-clau curriculum. (3 en.)
EDS 460. TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS . The mathematical abilities of the
secondary student; methods of mathematical teaching; rcsulta of mathematical education according to recent
research; the control and uac of the visual aids pertaining to mathematics, and student, teacher, administntion and
community problems with proper methods of instruction. Content material is included at the discretion of the
Mathematica department. Evaluation is maintained by teats, reports, textbook evaluations, courac outlines, unit
plans, projecta and teaching lessons. (3 en.) S-F
EDS 461. STUDENT TEACHING AND SCHOOL LAW. Obacrvation and participation in all teaching and
activitic1 related to the performance of a teacher'• work, in the area of the student'• specializations. Prerequisite:
A genenl quality point avenge of 2.50 and 2.50 in the area of specialization. The student spends full time in
actual cla11room teaching for a semester of 16 weelca. (12 en.) (Variable credit in special circumstances) S-F
EDS 465 . DEVELOPMENT AL READING IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL. Intended to help the prospective
teachcn of the Secondary Education academic subject areas develop an undentanding and appreciation of the
reading skills needed by their studcntl. Methods of establishing awareness of gencnl reading needs as well as the
special 1kill1 unique to their subject area arc stressed. (2 en.) S-F
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
183
EDS 466 . TEACHING MODERN LANGUAGES (K through 12). Thia course is taught in the Language
Labontory. It coven the theory and pnctice of teaching modem languages. Instruction in the use of the
labontory i■ jiven. Ernpha1i1 i1 given to the atudent developing an adequate undemanding of the need■, intere■ta,
leamina chancteri■tica and motivations of atudenta at various age■ of development K through 12. (3 en.)
EDS 467. TEACHING OF SCIENCE IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. Give■ the proapective ■cience major a
thorough groundiq in the problema of teaching ■cience. The objective■ of the ■cience prognm in the secondary
■chool, selection of textboolta, 10Urce1 of auitable litenture, how to secure materials for instruction, the prepantion
of unit■, and ■pecial techniques are studied. Prerequisite: Twelve houn of work in major field . (3 en.) S-F
EDS 469. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. (Variable)
EDS 491. HONORS SEMINAR IN SECONDARY EDUCATION. A seminar intended to provide an experience
of quality that utilizes the human and other re10Urce1 of the univenity. The major emphasis is on inquiry nther
than mere acquisition of information. The methodology of the course is designed to feature the Socntic method,
case study, action research, or problem-oriented techniques. The examination is in the form of a defense of a paper
written by atudenta in their major fields . It is intended to minimize routine aummary and to maximize critical
thinking . (Variable)
EDE 494. STUDENT TEACHING WORKSHOP. For student■ seeking secondary teaching certification in
Pennsylvania who have had prior teaching experience in secondary ■choola. The learning procedures aaaume
various undentanding• and competenciea. Regiatntion for this workshop requires the approval of the Dean of
Education and the Director of Student Teaching. (8 era.) S
EDF 500. CREATING INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS . Thia basic production course encompaaaea the
principle ■, techniques, and skills used in the effective prepantion of a variety of inexpensive teacher-made
instructional materials, auch as tnn■parencies, opaque projection materials, individual materials to aupport projector
inatruction, duplicating di■c recording, on tape, duplicating tape ■, making 10Und effect■, chalkboard techniques,
mounting and preserving pictorial materials and ■pecimens, lettering techniques, devices for the di ■play and study
of live ■pecimens, apecial-purpose maps, models and mock-ups, (flannel boards, magnetic boards, electric boards,
dionma ■tagea, and effective bulletin boards). (3 era.)
EDF 510. PHOTOGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION. Beginning with the fundamentals ofphotognphy, this course
considers the skills and techniques needed to take and display effective photognphs in black and white or in color,
and how to use various camens, common aupplements, attachments, and materials. Because photognphy also
depend, on the photognpher's perception and style, students are encounged to seek out aubjecta that interest them.
They plan and execute individual projects in communicating thoughts or feelings to others. Applications to
problems of inatructional communication and instructional development are encounged, and emphasis is placed on
techniquea of presentation. (3 era.)
EDF 520. TELEVISION PRODUCTION FOR TEACHERS. A study of the techniquea for producing and directing
effective televised inatruction. Student■ develop skills and competencies by doing exercise, in planning, designing,
■cripting, preparing gnphics for, and teaching and directing short television lessons.
Effective utilization
techniquea and evaluation of televised instruction are also considered. (3 era.)
184
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION (EDE)
EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION (ECE)
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION/EARLY CHILDHOOD
See also: Special Education in this catalog, pages 326 and following, for dual majors in
Early Childhood and Special Education, and in Elementary Education and Special Education.
Professor Roger J. Orr, chair; Associate Professor Elwin Dickerson, assistant chair.
Professors M. Eileen Aiken, Dorothy M. Campbell, Ronald A. Christ, Allan D . Jacobs,
Gary W. Kennedy, J. Gregory Martin, Phyllis S. Mcllwain, Anthony J. Saludis; Associate
Professors Diane H. Nettles, Jannene Southworth, John R. Vargo; Assistant Professors
Beverly J. Melenyz.er, Joseph D. Scarmazzi
Student in all curricula must achieve a satisfactory score on the National Teachers '
Examination in order to acquire Pennsylvania Certification.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
The goal of the Elementary Education program is to have students acquire the
knowledge, skills, and attitudes essential to becoming a successful member of the teaching
profession.
The term Developmental Interaction is used to summariz.e the department's belief that:
(1) learning is the result of interaction between heredity and environmental factors;
(2) learning is the result of interaction between cognitive, affective, and psycho-motor areas
of development; and
(3) learning occurs in predictable stages of development which are age-related.
The Elementary/Early Childhood Professional Education Program seeks to prepare
teachers who facilitate learning by emphasizing the following: (1) process-oriented teaching
strategies, (2) diagnostic teaching, (3) holistic learning experiences, (4) reliance upon
intrinsic motivation, (5) responsive environments, (6) integration of cognitive and affective
objectives, and (7) home/school collaboration.
Elementary Education majors must successfully complete one semester of student
teaching, which includes field work at two grade levels. Certification to teach kindergarten
through sixth grade is awarded upon graduation and upon successful completion of the NTE.
The College of Education is accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of
Teacher Education. The Placement and Career Services Office aids students seeking
teaching positions locally and out-of-state.
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
185
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral F.ducation: 18 credit, in Humanities (including English Composition 1-11 and Oral
Communication); 15 credita in Natunl Sciences (including mathematic ■, biological science, physical science and
environmental science); 15 credit, in Social Science, (including Gcognphy, American History, Economic• and
Genenl Psychology), 3 credit, in Health and Phy■ical Activities
(B) Professional F.ducatioo: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computera for Teachera (EDF 301);
Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Educational Psychology (PSY 208): Child Psychology (PSY 205);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainatreaming Exceptional Leamera (EDU 340); Student Teaching
(EDE 461)
(C) Professional Specialization: Art for Elementary Teachera (EDE 205); Teachin, Music in Elementary
Gnde1 (EDE 207); Health and Physical Education in Elementary Gndea (EDE 208); Inatnictional StrateJiea in
Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children'• Litenture I
(EDE 311); Field Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Observation and Conference (EDE 409);
Mathematica Content and Method in the Elementary School (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studie1 (EDE 306);
Science in the Elementary School (EDE 307); Teaching of Language Arla (EDE 308); Assessing Children's
Performance (EDE 450)
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD
The Early Childhood Education program provides the academic background and field
work needed for teaching certification from infancy through third grade. Upon completion
of the program and upon successful completion of the National Teachers' Examination, the
prospective teacher will receive a Bachelor of Science degree and a Pennsylvania
Instructional Certificate. The College of Education is accredited by the National Council
for Accreditation of Teacher Education, and certification in Pennsylvania can apply to all
fifty states. Our Placement Office is active in aiding students seeking teaching positions
locally and out of state.
California University of Pennsylvania has had exceptionally high placement of its Early
Childhood graduates, and given the number of students graduating in the field, future
employment looks promising.
The objectives of the Early Childhood program are to help students:
-Understand the growth and development of children;
-Plan educational experiences using knowledge of different cultures and societies;
-Select and use instructional resources wisely.
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral F.ducation: 18 credit, in Humanities, including English Composition 1-11 (ENGl0l-102), Oral
Communication (COM 101), and counes in litenture, music, and art history; 15 credit, in Natural Sciences,
including Mathematics, Biology, Physical Science, and Environmental Science); 15 credit, in Social Sciences,
including Geognphy, American History (Before or Since 1877), American Government, Element, of Economics
Geognphy, and Genenl Psychology), 3 credita in Health, including Health Coed.
(B) Professional F.ducatioa: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computera for Teachera (EDF 301);
Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Educational Psychology (PSY 208): Child Psychology (PSY 205);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainatreaming Exceptional Leamera (EDU 340); Student Teaching
(EDE 461)
186
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
(C) ProfeMiooal Specialization: Field Experience with Infants, Toddlers, and Preschoolen (ECE 203); Field
in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Art for Early Childhood (ECE 215); Inatructional Strategies in
Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Music for Early Childhood (ECE 217); Health and Physical
Education in Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 218); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301);
Children' ■ Literature I (EDE 311); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); The Child in a Social and
Physical Environment (ECE 316); Science for Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 307); Communicative Art■ in
Early Childhood (ECE 318); Early Childhood Seminar (ECE 405)
Experience ■
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ELEMENTARY/EARLY CHILDHOOD (DUAL MAJOR)
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 18 credits in Humanities, including English Composition 1-11 (ENGI0l-102), Oral
Communication (COM 101), and courses in literature, music, and art history; 15 credits in Natural Science■,
including Mathematics, Biological Science, Physical Science, and Environmental Science); 15 credits in Social
Science,, including Geography, American History (Before or Since 1877), Elements of Economic ■ and General
Psychology), 3 credits in Health, Finl Aid and Personal Safety.
(B) ProfeMiooal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computers for Teachen (EDF 301);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210) ; Educational Psychology (PSY 208) : Child Psychology (PSY 205);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Student Teaching
(EDE 461)
(C) ProfeMiooal Specialization: Art for Elementary Teacher (EDE 205); Teaching Music in Elementary
Grades (EDE 207); Health and Physical Education in Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 218); Inatructional
Strategies in Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children's
Literature I (EDE 311); Field Experience in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Observation and Conference (EDE 409);
Mathematic ■ Content and Methods (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studies (EDE 306); Science for Elementary
Teachers (EDE 307); Teaching Language Art■ (EDE 308); Field Experiences with Infant, Toddlers, Preschoolers
(EDE 203); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE
315); Child in Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Communicative Art■ in Early Childhood (ECE 318);
Early Childhood Ed Seminar (ECE 405); Assessing Children's Performance (EDE 450)
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION- EARLY CHILDHOOD
187
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION COURSES (EDE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
EDE 100: READING, STUDY AND LISTENING SKILLS . The purpose of this counc i■ to develop lillening,
reading and ■tudy 1k.ill1 ncceaaary for academic ■ucce11 in Univenity ■tudies and future vocational and profe11ional
work. 11ris course does 1fOt cany credit towards gradualion. (3 en.)
EDE 205 : ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES. Development of art activities suitable for the elementary
gndea. Emphaais is placed upon the integntion of art education with other ■chool subjects. (3 en.)
EDE 207 : TEACHING OF MUSIC IN ELEMENTARY GRADES . For cla11room teachen of elementary, early
childhood and middle ■chool gndes, thi■ counc demonstrate■ proper technique■ of teaching mu ■ic to children.
Basic performance skills and their application in the classroom, such as the use of rhythm instruments, ■inging
game ■, records, dance ■, creative activitie1 and part- ■inging are taught. Information on resource material is
included. Students pnctice teaching selected mu ■ic topics to the other ■tudents in the cla11. (3 en.)
EDE 210. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES IN ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION.
The role of a developmental intenctionist teacher i■ explored in this counc. Preservice teachen are taught specific
pedagogical skills and stntegies that develop a teacher who does the following effectively: observe ■ and 11se1se1
children, facilitates active learning, provides a rich learning environment, attends to both affective and cognitive
demands of learning, and views learning a ■ an interaction of environmental and developmental facton . (3 en.)
EDE 218 : TEACHING HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/ELEMENTARY
AGE CHILDREN. An introductory counc with special emphasi1 on planning, asseHing, pre■cribing, teaching
and evaluating activities which enhance the development of growth of children beginning at infancy. Teacher
directed practicum experience■ are provided during cla11 time. Prerequisite 32 credits. (3 en.)
EDE 301 : TEACHING OF READING. Theoretical background and the research base behind suggestion■ to put
theory into pnctice are included to give the prospective teacher a balanced perspective. Students are presented
pnctical information, activities and strategies for teaching reading, and given the opportunity to participate through
observation■, demonstration■, and actual le110n planning and teaching situations. Prerequi ■ite: 32 credits; 9
Humanities credits. (3 crs.)
EDE 302: DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL READING. Major emphasis is placed on acquainting the ■tudent
with the technique■ of diagnosing reading difficultiea and of detennining appropriate remedial treatment.
Prerequisite : EDE 301. (3 crs.)
EDE 305: MATHEMATICAL CONTENT AND METHOD IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. Emphaais is on
understanding the cognitive development and the perception of children and their work with mathematic ■. To
accomplish this it i■ suggested that students work with children. The professor demon■tntes learning activities
appropriate to the developmental and academic levels of the children. Al time pennits, and on the ba1i1 of the
experiences gained through observing and working with children, critical analyses of commercial arithmetic
materials and texts, 11 well as recent trends and current projects in arithmetic, are considered. Prerequisite■ 32
credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 crs.)
EDE 306 : TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES FOR ELEMENTARY GRADES . The foundation■ of the social
studies are examined, and teaching strategic, are emphaaized . Attention will be given to current trend ■ and the
present statu■ of social studies. Child growth and development are related to knowledge base• throughout the
COUl'IIC . Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Social Science credits. (3 crs.)
188
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION- EARLY CHILDHOOD
EDE 307 : SCIENCE FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. Thia course is required of all lltudenu in the
Elementary curriculum. It is designed to acquaint students with the history of acience curricula, the content of
science, and the proce11 of science teaching. Additionally, the instructor generate, behavioral outcome, by
encouraging acientific alcilla, deacribing positive attitudes, and enhancing appreciationa and acience interelt.
Prerequi ■ite : 32 credits; 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.)
EDE 308 : TEACHING OF LANGUAGE ARTS . Presents a broad foundation of the variou1 aspects of the
language arta in elementary education. Emphasis given to the knowledge of the facets of the language arta, basic
principle, technique,, materials of instruction, recent trends and research, and practice planning language arta
experiences. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Humanities credits. (3 en.)
EDE 311: CHILDREN'S LITERATURE. Acquaints the student with literature available for children and various
techniques that may be employed in elementary classrooms to stimulate interelt in reading and telling stories and
poems. Prerequi■ites : 32 credits; 9 Humanities credits. (3 en.)
EDE 312: CHILDREN'S LITERATURE D. An extenaion of Children' s Literature I. Emphasis on selection and
use of literature compatible with children's needs, intereata, and abilities. Focuse ■ on heightening appreciation of
literature in children. Prerequisite: EDE 311 (3 en.)
EDE 335: READING IN URBAN SOCIETY . Presents an undentandingof the reading proceu and its relationahip
to lltudents in the urban school. Emphasis ia given to characteristics of the di ■advantaged child, phases of the
reading proceu, stages of readiness, needs of the di ■advantaged child, providing for individual difference,, variou■
multi-ethnic ba■al reading programs, and materials and equipment. Prerequisite: EDE 301 . (2 en.)
EDE 337: POETRY FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CHILD . The study of poetry and verse, the heart of
all literary experiences, mainly in terms of the pleaaure they give children through their meaning, music and
mythm. Emphaaia is given to the special pleaaure inherent in poetry for children by extending their imaginationa,
contributing new sen■ationa, and enhancing their past experiences. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Hurnanitiea credits.
(2 en.)
EDE 409 : OBSERVATION AND CONFERENCE. The 11tudent receives background and experience in working
with intermediate grade children in the classroom. Lectures and classroom teaching experience, are combined to
give the student an opportunity to discover an aptitude and interest in working with children. (3 en.)
EDE 450: ASSESSING CHILDREN'S PERFORMANCE. This course reflects the developmental interaction model
of teaching with a focus on the consideration of developmental factors in planning evaluation procedure,. This
course's content includes the development and adaptation of instruments and procedures for evaluation of activities
associated with a variety of teaching approaches including inquiry and diacovery learning.
EDE 461 : STUDENT TEACHING . During this course the student is assigned to work in two claurooms in the
public schools. Under supervision, the student observes and participates in all teaching activities related to the
performance of a teacher's work in the elementary grades. Beside field work, students attend practicum clau once
a week. Discussions are centered around the current materials utilized in all aubject areas. Pennsylvania achool
law, relevant to the work of the claBBroom teacher are analyzed and discussed thoroughly. Opportunities are
provided to discuu problems encountered by students in their student teaching experiences. Teaching opportunitie■
are identified and discussed on a weekly basis. (12 crs.)
EDE 498 : INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES IN ELEMENT ARY SCHOOL. The techniques and the experience ■ of
educational innovation are nearly boundleu; therefore, we focus on educational innovation a, reaction to national
crisis, as reaction to technical innovation, and aa reaction to political fad. From this perspective, we asae11 the
present social and political forces that engender change in our national experience and that foster innovation in our
educational practices. We will examine the role of the NTE as an agent of change. Prerequisite: 32 credits. (3
crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
189
EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION COURSES (ECE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
BCE 202: FIELD EXPERIENCES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. The studenta m:eive background and experience
in worki111 with primary grade children in the clauroom. Lectures and clauroom teachi111 experience■ arc
combined to Jive studenta an opportunity to diacover their aptitude for and interest in working with young children.
Prcrequi1ite1: 32 credita, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 en.)
BCE 203:FIELD EXPERIENCES wrrH INFANTS, TODDLERS, AND PRESCHOOLERS. Introduce■ the
student to working with young children, from infancy through five by providing field experience■ in infant/toddler
day care centen and prcachool centen (Day Care, Head Start, or Nunery School). The student obacrvea, plans
activities, and prepares learning materials for children in group acttings. Lectures and clauroom teaching arc
combined to give students an opportunity to diacover their aptitude for and interest in working with very young
children. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 crs.)
EDE 210. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES IN ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION.
The role of a developmental intenctionist teacher ia explored in this course. Prcacrvice teachen arc taught specific
pcdaJoJical ■kill■ and atratejiea that develop a teacher who doc■ the following effectively: obacrvea and a■ICIICI
children, facilitates active learning, provide ■ a rich learning environment, attend■ to both affective and cognitive
demand■ of learning and view ■ learning a■ an interaction of environment and developmental factor■. (3 crs.)
BCE 217: MUSIC FOR EARLY CHILDHOOD. A creative approach to the music intercata and need■ of the very
young child deaigncd to acquaint the prospective teacher with current music education practice■ in prcachool and
the primary ,rades. Experience■ arc provided in singing, listening, playing inatrumenta, mythmic movement, and
creative mu■ic activities. Prerequisite: 32 crcdita; 9 Humanitie■ crcdita. (3 en.)
EDE 218: TEACHING HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/ELEMENTARY
AGE CHILDREN. An introductory course with special emphasia on planning, aaacssing, prcacribing, teaching and
evaluating activities which enhance the development of growth of children beginning at infancy. Teacher directed
practicum experience, arc provided during claaa time. Prerequisite: 32 credita. (3 crs.)
BCE 301: READING EXPERIENCES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. This course prepares Early Childhood studenta
to become facilitators of early literacy learnings. Content deals with concepts of emerging literacy and the
introduction of reading skills from infancy throughout the primary gradea. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Humanitiea
credita. (3 en.)
EDE 307: SCIENCE FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. This course is required of all student in the
Elementary and Early Childhood curricula. It is designed to acquaint students with the history of acience curricula,
the content of acience, and the proceas of acience teaching. Additionally, the instructor, generates behavioral
outcome■ by encourajing acientific skills, deacribing positive attitudes, enhance appreciation■, and acience interest.
Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.)
BCE 315: MATHEMATICAL CONTENT IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. The student is introduced to how
mathematic, develops in the very young child and how to aaacas this development. The student is introduced to
the teaching of arithmetic, mea111rcment, and geometry to the young child. Skill■ and understanding■ that children
acquire from infancy to age 8 arc covered. Prerequisites: 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.)
BCE 316: THE CHILD IN A SOCIAL AND PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT. Providea student with skills nccesaary
to develop children' ■ awareness of their social and physical world. Teaching atrategiea arc developed and evaluated
190
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD
as they pertain to children at the early childhood level of birth through eight yean. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9
Social Science credits. (3 en.)
ECE 318 : COMMUNICATIVE ARTS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. Familiarize students with methods of teaching
communication skills to young children. The integration of the cognitive and affective domaina, so important in
helping children communicate, receives special empha ■ia . Strategiea and techniques for teaching the language arts
are included . Prerequisite: 32 credits; 9 Humanitie, credits. (3 en.)
ECE 405 : EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION SEMINAR. How young children have been viewed and educated
by society throughout history. The present-day circumstances of children and families are studied. Students receive
background in how to work with parents, communities, other profeBBionals, and policy-maken to ensure a quality ,
developmentally appropriate education for young children. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 en.)
ECE 491 : FUNDAMENTALS OF DAY CARE EDUCATION. Background in the origin and current trends of
day care and the fundamentals of setting up a day care center. The course teaches students how to administer a
program focusing on aspects such as budgeting, personnel management, and developing program components.
Prerequisite: 32 credits; EDF 100, PSY 208 . (3 era.)
ECE 493 : DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRESCHOOL CHILD. The development of the child from conception to
six yean of age . The areas of development to be explored are sensory-motor, social-emotional, language, and
intellectual. Strategiea for enhancing growth through the various stages are emphasized. Prerequisite: 32 credits,
EDF 100, PSY 208: (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
191
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
ENGLISH (ENG)
LITERATURE (LIT)
PROFESSIONAL WRITING PROGRAM, Optiom in
-BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL WRITING
-CREATIVE WRITING
-JOURNALISM
-RADIO-TELEVISION MEDIA
-SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING
See also the program in Secondary Education Communication Certification (pages 164-165
in this catalog).
Professor Jack D. Goodstein, chair. Assistant Professor Ronald L. Forsythe, assistant chair.
Professors Philip Y. Coleman, Robert W. Dillon, Sr., John M. Hanchin, Robert A.
Korcheck, Horace S. Rockwood, ill, Charles R. Thomas; Associate Professors Glenn H.
Blayney, Edward J. Chute, Sumner Ferris, Gene Patrick Halboth, Madelon Jacoba,
Frederick S. Lapisardi, William M. Murdick, J. Alan Natali, Connie Mack Rea; Assistant
Professors William J. Beardsley, William K. Bennett, Bernard J. DeFilippo, Judith A.
Good, Robert H. Grimes, Patricia L. Hartman, William Hendricks, Arthur W. Knight,
Pratul C. Pathak, Lisa M. Schwerdt, G. Ralph Smith, II, Madeline C. Smith, Carole A.
Waterhouse; Instructor William A. Yahner
PURPOSE
English is a comprehensive discipline. Its scope encompasses a study of the evolution
of the language itself, the various types of writing, the literature in English (poetry, drama,
fiction, and essay regardless of national origin), and the study of literature in languages
other than English.
Enabling people to express their ideas clearly and to read their ideas and the ideas of
others in an appreciative and critical manner sets English off as a "liberalizing" course of
study. The ideas expressed are boundless. The content expressed is emotive as well as
rational. What is written is a personal and social record of the struggle to create meaning
for human existence. The reader is made more self-aware. Insight into the past and into
the present creates an interdisciplinary and common core of ideas to be discussed and
analymd by scholars in many disciplines.
PROGRAMS
The English major has seven options or areas of specialization. One is the general
English program. Five options form the Professional Writing Program: Business and
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
192
Commercial Writing, Creative Writing, Radio-Television Media, Scientific and Technical
Writing, and Journalism. The seventh option is for persons who want to teach English or
an allied area: the English Department in cooperation with the College of Education and
Human Services provides course work necessary for secondary school certification in
English and in Communication (which certifies students to teach English, Speech, or
Theatre).
A well developed internship program supports classroom studies in the Professional
Writing Program. Depending upon the Professional Writing option undertaken, a student
may take as many as sixteen credits of internship experience. Policies and procedures
regarding internships can be secured from the departmental office or faculty internship
supervisor.
HONOR SOCIETY
Sigma Tau Delta (ET~) is the National English Honor Society. The California
University Chapter, Delta Theta (~0), was chartered in 1959 and is the oldest chapter in
the Pennsylvania State System of Higher Education. Membership is Sigma Tau Delta is
open not only to English majors but also to all those who have English as an interest,
provided they have at least a 3.0 average in their English courses, rank in the highest 35%
of their class in general scholarship, have completed at least three semester of college, and
have completed at least two courses in literature in addition to freshman English.
AWARDS
The English Department offers the following awards, in order to encourage and reward
academic achievement:
The Eleanore C. Hibbs Writing Award is given annually to a student in Composition I
and Composition II. An applicant for the award must submit an essay that was written for
one of these classes and that carries the recommendation of the student's instructor. All
entries are judged by a special committee of the English Department. The winner receives
a certificate of merit and $100, both awarded at a luncheon in May.
The Minor W. Major Award is given annually to a student who has achieved distinction
in the study of English. The award is given for merit alone, usually to a student of junior
standing. A departmental committee reviews the academic records of prospective recipients,
usually English majors, and singles out the student who best meets its standards. The award
is named for Dr. Minor W. Major, late professor of English, 1957-1975. The recipient
receives a certificate of merit and a cash award, both presented at a luncheon usually in
April.
The English Faculty Award is given annually to the student in English whose
development has been most noteworthy over four years. The recipient receives a certificate
of merit and an inscribed book, awarded at the senior dinner in May.
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
193
CAREERS
Besides preparing the graduate for graduate work in English and American literature,
linguistics, library work, law, and a number of other fields, the English program offers
career opportunities in such positions as a newspaper reporter, magazine editor, writer,
public information assistant, advertising researcher, communications specialist, proof reader,
radio and television editor, and employment interviewer.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH
Curriculum:
(A) Geoeral Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area or Concentration: English Literature 1-11 (ENG 301 and 302); American Literature to 1865 (ENG
365); American Literature from 1865 to World War I (ENG 366); American Literature from World War I (ENG
367); Chaucer (ENG 415) or Milton (ENG 427) or Survey of Old and Middle English Literature (ENG 310);
ShakeBpeare (ENG 425); History of Literary Criticism (ENG 348) or Practical Criticism (ENG 448); Introduction
to Linguistic, (ENG 247) or History of the English Language (ENG 346) and 12 credits of 300-400 level English
counes. Related Counes: 30 credits, at least 16 of which must be in a Related Discipline approved by the advisor
and at least 16 of which must be at the 200 level or above.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH:
PROFESSIONAL WRITING PROGRAM
Curriculum:
Geoera1 Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
Busin~ and Commercial Writing Option
Area or Concentration: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Advertising (ENG 437); Great Books (ENG 203);
Bu1ine11 Writing I (ENG 211); and II (ENG 212); Journalism I (ENG 307); Research for Writen (ENG 308);
Publiahing the Magazine (ENG 351); Writing for Publication (ENG 496) . 9 credits of restricted elective,: Studie1
in Writing (ENG 352); Article Writing (ENG 435); Journalism II (ENG 311) and ill (ENG 312); Copywriting
(ENG 401); Directed projects in English (ENG 478); English Grammar and Usage (ENG 345); 21 credits of related
counes: Introduction to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I (BUS 111); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 301);
Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Principles of Marketing (BUS 321 ); Salcsmanahip (BUS 221 ); Principle,
of Management (BUS 201); 11 credits of elective,.
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
194
Creative Writing Option
Area or Coacmtration: Poetics (ENG 318); Creative Writing: Fiction (ENG 376) or Poetry (ENG 377); Creative
Writing Seminar (ENG 495); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351); Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Article Writing
(ENG 435); Studie1 in Writing (ENG 352); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Writing for Publication (ENG 496).
Three of the following restricted elective courses: Great Boob (ENG 203); Adaptation of Literary Material, (ENG
430) ; Playwriting (THE 250); Businen Writing I (BUS 211); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217);
Advertising (ENG 437); Journalism I (ENG 307); Creative Writing: Fiction (ENG 376) or Poetry (ENG 377);
Copywriting (ENG 401) . 32 credits of elective, drawn from literature (300 level and beyond), linguilllica, apccch,
foreign language,, and theatre, including 12 hours of electives from any one area .
Journalism Option
Area or Concentration: Word Procening (ENG 151); Journalism I (ENG 307) and Journalism D (ENG 311)
and Journalism m (ENG 312); Press Law and Ethics (ENG 253); American Journalism (ENG 254); Newapaper
Reporting I (ENG 334); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Six of the following: Research for Writers (ENG
308); Article Writing (ENG 435); Studies in Writing (ENG 352); Newspaper Reporting D (ENG 335); Publishing
the Magazine (ENG 351); Sportawriting I (ENG 313); Sportawriting D (ENG 314); Advertising (ENG 437).
Twelve credits in a related discipline; 16 credits in internship or related electives.
Radio-Television Media Option
Area or Concentration: Writing core: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Journali•m I (ENG 307); Research for
Writers (ENG 308); Article Writing (ENG 435); Directed Projects in English (ENG 478); Adaptation of Literary
Materials (ENG 430); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Media Core : Introduction to Televi1ion Production
(COM 240); Introduction to Radio Production (COM 245); Radio and Television Writing : News and Commercials
(COM 330) ; Radio and Television Writing: Drama (COM 335); Radio Workshop I (COM 196) and D (COM 296)
and ill (COM 396) or Television Workshop I (COM 195) and D (COM 295) and ill (COM 395). Six to 15 credits
of writing electives from among: Playwriting (THE 250); Journalism D (ENG 311) and m (ENG 312); Creative
Writing : Drama (ENG 378); Advertising (ENG 437); and Businesa Writing I (ENG 211) . Six to 12 credits of media
electives from among: Radio and Television Announcing-(COM 246); Appreciation of Television (COM 270);
Advanced Televi1ion Production (COM 340); and Special Problems in Speech Communication (COM 420). Three
to 15 credits of literature electives from among: Great Boob (ENG 203); Shakespeare (ENG 425); Studies in
Drama (ENG 488); Shakespeare in the Theatre (THE 305); World Drama (THE 315); Dramatic Theory and
Criticism (THE 400); or other advanced literature courses.
Scientific and Technical Writing Option
Area or Concentration: Writing Core: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Journalism I (ENG 307); Scientific
and Technical Writing I (ENG 217) and Technical Writing D (ENG 218); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351);
Article Writing (ENG 435); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Studies in Writing (ENG 352); Writing for
Publication (ENG 496); Literature Core : Six credits from among: Great Boob (ENG 203); English Literature I
(ENG 207) and English Literature D (ENG 208); American Literature to 1865 (ENG 365); American Literature
from 1865 to World War I (ENG 366) ; American Literature from World War I (ENG 367) . Related Electives:
14 credits from among: English Grammar and Usage (ENG 345); Journalism D (ENG 311); Advertising (ENG
437); Copywriting (ENG 401); Business Writing I (ENG 211); Directed Project in English (ENG 478) . 3-8 credits
of literature electives; and a 3-11 credit internship . 21 credits of Scientific or Technical courses, 15 credits in one
discipline code .
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
195
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN ENGLISH FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculma:
(A) Gmenl Educatioa:
Humanitie ■ (IS credit, minimum): including Compo■ition I (ENG 101);
(ENG 102), Theatre Coune, World Literature to 1600 (ENG 20S) or World Literature ■ince 1600
(ENG 206); Natural Science (9 credit, minimum); Social Science (9 credit minimum); Health or Phy■ical Activitie■
(3 credit minimum); Oral Communication (COM 101); General P■ychology (PSY 101).
(B) Profeuioaal Educatioa: (41 credita): Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational P■ychology
(PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300);
Educational Tellla and Mea■urementa in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary
School ■ (EDS 46S); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Lcamcra (EDU
340); Computera for Teachers (EDF 301); Teaching of English in Secondary Schools (EDS 440); Student Teaching
and School Law (EDS 461).
(C) Profeuioaal Specialization: (4S credita) : Advanced Writing (ENG 37S) or Scientific & Technical
Writing (ENG 217) or Creative Writing (ENG 376); History of the English Language (ENG 346); English
Grammar and U■age (ENG 34S); History of Literary Criticism (ENG 348); Introduction to Lingui ■tics (ENG 347);
Argumentation & Debate (COM 230) .
(D) AdHDCed Requirements: (27 credita) : American Literature to 186S (ENG 36S); American Literature
from 186S to World War I (ENG 366); American Literature from World War I (ENG 367) or American Literature
Elective; English Literature I (ENG 301); English Literature II (ENG 302); Shakespeare (ENG 42S);
Communication Theory (COM 490); Fundamentals of Acting (THE 130) or Stagecraft (THE ISi) or Fundamentals
of Directing (THE 200); ~00-400 ENG literature elective.
Compo■ition II
Students must achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to achieve Pennsylvania
Certification.
ENGLISH COURSES (ENG)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ ENG 100. ENGLISH LANGUAGE SKILLS . A beginning coune which provides guided practice in writing and
reading, with emphasis on the interrelationship of reading, thinking, and writing to evaluate the effective use of
the written language and, after evaluation, to help develop these ■kills to the level of competency expected of
college lludenta. ENG 100 stresses learning fundamental principles and attitudes concerning the writing process
as well as how to put into practice these principles and attitudes. It explores the importance of eaaential
compo■itional ■lcill■: the ability to read correctly and to organize material effectively and, by adherence to the innate
logic of language (revealed in ita rules of grammar, ■yntax, punctuation and vocabulary choice) to expreu idea■
clearly and precisely. This course does 1UJI cany credit towards graduation. (3 era.)
+ENG 101. ENGLISH COMPOSmON I. Composition I is a natural sequel to English Language Sicilia. It
guided practice in writing, with emphaaia on thoughtful analyai■ of subject matter, clear understanding
of the writing ■ituation, flexible use of rhetorical strategies, and development of stylistic options, particularly those
related to an understanding of a variety of purpose■ and voice■ . ENG 101 continues the development of the
eaaential writing, reading and thinking slcill■ atre■sed in ENG I 00. (3 era.)
provide■
196
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
+ENG 102. ENGLISH COMPOSITION D. The 1equence of Composition I - Composition D provides guided
practice in writing, with an empha■ia on more demanding writing aituatione. It continue ■ the work begun in
Compo■ition I with more complicated rhetorical ■trate,ie■ and styli■tic options, especially audience-centered
considerations. ENG 102 introduce■ reaearch and reaearch writing at the undergraduate level. (3 en.)
+ ENG 106. INTRODUCTION TO POETRY. An introduction to the elements of poetry throuah the clo■e
and explication of ■elected poetry from a variety of poets. (3 en.)
analy■ia
+ ENG 107. INTRODUCTION TO FICTION. An introduction to the elements of fiction throuJh the clo■e reading
of ■elected ■hort ■torie■, novella■, and novel■ by a variety of authon. (3 en.)
+ ENG 108. INTRODUCTION TO DRAMA. An introduction to the ba■ic elements of drama.
aelected from worka from the Greek Clauical Period to the Modem Age. (3 en .)
Reading■
will be
+ENG 151. WORD PROCESSING . Familiarize, the IIUdent with the ba■ic concepts of word proceuing. The
atudent learns ■uch operations a■ di■k fonnatting, editing and printing ■tandard document file■ , copying file■ from
other eource■, creating simple databaae file,, and melJUli file■ to do maaa-mailings. The coune aa■ume■ no prior
knowledge of computen. Thi■ coune may not be uaed to aatiafy Humanitie■ requirements in the General Education
program. (1 er.)
+ ENG 155 . BLACK LITF.RATURE. An introduction to the writing■ of African Americana in poetry, fiction, and
drama, ran,ing from the Harlem Renai■aance of the 1920. to the contemporary productions of Leroi Ione■ and
l■hmael Reed . (3 en.)
+ENG 191. STUDENT PUBLICATIONS WORKSHOP. The univenity newspaper and other publications aerve
as laboratories. The IIUdent practices writing, editing, photography, layout, and production. Above all, the IIUdent
learns to work against the clock, a journali■tic neceuity. (1 er.)+ENG 203 . GREAT BOOKS. The texta and hi■torical background ■ of aelectione from among the mo■t highly
regarded literature of the world . The range i■ from the clauical Greek era to the twentieth century. (3 en.)
+ ENG 205. WORLD LITERATURE TO 1600. Example, of worka from a variety of periods and culture■ through
1600 are examined for their literary merit and national characten. Worlte are read in translation. (3 en.)
+ENG 206 . WORLD LITERATURE FROM 1600. Example, of worka from a variety of culture■ and periods
after 1600 are examined for their literary merit and national characten. Works are read in translation. (3 en.)
ENG 211. BUSINESS WRITING I. An introduction to the analysis, writing, and oral preaentation of fonnal and
aemi-formal documents eaaential to busineu groups. Prerequisite: ENG 101. (3 en.)
ENG 212. BUSINESS WRITING D. A continuation in the practice of thoae skills developed in Busineu Writing
I. Prerequisite : Busineu Writing I or equivalent writing ability. (3 en.)
ENG 215. LITERATURE AND AGING. The 1111dy of literature that
include ■
aging as a thematic device. (3 en.)
ENG 217. SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING I. An introduction to the specific technique, uaed in the
preparation of reporta and other acientific documents. Recommended for Science and Technology majon. (3 en.)
ENG 218. SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING D. For IIUdents who wish to improve writing skills
acquired in ENG 217: a problem-aolving approach to adapting technical documents to variou■ audiences; ■trategie ■
of organization for complex technical documents ■uch aa formal propoaals, professional articles, and computer
documentation; the uae of computen to mailer different formats in acientific and technical communication.
Prerequi■ite : ENG 217. (3 er.)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
197
ENG 253. PRESS LAW AND ETHICS : Thi ■ counc help ■ atudent joumali1ta understand not only what they can
or can't do by law, but what they ■hould or ■hould not do within commonly accepted standard■ of good taste and
morality.
ENG 254. AMERICAN JOURNALISM: A atudy of the rccenthiltOry ofjoumaliam and of the prcacnt ■tatc of the
profeuion. The empha1i1 i■ on print journalism; however, the news gathering and reporting aapccta of radio and
tclevi■ion arc covered briefly. Prcrcqui1itc1: Joumali■m I and II for Writing Majon.
ENG 265. THE AMERICAN EXPERIENCE IN LITERATURE: NINETEENTH CENTURY. A aurvey of aclcctcd
worb which (1) were very popular; (2) were influential in the counc of American history; and (3) reveal faceta
of American life in the 19th century. (3 en.)
ENG 266. THE AMERICAN EXPERIENCE IN LITERATURE: TWENTIETH CENTURY. A study of aclectcd
literature of twentieth century America in the context of major social, hiltOrical, economic, and intellectual trend■ •
In addition to the treatment of ■tandard twentieth century •clauic■, • book■ which have had a wide popular appeal
or which have influenced or interpreted the cultural life of modem America arc atudied . All genres arc included,
with apccial empha■i■ on fiction and non-fiction. A lower divi ■ion counc de■igncd for the general educational
atudent. (3 en.)
ENG 301 . ENGLISH LITERATURE I. A aurvey of English literature from ita beginnings in the sixth century to
the late eighteenth century. (3 en.)
ENG 302. ENGLISH LITERATURE II. A aurvey of Engli■h literature from the Romantic pocta to the prcacnt day.
(3 en.)
ENG 307. JOURNALISM I (NEWSWRITING). An introduction to basic newsgathering and newswriting taught
by in-clau exerciaca early in the acmcstcr, followed by weekly auignmenta that require submissions to the
California 1lmes. (3 en.)
ENG 308. RESEARCH FOR WRITERS. For students in each of the ProfeSBional Writing tracks . Basic library
materials and technique■, on-campu■ rcaource■, govemmcntdocumenta, research libraries, and advanced techniques
of interviewing, document analysis, etc. Concludes with a pre-publication draft of a rcacarched paper in the
student's area of apecialization. (3 en.)
ENG 310. SURVEY OF OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE. A study of English literature from ita
beginning■ to approximately 1500. Some of the topic■, authon, and work■ arc Beowulf, elegiac and Christian
poetry, the riac of the drama, the romance (Sir Gawain and lhe Green Knight and Thomas Malory' ■ Morre
Danhur), and aclcctiona from Geoffrey Chaucer' s Canterbury Tales. Moat of the writing is read in Modem
Engli■h veniona. (3 en.)
ENG 3 ll . JOURNALISM II (FEATURE WRITING) . Feature writing and in-depth news reporting. Studenta write
four feature article■ ■uitable for publication in the California 1lmes. (3 en.)
ENG 312. JOURNALISM m. Working on college publications, editing, proofreading, and rewriting materials for
print arc learned in the clauroom and in the production of actual publicationa. (3 en.)
ENG 313 . SPORTSWRITING I . A study of the history of aportswriting in America and the technique• of writing
daily coverage of aports and athlete■ . Student.I will atudy interviewing, finding and using statistics, the standards
and practice ■ of the profeuion and the make-up, layout and de■ign of the daily aports page. Student.I will_ be
auigncd •beats• and will be asked to write at least one ltOry per week. (3 en.)
ENG 314. SPORTSWRITING II: A atudy of the techniques of writing lengthy, in-depth stories about aporta and
athletes. Student■ will be a■ked to write columns, feature 1t0rie1 and profile■ and to do investigative reporting .
Student■ ■hould have taken Joumali■m I and Sportswriting I. (3 en.)
198
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
ENG 31.S. SURVEY OF AMERICAN WOMEN WRrrERS: METHOD AND TEXT. The importance of both
text and method in the study of American women writen ia emph■aized in thia coune. Aaaiped reading• and
research worbhopa introduce studenta to ■ variety of texta and aourcea ■a well ■a to methods for reading,
discovering, and interpreting writings. Integration of text and method ia achieved through • aerie• of writing and
research projecta that ■re tied to the ■aaigned readings. (3 en.)
ENG 316. MYTHOLOGY I. An exploration of the origins of mythology and various mytha through• study of
aelected Greek, Roman, Nordic, Oriental, African, and American Indian mythologies, with attention to the roles
of aoda and heroes. (3 en.)
ENG 317. MYTHOLOGY Il. A further examination of mythology, with emphasis on legend• and folkt■ lea, through
study of En,liah, lriah, German, Italian, French, and American mythologies. (3 en.)
ENG 318. POETICS. Through reading• from a text on poetic theory, eu■ya on poetry by poeta, and ■n anthology
of poetry, studenta learn to analyze poema in great detail, atreaaing poetry ■a ■n ■ct of language and something
which ia made •• much II it ia inspired. Studenta become acquainted with the variety of me■n1 by which the
literary craft.man creates feeling and meaning. (3 en.)
ENG 321 . THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE: SKELTON THROUGH DONNE. A study of nondramatic prose and
poetry choaen from such writen as Thomas Wyatt, the Earl of Surrey, Thomas S■ckville, John Skelton, Sir Philip
Sidney, Edmund Spenser, William Shakespeare, and John Donne, with emph■aia on such literary genre••• the lyric
and sonnet, and ■n examination of various philosophical, historical, and social documenta. (3 en.)
ENG 322. THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE: BACON THROUGH MARVELL. A study of the non-dramatic prose
and poetry of En,l■nd in the seventeenth century from the worb of Francia Bacon, Richard Burton, John Donne,
Michael Drayton, George Herbert, Robert Herrick, Ben Jonaon, the King James Bible, Andrew Marvell, John
Milton, Henry Vaughan, and Izaak Walton. Emph■1i1 on the three achoola of poetry of the century. (3 en.)
ENG 334. NEWSPAPER REPORTING I. A profeaaion■ l-level coune that acquainta studenta with basic newsroom
procedures and ■aaignmenta. Prerequisites: Journ■ liam 1-Il.
ENG 335. NEWSPAPER REPORTING Il. The coune builds on material learned in Newspaper Reporting I, but
the emphaaia ahifta to extended coverage of more complex inatitutions and i1111e1, culminating in a multi-part story
which demonatratea ■ knowledge of both the i1111e and the governing, deliberative or enforcement agency involved.
Prerequiaitea: Journalism 1-Il, Newspaper Reporting I.
ENG 341. ROMANTIC LITERATURE. An intensive study of selected worb by such Romantic poeta •• William
Blake, William Wordsworth, Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Percy Bysahe Shelley, John Keata, and Lord Byron. (3 en.)
ENG 342. VICTORIAN LITERATURE. An historical and critical survey of the poetry and non-fictional prose of
the Victorian period through such writen as Alfred TeMyson, Robert and Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Thomas
Carlyle, Matthew Arnold, Dante Gabriel and Christin■ Rossetti, Gerard Manley Hopkins, John Stuart Mill , John
Ruskin, John Henry Newman, T . H. Huxley, and Walter Pater. (3 en.)
ENG 345. ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND USAGE. Provides future English te■ chen, professional writing majon,
and other inlereated atudenta, with a sophisticated background in En,liah grammar. The course coven a variety
of grammatical theoriea, issues of mechanical correctneaa in writing, and the sociology of usage. (3 en.)
ENG 346. HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A survey of the development of the language from ita
Germanic base to the emergence of American Engliah. Explanations of aound ahifta and foreign and social
influences. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
199
ENG 347. INTRODUCTIONTO LINGUISTICS. An examination of the ecvenl areas oflan,uage study: history
of the lan,uage, phonology and morphology, gnmman (tnditional and modem), and contcmponry American
usage, dialccll, lexicognphy, and ecmantic1. (3 en.)
ENG 348. HISTORY OF LITERARY CRITICISM. An examination of major critical documcnll from Plato
through the modem critics. An intenaive examination of the worb themselves, with some additional concern for
their place in litenry hiatory. (3 en.)
ENG 351 . PUBLISHING THE MAGAZINE. Studenll in this courec publish a magazine, Flipside. They contribute
worb of litenturc and reportage, illuatnte it with original work: or with photognphs, solicit contributon, finance
the magazine through advertising, and elllbliah editorial policy. (3 en.)
ENG 352. STUDIES IN WR1TING. A study in style: ill definition, ill analysis, and the technique, modern writen
of creative non-fiction uec to achieve it. Studenll analyze the work: of such writen as Tom Wolfe, Joan Didion,
Hunter Thompson and Truman Capote, and then apply to their own proec the techniques theec writen learned from
thoec writen. (3 en.)
ENG 355. SURVEY OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL I: THE BEGINNING THROUGH SCOTT. A study of the
development of the novel from ill beginnina• through the Romantic period, with emphasis on Daniel Defoe, Samuel
Richardson, Henry Fielding, Tobias Smollett, Sir Walter Scott, and Jane Austen. (3 era.)
ENG 356 . SURVEY OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL Il: DICKENS TO THE PRESENT. A study of the novels and
novelilll of the Victorian period and the twentieth century, including Charlea Dick:ena, Charlotte, Emily and Ann
Bronte, W. M . Thack:cny, George Eliot, Joecph Connd, James Joyce, and Virginia Woolf. (3 en.)
ENG 357. TWENTIIITHCENTURY BRil1SH LITERATURE TO WORLD WAR Il. A study of fiction, dnma,
and poetry with empha ■is on W. 8. Yeats, D. H. Lawrence, George Bernard Shaw, Jamea Joyce, Joecph Connd,
Virginia Woolf, E . M . Fonter, and W. H. Auden. (3 en.)
ENG 358. CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE SINCE WORLD WAR Il. An explontion of major genres in
American, English and Continental litenturc by such authors a ■ Saul Bellow, Norman Mailer, Kurt VoMegut, John
Fowle,, Robert LowelJ, Ken Kcecy, John Updike, Lawrence Durrell, Bernard Malamud, Philip Roth, Sylvia Plath,
Thom GuM, Boria Paatcrnak:, Samuel Beckett, Jean Genet, Eug~ne Ionesco, and Bcrtold Brecht. (3 era.)
ENG 365. AMERICAN LITERATURE I. The first courec in the survey of American litenturc covers the period
from ecttlemcnt to 1865. Readings take into account the discovery and rediscovery of new a ■ well as tnditional
texts: writing• of Native Americana, Colonilll, Fedenlista, Romantic,, Tnnscendentalista, and othen arc studied
with an empha ■ i1 upon the influence of Puritan and Enlightenment thought and upon the context of the implicit
conflicts in American aocial hiatory and culture. (3 crcs.)
ENG 366. AMERICAN LITERATURE Il. The accond courec in the survey of American litenturc focueca on the
period of the Civil War to the end of World War I in which fiction . and poetry dominate the litenturc.
Conaidention ia given to the emergence of Black: (in the Harlem Renaissance) and women writen within the context
of a maturing America: growing expanaion, imrnigntion, industrialization, and national definition (3 en.)
ENG 367. AMERICAN LITERATURE m. The final courec in the survey of American litenturc deals wi\h
writing, from World War I to the prcecnt. A growing divenity of •voices,~ atyles, and genre reflect the increasing
complexity and richneaa of the American litenry landscape. Both Modernista and contemponry writen arc
studied. (3 en.)
ENG 375. ADVANCED WRP'ING. The theoriea and pnctice of expository, persuasive, and specialiud report
writing. Prcrcquiaites: English Composition I and English Composition Il or equivalent writina ability. (3 en.)
200
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
ENG 376 . CREATIVE WRITING: FICTION . Techniques of fiction are studied and applied to the writing of short
stories, and students are encouraged to use and shape their own experience; transmitting those everyday things
around them into fictional realities. (3 en.)
ENG 377. CREATIVE WRITING : POETRY . A11pects of poetry, 111ch aa line length, rhythm, aound patterns and
imagery, are discussed . Students will apply those techniques to their own experience and vision, developing a
poetic voice or style. (3 en.)
ENG 378 . CREATIVE WRITING : DRAMA. Writing techniques for the modem stage; e .g., developing character
through dialogue and action. (3 crs.)
ENG 401. COPYWRITING. Students who have already taken the basic Advertising course are expected to improve
preexisting writing skills through individual and group projecta in each of these areas: (1) direct mail
advertisements, (2) newspaper and magazine space advertisements, (3) industrial newsletters and brochures, (4)
radio and TV advertisements. Each student writes at least two usable advertisements for off-campus and one for
a campus program or organization. Noifor beginnen. Prerequisite: ENG 437 (3 crs.)
ENG 415. CHAUCER. 1he Canterbury Tales and other works . (3 crs.)
ENG 419 . INTERNSHIP IN PROFESSIONAL WRITING . Introduces students to the competitive world of
professional writing. Students and cooperating institutions conclude a fonnal agreement whereby they work at a
job and simultaneously receive undergraduate credit. (All details of the course are to be worked out with the
Director of Professional Writing. Variable credits.)
ENG 425. SHAKESPEARE. Explores in considerable depth, and with special reference to the conditions of
Shakespeare's times and theater, some of his greatest plays, especially (a) those most often studied in secondary
school and (b) his great tragedies. (3 crs .)
ENG 427. MILTON. An examination of the major poetry : Paradise Lost, Paradise Regained, Samson Agonisies,
and Lycidas . The prose is treated insofar as it is related to the poetry . (3 crs.)
ENG 430. ADA.Pr ATION OF LITERARY MATERIALS . Adaptation of literature to the mechanical demands of
television, radio, theater, and film. While remaining faithful to an author's intent, the student must adapt one short
piece of literature and one major, long piece to each of the following: radio, television, theater, and film. (3 crs.)
ENG 435 . ARTICLE WRITING . The styles and techniques of article writing. The student learns the editorial
demands of numerous magazines, and demonstrates versatility and writing ability by tailoring the work to the
demands . Promotes astuteness by showing how to illustrate, "package,• and market a special kind of writing. (3
en .)
ENG 43 7 . ADVERTISING . An introduction to marketing theories, behavior patterns, and techniques of advertising
campaigns: copywriting, layout, and production of advertising through working for an actual client. (3 crs.)
ENG 445. DESCRIPTIVE LINGUISTICS . An examination of the methods used by linguists to describe languages
in terms of their internal structures. Topics explored include world language families, language classification,
writing systems, inventories of speech sounds, and other related material. (3 crs.)
ENG 448 . PRACTICAL CRITICISM. Provides examples of criticism and the opportunity to criticize poetry,
fiction , and drama . (3 crs .)
ENG 481. STUDIES IN OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE. Arthurian romance, medieval drama ,
Beowulf, medieval ballads, Old English Poetry. (3 crs.)
ENG 482 . STUDIES IN RENAISSANCE LITERATURE I. Eliubethan lyric poetry, pre-Shakespearean drama,
Jacobean drama , Renaissance prose, the school of Spenser, Metaphysical poetry, Cavalier poetry. (3 en .)
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
201
ENG 483 . STUDIES IN THE RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. Reatontion dnma, Au,u1tan
aatire, the Scriblerua Club, periodical litenture, nco-i:laaaical criticiam. (3 en.)
ENG 484. STUDIES IN NINETEENTH-CENTURY LITERATURE. Nincteenth-centurydnma, Romantic proae,
nineteenth-century litenry criticism, the pre-Raphaelite,, the Edwardians, and the Georgiana. (3 en.)
ENG 485. STUDIES IN TWENTIETH CENTURY ENGLISH LITERATURE. Contemponry trends in litenture,
the war novel, the poets of the Thirties, Irish litenturc, the British novel. (3 en.)
ENG 487. STUDIES IN AMERICAN LITERARY GENRES. The American short atory, the nineteenth-century
American novel, the twentieth-century American novel, modern American poetry, American dnma, American nonfiction. (3 en.)
ENG 488 . STUDIES IN DRAMA. Cla11ical dnma, theater of the absurd, continental dnma , film and television
as dnma, realism and natunliam in dnma. (3 en.)
ENG 495. CREATIVE WRITING SEMINAR. The fictional principle■ learned in ENG 376 are applied to the
writing of major creative work, such as novella, and the atudent i■ given the opportunity to polish and extend
writing akilla previously acquired . (3 en.)
ENG 496. WRrrING FOR PUBLICATION . Students work individually with an inatructor to refine their work for
publication and are expected to publish at least one work during the aemeatcr. Simultaneou1ly, they compile jobrelated portfolios, and work on a auperviaed project, e.g ., a public relation■ scheme for the univenity . (3 en.)
LITERATURE COORS~ (Ll'D
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
These are all introductions to literature, with emphasis on the subject indicated in the title.
They are primarily intended for the general student and may not be used to fulfill
requirements for the English major.
+ LIT 111. *STAR TREK" AND MODERN MAN. (3 en.)
+LIT 115. MAN'S VIEW OF GOD. An introduction to the Bible as a chronicle of Hebrew hiatory in light of
recent archeological and philological discoveries, to demonatnte how deeply this oriental book has affected the
western mind. (3 en.)
+LIT 116. MYTH, MAGIC, MYSTICISM. The four basic paths into the unknown: magic, mysticism, fantasy,
and myth . (3 en.)
+ LIT 118. THE AMERICAN HERO. The development of the American hero in fiction, with specific emphasis
on the hero'• nature, chancier, and matuntion. (3 en.)
+ LIT 125. THE AMERICAN WEST. A genenl_introduction to the litenture of the Great American West through
an examination of a variety of litenry types. (3 en.)
202
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
+LIT 127. WOMAN AS HERO. An exploration of heroic roles assigned to women in literature, the contrast
between reality and tlle literature, and the differences between fictional women created by male and female autho111.
An analysis of the reasons for these differences forms part of the subject. (3 crs.)
+LIT 130. ATHEISM AND EXISTENTIALISM. (3 crs.)
+ LIT 138 . WAR IN THE NOVEL. A study that limits itself to those wars fought after 1900 and to their
treatments in literature. In particular, the course is interested in the effects of war upon individuals, and in the
ambivalence toward war ahown by novelists . (3 era.)
+ LIT 147. SCIENCE FICTION. An introductory survey of the forms of science fiction, with particular emphasis
on the author' s ability to detail and predict future developments . (3 era.)
+ LIT 148 . HORROR IN LITERATURE. An examination of the tradition of horror literature in England and
America from a literary, historical, and psychological viewpoint. Some emphasis on the sociological implications
of the popularity of the form . (3 crs.)
+LIT 150. BASEBALL IN LITERATURE. This course requires the student to read, write, and talk: about a game
that Steinbeck: called a "state of mind,• a game that is, in the words of Jacque Baf"Zlln, a way "to know America .•
Thus the student that works learns about both himself and his country. (3 crs.)
+ LIT 160 . AMERICAN NATURE WRITERS. An introduction to the best of America's great naturalists
emphasizing the development of informed and educated attitudes towards America ' s natural resources and issues
of protection and exploitation. (3 crs .)
+ LIT 166. SACCO AND V ANZEITI.
+ LIT 170. ALL ABOUT WORDS. An introduction to the total complexity and fascination of words. The course
deals with words as shapes, analogs, formulas , and games. Indirectly, but significantly, it instructs in vocabulary
by introducing a sizeable vocabulary for talking about words and by nurturing a student's natural curiosity about
worda. (3 m.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
203
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURFS
FRENCH (FRE)
GERMAN (GER)
RUSSIAN (RUS)
RUSSIAN AND SOVIET STUDIES
SPANISH (SPN)
Associate Professor Elsbeth E. Santee, chair. Professors Alan H. Krueck, Bruce L. Weston;
Associate Professors Raldo 0. Parascenz.o, Carol L. Kaplan; Assistant Professors Manuel
G. Demetrakis, Margarita Ribar
PURPOSE
Rapid political and economic changes in the world require that students not only
understand other cultures but that they can communicate with persons in those cultures. In
this sense familiarity with speaking and reading a foreign language and being aware of how
persons in other countries think about the world is pragmatic. It is good business or smart
diplomacy. Instruction in an unfamiliar language also helps students see the world from a
different perspective. Inasmuch as that occurs, students increase in self-awareness, lose a
blind ethnocentrism, and gain a greater appreciation of all cultures, including their own.
This makes life in general more meaningful.
PROGRAMS
The department administers three programs: a language program in German, French,
Spanish, and Russian; an International Studies program with options in Business and
Economics, Political Science, Geography and Languages (see the section on Earth Sciences,
pages 167 and following, in this catalog); a language certification program for students who
plan to teach in one of the language areas; and the Russian and Slavic Interdisciplinary
Studies Program. Students in these programs will develop listening, speaking, reading and
writing skills, as well as an awareness of cultural diversity and its impact on human
behavior.
Language and culture are closely aligned. To support both the language programs,
International Studies majors and the general education humanities electives, required across
the university for graduation, a series of culture courses, taught in English, are available.
These indicate how artistic expression, geography, economic and historical development in
the principal areas where the four languages are spoken mutually influence each other.
204
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
PLACEMENT
Students entering a foreign language course will be evaluated in order to determine the
proper course-level placement for them. Students who wish to receive credit for previously
acquired language proficiency can talce a CLEP examination or a challenge examination (see
pages 51-52 in this catalog).
AWARDS
The Elsbeth E. Santee Scholarship Fund grants renewable awards annually for students
majoring in a foreign language and who maintain a 3.0 QPA in their major. Information
about the award and application procedures is available from the departmental office.
CAREERS
Linguistic ability in languages other than English can promote employment opportunities
in organizations working internationally, namely international legal, banking and commercial
corporations, national and regional governmental agencies, social service and religious
organizations, educational institutions, the communications, import-export and travel
businesses and a variety of translation services. More information on specific employment
opportunities is available in the Career Planning and Placement Office.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIF1CATION IN
FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEACIDNG FOR GRADES K-12
(FRENCH, GERMAN, OR SPANISH)
Curriculum:
(A) Gmeral F.clucatioo: 15 credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102); 9 credits in
Natural Science,; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM
101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credits of free electives .
(B) Pro(euioaal F.clucation: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300) ; Educational Telltl
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School• (EDS 465);
TeachinJ in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming the Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Computen for
Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching Modern Languages K through 12 (EDS 460); Student Teaching and School Law
(EDS 461).
(C) Proreuioaal Specialization: Intermediate I (203) and II (204); Convenation and Compo■ition 1-11 (311
and 312); Advanced Composition, Grammar & Stylistics (FRE, GER, or SPN 401); 6 credits, Culture and
Civiliution; Survey of Literature 1-11 (421 and 422); Foreign Language Colloquium in appropriate languaae (FRE,
GER, or SPN 450); 6 credits of elective■ in major field in second foreign language.
Students in these curricula also must achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order
to achieve Pennsylvania Certification.
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
205
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH
Curricuhma:
(A) Gtllel'III Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Intermediate French 1-Il (FRE 203 and FRE 204); French Conversation,
Compo1ition, and Phonetic, 1-Il (FRE 311 and FRE 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Styli1tic1 (FRE
401); French Colloquium (FRE 450); Studie1 in French Culture (6 credits); Survey of French Literature 1-Il (FRE
421 and FRE 422); Geography of Europe (GEO 325). Six credits in one other foreign language; 3 credits in each
of HiltOry, English, Philosophy, Psychology, and Communication Studies. Fourteen credits of related electives
with the adviaer'• approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GERMAN
Curricuhma:
(A) Gt11e1'111 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Science; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: I!ttermediate German I (GER 203) and Il (GER 204); German Conversation and
Compo,ition I (GER 311) and Il (GER 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Stylistics (GER 401); Studies
in German Culture (6 credits); Survey of German Literature I (GER 421) and (GER 422); German Colloquium
(GER 450) or HiltOry of the German Language (GER 452); Geography of Europe (GEO 325); six credits in one
other foreign language; at least three credits in each of Philosophy, Psychology, Communication Studies, History,
and English. 14 credits of electives with the adviaer's approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SPANISH
Curricuhma:
(A) Gt11e1'111 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Intermediate Spanish I (SPN 203) and II ( SPN 204); Spanish Conversation and
Compo1ition I (SPN 311) and II (SPN 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Stylistics (SPN 401); Studies
in Hispanic Culture (6 credits); Survey of Spanish Literature (SPN 421); Survey of Spanish-American Literature
(SPN 422); Geography of Latin America (GEO 328); Spanish Colloquium (SPN 450); Six credits in one other
foreign language; at least three credits in each of Philosophy, Psychology, Communication Studies, HiltOry and
English. Fourteen credits of electives taken with the advisor's approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES,
WITH A SPECIALIZATION IN RUSSIAN AND SLAVIC STUDIES
Curriculum:
(A) Gtllel'III Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 1~); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Elementary Rusaian 1-11 (RUS 101-1Q2); Intermediate Ru11ian 1-11 (RUS 203204); Soviet Rusaian Culture (RUS 296); Geography of the Soviet Union (GEO 330); History of Russia (HIS 245);
Philosophy of Marxi,m (PHI 270); Comparative Economic System■ (ECO 351); Politics and Government of the
Soviet Union (POS 280); Studies in Ru11ian Literature (RUS 469); 35 credits of restricted electives.
206
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
FRENCH COURSES (FRE)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
Culture Courses (FRE 240 and 296-301) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy
General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the major. Courses
are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester.
+FRE 101. ELEMENTARY FRENCH I. For the IIUdent without previou■ knowledge of French. The
development of the fundamentals of correct idiomatic French. Instruction in basic audio-lingual comprchen■ ion,
sentence ltnlcture, reading, writing, and apeaking. Cla■aroom inllnlction ia supplemented by laboratory IIUdy and
practice. Three cla■a houn each week and one hour language laboratory per week. (3 en.)
+ FRE 102. ELEMENT ARY FRENCH Il. A continuation of French 101. Three cla■a houn each week and one
hour languaae laboratory per week. Prcrequi■ite : French 101 or one year of high achoo! French. (3 en.)
+ FRE 203. INTERMEDIATE FRENCH I. French ,rammar and reading. A review of essential French grammar.
Development of audio-lingual comprehen■ ion, reading and writing facility . Three class houn each week; one hour
languaae laboratory per week. Prerequisites: French 101 and 102 or two yean of high achoo! French. (3 en.)
+FRE 204. INTERMEDIATE FRENCH Il. Continuation of French 203 . Oral-aural work continue■ but i■
accompanied by a development of reading ■kill through diacuuion of selected prose and poetry. Three clau houra
and one hour language laboratory each week. Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. (3 en.)
+ FRE 240. THE MIDDLE AGES AND THE RENAISSANCE (800-1600). Thi■ course survey ■ the evolution of
French- culture from the Middle Age■ to the end of the sixteenth century, from an age of analogy to one of
1kcptici1m. While it doc■ follow 10eioloaical, political, phil080phical and historical development■ to a certain
degree, the course put■ it■ primary empha■i■ on the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual
art■ of the period. In 10 doing, this course illustrate■ to the student the way ■ in which France has been influenced
by it■ rich cultural heritage. (3 en.)
+ FRE 296 . THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY AND THE CLASSICAL AGE. This course surveys the evolution
of French culture from the early seventeenth century or the Baroque (1600-1640) to the clauical period (1640 to
the end of the century). The course seek■ to introduce the student to the history of French thought in the Splendid
Century. While it doc ■ follow 10eiological, political, philosophical and historical developments to a certain degree,
it■ primary emphasis i• on the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period.
In 10 doing, thi■ course illustrates to the student the ways in which France ha• been influenced by it■ rich cultural
heritage. (3 en.)
+ FRE 297. THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY AND ENLIGHTENMENT. Thia course surveys the evolution of
French culture throughout the Age of Enlightenment, when acientific diacovery and new historical methods acted
a• agents of change upon the traditional foundation■ of belief. Con■ ideration ia given to how these change, affected
French thoupt, e■pecially in the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period.
The course will introduce the student to thi■ age of criticism and recon■truction, an age viewed a■ the •cri■is of
the European mind" and gave birth to the philosophe, or •philosopher," one who was not only involved with the
theories but with 10eial reform as well. These reform■ in human inllitution■ and thought will be ahown to terminate
in the revolution of 1789 and the end of the Ancien Regime. (3 en.)
+ FRE 298. THE AGE OF FRENCK ROMANTICISM: FROM THE NAPOLEONIC EMPIRE TO THE
REVOLUTION OF 1848. Thi■ course survey■ the evolution of French culture throughout the Romantic Movement
which permeated the sen■ibility of the young in France under the reign of Louis XVI and which reached a true
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
207
flowerilli in the nineteenth century, particularly from 1820 to 1845. Boch the early precuraon and the maaten of
thia movement are conaidercd through a lludy of the artillic expreuion of the time,. (3 en.)
+FRE 299 . THE AGE OF FRENCH REALISM: THE SECOND EMPIRE TO THE AFTERMATH OF THE
FRANCO-PRUSSIAN WAR.. Thia coune 111rvey1 the evolution of French culture durilli the A,e of Realiam;
including the Franco-Pruuian War, positivism and ita aftermath. Thia period encompaaaca the dictatonhip of
Napoleon m, a monarchy marked by material aucceu among the middle clau and by disappointment and peuimiam
among thinken, writen, and artiata. Thia coune conaiden the artillic achievement& of the period within the
framework of the aociological, political, and hiatorical setting. The new generation of artiata studied reflect& a
disguat with the reactionary politics of the Second Empire and the effect& of the height of the lnduatrial Revolution.
The coune illu11trate1 to the student how the artiata found comfort and refuae in art as the only enduriDi value and
a■ a aubllitute for religion. The closilli decade, of the nineteenth century were to elaborate and divenify two
separate achoola of art, naturaliam follcrcd by the aae of po1itivi1m and incorporated in the work of Comte, Renan,
and Taine, and 1ymboli1m which expreucd itaclf in the areat pocta, Verlaine, Rimbaud, and Mallann6. Thi•
coune accb to illuatrate to the student how these conflictilli achoola of artillic expreuion manifeatcd themaclves
in the principal worb of literature, philoaophy, music, and the viaual arta. (3 en.)
+ FRE 300. THE BIR.TH OF THE MODF.RN: FRENCH CULTURE IN THE AR.TS 1900-WORLD WAR. D. Thia
coune survey• the evolution of French culture from 1900, the time of the Belle Epoque or Beautiful Period at the
tum of the century, to the advent of the Second World War. While the coune docs follow the aociological,
political, and hiatorical development& of the period, it puta emphasia on the artillic ramificationa of this period of
conflict and rapid chqe. The interwar years are treated in all their artillic output, especially in inter-war theater,
fiction, and the presence of the achoo! of Surrealism in poetry, fiction, theater, and art. (3 en.)
+FRE 301. CONTEMPORARY FRENCH CULTURE IN THE AR.TS SINCE WORLD WAR. D. Thia coune
survey, the evolution of French culture from the Occupation and Vichy Regime in France to the present day. It
seelca to introduce the student to the literature, philoaophy, muaic, filma, and viaual arta of the period which reveal
the rich cultural heritage of France. As an orientation to the cultural arta, conaideration will be aiven to the impact
which important acographical, aocial, and hiatorical elementa had upon them. (3 en.)
FRE 311. FRENCH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Cultural themes are a basis for
idiomatic conversation and diacuuiona. Written compositiona are auigncd to teach the student how to write
correct French. The coune also provides a 1y1tcmatic atudy of the sounds and 1011nd pattcrna of the French
Languaae. Three clau hours and one hour langua1e laboratory each week. Prerequisite: French 204. (3 en.)
FRE 312. FRENCH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS D. Continuation of French 311
on a more advanced level a■ reflected in conversation, composition, and exercises in phonetic tranacription.
Prerequiaite: French 311 . (3 en.)
FRE 401. ADVANCED COMPOSITION: GRAMMAR. AND STYLISTICS. An in-depth grammatical analyais
of the French languaae through intenaive practice in exercises, compoaitiona, and tranalationa. It i• required of all
majors•• well as those acckilli a teacher certification degree or certification in French. Prerequisite: French 312.
(3 en.)
FRE 421. SURVEY OF FRENCH LITERATURE I. An introduction to French literature from the Middle Ages
to 1800 through an examination of representative novel,, play,, and pocma of the period. Three clau hours each
week. (3 en.)
FRE 422. SURVEY OF FRENCH LITERATURE D. An introduction to French literature from 1800 to the
present th~gh an examination of representative novel■, play,, and pocma of the period. Three clalia hours each
week. (3 en.)
208
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
FRE 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN FRENCH. An advanced counc in intenaive spoken
contemporary French required of all French majon I I well I I those accking teacher certificatfon in French.
Prerequisite: French 311. ( 3 en.)
FRE 469 . STUDIES IN FRENCH LITERATURE. Subject matter to be arranged. Designed for French majon
who wish to take additional credit,. Prerequi1ite: 18 houn of French . (Variable)
GERMAN COURSES (GER)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
Culture Courses (GER 240-310 and 313-317) are taught in English and are intended to
satisfy General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the Major.
Courses are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular
semester.
+GER 101. ELEMENTARY GERMAN I. For ltUdenll who have had no previous instruction in German or who
require additional instruction before attempting a more advanced level. Develops the fundamentals of correct
idiomatic German through instruction in basic audio-linguiatic patterna and sentence structure. Three cla11 houn
and one hour language laboratory each week. (3 en.)
+ GER 102. ELEMENTARY GERMAN Il. Continuation of German 101. Three cla11 houn and one hour language
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 101 or one year of high-school German. (3 en.)
+GER 203 . INTERMEDIATE GERMAN I. The goals are to undentand, speak, and write German on a more
advanced level. A review of the structural principles covered in German 101 and German 102 and additional
structural material , idioma, etc. is given. More emph11is is placed on speaking and reading . Three cla11 houn and
one hour language laboratory each week. Prerequisite: German 102 or two years of high-school German. (3 en.)
+GER 204 . INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Il. Continuation of German 203, with speaking, reading, writing on a
more advanced level emph11iz.cd . Three cla11 houn and one language laboratory per week. Prerequiaite: German
203. (3 en.)
+GER 240. FROM TACITUS TO LUTHER. Fifteen hundred years of German Cultural History is traced in this
counc, including the tribal era, eatablishment of the Holy Roman Empire and medieval society. (3 en.)
+GER 296. THE GERMAN BAROQUE. The topic incorporates roughly two hundred years of German cultural
history beginning with the spread of Protcatantism in the late Renaissance and concluding at the apogee of
Enlightenment thought and influence. (3 era.)
+GER 297. THE AGE OF GOETHE: PART I-ENLIGHTENMENT. The first half of the life of JohaM
Wolfgang von Goethe ia the b11i1 for the counc chronology: 1749-1796; the period reflect, the acceptance,
endoncment and ultimate waning of Enlightenment (Aujklilrung) ideals in the German lands. (3 era.)
+GER 298 . THE AGE OF GOETHE: PART Il-ROMANTICISM. The concluding segment of Goethe's life
(1796-1832) encompasacs the reaction against Enlightenment ideals and the realities of the Napoleonic Wars. These
led to the riae of romanticism and the tint decisive atcpa to German cultural prominence in nineteenth century
Europe. (3 en.)
+-GER 299. RICHARD WAGNER AND HIS TIMES: TRIUMPH OF THE BOURGEOISIE. The period covered
begina in the year of Goethe' s death, 1832, which is also the year which witnesacd the first attempts of writing for
the musical atage by Richard Wagner. The rise of the German middle clau and triumph of bourgeois ideals form
the background for the endeavon and developments of Wagner and hia contemporaries . (3 era.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
209
+GER 300. THE Wll.HELMINIAN ER.A. The aurvey covers the period 1870-1918 when German land, are united
into a powerful national state, the Deuzsches Reich. Germany ia viewed at the peak of her cultural leadership in
weltem civilization, before the debacle of the First World War. (3 era.)
+ GER 301 . THE WEIMAR REPUBLIC. The ill-fated German Weimar Republic lasted fourteen years, from 1919
to 1933, but in that period the world witneued an unparalleled concentration of cultural endeavor bom from
military defeat, political humiliation and aocial and economic chaos following World War I. (3 era.)
+GER 302. GERMAN CULTURE UNDER THE NATIONAL SOCIALISTS . The premise for this course is that
German culture did not cease to manifeat itself during the period from 1933 to 1945 when Adolf Hitler and the Nazi
Party controlled Germany' a deatiny. What the German public waa permitted in the way of cultural conaumption
during the Nazi era is the focal point of the aurvey . Only worka produced in Germany at the time and either
explicitly or tacitly endorsed by the Nazi government are dealt with . (3 en.)
+GER 303 . GERMAN CULTURE IN EXILE. Many intellectuals uprooted for political or racial reasons by the
Nazi uaurpation of political power in Europe fled their homelands, never to return . Documentary evidence from
1933 to 1949 ia uaed to understand their exile and German culture abroad. (3 era.)
+GER 309. POSTWAR GERMANY-1945 TO 1990: BUNDESREPUBLIK (FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF
GERMANY, WEST GERMANY). The cult!Jral apectrum of the Federal Republic of Germany (West Germany,
BundesrepubUk Deuzschland) is the subject of thia survey. (3 era.)
+GER310.POSTWARGERMANY-1945TOTHEPRESENT:DEUTSCHEDEMOKRATISCHEREPUBLIK
(GERMAN DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC, EAST GERMANY). The cultural apectrum of the German Democratic
Republic (East Germany, DeulSche Demokratische Republik) is the subject of this survey which begins with the year
"0" and continues to ita demise.
GER 311. GERMAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Selected readings are used to
develop further skills in reading, writing, and speaking German. Three class hours and one hour language
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 204. (3 crs.)
GER 312. GERMAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSITION, AND PHONETICS II. Continuation of German 311,
conducted on a more advanced level. Three cla11 hours and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
German 311 or the completion of German 204 with a grade of A or B. (3 crs.)
+GER 313. AUSTRIA: FROM THE BABENBERGS TO THE CONGRESS OF VIENNA 976-1813 . Thia topic
presenta an approximately one-thousand-year cultural history of the Austrian empire from ita birth as protector and
aucce110r of the Holy Roman Empire, to ita twilight at the end of the Napoleonic Wars. (3 crs.)
+GER 314. AUSTRIA: FROM THE CONGRESS OF VIENNA TO THE TREATY OF
VERSAILLES-1813-1918 . The last century of Hapsburg rule is the backdrop for this aurvey of the Golden Age
of Austrian cultural enterprise. (3 crs.)
+GER316 . AUSTRIA: FIRST REPUBLIC-HEIM INS REICH-SECOND REPUBLIC (1919-PRESENT). This
course presenta a cultural history of Austria from 1919 to the present with representative works from the first
Republic (1919-38), the period of Nazi annexation (Anschluss) (1938-45) and the post-World War II era which gave
rise to the Second Republic (1955 to the present). (3 crs.)
GER 317. SWITZERLAND. This course presenta a cultural survey of the German-speaking SwiBB primarily
though the cultural contributions of the other lan,uage groups are represented. Although it begins in the days of
the Roman Empire and proceeda awiftly through the formation of the Swiss Confederation in the 13th century to
the beginning of the 18th century, the greater part of the course deals with the last two hundred years of the SwiBB
cultural enterprise. (3 era .)
210
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
GER 401. ADVANCED COMPOSfflON: GRAMMAR AND STYLISTICS. The counc provide, in-depth
grammar analysis of Gennan. lntenaive pnctice ia given for tnnalation and composition. Refinement of expository
writing ia a major goal, and emphasis is placed on achieving fluent and idiomatic expression to a degree acceptable
by a native and educated speaker. (3 en.)
GER 421. SUR.VEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE I. Presents a foundation on liierary definition (style, form,
period) and illuatntea them through the worka of leading Gennan speaking authors . (3 en.)
GER 422. SUR.VEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE II. Continuation of Gennan 421. (3 en.)
GER 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN GERMAN. The colloquium in Gennan is designed for
students in teacher education who mull demonatnte a fluency in oral presentation in order to meet requirements
for employment and tenure in Pennaylvania's achoo! ayatcma; &B such it i1 required for students in teacher
education. It ia de ■igned aecondarily for the libenl arts major who wiahea to enhance fluency in speaking, but it
is not required for the German major. (3 en.)
GER 452. HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. For German language majors but open to any lltUdent
meeting the prerequisite ■ . The counc begina with the emergence of a Gennan language group from its lndoEuropean heritage and tnces the development of contemporary German from Gothic through Old High Gennan,
Middle High Ge~n and dialectic manifeatationa, &B well &B its encounters with other European languages. The
counc ia required for German majors. (3 en.)
GER 469 . STUDIES IN GERMAN LITERATURE. Designed to meet special needs of Gennan majors.
Prerequisite: 18 hours of German. (Variable)
RUSSIAN COURSES (RUS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
Culture courses (RUS 240-297) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General
Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the major. Courses are not
taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester.
+RUS 101. ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN I. The purpose of RUS 101 is to prepare students to read intermediate
level Russian by the middle of Ruaaian 102. To this end, it begina with practicing all skills but soon changes to
a focus on structure and tnnalation. Ruaaian is presented without a text during the first week in order to establish
awareness of the 1011nds of the language. Then study follows the units of the text. The grade is based on
approximately 12 teats of equal weight. (3 en.)
+ RUS 102. ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN II. Completes the study of the structure of the RuBSian language . Reading
of Russian history begina approximately halfway through the acmeatcr, with Stilman 's Graded Readings in Russian
History. Prerequisite: Russian 101 or one year of high-school Russian. (3 en.)
+RUS 203 . INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN I. Ruuian 203 prepare, the atudent to read advanced Russian. Upon
completion ofStilman's Graded Readings in Russian History, the lltUdents read selected material• from the current
Soviet preu. Grammar review is presented &B required. The grade is baaed on approximately six tnnalation teats.
Three class hours each week. Perquisite: RuBSian 101 or 102. (3 en.)
+RUS 204 . INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN II. This counc is a continuation ofRUS 203 . Develops a reasonable
control of spoken Russian through dialogue and oral practice. Students read selected materials from current Soviet
publicationa. Prerequisite: Russian 203. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
211
+ RUS 240. RUSSIAN CULTURE. Studenta read fiction by great Ruuian authon, listen to muaic by compoaen
auch aa Tchaikovsky and Borodin, and grasp an understanding of Ruuia and ill culture through alidea, filma, and
other media. (3 en.)
+RUS 296. SOVIET RUSSIAN CULTURE. Literary and non-literary writings, films, slidea and recordings arc
used to present a broad picture of the Soviet Union. (3 en.)
+RUS 297. EASTERN EUROPEAN CULTURE. Study the folk and high culture of Poland, Czechoslovakia,
Hungary, Ukraine and Yugoslavia . Films, slides and recordings play a prominent role in the course. (3 en.)
RUS 311. RUSSIAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Intenaive practice of
contemporary Ruuian aa it is used in everyday situationa by Soviet Russian speaken. While there ia regular work
on composition, the course atrcucs proficiency in speaking. (3 en.)
RUS 312. RUSSIAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS ll. Continued intenaive practice
of contemporary Russian as it is used in everyday situationa by Soviet Ruuian speaken. While there is regular
work on composition, the course stresses proficiency in speaking. (3 en.)
RUS 469. STUDIES IN RUSSIAN LITERATURE. lndependentreadings in Russian literature. The inatructor and
the studentarrange a program of study according to the student's needs and desires. (Variable)
SPANISH COURSES (SPN)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
Culture Courses (SPN 205-303) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General
Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the Major. Courses are not
taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester.
+ SPN 10 l . ELEMENTARY SPANISH I. For the student without previous knowledge of Spanish who wishes to
achieve a command of language fundamentals . Acquisition of speech skills in the classroom is reinforced in the
language laboratory. Progressively greater emphasis is placed on reading and writing. Three class houn and one
hour language laboratory per week. (3 en.)
+SPN 102. ELEMENTARY SPANISH ll. A continuation of Spanish IOI. Three class houn and one hour
language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or one year of high school Spanish . (3 en.)
+ SPN 203. INTERMEDIATE SPANISH I. A review of the essentials of Spanish grammar through intenaive oral
and written practice to facilitate the use of Spanish grammar and to develop the use of words and exprcssiona
accepted throughout the Spanish-speaking world. Three class houn and one hour language laboratory per week.
Prerequisite■: Spanish 101 and Spanish 102 or their equivalenta. (3 en.)
.
+ SPN 204. INTERMEDIATE SPANISH ll. Develops control of the principal structural patterna of the language
through dialogue and oral reading, as well as through written exercise ■ baaed on selected readings. Three class
houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Spanish 203. (3 en.)
+SPN 205. 14TH CENTURY SPAIN. Thia course will examine the style of art, literature and music of the 14th
century Spanish culture. This is a period of conaolidation, of gradual assimilation of many influences and of
significant contributions to western culture. One of the outatanding boob in literature, ubro de bum amor, and,
212
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
in music, Las Huelgas Codex will be studied aa well II Ferrer Baua •• murals and Luis Borraua •• three-dimemional
worlta. (3 en.)
+SPN 206. GOLDEN AGE AND BAROQUE. The Golden Age of Spain ia a coune de1i,ned to capture the
significance of Spain' • reawakening. It deacribea Lope de Vega's revolutionizing the entire concept of dramatic
form; it detail, Spain'• contribution■ to Weatem Civilization in the form of great characten like Don Juan and Don
Quixote and how they influenced the culture, of the world. (3 en.)
+ SPN 207. 1700-MID 19TH CENTURY. Thia coune will examine the style of Peninsular art, literature and
mu1ic in the 18th and tint half of the 19th centurie1. Memben of the Houaeof Bourbonare on the Spanilh throne
and thereby there i, a strong French influence upon artistic expre11ion. Thia i, the Age of Reason and the age of
false and dictatorial 10phillication of neoclauic standard, which end, with the flowering of romantici1m. (3 en.)
+SPN 208. GENERATION OF 1898-MODERNISM. Thia coune examines the latter part of the 19th century,
a time in Spain when a new literary and social awarene11 was being expressed in the arts. Developmenll in the
arts aet the atmosphere in which an entire generation of artiata, the generation of 1898, 11 they were referred to,
set about the busine11 of representing the heart and soul of Spain. This coune closes by examining the work of
the intellectuals who brought the Modemismo of Rubin Dario of Nicaragua to Spain. (3 en.)
+ SPN 209. 2CYTH CENTURY SPAIN-PART I. In thi1 coune we will comider the concept of a •generation• and
two earlier movementa in Spanish poetry (Ultni1m and Creationi1m) before.dealin, with the poetry and the theater
of the artiata known aa the generation of '27. Also, the compoaen of the Grupo~ Madrid, an international
film-maker, Lui, Bunuel, as well as a very notorious painter, Salvador Dali, will be diacuued. (3 en.)
+SPN 210. 20TH CENTURY SPAIN-PART Il. The explosive growth and rebirth of Spanish culture during the
present century, especially the period following the repre11ive yean of the Franco regime, i1 studied through the
worlta of notable intellectuals and artiata 1Uch aa Salvador Dali, Pablo Picauo and Federico Garcfa Lorca. The
student is offered a panoramic orientation to the culture of contemporary Spain. (3 en.)
+ SPN 213. SPANISH CARIBBEAN . The cultural achievementa of contemporary Spanish Caribbean,. The coune
reviews changes in Caribbean societies since the movement~ avance (Vanguardism, 1927). A sampling of the
countries' art, unique music, architectural styles and folk dances, will be presented. (3 en.)
+SPN 240. ORIGINS OF SPANISH CULTURE. The style of art, literature and mu1ic of the 12th and 13th
centuries in Spain, in which the tendency i1 studied to recount wan, weddings and conquelll i1 evident. (3 en.)
+SPN 301. ROMANTICISM IN LATIN AMERICA. The style of art, literature and muaic of the 19th century
in Latin America. Attention will be given to the 1Ubordination of form to content, the emphaais given to
imagination and emotion which often celebrates nature, and the utilization of common man and freedom of spirit
themes. (3 en.)
+SPN 302. MEXICO 20TH CENTURY. The cultural achievementa of contemporary Mexican,. Changes in
Mexican society since the 1910 revolution, and the concern of Mexican writen with social and political theme,.
A sampling of the country's art, unique muaic, architectural styles, mural• and folk dances will be presented. (3
en.)
+SPN 303. CONTEMPORARY ARGENTINA. A view of Argentina's cultural tendencies in the Twentieth
Century such a■ Surrealism, 11 well II the intellectuals' choice of a simpler expre11ion of reality, surrealiam, 11
well as the exiatential and neo-natural style, in literature, music and visual arts. (3 en.)
SPN 311 . SPANISH CONVF.RSATION, COMPOSITION, AND PHONETICS I. Intemive practice in
convenation, composition and phonetics, baaed on modem prose, provides models of natural, spontaneou1 speech,
including colloquialisms. Written composition■ use orthographic rules. Three cla11 houn and one hour language
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Spanish 311. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
213
SPN 312. SPANISH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS II. A study of the essential Spanish
morphology, syntax, semantics, and linguistics as reflected in some representative authors . Prerequisite: Spanish
312 . (3 en.)
SPN 401. ADVANCED COMPOSITION: GRAMMAR AND STYLISTICS . This course is intended to provide
an in-depth grammatical analysis of the Spanish language, emphasizing "shades of differences" in the meaning of
words and expressions as used in oral and written expression. (3 crs.)
SPN 405 . CERV ANTES:DON QUIXOTE: Prerequisite: Spanish 321 or Spanish 322. (3 crs.)
SPN 416 . GOLDEN AGE NOVEL. The major prose worlcs of the Renaissance and Baroque styles are studied :
the Pastoral, Chivalric, and Picaresque novels . Prerequisite: Spanish 421 or Spanish 422 . (3 era.)
SPN 421. SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE. An intrnduction to the masterpieces of Spanish literature,
ranging from Poema de Mio Cid to current authors . Represented will be all of the important Spanish literary genres:
narrative poetry (epic and ballad), lyric verse , the short story, and selections from novels and dramas . (3 era.)
SPN 422. SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN LITERATURE. A study of representative selections from the
Colonial period to the present, with emphasis on the salient characteristics and the distinctive contributions of each
literary form in the period or movement under study. (3 crs.)
SPN 444. HISTORY OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. A history of the development of modem Spanish,
beginning with Vulgar Latin as used in the Iberian peninsula . Attention is given to the impact of political and
cultural influences on linguistic development as well as to making comparisons with the evolutionary development
of other Romance languages. Prerequisite: Twelve hours of Spanish beyond Spanish 102. (3 crs.)
SPN 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN SPANISH. An advanced course in intensive spoken
contemporary Spanish required of all Spanish majors as well as those seeking teacher certification in Spanish.
Prerequisite: Spanish 312. (3 crs.)
SPN 469. STUDIES IN SPANISH LITERATURE. Designed to meet the special needs of Spanish majors.
(Variable)
214
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOWGY
Associate Professor Marilyn M. Patterson, Chair. Professor Karen L. Hornung; Assistant
Professor Mary A. Hart. The following faculty members of other departments teach
Gerontology courses: Philip Y. Coleman and Angelo J. Orlandi.
As the number of older people in the country increases, the need for trained
professionals in the field of aging is also increasing dramatically every year. Employment
opportunities for persons trained in gerontology are not only excellent at this time but have
prospects of improving still further. The second largest projected growth area in jobs in the
United States in the 1990's is in positions working with older adults. California University
has the only approved Bachelor of Science in Gerontology program among the 14
universities in the State System of Higher Education.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN GERONTOLOGY
This program is dedicated to providing the student with a broad range of academic
and practical experiences that will enable the graduate to function in a variety of settings,
such as administration, planning, management, and delivery of services to older persons.
It is the objective of this program to increase the numbers and competency of persons
working with older adults, their families, and their communities.
The California Model Senior Center, located several blocks from campus, allows
students a chance to receive actual experience under the supervision of a Gerontology
department faculty member and a professional staff. It is one of very few Senior Centers
in the nation with relations to an academic program in Gerontology.
Students are involved in the various educational, recreational, nutritional,
informational, referral, transportation, and grant components of the multi-purpose Senior
Center. Specifically, students may coordinate the intergenerational visitation program,
coordinate Geriatric Assessment, facilitate support groups for caregivers and older adults,
develop training and educational videos, assist with program and group development, and
plan educational classes. The Senior Center is near campus and it offers accessible,
invaluable, and practical experience in a real-life setting.
The Gerontology Department operates several grant-and university-funded programs
providing a variety of services to the area's older population. Gerontology students are
involved in all projects and receive invaluable practical experience. Some of the present
ones are:
SHARE: Student Housing Alternative with Rural Elders is a unique project pairing
University students with rural older adults in a shared living arrangement. This project has
brought national recognition to the Gerontology program.
Senior Center/Senior Swim Programs: These provide educational, sociali:zation, recreation,
exercise, and nutrition services to older adults.
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
215
SHINE: Student Helpers Involved with Neighborhood Elders coordinates and trains student
volunteers from the junior high school, high school, and university level to provide
much-needed services to older adults.
REACH: Rural Elderly Access to Consumerism and Homemaking provides educational
programs and related services to older adults.
The Gerontology Department also conducts research related to the projects it
sponsors. By assisting in this research, students gain other skills that will be of value to
them in employment or post-graduate studies.
Curriculwn:
(A) General Education: Composition I and II (ENG 101,102); Business Writing I (ENG 211); 12 credits
of Humanities, including Oral Communication (SPE 101 ); 12 credits of Natural Sciences, including one computer
course; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 15 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Get'?ntology (XGE 101); Aging in American Society (XGE
102); Aging Policies and Services (XGE 201); Biology of Aging (XGE 204); Media and Library Reaources in
Aging (XGE 205); Adult Development and Aging (XGE 380); Seminar in Gerontology (XGE 439) . Eighteen
credita in major electives selected from the following: Middle Years of Life (XGE 202); Group Work with Older
Adulta (XGE 210); Aging and the Family (XGE 249); Minority Aging/Institutionalization (XGE 289); Health and
Safety in Aging (XGE 300); Counseling the Older Adult (XGE 320); Activities in Long-Term Care (XGE 340);
Selected Topics (XGE 349); Exercise for the Elderly (XGE 350); Rural Aging (XGE 369); Nursing Homes (XGE
370); Professional Practicum (XGE 449); Senior Center Operations (XGE 449); Survey of Aging Programs and
Services (XGE 449); Foundations of Death and Dying (EDF 318); Literature and Aging (ENG 223); Historical
Perspectives on Aging (HIS 205). Related Courses (16 crs.): Introduction to Social Work (SOW 150); Word
Processing (ENG 151); First Aid and Personal Safety (HPE 314); Delivery of Services (SOW 365); one other 200,
300, or 400 level Social Work course; one 200, 300, or 400 level Management or Marketing course. Required
Field Experience: a minimum of 6 credita, including both Community Set;ing (3 credits) and Institutional Setting
(3 credits). Related Elective•: 1-7 credits.
216
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
AGING SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE
The Aging Specialist Certificate is becoming recognized as the minimum credential
of qualification in the field of aging. The Certificate in Gerontology is designed primarily
for either undergraduates interested in working with older adults in relation to their
undergraduate major (e.g., Social Work, Psychology, Nursing, Speech Pathology and
Audiology) or people who are currently working with or on behalf of older adults who have
had practical experience in the field of aging but who have had little formal training. The
Aging Specialist Certificate is 18 hours of course work in Gerontology including a
three-credit practicum experience.
Curriculum:
Six credit.a in Gerontology: Introduction to Gerontology (XGE IOI); Aging Policie1 and Service, (XGE
20 I) . A minimum of nine credit.a of ■elected Gerontology course ■ choacn in consultation with the advi10r of the
Gerontology Program. Three-credit practicum counc (XGE 449).
- GERONTOLOGY COURSES (XGE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
XGE IOI. INTRODUCTION TO GERONTOLOGY . An introduction to the field of aging for major■ and
non-major■ . A general overview of the psycho10eial, biological, cultural , and behavioral aspect.a of late life. (3
en.) F S
XGE 102. AGING IN AMERICAN SOCIETY. Examinationofpsycho10eial aspect.a of work, retirement, leiaurc,
inatitutionalization, and death II experienced in contemporary America . Examination of roles and adjuatmcnll
in late life. (3 en.) F
XGE 201 . AGING POLICIES AND SERVICES . An overview of programa and acrvicea available to older
adult.a, including the pall, present, and future of aging policies. Covered arc the Older Americana Act and
amendment.a. Prerequisite: XGE 101, 205 . (3 en.) S
XGE 202. MIDDLE YEARS OF LIFE. Multidisciplinary life cycle approach to middleacence . Relationahip of
middle-aged to family , work, and community examined . Adult developmental taslca and stages emph11izcd . (3
era.)
XGE 204. BIOLOGY OF AGING. Introduction to biological aspect.a of aging, both normal and pathological.
Studied arc age-related changes in the digestive, akin, musculoskeletal, endocrine, and reproductive ay ■tcma.
Prerequisite : XGE 205. (3 era .) F
XGE 205 . MEDIA AND LIBRARY RESOURCES IN AGING. Introduction to print and non-print aging
materials. Student.a learn how to locate and use different types of library and media materials and write a
literature review following the APA style. (3 era.) F
XGE 210. GROUP WORK WITH OLDER ADULTS . Focuses on basic principles of group dynamics and
information about aging as it applies to group work. Student.a arc introduced to skills and specific technique,
required to facilitate groups with older adult.a in institutional and community based settings. (3 era.) S
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
217
XGE 249. AGING AND THE FAMILY. Overview of the theory/reacarch on familie■ in later life including a
1ynthe1i1 and review of existing literature, identification of reacarch i11ue1 and needs, and implication■ of thi■
information for practitioner■, reacarcher■, and family member■. (3 era.)
XGE 289. MINORITY AGING/INSTITUTIONALIZATION . An overview of the theory, reacarch, and policy
i1111e1 regarding minority aging and institutionalization, and implication■ of thia information for practitioner■,
reacarchen, and ■ociety. (3 era.)
XGE 300. HEALTH AND SAFETY IN AGING. Information and experience relative to health a1111C11ment,
maintenance, promotion ofwellnea■ among older adult■ . Safety i11ues for older adult■ will be presented. (3 en.)
XGE 320. COUNSELING THE OLDER ADULT. Combines information about the aaing proceaa with
information and skills practice in counseling intervention. (3 era.) F
XGE 340. ACTIVITIES IN LONG-TERM CARE. Basic principle■ of therapeutic recreation and activity program
planning aa it applies to acrving older adult■ in long-tenn care acttings, primarily nur■ ing homes, per■onal care
homes, and adult day care facilities. Student■ will be introduced to the 1kill1 needed to develop and implement
a well-balanced activity program. (3 era.)
XGE 349. SELECTED TOPICS. Roundtable diacuaaion■ of ■elected gerontological topics. For atudenta wanting
to study either a new topic or a topic in more detail. Topics vary according to student■ and in■tructor.
Prerequisite: XGE 101. (Variable credit)
XGE 350. EXERCISE FOR THE ELDERLY. Cour■e provide, information and experiences to develop and
conduct phyaical activity programs for the elderly. Activities to maintain and improve health and fitne11, and
corrective and therapeutic activities are also presented. Prerequiaites: XGE 204, HPE 314. (3 era.) S
XGE 369. RURAL AGING. Overview of rural, non-metropolitan are_as aa they relate to older adult■ •
compares rural older adult■ to their urban metropolitan counterpart■. (3 en.)
Cour■e
XGE 370. NURSING HOMES. Examines nuning homes from historical, medical, managerial, environmental,
and psycho■ocial per■pectives. (3 era.)
XGE 380. ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING. Introduction to psychology of aging. An overview of late
life cognitive processes including intelligence, learning, memory, problem solving, and creativity. Examination
of adult ■ocialization, per■onality adjustment, psychopathology, and death . Prerequisites: XGE 101 , 102, 204,
205, and junior level standing. (3 era.) S
XGE 439 . SEMINAR IN AGING. For advanced Gerontology students to intensively examine and discuss
■elected aging subject■. Topics chosen by instructor; research paper/project required . Prerequisites: XGE 101,
102, 201, 204, acnior status, and permiaaion of instructor. (3 era.) F
XGE 449, Section 1. GERONTOLOGY PRACTICUM: PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM. Opportunity to apply
theoretical knowledge to practice through placement in agency or institution serving older people. Practicum sites
include acnior center■, nur■ing homes, adult day care center■, independent living facilities, or area agencies on
aging. Prerequisites: Permission of instructor and extensive cour■ework . (Variable credit.) F S
XGE 449, Section 2. GERONTOLOGY PRACTICUM: SURVEY OF AGING PROGRAMS AND SERVICES.
Claa■ field trips to observe available aging programs and service■. Reacarch paper on aging programs and acrvices
required. (Variable credit.)
XGE 449, Section 3 . GERONTOLOG'i'. PRACTICUM: SENIOR CENTER OPERATIONS . Claas field trips
to observe wide range of acnior center■. Reacarch paper on acnior center operations required. (Variable credit.)
218
DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY
The following couneaaR taught in other dcpartmcnu of the University other than Gerontology but aR nonctheleu
Gerontology Major Electives.
EDF 318. FOUNDATIONS OF DEATH AND DYING. A multidisciplinary introduction to dcath-Rlatcd topic■
from anthropological, psychological, philosophical, educational, literary, and musical perspectives. (3 era.)
ENG 223. LITERATURE AND AGING. Positive and negative views of aging as portrayed in poetry, fiction,
and drama. Studenu learn techniques for intcrpRting litcratuR and exploR criticism of the litcratuR. (3 era.)
HIS 205. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON AGING. A chronological survey of aging in historical
perspective, emphasizing social, cultural, and economic conditions that have effect on the aging population. (3
era.)
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
219
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND
SAFETY
HEALffl AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION (HPE)
DRIVER EDUCATION (HSD)
Associate Professor Terry E. Scott, chair; Assistant Professors Carol A. McMahon, Floyd
W. Shuler; Instructor Harry L. Ervin
The Department offers courses reflecting the wellness concept. Presently, it functions
as a service oriented department. However, there is a certification program in Driver
Education Certification.
Driver Education Certification Program
The Department offers a certification program for a student seeking to become qualified
as a Driver Education teacher in the secondary schools. In order to fulfill the requirements
of this program, the student must complete a minimum of 12 semester hours. Six of the 12
hours are required in the program (HSD 300, Introduction to Safety, and HSD 305, Driver
Education and Traffic Safety).
The same 12 hours required in the Driver Education Endorsement Program can be used
as "free electives" in the 30-hour free elective block. For further information concerning
the program, contact the chairperson of the Health, Physical Education and Safety
Department in Hamer Hall.
DRIVER EDUCATION COURSES (HSD) _
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
•HSD 300. INTRODUCTION TO SAFETY EDUCATION. The history and development of the aafety movement.
Psychological variable• 111ch as attitudes, habits, emotions and values arc considered in tenm of their importance
in the total accident picture. Home, farm, traffic , fire industrial and many other areas of aafety arc discussed. (3
crs.) F S
•HSD JOS. DRIVER EDUCATION AND TRAFFIC SAFETY. Designed to prepare a teacher to teach a complete
thirty-and-1ix Driver Education clan. Emphasis upon euential facta, principle,, skills and p1ychological variable•
necesaary for good driving and the teaching of the aame to beginning drivers. Enrolled atudenta arc required to
teach a beginner the behind-the-wheel driving sequence. Prerequisite: a driver's license. (3 crs.) F S
220
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
HSD 306 . MATERIALS AND METHODS IN SAFETY IN THE SECONDARY AND ELEMENTARY
SCHOOLS. The various teaching methods and materials that can be uaed to teach aafety in the elementary or
secondary school ■. (3 era.) F
HSD 307. MOTORCYCLE SAFETY. A comprehenaive study of all aspects of motorcycle aafety. Various
classroom and nnge experience, are provided to enable each student to become a proficient cyclilt. The coune
alao prepare■ the student to teach others how to ride. Prerequi ■ite: HSD 305. (3 en.) F
HSD 405 . ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF SAFETY EDUCATION. Organizing and
Safety Education Prognm■ nnging from the elementary school through college. School aafety
prognm■, environmental safety, and safety services are analyzed in detail. Prerequi■ite: HSD 330. (3 en.) S
admini ■tering
HSD 408 . PROBLEMS IN ORNER AND TRAFFIC SAFETY. Current problem■ in many area■ of the driver and
traffic safety. Federal Highway Safety Program Standards are analyzed . (3 en.) F S
•Required courses for Driver Education Endorsement Program.
HEALm AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES (HPE)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
CPE 205 . FOUNDATIONS OF ATHLETICS . The basic theory, organization, and coaching technique■ of several
sports are covered. (2 en.) F S
HPE 100. HEALTH. Provide ■ the student with a critical analysis of health problem■ facing people today . Topic ■
studied include communicable diseases, chronic di■eases, abusive substances, mental health, sex education,
nutrition, exercise, and ltreu management. (2 era.) F S
HPE 102. AIDS PREVENTION. The course ia taught by an interdisciplinary team of public health providers and
university faculty. During the five-week course, the student will learn all the dimenaiona of AIDS . (1 er.) F S
HPE 202 . COED AEROBIC FITNESS AND NUTRITION. The course is designed to increase an individual' ■
fitness through higher level exercises. The activity portion of the class will include high impact aerobic ■ , rope
jumping, swimming, etc ., to improve the student' ■ cardiopulmonary endunnce, ltrength and flexibility . There will
be lectures on nutrition and basic exercise physiology. (2 era.) F S
HPE 231. BEGINNING BADMINTON AND TENNIS . Basic inltrUction in the rules, ltntegy,
etiquette of both badminton and tennis . (1 er.)
technique■
and
HPE 232. INTERMEDIATE BADMINTON AND TENNIS . An opportunity ia provided for the student to advance
beyond the beginner level and to acquire a greater degree of skill through advanced analysis of techniques and
stntegy. (1 er.) F S
HPE 241. BEGINNING SWIMMING. The course places emphasis on the development of skills that will enable
a student to move safely in and around the water with ease and enjoyment. Shallow water. (1 er.) F S
HPE 242. INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING. Advanced beginner and intermediate swimming inltrUction i■ provided.
Emphasis is placed on perfecting the nine basic ltrokes and on becoming more comfortable in, on, or near the
water. Students should feel safe in deep water in order to enter this course. (1 er.) F S
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
221
HPE 250. MODERN DANCE. Contemporary dance fonna, techniqueund compo1itionarc prcacntcd. The atudent
experience, working with exprcuive movement proble1111 in force, time, apace, line and level,. No prcrequi1ite.
2 houn combined lecture-laboratory. (1 er.) F S
HPE 252. JAZZ DANCE I. The courac i1 de■igncd to atimulate penonal ■ati1faction through the jazz dance form
of movement. It i1 offered II an introductory courac in jazz technique. (1 er.) F S
HPE 256. CONDmONING AND MOVEMENT EDUCATION. Encourage, an appreciation of the ability and
capacity to control and direct the movementl of the body with wll and intelligence. (l er.) F S
HPE 265 . BADMINTON AND GOLF. Buie instruction in the rule■, ■trategy , technique■ and courte1ie1 of both
golf and badminton. (l er.) F S
HPE 266. TENNIS AND VOLLEYBALL. Fundamental• and game technique■ of tenni1 and volleyball. Game
drill• and conditioning exen:iac■ arc al ■o a part of the courac. (l er.)
FS
HPE 267. ARCHERY, BILLIARDS , TABLE TENNIS . In■truction in the fundamental skill■ of the three activities.
(l er.)
HPE 271 . SLIMNASTICS. The courac is designed for weight management and cardiopulmonary endurance through
aerobic activitiea. The ■tudent will learn the ■afe type of aerobic exen:i■c ■ and diacu■■ dietary goala. (l er.) F S
HPE 275 . VOLLEYBALL AND BASKETBALL. lnstnlction and participation in the fundamental techniques,
methods, rule■, and game strategy of the two aporta . (l er.) F S
HPE 308. KINESIOLOGY . the biomechanic ■ of motor performance. Prepare, atudentl to analyze movement in
order to teach, correct, or improve human performance. Offered aa part of the Sportl Medicine Pro,ram. (3 en.)
F
HPE 309 . EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY. The courac coven the acientific theories and principle, underlying lllrcngth,
muacular endurance, cardio-vaacular endurance, flexibility , training and conditioning in human movement. Offered
11 part of the Sporta Medicine Program. (3 en.) S
HPE 312. WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTOR. Conducted under the auapice■ of the American Red Cro■s, the courac
is designed to equip the individual with the basic knowledge and skills neceaury to save one ' ■ own life or the live■
of othen. The courac provides certification in water safety instruction. Prerequisite: Current lifeguard training
certificate. (3 en.) S
HPE 314. FIRST AID PERSONAL SAFETY. Provide■ an undentanding of the cauac-effcct, prevention and
treatment of emergency ■ituation■ . Thia courac i■ helpful to all ■tudentl, eapccially ■tudentl in the teacher education
program. No prerequisite. Three-year certification is offered by the American Red Crou. (3 en.) F S
HPE 315. CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION . Include■ preventive heart practice,, baaic conccptl of heart
and lung function■ and ■kill■ for managilli obatructcd airways and cardiac arrclt. Certification ia by the American
Heart Auociation. No prerequisite. Offered when there ia ■tudent need and interc■t . (l er.) F S
HPE 316. LIFEGUARD TRAINING . Conducted under the auspice■ of the American Red Crou, the courac give■
con■ ideration to swimming, life-saving techniques, and pool management. American Red Crou Certification
iuued . Prcrequ~ite: Water Teat, CPR, and First Aid. (3 en.) F S
Ii·
HPE 338 . PHYSICAL EDUCATION FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL CHILD. An introduction to the principle■,
technique ■ , and rc■can:h in the phy■ical education training for the exceptional child. Major empha■i■ is on gro■a
motor akilla and physical activities leading to lifetime recreation and aporta . (3 en.)
222
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
HPE 347. BASKETBALL OFFICIATING. Enables studenta to become qualified PIAA basketball officials. Course
content includes analysis of roles, regulations and the mechanics of officiating. Studenta receive game officiating
practice. (2 en.) S
HPE 400. ADVANCED FIRST AID. Students learn advanced emergency first aid technique, auch as delivering
babies, extricating victims from automobiles, performing C.P.R. in transport, using Hare Traction splint for open
fractures, and understanding basic ambulance equipment. Three-year certification by the American Red Cross. (3
en.) S
HPE 500. EMERGENCY MEDICAL TECHNICIAN (EM1). Prepares studenta to become certified as Emergency
Medical Technicians. Emphasis is placed upon the care and treatment of the ill or injured in a variety of
emergency situations. Studenta arc required to devote at least ten houn to actual in-hospital observation.
Prerequisite: Age 16 . (4 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
223
DEPARTMENT OF ffiSTORY
AND URBAN STUDIES
ffiSTORY (HIS)
URBAN STUDIES (XUA)
Associate Professor Anthony P. McGrew, chair. Professors John F. Bauman, Frank T.
Edwards, J. K. Folmar; Associate Professors Margaret A. Spratt; Assistant Professor Sean
C. Madden.
PURPOSE
The recording and explanation of the events that constitute social, organiutional or
personal existence comprise the discipline of history. History, with its special concern for
what is unique in human events, is an integrative discipline. Its narratives and explanations
are contextual. As such, historians take cogni7.ance of the works of artists, philosophers and
social scientists. For example, social historians utilize the methods of the social scientist.
This integrative aspect of historical narrative and explanation continues to make it a primary
part of a Liberal Arts education. In as much as it reveals every person's past, it makes
possible greater personal freedom and creativity.
PROGRAMS
The department offers two degree programs: History and Urban Studies. The Urban
Affairs major provides the student with the information and perspectives necessary to
understand and analyze any complex urban system. It incorporates the principles and
methods of urban planning and administration. This program provides the student the
opportunity to participate in a practicum. Students interested in careers in Planning, Public
Administration, Business, or Law Enforcement are encouraged to take a full semester of
practicum credits in their junior or senior year.
The History major is general in nature, providing students with the opportunity to
select areas of topical interest. In relation to the major, the department, in conjunction with
the College of Education and Human Services, provides requisite courses for Social Science
certification for teaching in Secondary Schools. Students interested in teacher certification
can secure further information from the College of Education and Human Services Office.
HONOR SOCIETY
Students who meet the academic requirements are eligible for membership in Phi
Alpha Theta (~A0), the International Honor Society. Information can be obtained from
faculty advisors and the departmental office.
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
224
AWARDS
The History Faculty Award for Academic Excellence is given annually to the History
major who has demonstrated outstanding achievement.
The Edward McNall Burns Scholarship Award is given annually to any individual
majoring in Anthropology, Sociology, Political Science, Economics, History or Urban
Affairs. See the departmental office for further information.
CAREERS
Teacher, archivist, museum curator are professions directly related to the history
major. Careers in law, religion, foreign service, both corporate and governmental, and
diplomacy have a great reliance on historical knowledge. The urban affairs major will find
career opportunities in urban and regional planning, in public and private agencies which
provide data analysis relative to housing, market, transportation, crime and traffic patterns.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN lllSTORY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition I-II (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credita ofNatunl
Sciences; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: (l) Required Western History - 15 credita; History of the United States to
1877 (HIS 101); History of the United Stateaaince 1877 (HIS 102); History of Western Society to 1740 (HIS 104);
History of Western Society since 1740 (HIS 106); History Seminar (HIS 495) . (2) A minimum of two courses in
Non-Western History - 6 credits; (3) History Electives - 24 credits: These must include at least three topical and
three chronological courses listed on the History Major Distribution sheet, (4) Social Science Electives - 9 credits:
These credits require one course from three of the following discipline, : Economics, Sociology; Geognphy,
Anthropology, Political Science; (5) Related Electives - 14 credits.
1. . ______
B_A_C_HE_L_O_R_O_F_AR_T_S_IN_URB
__AN
__
STUD
__m_s_____......
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG l 0 l, l 02); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credits of Natunl
Science; 12 credits of Social Science; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Survey of Urban Affairs (XUA 101); Municipal Government (POS 205);
Urban Geognphy (GEO 210); Political Economy (XUA 217); Urban Sociology (SOC 235); History of Urban
American (HIS 236); Urban Transportation (GEO 315); Seminar in Urban Studie1 (XUA 480); 18-24 credits of
restricted electives, 6-12 credits of applied courses, and 11-14 credits of related elective,. A 6-12 credit Pncticum
in Urban Studies i1 optional.
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
225
IIlSTORY COURSES (HIS)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
+HIS 101. HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES TO 18TI. American history from the Pilgrima to the age of
modem indultly: the colonial heritage, American Revolution, the emergence of a new nation, weltwanl expanaion,
Civil War, and poltWar Reconatruction. (3 en.) F,S
+HIS 102. HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES SINCE 1877. The emergence of modem America, its
achievements and its problema: prosperity and depreaaion; war and social unrest; World War I through the Vietnam
era and beyond; the computer age and its challenges. (3 crs.) F, S
+HIS 104. HISTORY OF WESTERN SOCIEI"Y TO 1740: Western society from its origins in the near East to
the period of Absolutism in Europe. (3 crs.)
+HIS 106. HISTORY OF WESTERN SOCIETY SINCE 1740: Western society from the Enlightenment to the
preacnt. (3 en.)
+HIS 111. THE DEVELOPMENT OF MAJOR WORLD CIVILIZATIONS. The proceaa and interplay of the
major world cultures in their evolution: Indian, Moslem, East Asian (China, Korea, Japan), Slavic, Western
European, Latin American, and African. (3 crs.)
+ HIS 112. MAJOR WORLD CIVILIZATIONS IN TRANSITION. Significant factors influencing change in there
world'• major cultural areas: industrialization and urban conflict; the democratic revolution and the riac of
charismatic leaden from Napoleon to Hitler. (3 en.)
+HIS 121. EUROPEAN LIFE AND SOCIETY TO 1815 . The development of the social, economic, political,
religioua, and cultural experiences of the European people. F, S
+HIS 122. EUROPEAN LIFE AND SOCIETY SINCE 1815. The development of Europe from the CongreH of
Vienna to the end of the twentieth century; the social, political and economic stimulations that led to the emergence
of nationaliam, dictatorship, and war. (3 en.) F,S
HIS 147. HISTORY OF THE MIDDLE EAST. A history of the region, emphasizing the twentieth century
interplay of cultural changes with tnditional ways: Islam and modernization; Soviet-American rivalry; the politics
of oil; the Arab-Israeli conflict; and Arab nationalism: its leaden; the role of tem>rism. (3 era.)
HIS 150. HISTORY OF THE ANCIENT WORLD. A study of the origins of Western Civilization from prehistoric
man to the diaintegration of the Roman Empire; the cultural aspects of the Fertile Crescent and Greco-Roman
civilizations. (3 en.)
HIS 180. INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN'S HISTORY. An introductory courac designed to examine a variety of
women'• issue, using an intenliaciplinary approach . (3 era.)
HIS 187. FAMILY HISTORY. The techniques and proce88Cs used to tnce, study and analyze family history,
including such new developments as oral history, penonal family archives, census data retrieval, quantitative
methodologiea that are adaptable to family history, and the uaca of public documents and original aourcea. (3 en.)
226
DEPARTMENT OF IIlSTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
HIS 188. LOCAL HISTORY. An introduction to the location, evaluation and significance of local hilltOry by uaing
the problem-solving and genealogical approach. Specific topic, are analyzed in order to get to know at tint hand
the importance of local and family history at the gra11 roota level. (3 en.)
HIS 200. HISTORY OF PENNSYLVANIA. The hilltOry of Pennsylvania from colonial time■ to the present; the
changes involved in social, political, and economic life are treated from internal and external pointa of view. (3
en.)
HIS 201 . CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION . The cause, of the Civil War; the military, political, economic,
and social development■ during the war; the consequence, of the poatwar period from the standpoint of
contemporary development■ and their application■ today. (3 en.)
HIS 203 . HISTORY OF TRANSPORTATION IN PENNSYLVANIA. The role■ that Pennsylvania ha ■ played in
the development of transportation ayatema ■ince Colonial times, includifli turnpike ■, canals, river transport
(flatboat■ to ateamboata), railroads, and motor transportation.
HIS 204. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON AGING. A chronological survey of aging in American culture from
colonial times to the present. Principal subject■ for examination are the emergence and development of retirement
program■, -and institutional and non-institutional treatment of the elderly in social, religiou1, political and cultural
contexta. (3 en.)
HIS 215. THE EXPANSION OF AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY. The emergence of modem American foreign
policy and the facton that have influenced ita operation in the twentieth century: the interplay of military atrategy
and the conduct of foreign relation■; the role of an expanding intelligence activity 1ince World War II; alobal
economic problems; modem revolutionary movement■; the scientific revolution. (3 en.)
HIS 216. HISTORY OF ENGLAND. The rise of England II a world power from the reian of Henry VII to the
modem era, with particular attention to the social and economic aspect■ of Britiah life, the rise and fall of the
Britiah colonial empire and its consequence, on world affain. (3 en.)
HIS 217. THE AFRO-AMERICAN IN UNITED STATES HISTORY. A survey of the role of Afro-American&
in the coune of American hilltOry, from the beginning to the present. (3 en.)
HIS 218. HISTORY OF SPORT IN AMERICA. Sport a ■ a pervasive facet of our popular culture, a ■ a social
in&titution, aa an arena of human activity, and aa a drama; sports and cultural value■ and values conflict; the
relationahip of sport to social change throuahout American hilltOry. (3 en.)
HIS 220. UNITED STATES MILITARY HISTORY. The development of America' s military strategy and the
growth of the United States military establiahment: principal campaigns and battles; the role of the anncd forces
as a f()Cial and political in&titution from the Revolution to the post-Vietnam Era. Emphasis is given to twentiethcentury strategy and related policy problem■ . (3 en.)
HIS 225. HISTORY OF CONTEMPORARY EUROPE. Major development■ in Europe within the last 45 years
which have significance in challenging and transforming many of the traditional values of society. The decline in
the pre-eminent position of Europe in world affairs and the rise of a global civilization. (3 en.)
HIS 226. HISTORY OF MEDIEVAL EUROPE. A study of the political, social, economic, and cultural force• of
the Middle Ages, with emphasis on inatitutional and cultural life from the fall of Rome to the Renaissance. (3 en.)
HIS 227 . RENAISSANCE AND REFORMATION. A study of Renaissance culture in Europe from the fourteenth
to the sixteenth century, with emphasia on Italy, conaidering late medieval civilization, humanism, the artistic
Renaissance, and the growth of the middle class, the universal church, and the appearance and character of the
principal branches of Protestantism. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
227
HIS 230. HISTORY OF EASTERN EUROPE. The medieval origin.I of Poland, Czechoalovakia, Hungary,
Yugoalavia, and Bulgaria; Romania through the period of national revival of the nineteenth century, independence
after World War I, sovietization after World War II, and reemerging nationalism. (3 en.)
HIS 234. URBAN PLANNING IN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE. The planning implicationa ofuroanization; the
early city planning of the pre-induatrial era, and the efforta by city plannen and developen to make the city more
attractive and liveable in various period ■ of uroan growth . (3 en.)
HIS 236 . HISTORY OF URBAN AMERICA. The uroan experience in American from the aeventeenth century to
the preaent. Uroan America in the context of world uroanization, demographic trend ■ , technolojy, and the
implicationa of theae force■ on the soci~onomic acene of uroan development. (3 en.)
HIS 237. SOCIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES. The major grouping• and waya of the United States
from colonial day■ to the preaent. (3 en.)
HIS 238 . HISTORY OF AMERICAN LABOR. American labor from early Colonial times to the present. (3 en.)
HIS 240. HISTORY OF THE COLD WAR. The origina and continuance of Soviet-American rivalry 1ince World
War II; confrontation in Europe; NATO; the Wanaw Pact; the growing nuclear anenal; regional conflict in Africa,
Latin America and Asia; the Congo, Angola, Cuba, Iran, China, Vietnam; the politic ■ and leadenhip of both
nationa; the emergence of Ru11ia a ■ a global power. (3 en.)
HIS 245. HISTORY OF RUSSIA. Rusaian hiltory, culture, and inatitutiona from the inception of the Kievan state
to the present; the pre-Soviet periods and those aspects of development of the RuHian state and people that have
played a dominant role in the shaping ofRu11ian character, temperament, and history. (3 en.)
HIS 247. HISTORY OF ETHNIC AMERICA. The immigrant in United States hi1tory from the eighteenth century
through the contemporary period . (3 en.)
HIS 250. AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY . The growth of the American conatitutional system, with
special emphasis on those aspects of conatitutional growth that relate closely to the fundamental structure of
American government and social order. (3 en .)
HIS 260. WOMEN IN UNITED STATES HISTORY: A study of women from the Colonial Era until the present,
arranged around·topics such a ■ reform, abolition, political activism, working conditiona and contemporary issue■ .
(3 en.)
HIS 265 . HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA. The emergence of modem Latin America from the Aztecs to Castro;
economic and social development of the region in the twentieth century; struggle for social justice among divene
culturca; conflicts within Latin American political life; military dictatonhipa; parliamentary democracy; guerrilla
warfare and counterterrorism. (3 en.)
HIS 303. TALE OF THREE CITIES . A comparative approach to the proceu of uroan growth and the social,
economic and political forces shaping the American city over time. Three cities, Washington, Pennaylvania,
Pittsburgh and Philadelphia are examined to demonatrate how social, economic, political and technological forces
shaped the uroan landacape over the yean 1750-1980. (3 en.)
HIS 304. THE GREAT DEPRESSION AND WORLD WAR II. The stresses and straina of the 1930-1945 period
of United State ■ history, using recent trends in acholanhip . (3 en.)
HIS 305 . CONTEMPORARY HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES . The unprecedented
occurred in the United States since the end of World War II. (3 en.)
change■
that have
228
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
HIS 320. THE ANATOMY OF DICTATORSHIP. The basic, 10Cial, economic, psychological, and political
clements that make up the modem dictatonhip . (3 en.)
HIS 350. ADOLF HITLER.. The philo110phical and psychological clements that led to the rise of National
Socialism, and its impact upon the western world . (3 en.)
HIS 379. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN HISTORY. Development of individual prognms by students. (Variable en.)
HIS 495 . SEMINAR IN UNITED STATES HISTORY. A study of American historians and their writings; the
changing interpretations of major topic■ in American hi■tory. (3 en.) S
URBAN STUDIES COURSES (XUA)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
+ XUA 101. SURVEY OF URBAN AFFAIRS. An introduction to the basic concepts and language used to define
and undentand urban life. The course seek■ to familiarize students with the dynamics of urban life as well as with
the iuuc■ and problems which have hi■torically confronted the city and its people. (3 en.)
+XUA 173 . COMMUNITY ACTION ANDNEIGHBORHOODGOVER.NMENT. Aninterdi1eiplinaryanalysis
of the various aspects of community organization and neighborhood government of use to urban planncn and
managcn, policy analy ■ta, nd those seeking careen in local voluntary or governmental agencies and institutions.
(3 en.)
+XUA 217. POLmCAL ECONOMY. The application to issues in urban affain of the analytic methods and
common to planning law, politics, and economics. (3 en.)
principle ■
+ XUA 254. HOUSING AND HOUSING POLICY . Urban housing from the 10Ciological, economic, and historical
pcnpcctivc: the nature of ahclter, the elements of housing, and such topics as housing and transportation, housing
and the private sector, public housing, housing design, housing finance and slum creaton. (3 en .)
+XUA 264. ORGANIZATIONAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE BEHAVIOR. Organizational and administrative
behavior in the context of planning, policy development, purveyance, and implementation. In order to promote
basic undcntanding of the various activitic■ and proccsacs involved, a number of concrete policy cases are used
as vehicles for di1eu11ion and illumination. (3 en.)
XUA 328 . LEISURE LEARNING . An overview of both leisure and recreation with emphasis placed upon the
history, economics, education and the role of government and the private sector as they affect both leisure and
recreation in the twentieth century. (3 en.)
XUA 335 . RECREATION LEADERSHIP. A study of leadership theory practice and practical application as they
relate to the administration, service and delivery of recreational programs. (3 en.)
XUA 357. RECREATION FOR THE PHYSICALLY AND EMOTIONALLY DISABLED. Designed to assist
students to develop pcnonalized recreation programs for those individuals who are mainstreamed into both public
and private recreation programs. (3 en.)
XUA 449 . PRACTICUM IN URBAN AFFAIRS . An intemahip in one of numerous planning, development or
10Cial agencies or oraanizations serving the Washington, Greene, Westmoreland, Fayette, and Allegheny County
regions. Can be taken for 4-16 credits, and includes cooperating agency supervision as well as performance
review . (Variable en.)
HONORS COURSES
229
HONORS COURSES
Admission to the Honors Program is a prerequisite for all of ·these courses.
description of the Honors Program earlier in this catalog (page 29).
See the
HON 281. KNOWLEDGE AND CULTURE: SOME EXPLORATIONS. •To be culturally literate is to possess
the basic infonnation needed to thrive in the modem world"-E.D. Hinch. This course explore ■ what every
student need■ to know to read intelligently. Cius scuions focus on ■kill ■ needed to acquire cultural literacy, i.e .,
the grasp of a coherent community of value■ and recognitions. The course provide■ honon students with a
framcworlc of reference and bibliographic 1kill1 that they can utilize in their area■ of study. (3 en.)
HON 285. PROTEST MOVEMENTS IN THE 1960'S. A general and comprehensive perspective on the unique,
exciting, and dangerous world of 19601 politic,. Undentanding the period entails the use of films, videos, and
record■ as well as extensive reading. (3 en.)
HON 287. THE LITERATURE OF SOCIAL UNREST. The relationship between literature and aocial change as
mirrored in contemporary fiction and drama from Eaatem Europe, Latin America, and South Africa. Class
discuuion will emphasize the historical and political aignificance of works by such authors as Jerzy Kosinski, Milan
Kundera, Vaclay Havel, Gabriel Garci'a M,rquez, Athol Fugard and Nadine Gordimer. (3 en.)
HON 295. LITERATURE, THE VISUAL ARTS, AND THE WORLD VIEW. The relationships bttween
literature and the visual arts, primarily sculpture and painting, illustrated in various periods of history and
culture-Ancient Greece, the Renaissance, Manncriam, the Baroque, the Rococo, Romanticism, Realism and
Naturaliam, Impre1sionism, and Expressionism; and, by study of the historical, aocial, and philosophical
background■, an exploration of the •world view" of each period and how it ia expressed in artistic movements or
•schools." (3 crs.)
HON 381. EVOLUTION OF EARTH SYSTEMS. The evolutionary dynamic, of living systems; namely, how
the interrelationship, between plants, animals, humans and environment shape their evolution, extinction, diversity,
geographic distribution, geologic history, and, for humans, their cultural history. Specific examples of past and
present biotic communities include Ice Age vertebrates, living mammals, amphibians and reptiles, continental and
ialand fauna,, and human cultures from Peru, Egypt, the Amazon Basin and the Arctic. Lectures are strongly
aupplemcnted with study of apecimcna, artifacts, and exhibits from The Carnegie Museum of Natural History. (3
en.)
HON 385 . BIOLOGICAL ORIGINS OF SOCIAL BEHAVIOR. Socio-biology and the influence of the process
of natural selection on aocial behavior in non-human and human animals. Findings from the biological and aocial
science, are integrated to provide a comprehensive view of the origin and nature of various aocial behaviors. Field
and laboratory observations of animal behavior are used to demonatrate a complex variety of aocial behaviors. (3
en.)
HON 388. PRINCES AND PAUPERS: STUDIES IN SOCIAL CLASS, WEALTH AND POVERTY IN WORLD
HISTORY. The impact of aocial and economic inequality on world history, using a case study approach to the
exiatence of wealth and poverty in Ancient Rome, in Medieval and Refonnation Europe, in Colonial America, in
Victorian England, and in 20th Century Urban America. (3 crs.)
HON 499. HONORS THESIS. The thesis serve• as the capstone of the university Honors Program. Under the
aupcrviaion of a faculty adviser of the student' ■ choice, the honors student seeks to make a substantive contribution
to the discipline. Considerable latitude in the form of the contribution ia permitted; empirical and historical
research as well ■ 1 creative products are all appropriate. A reader/reviewer ia assigned to pass judgment
independently on the student'• scholastic effort. An oral defense, demonstration or display of the completed thesis
i• required. (3 en.)
230
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOWGY
Bachelor's Degree Programs:
Electrical Engineering Technology
(1) B. S. degree, 4 years
(2) Upper level, 2 year transfer
Graphic Communications:
Options - Electrographics
- Photolithography Offset
- Screen Printing
Industrial Management:
Options - Manufacturing
- Printing
Industrial Technology
Manufacturing Technology
Technology Education (formerly Industrial Arts)
~ate Degree Programs:
Automation Technology:
Options - Numerical Control Machining
- Robotics
Drafting Technology
Electronics Technology
Screen Printing
Faculty: Professor Jay D. Helsel, chair. Professors Ronald G. Dreucci, Richard C. Grim,
John R. Kallis, John H. Lucy, Mark L. Nowak, Joseph E. Pecosh, Charles A. Schuler,
Alfred E. Simpson, Darrell L. Smith. Associate Professors Mark E. Bronakowski, Stanley
A. Komacek, John W. Loney, James R. Means, Jr., Joseph A. Sanfilippo, John M.
Thompson, Jaroslav V. Vaverka. Assistant Professors Larry D. Horath, Rene L. Horath,
Steve C. Hsiung, David V. Kolick, Jeffrey S. Sumey. Instructors Joseph G. Schickel,
Susan G. Urbine.
The Department of Industry and Technology offers six bachelor's and four associate degrees
with various options. The Department has earned a national reputation of excellence in its
many technology programs.
Technology courses are taught in the Shriver L. Coover Complex, which houses twenty-two
laboratories in two buildings. All laboratories are well-equipped with state-of-the-art
equipment. Some of the facilities found in the Complex are three electronics laboratories,
CADD equipped drafting rooms, a numerical control machining laboratory, a robotics
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
231
laboratory, two graphics laboratories, an electronic composition laboratory, a material
testing laboratory, and a machine tool laboratory.
In addition, laboratories in
communication, production, and transportation technology are available for use in the
teacher education program (Technology Education).
In all the curricular descriptions below, F and S indicate whether the course is usually
offered in the Fall or the Spring.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY
Electrical Engineering Technology is a branch of higher education dealing with both abstrac!
and practical concepts from science, mathematics, engineering and technology.
Considerable emphasis is placed on applications of current technology to meet the needs of
everyday problems and situations. The Electrical Engineering Technology program provides
students with the knowledge required to design, develop, modify, maintain and repair
sophisticated electrical and electronic systems.
Career Outlook
Opportunities for employment in the field of Electrical Engineering Technology are diverse
and plentiful. Graduates will find challenging jobs in all areas of the United States. Typical
positions include:
Electronic Design
Instrumentation Design
Systems Control
Microprocessor/Computer Applications
Software Development
Electronic Field Representative
Sales Representative
Engineering Administration
Curricul1DD
The Electrical Engineering Technology program provides students with a comprehensive
understanding of the current engineering technology available to solve many of the technical
problems confronting business, industry and government. The necessary background in
mathematics, physics and computer science is provided so that meaningful mathematical
modeling can be introduced and applied. Computer/microprocessor interfacing and
programming are heavily used to demonstrate flexibility and simplicity in instrumentation
design, communications, signal processing, and controls. Classical linear systems are
presented to provide the student with an understanding of linear active filters, transient
analysis, transducer interfacing, linearization, instrumentation, communications and controls.
Finally, the student has an opportunity to develop wider intellectual horizons through the
university's general education program.
232
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Program A~ion
In addition to the conventional freshman admission procedure, student admission also
includes those who have successfully completed a two-year associate degree in Electrical
Engineering Technology or its equivalent.
Students graduating with an Electrical Engineering Technology associate degree from
institutions having an articulation agreement* with the University will normally enter the
program with junior class standing.
Students with an educational background in a field related to Electrical Engineering
Technology who apply for admission to the program will be evaluated on an individual
basis.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Electrical Engineering
One hundred and thirty-two credits are required for tM degree.
A. General Educalion: 59 credits
MAT 181 College Algebra (F,S)
MAT 191 College Trigonometry (F,S)
MAT 281 & 282 Calculus I & II (F,S)
CSC 12X Computer Science I (F,S)
(Any language)
PHY 101 (S) & 202 (F) College
Physics I & II
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
COM 250 Oral Communication: Management (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
Humanities Electives - 6 crs.
Social Science Elective - 9 crs.
Natural Science Elective - 4 crs.
Free Electives - 9 crs.
B. Professional Specialty: 73 credits
Electrical Engineering Technology- 65 crs.
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
EET
110 DC Circuits (F)
160 AC Circuits (S)
170 Digital Electronics Design (S)
210 & 260 Linear Electronics I (F) & II (S)
220 Introduction to El_ectric Power (F)
270 Introduction to Microprocessor Design (S)
310 Methods in Engineering Analysis (F)
320 Network Analysis (F)
EET 330 Advanced Microprocessor Design (F)
EET 360 Microprocessor Engineering(S)
EET 370 & 420 Instrumentation Design l(S) & II(F)
EET 400 Senior Project Proposal (F)
EET 410 Automatic Control Systems (F)
EET 430 RF Communications (S)
EET 450 Senior Project (S)
EET 460 Digital Signal Proc. (S)
Technical Electives - 8 crs . minimum
• Articulation agreements :
Community College of Allegheny County - South Campus
Westmoreland County Community College
Butler County Community College
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
233
GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY
A reliable system for the transmission of ideas and messages is necessary in our fast-paced
progressive world. The "printed word" or graphic communications serve as a most effective
method of transferring those ideas and messages. Graphic communications involve all of
the people, processes, materials, and related fields necessary to reproduce words, pictures,
ideas and symbols in printed form on physical media such as paper, metal or cloth, in any
quantity. The graphic communications industry is a large and diverse industry employing
over one million people.
Among all U. S. manufacturing industries, graphic
communications ranks first in the number of establishments, sixth in total payroll and sixth
in total number of employees. This large and ever changing industry is experiencing many
technological changes that will create new slcills, jobs and challenges for tomorrow's
workers.
The Graphic Communications Technology Program at California University prepares people
to enter the field by offering a curriculum of technical studies with laboratory-based
experiences in the major printing processes. Students in the program study both general
education, technical, and technical specialty courses. They have the opportunity to
concentrate in one of three technical specialty areas: Electro-Graphics, Photo-Offset
Lithography, or Screen Printing. The facilities used by the Graphic Communication
Technology and Printing Management programs include three well equipped graphic
communication laboratories with two photographic darkrooms, a phototypesetting laboratory,
two modem electronic laboratories, and two drafting and design rooms. A wide variety of
modem photo composing, cameras, film processors, printing presses and other equipment
is available for instruction and student use.
Career Outlook
The future for people involved in graphic communications is bright. Because of both the
sire and tremendous diversity in the graphic communications industry there is a wide variety
of career opportunities for men and women of all interests, talents and educational levels.
Recent estimates indicate that up to 500,000 people will be needed in the next five years in
the nation's 100,000 printing plants. It would be impossible to list all of the individual job
descriptions that exist, but typically Graphic Communications Technology graduates expect
to fill positions in production areas, printing sales, quality control, customer service,
estimating, scheduling, print buying, product design, marketing, equipment sales and
technical service.
Opportunities are available with advertising agencies, publishers,
commercial printers, manufacturers of equipment and graphic communications suppliers, as
well as graphic communications electronic equipment and control systems.
234
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Curriculwn
The Graphic Communications Technology program provides students with a comprehensive
understanding of graphic communications concepts applicable to the solution of problems
encountered on the job. In addition, the program provides students with experiences in the
application of principles of business management and the development of analytical, and
verbal skills. Students also acquire computer programming skills to prepare them to carry
out their job responsibilities more effectively. To gain a more thorough understanding of
computers and other electronic systems, they also take some required course work in
electronics. Finally, students develop wider intellectual horiz.ons through their general
education program.
A unique opportunity in this program is the Graphic Communications Internship whereby
students may spend a junior or senior semester or a summer working in an industrial setting.
This internship broadens the students' education by offering the opportunity to work in a
real-world setting, experiencing the day-to-day operations in a printing plant. Students
observe how different jobs are produced, problems are handled, and solutions reached. In
addition, the employer has an opportunity to observe students as prospective employees.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Graphic Communications Technology
One hundred mid rwenl)l-eighl credits are required for the degree.
A . General Education: 48 credits
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Math l&Il (F,S)
PHY 121 General Physics I (F,S)
COM 250 Oral Communication: Mgt (F,S)
Humanities - 6 credits
Social Sciences - 6 credits
Natural Science - 6 credits
Free Electives - 12 credits
8 . Photo Offset Option: 80 credits
Management - 23 en.
GCT 340 & 440 Eat. & Cost Analysis I (F) & Il (S)
ITE 375 Principles of Production (F,S)
ITE 455 Quality Control (F,S)
MGT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
MKT 221 Salesmanship (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
MGT 362 Labor Relationa (F,S)
Technical Concentration - 27 en.
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commns. I & Il (F,S)
GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (F,S)
GCT 235 Photographic Techniques (F)
GCT 350,351 & 352 PhotolithographicTechniques
1 (F), n (S), & m (F)
GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F, S)
GCT 375 Finishing and Compoaing
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
235
Technical Support - 21 crs.
CSC I0S Buie Programming Language (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ (F,S)
IND 130 Introduction to Circuit Analysis (F,S)
PHS 13S Chemistry of Material, (F,S)
IND 13S Digital Electronic, (F,S)
PSY 209 Industrial P■ychology (F,S)
rrE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
OCT 49S Graphic Communication Intem.ahip or Approved Courses - 9 crs. (F,S)
C. Screen PrlMng Opdon: 80 crediu
Management - 23 crs.
OCT 340 & 440 Est. & Cost Analysis I (F) & Il (S)
ECO 201 Introduction to Microeconomics (F,S)
rra 37S Principles of Production (F,S)
rrE 4SS Quality Control (F,S)
MOT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
Electives - 2 crs.
Technical Concentration - 27 crs.
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Communa I & Il (F,S)
OCT lSS, 2SS & 3SS Screen Printing I (S),
n (F), & m cs)
OCT 22S Principles of Layout & Design (F,S)
OCT 23S Photographic Techniques (F)
OCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S)
IND 14S Photography (F,S)
Technical Support - 21 crs.
IND 101 Drawing & Design (F,S)
CSC l0S Ba ■ic Programming Language (F,S)
PHS 13S Chemistry of Material, (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F,S)
PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
OCT 49S Graphic Communication Intem.ahip or Approved Courses - 9 crs. (F,S)
D . Electro-Graphics: 80 credits
Management - 14 crs.
MOT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
rrE 37S Principles of Production (F,S)
OCT 340 Estimating & Coat Analysis I (F)
Electives - 2 crs.
Technical Concentration - 39 crs.
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commna. I & II (F,S)
OCT 320 & 321 Elect. Composition I & Il (F,S)
qCT 3S0 Photolithoiraphic Techniques I (F)
IND 110 Technical Drawing I (F ,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
IND 13S Digital Electronics (F,S)
IND 14S
IND 230
IND 23S
IND 33S
IND 330
Photography (F,S)
Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ (F,S)
Introduction to Microprocessors (F,S)
Advanced Microproceuors (S)
Industrial Electricity/Electronics (F,S)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
236
Technical Support - 18 era.
PHS 135 Chemistry of Material, (S)
CSC 121 & 221 Computer Science I & II (F,S)
PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
IND 215 Computer Aided Drafting I (F,S)
OCT 495 Graphic Communication Internahip or Approved Courses - 9 era. (F ,S)
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGY
The need for educated personnel to participate in the development and application of
technological change is evident; trained and experienced managers of production ensure that
the benefits of modem technology are realized. The complexity of modem production
processes requires higher levels of sophistication for planning, organizing, operating and
controlling these activities. The Industrial Management curriculum combines a core of
business and management courses with a selected technical area of study to prepare
graduates for managerial roles in industry. Three technical option areas are available:
Computer Science, Manufacturing, and Printing Management.
The Manufacturing and Printing Management options are administered by the Department
of Industry and Technology, while the Computer Science option is administered by the
Mathematics and Computer Science Department (see pages 268 and following below).
Career outlook
The graduate of the Industrial Management Technology program is prepared for a wide
variety of employment opportunities depending in part upon the chosen technical option area.
Several possible career possibilities are listed below:
Industrial Engineering Technology
Production Planning
Production Supervision
Quality Assurance
Numerical Control Programming
Industrial Sales
Systems Analysis
Computer Programming
In-House Printing Management
Field or Service Representation
Personnel Management
Marketing Management & Planning
Curriculwn
The student may select the appropriate option in order to gain the necessary skills for a
career in a business or industrial-related position. In addition the program:
provides the student with sufficient elective courses to allow for an exposure to the
humanities, the natural sciences and the social sciences;
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
237
presents the students with opportunities to develop the habits of reasoning
critically and thinking clearly;
provides the student with opportunities to develop appropriate communication and
quantitative skills;
exposes the student to an environment and activities that will provide an
understanding of the field of business and management;
provides the student with opportunities to develop competency in a technical area
such as printing management, computer science or technology.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Industrial Management
One hundred and twenty-eight credits are required.
A. General Education: 48 credits
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Math I & II (F,S)
PHY 121 General Phyaica I (F,S)
COM 2.S0 Oral Communication: Management (F,S)
Humanities - 6 era .
Natural Science - 6 era .
Social Science - 6 era.
Free Electives - 12 era.
B. Manufacturing Option: 80 credits
Management - 30 era.
PSY 209 lnduatrial Psychology (F,S)
ACC 201 & 202 Accounting I & II (F,S)
ACC 331 Coll Accounting I (F ,S)
ECO 201 Introductory Microeconomics (F,S)
ECO 202 Introductory Macroeconomics (F,S)
ECO 322 Managerial Economics (F,S)
MOT 361 Labor Relations (F,S)
ENG 211 Business Writing I (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
Computer Courses - 6 era.
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
CSC 218 COBOL I (F,S)
Metal Machining - 18 era.
IND 16.S & 26.S Machine Processes I (F,S) & II (S)
MTE 236 & 336 Numerical Control Programming I & II (F,S)
MTE 337 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (COMPACT II) (F)
MTE 338 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S)
Technical Drawing - 6 era.
IND 110 & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S)
238
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Electro-Mechanical - IS en.
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F,S)
IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
ITE 445 Quality Control (F,S)
ITE 181 Material Technology (F)
Elective Labs - S en.
C. Printing Managemenl Opdon: 80 credits
Management - 29 en.
ECO 201 Introductory Microeconomics (F,S)
ACC 201 Accounting I (F,S)
ITE 375 Principles of Production (F ,S)
•ITE 4SS Quality Control I (F) & ll (S)
MKT 221 Salesmanship (F,S)
MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S)
GCT 340 & 440 Estimating & Cost Analysis
MTE 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
Elective - 2 en.
Technical Concentration - 27 en.
GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (S)
GCT 235 Photographic Techniques
GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S)
IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commns I (F,S) & ll (F,S)
GCT 350,351 & 352 PhotolithographicTechniqucs
1 (F), n (S) & m (F)
IND 145 Photography (F,S)
Technical Support - 15 en.
PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S)
ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
CSC 105 Basic Programming Language (F,S)
MAT 171 Mathematics of Finance (F ,S)
PHS 135 Chemistry of Materials (S)
GCT 495 Graphic Communication Internship or Approved Councs - 9 en. (F,S)
D. Computer Option: Sec Mathematics and Computer Science Department List
INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY
The role of technology becomes increasingly important as lagging productivity, rising prices
and soaring energy costs combine to add to the economic difficulties of industries, workers,
and consumers. The need for educated men and women to work in the development and
application of technology has never been greater. The Industrial Technology program
provides students with the knowledge and skills to become highly qualified technical middle
managers who oversee and guide production and carry out the important research and
development needed in a variety of industries.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
239
Career Outlook
Students enrolled in the Industrial Technology program are required to complete several
management courses in addition to a core group of Industrial Technology courses. Typical
entry level positions for. graduates are:
Systems Analysis
Product Design
Purchasing
Safety Management
Motion and Time Specialist
Technical Problem Solving
Product Supervision
Quality Assurance
Production Control
Industrial Relations
Personnel Management
Sales and Service
Students have no difficulty in finding employment in business and industrial careers that
require knowledge in science, manufacturing, and management.
Curriculwn
The Bachelor of Science Degree in Industrial Technology has been planned to prepare
management-oriented technical graduates. A significant portion of the program is devoted
to the study of technological concepts, principles, and their relation to automation,
productivity, and manufacturing systems. Students may elect various technical options
which focus on the technologies of today and tomorrow through a laboratory-based
approach.
Requiremeata:
Bachelor of Science Degt't!e - Industrial Technology
One lumdrt!d and twenty-eight credits art! required/or the degree.
A . General Education: 48 Ct't!dilS
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Mathematica l&ll (F,S)
COM 250 Oral Communication: Management (F,S)
CSC XXX Computer Science - 3 era.
Humanities - 6 era.
Social Science - 6 era.
Natural Science - 6 era.
Free Electives - 12 era.
B. Industrial Technology: 80 Ct't!dilS
Physical Science - 8 era.
PHY 121 & 122 General Physics I & ll (F,S)
240
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Industrial Technology - 39 en.
IND 110 Technical Dnwing I (F,S)
IND 180 Introduction to Robotics
IND 215 CAD I (F,S)
ITE 101 lndultrial Safety (F,S)
ITE 480 Problema in Industrial Technology (S)
ITE 181 & 182 Material Technology I (F) & Il (S)
ITE 460 Principles of Manufacturing (S)
IND 165 Machine Processes I (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis(F,S) or
IND 135 Digital Electronic, (F,S) or
IND 230 Introductory Linear Electronics (F,S)
or IND 235 Introduction to Microproceuon (F ,S)
MAT 215 Statistic, (F,S
Management - 21 en.
MGT 201 Principles of Management (F,S)
ITE 375 Principle■ of Production (F,S)
ITE 445 Quality Control (F,S)
ITE 385 lndultrial Cost Estimating (F)
ECO 100 Elements of Economics (F,S)
MGT 362 Labor Relations (F,S)
ITE 420 Production Analysis (F)
Technical Electives - 12 en.
Students will select from an approved list.
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
One measure of humanity's growth and progress is the ability to manufacture goods
effectively. It has been estimated that in the 1990' s over 22 million men and women will
be employed in the manufacturing industry. A sizeable portion of this growing labor force
is needed to engage in the management, manufacture, sale and programming of new
manufacturing and computer-aided design equipment. The Manufacturing Technology
program, while placing emphasis on the principles of numerical control (N /C) technology,
provides students with a broad, flexible education, enabling them to enter the manufacturing
work force in a variety of professional positions.
The facilities available to majors in the manufacturing technology programs include a
modem Numerical Control Machining laboratory and a well equipped Machining laboratory.
A wide variety of modem equipment such as N. C. Vertical Milling Machine, a N. C.
Turning Center, computers and computer terminals and other traditional machining
equipment is located in the laboratories.
Career Outlook
Opportunities for employment in the field of Manufacturing Technology are diverse and
available. Graduates will find challenging job placements in all geographical areas of the
United States.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
241
Some careers in Manufacturing Technology are:
N/C Field Representative
N/C Technician
N/C Programmer
N/C Coordinator
Technician
Manufacturing Supervisor
Production Manager
Quality Control Technician
Sales Representative
Industrial Engineering
CurricullDD
The Manufacturing Technology Program provides students with experiences in
manufacturing processes that will help them understand and solve problems they may
confront in the manufacturing world. The necessary background in math is provided so that
meaningful machine tool programming problems can be resolved. Students will study four
programming languages: BASIC, FORTRAN, COMPACT II and APT. Basic techniques
are studied in technical foundations courses such as technical drawing, electronics, and
machine shop. Advanced technology in CADD, Robotics, Hydraulics and Numerical
Control provides a capstone· of computer-assisted techniques used by modem industry to
increase quality and productivity. This technical background, coupled with managerial
subjects and the general education requirements, positions the manufacturing technology
students for many attractive job opportunities.
A unique opportunity within this program is the Manufacturing Technology Internship
whereby students may spend a semester or a summer working in an industrial setting. This
internship broadens the student's education, offering the opportunity to work in a real world
setting experiencing the day-to-day operations of a manufacturing facility . Students observe
how different jobs are produced, problems are handled, and solutions are reached. In
addition, the employer has an opportunity to observe students as prospective employees.
Requirements:
Bachelor of Science Degree - Mamifacturing Technology
One hundred and twenty-eighl credits are required for the degree.
A. Gmeral Education: 48 credits
ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 & 192 Technical Mathematica l&Il (F,S)
CSC 105 Basic Prognmming Language (F,S)
COM 250 Onl Communication: Management (F ,S)
Humanities - 6 crs.
Social Science - 6 era.
Natunl Science - 6 era .
Free Electives - 12 era.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
242
B. Manufacturing Technology: 80 credits
Indultrial Techoology - IS en.
PSY 209 Indultrial Psychology (F,S)
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
lTE 101 Indultrial Safety (F,S)
lTE 375 Principle, of Production (F,S)
lTE 445 Quality Control (F,S)
Elec~Mechanical - 8 en.
IND 180 Introduction to Robotic, (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analy1i1 (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic, (F,S)
IND 330 lndultrial Electricity/Electronic• (F,S)
IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
lTE 181 Material, Technology I (F)
Metal Machining - 24 en.
IND 165 & 265 Machine Proceuing I & n (F,S)
MTE 236 & 336 Num. Cont. Proa. I & Il (F,S)
Approved elective lab, - 6 en.
MTE 337 COMPACT Il (S)
MTE 338 APT (F)
Technical Drawing - 9 en.
IND llO & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S)
IND 215 CAD I (F,S)
MTE 495 Manufacturing Technology Internahip - 14 en. (F,S) or Approved Counea
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION
(formerly Industrial Arts)
The Technology Education program prepares the prospective teacher for employment in both
primary and secondary schools. Graduates of this program are awarded a Bachelor of
Science Degree in Education and an Instructional I certificate making them eligible for
teaching Technology Education/Industrial Arts in grades K-12.
Due to our ever-expanding knowledge base in a world community, technology education
majors are required to develop a strong academic background in the humanities, sciences,
mathematics and personal communication skills. In addition, these undergraduates must
have an understanding of how young students learn within a multicultural society.
Technology Education majors are required to complete a series of laboratory classes related
to technical systems of transportation, production, and communication. These laboratory
courses develop skills in the use of tools, materials and processes. Computer applications
are evident as current softwares and supporting devices are developed. Students make
extensive use of the universal systems model while studying production, services, and their
social/cultural impacts.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
243
Career Outlook
While the reputation for our program in Technology Education at California University of
Pennsylvania remains rather high, the demand for its graduates is even higher. For the most
part, these teachers have been successfully employed in Pennsylvania and other states. This
profession is open to both men and women. While most graduates have remained in
classroom teaching, many have become certified as either a building principal,
superintendent, guidance counselor or a special education instructor. Some obtain advanced
degrees and are eventually employed at a college or university.
Annual Open House
Prospective students are encouraged to attend the Annual Open House, which is held the last
Thursday in April. This is an excellent opportunity to tour the facilities and see a variety
of activities being conducted in the laboratories. Parents, teachers, administrators and
guidance counselors are also welcome. For more information, please call the departmental
office at (412) 938-4086.
Curriculwn
This curriculum includes a study of selected technologies which explore the solutions of
technical problems and their associated impacts encountered by people as they transport,
produce and communicate on a daily basis. More specifically, these systems are as follows.
Communication Technology. Communication technology is concerned with the study of the
methods by which humans communicate. This system includes experiences in such areas
as drafting, design, computer-aided drafting, photography, graphic arts, computer
networking, video production and desktop publishing.
Production Technology. Production technology is concerned with the study of the methods
by which humans produce goods both in-plant and on-site. This system includes courses in
manufacturing and construction technologies which provide an understanding in the
fabricating, forming, combining, and testing of such materials as composites, wood, plastics,
ceramics and metals. In addition, these classes contain activities which include the use of
computer-aided machining processes.
Transpo71ation Technology. Transportation technology is concerned with the study of how
people, products and materials are transported from one place to another. This system also
encourages the student to complete classes in electronics, digital circuitry, microprocessors,
pneumatics, hydraulics, robotics, energy/power systems and small gasoline engines.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
244
Requiranmu:
Bachelor of Scimce Deglle in Educalion:
Cenijicalion in Industrial Ans/Technology Educalionfor Grades K-12
One hundlld and thirry clldits all llquilldfor the deglle.
A . General Educalion: 48 clldits
CHE 101 General Chemistry I (F,S)
ENG 102 Englilh Composition II (F,S)
MAT 192 Technical Mathematica II (F,S)
PHY 121 & 202 General Physics 1&11 (F,S)
. COM 101 Oral Communication (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 9 era.
Social Science Electives - 6 era.
Health/Physical Activities - 3 era.
Electives - 7 era .
B. Professional Educalion: 15 credits
EDF 100 Foundations of Education (F,S)
EDU 210 Teaching in a Multicultural Society (F,S)
EDU 340 Mainstreamina Exceptional I.camera (F,S)
EDS 465 Dev. Reading Sec. School (F ,S)
PSY 208 Educational Psychology (F,S)
C. Professional Specialty: 24 credits
TED 280 Technology/Society/Education(F,S)
TED 410Teaching-CommunicationTech. (Rotated)
TED 420 Teaching Production Technology
(Rotated)
TED 430 Teaching Transportation (Rotated)
TED 461 Student Teaching and School Law
(12 era.) (F,S)
D. Curriculum Specialty: 42 clldits
Communications -
15 era.
Required Course,
TED 110 Introduction to Communication (F,S)
IND 101 Drawing and Design
IND 110 Technical Drawing I (F ,S)
Two Communication Electives (Select one course from Graphics and one course from Drafting from the courses
lilted below):
Graphic• Elective
IND 140 Graphic Communications I
IND 145 Photography
IND 240 Graphic Communications II
Drafting Elective
IND 210 Technical Drawing II
IND 215 Computer Aided Drafting I
IND 320 Architectural Drafting and Design
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
245
F.nergyffransportalion - 15 en.
Required Counea
TED 130 Introduction to Energyfrnnaportation (F,S)
IND 130 Introduction to Circuit Analysia (F,S)
Power Elective (Select One Coune)
IND 180 Introduction to Robotic ■
IND 184 Ene1JY and Power System,
IND 186 Hydnulic Fluid Power
IND 188 Pneumatic Fluid Power
IND 282 Small Gaaoline Engines
Electronic ■ Elective (Select One Coune)
IND 135 Digital Electronics
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic ■
IND 235 Introduction to Microproceaaon
Enerufrnnaportation Elective
(Select one other coune from the power or electronic, coune1 lilted above.)
Production - 12 en.
Required Courses
TED 120 Introduction to Production
Manufacturing Elective (Select one course)
IND 160 Material Fabricating
IND 165 Machine Proceaaing I (Fundamental, of Machine)
IND 275 Materials Testing
IND 278 Plaatica Technoloiy
MTE 236 Numerical Control Programming I
Construction Elective (Select one coune)
IND 250 Construction I
IND 350 Construction II
IND 355 Wood Technology
Production Elective
(Select one other course from the construction or manufacturing courses lilted above.)
Penmylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the National Teachers'
Examination (NTE).
246
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
~ociate Degrees
The Department offers four associate degrees. The Automation Technology degree has two
options: Numerical Control Machining and Robotics systems. The other two technical
choices are in Screen Printing and Drafting Technology. All programs are supported by the
twenty-two laboratories located in the Shriver L. Coover Complex.
The associate degree requires the completion of 66 credits. Associate degree credits can be
transferred toward the completion of a Bachelor of Science degree. The associate degree
is designed to provide graduates with the skills essential to enter the work force as a
technical skilled worker.
In the curricular requirements below, F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered
in the Fall or the Spring.
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY:
NUMERICAL CONTROL OPl'ION
Numerical control (N/C) of machine tools is a relatively recent innovation that has provi~ed
manufacturing industries, both large and small, a means of increasing productivity. The
change in this method of manufacturing requires that industries have educated personnel that
can develop complex numerical control programs.
California University of Pennsylvania has an outstanding Numerical Control Machining
Laboratory. It is equipped with two Bridgeport CNC vertical milling machines and CNC
lathe. High speed terminals and punches are available for computer access when writing
programs. Also, plotters and microcomputers are available for the preparation of programs.
Career Outlook
Career opportunities appear to be excellent in this area. Individuals trained in the
programming of numerical control machines can expect to be employed as N/C Technicians.
Personnel with N/C skills are needed in most geographic regions in the United States. Jobs
are available to these graduates who excel and desire a job in N/C Programming.
Curriculwn
Students in the Numerical Control option of the Automation Technology Program will learn
to write manual programs in the format detail of the machine tool, employing linear and
circular interpolation addressing three axes. In-house COMPACT II and APT are the two
machine tool languages that are studied. The computer programs prepared by the students
are interfaced with the machine tool with post processor software. Individual programs are
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
247
loaded into the memory of a CNC lathe or CNC mill and the part is then manufactured.
Students, therefore, are experienced N/C machine operators as well as manual, APT, and
COMPACT II programmers.
The principal objective of the Numerical Control Option of the Automation Technology
Degree is to provide the student with sufficient skills and expertise in the programming and
operation of computerized numerical control equipment to secure employment.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4
5.
Program, set up, and operate CNC equipment, i.e. lathes and mills.
Program using manual programming and the COMPACT II and APT
programming languages.
Prepare supporting documentation for machine setup and operation.
Program linear and circular moves.
Machine parts on a mill and a lathe using a N/C program prepared by the
student.
Requiremmta:
Associaze Degree in Auzomation Technology Numerical Control Oprion: 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 Engliah Compo■ition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematica I (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 3 en.
Social Science Elective - 3 en.
Natural Science Elective - 3 en.
Free Elective - 3 en.
B. Technical Studies: 39 credits
Numerical Control Machining - 24 en.
IND 165 & i65 Machine Processing I & D (F,S)
MTE 236 & 336 Numerical Control Programming I (F,S) & D (S)
MTE 337 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (COMPACT D) (F)
MTE 338 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S)
MTE 437 Advanced Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (Compact D) (S)
MTE 438 Advanced Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S)
Related Electives - 15 en.
IND 110 & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S)
IND 135 Digital Electronics
(F ,S)
IND 235 Introduction to Microprocesson (F,S)
IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
248
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY:
ROBOTICS SYSTEMS OPfION
Robots are automated devices that are used in the industrial world. These robots are used
individually or with other pieces of automated equipment. A variety of manufacturing
industries need people skilled in automated systems and robotics in order to increase
productivity and provide better quality control in the manufacturing of goods and materials.
California University of Pennsylvania has a well-equipped state-of-the-art Robotics Systems
Laboratory. A variety of robotic arms, from small educational robots to large industrial
robots, are used in providing instruction, along with an automatic guided vehicle (AGV),
an artificial vision system, programmable controllers, and automatic identification
equipment. This laboratory is an outstanding facility for the teaching of automated systems.
Career Outlook
The career opportunities appear to be excellent in this area. Various sources indicate that
the demand for automation technicians will increase 25-34% in the 1990's. Persons trained
in this field are expected to become automated manufacturing systems technicians in a
variety of settings where automated manufacturing principles are employed. The program
is structured as an interdisciplinary approach where each course emphasizes the
understanding of integrated systems that use automated equipment and components.
Curriculwn
The major purpose of this program is to train persons to become automated manufacturing
technicians who will be able to program, interface, set up, and operate the various
components that make up an automated system. Students will be able to understand the
operational behavior of individual robots and at the same time have an awareness of robots
in an automated manufacturing system. The graduate of the program will have sufficient
skills and expertise in automated systems, including robotics, to secure employment.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program, setup, maintain, and operate servo and non servo robots, artificial vision
systems, and other automated equipment.
Interface the different components of an automated system.
Prepare supporting documentation that is clear, concise and accurate.
Select equipment and components best suited for use in automation.
Solve industrial problems through the application of automation technology.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
249
Requiremmta:
Associale Degree in Automation Technology:
Robotic Systems Option: 66 credits
A. General Srwlies: 27 credits
ENG 101 Engliah Compo■ition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematics I (F,S)
PHY 121 General Phy1ic1 I (F,S)
CSC 105 Basic Programming Language (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technolou & Society (F,S)
Humanitiea Elective - 3 credits
Social Science Elective - 3 en.
Free Elective, - 3 credits
B. Technical Srwlies: 39 credits
Robotic, Syatcma - 15 credits
IND 180 Introduction to Robotics (F,S)
MTE 270 Electro-Hydraulic Servo Systems (F)
MTE 280 & 281 Robotics Syatcma I (F) & D (S)
MTE 290 Applications of Industrial Robotics
Systems (S)
Related Arca - 24 credits
IND
IND
IND
IND
130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
135 Digital Electronics (F,S)
186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S)
188 Pneumatic Fluid Power (F,S)
IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electron (F,S)
IND 235 Introduction to Microprocesson (F,S)
IND 330 Industrial Elec/Electron (F,S)
Technical Elective (One of the Following)
MTE 236 Numerical Control Programming I (F,S)
IND 335 Advanced Microprocessors (F)
or Course by advisor approval
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN DRAFI'ING TECHNOLOGY
Drafting is generally considered to be the primary means of communicating technical ideas.
It is the graphic language of industry and is essential to the process of design,
manufacturing, and service.
A modem drafting laboratory and a well equipped CAD laboratory with terminals and
plotters are available to support this program. The CADD systems are of industrial quality
using the ANVIL 5000 language and AUTOCAD.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
250
Career Outlook
As we continue to grow technologically, the need for drafting technicians will continue to
increase. Since technological growth is expected to continue for many years to come, the
need for personnel in drafting and related fields will, presumably, also continue to grow.
The placement of graduates from this program has been at nearly the 100% level and is
expected to continue at that rate for many years to come.
Curriculum
The principal objective of the Drafting Technology program is to provide students with
sufficient skills and expertise to secure employment in drafting or a related field. In
addition, all credits earned in this Associate Degree program are applicable to several
four-year Bachelor of Science degree programs.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to do at least the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Communicate technical ideas through freehand sketching.
Make technical drawings that fully describe a design idea.
Solve technical problems by using the tools and techniques of drafting.
Prepare pictorial presentation drawings in pencil, ink, and water color.
Write technical reports that are clear, concise, and accurate.
Prepare drawings and solve design problems using a modem CADD
(computer-aided drafting and design) system.
Requiremeats:
Associale Degree in Drafting Technology - 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematica I (F,S)
Pm 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 3 era.
Social Science Elective - 3 era.
Natunl Science Elective - 3 era.
Free Elective - 3 era.
B. Technical Studies: 39 credits
Technical Dnwing - 30 credits
IND 110, 210 & 310 Technical Dnwing I (F,S), Il (F,S), & ill (S)
IND 101 Dnwing and Design (F,S)
IND 215 & 315 Computer Aided Dnfting I (F,S) & Il (F,S)
IND 218 Deacriptive Geometry and Surface Development (F)
EAS 271 Cartognphy (F)
IND 318 Airliruah Techniques (F,S)
IND 320 Architcctunl Dnwing & De■ign (S)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
251
Related Area - 9 credits (Select 3 of the following)
IND 140 Gnphic Communicationa I (F,S)
rrE 181 Material■ Technology I (F)
IND 165 Machine Proceuea I (F,S)
rrE 101 Indultrial Safety (F,S)
IND 160 Material Fabricating (F,S)
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN ELECTRONICS TECHNOLOGY
Electronics Technology deals with devices, circuits, systems, and instrumentation. This
curriculum prepares students to install, analyze, diagnose, and repair electronic equipment
and systems.
The University has three outstanding laboratories for instruction in electricity and
electronics. One laboratory is devoted to courses in digital and microprocessor electronics,
one_to circuit analysis and linear electronics, and one to advanced courses with emphasis on
sophisticated instrumentation systems.
All of the laboratories are equipped with
microcomputers, and a complete instrumentation package is available at every student work
station. Students work in teams of two, and laboratory enrollment is limited to 24 persons.
In addition to the electronics center, students have access to a robotics laboratory and a
numerical control machining laboratory.
Career Outlook
Electronics is a vital and ever-expanding technology. The national job market is excellent
in this area as more and more businesses, industries, and institutions turn to electronic
solutions for many of their problems. The continued growth of electronics is expected to
provide many new positions for skilled technicians and technologists for the foreseeable
future.
Curriculwn
The Electronics Technology curriculum is designed to develop analytic skills and
problem-solving abilities in students. The courses are structured as a blend of applied
mathematics, theory, and laboratory practice. The content is modem with emphasis on
digital techniques, microprocessors, linear electronics, system analysis, product
development, and RF communications.
The principal objective of the Electronics Technology Associate degree is to provide the
student with sufficient skills and expertise to secure employment.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to:
252
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
Analyze circuits with quantitative and computer skills for problem solving purposes.
Understand the concepts of de and ac circuits as applied to electrical and electronic
instrumentation.
Program, interface, and troubleshoot microprocessor based designs.
Apply the theory of radio frequency devices and circuits to modem communication
and telecommunication systems.
Work safely with electrical and electronics circuits while using electronic tools and
testing equipment.
Understand and work with solid-state devices and their application in digital and
linear electronic circuits.
Requinmeats:
Associate Degree in Electronics Technology - 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematica (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanities Elective - 3 era.
Social Science Elective - 3 era.
Natural Science Elective - 3 era.
Free Elective - 3 era.
8. Technical Studies: 39 credits
IND
IND
IND
IND
130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S)
135 Digital Electronics (F ,S)
230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F ,S)
235 Introduction to Microprocessors (F,S)
IND 330 Industrial EUEL (F,S)
IND 332 Communication Electron (S)
IND 335 Advanced Microproce880ra (F)
IND 336 Electron. Systems & Product Dvpmt. (F)
Technical Electives - IS era. (Advisor approval is required.)
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN SCREEN PRINTING TECHNOLOGY
Screen printing is one component of the rapidly growing graphic communications industry.
This industry has been growing at an annual rate of between six and eight percent a year.
Because of the increasing complexity of the communications industry, individuals trained in
screen printing are needed. Four outstanding graphic laboratories are utilized in this
program. Each has modem equipment related to its area of study. Modem photo-composing
equipment has recently been purchased for the Electronic Composition area. Modem
screening presses, dryers, computer stencil transfer equipment and other support items were
recently installed in the screening laboratory for student use.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
253
Career Outlook
Career opportunities are outstanding. People trained in screen printing will find employment
opportunities in most segments of the communications industry, small printing shops, and
large corporations with communications divisions or departments.
Curriculwn
The principal objective of the Screen Printing program is to provide students with knowledge
and expertise in the applications of screen printing, thus enabling them to become productive
members of the graphic arts industry. This program of studies offers the flexibility of
scheduling business electives for the acquisition of knowledge and skills to initiate and
manage one's own screen printing business.
Upon completion of the program, the graduate will be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Identify materials capable of being screen printed, based on a particular application.
Formulate a plan for the production of a screen printed product consistent with the
individual's career objective.
Produce quality screen printing plates for given applications.
Screen print a quality image on a designated material, in accordance with detailed
specifications.
Assess the quality and value of a screen printed production.
Recogni:ze the importance of membership in professional associations which support
individual career objectives and further professional growth.
In addition, all credits earned in this Associate (two year) program, are transferable to a four
year Bachelor of Science degree program.
Requin!ments:
Associaze Degree in Screen Prinling Technology - 66 credits
A. General Studies: 27 credits
CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S)
ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S)
ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S)
MAT 182 Technical Mathematic, I (F,S)
PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S)
Humanitie■ Elective - 3 en.
Social Science Elective - 3 en.
Natural Science Elective - 3 en.
Free Elective - 3 en.
B. Technical Studies: 39 credits
Screen Printing - 30 credits
OCT 155, 255 & 355 Screen Printing I (S), II (F), & ill (S)
IND 140 Graphic Communication■ I (F ,S)
254
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (S)
GCT 340 Estimating & Cost Analysis I (F)
IND 101 Drawing and Design (F,S)
IND 210 Technical Drawing Il (F,S)
IND 145 Photography (F,S)
GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S)
1TE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S)
Related Area Electives - 9 credits (Select three of the following)
GCT 235 Photographic Techniques (F)
IND 240 Graphic Communications Il (F,S)
GCT 350 Photolithographic Techniques I (F)
IND 278 Plastics Technology (S)
ITE 375 Principles of Production (F ,S)
PHY 135 Chemistry of Materials (S)
TED 120 Introduction to Production (F,S)
IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis(F,S)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
255
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY COURSES (EET)
EET 110. DC CIRCUITS. An introduction to the study of electrical circuits. Topic ■ include resistance, voltage,
current, meah analysis, and nodal analysis. Network theorems pertaining to de 10Urces are presented. Corequisite:
MAT 181. (4 en.)
EET 160. AC CIRCUITS. An introduction to the study of electrical circuits in the sinusoidal steady state. Topics
include capaciton, inducton, complex numben, ac mesh analy1i1, ac nodal analysis and network theorems
pertainina to ac 10Urce1. Prerequisite: EET 110. Corequisite: MAT 191. (4 en.)
EET 170. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS DESIGN. An introduction to the design of combination and sequential digital
logic circuits. Topics include number systems, code■, gates, latche■, decoden, multiplexen, flip-flops, counten,
AID and DIA concepts and memory circuits. Prerequisite: None. (3 en.)
EET 210. LINEAR ELECTRONICS I. A study of solid state diodes and transiston. Methods of biasing,
temperature stabilization, determining voltage gain and input resistance for small signal amplifien. Prerequisite:
EET 160. (4 en.)
EET 220. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC POWER. A study of the fundamentals of three-phase circuits,
transformen, de machines, polyphase ac machines, and single-phase ac machine■ . Prerequisite: EET 160. (4 en.)
EET 260. LINEAR ELECTRONICS D. An introduction to power amplifien, differential amplifien, field effect
operational amplifien, frequency effects, voltage re,ulation, and operational amplifier applications.
Prequi1ite1: EET 210, MAT 281. (4 en.)
transi■ton,
EET 270. INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN. Introduction to programming concepts include■
branching, stack operations, ■ubroutines and vector interrupts. Interfacing topics include decoding, driven, D/ A
and AID convenion. Prerequisite: EET 178. (3 en.)
EET 310. METHODS IN ENGINEERING ANALYSIS . Introduction to matrix theory, classical fint and second
order transient analy1i1, active filter and o■cillator de■ign, and Fourier analysis. Computer solutions to ■pecial
problems will be presented . Prerequisites: EET 260, MAT 281 . Corequisites: EET 320, MAT 282. (4 en.)
EET 320. NETWORK ANALYSIS . A calculus-based circuit theory course. Topics include the introduction to
Laplace transforms, and the utilization of Laplace transforms in the study of circuit analysis, transfer functions and
frequency re■ponse . Circuit analysis programming i■ used to compare computer solutions with analytic solutions.
Prerequisites: EET 260, MAT 281 Corequisitea: EET 310, MAT 282. (4 en.)
EET 330. ADV ANCED MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN. Applications of microprocesson and microcomputen to
instrumentation, control, and communications. Topics include machine and assembly language programming, 1/0
interfacina circuits, advanced AID and D/A convenions, handahaking, interrupts, serial and parallel
communications and programmable timer algorithms. A semester project is required. Prerequisite : EET 270. (3
en.)
EET 360. MICROPROCESSOR ENGINEERING . The analy1i1 and development of MCU stand-alone controllen.
The requirements for the design of industrial applications and the use of advanced software development tools and
PCs as development systems will be presented. Prerequisite: EET 330. (4 en.)
EET 370. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN I. The design of electronic instruments utilizing linear and digital
integrated circuits and opto--electronic devices. Topic■ will include dual slope digital voltmeten, electronic
256
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
thennometen, iaolation amplifien, frequency counten and function generaton. Numerical linearization method,
for non linear tranaducen are introduced. Prerequisite: EET 320. (4 en.)
E!IT 400. SENIOR PROJECT PROPOSAL. The student will submit a written proposal for a project. After
approval of the project the student will be auigned a faculty adviaor. Minimum requirementa for the proposal are
aubmiuion of a functional specification and a time schedule for completion. Prerequisite: Senior Statu ■.
Corequiaite: ENG 217. (1 er.)
EET 410. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS . Design of feedback control aystema and device, aa applied to
electrical machinery and tranaducen. Topic■ will include Bode plots, the root-locus method and nyquiat diagnma.
Prerequisite: EET 370. Corequisite: EET 420. (4 en.)
EET 420. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN D. A microproce110r-baaed imtrumentation deai,n coune utilizing
linear, digital and opto-electronic device,. Software aolutions to input/output problems will be considered along with
aoftware aolutions to nonlinear transducer data . Prerequisite: EET 370. Corequiaite: EET 410. (4 en.)
EET 430. RF COMMUNICATIONS . Communication systems principles including: AM/FM modulation, AM/FM
demodulation, transmitten, receivers, antennas, transmiuion lines, digital techniques and protocols. Prerequisite:
EET 320 . (4 en.)
EET 450. SENIOR PROJECT. Employs the design, construction and analysis of an electronic device or imtrument.
Depending on the complexity of the project, total construction may not be required . With the approval from the
adviaor, group projects may alao be involved. Prerequisite: EET 400. (3 en.)
EET 460. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING. Introduction to linear systems, digital filters and the Z-Tranafonn,
and the Falt Fourier Transform. Fundamental• of sampling concepts and the interfacing of analog and digital ■ignal
proceuin, will alao be covered. Prerequi■itea: EET 410, EET 360. (4 en.)
EET 475 . BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY. A study of the widely used medical devices with
emphaaia upon those types used for patient care in the hospital . The Physics and Engineering of various device,
will be presented and their relationship to human anatomy and physiology will be emphasized. Hospital
organization and the role of the Clinical Engineering department will be examined. Prerequisite: EET 420. (4 en.)
EET 476 . BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Upon acceptance to a hospital the
student will work with a Clinical Engineer and/or a Biomedical Equipment Technician inspecting, maintaining,
calibrating and modifying biomedical equipment. Prognma of instruction will vary from hospital to hospital but
the student will be exposed to medical devices from all special and critical care areas . Prerequisite: EET 475 . (4
en.)
GRAPIIlC COMMUNICATIONS COURSES (GCT)
Courses marked (LAB) will meet for two hours of lecture and four laboratory hours per
week.
GCT 155 . SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES I (LAB) . The first in a aeries of three counes that define and
analyze the proce11 of screen printing, this coune is an introduction to the various applications of screen printing.
Student-deaianed activities are supported by exercises that provide quality and control for the printing proceaa.
Empha1i1 of the coune is centered on establishing repeatability of the printing process by controlling variable,;
photognphically generated stencil systems; single and multiple color image generation, conversion, aaaembly and
transfer; sheet-fed manual and semi-automatic preaawork; flat aubatrate printing applications of simple and complex
close register line artwork. Prerequisite: IND 140. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
257
GCT 225. PRINCIPLES OF LAYOUT AND DESIGN. A presentation of design elements and principles used to
produce various layouts for printing production. The individual must strive to develop harmonious relationships
between these design elements and principles and various printing applications through practical activity
assignments. The fundamentals of producing mechanical layouts for newspaper, magazine, direct mail, poster,
display and point of purchase advertising are considered to serve the individual's career direction. The explanation
and use of computers for electronic/desktop publishing is emphasized for practical application. Production and
practical application assignments are to be performed in conjunction with theory explanations as out of class
activitie ■. (3 era.)
GCT 235. PHOTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES (LAB). A study of the concepts and techniques involved in producing
color prints and color transparencies from color negatives. Emphasis is placed on picture composition, developing
color negatives, contact printing, filter fundamentals, enlarging calibration procedures and photo finishing .
Microphotography and positive print techniques are also covered. Prerequisite: IND 145 . (3 era.)
GCT 240. ELECTRONIC DESKTOP PUBLISHING (LAB). This course provides an in-depth study into the
electronic desktop publishing systems and their concept of architecture, operation, networking, financing, and
design role in the publishing industry. It covers the basic aspects of graphic designing, creating page layouts,
scanning of text and continuous tone photographs, connectivity, telecommunications, image setting, and encryption
of data. Each student will experience hands-on activities with microcomputers utilizing high-end design, draw,
paint, scanning, and integrated layout software packages.
GCT 255. SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES II (LAB). A study of the techniques used for image transfer of
line and halftone copy on substrates commonly used by the screen printer. Each student has the opportunity to
identify, calibrate and print upon selected substrates.Prerequisite: GCT 155. (3 crs.)
GCT 320. ELECTRONIC COMPOSITION I (LAB). An introduction to the operation of phototypesetting systems.
A variety of jobs are set which represent the range of standard typesetting formats in use in the industry. Work
with direct and indirect systems is carried out in the form of projects. A variety of input devices are used,
including paper tape, magnetic disk, optical character recognition and visual display systems. In addition students
are required to gather data about the state of the art of phototypesetting equipment presently in use. Prerequisite:
IND 140. (3 era.)
GCT 321. ELECTRONIC COMPOSmON II (LAB) . Emphasis is placed on analysis of photocomposition systems
from an understanding of basic functions and their compatibility with other components or systems. Some handson experience is provided to alter the compatibility for better system function. Prerequisite: GCT 320. (3 era.)
GCT 340. ESTIMATING AND COST ANALYSIS I. A critical examination of the operations involved in the
production of graphic materials for the purpose of determining costs of the operations to be included. The
procedures necessary to assemble this information to produce estimates of typical printing matter are discussed.
The identification and study of cost centers as they relate to the hour costs and ultimately to the selling price are
examined. Students are required to prepare a number of cost estimates for the course. Prerequisite: GCT 255 or
GCT 350. (3 era.)
GCT 350. PHITTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES I (LAB). An in-depth study of photographic process as it
relates to line and halftone reproduction of graphic materials. Projects are produced which represent the various
combinations of line and halftone materials as they are used in the industrial setting. Besides the projects required
of each student, the theoretical aspects of the optical system are investigated, as well as the areas of sensitive
materials, light and related chemical reactions. Prerequisites: IND 140 and IND 240. (3 era.)
GCT 351. PHITTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES II (LAB). A continuation of GCT 350 which utilizes the film
elements produced in order to complete required projects for this course. This course treats the subjects of
stripping, platemaking and presswork. A critical study of imposition of various type of jobs, from simple
single-<:olor to more complex multi-<:olor jobs. The latest techniques of platemaking as well as information on types
of plates presently in use are discussed. Feeder-delivery setup, press packing methods, inking/dampening systems,
258
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
control devices, rollers, blankets and other related press activities are thoroughly discussed. Also, some folding
and binding techniques are included. Prerequisite: GCT 350. (3 era.)
GCT 352. PHOTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES ill (LAB) . Primary emphaaia ia placed on developing an
understanding of the nature of light, the nature of color, its relation to filters and printing inks used in the graphics
industry and the problems caused by color contamination in making color separations. A presentation of direct and
indirect methods of color separations as well as the various masking techniques is included. The use of various
control devices is discussed and employed in the laboratory. Special techniques required to atrip projects, make
the plates, and produce them on the press are also covered. Prerequisites: GCT 225, GCT 235, GCT 320 and GCT
351. (3 en.)
GCT 355. SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES ill (LAB). This course is directed study relevant to the
individual' s career objectives based on specific screen printing applications. The student formulates specifications,
estimates and a procedural rationale for self-determined screen printed product productions. These student
productions are organized as a portfolio consistent with the individual career objective that haa been developed
through previous screen printing coursework. Four-color process screen printing with ultraviolet curing theory and
practice is analyzed for application through student independent study coursework. Prerequisite: GCT 255. (3 en.)
GCT 375. FINISHING AND BINDING (LAB) . This course provides an introduction to the operations performed
in the finishing and binding of printed materials. Various operations such as cutting, trimming, folding, folding
schemes, impositioning methods, gathering, stitching, casemaking, gluing, laminating, perforating, hot stamping,
sewing, and drilling will be considered. Analysis of the various kinds of adhesives and adhesion materials available
and their most effective uses will be discussed . Additionally, this course is heavily supplemented with field trips
to selected printing firms for first hand observations. Prerequisite: IND 240. (3 era.)
GCT 440. ESTIMATING AND COST ANALYSIS II. This second in the series of two courses dedicated to
estimating and cost analysis for printing production processes analyzes current computerized programs for
estimating, scheduling, determining cash flow , and inventory control. The need for computer literacy in the area■
of estimating, time-reporting, comparative ratio analysis and related activities are emphasized. No previous
technical knowledge about computers is required. The course is based on the student's comprehension and ability
to perform the specific objectives stated in Estimating and Cost Analysis I. Students are required to prepare a
number of computer assisted cost estimates for the course. Prerequisite: GCT 340. (3 en.)
GCT 495. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS INTERNSHIP. Student interns are placed with an organiution which
most nearly approximates their goals for employment. If this is not possible, students are placed in some type of
graphics environment which is available at the time . The intent of the internship is to provide students with
practical work experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with real problems requiring real
solutions in a relatively short time frame . Advisor and Department chairperson approval is required before course
enrollment.
This is a repeatable course and may be taken as follows : Students may earn up to nine credits of internship in the
following curriculums: Graphic Communications - Photo Offset; Graphic Communications - Electro-Graphics;
Graphic Communications - Screen Printing. The student is permitted to take nine credits of internship. However,
they may enroll for twelve credits for a full semester load and use three credits for free elective. Prerequisite:
Upper Level Slanding . (1-12 crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
259
INDUSTRY COURSES (IND)
IND -classes meet for two lecture and four laboratory hours per week.
IND 101. DRAWING AND DESIGN. An introductory coune for thoae who wiah to become more altilled and
confident in their ability to draw and deaian. Deaian elements, principle, and practice, are studied. Creativity,
aelf-discovery, and aelf-expreuion are encouraged. The student ia required to develop a disciplined approach to
problem aolving and a aensitivity to craftamanahip in order to create aolutions to a wide variety of challenging
de1ian auiinments. (3 en.)
IND 110. TECHNICAL DRAWING I. A beginning coune with emphaaia on the graphic language, mechanical
drawina, lettering, geometric construction, sketching and ahape description, multi-view projection, aectional view,,
dimensioning, axonometric projection, and oblique projection. (3 en.)
IND 130. INTRODUCTORY CIRCUIT ANALYSIS. An introduction to DC and AC circuit theory and analyaia.
The theory include, electrical meaBUrement ■yatema, Ohm'• Law, Kirchoff's Law■, circuit theorems, and
component characterilltica. Laboratory work provide■ experience, with electrical components, schematic ■ , electrical
tool,, and basic electrical and electronic instrumentation. (3 en.)
IND 13S. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS. An introduction to the theory and application of logic gates, Boolean
algebra, combinational logic, ■equential logic, ■hift regiaten, counten, and arithmetic circuits. Laboratory
experiments provide experiences with digital integrated circuits, circuit behavior, and digital trouble■hooting
technique,. (3 en.)
IND 140. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS I. Thia coune offen the student an opportunity for experience, of
practical application in the five major printing proce11e1. It coven image de1ign, convenion, aaaembly, carrier
preparation, transfer and fini■hina technique, related to lithographic, screen, letterpreu, flexographic, and gravure
printing. Related areaa of studiea include duplication, ink chemistry, paper uae and aelection, and photography.
(3 en.)
IND 14S. PHOTOGRAPHY. Thia course provide■ the opportunity to learn the technique■ involved in
monochromatic lltill photography and introduces color photography. It coven the basic aspects of picture taking,
camera operation, film proceuing, enlarging, print proceuing, finishing procedures and selecting photographic
equipment and lllppliea. (3 en.)
IND 160. MATERIAL FABRICATING . A BUrvey course designed to acquaint students with the origin and
industrial/technological UICI of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Laboratory experiences will include safety, aa well
aa conatruction of metal producta using a variety of fabricating procesaea and techniques. (3 era.)
IND 16S. MACHINE PROCESSING I. An introduction to basic foundry (metalcaating) and machine metalworking
proceaaea. Include, aand moldmalting and gating, layout, tool geometry, lathe work, milling, shaping, drilling,
and bench work . (3 en.)
IND 180. INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS. The course i1 de■iined to provide a variety of activities in
automated manufacturing emphasizing the use of robotic equipment. Theoretical as well aa practical hands-on
laboratory applications in robotic components, types, 1yatema and controllen are studied. Robotic programming
include, teach pendant, off-line programming, BASIC language, and ROBOTALIC. Practical applications include
interfacing with other peripherals in a workcell setting. (3 en.)
IND 184. ENERGY AND POWER SYSTEMS. An application of the 1y1tema approach to the study of energy
1011rce1 and converten, power transmisaion, and control■. lnatruction will focu■ on energy a~ it i• applied to
260
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
propulaion ayatema, residential conservation, and induatrial uaca. Energy alternatives, 1y1tem efficiency and
conservation arc empha■izcd . (3 en.)
IND 186. HYDRAULIC FLUID POWER. Thia counc atudies basic hydnulic components and circuits. Topic,
to be included arc: hydnulic fluids , filtntion, power supply, actuaton, controls, conditionen, and monitoring
device ■ . Teaching and learning activities include lectures, class discussion and labontory activities. (3 en.)
IND 188. PNEUMATIC FLUID POWER. An introductory counc in the ■tudy of pneumatic fluid power
components and circuits that include• gas law,, comprc880n, air lines, air distribution, air-conditioning components,
control devices, circuit diagnma, circuit deaign and construction, and troubleshooting of comprcaacd air 1y1tems.
Theoretical concepts arc verified by corresponding pnctical labontory activities. (3 en.)
IND 210. TECHNICAL DRAWING II. Provides experiences in problem-aolving through the uac of technical
workioi dnwing■ . Special emphasis is placed on American National Standards dnwing pncticea, shop proce1ac1,
conventional representation, standardization of machine part.I and fastcnen, prcpantion oftncinga, the reproduction
of dnwinga, and aurface development. Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.)
IND 215 . COMPUTER-AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) I. Thia counc involve, the uac of computer aoftwarc and
hardware II applied to mechanical design and dnfting. Students learn to manipulate basic geometric entities (points,
lines, and area) to create 2-D and 3-D model,. Experiences dealing with dimensioning, level/layer 111rface1 and
planes arc alao explored . Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.)
IND 218 . DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY AND SURFACE DEVELOPMENT. Adding to the knowledge and
experience, gained in Technical Dnwing I, thia counc coven the theory of projection in detail with emphaais on
the manipulation of points, lines and planes in space. In addition, 111rface development and design in order to acrve
of value in future advances auch aa computer-aided dnfting, computer-aided instruction and computer-aided
manufacturing. Prerequisite: IND 110 (3 en.)
IND 230. INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR ELECTRONICS. An investigation into the fundamental concepts of
analog electronic, including semiconductor device theory, power 111pplies, amplifiers, opentional amplifiers,
oscillaton, plate linear integntcd circuita, and control circuits. Labontory experiments provide experience, with
electronic instrumentation, electronic components, and electronic circuit behavior. Prerequisite: IND 130. (3 en.)
IND 235 . INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSORS . A presentation of number systems and codes,
rnicroproce880r architecture, computer arithmetic, machine language prognmrning, and microprocesaor interfacing.
Emphasis ia placed on labontory experiments dealing with machine language prognm execution and
rnicroproce880r interfacing. Prerequisite: IND 135 (3 en .)
IND 240. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS D. The emphasis in this second counc in gnphic communications is
on the equipment, processes, material, and supplies utilized by the industry for phototypesetting,
photo-composition, darkroom techniques, image assembly, platemaking, and offset duplicator opentions. The
student ia provided with learning experiences to develop a comprehensive understanding of the scope, structure,
products and related procesa of the printing industry. Prerequisite: IND 140 (3 en.)
IND 250. CONSTRUCTION PROCESSES I. An introductory course in construction with an emphasis on
residential houaing . Instruction and experiences will include aspects of construction 111ch as planning and
estimating, personnel and time management, site prcpantion, footings and foundations, fnming , and roofing . The
safe and intelligent uac of tools and material ■ ia strcaacd. Prerequisite: TED 120. (3 en.)
IND 265 . MACHINE PROCESSES II. Current foundry (metalcasting) procesaca arc ltudied. Advanced machine
metalworking procesaca, including indexing and gear cutting arc emphasized . Students arc responsible for
determining the sequence of opentions nece ■sary to produce a product. Prerequisite: IND 165 . (3 en.)
IND 275 MATERIALS TESTING . A ■tudy of the theory and application of materials testing uacd to determine
the chemical, phy■ical , mechanical and dimensional properties of materials. Specifically, the structure and
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
261
propertie1 of metal■, polymen, ceramic, and compo1it.e material, are investigated. Provi1iona are made for
individual and clan development of test ■pecimena and their subaequent evaluation. Instruction ia provided in the
recording and interpretation of test data. (3 en.)
IND 278. PLASTICS TECHNOLOGY. Thi, i1 a survey coune de1igned to provide the student with an opportunity
to gain information about the industrial and technological u■e1 of plastic-like materials. Laboratory experience,
are required in which the student de1ign,, constructaand u ■e1 a variety of tool,, forms and mold 1. Depending upon
the activity and the time allotted, students will be encouraged to create well-deaigned products for penonal and/or
profe11ional u■e . (3 en.)
IND 282. SMALL GASOLINE ENGINES. An introduction to the theory, operation and major overhaul procedures
of ■mall 2 and 4 cycle gaaoline engine,. Engine componenta, diagnosis, testing, maintenance, diuuembly,
reauembly, and trouble ■hooting are streued in the coune to afford the participants the opportunity to develop the
experti■e in coune content 1kil11 and the background to repair amall gaaoline engine,. Laboratory work provides
for the opportunity to apply theoretical concepta in general practice,. (3 en.)
IND 284. FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTO MECHANICS. An introduction to automobile mechanic■ with theory
and practical application,; limited to basic preventive and tune-up procedures in the areas of carburetion, pollution
device, and control 1, complete engine tune-up, diagnostic 1kill1, u ■e of testing equipment, ignition circuita, charging
circuita, and cranking circuita. Counea are offered at General Moton Training Cent.er by approval. Prerequisite:
IND 184. (3 en.)
IND 310. TECHNICAL DRAWING m. An ext.enaion of Technical Drawing I and II with continued emphasis on
skill, technique, and the u■e of ANSI and ISO drafting standards. The course is developed around current industrial
drafting practices and include■ instruction in geometric tolerancing, surface texture, weldments, metrication, etc.
Prerequisite■ : IND 101, IND 110, and IND 210. (3 en.)
IND 315 . COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) II. Thia course is an ext.enaion of Computer Aided Drafting
(CAD) I and will include more complex problem■ and procedure, in the development of graphic aolutiona . The use
of ext.ended geometry will compri ■e an important part of the coune. Students will gain additional experiences on
PC baaed computer drafting aystem■ . Prerequisite: IND 215. (3 en.)
IND 318. AIRBRUSH TECHNIQUES. Preci ■e pictorial line representation as it relates to technical illustration ia
stres■ed . Mechanical and freehand techniques uaed in pictorial line drawing are explored in detail. Students gain
experience in the theory of light and ■hadow . Emphasia ia placed on exploring more advanced graphic media in
technical illustration. Ext.enaive experience is provided in airbrush rendering techniques. Prerequisite : IND 110
(3 en.)
IND 320. ARCHITECTURAL DRAFTING AND DESIGN. Experience ia provided in basic residential design.
The fundamental aequence1 in deaigning and drawing are atreaaed as the student completes the architectural
drawing• neceaury for the construction of a reaidence. Elements of the coune include architectural atyles, area
planning, structural detailing, pictorial rendering, building specification,, and cost analysis . Prerequisite: IND
110. (3 en.)
IND 330. INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICITY/ELECTRONICS. An inveatigation into the theory and application■ of
moton and motor controllen, thyriston, tranaducen, programmable controllen, microproce110r controllen,
■ervomechaniama, and Robotic, . Laboratory experience, include motor identification, motor diaas■embly and
repair, motor testing, control circuitry, and ■ervomechaniama. Prerequisite■: IND 130 and IND 230. (3 en.)
IND 332. COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS. The application of devices and circuits to electronic
communication,. The major topic, include modulation, demodulation, tranamission, data tranafer, optical
technique,, test equipment, and aystem analyaia. Prerequiait.ea: IND 230 and IND 235. (3 en.)
262
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
IND 335 . ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS. This coune deals with advanced concepts in machine Jan,uage
programming. It introduce■ the world of editora, auemblera, and debuggera . It also coven the advanced
architecture of modem microproceuora and their more sophisticated illllrllction sell and addreuUJi mode,. The
student will learn to develop hardware and software required to apply microproceuora to real world problema.
Prerequiaite: IND 235 . (3 era.)
IND 336. ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT. Thia coune provides a development
experience for electronic systema and/or products. The student will select a project subject to illllrllctor approval
and develop that project to the prototype lllage. The llUdent will also verify all performance specifications for their
project. Prerequisites: IND 235 and IND 230. (3 era.)
IND 355. WOOD TECHNOLOGY. A llUdy of woodworking providing illllrllction in furniture and case work.
The safe use and care of machines and hand tool, i1 lllreued. Emphasis i1 placed on project planning and design,
colt analy1i1, wood technology, material selection and product development. Students design and produce a project
involving operations on basic machine■. (3 era.)
IND 365 . SPECIAL MACHINE PROCESSING. A special coune designed to allow the llUdent to investigate
a specific area of interest in the metal machining field. Students interested in taking this coune will complete a
document identifying- the ■cope of their interest, specifying the activities that will be pursued throughout the
semester, and have it approved by the illllrllctor 1ix weeks before the beginning of the clau. The llUdent'•
background in the metal machining proceues will be broadened by completing the laboratory experience, outlined
in the approved proposal. Prerequisites : IND 165 and IND 265. (3 era.)
IND 384. ADV AN CED AUTO MECHANICS. An advanced study in auto mechanics that provides for both an
in-depth underlllanding of basic automotive principles and a broadening in ■cope of other areas of preventive and
tune-up procedures. Theoretical and practical activities in carburetion, ignition circuits, charging circuits, cranking
circuits, and the use of testing equipment applicable to the unit of llUdy. Counes are offered at General Moton
Training Center by approval. Prerequiaite: IND 284. (3 era.)
INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY COURSES (ITE)
Courses marked (LAB) have two hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per week.
ITE 101. INDUSTRIAL SAFETY. An introduction to the fundamentals of safety as well as aound
management-oriented practices related to the development of a safe work place. Legal requirements of OSHA and
worker's compensation laws are diacuued. Students will be able to identify cause of accidents, identify safety
hazards, and apply methods of accident prevention. (3 era.)
ITE 181. MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY I (LAB) . A study of the theory and application of materials and materials
testing used in a wide variety of industrial applications. Study includes the chemical, physical, mechanical and
dimensional properties of metallic materials including ceramics. Sufficient background in general chemistry is
included to provide a proper foundation . (3 era.)
ITE 182. MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY ll (LAB). A continuation of Materials Technology I with an emphasis
on non-metals including natural and man-made polymera, wood and paper and composite,. Additional study of
materials testing ia included with provisions made for individual and clau development of test specimens and their
subsequent evaluation. Instruction is provided in the recording and interpretation of test data. Prerequisite: ITE
181. (3 era.)
ITE 205 . INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY (LAB) . A study of the theory and application
of material, used in a wide variety of industrial applications. Study include• the chemical, physical, mechanical,
and dimensional properties of materials. Specifically, the structure and properties of metals, polymera, ceramics,
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
263
and composite materials are investigated. Provision, are made for the telling of materials to demon.atrate the
various concepts being presented in clau. (3 en.)
ITE 311. INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS. An introduction to techniques and procedure■ for developing and
applying the principle• of human facton and ergonomics to system deaign and the systematic analysis,
identification, and evaluation of human-machine systems. Current advances in practical biomechanics and
ergonomic■ in industry in combating musculoskeletal injury and illneu will be discuued. Prerequisite: ITE 101 .
(3 en.)
ITE 375 . PRINCIPLES OF PRODUCTION. An introduction to the methods used in analyzing the production flow
from raw material to the finiahed product. Topic■ covered include a lludy of the major manufacturing proceases,
material, handling, plant layout, operation, analysis, industrial engineering, inventory control and ahipping . An
overview of the role of production management as it relates to the various areas of industrial environment will be
presented. (3 en.)
ITE 385. INDUSTRIAL COST ESTIMATING . An introduction to the methods used to cost and budget a
production organization. Topics include ■ome accounting basics, cost accounting, the time value of money and cost
estimating as related to induatrial operations. (3 en.)
ITE 420. PRODUCTION ANALYSIS . A continuation of the principles of production with an emphasis on the
calculation, auociated with production management. Topics include linear programming, scheduling and project
management as with pert, simulation and inventory control. Use ia made of per■onal computen for the calculations
involved . Prerequisite: ITE 375 . (3 en .)
ITE 445. QUALITY CONTROL. An introduction to the method■ used in analyzing quality control. Topic ■ include
a lludy of the fundamental ■ of statiatica and probability, the constnJction and use of control and attribute charta,
the definition and use of acceptance criteria and the use of computen in modem quality control operations. An
overview of the role of quality control department of a manufacturing facility will be presented. (3 en.)
ITE 460. PRINCIPLES OF MANUFACTURING . An introduction to the methods used in manufacturing proceues.
Topics covered include a lludy of the manufacturing ability, fabricability, and marketability of manufactured
products. Problems encountered by production managen in changing raw materials into a consumable product are
discuued . The use of per■onal computen for the ■olution of manufacturing problems is included. Prerequisite :
ITE 375 and ITE 385 . (3 en.)
ITE 480. PROBLFMS IN INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY (LAB) . This is a multidiscipline course that combines
the variou■ elements in indu■trial technology, giving the student the opportunity to study problems typically
encountered by an industrial technologist. The exact content of the course will vary depending upon the
background and experience of the instructor but it ia intended to include problem ■olving and role playing in a wide
variety of industrial setting ■ . lnduatrial consultants will al■o be uaed to expose the student to modem industry .
Prerequiaite: Senior Standing. (3 en.)
ITE 495 . INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Student interns will be placed with an industrial
organization which moat nearly approximate■ their goals for employment. The intent of the internship ia to provide
lludents with practical work experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with practical problems
requiring real ■olution■ in a relative abort time frame. Advi ■or and Department Chairper■on approval i ■ required
before course enrollment. Prerequisite: Upper Level Standing . (1-6 en .)
264
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY COURSES (MTE)
Courses marked (LAB) have two hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per week.
MTE 236. NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAMMING I (LAB). An introduction to the procedures for manually
proplllDlllJi numerically controlled equipment. Studenta write programs followinB a machine format detail, u1ing
carteaian coordinate, for motion command and incorporating preparatory and miacellaneoua command, neceuary
to manufacture parts on a machining and turnilli center. (3 era.)
MTE 270. ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO SYSTEMS (LAB). Activities relevant to this coune provide for
the functional underatanding and application of principles of electrohydraulic servo control robot systems. Topic,
include the operation and adjustment of electrohydraulic servo systems controlling, position, velocity, acceleration,
preuure, force and torque on both linear and rotary applications. Other topics and activities include servo-valve
applications, selection, and characteristic, and the study of transducers. Prerequisite■: IND 135 or IND 186 . (3
era.)
MTE 280. ROBOTICS SYSTEMS I (LAB). Activities in this coune focua on the practical application and
programmilli of non-servo controlled robota. Propmming of the robot ia accompliahed through the use of
programmable electronic controllers (PEC) . The three aeneral areas of study include : robot operation and
proplllDlllJi, robot maintenance and repair, and robot application in applied problems. Servo type applications
will 1110 be contraated. Robot operation includes site preparation, electrical and power control,, fluid power,
velocity control, machine interlocb, controller and connections, emergency procedures, and ufety precautions.
Studies in maintenance and repair procedure include theory diagrams, preventive and dia,nostic checb, and
replacement procedures . Robot application involves applyinB non-servo robota and programmable controllers to
industrial situations. Prerequisite: IND 180. (3 era.)
MTE 281 . ROBOTICS SYSTEMS D (LAB). Studenta learn to use servo robota II part of a work:cell through
theoretical and practical hands-on activities. Topics will include components of servo robota, controller components,
confi,uration and operation, controller proarammilli, pro,ram input and output, dynamic performance of servo
robota, servo robot operation, and servo robot testing and troubleshooting. Prerequisites: IND 180, MTE 270,
MTE 280. (3 era.)
MTE 290. APPLICATIONS OF INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS SYSTEMS (LAB). Thia coune provides activities
in the planni!li, preparation, installation, and operation of automated activitiea in integrated work:cella. Topics
include application planning, feed devices, development trends, end effectors, computer interfacing, automatic
identification, and automation interfacin,. The use and programmilli of an artificial vision system is introduced
in thia coune. Prerequisites: IND 180, MTE 270, MTE 280, and MTE 281. (3 era.)
MTE 336 . NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAMMING D (LAB). The second of two counea in the manual
programming of numerically controlled machines. Concentration is placed on continuoua path machining of parts
using the linear interpretation capability of machines to cut chords of area to closely approximate curves. Circular
interpolation ia studied with the additional word addresses that are nece11Bry. Auignments provide experiences
in three axis linear interpolation programming and two axis circular interpolated progralllDlllJi. Prerequisite: MTE
236 . (3 era.)
m.
MTE 337. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (COMPACT
A study of the COMPACT computer languaae used to produce machine tape imtructions for manufacturilli parts.
Students learn to access and utilize a computer to produce part geometry and direct a machine tool to accompliah
a variety of metal machining operations. The graphics capability of BRAVOS aoftware will be explored.
Prerequisite: MTE 236. (3 era.)
MTE 338. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (API).
An
investigation of the APT machine tool language for programming numerical controlled machine tools. Students
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
265
write APT proarams and operate equipment with the produced tape, to manufacture milled and turned paru.
Prerequisite: MTE 236. (3 era.)
MTE 437. ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT
(COMPACT D) . An invellligation into the more aophiaticatcd proceuea of the COMPACT D machine tool
programming language. Paru are programmed and manufactured on a CNC milling machine and lathe u1ina the
COMPACT D language and the BRAVOS graphic aoftware. Prerequisite: MTE 337. (3 era.)
MTE 438 . ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT
(APT). The machining of parts using matrixe1, loops, pocketing, macros, and other advanced techniques. Theac
methods are applied to the operation of a CNC vertical milling machine and a CNC lathe. Prerequisite: MTE 338.
(3 era.)
MTE 495 . MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Student interns are placed with an industrial
organization which most nearly approximates their goals for employment. The intent of the internship is to provide
students with practical work: experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with practical problems
requiring real aolutiona in a relative short time frame . Adviaor and Department Chairperaon approval i, required
before courac enrollment. Thia is a repeatable courac and may be taken as follows: Students may take up to 14
credits. The extra credit may be used as a free elective or for a credit deficiency due to other program changes.
Prerequisite: Upper Level Standing. (1-14 era .)
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION COURSES (TED)
Courses marked (LAB) will meet for two hours of lecture and four laboratory hours per
week.
TED 110. INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION (LAB) . A broad overview of communication systems,
specifically, print, acoustic, light, audio-visual and electronic media as they relate to the realm of communicationa.
Students experience individualized and group laboratory activitiea in the combined areas of generating, aaacmbly,
processing, diueminating and assimilating of a communicative message. (3 era.)
TED 120. INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION (LAB). An introduction to production technology as it relates
to manufacturing and conatruction. Activities include manufacturing proceues, material testing, and a studentdirected manufacturing enterpriac. (3 era.)
TED 130. INTRODUCTION TO ENERGYfl'RANSPORTATION (LAB). An analysis of energy sources and
transportation systems, their operation, efficiencies, historical and future development, and social and environmental
impacts. Students design transportation systems and verify their safety, energy, and economic efficiency. (3 era.)
TED 280. TECHNOLOGY/EDUCATION/SOCIETY . A claBB for all Technology Education majors; to be taken
during the aophomore or junior year. Students study the development of general education in relationship to
technology as found in a pluralistic society. Readings and discuBBion will focus on the taxonomies and systems for
technology education, professional organizationa, developmental rates of youth, laboratory safety, special need
learners, teacher liability, and certification requirements. The technology education major is required to spend each
Friday making visitationa to industrial sites, urban schools and a regular teaching center. This class meets two
lecture houra per week: and all day Friday (to meet the requirements of the Early Field Experience Program) .
Prerequisites: TED 110, TED 120, TED 130 and 9 credits in IND couracs. (3 crs.)
TED 410 . TEACHING COMMUNICATION (LAB). Advanced studies in the areas of light, print, acoustic,
audiovisual and electronic systems aa they relate to communicationa. The student develops inatructional units,
laboratory applications, evaluation systems, design communicationa facility and prepare instructional materials for
266
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
uae in teaching communications technology K thru 12. Peer teaching is utilized to determine the content validity
of the developed inatructional unita . Prerequisites: TED 110 and TED 280. (3 en.)
TED 420. TEACHING PRODUCTION (LAB). A courae designed to provide technology education majon with
experiences relating to the teaching of production technology in the public schools. Cius participanta examine
methods of promoting the program, teaching special needs studcnta, design production facilities, and develop
instructional unita for uae in teaching manufacturing and construction on the primary and aecondary level. This
development includes the identification of problems, individual research, laboratory applications, and writing
inatructional materials. Computer applications such as CAD/CAM and a student-directed cnterpriae activity will
be included. Prerequisites: TED 120 and TED 280. (3 era.)
TED 430. TEACHING ENERGY/TRANSPORTATION (LAB). Studenta will draw on their technical slcills and
knowledge in the areas of transportation, energy, electronic ■, fluid power, and robotics to develop curriculum plans
and inatructional activities appropriate for public school teaching of transportation technology. In addition,
enhancing technical skill ■ and teaching techniques will be emphaaized along with the integration of computen,
mathematics, and science into transportation technology education. Prerequisitea: TED 130 and TED 280. (3 en.)
TED 461. STUDENT TEACHING - TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION. Student teaching is the culminating
experience of teacher education majors in the Technology Education curriculum. The student teacher i1 auigned
to and worb under the supervision of two different master teachers at two different field locations during the
aemester. The development and refinement of contemporary pedagogical skills constitute the primary learning
purpoae for each student teacher. Specific teacher-learning skill ■ which are developed are tenon planning, delivery
method ■, Ofianizational procedures, class control, laboratory management, aafcty practices, record keeping, and
educational measurement and evaluation. An integral component of the student teaching experience is a weekly
practicum. The practicum aerves as a means of coordinating activities and interchanging ideaa and experience• of
the student teachers. (12 era.)
INDEPENDENT STUDY COURSES
TED 310. STUDIES IN COMMUNICATION (1-3 era.)
TED 320. STUDIES IN PRODUCTION (l-3 era.)
TED 330. STUDIES IN TRANSPORTATION (1-3 en.)
'"TED 460. HONORS STUDY IN COMMUNICATION (1-3 en.)
'"TED 470. HONORS STUDY IN PRODUCTION (l-3 era.)
'"TED 480. HONORS STUDY IN TRANSPORTATION (1-3 era.)
Tbcae are independent studies in which the student works in an area of interest under the guidance of an inatructor
with similar interesta. The student prepares triplicate copies of a proposal which preaents the objective■ to be
achieved and a procedural outline, states special conditions and expected findings, and specifics how the activity
will be evaluated .
Studenla are entitled to a minimum of five houn of individual faculty time per credit.
instructor and department approval before the student registen in the courae.
Proposal ■
must receive
•Honors couraes are reaerved for studenta with a MB" grade or better quality point average in the Technology
Education curriculum specialty couraes taken.
DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SERVICES
267
DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SERVICES
William L. Beck, Dean of Library Services. Associate Professor Albert R. Pokol, Chair.
Professors Kade Kos, Albert F. Maruskin; Associate Professors Clyde Y. Kiang, Richard
M. Matovich, Lola E. Maxwell; Assistant Professors Marsha L. Nolf, Betty Shaw;
Instructor, Alice G. Dennison; Kathleen A. Joki, Systems Analyst.
A fuller description of the services and materials available in the library may be found
in the General Information section, towards the beginning of this catalog.
The members of this department are in charge of the Manderino Library. They also
supply, to students, faculty, and staff, such services as instruction in the use of the
VULCAT on-line catalog, the CD-ROM computerized indexes to periodicals, and other
library resources. They offer assistance in reference questions, interlibrary loans, and
advanced bibliographical searches in other databases. They offer instruction in the use of
the library for individual classes at both beginning and advanced levels, and they are
responsible for collection development and the processing of materials as they arrive at the
library.
268
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF MATIIEMATICS AND COMPUTER
SCIENCE
MATHEMATICS (MAT)
COMPUTER SCIENCE (CSC)
COMPUTER ASSISTED WORKSHOPS (CAW)
Professor Howard L. Hausher, chair. Associate Professor John A. Beyer, assistant chair.
Professors Michael R. Gross, Robert T. Little, Andrew J. Machusko, Lawrence D.
Romboski, Paul D. Williams; Associate Professors Robert M. Berry, William F. Blank,
Antonio J. Fernandes, John S. Gibson, Jr., Judith I. Hall, George D. Novak, Anthony S.
Pyulrowski, Donald R. Sapko, Elwyn M. Schmidt, John S. Skocik, Jr., Brian E. Weinrich;
Assistant Professors Jerry M. Blackmon, Anette M. DeNardo, Barbara Hess, Karla A.
Hoffman, Nancy A. Skocik
The Department of Mathematics and Computer Science offers several degree programs:
The Bachelor of Science degree in Applied Computer Science is designed to provide the
student with a strong computer science background supplemented with a substantial core of
courses in a related academic discipline.
The Bachelor of Science degree in Mathematics and Computer Science is a careful
blending of courses that offers the student both theory and applications in mathematics and
computer science.
The Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Management Technology: Management and
Computer Science Option emphasizes management and business courses along with computer
science courses. The program is designed to prepare the student for continued study at the
graduate level or for employment in business, industry, or government.
The Bachelor of Arts degree in Mathematics is a sufficiently flexible program that
permits the student to select courses that meet particular interests and needs. It allows for
both depth and breadth of study in mathematics as well as study in the natural sciences. It
is designed to provide the student with an excellent background for graduate studies in
mathematics and for employment opportunities in business, industry, or government.
The Bachelor of Science in Education degree is a program designed for the student who
wishes to pursue a career in secondary teaching of mathematics. It provides the prospective
teacher the opportunity to acquire the knowledge, attitudes, skills, and understanding
necessary to become an effective educator.
The Associate degree in Computer Science is a two-year program designed to provide
the student with career-oriented computer science technology background. Though its
emphasis is on training for job placement in the computer industry after a two-year
curriculum, the program is designed to allow for transfer into the Bachelor of Science
programs.
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
269
In addition to the degree programs, there is offered an 18-credit hour certificate
program in personal computer applications.
Provision is made in several of the programs to accommodate student internships. The
availability of these internships is dependent upon the needs of various governmental
agencies and private employers, and they are not a guaranteed part of the program. If
selected, the student may earn a salary as well as college credit and invaluable experience.
Faculty advisors work carefully with the student to select the courses best suited to the
student's interests and goals.
An open-door policy prevails in the Department of
Mathematics and Computer Science so that students may discuss problems freely with their
advisors or members of the department.
Student work-study assignments are available for those who desire and qualify for
employment. Students may assist in the Mathematics Department, the Computer Center,
the Computer Laboratory, or the Mathematics Laboratory. Hence, students learn while they
earn.
In order to encourage and recogni:re academic achievement, the Department of
Mathematics and Computer Science makes the following awards:
Computer Science Award: The computer science award is presented annually to the
graduating student of the Mathematics and Computer Science Department who has achieved
a high level of academic excellence in computer science courses.
Frederick E. Atkins Memorial Award: In honor of the contributions made by Frederick
E. Atkins to the Mathematics Department and to the many students he taught, an award
established in his name is presented to the graduating student of the Mathematics and
Computer Science Department who has achieved a high level of academic excellence in
Mathematics courses, in either the Mathematics and Computer Science program or the
Bachelor of Arts in Mathematics program.
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
270
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN APPLIED COMPUTER SCIENCE
This program is a careful blending of courses designed to provide the student sufficient
specificity to achieve a solid computer science background as well as sufficient flexibility
to allow for the development of an interest in another academic area. It is for students who
do not require the mathematics-oriented or business-oriented approach provided by the
department' s other programs.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: English Composition I & ll (ENG 101 & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing
(ENG 217); Oral Comrnunications-Management(COM 103); Basic Programming (CSC 105) or Computer Science
I (CSC 121); Technical Mathematica I (MAT 182); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Science■ ; 6 credits
in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Free Elective■ .
(B): Area ofCoaceotration: Stati■tic ■ (MAT 215); Discrete Mathematic ■ (MAT 272); Basic Calculus (MAT
273); Linear Algebra I (MAT 341); Micro■ and Application Software (CSC 101), Computer Science with C (CSC
223) ; Pascal Programming (CSC 123); Cobol I (CSC 218); Logic & Switching Theory (CSC 316); .A■aembler
Language (CSC 323); Information Structures (CSC 377); Computer Architecture (CSC 378); Operating Systems
(CSC 400); Data Comrnunications(CSC 405); Lisp Programming (CSC 410); Structure of Programming Languages
(CSC 455) ; Language Translation (CSC 460) . 9 credits of Computer Science Electives selected from the following :
Computer Science ll (CSC 221); Computer Operations (CSC 300); Operations Research (CSC 309); Cobol ll (CSC
318); Computer Graphics (CSC 324); Systems Analysis (CSC 375); Artificial Intelligence (CSC 420); Numerical
Analysis (CSC 424); Data Base Management Systems (CSC 456); Theory of Languages (CSC 475); Computer
Science Internship (CSC 419) . 20 credits of related electives must be taken in a single discipline selected by the
student and approved by the faculty advisor and the department chairperson (at least 14 credits must be 200 level
or higher) .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
The program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree in Mathematics and Computer
Science is a careful blending of courses which offers students the theory and application of
problems in mathematics and computer science. A demanding but versatile program, it
permits students with a deficiency in mathematics to take introductory courses to provide
them sufficient background to effectively take courses in their area of concentration.
Although the introductory courses do not count in the area of concentration, they do count
as free electives in the program.
· This program is designed to prepare the student for continued study at the graduate level
~r for employment in business, industry, and government in computer operations, computer
programming, systems analysis, or computer equipment analysis, or as a computer specialist
in research, analysis, information storage and retrieval, or computer sales.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: English Composition I & ll (ENG 101 & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing
(ENG 217); Formal Logic I (PHI 211); Mathematic ■ of Finance ll (MAT 271); Basic Programming Language (CSC
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
271
l0S) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural
Science,; 12 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Coacentration: Calculu■ I, Il, m & IV (MAT 281, 282, 381, 382); Diacrete Mathematica (MAT
272); Abltract Algebn I (MAT 3Sl); Statillical Analy1i1 I (MAT 461); Linear Alaebn I (MAT 341); Differential
Equations (MAT 406); Computer Science with Paacal (CSC 123); Computer Science with C (CSC 223): Auembler
Language (CSC 323); Coboll (CSC 218); Information Structure, (CSC 377); Structure of Pro,nmming Languages
(CSC 4SS); Numerical Analysis (CSC 424); LoJic and Switchin, Theory (CSC 316); Computer Architecture (CSC
378); Theory of Languages (CSC 47S); 6 credits from Mathematica Counea; Linear Alaebn Il (MAT 441);
Abltract Algebn Il (MAT 4Sl); Statillical Analy1i1 Il (MAT 462); Honon (MAT 469); Advanced Calculua I &
Il (MAT 481 & 482); Topology (MAT 490); Seminar in Mathematic, (MAT 49S). 17 credits from Computer
Science Coune1: Computer Science Il (CSC 221); Computer Opentions (CSC 300); Survey ofOpentions Research
(CSC 309); Cobol Il (CSC 318); ComputerGnphica (CSC 324); Systems Analysis (CSC 37S); Openting Systems
(CSC 400); Data Communications (CSC 40S); Artificial lnlelliaence (CSC 420); Lisp Prognmming (CSC 410);
Data Base Manaaement (CSC 4S6); Languaae Tnnalation (CSC 460); lnlernahip (maximum 12 en. allowed) (CSC
419).
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MATHEMATICS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Compoaition 1-Il (ENG 101, I 02); 12 credits of Humanitie1; 12 credits of Natunl
12 credits of Social Science■; 18 credits of free elective,.
Science■;
(B) Area of Coacentration: Calculus I, Il, m, & IV (MAT 281, 282, 381, & 382); Geometry (MAT 203);
Abltract Alaebn I (MAT 3Sl); Linear AIJebn I (MAT 341); Statillical Analysi1 I {MAT 461); Differential
Equations (MAT 406); Advanced Calculus I (MAT 481) and Il (MAT 482); Topoloay (MAT 490); 12 credits in
Physics and/or Chemistry; 20 credits in Natunl Science Elective,.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN MATHEMATICS FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: lS credits in Humanitie1, iocludin, Composition I - Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits
in Natunl Science■; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Onl Communication
(COM 101); Genenl P1ychofogy (PSY 100); 9 credits of free elective,.
(B) Profes.,ional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teltl
and Meaaurementa in Secondary School, (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 46S);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teachin, in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainatreaming Exceptional
Child (EDU 340); Teaching of Mathematica in Secondary School, (EDS 460) or Modem Method• (EDS 4SS);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461).
(C) Profes.,ional SpeciaJization: Required: Calculus I, Il, m, (MAT 281, 282, 381); Diacrete Mathematics
(MAT 272); Geometry (MAT 203); Abltract Alaebn I (MAT 3Sl); Statistical Analy1i1 I (MAT 461); Linear
Algebn I (MAT 341); Hi1tory of Mathematica (MAT 304); Basic Pro,nmming Language (CSC l0S) or
Introduction to Computer Science with Paacal (CSC 123).
272
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
Reltricted Eective,: Choose one from Group I and one from Group Il.
Group I: Calculua IV (MAT 382); Differential Equationa (MAT 406); Abstract Algebra Il (MAT 451); Statistical
Analy1i1 Il (MAT 462); Linear Algebra Il (MAT 441); Honon Coune in Mathematic, (MAT 469); Theory of
Equationa (MAT 305); Seminar in Mathematic, (MAT 495) .
Group Il: Basic Program Language (CSC 105); Introduction to Computer Science with Pucal (CSC 123);
Introduction to Computer Science with C (CSC 223); Aaaembler Language (CSC 323); Information Structure, (CSC
377); Syatema Analy1i1 (CSC 375).
Students must also achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to acquire
Pennsylvania certification.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INDUSI'IUAL MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY:
MANAGEMENT AND COMPUTER SCIENCE OPfION
Curriculum:
(A) GeDen1 Education: English Compo■ition I (ENG 101); Busineu Writing I (ENG 211); Scientific and
Technical Writing (ENG 217); Technical Mathematic, I (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181); Mathematica
of Finance I (MAT 171); Ba1ic Calculus (MAT 273); 6 credit in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits
in Natural Science,; 12 credits of free elective■.
(B) Area of Coacemtratioa: Mathematic ■ of Finance Il (MAT 271); Statistics (MAT 215) or Bu1ine11
Statistic, (MAT 22.5); Discrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Oral Communication Management (COM 103); General
Psychology (PSY 100); Indultrial P■ychology (PSY 209); Introduction to MicroproceB10nand Application Software
(CSC 101); Baaic Prognmmina Language (CSC 105) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); Computer Science with
Pascal (CSC 123); Computer Science with C (CSC 223); Cobol I & Il (CSC 218 & 318); Information Structure,
(CSC 377); Data Baae Management (CSC 456); Syatema Analy1i1 (CSC 375); Survey of Operationa Research (CSC
309); 5 credits of 200 level or above computer science elective,. Accountina I & Il (ACC 201 & 202); Managerial
Accounting (ACC 321) or Coat Accountina (ACC 331); Introductory Microeconomic• (ECO 201); Introductory
Macroeconomic, (ECO 202); Principle, of Management (MOT 201); Fmancial Management (FIN 301); Labor
Relationa (MOT 362); 3 credits of 300 level or above in Accountina, Busineu, Economic1, Management,
Marketina or Fmance.
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE
IN COMPUTER SCIENCE TECHNOLOGY
This two:year associate degree program provides students with training in computer
science technology. This high-quality program is career-oriented. All credits earned in this
program are directly transferable to the four-year Bachelor's degree in Industrial
Management Technology-Management and Computer Science Option.
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
273
Curricululll:
(A) General Educatioa: English Compoaitionl (ENG IOI); Busineaa Writing I (ENG 211); Colle1e Algebra
(MAT 181) or Technical Mathematic ■ I (MAT 182); Baaic Programmin, LallJU&ge (CSC I OS) or Computer Science
I (CSC 121); Science, Technoloiy, and Society (PHI 247); 3 credit.sin Humanities; 3 credit.sin Social Sciences;
3 credit.s in Natural Science,; 3 credit.s in Free Elective,.
(B) Area ofConcentratioa: Mathematica of Finance I (MAT 171); Statistics (MAT 215) or Buaine11Stati1tic1
(MAT 225); Discrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Introduction to Microproce880r■ and Applications Software (CSC
101); Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Cobol I (CSC 218); Computer Operations (CSC 300); Systems
Analyaia (CSC 375); Information Structures (CSC 377); 12 credita Mathematica and/or Computer Science elective ■
200 level or above .
CERTIFICATE IN PERSONAL COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
This eighteen-credit certificate program is designed for both undergraduates interested
in concentrating their elective course work in the area of micro-computer applications and
non-degree seeking students interested in learning how to use microcomputers in their daily
lives. The course requirements are divided into three areas: Programming (6 credits),
Application Software (9 credits), and Field Experience (3 credits). The Systems Analysis
course may be substituted for the field experience.
Curriculum:
Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Introduction to Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Micro,
and Application Software (CSC 101); PC Applications Programming (CAW 105); Word Proceaaing (ENG 151);
Lotua 1-2-3 (CAW 102); Advanced Lotus Workshop (CAW 103); Field Experience in Computer Science (CSC 199)
or Systems Analy1i1 (CSC 375) .
MATHEMATICS COURSES (MAT)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
+ MAT 098. BASIC MATHEMATICS . A review of the fundamentals of arithmetic computations to include: whole
number, fractions and decimals, percent.B, ratio and proportion. Basic geometric measures and formulas. Some
elementary alaebra . (3 era.) 1his course does IIOI eam credit toward graduation. Thia course may not be
uaed aa a Natural Science elective.
+MAT 099. INTRODUCTORY ALGEBRA. Designed to aid the student in the transition from arithmetic to
algebra. It may be a tenninal course for 10me or may be a preparation for a traditional College Algebra course
and topic ■ will include: Operations on integen and polynomials, factoring and linear equations. (3 era.) Thia
course may not be uaed aa a Natural Science elective. This course does IIOI eam credit toward graduation.
+MAT 100. FUNDAMENTALS OF MATHEMATICS. Seta and their language; numeration aystems; properties
of natural numben, whole numben, integers, rational and real numbers; elementary number theory; modular
arithmetic; mathematical systems; logic. No prerequisite■ . (3 era.)
274
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
MAT 155. METRIC WORKSHOP. For one who wiahe1 to improve one'• uac of the metric 1yatem in all aspects
of daily life. Activities applicable to tcachen, parents, and pcnona in bu1incu and indultry. Teaching 1trategie1,
game■, and 1011rces of materials for tcachen. (1 er.)
+MAT 161. DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL TECHNIQUES IN MATHF.MATICS . For Elementary Education
majon. Various approaches and meth?(i• designed to engage the student in a critical analy1i1 of 1trength1 and
weakncaac1 in approaches to teaching mathematics. Material■ and game■ to remedy deficiencies of the child .
Teaching technique• such as flexible grouping pattern, and individual inatJUction. Prerequisite: Two yean of high
achoo! mathematic,. (3 en.)
MAT 163. INTUITIVE GEOMETRY. To develop basic concepts of geometry: congruence, similarity, measure,
symmetry, etc. Lecture,, group and individual projects. Geometry for the elementary gndes i1 emphasized . (3
en.)
+ MAT 171 . MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE I. Simple intcreat, compound intereat, value of money relative to
time and intcreat, diacounting, accumulation, mortgage points, annuitie1, amortization achedule1, and equation■ of
value. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 182 (3 en.)
+MAT 181. COLLEGE ALGEBRA. Fundamental operation■; factoring and fraction■, exponents and radicals;
and gnpha; equation■ and inequalities; ayatem■ of equation■. Prerequisite: MAT 099 or high achoo!
algebra. (3 en.)
function■
+MAT 182. TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS I. An introduction to algebraic topic ■ usually covered in a highachool algebra coune, 111ch a ■ function■ , graphs, exponents and radicals, and linear and quadratic equations.
Emphasis on technology application■ . (3 en.)
+MAT 191. COLLEGE TRIGONOMETRY. Polar coordinates; identities; solving trigonometric equationa;
functiona and invene functiona, complex numben and logarithm■. Prerequiaite: The student ahould have an
adequate background in algebra, and some plane geometry ia de1inble . (3 en.)
+MAT 192. TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS Il. An emphaaia on trigonometry: trigonometric functiona, vccton,
graph• of trigonometric functiona, exponents and logarithm■, and additional topics in trigonometry. Empha1i1 on
technology applicationa. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.)
+ MAT 199. PRE-CALCULUS . Fundamental notion■ (functiona, lines, acgments, slopea, angle between
and equation■), conic ■, algebnic and tranacendental curve,. (3 en.)
line■ ,
graph■
MAT 203. GEOMETRY. Analysis of axiomatic system■ , axiomatic development of elementary Euclidean
geometry and non-Euclidean geometry. Prerequisites: MAT 181 and MAT 191, or three yean of high-achoo!
mathematics. (3 en.)
MAT 215 . STATISTICS. For non-mathematics majon; not counted toward a mathematics major. Frequency
diatribution, percentile■, mea111rea of central tendency and variability, nonnal diatribution and curve, populations,
samples, sampling diatribution of means, sampling diatribution of proportion, null and alternative hypotheac1, type
I and type Il erron, teats of mean■, confidence intervala, dcciaion procedure,, correlation, chi-square, 1imple
analysis of variance and design of experimenta. Prerequisite: MAT 181. (3 en.)
MAT 225. BUSINESS STATISTICS. Statistical technique, relevant to buainc11 applicationa. Primary emphaais
i1 placed upon identification of appropriate atatistical method, to uac, proper interpretation and appropriate
preacntation of reaulta. Topics include descriptive atatiatica, probability concepta, the nonnal probability
diatribution, estimation techniques, teata of hypotheac1, 1imple and multiple linear regre11ion. Statistical software
i1 uacd to implement many of the statistical method■ . Prerequiaite: MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
275
MAT 271 . MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE II. Gencnliud aMuitie■; bond ■, amortization of premium, and
accumulation of diacount; c11h flows; depreciation achedules; comparison of depreciation; net ca■h flow; nte of
return; capitaliud coll and aMual return; life aMuitie■; life inaunnce. Prerequisite: MAT 171 (3 en.)
MAT 272. DISCRETE MATHEMATICS. An introduction to theories and methods of mathematic athat are relative
to computer acience. topic• include: logic, sell, elementary number theory, mathematical induction, combinatorics,
relations, dignpha, Boolean matrice1, t.rcca. (3 en.)
MAT 273 . BASIC CALCULUS . The techniques of differentiation and integntion are covered without the theory
oflimita and continuity. Applicationa in buaineaaand biological acience are conaidered . Prerequisite■ : MAT 181
or MAT 182, MAT 191 or MAT 192. (3 en.)
.MAT 281. CALCULUS I. A revie~ of absolute value and inequalities; an introduction to analytic geometry;
functions, limits, and continuity; the derivative; applications of the derivative. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT
199 or four yean of high-achoo! mathematics. (3 en.)
MAT 282. CALCULUS II. The integnl; fundamental theorem of integnl calculus; applications of the integnl;
invenc functiona; logarithmic functiona; exponential functiona; trigonometric functiona; hyperbolic functiona;
techniques of integntion. Prerequisite: MAT 281. (3 en.)
MAT 300. MATHEMATICAL INSIGHTS . A gndual introduction to the basic concepll of logic, set theory, and
abatnct algebn. The axiomatic structure i1 emphasiud. (3 en.)
MAT 304. HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS . Thia counc ia a hiatorical ■ummary of the development of
mathematic ■ . Empha■is will be relating mathematic ■ to the development of world culture and ita relation■hip with
all aspects of our culture. The lives and diacoveries of many mathematiciana are discu1sed. Methods of
incorponting the hillory of mathematic, into high school mathematics councs are a major focu1 of the counc.
Prerequisite ■ : MAT 203 and MAT 282. (3 en.) S
MAT 305 . THEORY OF EQUATIONS . Complex numben; theorems involving polynomial1 in one variable; cubic
and biquadratic equations; sepantion of roots, Stunn' a theorem, and approximate evaluation of roots. Prerequisite:
Junior or Senior 11tandi111, (3 en.) S
MAT 341. LINEAR ALGEBRA I. Systems of linear equations and matrices; detenninanll; vecton in 2-space and
3-space; vector spaces; linear tnnsfonnations (3 en.)
MAT 351. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA I. Fundamental concepll of logic; natunl numbers, well-ordering property,
induction, elementary concepll of number theory;_.iJ:8UPS;-cosell, Lagrange's theorem, normal sub-groups, factor
groups; homomorphism, i■omorphism, and related topic■ inclu~
Cayley'a theorem, natural hemomorphism, and
the three fundamental homomorphism theorems. (3 en.)
MAT 381. CALCULUS m. Indeterminate fonna and improper intc ls, polar coordinates and conic sections,
infinite aerie■ , and the theory of infinite aerie■ . Prerequisite: MAT 28 . en.)
MAT 382 . CALCULUS IV. Vectors in the plane; vectors in three space; theory or curve ■ and surfaces; the
differential calculua and the integnl calculu■ of function■ of several variable■ . Prerequisite: MAT 381. (3 en.)
MAT 406 . DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS . Ordinary differential equations and their ■olutions . The exilllence and
uniquencaa of ■olutions . Various types of differential equationa and the techniques for obtaining their ■olution . Some
basic applications, including numerical techniques. Computer ■olution techniques are discus■ed . Prerequisite: MAT
282 and MAT 381. (3 en.)
276
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
MAT 441. LINEAR ALGEBRA Il. Extend• the concepta learned in Linear Algebra I. The content i1 not fixed ,
but usually includes the following topics: linear transfonnations, change-of-baae ■ matricea, repreaentation matrice1;
inner-product spaces, eigenvalues and eigenvecton, diagonalization. Prerequi1ite: MAT 341 (3 en.) F
MAT 451. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA Il. Study of ring■, ideals, quotient ringa, inte,ral domaina, and fields ; ring
homomorphisnu; polynomial rings, diviaion algorithnu, factorization of polynomial,, unique factorization,
extensions, fundamental theorem; finite field■. Prerequi1ite: MAT 35 I . (3 en.)
MAT 461. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS I. Baaic concepta of both diacrete and continuoua probability theory. The
study of random variable,, probability diatributions, mathematical expectation and a number of 1ignificant
probability models. Introduction to atatiatical eatimation and hypotheaia teating . Prerequiaitea: MAT 282 (3 en.)
MAT 462. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS Il. Statiatical theory and application of atatiatical eatimation technique■ and
hypothesis teating methods. Simple linear and multiple linear regreaaion models. Statiatical techniques are
implemented with microcomputer atatiatical aoftware . Prerequisite■: MAT 461 (3 en.) S
MAT 469. HONORS COURSE IN MATHEMATICS. Mathematica majon mull, aa a prerequisite for this courae,
have completed 64 credita with a QPA of 3 .25 in all work and the permiaaion of the department chair or nonrepeatable. (3 en.)
MAT 481. ADVANCED CALCULUS I. Logic and technique, of proof; relation■ , function■, cardinality, and
naive aet theory; development of real numben from natural numben through topology of the line; convergence and
related idea, dealing with function■ (sequence, and aerie■) including continuity.
MAT 482. ADVANCED CALCULUS Il. Further development of the limit concept pertaining to functions
including differentiation and integration along with appropriate theorenu and propertie ■; continuation of
development of sequences and aeries including functions . Prerequi■ite : MAT 481. (3 en.)
MAT 490. TOPOLOGY. Set theory as applied to topological spaces including the real line; metric spaces.
Prerequisite: MAT 351 or MAT 481. (3 en.)
MAT 490. SEMINAR IN MATHEMATICS . Topic, in thi■ courae are choaenjointly by the inatructor and the
student or atudenta involved. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor and chairman of department. Repeatable for
a maximum of 3 credita. (1 to 3 en.)
COMPUTER SCIENCE COURSES (CSC)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +).
+CSC 101. INTRODUCTION TO MICROCOMPUTER AND APPLICATION SOFIWARE. An introductory
study of the IBM-PC microcomputer, ita operating system, and its moat popular application■. Major topics:
Computer hardware, MS-DOS, word processing, spread aheeta, graphic■, data baaea. (3 en.)
+CSC 105 . BASIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE. The nature and atructure of computen, the history and
development of computen, flow charting and elementa of the BASIC language involved in reading and printing,
transfer atatementa, looping, subroutines, conversational programming, etc . The computer language taught i■
BASIC. (3 en.)
+CSC 121. COMPUTER SCIENCE. Thia courae ia an introduction to computer acience using a recent venion
of the FORTRAN programming language. The concept of structured programming, input and output technique■,
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
277
exprcuion evaluation, the uaignment lllatement, decision lllatementa, looping techniques, and arrays arc among the
topic• covered in thia coune. Prcrequiaite: MAT 181. (3 en.)
CSC 123. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE wrrH PASCAL. Thia coune introduce, the ltudent to
computen, algorithma, and pro,rama. Empha1i1 ia on efficient pro,nm deai,n using llnlcturcd pro,nmming
technique,. Students arc required to run PASCAL programa on the Univenity's computer ayatem and/or on
penonal computen. (3 en.)
CSC 199. FIELD EXPERIENCE IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Thia coune ia designed for the Auociate Degree
in Computer Science prognm. It affords •handa-on" job-related experience in computer acience. Availability of
this coune ia dependent upon finding a hoat organization. Not repeatable. (3 en.)
CSC 218. COBOL I. Introductory concepts of data proceuing through the buic components of COBOL
prognmming. Includes structured programming, input/output computational, conditionals, and table handling
facilities. Prerequisite : An introductory coune in computer acience is recommended . (3 en.)
CSC 221. COMPUTER SCIENCE Il. Thia coune involves advanced pro,nmming technique, using the moat
recent venion of the FORTRAN programming language. Among the topic• covered in this coune arc advanced
array technique■ , character manipulation, subroutine, and function subpro,nma, the internal rcprcaentation of
character and numeric value,, and file proceuing. Prcrequiaite: CSC 121. (3 en.)
CSC 223. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE wrrH C. Thi ■ coune introduce• the student to the C
environment. Emph11i1 is on efficient software development using llnlctured programming techniques. Students
arc required to run C programa on the Univenity' s computer system and/or on personal computen. Prerequisite:
CSC 123 or equivalent. (3 en.)
CSC 256. COMPUTER-AIDED INSTRUCTION (CAI). The coune is taught on a lecture-laboratory baais.
Students arc expected to be able to uae the Math and Computer Science department's personal computers and should
be familiar with at least one converutional computer language, preferably BASIC. In the laboratory seaaion,
students arc expoaed to various types of CAI prognmming materials and instructed in the development of their
own CAI •pack.age" using appropriate software. Prerequisite: CSC 105 or CSC 121 or CSC 123. (3 en.) F
CSC 300. COMPUTER. OPERATIONS . Introduction to the hardware of the computer and the usage and operation
of the Central Proceuing Unit and its peripheral equipment. Prerequisites: CSC 221 or CSC 123 . (3 en.)
CSC 309 . SURVEY OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH. Lecture and laboratory aessiona utilizing the computer in
the performance of quantitative methods of decision-making. Survey of prcaent operations rcaearch tools available
to the administrator and manager is an integral part of the coune. Prerequisites: Junior or Senior It.anding, MAT
215 or MAT 225, along with MAT 341 arc desirable. (3 en.)
'.
CSC 316 . LOGIC AND SWITCHING THEORY OF THE COMPUTER. Thia coune is designed to provide an
in-depth 1tudy of Boolean algebra and its application to switching and gating networks . Prerequisites: CSC 105
or CSC 121 or CSC 123 or MAT 272. Recommended couraes arc MAT 273 or MAT 281 and CSC 323 . (3 en.)
CSC 318. COBOL Il. A continuation of COBOL I emphaaizing aequential and indexed files, disk: storage, table
handling, subpro,nma, library copy facilities, interactive proceuing, sorting, character manipulation and
debugging. Top-down deai,n and principle ■ of structured programming permeate the courae. File editing, file
updating and file maintenance programs arc covered in detail. Prerequisite: CSC 218 (3 en.)
CSC 323. ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING . Computer organization, rcprcaentation of numbers and
characters, instruction codes, machine language, macros, and subroutines. Prerequisite: CSC 123 or CSC 221 (3
en.)
278
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 'AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
CSC 324. COMPUTER GRAPHICS. Lecture and labontory aeaaiona utilizing the computer via inter-active
gnphic1 terminal,, and study of the theory and hardware of gnphica device■. Development and utilization of
gnphic1 10ftware i1 the major goal of thi1 coune. Prerequisites: CSC 123 or CSC 221 . (3 en.)
CSC 375. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS . An introduction to the baaic conccpta and tool• of 1yatema analy1i1 within the
context of real life problem situationa. Prerequi1ite: CSC 101 and CSC 123 or permiaaion of imtnactor. (3 en.)
s
CSC 377. INFORMATION STRUCTURES. Data llructures, conccpta and algorithm■ uaed in 10lution of nonnumerical problem■. Topics include atacb, queue■, linked liata and binary tree■, 10rting and ■earching method■,
and 10me analy1i1 of algorithm■ . Prerequi1ite1: MAT 272 and CSC 123. (3 en.)
CSC 378. COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE. Centnl proceaaor organization, imtnaction formata, addreaaing
schemes, hienrchiea of atonge, executive, and priority proceuing, 11 well as input and output. Prerequi1ite: CSC
123 or CSC 221 and CSC 316 and CSC 323. (3 en.) F
CSC 400. OPERATING SYSTEMS. An introduction to the function, purpose, chancteristics, and design objectives
of computer operating syatema. Prerequisites: CSC 323 and CSC 377. (3 en.) F
CSC 405. DATA COMMUNICATIONS . A study of the theory, implementation procedure■, and problem■
a110Ciatcd with data communicationa. Prerequi1ite: CSC 378, MAT 272, CSC 377 and MAT 341. (3 en.) S
CSC 410. LISP PROGRAMMING. An introduction to LISP (List Proceuing) 11 a vehicle for encoding
intelligence-exhibiting procesaea. Topic ■ include a ■urvey of lambda calculus and recursive function theory.
Prerequi1ite1: CSC 377 (3 en.) F
CSC 419. MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE INTERNSHIP. Focuae1 on job related experience in
Computer Science and Mathematic,. Opportunitiea may be available to studenta off and on campu1. (l-15 en.)
CSC 420. ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE. To ■urvey the 10ftware pacbgea needed for artificial intelligence and
to uae theae II tool, in a representative sample of Al topics . Prerequisites: CSC 377 and CSC 410. (3 en.) S
CSC 424. NUMERICAL ANALYSIS . Round-off errors and computer arithmetic; numerical instability; error
analy1i1 and estimation; cubic spline interpolation; condition number of a matrix; Gauuian elimination and pivoting
atntegiea for linear system■; numerical integntion and 10lution of differential equation,. Prerequisite,: CSC 123
or CSC 221 and MAT 382. (3 en.) F
CSC 455. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES . The power and limitationa of algebraic language■ ,
string manipulation languagesand intenctive languagenre studied together with compiler llructure and technique, .
Pre!CQuiaite: CSC 223. (3 en.) F
CSC 456. DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS. Design, implementation and application of data base
management 1yatems. Prerequisite: CSC 218. (3 en.)
CSC 460. LANGUAGE TRANSLATION. Theory and design of asaemblen, interpreters, and compilers for digital
computers. Topics include analysis of 10Urce language, genention of efficient-object code, and optimization
techniques. Prerequisites: CSC 323 and CSC 377 . (3 en.) S
CSC 475. THEORY OF LANGUAGES. An introduction to abatnct machine theory, combinatorial 1yatems,
computable functions, and formal linguistics. Topics include tinite-atate machines, regular aeta, Turing machines,
Chomsky bienrchy gnmman and language,. Empb11i1 is on ■urveying baaic topics and developing an intuitive
understanding in the theory of languages. Prerequisite,: CSC 377, MAT 272 or MAT 351. (3 en.) S
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
279
CSC 485. SPECIAL TOPICS IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Individual study or research on topic ■ and materials
not ordinarily covered by other courses. Repeatable for a maximum of three credits. Prcrequi1ite: Pennission of
illBlructor. (3 en.)
CSC 496. SEMINAR IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Topics to be chosen jointly by the instructor and the student
or students involved. Prerequisite: Approval of instructor. (I to 3 en.)
COMPUTER ASSISTED WORKSHOPS (CAW)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
CAW 102. LOTUS WORKSHOP. An introductory study of the LOTUS 1-2-3 Worksheet Program. Worksheet
entries and LOTUS 1-2-3 commands and graphs. (1 er.)
CAW 103. ADV ANCED LOTUS WORKSHOP. A study of the LOTUS 1-2-3 macro command language, data base
commands, and worksheet consolidation. Prerequisite: CAW 102. (I er.)
CAW 105. PC APPLICATIONS PROGRAMMING WORKSHOP. An introductory study of the personal computer
operatina 1y■tcm includina batch files, confi,uration files and communicatiom. (3 en.) S
280
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
(ARMY ROTC)
Major Rand C. Lewis, Professor of Military Science; Captain Steven Roberts, Assistant
Professor, officer in charge; Captain John Haselrig, Assistant Professor; Captain Andrew
E. Kwortelc, Assistant Professor
The Army Reserve Officers Training Corps (Army ROTC) is a national program that
provides college-trained officers for the U.S. Army, the Army National Guard and the U.S.
Army Reserve. Army ROTC enhances students' education by providing unique leadership
and management experience and helps develop self-discipline, physical stamina and poise.
This education experience is further enhanced through the Professional Military Education
program. This program encourages students to take additional courses in military history,
written communication, human behavior, management, and national security studies.
Participation in field training/trips may be required during each semester. For additional
information not covered below, please call the Military Science department (938-4074) or
visit the ROTC building on the University campus.
THE BASIC PROGRAM
Army ROTC is traditionally a four-year program consisting of a Basic and Advanced
Program. The Basic Program is usually taken in the freshman and sophomore years. The
student incurs no military obligation. Students may discontinue the Basic Program at any
time. It consists of four semesters of training and instruction on areas of national defense,
land navigation, small unit leadership, military history and leadership development.
Uniform, necessary textbooks, and equipment are furnished without cost to the student.
To be eligible for the Basic Program, a student must be enrolled as a full-time student
at California University and not be a conscientious objector. Students who have taken Junior
ROTC or have military experience (active duty or reserves) may receive advanced placement
credit for the Basic Program.
THE ADVANCED PROGRAM
The Advanced Program is normally taken in the final two years of college. Instruction
includes further leadership development and evaluation, organiz.ational and management
techniques, tactics and administration. Training is directed towards preparing the student
to be commissioned and assume responsibilities as a Second Lieutenant upon completion of
all program requirements.
A paid Advanced Camp is held during the summer between the junior and senior year
and is required of all advanced course students. This camp permits the cadet to put into
practice the principles and theories acquired in classroom instruction. In addition to being
paid approximately $600 (for six weeks of leadership training), the cadet is paid travel
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
281
expenses, room and board, medical and dental care, and other benefits while attending
Advanced Camp.
To be eligible for the Advanced Program, a student must (1) fulfill the requirements for
the Basic Program, (2) successfully complete the Professor of Military Science's (PMS)
interview and selection process, (3) meet Army medical standards, (4) pass an Officer
Selection Battery (OSB), (5) have a Grade Point Average of 2.0 or better (2.2 or better
preferred), and (6) meet Army physical fitness standards.
Two-Year Program
The two-year program enables students who did not enroll in the Basic Program to
become eligible for entry into the Advanced Program through one of three methods: (1)
Armed Forces veterans and Junior ROTC graduates may qualify for entry into the Advanced
Program. (2) Students may elect to attend the ROTC Basic Camp (a six-week program
completed during the summer) before entering the Advanced Program. (3) Students may
attend Basic Training as members of an Army Reserve or National Guard unit. To be
eligible for the two-year program one must be a full-time student in good standing with the
university and must have at least junior status, be pursuing a four-year degree, and satisfy
all the entry requirements outlined above for the Advanced Program.
Anny ROTC Stipend
All students that are enrolled and contracted into the Advanced Program receive a
stipend of $100 per month for ten months of each school year during the last two years of
the ROTC program. This stipend is non-taxable.
Anny ROTC Scholarships
Advanced freshmen may compete for three-year merit scholarships whether or not they
are enrolled in Military Science courses. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, a flat
book rate, and a $100 per month ROTC stipend during the school year for the length of the
scholarship. Applications for these .scholarships are accepted from the end of the fall
semester through the beginning of the spring semester.
Simultaneous Membership Program (SMP)
This program provides membership in ROTC and an Army Reserve or Army National
Guard unit at the same time. While enrolled in ROTC, the student is also filling a
leadership position such as platoon leader in a Reserve or National Guard unit. This affords
the student the opportunity gain valuable leadership and management experience while
attending California. The student receives the ROTC stipend ($100/month) and drill pay
from the Reserves (approximately $120/month). Students who qualify and take advantage
of all the benefits that are available through this program may receive benefits of as much
as $10,000.
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
282
Milftary Science Student Activities
Military Science students are encouraged to participate in university and civic activities
as much as their course load will allow. The Military Science Department and the Vulcan
Cadet Corps sponsor numerous activities such as serving as color guard for all home football
and basketball games and university functions, Red Cross blood drives, marching in parades,
and formal and semi-formal social activities.
Military Adventure Training
In addition to all the training and activities offered by the Department of Military
Science, a selected number of highly motivated cadets are afforded the opportunity to attend
some of the U.S. Army's most prestigious and challenging military schools. Limited
numbers of positions are available for California cadets to attend the U.S. Army Airborne
School (at Fort Benning, Georgia), the U.S. Army Air Assault School (at Fort Campbell,
Kentucky), and the U.S. Army Northern Warfare School (at Fort Greenly, Alaska). School
allocations are awarded on a competitive basis.
A Suggested Military Science Curriculwn
Fall Semester
Spring Semester
Basic Course
Freshman
Sophomore
GMS 111
GMS 213
Junior
Senior
GMS 315
GMS 417
GMS 112
GMS 214
Advanced Course
GMS 316
GMS 418
MILITARY SCIENCE BASIC PROGRAM: GMS COURSES
The first four semesters of Military Science (100 and 200 series courses) constitute the Basic
Program, allowing the college student to gain insight into the military as a profession
without incurring any military obligation. The student learns about the role of the US Army
in providing for national security, basic leadership and management skills, as well as basic
military skills. The student is afforded the opportunity to partake in outdoor activities such
as rappelling, swim survival and white water rafting besides participating in the various
social activities sponsored by the Cadet Corps.
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
283
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
GMS 111 . LEADERSHIP CONCEPl'S AND COMMUNICATIONS SKILL. Develop, the atudent'a leadenhip
and management 1kill1 through a aeries of caae atudiea and role-playing model■. Studenta learn communication
skills, interpenonal 1kill1 and penonnel conflict reaolution . One hour lecture and one hour leadc;_nhip laboratory
per week. (2 en.) F
GMS 112. ROLE OF THE U .S . ARMY IN NATIONAL SECURJI'Y. Familiarize, the atudent with the
organization of the Department of Defenae, focu1i111 on the U .S . Anny, Reaerve componenta, the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization (NATO), Soviet Anny doctrine, and baaic aoldering 1kill1. One hour lecture and one hour
leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.) S
GMS 213. FUNDAMENTALS OF MILITARY SKILLS AND SMALL UNIT LEADERSHIP. Studenta learn baaic
land na"igational 1kill1 by using the military topographical map and the lenaatic compau. Additionally, the atudent
ia taught basic, in ,mall unit leadenhip and tactic, of aquad-aized unita. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip
laboratory per week. (2 en.) F
GMS 214. MILITARY HISTORY: LEADERS AND BATTLES. An analytical study of the principles of war and
their application■ in U .S . military history from the American Revolution through the Vietnam conflict. The atudent
will atudy the commander' ■ penpective and how it affected the outcome of the battle. Three houn lecture per week.
(3 en.) S
LEADERSHIP LABORATORY: (Baaic Program cadeta/atudenta)ln laboratory the cadet learn■ basic military 1kill1,
111ch II fint aid , awim 111rvival, and mountaineering 1kill1 and ia afforded the opportunity to rappel. Cadeta are
1)10 afforded the opportunity to gain leadenhip experience through various challe111ing aquad or platoon poaitiona.
Leadenhip laboratory mull be acheduled u part of each basic Military Science courae (GMS 111 thru GMS 214) .
Mll..ITARY SCIENCE ADVANCED PROGRAM: GMS COURSES
The 300 and 400 series courses constitute the advanced courses of military instruction
for men and women who desire a commission as Second Lieutenant in the active Anny, the
Anny Reserve, or the National Guard. This phase is composed of studies in advanced
leadership and management, tactics, military law, modem instructional and training
techniques and ethics and professionalism. Students are evaluated on their leadership skills
in various leadership positions. Acceptance by the Professor of Military Science is a
prerequisite for enrollment in the Advanced Program.
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
GMS 315 . ADVANCED MILITARY SKILLS AND LEADERSHIP DEVELOPMENT. Extcnaive atudy and
experience in military leadenhip and military combat akilla, 111ch a■ drill and ceremony, land navigation,
communication■, and phy■ical fitneu. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Acceptance into the Advanced Program. (2 en.) F
GMS 316 . ADVANCEDMil..ITARY TACTICS AND COMBAT OPERATIONS . Extcnaive atudy and handa-on
experi~nce in small unit ~ctica and leadenhip 1kill1, including operation■ orden, offenaive and defenaive combat
operation■ and leadenhip development. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.)
s
284
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE
GMS 417. DYNAMICS OF MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND ARMY FUNCTIONS. A study of the U.S. Army's
command and staff functions, military justice system, and the Army Training Management Syatem. In-depth
discu11ions of ethic• and professionalism required of the Officer Corps. Two hours lecture and one hour leadenhip
laboratory per week:. (2 era.) F
GMS 418. THE MILITARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND OFFICER TRANSmON. An introduction to the
U.S. Army'• personnel and logistical management system and personnel evaluation system. The course conclude■
with a worbhop to a11ist the cadet to make the transition into the military profe11ion. Two houn lecture and one
hour leadenhip laboratory per week:. (2 en.) S
LEADERSHIP LABORATORY. (Advanced Program cadets) During leadenhip laboratory cadets are evaluated
in various leadenhip positions at the battalion and company level. Leadership laboratory i1 de1igned to prepare
cadets for advanced camp and future appointments as Second Lieutenants. Senior level cadets conduct the training
and administration of the Cadet Corps. Leadership laboratory must be scheduled in conjunction with the advanced
Military Science courses (GMS 315 through GMS 418).
285
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
MUSIC (MUS)
HUMANITIES AREA
Associate Professor Gene G. Suskalo, chair. Associate Professors Paul P. Dolinar, Max A.
Gonano, Shirley J. Sutton, Albert Tiberio
PURPOSE
People, regardless of time and place, are expressive about the circumstances of their
lives, as well as about their hopes and dreams. One form of that expression is music. To
comprehend its meaning and importance necessitates relating it to an historical context and
to understanding the science of sound production behind this art form. Music is not simply
an end in itself. Music is also a means by which the values and interests of a society are
revealed.
The music curriculum is designed to give a general introduction to the appreciation of
modem and classical music as well as to provide interested students with the opportunity to
participate in the university's band, choirs, and instrumental ensembles.
PROGRAM
The university has no major in music. The curriculum serves the General Studies
Program of the university and the Co-Curricular Program sponsored by Student Affairs, Inc.
Located in the Music Department is the Humanities Area Major. It provides students with
the opportunity and flexibility to structure a course of study from across disciplines in the
humanities - Music, Art, Theater, Philosophy, Communication Studies, English, and the
Foreign Languages and Cultures.
MUSIC COURSES (MUS)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+MUS 100. INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC. Expoaes the student to the various hiatorical, analytical and aesthetic
elements of muaic, thereby providing an opportunity to broaden and enrich peraonal enjoyment. This expoaure to
mu■ic ia made through the uae of villl41 aid■, audio recording■, radio, television, films, and concerts. (3 en.) F-S
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
286
MUS 104. VOICE CLASS I. Thi, courx i, deaigned for students who want to improve their singing voice I I a
musically exprcuive instrument. Breathiq, vocal placement, and diction will be emphasized. Attention will also
be given to improving 1ight-1inging ability. (3 en.)
+MUS 105. SURVEY OF JAZZ. Coven the historical background of jazz from 1900 to the present, the important
artiata and ensemble, and their contributions to the art fonn, and analyze• of jazz styles and forms via guided
liatening1 to recording,, video,, and attendance at live performance,. (3 en.) F-S
+ MUS 106. SURVEY OF TWENTIETH-CENTURY MUSIC . Auiata in a realization and undentanding of the
impact of modern twentieth-century compositional and performance techniques upon the tnditional muaical heritage.
The student will emerge with a theoretical knowledae of numerou■ twentieth-century musical concepts and
technique,, 11 well I I an appropriate vocabulary. Important compoacn and a de■criptive analy1i1 of their worb
will play a dominalll role throughout the courx. (3 en.) F-S
+ MUS 107. AMERICAN MUSIC . Presents a panoramic view of the musical activities which have occurred in
America from Colonial time, through the present. Included in thia study of American folk, popular and art muaic
arc the various upects of primitive music, psalmody, early opera, and concert life, African and European folk
music•• influence in America, the ■inging ■chool , the mu■ical effect of European immigrants, and the roots of jazz
and its ramifications. (3 en.) F-S
MUS 114. VOICE CLASS ll. This course continue, the objectives of Voice I (MUS 104). A more demanding level
of vocal literature, commensurate with the student'• 1ingina ability will be performed.
+ MUS 11 S. FUNDAMENTALS OF MUSIC. Provide■ a knowledge of the fundamentals of muaic and an ability
to execute baaic 1kill1, including the study of note value,, meter signature■, ■cales, key signature,, and the use of
syllables in reading music . A b11ic introduction to the piano keyboard i1 also included . Strongly recommended
for Elementary Education students and any ochen interested in ■trcngthening their knowledge of music
fundamental,. (3 en.) F-S
MUS 196. JAZZ ENSEMBLE. Entnnce by interview with Jazz Ensemble Director. Required attendance at
rchcaraala and all public performance,. Membenhip ,ranted only by audition. (1 er.) F-S
MUS 197. CALIFORNIA CHORALE. A ,roup of approximately 25 mixed voices. Memben arc chosen from the
ltudent body, faculty , and mcmbcn of surrounding communitie■. Membership is granted only by audition. (1 er.)
F-S
MUS 203 . SURVEY OF THE AMERICAN MUSICAL. Thi, course will present the variou■ historical, cultural
and social elements of the American Muaical. Thia will be accompli■hed through the use of visual aid ■ , audio
recording,, television, video tape■ , film■ , and whenever pouible, attendance at live performances. Experts in the
field will be utilized II guest lecturcn. (3 en.)
MUS 211. KEYBOARD I. For the beginning ltudents intercated in achieving facility at the piano. Includes playing
of major and minor ■cale■, pattel'III and fingering,. Chord, (I, IV, V) in both major and minor key■ followed by
their invenion■ and the common tone chord sequence pattern. A student completing the course ahould be able to
play aimple song■ by combining melody with chord accompaniment. It ia expected that atudenll will be at an entry
level in keyboard experience. (3 en.) F-S
MUS 212. KEYBOARD ll. A continuation of Keyboard I for the more advanced student. Review of ■cales,
chords, invenion■, and sight readings followed by the improvisation of simple accompaniments from chord
1ymbol1. Modulation study is begun with the study of the circle of fifths; further method• of modulation arc
introduced II time permits. Transposition at boch the accond and third is introduced. A thorough study of
dominant seventh chord, relating the ■imple improvisation within any given key. (3 en.) S
• • •
287
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
CCU 187. PEP BAND. The Pep Band ia composed of bra11, woodwind and percuaaioniata from the University
Band. Thia enacmble performs at aclected basketball 1ame1. (1 er. aprin, acmeater) S
CCU 188 . WOODWIND ENSEMBLE. The Woodwind Enacmble ia composed of woodwind players from the
University Band. It explore, all phaaca of literature composed for thia type of enacmble. The ,roup rehearaea one
hour a week and performs both on and off campua. (1 er. per acmeater) F-S
CCU 189. BRASS ENSEMBLE. The Brau Enacmble ia composed of bra11 players from the University Band.
It explores all phaacs of literature composed for thia type of enacmble. The ,roup rehearaea one hour a week and
performs both on and off campua. (1 er. per acmeater) F-S
CCU 197. UNIVERSITY BAND. The University Band follow■ two curricula determined by the acmeater. During
the fall acmeater, the University Band performs at football 1ame1 and parades and ia the featured exhibition band
at numerous marchiDB band feativala. Membership in thi1 enacmble ia open to any intereated inatrumentaliat.
Membership ia alao open to thoac wilhiDB to audition for feature twirler or for a po1ition on the Silk, Squad, Dance
Linc, or Rifle Linc. DuriDB the SpriDB Scmeater, the University Band performs literature which encompaaaca all
facets of the idiom. Thia enacmble performs at convocationa and concerts, both on and off campus. (1 er. per
acmeater)
'
CCU 198. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY CHOIR. The California University Choir provides an opportunity for
atudents to aing a wide variety of music from the contemporary I I well I I the traditional repertoire . They perform
frequently on campua and throughout the area. Membership in the Choir ia elective; auditions are not required.
(1 er.) F-S
CCU 199. CALIFORNIA SINGERS. The California Sillier& ia a amall performiDB enacmble. Membership in the
,roup is determined by audition. There are an equal number of men and women . The baaic performance atyle
is that of a pop/ahow/awing choir, although other atyles of muaic are performed when appropriate for the acaaon
or the audience. Smaller groups, such I I a women'• trio or a men'• barbershop quartet, are formed within thia
group. Choreography ia a regular part of the performance, preacnted by thia group. (1 cr.)F-S
•
• •
ECE 217. MUSIC IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. A creative approach to the muaic intereata and nccda of the very
young child, de1igncd to acquaint the prospective teacher with current music education practice, in pre-achoo! and
the primary ,rades. Experiences are provided in 1ingi11B, liateniDB, playiDB inatnnncnts, rhythmic movement, and
creative music activitie1. (3 era.) F-S
EDE 207. TEACHING OF MUSIC IN ELEMENTARY GRADES K-8 . Thia course teachea the proper technique,
of teaching muaic to children and include, the atudy of much aource material and its proper application in the
cla11room. Students develop technique■ and procedure, through actual teaching experience in a cla11room actting.
Although not required, Fundamental■ of Muaic (115) ia atroDBIY advised . (3 era.) F-S
288
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
Professor Margaret A. Marcinek, chair. Associate Professor Jacqueline Stefanik; Assistant
Professors Suz.anne M. Palko, Debra A. Shelapinsky.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING
The Department of Nursing, an upper-division nursing program for registered nurses
who have graduated from associate degree and diploma programs, is accredited by the
National League for Nursing. The Bachelor of Science in Nursing program is designed to
build upon the prior knowledge and experience of registered nurses. It prepares the
graduate to practice as a generalist in a variety of health settings through the internalization
of concepts relevant to professional nursing. The course of study combines general
education in the humanities as well as the biophysical and psychosocial sciences with
comprehensive theory and practice in nursing.
All of the academic requirements of the University apply to the Nursing Program. In
addition, a minimum grade of "C" is required in each upper-division nursing course.
All RN students are admitted into the Pre-BSN Program and must complete all Pre-BSN
requirements before being admitted to the upper-division BSN nursing courses. An overall
QPA of 2.0 is required for entrance into upper-division nursing courses, and a subsequent
QPA of 2.0 in nursing courses must he met for graduation requirements.
Lower-division courses may he accepted as transfer credits from accredited institutions,
or they may he completed at California University of Pennsylvania. Selected courses may
he challenged by examination. Specific information on challenge examinations for General
Education courses may he obtained from the Department of Nursing.
Knowledge from previously completed nursing courses must he validated in order to
grant lower-division credit in nursing. Validation examinations are administered in the
department and are composed of the NLN Mobility Profile II Examinations and the Clinical
Performance Examination. In addition, participation in the optional Portfolio Review
process may permit students to waive selected clinical requirements. Further information
on validation examinations and Portfolio Review may he obtained from the department.
Specified General Education and support courses must he completed at California
University of Pennsylvania. All exceptions to this policy must he approved by the
chairperson of the department and the Dean of the College of Science and Technology.
Students enrolled in upper-division nursing courses must meet the annual health
requirements. In addition, students must provide evidence of professional and personal
liability insurance coverage, evidence of current RN licensure, and current CPR
certification.
Scholarship opportunities for the RN student entering this program are available through
various local, state and national nursing organizations. Additionally, the Department of
Nursing maintains a Nursing Honor Society and a Nursing Alumni Society which presents
a yearly award to the outstanding graduating senior.
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
289
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral F.ducatioa: Compositionl-Il (ENG 101 and 102); College Algebra (MAT 181); Statistic ■ (MAT
215 or 225); General Psychology (PSY 100); Principle■ of Sociology (SOC 100); Developmental P■ychology (PSY
207); Social P■ychology (PSY 211); Penpective1 in Philoaophy (PHI 100) or Ethics (PHI 220); 3 en. Humanities
elective; Human Anatomy and Physiology I and Il (BIO 230, 260); Chemillry for Health Profe11ional1 (CHE ISO);
Microbiology (BIO 226); 7 en. of free electives.
(B) Support Counes: Principles of Manaiement (MGT 201); Introduction to Microcomputen (CSC 101)
total of 6 en. from any 2 area■ in Computer Science, Gerontology, Buaineaa Writing, Public School Nuning,
Nutrition (BIO 228), or Nuning elective (NUR 200).
(C) Area of Coaceatntioa: Nuning Placement Examinationa: NLN Mobility Profile Il Examinationa and
Clinical Performance Examination (30 en.); Philoaophy of Profe11ional Nuning (NUR 330); Health Aaaeaament
(NUR 350); Trend ■ and laaue■ in Nuning (NUR 360); Profe11ional Nuning in Health Promotion (NUR 390);
Method■ of Nuning Research (NUR 430); Profeaaional Nuning in Health Restoration (NUR 440); Profeaaional
Nuning; Social lmplicationa (NUR 460); Leadenhip and Change in Nuning (NUR 490).
NURSING COURSES (NOR)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
NUR 101. WOMEN'S HEALTH ISSUES.
Thi■
and cogs;em■ of women in today'• ■ociety .
Emphasi■
coune ia designed to address the various health care issues, needs
is on the biological, developmental, psychological and ■ocial
concepts related to women'• health care. FREE ELECTIVE. OPEN TO ALL STUDENTS. (3 en.) S
NUR 105 : PARENTING; INSIGHTS AND ISSUES . This coune examines the challenge of parenthood and
effective parenting in today' ■ world . Explication of the functiona, proceaa and problems of parenting serves a s
a foundation for di■cu■sion of effective parenting ■kills and behavion. FREE ELECTIVE. OPEN TO ALL
STUDENTS. (3 en.) S
NUR 200. TRANSmONS IN NURSING . This RN/BSN tnnaition coune is deaigned to assist the reiistered nune
in developing and achieving profeaaional goal■. Empha1i1 i■ on educational trends in nuning, concepts of
profeaaionali■m, theories of role tnnaition, and culture shock. (3 en.) F
■tudent
NUR 330. PHILOSOPHY OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING. Focuses on theoretical frameworks for professional
nuning practice, including an introduction to the nuning proce11. Allignments assist students to develop and apply
a penonal philosophy of profeaaional nuning, and to independently plan appropriate interventiona for multicultural
clients of all ages. Prerequisite: BSN Status. (3 en.) F
NUR 350. HEALTH ASSESSMENT. Concepts and skills of history-taking and physical asseaament are
emphasized, focusing on the variationa in approach as well as in findings at different stages of human development.
Prerequi■ite : BSN Statu1. (3 en.) F
NUR 360. TRENDS AND ISSUES IN NURSING. Analysis of professional nuning aa well aa bi~thical issues
from historical and contemporary viewpoints with implicationa for profe■sional nuninJ practice in the health care
delivery ■ystem. Prerequisite: BSN Status. (3 en.) S
NUR 390. PROFESSIONAL NURSING IN HEALTH PROMOTION. Reviews concepts and principles of
profeaaional nuning practice related to health promotion and maintenance for individuals and familiea 1cro11 the
life span. Emphasis ia on enhancement of health aaseaament skills and utilization of the nuning proceaa to manage
health promotion activities. Prerequisites: NUR 330, NUR 350. (6 en.) S
290
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING
NUR. 430. MEI'HODS OF NURSING RESEARCH. Basic concepts and methods related to the reaearch proce11.
Opportunity i■ provided for the- development of critical thinking- and decision-making ■killa needed by the
profeuional nune to analyze and evaluate reaearch findings for application to practice. Prerequisite: BSN Statu1.
(3 era.) F
NUR. 440. PROFESSIONAL NURSING IN HEALTH RESTORATION. Focuses on health restoration and
rehabilitation of individual& acro11 the life ■pan . Practicum■ provide the opportunity for direct client care in a
variety of aettinga. Emphasis i■ on the development of a theoretical base for nursing practice and scientific analy1i1
of nursing care. Prerequisite: NUR. 390 (6 en.) F
NUR. 460. PROFESSIONAL NURSING: SOCIETAL IMPLICATIONS. Societal influences on the health care
delivery aystcm and professional nursing practice are examined. Clinical experiences focus on application of
advanced decision-making skills utilizing the nursing proceBB to meet health care needs of an identified population.
Prerequisite: NUR. 440. (3 era.) S
NUR. 490. LEADERSHIP AND CHANGE IN NURSING. Enhances leadership skills through analysis of
and experiential exercises. Practicum■ provide for application of theory in critical analy1i1 of
situations and decision-making within the practice of nursing to meet emerging health needs of consumers.
Prerequisite■: NUR. 440 and MOT 201. (6 en.) S
theorie■/conccpts
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
291
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
Professor Ronald C. Hoy, Chair. Professors John J. Bums, Vincent F. Lackner, Barbara
Ann Demartino Swyhart, John J. Walsh; Assistant Professor Gary A. Smith.
The word philosophy comes from two Greek words that mean love (..fo,, phileo) and
knowledge (<10ux, sophia), and throughout much of history anyone who sought wisdom was
called a philosopher. Socrates was esteemed to be wise because he was aware of how little
he knew. In knowing this, however, he was wiser than the "authorities" and "experts"
whose unreflective confidence in their beliefs was mistaken. With time, philosophy as an
academic discipline became the critical study of the justification of beliefs and the attempt
to put together different kinds of beliefs to form a workable view of reality as a whole. In
brief, philosophy is the critical study of beliefs about truth, knowledge, reality, and values.
Aristotle thought the study of philosophy was intrinsically rewarding because it fulfilled a
distinctively human potential-the ability to reason and to know. But if minimizing one's
mistaken or dogmatic beliefs has practical value, then philosophy also can serve pragmatic
purposes.
Philosophy students study the historical development of theories about the nature of
knowledge, reality, and values, and they learn how to assess the correctness of such
theories. Students develop their abilities to think logically, to explore ethical issues from
different perspectives, and to present their ideas effectively in writing.
PROGRAMS
The Department of Philosophy has two majors. The first is a traditional, general,
course of study which includes the historical, normative (e.g., ethics and aesthetics) and
methodological (e.g., logic) professional areas. The second, in addition to traditional course
work, focuses on topics and issues pertinent to graduate study, particularly those related to
the legal profession, such as the philosophy of law, ethics, social and political philosophy.
ACTMTIES
The Philosophy Department sponsors a student Philosophy Club which gives students
informal social opportunities for discussions, debates, and lectures. The Philosophy faculty
also present or host topical lectures and forums.
292
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
CAREERS
Philosophy majors can go on to a variety of careers: law, ministry, teaching, civil
service, management, to name a few. Indeed, a philosophy major is well suited for any
career that valu~ critical reasoning, logical problem solving, and an ability to look at issu~
from many perspectiv~. Increasingly, for example, the business world is looking for
liberally educated employees who have learned how to go on learning. Philosophy majors
should work closely with their advisor to choose major and non-major cou~ that will help
them achieve their individual career goals. The Philosophy program at California University
is d~igned to be flexible so that it can be tailored to the diverse needs and inte~ts of
philosophy majors.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHILOSOPHY
Curricuhma:
(A) Geaera1 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science,; 12 credits of Social Science,; 18 credits of Free Electives.
(B) l'lliloaoplly COKeatration: Logic and Language (PHI 115); History of Ancient Philosophy (PHI 201);
Sixteenth to Eighteenth Century Philosophy (PHI 206) .
Restricted ElectiTes: twenty-one credits: two courac1 in each of the following areas of philosophy: Historical,
Normative, and Methodological. One additional courac from one of the above mentioned areas .
Related Electins: thirty-eight credits.
(C) l'llilosopby/Pre-Law COKeatration: Logic and Languaae (PHI 115); History of Ancient Philosophy (PHI
201); 16th-18th Century Philosophy (PHI 206); Social and Political Philosophy (PHI 225); Ethical Theory (PHI
320); Philosophy of Law (PHI 370); four additional advanced Philosophy couracs.
Related Electins: 12 credits of advanced Philosophy couracs. Electives: 14 credits
PHILOSOPHY COURSES (Pill)
Introductory cou~ are indicated by a plus ( +).
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
+PHI 100. PERSPECTIVES IN PHILOSOPHY. Analysi■ of such major philosophical issues as the nature of
knowledge, reality, religion and moral,. (3 en.) F S
+PHI 115. LOGIC AND LANGUAGE. An introduction to basic principles and techniques for distinguishing
correct from incorrect reasoning. (3 en.) F S
+ PHI 200. WORLD RELIGIONS. The study of the
■even
world religions, including their origins and doctrines.
(3 en.)
+ PHI 20 I. HISTORY OF ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY. Analysis of the texts of the pre-Socratic philosophen, Plato,
Aristotle, the Stoic,, Epicureans, and the Skeptic,. (3 en.) F
+ PHI 206. SIXTEENTH TO EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHY. Introduction to such influential thinken
Francia Bacon, Dcacartcs, Hobbea, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant. (3 era.) S
11
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
293
PHI 211. FORMAL LOGIC I. Introduction to the ■yntax and
language,, and al10 to prooftheorie1 for ■uch languages. (3 en.)
■emantics
of truth-functional and first-order
+ PHI 220. IITHICS. An examination of ■elected ethical 1y11tem1 and their philo■ophical foundation■.
emph11i1 on understanding 111ch b11ic moral concepta I I good, right and duty. (3 en.)
Lay■ ■pecial
+ PHI 225. SOCIAL AND POLmCAL PHILOSOPHY. An examination of ■elected ■ocial or political 1y11tem1
and their philo■ophical foundation■. Lay■ ■pecial emph11i1 on 111ch baaic concepta I I natural righta, equality,
justice, individual freedom and political authority. (3 en.)
PHI 231. PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION. A con■ ideration of the nature of religion, ■peculatiom and argumenta
of the nature and existence of God, the po11ibility of religious knowledge, claim■ to religious experience and
revelation, the problem of evil, the belief in immortality and the meaningfulneaa of religious language . (3 era.)
+ PHI 247. SCIBNCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY. Examines the philo■ophical i1111e1 that stem from the
impact that evolving science and technology have on people's beliefs, values, and behavior. (3 era.) F S
+PHI 266. PHILOSOPHY OF PLAY. Seeb to clarify human play and/or lei111re activitie1. Special attention i ■
given to the problem of con■tructive and destructive form■ of play and their relationship to human freedom and
anxiety. (3 en.)
+PHI 270. PHILOSOPHY OF MARXISM. An examination of the basic texta of Marx and Engels and the
development of Marxist philo10phy. Attempta a critical evaluation in light of contemporary political
philo■ophy. (3 en.)
111b ■equent
PHI 305. MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY. Begin■ with Neo-Platonism and proceeds with 111ch thinkers as Augustine,
Erigena, Amelm, Thomas Aquina1, Roger Bacon, Dun■ Scotu1 and William of Ockham. (3 en.)
PHI 310. NINETEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHY. A 111rvey of the development of German idealism after Kant
and the voluntaristic reaction■ to it. A110 considen British Empirici■m and French Positivism. (3 era.)
PHI 312. FORMAL LOGIC II. A continuation of Formal Logic I, with emphasis on the meta-theory of
truth-functional and first-order languages. It al10 considers ■elected topics in the philo■ophy of logic and the
philo■ophy of mathematics. Prerequisite: PHI 211. (3 era.)
PHI 320. IITHICAL THEORY. An examination of the poaaibility and nature of ethical knowledge and the meaning
of moral diacour■e. Special consideration is given to contemporary discussions. (3 era.)
PHI 325 . PHILOSOPHY OF SCIBNCE. A study of the methods, concepts and presuppositions of scientific inquiry.
An attempt is made to understand the historical development of science in the context of various theorie■ of
knowledge and reality. (3 era.)
PHI 335. AESTHETIC THEORY. An examination of the nature and basis of criticism in the fine arts and
literature - the nature and function of art, aesthetic standard ■, the concept of beauty, artistic creativity and the
meaning and truth in literature and the art■ . (3 era.)
PHI 370. THE PHILOSOPHY OF LAW. A survey of the debate about the concept of law in the history of
philo10phy and an examination of the recent revival of the debate in greater detail. Specific topic ■ include the
nature of legal rea ■oning, the legal enforcement of morality, the problem of responsibility, and the concept of
justice.
PHI 405 . EPISTEMOLOGY. An examination of
contemporary discuaaion■. (3 en.)
■elected
theories of knowledge with special emph11i1 on
294
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY
PHI 410. METAPHYSICS M. An inquiry into the nature of reality and the meaning of existence. (3 en.)
PHI 415. PHILOSOPHY OF MIND. An examination of important atAges in the philosophical development of the
notion of mind. Diacusaea such contemporary problema aa the relation of mind and body and the nature of
conaciouaneu, and analyze• 111ch notiona a ■ will, emotion, action and memory. (3 en.)
PHI 420. PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE. An exploration of the relationa between the variou1 dimenaiona of
traditional philosophical problema. Examine• theories of meaning, kinda of meaning, and uaea of language•. (3
en.)
PHI 426. PHENOMENOLOGY AND EXISTENTIALISM. A study of the historical background and development
of twentieth century European philosophy, with particular emphasis on 111ch major philosophen aa Hu1aerl,
Heidegger, Sartre and Merleau-Ponty. (3 en.)
PHI 431. ANALYTICAL PHILOSOPHY. An exploration of selected philosophical issues (e.g ., knowledge, truth
and meaning), utilizing recent work in conceptual and methodological analysia. Though the coune ia usually
problem-oriented, a aood deal of the history of recent Anglo-American philosophy is covered. Recommended
prerequisites: PHI 206 and PHI 211 . (3 en.)
PHI 459. TUI'ORIAL IN PHILOSOPHY. (Variable credita)
PHI 470. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN PHILOSOPHY. A discussion of aome special problem or i11Ue in philoaophy .
(3 en.)
PHI 490. SEMINAR IN PHILOSOPHY. A diacuuion of either one prominent philosopher or a movement in
philosophy. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
295
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
CHEMISTRY (CHE)
PHYSICS (PHY)
PRE-ENGINEERING
PHYSICAL SCIENCE (PBS)
NATURAL SCIENCE
GENERAL SCIENCE TEACHER CERTIDCATION
Associate Professor Clyde W. Clendaniel, chair. Professors Theodore L. Dominick, Gabriel
C. Fusco, David L. Johnson, Anthony Lazzaro, David W. Pajerski; Associate Professors
Gregg Gould, Michael Hackett, Michael Walt Robin, Robert L. Zoppetti; Instructor Elaine
S. Costello
The Physical Science Department is a unique department in that it houses both the
Chemistry and Physics programs at the University. Both of these programs are located in
the New Science building which was renovated in 1984. Along with the building renovation
the department acquired state-of-the art chemical instrumentation, and more recently has
acquired a number of computers for use in both the physics and chemistry programs.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY
This program focuses upon studies of the nature and structure of matter and provides
a strong foundation in the fundamentals of chemistry, physics and mathematics. Upon
successful completion of this program, the graduate is qualified to assume a position as a
chemist in either the private or public sector. Program graduates should also be well
prepared to undertake graduate studies leading to the M.A., M.S., or Ph.D. in Chemistry.
Through consultation with an advisor, students obtain information that will guide them
toward a proper selection of electives in General Education. Such a judicious selection of
electives based upon the student's objectives may help to promote additional career
opportunities upon graduation and also satisfy the admissions standards of various
professional and graduate schools. Some graduates have thus chosen to continue their
education or to pursue careers in medicine, dentistry, pharmacy, management, college and
university teaching, and research.
Career opportunities include positions as an analytical chemist, a quality control
specialist, an industrial management trainee, a technical writer, a chemical purchasing agent
and a sales person with the chemistry industry. The program also provides preprofessional
training in medicine, dentistry, and law, as well as preparation for graduate school.
296
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
Curriculum:
(A) General Education:
Compo■ition 1-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanitie1; 12 credita of Natural
Sciences; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives.
(B) Area of Coacentratioa: General Chemilltry 1-D-m (CHE 101, 102 and 203); Analytical Chemilltry I
(CHE 261); Organic Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 331 and 332); Physical Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 451 and 452); 4 credita of
Chemilltry elective■; Calculu11-D (MAT 281 and 282); College Physics 1-D (PHY 101 and 202); 18 Olher credits
of related electives.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHYSICS
The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree in Physics offers the student a
variety of choices which may be tailored to one's needs. From the Physics curriculum the
student may choose between a diversity of courses in classical and contemporary physics,
including such courses in applied physics as Plasma Physics, Quantum Mechanics, Special
and General Relativity, and Astrophysics. Advanced laboratories include facilities for
studies in photometry, holography, X-ray diffraction, and digital electronics.
The flexibility of the program allows the graduate to prepare for many occupations,
including admission to an advanced degree program in Physics or Engineering, and technical
or research positions with industry or government. The programs also serve as excellent
training for entrance to professional schools.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 9 credita in Social Science;
3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); IS credits of free elective ■ including Composition 1-D (ENG IOI, 102).
(B) Area of Coacentratioa: College Physic ■ 1-D-m (PHY 101, 202, and 203); Intermediate Mechanics (PHY
221); Intermediate Electricity and Magneti■m (PHY 301); Modem Phy1ic1 I (PHY 331); Calculu■ 1-D-m (MAT
281, 282, and 381); Differential Equations (MAT 406); General Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 101 and 102); 6 credita of
Phy■ic, Electives; 19 credits of Advanced Related Elective,.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN CHEMISTRY FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: IS credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-D (ENG 101-102); 11 credita in
Natural Sciences, including Principles ofBiolou (BIO 115), Organic Chemilltry (CHE 322), and an approved Earth
Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM
IOI); General Psychology (PSY 100); 6 credits of free electives, including a science elective.
(B) ProfEllSional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teats
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Learners (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467) or Modem Methods (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461).
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
297
(C) Professional Speciali.r.ation: General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101, 102); Geochemiatry (CHE 255);
Analytical Chemistry I (CHE 261); Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331); Organic Chemistry Il (CHE 332);
Biochemistry (CHE 441) ; Physical Chemiatry I (CHE 451); Individual Work I (CHE 368); Calculu ■ I (MAT 281);
Calculu1 Il (MAT 282); Principles of Biology (BIO 115); College Phy■ic ■ I (PHY 101).
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN PHYSICS FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 credits in Humanities, including Compo1ition I - Il (ENG 101, 102); 11 credits
in Natural Sciences, including Principles of Biology (BIO 115), General Chemistry (CHE 102), and an Earth
Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM
101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 1 credit of free elective,.
(B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School, (EDS 465);
Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Leamen (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary School■ (EDS 467) or Modem Method■ (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461) .
(C) Professional Speciali.r.ation: College Physics 1-Il-m (PHY 101, 202 and 203); Intermediate Mechanics
(PHY 221); Intermediate Electricity and Magnetism (PHY 301); Modem Physics (PHY 331); Mathematical
Methods of Physics I (PHY 341); Physics Seminar (PHY 495); Calculus 1-Il-m (MAT 281, 282 and 381); General
Chemistry I (CHE 101).
Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE.
COOPERATIVE ENGINEERING PROGRAM
California University of Pennsylvania participates in cooperative liberal arts engineering
programs with both the Pennsylvania State University and the University of Pittsburgh. The
student undertakes a three-year curriculum at California University of Pennsylvania
concentrating on studies in liberal arts and pre-engineering courses in natural sciences.
Upon successful completion of that curriculum and the recommendation of faculty, the
student spends two years at the Pennsylvania State .University or the University of
Pittsburgh, at which time the student will complete the engineering course requirements as
specified by the institution.
Some advantages of such cooperative programs include the following:
1. For students who have yet to choose between engineering or another discipline as a
field endeavor, the programs provide initial studies in both the arts and sciences at California
University of Pennsylvania, during which time they may ascertain whether their abilities and
interests lie in the field of engineering or another discipline.
298
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
2. The program permits qualified students to receive both a liberal and technical
education at relatively low cost.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 9 credita in Humanities including Perspective, in Philosophy (PHI 100); 6 credita
in Natural Sciences; 12 credita in Social Sciences, including Elementa of Economic, (ECO 100); Composition 1-Il
(ENG 101 and 102); Oral Communication (COM 101).
(B) Area or Concentration: Technical Drawing I (IND 110); Engineering Seminar; General Chemistry 1-Il
(CHE 101 and 102); College Physics 1-Il-m (PHY 101, 202 and 203); Calculus 1-Il-ill-IV (MAT 281, 282, 381
and 382); Linear Algebra I (MAT 341); Computer Science I (CSC 121); Differential Equationa (MAT 406); 16
credita of Engineering Discipline Courses.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN NATURAL SCIENCE
This extremely flexible program provides the student with an opportunity to structure
a course of study that encompasses the broad areas of science and mathematics. Students
enrolling in this program are expected to work carefully and regulai:ly with their academic
advisor to develop a program that meets their individual needs. Course distribution sheets
outlining the curricular structure of the program are available in both the Physical Science
Department office and the office of the College of Science and Technology.
GENERAL SCIENCE CERTIFICATION
The College of Education and Human Services offers a program for a student who has
already received certification but seeks also to he qualified as a teacher of General Science
in secondary schools. In order to fulfill the requirements of this program the student must
complete twenty-seven semester hours. The courses required are: General Zoology (BIO
120); General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemistry 1-11 (CHE 101 and 102); General
Physics 1-11 (PHY 121 and 122); Geology (EAS 150); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS
163). Further information may he obtained at the Office of Education and Human Services
in the Keystone Education Building.
CHEMISI'RY COURSES (CHE)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+CHE 100. INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY. A preparatory course emphasizing the mathematical and
reaaoning 11cill1 needed to be aucceaaful in General Chemistry. There are no prerequisites, and the course aati1fie1
requirementa in the Natural Science area for non-science majors. Thia course is not an elective for Chemillry
majors. Three clan hours each week. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
299
+CHE 101. GENERAL CHEMISTRY I. An introductory COUl'IIC for majon and non-majon. Topic, covered
include atomic structure, bonding, stoichiometry, chemical reactions (including redox reactions) , solutions, and the
liquid state. Three claaa houra and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.)
+CHE 102. GENERAL CHEMISTRY Il. A continuation of General Chemistry I. The gaaeou ■ state, solutions,
thermodynamics, kinetics, acids and bases, gaseoua and ionic equilibria. Prerequisite: CHE 101. Three claaa and
three laboratory houn each week. (4 era.)
CHE 150. CHEMISTRY FOR THE HEALTH PROFESSIONS . The basic principles of general chemistry, orianic
chemistry, and biochemistry needed for the health sciences (specifically nursing chemistry). Three lecture hours
and three laboratory houra each week. (4 era.) F
CHE 203. GENERAL CHEMISTRY m. A continuation of General Chemistry Il. Descriptive chemistry of metala
and nonmetal,, electrochcmistry, nuclear chemistry, solid state molecular orbitals, coordination chemistry .
Laboratory :' Equilibrium and qualitative chemistry of the elements. Three class and three laboratory hours each
week. Prerequisite: CHE 102. (4 en.) S
CHE 255 . GEOCHEMISTRY. Basic chemical principles employed in the solution of some geologic problems.
Geologic dating, sedimentary geochemistry, chemical weathering, colloids and structural aspects of clay minerals
and soila. Three claaa houn each week. (3 en.) F
CHE 261. ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY I. An introduction to quantitative analytical techniques and procedure
including volumetric, gravimetric, and spectroscopic methods. Prerequisites: CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture
houra and three laboratory hours each week. (4 en.) F
CHE 262. INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS I. An introduction to various instrumental and separation techniques
including 111ch topics II chromatography, clcctrochcmistry, and atomic absorption spectroscopy . Prerequisite: CHE
261. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours each week. (4 en.) S
CHE 331 . ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. An introduction to the basic principles which govern the reactions of carbon
compound,. Particular emphasis is placed on the structure and atereochemistry of organic molecules, acid-base
theory, reaction mechanisms, and an introduction to the reactions and synthesis of alkanes, alkenes, alkynes,
alicyclica, alkyl halides and aromatic compounds. Three hours lecture and three hours laboratory . Prerequisites:
CHE 101 and 102. (4 en.) F
CHE 332. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Il. A continuation of the study of organic compounds. The student is
introduced to the important functional groups present in such families as alcohols, ethers, carboxylic acids, caters,
amides, aldehyde,, kctonca, amines, phenols, aryl halides, and reactions, and synthetic interconversion of these
compound,. Three houra lecture and three houn laboratory. Prerequisites: CHE 331 . (4 en.) S
CHE 340. ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPIC INTERPRJITATION. Introductory theory and interpretation of infrared
spectroscopy, ultraviolet spectroscopy, nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, and maas spectrometry.
Prerequisites: CHE 101 and CHE 331. Three claas hours each week. (3 en.) S
CHE 345 . ~EDICINAL CHEMISTRY . A comprehensive survey of the major classes of organic pharmaceutical
agents, with particular cmpha ■is on the structurea, synthesis and pharmacological properties, aa well a ■ the
structure-activity relationships of the important classes of drugs used in medicine. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and
CHE 332. Three claaa hours each week. (3 en.) S
CHE 350. COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CHEMISTRY. This coul'IIC engages the student in activitiea which
focus on computer solution of chemical problcma. Both software coding and usage, as well aa interfacing of
microcomputera to chemical instruments, are covered. Prerequisites: CHE 101; CHE 102 and BASIC
Programmiq Language. Three claaa hours each week. (3 en.) S
300
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
CHE 368 . INDIVIDUAL WORK I. An opportunity for atudenta apecializing in chemistry to organiu, inveltiaate,
and report on a apecific problem of their own selection. (1 er.)
CHE 410. CHEMISTRY INTERNSHIP. The atudent i■ provided an opportunity to work: in an indu■trial or nonprofit research laboratory . This practical training is intended to ■upplement the academic pro,ram. Prerequi■ite:
Junior or Senior ■tanding and permission of the department. (Variable: 1-12 en.)
CHE 411. BIOCHEMISTRY I. A comprehensive ■urvey of the properties, reactions, and atructure of amino acids,
proteins, enzyme ■, carbohydrates, fats and lipids, and nucleic acid■. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332. Three
clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F
CHE 412. BIOCHEMISTRY ll. A comprehensive ■urvey of metabolic proceue■, including carbohydrate
metaboli■m, the Kreb ■ cycle, photo■ynthe ■i ■, fatty acid and protein metaboli■m, aa well aa protein bio■ynthe■i■,
fatty acid bio■ynthe■i■ and DNA replication. Prerequi■ite: CHE 411. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) S
CHE 421. ADV ANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. Modem treatment of principles of inorganic chemistry,
empha■izing chemical bonding and stereochemistry, with emphaaia on periodic properties, acida and baaea, and nonaqueous solvents. Coordination compounds; nomenclature stereochemistry, and kinetics of coordination coq,ounda
of the abort and long transition metals. Three clau houn each weelt. Prerequisite: CHE 451. (3 en.) F
CHE 422. ADV ANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY ll. A atudy of the chemistry of metal coordination
compounds. The hiatorical development of coordination theory i■ presented 11 well I I the modem concepta of
valence bond, cry■tal field and molecular orbital theories I I they apply to coordination compound■ • Prerequisite:
CHE 425 . ORGANIC PREPARATIONS. An advanced coune in synthetic organic chemiatry with emphaaia on the
moat recently discovered method■ of synthe■ia of organic compound■. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332.
Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F
CHE 426 . QUALU ATIVE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. A laboratory coune in which the identifications of organic
compound, are determined by experimental analyaia. A basic aim i■ to develop in the atudent a more active
acquaintance with the concepts and facts introduced in elementary organic chemistry. Thia implies recoune to
chemical reactions rather than reliance on inatrumental analysis. Nevertheleu, the use of infrared and nuclear
ma,netic resonance inatrumentation will also form an integral part of the coune. Prerequiaites: CHE 331 and 332.
(3 era.) S
CHE 433. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. A detailed atudy of the mechanism■ of the main typea of
organic chemical reactions, and the methods - both kinetic and non-kinetic - used to atudy reaction mechaniama.
Prerequisite■: CHE 331 , CHE 332, CHE 451 and CHE 452. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 era.) F
CHE 434. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY ll. A continuation of the material presented in Advanced
Organic Chemiatry I (CHE 433) with particular emphasis on photochemistry, pericyclic and aromatic
rearrangementa, and the chemistry of radicals and carbenes. Prerequisites: CHE 433. Three clau houn each weelt.
(3 en.) S
CHE 445 . MATHEMATICS FOR CHEMISTS. Mathematical technique■ including differential and inte,ral
calculua, ordinary and partial differential equations, ,raphical method■, approximation methods, complex numben,
Fourier aerie, expansions, determinants coordinate aystema, vector analy1i1, vector and matrix alaebra with
emphasis on application to chemical systema. Prerequisite■: Differential and Inte,ral Calculua. Three clau houn
each weelt. (3 en.) F S
CHE 4S 1. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I. Properties of gaaea, kinetic-molecular theory, molecularenergiea, clauical
and ■tatiltical development of thennodynamics, with applications to thermochemistry and chemical equilibria.
Prerequiaitea: CHE 261 and mathematics throuah Integral Calculua. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houra
each weelt. (4 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
301
CHE 452. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY Il. Kinetic ■ of chemical reaction,, properties of liquids, phase equilibria,
aolutiona, thermodynamics, properties of elcctrolytc1 in solution; and elcctrochemistry. Three lecture houn and
three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: CHE 451. (4 en.) S
CHE 495. CHEMISTRY SEMINAR. Student■ may choose a particular topic in chemistry and, under the
supervision of a faculty member, prepare and present a seminar report on it. The topics arc to be on material not
covered in the undergraduate councs, or may be extcnaiona of ■ome particular aspect of chemistry included in less
detail in an undergraduate counc. (I er.) F S
PHYSICS COURSES (PHY)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ PHY I 01 . COLLEGE PHYSICS I. Introductory Phy1ics. Vecton, mechanics, energy, momentum, conservation
principles and oacillatory motion. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Corequisite: MAT 281
(4 en.) S
PHY 121. GENERAL PHYSICS I. An introductory non-calculus counc dealing with mechanic, and heat. A
functional knowledge of algebra and elementary trigonometry is a1111med. Three clas■ houn and three laboratory
houn each week. (4 en.)
PHY 122. GENERAL PHYSICS Il. An introductory non-calculu ■ counc addreBSing the areas of ■ound, light and
electricity and magnetism. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: PHY 121. (4
en.)
+PHY 202. COLLEGE PHYSICS Il. A continuation of College Physics 101. Heat and thermodynamics,
and acoustics, electricity, magnetism and AC circuits. Three class houn and three laboratory
houn each week. Prerequisite: PHY 101 Corequisite: MAT 282. (4 en.) F
hydrostatic■, wave■
PHY 203 . COLLEGE PHYSICS m. A continuation of College Physics 202. Maxwell'• equation and
electromagnetic waves, light, atomic and nuclear physics, and special relativity. Some time is al■o spent reviewing
material from College Physic ■ 101 and 202 . Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prcrequi1ite:
PHY 202. Corequisite: MAT 381. (4 en.) S
PHY 221. INTERMEDIATE MECHANICS. Vector calculus, Newtonian kinematics, and dynamic, of many
particle 1y1tcma with emph11i1 on integral relation,, motion in a central potential, acattcring theory, 1y1tcma with
conatraints, variational principles in mechanics, ■mall oscillationa, wave equation, and special relativity. Three
class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prcrequi1ite: PHY 202. Corequisite : MAT 381. (4 en.) S
PHY 235. GEOPHYSICS . Primary empha■ ia i■ on geophysical prospecting for oil. Particularly focuse1 on the
following prospecting methods: seismic refraction and reflection, gravitational, magnetic, and electrical. Three
class houn each week. (3 en.) F S
PHY 30 I . INTERMEDIATE ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM. Electric and magnetic field■ and energy, the
effects of matter on them, circuits, Maxwell'• equations, electromagnetic waves. Vector calculu■ and differential
equation, uacd. Prerequisites: PHY 203 and MAT 381. Recommended: PHY 221, MAT 382 and MAT 341.
Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.) F
PHY 331. MODERN PHYSICS I. Relativistic kinematics and dynamic■, particle and wave aspects of radiation and
particles, the atructure of the hydrogen atom, and the many-electron atom■ . Quantum mechanic, introduced for
1be tint time here . Prerequisites: PHY 203 and MAT 381 . Three class houn each week. (3 en.) F
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE
302
PHY 341. MATHEMATICAL METHODS OF PHYSICS I. Vector calculus, Fourier series and integrals, ordinary
differential equations, partial differential equation, general series representations of functions and special functions .
Prerequi1ite1: PHY 203 and MAT 381. Three clau houra each week:. (3 en.) S
PHY 451 . ADV ANCED LABORATORY I. Experiment& selected from topics discul&ed in Modem Physic ■ I. The
lecture time ia uaed to discu11 error analyaia, curve fitting, and points of interest to the laboratory reports.
Prerequi■ite : 12 Phy1ic1 credits. One clau hour each week: and three laboratory houn each week:. (1 er.) F S
PHY 495 . PHYSICS SEMINAR. An introduction to literature, history, teaching, and research methods in the
Junior standing and at least 19 houra of physic, (including College Phy1ic1 1-11)
(1 er.) F S
phy■ical science■• Prerequisite■:
PHYSICAL SCIENCE COURSES (PHS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ PHS 117. BASIC PHYSICAL SCIENCE. An elementary, non-laboratory approach to the physical world.
Topics may be selected jointly by the students and the instructor. Three class hours each week:. (3 crs.)
PHS 125. OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY. This course is designed to present an opportunity to acquire a
general understanding of the Night-Time sky as it relates to Astronomy as well as experiences and opportunities
for observation. Two class hours each week:. (2 crs.)
PHS 135. CHEMISTRY OF MATERIALS. An introduction to the science of chemistry, in which the principles
are lhown in a nonmathematical manner. Thia course attempts to lhow how chemistry is an integral part of our
lives and how it has both solved and created many problems in a modem technological society . Three claaa hours
each week:. (3 en.) S
PHS 145 . ASTRONOMY. A presentation of methods of investigation and results of astronomical discoveries.
Survey of facts and important astronomical theories. Solar system, what is a star, multiple star systems, variable
atan and stellar evolution will be discuaaed. Instruments of the astronomer - telescopes, spectroscopes, etc. will be uaed . Three cla11 hours each week:. (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
303
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOWGY
GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY
INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Associate Professor Stephen Levendos, chair. Professors Gail Ditkoff, Ira London, Richard
Scott, M. Eugene Wilson; Associate Professors Kirk John, Dennis C. Sweeney, Sylvia
Williams; Assistant Professor Elizabeth Mason; Instructor Sammy Lonich.
PURPOSE
Psychology is one of the social science disciplines engaged in the systematic study of
human behavior. Psychology focuses on the study and explanation of patterns of individual
behavior. The latter rests not only on mental processes but on social and physiological ones.
The field of psychology seeks to understand individual behavior as an end in itself as well
as use that information to assist persons to live more productive and fulfilling lives.
PROGRAMS
The department offers two majors: General Psychology and Industrial/ Organizational
Psychology. Industrial/Organizational Psychology is the research and applied specialty
which is concerned with the impact of organizational dynamics upon individual decisionmaking. It is the major for students interested in human resource management careers.
Within the General Psychology major there are options for students interested in counseling
and mental health care careers, educational, child, or developmental psychology. The
department makes available to its majors a publication entitled "The Survival Manual,"
which states policies, procedures, course requirements, and other information of interest to
majors.
AWARDS
The David W. Hambacher Memorial Fund Scholarship Award is given annually.
Applicants must be Psychology majors with a 3.5 &rade point average. Information about
the award is available in the departmental office.
An Outstanding Senior Award is given annually at the spring Psychology Club banquet.
HONOR AND PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES
Qualified majors can join Psi Chi (i'X), the national honor society. The department
also sponsors a Psychology Club which hosts guest speakers, organizes trips to conferences
of professional interest, and provides career and employment information.
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
304
CAREERS
With a bachelor's degree in Psychology, a graduate can secure a variety of entry-level
positions at mental health centers and clinics. A Bachelor of Psychology in the
lndustrial/Organiz.ational area can find employment in personnel resource management.
Students will be prepared to do personnel recruitment, training, testing, and supervision.
Most career opportunities in psychology, however, require an advanced degree.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) Geaen1 Educatioo: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credita of Natural
Science■;
12 credita of Social Science; 18 credita of free electives.
(B)AreaofConceatratioa:
Required: General P1ychology (PSY 100); P■ycholojical Statistic ■ (PSY 225); P■ychology of Leaming (PSY 235);
Hilltory and Sy■tema of P■ychology (PSY 345); Experimental P1ychology (PSY 360).
Oae of the following: Child P■ychology (PSY 205) or Adoleacent P■ychology (PSY 206) or Developmental
Psycholou (PSY 207).
Two of the followina: Educational Paycholou (PSY 208) or lnduatrial Psychology (PSY 209) or Social
P■ycholou (PSY 211) or Psycholojical Testing (PSY 340).
One of the following: P■ychology of Penonality (PSY 305) or Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400).
Nine to 24 credita of additional Psychology courae ■.
Seventeen to 35 credita in related elective,, including courae, in at lea■t three of the followina area■ :
Anthropology, Biology, Chemi■try, Education, Gerontology, Political Science, Philosophy, Physic ■,
Social Work, Sociology, and Special Education.
BACHELOR OF ARTS
IN INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Curricalum:
(A) Geaenl Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science■;
12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: General Psychology (PSY 100); Advanced Industrial Psycholou (PSY 428);
Psychology of Gender Roles (PSY 311); Social Psychology (PSY 211); Psychological Statistics (PSY 225);
lndu■trial Psychology (PSY 209); Psychology of Leaming (PSY 235); Psychology of Testing (PSY 340); Hilltory
and Sy■tema (PSY 345); Interviewing Skills (PSY 370); Principle■ of Management (MOT 201); Organizational
Behavior (MOT 301); Human Reaource Management (MOT 352); Compensation Management (MOT 353); Labor
Relations (MOT 362). 8 credits of psychology electives. 15 credita of Re■tricted Elective■ from Communication
Studie1, Buaineu, Accounting, E.conomics, lndu ■trial Technology Education, Computer Auiated Workshop ■, and
Englilh.
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
305
PSYCHOLOGY COURSES (PSY)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ PSY 100. GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY. A general introduction to the scientific study of the principle■ of behavior
with emphaai■ on auch topic■ 11 method■ of re ■earch, development of the individual, learning, motivation,
emotiona, cOjllitive proceue1, senaation, perception, telling, peraonality, behavior diaorders, and individual
difference■. Experimental re ■earch as well as practical application is stres■ed . (3 era.) F S
+PSY 205. CHil.D PSYCHOLOGY. Age-related change■ in ■ocial, cognitive, emotional, and phyaical
Development from prenatal ■tage■ through later childhood i1 included . Socialization of the child
i■ examined. Prerequi■ite : PSY 100. (3 era.) F S
characteri■tic■.
+ PSY 206. ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY. Factors that influence the growth and development of adolescent■ •
on the relationahip among physiological, psychological and ■ociological factors and theoretical system■
u■ed to deacribe, explain, predict, and work with adolescents. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
Emphaai■
+PSY 207. DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. The patterna of phyaical, mental,
development throu1hout the life ■pan . Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 era.) F S
■ocial
and emotional
+ PSY 208. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY. The learning proceu, with emphasis on learning in school settinga,
i1 examined. The application of current theories and research findings to school settings is considered. The
application of current theorie1 and re■earch finding, to cl11sroom ■ituations ia stressed. Thia course examine■
coJnitive development, intelligence, motivation, discipline, behavioral objective■, and mea■urement and evaluation.
Prerequi■ite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
PSY 209. INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. The application of paychological principle■ of behavior to people and
work conditiona. An examination of buaine■a and induatrial activities and the role of the psycholoJill plays in auch
activitie■• A ltrolli emphuis on the practical and everyday problem■ that confront people in the world of work.
Prerequi■ite : PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
PSY 211. SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY. The interaction between the individual and ■ocial groups within a cultural
context: the individual in a ■ocial role, ■ocial 1roup1, and ■ocial institutions. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
PSY 215 . PSYCHOLOGY OF EXCEPI'IONAL CHILDREN . The psychological problem■ of children who have
hearilli, apeech, mental and behavioral deficits, as well as culturally disadvantaged and gifted children are explored.
A major objective ia to gain a functional understanding of these problems and of modem intervention techniques.
The student i ■ given the opportunity to gain firsthand experience with exceptional children in an observation of a
apecial cla■a in the public schools. Prerequisites: PSY 100 and 205 for Psychology Majors; PSY 100 and 205 or
207 for non-P1ycholo1y Majors. (3 era.) F S
PSY 222. PSYCHOLOGY OF STRESS MANAGEMENT. Source of streu, effects of streu, mediation of streu
will be examined with the focua being on practical application. (3 era.)
and method, of copilli with
ltreaa
PSY 225. PSYCHOLOGICAL STATISTICS. This course provides the student with a working knowledge of
1tati■tical procedures and their application to p■ychological meaaurement and re■earch in the ■ocial and behavioral
acience■• A variety of 1tati■tical method■, includilli meaaure1 of central tendency, variability, and correlation
coefficient■, are presented. Hypothesia te■tilli and prediction are alao included. The student use, the computer
to analyze data and interpret■ the reault■ generated. The application of ltati ■tical procedure, to re■earch que■tiona
in the field of behavioral and ■ocial acience i■ emph11ized. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S
306
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
PSY 235. PSYCHOLOGY OF LEARNING. The nature and conditiona of learning, the type, of learning and the
experimental procedures uaed in the atudy of learning problema. The variou1 interpretationa of the proceu are
examined and evaluated. Prerequi1ite: PSY 100 (3 en.) F
PSY 305. PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY. The euential facton that result in creating individual differences
of human behavior. Current theories uaed to explain the development and lltnlcture of penonality are preaented.
The characteriatic1 of the normal and the maladjulted penonality are identified, with apecial concern for
developmental patterna. Prerequi1ite: PSY 100 (3 en.) S
PSY 310. MENTAL HEALTH/PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT. Problema of penonality and mechani1m1
of adjuatment, including a atudy of the oriJin and re10lution of conflicts, and the role of emotion in the patterna
of behavior. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en) F
PSY 311. PSYCHOLOGY OF GENDER ROLES . How gender roles develop , the facton that sultain theae roles,
and how gender role■ influence the daily livea of men and women. Sex difference, are viewed from hillorical,
biological, psychological, aociological, and anthropologicalpenpective1. Prerequisite PSY 100 (3 en.) S
PSY 340. PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTING. The nature and function of measurement in p1ychology with
concentration on teat conlltnlction problema and procedure■ and an examination of 10me typical teats in the fields
of intelligence, penonality, aptitude■, abilities, and intereats. Prerequisites: PSY 100 and 225 . (3 en.) F S
PSY 345 . HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY. A detailed look at the evolution of paychological
thought. The early problema and method• of paychology are examined in 10me detail aa are the varioua achoola
of paychological thought. Emphasis ia directed toward the effect of the diacoveriea and thinking of the time• on
the courae of the development of psychology aa a acience. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 en.) S
PSY 350. PRINCIPLES OF BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION. A conaideration of the application of the principle■
of contemporary behaviorism to the problem of behavior modification in educational and clinical aettinga. Major
emphasis ia placed on the remediation of problema of academic, emotional, and aocial adjustment in the claaaroom
context. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100 (3 en.)
PSY 360. EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. Empha1iu1 the design of reaearch strategies for evaluating
hypotheaea about behavior and the quantitative analy1i1 of reaearch results. Theae principle• of reaearch are
preaented in the context of, and are applied to the content of experimental inquiry such as aenaation and perception,
conditioning and learning, memory, thinking and problem-10lving, aocial influence proceues, and paychological
telling. Prerequisite: PSY 225 (3 en.) F
PSY 365. METHODS OF RESEARCH. Handa-on laboratory experience• in the application of experimental
procedure• to lhe acientific wdy of behavior. ·Students apply a variety of melhods to reaearch problema in a
number of content areaa and are exposed to the reaearch literature in theae area ■ . A110 included i1 instruction in
the preparation of a formal reaearch report. Prerequisite: PSY 225 and 360 (3 en.) S
PSY 370. INTERVIEWING SKILLS . For aenior students who will soon be aeeking employment in an
organizational aetting, providing knowledge and practical experience in aeveral different and specific type• of
interview,, especially the aelection interview for employment, the career planning interview, exit interview and the
performance evaluation interview. Prerequi1ite: Junior or aenior 1tandi11J. (3 en.) S
PSY 375 . PSYCHOPATHOLOGICAL DISORDERS OF CHILDHOOD. Thi■ courae explore• lhe varioua
p1ychopathological di10rden of childhood. The particular manife1tation in children will be diacuued for each
di10rder, with emphasis on the quantitative nature of clinical symptom characteriatica as illustrated by caae atudie1.
The differentiation between 1imilar diagnoae1 and ■ymptoma, H well a1 the relationahipa between each di10rder
and other emotional familial problema, will be diacuued. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100 and 205 .
PSY 400. ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY . A survey of behavioral pathology - including paychoaea, neuroaes,
character di10rden including drug addiction and p1ychophysiological di10rder - together with a general
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
307
conaiderationof etiology, treatment, and pro,no1i1. Prerequisite: PSY 100 and 12 credit■ in P1ychology. (3 en.)
FS
PSY 410. CLINICAL CHll.D PSYCHOLOGY. Thi■ coune ia a comprehenaive introduction to the field of Clinical
Child PaycholoJY. It will explore the major concept■, reaearch findinaa, and profeuional iuuea influencina the
practice of Clinical Child PaycholoJY. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100, 205 and 375. (3 en.)
PSY 411. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY I. Deai,ned to aid ltUdentl to think creatively about the kinda of information
and data to be obtained in ltlldying individual■. Seeb to point out some of the problerna and procedure, which
conatitute types of clinical procedure■ • Not de■i,ned to train the ltUdent to become a clinical p ■ychologiat, but
rather an introduction to the applied area■ of clinical p■ychology . Prerequi1ite1: PSY 305, 340, 400, and Senior
standing. (3 en.) F
PSY 412. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY II. The projective technique, u■ed to a■ae ■s individual personality. The
conatruction and method■ of interpretation of theae technique,. An introduction to some of the tools of the clinical
p ■ychologiat and counaelor. Prerequisite■: PSY 350, 340, 400, and Senior standing. (3 en.) S
PSY 428. ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. A survey of aeveral important i■sue■ not considered in
PSY 209, including organizational dynamic,, paychological evaluationa, employee right■ law■ , wage and aalary
p1ychologie1, and the undentanding of employee motivationa. Prerequisite: PSY 209 (3 en.) S
PSY 430. PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY. The relationahips between bodily procesaes and behavior. The
relationahip between p■ychological phenomena and the phy■iological functioning of the organism. Senaation and
perception, reflexive behavior, motivation, emotional behavior, and critical functioning. Some laboratory
experience i, included. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en.) F
PSY 452. CLINICAL PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY I. Special study in caae study methods, paychological
testing, and psychopathology . Prerequi1ite1: PSY 340, 400, 411 , and permission of the chairperson of the
department. (3 en.) F
PSY 453 . CLINICAL PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY II. A continuation of Clinical Practicum I, but with
,reater empha1i1 on psychotherapy, uae of clinical instrument■, dia,noatic caae1, and visit■ to hospital■ and clinics.
Prerequisites: PSY 452 and permiaaion of the chairperson of the department. (3 en.) S
PSY 455 . PSYCHOLOGY OF SOCIAL CONTROL. Analyaes of fictionalized descriptiona of attempt■ to control
human behavior from the viewpoint of contemporary behavioral science. Such analyaes reveal the degree to which
the procedure■ and outcome■ described in fictional account■ are conaistent with what is known or aasumed to be
true about behavior and it■ cauae1. Fictionalized account■ of such technique, as physical puni■hmcntl, threats,
indoctrination and brainwashing, drug■ , and hypno1i1 applied to both individuals and group ■ are conaidered. The
moral and ethical i■sue, involved in ■ocial control venue individual freedom are examined in the light of• rapidly
developing behavioral technology and an increaaing real-life incidence of miaapplicationa and abuaes. Prerequisite:
PSY 100. (3 en.) S
PSY 469. PSYCHOLOGY INTERNSHIPS. Student■ will be placed with profeaaional psychological agenciea off
campu1. They will integrate, under supervi1ion, what they have academically been studying - the dutie1 and
re■ponaibilitie1 aui,ned to them by practicing p ■ychologiat■ in the field . Eligibility requirement■ and procedures
for application are available at the departmental office. 01A credit 3-16)
308
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING (PSN)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING
The Public School Nursing Program provides an academic background and the field
experience required to function effectively as a nurse in a school setting from kindergarten
through grade twelve. The program is specifically designed to prepare students for a dual
role as school nurse and health educator.
Applicants to the program must have completed an approved nursing program and be
registered nurses. Upon completion of the program, the Bachelor of Science in Education
degree with a major in Public School Nursing will be awarded.
The Office of Placement and Career Services at California University of Pennsylvania
is active in assisting graduates seeking employment as public school nurses.
The State Department of Education mandates that school nurses be hired according to
a student ratio of 1: 1,500. Therefore, it is expected that the need for highly qualified school
nurses will continue.
Additionally, the demand for competent school nurses can be expected to increase
because of the expanding number of handicapped students mainstreamed into the regular
classroom. Increased emphasis on health education and health counseling should have a
significant effect on the demand.
The general objectives of the Public School Nursing Program are to enable the student
to:
Acquire the knowledge, attitudes, and skills essential for professional school nursing;
Apply theories and concepts pertaining to the role of a school nurse during a supervised
practicum;
Comprehend the nature of an educational setting and serve as an active participant in
curriculum design, faculty affairs, and professional activities;
Function as an integral part of the school health team;
Foster an appreciation of the existing community services for children and youth;
Develop competencies in group dynamics and public relations;
Appreciate the professional organizations of the school nurse that focus on continuing
education and maintaining high-quality standards of performance.
The Public School Nursing Program is designed for applicants who have completed an
approved nursing program and are registered nurses. California University of Pennsylvania
grants up to a total of 68 credits for completion of the R.N. from a hospital program.
Students receiving the R.N. from an associate degree program will have their credits
evaluated according to the credits taken at the college granting the degree. The University
will transfer no more than 90 credits per student from any two-year Community or Junior
College.
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING PROGRAM
309
Usually, at least sixty additional credits are required in order to earn a Bachelor of
Science degree in Education and certification as a Public School Nurse.
The applicant must possess current licensure as a professional registered nurse in
Pennsylvania.
The applicant must give evidence of one year's supervised experience as a graduate
nurse.
Thirty credits must be earned at California University of Pennsylvania in fulfillment of
the residency requirements.
Curriculum:
Public School Nuning (PSN 306); Public Health Nuning I & ll (PSN 301 & 302); Nutrition and Community
Health (PSN 305); Prevention and Control of Communicable Diaeaac (PSN 405); Foundation, of Education (EDF
100); Educational P■ychology (PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Guidance (EDS
420); one Sociology counc; Introduction to Exceptionality (ESP SOI); 9 credits in Humanitie1; 9 credit■ in Social
Science,; 8 credits of free elective,. A minimum of fifteen houn of practicum in the public school i1 required in
addition to the regular classroom work.
PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING COURSES (PSN)
PSN 301. PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING I. A lltlldy of the American health care delivery ayatcm in terma of an
hiatorical, philosophical, and sociological pcnpcctive. Arcaa of emphasis include current trends in health care,
utilization of health acrvice■, resource,, government participation in health promotion, rcaearch, and iMOvationa
in the health field. (3 en.)
PSN 302. PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING ll. The need for health education as it relates to the taxonomy of
lifestyle; the concept of wellne11 i■ examined. Contemporary iaauea and trend■ arc analyzed in depth in terma of
promotion of penonal and community health, current legislation, and the role of the achoo! nunc as a health
educator. (3 en.)
PSN 305. NUTRITION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH. A review of the basic concept■ and principles in
nutrition; the aaac11ment of nutritional need, at different stages of growth and development. Focuaca upon cultural
difference, in food habit■, aclection of food, importance of diet in health and diaeaac, quackery, budgeting, special
nutrition problema of the achoo! age child, nutrition education, and role of the achoo! nunc . (3 en.)
PSN 306. PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING. A comprchenaive lltlldy of the _physical, aocial, and emotional
development of children with aaac11ment procedures for identification of deviation, from nonnal. Basic principles
and concept■ relating to the organization of the school health program, school health services, health inatruction,
and healthful school living. Practicum in a public achoo! setting provides opportunity for application of concept■
developed in theory . Prerequisite: Student■ must aubmit evidence of current CPR certification prior to entering this
practicum. (4 en.)
PSN 405. PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASE. A conceptual approach to the
lltlldy of communicable diaeaacs with recognition of significant historical events, as well as identification of the
social, psychological and economic facton involved. Explores current control meaaurcs, roles of administrative
agencies, methods of epidemiological investigation, and the role of the achoo! nunc. (3 en.)
310
R. N.ANESTHETISTPROGRAM
R. N. ANESTIIETIST PROGRAM
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION FOR C.R.N.A.
This program for Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetists is designed for persons who
have completed an approved anesthetist program and are currently licensed CRNA's. The
program provides the academic background and field experience necessary for the student
to develop skill in functioning more effectively in an instructional and administrative
capacity.
The CRNA Program is offered by the College of Education and Human Services. The
College of Education and Human Services meets all standards of accrediting agencies.
California University of Pennsylvania is accredited by the Middle States Association of
Colleges and Universities. The College of Education and Human Services has national
accreditation from the National Association of Colleges of Teacher Education.
Studies have indicated a strong demand for nurse anesthetists. Certainly, unlimited
opportunities are available to the Certified Nurse Anesthetist who has additional preparation
in the area of instruction.
The general objectives of the program are to enable the student to:
Develop the competencies required for effective media utili:zation practice;
Develop competencies in group dynamics and public relations;
Develop competencies relating to the administrative aspects of anesthesia as a result of
planned field experience;
Design a conceptual framework for curriculum planning;
Develop a theory of learning which lends support and evidence of applicability to an
effective instructional process;
Understand the principles underlying the construction of tests and the statistical
measures of evaluation.
California University of Pennsylvania will grant up to a total of 68 credits for
completion of the R.N. and an additional 26 credits for completion of the anesthetist
program.
All R. N. 's graduating from an Associate Degree Program must have their transcripts
evaluated to determine the number of credits to be granted. The University will transfer no
more than 75 credits per student from any two-year Community or Junior College.
To complete the requirements for a Bachelor of Science in Education, students must
complete 34 additional credits of approved undergraduate work. Thirty credits must be
earned at California University of Pennsylvania.
R.N.ANESTHETISTPROGRAM
311
Curriculum:
Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Learning Re10Urce1 and Instructional Technology (EDF 308);
Introduction to Guidance (EDS 420); The Secondary School Curriculum (EDS 456); Introduction to Instruction
(EDS 425); Educational Teata and Measurements (EDS 430); Administration and Field Experience (EDS 411); 12
credilll in Humanities and Social Sciences.
REGISTERED NURSE ANESTHETIST COURSES (RNA)
RNA 411 . ADMINISTRATION AND FIELD EXPERIENCE FOR NURSE ANESTHETIST. The principles and
practice of administration of nurse anaesthetiat and policies concerning planning, human relations, and personnel
as well aa the administration of business affairs, legal liability and organizational problems. In addition to the
regular classroom work, a 15-hour field experience affords studenlll opportunities for practical experiences in
administrative functions through observation and participation in the programs of nearby hospitals. (4 crs.)
312
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
ANTHROPOLOGY (ANT)
POLITICAL SCIENCE (POS)
-GENERAL
- INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: POLITICAL SCIENCE
-PRE-LAW
-PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
SOCIAL SCIENCE (SOS)
- SOCIAL SCIENCE AREA MAJOR
SOCIOLOGY (SOC)
Associate Professor James Wood, chair. Professors Rollin M. Barber, Ronald L. Michael,
William F. Schweiker; Associate Professors William D. Hepner; Assistant Professors Joseph
C. Heim, John P. Nass, Willie H. Pigg.
PURPOSE
Common to the degree programs offered by the Department of Social Science is the
study of people interacting with one another. Their common approach is scientific; that is,
they study patterns of human behavior by objective, measurable methodologies.
Anthropology is the most comprehensive since there is no aspect of human development
or behavior that it does not study, although it traditionally has focused on pre-industrial
societies. Anthropology includes such diverse subject areas as ethnology, medical and
psychological anthropology, archaeology, and human evolution.
Political Science is the most prescribed of the above disciplines. It limits its interests
to the political aspects of human behavior, both national and international, including the
study of power and public organizations. For this reason Pre-law and Public Administration
are two areas closely related to Political Science.
Sociology, which is closely aligned with anthropology, is less comprehensive. It
concentrates on the nature, structure and interactional processes in large and small groups,
institutions and societies, usually found in modem industrial societies. It can focus, for
example, on political institutions and behavior, but it usually does this in relation to other
institutions, such as the economic, educational, familial and religious ones.
The Social Science Area major is general and interdisciplinary in nature. It presents
an overview and the interrelationship of all the social science disciplines, not simply those
stated above. For more information about this program, please inquire at the departmental
office. Courses in this area contribute to a historical perspective within the social sciences.
. DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
313
PROGRAMS
Anthropology, Social Science and Sociology are majors without optional specializations.
Political Science is a major with three options: General Political Science, Public
Administration, and Pre-law. The Public Administration option is an interdisciplinary field
of study with courses offered through the programs in Business and Economics and Urban
Affairs, as well as Political Science. Under the International Studies Program, Political
Science advises the International Studies: Political Science option. This course of study
also is interdisciplinary in its coursework. Finally, the department, in conjunction with the
College of Education and Human Services, provides a teacher certification program for those
interested in teaching the social sciences in secondary schools.
Field experiences are available in archaeology and political science. An archaeology
field school runs during the summer school session. Students participate in the excavation
of an archaeological site whereby they apply what was learned in class to an actual dig.
An internship in Political Science is a form of field experience. Students are placed in
governmental agencies and the offices of public administrators and elected officials where
they can observe and practice what they have learned in the classroom.
HONOR SOCIETIES
Anthropology majors are eligible for membership in the Gamma Chapter of Lambda
Alpha (AA), the national honor society. Requirements are the completion of twelve credits
of Anthropology course work and a 3.0 grade point average or higher in the major, as well
as an overall 2. 7 GPA.
Students in the social sciences are eligible for membership in Pi Gamma Mu (IlrM),
the social science honor society. Students must have completed sixty-four university credits,
including a minimum of twenty credits in social science course work, and have a 3.0 or
higher grade point average.
AWARDS
The Joseph Lynn Marino Memorial Award is presented annually. For consideration an
applicant must have a minimum grade point average of 3.5, be enrolled in the College of
Liberal Arts and have successfully completed two courses in Anthropology. Persons
interested in applying can secure further information from the departmental office.
The Edward McNall Bums Scholarship Award is given annually to any individual
majoring in Anthropology, Sociology, Political Science, Economics, History, or Urban
Affairs. See the departmental office for further information.
CAREERS
Students with an undergraduate degree can secure work in entry level social service and
personnel resource areas. Career opportunities, however, increase with the attainment of
314
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
graduate course work and degrees. The social sciences as a whole prepare students to enter
careers in law, public administration, the ministry, personnel resource management,
education, social service professions and law enforcement.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 crcdita of Humanitiea; 12 crcdita of Natural
Science,; 12 crcdita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free elective,.
(B) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Anthropology (ANT I 00); History of Anthropology (ANT 420);
World Elhnology (ANT 255); Field School (ANT 100) or Prehistoric American Indiana (ANT 355); 21 credita of
elective, in Anthropology; Principles of Sociology; plua 32 credita of related elective,.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credita in Natural
Science■;
12 credita in Social Sciences; 18 crcdita of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration (68 credits): Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National
Government (POS 105); Seminar in American Politic, (POS 450). One course each in American Politics, Political
Theory, International Relationa/Comparative Politic,, and Public Administration/Public Policy. 15 credita of
Political Science elcctivea. At leall nine crcdita mull be at the 300 level or above. Related couraca (32 crcdita) :
Hiatory of the United State, to 1877 (HIS 101); Hiatory of the United State, aince 1877 (HIS 102); European Life
and Society to 1815 (HIS 121); European Life and Society 1ince 1815 (HIS 122); 20 crcdita in related couraca, 15
crcdita of which mull be at the 200 level or above.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION TRACK
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credits in Natural
Science,; 12 crcdita in Social Sciences; 18 crcdita of free elective,.
(B) Area of Concentration (68 crcdita): Political Science: Introduction to Political Science (POS 100);
American National Government (POS 105); Introduction to Public Adminiatration (POS 220); Introduction to Public
Policy (POS 300); Seminar in American Politics (POS 450). Manaaement: Introduction to Microeconomic, (ECO
201); Introduction to Macroeconomics (ECO 202); State and Local Finance (ECO 307); Financial Management of
Non-Profit Organizations (FIN 307); Principles of Management (MOT 201); Marketing for Non-Profit
Organizations (M1CT 341). Urban Studies: Survey of Urban Affairs (XUA 101). Ilectiv~: 18 credita from
approved lill. With the rccommendationofthe Political Science faculty members, studenta may earn up to 6 hours
credit through an internship program. Related Courses: Computer Science (specific course selected with advisor's
approval); Stati ■tics (MAT 215); Group Diacuaaion Management (COM 102); Oral Communication: Management
(COM 250); 2 credits of related electives selected with advisor's approval.
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
315
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY
Curriculum:
(A) General Education. Composition 1-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Science■ ;
12 credit& of Social Sciences; 18 credit& of free elective■ •
(B) Area of Concentration: Principle, of Sociology (SOC 100); Re■carch Method■ (SOC 200); History of
Social Thought (SOC 375); 27 credita of major electives. Related Courses: Introduction to Anthropoloay (ANT
100); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National Government (POS 105); Statistic, (MAT
215); Elements of Economics (ECO 100); General Psychology (PSY 100); Social P■ychology (PSY 211); 3 credita
in Philo■ophy; 8 credit& of electives.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
CERTIFICATION IN SOCIAL STUDIES FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Curriculum:
(A) Geaeral Education: 15 credita in Humanities, including Composition I - D (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits
in Natural Sciences; 9 credita in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication
(COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credita of free electives.
(B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208);
Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa
and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465);
Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional
Learners (EDU 340); Teaching of Social Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 445) or Modem Methods (EDS 455);
Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461).
(C) Professional Specialization: Introduction to Anthropology (ANT 100) and one additional Anthropology
course; Introduction to Geography (GEO 100) md one additional Geography course; History of the United States
to 1877 (HIS 101); History of the United State■ 1ince 1877 (HIS 102); Elemcnta of Economics (ECO 100);
Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201) or Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Introduction to Political
Science (POS 100); American Government (POS 105); Educational Psychology (PSY 11 O); Adolescent Psychology
(PSY 206); Principles of Sociology (SOC 100) and one additional Sociology course.
(1) For concentralion in Anthropology: Origins of Man (ANT 285). 9 credita from the following : Culture
Block (choose 3 or 6 credita): Primitive Institutions (ANT 210); Enculturation (ANT 235); Peasant and Folk
Culture (ANT 240); Culture Change and Culture Shock (ANT 250); World Ethnology (ANT 255); Southwest
Ethnology (ANT 270); Indians of North American (ANT 280). Archaeology Block (choose 3 or 6 credits):
Archaeology Field School I (ANT 101 - maximum of 3 credita); Old World Prehistory (ANT 200); classical
Archaeology (ANT 260); Archaeology (ANT 260); Archaeology & Culture History (ANT 287); Prehistoric
American Indians (ANT 355).
(2) For concentralion in Economics: Intermediate Microeconomics (ECO 301); Intermediate Macroeconomics
(ECO 302); 6 credita from Economics course■ 200 level or above.
(3) For concentralion in Geography: Physical Geography (EAS 160); Human Geography (GEO 105);
Economic Geography (GEO 200); Cartography (EAS 171 or Map and Aerial Photography (EAS 272).
(4) For concentration in History : European Life and Society to 1815 (HIS 121); European Life and Society
since 1815 (HIS 122); Seminar in United State■ History (HlS 495); any History elective.
(5) For concentralion in Political Science: 6 credit& from the following : Municipal Government (POS 205);
Political Parties (POS 218); Introduction to Public Administration (POS 220); Constitutional Law (POS 250); Civil
Liberties (POS 215). also 6 credits from the following : Comparative Politics (POS 215); Development of Political
Thought (POS 225); International Relations (POS 236); Politics and Government in the Soviet Union (POS 280);
foreign Policy: A Comparative Approach (POS 320).
(6) For concentralion in Psychology: Child Psychology (PSY 205); Mental Hygiene (PSY 310); Social
Psychology (PSY 211); Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400) .
316
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
(1) For concentralion in Sociology: Contemporary Social Problems (SOC 205); Minority Group Relationa
(SOW 218); The Family (SOC 220); Url>an Sociology (SOC 235); Social Inatitutiona (SOC 240).
Students must also achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to acquire
Pennsylvania certification.
ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES (ANT)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+ ANT 100. INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY. An introduction to biological anlhropoloJY (primatoloJY,
hominid evolution, variation in modem man); archaeoloJY (methods, evidence, of the evolution and diffusion of
culture); anthropological linguiatica; and cultural anthropology (methods of participant observation, comparative
data from non-Welllem 10eietiea, divenity and unity of culture). F, S
+ ANT 101. ARCHAEOLOGY FIELD SCHOOL. An introduction to archaeological procedure, by participation
in the excavation of a ailc. Students will be involved in all phaaca of an archaeological excavation, from initial
preparation of the site for excavation through the proceaaing of artifacts at the campu1 archaeological laboratory.
(3-6 credits)
ANT 200. OLD WORLD PREHISTORY. A middle-level aurvey of the main archaeological focal pointa of the Old
World, requiring a basic understanding of archaeological concepts, goala and technique,. (3 en.)
ANT 205. CULTURAL RESOURCE MANAGF.MENT: HISTORICAL PRESF.RV ATION. The counc acquainta
the student with the need for preservation of cultural rcaource1 (hiatoric preservation), the legialation aupportin,
auch work, and the way the work is performed. Studenta learn what i1 meant by hiatoric preservation and cultural
rcaource atudy, what types of queations prcacrvationiata mull acck anawen to, how significant rcaourcea (hiatoric
and archaeological) arc identified, how it i■ detennincd whether a rcaource i■ considered significant, how to do
architectural deacriptions of historic atructurca, and how to complete the National Regilller of Hiatoric Place,
nomination forms. Part of the course involve ■ on-site atudy of rcaourcea. Prcrcquiaite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 210. PRIMrrIVE INSTITUTIONS . Analysia and compariaon of the 10eial, political, and religious institutions
of pre-literate and pre-industrial peoplea. (3 en.)
ANT 220. AZTECS, MAYAS, AND INCAS. An introduction to and aurvey of the ethnoloJY and pre-conquest
archaeology of the advanced American Indian culturca ofMeao-Amcrica and the Andean Culture area. Inquiry into
the problems of cultural precocity. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 225 . EIGHTEENTH AND NINETEENTH CENTURY FOLK CRAFTS AND TRADmONS . Studenta learn
how to place American folk crafts and tnditions in cultural perspective by learning how to identify auch crafts and
tnditions, detennining how they have evolved through time, and identifying the role auch practice, held in the
American family. They learn the rudimenti of a number of the crafts and tnditions by observing them bein,
performed and by doing them. They learn how to gather material folk cultural data by collcctin, data on a craft
or folk tradition in Southwestern Pennaylvania. (3 en.)
ANT 226. HISTORIC SITES ARCHAEOLOGY. The course acquaints atudents with techniques, philoaophy, work,
and aims of that branch of history and anthropology that atudiea the American pall from a cultural-archaeological
point of view. The course includes study of military and community restorations baaed on hiatorical archaeoloay,
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
317
auch as Colonial Williamsburi, Plimouth Plantation, Independence Square, Fort Michilimackinac, Fort Ligonier,
and Fort Neceuity. Some laboratory and field experience• included. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 231 . MEDICAL ANTHROPOLOGY . An introductory coune that emphasize, the contributiona from
biological anthropoloJY, archaeology, and cultural anthropoloJY to the ltudy of human aickneu and health.
Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 235 . ENCULTURATION. A croaH:ultural examination of the univeraal human problem of transforming a
neonate into a functioning adult in a particular culture. (3 en.)
ANT 250. CULTURE CHANGE AND CULTURE SHOCK. Conditiona and facton which stimulate or retard
cultural change are conaidered with reference to specific historical, ethnological and aociological data and theories .
Emphasize, the impact of Weatem technoloiy upon non-We■tem culture■ while alao treatina of the
•primitivization• of the Welllem world. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.)
ANT 255. WORLD ETHNOLOGY. An advanced coune in cultural anthropology, in which comparative data from
text and films about non-Welllem culture, are uaed to reveal cultural differences and similarities and the nature of
the ethnographic enterpriae. (3 en.)
ANT 260. CLASSICAL ARCHAEOLOGY. The ba1ic concept of Western man as revealed in the archaeological
record from Crete through the Hellenistic period. (3 en.)
ANT 270. SOUTHWEST ETHNOLOGY. An examination of the conatantly changing cultural life styles that have
existed in the Southwest Cultural Area of North American. (3 en.)
ANT 280. INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA. Social anthropology and cultural ecology of American Indian
culture,. (3 en.)
ANT 281. SUB-SAHARAN AFRICA. The cultural anthropology of aelected African groups, past and
contemporary. (3 en.)
ANT 285 . ORIGINS OF MAN . Contemporary biological anthropology, emphasizing the evolution of human being■
part of the evolution of the primates. (3 en.)
H
ANT 287. ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURE HISTORY . A comprehensive survey of archaeology: history,
theory and techniques. (3 en.)
ANT 329. ANTHROPOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Application of theoretical knowledge to practical aituationa, to
meet career and program need ■ by meana of auperviaion and training, to enhance a student'• profe11ional viability.
(VA credit)
ANT 355 . PREHISTORIC AMERICAN INDIANS . The archaeology and reconstnicted culture of Indiana of the
ealtem United State,. (3 en.)
ANT 385 . PRIMATE SOCIETIES AND BEHAVIOR. Advanced 1tudy of the non-human primates, including
clauification to the generic level. Prerequisite: ANT 285 or permi11ion of the instnictor. (3 en.)
ANT 420. HISTORY OF ANTHROPOLOGY. (3 en.)
ANT 495 . SEMINAR IN ANTHROPOLOGY. (3 en.)
318
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
POLITICAL SCIENCE COURSES (POS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+POS 100. INTRODUCTION TO POLrrICAL SCIENCE. Thi ■ course is designed to introduce lllldenu to key
proceue1, and acton in the political world. It is intended to be a general, not detailed,
examination, and attempU to encourage undentandina, reflection and critical thinking. (3 en.) F,S
idea■, in■titutiona,
+ POS IOS. AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. Thia ia an introductory course in American government, focusing on
the major inatitutions and processe■ in the American political system. Topics discussed in the course include
separation of powen, checks and balances, civil liberties, political parties, the Congress, the President, the Supreme
Court, federalism, and policy-making proceuea. (3 en.) F, S
POS 205. MUNICIPAL GOVERNMENT. The organizational forms of municipalitie1, the proceu of decisionmaking and implementation, and proposed 10lutiona to problems of an urlian society. (3 en.)
POS 210. POLrrICS OF WESTERN EUROPE. A comparative analysi1 of the
of the nation■ of Great Britain, France, and Well Germany, and how these
■y■tem. Prerequisite■ : POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.) S
in■titutiona, proceue■,
nation■
and policiea
relate to the United Statea
POS 218. POLmCAL PARTIES, CAMPAIGNS, AND ELECTIONS . The organization and operations of
political parties in the United States. Careful attention is given to the methods used by parties in nominating
candidates in conducting campaign■ and to the significance of pressure groups, public opinion, and the electorate
in our political life. Prerequisite: POS 105. (3 en.)
POS 219. THE MASS MEDIA AND AMERICAN POLITICS. The interaction of politics and the mau media
within American society. Topic ■ include media effecu on political socialization, techniques of opinion
manipulation, propaganda, pre11 responsibility, public opinion polling, and government control of the media.
Special attention ia devoted to the use of television as an instrument of communication. Prerequisites: POS 105.
(3 en.)
POS 220. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION. Primarily an introduction to the study of
American public adminiatration, this course seeks to achieve several broad objectives. Firat, it attempta to convey
an understanding of the significant role played by administration in present-day American government and of the
implication■ of that role for a democratic society. It ha ■ the further purpose of providing insight into the specific
relationahipa between administration and the broad political environment from which it arises and in which it
operates. Finally, and mainly, the course offen opportunity for consideration of those more specialized and
technical facton, ■uch as public organization, public penonnel, budgeting, and executive leadership, that are
involved in the formulation and administration of public policy. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.)
POS 222. THE ADMINISTRATION OF CRIMINAL JUSTICE IN THE UNITED STATES. The operations of
the criminal ju■tice ay■tem in the United States. Topics include crime in American, the rule of law, the role of the
police, the function of the prosecuting and defense attorney, criminal courts and trial processes, sentencing,
corrections, incarceration, probation and parole. Prerequisite: POS !OS. (3 en.)
POS 228. DEVELOPMENT OF POLmCAL THOUGHT: CLASSICAL AND MEDIEVAL. The basic ideas,
value,, and methods of the profound political thinken and philosophers from Claaaical Greece, Rome, and the
Chri■tian Church. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
319
POS 229. DEVELOPMENT OF POLmCAL THOUGHT: MODF.RN. A sequel to the questions and approaches
niacd in POS 228. The major political philoaophen from the Renaissance to the beginning of the twentieth
century. Prerequisites: POS JOO and POS 105. (3 en.)
POS 235. STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. A treatment of the organiution, powen, functions, and
problem of It.ate and local governmental units . Emphaais ia placed on the growing complexity of relationship,
among the various levels of government II a remit of technological developments and the growth of metropolitan
areas. (3 en.)
POS 236. INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS. A pnctical and theoretical introduction to a
atudy of syatcmatic patterns in international relations. Includes analysis of rules, instruments, proceucs, decisionmaking facton, and conflict resolution. (3 en.)
POS 237. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS. An analysis and evaluation of the United Nations and other
international organiutions, and of aome of the theoretical concepts and pnctical problems involved. Prerequisite:
POS 100 or pcnniuion of instructor. (3 en.)
POS 270. POLmCS OF THE DEVELOPING AREAS . A compantive analy1i1 of the problems faced by recently
independent nations of the Third World and the idea ■ and institutions they have developed in an attempt to addrcu
the difficulties of political, economic, and aocial change. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 en.)
POS 280. POLmcs IN THE SOVIET UNION. Basic components of Soviet politics: background history, Marxist
ideology, and the historical development of Ruaaian political institutions and pncticea from the Revolution to the
prcacnt. Prerequisite,: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 era.) F
POS 300. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC POLICY. Primarily in acminar faahion . Students prcacnt and discuss
major idea■ from aasigned readings . Formal lectures arc alao scheduled when needed to prcacnt basic ideas and
information. Prerequisite: Any Political Science course or penniuion of the instructor. (3 era.)
POS 306. CONGRESS . An intensive examination of the legislative problems and procedure■ of Congress. Students
arc introduced to auch topic, as the rcprcacntational functions of Congrcu, the role of parties and leaden in
Congrcu, the importance of the committee system, and the forces affecting congrcuional decision-making.
Prerequisites: POS 105 or pennisaion of the instructor. (3 era.)
POS 307. REVOLUTION . A compantive study of the phenomenon of revolution, encompassing the cauacs, eventa,
and principal acton in thoac periods that culminate in the outbreak of violent political change. Prerequisites: POS
100 and POS 105 . (3 era.) F
POS 310. THE PRESIDENCY. Intensive study of the American presidency, focusing on personality, organiution
of the office, uac and miauac of power, and policy making. Prerequisites: POS 105 or penniuion of instructor.
(3 en.)
POS 314. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW: GOVERNMENTAL POWERS . A study of the major provisions of the
American Constitution and the growth of American constitutional law baaed on analysis and discussion of leading
judicial decisions. Prerequisite ■ : POS 105 or pennisaion of instructor. (3 era.)
POS 315. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW: CIVIL LIBERTIES . A atudy of the development and meaning of the rights
and liberties guannteed to persona under the Constitution of the United States. Special emphasis ia placed on the
antccedenta of and the adoption of the Bill of Righta and a description of the court structure through which the
meaning of civil liberties is determined in specific situations. Prerequisites: POS 105 or penniaaion of the
instructor. (3 en.)
320
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
POS 316. JUDICIAL PROCESS. Intensive ltlldy of the judicial proceu in the United States and the relationship
between the judicial ayatem and the larger American social ayatem. Prerequisite: POS 105 or permiuion of the
imtructor. (3 en.)
POS 320. U. S. FOREIGN POLICY: Policy objectives, patterns of decision-making, and U .S. foreign policy
actions. The roles of interest groups, public opinion, Congress, and other external influences in U. S. foreign
policy are alao examined. Prerequisite: POS 105 . (3 en.)
POS 322. POLIDCS OF THE MIDDLE EAST. A comparative analysis of the institutions, proceues, and politic•
of Middle Eastern governments and how these have been shaped by the international relations of the region.
Prerequiaite: POS 100. (3 en.)
POS 323. POLIDCS OF LATIN AMERICA. A comparative analysis of the institutions, proce1se1, and politic,
of Latin American countries and how these have been shaped by the international relations of the region .
Prerequisite: POS 100. (3 crs.)
POS 325. POLIDCS OF ASIA. A comparative analysis of the institutions, processes,and policies of China, Japan,
and India and how these nations relate to the system in the United States. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105.
(3 en.)
POS 327. CONTEMPORARY POLIDCAL THOUGHT. A general survey of the major political ideas and
thinken of the twentieth century, drawing connections between these ideas and contemporary developments in
philosophy, paychology, economics, and sociology . Prerequisite,: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 crs.)
POS 329 . INTERNSHIP IN POLIDCAL SCIENCE. Practical field experience to supplement academic wor~,
developing profesaional competencies in research and communication skills.
POS 330. AMERICAN POLIDCAL IDEAS. An advanced course in political theory: the major political ideas and
controversiea that are associated with the development of American political thought. Prerequisites : Any Political
Science course or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.)
POS 335 . ADMINISTRATIVE LAW. The legal structure and political environment within federal administrative
agencies in the United States that formulate public policy . Emphasis is given to the growth of the administrative
state within the United States, the necessity for the delegation of legislative authority to administrative agencies and
the need for judicial control of the bureaucracy . Prerequisites: POS 100, POS 105 or permission of the instructor.
(3 crs.)
POS 450. SEMINAR IN AMERICAN POLITICS . Thia seminar, required of all Political Science majors, is
deaigned to provide intensive examination of a specific and narrowly focused area in the field of American politics.
The course ia research-oriented and consists of individually prepared contributions by all participants, which are
discussed and critically appraised by all members of the class. Prerequisites: Students taking this course must be
Seniors majoring in Political Science. (3 en.) S
SOCIOLOGY COURSES (SOC)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+SOC 100. PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY. Examines interaction among human beings. Emphasis on natural
and social heritage, the meaning and functions of culture, and the origin, function, and characteristics of social
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
321
institution,, with inquiry into the nature and genesis of 10Cial pathology. (3 en.) F, S
+SOC 110. ETHNIC, RACIAL AND SEXUAL MINORITIES. Disadvantaged, not just numerical, minoritiea are
studied in tenna of their demoaraphic and ecoloaical characteristic,. Contemporary iuues are studied in historical
context. (3 en.)
+ SOC 125 . MEN, WOMEN AND WORK. Through readings, audio-visual material■ , panel, and informal student
reporta, clasa memben investigate the role• of men and women in the existing economic structure, the reason, for
the■e role, and the development of trends and changes in the economic area . Diacu11ion-cenlered. (3 en.)
+SOC 155. CHARISMATIC LEADERS. The characteristic, of chariamatic leaden and the methodology u■ed
to study thia phenomenon. Diacu11ion-centered cla1■e1 . (3 en.)
+ SOC 165. MODERN FREEDOM MOVEMENTS. The study of 10Cial movements in American IOCiety. Basic
focus is upon 10Cial change brought about by 10Cial movements. (3 en.)
SOC 175 . CONTEMPORARY WOMEN'S MOVEMENT. An investigation of themes, philosophies, and activists
in the current women's movement. (3 en.)
SOC 200. RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIOLOGY. Fundamental concepta of systematic, empirical 10Cial
research; the logical and procedural rulea for scientific problem solving and the method■ and techniques for
implementing the■e rules in actual research. (3 en.)
SOC 205 . CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL PROBLEMS . Contrasting theoretical approaches provide alternative
approachea to undentanding and analyzing 10Cial problems. (3 en.) F,S
SOC 210. SOCIAL STRATIFICATION. The student is made more aware of the class, status, and power inequities
of our stratified 10Ciety. Claa■, cute, and estate ayatems are compared. Prcrequiaite: SOC 110. (3 en.)
SOC 215 . SOCIOLOGY OF THE WORKPLACE. Basic patterns of work behavior in American culture. Some
emphaai■ ia placed upon career path, and the impact of technological change upon work. (3 en.)
SOC 220. THE FAMILY. The institution of the family within the context of American culture. Prerequisite: SIC
100. (3 en.)
SOC 225. SOCIOLOGY OF AGING . Theoretical issues of aging, research, and the methodological tradition,
involved in the study of the human aging proce11. Special emphasis is placed upon the interaction of pertinent
biological and sociological variables related to the proces■es of work, retirement, leisure, institutionalization, and
death . Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 240. URBAN SOCIOLOGY. Focu■ea on the relationahip between the demographics of urbanization and the
10Cial-psychological characteristic, of urbanism. Dcterminiat, compositional, and sub-cultural theories are
compared. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 260. CRIME. Types of criminal behavior, the epidemiology of crime in the United States, the social baais
of law, and major etiological forces responsible for lawbreaking. General systems theory is the basic theoretical
penpective u■ed in this cour■e . Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 285 . SOCIOLOGY OF SUBSTANCE USE AND ABUSE. The 10Ciology of substance uae and abuae, as
well as the approaches for treatment. Special emphasis is given to alcohol and the more commonly abused drugs
(e.g., nicotine, marijuana, and cocaine). The course focuacs on the social procesacs that influence substance abuac
and the 10Cietal coats and con,equencea. Prerequisite: SOC 100 or permission of the instructor. (3 en.)
322
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
SOC 305 . SYMBOLIC INTERACTIONISM. A 10eiological contribution to 10eial psychology, aymbolic
interactioniam, ia viewed as complementing paychological contribution■ to the field, particularly to the Gestalt,
p ■ychoanalytical , and neo-behavioral theorie,. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 370. SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY BUILDING . Some of the logical baaca for determining the relative merits
of alternative a1&Umptiona concerning matten of fact or 10eial policy. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOC 375 . HISTORY OF SOCIAL THOUGHT. Major theoretical penpectivea are compared in terms of their
aaaumptiona and utility in explaining social behavior; emphasis is on conflict theory, aymbolic interactioniam, and
structure functionaliam. Intended primarily for Sociology and Social Work: majon in the sixth semester or higher.
(3 en.)
SOC 495 . SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY. (3 en.)
SOCIAL SCIENCE COURSES (SOS)
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
+SOS 100. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL SCIENCE. An introduction to the broad field of human behavioral
studies, with concern for the changing and contrasting patterns evidenced therein. (3 era.) F, S
+SOS I 01 . WORLD CULTURE. A survey of the evolution of human culture: governmental, economic, 10eial,
religious, intellectual, and aesthetic activities from ancient times to the beginning of the modem world . (3 era.)
+SOS 107. UNIVERSAL CULTURE PROBLEMS . Problems of technological change in ancient Egypt and in
modem China; problems of social organization in industrial western nations and in the U .S.S.R.; problems of
allocation of authority in ancient Greece and in Nazi Germany; and problems of religion in medieval Europe and
the Middle Eaat today . (3 era.)
SOS 110. QUALITY OF LIFE. (3 era .)
SOS 155 . CULTURAL VIEWS OF WOMEN. Women in five different cultures. Special attention ia given to the
work: ofMafiaret Mead . (3 era.)
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
323
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
SOCIAL WORK
Associate Professor Edward Brown, chair. Professors Beverly G. Willison.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SOCIAL WORK
The Social Work program is designed to (1) provide the student with generalist skills
for direct entry into social work practice through a variety of agencies and human services
settings at a beginning professional level; (2) to prepare the student for entrance to graduate
programs of social work or related professional schools; and (3) to contribute to a general
college education by helping students to understand social welfare needs, services, and issues
relevant to a modem industrial democracy.
Graduates of the program are eligible for full membership in the National Association
of Social Workers and also for advanced standing if they choose to continue their social
work education at an accredited graduate social work program. The program provides
career opportunities in such areas as personal services (casework counseling, family
development, therapy, etc.); protection services (corrections, public health,judicial system,
etc.); maintenance services (child care, institutions, mental health, physical health, public
welfare, etc.); and information/advising services (education, hot lines, crisis centers,
consulting, etc.).
For graduation student must maintain at least a 2.0 QPA average in the major.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Compoaition 1-D (ENG 101-102); 12 credits in Humanitie■ ; 12 credits in Natural
Science,; 12 credits in Social Science; 18 credits of free elective■ .
(B) Ana of Concentration: Introduction to Social Work (SOW 150); Social Work Interviewing (SOW 301);
Social Work Method■ I (SOW 255); Social Work Method ■ D (SOW 346); Social Work Methods ill (SOW 347);
Social Work Reacarch Method• (SOW 450); Human Growth and Behavior I (SOW 215); Human Growth and
Behavior (SOW 216); Minority Group Relation• (SOW 208); Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400); Human Sexuality
and Society (SOW 475); Social Change (SOW 370); Delivery of Servic e ■ (SOW 365); Social Welfare as a Social
lnatitution (SOW 290); Child Welfare (SOW 270); Juvenile Delinquency (SOW 265); Contemporary Social
Problems (SOW 205); Advanced Clinical Methoda in Social Work (SOW 352); Welfare Practicum I ((SOW 309);
Welfare Practicum D (SOW 319); and Seminar in Social Work (SOW 495) .
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
324
SOCIAL WORK COURSES (SOW)
Introductory courses are indicated by a plus ( + ).
+SOW 150. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK. Introduce, the social, political, and economic dimensions
of poverty and welfare service, of the United State,. Complementa other beginning counea in the aocial science,
by intepting this knowledge in a fashion which aida in the comprehension of welfare service, while eatabliahing
a ba1i1 for movement towards higher level counea. (3 en.)
SOW 208. MINORITY GROUP RELATIONS. Analysis of the historical, economic and political relations of
relations of American religiou1, ethnic, and racial minorities in tenna of aocial change and aocial atructure . f aocial
change and aocial atructure. Special attention given to Puerto Rican, Chicano and Indian subculture,. Source1 of
prejudice and discrimination, aocial processea including conflict segregation, a1similation, accommodation, and
cooperation. Prerequi1ite: SOC 100. (3 en.)
SOW 215 . HUMAN GROWfH AND BEHAVIOR Il.
Prerequisite: SOW 215 (3 en.)
A continuation of Human Growth and Behavior I.
SOW 255 . SOCIAL WORK METHODS I. Designed for people who work: with other people. Auume1 that
although the task:I that a human service worker may be a1k:ed to perform vary from agency to agency, there are,
nevertheleu, certain attitudes, knowledge, and skills that are basic to all such work:. It further auume1 that H these
attitudes, knowledge, and skills become more acutely developed, self-awareness will develop with subsequent
development of a profeBSionalized self. Prerequisites: SOW 150 and SOW 100. (3 en.)
SOW 265 . JUVENILE DELINQUENCY. The causes, prevention, and treatment of deviancy among youth.
Emphasi, on concept of the non-adversary role of the juvenile court system and the urgent need for change. An
exploration of the aociological theories for deviancy and the changing attitude toward treatment and treatment
facilities. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 en.)
SOW 270. CHILD WELFARE. The services which are peculiar to programs in a Child Welfare agency.
Casework: with children, natural parenta and substitute parenta is discussed. Separation theories are presented and
related to the undentanding of this experience for children. Some historical, as well aa, current practice in
homemaker service, day care, foster care, (foster home inatitutiona, group home■, and residential treatment centen)
and adoption will be presented. Case material will be used to focus the discussion of the caseworker'• role in these
service,. Prerequisite: SOW 150 (3 en.)
SOW 290. SOCIAL WELFARE AS A SOCIAL INSTITUTION. Historical approach to aocial welfare aa an
inatitution in order to focus on the proceu of inatitutionaliution in which behavior that ia anticipated and
unpredictable evolve■ into that which is regular, patterned and recurring. The historical approach alao enable■
atudenta to make aome correlation between values, beliefs and norms emanating from aocial welfare in aixteenth,
eighteenth and nineteenth century Europe and concepta, attitude, and philoaophies auociated with aocial welfare
in twentieth century America. Prerequisite,: PSY 100 and SOW 150. (3 en.)
SOW 301. SOCIAL WORK INTERVIEW. Thia coune ia designed to familiarize atudenta with the euential
componenta of interviewing skills in collecting information, asseBSing client problems and interviewing in the
proceu of ameliorating individual or small group disfunctioning. This coune emphasizes the importance of the
interview H a major means of communication with penona in need of help. (3 en.)
SOW 309. WELFARE PRACTICUM I. An opportunity to learn and apply theoretical knowledge to practice
through involvement in a aocial welfare agency setting or inatitution. The student is required to apend 16 clock:
houn per week: in the field. Prerequisite: Permiuion of the inatructor. (6 en.)
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
325
SOW 319. WELFARE PRACTICUM Il. Continuation of Welfare Practicum I. The student continue, to work:
under a trained aocial worker, prefenbly in the aame setting aa the previous placement. The student ia expected
to demomtnte a considenble amount of clauroom knowledge and ahould ahow conviction about the value of aocial
work: in improving the client'• psycho-aocial functioning . The student ia required to spend 16 clock houn per week
in the field . Prerequisite: SOW 309 and permiaaion of the inatnlctor. (6 en.)
SOW 346. SOCIAL WORK METHODS Il: GROUP WORK. Hiatory of aocial group work:, the aocial the aocial
work: valuea, the aaaessment of goals and objectives in the group, the principles of aocial group work:, and the
various model ■ of group thenpy. Prerequi1ite1: SOW 150 and SOW 255. (3 en.)
SOW 347. SOCIAL WORK METHODS m: COMMUNITY ORGANIZATION. A comprehensive review and
descriptive hiatory of the evolution of community organiution methodologies with emphasis upon their generic
aocial work: qualities. Concern is devoted to both the character of the proceaa and task:■ aaaociated therewith, aa
well aa the role community organiution plays in aocial reform in the United States. The course material relates
to collective aocial behavior, aocial institutions, the politics of aocial services delivery, community problem-solving,
and aocial planning . Prerequisite: SOW 346. (3 en.)
SOW 352. ADVANCED CLINICAL METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK. Builds upon the elements of casework:
pncticea introduced in Social Work Method• I. The proceaa of paychoaocial study, diagnosia, and treatment more
adequately developed. Abundant use of aaaigned tests and case material, particularly those concerned with aocial
welfare . Pedagogic use of role playing ia also ayatematically developed . Generic concepts ltreaaed, but specific
setting topically considered. For example, relaxation training, biofeedback:, hypnoaia and projective telling for the
aocial worker are typically considered . Prerequisite: SOW 255 (3 en.)
SOW 365. DELIVERY OF SERVICES. Deals with macro practice techniques. Theoretical underpinnings are
examined from a aocial systems prospective. The primary value ltreaaed is that the student must become sensitive
to consumers and empathetic to their concerns is prerequisite to becoming a professional aocial worker. It is felt
that such a goal cannot be attained simply by talking about consumers, but that consumerism must be experienced.
Therefore, the student is required during the semeater to become involved in a consumer concern, which will be
agreed upon by the student and the instructor, and write a paper describing their experience and how it relates to
the course. Prerequisite: SOW 346.
SOW 370. SOCIAL CHANGE. A continuation of SOW 365, Delivery of Services, and also emphasis on macro,
genenlist techniques, drawn from aocial syatem theory . It is also stressed that aocietal representative• will effect
needed change• only if the human service worker initiates change efforts in a faahion that provides adequate
feedback: to decision makers. It is assumed that decision makers effect needed aocietal change• satisfied.
Prerequisitea: SOW 346, 365. (3 en.)
SOW 450. RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK. The aocial work: scientific endeavor is presented as
a special type of problem-solving and analytical thinking activity. Its thrust is to teach the undergnduate student
to become a critical consumer of research reports and to prepare the student to begin to understand the critical
importance of research aa a profeaaional endeavor.
SOW 475 . HUMAN SEXUALITY. Thia course provides a basic overview of the human sexual syatem. Social
sexual value■ and attitudes will be examined along with information on physiological and psychological sexual
dysfunctioning. A special emphasis will be on the skills and knowledge needed to provide information to clienta
aa well as thenpeutic interventions. (3 en.)
SOW 495 . SEMINAR IN SOCIAL WORK. (variable)
326
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
SPECIAL EDUCATION
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
COMMUNITY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED:
PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION
EARLY CHILDHOOD/SPECIAL EDUCATION
ELEMENTARY/SPECIAL EDUCATION
Professor Wallace D. Hodge, chair. Professors Robert A. Bauman, Peter J. Belch, Robert
F. Dickie, Jay R. Powell; Associate Professors Albert Dascenzo, Regis Laz.or, Ben A.
Mule, Angela K. Zondos; Assistant Professor Paul L. Lancaster
The Department of Special Education, accredited by the American Association of
Colleges of Teacher Education, offers several programs leading to the baccalaureate degree
with a major in Special Education. The Mentally/Physically Handicapped curriculum leads
to a Pennsylvania Instructional I Certification. This certificate entitles the graduate to teach
children manifesting the following handicaps: mental retardation, learning disability, physical
handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage. The Mentally/Physically Handicapped
curriculum with Physical Education and Recreation emphasis also leads to Pennsylvania
certification. In addition graduates of this program can provide adaptive physical education
instruction for each of the handicap categories. Majors in either Early Childhood or
Elementary education may dual major in Special Education. Graduates of these programs
receive certification in both Early Childhood/Elementary and Mentally/Physically
Handicapped.
Pennsylvania teacher certification requires a satisfactory grade on the NIE.
The field of special education, both within the state of Pennsylvania and nationally,
continues to grow, providing excellent professional career opportunities. Recent federal
legislation has mandated new services for handicapped youngsters and provided increased
funding. The impetus should be toward an increased growth rate in special education
programs, particularly for children with severe and/or profound handicaps. The area of
physical education and recreation for the handicapped is also presently characterized by
expanding interest and activity. More and more programs are recognizing the needs of
handicapped children to develop their physical skills and their ability to participate in
recreational activities. Graduates of the Mentally/Physically Handicapped program are
qualified to assume several professional roles including: special education classroom teacher,
resource room teacher, homebound instruction teacher, hospital teacher, itinerant physical
education teacher for the handicapped, recreational director in an institutional or agency
setting, recreational program specialist for governmental agencies involving parks and
playgrounds as well as a variety of roles in sheltered workshops and community-living
arrangements for handicapped adults.
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
327
The growth of mainstream programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid.
It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild forms of handicaps typically attain higher
levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special self-contained
classroom. These children do, however, need special help and remedial instruction in some
areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is
becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of children while
continuing to maintain their enrollment in regular classrooms. This process of integrating
the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool level, or no later
than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in Early Childhood or Special Education
will be able to provide excellent resource services to both children and the other staff
members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume
several professional roles, including regular early childhood classroom teacher (nurserythird grade), special education classroom teacher-mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed,
physically handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged (nursery-twelfth grade), and
resource room teacher.
The Special Education Department also offers two programs for majors preparing to
work with the handicapped in various community settings. Students may complete a twoyear associate degree or a four-year baccalaureate degree in the Community Services
Personnel Training Program.
This program emphasizes providing service to the
handicapped in other than school settings. Training stresses a comprehensive non-categorical
approach to understanding handicapping conditions.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED EDUCATION
This program, leading to the Pennsylvania Instructional Level I certification, entitles the
graduate to teach children with the following handicaps: Mental retardation, learning
disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage.
The general objectives of the program are:
To demonstrate an understanding of the nature of handicapping conditions and
the impact of these conditions on normal growth and development;
To demonstrate an ability to effectively use alternative instructional strategies
appropriate to the needs of exceptional children;
To demonstrate the ability to identify the educationally relevant characteristics
of various exceptional children and to effectively diagnose and prescribe
appropriate educational experiences;
To demonstrate the ability to function as a competent classroom manager in
promoting learning among handicapped students;
To demonstrate competency to initiate instructional programs that facilitate
appropriate career and vocational goals for the mentally/physically
handicapped.
328
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
Curriculam:
(A) Gmenl Education: 9 credita in Humanitie1; 9 credita in Natunl
Science■; 9 credita in Social Science■ ;
3 credita of Health or Phyaical Activitie1; Onl Communication (COM IOI); Gencnl Paycholoi)' (PSY 101); 22
credita of free elective,, including Engliah Composition 1-ll (ENG 101 , 102).
(B) Profeuioaal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Paychology (PSY 208);
Developmental P■ycholoi)' (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a Multicultunl
Society (EDU 210); Computcn for Teachen (EDF 301); 6 creditB of electivea; Student Teaching and Pncticum
(C) Area ofCoaceatratioa: Exceptional Child 1-ll (ESP 100, 201); Behavior Principles 1-ll (ESP 301,401);
Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503);
Phyaical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Curriculum Methods 1-ll (ESP 504-505); Habilitation
Tnining (ESP 506) .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SPECIAL EDUCATION:
COMMUNITY SERVICES
The Community Services Personnel Training Program is a four-year undergraduate
curriculum leading to a Bachelor of Science degree in Special Education. It emphasizes
career working with the handicapped in community settings other than schools. Training
stresses a comprehensive non-categorical approach to understanding
handicapping
conditions. Students learn to work with the mentally retarded, learning disabled, physically
handicapped, emotionally disturbed, and brain-injured.
The field of community alternative services for the handicapped is the fastest growing
area in the field of human care services. Both philosophical concern and legal mandates
have drastically altered the nature of such services during the past few years. Communities
are beginning to recognize and respond to their responsibility for handicapped residents.
Large-scale warehousing of human beings within institutions has been significantly reduced,
and, more importantly, society is re-examining the central question of institutionali:r.ation on
humanitarian and constitutional grounds. This shift has opened an entirely new professional
career field-providing community-based alternative programs for the handicapped.
Expansion, while rapid, has been impeded by the lack of trained personnel. The need for
competent personnel in this area will very probably continue to expand. Graduates of this
program are qualified to assume professional roles as resident managers of community living
arrangements, mental retardation specialists in MH/MR community programs, supervisors
of work activity centers, supervisors of therapeutic activity centers, supervisors of adult
development centers, supervisors of child development centers.
The general objectives of the Community Services Personnel Training Program are:
To demonstrate the ability to use effectively behavior management principles
in a number of applied settings;
To demonstrate the ability to program effectively and provide instruction to
handicapped clients in the area of daily living skills.
To demonstrate the ability to provide effective counseling services to clients
and their families.
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
329
Curriculum:
(A) Gt11era1 Educatioo: 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 2 credits in Health or Physical
Activities; General Psychology (PSY 100); 20 credit, of free electives, including English Composition 1-Il (ENG
101, 102).
(B) Professional Specialization: 15 credita from the following: Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400);
Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Social Psychology (PSY 209); Principles of Behavior Modification (PSY
350); Child Welfare (SOW 270); Contemporary Social Problems (SOC 205); The Family (SOC 220): Juvenile
Delinquency (SOW 265); Social Institutions (SOC 240); Social Change (SOW 370).
(C) Professional Education: Exceptional Child 1-Il (ESP 101,200); Behavior Principles 1-Il (ESP 301,401);
Education of Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Academic and Recreational Skill Training (ESP 278);
Occupational and Daily Living Skill Training (ESP 279); Community ReBOUrces and Public Relations (ESP 378);
Buaineu Management and Legal Factors (ESP 379); Client Counseling and Psycho-Social Development and Client
Counseling (ESP 478); Program Evaluation and Personnel Management (ESP 479); Internship and Practicum.
ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN COMMUNITY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS
One of the most significant new developments in the field of human services has been
the rapid and dramatic growth of community-based programs for the mentally retarded.
These community living arrangements (CLAs) need trained staff members to provide client
services.
This program is specifically designed to incorporate skills that will lead to immediate
employment in a CLA after completion of the program.
Curriculum:
(A) Genenl Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits in Social Sciences (including General
Psychology [PSY 100) and one Psychology elective and a Sociology course); 6 credits in Natural Sciences including
Fundamental• of Mathematics (MAT 100); 3 credits of free electives.
(B) Professional Counes: Exceptional Children 1-Il (ESP 101, 200); Behavior Principles 1-Il (ESP 301 ,
401); Academic and Recreational Skill Training (ESP 278); Occupational Skill Training and Activities of Daily
Living (AOL) (ESP 279); Community ReBOUrce Utilization and Public Relations (ESP 378); Practicum.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED:
PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION
The Comprehensive Mentally/Physically Handicapped Physical Education and
Recreation program is a four-year undergraduate program leading to a Bachelor of Science
degree in Education and to the Pennsylvania Instructional I certification.
This certificate entitles the graduate to teach children with the following handicaps:
mental retardation, learning disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain
damage. Majors pursuing the Physical Education and Recreation area of interest can
provide physical education instruction for each of these handicap categories.
The area of physical education and recreation for the handicapped is presently
characteri.zed by expanding interest and activity. More and more programs are recognizing
the needs of handicapped children to develop their physical skills and their ability to
330
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
participate in recreational activities. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume
several professional roles, including special education teacher for the handicapped,
recreational director in an _institutional or agency setting, and recreational program specialist
for governmental agencies involving parks and playgrounds.
The objectives of this program are:
To demonstrate an understanding of the nature of handicapping conditions and
the impact of these conditions on normal growth and development;
To demonstrate the ability to effectively use alternative instructional strategies
appropriate to the needs of exceptional children;
To demonstrate the ability to identify the educationally relevant characteristics
of various exceptional children and to effectively diagnose and prescribe
appropriate educational experiences;
To demonstrate the ability to function as a competent classroom manager in
promoting learning among handicapped students;
To demonstrate competency to initiate the instructional programs that facilitate
appropriate career and vocational goals for the mentally/physically
handicapped;
To demonstrate the ability to implement physical education programs for
handicapped youngsters, with emphasis on gross-motor skills and physical
activities leading to lifetime recreation skills.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 9 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM lCJO); 3 credita in
Health and Physical Education; 9 credits in Natural Sciences; 9 credits in Social Sciences, including General
Psychology (PSY lCJO); 21 credita of Free Electives, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102)
(B) Profeuiooal Education: 32 credita: Educational Foundations (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY
208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a
Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); six credita of electivea; Student Teacbina
and School Law: 12 credits.
(C) Area of Concentration: 39 credita: Exceptional Child 1-11 (ESP 100, 200); Behavioral Principles 1-11
(ESP 301, 401); Education of the Severely and Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnoltic Telling and
Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503); Phyaical Activitiea for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Curriculum and
Methods 1-11 (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506).
(D) Physical Education and Recreation: 16 credita: Anatomy, Kinesiology and Physiology (ESP 315); Motor
Learning (ESP 316); Rhythmical Analysis and Creative Movement (ESP 317); School-Community Recreation and
Crafts (ESP 415); Methods of Physical Education and Recreation (ESP 416) .
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
EARLY CHILDHOOD/SPECIAL EDUCATION (DUAL MAJOR)
Students of superior academic achievement who are majoring in either Early Childhood
Education or Special Education are encouraged to consider pursuing a dual curriculum
leading to Pennsylvania certification in both fields. Current educational thought advocates
the placement of mildly handicapped youngsters in regular classrooms with special education
resource services made available to the student and the classroom teacher. Students who
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
331
successfully complete this dual-major program will possess demonstrated competencies in
facilitating the assimilation of the mildly handicapped into the mainstream of American
education and society.
The growth of mainstreaming programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been
rapid. It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild forms of handicaps typically attain
higher levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special selfcontained classroom. These children do, however, need special help and remedial
instruction in some areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the
resource room, is becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of these
children while continuing to maintain their enrollment in regular classrooms. This process
of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool
level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in both Early Childhood
and Special Education will be able to provide excellent resource services to both children
and the other staff members of an elementary school.
Graduates of this program are qualified to assume several professional roles, including
regular early childhood classroom teacher (nursery-third grade) , special education classroom
teacher-mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically handicapped, learning disabled,
brain-damaged (nursery-twelfth grade)-and resource room teacher.
Early Childhood/Special Education dual majors must demonstrate the competencies
associated with each of the individual certificate programs (refer to the Early Childhood and
Special Education programs). In addition, the following general objectives must be met:
To demonstrate the ability to identify students who are in need of some special
service;
To demonstrate the ability to work effectively with other teachers in
cooperatively planning programs for children with special needs;
To demonstrate the ability to facilitate the social acceptance of children with
handicaps by structuring classroom environments that reinforce positive
interpersonal relationships;
To demonstrate the ability to complete educational assessment of the learning
needs of students;
To demonstrate the ability to develop individual educational prescriptions based
on assessment data;
To demonstrate the ability to effectively modify instructional strategies or
materials to provide for the unique needs of students manifesting learning
handicaps.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 15 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM 100) and
Composition I-II (ENG 101-102); 15 credits in Natural Sciences; 15 credits in Social Sciences, including General
Psychology (PSY 100); 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities.
(B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Child
Psychology (PSY 205) or Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Student Teaching and
Prscticum.
(C) Early Childhood Courses: Field Experience in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Laboratory Experiences in
Nursery/Kindergarten (ECE 201); Art for Early Childhood (ECE 215); Music for Early Childhood (ECE 217);
332
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
Health and Physical Education for Early Childhood (ECE 218) or Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child
(HPE 337); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Children' s Literature (ECE 311); Mathematics
Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); The Child in Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Science for
Early Childhood (ECE 317); Early Childhood Seminar (ECE 405).
(D) Special Education Courses: Exceptional Child I-II (ESP 100,201); Behavioral Principles I-II (ESP 301 ,
401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP
503); Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337) or Health and Physical Education for Elementary
Grades; Curriculum Methods I-II (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506).
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ELEMENTARY/SPECIAL EDUCATION (DUAL MAJOR)
The growth of mainstream programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid.
It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild handicaps typically attain higher levels of
achievement in the regular class environment than in the special self-contained classroom.
However, these children still need special help and remedial instruction in some areas of the
curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is becoming an
increasingly common means of addressing the needs of mildly handicapped children. This
process of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the
preschool level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in both
Elementary and Special Education are able to provide excellent resource services to both
children and other staff members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are
qualified to assume several professional roles: regular elementary classroom teacher (K-8),
special education classroom teacher (mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically
handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged, nursery-grade 12), and resource room
teacher.
Students of superior academic achievement who are majoring in either Elementary
Education or Special Education are encouraged to pursue a dual curriculum leading to
Pennsylvania certification in both fields. Since current educational thought advocates the
placement of mildly handicapped youngsters in regular classrooms with special education
resource services made available to the student and the classroom teacher, students who
successfully complete this dual major program will possess demonstrated competencies in
facilitating the assimilation of the mildly handicapped into the mainstream of American
education and society.
Elementary/Special Education dual majors must demonstrate the competencies associated
with each of the individual certification programs (refer to the competencies given in this
and the Elementary Education sections of this catalog). In addition, the following general
objectives must be satisfied:
To demonstrate the ability to identify students who are in need of some special
service;
To demonstrate the ability to work effectively with other teachers in
cooperatively planning programs for children with special needs;
To demonstrate the ability to facilitate the social acceptance of children with
handicaps by structuring classroom environments that reinforce positive
interpersonal relationships;
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
333
To demonstrate the ability to complete educational assessment of the learning
needs of students;
To demonstrate the ability to develop individual educational prescriptions for
children based on assessment data;
To demonstrate the ability to effectively modify instructional strategies and/or
materials to provide for the unique needs of students with learning handicaps.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: 18 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM 100) and
Composition 1-11 (ENG 101 -102), courses in art, history, and music; 15 credits in Natural Sciences, including
algebra, biology, physical science, and Man and His Environment; 15 credits in Social Sciences, including General
Psychology (PSY I 00), American Government, U.S. History (Before or Since I 877), Elements of Economics, and
Geography; Co-Ed Health and one credit of Physical Education
(B) Proft!Mional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Child
Psychology (PSY 205) or Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304);
Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Student Teaching; Practicum
and School Law.
(C) Elementary Education Courses: Elementary Health and Physical Education (EDE 208) or Physical
Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children's Literature I (EDE
311); Field Experiences in Early Childhood Education (ECE 202); Mathematics Content and Methods in the
Elementary School (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studies (EDE 306); Science for Elementary Teachers (EDE
307); Teaching Language Arts (EDE 308) .
(D) Special Education Courses: Exceptional Child I-II (ESP 100, 201); Behavioral Principles 1-11 (ESP 301,
401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP
503); Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337) or Health and Physical Education for the Elementary
School (EDE 208); Curriculum and Methods I-II (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506).
334
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES (ESP)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
B indicates that the courses are usually offered both semesters.
ESP 101 & 200. EXCEPTIONAL CHILD I & II. A tw<>--<:oune introductory sequence to handicapped children and
to the field of special education. Theac coune■ examine the range of handicaps in children and their broad
10eiological, educational, and vocational implication■. Specifically, the acquence develop■ competencies in such
area, 11 the historical development of acrvice1 for handicapped, children, definition■ and clauification of children'•
handicap,, the impact of labelling children and main■tream programa, pre-school and poat-school programa for the
handicapped, family acrvices, prosthetic devices and program modifications for the physically handicapped and a
behavioral analysis of normal child development. Theac counea atress obacrvation of the various target groups of
handicapped children. ( 4 en. each) F
ESP 250. WORKSHOP FOR TEACHER AIDES . For teacher aides who worlc in clasac■ for handicapped children.
the content i1, however, of great value to all teacher' s aides since it deals with methods that might enable the
participants to deal more easily and more effectively with any children. Numerous activities characterize the
worbhop; it i ■ not a lecture coune. (3 en.) B
ESP 278 . ACADEMIC AND RECREATIONAL SKILL TRAINING. Handicapped penon■ residing in the
community mull acquire thoac sltills which will facilitate assimilation to the community at large. Important among
theac ■ltil11 are baaic competencie■ in academic area■ such as reading, writing, communication, and computational
abilitie■. In order to live independently, the handicapped must also be capable of -nonnal" behavioral responaca
in varioua 10eial, vocational and recreational situation■. (3 en.) F
ESP 279. OCCUPATIONAL SKILL TRAINING AND ACTIVITIES OF DAILY LIVING (ADL) . Thia coune
focuac1 on the prevocational and vocational need■ of handicapped youth and adults as well II thoac supportive 11till1
ncce ...ry for achieving acceptable level• of -nonnal adult adjuatmcnt. • Since the habilitation and training need ■
of the handicapped population are so divene, the nature of coune content and emphasis is also broad, to include
such programa as sheltered worlcahops and rehabilitation facilities, worlc activity centen, therapeutic activity
centen, CLS'1, etc . (3 en.) F
ESP 301 . BEHAVIOR PRINCIPLES I. Provides the student with the verbal and performance sltills in
measurement and obacrvation nccesury to apply the principles of behavior modification in schools and a variety
of other acttings. Students who complete the coune will have mastered sltills in data collection, data manipulation,
and data-display including graphing, behavioral definitions, the principles of reinforcement and extinction, and databased decision malting. (4 en.) F
ESP 315. ANATOMY, KINESIOLOGY, PHYSIOLOGY. An introduction to practical lcnowledge of human
growth and development, human anatomy and physiology. Special focus on the biomechanics of human motion
in relation to sport and recreational sltills for handicapped and nonhandicapped penon■. (3 en.) S
ESP 316. MOTOR LEARNING . A preparatory coune for teaching adapted physical education to handicapped
children. A 1y1tcmatic approach baaed on the I CAN Curriculum is used to 11ac11, teach and evaluate paychomotor
11till1. Child development theories are atudied and applied to the development of special physical education
programs for handicapped children. (3 en.) S
ESP 317. RHYTHMICAL ANALYSIS AND CREATIVE MOVEMENT. An introductory coune that focuaca on
the therapeutic value of music and dance. Special emphasis is placed on Laban' s Effort-Shape System of Movement
Analysis. (3 en.) S
ESP 360. FIELD EXPERIENCE FOR SPECIAL EDUCATION . Provides a vehicle for obtaining needed practical
experience, with various groups of handicapped children. The type of practicum site may vary widely and includes
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
335
such acttinga aa public and private residential inatitutiona, day care centen, therapeutic activity centen, lheltered
worbhopa, rehabilitation centen, community MH/MR programs, and summer camps for handicapped children.
(Variable credit) B
ESP 378. COMMUNITY RESOURCE UTILIZATION AND PUBLIC RELATIONS. Community-baaedprognma
for handicapped individuala utilize community facilitiea, agenciea, and acrvicea to provide broad-baaed support and
auiatance to the client populationa. In thoac aituationa where an insufficient or inadequate level of support ia in
place, the public II well a ■ the policy maken muat be mobilized to fill identified voids . Very often the apringboard
from which an effective acrvice baac can be eatablilhed ia a well developed program of public relationa. the public
relationa prognm al110 acrvea the handicapped by educating the community memben-the neighbon of handicapped
penona living in the community. (3 en.) B
ESP 379 . BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS . Community-based prognma
currently exiat both aa a mandate of law and at the pleasure of legislation from a fiscal standpoint. Further, the
relationahipa between providen and clienta, providen and agencies, agenciea and clients, etc . are all regulated.
Thia courac, therefore, explores the many legal implicationa involved in community-baaed programs and apecifiea
the reaponaibility that atudents will face as profe11ional1. (3 en.) B
ESP 401 . BEHAVIOR PRINCIPLES II. Thia courac familiarize, the atudent the laboratory derived learning
principle, that constitute the field of applied behavior analysis. An experimental component provides each atudent
the opportunity to observe and report on a behavioral intervention program. (4 en.) S
ESP 415 . SCHOOL, COMMUNITY RECREATION, AND CRAFTS FOR HANDICAPPED PERSON . Basic
philosophical foundationa of leisure and recreation. Special focus ia on the aima and benefits of the recreation
proce11 and therapeutic recreation. A third of this courac includes supervised practice with penona who are
handicapped. (3 en.) B
ESP 416. METHODS OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION FOR HANDICAPPED PERSONS .
Prepare, teachen of the handicapped to plan, aaaeu, prescribe, teach, and evaluate special physical education
programs for penona who are mentally retarded, learning disabled, hearing impaired , visually handicapped,
emotionally diaturbed , orthopedically handicapped, and multi-handicapped . (4 en.) B
ESP 459 . STUDENT TEACHING. In the new comprehenaive curriculum, each courac has a practicum associated
with it that involves conaistent contact throughout each semester with apecial children. The Special Education ataff
memben make a concerted effort to ensure that Special Education majon are exposed to the full range of children
covered under the comprehenaive certification, i.e., mentally retarded, emotionally diaturbed, learning disabled,
brain damaged, and physically handicapped . Students are also expoaed to the dimenaiona of mild-profound and
elementary-aecondary since the new certification coven K-12, mild through profound, in each of the handicapping
areas for their atudent teaching experience. the areas relate to their specific vocational goals and their own intereata
and atrengtha . The major practicum, Student Teaching, provides an intenaive experience for the atudent in two of
the handicapping areas for a period of sixteen weeks . (12 en.) B
ESP 478. PSYCHO-SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT AND CLIENT COUNSELING. Examines the concept of
nonnalization and how the emphasis on the nonnalization of the experience, of handicapped clients in communitybaaed prognma ia vital to their succeaaful adjuatment. Methods for developing nonnalizing experiences are also
explored . (3 en.) B
ESP 479 . PROGRAM EVALUATION AND PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT. Thia courac ia intended to fulfill
the need of training of penonnel within community facilities who are required to perform management duties. The
environments for which the training techniques in the courac are designed include community living arrangements,
lheltered worklhops, adult activity centen (both therapeutic and work), and other human service providen and
community aocial welfare agencies . Competencies are developed that are knowledge- or infonnation-baacd as well
11 akill-baaed. (3 en.) B
336
DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION
ESP 490. PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM AND SCHOOL LAW. Meeta weekly to provide Special Education
majors working toward, a comprchenaivecertificate (Mentally Retarded, Emotionally Disturbed, Leaming Disabled,
Brain Damaged and Physically Handicapped) with an opportunity to diacuss problems encountered by the studenta
in their teaching experiences. The studenta arc provided with opportunities to demonatrate the effectiveness and
functionality of their teacher-made devices, learning centers, and curriculum materials uaed in their claaaroom. (2
era.) B
ESP 495. HONORS SEMINAR. (3 era.) B
ESP 498 . INTERNSHIP. Each student majoring in the Handicapped Persona Community Service Personnel
Training Program completes a one-semester (15-week) internship assigned to community agencies. Ten weelcs are
spent worlcifii in all phases of a community living arrangement (CLA), including client counseling, slcill training,
recreational planning, public rclationa, buaincss and personnel management, etc . Interns arc required to live at the
CLA facility when it i ■ conaidered essential to their training . The remaining five weeks of the internship arc spent
in another type of community program for the handicapped, such aa therapeutic activitiea centers, worlc activity
centers, adult development centers, sheltered workshops, etc . Studenta arc encouraged to identify the type of
agency they arc interested in and attcmpta arc made to arrange an appropriate affiliation. (Variable.) B
ESP 501. INTRODUCTION TO THE EXCEPTIONAL CHil.D. An introduction to handicapped children and to
the field of special education, examining the broad range of handicaps in children and their sociological,
educational, and vocational implicationa. (Variable.) B
ESP 502. EDUCATION OF THE SEVERELY/PROFOUNDLY HANDICAPPED. How to work with children
and adulta who display severe/profound learning and/or behavior problems. Studenta spend time tutoring at
facilities for this population. (Variable.) F
ESP 503 . DIAGNOSTIC TESTING AND PRESCRIPTIVE TEACHING . This course deals with both normreferenced and criterion-referenced testa and their use with exceptional children. Class participanta must administer
selected testa and preacribe remediation based on the resulta . (Variable.) S
ESP 504 AND ESP 505 . CURRICULUM PLANNING AND METHODS I AND II. Curriculum and Methods I
and II are a block of courses that are offered to Special Education majors the semester prior to their student
teaching experience. The major purpose of these courses is the inatruction of communication and arithmetic slcills
to all age groups of exceptional children. Specifically, Curriculum and Methods I is concerned with communication
slcills (reading-silent and oral-vocabulary development and comprehension) . Curriculum and Methods II
emphasizes arithmetic slcills. Both courses stress: (1) a behavioral diagnosis of communication and arithmetic
strengths and wealcnesses; (2) the development and implementation of intervention strategies for various populations
of exceptional children; (3) the selection and/or development of appropriate materials for instruction; and (4) the
procedures and techniques for continuous evaluation for the instructional process in order to determine
effectivencsa. (Variable.) B
ESP 506. HABILITATION TRAINING . This course deals with special education programs for senior high school
studenta as well as those persons who reside in the community. Emphasis is placed on vocational preparation and
training . Specific techniques for task analysis of jobs, daily living slcills, and social adaptation constitute a major
portion of this course. Emphasis is placed on the development of functional slcills that contribute to normalized
development. (Variable.) B
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
337
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PAIBOWGY AND AUDIOWGY
Associate Professor Albert E. Yates, chair. Professors R. Michael Feldman; Associate
Professors Charles A. Gismondi, D. Frank McPherson, Richard R. Nemec
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
SPEECH/LANGUAGE PAfflOLOGY
The experiences in the Speech Pathology and Audiology Department are integrated with
the overall undergraduate program in order to provide students with a broad understanding
of the needs of individuals who have communication disorders. The department also
provides clinical services for individuals who have communication disorders. Students
observe and/or assist in diagnostic evaluations and therapy programs. The work includes
experiences with individuals of all ages, ranging from pre-school to adult.
The undergraduate program in Speech Pathology and Audiology (SPA) is a
preprofessional degree program. Students, therefore, should be preparing themselves for
future graduate training in order to pursue a career in the profession of Speech/Language
Pathology. (At California University of Pennsylvania, teacher certification in SPA is not
offered as an undergraduate program, but may be obtained in graduate school.) Students
planning to complete the undergraduate program in SPA should maintain a grade point
average (GPA) sufficient to enhance the probability that they can be admitted to a graduate
program. Since unconditional admission to most graduate programs in SPA requires a 3. 0
GPA in the major area and a 2.8 overall GPA in undergraduate work, these are the
minimum goals which undergraduates should strive to achieve. To facilitate the attainment
of these goals, the faculty in SPA have determined that students should be maintaining the
following GPAs at the indicated points in their undergraduate program:
I
I
OVERALL GPA
I
SPA GPA
End of Freshman Year (32 credit hours)
2 .20
2 .50
End of Sophomore Year (64 credit hours)
2 .40
2 .65
End of Junior Year (96 credit hours)
2 .60
2 .80
Graduation (128 credit hours)
2 .80
3.00
I
Students who are not achieving the above standards will be counseled each semester
concerning the options which are available to them : (1) Make a more concerted effort to
improve their level of performance, (2) consider transferring to some other program, or (3)
graduate from the program with the minimum allowable GPA (2.3 overall and 2.5 in SPA),
but with the understanding that employment opportunities in the profession with only the
338
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S. degree will be extremely limited if not completely nonexistent. Every effort will be
made to assist students with whatever option they choose.
•
•
•
•
•
The objectives of this program are to:
Develop an understanding of the basic acoustical, anatomical, neurological, and normal
development of speech, language, and hearing;
Develop knowledge of the various disorders affecting speech and language and the
underlying pathologies and symptoms of the disorders;
Create awareness of the instruments and procedures available to assess speech and
language disorders and develop the ability to select and use such instruments correctly;
Develop the clinical skills to effectively perform therapeutic procedures to correct or
improve speech and language disorders;
Instill the principles and practices of ethical professional behavior.
Curriculum:
(A) General Education (56 credits): Humanities: 18 credits (from two disciplines), including Composition
1-11 (ENG 101-102) and Oral Communication(COM 101); Natural Sciences: 9 credits (from two disciplines); Social
Sciences: 9 credits (from two disciplines); 3 credits Health or Physical Activities; General Psychology (PSY 100);
Free Electives: 14 credits.
(B) ReJated Professional Courses (30 credits selected from adviser-approved university courses), including
Developmental Psychology (PSY 207), Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210) or Ethnic, Racial, and
Social Minorities (SOC 110), Computers for Teachers (EDF 301), Foundations of Education (EDF 100), and
Educational Psychology (PSY 110). (EDF 100 and PSY 110 are required only for Pennsylvania Certification.)
(C) Speech Pathology and Audiology (42 credits): ASHA Basic Science Requirements (selected from
matrix) : 6 credits in Biological Sciences, Physical Sciences, or Mathematica; 6 credits in Behavioral or Social
Sciences; Survey of Speech Pathology (SPA 100); Language and Speech Development (SPA 105); Phonetics (SPA
203); Anatomy and Physiology (SPA 204); Acoustics and Psychoacoustics (SPA 211); Speech Pathology I (SPA
300); Speech Pathology II (SPA 30 l ); Auditory Training and Speech Reading (SPA 302); Introduction to Audiology
(SPA 305); Clinical Practicum (SPA 400).
SPEECH PAfflOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY COURSES (SPA)
SPA 100. SURVEY OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY. This course introduces the student to the field of communication
disorders through a description of the communicatively handicapped. (3 era.)
SPA 105 . LANGUAGE AND SPEECH DEVELOPMENT. The course emphasis is on the normal development
of speech, language, and communication. The form and function of language are considered, i.e., phonology,
syntax, morphology, semantics, and pragmatics. (3 era.)
SPA 203. PHONETICS. Introduces practical phonology and phonetic, as they apply to the communicative proce11.
The student is required to learn and use the International Phonetic Alphabet. (3 era.)
SPA 204. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. The structure and normal function of the components of the human
body participating in the production of speech; how the function of these components may change during speech
production. Prerequisite: 6 er. in biological sciences. (3 era.)
SPA 211. ACOUSTICS AND PSYCHOACOUSTICS. This course will provide the student with a basic
understanding of how sound is generated and measured. In addition, the manner in which the human auditory
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
339
system encodes sound information and subsequently extracts meaning from it will be investigated. Prerequisite: 6
credits of Physical Science or Mathematics. (3 crs.)
SPA 300. SPEECH PATHOLOGY I. This course provides students with introductory knowledge of children with
language and speech disorders. They will become aware of procedures and principles utilized by speech-language
pathologists in the assessment and management of children with language and speech delays/disorders.
Prerequisites: SPA 100, 203 , 204 and 211. (3 crs.)
SPA 301 . SPEECH PATHOLOGY II. Primary emphasis is placed on several of the major speech disorders,
namely: fluency disorders, voice disorders, language disorders in adults, dysar1hria, apraxia, and dysphagia.
Prerequisites: SPA 203, 204, 211. (3 crs.)
SPA 302. AUDITORY TRAINING AND SPEECH READING . The course will emphasize work with hearing
handicapped individuals in the following areas: (a) diagnostic information; (b) speech reading methods; (c) auditory
training techniques; and (d) speech training for the aurally handicapped . Prerequisites : SPA 211 and 305. (3 crs.)
SPA 305. INTRODUCTION TO AUDIOLOGY. The course will provide the student with an understsnding of the
genetic and disease processes producing hearing loss in children and adults and the procedures used to assess
hearing loss and rehabilitste persons with hearing impairment. Prerequisite: SPA 204, 211. (3 crs.)
SPA 400. CLINICAL PRACTICUM. Provides the student clinician with a variety of therapeutic and evaluation
experiences with children or adults having speech, language or hearing disorders. Prerequisites: SPA 300 and 301 .
(3 crs.)
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
340
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
ATIIl..ETIC TRAINING EDUCATION
Associate Professor William B. Biddington, chair; Associate Professor Robert H. Kane, Jr.;
Assistant Professor Bruce D. Barnhart; Instructor, Joni L. Cramer
The Athletic Training Education Program provides interested students with the
opportunity to develop the leadership, responsibilities, and special skills necessary for a
career as a Certified Athletic Trainer. The basic concept of athletic training involves the
prevention, care, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic injuries. The Athletic Training
Education Program is a National Athletic Trainers' Association (NATA) approved
curriculum and is approved by the State Board of Physical Therapy. Modem athletic
training rooms are located in Hamer Hall and Adamson Stadium. The cadaver anatomy
laboratory is also located in Hamer Hall. The California University intercollegiate athletic
program, which is a strong NCAA Division II program and a member of the PSAC
. (Pennsylvania State Athletic Conference), comprises 14 varsity sports that enable students
to gain valuable experience as student athletic trainers.
The high incidence of injuries occurring through athletic participation has become a
national concern and has created demand for individuals who have completed athletic
training courses, fulfilled clinical requirements, and earned a minimum of a bachelor's
degree. Job opportunities for certified athletic trainers have increased substantially, and the
employment potential for athletic trainers should continue to increase. The ultimate goal of
this program is to prepare graduates for certification by the NATA and for careers in athletic
training. Many high schools hire athletic trainers to help provide better health care for their
interscholastic athletic programs. In addition, four-year colleges and universities and junior
and community colleges provide significant possibilities for employment. Positions with
professional teams exist; however, they are fewer in number than those associated with
school athletic programs. There is also growing employment in sports medicine and
rehabilitation clinics for athletic trainers.
Admission into the Athletic Training Education Program is competitive, and only a
limited number of students are selected each year. Applications for the Athletic Training
curriculum are accepted during the second semester of the freshman year and screened by
the Admissions and Academic Standards Committee (AASC). During the first semester of
the sophomore year, -the student submits a letter of application to the AASC, which screens,
interviews, and selects the remaining students to a maximum number of ten. Criteria for
selection are a minimum of a 2.75 QPA, 350 observation hours over a three-semester
period, interpersonal skills, and other qualifications, which can be obtained from the
Program Director of the Athletic Training Education Program.
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
341
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ATHLETIC TRAINING EDUCATION (SINGLE MAJOR)
This program will lead a prospective student to a Bachelor of Science degree in
Education without teacher certification.
Curriculum:
(A) Gmeral F.ducation: IS credit, in Humanities including Oral Communication (COM 101); English
Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credit, in Natural Sciences; 9 credit, in Social Sciences; 2 credit, in Physical
Activitie, and 37 credit, of free electives.
(B) Area of Concentration: Practicum Athletic Training I, Il (ATE 100, 110); Substance Abuse Education
(ATE 120); Human Anatomy of the Extremities 1-Il (ATE 200, 210); Health (HPE 100); two courac1 in
Psychology; Kinesiology (HPE 310); Physiology of Exercise (HPE 311); Athletic Training 1-Il (ATE 220, 260);
Administrative Aspect, of Athletic Training (ATE 230); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Human
Physiology for Athletic Trainen (ATE 250); Nutrition for Sports (ATE 230); Emergency Medical Technician (HPE
500); Modality Principles and Techniques with Laboratory (ATE 320); Therapeutic Exercise with Laboratory (ATE
330); Orthopedic Evaluations in Sports Medicine (ATE 400); and Special Topics in Sports Medicine (ATE 450).
Clinical houn: minimum of 800 houn during junior and senior ycan.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION:
ATHLETIC TRAINING/SECONDARY EDUCATION
DUAL MAJOR WITH:
Biology
Chemistry
Communication (Speech)
Communication (Theatre)
Early Childhood
Earth Science
Elementary Education
English
Foreign Languages
General Science
Mathematics
Physics
Social Studies
Special Education
The dual major in Athletic Training/Secondary Education enables interested students to
pursue the education and training necessary for a dual career as effective teachers and
athletic trainers. The requirements listed below are for the Athletic Training component
alone. Students interested in this program should contact the Program Director of the
Athletic Training Education Program for details on the dual major. This program also
requires satisfactory performance on the NTE in order to receive a Pennsylvania teaching
certificate.
342
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
Curriculum:
(A) Genen1 Education: 15 credita in Humanities including Oral Communication (COM 101); English
Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 9 credita in Social Sciences; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 2 credita in Physical
Activities. (Certain programs require specific counes in these areas).
(B) Area or Concentration: Human Anatomy of the Extremities 1-11 (ATE 200, 210); Practicum Athletic
Training I, II (ATE 100, 110); Substance Abuse Education (ATE 120); Health Co-ed (HPE 100); General
Psychology (PSY 100); Kinesiology (HPE 310); Physiology of Exercise (HPE 311); Emergency Medical Technician
(HPE 500); Athletic Training 1-11 (ATE 220, 260); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainera (ATE 230); Nutrition
for Sport, (ATE 240); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainers (ATE 250); Modality Principles and Techniques
with Laboratory (ATE 320); Therapeutic Exercise with Laboratory (ATE 330); Orthopedic Evaluations in Sporta
Medicine (ATE 400) and Special Topic• in Sports Medicine (ATE 450). Clinical experience: minimum of 800
hours during junior and senior years.
(C) Professional Education Requirements: Al required by the College of Education and Human Services.
(D) Professional Specialization (Second Major): Al required by the specific major.
A'IHLETIC TRAINING COURSES (ATE)
F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester.
ATE 100. PRACTICUM ATHLETIC TRAINING I. The basic mechanical techniques of athletic training, 111ch
as taping, transportation, modality usage, maintenance of equipment, record keeping, etc. (1 er.) F
ATE 110. PRACTICUM ATHLETIC TRAINING II. A continuation of Practicum Athletic Training I; taping,
evaluationa, rehabilitation equipment, etc. Prerequisite: ATE 100. (1 er.) S
ATE 120. SUBSTANCE ABUSE EDUCATION . The knowledge of substance abuse as it relate, to athletics and
competition, drug testing procedures as enforced by governing a880Ciationa, and the prevention and treatment of
substance abuse.
ATE 200. HUMAN ANATOMY OF THE EXTREMITIES I. The organization, structures, and functiona of the
human body: the development of the cell, tissues, integumentary system, digestive system, respiratory system,
urinary system, reproductive system, lymphatic and cardiovascular systems. (3 era.) F
ATE 210. HUMAN ANATOMY OF THE EXTREMITIES II. The organization, structure■ and functions of the
human body; the development and function of the skeletal system, ligament and joint structure, muscular system,
and the nervous system. Prerequisite: ATE 200. (3 era.) S
ATE 220. ATHLETIC TRAINING I. The basic prevention, care, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic injuries;
understanding and demonstrating how to develop a conditioning program, basic evaluation of injuries, and how to
manage them, and other topics related to sport, medicine. Prerequisites: Open to curriculum studenta only . (3 era.)
F
ATE 230. ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS OF ATHLETIC TRAINING . The administrative functions, litigation,
staff relationships, ethics, budget and supplies, inventory, facility design, maintenance, safety assesament, student
trainer organization and risum6 writing. Prerequisites: Open to curriculum students only. (1 er.) S
ATE 240. NUTRITION FOR SPORTS. Nutrition and its applications to health and sport,: designed to provide the
student with a sound nutritional background 10 that ■ound decisions may be made concerning all aspecta of
nutrition. Additionally, specific nutritional techniques used to improve athletic performance are addressed. (3 era.)
F
DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE
343
ATE 250. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY FOR ATHLETIC TRAINERS . An introductory course in human physiology
examining the function of the body' s major systems. Particular attention is given to those systems of interest to
prospective athletic trainers. Prerequisites: ATE 200, 210. (3 crs.) S
ATE 260. ATHLETIC TRAINJNG Il. The spine and its extremities; the evaluation techniques that are used to
determine the degree of injury found in the clinical setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (3 crs.)
s
ATE 320. MODALITY PRJNCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES WITH LABORATORY. Lectures and laboratory
exercises that explain the use and theory of physical therapy modalities that are used in the sports medicine clinical
setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (4 crs.) F
ATE 330. THERAPEUTIC EXERCISE WITH LABORATORY. Lectures and laboratory exercises that explain
the use and theory of therapeutic exercise and equipment used for rehabilitation in the sports medicine setting.
Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (4 crs.) S
ATE 400. ORTHOPEDIC EVALUATIONS 1N SPORTS MEDICJNE. Clinical evaluations of injured athletes by
the student and the physician to be used in determining the extent of an injury. The student will register for this
course again in a consecutive semester. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only . (1 er.) F S
ATE 450. SPECIAL TOPICS 1N SPORTS MEDICJNE. Orienta the advanced student to research and
experimentation in sports medicine and athletic training. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (3 crs.)
F
344
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
THEATRE (THE)
See also the program in Secondary Education Communication Certification (pages 164-165
in this catalog.)
Professor Roger C. Emelson, chair. Associate Professor Malcolm P. Callery; Assistant
Professor Michael J. Slavin; Instructor Richard James Helldobler
PURPOSE
As one of the performing arts, the theatre is a means of self-expression and social
communication. Whether studying pure dramatic expression or musical dramatic expression,
the objective is to understand how speech, as well as the non-verbal aspects of a production,
such as lighting, movement, scenery and costumes, communicates ideas and emotion and
how they have been used and are used for entertainment, education, reform and other social
purposes. The study of the dramatic arts serves not only Theatre majors but those in other
disciplines concerned with human interaction and symbolic expression, e.g., Art,
Communication Studies, Political Science, Sociology, English, and Psychology. Students
who are aware of the history and technology associated with the theatre hopefully will be,
as participants, whether as actors or viewers, more appreciative of this art form.
PROGRAM
Theatre is an undergraduate degree program in the College of Liberal Arts. Theatre
also is one option of the teacher certification program in Communication. Persons who
receive certification in this area can teach English, Theatre, Speech, and Non-Print Media.
The student interested in the certification program should contact the College of Education
and Human Services. A master's degree program in Communication that includes theatre
studies is available through the School of Graduate Studies.
The Theatre Program as a whole serves a dual function. It provides occupational
education and training for talented students who wish to pursue a career in Theatre, and it
provides not only educational but performance opportunities for all students on campus. The
addition of six dance courses, which range from basic ballet to theatre dance, gives the
major a competitive advantage in professional preparation.
The Theatre Department annually presents four on-campus play, dance and musical
productions. Dance concerts which combine classical ballet and modem jazz contribute to
the university's performing arts presentations. At Linden Hall, a nearby conference and
recreation center, the department sponsors the Valley Theatre Company, which produces six
plays and musicals from May through October. In cooperation with the Student Association,
Incorporated, the department also sponsors three play-producing groups: the University
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
345
credits. It is expected that each experience will be in a different area of play production.
Theatre majors are required to take one practicum credit during each regularly enrolled
term. A major must have a minimum of eight practicum credits. Practicum grades are
awarded on the faculty advisor's evaluation of the quality of work performed and on the
completion of the work hours agreed to at the time the practicum is undertaken.
The Theatre Department recognizes student achievement. It rewards creative excellence
by offering opportunities for upper level students to produce a musical variety show and to
direct or design theatrical productions.
The University's Steele Auditorium has a seating capacity of 955. It has a proscenium
stage, a 16-channel sound mixer with multiple microphone and line inputs on stage, and is
undergoing a complete renovation of its lighting system. The theatre also has scenery,
lighting, costume, and property areas.
HONOR SOCIETY
Since 1938, outstanding students annually have been elected to the University Players'
Hall of Fame. Membership in Alpha Psi Omega (A~O), the national honor society, can be
achieved through active participation in theatre productions.
CAREERS
Graduates work throughout the country in professional and semi-professional theatre,
in film and television, rehabilitational theatre, teaching, recreation, public relations, interior
decoration, and arts management.
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE
Curriculum:
(A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101-102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural
Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives.
(B) Area Concentration: Required: 29 credits of Introduction to the Theatre (THE 100); Ballet Technique
(THE 121); Fundamentals of Acting (THE 131); Stagecraft I (THE 151); History of the Theatre I & Il (THE 261
& 262); Production, Rehearsal and Performance (THE 392); Theatre Practicum (THE 350-358); 24 credits of
theatre electives; 15 credits of related electives in disciplines closely related to Theatre.
or
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
346
THEATRE COURSES (THE)
F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring.
All the Theatre courses are offered during a student's four-year matriculation at California
University.
Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +).
+THE 100 INTRODUCTION TO THE THEATRE. A survey of the art and craft of the theatre from play script
to play production. Theatre history and literature, acting, directing, design, and playhouse architecture are studied
to discover what goes on in the theatre and what it all means. Students will be aaaigned as cast or crew for
departmental productions during the term in which they are enrolled. Students can expect to participate in claaaroom
performances. (3 era.) F,S
+THE 101. VOICE AND SPEECH. A practical and useful course for the performer or anyone who wants a
flexible , strong, controlled voice. The Lessac method involving the natural ways in which the body produces vocal
sounds is primarily studied for clear and articulate speech which is free of regional qualities, affectation, imitation,
and annoying physical habits. The course also involves trsnacription of the International Phonetic Alphabet for
correct pronunciation. (3 era.) F
+THE 102. VOICE AND INTERPRETATION. Methods of analysis and presentation for effective oral reading
of dramatic literature, prose and poetry. (3 era.) S
+THE 121. BALLET TECHNIQUE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to ballet as
practiced in western Europe and in the United States. Basic techniques include barre exercises, port de bras and
center practice with jumps, beats, and turns. This course is suitable for the student who has no previous experience.
(3 era.) F
THE 122. BALLET TECHNIQUE ll. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of techniques
demonstrated in specialized study and drill. Emphasis is placed on quicker retention of complex combinations.
Further emphasis is placed on center work to develop the student's artistry in the dance form. Prerequisite : Ballet
Technique I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student' • experience
and ability. (1-3 era.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of 7 credits to count toward graduation.) S
+THE 126 MAKEUP. This course covers modeling the face and the body with makeup, and the addition ofthreedimensional prostheses. Historical, specific character, fantasy, corrective, street and fashion makeup will be
researched, designed and applied . Students with an advanced interest will construct three-dimensional prostheses
and hair pieces. (3 era.)
+THE 131. FUNDAMENTALS OF ACTING. An introduction to the development of the basic tools of the actor' s
craft, and personal discipline for the actor through the use of acting exercises, sensitivity exercises, theatre games
and improvisation. (3 era.) F
+THE 151. STAGECRAFT I. Introduction to the theory and practice of stagecraft, involving basic set
construction, painting and plan reading. Practical experience for students majoring in performance media . (3 era.)
F
THE 152. STAGECRAFT ll. Advanced practice and principles of scenery and property construction. Practical
experience with plastics, metals, silk screening, drafting and advanced woodworking is stressed . Prerequisite:
Stagecraft I or permission of instructor. (3 era.) S
THE 200. FUNDAMENTALS OF DIRECTING. The comprehensive study of a director's pre-production planning
for a play presented on stage, film or television. The directorial analysis of plays and basic fundamentals of
composition, picturization, pantomime with properties, movement, and ground plan are studied. The in-claaa
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
347
prepantion of a complete directorial script for a one-act or cuning from a longer play may be directed as part of
a public prognm of student-directed plays. (3 crs .) S
THE 211. LIGIITING I. The basic theory and pnctice of lighting for the stage, film, and television. Pnctical
experience for student& majoring in performance media is stressed. (3 crs.) F
THE 212. LIGIITING D. Advanced pnctice of lighting for the stage, television and film. Pnctical application for
students majoring in performance media is stressed. Prerequisite: Lighting I or consent of the instructor. (3 crs.)
s
+THE 220. JAZZ TECHNIQUE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to American jazz
dance. Lengthening muscles and developing isolation techniques are pncticed as necessary for most forms of jazz
dance. The Luigi Technique which includes standing and floor warm-up, stretch and center pnctice in jumps, turns
and isolations is studied . (3 crs.) F
THE 221. JAZZ TECHNIQUE D. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of jazz techniques
as demonstnted in specialized study and drill . Emphasis is placed on quicker retention of complex combinations.
Further emphasis is placed on center work to develop the student's artistry in the dance form . Prerequisite: Jazz
Technique I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student's experience
and ability . (1-3 crs.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of 7 credits to count toward gnduation.) S
THE 225 . COSTUME CONSTRUCTION. Basic pattern dnfting and sewing techniques applied to the construction
of costumes. (3 crs.)
THE 231. INTERMEDIATE ACTING . The development of a personal and useful acting method to create
believable chancters for the stage. The acting method is developed through intense scene work that includes
chancter and script analysis. Prerequisite: Fundamentals of Acting or consent of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
+THE 240. CREATIVE DRAMATICS. The stimulation and development of creativity through playmaking
exercises, storytelling, improvisation and sensitivity techniques useful for potential teachers and parenta. (3 crs.)
FS
THE 245 . CHILDREN'S THEATRE. The selection, direction and production of plays for children. (May be
repeated for credit.) (3 crs.)
+TH_E 255 . PUPPETRY. The planning and production of puppet plays. (3 crs.)
+THE 257. HISTORY OF COSTUME. A survey of the history of costume in the western world . (3 crs.)
+THE 261. HISTORY OF THE THEATRE I. The development of the theatre from the Classic through the
Baroque, including representative plays. (3 crs.) F
THE 262. HISTORY OF THE THEATRE D. The development of the theatre from the Baroque to the present day,
including representative plays . (3 crs .) S
+THE 263. AMERICAN THEATRE HISTORY . A survey of the American theatre from Colonial times to the
present, including representative plays. (3 crs.) F
THE 270. READERS THEATRE. The principles and pnctice of organizing and presenting Readers Theatre
presentations. Prerequisite: THE 102 or COM 111 or permission of instructor. (3 crs.)
THE 300. THEATRE DANCE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to the various dance
forms used in musical theatre. The forms are tap, jazz, ballet, ethnic and modem dance . Choreognphic styles as
THEATRE DEPARTMENT
348
originated by Agnes DeMille, Bob Fosse, Jerome Robbins and Jack Cole will be demonstrated and applied .
Prerequisite: Ballet Technique D, Jazz Technique Dor permission of the instructor. (3 crs.)
THE 301. THEATRE DANCED. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of modem dance
techniques as demonstrated in specialized study and drill. Emphasis is placed on principles stressed in Theatre
Dance I with the addition of character shoes for women, partnering work and stage combat. Prerequisite: Theatre
Dance I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student' s experience and
ability. (1-3 crs.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of7 credits to count toward graduation.)
+THE 305 . SHAKESPEARE IN THE THEATRE. Representative Shakespearean plays studied as theatrical
presentations. (3 crs.)
THE 315. WORLD DRAMA ON STAGE. Classical to nineteenth-century plays (excluding Shakespeare) studied
as theatrical preaentations. (3 era.) F
THE 317. MODERN DRAMA ON STAGE. Nineteenth and twentieth-century plays studied as theatrical
presentations. (3 crs.) S
THE 323 . SCENERY DESIGN I. Introduction to the theory and practice of designing scenery for various
environments . Prerequisite: Stagecraft I or permission of the instructor. (3 crs .) F
THE 324. SCENERY DESIGN D. Advanced theory and practice of designing scenery for various environments .
Prerequisite: Scenery Design I or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
THE 325. COSTUME DESIGN . Basic principles of costume design. Students complete various design projects
for specific plays selected from a variety of historical periods. (3 crs.)
THE 328 . SCENE PAINTING. The practice of scenery painting for the theatre. Students work with a variety of
paints, texturing materials, and application techniques. Emphasis is placed on enlarging an existing art work to a
size suitable for the stage. (3 era.)
THE 330. ADVANCED ACTING. This course challenges the actor' s ability to demonstrate a personal and useful
acting method through a wide range of problems as found in historical and modem plays, and in acting styles.
Prerequisite: Intermediate Acting or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) S
THEATRE - CHANGE IN PRACTICUM LISTING . Theatre practicum is the application of learned skills in
all areas of theatre and dance. Credit is variable. Maximum number of credits per term is five; maximum that
will count toward graduation is eighteen. Courses numbered THE 350 through THE 358 are practicums that can
be repeated up to 5 credits each . Courses THE 357 and 358 can be repeated, but cannot exceed 10 credits.
+THE 350.
+THE 351.
+THE 352.
+THE 353.
+THE 354.
+THE 355.
+THE 356 .
+THE 357.
+THE 358 .
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
THEATRE PRACTICUM:
ACTING.
DANCE.
DIRECTING.
DESIGN.
MANAGEMENT.
TECHNICAL DIRECTOR.
TECHNICAL PRODUCTION.
TOURING THEATRE.
SUMMER THEATRE.
THE 392. PRODUCTION, REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE. Special acting, directing, management and
design, or technical involvement in a play production. Prerequisite: Senior level only. (3 crs.) F S
THE 400. DRAMATIC THEORY AND CRITICISM. Theories of dramatic structure and their application to
theatrical presentations. (3 crs.) S
349
GOVERNANCE
The State System of Higher Education
California University of Pennsylvania:
Administrative Officers and Staff
Faculty and Administration
Emeriti Faculty
350
STATE SYSTEM OF IIlGHER EDUCATION
THE STATE SYSTEM OF IDGHER EDUCATION
OF
THE COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA
James H. McCormick, Chancellor
Emily Hannah
Vice-Chancellor
Academic Policy and Planning
Wayne G. Failor
Vice-Chancellor
Finance and Administration
Edward P. Kelley, Jr.
Vice-Chancellor
Employee and Labor Relations
Sarah V. Souris
Vice-Chancellor
Advancement
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
F . Eugene Dixon, Jr., Chairperson
Judy Ansill, Vice-chairperson
James L. Larson, Vice-chairperson
Muriel Berman
The Honorable Donald M. Carroll, Jr.
The Honorable Jeffrey W. Coy
Jennifer Crissman
G. Edward DeSeve
Floyd M. Mains
Mary Napoli
Joseph M. Nespoli
Darren K. Parr
Philip D. Rowe, Jr.
Rebecca F. Gross
The Honorable Jere W. Schuler
James A. Hughes
The Honorable Patrick J. Stapleton
The Honorable F. Joseph Loeper
Julius Uehlein
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
351
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
John Pierce Watkins, President
COUNCIL OF TRUSTEES
Judy Ansill, Chairperson
Carmine Durzo, Vice-chairperson
Aaron Selekman, Secretary and Student Trustee
William F. Barry
Gail Lese
Robert Billick
Frank Mascara
Frank DeLuca
Gwendolyn Simmons
Paul Lemmon
Steven Stout
352
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
ACADEMIC AFFAIRS
Vice-President for Academic Affairs
Nancy Z. Nelson
Acting Associate Vice-President for Academic Affairs
Donald J. Thompson
George W. Crane
Dean, School of Graduate Studies and Research
Stephen A. Pavlak
Dean, College of Education and Human Services
Acting Associate Dean, College of Education and Human Services
Regis Lamr
Director of Student Teaching
Betty A. Ford
Dean, College of Science and Technology
Richard B. Hart
Associate Dean, College of Science and Technology
Harry M. Langley
Dean, College of Liberal Arts
Jesse A. Cignetti
Associate Dean, College of Liberal Arts
Walter A. Brumm
William L. Beck
Dean of Library Services
Library Systems Analyst
Kathleen A. Joki
Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services
Norman G. Hasbrouck
Assistant Director of Admissions
Amy C. Woodward
Assistant Director of Admissions
Jeannine Metal
Director, Placement and Career Services
Stephanie Lashway
Assistant Director, Placement and Career Services
Charles E. Talbert
Coordinator, Cooperative Education
Dawn Wilson DePasquale
Director of Institutional Research
Richard L. Kline
Director of Honors Program
Jay R. Powell
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
Vice-President for Student Development and Services
Dean of Students
Dean of Student Life/University Judicial Officer
Dean for Student Services
Associate Dean for Residence Life
Director, University Dining Services
Associate Dean for Support Services, Director for Social Equity
Director, Women's Center, Disabled Services
Associate Dean for Student Services
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Residence Hall Director
Elmo Natali
Paul E. Burd
Phillip L. Hayes
Dennis Riegelnegg
William F. Behrendt
Lenora Angelone
Alan K. James
Alberta Graham
Tim Susick
Paul Bums
Colleen Crooks
William Edmonds
Shawn Urbine
Leslie Louse
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
Athletic Director
Associate Athletic Director
Dean/International Student Adviser
Counseling Psychologist
Counseling Psychologist
Counselor, Drug & Alcohol Specialist, Director of CHOICES
Campus Ministry
Director of Student Publications
Executive Director, Student Association, Inc.
Assistant Director, Student Association, Inc.
Operations Manager, Student Association, Inc.
Program Director, Student Association, Inc.
Assistant Program Director, Student Association, Inc.
Systems Analyst
Comptroller, Student Association, Inc.
Director, Fitness Center
University Physician
Head Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
University Nurse
Nurse Educator
Manager, Book Store, Student Association, Inc.
Manager, University Dining Services
353
Tom Pucci
Paul Flores
Nancy J. Tait
Lynn R. Surrey
Dawn Moeller
Liz Gruber
Sr. Karen Larkins
William Bennett
Paul E. Burd
Barry Niccolai
Dave Smith
Jay R. Wheeler
John G. Watkins
Richard Olshefski
Anna Coleman
Paul Fazio
Raymond Nino, M.D.
Celeste H.Roskevitch
Virginia Saunders
Mary Ann Keruskin
Lois Sheridan
Bernice Barnhart
Claudia Martucci
Janet Todaro
Norma Snyder
Linda Timko
Paul Taylor
354
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF
ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
Vice-President for Administration and Finance
Associate Vice President for Administration and Finance
Comptroller
Director of Computer Services
Director of Financial Aid
Director of Grants
Director of Health and Safety
Director of Personnel
Director of Physical Plant
Director of Public Safety
Director of Purchasing
Director of Budget
Inventory and Facilities Officer
Director of Payroll
Allan J. Golden
Eugene P. Grilli
Vacant
Richard E. Cerullo
Gary Seelye
Sandra Huska
Thomas Hartley, Sr.
Penelope Stanick
Thomas Jameson
Jack Duvall
Carl Maurer
Charles W. Zinsser, Jr.
Vacant
Margaret M. Wilson
DEVELOPMENT AND EXTERNAL RELATIONS
Vice-President for Development and External Relations
Executive Director, Mon Valley Renaissance
Director of Alumni Relations
Director of Public Relations
Homer R. Pankey
Richard H. Webb
Pauline M. Tonsetic
Cleo C. Boyle
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
355
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION
(The date is that of first appointment to California University of Pennsylvania.)
M . EILEEN AIJCBN. (1969) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY BDUCATION
B.S., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ed.D., Brigham
Young Univenity
DBNCIL K. BACKUS. (1983) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
A.B., Glenville State College; M.A. , West Virginia Univenity
MITCHELL M. BAILEY. (1959) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIBNCES
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Rutgen Univenity
JAN W . BAWN0. (1966) PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVIRONMENTALSCIBNCES
B.A., Univenity of Louisville; M .S., Purdue University; Ph .D ., Univenity of Louisville
ROI.UN M . BARBER. (1976) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.S ., Ohio State Univenity; M .S. , Ohio State Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity
BRUCE D . BARNHART. (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; A.T .C.
JOHN F. BAUMAN. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A. , Uninua College; M.A., Temple Univenity; Ph.D., Rutgen Univenity
ROBERT A. BAUMAN. (1968) PROFESSOR, SPl!CIAL EDUCATION
B.S., Geneseo College; M .S., Indiana Univenity; Ed.D., Indiana Univenity
WILLIAM J. BBARDSLEY. (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BN0USH
B.A., West Virginia University; M.A., West Virginia Univenity
WILLIAM L. BBCK. (1970) OHAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.L.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh
WIWAM F. BEHRENDT. (1971) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, STUDENT SERVICES; OHAN FOR RESIDENCE UFB
B.S. , California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Univenity of Pittaburgh
PBT8R J. BBLCH. (1968) PROFESSOR AND COORDINATOR OF 0RADUATB PROORAM, special education
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ed.D., West Virginia
Univenity
WIWAM BENNETT. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BN0USH; DIRECl'OR OF STUDENT PUBUCATIONS
B.A., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M .A., Univenity of Pittaburgh
ROBERT M . BERRY. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.A. , Univenity of Maine; M .A., Univeraity of Maine
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
356
JOHN A. BHYER.. (1963) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.Ed ., Duquemc Univenity; M.Ed ., Duquesne Univenity; M. Math., Univenity of South Carolina
Wll.JJAM B. BIDDINOTON. (1977) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S ., Welt Virginia Univenity; M .S., Welt Virginia Univenity; A.T.C.
FOSTER E. BILLHEIMBR. (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCBS
B.S., PcMtylvania State Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Texas; Ph.D., Rutgen Univenity
JOHN C. BLACK. (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BDUCATIONALSTUDIES
B.S., Clarion Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D ., Univenity of Pitllburah
JERRY M . BLACKMON . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB; DIRl!CTOR, P.C .
LABS
B.S., Oklahoma State Univenity; M .S., Oklahoma State Univenity; Regiatcrcd Profeuional Engineer
(Electrical) P.E.
WIIJJAM F . BLANK. (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A.T. , Duke Univenity
G. H . BLAYNEY. (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EN0USH
B.A., Lafayette College; M.A ., Brown Univenity; B.Litt., Univenity of Oxford
Wll.JJAM F . BLOSEL. (1976) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., PeMtylvania State Univenity; M.B.A., Univenity of Pittsburgh; C .P.A.
MARCELLA A. RYE BLOUT. (1968) PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., Welt Virginia University; Ed.D., Welt Virginia
Univenity
DAVID F. BoEHM. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Welt Liberty State College; M.S., Welt Virginia Univenity; Ph.D ., Welt Virginia Univenity
MARKE. BRONAKOWSKI. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of PeMtylvania
BURREU. A. BROWN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S. , California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .B.A., Univenity of Pitllburgh; J .D ., Univenity of Pitllburgh
EDWARD BROWN. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SOCIAL WORK
B.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M.L .S., Carnegie Mellon Univenity; M .S.W., Univenity of Pitllburgh
ROBERT A. BROWN. (1969) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
B.A., University of New Hampshire; M .Ed., Univenity of Pitllburgh; Ph.D., University of Pitllburgh
WALTER A. BRUMM. (1988) ASSOCIATE DEAN, COI.J.JlOE OF UBERALARTS
B.A., Wittenberg Univenity; B.D., Methodist Theological School of Ohio; M .A., Kent State Univenity;
Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
357
THOMAS P. BUCKELEW.
(1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Muhlenberg College; M .S., Univenity of South Carolina; Ph .D., Univenity of South Carolina
(1969) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DEAN OF STUDENTS
B.A., West Virginia Univenity; M.A., Well Virginia Univenity; Ed.D., Well Virginia Univenity
PAULE. BURD .
(1969) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY
B.A., Univenity of Notre Dame; M .A., Univenity of Toronto; J.D., Duquesne Univenity
JOHN J . BURNS.
MALcolM P. CALLERY.
(1978) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, THEATRE
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .F .A., Southern Illinois Univenity
N. CAMPBELL. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B. Ed ., Southeastern Louisiana Univenity; M.S. , Univenity of Illinois; Ph.D., Univenity of Illinois
DAVID
(1973) PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S., Bucknell University; Ph.D., University of PittBburgh
DoROTHY M. CAMPBELL.
(1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Univenity of Massachusetts; M .S., Eastern Kentucky Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of North Dakota
JOHN P . CARROLL.
(1990) INSTRUCTOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., Marshall University; M .A ., Ohio University
JAMES 0. CARTER .
(1967) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Brigham
Young Univenity
RAYMOND A. CATALANO .
M . ARsHAD CHAWDHRY . (1976) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., University of Agriculture (Pakistan); M.S., Univenity of Agriculture (Pakistan); M.A., Univenity of
Maryland; M .S., University of Illinois; Ph .D., Univenity of Illinois
A. CHRIST . (1970) PROFESSOR, EU!MENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., University of PittBburgh; M.Ed ., University of PittBburgh; Ed.D., Pennsylvania State University
RONALD
(1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF FRESHMAN WRITING, ENGLISH
B.A., St. Vincent College; M.A ., University of Minnesota; Ph.D., Univenity of Minnesota.
EDWARD J . CHUTE.
A. CIGNll1TI. (1968) DEAN, COLl..llOE OF LIBERAL ARTS
B.S., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Duquesne Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity
JESSE
CLYDE W. CLENDANIEL.
(1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A.T., Indiana Univenity
M . CLINGERMAN . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.A., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.B.A., West Virginia Univenity
DEBRA
(1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.A., Harvard College; M.A., Tufts University; Ph.D., University of PittBburgh
lsMAIL COLE.
358
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
(1967) PROFESSOR, BNGLISH
B.S ., Southern Illinois University; M.A., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of Illinoi ■
PHILIP Y. COLEMAN.
(1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, HARTH SCIENCES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.S., California
University of Pennsylvania
DoNALD J. CONTE.
ELAINE S. COSTEU.O.
(1966) INSTRUCTOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S . , California University of Pennsylvania
ROBERT C. COWLES .
(1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF FORENSIC ACTIVITIES, COMMUNICATION
STUDIES
B.A., Marietta College; M .A., Bowling Green State University
JONI
L. CRAMER . (1991) INSTRUCTOR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S ., West Virginia University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; A.T.C .
(1969) DEAN, GRADUATE SCHOOL AND RESEARCH
B.S ., State University of New York at Brockport; M.S., State University of New York at Fredonia; Ph.D.,
Ohio University
GEORGE W . CRANE.
(1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
ALBERT DASCENZO .
J. DEFILIPPO . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., California University of Pennsylvania; D .A., Carnegie
BERNARD
Mellon University
ANETTB M . DENARDO .
(1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
(1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A., West Liberty State College; M.A., West Virginia University
MANUEL G. DEMETRAXIS.
(1991) INSTRUCTOR AND REFERENCE LIBRARIAN , LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S ., Radford University; M.S., Radford University; M.L.S. , Florida State University
AUCH G . DENNISON .
(1990) COORDINATOR, COOPERATIVE EDUCATION
B.A., Grove City College; M .A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania
DAWN WILSON DEPASQUALE.
(1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D ., West
Virginia University
ELWIN DICKERSON.
F . DICJCJE. (1966) PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION
B.S., Bridgewater State College; M .A., Michigan State University; Ed .D., Michigan State University
ROBERT
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
359
ROBERT W. DILLON, SR. (1970) PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
A.B., Fairfield University; M.A., Ohio University; Ph.D ., Ohio University
GAILS. DITJCOFF. (1986) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., State University of New York at BinaJamton; M.S., State University of New York at Albany; Ph .D.,
State University of New York at Albany
PAUL P. DoUNAR. (1968) ASSOCtATB PROFESSOR, MUSIC
B.S., Duquesne University; M.Ed., Duquesne University
THEODORE L. DoMINICK. (1969) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIBNCB
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Weat Virginia University
RONALD G. DREUCCI. (1973) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D., West
Virginia University
RAYMONDE. DUNLEVY. (1978) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
DILAWAR MUMBY EDWARDS. (1972) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
I.Sc ., St. Aloyaiua' College, Jabalpur, India; B.E. (Hon■.), Govt. Engineering College, Jabalpur, India;
M .E.(I), Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India; M .Sc. in Ed., Indiana University; Ph.D., Indiana
University
FRANKT. EDWARDS. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Antioch College; B.S., Georgetown School of Foreign Service; M.A., Georgetown University; Ph .D. ,
Catholic Univenity of America
ROGER C. EMELSON. (1961) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, THEATRE
· B.A. , Beloit College; M .F .A., Carnegie Mellon University; Ph.D ., Carnegie Mellon University
HARRY L . ERVIN . (1971) INSTRUCTOR, HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
B.S ., Hardin-Simmon■ College
R . MICHAEL FELDMAN . (1969) PROFESSOR, SPF.llCH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.A., University of Iowa; Ph .D., Northweatcm University; CCC Audiology
ANTONIO J. FERNANDES. (1961) ASSOCtATB PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB
B.A., Well Virginia University; M.S., Weat Virginia University
SUMNER FERRIS. (1964) ASSOCtATE PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Harvard College
PAUL A. FLoRES. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ATHumcs; ASSOCtATE DIRECTOR OF ATHumcs;
WOMEN 'S BASKllTBALL COACH
B.S. , Eaat Stroudsburg University of Pennsylvania; M.S., East Stroudsburg University of Pennsylvania
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
360
L. FOIL. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF TELEVISION STUDIO, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
8.S .S., Northwestern University; M.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D ., Northwestern University
SYLVIA
J.
K. FOLMAR.. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Samford University; M.A., Binningham-Southern College; Ph.D., University of Alabama (l'uacalooaa)
BETTY A . FORD . (1989) DIRECTOR STUDENT TEACHING, COLI.EOE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
B.A., Fairmont State College; M .A., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., Ohio University
(1968) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ENGLISH
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., North Dakota State University
RONALD L. FORSYTHE.
(1966) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
8.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , West Virginia University; Ph.D., The Ohio State
University
GEOROE J . FRANOOS .
Fusco. (1967) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
8 .S., Duquesne University; M .S., Duquesne University; Ph.D., University of Colorado
GABRIEL C .
E. GABOR . (1964) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., West Virginia University; M .S., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., West Virginia University
WILUAM
(1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.A., Washington and Jefferson College; M .A., Michigan State University
JOHNS . GIBSON, JR.
(1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
8.S ., Carnegie Mellon University; M.Ed ., University of Pittsburgh; M .Pub.Mgmt., Carnegie Mellon
University
LIZBETH A . GILLE'ITE.
CHARLES A. GISMONDI.
COACH
(1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPEECH PATHOLOOY AND AUDIOLOOY; HEAD BASEBALL
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.S ., West Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology
(1981) VICE-PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
B.A., Fairleigh Dickinson University; M .A.T., Fairleigh Dickinson University; Ph .D ., New York University
Ail.AN J . GOLDEN .
MAx A. GONANO . (1982) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MUSIC; DIRECTOR OF BANDS
B.F.A., Carnegie Mellon University; M.F.A., Carnegie Mellon University
(1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.A., Pennsylvania State University
JUDITH A . GooD .
JACK
D. GOODSTEIN. (1967) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ENGLISH
B.A., Queens College; M.A., New York University; Ph .D ., New York University
(1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
8 .A., Colgate University; Ph .D ., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
GREOO GOULD .
(1971) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR, WOMEN ' S CENTER
B.S., Robert College; M. Ed., Loyola University of Chicago
ALBERTHAL . GRAHAM.
P. GRJW. (1982) ASSOCIATE VICE-PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
B.A., California University of Pennsylvania; M.B.A., University of Pittsburgh
EUGENE
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
361
RICHARD C. GRIM. (1983) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY
B.S ., Arbnaaa State Univenity; M.S ., Arkanaa■ State Univenity; Ed.D., Univenity ofTenneuee
H. GRIMES. (1961) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Welt Virginia Univenity; M.A., West Virginia Univenity
ROBHRT
RICHARD H. GRINSTEAD. (1972) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ART
B.A.E., Ohio State Univenity; B.F.A. , Ohio State Univenity; M .F .A., Ohio State Univenity; M .A.E., Ohio
State Univenity
R. GROSS . (1978) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCJBNCE
B.S ., Carnegie Mellon Univenity; Ph .D., Univenity of Pittaburgh
MICHAEL
EI.J7Alllmf A. GRUBHR . (1990) INSTRUCTOR, STUDBNT SHRVICBS
B.S., Bowling Green State Univenity; M.A. , Youngstown State Univenity
A. GUSTIN. (1988) INSTRUCTOR, BARTH SCJBNCBS
B.S., Indiana State Univenity; M.A., Indiana State Univenity
WIWAM
MICHAEL HACIIBIT. (1965) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIBNCE
B.S ., Univenity of Delaware; M .S., University of Delaware
GBNB PATRICK HALB<>TH. (1965) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Marquette Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Chicago
I. HALL. (1984) ASSOCIATB PROFBSSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCJBNCE
B.S., Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S., University of Pittaburgh
JUDITH
JOHN
M. HANCHIN. (1967) PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Duque1nc Univenity; M.Ed., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Indiana University of
Pennsylvania
A. HART. (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, OHRONTOLOOY
B.S ., Nebraska Wesleyan Univenity; M.A., Duquesne Univenity; Graduate Aging Specialist Certificate,
MARY
University of Nebraska, Omaha
RICHARD B. HART . (1968) DBAN, COLLEOB OF SCJBNCE AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S ., Franklin and Marshall College; Ph.D. , University of Minneaota
PATRICIA L. HARTMAN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFBMOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Abilene Christian Univenity; M .A.T ., Johna Hopkins University; M .A., Ohio Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio
University
NORMAN G. HAsBROUCK. (1980) DBAN, BNROUMBNT MANAOBMBNT AND ACADBMIC SHRVICBS
B.A., Thiel College; M.A., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania
JOHN A. HAsBUUO. (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT), MILITARY SCJBNCE
B.S., Lock Haven University of Pennsylvania; Captain, U.S. Anny
AU A . HAsHBMI . (1982) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., Univenity of Tehran; M.P.A., University of Tehran; M.B.A., St. Louis Univenity; Ph .D.,
Northwestern Univenity
362
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNNERSITY
HOWARD L . HAUSHBR (1966) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.S., Wayneaburg College; M.A., West Virginia University; Ed.D ., University of Virginia
PHIL HAYES. (1970) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SBRVJCBS; DEAN FOR STUDENT LIFE
B.S., Fainnont State College; M .Ed., West Virginia University; Ed.D., West Virginia University
C . HEIM. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
BA, University of Pittaburgh; MA, University of Pittaburgh; M. Phil., Cambridge University
JOSEPH
RICHARD JAMBS HBLUX)BLBR. (1988) INSTRUCTOR, CHAIR, AND COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE COMMUNICATION
PROGRAM, THEATRE
B.B.A., University of Toledo; M.A., Bowling Green State University, Ph .D ., Bowling Green State University
JAY D . HELSEL. (1961) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Pennsylvania State University; Ed.D ., University of
Pittaburgh
WU.LIAM HENDRICKS . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A. , Caae Western Reserve University; M.A., University of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , University of Pittaburgh
WU.LIAM D . HEPNER. (1956) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University
BARBARA HESS. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
WALLACB D . HOOOB. (1968) PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.Ed ., Duquesne University; Ed.D., West Virginia University
KARLA A . HOFFMAN . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB
B.S., Towson State University; M.Ed ., University of Massachusetts; CAGS University of Massachusetts
HALBERT
H.
HOl.LOWAY.
{1985) ASSOCIATE
PROFESSOR
AND
ASSOCIATE
DlRllCTOR
OF
FORENSICS,
COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., San Jose State University; M.A., San Francisco State University; Ph .D., Wayne State University
LARRY D . HORATH . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., Eastern Illinois University; M.S., Eastern Illinois University; Ph .D., Texas A&M University
L. HORATH. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., Peru State College; M .S., Texas A & M University; Ph .D ., Texas A&M University
REN~
KAREN L. HORNUNG . (1981) PROFESSOR, GERONTOLOGY .
B.A., Geneva College; M .A., University of New Mexico; Ph.D ., University of Nebraska; Graduate A~ng
Specialist, University of Michigan; Faculty Fellow, Geriatric Education Center of Pennsylvania
RONALD C . HOY. (1969) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR , PHILOSOPHY
B.A., University of California at Berkeley; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh
STEVE C . HSIUNG . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.Ed., National Kaohsiung Nonna! University; M.S, University of North Dakota; MS . EE., Kansas State
University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
BARRY B. HUNTER.
363
(1968) PROFESSOR AND DIRECI'OR OF ORADUATE STUDIES, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
SCIENCES
B.S., California University of Penmylvania; M.S ., University of Minnesota; M .Ed., California University
of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., West Virginia University
MADELON JACOBA.
(1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENOUSH
B.A., Albion College; M.A., Purdue University; Ph.D ., Purdue University
(1970) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Eastern Michigan University; M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University; Ph .D., Wayne State
University
ALU..N D. JACOBS .
(1984) ASSOCIATE DEAN, STUDENT SERVICES; SOCtAL EQUITY OFFICER
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh
ALAN K. JAMES .
KIRK R. JOHN. (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., California University of Penmylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D ., Indiana
University of Pennsylvania; NCSP; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist; Pennsylvania Licensed
Psychologist
L. JOHNSON. (1968) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S., University of Kansas; Ph .D ., Louisiana State University
DAVID
A. JOICL. (1988) SYSTEMS ANALYST, LIBRARY SERVICES
B .S ., State University of New York at Buffalo; M.S.I.S., University of Pittsburgh
KATHLEEN
CAROLYN JONES .
(1975) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVllLOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.A., St. Augustine's College; M.A., North Carolina Central University
T . JONES . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S. , Waynesburg College; M.S ., Well Virginia University; C .P.A.
DAVID
GERALDINE
M . JONES. (1974) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, CHAIR, AND UPWARD BOUND DIRECTOR, ACADEMIC
DEVllLOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California University of Pennsylvania
(1991) INSTRUCTOR, EARTH SCIENCES
B.S., Salem State College
BETTY I . JOYNT
N. KAl.t. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., Governors State University; M .A. , Governors State University; M.A., University of Illinois, Chicago;
Ph .D., Indiana University, Bloomington
MACDONALD
JOHN R. KALuS .
(1985) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D., University
of Pittsburgh
(1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPORTS MEDICINE
B.S ., University of Connecticut; M.S ., University of Southern Maine; P.T.; A .T .C .
ROBERT H . KANE, JR.
364
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
CAROLL. KAPIAN. (1984) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A., Northwellem Univenity; M.A., Northwellem Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittaburgh
GARY W . KENNEDY. (1962) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittsburgh
CLYDE Y. KIANG. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHIBF CATALOGER, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.A., National Taiwan Univenity; M.A., Wellem Michigan Univenity; M.A., Michigan State Univenity
WIUJAM G. KIMMEL. (1976) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.A., Wilkes College; M.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; Ph.D ., Pennsylvania State Univenity
RICHARD L. KLINE. (1972) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR OF INSTITUTIONAL SEARCH
B.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; M.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania
ARTHUR W. KNIGHT. (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A., San Franciaco State Univenity; M .A ., San Franciaco State University
DAVID V. KOLICX:. (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; A.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California
Univenity of Pennsylvania
STANLBY A. KOMACBK. (1987) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., Miami University; Ed.D., West Virginia University
ROBERT J. KOPKO. (1979) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., Elon College; M.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; C .P.A.
ROBERT A. KORCHECK. (1967) PROFESSOR AND COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE STUDIES, ENGLISH
B.A., St. Bonaventure University; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ph .D., West Virginia Univenity
KADE Kos . (1961) PROFESSOR AND CATALOGER, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S ., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.L.S., Syracuse University; Ed.D ., University of Pittsburgh
ALAN H. KRUECK. (1966) PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A ., Syracuse University; M.A., Michigan State University; Ph.D ., University of Zurich
EwALD C. KRUBOER. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMBNTALSCIENCES
B.S., Oshkosh State College; M.S ., West Virginia University
ANDREW E. KWORTEK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT), MILITARY SCIENCE
B.A ., California University of Pennsylvania; Captain, U.S. Anny
PAULL. LANCASTER. (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S ., California University of Pennsylvania
HARRY M . LANGI.BY. (1989) ASSOCIATB DEAN, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S ., Texas Lutheran College; M.S ., Clemson Univenity; Ph.D., Clemson University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
365
(1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENOUSH
A.B., Niagara University; M .A., Niagara University
FREDERICKS. LAP!SARDI.
(1988) DIRECTOR, PLACBMBNT AND CARBBR SERVICES
B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M .S.Ed ., Duquesne University
STEPHANIE URCHICIC LAsHWAY.
REGIS LAzoR.
(1972) ACTING ASSOCIATE DBAN, COLLBOE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES; ASSOCIATE
PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., University of Delaware
(1966) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of North Carolina; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State
University
ANTHONY u.zzARO .
(1986) PROFBSSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S., West Virginia University; M .B.A., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh
KARBN L. LBMAsTERS .
(1961) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.S., Illinois State College
STEPHEN LBVBNDOS.
(1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Brandeis University; M .S., Brown University; D.A., Carnegie Mellon
ROBERT A. LBVJN .
T. LITTLB. (1970) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D., West
Virginia University
ROBERT
(1975) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
R.N., Uniontown Hospital School of Nursing; B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D ., West
Virginia University; M.S ., California University of Pennsylvania
SHIRLEY A. LITTLB.
IRA
T. LoNDON . (1970) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., University of Delaware; Ph .D ., University of Connecticut
(1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S ., Youngstown State University; M.S., Michigan Technological University
JOHN W . LoNEY.
SAM
P . LoNICH . (1989) INSTRUCTOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., California University of Pennsylvania
JOHN
H. LUCY . (1972) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University; Ph .D., The Ohio State
University
(1970) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., University of Georgia; Ph.D ., University of Georgia
ANDREW J. MACHUSKO.
366
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
F . MEL MADDBN. (1976) PROFESSOR, COUNSBLOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
S.T.B., St. Anthony-on-the Hudaon (with Catholic Univenity); M.A., Montclair State Colleje; Ed.D.,
Univenity of North Dakota
SEAN C. MADDEN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Xavier Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Notre Dame; D.A., Carnegie Mellon Univenity
A. MARCINEK. (1983) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, NURSING
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.S .N., University of Maryland; Ed .D., West Vi[Jinia University; R.N .
MAROARBT
J . GREOORY MARTIN . (1969) PROFESSOR, BU!MBNTARY EDUCATION
B.A., Miami University; M.A.T., Cornell Univenity; Ph.D., Cornell Univenity
F . MARUSKJN . (1966) PROFESSOR AND COLLECJ1ON DHVBLOPMBNT LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.A., Pennsylvania State University; M.L.S., Univenity of Piu.burgh; Ph.D., Univenity of Piu.burgh
ALBERT
ELIZABETH MAsoN .
(1987) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY; SUPERVISOR, SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY CLINIC
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Ball State
Univenity; NCSP; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist
RICHARD
M.
MATOVICH . (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, AND INTER.UBRARY LOAN/DOCUMENTS LIBRARIAN,
LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Duque1ne Univenity; M.L.S., Univenity of Piu.burgh
E. MAXwllU.. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CURRICULUMUBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., University of Piu.burgh; M .L.S., Rutgen Univenity
LoLA
P. McGREW. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, HISTORY AND
B.S., Brigham Young University; M.A., Brigham Young University
AN11fONY
URBAN AFFAIRS
J . DRBW McGUKJN . (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, DIRllCTOR OF COMMUNICATION LAB/RBSBARCH CBNTBR,
COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION STUDIBS
B.A., Freed-Hardeman College; S.C .T ., Murny State University; Ph.D., Univenity of Nebraska
PHYLus S . MCILWAIN . (1969) PROFESSOR, ELBMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D.,
University of Piu.burgh
CAROL A. MCMAHON . (1974) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
B.S., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Piu.burgh
D . FRANK MCPHERSON . (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBBCH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M .S., University of Hawaii; Ph.D., Purdue University; C.C .C.
Speech Pathology; C.C.C. Audiology
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
367
JAMFS T. MCVHY. (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BNOUSH
B.A., Youlliltown Univenity; M.A. , Univenity of Virginia
JAMFS R . MBANS, JR. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., Well Virginia Univenity; M .S ., Univenity of Pittaburgh
MELBNYz.ER. (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ELBMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; M.Ed ., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; Ed .D .,
Indiana Univenity of Pennaylvania
BBVHRLY J.
MBNDou. . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND BCONOMICS
M.S., Wayneaburg College; M .S ., Robert Morri■ College; C .P.A.
EDWARD
JBANNINBMBTAL. (1985) ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, ADMISSIONS
B.A., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennaylvania
L. MICHAEL. (1969) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIBNCB
B.S., Jameatown Colleae; M .A., Univenity of North Dakota; Ed.D., Ball State Univenity
RONALD
RICHARD MIBCZNIKOWSKI. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .A ., State Univenity of New York at Alfred Univenity
PATRICIA MILFORD . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A., George Mason Univenity; M .A ., Eastern Michigan Univenity; Ph.D ., Pennaylvania State Univenity
C. ALLAN MILLER. (1976) PROFESSOR AND DIRBCTOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, BIOLOGICAL AND
BNVIRONMENTAL SCIBNCES
B.S., Buena Villa Colleae; M .A ., Mankato State College; Ph.D ., North Dakota State Univenity
L . MILLER. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.S., Dickinson State Univenity; M.A ., Colorado State Univenity
PATRICK
DAWN M. MOELLER. (1990) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, STUDBNT SERVICES
B.A. , Univenity of Virginia; M.S. , Syracuse Univenity; Ph.D ., Syracuse Univenity
SUSAN J . MONOBU.. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND BCONOMICS
B.A., Seton Hill Colleae; M .A ., Univenity of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittsburgh
C. MOON . (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.A., Kalamazoo College; M .A.T., Oberlin College; Ph.D ., Michigan State Uruver■ ity
THOMAS
JOHN
P. MORESCHI, JR. (1972) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.S ., California Univenityof Pennaylvania; M .Ed., Univer■ity of Pittsburgh; Ed.D ., Univer■ ity of Pittsburgh
LAWRBNCB L. MOSES. (1969) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BARTH SCIBNCES
B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .Ed ., Pennaylvania State
Pittaburgh
Univer■ ity ;
Ph.D., University of
368
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNNERSITY
JBANETTB MUWNS. (1975) PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVJRONMENTAL SCIBN<:m
B.A ., Wayne State University; M .S ., Waync State University; Ph.D., North Dakota State University
8BN A. MULE. (1972) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, SPllCIAL BDUCATION
B.S. , State University of New York at Genc1e0; M .Ed., University of Rochester
WJWAM M . MURDICK. (1969) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BN0USH
B.A. , State University of New York; M .F .A., University of Iowa
JOHN P. NASS. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.A., Michigan State University; M .A., Western Michigan University; Ph.D. , The Ohio State University
El.MO NATAU. (1962) VICE-PRBSIDBNT, STUDENTDHVELOPMBNT AND SERVJ<:m
B.S., California University of PeMaylvania; M .A., Welt Virginia University
J . ALAN NATAU. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EN0USH
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., California University of Pennsylvania
JOANN NELSON . (1969) PROFESSOR, BDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.L.S ., University of Pittsburgh; Ph.D ., University of
Pittsburgh
NANCY Z. NELSON (1967) VJCE-PRBSIDENT, ACADEMIC AFFAIRS
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh; Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh
RICHARD R . NBMBC. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Welt Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology
DIANE H . NETTLES. (1989) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BLBMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.A., University of South Florida; M .A., University of South Florida; Ph.D ., University of South Florida
MARsHA L. NOLF. (1987) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND BIBUOORAPHIC LECl'URER, UBRARY SERVJ<:m
B.A., Waynesburg College; M .L.S., University of Pittsburgh
GEORGE D . NOVAIC. (1959) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Litt., University of Pittsburgh
MARK L. NOWAIC. (1985) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOGY
B.S., University of Wisconsin, Stout; M.S ., Texas A&M University; Ed.D., Texaa A&M University; C .P.R.
DAVIDE. OLSON, (1991) INSTRUCTOR, ART
B.A., Pennsylvania State University; M.Ed ., Pennsylvania State University
MAHMOOD A. K. OMARZAI . (1979) PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND ECONOMICS
B.A., Y.D. College, India; M .A., Karachi University, Pakilltln; M.A., Indiana University; Ph.D ., Indiana
University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
369
J. ORIANDI . (1966) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., St. Vincent College; M .A., Well Virginia Univenity; Ed .D ., West Virginia Univenity
ANGELO
J. ORR. (1969) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Pennsylvania State Univenity; Ed.D. , Pennsylvania State
ROGER
Univenity
J . ORSAG. (1967) ASWCIATE PROFESSOR, BARTH SCJl!NCES
B.S. , Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.L., Univenity of Pittsburgh
HARRY
DAVID W . PAJERSKI. (1969) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCJl!NCE
B.S., University of Pittsburgh; M.S., Univenity of New Hampshire; Ph .D . , University of Pittsburgh
SUZANN!! M. PALKO . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, NURSING
B.S.N ., Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; M .S .N ., University of Pennsylvania; R .N .
HOMER R. PANKEY. (1965) VICE-PRl!SIDENT, DEVELOPMENT AND BXTERNAL RELATIONS
B.A., Shepherd College; M .A ., West Virginia University; Ed.D ., West Virginia University
RALDo 0. PARASCENW . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M .Ed., University of Pittsburgh; M. Lit., University of Pittsburgh; D .Ph.
& Lit., International University of Mexico
J . PARK. (1977) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.P.A., Korea University; M.A., Temple University; Ph.D ., Temple University
YOUNG
A. PARKINSON . (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S ., Indiana University; M.S., University of Pittsburgh
LESLIE
WJWAM G . PARNELL. (1968) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES
B .S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Eastern Michigan University; Ed.D ., West Virginia
University
C. PATHAK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A., University of Delhi, India; M.A., University of Delhi, India; L .L .B., University of Delhi, India; M.A.,
PRATUL
Univenity of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee
MARILYN M. PATTERSON. (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, GERONTOLOGY
B.A., Florida State University; M.S., Memphis State University; Ed.D. , Memphis State University;
Certification, National Board for Certified Counselors
K . PAULSON . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
B.A., Gustavus Adolphus College; M .S ., Michigan Technological University; Ph.D ., University of Oldahoma
BRIAN
STEPHEN A . PAVUJC. (1971) DEAN , COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California Univenity of PeMsylvania; Ph .D ., University
of Pittsburgh
370
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
JosBPH E . PECosH. (1967) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh
PAMELA 8. PlmUCK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION; DIRECfOR, READING CLINIC
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D, University
of Pittaburgh
JEFFREY L . PlrrR.UCCJ . (1981) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ATHLETICS; HEAD FOOTBAIL COACH
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., California University of Pennsylvania
WIWB H . PIOG. (1986) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.S., University of Tennessee; M.A., University of Tennessee
ALBERT R. PoKOL. (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, CHAIR, AND REFERENCE LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Duquesne University; M.L.S ., University of Pittaburgh
ALTON N . PoWE. (1973) PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D.,
University of Pittsburgh
JAY R. PoWELL. (1972) PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION; DIRECfOR, HONORS PROGRAM
B.S., University of Illinois; M.A., Southern Illinois University; Ph .D ., Southern Illinois University
WIWAM J. PROCASKY. (1965) PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , University of Nebraska; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh
TOM G. Pucci. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ATHLETICS; DIRECfOR OF ATHLETICS.
B.S., California State University al Sacramento; M.Ed ., Pacific University; Ed.D ., University of New
Mexico.
ANTHONY S. PvzoROWSKJ . (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
Associate, Pennsylvania State University; B.S., West Virginia University; M.S ., West Virginia University;
Ph.D., West Virginia University; E.l.T.
JOANNE RAulJGH . (1975) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ACT 10 I DIRECfOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT ANO SERVICES
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California University of Pennsylvania
CONNIE MACK REA . (1963) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
B.A., Centenary College; B.S., Centenary College; M .Ed ., University of Colorado; M .A., University of
Southern California
GEORGE A. REID . (1968) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Muskingham College; M.S ., Westminster College; Ph .D., University of Pittsburgh
MARGARITA RIBAR. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES ANO CULTURES
B.S., Universidad Pedag6gica, Bogota, Colombia; M.S ., Duquesne University
MICHAEL K. RICH . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS ANO ECONOMICS
B.S., Utah State University; M.B.A., Kent State University
F. DENNIS RIEOELNEGO. (1978) DEAN OF STUDENT SERVICES
B.A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M. Ed., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
371
(1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT) AND OFFICBR. IN CHARO£!, MIUTARY SCIENCE
B.A., Virginia Military Institute; Captain, U.S. Anny
STEVEN ROBBR.TS .
(1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIE!NCE!
B.A., Hunter College; M .S., New York University
MICHAEL WALT ROBIN.
ill. (1969) PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
A .B. , Boston University; M .A ., University of Michigan; Ph .D ., University of Michigan
HORACE S. ROCKWOOD,
JOANNB RODRIOUBZ- NAESBR .
(1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF STUDENT SUPPORT SBR.VJCBS,
ACADBMIC DHVELOPMBNT AND SBR.VJCBS
B.A., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
D . ROMBOSKI . (1969) PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR. SCIE!NCE
B.A., Washington and Jefferson College; M .A., Rutgers University; M.S. , Rutgers University; Ph .D .,
Rutgers University
I.AWRBNCE
(1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.S ., Waynesburg College; M .S ., California University of Pennsylvania; C.M .A .
FRBD RossBLL, JR.
(1973) PROFESSOR, ACADBMIC DBVBLOPMBNT AND SBR.VJCBS
B.S. , West Virginia University; M.Ed. , California University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D ., University of
Pittsburgh
MBI..VIN J. SALLY .
(1969) PROFESSOR, BI..BMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., Duquesne University; M .Ed ., Duquesne University; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh
ANTHONY J . SALUDIS.
(1965) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR , INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Ball State University
JOSEPH A. SANFILIPPO .
(1966) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, FORBION LANOUAOBS AND CULTURES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , West Virginia University
ELSBBTH E . SANT£!£!.
R. SAPKO . (1961) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., University of Pittsburgh
DoNALD
D . SCARMAZZ! . (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BI..BMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
JOSEPH
(1968) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART
B.S., Kutztown University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Temple University
PHILIP E. SCHALTBNBRAND.
G . SCHICKEL . (1988) INSTRUCTOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M. Ed. , Clemson University
JOSEPH
(1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIE!NCB
B.S. , Pennsylvania State University; M.S ., West Virginia University
ELWYN M . SCHMIDT .
(1966) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D ., Texas A&M University
CHARLES A . SCHULBR.
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
372
WII.J.JAM F. SCHWEIKER. (1972) PRO~R, SOCIAL SCIBNCE
B.A., Welt Virginia University; M.A., University of Minnesota; Ph .D. , University of Minnesota
LISA M. SCHWBRDT.
(1990) ASSISTANT PRO~R, BNOLISH
B.S. , Florida International University; B.A., Florida International University; M .A ., Purdue University;
Ph.D., Purdue University
RICHARD D . SCOTT .
(1971) PRO~R, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., PeMaylvania State University; M .S., University of Massachusetts; Ph.D., University ofTenneuee
TBRRY
E. SCOTT. (1966) ASSOCIATB PRO~R AND CHAIR, HBALTH AND PHYSICAL BDUCATION
B.A., William Jewell Colle1re; M.A., Washington University of St. Louis
LoUISB
E. SBRAFIN. (1991) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BUSINBSS AND BCONOMICS
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; E.M.B.A. , University of Pittsburgh
BBTTY SHAW. (1988) ASSISTANT PRO~R AND RBFBRBNCB LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SBRVICES
B.S., University of Pittsburgh; M.L.S ., Carnegie Mellon University; M .A., Indiana State University
(1991) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BDUCATIONAL STUDIBS
B.S. , California University of PeMaylvania; M.Ed., Slippery Rock University; Ph.D. , University of
Pittsburgh
CARYL SHBFFIBlD .
A. SHBU.PINSICY. (1986) ASSISTANT PRO~R, NURSING
B.S.N., University of Akron; M .S.N., University of Pittsburgh; R.N.; P.N.P.
DBBRA
JOHN
W. SHIMKANIN. (1990) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BLBMBNTARYBDUCATION
B.S ., Moravian College; M .S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D., Penn State University
Fl.oYO W. SHUL.BR. (1966) ASSISTANT PRO~R, HBALTH AND PHYSICAL BDUCATION
B.A., Welt Liberty State College; M .S., Welt Virginia University
ALFRED E. SIMPSON . (1976) PRO~R, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S ., Southern University; M.A., Welt Virginia University; Ph.D., The Ohio State University
JOHNS . SKOCIK, JR.
(1967) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIBNCB
B.S ., California University of PeMaylvania; M .S., Welt Virginia University
A. SKOCIK. (1990) ASSISTANT PRO~R, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIBNCE
B.S., California University of PeMaylvania; M.Ed., California University of PeMaylvania
NANCY
MICHAEL J. SLAVIN . (1989) ASSISTANT PRO~R, THBATRE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., Welt Virginia University
(1968) PRO~R, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California University of PeMaylvania; Ed.D., Texa,
A&M University
DAR.REILL. SMITH.
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
373
G. RALPH SMITH, 0 . (1964) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, BNOUSH
A.B., Franklin and Marshall College
GARY A. SMITH. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, PHILOSOPHY
B.A., Juniata College; M .A., Wayne State Univenity
MADEUNE C. SMITH. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, ENOUSH
B.A., Mt. St. Mary College; M .A., SUNY-New Paiz; Ph.D., West Virginia Univenity
JANNENE SOlITHWORTH-MACINTYRB. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BLBMBNTARY EDUCATION
B.S., Ball State Univenity; M.A., Ball State Univenity; Ed.D ., Univenity of PittBburgh
MAROARBT A. SPRATT. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES
B.A., Transylvania Univenity; M.A., Duke Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Kentucky
MARILYNN STANARD. (1987) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Western Michigan Univenity; M.A., Michigan State Univenity; Ph .D ., Michigan State Univenity
JACQUEUNE STEFANIK. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, NURSINO
B.S.N., Pennsylvania State Univenity; M .S.N., West Virginia Univenity;M.P.A., West Virginia Univenity;
C.R.N.P.
JEFFREYS . SUMEY. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.S., West Virginia Univenity
LYNN R. SURREY. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, STUDENT SERVICES; COUNSBUNO PSYCHOLOOIST
B.A., Olivet Nazarene Univenity; M.A. , Univenity of Mis10Uri at Kansai City; Ph.D., Univenity of
Miaaouri at Kansas City
GBNE G. SUSKALO. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, MUSIC
B.S., Duquesne Univenity; M.S., Duquesne Univenity; M .Music, Duquesne Univenity
SHIRLEY J. SUTTON. (1964) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, MUSIC; DIRECTOR, CALIFORNIA CHORALE
B.Mus.Ed., Drake Univenity; M.Mus.Ed., Drake Univenity
DENNIS C . SWEENEY. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, PSYCHOLOOY
B.S., Univenity of Nol1h Carolina; M .A., Bowling Green State Univenity; Ph.D., Bowling Green State
Univenity
BARBARA ANN DEMAR.TINO SWYHART. (1986) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY
B.A., Marquette Univenity; M .A., Marquette Univenity; Ph .D., Temple Univenity
MARC A. SYLVESTER. (1973) PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, BIOLOOICAL AND
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.A., Waahington and Jeffenon College; M.S ., West Virginia Univenity; Ph .D ., West Virginia Univenity
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
374
(1971) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; COUNSELOR, CENTER FOR STUDENT DEVELOPMENT
8.S. , Lake Erie College; M .S., Northern Illinois Univenity; Ed.D ., Indiana Univenity
NANCY J . TAIT.
E. TALBERT . (1978) ASSOCIATE DJJtECTOR, PL\CEMENT AND CAREER SERVICES
B.A., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California Univenity of Pennsylvania
CHARLES
P.
(1978) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
B.A., Marietta College; M.A ., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , Univenity of Pittaburgh
RONAID TARULLO .
(1965) PROFESSOR, ENGLISH
8.A. , West Virginia Univenity; 8 .S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .A .. , West Virginia
Univenity Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of PeMSylvania; Ed .D ., West Virginia Univenity
C . R . THOMAS.
DoNALD J. THOMPSON .
(1969) ACTING ASSOCIATE VICE-PRESIDENT FOR ACADEMIC AFFAIRS; PROFESSOR, EARTH
SCIENCES
B.A., Monmouth College; M.A. , Indiana Univenity; Ph .D ., Washington Univenity
JOHN
M. THOMPSON . (1987) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M .S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D ., Univenity of Pittaburgh
(1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MUSIC
8 .S. , The Juilliard School; M.A., Columbia Univenity; P.O., Teachen College of Columbia Univenity
ALBERT nBE!RIO .
G. URBINE. (1990) INSTRUCTOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., CleDlllOn Univenity
SUSAN
JOHN
R. VARGO . (1970) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity
(1984) PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES
B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.S., Syracuse Univenity; Ph .D ., Syracuse Univenity
ROBERT A . VARGO .
(1990) ASSOCIATE, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY
B.S., DUX School of Mines, Czechoslovakia; M.8.A., Baldwin-Wallace College; M .S., Columbia Pacific
Univenity
JAROSLAV V . VAVERXA .
L. WAHL. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES
B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Slippery Rock: Univenity of Pennsylvania
DEAN
JOHN
H. WALSH . (1961) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY
A .B., Duquesne Univenity; M.A., Duquesne Univenity; Ph .D ., Georgetown University
A. WATERHOUSE. (1986) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENOUSH
B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.F.A ., Univenity of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., Ohio University
CAROLE
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
375
JOHN PIERCE WATKINS . (1957) PRESIDENT
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A ., West Virginia University; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh
RICHARD H . WEBB . {1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR, MON VALUN RENAISSANCE
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., West Virginia University
BRIAN E . WEINRICH. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S ., Pennsylvania State University; M.A ., Pennsylvania State University; M .S. , Shippensburg University
of Pennsylvania
BRUCE L . WESTON . (1972) PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES
B.S., Northwestern University; M.A., University of Michigan; Ph .D., University of Michigan
PAUL D . WILUAMS. (1986) PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF MATH LAB, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Clarkson University; Ed .D., University of Pittaburgh
SYLVIA S . WILUAMS . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY; COORDINATOR, GRADUATE PROGRAM;
DIRECTOR, SCHOOL PsYCHOLOGY CLINIC
B.A. , Pennsylvania State University; M .A., West Virginia University; Pennsylvania Certified School
Psychologist; Licensed Psychologist
BEVERLY G. WILLISON. (1978) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL WORK
B.A., Duquesne University; M .S.W., University of Pittaburgh; Ed.D., West Virginia University; N.C.C .,
L.S.W., A.C .S.W.
MAURICE E. WILSON. (1969) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY
B.A., Wofford College; M .A., William and Mary University; Ph .D ., Emory University
JAMES WOOD . (1987) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SOCIAL SCIENCE
B.A ., Colorado State University; M .A., Arizona State University; Ph .D ., Arizona State University
AMY C . WOODWARD. (1984) ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, ADMISSIONS
B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania
WILLIAM A. YAHNER. (1989) INSTRUCTOR AND COORDINATOR, WRITING CENTER, ENGLISH
B.S, Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; M .A ., Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D. , Indiana
University of Pennsylvania
ALBERT E . YATES . (1964) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., West Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology
GEORGE YOCHUM . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES
B.A ., University of Pittaburgh; M .A., University of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , University of Pittaburgh
JOHN R. YOUNG. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
B.A., Lincoln University; M .Litt. , University of Pittaburgh; Ph .D ., University of Pittaburgh
~GELA K . ZONDOS. (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION
B.S ., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M .A., Michigan State University; Ph.D ., New York
University
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
376
L . ZoPPB'ITI . (1961) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Pennsylvania State University
ROBERT
EDWIN
M. ZUCHELKOWSKI. (1985) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR,
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., West Virginia University
BJOLOOICAL AND
EMERITI
377
PROFESSORS EMERITI
The honorary status of professor emeritus is awarded to retired members of the faculty on
recommendation of their academic departments and approval by the President and the
Trustees of the University. Faculty members who have only recent retired have not yet had
the opportunity to be designated emeriti.) It signifies dedicated service to the University and
demonstrates that, though retired from teaching, the emeritus professor maintains a valued
relationship with California University of Pennsylvania.
Dr. Robert H. Aldstadt (1963-1988)
Dr. George S. Allen (1971-1988)
Mr. James T. Anthony (1964-1981)
Dr. Arthur L. Ball (1964-1984)
Mrs. Ruth Barry (1962-1979)
Dr. William R. Benedetti (1965-1990)
Mr. August J. Bethem (1961-1983)
Mr. Richard M. Birch (1957-1989)
Dr. William L. Black (1965-1975)
Dr. Vernon L. Bloemker (1962-1990)
Mr. Gale H. Boak (1967-1986)
Mr. J. Herschel Bowlen (1946-1969)
Dr. Clarence L. Brammer (1969-1985)
Mr. Charles A. Butler (1961-1985)
Dr. Merrill G. Campbell (1948-1974)
Ms. Mary Jean Cicconi (1969-1991)
Mr. Leonard M. Colelli (1958-1982)
Dr. Thomas H. Coode (1965-1989)
Dr. J. Robert Craig (1957-1982)
Dr. Harold K. Crockett (1965-1978)
Mr. Wasil Curtioff (1966-1977)
Dr. William F. Daniels (1964-1981)
Ms. Ethel V. Davis (1969-1991)
Mrs. Gertrude Davis (1965-1975)
Dr. Mary R. DeCarlo (1954-1968)
Mr. Joseph A. Delisi (1968-1985)
Mr. Berlie E. Dishong (1964-1986)
Mr. Angus H. Douple (1946-1970)
Dr. William L. Dovenspilce (1955-1982)
Dr. Walter A. Fabian (1969-1984)
Mr. Edward E. Fear (1964-1987)
Miss Ann D. Fisfis (1968-1987)
Dr. Richard E. Frickert (1969-1990)
Dr. Henry H. Furio (1969-1979)
Dr. Karl W. Gamble (1961-1976)
Mrs. Mildred Gath (1966-1980)
Mr. Henry R. George (1965-1984)
Mrs. Joan M. Glasgow (1972-1982)
Ms. Pauline Glod (1959-1979)
Mr. Ivan H. Guesman (1968-1982)
Dr. William 0. Hambacher (1968-1988)
Mrs. Lela T. Hamilton (1953-1968)
Dr. George S. Hart (1938-1968)
Dr. Arthur G. Henry (1958-1968)
Mr. Robert V. Herron (1965-1990)
Mr. Francis Herron (1960-1982)
Mrs. Eleanore Hibbs (1966-1980
Miss Louise A. Hildreth (1926-1962)
Dr. Eugene F. Hilton (1970-1981)
Mrs. Merrell Holman (1947-1980)
Dr. Jack F. Hoyes (1946-1971)
Mrs. Rose G. Hughes (1938-1974)
Miss Donna Johnson (1969-1986)
Mr. William B. Kania (1961-1988)
Mr. John H. Katusa (1966-1986)
Dr. Milton C. Kells (1966-1991)
Mr. Roger R. Keightley (1963-1991)
Dr. Harold E. Kemper (1955-1978)
Mr. Curtis W. Kerns (1969-1982)
Mr. Benjamin R. Kneisley (1968-1986)
Miss M. Isobel Knill (1966-1989)
Mr. Daniel Lee LaBute (1964-1991)
Ms. Norma Langham (1959-1979)
Mr. John R. Lawrence (1966-1990)
Mr. John R. Linton (1967-1991)
Mr. Leonard Liz.ak: (1966-1991)
Dr. W. Ray Lister (1963-1988)
Mrs. Rose Lofstead (1957-1979)
Mr. Arthur L. Long (1963-1981)
Dr. John A. Long (1963-1974)
378
Mr. Norton E. Lownsbery (1969-1986)
Ms. Norma E. Maatta (1965-1986)
Mr. Samuel Madia (1966-1986)
Ms. Margaret Maley (1966-1980)
Dr. Wilbur Marisa (1960-1979)
Mrs. Ada K. Marsh (1945-1965)
Dr. John 0. Marsh (1967-1982)
Mr. Schuyler Marshall (1958-1982)
Mr. Richard L. May (1967-1989)
Mr. John C. McCrory (1958-1984)
Mr. James C. McIntyre (1964-1981)
Mr. James L. McPaul (1966-1981)
Dr. Milton A. Messinger (1969-1991)
Dr. Harry L. Monroe (1942-1975)
Dr. Albert D. Murden (1971-1982)
Miss Doris Nevin (1962-1980)
Mr. James Norman (1961-1980)
Dr. Joseph C. Nucci (1968-1990)
Dr. Mary Catherine O'Brien (1960-1984)
Dr. Virjean Parker (1970-1991)
Dr. Harold Pash (1969-1982)
Dr. Stephen E. Pavlak (1950-1979)
Dr. Fred Pollock (1968-1985)
Dr. Philip J. Proud (1962-1981)
Mr. John Pushkarsh (1966-1982)
Miss Louise Rakestraw (1946-1974)
Miss Gloria Rhodes (1970-1982)
Dr. Daniel E. Rider (1969-1985)
Mr. John R. Riggle (1964-1991)
Dr. George H. Roadman (1948-1977)
Dr. Luis V. Romero (1965-1976)
EMERITI
Miss Emma Sacco (1928-1957)
Dr. Regis J. Serinko (1961-1985)
Dr. Irvin Shutsy (1946-1979)
Mr. Edward Sikora (1956-1983)
Mr. R. Donald Similo (1966-1988)
Mr. Charles Slick (1964-1978)
Mr. Hubert E. Snyder (1949-1976)
Mr. Vetold W. Spomy (1963-1978)
Dr. Sarah Stephenson (1968-1987)
Mr. John R. Swearingen (1955-1975)
Dr. John Tomikel (1965-1982)
Dr. Harold W. Traister (1947-1957)
Dr. Allison E. Troy (1971-1984)
Dr. Alexander N. Tsambassis
(1964-1981)
Mr. Leonard Volkin (1967-1977)
Mr. Frank L. Vulcano (1965-1991)
Mrs. Maetroy A. Walker (1969-1990)
Mrs. Marian H. Weaver (1954-1976)
Dr. Howard R. White (1966-1976)
Mrs. Lola M. Willett (1961-1977)
Dr. Robert F. Wilseck (1967-1986)
Dr. Daniel E. Wilson (1966-1988)
Mrs. Miriam Wilson (1966-1984)
Mr. Myles B. Witchey (1962-1988)
Mr. Donald B. Wodock (1966-1986)
Mrs. Henrietta Wood (1959-1978)
Mr. Edward Zadoromy (1962-1985)
Mr. Jay A. Zeffiro (1970-1988)
Mr. George Zemo (1957-1986)
INDEX
379
INDEX
Abbreviationa . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 106
Absence• from Clau . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4S, 67
Academic Affain, Univenity Pel'IIOnncl . . . 352
Academic Development Services . . . . . . . . 121
Academic Dismisaal . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... S7
Academic Programs and Degrees . . . . ... 106
Academic Progreu, Satisfactory . . . . . ... 100
Academic Standing, Good . . . . . . . . . . 47, S7
ACC: Accounting Coul'IICs .... .. .. . . . 147
Accounting, Program in . . . . . .. .. .... 144
Accounting, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . 146
Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Administration and Finance,
Univenity Pel'IIOnncl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Administration and Management,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Administration and Management,
Bachelor' s Degree in ... .. .. . . .... 143
Administrative Officen and Staff . . . . . . . 354
Admi88ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Advanced Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Advanced Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Aging : See : Gerontology
Aging, Specialist Certificate in ... ... . .. 216
Alcohol and Drug Intervention
Program (CHOICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Alumni Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Alumni Scholarships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Anesthetist Program and
Coul'IICs (RNA) . . . . . . . . .. . .... . 310
ANT: Anthropology Courses . . . . . . . . . . 316
Anthropology, Major in .. .... • . . . . . . 314
Appeal, Financial Aid ... . ... . . . . . . . 102
Appeal, Procedure for Teacher
Certification Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Appealing a Grade or other Academic Dcciaiona,
Procedures for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 1
Application, for Admiuion . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Area Degree Programs . . . . l lS, 282, 298, 312
Art, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . 123-124
Art Courses (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 123
Art, Department and Major . . . . . . . . ... 122
Associate Degrees (Two-Year Programs):
See : Accounting; Banking; Community Living
Arrangements; Computer Science Technology;
Computer Based Management Systems;
Drafting Technolol)'; Early Childhood;
Electronics Technoloi)'; Numerical Control
Technology; Robotics; Screen Printing
Technology
ATE: Athletic Training Courses . . . . . . . . 342
Athletic Training, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Athletic, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 6S
Attendance at Claascs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4S , 67
Attrition Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Automation Technology,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 247
Banking, Auociate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . 147
BIO: Biology Course■ ... ... .. ... . . . 13S
Biology, Certification in for
Teacher Education .. . .. . . . . . . . . . 129
Biology, Department and Majon .. . . . . . . 128
Board of Governon, State System of
Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3S0
Budget Plan for Payment of Fee, . . . . . . . . 88
BUS : Busineu Coul'IICs . .. ... . . .. ... 149
Busine88 Administration
See also: Administration and Management
Business Administration, Major in . . . . . . . 144
Busine88 and Commercial Writing,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Busine88 and Economics,
Department and Majon . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Busine88 Economics Major . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Calendar, Academic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Campus and Surrounding Area . . . . . . . . . . 6
Campus Ministry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 37
See also: Counseling and Psychological Services
CARE Program for
the Learning Diaabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Career Planning, Coul'IIC (XCP) . . . . . . . . 121
CAW: Computer Assisted Workahopa . . . . 279
CCU: Co-Curricular Courses ... ... .. .. 156
Certification for Teachen . . . . . . . . . . . . l 08
Chancellor, State System of
Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Cheating and Plagiarism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S7
Check, Charge for Bad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chemistry, Certification in for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Chemistry, Courses (CHE) . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Chemistry, Major in . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 29S
CHOICES (Drug & Alcohol
380
Program) . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Citizenship, Requirement for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Class Absence ■ Due to Illness . . . . . . . 45 , 67
Claaa Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CLEP: See College Level Examination Pro,ram
Co-Curricular Activities Course ■
(CCU) .... . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 156
College Level Equivalency
Program (CLEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . S l, 85
Colleges: Undergraduate Divisions
of the University . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-119
COM: Communication Studies Course■ . •.. 160
Commencement Honora . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54
Communication, Major in, for
Teacher Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
See also : Communication Studies
Communication Studies Department
and Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Communication Studies Course■ (COM) . . . 160
Community College Graduates,
Transfer Credits for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Community Living Arrangements,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Community Services,
Special Education Major in . . . . . . . . . 328
Computer Applications, Certification in . . . 273
Computer Aaai■ted Workahops (CAW) .... 279
Computer Baaed Systems Management,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Computer Baaed Systems Management,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Computer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Computer Facilities ... .... . . . . . . .... 19
Computer Laboratory, Teacher Education ... 21
Computer Science Technology,
Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Computer Science, Courses (CSC) . . . . . . 276
Computer Science, Degree Programs in . . . 270
Confidentiality of Student Records . . . . . . . . 38
Cooperative Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cooperative Engineering Program . . . . . . . 297
Council of Trustees, University . . . . . . . . 35 l
Counseling and Psychological Services . . . . . 68
See also : Campus Ministry
Course Numbering System . . . . . . . . .. .. 45
Course Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Creative Writing Major . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Credentials, Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 77
Credit Load and Overload . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46
Credits and Credit Houra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Credits Earned by Examination ... . .... .. 52
CSC : Computer Science Courses . . .. . . .. 79
"Cuts" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 67
INDEX
Dean's List . ... . .... . . . ... .. .. . .. 54
Degrees Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 0
Degree■, When Conferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Delinquent Account■ . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . 85
Dental Hygiene, Education Certification,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Development and External Relations . . . 8, 354
Developmental Course■ . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 78
Dining Service■ . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 65
Di■abled : Parking and Service ■ .. •• . . . . . . 69
Di■abled : Program for Learning-Di■abled . .. 26
Dismi■■al , for Academic Reasons . . . . . . . . 57
See also: Withdrawal, Administrative
Distinguiahed Service Award . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dormitories: See Residence Hall ■
Drafting Technology, Associate Degree in .. 247
Driver Education Program . . .. .... . . . . 219
Drop/ Add Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Drug & Alcohol Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Dual Majora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 55
Early Admisaion for High School Students . . . 79
Early Childhood, Associate Degree in . . . . 326
Early Childhood, Major in ... . . . . . . . . 185
Early Childhood/Special Education, Major in 186
Earth Science, Certification in for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . .. .... 169
Earth Science Courses (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . 171
Earth Science, Department and Majora .. .. 167
EAS: Earth Science Courses . . . . . . . . . . 171
ECE: Early Childhood Courses . . . . . . . . 189
Economics Courses (ECO) . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Economics, Major in . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 143
EDE: Elementary Education Courses . ... . 187
EDS : Secondary Education Courses . . . . . . 181
EDU (Education) Courses . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Education and Human Services, College of . 108
Educational Foundations, Courses (EDF) .. 181
Educational Studies, Department . . . . . . . . 180
v EEr: Electrical Engineering Course ■ . .. .. 255
Electrical Engineering Technology Major in . 231
Electrical Engineering Technology (EET)
Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Electrographics, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Electronics Technology, Associate Degree in 25 l
Elementary Education, Courses (EDE) . . .. 187
Elementary Education, Department . . . . . . 184
Elementary Education, Major in .. .. . . . . 184
Elementary Education/Special Education,
Dual Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Emeriti Faculty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Employment, Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ENG: Engliah Course■ ..... . ........ 195
Engineering (Electrical) Technology Major in 255
Engineering, Cooperative Program . . . . . . 297
INDEX
English, Certification in
for Teacher1iducation . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
English Coones (ENG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
English, Department and Majon . . .. . ... 191
ENS : Environmental Studies Coones .. ... 140
Entnnce Requirements . . . . . . . . .. . .. 74-77
Environmental Educ, ,on Endonement . . . . 131
Environmental Stujies C~ nes (ENS) ... . 140
Environmental Coll8ervation, Resources, Science,
and Pollution Control, ~a_f;;n in . . . . . . 129
Equality of Op_portuni~y '\' .. : . . . . . .... 14
ESP: Coones m Special Education . . . . . . 335
Examination, Credits b . . . . . . . .... ... 52
Faculty, Administntion and Profeaaional Staff 355
Faculty, Emeriti . .. . .. ... ... . . . ... 377
Fees and Expe118es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-89
FIN: Finance Counes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Finance, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Financial Aid and Scholarships .. . .... 89-103
Financial Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Foreign Languages, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Foreign Languages, Department and Majon . 203
Foreign Students: See International Students
Fraternities, Social . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
FRE: French Counes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
French, Certification in for Teacher Education 204
French, Coones (FRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
French, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
GCT: Graphic Communications Coones . . . 256
General Business Major . . . . . . . . . . .. . 145
General Education, College of
Education & Human Services . . . . . . . . 109
General Education, College of Liberal Arts . 115
General Education, College of
Science and Technology . . . . . . . . . . . 118
General Science Certification . . . . . . . . . . 298
GEO: Geography Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Geography, Coones (GEO) ... . . . . . . . . 175
Geography Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Geology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GER: Coones in German . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
German, Certification in
for Teacher Education ... .. . ... ... 204
German, Coones (GER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
German, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Gerontology . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... .. 214
Gerontology, Counes ()CGE) . . . . . . . . . . 216
Gerontology, Major in .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Gerontolou: Aging Specialist Certificate . . 215
GMS : Coones in Military Science
(RaTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 283
Goals of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Good Academic Standing . . . . . . . . . . 47, 57
381
Governon, Board of, State System of
Higher Education
Grade Appeal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Grade Point Average . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 46
Grade Reporta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 51
Grading System . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Graduate Coones, Undergraduate Credit for . 52
Graduate Credits for Senion . . . . . . . . ... 53
Graduate School . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Graduation Honon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54
Graduation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Grants, Financial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 95
Graphic Communications Technology,
Major in .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . 237
Graphic Communications, Coones (GCT) . . 256
Guidance and Cou118eling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Handicapped, Academic Programs in. See Special
Education and Speech Pathology
Handicapped: See Disabled
Hazing . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . ... 71
Health and Physical Education, Coones (HPE)220
Health, Physical Education and Safety,
Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Health Profeaaions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Health Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
HIS : History Counes . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 225
History and Urban Studies Department of . . 223
History, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
History of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Honon Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Honon Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Honor Societies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Honors Convocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Honon, Graduation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54
Honon, Semester (Dean's List) .. . .. . . . . 54
Honon : See also: Distinguished Service Awards
Housing . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Housing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HSD: Coones in Driven Education
and Highway Education . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Human-Resources Manaiement, Major in . . 145
Humanities, Area Degree Program in .. 115, 285
Identification, Social Security Number . . . . . 78
Illneaa, Absence Due to ·. . . . . . . . . . . 45 , 67
Incomplete Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Industrial Arts: See Industry and Technology
Industry and Technology, Department .... 230
IND Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Industrial Management Technology, Major in 236
Industrial Management Technology:
Computer Science Option, Major in . . . . 272
Industrial/Organizational Psychology,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Industrial Technology, Counes (ITE) .. ... 262
382
Industrial Technology, Major in .. . .. . .. 238
Industry Counc1 (IND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Infinnary: See Health Service■
Intercollegiate Athletic ■ • . . . . . . . . . • . . . 65
International Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
International Studie ■ (Geography) Major in . 170
Intemahip• . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 116
rrE: Coone■ in Industrial Technology . . . . 262
Journali■m, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Laboratory Coone Requirement,
College of Liberal Arts . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Language■, Foreign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Late Payment Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Learning Centen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Learning Di■abled : CARE Program . . . .. . . 26
Learning Reaource Centen . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Liberal Arts, College of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Library, Loui1 L . Manderino . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Library Service,, Department . . . . . . . . . . 267
LIT: Coone■ in Literature . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Literature, Coone■ Loam . ... . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . 96, 99
Majon, Lill of ... . . . ... .. . . .. . ... 106
Management, Major in ... . . ... . . . . . . 145
Management (MGT) Coonca . . . . . . . . . . 153
Management and Computer Science/
Industrial Management Program . . . . . . 272
Manufacturing/lndulllrial Management,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Manufacturing Technology, Councs (MTE) 264
Manufacturing Technology,
Degree Program in .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Marketing, Major in . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 145
Marketing (MK1) Coone, . . . ... . . . . . 154
MAT: Mathematic Coone, . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Mathematic ■ and Computer Science,
Department of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Mathematica and Computer Science, Major in 270
Mathematica, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Mathematic ■, Coone■ (MAT) . . . . . . . . . 273
Mathematic■ Laboratory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mathematic ■, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Medical Technology, Major in . . . . .. ... 131
Mentally/Phy ■ically Handicapped, Major in . 329
Meterology, Program in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
MGT: Management Coones . . . . . . . . . . 154
Mentally/Phy■ically Handicapped, Physical
Education and Recreation Major in . . . . 329
Military Science, Councs (GMS) . . . . 282, 283
Military Science, Department of . . . . . . . . 277
Minilllry, Campu1 ... . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 37
Miuion of the Univenity . . . . . . .. . . . . . IS
MKT: Marketing Coones . . . . . . . . . ... 153
INDEX
Mortuary Science, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . 135
MTE: Manufacturing Technology Counc■ • . 264
Mu■ic, Department and Counc■ (MUS) . . . 285
Natural Science, Area Degree Program in . . 298
Nondi■crimination Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Numerical Control Technology,
Auociate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
NUR.: Counc■ in Nuning . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Nuraing, Bachelor of Science in . . . . . . . . 288
Nuning, Department and Coune1 (NUR.) . . 288
Nuning: See al.so: Regiatered Nunc Anelllhetilll
Program; Public School Nuning Program;
Dental Hygiene Program; Health Profeuiona
Objective■ of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Oceanography, Program in . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Out-of-State Residency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Ouwome1Alleument . . ... .. .. . . . . . . 34
Overload, Coone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Parka and Recreation, Major in . . . . . . . . 171
Paa/Fail Grading Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Payment of Bill■ • . . . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . 85
Pennaylvania Residency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
PHI: Philoaophy Counc1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Philoaophy Department . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 291
Photo-Lithography (Offset)
Program in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
PHS : Phy■ical Science Coone■ . .... .... 302
PHY: Phy1ic1 Coones ... . . . . . . . .. .. 301
Physical Education Coones (HPE) . . . . . . 228
Phyaical Education: See al.so Special Education
Physical Science Coones (PHS) . . . . . . . . 302
Phyaical Science Department . . . . . . . . . . 295
Physic ■ Councs (PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Phyaics, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Physic ■, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JS
Plagiariam and Cheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Political Science, Counes (POS) . . . . . . .. 318
Political Science, Major in . . . . . . . . . .. 314
POS : Political Science Counes . . . . . . . .. 318
Pre-Engineering Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Pre-Law/Philoaophy, Major in . .. . ... . . 292
Pre-Profe■aional Biology Majora . . . . . . . . 132
Printing Management: Industrial Management
Technology Program in . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Probation, Academic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Profeuional Writing Program,
Majon in .. . . . . . . . . ... . ... 191, 193
Program and Departmental
Coone Abbreviation■ • ... • . . . ••. . . 106
Program■ Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 06
Progreu, Academic, Satisfactory . . . . 47, 100
INDEX
PSN: Public School Nuning Coones . . . . . 308
PSY: Psychology Coune1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Psychology, Coones (PSY) .. .. . . . . . . . 305
Psychology, Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Psychology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Public Administntion, Major in . . . . . . .. 314
Public Relations, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Psychological Counseling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Public Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . ... 41
Public School Nuning Prognm
and Counea (PSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Quality Point Avenge (Gnde Point Avenge) . 46
Radio and Television, Communication
Studies Major in . . . . . . . .... .. . .. 160
Radio and Television, Profeuional Writing
Major in ..... . . .. .......... .. 194
Reading Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Readmi11ion lo the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . 60
Refund, for Student Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Refund Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87, 103
Regiatcred Nune Aneathetill Prognm
and Counea (RNA) . . . . . . . . . . . ... 310
Regiatntion, Fee for Late . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Registntion Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Regulationa, Genenl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Repeating a Coone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Reserve Ofticen Tnining Corps (ROTC) 95, 280
Residence Halla . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 63
Residence Rcquiremenll for Gnduation . . . . 46
Residency, Pennsylvania and Out-of-State . . . 76
RNA: Coone, in Nurse Anesthetist Program 310
Robotic• Syatcma, Auociate Degree in . . . . 248
ROTC . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . ... 95,277
Room Deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ruuian Coones (RUS) .... .. .. . . ... 210
Ru11ian & Slavic Studiea, Major in . . . . . . 205
Satiafactory Academic Progre11 . . . . . . . . 100
Scholanhipa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 99
Science and Technology, College of . . . . . . 118
Science, Certification in Genenl
Science for Teacher Education . . . . . . 298
Scientific and Technology Writing,
Profeuional Writing, Major in . . . . . . . 194
Screen Printing, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Screen Printing, Technology, Associate
Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Second Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 55
Second Major . . . . . . . ... ... . . . .... 55
Secondary Education, Certification in . . . . . 179
Secondary Education, Courses (EDS) . . . . . 181
Secondary Education:
See also,: Prognma in Teacher Certification in
Art, Biology, Chemillry, Communication, Earth
Science, En,lish, Mathematica, Foreign
383
Language• (French, Gennan, Spanish),
Phy1ic1, Social Sciencee, and Technology
Education
Security lnfonnation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Semeatcr Honon (Dean'• Lill) .. .... . ... 54
SOC : Sociology Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Social Science, Arca Degree Prognm in 115, 312
Social Science, Certification in for
Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Social Science, Counce (SOS) . . . . . . . . . 322
Social Science, Department (Anthropology,
Political Science, Social Science,
Sociology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Social Security Numben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Social Work Coones (SOW) . . . . . . . . . . 325
Social Work Department and Major .. .... 323
Sociology, Counea (SOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Sociology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Sororitie1, Social . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SOS: Courses in Social Science .. .. . . . . 322
SOW: Social Work Counce . . . . . .... .. 324
SPA: Counca in
Speech Pathology and Audiology . . . . . 338
Spanish, Certification in
for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Spanish Coones (SPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Spanish, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
SPE: Coones in Special Education . . . . . . 334
Special Education/Community Services,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Special Education, Coones (ESP) . . . . . . . 334
Special Education, Department . . . . . . . . . 326
Special Education/Early Childhood,
Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Special Education, Majon in . . . . . . . . . . 326
Special Education, Mentally and/or
Phyaically Handicapped, Majon in . 327, 329
Special Studenll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Speech Communciation:
See : Communication Studies
Speech Pathology and Audiology,
Department and Major . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Speech Pathology and Audiology,
Coune1 (SPA) . . . . . . . . . .... .. .. 338
SPN: Spani ■h Counca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sporll Medicine, Department and Prognma . 340
State Syatcm of Higher Education,
Chancellor and Board of Governon . . . . 350
Student Association Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Student Aaaociation, Incorporated . . . . . . . . 63
Student Congreu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Student Development and Service, . . . . 62, 352
Student Development: Univenity PenoMel .. 62
Student Exchange Prognm . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
INDEX
384
Student Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 113
Student Teaching for Experienced Teachen . 113
Student Union Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83
Teacher Education, Admission to . . . . . . . 111
Teacher Education Programs . . . . . . . . . . 108
Technology Education, Major in . . . . . . . . 242
TED : Technology Education Counes . .... 265
Television and Radio, Communication
Studies Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
THE: Counea in Theatre . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Theatre, Counes (THE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Theatre, Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Theatre, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Theatre: Su also: Communication
Tnnscript Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Transfer Credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 79-80
Transient Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Travel & Tourism, Major in . . . . . . . . . . 170
Trustees, Council of, California Univenity . 351
Tuition and Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-82
Two-year Programs: See : Associate Degrees
Undergraduate Credit for Graduate Counes . . 52
Photography
Production Assistance
Urban Studies, Coones (XUA) . . . . . . . . . 228
Urban Studies, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
U .S . Citizenship-A Requirement for Teacher
Certification in Pennsylvania . . . . . . . . 114
Veterans .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 99
Veterans, Coune Credit for Military Service . 86
Visiting Students Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vocational Rehabilitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Washington Hospital,
Registered Nunes' Program . . . . . . . . 114
Withdrawal, Administrative ... . . . . . . . .. 58
Withdrawal from Courses .. . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Withdrawal from the Univenity . ... .. .. . 58
Women' s Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Work Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Word ProceHing Center . . . . . ... . . . . . . 21
Writing Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Writing, Professional Writing Major .. 191 , 193
Writing Requirement, College of Liberal Arts I 15
XCP: Career Planning Coune . . . . . . . . . 121
XGE: Gerontology Counes . . . ... . . . . . 216
XUA: Counea in Urban Affain . . . . . . . . 228
Mary Huschak
Mary Jane Sicchitano
,.
CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
250 University Avenue
California, PA 15419-1394
412-938-4000
Media of